《梵网经》巴利
1. Brahmajālasuttaṃ
游方者谈论的注释巴利
Paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā
1 到这里,已经展示了《梵网经》共通的外在因缘——它极其细密、柔和、深奥、难以看见,又以种种不同的理趣加以庄严。现在要注释内在因缘,首先为了说明词的分辨,而说了“tattha eva”等话。因为要通达义理,根本在于把词妥善安立;而要把词妥善安立,就必须通过“这就是”这样的自性阐明,用词的分辨来成立。通过词的分辨,也就是认识到“这个词叫做这个”,然后按照各个词正确地安立性、格、数、时态、用法等,所说的词才算妥善安立;由此,义理也才能完全通达。正如经中所说:“诸比丘,对于妥善安立的文句,其义理也容易理解”等等。此外,应当通过六种方式来做义理注释:关联、词、词的分辨、词义、追问、排除。其中,所谓关联,就是说法的关联,世间人也把它叫做“引出”;这应当从经典的因缘部分以及因缘部分的结集方式来理解。因为,在说明第一次大结集时,就已经显示了因缘部分的关联。所以,注释者从词等开始注释,而说了“eva”等话。在这里,通过“eva是不变词”等,从词和词的分辨两方面来做注释,因为显示了词以及它们的差别。所谓词的分辨,其实是指词的差别,而不是词的分解。词和词的分辨都是词的分辨。或者,词的分辨和词的分解都称为词的分辨,应当以省略语的方式理解:词和词的分解也由“词的分辨”一词来表达。然而,从词的分解方面,后面将以“bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho”等来做注释,同样也以词义、追问、排除等方式来做。在这里,“eva”是省略表述的“iti”一词,具有“等”的意思,因为“antara”一词以及“sadda”等也被包括在内,或者通过“naya”一词的摄取,它们也被摄取了。因此说“metiādīni nāmapadānī”。否则,就必须说“antara”一词以及“sadda”等也是不变词。在“metiādīnī”中,通过“ādi”一词,直到“paṭi”一词为止,其余的词都被摄取了。“paṭi”是前缀词,因为“patisadda”具有作用性。巴利
1. Ettāvatā ca paramasaṇhasukhumagambhīraduddasānekavidhanayasamalaṅkataṃ brahmajālassa sādhāraṇato bāhiranidānaṃ dassetvā idāni abbhantaranidānaṃ saṃvaṇṇento atthādhigamassa sunikkhittapadamūlakattā, sunikkhittapadabhāvassa ca ‘‘idameva’’nti sabhāvavibhāvanena padavibhāgena sādhetabbattā paṭhamaṃ tāva padavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tattha eva’’ntiādimāha. Padavibhāgena hi ‘‘idaṃ nāma etaṃ pada’’nti vijānanena taṃtaṃpadānurūpaṃ liṅgavibhatti vacana kālapayogādikaṃ sammāpatiṭṭhāpanato yathāvuttassa padassa sunikkhittatā hoti, tāya ca atthassa samadhigamiyatā. Yathāha ‘‘sunikkhittassa bhikkhave – padabyañjanassa atthopi sunayohotī’’tiādi. Apica sambandhato, padato, padavibhāgato, padatthato anuyogato, parihārato cāti chahākārehi atthavaṇṇanā kātabbā. Tattha sambandho nāma desanāsambandho, yaṃ lokiyā ‘‘ummugghāto’’tipi vadanti, so pana pāḷiyā nidānapāḷivasena, nidānapāḷiyā ca saṅgītivasena veditabbo. Paṭhamamahāsaṅgītiṃ dassentena hi nidānapāḷiyā sambandho dassito, tasmā padādivaseneva saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto ‘‘eva’’ntiādimāha. Ettha ca ‘‘evanti nipātapadantiādinā padato, padavibhāgato ca saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karoti padānaṃ tabbisesānañca dassitattā. Padavibhāgoti hi padānaṃ visesoyeva adhippeto, na padaviggaho. Padāni ca padavibhāgo ca padavibhāgo. Atha vā padavibhāgo ca padaviggaho ca padavibhāgoti ekasesavasena padapadaviggahāpi padavibhāgasaddena vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Padaviggahato pana ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ saṅgho’’tiādinā upari saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karissati, tathā padatthānuyogaparihārehipi. Evanti ettha luttaniddiṭṭhaiti-saddo ādiattho antarāsadda ca saddādīnampi saṅgahitattā, nayaggahaṇena vā te gahitā. Tenāha ‘‘metiādīni nāmapadānī’’ti. Itarathā hi antarāsaddaṃ ca saddādīnampi nipātabhāvo vattabbo siyā. Metiādīnīti ettha pana ādi-saddena yāva paṭisaddo , tāva tadavasiṭṭhāyeva saddā saṅgahitā. Paṭīti upasaggapadaṃ patisaddassa kāriyabhāvato.
现在,按照提取义理的方式,从词义上作注释,说了“atthato pana”等话。不过在这个地方,为了让听众精通注释的理路,应当说明注释的种类。怎么说明呢?巴利
Idāni atthuddhārakkamena padatthato saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto ‘‘atthato panā’’tiādimāha. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne sotūnaṃ saṃvaṇṇanānayakosallatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāppakārā vattabbā. Kathaṃ?
一纳利迦之说,以及四方形之说;
还有坐转之说,应当以三种方式解说。巴利
Ekanāḷikā kathā ca, caturassā tathāpi ca; Nisinnavattikā ceva, tidhā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ vade.
其中,先说了经文,再逐词解释词义,因为就像用一纳利来量一样,所以叫一纳利迦;或者说每一个词是一纳利,是根本,或者说每一个词是一纳利迦,是引出义理的途径,因此叫一纳利迦。先指出对立面,再给出对立面的比喻,然后指出同类面,再给出同类面的比喻,因为是以这四个部分来说的,所以说有四种简略的观察方法,因此叫四方形。以不同性质的法走到终点,再以相同性质的法走到终点,让它安住、确立之后还能回转,因此叫坐转;或者说,对于安坐者所开始的行为和成就是确定相应的,因此叫坐转;意思是说,对于已经开始的意义,各自分别走到终点。不过,带有例证的解说,应当从《增支部义注》的复注中,第十一集《牧牛者经》的注释里取来。巴利
Tattha pāḷiṃ vatvā ekekapadassa atthakathanaṃ ekāya nāḷiyā minitasadisattā, ekekaṃ vā padaṃ nāḷaṃ mūlaṃ, ekamekaṃ padaṃ vā nāḷikā atthaniggamanamaggo etissāti katvā ekanāḷikā nāma. Paṭipakkhaṃ dassetvā, paṭipakkhassa ca upamaṃ dassetvā, sapakkhaṃ dassetvā, sapakkhassa ca upamaṃ dassetvā, kathanaṃ catūhi bhāgehi vuttattā, cattāro vā rassā sallakkhaṇūpāyā etissāti katvā caturassā nāma, visabhāgadhammavaseneva pariyosānaṃ gantvā puna sabhāgadhammavaseneva pariyosānagamanaṃ nisīdāpetvā patiṭṭhāpetvā āvattanayuttattā, niyamato vā nisinnassa āraddhassa vatto saṃvatto etissāti katvā nisinnavattikā nāma, yathāraddhassa atthassa visuṃ visuṃ pariyosānāpi niyuttāti vuttaṃ hoti, sodāharaṇā pana kathā aṅguttaraṭṭhakathāya taṭṭīkāyaṃ ekādasanipāte gopālakasuttavaṇṇanāto gahetabbā.
分别说、真实说,以及异门说;
智者这样了解了义理的次第之后,应当讲说三种注释。巴利
Bhedakathā tatvakathā, pariyāyakathāpi ca; Iti atthakkame vidvā, tidhā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ vade.
在这里,从词源等方面进行考察,叫作分别说,比如“因为觉悟,所以是佛陀”这样。从自性方面进行考察,叫作真实说,比如“佛陀,就是那位世尊、自生者、无师者”这样(《大义》192;《小义》97;《无碍解道》1.161)。从同义词方面进行考察,叫作异门说,比如“佛陀、世尊、一切知者、世间导师”这样(《导论》38,依异门摄取分别所引经典)。巴利
Tattha pakatiādivicāraṇā bhedakathā yathā ‘‘bujjhatīti buddho’’tiādi. Sarūpavicāraṇā tatvakathā yathā ‘‘buddhoti yo so bhagavā sayambhū anācariyako’’tiādi (mahāni. 192; cūḷani. 97; paṭi. ma. 1.161). Vevacanavicāraṇā pariyāyakathā yathā ‘‘buddho bhagavā sabbaññū lokanāyako’’tiādi (netti. 38 vevacanāhāravibhaṅganissito pāḷi).
作用和总义,连结和质问;
还有“解答”,在一切处都应说五种注释。巴利
Payojanañca piṇḍattho, anusandhi ca codanā; Parihāro ca sabbattha, pañcadhā vaṇṇanaṃ vade.
在这里,作用指的是说法的果报,也就是闻所成智等。总义指的是为了容易理解散乱的义理,把它归纳起来说。连结指的是提问的连结等。质问指的是对所说的内容提出相反的说法。排除指的是对那相反的说法作出不相违的解释。巴利
Tattha payojanaṃ nāma desanāphalaṃ, taṃ pana sutamayañāṇādi. Piṇḍattho nāma vippakiṇṇassa atthassa suvijānanatthaṃ sampiṇḍetvā kathanaṃ. Anusandhi nāma pucchānusandhādi. Codanā nāma yathāvuttassa vacanassa virodhikathanaṃ. Parihāro nāma tassa avirodhikathanaṃ.
引出词、词、词义和词的分解;
动摇和现前,应解说为六种诠释。巴利
Ummugghāto padañceva, padattho padaviggaho; Cālanā paccupaṭṭhānaṃ, chadhā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ vade. (vajira. ṭī. paṭhamamahāsaṅgītivaṇṇanā);
在这其中,由内在等因缘引出的,是“引出”的说明。“Evamida”这样用各种方式说明词的特殊性,是词。声义、意图义等,是词义。从多种角度解释词源,是词的分解。所谓动摇,就是质问。现前,就是解答。巴利
Tattha ajjhattikādinidānaṃ ummugghāto. ‘‘Evamida’’nti nānāvidhena padavisesatākathanaṃ padaṃ, saddatthādhippāyatthādi padattho. Anekadhā nibbacanaṃ padaviggaho.Cālanā nāma codanā. Paccupaṭṭhānaṃ parihāro.
生起因、词义,以及意图、随说与规则等方式;
违难、解答,以及结语,一共八种。巴利
Samuṭṭhānaṃ padattho ca, bhāvānuvādavidhayo; Virodho parihāro ca, nigamananti aṭṭhadhā.
在这其中,起因是指内在的等类根源。词义是指按照所要表达的、不所要表达的等等方式,一个词有多种含义。义理就是意图。随说方式是指:第一句是规则,之后那句是随说,用来阐明那个规则;或者,限定词和被限定词之间的规则与随说,也共用这个名称。违难是为了确定义理而提出的质难。答复就是对它的澄清。结语是随顺脉络的归结。巴利
Tattha samuṭṭhānanti ajjhattikādinidānaṃ. Padatthoti adhippetānadhippetādivasena anekadhā padassa attho. Bhāvoti adhippāyo. Anuvādavidhayoti paṭhamavacanaṃ vidhi, tadāvikaraṇavasena pacchā vacanaṃ anuvādo, visesanavisesyānaṃ vā vidhānuvāda samaññā. Virodhoti atthanicchayanatthaṃ codanā. Parihāroti tassā sodhanā. Nigamananti anusandhiyā anurūpaṃ appanā.
首先,应当说明它的起因和目的;
整体含义、词义、关联和意图;
对于呵责与清净,我解说八种注释方式。巴利
Ādito tassa nidānaṃ, vattabbaṃ tappayojanaṃ; Piṇḍattho ceva padattho, sambandho adhippāyako; Codanā sodhanā ceti, aṭṭhadhā vaṇṇanaṃ vade.
在这里,“关联”指的是前与后的连接,也就是被称为“连结”的那种。其余的都已经在前面解释过了。像这样,了解了在这些经文中各处出现的注释方式之后,就应该在一切地方根据具体情况加以审察。巴利
Tattha sambandho nāma pubbāparasambandho, yo ‘‘anusandhī’’ti vuccati. Sesā vuttatthāva, evamādinā tattha tatthāgate saṃvaṇṇanāppakāre ñatvā sabbattha yathārahaṃ vicetabbāti.
像这样,多种含义的区分只能根据实际用法来了知,所以为了说明这一点,就说了“因为彼如是”等话。或者也可以这样看:说这些话是为了表明,一个声音(词)是某个含义的表达者,这完全是靠约定俗成确定下来的;而所谓约定,正是依据用法而成立的。在类似的情况下也应这样理解。难道不是……巴利
Evamanekatthappabhedatā payogatova ñātabbāti tabbasena taṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘tathā hesā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atha vā ayaṃ saddo imassatthassa vācakoti saṅketavavatthitāyeva saddā taṃ tadatthassa vācakā , saṅketo ca nāma payogavasena siddhoti dassetumpi idaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Evamīdisesu. Nanu ca –
就像从一堆花里,可以编出许多花环;
人既然这样出生了,就该多做善事。巴利
‘‘Yathāpi puppharāsimhā, kayirā mālāguṇe bahū; Evaṃ jātena maccena, kattabbaṃ kusalaṃ bahu’’nti. (dha. pa. 53);
这里,因为“evaṃ”这个词只是表达了譬喻的相状,所以它就只有相状的含义吗?不是的,因为它还表达差别。在“evaṃ byā kho”这类语句中,所指的确实只是单纯表达相状的相状义,而不是表达某种特定差别的相状。在这里,虽然从花堆的比喻出发,说明了人的投生、依靠善人、听闻正法、如理作意、受用资具圆满,以及布施等福业之因的聚合,因为与美好芬芳等功德相应,就像花鬘一样,众多福业是必死的有情应当去做的——这个道理被阐明了,所以花堆和花鬘就是譬喻,所谓“借此来比喻”。它们所显示的譬喻相状,已由“yathā”一词以不确定的方式表明,因此说“evaṃ一词是决定地归结譬喻相状之义”,这是合理的。然而,当那个譬喻相状被确定时,从意义上说它就是譬喻本身,因为如果没有作为依据的譬喻,就无法把握被譬喻之物的相状,正是基于这个意思才说“用于譬喻中”。或者,因为譬喻就是令其相似,所以与花堆、花鬘相似的体性所摄的譬喻相状本身,就叫做譬喻。因为论中说“正法性可以为譬喻”,所以evaṃ词只是表达相状的相状义。而那种能表达名为譬喻的具体相状差别的,才是譬喻义,所以说“用于譬喻中”。巴利
Ettha evaṃ-saddena upamākārasseva vuttattā ākāratthoyeva evaṃ-saddo siyāti? Na, visesasabbhāvato. ‘‘Evaṃ byā kho’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 234, 396) hi ākāramattavācakoyeva ākāratthoti adhippeto, na pana ākāravisesavācako. Ettha hi kiñcāpi puppharāsisadisato manussūpapatti sappurisūpanissaya saddhammasavana yonisomanasikārabhogasampattiādidānādipuññakiriyāhetusamudāyato sobhāsugandhatādiguṇayogena mālāguṇasadisiyo bahukā puññakiriyā maritabbasabhāvatāya maccena sattena kattabbāti atthassa jotitattā puppharāsimālāguṇāva upamā nāma upamīyati etāyāti katvā, tesaṃ upamākāro ca yathāsaddena aniyamato jotito, tasmā ‘‘evaṃ-saddo niyamato upamākāranigamanattho’’ti vattuṃ yuttaṃ, tathāpi so upamākāro niyamiyamāno atthato upamāva hoti nissayabhūtaṃ tamantarena nissitabhūtassa upamākārassa alabbhamānattāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti. Atha vā upamīyanaṃ sadisīkaraṇanti katvā puppharāsimālāguṇehi sadisabhāvasaṅkhāto upamākāroyeva upamā nāma. ‘‘Saddhammattaṃ siyopamā’’ti hi vuttaṃ, tasmā ākāramattavācakova ākārattho evaṃ-saddo. Upamāsaṅkhātaākāravisesavācako pana upamātthoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘upamāyaṃ āgato’’ti.
同样地,在“应当以这样的方式前进”等教导中,对于所教导的、与沙门身份相符的威仪成就,其教导的方式从意义上说就是教导本身,所以说“于教导中”。在“evametaṃ”这个词里,世尊对于那些如实不颠倒地了知所说义理的人,以他们所具有的种种功德来令他们欢喜、使他们心生踊跃,这就是“令欢喜”。其中,令欢喜的方式从意义上说就是令欢喜本身,所以说“令欢喜”。在“evameva panāyaṃ”中,通过揭示过失而说的指责之语就是“呵责”,那种方式从意义上说也就是呵责本身,因此说“于呵责中”。而这里呵责的方式,因为紧邻“vasalī”等呵骂之词,可以知道是由“evaṃ”这个词所显示的。正如在这里,由于紧邻花堆等词,譬喻的方式等也就以譬喻等来表述,应当这样理解。因为不变词只是起阐明作用。“evameva”则是以刚才所说的方式。“ayaṃ vasalī”是说:她因具有贱民的品性而是贱民、不祥者,无论在任何地方都是这样说的,这是关联。“evaṃ bhante”是说:善哉,尊者!妙哉,尊者!在这里,比丘们对法善加听闻、如理作意之后,承认自己安住于其中,这就是“领受言说”,那种方式从意义上说就是领受言说本身,因此说“于领受言说中”。巴利
Tathā ‘‘evaṃ iminā ākārena abhikkamitabba’’ntiādinā upadisiyamānāya samaṇasāruppāya ākappasampattiyā upadisanākāropi atthato upadesoyevāti āha ‘‘evaṃ…pe… upadese’’ti. Evametanti ettha pana bhagavatā yathāvuttamatthaṃ aviparītato jānantehi kataṃ tattha saṃvijjamānaguṇānaṃ pakārehi haṃsanaṃ udaggatākaraṇaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ. Tattha sampahaṃsanākāropi atthato sampahaṃsanamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sampahaṃsaneti. Evameva panāyanti ettha ca dosavibhāvanena gārayhavacanaṃ garahaṇaṃ, tadākāropi atthato garahaṇaṃ nāma, tasmā ‘‘garahaṇe’’ti vuttaṃ. So cettha garahaṇākāro ‘‘vasalī’’tiādikhuṃsanasaddasannidhānato evaṃ-saddena pakāsitoti viññāyati, yathā cettha evaṃ upamākārādayopi upamādivasena vuttānaṃ puppharāsiādisaddānaṃ sannidhānatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Jotakamattā hi nipātāti. Evamevāti ca adhunā bhāsitākāreneva. Ayaṃ vasalaguṇayogato vasalī kāḷakaṇṇī yasmiṃ vā tasmiṃ vā ṭhāne bhāsatīti sambandho. Evaṃ bhanteti sādhu bhante, suṭṭhu bhanteti vuttaṃ hoti. Ettha pana dhammassa sādhukaṃ savanamanasikāre sanniyojitehi bhikkhūhi tattha attano ṭhitabhāvassa paṭijānanameva vacanasampaṭiggaho, tadākāropi atthato vacanasampaṭiggahoyeva nāma, tenāha ‘‘vacanasampaṭiggahe’’ti.
“Evaṃ byā kho”就是“evaṃ viya kho”。语法学家们说,在这些词中间,是“viya”这个词在起指示作用,他们还主张:“把va变成ba,再和ya连在一起,按长音来成立词形。”Ākāra指仅仅形相。Appābādha指没有不适的感受。Appātaṅka指没有需要治疗、危及生命的疾病。Lahuṭṭhāna指因为无病而起身轻快相应。Bala指身体的力量。Phāsuvihāra指在行、住、坐、卧四种威仪中安乐而住。详细解释在第十《须婆经》的义注(dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.445)中就会明了。“Evañca vadehīti”指如我所说,你也这样对沙门阿难说。“‘Sādhu kira bhava’nti”等语是现在应当说的话,而那种说的方式在这里由“evaṃ”一词指示,所以说“nidassane”(指示)。“Kālāmāti”指称呼与迦罗摩族有关系的众人。“‘Ime…pe… vā’ti”指“我所说的,你们认为如何”之义。“Samattāti”指圆满。“Samādinnāti”指已受持。“Saṃvattanti vā no vā saṃvattanti”在这两种说法中,应当连接为“kathaṃ vo tumhākaṃ mati hotīti”。“Evaṃ noti”指“我们就是这样认为”,也有“我们在这里就是这样认为”的意思。而且在这里,为了对那些所说的法能引生无益与苦的情况生起确定,以随喜接受的方式,在问“saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotī”之后,因为说了“evaṃ no ettha hotī”,所以那种行相的确定由“evaṃ”一词表明;而那诸法引向无益与苦的方式在被确定时,意义上正是决定,所以说“avadhāraṇe”(决定)。除了Ākāra的意义之外,其余各处都应按照所说的方法理解codanā(责问)和sodhanā(净化)。巴利
Evaṃ byā khoti evaṃ viya kho. Evaṃ khoti hi imesaṃ padānamantare viyasaddassa byāpadesoti neruttikā ‘‘va-kārassa, ba-kāraṃ, ya-kārasaṃyogañca katvā dīghavasena padasiddhī’’tipi vadanti. Ākāreti ākāramatte. Appābādhanti visabhāgavedanābhāvaṃ. Appātaṅkantikicchajīvitakararogābhāvaṃ. Lahuṭṭhānanti niggelaññatāya lahutāyuttaṃ uṭṭhānaṃ. Balanti kāyabalaṃ. Phāsuvihāranti catūsu iriyāpathesu sukhavihāraṃ. Vitthāro dasama subhasuttaṭṭhakathāya meva (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.445) āvi bhavissati. Evañca vadehīti yathāhaṃ vadāmi, evampi samaṇaṃ ānandaṃ vadehi. ‘‘Sādhu kira bhava’’ntiādikaṃ idāni vattabbavacanaṃ, so ca vadanākāro idha evaṃ-saddena nidassīyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘nidassane’’ti. Kālāmāti kālāmagottasambandhe jane ālapati. ‘‘Ime…pe… vā’’ti yaṃ mayā vuttaṃ, taṃ kiṃ maññathāti attho. Samattāti paripūritā. Samādinnāti samādiyitā. Saṃvattanti vā no vā saṃvattanti ettha vacanadvaye kathaṃ vo tumhākaṃ mati hotīti yojetabbaṃ. Evaṃ noti evameva amhākaṃ mati ettha hoti, amhākamettha mati hoti yevātipi attho. Ettha ca tesaṃ yathāvuttadhammānaṃ ahitadukkhāvahabhāve sanniṭṭhānajananatthaṃ anumatiggahaṇavasena ‘‘saṃvattanti no vā, kathaṃ vo ettha hotī’’ti pucchāya katāya ‘‘evaṃ no ettha hotī’’ti vuttattā tadākārasanniṭṭhānaṃ evaṃ-saddena vibhāvitaṃ, so ca tesaṃ dhammānaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanākāro niyamiyamāno atthato avadhāraṇamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘avadhāraṇe’’ti. Ākāratthamaññatra sabbattha vuttanayena codanā, sodhanā ca veditabbā.
在这里应当知道,以“ādi”(开头的“等”字)这个词,统摄了“此义、提问、限量”等含义。就像在“evaṃgatāni, evaṃvidho, evamākāro”这些说法里,“evaṃ”(如此)指的是“此义”,而“gata、vidha、ākāra”这些词则是“方式”的同义词。世间人把“ākāra”这个词和“gata、vidha”结合起来,用来表达“方式”的意思。在“Evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā……seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyako ti? No hidaṃ bho gotamā”这类文句里,“evaṃ”用于提问。在“Evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ, evamāyupariyanto”这类文句里,“evaṃ”用于限量。在这里,“sunhātā suvilittā”等语就是提问,而“lahuparivattaṃ”(轻快变易)和“āyūnaṃ pamāṇaṃ”(寿命的限量)就是限量。那种形态从意义上说,也叫做提问和限量。因此应当知道,在这些用法中,“evaṃ”这个词有提问的意思,也有限量的意思。那么,它到底出现在哪些情形中呢?是出现在一切情形中,还是不确定地只出现在某些地方呢?针对这样的质疑,论师说了“svāyamidhā”等话。巴利
Ādisaddena cettha idamatthapucchāparimāṇādiatthānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi ‘‘evaṃgatāni, evaṃvidho, evamākāro’’ti ca ādīsu idamatthe, gatavidhākārasaddā pana pakārapariyāyā. Gatavidhayuttākārasadde hi lokiyā pakāratthe vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ su te sunhātā suvilittā kappitakesamassū āmuttamaṇikuṇḍalābharaṇā odātavatthavasanā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārenti, seyyathāpi tvaṃ etarahi sācariyakoti? No hidaṃ bho gotamā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.286) pucchāyaṃ. ‘‘Evaṃ lahuparivattaṃ (a. ni. 1.48), evamāyupariyanto’’ti (pārā. 12) ca ādīsu parimāṇe. Etthāpi ‘‘sunhātā suvilittā’’tiādivacanaṃ pucchā, lahuparivattaṃ, āyūnaṃ pamāṇañca parimāṇaṃ, tadākāropi atthato pucchā ca parimāṇañca nāma, tasmā etesu pucchattho, parimāṇattho ca evaṃsaddo veditabboti. Idha pana so katamesu bhavati, sabbattha vā, aniyamato padese vāti codanāya ‘‘svāyamidhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
有人追问:难道不是只在一种意义上成立吗?为什么说三种意义?又问:就算有三种意义,那又是为了说明什么、以什么方式说明?为了回应这些追问,论师说了“tatthā”等话。“Tatthā”的意思是在那三种意义当中。所谓种种理趣,就是依一性、差异性、作用、法性等而安立的“欢喜轮、三旋、狮子嬉戏、钩状眼”等名称;或者依所依等差别而区分的种种理趣,也就是圣典的趣向。这些理趣随顺三藏,按施设与随施设、略说与广说、杂染分与世间及二者混合、善等三性、蕴、摄、时解脱、安立、善根、三法发趣等种种方式而有差别,所以叫种种理趣。以这些理趣,精微、细密、微妙地如此。意乐就是内心的倾向,它依常见等而有差别,其中又依少尘垢等而有许多种类;或者自意乐等就是它生起的因,所以如此。由于无可指摘,义理与文句圆满具足,所以如此。再者,以宣说、阐明、开显、分别、显了、施设这六种义理,以及字母、词、文句、形式、语法、解说这六种文句,而圆满具足,所以如此。或者,因为能入智者之心,因为听闻时令人不满足,因为以文句之味而极为深奥,因为审察时令人不满足,因为以义理之味而圆满具足美味,所以如此。巴利
Nanu ekasmiṃyeva atthe siyā, kasmā tīsupīti ca, hotu tibbidhesu atthesu, kena kimatthaṃ dīpetīti ca anuyogaṃ pariharanto ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Tatthāti tesu tīsu atthesu. Ekattanānattaabyāpāraevaṃdhammatāsaṅkhātā, nandiyāvattatipukkhalasīhavikkīḷitaaṅkusadisālocanasaṅkhātā vā ādhārādibhedavasena nānāvidhā nayā nānānayā, pāḷigatiyo vā nayā, tā ca paññattianupaññatti ādivasena, saṅkhepavitthārādivasena, saṃkilesabhāgiyādilokiyāditadubhayavomissakādivasena, kusalādivasena, khandhādivasena, saṅgahādivasena, samayavimuttādivasena, ṭhapanādivasena, kusalamūlādivasena, tikapaṭṭhānādivasena ca piṭakattayānurūpaṃ nānāppakārāti nānānayā. Tehi nipuṇaṃ saṇhaṃ sukhumaṃ tathā. Āsayova ajjhāsayo, te ca sassatādibhedena, tattha ca apparajakkhatādivasena anekā, attajjhāsayādayo eva vā samuṭṭhānamuppattihetu etassāti tathā, upanetabbābhāvato atthabyañjane hi sampannaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ tathā. Apica saṅkāsanapakāsanavivaraṇavibhajanauttānīkaraṇapaññattivasena chahi atthapadehi, akkharapadabyañjanaākāraniruttiniddesavasena chahi byañjanapadehi ca sampannaṃ samannāgataṃ tathā. Atha vā viññūnaṃ hadayaṅgamato, savane atittijananato, byañjanarasavasena paramagambhīrabhāvato, vicāraṇe atittijananato, attharasavasena ca sampannaṃ sādurasaṃ tathā.
对于“示导”这个词的含义,他们解释说:“因为能去除对立面,因为能除去贪等烦恼,所以叫示导。”可是,世尊并没有贪等需要去除的对立面,因为他在菩提树下就已经把一切烦恼连同习气全部断尽了。而且,凡夫在远离随烦恼、具备八种功德的心中生起神通时,也是因为对立面已经被去除才行。所以,按照凡夫中通行的说法,在这里也不能叫“示导”。不过,如果从大悲世尊想要救拔沉溺在轮回泥沼中的众生这一角度来说,把所化众生身上的烦恼当作对立面,那么因为去除了这些被称为所化众生烦恼的对立面,所以说为“示导”,这样讲就合理了。巴利
Pāṭihāriyapadassa vacanatthaṃ ‘‘paṭipakkhaharaṇato rāgādikilesāpanayanato pāṭihāriya’’nti vadanti. Bhagavato pana paṭipakkhā rāgādayo na santi, ye haritabbā bodhimūleyeva savāsanasakalasaṃkilesānaṃ pahīnattā. Puthujjanānampi ca vigatūpakkilese aṭṭhaguṇasamannāgate citte hatapaṭipakkhe satiyeva iddhividhaṃ pavattati, tasmā puthujjanesu pavattavohārenapi na sakkā idha ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vattuṃ, sace pana mahākāruṇikassa bhagavato veneyyagatāva kilesā paṭipakkhā saṃsārapaṅkanimuggassa sattanikāyassa samuddharitukāmato, tasmā tesaṃ veneyyagatakilesasaṅkhātānaṃ paṭipakkhānaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyanti vuttaṃ assa, evaṃ sati yuttametaṃ.
或者,世尊教法的对立者就是外道,由于能去除那些作为外道的对立者,所以也可以叫“示导”。不过在这里,其实并没有真正要去除的外道,而是通过去除他们心相续中的邪见,以及由于他们无法阐明正见,就以神变示导、记说示导、教诫示导这三种方式,说他们被去除、被清除了。又或者,“paṭi”这个词表达的是“之后”的意思,就像在“当他进去之后,另一个婆罗门来了”这类句子里那样。所以,当心已经入定、远离了随烦恼、该做的事已经做完之后,再去去除、再去令其生起,这就是“示导”;同样地,因为持续时间长,或者因为依自义生起的条件,也叫“示导”;又或者,自己的随烦恼已经被第四禅和圣道去除之后,再去去除别人的烦恼,按照前面说的方式,也叫“示导”。因为神变、记说、教诫这三者,是已经远离随烦恼、所作已办的人为了利益众生而再次令其生起的;而且在自己的随烦恼被去除之后,它们也成为去除其他众生随烦恼的方法。所以这两种词源解释都说得通。巴利
Atha vā bhagavato sāsanassa paṭipakkhā titthiyā, tesaṃ titthiyabhūtānaṃ paṭipakkhānaṃ haraṇato pāṭihāriyantipi yujjati. Kāmañcettha titthiyā haritabbā nāssu, tesaṃ pana santānagatadiṭṭhiharaṇavasena diṭṭhippakāsane asamatthatākāraṇena ca iddhiādesanānusāsanīsaṅkhātehi tīhipi pāṭihāriyehi te haritā apanītā nāma honti. Paṭīti vā ayaṃ saddo ‘‘pacchā’’ti etassa atthaṃ bodheti ‘‘tasmiṃ paṭipaviṭṭhamhi, añño āgañchi brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 985; cūḷani. 4) viya, tasmā samāhite citte vigatūpaklese katakiccena pacchā haritabbaṃ pavattetabbanti paṭihāriyaṃ, tadeva dīghavasena, sakatthavuttipaccayavasena vā pāṭihāriyaṃ, attano vā upaklesesu catutthajjhānamaggehi haritesu pacchā tadaññesaṃ haraṇaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ vuttanayena. Iddhiādesanānusāsaniyo hi vigatūpaklesena, katakiccena ca sattahitatthaṃ puna pavattetabbā, hatesu ca attano upaklesesu parasattānaṃ upaklesaharaṇāni ca hontīti tadubhayampi nibbacanaṃ yujjati.
另外,按照上面所说的词源解释,由神变、记说、教诫这三者组成的整体,就叫作“示导”。不过,其中每一个单独的存在,由于表达特殊意义的接尾词造成了词形上的差别,所以也叫作“示导”;或者说,第四禅和圣道因为能去除对立面,所以叫“示导”,在它们之中生起的、以它们为因相的、从它们而来的,就叫作“示导”。因为接尾词的用法本来就多种多样。而世尊的教法,按神变、记说、教诫的区分,以及按所缘境的区分,有多种多样,所以说“种种示导”。因为世尊有时以神变力来说法,比如在化佛一起问答等场合;有时也以记说力来说法,比如为臭秽婆罗门说法等场合;但大多数时候是以教诫力来说法。因为教诫示导就是诸佛恒常不断的说法。这样,依照各种不同的说法方式,教法就具有多种示导性。这个道理在后面第十一《坚固经》的注释中会清楚说明。或者也可以说,因为世尊的教法能显示这种种示导,所以说“种种示导”,意思是显示多种多样的示导。巴利
Apica yathāvuttehi nibbacanehi iddhiādesanānusāsanīsaṅkhāto samudāyo paṭihāriyaṃ nāma. Ekekaṃ pana tasmiṃ bhavaṃ ‘‘pāṭihāriya’’nti vuccati visesatthajotakapaccayantarena saddaracanāvisesasambhavato, paṭihāriyaṃ vā catutthajjhānaṃ, maggo ca paṭipakkhaharaṇato, tattha jātaṃ, tasmiṃ vā nimittabhūte, tato vā āgatanti pāṭihāriyaṃ. Vicitrā hi taddhitavutti. Tassa pana iddhiādesanānusāsanībhedena, visayabhedena ca bahuvidhassa bhagavato desanāya labbhamānattā ‘‘vividhapāṭihāriyanti vuttaṃ. Bhagavā hi kadāci iddhivasenāpi desanaṃ karoti nimmitabuddhena saha pucchāvissajjanādīsu, kadāci ādesanāvasenāpi āmagandhabrāhmaṇassa dhammadesanādīsu (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.241), yebhuyyena pana anusāsaniyā. Anusāsanīpāṭihāriyañhi buddhānaṃ satataṃ dhammadesanā. Iti taṃtaṃdesanākārena anekavidhapāṭihāriyatā desanāya labbhati. Ayamattho upari ekādasamassa kevaṭṭasuttassa vaṇṇanāya (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.481) āvi bhavissati. Atha vā tassa vividhassāpi pāṭihāriyassa bhagavato desanāya saṃsūcanato ‘‘vividhapāṭihāriya’’nti vuttaṃ, anekavidhapāṭihāriyadassananti attho.
世尊以法的语言开示法时,所有听者虽然各说各的语言,开示却能随各自的语言进入他们的耳门,所以说“一切……进入”。耳本身就是耳道,或者听闻就是耳,它的通道就是那样,意思是耳门。“以一切方式”,就是按所开示的方式。“谁能了知?”就是不能了知,所以是省略句。“而”字在此是决定的意思,由此显示:以信、念、慧、精进等力所摄的一切力量,决定地生起名为“想听”的善欲。“即使生起之后”中的“pi”字,或“api”字,是赞叹的意思,如“佛陀也修习佛性”等句(《长部》注1;《中部》注1;《相应部》注1;《增支部》注1·第一结集语)那样,由此对如是听闻的法作赞叹:“即使以一切力量决定地生起想听之心,尚且只能以一种方式听闻,何况其他方式?”有人说“在这类地方是谴责的意思”,那是不对的,因为这里并没有谴责的意思,而接词和助词只是表示存在的意义。因为“种种理趣微细”等句,在这里只是就法不能以一切方式听尽而作赞叹,所以只有在像“即使在天界欲乐中,他也不获得喜”等句(《法句经》187)那样可能存在谴责意思的地方,才应知道是谴责的意思。“api”字在这类地方只是助词,不是接头词。正如文中所明。在“我亦”中不单指我自身,亦指其他类似之人,应取合摄之义。巴利
Dhammaniruttiyāva bhagavati dhammaṃ desente sabbesaṃ suṇantānaṃ nānābhāsitānaṃ taṃtaṃbhāsānurūpato desanā sotapathamāgacchatīti āha ‘‘sabba…pe… māgacchanta’’nti. Sotameva sotapatho, savanaṃ vā sotaṃ, tassa patho tathā, sotadvāranti attho. Sabbākārenāti yathādesitākārena. Ko samattho viññātuṃ, asamatthoyeva, tasmāti pāṭhaseso. Panāti ekaṃsatthe , tena saddhāsatidhitivīriyādibalasaṅkhātena sabbathāmena ekaṃseneva sotukāmatāsaṅkhātakusalacchandassa jananaṃ dasseti. Janetvāpīti ettha pi-saddo, api-saddo vā sambhāvanattho ‘‘buddhopi buddhabhāvaṃ bhāvetvā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha 1; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 1; a. ni. aṭṭha 1.paṭhamaganthārambhakathā) viya, tena ‘‘sabbathāmena ekaṃseneva sotukāmataṃ janetvāpi nāma ekenākārena sutaṃ, kimaṅgaṃ pana aññathā’’ti tathāsute dhamme sambhāvanaṃ karoti. Keci pana ‘‘edisesu garahattho’’ti vadanti, tadayuttameva garahatthassa avijjamānattā, vijjamānatthasseva ca upasagganipātānaṃ jotakattā. ‘‘Nānānayanipuṇa’’ntiādinā hi sabbappakārena sotumasakkuṇeyyabhāvena dhammassa idha sambhāvanameva karoti, tasmā ‘‘api dibbesu kāmesu, ratiṃ so nādhigacchatī’’tiādīsuyeva (dha. pa. 187) garahatthasambhavesu garahattho veditabboti. Api-saddo ca īdisesu ṭhānesu nipātoyeva, na upasaggo. Tathā hi ‘‘api-saddo ca nipātapakkhiko kātabbo, yattha kiriyāvācakato pubbo na hotī’’ti akkharacintakā vadanti. Mayāpīti ettha pana na kevalaṃ mayāva, atha kho aññehipi tathārūpehīti sampiṇḍanattho gahetabbo.
“自己存在”所以叫“自生者”,也就是没有老师的人。至于“我们没有证得这个”这一句,从上下文可以看出它的意思是“不是靠自己的智慧亲自证得的”。因为即使是普通用语,也可以根据结合、分离、伴随、矛盾、近音词、特征、习惯、时间、地点、上下文等,把握到它特别的含义。一切地方都是这样。“令解脱”的意思是:为了让人从所说的过失中解脱出来,就像“再者,比丘们,这里有一个恶比丘,学通了如来所宣说的法和律之后,把它据为己有”(《波罗夷》195)所说的那样。因为“anta”这个词在“未觉者亲近佛陀”等句子里(《律》注1.结集语),有“因”的意思。通过对这部经注释方式的考察,针对自己智慧的亲证,才说“现在应当说”。因为注释者的惯例就是:对于要注释的法,在一切地方都事先考察注释的方式:“这是这个意思,我将这样来注释。”巴利
Sāmaṃ bhavatīti sayambhū, anācariyako. Na mayaṃ idaṃ sacchikatanti ettha pana ‘‘na attano ñāṇeneva attanā sacchikata’’nti pakaraṇato attho viññāyati. Sāmaññavacanassāpi hi sampayogavippayogasahacaraṇavirodhasaddantarasannidhānaliṅgaocityakāladesapakaraṇādivasena visesatthaggahaṇaṃ sambhavati. Evaṃ sabbattha. Parimocentoti ‘‘puna caparaṃ bhikkhave, idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’ti (pārā. 195) vuttadosato parimocāpanahetu. Hetvatthe hi anta-saddo ‘‘asambudhaṃ buddhanisevita’’ntiādīsu (vi. aṭṭha. 1.ganthārambhakathā) viya. Imassa suttassa saṃvaṇṇanāppakāravicāraṇena attano ñāṇassa paccakkhataṃ sandhāya ‘‘idāni vattabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Esā hi saṃvaṇṇanākārānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbadhamme sabbattha ‘‘ayamimassa attho, evamidha saṃvaṇṇayissāmī’’ti puretarameva saṃvaṇṇanāppakāravicāraṇā.
“最上(第一)一句”的含义已经说过了。至于“多闻者”等句中,其他长老也有多闻的、具念的、捷慧的、坚毅的,以及做侍者的,但这位具寿在领受佛语时,是站在十力尊教法中的“司库教理”位置上领受的,所以成为多闻者中的第一。这位长老领受佛语后,忆持之念比其他长老更强,所以成为具念者中的第一。正是这位具寿,能安住于一句而领受六万句,依照导师所说的方式了知一切句,所以成为捷慧者中的第一。也正是这位具寿,他领受佛语的精进、背诵的精进比其他长老更为无比,所以成为坚毅者中的第一。他侍奉如来时,并不以其他侍者比丘侍奉的方式侍奉。其他长老也侍奉如来,但不能把握佛陀的心意而侍奉;而这位长老从获得侍者职位之日起,便发起精进,把握如来的心意而侍奉,所以成为侍者中的第一。义善巧者,即于所说之义、所用之义中善巧。法者,即巴利法,或种种因。文者,即字,因义由文而显。由句所显之义,因句以字为根本,故说为“由字所显”。或者,因义由文句而显,此处文句也称为文。因为由文句,义得以圆满显示,所以具寿大迦旃延长老说“由文句而开显”。词无碍者,即解释,或五种词无碍之方式。因为由彼等之声组合差别而成为证义之因,故此处取其义。前后者,即前后连贯,或经的前分与后分的结合。由世尊以五种最上处,及法将以五种善巧,故与所赞叹之状态相应,这是关联。念力者,即称为念之力,或于念之力,两处皆指能持之能力。开示者,即成为开示,或开示之因,这也是义。那确实从义或从文皆不增不减,这是决定之果。不应作其他理解,这是遮止之处。不作其他理解,即从世尊面前所闻的方式不作其他理解,而不是从世尊所说的方式。因为世尊的教说是不可思议威力的,这样作时,“以一切方式谁能了知”下面所说之语便得以成立;否则,若以世尊所说的方式就能听受,那么这话就不应说。然而,以如上所说之义,念力之开示也不相违,因为依所闻方式不相违而念被理解;否则,若以世尊所说的方式就能持,则与下面所说之语相违。此处不应成立二义之互异,因为彼二义皆以显示所闻性而同一所缘;否则,长老于世尊教说的完全领受,以后义而言为能,以前义而言为不能,这就成了过失。巴利
Etadaggapadassattho vuttova. ‘‘Bahussutāna’’ntiādīsu pana aññepi therā bahussutā, satimanto, gatimanto, dhitimanto, upaṭṭhākā ca atthi, ayaṃ panāyasmā buddhavacanaṃ gaṇhanto dasabalassa sāsane bhaṇḍāgārikapariyattiyaṃ ṭhatvā gaṇhi, tasmā bahussutānaṃ aggo nāma jāto. Imassa ca therassa buddhavacanaṃ uggahetvā dhāraṇasati aññehi therehi balavatarā ahosi, tasmā satimantānaṃ aggo nāma jāto. Ayamevāyasmā ekapade ṭhatvā saṭṭhipadasahassāni gaṇhanto satthārā kathitaniyāmena sabbapadāni jānāti, tasmā gatimantānaṃ aggo nāma jāto . Tasseva cāyasmato buddhavacanaṃ uggaṇhanavīriyaṃ, sajjhāyanavīriyañca aññehi asadisaṃ ahosi, tasmā dhitimantānaṃ aggo nāma jāto. Tathāgataṃ upaṭṭhahanto cesa na aññesaṃ upaṭṭhākabhikkhūnaṃ upaṭṭhahanākārena upaṭṭhahati. Aññepi hi tathāgataṃ upaṭṭhahiṃsu, na ca pana buddhānaṃ manaṃ gahetvā upaṭṭhahituṃ sakkonti, ayaṃ pana thero upaṭṭhākaṭṭhānaṃ laddhadivasato paṭṭhāya āraddhavīriyo hutvā tathāgatassa manaṃ gahetvā upaṭṭhahi, tasmā upaṭṭhākānaṃ aggo nāma jāto. Atthakusaloti bhāsitatthe, payojanatthe ca cheko. Dhammoti pāḷidhammo, nānāvidho vā hetu. Byañjananti akkharaṃ atthassa byañjanato. Padena hi byañjitopi attho akkharamūlakattā padassa ‘‘akkharena byañjito’’ti vuccati. Atthassa viyañjanato vā vākyampi idha byañjanaṃ nāma. Vākyena hi attho paripuṇṇaṃ byañjīyati, yato ‘‘byañjanehi vivaratī’’ti āyasmatā mahākaccāyanattherena vuttaṃ. Niruttīti nibbacanaṃ, pañcavidhā vā niruttinayā. Tesampi hi saddaracanāvisesena atthādhigamahetuto idha gahaṇaṃ yujjati. Pubbāparaṃ nāma pubbāparānusandhi, suttassa vā pubbabhāgena aparabhāgassa saṃsandanaṃ. Bhagavatā ca pañcavidhaetadaggaṭṭhānena dhammasenāpatinā ca pañcavidhakosallena pasaṭṭhabhāvānurūpanti sambandho. Dhāraṇabalanti dhāraṇasaṅkhātaṃ balaṃ, dhāraṇe vā balaṃ, ubhayatthāpi dhāretuṃ sāmatthiyanti vuttaṃ hoti. Dassento hutvā, dassanahetūtipi attho. Tañca kho atthato vā byañjanato vā anūnamanadhikanti avadhāraṇaphalamāha. Na aññathā daṭṭhabbanti pana nivattetabbatthaṃ. Na aññathāti ca bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato na aññathā, na pana bhagavatā desitākārato. Acinteyyānubhāvā hi bhagavato desanā, evañca katvā ‘‘sabbappakārena ko samattho viññātu’’nti heṭṭhā vuttavacanaṃ samatthitaṃ hoti, itarathā bhagavatā desitākāreneva sotuṃ samatthattā tadetaṃ na vattabbaṃ siyā. Yathāvuttena pana atthena dhāraṇabaladassanañca na virujjhati sutākārāvirujjhanavasena dhāraṇassa adhippetattā, aññathā bhagavatā desitākāreneva dhārituṃ samatthanato heṭṭhā vuttavacanena virujjheyya. Na hettha dvinnaṃ atthānaṃ atthantaratāparihāro yutto tesaṃ dvinnampi atthānaṃ sutabhāvadīpanena ekavisayattā, itarathā thero bhagavato desanāya sabbathā paṭiggahaṇe pacchimatthavasena samattho, purimatthavasena ca asamatthoti āpajjeyyāti.
有人依据“凡不是他人的,就是自我”这句话,说在被称为“自身内相续”的流转中,三种“我”(me)这个词都能出现。因此,虽然从自身内相续这个意义上说,“我”这个词看起来指的是同一个意思,但按照具格、为格、属格的不同表达方式,它其实存在格位上的差别,所以说“见于三义”,意思就是:通过三种格位,可以看到它与自身相关联的意义。所谓“以偈颂歌咏”,就是对着偈颂唱诵。“不应食”,是指不适合拿来当食物。因为“歌咏”这个词含有对作者的指向,所以有“由我”的意思。其余各处也应当按同样道理随宜理解。“闻”这个词依据业行成就的构词方式,成为有两种指向的词,因此随其所应,可以通于“我所闻”和“我之闻”两种意思。巴利
‘‘Yo paro na hoti, so attā’’ti vuttāya niyakajjhattasaṅkhātāya santatiyā pavattanako tividhopi me-saddo, tasmā kiñcāpi niyakajjhattasantativasena ekasmiṃ yevatthe me-saddo dissati, tathāpi karaṇasampadānasāminiddesavasena vijjamānavibhattibhedaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘tīsu atthesu dissatī’’ti, tīsu vibhattiyatthesu attanā saññuttavibhattito dissatīti attho . Gāthābhigītanti gāthāya abhigītaṃ abhimukhaṃ gāyitaṃ. Abhojaneyyanti bhojanaṃ kātumanaraharūpaṃ. Abhigītapadassa kattupekkhattā mayāti attho. Evaṃ sesesupi yathārahaṃ. Sutasaddassa kammabhāvasādhanavasena dvādhippāyikapadattā yathāyogaṃ ‘‘mayā suta’’nti ca ‘‘mama suta’’nti ca atthadvaye yujjati.
虽然前缀会让动词产生差别,但由于它只是起显示作用,即使有前缀,“所闻”这个词本身仍然表达各种不同的意义,所以在提取无前缀的“所闻”一词的含义时,把有前缀的也一起收进来,并不矛盾,因此说“有前缀和无前缀”。所谓“它的”,指的是“所闻”这个词。依靠前缀,词根也能表达特殊含义,比如“anubhavati(经历)、parābhavati(失败)”中说的,根本意思是“去”。同样,无前缀的词根也像有前缀的词根一样能表达特殊含义,所以说“vissutadhammassāti attho(意思是‘已显法者’)”。在这类情况下也是如此。“耳所识”:指依靠耳门所产生的识所能识知的;或者这是附带资粮的说法,意思是依靠耳门所能识知的。“随顺耳门识知持法者”:指随顺耳门、以意识识知并持法的人。因为并不是单凭依靠耳门的识就能识知法,而是要靠随顺它的意识才能识知;而且“闻持者”也是按那样识知并持法来说的,所以正是这个意思,才这样说的。为了说明“所闻”这个词中存在作格成就,说了“然而于此”等话。意义的成立与不成立,要依据前后词的联系才能知道,所以不能只凭“所闻”这个词就知道这个意思是“成立”还是“不成立”。为了回应这个质疑,依据前后词的联系来说明这个意思是成立的,所以说了“me这个词确实”等话。当“由我”这个意思存在时,也就是说,本该说“由我”这个意思、以作格来标示具格的时候;当“me”这个词以作格来标示具格时,就这样说。当“我的”这个意思存在时,也就是说,本该说“我的”这个意思、在属连关系中标示所有者的时候;当依据属连关系来标示所有者时,就这样说。巴利
Kiñcāpi upasaggo kiriyaṃ viseseti, jotakamattabhāvato pana satipi tasmiṃ sutasaddoyeva taṃ taṃ atthaṃ vadatīti anupasaggassa sutasaddassa atthuddhāre saupasaggassa gahaṇaṃ na virujjhatīti āha ‘‘saupasaggo ca anupasaggo cā’’ti. Assāti sutasaddassa. Upasaggavasenapi dhātusaddo visesatthavācako yathā ‘‘anubhavati parābhavatī’’ti vuttaṃ ‘‘gacchantoti attho’’ti. Tathā anupasaggopi dhātusaddo saupasaggo viya visesatthavācakoti āha ‘‘vissutadhammassāti attho’’ti. Evamīdisesu. Sotaviññeyyanti sotadvāranissitena viññāṇena viññātabbaṃ, sasambhārakathā vā esā, sotadvārena viññātabbanti attho. Sotadvārānusāraviññātadharoti sotadvārānusārena manoviññāṇena viññātadhammadharo. Na hi sotadvāranissitaviññāṇamattena dhammo viññāyati, atha kho tadanusāramanoviññāṇeneva, sutadharoti ca tathā viññātadhammadharo vutto, tasmā tadatthoyeva sambhavatīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Kammabhāvasādhanāni sutasadde sambhavantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘idha panā’’tiādimāha. Pubbāparapadasambandhavasena atthassa upapannatā, anupapannatā ca viññāyati, tasmā sutasaddasseva vasena ayamattho ‘‘upapanno, anupapanno’’ti vā na viññātabboti codanāya pubbāparapadasambandhavasena etadatthassa upapannataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘me-saddassa hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Mayāti atthe satīti kattutthe karaṇaniddesavasena mayāti atthe vattabbe sati, yadā me-saddassa kattuvasena karaṇaniddeso, tadāti vuttaṃ hoti. Mamāti atthe satīti sambandhīyatthe sāminiddesavasena mamāti atthe vattabbe sati, yadā sambandhavasena sāmi niddeso, tadāti vuttaṃ hoti.
像这样,先依词说明了应当知道的意义,现在为了显示他们所要显示的意义,而说出“于如是诸”等话。在“所闻”这个词的运用中,必须用“如是”这个词来显示听闻的作用,因为助词只是显示现存的意义而已,所以说“如是一词是显示耳识等识的作用”。因为行相、显示和决定都属于听闻,所以如上所说,“如是”一词的三种意义——以显示听闻作用的方式——在这里就是所要表达的意思。这里,通过“等”这个词,应当知道包含了耳门的领受等识,以及转向这些识的意门识,因为这里是依照随顺耳门而识知的意义,才说“所闻”这个词的。由于语言的使用具有决定的作用,整句话也都含摄在决定之中,因此“所闻”就是“唯有听闻”的意思,所以说“由遮遣未闻性”。用这个决定性的说法,显示他已经遮遣了。应当决定“所闻就是唯有听闻”,而且那所闻是正确听闻的,为了显示这个决定的结果,所以说“显示无减、无增、无颠倒的执取”。或者,词是通过遮遣其他意义来表达意义的,因此“所闻”就是“不是未闻”的意思,所以说“由遮遣未闻性”。以此遮遣所见等,因为所见等应当以“未闻”这个其他意义来遮遣。这里所说的是:这不是我以自己的智慧所见,也不是以自证智所证,而是所闻,而且那所闻是正确听闻的。针对那正确听闻的性质,所以说“显示无减……等”。巴利
Evaṃ saddato ñātabbamatthaṃ viññāpetvā idāni tehi dassetabbamatthaṃ nidassento ‘‘evametesū’’tiādimāha. Sutasaddasannidhāne payuttena evaṃ-saddena savanakiriyājotakeneva bhavitabbaṃ vijjamānatthassa jotakamattattā nipātānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti sotaviññāṇādiviññāṇakiccanidassana’’nti. Savanāya eva hi ākāro, nidassanaṃ, avadhāraṇampi, tasmā yathāvutto evaṃ-saddassa tividhopi attho savanakiriyājotakabhāvena idhādhippetoti. Ādi-saddena cettha sampaṭicchanādīnaṃ sotadvārikaviññāṇānaṃ, tadabhinipātānañca manodvārika viññāṇānaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ, yato sotadvārānusāraviññātatthe idha sutasaddoti vutto. Avadhāraṇaphalattā saddapayogassa sabbampi vākyaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇaṃ, tasmā ‘‘suta’’nti etassa sutamevāti ayamattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti. Etena hi vacanena avadhāraṇena nirākataṃ dasseti. Yathā pana yaṃ sutaṃ sutamevāti niyametabbaṃ, tathā ca taṃ sutaṃ sammā sutaṃ hotīti avadhāraṇaphalaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘anūnādhikāviparītaggahaṇanidassana’’nti. Atha vā saddantaratthāpohanavasena saddo atthaṃ vadati, tasmā ‘‘suta’’nti etassa asutaṃ na hotīti ayamattho labbhatīti sandhāya ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti vuttaṃ, iminā diṭṭhādinivattanaṃ karoti diṭṭhādīnaṃ ‘‘asuta’’nti saddantaratthabhāvena nivattetabbattā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – na idaṃ mayā attano ñāṇena diṭṭhaṃ, na ca sayambhuñāṇena sacchikataṃ, atha kho sutaṃ, tañca kho sutaṃ sammadevāti. Tadeva sammā sutabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘anūnā…pe… dassana’’nti. Hoti cettha –
正是以这样的力量,以及通过排除其他含义,
声音以两种方式按相应情况排除别的意思。巴利
‘‘Evādisattiyā ceva, aññatthāpohanena ca; Dvidhā saddo atthantaraṃ, nivatteti yathāraha’’nti.
另外,对于“evaṃ”这个词,这里是按“决定”的意思来理解,所以作了这样的义理连接:因此,针对“闻”这个词,为了表达它的决定义,就说“由遮遣未闻性”;这是为了显示那个决定的结果,也就是“无减……见”。这里“闻”这个词因为和表示状态的词结合,所以应当理解为被动意义,即“被听闻”。由于无增无减,从在世尊面前听闻的方式来看,是没有颠倒的;或者说,是以不颠倒的方式执取经典,它的显示也是如此。这样,就是根据闻的因,以及闻者各自听闻的差别,作了这个义理连接。巴利
Apica avadhāraṇatthe evaṃ-sadde ayamatthayojanā karīyatīti tadapekkhassa sutasaddassa sāvadhāraṇattho vutto ‘‘assavanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti, tadavadhāraṇaphalaṃ dasseti ‘‘anū…pe… dassana’’nti iminā. Savana-saddo cettha bhāvasaddena yogato kammasādhano veditabbo ‘‘suyyatī’’ti. Anūnādhikatāya bhagavato sammukhā sutākārato aviparītaṃ , aviparītassa vā suttassa gahaṇaṃ, tassa nidassanaṃ tathā, iti savanahetu suṇantapuggalasavanavisesavasena ayaṃ yojanā katā.
已经用第一种方式说明了这三句的义理关联,现在为了用另一种方式也说明它,所以说了“tathā”等话。其中,“tassā”指的是在世尊面前以闻法方式生起的那条意门心路过程,就是它。因为它能够以种种方式在所缘上生起,而耳门心路过程不能这样,因为耳门心路过程只在一个所缘上生起,所以也才说“依随耳门”。这样一来,耳门心路过程就被排除了。“以种种方式”是指接下来要说的、以多种多样执取文句与义理的行相所构成的种种行相,以此表明:在这句义理关联中,“evaṃ”一词取的就是“行相”之义。“阐明生起状态”即阐明生起的存在。在那种行相中,所说的心路过程以种种方式生起,正是就那个所缘而说“法之阐明”,而不是就所闻之词的法义而说,因此说“此法已闻”。因为那条心路过程的所缘本身就被称为“此法已闻”。而那被确定者,正是如前所说的心路过程的所缘,即所闻本身。“Ayañhetthāti”等语,是对已说之义的显明。此处“hi”一词,其义就是显明彼义。以作为工具的心路过程,我并未做别的,而是做了这个所缘。那么,那是什么?就是“此法已闻”。而此处的意趣是这样的:在“evaṃ”一词取“行相”之义时,所说的“以一种行相”那种行相,从义理上说,正是随耳门心路过程以种种方式在所缘上生起的状态;而由彼,则只是对作为彼所缘的法本身的闻,并非别的。如此,这句义理关联便显示了闻的作用中作者、工具、对象的差别。巴利
Evaṃ padattayassa ekena pakārena atthayojanaṃ dassetvā idāni pakārantarenāpi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tassāti yā bhagavato sammukhā dhammassavanākārena pavattā manodvārikaviññāṇavīthi, tassā. Sā hi nānāppakārena ārammaṇe pavattituṃ samatthā, na sotadvārika viññāṇavīthi ekārammaṇeyeva pavattanato, tathā ceva vuttaṃ ‘‘sotadvārānusārenā’’ti. Tena hi sotadvārikaviññāṇavīthi nivattati. Nānappakārenāti vakkhamānena anekavihitena byañjanatthaggahaṇākārasaṅkhātena nānāvidhena ākārena, etena imissā yojanāya ākārattho evaṃ-saddo gahitoti dasseti. Pavattibhāvappakāsananti pavattiyā atthibhāvappakāsanaṃ. Yasmiṃ pakāre vuttappakārā viññāṇavīthi nānappakārena pavattā, tadeva ārammaṇaṃ sandhāya ‘‘dhammappakāsana’’nti vuttaṃ, na pana sutasaddassa dhammatthaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti. Tassā hi viññāṇavīthiyā ārammaṇameva ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo suto’’ti vuccati. Tañca niyamiyamānaṃ yathāvuttāya viññāṇavīthiyā ārammaṇabhūtaṃ suttameva. Ayañhetthātiādi vuttassevatthassa pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ. Tappākaṭīkaraṇattho hettha hi-saddo. Viññāṇavīthiyā karaṇabhūtāya mayā na aññaṃ kataṃ, idaṃ pana ārammaṇaṃ kataṃ. Kiṃ pana tanti ce? Ayaṃ dhammo sutoti. Ayaṃ panetthādhippāyo – ākāratthe evaṃ-sadde ‘‘ekenākārenā’’ti yo ākāro vutto, so atthato sotadvārānusāraviññāṇavīthiyā nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattibhāvoyeva, tena ca tadārammaṇabhūtassa dhammasseva savanaṃ kataṃ, na aññanti. Evaṃ savanakiriyāya karaṇakattukammaviseso imissā yojanāya dassito.
他又用“tathā”等语句说了另一种连接方式。为了举例说明,取用“evaṃ”这个词,而由于所举的例子和所要举例说明的对象不可分离,所以说“evaṃ是对所要举例说明之内容的阐明”。因为这种不可分离的关系,用“evaṃ”这个词就统摄了整部经,这表明“suta”一词从属于动作,而听闻这个动作又依附于共通的识相续,并且在这个识相续中安立了“人”的说法,所以说“阐明人的作用”。因为在这里,共通的识相续依据施设而被称为“人”,而听闻这个动作就是他的作用。应当知道,如果没有“人”这个施设,在法的相续中就找不到听闻这个动作,因为这个动作属于言说所行的范围。“idaṃ”等语句是显示整体含义:由我——也就是前面所说的识相续所构成的“人”。“sutaṃ”则是与被称为听闻动作的人的作用相结合。不过应当知道,通过这种连接方式,人的作用所涉及的对象(即人)以及人的作用,都被举例显示出来了。巴利
Aññampi yojanamāha ‘‘tathā’’tiādinā. Nidassanatthaṃ evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā nidassanena ca nidassitabbassāvinābhāvato ‘‘evanti nidassitabbappakāsana’’nti vuttaṃ. Iminā hi tadavinābhāvato evaṃsaddena sakalampi suttaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti dasseti, sutasaddassa kiriyāparattā, savanakiriyāya ca sādhāraṇaviññāṇappabandhapaṭibaddhattā tasmiñca viññāṇappabandhe puggalavohāroti vuttaṃ ‘‘puggalakiccappakāsana’’nti. Sādhāraṇaviññāṇappabandho hi paṇṇattiyā idha puggalo nāma, savanakiriyā pana tassa kiccaṃ nāma. Na hi puggalavohārarahite dhammappabandhe savanakiriyā labbhati vohāravisayattā tassā kiriyāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Ida’’ntiādi piṇḍatthadassanaṃ mayāti yathāvuttaviññāṇappabandhasaṅkhātapuggalabhūtena mayā. Sutanti savanakiriyāsaṅkhātena puggalakiccena yojitaṃ, imissā pana yojanāya puggalabyāpāravisayassa puggalassa, puggalabyāpārassa ca nidassanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
只是取“如此”这个词的行相义,为了在前一种连接方式之外,展示另一种义理连接方式,才说了“tathā”等语。“心相续的”,是指如前所说的识的相续。“以种种行相生起”,是指以种种方式在所缘上生起。对义理和文句作种种执取,或者对种种义理和文句的执取,正是因此,它才被称为“行相施设”。为了说明这个意思,便说了“evam hi”等语。所谓“行相施设”,其实就是依着施设,但因为它是依据诸法的生起行相而施设的,为了区别于其他的依着施设,才说为“行相施设”,这是境的说明,也就是生起处的说明。因为可听之法,对于作为听闻行为之作者的人来说,以听闻行为之力而成为生起处,这是由于它是行为的所作处,并且因此也要求其基体的基体性;但在这里,所要求的是行为作者的生起处,所以只从基体的角度来说所作,因此说“作者、境、执取的确定”,或者境就是所缘。因为所缘正是那有缘者的生起处。这样理解,义理也更容易明白。为了显示如上所说之语的总义,便说了“ettāvatā”等语。“ettāvatā”的意思是:以上述之义,由这三句,就已经完成了——如此连接。“以种种行相生起”是指以种种方式在所缘上生起。“以心相续”是指如前所说的名为识路的识的相续。这里“执取”一词是工具格。即使从胜义上说,离开了心相续并没有任何作者,但依世俗言说,为了表达由思心所构想的差别言说之欲求,把具足彼者看作好像与心相续不同,虽然实际上无差别,却以差别的言说方式说“以心相续,彼具足者”。因为言说以世俗为境,并非纯粹胜义(在《格具论》中,应参阅“yo kāreti sahetu”之经)。可听之法也是听闻行为之境,因为对于以听闻行为而转起的心相续,此处从胜义上说它是作者,所以说“作者、境、执取的确定”。巴利
Ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā purimayojanāya aññathāpi atthayojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cittasantānassāti yathāvuttaviññāṇappabandhassa. Nānākārappavattiyāti nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattiyā. Nānappakāraṃ atthabyañjanassa gahaṇaṃ, nānappakārassa vā atthabyañjanassa gahaṇaṃ tathā, tatoyeva sā ‘‘ākārapaññattī’’ti vuttāti tadevatthaṃ samattheti ‘‘evanti hī’’tiādinā. Ākārapaññattīti ca upādāpaññattiyeva, dhammānaṃ pana pavattiākāramupādāya paññattattā tadaññāya upādāpaññattiyā visesanatthaṃ ‘‘ākārapaññattī’’ti vuttā visayaniddesoti uppattiṭṭhānaniddeso. Sotabbabhūto hi dhammo savanakiriyākattubhūtassa puggalassa savanakiriyāvasena pavattiṭṭhānaṃ kiriyāya kattukammaṭṭhattā tabbasena ca tadādhārassāpi dabbassa ādhārabhāvassa icchitattā, idha pana kiriyāya kattupavattiṭṭhānabhāvo icchitoti kammameva ādhāravasena vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘kattu visayaggahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti, ārammaṇameva vā visayo. Ārammaṇañhi tadārammaṇikassa pavattiṭṭhānaṃ. Evampi hi attho suviññeyyataro hoti. Yathāvuttavacane piṇḍatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā ettakena yathāvuttatthena padattayena, kataṃ hotīti sambandho. Nānākārappavattenāti nānappakārena ārammaṇe pavattena. Cittasantānenāti yathāvuttaviññāṇavīthisaṅkhātena cittappabandhena. Gahaṇasadde cetaṃ karaṇaṃ. Cittasantānavinimuttassa kassaci kattu paramatthato abhāvepi saddavohārena buddhiparikappitabhedavacanicchāya cittasantānato aññamiva taṃsamaṅgiṃ katvā abhedepi bhedavohārena ‘‘cittasantānena taṃsamaṅgino’’ti vuttaṃ. Vohāravisayo hi saddo nekantaparamatthikoti (kārakarūpasiddhiyaṃ yo kāreti sahetusuttaṃ passitabbaṃ) savanakiriyāvisayopi sotabbadhammo savanakiriyāvasena pavattacittasantānassa idha paramatthato kattubhāvato tassa visayoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kattu visayaggahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti.
另外,如果只是依据听闻而使心现起,那么由于并没有真实的听闻行为,所以依这种心来说,它就成了由其他名色法聚合而成、作为那行为执行者的所缘。因此才那样说。这里要表达的是:按前一种解释,听闻行为以及它的执行者,从究竟意义上说,就是如此现起的心相续本身,所以行为的所缘也被说成是“执行者的所缘”。但按后一种解释,如此现起的心相续是行为,而与它不同的诸法聚合才是执行者,因此,虽然这个聚合纯粹只是行为的所缘,仍依行为而说为“以彼为终结的执行者的所缘”。“具彼者”指具足彼心相续者;“执行者”指执行者的;“所缘境”指依所缘而转起之处,或即所缘本身。又因为听闻者的行相已正确确定,所以说为“执取的确定”。巴利
Apica savanavasena cittappavattiyā eva savanakiriyābhāvato taṃvasena tadaññanāmarūpadhammasamudāyabhūtassa taṃkiriyākattu ca visayo hotīti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – purimanaye savanakiriyā, takkattā ca paramatthato tathāpavattacittasantānameva, tasmā kiriyāvisayopi ‘‘kattu visayo’’ti vutto. Pacchimanaye pana tathāpavattacittasantānaṃ kiriyā, tadaññadhammasamudāyo pana kattā, tasmā kāmaṃ ekantato kiriyāvisayoyevesa dhammo, tathāpi kiriyāvasena ‘‘tabbantakattu visayo’’ti vuttoti. Taṃsamaṅginoti tena cittasantānena samaṅgino. Kattūti kattārassa. Visayoti ārammaṇavasena pavattiṭṭhānaṃ, ārammaṇameva vā. Sutākārassa ca therassa sammā nicchitabhāvato ‘‘gahaṇasanniṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ.
另一种解释:对于“形态概念”这一说法,是把“如此”这个词按“形态”的含义来连接,并同时取它的限定作用,在这个解释方法中,不说“已作执取”,而说“已作执取的确定”,应当这样理解。因为这里通过限定所要表达的就是确定,所以应当知道:这是取“至此”等说法中“如此”一词的限定含义,表明只作了这样一种连接。然而应当知道,在这个连接中,展示了执取的形态、执取者以及所应执取之对象的区别。巴利
Aparo nayo – yassa…pe… ākārapaññattīti ākāratthena evaṃ-saddena yojanaṃ katvā tadeva avadhāraṇatthampi gahetvā imasmiṃyeva naye yojetuṃ ‘‘gahaṇaṃ kataṃ’’ icceva avatvā ‘‘gahaṇasanniṭṭhānaṃ kata’’nti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avadhāraṇena hi sanniṭṭhānamidhādhippetaṃ, tasmā ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādinā avadhāraṇatthampi evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā ayameva yojanā katāti dassetīti veditabbaṃ, imissā pana yojanāya gahaṇākāragāhakatabbisayavisesanidassanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
又用“atha vā”等说法讲了另一种连接方式。对于自己先前听过的、种种不同的、名为经的义理和文句,已经加以审察的那个相状、例证或简别,它的显现本身就是“evaṃ”这个词。基于这种审察——它已成为施设“人”的所依,是诸法相续的作用——所以说为“人的作用的说明”。因为对自己听过的义理和文句再次审察,就是相、例证、简别这三者,而这正是“evaṃ”这个词的含义。然而,依那个法相续而施设“人”,那个法相续的作用就是它的功能,因此用“evaṃ”这个词来说明人的作用。虽然听闻行为一般也可以说是人的作用,但这里特别说是识的作用,所以说为“识的作用的说明”。因为即使对主张有“人”的人来说,听闻行为也离不开识,他们也承认听闻等特别就是识的作用。由于“me”这个词的声音生起时,完全以有情为对象,而识的作用因为与有情的识没有差别,就应当归入其中,所以说为“兼具两种作用的人的说明”。“ayaṃ”等词是为了把它说明清楚。这里,“具有听闻作用的识”是就“evaṃ”这个词所说明的人的作用而说的。为了显示:因为人具有听闻作用的识,所以名为人的作用,所以不说“具有人的作用”,而说“具有听闻作用的识”。因此,意思是:具有听闻作用的识——也就是被说为“人的作用”的听闻作用——的人。又,就识而言,以已获得“听闻作用”这个称谓的识,是就“suta”这个词所说明的识的作用而说的。听闻本身就是作用,所以叫“听闻作用”。听闻作用的称谓,就是“听闻作用的称谓”,已获得它,所以叫“已获得听闻作用的称谓”。意思是:以已获得听闻作用这个称谓的识为工具,凭其能力。这个连接是:我——具有听闻作用的识的人——以已获得听闻作用这个称谓的识为工具,而“听闻”。巴利
Aññampi yojanamāha ‘‘atha vā’’tiādinā. Pubbe attanā sutānaṃ nānāvihitānaṃ suttasaṅkhātānaṃ atthabyañjanānaṃ upadhāritarūpassa ākārassa nidassanassa, avadhāraṇassa vā pakāsanasabhāvo evaṃ-saddoti tadākārādibhūtassa upadhāraṇassa puggalapaññattiyā upādānabhūtadhammappabandhabyāpāratāya ‘‘puggalakiccaniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ attanā sutānañhi atthabyañjanānaṃ puna upadhāraṇaṃ ākārādittayaṃ, tañca evaṃ-saddassa attho. So pana yaṃ dhammappabandhaṃ upādāya puggalapaññatti pavattā, tassa byāpārabhūtaṃ kiccameva , tasmā evaṃ-saddena puggalakiccaṃ niddisīyatīti. Kāmaṃ savanakiriyā puggalabyāpāropi avisesena, tathāpi visesato viññāṇabyāpārovāti vuttaṃ ‘‘viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Tathā hi puggalavādīnampi savanakiriyā viññāṇanirapekkhā natthi savanādīnaṃ visesato viññāṇabyāpārabhāvena icchitattā. Meti saddappavattiyā ekanteneva sattavisayattā, viññāṇakiccassa ca sattaviññāṇānamabhedakaraṇavasena tattheva samodahitabbato ‘‘ubhayakiccayuttapuggalaniddeso’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Aya’’ntiādi tappākaṭīkaraṇaṃ. Ettha hi savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅgināti evaṃ-saddena niddiṭṭhaṃ puggalakiccaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ pana puggalassa savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅgībhāvena puggalakiccaṃ nāmāti dassetuṃ ‘‘puggalakiccasamaṅginā’’ti avatvā ‘‘savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā’’ti āha, tasmā ‘‘puggalakicca’’nti niddiṭṭhasavanakiccavatā viññāṇena samaṅgināti attho. Viññāṇavasena, laddhasavanakiccavohārenāti ca sutasaddena niddiṭṭhaṃ viññāṇakiccaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Savanameva kiccaṃ yassāti tathā. Savanakiccanti vohāro savanakiccavohāro, laddho so yenāti tathā. Laddhasavanakiccavohārena viññāṇasaṅkhātena vasena sāmatthiyenāti attho. Ayaṃ pana sambandho – savanakiccaviññāṇasamaṅginā puggalena mayā laddhasavanakiccavohārena viññāṇavasena karaṇabhūtena sutanti.
另外,“eva”这个词的含义是“不存在的施设”,“suta”这个词的含义是“存在的施设”。因此,为了说明那种施设正是以作为执取对象的人的作用这种方式存在的,他说:“‘eva’是对人作用的说明,‘suta’是对识作用的说明。”因为如果只按究竟义来限定,就无法得到这种按人作用和识作用所作的区分。不过应当知道,按照这种连接方式,已经说明了作者的作用、工具的作用以及作者本身。巴利
Apica ‘‘eva’’nti saddassattho avijjamānapaññatti, ‘‘suta’’nti saddassattho vijjamānapaññatti, tasmā te tathārūpapaññatti upādānabhūtapuggalabyāpārabhāveneva dassento āha ‘‘evanti puggalakiccaniddeso. Sutanti viññāṇakiccaniddeso’’ti. Na hi paramatthatoyeva niyamiyamāne sati puggalakiccaviññāṇakiccavasena ayaṃ vibhāgo labbhatīti. Imissā pana yojanāya kattubyāpārakaraṇabyāpārakattuniddeso katoti veditabbo.
一切可以通过语言通达的意义,都只能借着施设才能进入;而一切施设又都包含在依“存在、不存在”等区分的六种施设之中。所以,为了从中指出“eva”(如是)等施设的自相,而说“evanti ca”等语。其中,“eva”和“me”所表达的意义,由于诸法并没有形态等可被觉察的相状,所以属于“不存在施设”,因此说“依真实义、胜义而言,是不存在施设”。“依真实义、胜义”就是依真实义、最上义的意思。这里说的是:不像幻术、阳焰那样是虚假的意义,也不像传闻等所取的那样是非最上的意义;只有具有色、声等自性,或具有可被损害、可被领受等自性的意义,才被称为“真实义、胜义”。而“evaṃ me”这些词的意义,因为是虚假的、非最上的,所以不能那样被称为真实义、胜义。因此,以真实义、最上义所构成的这个限定语来说,它只是不存在施设。凭这个限定语,就排除了愚人执为“存在”的纯粹施设。为了使这个意义清楚,或者用理由来证明,而说“kiñhettha ta”等。凡是能被“eva”或“me”所指称的诸法、诸意义,在这里都归于色、触等法的集合,或者归于“evaṃ me”这些词的意义。从胜义来说,它们并不存在。也就是说,以色、触等状态所指称的,从胜义看在这里确实存在;而“evaṃ me”所指称的,则不存在。至于“suta”,则是就声音处而说,所以说是“存在施设”。这里“依真实义、胜义而言”是总的原则。“Yañhī”等语是对它的说明,或者是对理由的显示。意思是:那声音处,是由耳、由耳门,或由依止于耳的识所领受、所通达的。这样便显示,这里是以业用方式摄取了声音处。巴利
Sabbassāpi saddādhigamanīyassa atthassa paññattimukheneva paṭipajjitabbattā, sabbāsañca paññattīnaṃ vijjamānādivasena chasu paññattibhedesu antogadhattā tāsu ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ paññattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ niddhāretvā dassento ‘‘evanti cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘eva’’nti ca ‘‘me’’ti ca vuccamānassa atthassa ākārādibhūtassa dhammānaṃ asallakkhaṇabhāvato avijjamānapaññattibhāvoti āha ‘‘saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena avijjamānapaññattī’’ti. Saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasenāti ca bhūtatthauttamatthavasenāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yo māyāmarīciādayo viya abhūtattho, anussavādīhi gahetabbo viya anuttamattho ca na hoti, so rūpasaddādisabhāvo, ruppanānubhavanādisabhāvo vā attho ‘‘saccikaṭṭho, paramattho’’ti ca vuccati, ‘‘evaṃ me’’ti padānaṃ pana attho abhūtattā, anuttamattā ca na tathā vuccati, tasmā bhūtatthauttamatthasaṅkhātena saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasena visesanabhūtena avijjamānapaññattiyevāti. Etena ca visesanena bālajanehi ‘‘atthī’’ti parikappitaṃ paññattimattaṃ nivatteti. Tadevatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karoti, hetunā vā sādheti ‘‘kiñhettha ta’’ntiādinā. Yaṃ dhammajātaṃ, atthajātaṃ vā ‘‘eva’’nti vā ‘‘me’’ti vā niddesaṃ labhetha, taṃ ettha rūpaphassādidhammasamudāye, ‘‘evaṃ me’’ti padānaṃ vā atthe. Paramatthato na atthīti yojanā. Rūpaphassādibhāvena niddiṭṭho paramatthato ettha attheva, ‘‘evaṃ me’’ti pana niddiṭṭho natthīti adhippāyo. Sutanti pana saddāyatanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘vijjamānapaññattī’’ti. ‘‘Saccikaṭṭhaparamatthavasenā’’ti cettha adhikāro. ‘‘Yañhī’’tiādi tappākaṭīkaraṇaṃ, hetudassanaṃ vā. Yaṃ taṃ saddāyatanaṃ sotena sotadvārena, tannissitaviññāṇena vā upaladdhaṃ adhigamitabbanti attho. Tena hi saddāyatanamidha gahitaṃ kammasādhanenāti dasseti.
按照注释书的方法,先把施设的自性确定下来之后,现在再按照注释书之外的方法,在所说的六种施设分类中,为了确定“eva”(如此)等施设的自性,而说了“tathā”(答托)等话。因为“执取施设”等,是古代的注释书之外,由结集者阿阇梨本人所说的。详细内容应当从阿毗达摩注释书中取得。“taṃ tanti”的意思是:那各种各样的法类,对于已到达听闻之道的人,依据他们所执取的法,为了显示他们心中所认定的行相,以确定和指涉的方式,说“如此”;又因为可以依据自己相续所摄的诸蕴而说“我”,所以是这个意思。依据色、受等种种法,依靠它们、以它们为因,而施设,就是“执取施设”,比如“依据各个部件而说车、屋”,“依据各种色、味等而说瓶、布”,“依据月亮太阳的运转等而说时间、方向”等等。这施设是从“应被施设”的意义上称为施设,不是从“施设动作”的意义上。至于那意义的施设行为,那只是“不存在的施设”。所谓“依所见等而安立言说”,就是依据所见、所觉、所识知的事物,加以支撑、加以观待之后而说的意思。因为即使在缺乏所见等自性的声处中,现行的听闻言说,比如“第二、第三”等,也是观待第一等所见、所觉、所识知的事物而起的,所以称为“比较施设”。而这又有许多种类:观待其他的比较施设、手边现有的比较施设、相应法的比较施设、假立的比较施设、不远处的比较施设、类似的比较施设、多分现行的比较施设、最胜的比较施设等等。其中,像“第二、第三”这类,因为是互相观待第一等所见等而说的,所以称为“观待其他的比较施设”。巴利
Evaṃ aṭṭhakathānayena paññattisarūpaṃ niddhāretvā idāni aṭṭhakathāmuttakenāpi nayena vuttesu chasu paññattibhedesu ‘‘eva’’ntiādīnaṃ paññattīnaṃ sarūpaṃ niddhārento ‘‘tathā’’tiādimāha. Upādāpaññatti ādayo hi porāṇaṭṭhakathāto muttā saṅgahakāreneva ācariyena vuttā. Vitthāro abhidhammaṭṭhakathāya gahetabbo. Taṃ tanti taṃ taṃ dhammajātaṃ, sotapathamāgate dhamme upādāya tesaṃ upadhāritākāranidassanāvadhāraṇassa paccāmasanavasena evanti ca sasantatipariyāpanne khandhe upādāya meti ca vattabbattāti attho. Rūpavedanādibhedehi dhamme upādāya nissāya kāraṇaṃ katvā paññatti upādāpaññatti yathā ‘‘tāni tāni aṅgāni upādāya ratho gehaṃ, te te rūparasādayo upādāya ghaṭo paṭo, candimasūriyaparivattādayo upādāya kālo disā’’tiādi. Paññapetabbaṭṭhena cesā paññatti nāma, na paññāpanaṭṭhena. Yā pana tassa atthassa paññāpanā, ayaṃ avijjamānapaññattiyeva. Diṭṭhādīniupanidhāyavattabbatoti diṭṭhamutaviññāte upanidhāya upatthambhaṃ katvā apekkhitvā vattabbattā. Diṭṭhādisabhāvavirahite saddāyatane vattamānopi hi sutavohāro ‘‘dutiyaṃ tatiya’’ntiādiko viya paṭhamādīni diṭṭhamutaviññāte apekkhitvā pavatto ‘‘upanidhāpaññatī’’ti vuccate. Sā panesā anekavidhā tadaññapekkhūpanidhā hatthagatūpanidhā sampayuttūpanidhāsamāropitūpanidhā avidūragatūpanidhā paṭibhāgūpanidhā tabbahulūpanidhātabbisiṭṭhūpanidhā’’tiādinā. Tāsu ayaṃ ‘‘dutiyaṃ tatiya’’ntiādikā viya paṭhamādīnaṃ diṭṭhādīnaṃ aññamaññamapekkhitvā vuttattā tadaññapekkhūpanidhāpaññatti nāma.
像这样,先用施设本身能让人通达意义这一点,说明了应当说明的内容之后,现在要指出应当通过词的力量来阐明的内容,把它确定下来并加以说明,于是说“这里又……”等话。“这里”就是指这三句话。“又”这个词是连接词,因为它是想引出另一个意义的人所用的。说了“听闻”之后,就表明这不是没有听闻,所以这个意思已经说清楚了。因此,长老用“正是”这个词,回指以“听闻”一词所表明的自己亲证之闻的各种样态。这样一来,通过“正是”这个词,就表明了没有迷乱,因此说“以‘正是’这个词,表明没有迷乱”。所谓没有迷乱,就是对如所听闻之经没有迷乱。那一点又由道理和反证来成立,即“因为并非……”等语所将说的经是多种多样的,且难以通达。对于这样多种多样、难以通达的经,迷乱的人怎么能有能力通达多种多样呢?由这个道理,以及这个反证,长老在那里的无迷乱状态这一应当表明的意义就可以被了知,这就是所说的意思。在这样的场合中,应依适当情况理解。因为长老在上文如实显示了从世尊面前听闻的方式,所以说“表明经的不忘失”。所谓“经过一段时间”,是指从听闻之时起经过另一段时间。对于……乃至……他承认,然而长老的犹如投入金盒中的狮子脂膏一样不丢失、不忘失而住立,因此说他就这样承认。那么,由这样表明的意义,究竟说明了什么呢?于是说“因此他的……”等语。其中,“因此他的”即“iti assa”,因此,由于表明了无迷乱和无忘失,所以接着以“长老的慧成就”等语相连接。所谓“以无迷乱”,即以没有迷乱。由与慧不相离的定等法所生起、与彼相应的慧而成就,因为依俱生等力而成就。或者,以与迷乱相对立、名为慧的法所生起。因为由听闻时所产生的慧,其后慧的成就是依亲依止等门而成就的。在其他意义上,也应依适当情况类推。巴利
Evaṃ paññattiyāpi atthādhigamanīyatāsaṅkhātaṃ dassetabbatthaṃ dassetvā idāni saddasāmatthiyena dīpetabbamatthaṃ niddhāretvā dīpento ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Etthāti etasmiṃ vacanattaye. Ca-saddo upanyāso atthantaraṃ ārabhitukāmena yojitattā. ‘‘Suta’’nti vutte asutaṃ na hotīti pakāsitoyamattho, tasmā tathā suta-saddena pakāsitā attanā paṭividdhasuttassa pakāravisesā ‘‘eva’’nti therena paccāmaṭṭhāti tena evaṃ-saddena asammoho dīpito nāma, tenāha ‘‘evanti vacanena asammohaṃ dīpetī’’ti. Asammohanti ca yathāsute sutte asammohaṃ. Tadeva yuttiyā, byatirekena ca samatthehi ‘‘na hī’’tiādinā vakkhamānañca suttaṃ nānappakāraṃ duppaṭividdhañca. Evaṃ nānappakāre duppaṭividdhe sutte kathaṃ sammūḷho nānappakārapaṭivedhasamattho bhavissati. Imāya yuttiyā, iminā ca byatirekena therassa tattha asammūḷhabhāvasaṅkhāto dīpetabbo attho viññāyatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evamīdisesu yathārahaṃ. Bhagavato sammukhā sutākārassa yāthāvato upari therena dassiyamānattā ‘‘suttassa asammosaṃ dīpetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kālantarenāti sutakālato aparena kālena. Yassa…pe… paṭijānāti, therassa pana suvaṇṇabhājane pakkhittasīhavasā viya anassamānaṃ asammuṭṭhaṃ tiṭṭhati, tasmā so evaṃ paṭijānātīti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ dīpitena pana atthena kiṃ pakāsitanti āha ‘‘iccassā’’tiādi. Tattha iccassāti iti assa, tasmā asammohassa, asammosassa ca dīpitattā assa therassapaññāsiddhītiādinā sambandho. Asammohenāti sammohābhāvena. Paññāvajjitasamādhiādidhammajātena taṃsampayuttāya paññāya siddhi sahajātādisattiyā sijjhanato. Sammohapaṭipakkhena vā paññāsaṅkhātena dhammajātena. Savanakālasambhūtāya hi paññāya taduttarikālapaññāsiddhi upanissayādikoṭiyā sijjhanato. Itaratthāpi yathārahaṃ nayo netabbo.
这样,通过已经阐明了的这个意义,又说明了什么呢?所以他说“于彼”等。“于彼”就是指那些难解的法。对文句来说,应当通达的行相并不太深,在那里只要按照所听到的那样记住就够了,因此在那里,念的作用更强,而慧则处于辅助地位,所以说“以慧为前导”等。因为“以慧为前导”这个词的构词解释就是“慧是它的前导”,而这里的前导性就是主导性,就像“诸法以意为前导”等处那样。另外,就像在眼识等当中,转向等虽然在前,但因为不了知那个所缘,所以不是主导;同样,即使在前,如果处于非主导的地位,“此以慧为前导”这个构词解释也能成立。而这里的前导性就是先行的意思。这样,俱生前导和无间前导这两种前导在这里都可能存在。就像这里所说的那样,在“前导”这个词上也应当按可能的情况来理解这个方法。那么,通过这样阐明、具有成就能力的说法,又显示出了什么呢?所以他说“由彼两者具足成就的结合”等。其中,“具足义与文者”是指义与文都圆满的人,或者具足开示等六种义理以及字母等六种文理的人,或者具足名为义与文的滋味而味道美好的人。正是教法本身,因为含藏了九种或十种出世间宝,就像收藏七种或十种宝的库藏一样,所以叫法库,同样叫法藏,在那里任职的人就叫法藏臣。或者,就像守护种种王库的人叫库臣一样,守护法的人叫法藏臣,通过显示其相似的原因,特别称之为“法藏臣”。正如所说的——巴利
Evaṃ pakāsitena pana atthena kiṃ vibhāvitanti āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Tatthāti tesu dubbidhesu dhammesu. Byañjanānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo ākāro nātigambhīro, yathāsutadhāraṇameva tattha karaṇīyaṃ, tasmā tattha satiyā byāpāro adhiko, paññā pana guṇībhūtāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paññāpubbaṅgamāyā’’tiādi. Paññāya pubbaṅgamā paññāpubbaṅgamāti hi nibbacanaṃ, pubbaṅgamatā cettha padhānabhāvo ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 1) viya. Apica yathā cakkhuviññāṇādīsu āvajjanādayo pubbaṅgamā samānāpi tadārammaṇassa avijānanato appadhānabhūtā, evaṃ pubbaṅgamāyapi appadhānatte sati paññāpubbaṅgamā etissāti nibbacanampi yujjati. Pubbaṅgamatā cettha purecāribhāvo. Iti sahajātapubbaṅgamo purejātapubbaṅgamoti duvidhopi pubbaṅgamo idha sambhavati, yathā cettha, evaṃ sati ‘‘pubbaṅgamāyā’’ti etthāpi yathāsambhavamesa nayo veditabbo. Evaṃ vibhāvitena samatthatāvacanena kimanubhāvitanti āha ‘‘tadubhayasamatthatāyogenā’’tiādi. Tattha atthabyañjanasampannassāti atthabyañjanena paripuṇṇassa, saṅkāsanādīhi vā chahi atthapadehi, akkharādīhi ca chahi byañjanapadehi samannāgatassa, atthabyañjanasaṅkhātena vā rasena sādurasassa. Pariyattidhammoyeva navalokuttararatanasannidhānato sattavidhassa, dasavidhassa vā ratanassa sannidhāno koso viyāti dhammakoso, tathā dhammabhaṇḍāgāro, tattha niyuttoti dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko. Atha vā nānārājabhaṇḍarakkhako bhaṇḍāgāriko viyāti bhaṇḍāgāriko, dhammassa anurakkhako bhaṇḍāgārikoti tameva sadisatākāraṇadassanena visesetvā ‘‘dhammabhaṇḍāgāriko’’ti vutto. Yathāha –
他多闻、能持法,在教法中也读诵一切经典;
牟尼啊,名叫阿难者是您的护法者。巴利
‘‘Bahussuto dhammadharo, sabbapāṭhī ca sāsane; Ānando nāma nāmena, dhammārakkho tavaṃ mune’’ti. (apa. 1.542);
它还用另一种方式来说明应当说明的含义,也就是通过“另一种理趣”等说法。这样,对于那些以声音说出的内容,显示其相状并加以确定,因为其对象是不颠倒的正法,所以说以如理作意来阐明是合理的,因此说“如理……阐明”。通过“非如理”等说法,则以反面的方式显示令知的原因。其中,在某些地方出现“hi”这个词,它表示原因,意思是“为什么”。正是通过这句话,由于如理作意的人能够生起种种通达,就像火通过烟这个结果而被了知一样,火作为原因也通过结果被了知,所以这也以义准的方式显示了它的随顺关系。这个道理在一切地方都随应适用。以“贤友,梵网经在哪里所说?”等提问的方式,对于现在将要进入论题、即将说出的经,用“闻”这个词所说的,是指在世尊面前亲闻,如果没有专注就不可能,因此说“阐明无散乱”。通过“心散乱的人”等说法,以反面的原因显示令知的原因之后,又用“确实如此”等说法来证明它。“以一切成就”是指以一切义、文、说法者和利益等成就。这显示了什么呢?所以说“而在这里,以如理作意”等。“在这里”是指在这两种法中。因为以作为原因的心不散乱和善士依止,使作为结果的听闻正法得以成就,所以说其成就;但并没有说以心不散乱使善士依止得以成就。为什么呢?因为心散乱的人不可能亲近善士,这个道理本身就已经成立。巴利
Aññathāpi dīpetabbamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādinā, evaṃ saddena vuccamānānaṃ ākāranidassanāvadhāraṇatthānaṃ aviparītasaddhammavisayattā tabbisayehi tehi atthehi yoniso manasikārassa dīpanaṃ yuttanti vuttaṃ ‘‘yoni…pe… dīpetī’’ti. ‘‘Ayoniso’’tiādinā byatirekena ñāpakahetudassanaṃ. Tattha katthaci hi-saddo dissati, so kāraṇe, kasmāti attho, iminā vacaneneva yoniso manasikaroto nānappakārapaṭivedhasambhavato aggi viya dhūmena kāriyena kāraṇabhūto so viññāyatīti tadanvayampi atthāpattiyā dasseti. Esa nayo sabbattha yathārahaṃ. ‘‘Brahmajālaṃ āvuso kattha bhāsita’’ntiādi pucchāvasena adhunā pakaraṇappattassa vakkhamānassa suttassa ‘‘suta’’nti padena vuccamānaṃ bhagavato sammukhā savanaṃ samādhānamantarena na sambhavatīti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘avikkhepaṃ dīpetī’’ti. ‘‘Vikkhittacittassā’’tiādinā byatirekakāraṇena ñāpakahetuṃ dassetvā tadeva samattheti ‘‘tathā hī’’tiādinā. Sabbasampattiyāti sabbena atthabyañjanadesakapayojanādinā sampattiyā. Kiṃ iminā pakāsitanti āha ‘‘yoniso manasikārena cetthā’’tiādi. Etthāti etasmiṃ dhammadvaye. ‘‘Na hi vikkhittacitto’’tiādinā kāraṇabhūtena avikkhepena, sappurisūpanissayena ca phalabhūtassa saddhammassavanassa siddhiyā eva samatthanaṃ vuttaṃ, avikkhepena pana sappurisūpanissayassa siddhiyā samatthanaṃ na vuttaṃ. Kasmāti ce? Vikkhittacittānaṃ sappurise payirupāsanābhāvassa atthato siddhattā. Atthavaseneva hi so pākaṭoti na vutto.
这里有人问:就像以作为结果的如理作意,能说明作为原因的自正愿和前世所积福德能够成立,因为两者不相离;同样,以作为结果的不散乱,也应该能说明作为原因的听闻正法和亲近善士能够成立,因为如果没有听闻正法的人、没有亲近善士的人,不散乱也就不存在。既然如此,为什么又以“心散乱确实不行”等有说服力的话,说以作为原因的不散乱和亲近善士,能成立作为结果的听闻正法呢?为什么这样说呢?回答说:因为另有意图,所以才那样说其成立。这里的意思是:听闻正法和亲近善士并不绝对是不散乱的原因,因为它们是外在的条件;而不散乱就像亲近善士一样,是听闻正法的绝对原因,因为它是内在的条件。所以,既然绝对的原因已经存在,何必还要对非绝对的原因设想它能产生结果呢?因此就那样说它的成立。在这里,第一是以果来显示因的成立,就像看见河水涨满,就知道上游下过雨;第二是以因来显示果的成立,就像看见必定降雨的云层生起,就知道降雨将会发生。巴利
Etthāha – yathā yoniso manasikārena phalabhūtena attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatānaṃ kāraṇabhūtānaṃ siddhi vuttā tadavinābhāvato, evaṃ avikkhepena phalabhūtena saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayānaṃ kāraṇabhūtānaṃ siddhi vattabbā siyā assutavato, sappurisūpanissayavirahitassa ca tadabhāvato. Evaṃ santepi ‘‘na hi vikkhittacitto’’tiādisamatthanavacanena avikkhepena, sappurisūpanissayena ca kāraṇabhūtena saddhammassavanasseva phalabhūtassa siddhi vuttā, kasmā panevaṃ vuttāti? Vuccate – adhippāyantarasambhavato hi tathā siddhi vuttā. Ayaṃ panetthādhippāyo – saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayā na ekantena avikkhepassa kāraṇaṃ bāhirakāraṇattā, avikkhepo pana sappurisūpanissayo viya saddhammassavanassa ekantakāraṇaṃ ajjhattikakāraṇattā, tasmā ekantakāraṇe honte kimatthiyā anekantakāraṇaṃ pati phalabhāvaparikappanāti tathāyevetassa siddhi vuttāti. Ettha ca paṭhamaṃ phalena kāraṇassa siddhidassanaṃ nadīpūrena viya upari vuṭṭhisabbhāvassa, dutiyaṃ kāraṇena phalassa siddhidassanaṃ ekantavassinā viya meghavuṭṭhānena vuṭṭhipavattiyā.
“另一种方法”等语,是以另一种方式说明应当阐明的义理,连接关系是“因为并非如此”。前面已经说过“如是……乃至……种种因的说明”,而所谓“形态”,是指依随耳门转起的、称为识路的心相续,以种种方式在所缘上活动,从而执取种种义理与文句;这就是依照世尊教法中义理与文句的区分界定,深入整个教法成就的形态。说“如此善妙”,是因为它成为无余利他圆满的因,所以通过如上所说的执取种种义理与文句,是美妙、最胜的;或者这是一个复合词:具有如此善妙者。非所愿者为无愿,正确地无愿,以这样的自我,便是如此;属于那样的。后二轮成就,是指称为自我正愿与宿世所修福德的两种功德成就。因为功德本身前后相续运转,以运转之义而称为轮。或者,众生以此行于成就之有,或处于成就之有中,所以称为轮。关于此,经中说:“诸比丘,有此四轮,具备这些的天与人,四轮得以运转”等。这里说“后”,只是依照说法次第而已。前二轮成就,是指称为适宜地居住与亲近善士的两种功德成就。其余如前所说。因此,前因就是前者的因,这里用“并非”等语说明其理由。巴利
‘‘Aparo nayo’’tiādinā aññathāpi dīpetabbatthamāha, yasmā na hotīti sambandho. Evanti…pe… nānākāraniddesoti heṭṭhā vuttaṃ, so ca ākāroti sotadvārānusāraviññāṇavīthisaṅkhātassa cittasantānassa nānākārena ārammaṇe pavattiyā nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇasaṅkhāto so bhagavato vacanassa atthabyañjanappabhedaparicchedavasena sakalasāsanasampattiogāhanākāro. Evaṃ bhaddakoti niravasesaparahitapāripūribhāvakāraṇattā evaṃ yathāvuttena nānatthabyañjanaggahaṇena sundaro seṭṭho, samāsapadaṃ vā etaṃ evaṃ īdiso bhaddo yassāti katvā. Na paṇihito appaṇihito, sammā appaṇi hito attā yassāti tathā, tassa. Pacchimacakkadvayasampattinti attasammāpaṇidhipubbekatapuññatāsaṅkhātaguṇadvayasampattiṃ. Guṇasseva hi aparāparavuttiyā pavattanaṭṭhena cakkabhāvo. Caranti vā etena sattā sampattibhavaṃ, sampattibhavesūti vā cakkaṃ. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamanussānaṃ catucakkaṃ vattatī’’tiādi (a. ni. 4.31) pacchimabhāvo cettha desanākkamavaseneva. Purimacakkadvayasampattinti patirūpadesavāsasappurisūpanissayasaṅkhātaguṇadvayasampattiṃ. Sesaṃ vuttanayameva. Tasmāti purimakāraṇaṃ purimassevāti idha kāraṇamāha ‘‘na hī’’tiādinā.
世尊为了说明什么而说了“如此,这位……”等话呢?这里说:是以这四轮的成就作为原因的。这位长老的。也就是以后二轮的成立,即以后二轮的存在而成立。意乐清净:就是由称为观智的随顺忍,以及称为业自作智和道智的如实智,这两种意乐,因为远离了成为不清净之因的烦恼而清净。因为那两种正是依止于还灭的清净有情的意乐。因为正愿者和宿世修福者,具有清净的意乐。正如所说:“善加引导的心,由此能使其更胜”(法句经43),“阿难,你已修福,精勤努力吧,你将迅速成为无漏者”(长部2.207)。不过有些人说:“想要做的欲求就是意乐”,那并不合理,因为与“以彼意乐清净而成就证悟的善巧”这句话相违。若如此,称为道智的意乐清净,也不应说以彼成就证悟的善巧吗?这并非不合理,因为前道是后道与果的因。加行清净:就是以如理作意为先导的闻法加行,以明净为清净;或者一切身语加行,以无过失为清净。因为住在适宜地的人与亲近善士的人,具有如上所说的清净加行。以如此清净的、如理作意为先导的闻法加行,以及能带来无悔的身语加行,心不散乱,在教法学习上成为敏锐者,而长老正是如此。由此可知,长老以前二轮的成立,加行清净已经成立。世尊为了说明什么而说了“以彼……”等话呢?成就证悟的善巧:就是在称为通达的证悟上,成就善巧。因为在注释书中,从应证得、应通达的角度,把通达称为“证悟”;也称为“教法”,因为通过它,自己和他人的利益等得以到来,或者因为应彻底了知、应完全知道。巴利
Tena kiṃ pakāsitanti āha ‘‘iccassā’’tiādi. Iti imāya catucakkasampattiyā kāraṇabhūtāya. Assa therassa. Pacchimacakkadvayasiddhiyāti pacchimacakkadvayassa atthibhāvena siddhiyā . Āsayasuddhīti vipassanāñāṇasaṅkhātāya anulomikakhantiyā, kammassakatāñāṇa-maggañāṇasaṅkhātassa yathābhūtañāṇassa cāti duvidhassāpi āsayassa asuddhihetubhūtānaṃ kilesānaṃ dūrībhāvena suddhi. Tadeva hi dvayaṃ vivaṭṭanissitānaṃ suddhasattānaṃ āsayo. Sammāpaṇihitatto hi pubbe ca katapuñño suddhāsayo hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sammāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, seyyaso naṃ tato kare’’ti, (dha. pa. 43) ‘‘katapuññosi tvaṃ ānanda, padhānamanuyuñja khippaṃ hohisi anāsavo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.207) ca. Keci pana ‘‘kattukamyatāchando āsayo’’ti vadanti, tadayuttameva ‘‘tāya ca āsayasuddhiyā adhigamabyattisiddhī’’ti vacanena virodhato. Evampi maggañāṇasaṅkhātassa āsayassa suddhi na yuttā tāya adhigamabyattisiddhiyā avattabbatoti? No na yutto purimassa maggassa, pacchimānaṃ maggānaṃ, phalānañca kāraṇabhāvato. Payogasuddhīti yonisomanasikārapubbaṅgamassa dhammassavanapayogassa visadabhāvena suddhi, sabbassa vā kāyavacīpayogassa niddosabhāvena suddhi. Patirūpadesavāsī, hi sappurisasevī ca yathāvuttavisuddhapayogo hoti. Tathāvisuddhena yonisomanasikārapubbaṅgamena dhammassavanapayogena, vippaṭisārābhāvāvahena ca kāyavacīpayogena avikkhittacitto pariyattiyaṃ visārado hoti, tathābhūto ca thero, tena viññāyati purimacakkadvayasiddhiyā therassa payogasuddhi siddhāvāti. Tena kiṃ vibhāvitanti āha ‘‘tāya cā’’tiādi. Adhigamabyattisiddhīti paṭivedhasaṅkhāte adhigame chekabhāvasiddhi. Adhigametabbato hi paṭivijjhitabbato paṭivedho ‘‘adhigamo’’ti aṭṭhakathāsu vutto, āgamoti ca pariyatti āgacchanti attatthaparatthādayo etena, ābhuso vā gamitabbo ñātabboti katvā.
“由此,他随顺修习了什么?”为了回答这个,说了“如此……”等话。“如此”是指按照上面所说的方式;或者,因为已经成就,所以这是对原因的说明。“言说”是指缘起的言说。为了借助世间和法上都能成立的譬喻让人明白这个意思,说了“犹如曙光升起……”等话。因为确实有经中说:“在这里,有些智者通过譬喻了知意义。”(本生经2.19.24)
“曙光”是指太阳升起之前出现的霞光;它的“升起”就是上升;意思是说,它应当像太阳升起、正在升起、已经升起时的先导和前驱一样。这里要表达的是:对于这样一位在教法通达和证悟善巧上具足的长老来说,所说的缘起言说,应当成为世尊言教的先导,也就是已经成为缘起的状态——这个意义已经被随顺阐明了。巴利
Tena kimanubhāvitanti āha ‘‘itī’’tiādi. Itīti evaṃ vuttanayena, tasmā siddhattāti vā kāraṇaniddeso. Vacananti nidānavacanaṃ lokato, dhammato ca siddhāya upamāya tamatthaṃ ñāpetuṃ ‘‘aruṇuggaṃ viyā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Upamāya midhekacce, atthaṃ jānanti paṇḍitā’’ti (jā. 2.19.24) hi vuttaṃ. Aruṇoti sūriyassa udayato pubbabhāge uṭṭhitaraṃsi, tassa uggaṃ uggamanaṃ udayato udayantassa udayāvāsamuggacchato sūriyassa pubbaṅgamaṃ purecaraṃ bhavituṃ arahati viyāti sambandho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – āgamādhigamabyattiyā īdisassa therassa vuttanidānavacanaṃ bhagavato vacanassa pubbaṅgamaṃ bhavitumarahati, nidānabhāvaṃ gataṃ hotīti idamatthajātaṃ anubhāvitanti.
现在,为了进一步说明前面所说的、名为“不迷惑与不忘失”的应当阐明之义,用“如是”和“所闻”这两个词作为它的阐明者来显示这个应当阐明的义理,所以说“另一种方法”等等。其中,通过“以阐明种种通达者、以阐明所闻差别通达者”这些语句,说明了前面已经阐明的、名为“不迷惑与不忘失”的应当阐明之义——因为由不迷惑而成就种种通达,由不忘失而成就所闻差别的通达。而通过“自己的”等词,则说明了应当显示之义。因此,阿阇梨法护长老说:“‘以阐明种种通达者’等,由于‘如是’和‘所闻’二词对长老在义与文上显示了不迷惑与不忘失,所以依四无碍解来展示义的联结。”这一组词含有原因之义,也就是说:它们正是名为种种通达和所闻差别通达的应当阐明之义的阐明者。存在的状态就是有,依义无碍解和辩无碍解成就而有的状态也是如此。“生起”也是一种异读,生起的状态就是生起,义无碍解和辩无碍解成就的生起也是如此。其余之义也是这样。而通过“以阐明所闻差别通达者”,则显示这个“所闻”一词因为与“如是”一词相邻,或者由于期待下文,虽然是一般性地说出,实际上是指所闻之法。在此,对于名为所闻之法的巴利,应当举例说明的所说之义与用途,以及在三种智中运作的智由于具有种种差别,所以以阐明其状态通达的“如是”一词来说明义无碍解和辩无碍解成就的存在,是恰当的;然而,由于所闻之法是得义之因,以彼之力而其余一切因的差别也被含摄,又由于是词源之状态,所以以阐明所闻差别的“所闻”一词来说明法无碍解和词无碍解成就的存在,应当知道是恰当的。为了使人知道这个同样的义理,没有说“以阐明不迷惑者、以阐明不忘失者”,而是那样说的。巴利
Idāni aparampi pubbe vuttassa asammohāsammosasaṅkhātassa dīpetabbassatthassa dīpakehi evaṃ-sadda suta-saddehi pakāsetabbamatthaṃ pakāsento ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādimāha. Tattha hi ‘‘nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakena , sotabbappabhedapaṭivedhadīpakenā’’ti ca iminā tehi saddehi pubbe dīpitaṃ asammohāsammosasaṅkhātaṃ dīpetabbatthamāha asammohena nānappakārapaṭivedhassa, asammosena ca sotabbappabhedapaṭivedhassa sijjhanato. ‘‘Attano’’tiādīhi pana pakāsetabbatthaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherena ‘‘nānappakārapaṭivedhadīpakenātiādinā evaṃ-sadda suta-saddānaṃ therassa atthabyañjanesu asammohāsammosadīpanato catupaṭisambhidāvasena atthayojanaṃ dassetī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.1). Hetugabbhañcetaṃ padadvayaṃ, nānappakārapaṭivedhasaṅkhātassa, sotabbappabheda-paṭivedhasaṅkhātassa ca dīpetabbatthassa dīpakattāti vuttaṃ hoti. Santassa vijjamānassa bhāvo sabbhāvo, atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāhi sampattiyā sabbhāvo tathā. ‘‘Sambhava’’ntipi pāṭho, sambhavanaṃ sambhavo, atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattīnaṃ sambhavo tathā. Evaṃ itaratthāpi. ‘‘Sotabbappabhedapaṭivedhadīpakenā’’ti etena pana ayaṃ suta-saddo evaṃ-saddasannidhānato, vakkhamānāpekkhāya vā sāmaññeneva vuttepi sotabbadhammavisesaṃ āmasatīti dasseti. Ettha ca sotabbadhammasaṅkhātāya pāḷiyā nidassetabbānaṃ bhāsitatthapayojanatthānaṃ, tīsu ca ñāṇesu pavattañāṇassa nānappakārabhāvato tabbhāvapaṭivedhadīpakena evaṃ-saddena atthapaṭibhānapaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvadīpanaṃ yuttaṃ, sotabbadhammassa pana atthādhigamahetuto, taṃvasena ca tadavasesahetuppabhedassa gahitattā, niruttibhāvato ca sotabbappabhedadīpakena suta-saddena dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattisabbhāvadīpanaṃ yuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tadevatthañhi ñāpetuṃ ‘‘asammohadīpakena, asammosadīpakenā’’ti ca avatvā tathā vuttanti.
前面已经用“如此”和“所闻”这两个词,把名为“不迷惑与不忘失”的应阐明之义显示出来了;现在又用同样的两个词,来显示名为“如理作意与不散乱”的应阐明之义,所以说“而‘如此’……”等话。其中,通过“‘如此’……说者,‘所闻’这个……说者”这些话,说明了前面已经阐明的、名为“如理作意与不散乱”的应阐明之义;而通过“这些为我……”等话,则说明这个义理就是听闻结合的阐明者,因为不散乱才能成就听闻结合,所以针对这一点而说。正如阿阇梨法护长老所说:“听闻、受持、语随行,对于教法,特别系属于耳的专注与确定,所以把它们和以不散乱为阐明者的‘所闻’一词联结起来。”对于教法,以意和见来审察、善通达,特别系属于作意,因此正是通过阐明这一点的话语,显示“这些法为我以意审察、以见善通达”这个义理,所以说“‘如此’……显示”。其中,“法”指教法。“以意审察”指以意这样审察:“这里说戒,这里说定,这里说慧,这里只有这些连结”等等。“以见善通达”指以名为审察忍或名为知遍知的见,对那里所说的色法与无色法,以“这是色,色有这么多”等方式善加确定而通达。巴利
Evaṃ asammohāsammosasaṅkhātassa dīpetabbassatthassa dīpakehi evaṃ-sadda suta-saddehi pakāsetabbamatthaṃ pakāsetvā idāni yonisomanasikārāvikkhepasaṅkhātassa dīpetabbassatthassa dīpakehipi tehi pakāsetabbamatthaṃ pakāsento ‘‘evanti cā’’tiādimāha. Tattha hi ‘‘evanti…pe… bhāsamāno, sutanti idaṃ…pe… bhāsamāno’’ti ca iminā tehi saddehi pubbe dīpitaṃ yonisomanasikārāvikkhepasaṅkhātaṃ dīpetabbatthamāha, ‘‘ete mayā’’tiādīhi pana pakāsetabbatthaṃ savanayogadīpakanti ca avikkhepavasena savanayogassa sijjhanato tadeva sandhāyāha . Tathā hi ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘savanadhāraṇavacīparicariyā pariyattidhammānaṃ visesena sotāvadhāraṇapaṭibaddhāti te avikkhepadīpakena sutasaddena yojetvā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.1). Manodiṭṭhīhi pariyattidhammānaṃ anupekkhanasuppaṭivedhā visesato manasikārapaṭibaddhā, tasmā taddīpakavacaneneva ete mayā dhammā manasānupekkhitā diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti imamatthaṃ pakāsetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘evanti ca…pe… dīpetī’’ti tattha dhammāti pariyattidhammā. Manasānupekkhitāti ‘‘idha sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, idha samādhi, idha paññā, ettakāva ettha anusandhayo’’tiādibhedena manasā anupekkhitā. Diṭṭhiyā suppaṭividdhāti nijjhānakkhantisaṅkhātāya, ñātapariññāsaṅkhātāya vā diṭṭhiyā tattha vuttarūpārūpadhamme ‘‘iti rūpaṃ, ettakaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā suṭṭhu vavatthāpetvā paṭividdhā.
听闻、受持、以语修习这三者,对于教法来说,尤其是与耳闻专注相关联的。因此,正是通过阐明这一点的语句,显示了“许多法是我所听闻、所受持、以语所修习”这个含义,所以说“所闻……显示”。其中,“所闻”是指通过耳门而了知。“受持”是指像把狮子肉放进金器里一样,通过使心善加安住而牢牢把握。“以语所修习”是指通过达到熟练而以言语修习、讽诵。现在,为了阐明应以如前所说的两个词——即在前一方法与后一方法中,作为如前所说应阐明之义的阐明者的那两种词——来显明应阐明之义,说了“以彼二者”等。其中,“以彼二者”是指在前一方法与后一方法中,以如前所说应阐明之义的阐明者的那两种词。“显示义与文的圆满”是为了引发恭敬而说的原因语。那同一个原因,通过反面来阐明,或者以道理来坚固它,即“义与文圆满故”等。这里,“不闻”中的“闻”字,是在相或原因的意义上(即“不闻”可理解为“不见”或“因不闻”)。"大利益"是指从大利益而来。"外部"是指从一切方面都在外。巴利
Savanadhāraṇavacīparicariyā ca pariyattidhammānaṃ visesena sotāvadhāraṇapaṭibaddhā, tasmā taddīpakavacaneneva bahū mayā dhammā sutā dhātā vacasā paricitāti imamatthaṃ pakāsetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sutanti idaṃ…pe… dīpetī’’ti. Tattha sutāti sotadvārānusārena viññātā. Dhātāti suvaṇṇabhājane pakkhittasīhavasā viya manasi suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanena upadhāritā. Vacasā paricitāti paguṇatāsampādanena vācāya paricitā sajjhāyitā. Idāni pakāsetabbatthadvayadīpakena yathāvuttasaddadvayena vibhāvetabbamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘tadubhayenapī’’tiādimāha. Tattha tadubhayenāti purimanaye, pacchimanaye ca yathāvuttassa pakāsetabbassatthassa pakāsakena tena dubbidhena saddena. Atthabyañjanapāripūriṃ dīpentoti ādarajananassa kāraṇavacanaṃ. Tadeva kāraṇaṃ byatirekena vivarati, yuttiyā vā daḷhaṃ karoti ‘‘atthabyañjanaparipuṇṇañhī’’tiādinā. Asuṇantoti cettha lakkhaṇe, hetumhi vā anta-saddo. Mahatā hitāti mahantato hitasmā. Paribāhiroti sabbato bhāgena bāhiro.
用这个能说明应当说明之义的双词,来彰显应当彰显之义,于是说“如是我闻”等这样的话。先前这些词是各自分别连接不同意义的,这里则是为了表明它们共同作为同一个应彰显之义的彰显者,所以说了“以总括的方式”。诚然,这里的“我”这个词是与前面相连的,但应当看到:由于依赖它的“如此”和“闻”这两个词与它相伴、不相分离,所以才那样说。“如来所宣说”,就是如来以种种方式所了知或所说的。“不据为己有”,就是在自己身上不确立“这是我的”。“非善士地”,就是非善士的境界;从意义上说,这就是世尊以大盗为比喻所说的、名为“不知恩”的非圣者言说之处,正如说“这里有个恶比丘,学得如来所宣说的法与律之后,据为己有”。这里“成为”是省略了而应补上的剩余词。“如此自称是弟子”,就是宣说进入善士地之相。难道不是这样吗:阿难长老并没有“这是我的话”这种增上慢,大迦叶长老等人当时也没有那样的疑虑,那么“超越非善士地”等说法岂非没有意义?并非如此。因为说“如是我闻”的人也彰显了这个意义,所以只是在显示这个意义而已;因为他正是这样显示那应彰显之义,而并不是说阿难长老有增上慢、大迦叶长老等人当时有疑虑——在这里应当得出这个结论。不过有些人说:“这样说是着眼于诸天的思量,所以这样的责难没有立足之地。”据说当时有些天人心里生起了这样的思量:“世尊已经般涅槃了,而这位阿难尊者善于说法,现在正在说法;他出身释迦族,是如来的弟弟、叔父之子——他到底是在宣说自己所证得的法,还是如其所闻地在宣说世尊的话呢?”为了知道这些天人心里的思量并消除它,才彰显了“超越非善士地”等意义。那如前所说、名为“非圣者言说之处”的,就是非正法;而进入它的对治位、名为“自称弟子”的,就是正法。既然如此,就应当知道这是以另一种方式显示前面的意义。再者,以诈现威仪、虚谈等而现起的不善聚,是非正法;远离这些,就是正法。用“纯全”等词,也是以另一种方式显示已经说过的意义,使它从如前所说的非圣者言说之处解脱出来。“以自称是弟子来指示大师”,就是这个意思。再者,他使自己从“作大师等行为”中解脱出来,因为可能有人怀疑他有这些行为。“正是大师、世尊的话被我听到了”——这样以大师为指示,就是彰显另一个意义。“胜者之语”等,也是显示另一种方式,或者正是彰显另一个意义。“令入”就是指示。在现法义、后世义和胜义中如其所应地引导众生,就是“导”;法本身就是这样的“导”。按照前面所说的方式,应当知道这里两种意义都是注释者的意趣。巴利
Etena pana vibhāvetabbatthadīpakena saddadvayena anubhāvetabbatthamanubhāvento ‘‘evaṃ me sutanti iminā’’tiādimāha. Pubbe visuṃ visuṃ atthe yojitāyeva ete saddā idha ekassevānubhāvatthassa anubhāvakabhāvena gahitāti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘sakalenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmañca me-saddo imasmiṃ ṭhāne pubbena yojito, tadapekkhānaṃ pana evaṃ-sadda suta-saddānaṃ sahacaraṇato, avinābhāvato ca tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathāgatappaveditanti tathāgatena pakārato viditaṃ, bhāsitaṃ vā. Attano adahantoti attani ‘‘mameda’’nti aṭṭhapento. Bhummatthe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Asappurisabhūminti asappurisavisayaṃ, so ca atthato apakataññutāsaṅkhātā ‘‘idhekacco pāpabhikkhu tathāgatappaveditaṃ dhammavinayaṃ pariyāpuṇitvā attano dahatī’’ti (pārā. 195) evaṃ mahācoradīpakena bhagavatā vuttā anariyavohārāvatthā, tathā cāha ‘‘tathāgata…pe… adahanto’’ti. Hutvāti cettha seso. Tathā sāvakattaṃ paṭijānantoti sappurisabhūmiokkamanasarūpakathanaṃ. Nanu ca ānandattherassa ‘‘mametaṃ vacana’’nti adhimānassa, mahākassapattherādīnañca tadāsaṅkāya abhāvato asappurisabhūmisamatikkamādivacanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyāti? Nayidamevaṃ ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vadantena ayampi attho anubhāvitoti atthasseva dassanato. Tena hi anubhāvetabbamatthaṃyeva tathā dasseti, na pana ānandattherassa adhimānassa, mahākassapattherādīnañca tadāsaṅkāya sambhavanti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘devatānaṃ parivitakkāpekkhaṃ tathāvacanaṃ, tasmā edisī codanā anavakāsā’’ti vadanti. Tasmiṃ kira samaye ekaccānaṃ devatānaṃ evaṃ cetaso parivitakko udapādi ‘‘bhagavā ca parinibbuto, ayañcāyasmā ānando desanākusalo, idāni dhammaṃ deseti, sakyakulappasuto tathāgatassa bhātā, cūḷapituputto ca, kiṃ nu kho so sayaṃ sacchikataṃ dhammaṃ deseti, udāhu bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ yathāsuta’’nti, tesameva cetoparivitakkamaññāya tadabhipariharaṇatthaṃ asappurisabhūmisamatikkamanādiattho anubhāvitoti. Sāyeva yathāvuttā anariyavohārāvatthā asaddhammo, tadavatthānokkamanasaṅkhātā ca sāvakattapaṭijānanā saddhammo. Evaṃ sati pariyāyantarena purimatthameva dassetīti gahetabbaṃ. Apica kuhanalapanādivasena pavatto akusalarāsi asaddhammo, tabbirahitabhāvo ca saddhammo.‘‘Kevala’’ntiādināpi vuttassevatthassa pariyāyantarena dassanaṃ, yathāvuttāya anariyavohārāvatthāya parimoceti. Sāvakattaṃ paṭijānanena satthāraṃ apadisatīti attho. Apica satthukappādikiriyato attānaṃ parimoceti takkiriyāsaṅkāya sambhavato. ‘‘Satthu bhagavatoyeva vacanaṃ mayāsuta’’nti satthāraṃ apadisatīti atthantaramanubhāvanaṃ hoti. ‘‘Jinavacana’’ntiādipi pariyāyantaradassanaṃ, atthantaramanubhāvanameva vā. Appetīti nidasseti. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthesu yathārahaṃ satte netīti netti, dhammoyeva netti tathā. Vuttanayena cettha ubhayathā adhippāyo veditabbo.
另外,他又用“或者说”等说法,来阐明另一项应当阐明之义。其中,“所生起的状态”,是指依说法而显现的状态。“开显前说”,是指把世尊先前所说、早已存在的世尊言教,使其变得清楚明白;这就是“此言”与前述内容的关联。具足四无畏智而无所畏惧,或者说,具足作为无畏之因的四无畏智。成就十力者。安住于被称为正等觉的最上位,或者说,安住于像牛王一样不可动摇、被称为“牛王位”的境地。正如《狮吼喻经》等经中所说:“诸比丘,就像这样,当如来出现于世间……他宣说法……”以种种方式作狮子吼者。在一切众生中,或者说是一切众生中最上者。这里并没有“简择”的特征,所以不是依简择而构成复合词。因为在一切梵文典籍和佛教典籍中,都是这样说的。以法为众生之主者。也有人说法本身就是主,因为它能令法生起。其余两个词,是对这同一含义从不同角度加以说明。以法为世间之灯者,是说他具有以法为灯的光明;或者说,由于他能令法生起,所以具足以法为灯。因为经中说:“诸比丘,如来之法身,这就是如来的同义语。”以法为世间之皈依者,是说他具有以法为皈依的安稳;或者说,具足以法为皈依。因为经中说:“我何不……敬重、尊重、恭敬、供养此法,依止而住。”应当这样连接理解:转动信根等名为正法的胜轮者,或者说转动正法教令之胜轮者,就是那位正自觉的世尊;他这句话,是我当面领受的。“文句”,是指由词组合而成的语句。疑或犹豫:这里,更坚固地安住着的怀疑是“疑”;不过度流转、只是见解分歧的程度是“犹豫”。“这是我当面领受的”,这是说明不应像那样做的原因。而不承认是自己所生起的状态、开显前说,则是为了摧毁无信、生起具足信心的原因。以“因此”等文句,用偈颂的方式显示如前所说的含义。巴利
Aparampi anubhāvetabbamatthamanubhāveti ‘‘apicā’’tiādinā. Tattha uppāditabhāvatanti desanāvasena pavattitabhāvaṃ. Purimavacanaṃ vivarantoti bhagavatā desitavasena purimataraṃ saṃvijjamānaṃ bhagavatā vacanameva uttāniṃ karonto, idaṃ vacananti sambandho. Catūhi vesārajjañāṇehi visāradassa, visāradahetubhūtacatuvesārajjañāṇasampannassa vā. Dasañāṇabaladharassa. Sammāsambuddhabhāvasaṅkhāte uttamaṭṭhāne ṭhitassa, usabhassa idanti vā atthena āsabhasaṅkhāte akampanasabhāvabhūte ṭhāne ṭhitassa. ‘‘Evameva kho bhikkhave, yadā tathāgato loke uppajjati…pe… so dhammaṃ desetī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 4.33) sīhopamasuttādīsu āgatena anekanayena sīhanādanadino. Sabbasattesu, sabbasattānaṃ vā uttamassa. Na cettha niddhāraṇalakkhaṇābhāvato niddhāraṇavasena samāso. Sabbattha hi sakkataganthesu, sāsanaganthesu ca evameva vuttaṃ. Dhammena sattānamissarassa. Dhammasseva issarassa taduppādanavasenātipi vadanti. Sesapadadvayaṃ tassevatthassa pariyāyantaradīpanaṃ. Dhammena lokassa padīpamiva bhūtassa, taduppādakabhāvena vā dhammasaṅkhātapadīpasampannassa. ‘‘Dhammakāyoti bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti (dī. ni. 3.118) hi vuttaṃ. Dhammena lokapaṭisaraṇabhūtassa, dhammasaṅkhātena vā paṭisaraṇena sampannassa. ‘‘Yaṃnūnāhaṃ…pe… tameva dhammaṃ sakkatvā garuṃ katvā mānetvā pūjetvā upanissāya vihareyya’’nti (a. ni. 4.21; saṃ. ni. 1.173) hi vuttaṃ. Saddhindriyādisaddhammasaṅkhātassa varacakkassa pavattino, saddhammānametassa vā āṇācakkavarassa pavattino sammāsambuddhassa tassa bhagavato idaṃ vacanaṃ sammukhāva mayā paṭiggahitanti yojetabbaṃ. Byañjaneti padasamudāyabhūte vākye. Kaṅkhā vā vimati vāti ettha daḷhataraṃ niviṭṭhā vicikicchā kaṅkhā. Nātisaṃsappanaṃ matibhedamattaṃ vimati. Sammukhā paṭiggahitamidaṃ mayāti tathā akattabbabhāvakāraṇavacanaṃ. Attanāuppāditabhāvaṃ appaṭijānanto purimavacanaṃ vivarantoti pana assaddhiyavināsanassa, saddhāsampadamuppādanassa ca kāraṇavacanaṃ. ‘‘Teneta’’ntiādinā yathāvuttamevatthaṃ udānavasena dasseti.
有人这样念“如是我闻”的时候,他是在说:这话是世尊亲口说的,是我当面听来的。说这话的人,是乔达摩世系的正等觉者的弟子,或者说是与乔达摩世系有关系的弟子——具寿阿难。正因为这样表明,就自然成立了他没有听错、没有听漏、没有把话说错等过失;这样一来,他在教法里就能摧毁不信、增长信心,这就是这句话的意思。这里应当知道:从第五种开始的三种释义,是取“如是”一词在形态等含义中尚未区分出来的共同义来说明的;再往后的三种,是取“如是”一词的形态义来说明的;最后三种,则是依次取“如是”一词的形态义、举例义、限定义来解说的。此外还有——巴利
‘‘Evaṃ me suta’’nti evaṃ vadanto gotamagottassa sammāsambuddhassa sāvako, gotamagottasambandho vā sāvako āyasmā ānando bhagavatā bhāsitabhāvassa, sammukhā paṭiggahitabhāvassa ca sūcanato, tathāsūcaneneva ca khalitadunniruttādigahaṇadosābhāvassa sijjhanato sāsane assaddhaṃ vināsayati, saddhaṃ vaḍḍhetīti attho. Ettha ca pañcamādayo tisso atthayojanā ākārādiatthesu aggahitavisesameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā dassitā, tato parā tisso ākāratthameva evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā vibhāvitā, pacchimā pana tisso yathākkamaṃ ākāratthaṃ, nidassanatthaṃ, avadhāraṇatthañca evaṃ-saddaṃ gahetvā yojitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Honti cettha –
看见、照亮、显明、辨明,
通过作用的方式,体验之义共有五种。
通过代代相传而开示,凭借多种含义的运用而成立。
在这里,“如是我闻”这一句,通达理趣的人依照三个词来解释。巴利
‘‘Dassanaṃ dīpanañcāpi, pakāsanaṃ vibhāvanaṃ; Anubhāvanamiccattho, kiriyāyogena pañcadhā. Dassito paramparāya, siddho nekatthavuttiyā; Evaṃ me sutamiccettha, padattaye nayaññunā’’ti.
不过,“一”这个词也出现在“其他”“最胜”“无伴”“数目”等含义中。比如,在“我与世间都是恒常的,只有这是真实的,其余都是虚妄——有些人这样宣称”这类句子中,它表示“其他”的意思;在“心一境性”这类说法中,它表示“最胜”;在“独自远离”这类说法中,它表示“无伴”;在“诸比丘,只有一个刹那、一个时节适合修梵行”这类说法中,它表示“数目”。在这里,它同样是“数目”的意思。为了说明这一点,论师说:“‘一’是对数目的限定说明。”意思是:只有这一个时节,不是两个也不是三个,以不多不少的方式对数目作出限定说明,这就是“一”这个词的含义。因此,当有人追问“限定的是什么”时,就说出“时节”来表明,所以说:“‘时节’是被限定的说明。”虽然这样按“限定”和“被限定”的关系来说,但因为并没有从自身性质上确定“这就叫做时节”,所以这是不确定的说法。为了说明这一点,论师用“一时……阐明”这句话来显示。巴利
Eka-saddo pana aññaseṭṭhāsahāyasaṅkhyādīsu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27) aññatthe dissati, ‘‘cetaso ekodibhāva’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.228; pārā. 11) seṭṭhe, ‘‘ekovūpakaṭṭho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.405; dī. ni. 2.215; ma. ni. 1.80; saṃ. ni. 3.63; vibha. 4.445) asahāye, ‘‘ekova kho bhikkhave, khaṇo ca samayo ca brahmacariyavāsāyā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 8.29) saṅkhyāyaṃ, idhāpi saṅkhyāyamevāti dassento āha ‘‘ekanti gaṇanaparicchedaniddeso’’ti (itivu. aṭṭha. 1; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paribbājakakathāvaṇṇanā) ekoyevesa samayo, na dve vā tayo vāti ūnādhikābhāvena gaṇanassa paricchedaniddeso ekanti ayaṃ saddoti attho, tena kassa paricchindananti anuyoge sati ‘‘samaya’’nti vuttanti dassento āha ‘‘samayanti paricchinnaniddeso’’ti. Evaṃ paricchedaparicchinnavasena vuttepi ‘‘ayaṃ nāma samayo’’ti sarūpato aniyamitattā aniyamitavacanamevāti dasseti ‘‘ekaṃ…pe…. dīpana’’nti iminā.
现在,为了说明“时”这个词有多种含义,就按提取含义的方式把它们展示出来,然后确定这里所要表达的意思,所以说“其中”等话。所谓“其中”,就是在“一时”这两个词当中,与“时”这个词紧密相连——这是它们之间的语义关系。然而它并不显现,是因为在这里它只依其中一种含义而出现。所谓“聚合”,是指诸缘的聚合,意思是因缘的会合。所谓“刹那”,是指机会。所谓“因、见”,是指因和执见。所谓“此”,是指“时”这个词的。所谓“关于时与时”:这里,“时”是指前往的适当时机;“时”则是指这件事的诸缘聚合,从意义上说,就是与那件事相应的身体力量,以及那件事的缘没有其他障碍。所谓“取”,是指以智慧把握它们,因此意思是:如所说的那样,以智慧把握并审察时与时。这里说的是:如果我们明天有适合前往的时机,身体也有足够的力量,而且前往的因缘没有其他不适,那么就审察这个时机以及被称为前往因缘聚合的时之后,也许明天也能来。“刹那”就是机会。诸如来出世等,就是修道与梵行的机会,因为那是获得彼缘的原因。刹那就是时。所谓“刹那”和“时”,意思就是同一个。夏季剩下一个半月是炎热时节,雨季后第一个月是酷热时节。“大时节”,就是大集会。这或者是合说,或者是分说。下过雨的树林叫“雨林”,这里是指迦毗罗卫城附近名为大林的树林。所谓“时也是”,这里“时”是补足学处的原因。跋陀利,是那位比丘的名字。这里说的是:跋陀利,有一个你应当通达的原因,而那个你也没有通达、没有观察。那是什么原因呢?所以说“世尊也”等话。巴利
Idāni samayasaddassa anekatthavuttitaṃ atthuddhāravasena dassetvā idhādhippetamatthaṃ niyamento ‘‘tatthā’’tiādimāha. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti padadvaye, samabhiniviṭṭho samaya saddoti sambandho. Na pana dissatīti tesvekasmiṃyeva atthe idha pavattanato. Samavāyeti paccayasāmaggiyaṃ, kāraṇasamavāyeti attho. Khaṇeti okāse. Hetudiṭṭhīsūti hetumhi ceva laddhiyañca. Assāti samayasaddassa. Kālañca samayañca upādāyāti ettha kālo nāma upasaṅkamanassa yuttakālo. Samayo nāma tasseva paccayasāmaggī, atthato pana tadanurūpasarīrabalañceva tappaccayaparissayābhāvo ca. Upādānaṃ nāma ñāṇena tesaṃ gahaṇaṃ, tasmā yathāvuttaṃ kālañca samayañca paññāya gahetvā upadhāretvāti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace amhākaṃ sve gamanassa yuttakālo bhavissati, kāye balamattā ca pharissati, gamanapaccayā ca añño aphāsuvihāro na bhavissati, athetaṃ kālañca gamanakāraṇasamavāyasaṅkhātaṃ samayañca upadhāretvā appeva nāma svepi āgaccheyyāmāti. Khaṇoti okāso. Tathāgatuppādādiko hi maggabrahmacariyassa okāso tappaccayapaṭilābhahetuttā. Khaṇo eva ca samayo. Yo ‘‘khaṇo’’ti ca ‘‘samayo’’ti ca vuccati, so ekovāti adhippāyo. Diyaḍḍho māso seso gimhānaṃ uṇhasamayo. Vassānassa paṭhamo māso pariḷāhasamayo. Mahāsamayoti mahāsamūho. Samāso vā esa, byāso vā. Pavuṭṭhaṃ vanaṃ pavanaṃ, tasmiṃ, kapilavatthusāmante mahāvanasaṅkhāte vanasaṇḍeti attho. Samayopi khoti ettha samayoti sikkhāpadapūraṇassa hetu. Bhaddālīti tassa bhikkhussa nāmaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – tayā bhaddāli paṭivijjhitabbayuttakaṃ ekaṃ kāraṇaṃ atthi, tampi te na paṭividdhaṃ na sallakkhitanti. Kiṃ taṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘bhagavāpi kho’’tiādi.
在“优伽诃摩那”等说法里,“摩那”是那个游方者的本名。不过因为他有能力学会某些技艺,人们就称他“优伽诃摩那”,所以叫“优伽诃摩那”。沙门光头之子,就是“沙门光头子”。据说他是提婆达多的侍者。人们在那里用各种方式宣说各自的教理和见解,所以叫“教义宣说处”,意思是“见解宣说处”。据说在那个地方,以商吉、多罗树、波迦罗娑帝等为首的婆罗门,以及尼干陀、裸形外道、游方者等出家众聚在一起,各自用各种方式宣说、讲论、阐明自己的教理,因此那座园林就叫“教义宣说处”。又因为它被名为丁杜迦树皮衣的丁杜迦树林所围绕,所以叫“丁杜迦树皮衣园”。那里有一间讲堂,所以叫“一讲堂园”。不过,起初那里确实只有一间讲堂,后来依靠有大福德的波特哈巴达游方者建了许多讲堂,但因为沿用了最初那一间讲堂的旧名,所以仍然叫“一讲堂园”。那座园林是波斯匿王王妃末利夫人的游乐园,花果繁茂,因此说“在末利园中”。“居住”的意思是在那里安适地住着。巴利
‘‘Uggahamāno’’tiādīsu mānoti tassa paribbājakassa pakatināmaṃ, kiñci kiñci pana sippaṃ uggahetuṃ samatthatāya ‘‘uggahamāno’’ti naṃ sañjānanti, tasmā ‘‘uggahamāno’’ti vuccati. Samaṇamuṇḍikassa putto samaṇamuṇḍikāputto. So kira devadattassa upaṭṭhāko. Samayaṃ diṭṭhiṃ pakārena vadanti etthāti samayappavādako, tasmiṃ, diṭṭhippavādaketi attho. Tasmiṃ kira ṭhāne caṅkītārukkhapokkharasātippabhūtayo brāhmaṇā, nigaṇṭhācelakaparibbājakādayo ca pabbajitā sannipatitvā attano attano samayaṃ pakārena vadanti kathenti dīpenti, tasmā so ārāmo ‘‘samayappavādako’’ti vuccati. Sveva tindukācīrasaṅkhātāya timbarūsakarukkhapantiyā parikkhittattā ‘‘tindukācīro’’ti vuccati. Ekā sālā etthāti ekasālako. Yasmā panettha paṭhamaṃ ekā sālā ahosi, pacchā pana mahāpuññaṃ poṭṭhapādaparibbājakaṃ nissāya bahū sālā katā, tasmā tameva paṭhamaṃ kataṃ ekaṃ sālaṃ upādāya laddhapubbanāmavasena ‘‘ekasālako’’ti vuccati. Mallikāya nāma pasenadirañño deviyā uyyānabhūto so pupphaphalasacchanno ārāmo, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mallikāya ārāme’’ti. Paṭivasatīti tasmiṃ phāsutāya vasati.
“现法”指现前存在的自身。“义”指增长。因为被业和烦恼所牵引、应当正确到达,所以叫“来世”,也就是他世;与它相应的,就是“与来世相关的”,即他世的利益。“通达义”是指获得前面所说的两种利益。因为来世的利益也由于因已经完成而可说为已经获得,所以把这两种利益合在一起,说为“通达义”。以智慧执取这样那样的义,或者具有智慧,就是“智者”。“慧”称为“般若”。因为它能进入极微细的义理,或者能了知苦等逼迫的样子,所以叫“般若”。由它而去的人,就是“智者”。或者,他已生起智慧,或者以智之行而通达,所以叫“智者”。“正慢通达”是指以正断除慢。这里的“正”,说的是以最上道智作彻底断除。“边际”指终结。逼迫,是令具有它的人受到伤害、不得舒展。这个义相同,只是把 ttha 音转成 ṭṭha 音。由诸缘和合而成,就是“行苦义”。以苦苦等使它炽燃、燃烧,就是“热恼义”。应当被老与死两种方式变易,就是“变易义”。应当被通达、应当被证悟,就是“通达义”,也就是逼迫等本身。因为把它们以应当被通达的状态合为一体,所以说为“通达义”。或者,通达即证悟的对象、行境,就是“通达义”,也就是那些法因为与彼境相应这一点共通,而被合说为一。这里,由于前缀只是起提示作用,所以 samaya 一词本身就能表达各自的意思;因此,在解释 samaya 一词的含义时,即使带有前缀,也称为 abhisamaya。巴利
Diṭṭhe dhammeti paccakkhe attabhāve. Atthoti vuḍḍhi. Kammakilesavasena samparetabbato sammā pāpuṇitabbato samparāyo, paraloko, tattha niyutto samparāyiko, paralokattho. Atthābhisamayāti yathāvuttaubhayatthasaṅkhātahitapaṭilābhā. Samparāyikopi hi attho kāraṇassa nipphannattā paṭiladdho nāma hotīti taṃ atthadvayamekato katvā ‘‘atthābhisamayā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhiyā paññāya taṃtadatthe rāti gaṇhāti, dhī vā paññā etassatthīti dhīro. Paṇḍā vuccati paññā. Sā hi sukhumesupi atthesu paḍati gacchati, dukkhādīnaṃ vā pīḷanādiākāraṃ jānātīti paṇḍā. Tāya ito gatoti paṇḍito. Atha vā itā sañjātā paṇḍā etassa, paḍati vā ñāṇagatiyā gacchatīti paṇḍito. Sammā mānābhisamayāti mānassa sammā pahānena. Sammāti cettha aggamaggañāṇena samucchedappahānaṃ vuttaṃ. Antanti avasānaṃ. Pīḷanaṃ taṃsamaṅgino hiṃsanaṃ avipphāritākaraṇaṃ. Tadeva attho tathā ttha-kārassa ṭṭha-kāraṃ katvā. Samecca paccayehi katabhāvo saṅkhataṭṭho. Dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ santāpaṭṭho. Jarāya, maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbo vipariṇāmaṭṭho. Abhisametabbo paṭivijjhitabbo abhisamayaṭṭho, pīḷanādīniyeva. Tāni hi abhisametabbabhāvena ekībhāvamupanetvā ‘‘abhisamayaṭṭho’’ti vuttāni. Abhisamayassa vā paṭivedhassa attho gocaro abhisamayaṭṭhoti tāniyeva tabbisaya-bhāvūpagamana-sāmaññato ekattena vuttāni. Ettha ca upasaggānaṃ jotakamattattā tassa tassa atthassa vācako samayasaddo evāti samayasaddassa atthuddhārepi saupasaggo abhisamayo vutto.
在这些义理当中,这个词的词义是这样:以共同助成的因缘而善加思择、和合,所以叫“时”,也就是和合。道与梵行在这里和合、聚集,这是就它所依止的人来说,所以叫“时”,也就是刹那。诸法或众生以俱生等、以生起等在这里和合,或者依此而聚集,所以叫“时”,也就是时间。因为仅就法的运转而言,时间虽然并非真实存在,却被当作法运转的所依,像工具一样,以纯粹假立的形式被言说。诸部分平等地、正确地运行、转起、安住,所以叫“时”,也就是集合,就像“集起”这个词一样。因为诸部分的共同安住本身就是集合,并不是在诸部分之外,胜义上另有一个什么集合存在。果在诸缘和合时生起或转起,从这一点说,所以叫“时”,也就是因,就像“集起”这个词一样。因为那因正是通过诸缘的和合,使自己的果具足生起与安住。以结缚的状态而和合,成为连结,在自己的境界中转起;或者由于坚固执取的状态,被它系缚的众生依此而随自己的执著转起,所以叫“时”,也就是见。因为众生被见结极度地系缚。和合、聚集、会合,叫“时”,也就是获得。到达寂灭,或者正确地离去、不再转起,叫“时”,也就是断除。应当以智慧正确地面对、前往,所以叫“通达”,也就是诸法不颠倒的自性。以面对的方式正确地到达、了知种种自性,所以叫“通达”,也就是对诸法如实自性的觉了。巴利
Tesu pana atthesu ayaṃ vacanattho – sahakārīkāraṇavasena sannijjhaṃ sameti samavetīti samayo, samavāyo. Sameti samāgacchati maggabrahmacariyamettha tadādhārapuggalavasenāti samayo, khaṇo. Samenti ettha, etena vā saṃgacchanti dhammā, sattā vā sahajātādīhi, uppādādīhi cāti samayo, kālo. Dhammappavattimattatāya hi atthato abhūtopi kālo dhammappavattiyā adhikaraṇaṃ, karaṇaṃ viya ca parikappanāmattasiddhena rūpena voharīyati. Samaṃ, sammā vā avayavānaṃ ayanaṃ pavatti avaṭṭhānanti samayo, samūho yathā ‘‘samudāyo’’ti. Avayavānaṃ sahāvaṭṭhānameva hi samūho, na pana avayavavinimutto samūho nāma koci paramatthato atthi. Paccayantarasamāgame eti phalaṃ uppajjati, pavattati vā etasmāti samayo, hetu yathā ‘‘samudayo’’ti. So hi paccayantarasamāgamaneneva attano phalaṃ uppādaṭṭhitisamaṅgībhāvaṃ karoti. Sameti saṃyojanabhāvato sambandho hutvā eti attano visaye pavattati, daḷhaggaṇabhāvato vā taṃsaññuttā sattā ayanti etena yathābhinivesaṃ pavattantīti samayo, diṭṭhi. Diṭṭhisaṃyojanena hi sattā ativiya bajjhanti. Samiti saṅgati samodhānaṃ samayo, paṭilābho. Samassa nirodhassa yānaṃ pāpuṇanaṃ, sammā vā yānaṃ apagamo appavatti samayo, pahānaṃ. Abhimukhaṃ ñāṇena sammā etabbo abhigantabboti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ aviparīto sabhāvo. Abhimukhabhāvena taṃ taṃ sabhāvaṃ sammā eti gacchati bujjhatīti abhisamayo, dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho.
难道不是这样吗:词只是随着所想要表达的意义才确定下来,所以并不是一个词就能表达许多意义。那么,为什么这里说“时”这个词有多种意义呢?确实如此,如果考虑到不同的词,那么一个词确实不可能表达多种意义。因为表示时间等意义的“时”这个词,并不会去表达集合等意义。不过在这里,是依据那些各自不同的意义都能用“时”这个词来说的这一共通性,才说“时”这个词有多种意义。在一切地方的释义都是如此。这里还有一首偈颂:巴利
Nanu ca atthamattaṃ yathādhippetaṃ pati saddā abhinivisantīti na ekena saddena aneke atthā abhidhīyanti, atha kasmā idha samayasaddassa anekadhā attho vuttoti? Saccametaṃ saddavisese apekkhite saddavisese hi apekkhite na ekena saddena anekatthābhidhānaṃ sambhavati. Na hi yo kālādiattho samaya-saddo, soyeva samūhādiatthaṃ vadati. Ettha pana tesaṃ tesamatthānaṃ samayasaddavacanīyatāsāmaññamupādāya anekatthatā samaya-saddassa vuttāti. Evaṃ sabbattha atthuddhāre. Hoti cettha –
依靠共通的可言说性,以多种方式。
一个词不能同时表示多个含义,所以说“词”并非如此。巴利
‘‘Sāmaññavacanīyataṃ, upādāya anekadhā; Atthaṃ vade na hi saddo, eko nekatthako siyā’’ti.
“集合”等意义在这里根本站不住脚,而且只有时间本身才是应当指明的,所以说“但在这里,时间才是它的意思”。就像地点等可以被理解为起因一样,时间在这里也被指明。为了说明“这是用来说明什么样的时间”,才说了“因此”等话。“因此”就是用表示时间的“时”这个词。半月是按半月来说的,上午等是按一天中的时段来说的,初夜等是按夜分来说的。用“等”字把刹那、瞬间等也包括进来了,意思就是用不确定的方式指出某一个时间。巴利
Samavāyādiatthānaṃ idha asambhavato, kālasseva ca apadisitabbattā ‘‘idha panassa kālo attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Desadesakādīnaṃ viya hi kālassa nidānabhāvena adhippetattā sopi idha apadisīyati. ‘Iminā kīdisaṃ kālaṃ dīpetīti āha ‘‘tenā’’tiādi. Tenāti kālatthena samaya-saddena. Aḍḍhamāso pakkhavasena vutto, pubbaṇhādiko divasabhāgavasena, paṭhamayāmādiko pahāravasena. Ādi-saddena khaṇalayādayo saṅgahitā, aniyamitavasena ekaṃ kālaṃ dīpetīti attho.
为什么这里只是笼统地指出时间,而没有用季节、年份等来明确限定呢?于是说“其中,虽然……”等等。虽然已经用智慧了知并很好地确定,但仍然是这样——这是上下文的关系。因为时间的种种差别无法用言语记住,也无法自己宣说或让别人宣说,而且如果要按时间的不同类别一直讲下去,还有很多要说的。然而,当说“一时”时,就表明并不存在那些时间分类,它们全都包含在其中,所以用“以一个词就总摄了那个意义”来说明这一点。这样,先依世间共许的时间来说明“时”的含义,接着为了依教法中显著的时间来说明“时”的含义,而说了“或者,这些……”等等。再者,为了表明不按季节、年份等来限定,在说“时”这个词时也已经获得了这个优点,所以说了“或者,这些……”等等。因为总说的显示要落在各别之上,它能排除各别的局限。其中,“这些时”是上下文关联。世尊入母胎的时候,这里是入胎时;见到四种相而生起悚惧的时候,是悚惧时;六年为证得正觉而修行的时候,是苦行时;每天以禅那和果等至度过的时候,是现法乐住时,特别是指七个七天中运用禅那等至的时候;四十五年间各各说法的时候,是说法时。以“等”字包含了双神变时等。显著,就是由震动一万世界、放出光明等而变得明显。当说“一时”时,因为还有别的时存在,从这一含义来说,这里所说的“一时”就是指那些时当中名为说法时的那个特定时间。这是意图所在。巴利
Kasmā panettha aniyamitavasena kālo niddiṭṭho, na utusaṃvaccharādinā niyamitavasenāti āha ‘‘tattha kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi paññāya viditaṃ suvavatthāpitaṃ, tathāpīti sambandho. Vacasā dhāretuṃ vā sayaṃ uddisituṃ vā parena uddisāpetuṃ vā na sakkā nānappakārabhāvato bahu ca vattabbaṃ hoti yāva kālappabhedo, tāva vattabbattā. ‘‘Ekaṃ samaya’’nti vutte pana na so kālappabhedo atthi, yo etthānantogadho siyāti dasseti ‘‘ekeneva padena tamatthaṃ samodhānetvā’’ti iminā. Evaṃ lokiyasammatakālavasena samayatthaṃ dassetvā idāni sāsane pākaṭakālavasena samayatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ye vā ime’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Apica utusaṃvaccharādivasena niyamaṃ akatvā samayasaddassa vacane ayampi guṇo laddhoyevāti dassento ‘‘ye vā ime’’tiādimāha. Sāmaññajotanā hi visese avatiṭṭhati tassā visesaparihāravisayattā. Tattha ye ime samayāti sambandho. Bhagavato mātukucchiokkamanakālo cettha gabbhokkantisamayo. Cattāri nimittāni passitvā saṃvejanakālo saṃvegasamayo. Chabbassāni sambodhisamadhigamāya cariyakālo dukkarakārikasamayo. Devasikaṃ jhānaphalasamāpattīhi vītināmanakālo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo, visesato pana sattasattāhāni jhānasamāpattivaḷañjanakālo. Pañcacattālīsavassāni taṃtaṃdhammadesanākālo desanāsamayo. Ādi-saddena yamakapāṭihāriyasamayādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Pakāsāti dasasahassilokadhātupakampanaobhāsapātubhāvādīhi pākaṭā. ‘‘Ekaṃ samaya’’nti vutte tadaññepi samayā santīti atthāpattito tesu samayesu idha desanāsamayasaṅkhāto samayaviseso ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttoti dīpetīti adhippāyo.
对于前面已经说过的那些分类中的“时”,为了用另一种方式把其中的一部分收摄起来展示,所以说了“而此……”等话。因为在这里,智的作用之时和自利修行之时,其实就是正觉之时;圣者默然之时,就是现法乐住之时;悲悯作用、利他修行、法谈之时,就是说法之时。因此应当知道,在那些所说的分类时当中,只是用另一种方式展示了其中的一部分。针对“诸比丘,聚集在一起的你们有两件事应当做:法谈或圣者默然”(《优陀那》12)所说的那个时,才说了“在聚集者应做两件事的时中”。所谓“在那些时中”,也就是在悲悯作用、利他修行、法谈、说法的时中。针对其中某一个时,说“一时”,因为从意义上说并没有差别。巴利
Yathāvuttappabhedesuyeva samayesu ekadesaṃ pakārantarehi saṅgahetvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yo cāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ñāṇakiccasamayo, attahitapaṭipattisamayo ca abhisambodhisamayoyeva. Ariyatuṇhībhāvasamayo diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārasamayo. Karuṇākiccaparahitapaṭipattidhammikathāsamayo desanāsamayo, tasmā tesu vuttappabhedesu samayesu ekadesova pakārantarena dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo bhikkhave dvayaṃ karaṇīyaṃ dhammī kathā vā ariyo vā tuṇhībhāvo’’ti (udā. 12) vuttasamaye sandhāya ‘‘sannipatitānaṃ karaṇīyadvayasamayesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesupi samayesūti karuṇākiccaparahitapaṭipattidhammikathādesanāsamayesupi. Aññataraṃ samayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vuttaṃ atthato abhedattā.
在其他地方,注解是用处格和作格来作的,这里则想通过宾格来确定注解的用意,于是以反问的方式提出质疑:“那为什么在这里……”等等。“在这里”指的是“一时”这个词,在此经句中。用作格来作注解,正如……应当这样联系起来。“存在于这里”是处格,指处所;在那里使用的词就是处格词。“通过它来完成行为”是作格,即行为得以完成的因。“应当被行为所触及”是宾格,即业;关于它的词也是这样。以“在那里……”等来回应前面所说的质疑。“在那里”指在那些阿毗达摩、其他经、律句中。“如是”指因为从处格和作格之义是可能的,应当这样连接;意思是,因为作为依处之性和作为因之作性之义是可能的。在此,指在此经句中。以其他方式,指用宾格。因为纯粹连接之义是可能的。巴利
Aññattha viya bhummavacanena ca karaṇavacanena ca niddesamakatvā idha upayogavacanena niddesapayojanaṃ niddhāretukāmo parammukhena codanaṃ samuṭṭhapeti ‘‘kasmā panetthā’’tiādinā. Etthāti ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti imasmiṃ pade, karaṇavacanena niddeso kato yathāti sambandho. Bhavanti etthāti bhummaṃ, okāso, tattha pavattaṃ vacanaṃ vibhatti bhummavacanaṃ. Karoti kiriyamabhinipphādebhi etenāti karaṇaṃ, kiriyānipphattikāraṇaṃ. Upayujjitabbo kiriyāyāti upayogo, kammaṃ, tattha vacanaṃ tathā. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādinā yathāvuttacodanaṃ pariharati. Tatthāti tesu abhidhammatadaññasuttapadavinayesu. Tathāti bhummavacanakaraṇavacanehi atthasambhavato cāti yojetabbaṃ, adhikaraṇabhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthānaṃ, hetukaraṇatthānañca sambhavatoti attho. Idhāti idhasmiṃ suttapade. Aññathāti upayogavacanena. Atthasambhavatoti accantasaṃyogatthassa sambhavato.
“其中确实……”这一段,是对它的进一步解说。“由此”是指从“一时”这句经文而来。“依处之义”就是所依之处。生起就是存在,也就是作用;用一种作用来说明另一种作用,就是“以存在说明存在”,这里说的正是这个意思。若有人问:凭什么样的“时”义,这两种意思才能成立?那就以与这两种意思相符的“时”义来回答,为了使这一点更确定,便说“因为依处……”等话。因为单从字面意义,上面说的两种意思就已经成立,格位变化只是用来显示而已。其中,被称为“时”的,或者“时”这个词所表达的意义,就是“时义”。被称为“集合”的,或者“集合”这个词所表达的意义,就是“集合义”。那是什么呢?就是“时”。这里要说的是:具有时义和集合义的“时”,在那里就是阿毗达摩中所说的触等诸法的依处、所依。意思是:在某个时间,或者在某个法聚中,欲界善心生起时,就在那同一时间、同一法聚中,触等也一起生起。这就是那里要表达的意思。难道不是这样吗?时间只是概念施设,集合也只是世俗言说,它怎么能成为那里所说诸法的依处呢?这并没有过失。就像时间本身在胜义上虽然不存在,却因为被自性法所限定,而被施设为所依;自性法被限定在那一刹那生起,在此之前和之后都不存在,比如“上午出生,傍晚回来”这类说法。集合虽然离开各部分就无法单独存在,只是因为假名施设而成立,却仍被施设为各部分的所依,比如“树上有枝”“草堆里有叶子”这类说法。同样,在这里,因为被自性法所限定,又因为只是假名施设而成立,这两者就被施设为那里所说诸法的依处。巴利
‘‘Tattha hī’’tiādi tabbivaraṇaṃ. Itoti ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti suttapadato. Adhikaraṇatthoti ādhārattho. Bhavanaṃ bhāvo, kiriyā, kiriyāya kiriyantaralakkhaṇaṃ bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, tadevattho tathā. Kena samayatthena idaṃ atthadvayaṃ sambhavatīti anuyoge sati tadatthadvayasambhavānurūpena samayatthena, taṃ daḷhaṃ karonto ‘‘adhikaraṇañhī’’tiādimāha. Padatthatoyeva hi yathāvuttamatthadvayaṃ siddhaṃ, vibhatti pana jotakamattā. Tattha kālasaṅkhāto, kālasaddassa vā attho yassāti kālattho. Samūhasaṅkhāto, ‘samūhasaddassa vā attho yassāti samūhattho, ko so? Samayo. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – kālattho, samūhattho ca samayo tattha abhidhamme vuttānaṃ phassādidhammānaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ ādhāroti, yasmiṃ kāle, dhammapuñje vā kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva kāle, dhammapuñje vā phassādayopi hontīti ayañhi tattha attho. Nanu cāyaṃ upādāpaññattimatto kālo, vohāramatto ca samūho, so kathaṃ adhikaraṇaṃ siyā tattha vuttadhammānanti? Nāyaṃ doso. Yathā hi kālo sayaṃ paramatthato avijjamānopi sabhāvadhammaparicchinnattā ādhārabhāvena paññāto, sabhāvadhammaparicchinno ca taṅkhaṇappavattānaṃ tato pubbe, parato ca abhāvato ‘‘pubbaṇhejāto, sāyanhe āgacchatī’’tiādīsu, samūho ca avayavavinimutto visuṃ avijjamānopi kappanāmattasiddhattā avayavānaṃ ādhārabhāvena paññāpīyati ‘‘rukkhe sākhā, yavarāsiyaṃ pattasambhūto’’tiādīsu, evamidhāpi sabhāvadhammaparicchinnattā, kappanāmattasiddhattā ca tadubhayaṃ tattha vuttadhammānaṃ adhikaraṇabhāvena paññāpīyatīti.
“以刹那、集合、因所组成的”等语,是为了显示“以存在标示存在”这一含义能够成立。其中,所谓“刹那”,是指除开八种无暇刹那之外的第九种——佛陀出世的刹那;或者,像经中所说“诸比丘,有这四轮,具足这四轮的天与人,四轮得以运转”,这里所说的合适地方居住、亲近善士、自身正愿、宿世所修福这四轮,把它们合在一起,从“处所”的意义上应知为“刹那”。因为它们都是善法生起的处所。所谓“集合”,是指经中“缘眼与色而生眼识”等所说的、为产生眼识等共同果报而成立的眼、色等缘的总合。因为眼识等是眼、色等的共同果报。所谓“因”,是指如理作意等能生的因。意思是:以被称为刹那、集合、因的“时”的“存在”作用,来标示触等诸法被称为“存在”的作用,即被了知。这话是说:就像“牛在挤奶时去了,挤完奶时回来了”这句话里,用挤奶的动作来标示去的动作;同样,在这里,也用所说的“时”的“存在”作用,来标示心的生起作用和触等的存在作用。难道这里的“存在”作用不是不存在吗?怎么能用它来标示呢?确实如此。不过,当说“于某时”时,即使“存在”作用不存在,这个意思仍然可以被了知,因为若没有与其他作用的关联,这个词本身就不会没有“存在”的含义。所以,实际上是以意义上可以领会到的那个“存在”作用来标示的。这里的含义是:在所说的那个刹那、那个缘的集合、那个因存在时,欲界善心生起,就在那同一个刹那、同一个缘的集合、同一个因存在时,触等也存在。不过,这个含义在阿毗达摩中只是以举例的方式说过,同样的道理也适用于其他经文段落。因此,由于依处义和“以存在标示存在”义都能成立,所以“为了说明那个含义”,就是为了以“时”这个词本身所具有的上述两种含义,通过依格来显示它确实存在。因为语尾变化就像灯一样,只是照亮事物本身已经存在的含义——这个道理在语法学中是很明显的。巴利
‘‘Khaṇasamavāyahetusaṅkhātassā’’tiādi bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthasambhavadassanaṃ. Tattha khaṇo nāma aṭṭhakkhaṇavinimutto navamo buddhuppādakkhaṇo, yāni vā panetāni ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave, cakkāni, yehi samannāgatānaṃ devamussānaṃ catucakkaṃ pavattatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.31) ettha patirūpadesavāso sappurisūpanissayo attasammāpaṇīdhi pubbekatapuññatāti cattāri cakkāni vuttāni, tāni ekajjhaṃ katvā okāsaṭṭhena ‘‘khaṇo’’ti veditabbāni. Tāni hi kusaluppattiyā okāsabhūtāni. Samavāyo nāma ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.204; 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43, 44; saṃ. ni. 3.60; kathā. 465, 467) niddiṭṭhā cakkhuviññāṇādisādhāraṇaphalanipphādakattena saṇṭhitā cakkhurūpādipaccayasāmaggī. Cakkhurūpādīnañhi cakkhuviññāṇādi sādhāraṇaphalaṃ. Hetu nāma yonisomanasikārādijanakahetu. Yathāvuttassa khaṇasaṅkhātassa, samavāyasaṅkhātassa, hetusaṅkhātassa ca samayassa sattāsaṅkhātena bhāvena tesaṃ phassādīnaṃ dhammānaṃ sattāsaṅkhāto bhāvo lakkhīyati viññāyatīti attho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā ‘‘gāvīsu duyhamānāsu gato, duddhāsu āgato’’ti ettha dohanakiriyāya gamanakiriyā lakkhīyati, evamidhāpi yathāvuttassa samayassa sattākiriyāya cittassa uppādakiriyā, phassādīnaṃ bhavanakiriyā ca lakkhīyatīti. Nanu cettha sattākiriyā avijjamānāva, kathaṃ tāya lakkhīyatīti? Saccaṃ, tathāpi ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye’’ti ca vutte satīti ayamattho viññāyamāno evahoti aññakiriyāsambandhābhāve padatthassa sattāvirahābhāvato, tasmā atthato gamyamānāya tāya sattākiriyāya lakkhīyatīti. Ayañhi tattha attho – yasmiṃ yathāvutte khaṇe, paccayasamavāye, hetumhi vā sati kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, tasmiṃyeva khaṇe, paccayasamavāye, hetumhi vā sati phassādayopi hontīti. Ayaṃ pana attho abhidhammeyeva (aṭṭhasā. kāmāvacarakusalapadabhājanīye) nidassanavasena vutto, yathārahamesa nayo aññesupi suttapadesūti. Tasmāti adhikaraṇatthassa, bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇatthassa ca sambhavato. Tadatthajotanatthanti tadubhayatthassa samayasaddatthabhāvena vijjamānasseva bhummavacanavasena dīpanatthaṃ. Vibhattiyo hi padīpo viya vatthuno vijjamānasseva atthassa jotakāti, ayamattho saddasatthesu pākaṭoyeva.
因义和作具义都能成立。就像“靠食物而住”“靠明而住”这类说法里有因义,而“用斧头砍”“用锄头挖”这类说法里有作具义一样。那么,怎么成立呢?回答说“凡彼……”等等。在律藏(波罗夷第20条)中,依据学处制定所请之因事,以长老为界限,说“舍利弗等人也难以了知”。这里说“以彼时为因、为作具”当中,各种事犯既是学处制定的因,也是作具。因为当世尊为了制定学处,最初随观各各成为学处制定之因的他们违犯而住时,那时就是随观他们违犯、为此而住,所以违犯事是学处制定的因这一点得以成立,正如“靠食物而住”等说法中,由随观食物、为此而住等理由,食物等有因义一样。而在制定学处时,是以先前已经成立的违犯来制定学处,因此就学处制定而言,单凭成就义,违犯的作具义也得以成立,正如“用剑砍”等说法中,由剑成就砍断作用等理由,剑等有作具义一样。即便如此,在随观违犯时,也同时随观违犯所依的时间而住,所以这里也说时间有因义;而制定学处时,不超越他们违犯的时间,就在那个时间制定学处,因此也说违犯所依的时间有作具义。由此理路,时间也可以获得因义和作具义,所以说“以彼时为因、为作具”。若依究竟理趣,则唯有违犯是因、是作具。因为那违犯在违犯之时作为因,后来在制定学处之时也成为作具。制定学处者,询问违犯后,令比丘众集会,审问彼人陷入之事,呵责之后,不超越彼事陷入之时,就在那个时间以作为作具而制定学处。随观学处制定之因者,则如第三波罗夷等中那样,随观成为学处制定之因的彼彼事犯之时,世尊以彼时为因,于各处而住,此为其义。巴利
Hetuattho, karaṇattho ca sambhavatīti ‘‘annena vasati, vijjāya vasatī’’tiādīsu viya hetuattho, ‘‘pharasunā chindati, kudālena khaṇatī’’tiādīsu viya karaṇattho ca sambhavati. Kathaṃ pana sambhavatīti āha ‘‘yo hi so’’tiādi. Vinaye (pārā. 20) āgatasikkhāpadapaññattiyācanavatthuvasena theraṃ mariyādaṃ katvā ‘‘sāriputtādīhipi duviññeyyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenāti ettha pana taṃtaṃvatthuvītikkamova sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetu ceva karaṇañca. Tathā hi yadā bhagavā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā paṭhamameva tesaṃ tesaṃ tattha tattha sikkhāpadapaññattihetubhūtaṃ taṃ taṃ vītikkamaṃ apekkhamāno viharati , tadā taṃ taṃ vītikkamaṃ apekkhitvā tadatthaṃ vasatīti siddho vatthuvītikkamassa sikkhāpadapaññattihetubhāvo ‘‘annenavasatī’’tiādīsu annamapekkhitvā tadatthaṃ vasatītiādinā kāraṇena annādīnaṃ hetubhāvo viya. Sikkhāpadapaññattikāle pana teneva pubbasiddhena vītikkamena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapeti, tasmā sikkhāpadapaññattiyā sādhakatamattā karaṇabhāvopi vītikkamasseva siddho ‘‘asinā chindatī’’tiādīsu asinā chindanakiriyaṃ sādhetītiādinā kāraṇena asiādīnaṃ karaṇabhāvo viya. Evaṃ santepi vītikkamaṃ apekkhamāno teneva saddhiṃ tannissitampi kālaṃ apekkhitvā viharatīti kālassāpi idha hetubhāvo vutto, sikkhāpadaṃ paññapento ca taṃ taṃ vītikkamakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena sikkhāpadaṃ paññapetīti vītikkamanissayassa kālassāpi karaṇabhāvo vutto, tasmā iminā pariyāyena kālassāpi hetubhāvo, karaṇabhāvo ca labbhatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tena samayena hetubhūtena karaṇabhūtenā’’ti, nippariyāyena pana vītikkamoyeva hetubhūto, karaṇabhūto ca. So hi vītikkamakkhaṇe hetu hutvā pacchā sikkhāpadapaññāpanakkhaṇe karaṇampi hotīti. Sikkhāpadāni paññāpayantoti vītikkamaṃ pucchitvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ sannipātāpetvā otiṇṇavatthuṃ taṃ puggalaṃ paṭipucchitvā, vigarahitvā ca taṃ taṃ vatthuotiṇṇakālaṃ anatikkamitvā teneva kālena karaṇabhūtena sikkhāpadāni paññapento. Sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamānoti tatiyapārājikādīsu (pārā. 162) viya sikkhāpadapaññattiyā hetubhūtaṃ taṃ taṃ vatthuvītikkamasamayaṃ apekkhamāno tena samayena hetubhūtena bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsīti attho.
正在制定学处、并且顾念制定学处的因,这两句话依次说明了“作具”的意义和“因”的意义。因此,虽然按照相应的说法应当说“以那个时候为作具、为因”,但先说了“为因”,这是因为这里特别强调因的意义,所以用倒序来说。据说在三部《甘提帕达》中都这样说:“世尊住在毗兰若时,顾念着成为法将长老请求制定学处之因的那个思惟时刻,就以那个时候为因而住。”也有人说:“不过,在这里何必以理推究呢?阿阇梨在此并没有想要按顺序措辞的意思,应当这样理解——在其他注释书中也是说这同一个顺序,而且那些注释书并不是为了显示‘那个时候住在毗兰若’这句律藏原文中特别强调因义才这样说的,因为那不是它的范围;而是因为按照‘正在制定学处者,以因时、作具时而住;顾念制定学处之因者,以因时而住’这样,此处依据实际获得的关联才这样说。”因此——因为所说的两种意义都能成立。为了阐明那个意义——按照所说的方式,以作具的表达来阐明那两种意义。在此——即在这部律藏中。而且在这里,就制定学处而言,只有违犯的时刻才算是成就它的作具,所以它的作具义与补入的“正在制定学处者”这个词相关联;而因义则只是因为顾念那个,所以只与“住”这个词相关联,应当这样理解。正如确实这样说过:“以那个时候为因、为作具,正在制定学处,并且顾念制定学处之因,世尊在各地而住。”因为作具是作用本身,不像因那样是作用的原因;而因是作用的原因,不像作具那样是作用本身。巴利
‘‘Sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto, sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno’’ti idaṃ yathākkamaṃ karaṇabhāvassa, hetubhāvassa ca samatthanavacanaṃ, tasmā tadanurūpaṃ ‘‘tenasamayena karaṇabhūtena hetubhūtenā’’ti evaṃ vattabbepi paṭhamaṃ ‘‘hetubhūtenā’’ti uppaṭipāṭivacanaṃ tattha hetubhāvassa sātisayamadhippetattā vuttanti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhagavā hi verañjāyaṃ viharanto dhammasenāpatittherassa sikkhāpadapaññattiyācanahetubhūtaṃ parivitakkasamayaṃ apekkhamāno tena samayena hetubhūtena vihāsī’’ti tīsupi kira gaṇṭhipadesu vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kiṃ panettha yutticintāya, ācariyassa idha kamavacanicchā natthīti evametaṃ gahetabbaṃ – aññāsupi hi aṭṭhakathāsu ayameva anukkamo vutto, na ca tāsu ‘tena samayena verañjāyaṃ viharatī’ti vinayapāḷipade hetuatthasseva sātisayaṃ adhippetabhāvadīpanatthaṃ vutto avisayattā, sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto hetubhūtena, karaṇabhūtena ca samayena vihāsi, sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno hetubhūtena samayena vihāsīti evamettha yathālābhaṃ sambandhabhāvato evaṃ vutto’’tipi vadanti. Tasmāti yathāvuttassa duvidhassāpi atthassa sambhavato. Tadatthajotanatthanti vuttanayena karaṇavacanena tadubhayatthassa jotanatthaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ vinaye. Ettha ca sikkhāpadapaññattiyā eva vītikkamasamayassa sādhakatamattā tassa karaṇabhāve ‘‘sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto’’ti ajjhāharitapadena sambandho, hetubhāve pana tadapekkhanamattattā ‘‘viharatī’’ti padenevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathāyeva hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tena samayena hetubhūtena, karaṇabhūtena ca sikkhāpadāni paññāpayanto, sikkhāpadapaññattihetuñca apekkhamāno bhagavā tattha tattha vihāsī’’ti. Karaṇañhi kiriyatthaṃ, na hetu viya kiriyākāraṇaṃ. Hetu pana kiriyākāraṇaṃ, na karaṇaṃ viya kiriyatthoti.
这里“于此”等语,是为了说明业格具有“完全结合”这一含义的可能性。所谓完全结合,就是与诸法、诸功德、诸作用毫无间断地紧密结合,也就是说,与它们始终相连、毫无间隔。这个意思就是这样。“如是类”指这样的性质。那么怎么可能呢?回答说“因为若……”等。“完全地”是指从开始一直到教说结束,始终同一、没有间断的意思。“以悲住”是指以被称为利他行的悲住。因为教说以悲为根源,所以这里把利他行称为“悲住”,而不是指悲的等至住。因为在说法之时,说法智以应说之法为境,而大悲以有情为境,由于二者境不同的缘故,不可能同时生起,所以,应当知道这里“悲住”是指依悲而起的住,即利他行之住。“因此”,是由于极相续结合义的可能性。“为了阐明彼义”,是如前所说,为了阐明业格的彼义,而作了业格的说明,如说“诵习一个月,受用一天”。“由此”,是由于在阿毗达摩及此经之外的其他经文中,处格有依止义与以方式而方式之相状义,在律中,作具格有因由义与作具义,而此处业格有极相续结合义是可能的,因此。“此”,是如前所说义的摄颂句,于阿毗达摩及此经之外的其他经文中,以及在律中。“如是”是“如是”一词。因为只有在声(词)上,依格等才在“有”等义上不可能。那个“如是”就是“如是”一词。巴利
‘‘Idha panā’’tiādinā upayogavacanassa accantasaṃyogatthasambhavadassanaṃ, accantameva dabbaguṇakiriyāhi saṃyogo accantasaṃyogo, nirantarameva tehi saṃyuttabhāvoti vuttaṃ hoti. Soyevattho tathā. Evaṃjātiketi evaṃsabhāve. Kathaṃ sambhavatīti āha ‘‘yañhī’’tiādi. Accantamevāti ārabbhato paṭṭhāya yāva desanāniṭṭhānaṃ, tāva ekaṃsameva, nirantaramevāti attho. Karuṇāvihārenāti parahitapaṭipattisaṅkhātena karuṇāvihārena. Tathā hi karuṇānidānattā desanāya idha parahitapaṭipatti ‘‘karuṇāvihāro’’ti vuttā, na pana karuṇāsamāpattivihāro. Na hi desanākāle desetabbadhammavisayassa desanāñāṇassa sattavisayāya mahākaruṇāya sahuppatti sambhavati bhinnavisayattā, tasmā karuṇāya pavatto vihāroti katvā parahitapaṭipattivihāro idha ‘‘karuṇāvihāro’’ti veditabbo. Tasmāti accantasaṃyogatthasambhavato. Tadatthajotanatthanti vuttanayena upayogavibhattiyā tadatthassa jotanatthaṃ upayoganiddeso kato yathā ‘‘māsaṃ sajjhāyati, divasaṃ bhuñjatī’’ti. Tenāti yena kāraṇena abhidhamme, ito aññesu ca suttapadesu bhummavacanassa adhikaraṇattho, bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho ca, vinaye karaṇavacanassa hetuattho, karaṇattho ca idha upayogavacanassa accantasaṃyogattho sambhavati, tenāti attho. Etanti yathā vuttassatthassa saṅgahagāthāpadaṃ aññatrāti abhidhamme ito aññesu suttapadesu, vinaye ca. Samayoti samayasaddo. Saddeyeva hi vibhattiparā bhavatiatthe asambhavato. Soti sveva samayasaddo.
像这样显示了自己的见解之后,现在为了显示古师们的见解,就说出了“然而古师……”等话。“古师”指的是早先的注释书师。“‘于彼时’……中间省略……‘一时’,这就是差别”,这是句子的连接。所谓“只是言说上的差别”,是说仅在言辞上有差别、有不同,而不是在义理上有差别,因此说“一切处都只是处格之义”,意思就是:在一切情况下,从义理上说都只是依止之义。通过这句话,显示了在经和律中有格位的变化,或者说,在处格之义中,业格和作具格的用法也是成立的。以“因此”等语句,赞叹了显示他们见解的功德。巴利
Evaṃ attano matiṃ dassetvā idāni porāṇācariyamatiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘porāṇā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Porāṇāti ca purimā aṭṭhakathācariyā. ‘‘Tasmiṃ samaye’’ti vā…pe… ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti vā esa bhedoti sambandho. Abhilāpamattabhedoti vacanamattena bhedo viseso, na pana atthena, tenāha ‘‘sabbattha bhummamevattho’’ti, sabbesupi atthato ādhāro eva atthoti vuttaṃ hoti . Iminā ca vacanena suttavinayesu vibhattivipariṇāmo kato, bhummatthe vā upayogakaraṇavibhattiyo siddhāti dasseti. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā tesaṃ matidassane guṇamāha.
以“沉重”之义而称为“重”。为了从共许的称名上成立这个含义,便说“因为‘重’……”等语,因为词是共许称名的对象,而它正是这样确定地表达这个含义的。“重”指应当尊重的人。用“于世间”这一说法,显示不只是在教法之内,在世间也因应当尊重之义而共许为“世尊”。如果因应当尊重之义而为世尊,那么为了显示正是这一位才具有殊胜,便说“而此……”等语。因为世间之主由于具足无量、无可比拟的神通与戒等功德的殊胜,由于以一切无益的排除为先导、致力于无余利乐之施设、无有更胜的加行圆满,以及对于天与人众的究竟饶益,而在无量诸世间中成为无量有情的最上尊敬处。显示不只是在世间,而且在教法中也如此,便说“往昔诸师……”等语,而“往昔诸师”即指注释师们。最上之语也因为与最上功德相伴而就是最上的,所以说“‘世尊’一语是最上的”。“语”即表达,因为以此表达含义,所以词就是语。或者,“语”即被说者、含义,因此,凡以“世尊”一语所应说的含义,那就是最上的,此即其义。“‘世尊’一语是最上的”在这里也是如此道理。“与尊敬相应”即与重的状态相应,因为与重的功德相合;或者,因殊胜而值得尊重,故与尊敬相应,即值得尊敬之义。以这三种理由,那位如来以沉重之义而为重,因此说为“世尊”,这是关联。这“重”等三词即是显示重的理由。有人说:“教授技艺等的人也称为‘重’,但他们并非与尊敬相应,而这位并非那样,因此为了说明‘重’而说‘与尊敬相应’。”若如此,那么这只是修饰语,前两词才应是显示理由的。巴利
Bhāriyaṭṭhena garu. Tadevatthaṃ saṅketato samattheti ‘‘garuṃ hī’’tiādinā saṅketavisayo hi saddo taṃvavatthitoyeva cesa atthabodhakoti. Garunti garukātabbaṃ janaṃ. ‘‘Loke’’ti iminā na kevalaṃ sāsaneyeva, lokepi garukātabbaṭṭhena bhagavāti saṅketasiddhīti dasseti. Yadi garukātabbaṭṭhena bhagavā, atha ayameva sātisayaṃ bhagavā nāmāti dassento ‘‘ayañcā’’tiādimāha. Tathā hi lokanātho aparimitanirupamappabhāvasīlādiguṇavisesasamaṅgitāya, sabbānatthaparihārapubbaṅgamāya niravasesahitasukhavidhānatapparāya niratisayāya payogasampattiyā sadevamanussāya pajāya accantupakāritāya ca aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhānanti. Na kevalaṃ lokeyeva, atha kho sāsanepīti dasseti ‘‘porāṇehī’’tiādinā, porāṇehīti ca aṭṭhakathācariyehīti attho. Seṭṭhavācakavacanampi seṭṭhaguṇasahacaraṇato seṭṭhamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭha’’nti. Vuccati attho, etenāti hi vacanaṃ, saddo. Atha vā vuccatīti vacanaṃ, attho, tasmā yo ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vacanena vacanīyo attho, so seṭṭhoti attho. Bhagavāti vacanamuttamanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Gāravayuttoti garubhāvayutto garuguṇayogattā, sātisayaṃ vā garukaraṇārahatāya gāravayutto, gāravārahoti attho. Yena kāraṇattayena so tathāgato garu bhāriyaṭṭhena, tena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuccatīti sambandho. Garutākāraṇadassanañhetaṃ padattayaṃ. ‘‘Sippādisikkhāpakāpi garūyeva nāma honti, na ca gāravayuttā, ayaṃ pana tādiso na hoti, tasmā garūti katvā ‘gāravayutto’ti vutta’’nti keci. Evaṃ sati tadetaṃ visesanapadamattaṃ, purimapadadvayameva kāraṇadassanaṃ siyā.
另外,“再者”这个词是表示另一种可能的含义,意思是另一种说法。其中——巴利
Apicāti atthantaravikappatthe nipāto, aparo nayoti attho. Tattha –
音素的增减和音素的倒置,
还有另外两种:音的变化和音的消失。
通过诸词根的意义与殊胜来结合,
这被称为五种辞。巴利
‘‘Vaṇṇagamo vaṇṇavipariyāyo, Dve cāpare vaṇṇavikāranāsā; Dhātūnamatthātisayena yogo, Taduccate pañcavidhā niruttī’’ti. –
在说明了语源特征之后,依照“pisodarā 等如前所述”这样的词语用法,或者依照 pisodarā 等离群者的特征,他拥有能带来世间与出世间快乐的、达到戒等圆满的福分,本来应该称为“bhāgyavā(有福者)”,却称为“bhagavā(世尊)”,所以说“bhāgyavā”。同样,他打破了数十万种不同类别的烦恼,或者简单说,打破了第五魔,本来应该称为“bhaggavā(打破者)”,却称为“bhagavā”,通过“bhaggavā”这个词显示了这一点。而在世间,“bhaga”这个词用于自在、法、名声、荣耀、欲望、精进这六种法上,这些被称为 bhaga 的法存在于他,所以是 bhagavā;为了显示这个意思,说了“yutto bhagehi ca(与诸福相应)”。他以善等种种差别,把一切法分别、区分、开显而宣说,本来应该称为“vibhattavā(分别者)”,却称为“bhagavā”,所以说“vibhattavā”。他在天住、梵住、圣住中,在身、心、依止的远离中,在空、无相、无愿解脱中,以及其他世间与出世间的殊胜人法中,修习、亲近、多修,本来应该称为“bhattavā(修习者)”,却称为“bhagavā”,通过“bhattavā”这个词显示了这一点。在三有中,以称为渴爱的行走,他已吐出、吐弃,本来应该称为“bhavesu vantagamano(在有中已吐出行走者)”,但取 bhavas 一词的 bha 音,取 gamana 一词的 ga 音,取 vanta 一词的 va 音,再将其延长,以字母颠倒的方式称为“bhagavā”;为了显示这一点,说了“vantagamano bhavesu(在有中已吐出行走者)”。应当依照“因为是有福者,所以是世尊”等,逐项配合。assa pada 一词,是指“bhagavā”这个词。vitthārattho,是指详细展开的意义。以“so ca”等语句,是为了避免文句过于庞大。这里的意思是:虽然已经说过,但在这里不再重复说,因为它是《清净道论》的一部分。巴利
Vuttaṃ niruttilakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā, ‘‘pisodarādīni yathopadiṭṭha’’nti vuttasaddanayena vā pisodarādiākatigaṇapakkhepalakkhaṇaṃ gahetvā lokiya lokuttarasukhābhinibbattakaṃ sīlādipārappattaṃ bhāgyamassa atthīti ‘‘bhāgyavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘bhāgyavā’’ti. Tathā anekabhedabhinnakilesasatasahassāni, saṅkhepato vā pañcamāre abhañjīti ‘‘bhaggavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuttanti dasseti ‘‘bhaggavā’’ti iminā. Loke ca bhaga-saddo issariyadhammayasasirīkāmapayattesu chasu dhammesu pavattati, te ca bhagasaṅkhātā dhammā assa santīti bhagavāti atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yutto bhagehi cā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kusalādīhi anekabhedehi sabbadhamme vibhaji vibhajitvā vivaritvā desesīti ‘‘vibhattavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘vibhattavā’’ti. Dibbabrahmaariyavihāre, kāyacittaupadhiviveke, suññatānimittāppaṇihitavimokkhe, aññe ca lokiyalokuttare uttarimanussadhamme bhaji sevi bahulamakāsīti ‘‘bhattavā’’ti vattabbe ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuttanti dasseti ‘‘bhattavā’’ti iminā. Tīsu bhavesu taṇhāsaṅkhātaṃ gamanamanena vantaṃ vamitanti ‘‘bhavesu vantagamano’’ti vattabbe bhavasaddato bha-kāraṃ gamanasaddato ga-kāraṃ vantasaddato va-kāraṃ ādāya, tassa ca dīghaṃ katvā vaṇṇavipariyāyena ‘‘bhagavā’’ti vuttanti dassetuṃ ‘‘vantagamano bhavesū’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yato bhāgyavā, tato bhagavā’’tiādinā paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Assa padassāti ‘‘bhagavā’’ti padassa. Vitthāratthoti vitthārabhūto attho. ‘‘So cā’’tiādinā ganthamahattaṃ pariharati. Vuttoyeva, na pana idha pana vattabbo visuddhimaggassa imissā aṭṭhakathāya ekadesabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
另外,对于“bhage vani”或“vamī”也可解释为“世尊”。因为他亲近、奉行诸福,也就是戒等功德;或者,他在名为“福”的戒等功德中,对应当调伏的有情相续祈愿、希求:“怎样才能生起呢?”这样就是在诸福中祈愿,所以是世尊。或者,他对诸福——荣耀、自在、声誉——像吐掉唾沫团一样吐弃、舍弃。因为世尊对到手转轮王的荣耀、四洲的自在、依转轮王成就而七宝光辉的声誉,都不顾恋地舍弃了。又或者,“bhāni”是星宿;与它们一同运行、转动,所以是“bhagā”,把长音“ā”缩短;也就是须弥山、持双山等处的器世间庄严。他吐弃、断除了对这些庄严的欲贪,这样就是在诸福中吐弃,所以是世尊。像这样随各处出现的理路,本应解释其含义;但我们为了照顾害怕论典的人、摄受学人,也为了不使论典显得过于繁重,就略过了。巴利
Apica bhage vani, vamīti vā bhagavā. So hi bhage sīlādiguṇe vani bhaji sevi, te vā bhagasaṅkhāte sīlādiguṇe vineyyasantānesu ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho uppajjeyyu’’nti vani yāci patthayi, evaṃ bhage vanīti bhagavā, bhage vā siriṃ, issariyaṃ, yasañca vami kheḷapiṇḍaṃ viya chaḍḍayi. Tathā hi bhagavā hatthagataṃ cakkavattisiriṃ, catudīpissariyaṃ, cakkavattisampattisannissayañca sattaratanasamujjalaṃ yasaṃ anapekkho chaḍḍayi. Atha vā bhāni nāma nakkhattāni, tehi samaṃ gacchanti pavattantīti bhagā ākārassa rassaṃ katvā, sineruyugandharādigatā bhājanalokasobhā. Tā bhagā vami tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahi, evaṃ bhage vamīti bhagavāti evamādīhi tattha tatthāgatanayehi cassa attho vattabbo, amhehi pana so ganthabhīrujanānuggahaṇatthaṃ, ganthagarutāpariharaṇatthañca ajjhupekkhitoti.
像这样显示了这些词各自的部分含义之后,现在要显示它们总合起来的含义,于是把前三个词的总合含义中尚未说到的部分,连同与之对应的那层意思一起显示出来,所以说了“至此”等话。“至此”是和“如是我闻”这句话以及“一时世尊”这句话联系在一起的。“于此”指的是在这个因缘叙述的话里。“如所闻之法而宣说”这里,“终”这个词表示原因。因为如实宣说的缘故,就叫做使法现前。这个道理在其他地方也一样。从“阿难,凡是我所说的法……乃至……就是你们的老师”这句话来看,确实存在以法为师的说法,所以说“使法身现前”。法身的意思是与世尊相关联、以法为身的身体。正如经中所说:“比丘们,法身就是如来的同义词。”那这有什么用意呢?于是说了“以此”等话。“以此”的意思是通过这样的使法现前。这部现在将要宣说的经,叫做佛陀世尊的善说、最上的言教。因此,你们并没有失去老师,并不是没有老师的状态。这个解释是以“有”为主,或者省略了“有”;否则,如果言教本身并没有失去老师,但那些因为见不到老师而心生不满的人,就可能被理解为“失去了老师”;如果那样,就和“这是你们的老师,用来安慰那些因为见不到老师而心生不满的人”这句话相矛盾。他们说,这里的正确意思是:这部言教通过完成老师的职责,所以并没有失去老师。“老师”这个词是第六格用于宾语,或者这是一个复合词,意思是“因为见不到老师”。不满叫做ukkaṇṭho,意思是艰难的生活。他们说“kaṭha”就是艰难生活的意思。由此产生的就是ukkaṇṭhito,或者被不满所压迫,心散乱,抬起头,伸长脖子,四处张望,走来走去,或者住着,按词源规则就叫ukkaṇṭhito,那个就是ukkaṇṭhita。这只是从词的能力上获得的,从通常用法来说,意思是被不满所压迫。这个道理在所有地方都一样。“安慰”的意思是产生安心的感觉。巴利
Evametesaṃ avayavatthaṃ dassetvā idāni samudāyatthaṃ dassento purimapadattayassa samudāyatthena vuttāvasesena tesamatthānaṃ paṭiyogitāya tenāpi saha dassetuṃ ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādimāha. Ettāvatāti etassa ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’nti vacanena ‘‘ekaṃ samayaṃ bhagavā’’ tivacanenāti imehi sambandho. Etthāti etasmiṃ nidānavacane. Yathāsutaṃ dhammaṃ desentoti ettha anta-saddo hetuattho. Tathādesitattā hi paccakkhaṃ karoti nāma. Esa nayo aparatthāpi. ‘‘Yo kho ānanda, mayā dhammo ca…pe… satthā’’ti vacanato dhammassa satthubhāvapariyāyo vijjatevāti katvā ‘‘dhammasarīraṃ paccakkhaṃ karotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Dhammakāyanti hi bhagavato sambandhībhūtaṃ dhammasaṅkhātaṃ kāyanti attho. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘dhammakāyoti bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Taṃ pana kimatthiyanti āha ‘‘tenā’’tiādi. Tenāti ca tādisena paccakkhakaraṇenāti attho. Idaṃ adhunā vakkhamānasuttaṃ pāvacanaṃ pakaṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ buddhassa bhagavato vacanaṃ nāma. Tasmā tumhākaṃ atikkantasatthukaṃ atītasatthukabhāvo na hotīti attho. Bhāvappadhāno hi ayaṃ niddeso, bhāvalopo vā, itarathā pāvacanameva anatikkantasatthukaṃ, satthuadassanena pana ukkaṇṭhitassa janassa atikkantasatthukabhāvoti attho āpajjeyya, evañca sati ‘‘ayaṃ vo satthāti satthuadassanena ukkaṇṭhitaṃ janaṃ samassāsetī’’ tivacanena saha virodho bhaveyyāti vadanti. Idaṃ pāvacanaṃ satthukiccanipphādanena na atītasatthukanti pana attho. Satthūti kammatthe chaṭṭhī, samāsapadaṃ vā etaṃ satthuadassanenāti. Ukkaṇṭhanaṃ ukkaṇṭho, kicchajīvitā. ‘‘Kaṭha kicchajīvane’’ti hi vadanti. Tamito pattoti ukkaṇṭhito, anabhiratiyā vā pīḷito vikkhittacitto hutvā sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā uddhaṃ kaṇṭhaṃ katvā ito cito ca olokento āhiṇḍati, viharati cāti ukkaṇṭhito niruttinayena, taṃ ukkaṇṭhitaṃ. Saddasāmatthiyādhigatamatto cesa, vohārato pana anabhiratiyā pīḷitanti attho. Esa nayo sabbattha. Samassāsetīti assāsaṃ janeti.
“那时”指的是结集这部经的时候。虽然世尊在世时也可以这样说,但这里是在世尊已经不在的情况下才这样说,所以是依着“含藏而说”的方式显示那个意思,因此说“显示已不存在的情况”。“般涅槃”是指依无余涅槃界而说的五蕴般涅槃。“由此”就是由那样的成就。“如是类者”就是这种类型、这种性质的,也有“如此体性”的意思。“名”这个字是表示呵责的助词,就像在“阿难长老啊,你们竟然对正在受苦的比丘坐视不管吗”这类话里的用法一样。借此表明:连这样的世尊都已经般涅槃了,其他人还有什么好说的呢?这是为了点出呵责的意思。“圣法”是指圣者的法,或者已经成为圣的法。凭十种身力和十种智力,称为具有十力的人。“金刚”是一种特殊宝石的名称,它聚集、结合成整块,身体就像那样。这是说:就像金刚聚不会被别的宝石或石头破坏,反而能破坏别的宝石或石头,因此说“没有什么宝石或石头是金刚不能破的”;同样,世尊的身体也是谁也破坏不了的,因为没有人能给世尊的色身造成伤害。由于“名”这个字表示呵责,而“也”这个字表示总括,意思是“不只是世尊,其他人也一样”。在这里应当知道,为了显示与论题相符的义理,即“虽然具有这样功德的人按理还不该般涅槃,但这位世尊确实已经般涅槃了”,所以说了“如是”等话。“希望”就是愿望,意思是根本不该生起。“我长寿,我长久活着,我将长久活着,我快乐地活着,我快乐地活着,我将快乐地活着”——依这种心态生起的慢就叫“命慢”,被它醉倒、放逸就是那样。“令悚惧”就是让人生起悚惧感,由此让那人生起对善法的精进。因为悚惧是精进的因,正如所说:“悚惧的人如理精勤。”巴利
Tasmiṃ samayeti imassa suttassa saṅgītisamaye. Kāmaṃ vijjamānepi bhagavati evaṃ vattumarahati, idha pana avijjamāneyeva tasmiṃ evaṃ vadati, tasmā sandhāyabhāsitavasena tadatthaṃ dassetīti āha ‘‘avijjamānabhāvaṃ dassento’’ti. Parinibbānanti anupādisesanibbānadhātuvasena khandhaparinibbānaṃ. Tenāti tathāsādhanena. Evaṃvidhassāti evaṃpakārassa, evaṃsabhāvassātipi attho. Nāma-saddo garahāyaṃ nipāto ‘‘atthi nāma ānanda theraṃ bhikkhuṃ vihesiyamānaṃ ajjhupekkhissathā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 5.166) viya, tena ediso api bhagavā parinibbuto, kā nāma kathā aññesanti garahatthaṃ joteti. Ariyadhammassāti ariyānaṃ dhammassa, ariyabhūtassa vā dhammassa. Dasavidhassa kāyabalassa, ñāṇabalassa ca vasena dasabaladharo. Vajirassa nāma maṇivisesassa saṅghāto samūho ekagghano, tena samāno kāyo yassāti tathā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā vajirasaṅghāto nāma na aññena maṇinā vā pāsāṇena vā bhejjo, api tu soyeva aññaṃ maṇiṃ vā pāsāṇaṃ vā bhindati. Teneva vuttaṃ ‘‘vajirassa natthi koci abhejjo maṇi vā pāsāṇo vā’’ti, evaṃ bhagavāpi kenaci abhejjasarīro. Na hi bhagavato rūpakāye kenaci antarāyo kātuṃ sakkāti. Nāmasaddassa garahājotakattā pi-saddo sampiṇḍanajotako ‘‘na kevalaṃ bhagavāyeva, atha kho aññepī’’ti. Ettha ca evaṃguṇasamannāgatattā aparinibbutasabhāvena bhavituṃ yuttopi esa parinibbuto evāti pakaraṇānurūpamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āsā patthanā kena janetabbā, na janetabbā evāti attho. ‘‘Ahaṃ ciraṃ jīviṃ, ciraṃ jīvāmi, ciraṃ jīvissāmi, sukhaṃ jīviṃ, sukhaṃ jīvāmi, sukhaṃ jīvissāmī’’ti majjanavasena uppanno māno jīvitamado nāma, tena matto pamatto tathā. Saṃvejetīti saṃvegaṃ janeti, tatoyeva assa janassa saddhamme ussāhaṃ janeti. Saṃvejanañhi ussāhahetu ‘‘saṃviggo yoniso padahatī’’ti vacanato.
“如是”这个词,是为了指出即将宣说的整部经的说法成就。而“弟子成就”,是指听闻者的成就,它表明:这是由我——那位已获得无碍解、在五个方面被世尊置于首位、在五种善巧中被法将尊者所称赞的大声闻——亲自听闻的,而且是自己亲闻,不是辗转听来的,也不是从传承中得来的。这样来阐明其含义。“时成就”则是通过“世尊”一词的邻近使用,表明“时”这个词显示的是以佛陀出世为庄严的时刻。因为佛陀出世是最殊胜的时成就。因此这样说:巴利
Desanāsampattiṃ niddisati vakkhamānassa sakalasuttassa ‘‘eva’’nti nidassanato. Sāvakasampattinti suṇantapuggalasampattiṃ niddisati paṭisambhidāppattena pañcasu ṭhānesu bhagavatā etadagge ṭhapitena, pañcasu ca kosallesu āyasmatā dhammasenāpatinā pasaṃsitena mayā mahāsāvakena sutaṃ, tañca kho sayameva sutaṃ na anussutaṃ, na ca paramparābhatanti atthassa dīpanato. Kālasampattiṃ niddisati bhagavātisadasannidhāne payuttassa samayasaddassa buddhuppāda-paṭimaṇḍita-samaya-bhāva-dīpanato. Buddhuppādaparamā hi kālasampadā. Tenetaṃ vuccati –
在劫浊与斗诤的时世,佛陀出世,啊,真是稀有!
就像在火堆中间长出来的、盛开着的、带着蜜汁的莲花一样。巴利
‘‘Kappakasāyakaliyuge , buddhuppādo aho mahacchariyaṃ; Hutavahamajjhe jātaṃ, samuditamakarandamaravinda’’nti. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.1; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1);
这句话的意思是:在被称为“劫”的时间累积中,按历算方式推移着被称为“争斗时”的、以塞迦纪元为准的年岁集合;其中出现的、名为佛陀出世刹那的时日集合,就像盲人登山一样,只是偶尔才出现,又像值得弹指惊叹一样难得,所以是极其稀有。那么,它像什么一样出现呢?就像在名为“火聚”的火焰中间,盛开着一朵含蜜的、名为莲花的水生花一样。这里是在说明“说法者成就”,因为这是出于对功德殊胜的最上众生的尊重而说的增上语。巴利
Tassāyamattho – kappasaṅkhātakālasañcayassa lekhanavasena pavatte kaliyugasaṅkhāte sakarājasammate vassādisamūhe jāto buddhuppādakhaṇasaṅkhāto dinasamūho andhassa pabbatārohanamiva kadāci pavattanaṭṭhena, accharaṃ paharituṃ yuttaṭṭhena ca mahacchariyaṃ hoti. Kimiva jātanti ce? Hutavahasaṅkhātassa pāvakassa majjhe sammā uditamadhumantaṃ aravindasaṅkhātaṃ vārijamiva jātanti. Desakasampattiṃ niddisati guṇavisiṭṭhasattuttamagāravādhivacanato.
就这样,按照六句的先后顺序,从各种角度解释了它们的含义之后,现在要解释“在王舍城与……之间”等句子的含义,于是说“在王舍城与……之间”等话。在“在王舍城与那烂陀之间”这里,可以看出“antarā”这个词是依据通常所说的意义,并考虑到上下文等的关联所表达的意义,也就是“中间”的意思。然而,通过实际用法可以了解它有不同含义,因此用“其间隔”等来说明。其中,“其间隔”就是指那个原因。“你和我商量”,意思是什么间隔、什么原因。“在闪电时”,就是闪电出现的刹那。“洗衣妇看见”,这是关联。“从内”,就是从心中。“忿”,就是因为使心浑浊而起的心的忿怒,也就是贪等。“中间而终”,就是在开始与完成之间结束。“又”表示虽然如此,即便这样仍然具足生起的意义。关于“二大地狱”,是就铜釜地狱而言。“中间”,就是在它们之间。据说,王舍城被穿透之后就是大饿鬼界。在那里,两个大铜釜地狱之间,有这条多波达河流来,所以它是沸腾而流的。而它在这里的空隙中运行,因为其他地方没有。在这里,像“其间隔谁能知”“这些劫之间,从计数来说不可数”“如何在中间中间”等例子中那样,应当举出的是那些表示原因之间的“antarā”一词的用法,而不是表示心念刹那空隙的“antarika”和“antara”的用法。因为“antarā”这个词的含义就是这样提取出来的。不过,这里的意思可能是这样的:在那些“antarika”和“antara”两个词都出现的含义中,也有“antarā”这个词,因为意义相同,所以表示“antarā”含义的“antarika”和“antara”两个词也被举出来了。或者,“antarā”这个词本身,在“yassantarato”这里,为了偈颂组合的方便而缩短了,所以说——巴利
Evaṃ padachakkassa padānukkamena nānappakārato atthavaṇṇanaṃ katvā idāni ‘‘antarā ca rājagaha’’ntiādīnaṃ padānamatthavaṇṇanaṃ karonto ‘‘antarā cā’’tiādimāha. Antarā ca rājagahaṃ antarā ca nāḷandanti ettha samabhiniviṭṭho antarā-saddo dissati sāmaññavacanīyatthamapekkhitvā pakaraṇādisāmatthiyādigatatthamantarenāti attho. Evaṃ panassa nānatthabhāvo payogato avagamīyatīti dasseti ‘‘tadantara’’ntiādinā. Tattha tadantaranti taṃ kāraṇaṃ. Mañca tañca mantenti, kimantaraṃ kiṃ kāraṇanti attho. Vijjantarikāyāti vijjuniccharaṇakkhaṇe. Dhovantī itthī addasāti sambandho. Antaratoti hadaye. Kopāti cittakālussiyakaraṇato cittapakopā rāgādayo. Antarā vosānanti ārambhanipphattīnaṃ vemajjhe pariyosānaṃ āpādi. Apicāti tathāpi, evaṃ pabhavasampannepīti attho. Dvinnaṃ mahānirayānanti lohakumbhīniraye sandhāyāha. Antarikāyāti antarena. Rājagahanagaraṃ kira āvijjhitvā mahāpetaloko. Tattha dvinnaṃ mahālohakumbhīnirayānaṃ antarena ayaṃ tapodā nadī āgacchati, tasmā sā kuthitā sandatīti. Svāyamidha vivare pavattati tadaññesamasambhavato. Ettha ca ‘‘tadantaraṃ ko jāneyya, (a. ni. 6.44; 10.75) etesaṃ antarā kappā, gaṇanāto asaṅkhiyā, (bu. vaṃ. 28.9) antarantarā kathaṃ opātetī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.426; pahā. va. 66; cūḷava. 376) viya kāraṇavemajjhesu vattamānā antarāsaddāyeva udāharitabbā siyuṃ, na pana cittakhaṇavivaresu vattamānā antarikaantarasaddā . Antarāsaddassa hi ayamatthuddhāroti. Ayaṃ panetthādhippāyo siyā – yesu atthesu antarikasaddo, antarasaddo ca pavattati, tesu antarāsaddopīti samānatthattā antarāsaddatthe vattamāno antarikasaddo, antarasaddo, ca udāhaṭoti. Atha vā antarāsaddoyeva ‘‘yassantarato’’ti (udā. 20) ettha gāthābandhasukhatthaṃ rassaṃ katvā vutto –
内心没有忿怒的人,
他已经超越了这样有与无、存在与不存在的种种状态。
他远离了恐惧,拥有安乐,没有忧愁,
天人们也无法见到他。巴利
‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā, Itibhavābhavatañca vītivatto; Taṃ vigatabhayaṃ sukhiṃ asokaṃ, Devā nānubhavanti dassanāyā’’ti. (udā. 20); –
这段偈颂确实出自《优陀那》中的《跋提经》。正是这首偈颂,通过表示自身意义的“ika”一词扩展成词,又被称为“antarikāya”。因此应当知道,这里所引用的和应当引用的之间并不存在矛盾。为了说明“为什么要限定特定的含义”,所以说了“tasmā”等话。这里难道不是只有业格吗?那为什么又说了属格的含义?或者说,在属格的含义中为什么用了业格?为了排除这些追问,所以说了“antarasaddena panā”等话。由此表明:在应当是属格的地方,因为与其他词结合而获得了这个业格。为了说明不仅教法中如此,世间也是如此,所以说了“īdisesu cā”等话。因为通过显示特殊的关联方式,这个含义也就得到了说明。由于与一个“antarā”词结合,两个业格就应当成立。而与两个词结合时,更不用说,其含义自然成就。“思惟字母的人”就是通过性、格等来思惟字母的人,也就是通达音声的人。这里,“字母”一词也应当把以它为基础的词等包括进去。虽然在音声上只结合一次,但在含义上它应当结合两次,因为一个词也可以通过重复等方式以多种方式成立,为了说明这一点,所以说了“dutiyapadenapī”等话。那么,如果不结合,有什么过失?回答说:“如果不结合,就不能获得业格。”意思是:第二个词不能获得业格,因为由于与其他词结合的缘故,在音声上虽然应当是属格,却以业格的变化而得以成立。因为关于音声的论究,就是格的运用。巴利
Hi ayaṃ udāne bhaddiyasutte gāthā. Soyeva ika-saddena sakatthapavattena padaṃ vaḍḍhetvā ‘‘antarikāyā’’ti ca vutto, tasmā udāharaṇodāharitabbānamettha virodhābhāvo veditabboti. Kimatthaṃ atthavisesaniyamo katoti āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Nanu cettha upayogavacanameva, atha kasmā sambandhīyattho vutto, sambandhīyatthe vā kasmā upayogavacanaṃ katanti anuyogasambhavato taṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘antarāsaddena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tena sambandhīyatthe sāmivacanappasaṅge saddantarayogena laddhamidaṃ upayogavacananti dasseti, na kevalaṃ sāsaneva, lokepi evamevidaṃ laddhanti dassento ‘‘īdisesu cā’’tiādimāha. Visesayogatādassanamukhena hi ayamatthopi dassito. Ekenapi antarā-saddena yuttattā dve upayogavacanāni kātabbāni. Dvīhi pana yoge kā kathāti atthassa sijjhanato. Akkharaṃ cintenti liṅgavibhattiyādīhīti akkharacintakā, saddavidū. Akkhara-saddena cettha tammūlakāni padādīnipi gahetabbāni. Yadipi saddato ekameva yujjanti, atthato pana so dvikkhattuṃ yojetabbo ekassāpi padassa āvuttiyādinayena anekadhā sampajjanatoti dasseti ‘‘dutiyapadenapī’’tiādinā. Ko pana doso ayojiteti āha ‘‘ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇātī’’ti. Dutiyapadaṃ na pāpuṇātīti attho saddantarayogavasā saddeyeva sāmivacanappasaṅge upayogavibhattiyā icchitattā. Saddādhikāro hi vibhattipayogo.
“道路”这个词是“长途”的同义词,所以经文说“长路”。那么,到底怎样才算“长途”呢?为了消除“它到底怎样才算是与这个含义相符的长途”这一疑问,注释书用“长途旅行时节……”等话来说明。所谓“长途旅行时节的分别”,是指在《群食学处》等戒条中,对“长途旅行时节”这个词所作的具体词义分别(见《波逸提》第217条)。即使只有半由旬,也算长途路,更何况更远。半由旬就是半由旬,相当于两嘎乌达的距离。但这里说的由旬是四嘎乌达的长度,所以说“踏上长途之路”,就是这个意思。巴利
Addhāna-saddo dīghapariyāyoti āha ‘‘dīghamagga’’nti. Kittāvatā pana so dīgho nāma tadatthabhūtoti codanamapaneti ‘‘addhānagamanasamayassa hī’’tiādinā. Addhānagamanasamayassa vibhaṅgeti gaṇabhojanasikkhāpadādīsu addhānagamanasamayasaddassa padabhājanīyabhūte vibhaṅge (pāci. 217). Aḍḍhayojanampi addhānamaggo, pageva taduttari. Aḍḍhameva yojanassa aḍḍhayojanaṃ, dvigāvutamattaṃ. Idha pana catugāvutappamāṇaṃ yojanameva, tasmā ‘‘addhānamaggapaṭipanno’’ti vadatīti adhippāyo.
“大”这个词在这里指的是“最上”和“众多”,所以注释里说“广大”等等。“以功德之大”是指由于少欲等功德的广大;“以数量之大”是指由于数目众多,也就是在计数上也众多。为了说明这个意思,就用“因为它……”等句子来论证。“那些比丘僧团”是指这里提到的、当时作为随从的比丘僧团,这些(etesaṃ)指诸比丘百〔人〕。“大”就是最上,因为在语句中人们也根据用法取这个最上的意思。“少欲”这个词,从字面声音上看还有剩余,但从意义上看则没有剩余,因为注释里并没有说“少贪”值得赞叹。然而《中部义注》的作者、论师法护长老这样说:“考虑到‘少声’(appasadda)有‘少分’(parittapariyāya)之义,所以义注中说‘文句似乎还有剩余’(mahāni. aṭṭha. 85)。但在这里,‘少声’也可以理解为‘不存在之义’,如同‘我知少病少恼’(ma. ni. 1.225)等句中那样。”在数量上也是“大”,在计数上也是多,由于“比丘僧团”这个词在句中的位置,似乎要对应当被解释的词进行切分,因此不取那个,而依“以那些比丘僧团”再次以句中位置的方式,与应当被解释的词作等同。这就是解释者的惯例:依语法格的需要,如其所应地解释应当被解释的词义,然后再次依其中存在的语法格加以转换而安立。为了阐明“以见、戒共同性而和合故为僧团”这个意思,他说“以见戒共同性和合的沙门众”。在这里,“凡此见是圣、能出离,能令行者正确灭尽苦,具足如是见者住于见共同性”(dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; pari. 274),这是就如此所说的见而言。“凡那些戒是不破、不裂、不杂、不污、自在、智者所赞、不执取、能引生定,具足如是戒者住于戒共同性”(dī. ni. 3.323; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.11; pari. 274),这是就如此所说的诸戒而言,以它们的共同性和合、集合、聚集,就是见戒共同性和合、沙门众,以见戒共同性而和合,这样说。也有“以见戒共同性和合名为”这样的读法。如是,以名为、以说为之义。如是,因为见戒等有决定自性,所以预流者也以见戒共同性互相和合,更何况一来等。如是又说“决定趣向正觉”(saṃ. ni. 2.41; 5.198, 1004),“诸比丘,这是不可能的,无此道理:见具足的人会故意夺众生命,此事无有是处”(a. ni. 6.11)等。因为圣者无论在何处,即使站在远处,也以自己的功德圆满而和合;然而由于“具足如是见者住于见共同性,具足如是戒者住于戒共同性”(ma. ni. 1.492)的说法,凡夫也有以见戒共同性和合之义可得。“共”一词是“一起”之义的不变词。“五……乃至……量”是以“五”一词省略“量”一词,说为外部复合词。这些(etesaṃ)指诸比丘百〔人〕。再次“五量”是详说,这里因中性而省略了词形变化。巴利
Mahantasaddo uttamattho, bahvattho ca idhādhippetoti āha ‘‘mahatā’’tiādi. Guṇamahattenāti appicchatādiguṇamahantabhāvena. Saṅkhyāmahattenāti gaṇanamahantabhāvena. Tadevatthaṃ samattheti ‘‘so hī’’tiādinā. So bhikkhusaṅghoti idha āgato tadā parivārabhūto bhikkhusaṅgho. Mahāti uttamo. Vākyepi hi tamicchanti payogavasā. Appicchatāti nillobhatā saddo cettha sāvaseso, attho pana niravaseso. Na hi ‘‘appalobhatāti abhitthavitumarahatī’’ti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ. Majjhimāgamaṭīkākāro pana ācariyadhammapālatthero evamāha ‘‘appasaddassa parittapariyāyaṃ manasi katvā ‘byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ viyā’ti (mahāni. aṭṭha. 85) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Appasaddo panettha ‘abhāvattho’ tipi sakkā viññātuṃ ‘appābādhatañcasañjānāmī’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.225) viyā’’ti. Saṅkhyāyapi mahāti gaṇanāyapi bahu ahosi, ‘‘bhikkhusaṅgho’’ti padāvatthikantavacanavasena saṃvaṇṇetabbapadassa chedanamiva hotīti tadaparāmasitvā ‘‘tena bhikkhusaṅghenā’’ti puna vākyāvatthikantavacanavasena saṃvaṇṇetabbapadena sadisīkaraṇaṃ. Esā hi saṃvaṇṇanakānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ vibhattiyānapekkhāvasena yathārahaṃ saṃvaṇṇetabbapadatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇetvā puna tattha vijjamānavibhattivasena parivattetvā nikkhipananti. Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatattā saṅghoti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento āha ‘‘diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghātena samaṇagaṇenā’’ti. Ettha pana ‘‘yāyaṃ diṭṭhi ariyā niyyānikā niyyāti takkarassa sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.324, 356; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttāya diṭṭhiyā. ‘‘Yāni tāni sīlāni akhaṇḍāni acchiddāni asabalāni akammāsāni bhujissāni viññuppasatthāni aparāmaṭṭhāni samādhisaṃvattanikāni, tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.323; ma. ni. 1.492; 3.54; a. ni. 6.11; pari. 274) evaṃ vuttānañca sīlānaṃ sāmaññena saṅghāto saṅghaṭito sametoti diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghāto, samaṇagaṇo, diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatoti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Diṭṭhisīlasāmaññasaṅghāṭasaṅkhātenā’’ tipi pāṭho. Tathā saṅkhātena katitenāti attho. Tathā hi diṭṭhisīlādīnaṃ niyatasabhāvattā sotāpannāpi aññamaññaṃ diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatā, pageva sakadāgāmiādayo, tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo’’ti, (saṃ. ni. 2.41; 5.198, 1004) ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ diṭṭhisampanno puggalo sañciccapāṇaṃ jīvitā voropeyya, netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjatī’’ti ca ādi. Ariyapuggalassa hi yattha katthaci dūre ṭhitāpi attano guṇasāmaggiyā saṃhatatāyeva, ‘‘tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhisāmaññagato viharati, (ma. ni. 1.492) tathārūpesu sīlesu sīlasāmaññagato viharatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.492) vacanato pana puthujjanānampi diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena saṃhatabhāvo labbhatiyeva. Saddhiṃ-saddo ekatoti atthe nipāto. Pañca…pe… mattānīti pañca-saddena mattasaddaṃ saṅkhipitvā bāhiratthasamāso vutto. Etesanti bhikkhusatānaṃ. Puna pañca mattā pamāṇāti byāso, nikāralopo cettha napuṃsakaliṅgattā.
Suppiya只是他的名字,并不表示他的品德等。不只是世尊和比丘僧团在一起,游方者Suppiya也和婆罗门青年Brahmadatta在一起——这里是把两个人合在一起说,而且仅仅是因为他们都走在修行路上这一点相同,并不是因为戒律和行为等方面相同,所以才说了“pi这个字”等等。为了发音顺畅,只是把前后两个词连接起来而已,因此说它是“词与词的连接词”,并不是指元音、辅音之间的连音,所以说“是就文句流畅而说的”,这就表明它只是一个填充音节的作用。另外,kho这个词也可以用来表示限定,比如“verañja婆罗门确实听到了”这类句子中就是这样,因此说明他确实已经走上了长途旅程,他的修行路上没有任何障碍,这个意思就显示出来了。“Sañjaya的”指住在王舍城、名叫Sañjaya的游方者,优波提舍和拘利陀最初就是在他那里出家的,当时他们只是穿衣服的游方者,不是裸形游方者。而“yadā, tadā”这些词则表明他们是在同一时间走上长途旅程的。巴利文中的hoti一词通过词形变化表示过去时,或者根据当时的时间参照而这样说,意思是“那时是”。巴利
Suppiyoti tassa nāmameva, na guṇādi. Na kevalaṃ bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṃ bhagavāyeva, atha kho suppiyopi paribbājako brahmadattena māṇavena saddhinti puggalaṃ sampiṇḍeti, tañca kho maggapaṭipannasabhāgatāya eva, na sīlācārādisabhāgatāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pi-kāro’’tiādi. Sukhuccāraṇavasena pubbāparapadānaṃ sambandhamattakarabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘padasandhikaro’’ti vuttaṃ, na pana sarabyañjanādisandhibhāvaṃ, tenāha ‘‘byañjanasiliṭṭhatāvasena vutto’’ti, etena padapūraṇamattanti dasseti. Apica avadhāraṇatthopi kho-saddo yutto ‘‘assosi kho verañjo brāhmaṇo’’tiādīsu (pārā. 1) viya, tena addhānamaggapaṭipanno ahosiyeva, nāssa maggapaṭipattiyā koci antarāyo ahosīti ayamattho dīpito hoti. Sañjayassāti rājagahavāsino sañjayanāmassa paribbājakassa, yassa santike paṭhamaṃ upatissakolitāpi pabbajiṃsu channaparibbājakova , na acelakaparibbājako. ‘‘Yadā, tadā’’ti ca etena samakālameva addhānamaggapaṭipannataṃ dasseti. Atītakālattho pāḷiyaṃ hotisaddo yogavibhāgena, taṃkālāpekkhāya vā evaṃ vuttaṃ, tadā hotīti attho.
“Ante”意思是“在附近”。“Vasati”这个词是就往返等动作而说的,通用于一切威仪路,意思就是“活动、出没”,因此说“在附近活动、在近处出没的弟子”。被天使所警策——即使已被幼童、老人、病人、受刑罚者或行刑者、死者这五种天使所警策、所教诫、所激发而心生悚惧。因为那些就像天神的使者,或者是清净天人的使者,所以叫“天使”。“Hīnakāyūpagā”意思是“投生于低劣之身者”。所谓“人”就是指那些青年,这是前后文的关联。这里是以通称把众生说为“青年”,其他的则是以别称来说。这是依据上下文所提炼出的意义。“Katakammehi”意思是“已作盗贼之业者”。“Taruṇa”指从十六岁到二十岁的人。《优陀那注》中说:“众生从出生到十五岁,都称为‘童子、愚幼’;此后二十年称为‘青年’。”Taruṇa、māṇava、yuvā 在意义上是一样的,不过世俗中也有从十二岁起直到老之前都称为 taruṇa 的说法。巴利
Anteti samīpe. Vasatīti vattapaṭivattādikaraṇavasena sabbiriyāpathasādhāraṇavacanaṃ, avacaratīti vuttaṃ hoti, tenevāha ‘‘samīpacāro santikāvacaro sisso’’ti. Coditā devadūtehīti daharakumāro jarājiṇṇasatto gilāno kammakāraṇā, kammakāraṇikā vā matasattoti imehi pañcahi devadūtehi coditā ovaditā saṃvegaṃ uppāditā samānāpi. Te hi devā viya dūtā, visuddhidevānaṃ vā dūtāti devadūtā. Hīnakāyūpagāti apāyakāyamupagatā. Narasaṅkhātā te māṇavāti sambandho. Sāmaññavasena cettha satto ‘‘māṇavo’’ti vutto, itare pana visesavasena. Pakaraṇādhigato hesa atthuddhāroti. Katakammehīti katacorakammehi. Taruṇoti soḷasavassato paṭṭhāya pattavīsativasso, udānaṭṭhakathāyañhi ‘‘sattā jātadivasato paṭṭhāya yāva pañcadasavassakā, tāva ‘kumārakā, bālā’ti ca vuccanti. Tato paraṃ vīsativassāni ‘yuvāno’’’ti (udā. aṭṭha. 44) vuttaṃ. Taruṇo, māṇavo, yuvāti ca atthato ekaṃ, lokiyā pana ‘‘dvādasavassato paṭṭhāya yāva jaramappatto, tāva taruṇo’’tipi vadanti.
“在这两者之中”是依别出而说的处格。前面已经得到的“一时”那个时间,它的对应说明就是“那时”——也就是世尊在王舍城和那烂陀之间走上长途道路的那一时,须卑也正好在那时走上那条长途道路而说毁谤,梵授则说称赞。Nipātamattaṃ:这里用 matta 这个词,是显示它只是没有别义的填充词。Madhupiṇḍikapariyāya:意思是“蜜丸教说”,你应当受持这部名为蜜丸经的经。Rājañña:指名为弊宿的国王。Pariyāya:轮转,所以是“回、次”;使应当宣说的义理成就,所以是“教说”;取自己的果而转起,所以是“原因”。单凭 aneka 这个词,就已经让人知道“多种”的意思,这里只是为了表达意图,所以说“以多种”。而这里说的“原因”只是似因,并不是决定性的原因,因为毁谤的原因并不真实,所以“以原因”的意思是“以似因”。正如后面会说:“把非因说成‘因’”。通过 bahūhi 等词,显示这里依种姓而说,是以多数义用单数形式。巴利
Tesu vā dvīsu janesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Yo vā ‘‘ekaṃ samaya’’nti pubbe adhigato kālo, tassa paṭiniddeso tatrāti yañhi samayaṃ bhagavā antarā rājagahañca nāḷandañca addhānamaggapaṭipanno, tasmiṃyeva samaye suppiyopi taṃ addhānamaggaṃ paṭipanno avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, brahmadatto ca vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatīti. Nipātamattanti ettha mattasaddena visesatthābhāvato padapūraṇattaṃ dasseti. Madhupiṇḍikapariyāyoti madhupiṇḍikadesanā nāma iti naṃ suttantaṃ dhārehi, rājaññāti pāyāsirājaññanāmakaṃ rājānamālapati. Pariyāyati parivattatīti pariyāyo, vāro. Pariyāyeti desetabbamatthaṃ paṭipādetīti pariyāyo, desanā. Pariyāyati attano phalaṃ paṭiggahetvā pavattatīti pariyāyo, kāraṇaṃ. Anekasaddeneva anekavidhenāti attho viññāyati adhippāyamattenāti āha ‘‘anekavidhenā’’ti. Kāraṇañcettha kāraṇapatirūpakameva, na ekaṃsakāraṇaṃ avaṇṇakāraṇassa abhūtattā, tasmā kāraṇenāti kāraṇapatirūpakenāti attho. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘akāraṇameva ‘kāraṇa’nti vatvā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1). Jātivasenidaṃ bahvatthe ekavacananti dasseti ‘‘bahūhī’’tiādinā.
“对没有缺点、又具备无可比拟功德的人也是如此”这句话,是为了说明接下来要讲的那个理由其实根本算不上理由。意思是:即使一个人没有过失,而且具足无人能比的功德,也照样会这样。应把上下文连起来理解为:人们诽谤佛世尊,说他的不是、说他的过失。从“凡在世间”等语句开始,是在显示无味、无实质、无受用、无作论、断灭论、令人厌恶、应被调伏、苦行者、卑劣等这些看似成立其实不成理由的说法。因此,应当把这一段和“无味……乃至……卑劣”这些词句连接起来。这里所说的是:世间所公认的,由礼拜、起迎、合掌、作事、侍奉、让座、邀请等所构成的和合味,在沙门乔达摩那里是没有的,因此他没有以这称为和合味的味所成就的自性,也没有受用这称为和合味的味。他不应作之说、应断灭之说,这一切就像粪秽一样,而装饰种姓的人则对此厌恶。他的破坏者,正因他不作此事,所以应被调伏。因他不作此事,所以对年长者等加热恼,或因缺乏那样的行为而成为可怜人。因他不作此事,所以从天上胎中消失,或因不作此事而成为低劣胎,如是,这同一不礼拜等行为,应视为无味性等的似因。“没有……乃至……差别”这一句的似因,则应确定为了知孙陀利女死、对轮回初始不可知的承认、对置问不答而以默然作答等如此之类。同样,“思辨所敲打,沙门……乃至……自己的辩才”这一句的似因,则是无师而自证得,于处处如是如是以法开示,于某处反问他人而说,依大目犍连等所告知的方式而作答等如此之类。“沙门……乃至……不是最上人”这些的似因,则是一切法次第不了知、不知世间边、自己没有所愿苦行等如此之类。禅那、解脱等,按前面所说,是过人法。圣、清净、最上,或称为智的见,足以破坏烦恼,是圣智见,于此有,或有此者,故为“足以圣智见”。那差别也是如此。或者,圣智见本身就是差别,按所说足以、适当,有此者,或于此有者,故为“足以圣智见差别”,即是过人法。“思辨所敲打”者,仅以分别从四周搜集来的,或以寻思所打磨的。“伺察所随行”者,以伺察反复擦磨的。“自己的辩才”者,唯自己所显现的,〔应与〕“如是之法”相连结。“非理由”者,不当、不成立,这是对“理由”一词的简别。因为无味性等过失在佛世尊那里确实不存在,而在法众中,恶说、恶行等是非理由,或无正当理由、仅是自己的空口承认。这也是自然语词。在此义中,说了理由之后,“如理由”一词,应以譬喻方式连接,因为所指的是似因。如是如是者,以对年长者等不作问候等的种种方式。由于“味”一词在功德、赞叹中通用,所以按次第说“诽谤不是、过失”。巴利
‘‘Avaṇṇavirahitassaasamānavaṇṇasamannāgatassapī’’ti vakkhamānakāraṇassa akāraṇabhāvahetudassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, dosavirahitassapi asadisaguṇasamannāgatassāpīti attho. Buddhassa bhagavato avaṇṇaṃ dosaṃ nindanti sambandho. ‘‘Yaṃ loke’’tiādinā arasarūpanibbhogaakiriyavādaucchedavādajegucchīvenayikatapassīapagabbhabhāvānaṃ kāraṇapatirūpakaṃ dasseti. Tasmāti hi etaṃ ‘‘arasarūpo…pe… apagabbho’’ti imehi padehi sambandhitabbaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – lokasammato abhivādanapaccuṭṭhānaañjalīkammasāmīcikammaāsanābhinimantanasaṅkhāto sāmaggīraso samaṇassa gotamassa natthi, tasmā so sāmaggīrasasaṅkhātena rasena asampannasabhāvo, tena sāmaggīrasasaṅkhātena paribhogena asamannāgato. Tassa akattabbatāvādo, ucchijjitabbatāvādo ca, taṃ sabbaṃ gūthaṃ viya maṇḍanajātiyo puriso jegucchī. Tassa vināsako sova tadakaraṇato vinetabbo. Tadakaraṇena vayovuḍḍhe tāpeti tadācāravirahitatāya vā kapaṇapuriso. Tadakaraṇena devalokagabbhato apagato, tadakaraṇato vā so hīnagabbho cāti evaṃ tadeva abhivādanādiakaraṇaṃ arasarūpatādīnaṃ kāraṇapatirūpakaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Natthi…pe… viseso’’ti etassa pana ‘‘sundarikāya nāma paribbājikāya maraṇānavabodho, saṃsārassa ādikoṭiyā apaññāyanapaṭiññā, ṭhapanīyapucchāya abyākatavatthubyākaraṇa’’nti evamādīni kāraṇapatirūpakāni niddhāritabbāni, tathā ‘‘takkapariyāhataṃ samaṇo…pe… sayampaṭibhāna’’nti etassa ‘‘anācariyakena sāmaṃ paṭivedhena tattha tattha tathā tathā dhammadesanā, katthaci paresaṃ paṭipucchākathanaṃ, mahāmoggallānādīhi ārocitanayeneva byākaraṇa’’nti evamādīni, ‘‘samaṇo…pe… na aggapuggalo’’ti etesaṃ pana ‘‘sabbadhammānaṃ kameneva anavabodho, lokantassa ajānanaṃ, attanā icchitatapacārābhāvo’’ti evamādīni. Jhānavimokkhādi heṭṭhā vuttanayena uttarimanussadhammo. Ariyaṃ visuddhaṃ, uttamaṃ vā ñāṇasaṅkhātaṃ dassanaṃ, alaṃ kilesaviddhaṃsanasamatthaṃ ariyañāṇadassanaṃ ettha, etassāti vā alamariyañāṇadassano. Sveva viseso tathā. Ariyañāṇadassanameva vā visesaṃ vuttanayena alaṃ pariyattaṃ yassa, yasminti vā alamariyañāṇadassanaviseso, uttarimanussadhammova. Takkapariyāhatanti kappanāmattena samantato āharitaṃ, vitakkena vā parighaṭitaṃ. Vīmaṃsānucaritanti vīmaṃsanāya punappunaṃ parimajjitaṃ. Sayampaṭibhānanti sayameva attano vibhūtaṃ, tādisaṃ dhammanti sambandho. Akāraṇanti ayuttaṃ anupapattiṃ. Kāraṇapade cetaṃ visesanaṃ. Na hi arasarūpatādayo dosā bhagavati saṃvijjanti, dhammasaṅghesu ca durakkhātaduppaṭipannādayo akāraṇanti vā yuttikāraṇarahitaṃ attanā paṭiññāmattaṃ. Pakatikammapadañcetaṃ. Imasmiñca atthe kāraṇaṃ vatvāti ettha kāraṇaṃ ivāti iva-saddattho rūpakanayena yojetabbo patirūpakakāraṇassa adhippetattā. Tathā tathāti jātivuḍḍhānamanabhivādanādinā tena tena ākārena. Vaṇṇasaddassa guṇapasaṃsāsu pavattanato yathākkamaṃ ‘‘avaṇṇaṃ dosaṃ ninda’’nti vuttaṃ.
“恶说”就是恶劣地宣说,同样也是难以证悟。“从轮回中出离”就是出离,它本身就是导向出离的,或者从那里出离就是脱离,致力于此的就是导向出离者。或者,“从轮回中出离”就是导向出离者,这是把 ya 音变成 ka 音,又把 ī 音变成短音。音声学者说:“anīya 这个词通常表示行为者”,但导向出离者并不是那样。按照前面所说的方式,它是令轮回之苦不能止息的。“对立之行”就是与正行相违的行。“不随顺之行”就是不随顺善士的行。“随顺非法之行”就是不随顺出世间法的行。那为什么在这里用现在时态说“正在说过失,正在说功德”呢?难道在结集的时候,那个说功德过失的时刻不是已经过去了吗?确实如此,但应该知道,这就像“他正走在长途路上”中的 hoti 一词一样,因为 bhāsati 这个词具有过去时的含义,所以才这样说。或者,是相对于他们说功德过失的那个时间点才这样说的,这样一来,虽然注释书里没有明说,“在那里”这个词的时间指示区分也就很好地成立了。巴利
Durakkhātoti duṭṭhumākkhāto, tathā duppaṭivedito. Vaṭṭato niyyātīti niyyānaṃ, tadeva niyyāniko, tato vā niyyānaṃ nissaraṇaṃ, tattha niyuttoti niyyāniko. Vaṭṭato vā niyyātīti niyyāniko ya-kārassa ka-kāraṃ, ī-kārassa ca rassaṃ katvā. ‘‘Anīya-saddo hi bahulā kattuabhidhāyako’’ti saddavidū vadanti, na niyyāniko tathā. Saṃsāradukkhassa anupasamasaṃvattaniko vuttanayena. Paccanīkapaṭipadanti sammāpaṭipattiyā viruddhapaṭipadaṃ. Ananulomapaṭipadanti sappurisānaṃ ananulomapaṭipadaṃ. Adhammānulomapaṭipadanti lokuttaradhammassa ananulomapaṭipadaṃ. Kasmā panettha ‘‘avaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, vaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti ca vattamānakālaniddeso kato, nanu saṅgītikālato so avaṇṇavaṇṇānaṃ bhāsanakālo atītoti? Saccametaṃ, ‘‘addhānamaggapaṭipanno hotī’’ti ettha hoti-saddo viya atītakālatthattā pana bhāsati-saddassa evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā yasmiṃ kāle tehi avaṇṇo vaṇṇo ca bhāsīyati, tamapekkhitvā evaṃ vuttaṃ, evañca katvā ‘‘tatrā’’ti padassa kālapaṭiniddesavikappanaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ avuttampi supapannaṃ hoti.
“须毕亚……(中略)……说”这一句,是为了显示与巴利经文的关联,也就是“他的内弟子……”等话。不应再触犯、也不应再越过的是诽谤圣者的业。那位老师,就是那位老师。剑锋,是指剑的锋利部分。锯齿排列,是指锯子被称为齿的不平整排列。就像用手、用脚或任何肢节击打而嬉戏一样。由于眼、耳、鼻三处而破裂的慢,就是已破慢者,指他。说过失,是指以说过失为因。这里“说”这个字有原因的含义。不是利,不是增长,就是非利。那本身就是灾祸,意思是极大的灾祸,他将遭遇它,因为诽谤三宝具有决定性的极重罪。因此说:巴利
‘‘Suppiyassa pana…pe… bhāsatī’’ti pāḷiyā sambandhadassanaṃ ‘‘antevāsī panassā’’tiādivacanaṃ. Aparāmasitabbaṃ ariyūpavādakammaṃ, tathā anakkamitabbaṃ.Svāyanti so ācariyo. Asidhāranti asinā tikhiṇabhāgaṃ. Kakacadanta pantiyanti khandhakakacassa dantasaṅkhātāya visamapantiyā. Hatthena vā pādena vā yena kenaci vā aṅgapaccaṅgena paharitvā kīḷamāno viya. Akkhikaṇṇakosasaṅkhātaṭṭhānavasena tīhi pakārehi bhinno mado yassāti pabhinnamado, taṃ. Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsamānoti avaṇṇaṃ bhāsanahetu. Hetuattho hi ayaṃ māna-saddo. Na ayo vuḍḍhi anayo. Soyeva byasanaṃ, atirekabyasananti attho, taṃ pāpuṇissati ekantamahāsāvajjattā ratanattayopavādassa. Tenevāha –
谁去称赞一个该被谴责的人,
或者,他去指责一个本该受称赞的人;
他用嘴巴挑拣出罪过,
他因为那样的罪过而得不到安乐。巴利
‘‘Yo nindiyaṃ pasaṃsati, Taṃ vā nindati yo pasaṃsiyo; Vicināti mukhena so kaliṃ, Kalinā tena sukhaṃ na vindatī’’ti. (su. ni. 663; saṃ ni. 1.180-181; netti. 92);
“我们的老师”等话,是先显示梵授王生起了悚惧心,以及他对自己的老师生起悲悯,然后说明:虽然弟子应当随顺老师,但这个人因为是贤智者,所以在这样的事情上并不盲从。现在为了显示他业自属智的生起,便说“然而,对老师……”等话。Halāhala 是指当下就能致死的毒。因为“hanati”(杀)的 na 音变成 la 音,就成了 halo;而 halā 中特殊的一种,以中间长音的方式称为 halāhala,以此排除了其他八种毒。正如所说:巴利
‘‘Amhākaṃācariyo’’tiādinā brahmadattassa saṃveguppattiṃ, attano ācariye ca kāruññappavattiṃ dassetvā kiñcāpi antevāsinā ācariyassa anukūlena bhavitabbaṃ, ayaṃ pana paṇḍitajātikattā na īdisesu ṭhānesu tamanuvattatīti idānissa kammassakatāñāṇappavattiṃ dassento ‘‘ācariye kho panā’’tiādimāha. Halāhalanti taṅkhaṇaññeva māraṇakaṃ visaṃ. Hanatīti hi halo na-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā, halānampi viseso halo halāhalo majjhedīghavasena, etena ca aññe aṭṭhavidhe vise nivatteti. Vuttañca –
Pume、paṇḍe、kākola、kāḷakūṭa、halāhala,
凡是生在萨罗提基与孙基基的,那位梵天之子燃灯者。
达拉多和瓦恰那跋,这些就是九种区分。巴利
‘‘Pume paṇḍe ca kākola, kāḷakūṭahalāhalā; Sarotthikosuṅkike yo, brahmaputto padīpano; Dārado vacchanābho ca, visabhedā ime navā’’ti.
Kharodaka 就是湍急的水流。也有写成 “Khārodaka” 的读法,意思是因太咸而苦涩的水。Narakapapāta 就是盗贼的悬崖。Māṇavaka 是称呼自己来告诫自己,就像“跋陀利,你确实错过了时机”等经文里那样。说“业是自己所有的”,就是先说明业是属于自己的,然后用“随自己的业而趣向相应之处”等话进一步解释。Yoniso 就是有方法、有道理地。Ummujjitvā 的意思是:不像老师那样,不以如理的方式沉溺在诽谤圣者中,而是从不如理地诽谤圣者中浮出来,也就是向上超脱。Maddamāno 就是压碎、破坏。为了让人们看到这里唯一的原因就是原因,所以说了 “sammā”。用 “yathā taṃ” 等话显示他已经开始了,“nti” 只是语助词。这里说的是:就像另一位有贤善本性的良家子弟,依出身和威仪,以种种方式开始称扬三宝的功德;这个人也已经开始这样做了,而且也许这位老师会因为这一点点称扬三宝功德而停止诽谤。巴利
Kharodakanti caṇḍasotodakaṃ. ‘‘Khārodaka’’ntipi pāṭho, atiloṇatāya tittodakanti attho. Narakapapātanti corapapātaṃ. Māṇavakāti attānameva ovadituṃ ālapati ‘‘samayopi kho te bhaddāli appaṭividdhoahosī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.135) viya. ‘‘Kammassakā’’ti kammameva attasantakabhāvaṃ vatvā tadeva vivarati ‘‘attano kammānurūpameva gatiṃ gacchantī’’tiādinā. Yonisoti upāyena ñāyena. Ummujjitvāti ācariyo viya ayoniso ariyūpavāde animmujjanto yoniso ariyūpavādato ummujjitvā, uddhaṃ hutvāti attho. Maddamānoti maddanto bhindanto. Ekaṃsakāraṇameva idha kāraṇanti dassetukāmena ‘‘sammā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Yathā ta’’ntiādinā tassa samāraddhabhāvaṃ dasseti, nti ca nipātamattaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yathā añño paṇḍitasabhāvo jāti ācāravasena kulaputto anekapariyāyena tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsitumārabhati, tathā ayampi āraddho, tañca kho api nāmāyamācariyo ettakenāpi ratanattayāvaṇṇabhāsato orameyyāti.
蛇王之色,就是蛇王的样子。色泽如莲花般美好,是指颜色美丽,或者指色身美好。我不拍打、不折断水生的莲花,只是从远处远远地闻它的香气,这就是这段话的意思。atha 是说即使如此。gandhatthena 就是偷香的人。saññūḷhā 是被系缚、被捆绑。gahapati 是尼乾陀若提子对居士优婆离的称呼。在这里,应当被描述为“他是这样这样的”、应当被说明的,是色,也就是形状。能够无混杂地加以区分的,是色,也就是种姓。当发生变化时,能显示其成为令心欢喜之状态的,是色,也就是色处。能依其自性使果得以明了的,是色,也就是原因。以大小等来衡量的,是色,也就是量度。被称赞的,是色,也就是功德。对功德的称扬,是色,也就是赞美。vaṇṇa 这个词在各处的用法,应当这样理解。以 ādi 这个词,把金砂、碎米等也包括进来。“在这里,功德和赞美也都是”,这正好印证了前面所说的“据说这个人……”等话。这里的 kira 表示传闻,或者只是凑足音节。guṇūpasañhita 是指与功德相关联。说“与功德相关联的赞美”时,因为赞美与功德不可分离,所以功德之说本身就已经成立,因此显示出这两种含义都是说得通的。巴利
Sapparājavaṇṇanti ahirājavaṇṇaṃ. Vaṇṇapokkharatāyāti vaṇṇasundaratāya, vaṇṇasarīrena vā. Vārijaṃ kamalaṃ na paharāmi na bhañjāmi, ārā dūratova upasiṅghāmīti attho. Athāti evaṃ santepi. Gandhatthenoti gandhacoro. Saññūḷhāti ganthitā bandhitā. Gahapatīti upāligahapatiṃ nāṭaputtassa ālapanaṃ. Ettha ca vaṇṇitabbo ‘‘ayamīdiso’’ti pakāsetabboti vaṇṇo, saṇṭhānaṃ. Vaṇṇīyati asaṅkarato vavatthāpīyatīti vaṇṇo, jāti. Vaṇṇeti vikāramāpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti vaṇṇo, rūpāyatanaṃ. Vaṇṇīyati phalametena yathāsabhāvato vibhāvīyatīti vaṇṇo, kāraṇaṃ. Vaṇṇīyati appamahantādivasena pamīyatīti vaṇṇo, pamāṇaṃ. Vaṇṇīyati pasaṃsīyatīti vaṇṇo, guṇo. Vaṇṇanaṃ guṇasaṃkittanaṃ vaṇṇo, pasaṃsā. Evaṃ tattha tattha vaṇṇasaddassuppatti veditabbā. Ādisaddena jātarūpapuḷinakkharādayo saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Idha guṇopi pasaṃsāpī’’ti vuttameva samattheti ‘‘ayaṃ kirā’’tiādinā. Kirāti cettha anussavanatthe, padapūraṇamatte vā. Guṇūpasañhitanti guṇopasaññutaṃ. ‘‘Guṇūpasañhitaṃ pasaṃsa’’nti pana vadanto pasaṃsāya eva guṇabhāsanaṃ siddhaṃ tassā tadavinābhāvato, tasmā idamatthadvayaṃ yujjatīti dasseti.
“如何说”呢?于是说“在那里”等等。他是单独一个人,所以叫“唯一的人”。凭什么意义说是“唯一的人”?因为无可比拟,因为功德殊胜,因为与无等者相等。因为他在最初发愿的时候,从依次作意十波罗蜜开始,凭借积累菩提资粮的功德和佛陀的功德,与其余大众不相似。他的那些功德也超胜其他众生的功德,而过去的正自觉者与一切众生并不相等,但这位唯独在色身和名身上与他们相等。“世间”指众生世间。“正在生起者生起”这两者都是未完成语态,因为表示正在进行的生起动作。正在生起者是为了大众的利益而生起,不是出于别的什么原因——这里的意思应当这样理解。因为这里的“-māna”这个词缀是表示特征,而这样的特征无法用别的词缀特征来否定。再者,这里应当知道有“正在生起者”“生起”“已生起者”的区分。从燃灯佛足下开始,直到不还果,这期间叫“正在生起者”;在阿拉汉道的刹那,叫“生起”;在阿拉汉果的刹那,叫“已生起者”。因为佛陀不像声闻弟子那样次第生起神变智等,而是在阿拉汉道的当下,整个一切知智的功德聚就已经具足了,所以因为一切作用都已生起,在阿拉汉果的刹那叫“已生起者”;因为是在那果位产生的,在其他刹那则随宜地说“正在生起者生起”。在这部经里,也是针对阿拉汉果的刹那而说“生起”。因为过去时的表达在某些地方也被见到用作现在时,所以这里的意思是“已生起”。这样一来,这里的“-māna”这个词缀就是表能力的意思。以能力而言,大菩萨在最后一生中的投生是可以成立的;具备以能力而言作为菩提资粮的圆满,就是这个意思。因为以那样的能力相应,才叫“正在生起者”。与一切众生不相等,却与那些无等者——过去的诸佛——相等,就像中间的金块一样,是毫无差别的,这是对“唯一的人”的修饰语。连根拔除称为“执着”的渴爱,就是“拔除执着”。截断轮回,就是“截断轮回”。巴利
Kathaṃ bhāsatīti āha ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi. Eko ca so puggalo cāti ekapuggalo. Kenaṭṭhena ekapuggalo? Asadisaṭṭhena, guṇavisiṭṭhaṭṭhena, asamasamaṭṭhena ca. So hi paṭhamābhinīhārakāle dasannaṃ pāramīnaṃ paṭipāṭiyā āvajjanaṃ ādiṃ katvā bodhisambhārasambharaṇaguṇehi ceva buddhaguṇehi ca sesamahājanena asadiso. Ye cassa guṇā, tepi aññasattānaṃ guṇehi visiṭṭhā, purimakā ca sammāsambuddhā sabbasattehi asamā, tehi pana ayameveko rūpakāyanāmakāyehi samo.Loketi sattaloke. ‘‘Uppajjamāno uppajjatī’’ti pana idaṃ ubhayampi vippakatavacanameva uppādakiriyāya vattamānakālikattā. Uppajjamāno bahujanahitāya uppajjati, na aññena kāraṇenāti evaṃ panettha attho veditabbo. Lakkhaṇe hesa māna-saddo, evarūpañcettha lakkhaṇaṃ na sakkā aññena saddalakkhaṇena paṭibāhituṃ. Apica uppajjamāno nāma, uppajjati nāma, uppanno nāmāti ayamettha bhedo veditabbo. Esa hi dīpaṅkarapādamūlato paṭṭhāya yāva anāgāmiphalaṃ, tāva uppajjamāno nāma, arahattamaggakkhaṇe uppajjati nāma, arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāma. Buddhānañhi sāvakānaṃ viya na paṭipāṭiyā iddhividhañāṇādīni uppajjanti, saheva pana arahattamaggena sakalopi sabbaññuguṇarāsi āgatova nāma hoti, tasmā nibbattasabbakiccattā arahattaphalakkhaṇe uppanno nāma, tadanibbattattā tadaññakkhaṇe yathārahaṃ ‘‘uppajjamāno uppajjati’’ cceva vuccati. Imasmimpi sutte arahattaphalakkhaṇaṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atītakālikassāpi vattamānapayogassa katthaci diṭṭhattā uppanno hotīti ayañhettha attho. Evaṃ sati ‘‘uppajjamāno’’ti cettha māna-saddo sāmatthiyattho. Yāvatā sāmatthiyena mahābodhisattānaṃ carimabhave uppatti icchitabbā, tāvatā sāmatthiyena bodhisambhārabhūtena paripuṇṇena samannāgato hutvāti attho. Tathāsāmatthiyayogena hi uppajjamāno nāmāti. Sabbasattehi asamo, asamehi purimabuddheheva samo majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇa nikkhaṃ viya nibbisiṭṭho, ‘‘ekapuggalo’’ti cetassa visesanaṃ. Ālayasaṅkhātaṃ taṇhaṃ samugghāteti samucchindatīti ālayasamugghāto. Vaṭṭaṃ upacchindatīti vaṭṭupacchedo.
“能够”是指有能力。虽然说了“五部”,但因为它们有很多组成部分,仅凭这一点并不能完全涵盖一切,所以说“九分教法、八万四千法蕴”。“未满足”是指没有进入之处。不应说佛等功德无量,因为在这里通过阐明无余的一切,巴利注释本身就已完成,而且以令心欢喜的业处成就来说也具有果报。“力”应理解为以全力阐明。“他为何要如此深入而说呢?”于是说“然而梵授……”等。依次或反复听闻就是“传闻”,即辗转听闻。“等”字涵盖行相寻思、审虑忍许。“其中,‘这是美好的理由’这样自己寻思理由就是行相寻思。以自己的见解审虑而后忍可、欢喜,就是审虑忍许”,这是注释中所说,意思是与那些(行相寻思等)相关联。“唯”字在这里是遮止限定的意思,以此遮止如上所说的理由。“以自己的力”是指以自己的智能力,而非与佛等功德相称,这是意旨。因为佛等功德是无量无数种种差别的。这确实说过——巴利
Pahontenāti sakkontena. ‘‘Pañcanikāye’’ti vatvāpi anekāvayavattā tesaṃ na ettakena sabbathā pariyādānanti ‘‘navaṅgaṃ satthusāsanaṃcaturāsītidhammakkhandhasahassānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atitthenāti anotaraṇaṭṭhānena. Na vattabbo aparimāṇavaṇṇattā buddhādīnaṃ, niravasesānañca tesaṃ idha pakāsanena pāḷisaṃvaṇṇanāya eva sampajjanato, cittasampahaṃsanakammaṭṭhānasampajjanavasena ca saphalattā. Thāmo veditabbo sabbathāmena pakāsitattā. Kiṃ pana so tathā ogāhetvā bhāsatīti āha. ‘‘Brahmadatto panā’’tiādi. Anukkamena punappunaṃ vā savanaṃ anussavo, paramparasavanaṃ. Ādi-saddena ākāraparivitakkadiṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyo saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha ‘‘sundaramidaṃ kāraṇa’’nti evaṃ sayameva kāraṇaparivitakkanaṃ ākāraparivitakko. Attano diṭṭhiyā nijjhāyitvā khamanaṃ ruccanaṃ diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantīti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ, tehiyeva sambandhitenāti attho. Matta-saddo hettha visesanivattiattho, tena yathāvuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ nivatteti. Attano thāmenāti attano ñāṇabaleneva, na pana buddhādīnaṃ guṇānurūpanti adhippāyo. Asaṅkhyeyyāparimeyyappabhedā hi buddhādīnaṃ guṇā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
即使是佛陀,也要赞叹佛陀的功德,
就算用整整一劫的时间也不宣说别的功德,
就算用整整一劫那么漫长的时间来耗尽
如来的功德也不会灭尽。巴利
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.304; 3.141; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.425; udā. aṭṭha. 53; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 4.1; apa. aṭṭha. 2.91; cariyā. aṭṭha. 9, 329);
在这里也将会说到“然而这是微不足道的”等等。巴利
Idhāpi vakkhati ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādi.
“iti”这个词是表示举例的,它指示出前面所说的那种情形。“ha”只是一个语气词,所以经文说“evaṃ te”。“aññamaññassā”这个说法是惯用语,就像“eko ekāyā”那个词一样;为了说明这一点,论师用惯用语“aññoaññassā”来加以解释。说了“ujumevā”是带有强调限定的复合词之后,又指出通过它所要排除的情况,说“īsakampi apariharitvā”,意思是连一点点都不偏离。怎么排除呢?于是说“ācariyena hī”等等。虽然前面已经一次性指出过说毁誉之语的情形,但由于“直接反对论者”这一说法,应当知道他们这样说不止一次,而是多次;为了说明这一点,所以说“puna itaro avaṇṇaṃ itaro vaṇṇa”。由此成立“vi”字具有多种含义。“sāraphalake”指心材木板,或者最上等的木板。“visarukkhaāṇi”指毒木制成的板条。他们是随着行住坐卧的威仪而跟随,并不是随着正行道而跟随。巴利
Iti-saddo nidassanattho vuttappakāraṃ nidasseti. Ha-kāro nipātamattanti āha ‘‘evaṃ te’’ti. Aññamaññassā’’ti idaṃ ruḷhipadaṃ ‘‘eko ekāyā’’ti (pārā. 444, 452) padaṃ viyāti dassento ‘‘aññoaññassā’’ti ruḷhipadeneva vivarati. ‘‘Ujumevā’’ti sāvadhāraṇasamāsataṃ vatvā tena nivattetabbatthaṃ āha ‘‘īsakampi apariharitvā’’ti, thokatarampi avirajjhitvāti attho. Kathanti āha ‘‘ācariyena hī’’tiādi. Pubbe ekavāramiva avaṇṇavaṇṇabhāsane niddiṭṭhepi ‘‘ujuvipaccanīkavādā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.1) vuttattā anekavārameva te evaṃ bhāsantīti veditabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘puna itaro avaṇṇaṃ itaro vaṇṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Tena hi visaddassa vividhatthataṃ samattheti. Sāraphalaketi sāradāruphalake , uttamaphalake vā. Visarukkhaāṇinti visadārumayapaṭāṇiṃ. Iriyāpathānubandhanena anubandhā honti, na sammāpaṭipattianubandhanena.
“以头随观”意思是:用头随观,也就是抬起头,沿着道路依次观看。“那时”是指:世尊踏上那段长途旅程的那一年、那一季、那一月或那半月。“那一天”则单独指出具体日子,因为须臾等时间已经包含在“日”里。这里“踏上那段长途”是依处格。正因如此,为了显示动作之间没有间断,才把在王舍城乞食和之前的动作一起用现在时来说;否则,如果理解成“那时在王舍城乞食,并且踏上那段长途旅程”,就会产生不想要的意思。因为所缘不同。“在王舍城周围的”是指:环绕王舍城而住者。“他”是指:如是住于王舍城的世尊。“那一天”是指:踏上长途道路的那一天。“食后”是指:食后之时,于食后之时。“从乞食返回”是指:为乞食而行并进食之处,从彼处离开。“踏上那条长途”是指:“期望在那烂陀为应受调伏者实现种种利益与安乐,为了此一因缘,将宣说以三种戒庄严、摧毁种种诡诈言说等邪命、缠缚六十二见之网、震动一万世界体系的《梵网经》”,他踏上了如上所说的长途道路;但这里的原因从论本身即可明了,故未另说。至此,“世尊为何踏上那段长途”这一责难便已澄清。巴利
Sīsānulokinoti sīsena anulokino, sīsaṃ ukkhipitvā maggānukkamena olokayamānāti attho. Tasmiṃ kāleti yamhi saṃvacchare, utumhi, māse, pakkhe vā bhagavā taṃ addhānamaggaṃ paṭipanno, tasmiṃ kāle. Tena hi aniyamato saṃvaccharautumāsaḍḍhamāsāva niddisitā ‘‘taṃ divasa’’nti divasassa visuṃ niddiṭṭhattā, muhuttādīnañca divasapariyāpannato. ‘‘Taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno’’ti cettha ādhāravacanametaṃ. Teneva hi kiriyāvicchedadassanavasena ‘‘rājagahe piṇḍāya caratī’’ti saha pubbakālakiriyāhi vattamānaniddeso kato, itarathā tasmiṃ kāle rājagahe piṇḍāya carati, taṃ addhānamaggañca paṭipannoti anadhippetattho āpajjeyya. Na hi asamānavisayā kiriyā ekādhārā sambhavanti, yā cettha adhippetā addhānapaṭipajjanakiriyā, sā ca aniyamitā na yuttāti. Rājagahaparivattakesūti rājagahaṃ parivattetvā ṭhitesu. ‘‘Aññatarasmi’’nti iminā tesu bhagavato anibaddhavāsaṃ dasseti. Soti evaṃ rājagahe vasamāno so bhagavā. Piṇḍāya caraṇenapi hi tattha paṭibaddhabhāvavacanato sannivāsattameva dasseti. Yadi pana ‘‘piṇḍāya caramāno so bhagavā’’ti paccāmaseyya, yathāvuttova anadhippetattho āpajjeyyāti. Taṃ divasanti yaṃ divasaṃ addhānamaggaṃ paṭipanno, taṃ divasa. Taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipannoti ettha accantasaṃyogavacanametaṃ. Bhattabhuñjanato pacchā pacchābhattaṃ, tasmiṃ pacchābhattasamaye. Piṇḍapātapaṭikkantoti yattha piṇḍapātatthāya caritvā bhuñjanti, tato apakkanto. Taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipannoti ‘‘nāḷandāyaṃ veneyyānaṃ vividhahitasukhanipphattiṃ ākaṅkhamāno imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā tividhasīlālaṅkataṃ nānāvidhakuhanalapanādimicchājīvaviddhaṃsanaṃ dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ dasasahassilokadhātupakampanaṃ brahmajālasuttaṃ desessāmī’’ti taṃ yathāvuttaṃ dīghamaggaṃ paṭipanno, idaṃ pana kāraṇaṃ pakaraṇatova pākaṭanti na vuttaṃ. Ettāvatā ‘‘kasmā pana bhagavā taṃ addhānaṃ paṭipanno’’ti codanā visodhitā hoti.
现在,为了澄清另一项责难,说了“须卑也”这句话。这里的关联要按前面“追随那一天”等所说的方式来理解。“pāto asitabbo”就是早餐,已经吃过早餐的人就是“bhuttapātarāsa”(已食早餐者)。“Iccevāti”的意思是“就这样”把心放在这件事上,而不是想“我要紧紧跟在世尊和比丘僧团后面”。“因此说‘不知道世尊已走上那条路’”,意思就是确实不知道而跟随着。他并不是想见到世尊,所以说“如果他知道,就不会跟随”。到这里,“须卑为什么要跟随”这项责难就澄清了。接着用“他”等话又澄清另一项责难。世尊有时是以某种特别的方式出行的,比如去降伏央掘魔罗、去拜访波拘沙提等;有时则是以佛陀的威神力出行。为了说明这里也是以这样的佛陀威神力出行,所以说了“以佛陀威神力闪耀”等话。这里的“sirī”(威神力)指的是身体庄严等成就,又用比喻来说明它,说“像被红毯围绕一样”等等。“Gacchati”(行)就是移动,就像“经行”那样。移动着行走的山,意思就是像那样一座金山的山峰。巴利
Idāni itarampi codanaṃ visodhituṃ ‘‘suppiyopī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmiṃ kāle, taṃ divasaṃ anubandhoti ca vuttanayena sambandho. Pāto asitabboti pātarāso, so bhutto yenāti bhuttapātarāso. Iccevāti evameva manasi sannidhāya, na pana ‘‘bhagavantaṃ, bhikkhusaṅghañca piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhissāmī’’ti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavato taṃ maggaṃ paṭipannabhāvaṃ ajānantovā’’ti, tathā ajānanto eva hutvā anubandhoti attho. Na hi so bhagavantaṃ daṭṭhumeva icchati, tenāha ‘‘sace pana jāneyya, nānubandheyyā’’ti. Ettāvatā ‘‘kasmā ca suppiyo anubandho’’ti codanā visodhitā hoti. ‘‘So’’tiādinā aparampi codanaṃ visodheti. Kadāci pana bhagavā aññataraveseneva gacchati aṅgulimāladamanapakkusātiabhiggamanādīsu, kadāci buddhasiriyā, idhāpi īdisāya buddhasiriyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhasiriyā sobhamāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sirīti cettha sarīrasobhaggādisampatti, tadeva upamāvasena dasseti ‘‘rattakambalaparikkhittamivā’’tiādinā. Gacchatīti jaṅgamo yathā ‘‘caṅkamo’’ti. Cañcalamāno gacchanto giri, tādisassa kanakagirino sikharamivāti attho.
“据说在那时”等这一段,是为了说明这个说法,因为它在巴利圣典中没有出现,在古代义注中也没有提到,所以是依据传闻而成立的说法。为了表明这一点,注释者才说“据说”。他们是这样说的。事实究竟是这样还是那样,暂且不论;凡是没有自己亲眼见过、亲耳听过、亲自感知过的,就应该看作只是传闻。
六种颜色是蓝、黄、红、白、橙、以及光辉色。“周遍”就是从四周、从十个方向遍满。所谓“八十手长”,是依照那些光芒自然运行所及的范围来说的。因此应当知道:在四周以及上方,各在八十手长的范围内,光芒自然密集而住。不过,律注中说:“那正是所谓的‘随量光’。因为六色光芒像从池中铺开的席子一样向十个方向流布,看起来大约有一寻那么长,所以称为随量光。”而在《等诵经》的义注中则会说:“从东边的身体放出金色光芒,占据八十手长的空间;从西边的身体……从右手……从左手放出金色光芒,占据八十手长的空间;从上方发际开始,一切发髻放出孔雀颈色的光芒,占据虚空八十手长的空间;从下方足底放出珊瑚色光芒,占据坚实大地八十手长的空间。这样,在四周八十手长的范围内,六色佛光闪耀、闪动、流布。”有些人只凭臆测另作别的说法,那不应采纳,因为那些说法在别处也没有出现,而且不合理。
为了显示那些佛光在当时并没有被遮蔽,所以才说“据说在那时”。因为就像波拘沙提靠近等情形一样,那时并没有任何理由要遮蔽那些佛光。
“奔流”是朝向正前方的方向奔流。“四散奔流”是变成种种样子,向四方奔流。巴利
‘‘Tasmiṃ kirā’’tiādi tabbivaraṇaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ adassitattā, porāṇaṭṭhakathāyañca anāgatattā anussavasiddhā ayaṃ kathāti dassetuṃ ‘‘kirā’’ti vuttanti vadanti, tathā vā hotu aññathā vā, attanā adiṭṭhaṃ, asutaṃ, amutañca anussavamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhapabhassaravasena chabbaṇṇā. Samantāti samantato dasahi disāhi. Asītihatthappamāṇeti tesaṃ rasmīnaṃ pakatiyā pavattiṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā samantato, upari ca paccekaṃ asītihatthamatte padese pakatiyāva ghanībhūtā rasmiyo tiṭṭhantīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, vinayaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘tāyeva byāmappabhā nāma. Yato chabbaṇṇā rasmiyo taḷākato mātikā viya dasasu disāsu dhāvanti, sā yasmā byāmamattā viya khāyati, tasmā byāmappabhāti vuccatī’’ti vuttaṃ, (vi. vi. ṭī. 1.16) saṅgītisuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘puratthimakāyato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Pacchimakāyato. Dakkhiṇahatthato. Vāmahatthato suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Upari kesantato paṭṭhāya sabbakesāvaṭṭehi moragīvavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā gaganatale asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Heṭṭhā pādatalehi pavāḷavaṇṇā rasmi uṭṭhahitvā ghanapathaviyaṃ asītihatthaṃ ṭhānaṃ gaṇhāti. Evaṃ samantā asītihatthamattaṃ ṭhānaṃ chabbaṇṇā buddharasmiyo vijjotamānā vipphandamānā vidhāvantī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.299) keci pana aññathāpi parikappanāmattena vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ tathā aññattha anāgatattā, ayuttattā ca. Tāsaṃ pana buddharasmīnaṃ tadā aniggūhitabhāvadassanatthaṃ ‘‘tasmiṃ kira samaye’’ti vuttaṃ. Pakkusātiabhiggamanādīsu viya hi tadā tāsaṃ niggūhane kiñci kāraṇaṃ natthi. Ādhāvantīti abhimukhaṃ disaṃ dhāvanti. Vidhāvantīti vividhā hutvā vidisaṃ dhāvanti.
在那片林间,以显现出来的样子,那些光芒的美丽就能被人知道,所以他说“宝鬘”等话。所谓宝鬘,就是用宝物做成的头饰,保护头顶,所以叫aveḷā,或者叫āveḷā,也就是头鬘。所谓ukkā,就是带着火焰的东西;那些(火焰)有上百个,落下就叫nipāta,因为那种落下,所以(林间)那样充满了它。因为可以磨碎,所以叫piṭṭha;产生在中国地方的粉末就叫cīnapiṭṭha,也就是红粉,也叫“sindūro”(辰砂),中国粉就是粉末。被风的力量吹得从这里到那里散开,所以是那样。因为世间共同认定它是因陀罗的弓,所以叫indadhanu(虹),也就是依太阳光而在空中显现出来的特殊形状。kuṭilaṃ(弯曲)是因为不能久住,变坏之后飞快奔驰,所以叫vijju(电);那本身就是藤蔓,因为和它相似,所以是那样,也就是由风的力量撞击云而生的光。因为它不离开而保护虚空,所以叫tārā(星);gaṇa(群)这个词要分别配上。它的光也是这样。vipphuritaviccharitamivāti,就是以光明种种地散布、又像在照耀。林子的中间空隙就是vanantara(林间),这里说的是世尊所到的林区。巴利
Tasmiṃ vanantare dissamānākārena tāsaṃ rasmīnaṃ sobhā viññāyatīti āha ‘‘ratanāveḷā’’tiādi. Ratanāveḷā nāma ratanamayavaṭaṃsakaṃ muddhaṃ avati rakkhatīti hi aveḷā,āveḷā vā, muddhamālā. Ukkā nāma yā sajotibhūtā, tāsaṃ sataṃ, nipatanaṃ nipāto, tassa nipāto, tena samākulaṃ tathā. Pisitabbattā piṭṭhaṃ, cīnadese jātaṃ piṭṭhaṃ cīnapiṭṭhaṃ, rattacuṇṇaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘sindūro’’tipi vuccati, cīnapiṭṭhameva cuṇṇaṃ. Vāyuno vegena ito cito ca khittaṃ tanti tathā. Indassa dhanu lokasaṅketavasenāti indadhanu, sūriyarasmivasena gagane paññāyamānākāraviseso. Kuṭilaṃ aciraṭṭhāyittā virūpaṃ hutvā javati dhāvatīti vijju, sāyeva latā taṃsadisabhāvenāti tathā, vāyuvegato valāhakaghaṭṭaneneva jātarasmi. Tāyati avijahanavasena ākāsaṃ pāletīti tārā, gaṇasaddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tassa pabhā tathā. Vipphuritaviccharitamivāti ābhāya vividhaṃ pharamānaṃ, vijjotayamānaṃ viya ca. Vanassa antaraṃ vivaraṃ vanantaraṃ, bhagavatā pattapattavanappadesanti vuttaṃ hoti.
八十种随形好,比如铜色指甲等,把身体装饰得同样庄严。红莲花、白莲花,以及其余青色、红色、白色的水生花——睡莲,这样一共归纳为五种莲花。那湖泊同时具有已开和盛开的莲花,所以说为已开、已放。因为以一切方式、从四面八方普遍开放、绽放,所以叫sabbapāliphulla(一切开敷),这是把a音变成ā音、把ra音变成la音,就像pālibhaddo这个例子一样。如同群星的光芒,由那光芒而开放、照耀,也是这样。随其光芒的周匝而成圆形,因此光耀、美丽。大士的相好彼此相连,就像花环一样排列,所以说三十二相花环。不应当说把三十二个月亮等编成花环依次放置,因为仅仅凭若可能有这样的假想,就会说成编成花环放置的三十二月鬘等。这只是一种假想的譬喻,在世间也能见到。巴利
Asītiyā anubyañjanehi tambanakhatādīhi anurañjitaṃ tathā. Kamalaṃ padumapuṇḍarīkāni, avasesaṃ nīlarattasetabhedaṃ saroruhaṃ uppalaṃ, iti pañcavidhā paṅkajajāti pariggahitā hoti. Vikasitaṃ phullitaṃ tadubhayaṃ yassa sarassa tathā. Sabbena pakārena parito samantato phullati vikasatīti sabbapāliphullaṃ a-kārassa ā-kāraṃ, ra-kārassa ca la-kāraṃ katvā yathā ‘‘pālibhaddo’’ti, tārānaṃ marīci pabhā, tāya vikasitaṃ vijjotitaṃ tathā. Byāmappabhāya parikkhepo parimaṇḍalo, tena vilāsinī sobhinī tathā. Mahāpurisalakkhaṇāni aññamaññapaṭibaddhattā mālākāreneva ṭhitānīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dvattiṃsavaralakkhaṇamālā’’ti. Dvattiṃsacandādīnaṃ mālā kenaci ganthetvā paṭipāṭiyā ca ṭhapitāti na vattabbā ‘‘yadi siyā’’ti parikappanāmattena hi ‘‘ganthetvā ṭhapitadvattiṃsacandamālāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parikappopamā hesā, lokepi ca dissati.
就像我的面容的光彩,何须夸耀那月轮。
因为在莲花中也有它,这是一个假想的比喻。巴利
‘‘Mayeva mukhasobhāsse, tyalaminduvikatthanā; Yatombujepi sātthīti, parikappopamā aya’’nti.
“以三十二个月亮组成的月环,用自己的光辉压过(其他)光辉”——这是(前后句的)关联方式。其余各处也按这个道理类推。巴利
Dvattiṃsacandamālāya siriṃ attano siriyā abhibhavantī ivāti sambandho. Esa nayo sesesupi.
世尊当时的庄严这样展示完以后,现在为了展示比丘僧团的庄严,说了“tañca pana”等话。以四种少欲称为少欲,以十二种知足称为知足,以三种远离称为远离。不与国王、大臣等人交往。对行为不正的人加以指责,对恶不善法加以呵斥,为了他人的利益而行动、而说法。也能忍受别人的话。所谓解脱智见,就是省察智。用“tesaṃ”等话,通过这种关联来展示世尊的庄严。红莲的丛、群、林,他就走到那中间。所谓“红莲、白莲”,不限定花瓣而这样说;若限定花瓣,则百瓣的是红莲,不足百瓣的是白莲。珊瑚就是红珊瑚,如同用珊瑚所造的栏楯围绕一样。Migapakkhīnampīti中的pi字,或api字,表示设想,因此说“何况天与人”。Mahātherāti是指大弟子们而说。由于略带黑色、颜色如云,所以是云色。Ekaṃsaṃ karitvāti是依一肩披衣的方式而置于左肩;kattarassa jiṇṇassa ālambano daṇḍo kattaradaṇḍo,这里是依多闻而立的名称。Suvammaṃ名为善美上衣,以彼而着衣、披甲,所以是suvammavammitā,这是显示他们穿着粪扫衣。凡入腹中的一切草叶等只是香类,他们名为香象,也就是被称为“hemavatā”者,那些长老也因戒等功德之香而与之相似。因称为内结、外结的渴爱之结而解开,所以是解开结者。因渴爱之缚已断,所以是断缚者。“So”等语是显示如上所说之语的功德。Anubuddhehīti是随觉者们,即随佛而觉者。因为他们也依一分由世尊所证悟的证悟部分而觉知四谛。Pattaparivāritanti是以花瓣围绕。kaṃ名为莲花等,于其中闪耀,所以称为kesara,也就是花蕊。kaṇṇe karīyatīti是作耳饰;耳饰,因形状相似而称为kaṇṇikā,也就是子房。如同六群鹅中的最上者持国鹅王,如同名为hārita的大梵天。巴利
Evaṃ bhagavato tadā sobhaṃ dassetvā idāni bhikkhusaṅghassāpi sobhaṃ dassento ‘‘tañca panā’’tiādimāha . Catubbidhāya appicchatāya appicchā. Dvādasahi santosehi santuṭṭhā. Tividhena vivekena pavivittā. Rājarājamahāmattādīhi asaṃsaṭṭhā. Duppaṭipattikānaṃ codakā. Pāpe akusale garahino paresaṃ hitapaṭipattiyā vattāro. Paresañca vacanakkhamā. Vimuttiñāṇadassanaṃ nāma paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. ‘‘Tesa’’ntiādinā tadabhisambandhena bhagavato sobhaṃ dasseti. Rattapadumānaṃ saṇḍo samūho vanaṃ, tassa majjhe gatā tathā. ‘‘Rattaṃ padumaṃ, setaṃ puṇḍarīka’’nti pattaniyamamantarena tathā vuttaṃ, pattaniyamena pana satapattaṃ padumaṃ, ūnakasatapattaṃ puṇḍarīkaṃ. Pavāḷaṃ viddumo, tena katāya vedikāya parikkhitto viya. Migapakkhīnampīti pi-saddo, api-saddo vā sambhāvanāyaṃ, tenāha ‘‘pageva devamanussāna’’nti. Mahātherāti mahāsāvake sandhāyāha. Surañjitabhāvena īsakaṃ kaṇhavaṇṇatāya meghavaṇṇaṃ. Ekaṃsaṃ karitvāti ekaṃsapārupanavasena vāmaṃse karitvā. Kattarassa jiṇṇassa ālambano daṇḍo kattaradaṇḍo, bāhullavasenāyaṃ samaññā. Suvammaṃ nāma sobhaṇuracchado, tena vammitā sannaddhāti suvammavammitā, idaṃ tesaṃ paṃsukūladhāraṇanidassanaṃ. Yesaṃ kucchigataṃ sabbampi tiṇapalāsādi gandhajātameva hoti, te gandhahatthino nāma, ye ‘‘hemavatā’’tipi vuccanti, tesampi therānaṃ sīlādiguṇagandhatāya taṃsadisatā. Antojaṭābahijaṭāsaṅkhātāya taṇhājaṭāya vijaṭitabhāvato vijaṭitajaṭā. Taṇhābandhanāya chinnattā chinnabandhanā. ‘‘So’’tiādi yathāvuttavacanassa guṇadassanaṃ. Anubuddhehīti buddhānamanubuddhehi. Tepi hi ekadesena bhagavatā paṭividdhapaṭibhāgeneva cattāri saccāni bujjhanti. Pattaparivāritanti pupphadalena parivāritaṃ. Kaṃ vuccati kamalādi, tasmiṃ sarati virājatīti kesaraṃ, kiñjakkho. Kaṇṇe karīyatīti kaṇṇikā. Kaṇṇālaṅkāro, taṃsadisaṇṭhānatāya kaṇṇikā, bījakoso. Channaṃ haṃsakulānaṃ seṭṭho dhataraṭṭho haṃsarājā viya, hārito nāma mahābrahmā viya.
世尊这样往前走,比丘们也看见了,于是他看了看自己的随众——这是上下文之间的连接。kājadaṇḍaka 就是所谓的担杖,也就是用来挑重物的棍子,或者绑在担子上的棍子。khuddakaṃ pīṭhaṃ 就是小凳子。棍子在根部和顶端分成三叉的,就是三叉杖。morahatthaka 就是孔雀尾羽做的拂子。khuddakaṃ pasibbaṃ 就是小袋子。kuṇḍikā 就是水瓶。按照词源的说法,它之所以叫 kuṇḍikā,是因为它把水向上涌出、流出,或者守护水。gahita 是从低劣处取来的、被破坏的,vividhaṃ lujjitañca pīṭhaka……乃至……以水瓶等种种资具为所谓的重担,他担起、承载这个重担,因此说 gahita……乃至……bhārabharitā。iti 是表示指示的意思。evaṃ 是这个意思。这样,这句话是开头,对于那句话来说如此,而那句话本身则是无意义的话,对于具有如此等无意义话语者来说。有脸面的,就是 mukharā,一切有脸面者都是如此,但这一位是以粗恶言语为脸面的,因此这样说。因为在呵责中,这个 rapaccaya 是这样。或者,以脸面取受不悦意之业,就是 mukharā。有种种杂乱言语者,就是 vikiṇṇavācā。tassāti 是指善比耶游行者。nti 是指如前所述种类的随众。巴利
Evaṃ gacchantaṃ bhagavantaṃ, bhikkhū ca disvā attano parisaṃ olokesīti sambandho. Kājadaṇḍaketi kājasaṅkhāte bhārāvahadaṇḍake, kājasmiṃ vā bhāralaggitadaṇḍake. Khuddakaṃ pīṭhaṃ pīṭhakaṃ. Mūle, agge ca tidhā kato daṇḍo tidaṇḍo. Morahatthako morapiñchaṃ. Khuddakaṃ pasibbaṃ pasibbakaṃ. Kuṇḍikā kamaṇḍalu. Sā hi kaṃ udakaṃ udeti pasaveti, rakkhatīti vā kuṇḍikā niruttinayena. Gahitaṃ omakato lujjitaṃ, vividhaṃ lujjitañca pīṭhaka…pe… kuṇḍikādianekaparikkhārasaṅkhātaṃ bhāraṃ bharati vahatīti gahita…pe… bhārabharitā. Itīti nidassanattho. Evanti idamattho. Evaṃ idaṃ vacanamādi yassa vacanassa tathā, tadeva niratthakaṃ vacanaṃ yassāti evamādiniratthakavacanā. Mukhaṃ etassa atthīti mukharā, sabbepi mukhavantā eva, ayaṃ pana pharusābhilāpamukhavatī, tasmā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Nindāyañhi ayaṃ rapaccayo. Mukhena vā amanāpaṃ kammaṃ rāti gaṇhātīti mukharā. Vividhā kiṇṇā vācā yassāti vikiṇṇavācā. Tassāti suppiyassa paribbājakassa. Nti yathāvuttappakāraṃ parisaṃ.
“现在”是指见到那样的大众的那个时刻。“然而”有暗示不悦的意思,也就是“即便如此”。“利得……乃至……衰损”:是成为衰损之因。怎样衰损呢?他说“外道们……”等等。“失去光彩”:就是失去庄严,这个意思也应该用《孔雀本生》等来说明。“优波提舍和拘利陀……”等,是就一方衰损而详细说明。“然而他们离去后”:是指舍利弗尊者和目犍连尊者在世尊身边出家这件事。“他们出家时,就有二百五十个游行者的团体跟着出家,此后随之出家的游行者团体更是无量无数”——用“他们的那个团体也分裂了”这句话来说明这一点。因为无论哪个游行者团体出家,由于同属一个团体,那个团体就叫做分裂了,所以这样说。“以这些人……”等,是以总结的方式说明利得方面的衰损。名为嫉妒之毒的吐出、呕出,就是“嫉妒毒吐”。而在这里,“然而此……”等,正是用来澄清“他为什么说三宝的坏话”这个质疑;而“如果……”等全部都是它的附属语句,因此那些也已经得到澄清了。他们是为了探究世尊有没有违逆或随顺之处,才说坏话和好话。也有人说“是被魔附身才这样说的”,这实在不对,因为与注释直接相违。这个含义其实已经很明显了。巴利
Idānīti tassa tathārūpāya parisāya dassanakkhaṇe. Panāti arucisaṃsūcanattho, tathāpīti attho. Lābha…pe… hāniyā ceva hetubhūtāya. Kathaṃ hānīti āha ‘‘aññatitthiyānañhī’’tiādi. Nissirīkatanti nisobhataṃ, ayamattho morajātakādīhipi dīpetabbo. ‘‘Upatissakolitānañcā’’tiādinā pakkhahānitāya vitthāro. Āyasmato sāriputtassa, mahāmoggallānassa ca bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tesu pana pakkantesū’’ti vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ pabbajitakāleyeva aḍḍhateyyasataṃ paribbājakaparisā pabbaji, tato parampi tadanupabbajitā paribbājakaparisā aparimāṇāti dasseti ‘‘sāpi tesaṃ parisā bhinnā’’ti iminā. Yāya kāyaci hi paribbājakaparisāya pabbajitāya tassa parisā bhinnāyeva nāma samānagaṇattāti tathā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Imehī’’tiādinā lābhapakkhahāniṃ nigamanavasena dasseti. Usūyasaṅkhātassa visassa uggāro uggilanaṃ usūyavisuggāro, taṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘yasmā panesā’’tiādināva ‘‘kasmā ca so ratanattayassa avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti codanaṃ visodheti, ‘‘sace’’tiādikaṃ pana sabbampi tapparivāravacanamevāti tehipi sā visodhitāyeva nāma. Bhagavato virodhānunayābhāvavīmaṃsanatthaṃ ete avaṇṇaṃ vaṇṇaṃ bhāsanti. ‘‘Mārena anvāviṭṭhā evaṃ bhāsantī’’ti ca keci vadanti, tadayuttameva aṭṭhakathāya ujuvipaccanīkattā. Pākaṭoyevāyamatthoti.
2 因为太阳已经落山,所以现在不是出行的时候——这就是这句话的关联所在。巴利
2. Yasmā atthaṅgato sūriyo, tasmā akālo dāni gantunti sambandho.
Ambalaṭṭhikā 是附近一带的称呼,就像说“瓦鲁那城”“苟达村”那样,所以接着说“据说那里”等等。laṭṭhikā 这个词用在树木上时,是幼树的同义词,比如“进入大林后,在幼贝鲁瓦树下坐下作日间住处”这类说法中就是如此;这里用“幼芒果树”来显示这个意思。不过有些人说:“按上面所说的方式,Ambalaṭṭhikā 是一个村庄。”按照他们的看法,Ambalaṭṭhikāya 是表示附近意义的地点格。Chāyūdakasampannaṃ 就是具备树荫和水。Mañjusā 就是箱子。Paṭibhānacittavicittaṃ 就是用男女交合等巧画装饰的;以此显示国王的住所,那住所就叫王宅。所谓 Rājāgāraka,有些人说是多闻天王的神庙。巴利
Ambalaṭṭhikāti sāmīpikavohāro yathā ‘‘varuṇanagaraṃ, godāgāmo’’ti āha ‘‘tassa kirā’’tiādi. Taruṇapariyāyo laṭṭhikā-saddo rukkhavisaye yathā ‘‘mahāvanaṃ ajjhogāhetvā beluvalaṭṭhikāya mūle divāvihāraṃ nisīdī’’tiādīsūti dasseti’’ ‘‘taruṇambarukkho’’ti iminā. Keci pana ‘‘ambalaṭṭhikā nāma vuttanayena eko gāmo’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ mate ambalaṭṭhikāyanti samīpatthe bhummavacanaṃ. Chāyūdakasampannanti chāyāya ceva udakena ca sampannaṃ. Mañjusāti peḷā. Paṭibhānacittavicittanti itthipurisasaññogādinā paṭibhānacittena vicittaṃ, etena rañño agāraṃ, tadeva rājāgārakanti dasseti. Rājāgārakaṃ nāma vessavaṇamahārājassa devāyatananti eke.
“有很多危难”是指有很多灾难。“被谁”等话,是接着“被盗贼等”这样说的。“来吧”这个词是表示放下话语的虚词,意思是:依靠他的威力,为了没有灾难,现在先去,明天再走。锡兰注疏里只说“和弟子梵授童子一起”,那只是按巴利圣典所记载的方式说的,并不是说当时没有须卑的徒众。为了说明这个意思,这里才说“和自己的徒众一起”。那么,为什么这里巴利圣典只记载梵授,而不记载须卑的其他徒众呢?因为说法没有差别,所以没有必要。应当知道,其他类似的情况也因为没有必要,结集者就没有结集进去。不过有些人以“巴利圣典中说过”为根据,说“这并不是展示锡兰注疏的理路,只是显示巴利圣典中说过罢了”,这说不通。因为“按巴利圣典所记载的方式”本身,就已经成了“巴利圣典中说过”的意思。所以,应当按前面所说的理路来理解。也有人说:“‘说过’的意思是‘我们也应当在这里说’。这样说是为了显示当时也有其他徒众存在,而按巴利圣典所记载的方式,这里另有所指,这个意思是合理的。”巴利
Bahuparissayoti bahupaddavo. Kehīti vuttaṃ ‘‘core’hipī’’tiādi. Handāti vacanavossaggatthe nipāto, tadānubhāvato nipparissayatthāya idāni upagantvā sve gamissāmīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Saddhiṃ antevāsinā brahmadattena māṇavenā’’ ticceva sīhaḷaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ, tañca kho pāḷiāruḷhavaseneva, na pana tadā suppiyassa parisāya abhāvatoti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘saddhiṃ attano parisāyā’’ti idha vuttaṃ. Kasmā panettha brahmadattoyeva pāḷiyamāruḷho, na pana tadavasesā suppiyassa parisāti ? Desanānadhīnabhāvena payojanābhāvato. Yathā cetaṃ, evaṃ aññampi edisaṃ payojanābhāvato saṅgītikārakehi na saṅgītanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘pāḷiyaṃ vutta’’nti ādhāraṃ vatvā ‘tadetaṃ na sīhaḷaṭṭhakathānayadassanaṃ, pāḷiyaṃ vuttabhāvadassanamevā’ti’’ vadanti, taṃ na yujjati. Pāḷiāruḷhavaseneva pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti adhippetatthassa āpajjanato. Tasmā yathāvuttanayeneva attho gahetabboti. ‘‘Vuttanti vā amhehipi idha vattabbanti attho. Evañhi tadā aññāyapi parisāya vijjamānabhāvadassanatthaṃ evaṃ vuttaṃ, pāḷiyamāruḷhavasena pana aññathāpi idha vattabbanti adhippāyo yutto’’ti vadanti.
现在为了说明“tatrāpi suda”等巴利文之间的关联,所以说了“evaṃ vāsaṃ upagato pana”等话。这里的关联是:被众人围绕而坐。kucchitaṃ kattabbaṃ 就是恶作,它的状态就是恶作,也就是卑劣的行为,或者说是从这里到那里动摇不定,手的恶作也是这样。用“sā hi”等话,说明造成这种状态的原因。nivāte 就是没有风的地方。因为远离前面所说的过失,所以静止不动。taṃ vibhūtiṃ 就是那样的光辉。vippalapanti 就是因为失念而种种胡言乱语。nillālitajivhā 就是向四处伸出的舌头。kākacchamānā 就是发出像乌鸦叫声一样的声音。gharugharupassāsino 就是发出“gharugharu”的声音来呼吸。issāvasena 就是依前面所说的两种原因而生嫉妒。“sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ”这句话,是用来说明“ādipeyyālanayo”的省略格式。巴利
Idāni ‘‘tatrāpi suda’’ntiādipāḷiyā sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ vāsaṃ upagato panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parivāretvā nisinno hotīti sambandho. Kucchitaṃ kattabbanti kukataṃ, tassa bhāvo kukkuccaṃ, kucchitakiriyā, ito cito ca cañcalananti attho, hatthassa kukkuccaṃ tathā. ‘‘Sā hī’’tiādinā tathābhūtatāya kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Nivāteti vātavirahitaṭṭhāne. Yathāvuttadosābhāvena niccalā. Taṃ vibhūtinti tādisaṃ sobhaṃ. Vippalapantīti sativossaggavasena vividhā lapanti. Nillālitajivhāti ito cito ca nikkhantajivhā. Kākacchamānāti kākānaṃ saddasadisaṃ saddaṃ kurumānā. Gharugharupassāsinoti gharugharuiti saddaṃ janetvā passasantā. Issāvasenāti yathāvuttehi dvīhi kāraṇehi usūyanavasena. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vattabba’’nti iminā ‘‘ādipeyyālanayoya’’nti dasseti.
3 能胜任种种行事的人很多,人数众多,所以说“bahukānaṃ”。按照最低限度来说,因为只有四人以上的僧团才能执行律仪行事,所以说“依律藏分别”等。而“三人”之说,只是举出典型来说明,因为两个人也算众多。由于在各处经文中都是这样传下来的,所以说“依经藏分别”等。这种区别,确实是依据各部巴利圣典中传来的用语而定的。“三人”就是指三个人本身,从这以上,四人和五人等就算众多,这就是它的意思。这里的“tato”是界限的意思。“Maṇḍalamāḷo”是用于多种意义的通称,但这里特指某一类,所以说“某处”等。“Kaṇṇikā”就是顶尖。“Haṃsavaṭṭakacchannena”就是以天鹅圆轮形状的覆盖。同样是覆盖,在其他地方说为“supaṇṇavaṅkacchadana”(金翅鸟弯曲形的覆盖)。“Kūṭāgārasālā”就是与尖顶相连的屋舍,那屋舍就是殿堂。“Thambhapantiṃ parikkhipitvā”就是围绕柱列,也就是做成圆形的柱列。“Upaṭṭhānasālā”就是集会堂。在那里只做集会礼敬之事,不是用来一夜或多夜坐卧的,但这里显示它正是那样建造的坐卧之堂,所以用“但这里”等来说明。因此,巴利圣典中不说“已集会”,而说“已坐定”。“Mānitabbo”就是堂;或者因为“mīyati pamīyati”所以叫堂。以圆形覆盖的堂就是圆堂,是一种多角的住处。“已坐定”是依坐姿而说的,或者依坐姿引出应解释的词,然后连接起来。这表明这两个词是就坐的威仪和身体和合而说的。“Saṅkhiyā”就是言谈,因为正确地被说、被谈。“Kathādhammo”就是言谈之性;有人说是考察的方法。巴利
3. Sammā pahonti taṃ taṃ kammanti sampahulā, bahavo, tenāha ‘‘bahukāna’’nti. Sabbantimena paricchedena catuvaggasaṅgheneva vinayakammassa kattabbattā ‘‘vinayapariyāyenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tayo janāti cesa upalakkhaṇaniddeso dvinnampi sampahulattā. Tattha tattha tathāyevāgatattā ‘‘suttantapariyāyenā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ taṃ pāḷiyā āgatavohāravasena hi ayaṃ bhedo. Tayo janā tayo eva nāma, tato paṭṭhāya uttari catupañcajanādikā sampahulāti attho. Tatoti cāyaṃ mariyādāvadhi. Maṇḍalamāḷoti anekatthapavattā samaññā, idha pana īdisāya evāti niyamento āha ‘‘katthacī’’tiādi. Kaṇṇikā vuccati kūṭaṃ. Haṃsavaṭṭakacchannenāti haṃsamaṇḍalākārachannena. Tadeva channaṃ aññattha ‘‘supaṇṇavaṅkacchadana’’nti vuttaṃ. Kūṭena yutto agāro, soyeva sālāti kūṭāgārasālā. Thambhapantiṃ parikkhipitvāti thambhamālaṃ parivāretvā, parimaṇḍalākārena thambhapantiṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upaṭṭhānasālā nāma payirupāsanasālā. Yattha upaṭṭhānamattaṃ karonti, na ekarattadirattādivasena nisīdanaṃ, idha pana tathā katā nisīdanasālāyevāti dasseti ‘‘idha panā’’tiādinā. Teneva pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sannipatitāna’’ ntveva avatvā ‘‘sannisinnāna’’ntipi vuttaṃ. Mānitabboti māḷo, mīyati pamīyatīti vā māḷo. Maṇḍalākārena paṭicchanno māḷoti maṇḍalamāḷo, anekakoṇavanto paṭissayaviseso. ‘‘Sannisinnāna’’nti nisajjanavasena vuttaṃ, nisajjanavasena vā ‘‘sannisinnāna’’nti saṃvaṇṇetabbapadamajjhāharitvā sambandho. Iminā nisīdanairiyāpathaṃ, kāyasāmaggīvasena ca samodhānaṃ sandhāya padadvayametaṃ vuttanti dasseti. Saṅkhiyā vuccati kathā sammā khiyanato kathanato. Kathādhammoti kathāsabhāvo, upaparikkhā vidhīti keci.
“Acchariya”(希有)等语,是为了说明他的词形显现,所以经文接着说“那么,那又是什么”等。这里的“so”(他/那个)指的是所说的法。阿阇梨法护长老说过:“‘Nīyati’就是理趣、意义;随顺音声论的理趣,就是音声理趣(saddanayo)。”(《长部注》1.3)或者,意义通过它被引导出来,所以叫理趣(nayo),也就是方法;在音声论中出现的理趣,作为把握意义的方法,就是音声理趣。因为在音声论中,非常用的“acchariya”一词,是依照惯用意义来使用的。因此他说“犹如盲人登山”等。盲人那样登山并非常态,只是偶尔才可能;同样,这也是偶尔才有。“Acchariya”(希有)是“accharāyogga”(适合惊叹)的省略形式,这是依词源学方法,省略了“yogga”一词;或者依派生词规则,由“ṇiya”词缀的多种变化而成。但它只出现在古注中,所以称为“注疏理趣”。“Pubbe abhūta”(过去未曾有)就是“abhūtapubba”(未曾有);这里显示“na bhūtaṃ abhūta”(非有即未曾有)的语源解释,同时也表明“bhūta”一词有过去的意思。“Yāvañcida”是依连音规则加入鼻音,所以他说“yāva ca idaṃ”,并且这个要与“suppaṭividitā”(善通达)连接。也就是说,这个“yāva ca idaṃ”所指的种种意乐差别被善通达,我们无法完全通达它,也无法完全宣说它——这是带有剩余义的说法。因此他说“以此善通达性,显示其不可度量”。巴利
‘‘Acchariya’’ntiādi tassa rūpadassananti āha ‘‘katamo pana so’’tiādi. Soti kathādhammo. ‘‘Nīyatīti nayo, attho, saddasatthaṃ anugato nayo saddanayo’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.3) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Nīyati attho etenāti vā nayo, upāyo, saddasatthe āgato nayo atthagahaṇūpāyo saddanayo. Tattha hi anabhiṇhavuttike acchariya-saddo icchito ruḷhivasena. Tenevāha ‘‘andhassa pabbatārohaṇaṃ viyā’’tiādi. Tassa hi tadārohaṇaṃ na niccaṃ, kadāciyeva siyā, evamidampi. Accharāyoggaṃ acchariyaṃ niruttinayena yoggasaddassa lopato, taddhitavasena vā ṇiyapaccayassa vicitravuttito, so pana porāṇaṭṭhakathāyameva āgatattā ‘‘aṭṭhakathānayo’’ti vutto. Pubbe abhūtanti abhūtapubbaṃ, etena na bhūtaṃ abhūtanti nibbacanaṃ, bhūta-saddassa ca atītatthaṃ dasseti. Yāvañcidanti sandhivasena niggahitāgamoti āha ‘‘yāva ca ida’’nti, etassa ca ‘‘suppaṭividitā’’ti etena sambandho. Yāva cayattakaṃ idaṃ ayaṃ nānādhimuttikatā suppaṭividitā, taṃ ‘‘ettakamevā’’ti na sakkā amhehi paṭivijjhituṃ, akkhātuñcāti sapāṭhasesattho. Tenevāha ‘‘tena suppaṭividitatāya appameyyataṃ dassetī’’ti.
“由世尊”等词句,是以同位语的方式说出来的,所以这里的“tena”这个词是指向自身含义的。因此,当世尊以所证悟的状态而明显、广为人知时,便是所谓“善为人知”;为了连同他所证悟的状态和修行方式一起,以那真实含义显示出来,他说了“yo so”等话。这里并没有先前说过的某个含义,能让那些长老用“ta”这个词去指代。因此应当知道,这里是以如前所说的功德——也就是自身含义——作为主要内容来指代的。
“无上正等觉”:就是以最上道智为直接基础的无碍智,以及以无碍智为直接基础的最上道智。因为这两者都正确地、不颠倒地自行觉悟,或者说正确地、殊胜地、美好地觉悟,所以叫“正等觉”。而它赋予诸佛一切功德圆满,就像灌顶赋予国王一切世间自在一样,因此被称为“无上正等觉”。
“已等正觉”:就是已经完全了知、已经通达;意思是,由那样一位世尊所证。智慧和见在这里虽然是慧的同义词,但为了显示它们依各自不同的特点而在不同领域起作用,他说了“对于种种众生”等话。这里首先以不共智显示其含义。意思是:以意乐随眠智了知,以一切知智和无碍智照见。巴利
‘‘Bhagavatā’’tiādīhi padehi samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttattā tenāti ettha ta-saddo sakatthapaṭiniddeso, tasmā yena abhisambuddhabhāvena bhagavā pakato samāno supākaṭo nāma hoti, tadabhisambuddhabhāvaṃ saddhiṃ āgamanapaṭipadāya tassa atthabhāvena dassento ‘‘yo so’’tiādimāha . Na hettha so pubbe vutto atthi, yo attho tehi therehi ta-saddena parāmasitabbo bhaveyya. Tasmā yathāvuttaguṇasaṅkhātaṃ sakatthaṃyevesa padhānabhāvena parāmasatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhinti aggamaggañāṇapadaṭṭhānaṃ anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ, anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca aggamaggañāṇaṃ. Tadubhayañhi sammā aviparītaṃ sayameva bujjhati, sammā vā pasaṭṭhā sundaraṃ bujjhatīti sammāsambodhi. Sā pana buddhānaṃ sabbaguṇasampattiṃ deti abhiseko viya rañño sabbalokissariyabhāvaṃ, tasmā ‘‘anuttarā sammāsambodhī’’ti vuccati. Abhisambuddhoti abbhaññāsi paṭivijjhi, tena tādisena bhagavatāti attho. Satipi ñāṇadassanānaṃ idha paññāvevacanabhāve tena tena visesena nesaṃ visayavisesappavattiṃ dassento ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ sattāna’’ntiādimāha. Ettha hi paṭhamamatthaṃ asādhāraṇañāṇavasena dasseti. Āsayānusayañāṇena jānatā sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇehi passatāti attho.
第二项,按三明来说。以宿住等,就是指以宿住智和漏尽智。第三项,按神通无碍智来说。虽然也包含在神通里,但为了显示这些明之间的分组差别,才说“以三明”。意思是:以称为无碍智的普眼而照见。第四项,按一切知智和肉眼来说。以智慧,就是指以一切知智。墙外、墙内等,就是指在墙的那一边、这一边等处的。以极清净,就是指以极为清净、具足五色、装饰着深蓝色可爱睫毛、无论昼夜都能遍照一由旬的肉眼。第五项,按证悟智和教说智来说。“成就自利”,这是就一向而说的;但就方便来说,它也能成就利他。因为靠它断除了覆蔽法性的烦恼,教说智等才得以生起。以证悟慧,就是指以圣道慧。以定为近因,与观相应的定是它的近因、直接原因,所以说是以定为近因,也就是以那种慧。以教说慧,就是指以能成办教说作用的一切知智。敌,就是烦恼之敌,或者五魔,或者教法的对立者——外道。杀他们、以神通降伏他们、让他们无言以对,以及置之不理,这在《中部》后五十经第五品所诵的《阐基经》中有例证。这里以“由此杀敌”这样的词源方式说明词义的成立。由此可知,“nāvacana”这个词的“tābyappadesa”是广大境域。另外,“杀敌”是以“ant”音完成词义成立,而“i”音变成了“a”。对于诸资具等,是给予者;或者接受它们;或者值得接受,所以是阿拉汉。用“因堪受诸资具故”这句话来说明。正确,就是无颠倒。自己,就是亲自,意思是成为不依赖他人者。那么这里“一切法”这个限定是怎么得来的呢?因为为了表明普遍性,限定词才立足;而且以限定词修饰的限定,不应被套用。如果这里“诸法”这个限定不被套用,那为什么“一切法”这个意思不被套用呢?因为不取一部分。如果不取部分,就可知道所取的是无余的,就像说“看见的人不给”一样。这个道理在类似情况中也适用。巴利
Dutiyaṃ vijjattayavasena. Pubbenivāsādīhīti pubbenivāsāsavakkhayañāṇehi. Tatiyaṃ abhiññānāvaraṇañāṇavasena. Abhiññāpariyāpannepi ‘‘tīhi vijjāhī’’ti tāsaṃ rāsibhedadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Anāvaraṇañāṇasaṅkhātena samantacakkhunā passatāti attho. Catutthaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇamaṃsacakkhuvasena. Paññāyāti sabbaññutaññāṇena. Kuṭṭassa bhittiyā tiro paraṃ, anto vā, tadādīsu gatāni. Ativisuddhenāti ativiya visuddhena pañcavaṇṇasamannāgatena sunīlapāsādikaakkhilomasamalaṅkatena rattiñceva divā ca samantā yojanaṃ passantena maṃsacakkhunā. Pañcamaṃ paṭivedhadesanāñāṇavasena. ‘‘Attahitasādhikāyā’’ti ekaṃsato vuttaṃ, pariyāyato panesā parahitasādhikāpi hoti. Tāya hi dhammasabhāvapaṭicchādakakilesasamugghātāya desanāñāṇādi sambhavati. Paṭivedhapaññāyāti ariyamaggapaññāya. Vipassanāsahagato samādhi padaṭṭhānaṃ āsannakāraṇametissāti samādhipadaṭṭhānā, tāya. Desanāpaññāyāti desanākiccanipphādakena sabbaññutaññāṇena. Arīnanti kilesārīnaṃ, pañcamārānaṃ vā, sāsanapaccatthikānaṃ vā aññatitthiyānaṃ. Tesaṃ hananaṃ pāṭihāriyehi abhibhavanaṃ appaṭibhānatākaraṇaṃ, ajjhupekkhanañca majjhimapaṇṇāsake pañcamavagge saṅgītaṃ caṅkīsuttañcettha (ma. ni. 2.422) nidassanaṃ, etena arayo hatā anenāti niruttinayena padasiddhimāha. Ato nāvacanassa tābyappadeso mahāvisayenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Apica arayo hanatīti antasaddena padasiddhi, ikārassa ca akāro. Paccayādīnaṃ sampadānabhūtānaṃ, tesaṃ vā paṭiggahaṇaṃ, paṭiggahituṃ vā arahatīti arahanti dasseti ‘‘paccayādīnañca arahattā’’ti iminā. Sammāti aviparītaṃ. Sāmañcāti sayameva, aparaneyyo hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kathaṃ panettha ‘‘sabbadhammāna’’nti ayaṃ viseso labbhatīti? Sāmaññajotanāya visese avaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca visesassa anupayojetabbato yajjevaṃ ‘‘dhammāna’’nti visesovānupayojito siyā, kasmā sabbadhammānanti ayamattho anupayojīyatīti? Ekadesassa aggahaṇato. Padesaggahaṇe hi asati gahetabbassa nippadesatā viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti, esa nayo īdisesu.
现在,为了用四句、依四无畏之力,显示他自己更想说的第六个义理,所以说“障碍法”等。也正因如此,他用“如是”等语来作总结。其中应当依次配合:以了知障碍法的智而了知者,以能出离法的智而照见者,以漏尽智而成为阿罗汉者,以一切知智而成为正自觉者。因为行于无义,烦恼本身就是敌,所以叫烦恼敌,即那些烦恼之敌。这里有人问:依那种智,因为正确、亲自觉悟一切法,世尊才被称为正自觉者;那么,这智在觉悟一切法时,是在一切对象上一次性生起,还是次第生起?对此,如果它是在一切对象上一次性生起,那么,当过去、未来、现在、内、外等种种不同的有为法,以及无为法和假名法一起呈现时,就会像远远看画布一样,不能以各别相而了知;这样一来,就像观“一切法无我”的人以无我相观照那样,一切法就会以没有确定相貌的方式成为世尊智的对象,这个过失就逃不掉。那些主张“佛陀之智在一切时都以一切所知法的共相为对象,远离分别而转起,因此他们被称为‘一切知者’”的人,也同样免不了这个过失。而且,因为以共相为所缘,而过去、未来的法并没有那样的共相,所以世尊之智就只局限于一部分对象。因此,智在一切对象上一次性生起,并不合理。如果说智在一切对象上次第生起,这也不合理。因为,当所知法依生趣、地、自性等,以及依方……巴利
Idāni ca catūhi padehi catuvesārajjavasena attanā adhippetataraṃ chaṭṭhamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘antarāyikadhamme vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tathā hi tadeva nigamanaṃ karoti ‘‘eva’’ntiādinā. Tattha antarāyakaradhammañāṇena jānatā, niyyānikadhammañāṇena passatā, āsavakkhayañāṇena arahatā, sabbaññutaññāṇena sammāsambuddhenaāti yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Anatthacaraṇena kilesā eva arayoti kilesārayo, tesaṃ kilesārīnaṃ. Etthāha – yassa ñāṇassa vasena sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā bhagavā sammāsambuddho nāma jāto, kiṃ panidaṃ ñāṇaṃ sabbadhammānaṃ bujjhanavasena pavattamānaṃ sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, udāhu kamenāti. Kiñcettha – yadi tāva sakiṃyeva sabbasmiṃ visaye pavattati, evaṃ sati atītānāgatapaccuppannaajjhattabahiddhādibhedabhinnānaṃ saṅkhatadhammānaṃ, asaṅkhatasammutidhammānañca ekajjhaṃ upaṭṭhāne dūrato cittapaṭaṃ pekkhantassa viya paṭibhāgenāvabodho na siyā, tathā ca sati ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti (a. ni. 3.137; dha. pa. 279; mahāni. 27; cūḷani. 8, 10; netti. 5) vipassantānaṃ anattākārena viya sabbe dhammā anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇavisayā hontīti āpajjati. Yepi ‘‘sabbañeyyadhammānaṃ ṭhitilakkhaṇavisayaṃ vikapparahitaṃ sabbakālaṃ buddhānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pavattati, tena te ‘sabbavidū’ti vuccanti. Evañca katvā –
行走时,那伽入定;站立时,那伽入定;
那伽入定时卧着,也入定时坐着。巴利
‘Gacchaṃ samāhito nāgo, ṭhito nāgo samāhito; Seyyaṃ samāhito nāgo, nisinnopi samāhito’ti. (a. ni. 6.43); –
有人说,增支部《那伽譬喻经》里的这段话也显示了智在一切时都能生起,这可算是善说。但他们的主张同样逃不过上面说的那些过失。而且,因为是以住立相为所缘,过去和未来的法并没有这个相,那世尊的智就只能局限于一部分对象了。所以,说智在一切对象上一次性生起,说不通。那如果说智在一切对象上是次第生起的,这样也说不通。因为所知随着生趣、地、自性等,以及方所、时间等而有种种差别,当它被次第地把握时,由于所知没有边际,就不可能毫无剩余地通达。又有人说:由于不违逆意义,在亲证所知的一部分之后,以“其余的也是这样”来胜解并确定,世尊因此被称为一切知者;而这种智不是比量,因为没有疑惑。世间与疑惑相伴的智才叫比量。这种说法也不对。因为如果一切都不是现量,就不可能靠不违逆意义来亲证所知的一部分,然后以“其余的也是这样”来胜解并确定,也做不到这样。所谓“其余”的,就是非现量;如果那也是现量,那它就没有“其余”的性质了。而且因为所知没有边际,也不可能这样确定。这一切都不成立。为什么呢?因为这是在对不属于境界的领域进行思择。世尊确实说过:“诸比丘,佛的境界不可思议,不应思议;若去思议,就会陷入狂乱和恼害。”(增支部4.77)不过这里应当确定的是:凡是世尊想要了知的,无论是全部还是一部分,由于在各方面都无碍而转起,所以智是现量地生起;又因为恒常等持,没有散乱。如果所要了知的全部并不属于境界,那他的智就不应该与愿求相连;然而这种愿求必定存在,因为经中说:“一切法都系于世尊的作意、系于愿求、系于心起。”(大义释69,156;小义释85;无碍解道3.5)世尊的智对过去和未来的对象,也因为没有比量、圣教、推理的取著,所以纯粹是现量。巴利
Idampi sabbadā ñāṇappavattidīpakaṃ aṅguttarāgame nāgopamasuttavacanaṃ suvuttaṃ nāma hotī’’ti vadanti, tesampi vāde vuttadosā nātivatti. Ṭhitilakkhaṇārammaṇatāya ca atītānāgatadhammānaṃ tadabhāvato ekadesavisayameva bhagavato ñāṇaṃ siyā, tasmā sakiññeva sabbasmiṃ visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti na yujjati. Atha kamena sabbasmimpi visaye ñāṇaṃ pavattati, evampi na yujjati. Na hi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena, disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne tassa anavasesapaṭivedho sambhavati apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa. Ye pana ‘‘atthassa avisaṃvādanato ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanena sabbaññū nāma bhagavā jāto, tañca ñāṇaṃ na anumānikaṃ nāma saṃsayābhāvato. Saṃsayānubaddhañhi ñāṇaṃ loke anumānika’’nti vadanti, tesampi taṃ na yuttameva. Sabbassa hi appaccakkhabhāve atthāvisaṃvādanena ñeyyassa ekadesaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā sesepi evanti adhimuccitvā vavatthāpanasseva asambhavato tathā asakkuṇeyyattā ca. Yañhi sesaṃ, tadapaccakkhameva, atha tampi paccakkhaṃ, tassa sesabhāvo eva na siyā, apariyantabhāvato ñeyyassa tathāvavatthitumeva na sakkāti? Sabbametaṃ akāraṇaṃ. Kasmā? Avisayavicāraṇabhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘buddhānaṃ bhikkhave, buddhavisayo acinteyyo na cintetabbo, yaṃ cintento ummādassa vighātassa bhāgī assā’’ti (a. ni. 4.77) idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – yaṃ kiñci bhagavatā ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, sakalamekadeso vā, tattha tattha appaṭihatavuttitāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati niccasamādhānañca vikkhepābhāvato, ñātuṃ icchitassa ca sakalassa avisayabhāve tassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttitā na siyā, ekanteneva sā icchitabbā, sabbe dhammā buddhassa bhagavato āvajjanapaṭibaddhā ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhā manasikārapaṭibaddhā cittuppādapaṭibaddhāti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) vacanato. Atītānāgatavisayampi bhagavato ñāṇaṃ anumānāgamatakkagahaṇavirahitattā paccakkhameva.
难道在这种主张里也有同样的毛病吗:当想要一次了知全部时,世尊的智就凭一时取全部境界、以没有确定行相的方式生起,所以还是逃不过前面说的过失?不是这样,因为这种过失已经被清除了。佛的境界已经被清净,所以不可思议。否则,如果诸佛世尊的智和凡夫的智一样运作,那佛智就没有不可思议性了。因此,佛智虽然以一切法为所缘,却像只以某一法为所缘那样,把那些法善加确定之后才生起——这就是此处不可思议的地方。“所知有多少,智就有多少;智有多少,所知就有多少。智以所知为尽头,所知以智为尽头。智不会越过所知生起,所知也不会越过智而存在。这些法彼此互为尽头而安住,就像两个箱盖正好相触时,下面的箱盖不越过上面的,上面的箱盖不越过下面的,彼此互为尽头而安住;同样,佛陀世尊的所知和智也彼此互为尽头而安住……这些法。”正是这样,依着那或总或别、或一时或次第、随所欲而生起的智的力量,由于正确而亲自觉悟了一切法,世尊才被称为正自觉者。巴利
Nanu ca etasmimpi pakkhe yadā sakalaṃ ñātuṃ icchitaṃ, tadā sakiṃyeva sakalavisayatāya anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavatteyyāti vuttadosā nātivattiyevāti? Na, tassa visodhitattā. Visodhito hi so buddhavisayo acinteyyoti. Aññathā pacurajanañāṇasamānavuttitāya buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ ñāṇassa acinteyyatā na siyā, tasmā sakaladhammārammaṇampi taṃ ekadhammārammaṇaṃ viya suvavatthāpiteyeva te dhamme katvā pavattatīti idamettha acinteyyaṃ, ‘‘yāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ neyyaṃ. Neyyapariyantikaṃ ñāṇaṃ, ñāṇapariyantikaṃ neyyaṃ. Neyyaṃ atikkamitvā ñāṇaṃ nappavattati, ñāṇaṃ atikkamitvā neyyapatho natthi. Aññamaññapariyantaṭṭhāyino te dhammā, yathā dvinnaṃ samuggapaṭalānaṃ sammā phusitānaṃ heṭṭhimaṃ samuggapaṭalaṃ uparimaṃ nātivattati, uparimaṃ samuggapaṭalaṃ heṭṭhimaṃ nātivattati. Aññamaññapariyantaṭṭhāyino, evameva buddhassa bhagavato neyyañca ñāṇañca aññamaññapariyantaṭṭhāyino…pe… te dhammā’’ti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) evamekajjhaṃ, visuṃ, sakiṃ, kamena vā icchānurūpaṃ pavattassa tassa ñāṇassa vasena sammā sāmañca sabbadhammānaṃ buddhattā bhagavā sammāsambuddho nāma jātoti.
这里还有一个超出注释书范围的理路:以六种智了知处非处等六种境界,以天眼智看见随业投生的众生死去和再生,以漏尽智灭尽诸漏连同习气而成为阿拉汉,对禅那等法依杂染与清净而自己如实无倒地觉悟,因此是正自觉者——就这样,以十力智,通过四种方式被赞叹。再者,以在三时中无碍的智而了知,以智随三种业转起而审慎行事,因此是见者;以断除贪等六种过失而成就断德,因此是阿拉汉;以欲等六种无上之因成就无所不知、辩才无竭的一切知性,因此是正自觉者——就这样,以十八不共佛法,通过四种方式被赞叹。应当依照这样的方式,根据那些含摄了各自的智、见、断、觉之义的诸佛功德来作连接。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – ṭhānāṭhānādīni chabbisayāni chahi ñāṇehi jānatā, yathākammūpage satte cutūpapātadibbacakkhuñāṇehi passatā, savāsanānamāsavānaṃ āsavakkhayañāṇena khīṇattā arahatā, jhānādidhamme saṃkilesavodānavasena sāmaṃyeva aviparītāvabodhato sammāsambuddhena, evaṃ dasabalañāṇavasena catūhākārehi thomitena. Apica tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇatāya jānatā, tiṇṇampi kammānaṃ ñāṇānuparivattito nisammakāritāya passatā, davādīnaṃ channamabhāvasādhikāya pahānasampadāya arahatā, chandādīnaṃ channamahānihetubhūtāya aparikkhayapaṭibhānasādhikāya sabbaññutāya sammāsambuddhena, evaṃ aṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhammavasena (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305) catūhākārehi thomitenāti evamādinā tesaṃ tesaṃ ñāṇadassanapahānabodhanatthehi saṅgahitānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ vasena yojanā kātabbāti.
这是针对四无所畏而说“以四种方式”。通过“已称赞”这个词,显示它是“世尊”一词的修饰语。虽然按低劣与高尚的分类,巴利文中意乐只说了两种,但按表现方式来说,其实有种种不同的分类,所以说“种种意乐”。而这个意乐就是内心的倾向和界,它又以各种方式显现为见解、容忍、喜好,因此用“种种意乐性”这个词来表达这个意思。正因如此,后面会说“种种意乐性、种种倾向性、种种见性、种种容忍性、种种喜好性”。“直到……这样”与“善通达”这个词有关联。在那里,“这样”一词只是填补音节,或者与“种种意乐性”这个词同指一事,而它的意义则是明显的,所以说“直到……以及善通达”。巴利
Catuvesārajjaṃ sandhāya ‘‘catūhākārehī’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Thomitenā’’ti etena imesaṃ ‘‘bhagavatā’’ti padassa visesanataṃ dasseti. Yadipi hīnapaṇītabhedena duvidhāva adhimutti pāḷiyaṃ vuttā, pavattiākāravasena pana anekabhedabhinnāvāti āha ‘‘nānādhimuttikatā’’ti. Sā pana adhimutti ajjhāsayadhātuyeva, tadapi tathā tathā dassanaṃ, khamanaṃ, rocanañcāti atthaṃ viññāpeti ‘‘nānajjhāsayatā’’ti iminā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nānādhimuttikatā nānajjhāsayatā nānādiṭṭhikatā nānakkhantitā nānārucitā’’ti. ‘‘Yāvañcida’’nti etassa ‘‘suppaṭividitā’’ti iminā sambandho. Tattha ca idanti padapūraṇamattaṃ, ‘‘nānādhimuttikatā’’ti etena vā padena samānādhikaraṇaṃ, tassattho pana pākaṭoyevāti āha ‘‘yāva ca suṭṭhu paṭividitā’’ti.
“凡此……”等句,是引出《界相应》的经文;这是把那部相应放在心上,再结合他们互相说好说坏的内容,说明长老们生起了这样的分类法。因此,为了用《界相应》的说法方式,说明世尊对这些众生根性已善加通达,注释者才说了“因为这……”等话;应当这样理解其含义。因为“因为这……”等话,正是在说明“已善加通达”。其中,“凡此种种意乐性……所好”应当这样连接。“依界”就是依意乐界(ajjhāsayadhātu)。“相合”就是互相联结、互相信任(saṃsandanti)。“相合”就是正确、或共同存在。“劣意乐者”等语,是说明其如此状态。“过去时”也是在过去之时,或这是绝对关联时的业格。对“种种意乐性”一词,“种种意乐性”是义释。“种种见……所好”是其自相的显示。以常见等所得而成为种种见性。以恶行善行等显示而成为种种不忍性。以恶欲无欲等而成为种种所好性。“以斗”就是以桶,或以āḷhaka。“以秤”就是以量。此处“种种意乐性智”所指的就是一切知智,而不是十力智,所以说“以一切知智”。这是阿阇梨法护长老(dī. ni. ṭī. 1.3)所说,在《阿毗达摩注》中、在《十力经注》中(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.149; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.21; vibha. aṭṭha. 831)也这样传来。巴利
‘‘Yā ca aya’’ntiādinā dhātusaṃyuttapāḷiṃ dassento tadeva saṃyuttaṃ manasi karitvā tesaṃ avaṇṇavaṇṇabhāsanena saddhiṃ ghaṭetvā therānamayaṃ saṅkhiyadhammo udapādīti dasseti. Ato assa bhagavato dhātusaṃyuttadesanānayena tāsaṃ suppaṭividitabhāvaṃ samatthanavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādimāhāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Suppaṭividitabhāvasamatthanañhi ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādivacanaṃ. Tattha yā ayaṃ nānādhimuttikatā…pe… rucitāti sambandho. Dhātusoti ajjhāsayadhātuyā. Saṃsandantīti sambandhenti vissāsenti. Samentīti sammā, saha vā bhavanti. ‘‘Hīnādhimuttikā’’tiādi tathābhāvavibhāvanaṃ. Atītampi addhānanti atītasmiṃ kāle, accantasaṃyoge vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ. Nānādhimuttikatā-padassa nānajjhāsayatāti atthavacanaṃ. Nānādiṭṭhi…pe… rucitāti tassa sarūpadassanaṃ. Sassatādiladdhivasena nānādiṭṭhikatā. Pāpācārakalyāṇācārādipakativasena nānakkhantitā. Pāpicchāappicchādivasena nānārucitā. Nāḷiyāti tumbena, āḷhakena vā. Tulāyāti mānena. Nānādhimuttikatāñāṇanti cettha sabbaññutaññāṇameva adhippetaṃ, na dasabalañāṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇenā’’ti. Evaṃ ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.3) vuttaṃ, abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ, dasabalasuttaṭṭhakathāsu (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.149; a. ni. aṭṭha. 3.10.21; vibha. aṭṭha. 831) ca evamāgataṃ.
外道却说:“所谓十力智并不单独存在,它只是一切知智的一种分类而已。”这种看法不能成立。因为十力智和一切知智确实是不同的。十力智只了知各自对应的特定范围,而一切知智则连十力智所了知的以及此外其余的一切都能了知。在十力智当中,第一只了知什么是因、什么不是因;第二只了知各种业与各种果报的差别;第三只了知业的界限;第四只了知界的种种差别;第五只了知众生的种种意向与偏好;第六只了知诸根的锐利与迟钝;第七只了知与禅那等相关的种种杂染等状态;第八只了知过去世五蕴相续的情况;第九只了知众生的死亡与投生;第十只了知对真理的界限。而一切知智则不仅了知这些所应了知的,还了知超出这些之外的;但它并不对所有这些十力智的功能全都实际执行。因为一切知智不能变成禅那而进入禅那,不能变成神通而显现神通,不能变成圣道而断尽烦恼。再者,应当这样反问外道:“所谓十力智,它是有寻有伺的、无寻唯伺的、还是无寻无伺的?是欲界的、色界的、还是无色界的?是世间的还是出世间的?”如果对方真的了解,他就会依次说前七种智是“有寻有伺的”,接下来的两种是“无寻无伺的”,而漏尽智则说“可能是有寻有伺的,可能是无寻唯伺的,可能是无寻无伺的”;同样,依次说前七种是欲界的,接下来两种是色界的,最后一种说“是出世间的”。但一切知智则只是有寻有伺的、只是欲界的、只是世间的。所以,十力智是一回事,一切知智是另一回事。因此应当理解:这是由被称为第五力智的种种意乐智以及一切知智所了知的。而且在诸本典籍中也能看到“ca”这个词。所谓“sā”就是如上所说的种种意乐性。以“两者都是名”等语,简要显示了前面所说经文的含义之后,又以“在这些当中也……”等语,说明了那分类法与它的关联。在这里,“iti ha me”当中,“iti”这个词表示“如此”的意思,“ha”只是一个虚词,或者是插入成分。由于连声的关系,i音消失,或者替换成了a音,因此用“evaṃ ime”来表示“如此这些”。巴利
Paravādī panāha ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma pāṭiyekkaṃ natthi, sabbaññutaññāṇassevāyaṃ pabhedo’’ti, taṃ tathā na daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññameva hi dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ. Dasabalañāṇañhi sakakiccameva jānāti, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana tampi tato avasesampi jānāti. Dasabalañāṇesu hi paṭhamaṃ kāraṇākāraṇameva jānāti, dutiyaṃ kammantaravipākantarameva, tatiyaṃ kammaparicchedameva, catutthaṃ dhātunānattakāraṇameva, pañcamaṃ sattānamajjhāsayādhimuttimeva, chaṭṭhaṃ indriyānaṃ tikkhamudubhāvameva, sattamaṃ jhānādīhi saddhiṃ tesaṃ saṃkilesādimeva, aṭṭhamaṃ pubbenivutthakkhandhasantatimeva, navamaṃ sattānaṃ cutipaṭisandhimeva, dasamaṃ saccaparicchedameva, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana etehi jānitabbañca tato uttariñca jānāti, etesaṃ pana kiccaṃ na sabbaṃ karoti. Tañhi jhānaṃ hutvā appetuṃ na sakkoti, iddhi hutvā vikubbituṃ na sakkoti, maggo hutvā kilese khepetuṃ na sakkoti. Apica paravādī evaṃ pucchitabbo ‘‘dasabalañāṇaṃ nāma etaṃ savitakkasavicāraṃ avitakkavicāramattaṃ avitakkaavicāraṃ, kāmāvacaraṃ rūpāvacaraṃ arūpāvacaraṃ, lokiyaṃ lokuttara’’nti. Jānanto paṭipāṭiyā satta ñāṇāni ‘‘savitakkasavicārānī’’ti vakkhati, tato parāni dve ‘‘avitakkaavicārānī’’ti vakkhati, āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ ‘‘siyā savitakkasavicāraṃ, siyā avitakkavicāramattaṃ, siyā avitakkaavicāra’’nti vakkhati, tathā paṭipāṭiyā satta kāmāvacarāni, tato paraṃ dve rūpāvacarāni, avasāne ekaṃ ‘‘lokuttara’nti vakkhati, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana savitakkasavicārameva, kāmāvacarameva, lokiyamevāti. Iti aññadeva dasabalañāṇaṃ, aññaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇanti, tasmā pañcamabalañāṇasaṅkhātena nānādhimuttikatāñāṇena ca sabbaññutaññāṇena ca viditāti attho veditabbo. Ca-kāropi hi potthakesu dissati. Sāti yathāvuttā nānādhimuttikatā. ‘‘Dvepi nāmā’’tiādinā yathāvuttasuttassatthaṃ saṅkhepena dassetvā ‘‘imesu cāpī’’tiādinā tassa saṅkhiyadhammassa tadabhisambandhataṃ āvi karoti. Iti ha meti ettha evaṃsaddatthe iti-saddo, ha-kāro nipātamattaṃ, āgamo vā. Sandhivasena ikāralopo, akārādeso vāti dasseti ‘‘evaṃ ime’’ti iminā.
4 “知晓”在这里:认知作用本来属于自然状态,虽然在一般意义上没有差别,但为了说明它依各种具体作为而具备能力、因此有多种差别,所以说了“因为世尊……”等话。“事物”指家宅之物。“以一切知智见后而知”这只是世俗的说法而已。因为并不是在那种“见”之外,另外还有一种叫“知”的东西。这个智是依于转向、依于欲愿、依于作意、依于心念的生起而运转的。为了令听者容易理解其义,便提出一个像是当面质问的问题:“正在做什么而知?”意思是:世尊正在做后夜分应做之事时,那个智依于转向等而运转,并因此如此而知。若只有一般性,那么说差别就有意义,为了回应这个质问,说了“这不过是作用……”等。以阿罗汉道断除了能令它生起的烦恼,因此在十八佛法中说“没有散乱心”。这里的意思是:没有无意义的心念现起。即便如此,所提出的质问仍然适用,于是以“那五种……”等来排除质问。其中,前两种作用应按白天分来理解,后三种应按夜间分来理解,因为接下来正是这样说明的。巴利
4. ‘‘Viditvā’’ti ettha pakatiyatthabhūtā vijānanakiriyā sāmaññena abhedavatīpi samānā taṃtaṃkaraṇayogyatāya anekappabhedāti dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vatthūnīti gharavatthūni. ‘‘Sabbaññutaññāṇena disvā aññāsī’’ti ca vohāravacanamattametaṃ. Na hi tena dassanato aññaṃ jānanaṃ nāma natthi. Tadidaṃ ñāṇaṃ āvajjanapaṭibaddhaṃ ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhaṃ manasikārapaṭibaddhaṃ cittuppādapaṭibaddhaṃ hutvā pavattati. Kiṃ nāma karonto bhagavā tena ñāṇena āvajjanādipaṭibaddhena aññāsīti sotūnamatthassa suviññāpanatthaṃ parammukhā viya codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti ‘‘kiṃ karonto aññāsī’’ti iminā, pacchimayāmakiccaṃ karonto taṃ ñāṇaṃ āvajjanādipaṭibaddhaṃ hutvā tena tathā aññāsīti vuttaṃ hoti. Sāmaññasmiṃ sati visesavacanaṃ sātthakaṃ siyāti anuyogenāha ‘‘kiccañcanāmeta’’ntiādi. Arahattamaggena samugghātaṃ kataṃ tassa samuṭṭhāpakakilesasamugghāṭanena, yato ‘‘natthi abyāvaṭamano’’ti aṭṭhārasasu buddhadhammesu vuccati. Niratthako cittasamudācāro natthīti hettha attho. Evampi vuttānuyogo tadavatthoyevāti codanamapaneti ‘‘taṃ pañcavidha’’ntiādinā. Tattha purimakiccadvayaṃ divasabhāgavasena, itarattayaṃ rattibhāgavasena gahetabbaṃ tathāyeva vakkhamānattā.
“为了摄受侍者,也为了让身体舒适”——用这句话说明:世尊由多劫累积福德资粮而生的殊胜面容,本来就没有口臭等过失,但他仍然为了这两个目的而做漱口等事。因为一切佛陀的身体,内外都不被尘垢染污,就像洗净的摩尼宝珠一样。“在闲静处”:指与果等至相应、能增长远离的座位。“度过”:这里说的是以果等至度过时间,那也不是因为偏向远离,而是为了让别人见了跟着学。意思是:他穿上像极红双层布那样的内衣,这是更换寺院住处时穿的;系上像闪电一样的腰带;披上如云色的善逝大衣;拿起石钵。各处确实都是这样说的。“有时独自一人”等,是显示世尊为了随顺调伏各种所化众生而前往接近他们。“或村或镇”:这里的“或”字表示选择,因此也包括城市。关联是:他以许多随自己心意而现起的神变进入。巴利
‘‘Upaṭṭhākānuggahaṇatthaṃ, sarīraphāsukatthañcā’’ti etena anekakappasamupacitapuññasambhārajanitaṃ bhagavato mukhavaraṃ duggandhādidosaṃ nāma natthi, tadubhayatthameva pana mukhadhovanādīni karotīti dasseti. Sabbopi hi buddhānaṃ kāyo bāhirabbhantarehi malehi anupakkiliṭṭho sudhotamaṇi viya hoti. Vivittāsaneti phalasamāpattīnamanurūpe vivekānubrūhanāsane. Vītināmetvāti phalasamāpattīhi vītināmanaṃ vuttaṃ, tampi na vivekaninnatāya, paresañca diṭṭhānugati āpajjanatthaṃ. Surattadupaṭṭaṃ antaravāsakaṃ vihāranivāsanaparivattanavasena nivāsetvā vijjulatāsadisaṃ kāyabandhanaṃ bandhitvā meghavaṇṇaṃ sugatacīvaraṃ pārupitvā selamayapattaṃ ādāyāti adhippāyo. Tathāyeva hi tattha tattha vutto. ‘‘Kadāci ekako’’tiādi tesaṃ tesaṃ vineyyānaṃ vinayanānukūlaṃ bhagavato upasaṅkamanadassanaṃ. Gāmaṃ vā nigamaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo vikappanattho, tena nagarampi vikappeti. Yathāruci vattamānehi anekehi pāṭihāriyehi pavisatīti sambandho.
“即所谓”等句,是在详细展开后一部分。“即所谓”在这里是助词,意思是“那是什么”;也可以理解为“这种具神变的进入是什么”。柔软之风,就是已经变得柔软的风,或者说是以柔软的状态吹行的风。水珠,就是水滴。放出,就是洒下。令尘平息,就是使尘埃沉降下来,在上方形成华盖而停住;因为它能除去狂风、烈日、霜雪等,所以成就了华盖的作用。由于从各处雪山等地的花树采集运送而来的含义可以被人理解,所以没有那样说。仅仅以令其变得平坦,就低伏、隆起,于是在落脚的时候,大地就变得平坦。这只是一个例子,因为除去砂砾、碎石、荆棘、尖锐树桩等也是可能的;而且这是善安立足相这一特征的异熟果,并不是神通所变化出来的。或者莲花等:这里的“或”字是抉择的意思,由此显示世尊随自己的意愿而行事:“如果按照前面所说的方式,大地变得平坦,那么它们就不承接;然而只有在不平坦的时候,它们才承接。”世尊的一切行走,首先都以称为举右足的随好所庄严,所以说“在右足刚放置时”。阿阇梨法护长老和舍利弗长老说,因为诸佛具有一切最胜性,所以这样说;意思是说,因为是一切中最上的,所以这样说。这样一来,就成了:因为是最上之人,所以有那样的本性。其关联是:刚放置时,就跃出而奔行。这只是就为了调伏所化众生而显现的导师神变,约他们所见之处来说的。说了“六色光明”之后,又说“像金水流一样呈金黄色”,应当理解为:因为世尊身体大部分是黄色的光。在《显扬真义》中说:“这里‘味’一词是水的代称,‘金黄’一词是黄金色的代称,意思是像金水流一样呈金黄色。”《显扬真义》中说。庄严村镇聚落等处的楼阁殿堂等,作为在那里存在的东西,装饰着它们而住。巴利
‘‘Seyyathida’’ntiādinā pacchimapakkhaṃ vitthāreti. Seyyathidanti ca taṃ katamanti atthe nipāto, idaṃ vā sappāṭihīrapavisanaṃ katamantipi vaṭṭati. Mudugatavātāti mudubhūtā, mudubhāvena vā gatā vātā. Udakaphusitānīti udakabindūni. Muñcantāti osiñcantā. Reṇuṃ vūpasametvāti rajaṃ sannisīdāpetvā upari vitānaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhanti caṇḍa-vātātapa-himapātādi-haraṇena vitānakiccanipphādakattā, tato tato himavantādīsu pupphūpagarukkhato upasaṃharitvāti atthassa viññāyamānattā tathā na vuttaṃ. Samabhāgakaraṇamattena onamanti, unnamanti ca, tatoyeva pādanikkhepasamaye samāva bhūmi hoti. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ sakkharakathalakaṇṭakasaṅkukalalādiapagamanassāpi sambhavato, tañca suppatiṭṭhitapādatālakkhaṇassa nissandaphalaṃ, na iddhinimmānaṃ. Padumapupphāni vāti ettha vā-saddo vikappanattho, tena ‘‘yadi yathāvuttanayena samā bhūmi hoti, evaṃ sati tāni na paṭiggaṇhanti, tathā pana asatiyeva paṭiggaṇhantī’’ti bhagavato yathāruci pavattanaṃ dasseti. Sabbadāva bhagavato gamanaṃ paṭhamaṃ dakkhiṇapāduddharaṇasaṅkhātānubyañjanapaṭimaṇḍitanti āha ‘‘ṭhapitamatte dakkhiṇapāde’’ti. Buddhānaṃ sabbadakkhiṇatāya tathā vuttanti ācariyadhammapālatthero,(dī. ni. ṭī. 1.4) ācariyasāriputtatthero (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.53) ca vadati, sabbesaṃ uttamatāya evaṃ vuttanti attho. Evaṃ sati uttamapurisānaṃ tathāpakatitāyāti āpajjati. Ṭhapitamatte nikkhamitvā dhāvantīti sambandho. Idañca yāvadeva vineyyajanavinayanatthaṃ satthu pāṭihāriyanti tesaṃ dassanaṭṭhānaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. ‘‘Chabbaṇṇarasmiyo’’ti vatvāpi ‘‘suvaṇṇarasapiñjarāni viyā’’ti vacanaṃ bhagavato sarīre pītābhāya yebhuyyatāyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Rasa-saddo cettha udakapariyāyo, piñjara-saddo hemavaṇṇapariyāyo, suvaṇṇajaladhārā viya suvaṇṇavaṇṇānīti attho’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.buddhāciṇṇakathā.22) sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vuttaṃ. Pāsādakūṭāgārādīni tesu tesu gāmanigamādīsu saṃvijjamānāni alaṅkarontiyo hutvā.
“如此”等语,是显示他们自己依法的本性而发出声音。那时接近身体,所以叫“近身”,并不是随便停在什么地方。“室内街道”这句话,是显示与世尊入城乞食相应的街道。因为世尊并不像贪吃放逸的乞食者那样到处乱走。应当知道:先走的人,或者有能力布施相应食物的人,会接过世尊的钵。“恭敬”是指以敬重之心来供养,或者使世尊成为受恭敬、被恭敬的对象。这只是世俗的说法,对世尊来说,并没有所谓不被恭敬这回事。“心相续”是指过去和现在生起的心相续。其中的关联是:他这样说法,使某些人安住在阿罗汉果中。说“某些人出家”,是为了显示阿罗汉果包含在出家之中,并不是为了否定在家人证得阿罗汉果。因为证得阿罗汉果的在家人,其本性就是当天出家,或者当天般涅槃。正如那先长老所说:“大王,这是不相称的。在家人的身份不相称,因为身份不相称,由于身份软弱,证得阿罗汉果的在家人,当天就会出家或般涅槃。大王,这不是阿罗汉果的过失,这正是在家人身份的过失,也就是身份软弱。”(《弥兰陀问经》5.2.2)这里应当说的全部内容就是这些。在这里,正是通过入城神变这一关联,显示了摄受大众;如果没有入城神变,就应该把“他们衣着整齐、穿着妥当”等话按适当方式连接起来,从意义上说明摄受大众。那也还是午前的事。这里的“侍奉厅”就是圆亭。到了那里,就说是“去圆亭”。这里写的是“去圆亭”。“香圆亭”的说法,在《满足希求》注中可以看到,它的复注中说:“以四种香庄严的圆亭。”说“进入香殿”,是因为与进入的动作有关,也因为靠近它,所以应当理解为“去进入”,而不是“住在里面”。这样,“那时世尊”等话就非常妥当了。巴利
‘‘Tathā’’tiādinā sayameva dhammatāvasena tesaṃ saddakaraṇaṃ dasseti. Tadā kāyaṃ upagacchantīti kāyūpagāni, na yattha katthaci ṭhitāni. ‘‘Antaravīthi’’nti iminā bhagavato piṇḍāya gamanānurūpavīthiṃ dasseti. Na hi bhagavā loluppacārapiṇḍacāriko viya yattha katthaci gacchati. Ye paṭhamaṃ gatā, ye vā tadanucchavikaṃ piṇḍapātaṃ dātuṃ samatthā, te bhagavatopi pattaṃ gaṇhantīti veditabbaṃ. Paṭimānentīti patissamānasā pūjenti, bhagavantaṃ vā paṭimānāpenti paṭimānantaṃ karonti. Vohāramattañcetaṃ, bhagavato pana apaṭimānanā nāma natthi. Cittasantānānīti atīte, etarahi ca pavattacittasantānāni. Yathā keci arahatte patiṭṭhahanti, tathā dhammaṃ desetīti sambandho. Keci pabbajitvāti ca arahattasamāpannānaṃ pabbajjāsaṅkhepagatadassanatthaṃ , na pana gihīnaṃ arahattasamāpannatāpaṭikkhepanatthaṃ. Ayañhi arahattappattānaṃ gihīnaṃ sabhāvo, yā tadaheva pabbajjā vā, kālaṃ kiriyāvāti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ āyasmatā nāgasenattherena ‘‘visamaṃ mahārāja, gihiliṅgaṃ, visame liṅge liṅgadubbalatāya arahattaṃ patto gihī tasmiṃyeva divase pabbajati vā parinibbāyati vā neso mahārāja, doso arahattassa, gihiliṅgasseveso doso yadidaṃ liṅgadubbalatā’’ti (mi. pa. 5.2.2) sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ. Ettha ca sappāṭihīrappavesanasambandheneva mahājanānuggahaṇaṃ dassitaṃ, appāṭihīrappavesanena ca pana ‘‘te sunivatthā supārutā’’tiādivacanaṃ yathārahaṃ sambandhitvā mahājanānuggahaṇaṃ atthato vibhāvetabbaṃ hoti. Tampi hi purebhattakiccamevāti. Upaṭṭhānasālā cettha maṇḍalamāḷo. Tattha gantvā maṇḍalamāḷeti idha pāṭho likhito. ‘‘Gandhamaṇḍalamāḷe’’tipi (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.53) manorathapūraṇiyā dissati, taṭṭīkāyañca ‘‘catujjātiyagandhena paribhaṇḍe maṇḍalamāḷe’’ti vuttaṃ. Gandhakuṭiṃ pavisatīti ca pavisanakiriyāsambandhatāya, tassamīpatāya ca vuttaṃ, tasmā pavisituṃ gacchatīti attho daṭṭhabbo, na pana anto tiṭṭhatīti. Evañhi ‘‘atha kho bhagavā’’tiādivacanaṃ (dī. ni. 1.4) sūpapannaṃ hoti.
“那时”,就是指像这样进入香殿的时候。“侍奉”,是指在近处。“洗了脚,站在洗脚台上,教诫比丘僧团”——这里要理解为:他正洗着脚、站在洗脚台上时,就在教诫。正是为了这件事,世尊等着比丘们吃完饭才坐下。“难得的成就”,意思是:即使得到了人身,像住在合适的地方、诸根完备、获得信心等等这些被称为成就的功德,也是很难得的。不过有些书上写成“难得的信心成就”,这个写法是不对的。“在那里”,是指在站在那个洗脚台上教诫的时候,或者是指在那些比丘当中。夜里住的地方叫“夜住处”,白天住的地方同样叫“昼住处”。“某些”等句,是对它的分别说明。四大王天住处,是指四大王天界里空着的天宫。这个道理也适用于三十三天住处等等。然后,世尊进入香殿,饭后把时间分成三段:第一段里,如果愿意,就右侧而卧,作狮子卧;如果不愿意,就进入诸佛所行的果定;然后按时间从定中起来,在第二段里,像后夜第三分那样观察世间,为了看到所应度化者的智慧已经成熟,所以有“如果愿意”等说法。狮子卧等的含义,前面已经讲过了。凡是没出现过、又不好懂的字词,我们才来解释。“应善加安顿”,就是以支撑的方式让他安住,已经善加安顿。身体像那样的人,就叫“如此”。为了听法而聚集。知道那大众心里的想法之后,针对已经做到的事,说“以随顺已聚集大众的神变”。在哪里共同说法,那里就叫“法堂”。“适合时机”,是指“在这个时候,对这个人,应当这样讲”,也就是适合各个不同的时机。“适合因缘”,是同一个意思的另一种说法,或者是指适合事情发生的因缘。另外,“适合因缘”也可以指用理由和譬喻来配合。世尊总是适时说法,并说明理由。他了解时机之后才把大众遣散,不会一直讲到天黑。他的意思是:了解时机之后才遣散大众。有些地方还看到“了解因缘之后遣散大众”这种变体写法,那是后来疏忽写错的。巴利
Atha khoti evaṃ gandhakuṭiṃ pavisituṃ gamanakāle. Upaṭṭhāneti samīpapadese. ‘‘Pāde pakkhāletvā pādapīṭhe ṭhatvā bhikkhusaṅghaṃ ovadatī’’ti ettha pāde pakkhālentova pādapīṭhe tiṭṭhanto ovadatīti veditabbaṃ. Etadatthaṃyeva hi bhikkhūnaṃ bhattakiccapariyosānaṃ āgamayamāno nisīdi. Dullabhā sampattīti satipi manussattapaṭilābhe patirūpadesavāsaindriyāvekallasaddhāpaṭilābhādayo sampattisaṅkhātā guṇā dullabhāti attho. Potthakesu pana ‘‘dullabhā saddhāsampattī’’ti pāṭho dissati, so ayuttova. Tatthāti tasmiṃ pādapīṭhe ṭhatvā ovadanakāle, tesu vā bhikkhūsu, rattiyā vasanaṃ ṭhānaṃ rattiṭṭhānaṃ, tathā divāṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Kecī’’tiādi tabbivaraṇaṃ. Cātumahārājikabhavananti cātumahārājikadevaloke suññavimānāni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Esa nayo tāvatiṃsabhavanādīsupi. Tato bhagavā gandhakuṭiṃ pavisitvā pacchābhattaṃ tayo bhāge katvā paṭhamabhāge sace ākaṅkhati, dakkhiṇena passena sīhaseyyaṃ kappeti, sace nākaṅkhati, buddhāciṇṇaṃ phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, atha yathākālaparicchedaṃ tato vuṭṭhahitvā dutiyabhāge pacchimayāmassa tatiyakoṭṭhāse viya lokaṃ voloketi veneyyānaṃ ñāṇaparipākaṃ passituṃ, tenāha ‘‘sace ākaṅkhatī’’tiādi. Sīhaseyyantiādīnamattho heṭṭhā vuttova. Yañhi apubbaṃ padaṃ anuttānaṃ, tadeva vaṇṇayissāma. Sammā assāsitabboti gāhāpanavasena upatthambhitabboti samassāsito. Tādiso kāyo yassāti tathā. Dhammassavanatthaṃ sannipatati. Tassā parisāya cittācāraṃ ñatvā katabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sampattaparisāyaanurūpena pāṭihāriyenā’’ti. Yattha dhammaṃ saha bhāsanti, sā dhammasabhā nāma. Kālayuttanti ‘‘imissā velāya imassa evaṃ vattabba’’nti taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ. Samayayuttanti tasseva vevacanaṃ, aṭṭhuppattianurūpaṃ vā samayayuttaṃ. Atha vā samayayuttanti hetudāharaṇehi yuttaṃ. Kālena sāpadesañhi bhagavā dhammaṃ deseti. Kālaṃ viditvā parisaṃ uyyojeti, na yāva samandhakārā dhammaṃ desetīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Samayaṃ viditvā parisaṃ uyyojesī’’tipi katthaci pariyāyavacanapāṭho dissati, so pacchā pamādalikhito.
“肢体”就是指身体本身,因为它由许多部分组成的缘故才这样说。“令取时节”这句话表明,洒水只是为了取得时节,并不是为了洗掉污垢。因为尘垢污秽确实不会沾在世尊身上。用四种香熏过的小屋,就叫香殿。它的庭院也是这样。在果定中短暂地独处静坐。从各处,就是从各人自己的夜住处和昼住处,前往;近处就是侍奉,也就是亲近、服侍的意思。在那里,就是在那坐处,或者在初夜时分,或者在那些比丘当中。巴利
Gattānīti kāyoyeva anekāvayavattā vutto. ‘‘Utuṃ gaṇhāpetī’’ti iminā utugaṇhāpanatthameva osiñcanaṃ, na pana malavikkhālanatthanti dasseti. Na hi bhagavato kāye rajojallaṃ upalimpatīti. Catujjātikena gandhena paribhāvitā kuṭī gandhakuṭī. Tassā pariveṇaṃ tathā. Phalasamāpattīhi muhuttaṃ paṭisallīno. Tato tatoti attano attano rattiṭṭhānadivāṭhānato, upagantvā, samīpe vā ṭhānaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ, bhajanaṃ sevananti attho. Tatthāti tasmiṃ nisīdanaṭṭhāne, purimayāme vā, tesu vā bhikkhūsu.
为了用问答等方式把想要表达的意思说完整,没有直接说“十千世界”,而是说“整个十千世界”,这是为了把它的许多部分都涵盖进去。也就是说:在食前、食后和初夜这几个时段,因为人群太多,没能得到机会;现在到了中夜才得到机会,或者是因为世尊让出了机会才得到。他们又是怎么问的呢?所以说“乃至四字,如所构”。“如所构”就是与所构相应,或者不超出所构;这里是在说明,他们是随顺自己的辩才来发问的。巴利
Pañhākathanādivasena adhippāyaṃ sampādento ‘‘dasasahassilokadhātū’’ti evaṃ avatvā tassā anekāvayavasaṅgahaṇatthaṃ ‘‘sakaladasasahassilokadhātū’’ti vuttaṃ. Purebhattapacchābhattapurimayāmesu manussaparisābāhullato okāsaṃ alabhitvā idāni majjhimayāmeyeva okāsaṃ labhamānā, bhagavatā vā katokāsatāya okāsaṃ labhamānāti adhippāyo. Kīdisaṃ pana pucchantīti āha ‘‘yathābhisaṅkhataṃ antamaso caturakkharampī’’ti. Yathābhisaṅkhatanti abhisaṅkhatānurūpaṃ, tadanatikkamma vā, etena yathā tathā attano paṭibhānānurūpaṃ pucchantīti dasseti.
在饭后时段的三分中,第一分里并不是绝对要作狮子卧,所以说“从食前开始就因为久坐而身体受压”。正因为这样,前面说“如果愿意”,就已经表明那时作狮子卧并不是固定的。疲倦的状态就是疲劳。为了解除身体的疲倦状态,以经行来度过时间,然后作狮子卧,这是这里的关联。所谓佛眼,就是由了知意乐、随眠、根器胜劣的智慧所构成的、属于第五和第六力的佛眼。正因为广泛观察世间,所以它被称为佛眼,而这里则是依照世尊在后夜经常修习的情况来说的。有时,世尊也以其余的力量之智,乃至以一切知智来完成这件事。巴利
Pacchābhattakālassa tīsu bhāgesu paṭhamabhāge sīhaseyyākappanaṃ ekantaṃ na hotīti āha ‘‘purebhattato paṭṭhāya nisajjāya pīḷitassa sarīrassā’’ti. Teneva hi pubbe ‘‘sace ākaṅkhatī’’ti tadā sīhaseyyākappanassa anibaddhatā vibhāvitā. Kilāsubhāvo kilamatho. Sarīrassa kilāsubhāvamocanatthaṃ caṅkamena vītināmeti sīhaseyyaṃ kappetīti sambandho. Buddhacakkhunāti āsayānusayaindriyaparopariyattañāṇasaṅkhātena pañcamachaṭṭhabalabhūtena buddhacakkhunā. Tena hi lokavolokanabāhullatāya taṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti vuccati, idañca pacchimayāme bhagavato bahulaṃ āciṇṇavasena vuttaṃ. Appekadā avasiṭṭhabalañāṇehi, sabbaññutaññāṇeneva ca bhagavā tamatthaṃ sādheti.
“在完成后夜的事务时了知”,为了说明前面所说的这个含义,所以接着说“然而在那一天”等话。诸佛世尊无论住在哪里,这五种事务都不会离开他们,因为他们在一切时候都善巧地安住于念与正知。因此,为了显示在那一天他们也没有舍弃这些事务,应当知道这里是在说明五种事务的运用。那里的“经行”指适合经行的场所。应当连起来理解为“正在经行时了知”。在前面所说的两种含义中,只取后一种含义,所以说“从一切知智开始”。因为前一种含义通过论典已经成立,所以很容易理解。巴利
‘‘Pacchimayāmakiccaṃ karonto aññāsī’’ti pubbe vuttamatthaṃ samatthento ‘‘tasmiṃ pana divase’’tiādimāha. Buddhānaṃ bhagavantānaṃ yattha katthaci vasantānaṃ idaṃ pañcavidhaṃ kiccaṃ avijahitameva hoti sabbakālaṃ suppatiṭṭhitasatisampajaññattā, tasmā tadahepi tadavijahanabhāvadassanatthaṃ idha pañcavidhakiccapayojananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Caṅkamanti tattha caṅkamanānurūpaṭṭhānaṃ. Caṅkamamāno aññāsīti yojetabbaṃ. Pubbe vutte atthadvaye pacchimatthaññeva gahetvā ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ ārabbhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Purimattho hi pakaraṇādhigatattā suviññeyyoti.
当时,世尊知道了那些比丘心里的这个想法后,就朝集会堂走去——这段经文是省略了一部分内容的版本。所以,为了说明“知道之后、这样想过之后才前往”这个意思,经文才说“知道之后,又对他……”等等。其中,“他生起了这个念头”是指世尊心里有这样的思量,或者说他心里生起了这样的想法。这里的词性发生了转换,就像“这是最上”等说法那样。一切知智的作用并不是在一切方面都明显可见的。“无间断”是指按顺序开示而没有间隔,或者按所说的内容开示而没有差别。这个词是中性的。“以那件事为因缘”是指把所说的那些话当作这部经生起的因缘,也可以理解为当作这部经说法的因缘。这里的“义”字表示原因,由此说明这部经的事缘安立。“在六十二处”就是在六十二种见解处。“不可逆转”是指不被沙门、婆罗门、天、魔、梵天或世间任何人所逆转。“作狮子吼”是指发出被称为最胜吼的无畏之吼。然而世间人所说的是:巴利
‘‘Atha kho bhagavā tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ imaṃ saṅkhiyadhammaṃ viditvā yena maṇḍalamāḷo, tenupasaṅkamī’’ti ayaṃ sāvasesapāṭho, tasmā etaṃ viditvā, evaṃ cintetvā ca upasaṅkamīti attho veditabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘ñatvā ca panassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha assa etadahosīti assa bhagavato etaṃ parivitakkanaṃ, eso vā cetaso parivitakko ahosi, liṅgavipallāsoyaṃ ‘‘etadagga’’ntiādīsu (a. ni. 1.188 ādayo) viya. Sabbaññutaññāṇakiccaṃ na sabbathā pākaṭaṃ. Nirantaranti anupubbārocanavasena nibbivaraṃ, yathābhāsitassa vā ārocanavasena nibbisesaṃ. Bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ. Taṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvāti taṃ yathārocitaṃ vacanaṃ imassa suttassa uppattikāraṇaṃ katvā, imassa vā suttassa desanāya uppannaṃ kāraṇaṃ katvātipi attho. Attha-saddo cettha kāraṇe, tena imassa suttassa aṭṭhuppattikaṃ nikkhepaṃ dasseti. Dvāsaṭṭhiyā ṭhānesūti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigataṭṭhānesu. Appaṭivattiyanti samaṇena vā brāhmaṇena vā devena vā mārena vā brahmunā vā kenaci vā lokasmiṃ anivattiyaṃ. Sīhanādaṃ nadantoti seṭṭhanādasaṅkhātaṃ abhītanādaṃ nadanto. Yaṃ pana lokiyā vadanti –
在后半句中,虎、雄牛、公牛、象;
狮子、虎、龙等,是表示最胜义的阳性词。巴利
‘‘Uttarasmiṃ pade byagghapuṅgavosabhakuñjarā; Sīhasaddūlanāgādyā, pume seṭṭhatthagocarā’’ti.
这应当从多数情况来理解。或者,是发出像狮子吼一样的声音。这个意思要通过《狮子吼经》(《增支部》6.64;10.21)来说明。又好像那头有鬃毛的兽王,因为能忍受、能摧毁,所以被称为“狮子”;同样,如来也因为能忍受世间法、能摧毁外道的说法,所以被称为“狮子”。因此,也应该理解为:他是在发出狮子——也就是如来——的吼声。就像狮子具备狮子的力量,在任何地方都无所畏惧、毫无怯懦,发出狮子吼;同样,如来这头狮子也具备如来的种种力量,在八种大众中无所畏惧、毫无怯懦,以“这些是见解的立足处”等方式,发出具足种种说法庄严的狮子吼。关于这一点,经中这样说:“比丘们,‘狮子’是如来、阿罗汉、正等正觉者的称号。比丘们,如来在大众中说法,这就是他的狮子吼。”(《增支部》10.21)因为“这些是见解的立足处”等,正是这里将要说的说法本身,也就是狮子吼。还应知道,按照“以受为缘而有渴爱”等将要说的方式,这也是对缘起条件的归纳。像须弥山等譬喻那样,通过这两个譬喻,显示出《梵网经》说法的不共与极其难行。“以金顶”,是指以黄金制成的特殊工具。就像用宝顶来完成房屋一样,以阿罗汉顶来完成《梵网经》;“顶”的意思是指达到究竟、极为高出的顶端。这里是说,因为以阿罗汉果为究竟,所以那本身就是一切功德中最上的。不过,前面那个“我”字是就说法而言的。即使已经般涅槃,我的这说法在后世五千年中,以听闻、受持、忆持、诵读等方式修习的人,以及如此修行的人,都将导向涅槃,这是其意趣。巴利
Taṃ yebhuyyavasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sīhanādasadisaṃ vā nādaṃ nadanto. Ayamattho sīhanādasuttena (a. ni. 6.64; 10.21) dīpetabbo. Yathā vā kesaro migarājā sahanato, hananato, ca ‘‘sīho’’ti vuccati, evaṃ tathāgatopi lokadhammānaṃ sahanato, parappavādānaṃ hananato ca ‘‘sīho’’ti vuccati. Tasmā sīhassa tathāgatassa nādaṃ nadantotipi attho daṭṭhabbo. Yathā hi sīho sīhabalena samannāgato sabbattha visārado vigatalomahaṃso sīhanādaṃ nadati, evaṃ tathāgatasīhopi tathāgatabalehi samannāgato aṭṭhasu parisāsu visārado vigatalomahaṃso ‘‘ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena nānāvidhadesanāvilāsasampannaṃ sīhanādaṃ nadati . Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sīhoti kho bhikkhave, tathāgatassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ arahato sammāsambuddhassa. Yaṃ kho bhikkhave, tathāgato parisāya dhammaṃ deseti, idamassa hoti sīhanādasmi’’nti (a. ni. 10.21). ‘‘Ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā’’tiādikā hi idha vakkhamānadesanāyeva sīhanādo. Tesaṃ ‘‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’tiādinā vakkhamānanayena paccayākārassa samodhānampi veditabbaṃ. Sineruṃ…pe… viya cāti upamādvayena brahmajāladesanāya anaññasādhāraṇattā sudukkarataṃ dasseti. Suvaṇṇakūṭenāti suvaṇṇamayapaharaṇopakaraṇavisesena. Ratananikūṭena viya agāraṃ arahattanikūṭena brahmajālasuttantaṃ niṭṭhapento, nikūṭenāti ca niṭṭhānagatena accuggatakūṭenāti attho. Idañca arahattaphalapariyosānattā sabbaguṇānaṃ tadeva sabbesaṃ uttaritaranti vuttaṃ. Purimo pana me-saddo desanāpekkhoti parinibbutassāpi me sā desanā aparabhāge pañcavassasahassānīti attho yutto. Savanauggahaṇadhāraṇavācanādivasena paricayaṃ karonte, tathā ca paṭipanne nibbānaṃ sampāpikā bhavissatīti adhippāyo.
“Yadaggena yenā”是工具格的说明,应当同样理解为“tadaggena tenā”。“etaṃ”指的是“yena tena”这一对词。其中“tattha”的意思就是“在那个圆堂里”。或者,“yena”是处所义的工具格,而“tena”是目的义。因此,有些论师也说“tattha”就是指那个圆堂。“upasaṅkamī”则是“正在走近”的意思,因为这里指的是现在时;但为了表明那次走近是过去发生的,所以依当时的角度用了过去时的说法“upasaṅkamī”。这样,“upasaṅkamitvā(走近之后)”这个说法才顺理成章。否则,如果两个词都是过去时,就不该那样说了。走近有“行走”和“到达”两种意思,但这里只取“行走”。因为怀着想到达的愿望前往某处时,由于一段一段地经过那些地方,就可以说“他走近、正在走近那个地方”,所以说“他去了那里”,由此排除了“到达”的意思。因为,想去某处而行走,只有真正到达了,才叫“到达”。这里没有加以解释的“upasaṅkamitvā”这个词,是表明走近行为的结束。或者,“gato”就是已经到达。再者,不带前缀的词也像带前缀的词一样表达不同的意思,带前缀的词也像不带前缀的词一样。因此,“upasaṅkamitvā”这个词的意思应当理解为:这样到达之后,为了能够对比丘们更近地宣说被称为靠近的问,或者说法,而到达了那个地方。此外,“yena”是因由义的工具格。以什么原因,世尊应当走近那个圆堂,以那个原因而走近,这就是意思。而那个原因,在义注中已经以“ime bhikkhū”等语说过了。巴利
Yadaggena yenāti karaṇaniddeso, tadaggena tenā tipi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etanti ‘‘yena tenā’’ti etaṃ padadvayaṃ. Tatthāti hi tasmiṃ maṇḍalamāḷeti attho. Yenāti vā bhummatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Tenāti pana upayogatthe. Tasmā tatthāti taṃ maṇḍalamāḷantipi vadanti. Upasaṅkamīti ca upasaṅkamantoti attho paccuppannakālassa adhippetattā, tadupasaṅkamanassa pana atītabhāvassa sūcanato ‘‘upasaṅkamī’’ti takkālāpekkhanavasena atītapayogo vutto. Evañhi ‘‘upasaṅkamitvā’’ti vacanaṃ sūpapannaṃ hoti. Itarathā dvinnampi vacanānaṃ atītakālikattā tathāvattabbameva na siyā. Upasaṅkamanassa ca gamanaṃ, upagamanañcāti dvidhā attho, idha pana gamanameva. Sampattukāmatāya hi yaṃ kiñci ṭhānaṃ gacchanto taṃ taṃ padesātikkamanavasena ‘‘taṃ ṭhānaṃ upasaṅkami upasaṅkamanto’’ti vattabbataṃ labhati, tenāha ‘‘tattha gato’’ti, tena upagamanatthaṃ nivatteti. Yañhi ṭhānaṃ pattumicchanto gacchati, taṃ pattatāyeva ‘‘upagamana’’nti vuccati. Yamettha na saṃvaṇṇitaṃ ‘‘upasaṅkamitvā’’ti padaṃ, taṃ upasaṅkamanapariyosānadīpanaṃ. Atha vā gatoti upagato. Anupasaggopi hi saddo saupasaggo viya atthantaraṃ vadati saupasaggopi anupasaggo viyāti. Ato ‘‘upasaṅkamitvā’’ti padassa evaṃ upagato tato āsannataraṃ bhikkhūnaṃ samīpasaṅkhātaṃ pañhaṃ vā kathetuṃ, dhammaṃ vā desetuṃ sakkuṇeyyaṭṭhānaṃ upagantvāti attho veditabbo. Apica yenāti hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ. Yena kāraṇena bhagavatā so maṇḍalamāḷo upasaṅkamitabbo, tena kāraṇena upasaṅkamīti attho. Kāraṇaṃ pana ‘‘ime bhikkhū’’tiādinā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttameva.
“坐在铺设好的座位上”这一句,如果有人问“这是谁铺设的”,为了说明是比丘们铺设的,就说了“据说在佛世时”等话。其中,“佛世时”指世尊还在世的时期。“殊胜”指比已获得的禅那、道、果更为超胜的成就。“atha”是表示疑问的不变词,意思是“是否看见”。应当这样连接理解:正在思惟的比丘;同样,在说明由此看见的理由之后,又说“教诫之后”。“重担”是指因为世尊适时之坐难得,所以是即刻之重任。“木板”是指为坐而制的木板。“收集后”是指聚集后。“无始”就是没有起点。“腾空而起”就是升到空中。因为《优陀那注》中说,于此类情形,确实只有依处格之义才适用。所谓“重担”,是因为在那一刹那,适合世尊的座位难得,所以是沉重之事。“木板”是指为坐而制的木板。“木块”是指除木板之外适合坐的木头段。“收集后”是指聚集后。“在那里”是指在旧叶上;仅仅因为在那些叶子上坐不合适,所以那样说;或者“在那里”是指在那些椅子等上。若如此,则“收集后铺设”一句,是依文义而变格后连接。“抖落后”是指为了清除站立处的尘土杂物等混杂不净,而摇动使之清净。知道“我们这样的谈论,应当能成为某种教说的因由,世尊必定会来”,于是针对如常的座位而这样说。这里应当知道,国王曾规定“凡来此的沙门或婆罗门,可取其临时座位受用”,而那个座位在来人时被受用过,是国王的坐具。因为并非那样安放的座位可比丘们受用,也不适合世尊铺设。因此,为了说明经典中所说的正是那样国王的坐具,而说了“针对那”等话。“胜解智”是指以众生种种胜解为所缘的一切知智,以及力智;或者所说的是这个意思。巴利
Paññatteāsane nisīdīti ettha kenidaṃ paññattanti anuyoge sati bhikkhūhīti dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhakāle kirā’’tiādimāha. Tattha buddhakāleti dharamānassa bhagavato kāle. Visesanti yathāladdhato uttari jhānamaggaphalaṃ. Athāti saṃsayatthe nipāto, yadi passatīti attho. Vitakkayamānaṃ naṃ bhikkhunti sambandho, tathā tato passanahetu dassetvā, ovaditvāti ca. Anamataggeti anādimati. Ākāsaṃ uppatitvāti ākāse uggantvā. Īdisesu hi bhummattho eva yujjatīti udānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Bhāroti taṅkhaṇeyeva bhagavato anucchavikāsanassa dullabhattā garukammaṃ. Phalakanti nisīdanatthāya kataṃ phalaṃ. Kaṭṭhakanti nisīdanayogyaṃ phalakato aññaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ. Saṅkaḍḍhitvāti saṃharitvā. Tatthāti purāṇapaṇṇesu, kevalaṃ tesu eva nisīditumananucchavikattā tathā vuttaṃ, tatthāti vā tesu pīṭhādīsu. Evaṃ sati saṅkaḍḍhitvā paññapentīti atthavasā vibhattiṃ vipariṇāmetvā sambandho. Papphoṭetvāti yathāṭhitaṃ rajojallādi-saṃkiṇṇamananurūpanti tabbisodhanatthaṃ sañcāletvā. ‘‘Amhākaṃ īdisā kathā aññatarissā desanāya kāraṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttā, avassaṃ bhagavā āgamissatī’’ti ñatvā yathānisīdanaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘idhāgato samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā tāvakālikaṃ gaṇhitvā paribhuñjatū’’ti raññā ṭhapitaṃ, tena ca āgatakāle paribhuttaṃ āsanaṃ rañño nisīdanāsananti veditabbaṃ. Na hi tathā aṭṭhapitaṃ bhikkhūhi paribhuñjituṃ, bhagavato ca paññapetuṃ vaṭṭati. Tasmā tādisaṃ rañño nisīdanāsanaṃ pāḷiyaṃ kathitanti dassetuṃ ‘‘taṃ sandhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adhimuttiñāṇanti ca sattānaṃ nānādhimuttikatārammaṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ, balañāṇañca, vuttovāyamattho.
“坐”这个词,是为了说明坐的行为到此结束,所以用“如此”等话来显示。因为前面已经说过“那些比丘了知了这些共论之法”,所以是明知道还问,这个意思就成立了,因此说“明知故问”。要知道,如果没有话题,与之相应的、应当进一步宣说的特殊议论就无法充分展开,所以提问是为了引出议论。“nu”是疑问词。“asa”这个词根有“进行”的意思,所以说“是为了哪一种……呢”。在这里,因为连音的关系,u音变成了o音,从意义上说和第一句并没有差别;为了说明这一点,就用“它的意思也还是同前面一样”来表示。而“它的意思也还是同前面一样”,指的就是“你们是为了哪一种呢”所表达的意思。巴利
‘‘Nisajjā’’ti idaṃ nisīdanapariyosānadīpananti dasseti ‘‘eva’’ntiādinā. ‘‘Tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ime saṅkhiyadhammaṃ viditvā’’ti vuttattā jānantoyeva pucchīti ayamattho siddhoti āha ‘‘jānantoyevā’’ti. Asati kathāvatthumhi tadanurūpā uparūpari vattabbā visesakathā na samūpabrūhatīti kathāsamuṭṭhāpanatthaṃ pucchanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nu-iti pucchanatthe. Asa-saddo pavattanattheti vuttaṃ ‘‘katamāya nu…pe… bhavathā’’ti. Etthāti etasmiṃ ṭhāne sandhivasena ukārassa okārādesova, na paṭhamāya pāḷiyā atthato visesoti dasseti ‘‘tassāpi purimoyeva attho’’ti iminā. Purimoyevatthoti ca ‘‘katamāya nu bhavathā’’ti evaṃ vutto attho.
“那么,又是什么呢”这里的“又”字,是表示区别,就像“凡皈依佛、法、僧的人”等句子里的用法一样。所谓区别,就是相对于前面所说的内容,指出特别的、更殊胜的含义;这个“又”字正是点明了相对于先前所问的话题、即将说到的、称为“未完成状态”的那种区别义。“而”字则是言辞上的修饰。不过,这类含义只有精通语法的人才能清楚理解,所以为了说明另外那些含义,就说了“中断的话题,即业处……中略……话题”等等。业处作意、诵出、遍问等,是沙门应当做的事;因为“中断”一词所指向的正是应当做的特殊事项,而通过关联和所依的方式要说明的也正是这些事本身,所以说“业处作意、诵出、遍问等”。比丘们聚在一起所谈论的那个话题,正是那个被中断的“中断的话题”,现在被特别地再次问起,而不是其他如业处作意、诵出、遍问等。“中断”一词的另一个含义,则说为“另一”“唯一”,这两个词其实是同义词。因为这里的“中断”一词在表示“另一”的意思时,就像“地间”“时间”等词一样。所以,“业处作意、诵出、遍问等”应当理解为依主释。或者,“中断”一词指的是“在……中间”,而那个话题因为处于他们中间,所以是另一回事,又因为不与那些业处等相混,所以是单独的一个。为了表明这个意思,就说“另一”“唯一”。以某种方式去做叫“所作”,从那里离开,或者离开了所作,就叫“未完成”,也就是没有结束。“顶”是指终点。而这是就着与那件事的关联,进一步想要说下去而提出的问题,针对这一点说“不”等等。“话题中断之义”就是话题被打破的意思。因为从意义上已经落入这个范畴,所以对一切知者作了邀请。因为不能导向解脱,所以是横阻于天界与解脱道(的谈论),这类话题就是“畜生论”。所谓“畜生论”,就是成为障碍、成为阻隔的意思。这里的“等”字,还包含了关于盗贼、大臣、军队、恐怖等话题,以及种种无意义的谈论。“正是这个话题”这句话,是为了表示限定包含在内,或者是为了排除其他。然后,“于是”是指在那个话题还没有中断的时候。用“那个我们”等话,从意义上说出了已经落入的情形。在类似情况下,这个规则也适用。难道那些比丘不是已经用“如是我……”等话,按照他们的意图把那个话题结束了吗?没有结束,因为世尊的到来把它打断了。如果世尊当时没有过来,那些与话题相关的话还会继续这样说下去;但因为世尊来了,就没有继续说下去。所以他说“这个我们……已经来到”。巴利
‘‘Kā ca panā’’ti ettha ca-saddo byatireke ‘‘yo ca buddhañca dhammañca, saṅghañca saraṇaṃ gato’’tiādīsu viya. Byatireko ca nāma pubbe vuttatthāpekkhako visesātirekattho, so ca taṃ pubbe yathāpucchitāya kathāya vakkhamānaṃ vippakatabhāvasaṅkhātaṃ byatirekatthaṃ joteti. Pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāro . Tādiso pana attho saddasatthatova suviññeyyoti katvā tadaññesameva atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘antarākathāti kammaṭṭhāna…pe… kathā’’tiādimāha. Kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādayo samaṇakaraṇīyabhūtāti antarāsaddena apekkhite karaṇīyavisese sambandhāpādānabhāvena vattabbe tesameva vattabbarūpattā ‘‘kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Yāya hi kathāya te bhikkhū sannisinnā, sā eva antarākathā vippakatā visesena puna pucchīyati, na tadaññe kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādayoti. Antarāsaddassa aññatthamāha ‘‘aññā, ekā’’ti ca. Pariyāyavacanañhetaṃ padadvayaṃ. Yasmā aññatthe ayaṃ antarāsaddo ‘‘bhūmantaraṃ, samayantara’’ntiādīsu viya. Tasmā ‘‘kammaṭṭhānamanasikārauddesaparipucchādīna’’nti nissakkatthe sāmivacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vemajjhe vā antarāsaddo, sā pana tesaṃ vemajjhabhūtattā aññāyeva, tehi ca asammissattā visuṃ ekāyevāti adhippāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aññā, ekā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Pakārena karaṇaṃ pakato, tato vigatā, vigataṃ vā pakataṃ yassāti vippakatā, apariniṭṭhitā. Sikhanti pariyosānaṃ. Ayaṃ pana tadabhisambandhavasena uttari kathetukamyatāpucchā, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘nāha’’ntiādi. Kathābhaṅgatthanti kathāya bhañjanatthaṃ. Atthato āpannattā sabbaññupavāraṇaṃ pavāreti. Aniyyānikattā saggamokkhamaggānaṃ tiracchānabhūtā kathā tiracchānakathā. Tiracchānabhūtāti ca tirokaraṇabhūtā, vibandhanabhūtāti attho. Ādi-saddena cettha coramahāmattasenābhayakathādikaṃ anekavihitaṃ niratthakakathaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ayaṃ kathā evāti antogadhāvadhāraṇataṃ , aññatthāpohanaṃ vā sandhāya cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Athāti tassā avippakatakāleyeva. ‘‘Taṃ no’’tiādinā atthato āpannamāha. Esa nayo īdisesu. Nanu ca tehi bhikkhūhi sā kathā ‘‘iti ha me’’tiādinā yathādhippāyaṃ niṭṭhāpitāyevāti? Na niṭṭhāpitā bhagavato upasaṅkamanena upacchinnattā. Yadi hi bhagavā tasmiṃ khaṇe na upasaṅkameyya, bhiyyopi tappaṭibaddhāyeva tathā pavatteyyuṃ, bhagavato upasaṅkamanena pana na pavattesuṃ, tenevāha ‘‘ayaṃ no…pe… anuppatto’’ti.
现在,为了说明缘起或缘起注释已经圆满结束,并且要证明它与世尊所说的话是相随顺的,所以说了“至此”等话。所谓“至此”,应当从两方面来理解:一是依照“如是我闻”等这样的语句顺序,缘起已经说到这里;二是依照“其中,‘evaṃ’是不变词”等这样的语句顺序,义理注释到这里已经完成。接着用“莲花……中略……水……”等话,则是说明那个缘起与世尊所说的话是相随顺的。其中,“有莲花、蓝莲辉耀、无垢、甘美之水”,是指具有称为莲花的红莲、白莲、白睡莲、红睡莲,以及称为蓝莲的青莲,而辉耀、无垢、甘美之水;“有以无垢石板铺设、以优美庄严而辉煌的宝石阶梯”,是指具有以无垢石板铺设、以优美庄严而辉煌的宝石阶梯,或以无垢石板铺设之庄严,及以善作之妙好而辉煌的宝石阶梯;“有散布珍珠般细沙粉末的白色地面”,是指具有以种种散布的珍珠般的细沙粉末而呈白色的地面;“围绕以善加区分的墙壁与彩绘栏楯”,是指围绕以善加区分的墙壁与彩绘栏楯;“有伸展之崇高”,是指具有游戏之崇高;“有象牙所制、光滑柔软之板,以金藤缠绕,众宝光芒聚集而辉耀庄严”,是指具有以象牙所制、极为光滑之板,以金藤缠绕,众宝光芒聚集而辉耀庄严;“有金镯、脚镯等相触之声与谈话、笑声混合,甜美音声的居家之人所行处”,是指具有以金制脚环、脚饰、手镯等互相触碰所生之声与谈话、笑声混合,称为甜美音声的居家男女所行之处;“有广大自在富贵庄严”,是指具有具足广大、具足自在、具足富贵之人,或指其居住的男女以殊胜主权与受用而庄严;“有金银宝珠、珊瑚等光辉散布照耀、善安立而宽广的门柱”,是指具有以金、银、各种宝珠、珍珠、珊瑚等光辉明亮照耀、善安立而宽广的门柱。巴利
Idāni nidānassa, nidānavaṇṇanāya vā pariniṭṭhitabhāvaṃ dassento tassa bhagavato vacanassānukūlabhāvampi samatthetuṃ ‘‘ettāvatā’’tiādimāha. Ettāvatāti hi ettakena ‘‘evaṃ me suta’’ntiādivacanakkamena yaṃ nidānaṃ bhāsitanti vā ettakena ‘‘tattha evanti nipātapada’’ntiādivacanakkamena atthavaṇṇanā samattāti vā dvidhā attho daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Kamala…pe… salilāyā’’tiādinā pana tassa nidānassa bhagavato vacanassānukūlabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Tattha kamalakuvalayujjalavimalasādhurasasalilāyāti kamalasaṅkhātehi padumapuṇḍarīkasetuppalarattuppalehi ceva kuvalayasaṅkhātena nīluppalena ca ujjalavimalasādhurasasalilavatiyā. Nimmalasilātalaracanavilāsasobhitaratanasopānanti nimmalena silātalena racanāya vilāsena līlāya sobhitaratanasopānavantaṃ, nimmalasilātalena vā racanavilāsena, susaṅkhatakiriyāsobhena ca sobhitaratanasopānaṃ, vilāsasobhitasaddehi vā ativiya sobhitabhāvo vutto. Vippakiṇṇamuttātalasadisavālukācuṇṇapaṇḍarabhūmibhāganti vividhena pakiṇṇāya muttāya talasadisānaṃ vālukānaṃ cuṇṇehi paṇḍaravaṇṇabhūmibhāgavantaṃ. Suvibhattabhittivicitravedikāparikkhittassāti suṭṭhu vibhattāhi bhittīhi vicitrassa, vedikāhi parikkhittassa ca. Uccatarena nakkhattapathaṃ ākāsaṃ phusitukāmatāya viya, vijambhitasaddena cetassa sambandho. Vijambhitasamussayassāti vikkīḷanasamūhavantassa. Dantamayasaṇhamuduphalakakañcanalatāvinaddhamaṇigaṇappabhāsamudayujjalasobhanti dantamaye ativiya siniddhaphalake kañcanamayāhi latāhi vinaddhānaṃ maṇīnaṃ gaṇappabhāsamudāyena samujjalasobhāsampannaṃ. Suvaṇṇavalayanupurādisaṅghaṭṭanasaddasammissitakathitahasita- madhurassaragehajanavicaritassāti suvaṇṇamayaniyurapādakaṭakādīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭanena janitasaddehi sammissitakathitasarahasitasarasaṅkhātena madhurassarena sampannānaṃ gehanivāsīnaṃ naranārīnaṃ vicaritaṭṭhānabhūtassa. Uḷārissariyavibhavasobhitassāti uḷāratāsampannajanaissariyasampannajanavibhavasampannajanehi, tannivāsīnaṃ vā naranārīnaṃ uttamādhipaccabhogehi sobhitassa. Suvaṇṇarajatamaṇimuttāpavāḷādijutivissaravijjotitasuppatiṭṭhitavisāla dvārabāhanti suvaṇṇarajatanānāmaṇimuttāpavāḷādīnaṃ jutīhi pabhassaravijjotitasuppatiṭṭhitavitthatadvārabāhaṃ.
通过显示三种戒等方式,正确地标示出佛陀的功德威力,所以叫“能显示佛陀功德威力者”,这是它的含义。而时间、地点、说法者、事由、听众——以这些为表征、为指示,如此庄严。巴利
Tividhasīlādidassanavasena buddhassa guṇānubhāvaṃ sammā sūcetīti buddhaguṇānubhāvasaṃsūcakaṃ, tassa. Kālo ca deso ca desako ca vatthu ca parisā ca, tāsaṃ apadesena nidassanena paṭimaṇḍitaṃ tathā.
那么,在结集法与律时,为什么还要说起因由的话呢?难道不是只应该结集世尊所说的话吗?回答是:这是为了让开示能够久住、不被遗忘、令人产生信仰。因为,开示一旦和时间、地点、说法者、事由、听众、教示这些方面关联起来并确定下来,就能长久住立,成为不会忘失的法,也能让人信受,就像世间裁判要依据说法者、时间、地点、事由等因缘来判定一样。正因为这样,当大迦叶尊者以“贤友阿难,梵网经是在哪里说的”等话,逐一询问地点等问题时,持法藏的阿难长老在回答时也说了因由,所以这里才说“以时间、地点、说法者、事由、听众、教示为庄严的因由”。巴利
Kimatthaṃ panettha dhammavinayasaṅgahe kariyamāne nidānavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu bhagavatā bhāsitavacanasseva saṅgaho kātabboti? Vuccate – desanāya ṭhitiasammosasaddheyyabhāvasampādanatthaṃ. Kāladesadesakavatthuparisāpadesehi upanibandhitvā ṭhapitā hi desanā ciraṭṭhitikā hoti, asammosadhammā, saddheyyā ca desakālavatthuhetunimittehi upanibandho viya vohāravinicchayo, teneva cāyasmatā mahākassapena ‘‘brahmajālaṃ āvuso ānanda kattha bhāsita’’ntiādinā (cūḷava. 439) desādipucchāsu katāsu tāsaṃ vissajjanaṃ karontena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena āyasmatā ānandattherena nidānaṃ bhāsitanti tadevidhāpi vuttaṃ ‘‘kāladesadesakavatthuparisāpadesapaṭimaṇḍitaṃ nidāna’’nti.
另外,说缘起之语是为了显示大师的成就。因为如来世尊没有事先的构思、推测,也没有依据其他传承的思择,所以成立正等正觉。由于他是正等正觉者,所以在事先构思之前,没有“或许会是这样”的推测,也没有依赖其他传承的思虑,因为他以无碍的智慧行于一切处,对一切所知法平等而住。同样,由于没有师藏、法悭,也不偏袒教法和弟子,所以成立漏尽。由于漏尽,就没有师藏等,利益他人的行为也是清净的。这样,通过显示说法者的杂染——即破坏正见与戒成就的无明和渴爱——的不存在,以及显示智与断的成就,前两种无畏得以成立。由此,对障碍法和出离法没有迷惑,后两种无畏得以成立。因此,世尊具足四无畏,而自利利他的实践也由缘起之语显示出来,因为缘起之语以随应现前大众意乐的、依处而起的辩才阐明说法,并且有“知者、见者”等语。因此说:“缘起之语是为了显示大师的成就。”巴利
Apica satthusampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Tathāgatassa hi bhagavato pubba-racanā-numānāgama-takkābhāvato sammāsambuddhattasiddhi. Sammāsambuddhabhāvena hissa puretaraṃ racanāya, ‘‘evampi nāma bhaveyyā’’ti anumānassa, āgamantaraṃ nissāya parivitakkassa ca abhāvo sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacāratāya ekappamāṇattā ñeyyadhammesu. Tathā ācariyamuṭṭhidhammamacchariyasāsanasāvakānurodhabhāvato khīṇāsavattasiddhi. Khīṇāsavatāya hi ācariyamuṭṭhiādīnamabhāvo, visuddhā ca parānuggahappavatti. Iti desakasaṃkilesabhūtānaṃ diṭṭhisīlasampattidūsakānaṃ avijjātaṇhānaṃ abhāvasaṃsūcakehi , ñāṇappahānasampadābhibyañjanakehi ca sambuddhavisuddhabhāvehi purimavesārajjadvayasiddhi. Tatoyeva ca antarāyikaniyyānikesu sammohābhāvasiddhito pacchimavesārajjadvayasiddhīti bhagavato catuvesārajjasamannāgamo, attahitaparahitapaṭipatti ca nidānavacanena pakāsitā hoti sampattaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena dhammadesanādīpanato, ‘‘jānatā passatā’’tiādivacanato ca, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘satthusampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacana’’nti.
另外,宣说缘起之语是为了阐明教法的成就。因为世尊的一切行为都被智慧和慈悲所摄持,他的活动没有无意义的,也不是为了自己的利益。所以,正等正觉者的一切身语意业,都是为了利益他人而运作;当这些行为被如实宣说时,就是根据现世、来世和胜义三种意义,随宜地教导众生,因此称为教法,而不是文学创作。大师的这些行迹,连同时间、地点、说法者、事由和听众等背景,在各处缘起之语中随其可能被阐明。或者,通过说明大师是权威标准,来表明教法是权威标准,所以宣说缘起之语。而这种权威标准的显示,既通过“世尊”一词表明如来功德殊胜、是一切众生中最上的,也通过“知者、见者”等语表明他具备意乐随眠智等作用。这里只是略示缘起之语作用的一个方面。谁能完全阐明随佛觉悟的持法藏者所说的缘起之语的全部作用呢?在此有偈颂:巴利
Apica sāsanasampattipakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ. Ñāṇakaruṇāpariggahitasabbakiriyassa hi bhagavato natthi niratthikā pavatti, attahitatthā vā, tasmā paresaṃyeva hitāya pavattasabbakiriyassa sammāsambuddhassa sakalampi kāyavacīmanokammaṃ yathāpavattaṃ vuccamānaṃ diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthehi yathārahaṃ sattānaṃ anusāsanaṭṭhena sāsanaṃ, na kabbaracanā. Tayidaṃ satthu caritaṃ kāladesadesakavatthuparisāpadesehi saddhiṃ tattha tattha nidānavacanehi yathāsambhavaṃ pakāsīyati. Atha vā satthuno pamāṇabhāvappakāsanena sāsanassa pamāṇabhāvappakāsanatthaṃ nidānavacanaṃ, tañcassa pamāṇabhāvadassanaṃ ‘‘bhagavā’’ti iminā tathāgatassa guṇavisiṭṭhasabbasattuttamabhāvadīpanena ceva ‘‘jānatā passatā’’tiādinā āsayānusayañāṇādipayogadīpanena ca vibhāvitaṃ hoti, idamettha nidānavacanapayojanassa mukhamattanidassanaṃ. Ko hi samattho buddhānubuddhena dhammabhaṇḍāgārikena bhāsitassa nidānassa payojanāni niravasesato vibhāvitunti. Honti cettha –
为了让教法长久住世,也为了让所说的法不致忘失;
也是为了让人们生起信心,由名声显赫的离车族人说出这个因缘。
既因为导师的圆满,也因为教法的圆满;
为了显示它具备这种衡量标准,才这样说了。巴利
‘‘Desanāciraṭṭhitatthaṃ, asammosāya bhāsitaṃ; Saddhāya cāpi nidānaṃ, vedehena yasassinā. Satthusampattiyā ceva, sāsanasampadāya ca; Tassa pamāṇabhāvassa, dassanatthampi bhāsita’’nti.
这部名为《吉祥悦意》的《长部》注释书,是为了阐明极为微细、深奥、难以理解的含义,为了让人产生极其清净、广大、智慧与辩才,由一位具备正直、柔和、善调、信仰、正念、禅定、智慧、忍耐、精进等品质,在带有义疏的三藏中拥有无滞、无碍、无畏之智,能深入自宗与他宗种种微细难处的大阿阇梨、大语法家——名为智光法军的长老,即大法王师——所造。其中《内缘起释》的晦义阐明,到此完成。巴利
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya paramasukhumagambhīraduranubodhatthaparidīpanāya suvimalavipulapaññāveyyattiyajananāya ajjavamaddavasoraccasaddhāsatidhitibuddhikhantivīriyādidhammasamaṅginā sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṅgāsaṃhīravisāradañāṇacārinā anekappabhedasakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhinā mahāgaṇinā mahāveyyākaraṇena ñāṇābhivaṃsadhammasenāpatināmatherena mahādhammarājādhirājagarunā katāya sādhuvilāsiniyā nāma līnatthapakāsaniyā abbhantaranidānavaṇṇanāya līnatthapakāsanā.
5 完成了内部缘起的注释之后,现在要注释已经安立下来的经典,于是说出“现在”等话。这样做是为了考察注释的场合。这种考察能让注释不违背次第、避免因跳过次第而产生的杂乱过失、让有智慧的人心生欢喜,并且必定承担起应负的责任;而注释者既然担起了应负之责,就表明他没有逾越智者的行为规范。所谓“已安立”,就是已宣说。“宣说”和“安立”,虽然意义上有差别,本质上却是同一回事,因为宣说也是把应当宣说的戒等义理安放在应受教化者的心相续中,所以称为安立。有人会问:难道不是直接注释经典本身吗?于是说出“然而此……”等话。这里要表达的意思是:考察了经典的安立之后,将要宣说的注释,因为能正确透彻地了解经典的缘起——“这部经是这样生起的”——所以容易理解,因此先从这一共通之处来考察。凡是能让经典义理的注释变得清晰明白的论述,注释者都应当宣说。而这种论述,因为是了知那些义理的方法,所以方便上也归入注释本身。在这里,考察了那部经典的安立之后,对于“诸比丘,有我……”(长部1.5)、“然而这是微不足道的……”(长部1.7)、“诸比丘,有……”(长部1.28)等经文段落,按照各自生起事缘的差别来注释时,应当知道,这是因为便于显示各个脉络,所以容易理解。其中,正如成百上千种经典,按教法安立的方式——杂染分、清净分等——都不超出十六种,同样,按自心意向等经典安立的方式,也不超出四种,所以说“四种经典安立”。有人会问:不是也有交叠的分类吗?那为什么只说“四种经典安立”呢?因为交叠的分类在任何地方都找不到。自心意向和事缘,可以与他心意向、随问安立相结合而产生交叠分类,即:“自心意向与他心意向”“自心意向与随问”“自心意向、他心意向与随问”“事缘与他心意向”“事缘与随问”“事缘、他心意向与随问”——因为意向、请问、脉络这些情况都可能存在。但自心意向和事缘之间,彼此并没有交叠。因此,由于按完全穷尽的方式来列举也找不到交叠的分类,所以这样说。应当这样理解。巴利
5. Evaṃ abbhantaranidānasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ katvā idāni yathānikkhittassa suttassa saṃvaṇṇanaṃ karonto anupubbāvirodhinī saṃvaṇṇanā kamānatikkamanena byākuladosappahāyinī, viññūnañca cittārādhinī, āgatabhāro ca avassaṃ āvahitabboti saṃvaṇṇakassa sampattabhārāvahanena paṇḍitācārasamatikkamābhāvavibhāvinī, tasmā tadāvikaraṇasādhakaṃ saṃvaṇṇanokāsavicāraṇaṃ kātumāha ‘‘idānī’’tiādi. Nikkhittassāti desitassa, ‘‘desanā nikkhepo’’ti hi etaṃ atthato bhinnampi sarūpato ekameva, desanāpi hi desetabbassa sīlādiatthassa veneyyasantānesu nikkhipanato ‘‘nikkhepo’’ti vuccati. Nanu suttameva saṃvaṇṇīyatīti āha ‘‘sā panesā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – suttanikkhepaṃ vicāretvā vuccamānā saṃvaṇṇanā ‘‘ayaṃ desanā evaṃsamuṭṭhānā’’ti suttassa sammadeva nidānaparijjhānena tabbaṇṇanāya suviññeyyattā pākaṭā hoti, tasmā tadeva sādhāraṇato paṭhamaṃ vicārayissāmāti. Yā hi sā kathā suttatthasaṃvaṇṇanāpākaṭakārinī, sā sabbāpi saṃvaṇṇakena vattabbā. Tadatthavijānanupāyattā ca sā pariyāyena saṃvaṇṇanāyevāti. Idha pana tasmiṃ vicārite yassā aṭṭhuppattiyā idaṃ suttaṃ nikkhittaṃ, tassā vibhāgavasena ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.5), ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.7), ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.28) ca vuttānaṃ suttapadesānaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā vuccamānā taṃtaṃanusandhidassanasukhatāya suviññeyyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha yathā anekasataanekasahassabhedānipi suttantāni saṃkilesabhāgiyādisāsanapaṭṭhānanayena soḷasavidhabhāvaṃ nātivattanti, evaṃ attajjhāsayādi-sutta-nikkhepavasena catubbidhabhāvanti āha ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti. Nanu saṃsaggabhedopi sambhavati, atha kasmā ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttanti? Saṃsaggabhedassa sabbattha alabbhamānattā. Attajjhāsayassa, hi aṭṭhuppattiyā ca parajjhāsayapucchāvasikehi saddhiṃ saṃsaggabhedo sambhavati. ‘‘Attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca, attajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, attajjhāsayo ca parajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca aṭṭhuppattiko ca pucchāvasiko ca, aṭṭhuppattiko ca parajjhāsayo ca pucchāvasiko cā’’ti ajjhāsayapucchānusandhisabbhāvato. Attajjhāsayaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ pana aññamaññaṃ saṃsaggo natthi, tasmā niravasesaṃ patthāranayena saṃsaggabhedassa alabbhanato evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
或者,事缘和自心意向之间也可能有交叉分类,但因为其余的安立——他心意向安立和随问安立——都已被含摄在事缘和自心意向之中,所以依混合方式宣说时,仍然是就根本安立而说“四种经典安立”。应当知道,在这个义理抉择中,只是按照教法安立的理路,随宜以单一、两种、三种、四种等方式,指出经典安立的纲要而已。这里作词义解释:安立即宣说,称为安立;经典的安立就是经典安立,意思是经典的宣说。或者,被安立者称为安立,经典本身就是安立,所以叫经典安立。自己的意向是自心意向,以此为因的,就是自心意向;或者按前面所说的道理,此经典具有自己的意向,所以叫自心意向。他心意向也是同样的道理。以请问为依据的,是随问安立;按前面所说的道理,此经典具有这样的请问依据,所以叫随问安立。应当被了知、应当被通达的意义,称为事义,也就是经典宣说所依的事基;那事基的生起就是事缘,这就是事缘(将ttha变为ṭṭha),按前面所说的道理,此经典具有这样的事缘,所以叫事缘安立。再者,经典依此而被安立,所以这是安立,也就是自心意向等经典宣说的原因。在这个义理抉择中,自己的意向是自心意向。他人的意向是他心意向。被问及的称为请问,即应当被问的意义。依于那请问而进行的、法领受者们的言说,是随问安立。那本身依于安立一词的期待,以阳性而说为“随问安立”。按前面所说的道理,事缘本身就是事缘安立,应当如此理解其义。巴利
Atha vā aṭṭhuppattiyā attajjhāsayenapi siyā saṃsaggabhedo, tadantogadhattā pana saṃsaggavasena vuttānaṃ sesanikkhepānaṃ mūlanikkhepeyeva sandhāya ‘‘cattāro suttanikkhepā’’ti vuttaṃ. Imasmiṃ pana atthavikappe yathārahaṃ ekakadukatikacatukavasena sāsanapaṭṭhānanayena suttanikkhepā vattabbāti nayamattaṃ dassetīti veditabbaṃ. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – nikkhipanaṃ kathanaṃ nikkhepo, suttassa nikkhepo suttanikkhepo, suttadesanāti attho. Nikkhipīyatīti vā nikkhepo, suttameva nikkhepo suttanikkhepo. Attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo, so assa atthi kāraṇavasenāti attajjhāsayo, attano ajjhāsayo vā etassa yathāvuttanayenāti attajjhāsayo. Parajjhāsayepi eseva nayo. Pucchāya vaso pucchāvaso, so etassa atthi yathāvuttanayenāti pucchāvasiko. Araṇīyato avagantabbato attho vuccati suttadesanāya vatthu, tassa uppatti atthuppatti, sā eva aṭṭhuppatti ttha-kārassa ṭṭha-kāraṃ katvā, sā etassa atthi vuttanayenāti aṭṭhuppattiko. Apica nikkhipīyati suttametenāti nikkhepo, attajjhāsayādisuttadesanākāraṇameva. Etasmiṃ pana atthavikappe attano ajjhāsayo attajjhāsayo. Paresaṃ ajjhāsayo parajjhāsayo. Pucchīyatīti pucchā, pucchitabbo attho. Tassā pucchāya vasena pavattaṃ dhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ vacanaṃ pucchāvasikaṃ. Tadeva nikkhepasaddāpekkhāya pulliṅgavasena vuttaṃ ‘‘pucchāvasiko’’ti. Vuttanayena aṭṭhuppattiyeva aṭṭhuppattikoti evaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo.
在这里,自心意向这一类安立之所以单独列出来,是因为它不观待他人根器成熟等条件,而是只凭自己的意向来说法,目的是让法得以安立。正因如此,下文才会说“只凭自己的意向而说”。但对于他心意向和随问这两类安立,不应该这样质疑:既然它们都是依他人的意向和提问作为说法的缘而生起,那为什么不跟事缘安立混在一起?或者,随问安立和事缘安立既然是随顺他人的意向来说法,那为什么不跟他心意向安立混在一起?这是因为,事缘安立所取的,是完全脱离他人祈请、追问等而生起的经典宣说之因,所以他心意向安立和随问安立才各自单独列出。比如《法嗣经》等经中,以利养生起等作为说法的缘,这就叫事缘。不靠他人提问,只以意向为缘而宣说的,就是他心意向安立。依提问而宣说的,就是随问安立。这个意思很清楚。巴利
Ettha ca paresaṃ indriyaparipākādikāraṇaṃ nirapekkhitvā attano ajjhāsayeneva dhammatantiṭhapanatthaṃ pavattitadesanattā attajjhāsayassa visuṃ nikkhepabhāvo yutto. Teneva vakkhati ‘‘attano ajjhāsayeneva kathetī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.5). Parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ pana paresaṃ ajjhāsayapucchānaṃ desanānimittabhūtānaṃ uppattiyaṃ pavattattā kathaṃ aṭṭhuppattike anavarodho siyā, pucchāvasikaṭṭhuppattikānaṃ vā parajjhāsayānurodhena pavattitadesanattā kathaṃ parajjhāsaye anavarodho siyāti na codetabbametaṃ. Paresañhi abhinīhāraparipucchādivinimuttasseva suttadesanākāraṇuppādassa aṭṭhuppattivasena gahitattā parajjhāsayapucchāvasikānaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi dhammadāyādasuttādīnaṃ (ma. ni. 1.29) āmisuppādādidesanānimittaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhuppattī’’ti vuccati. Paresaṃ pucchaṃ vinā ajjhāsayameva nimittaṃ katvā desito parajjhāsayo. Pucchāvasena desito pucchāvasikoti pākaṭovāyamattho.
“未被请求”是指:不是通过提问等方式被劝请、被恳求,而是完全按照自己的心意倾向来说法,目的是为了安立教法。这是这段话的意思。“系列”就是一连串,比如“珍珠串”;那个就是“系列者”,同样地,也是正勤诸经的系列者。因为按照顺序,在《相应部》中依次列出的、与正勤相应的诸经的连串,就称为“正勤经系列”,神足系列等也是这样。“神足、根、力、觉支、道支经系列”这句里,前面的词省略了后面的词,或者这是一个相违释复合词,或者是省略式的说明。“它们”是指前面所说的那些经。巴利
Anajjhiṭṭhoti pucchādinā anajjhesito ayācito, attano ajjhāsayeneva katheti dhammatantiṭhapanatthanti adhippāyo. Hāroti āvaḷi yathā ‘‘muttāhāro’’ti, sveva hārako, sammappadhānasuttantānaṃ hārako tathā. Anupubbena hi saṃyuttake niddiṭṭhānaṃ sammappadhānapaṭisaṃyuttānaṃ suttantānaṃ āvaḷi ‘‘sammappadhānasuttantahārako’’ti vuccati, tathā iddhipādahārakādi. Iddhipādaindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgasuttantahārakoti pubbapadesu parapadalopo, dvandagabbhasamāso vā eso, peyyālaniddeso vā. Tesanti yathāvuttasuttānaṃ.
已成熟,就是已经转变完成。能令解脱成熟,是指信根等能使阿拉汉果成熟的法。为灭尽,是为了灭尽,或者是指以灭尽为因的说法。意乐,是指倾向。忍,是指见审察忍。意,是指心。引导,是指誓愿。觉的状态,是指觉的体性,或者觉悟的行相。观察之后,是指已经省察之后,或者已经期待之后。巴利
Paripakkāti pariṇatā. Vimuttiparipācanīyāti arahattaphalaṃ paripācentā saddhindriyādayo dhammā. Khayeti khayanatthaṃ, khayakāraṇabhūtāya vā dhammadesanāya. Ajjhāsayanti adhimuttiṃ. Khantinti diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiṃ. Mananti cittaṃ. Abhinīhāranti paṇidhānaṃ. Bujjhanabhāvanti bujjhanasabhāvaṃ, bujjhanākāraṃ vā. Avekkhitvāti paccavekkhitvā, apekkhitvā vā.
“四种颜色”是指四种姓,或者是指以颜色等为标准来区分的四类众生。“大王”是指四大王天的天神。那是在说什么呢?意思是“五取蕴”。巴利
Cattāro vaṇṇāti cattāri kulāni, cattāro vā rūpādipamāṇā sattā. Mahārājānoti cattāro mahārājāno devā. Vuccanti kiṃ, pañcupādānakkhandhā kinti attho.
为什么这样说呢?所以接着说了“在具体场合中确实……”等话。在“称赞与毁谤”中,这是依处格;这里“称赞”这个词也涵盖了比丘僧团所说的“奇哉,贤友”等称赞。因为那件事也会作为具体场合,使世尊随后以“诸比丘,还有其他法”等话开始上面的教导。老师又认为“诸比丘,或者他人会称叹我”这一教导中,梵天所說的称赞作为具体场合而说,所以说“弟子称赞”。现在为了显示与巴利文的关联,说了“如是”等话。教导善巧者,即“对于这个具体场合,这个教导得以生起”,对教导善巧;以此对世尊作了与论书相应的赞叹。这确实是赞叹者们之常法,即处处以论书所证的功德赞叹世尊。“vā”这个词在这里见于多种含义:譬喻、集合、疑惑、言语放弃、足语、相似、抉择等。“譬如‘他也有智慧’等中,见于譬喻,即相似之义。‘诸智者亦宣说彼牟尼’等中,见于集合。‘谁或这是谁的’等中,见于疑惑。‘此或(此亦)这些沙门婆罗门中一切愚者一切痴者’等中,见于言语放弃。‘此童子不知量’等中,见于足语。‘愚者思蜜,直至恶不成熟’等中,见于相似。‘诸比丘,任何沙门或婆罗门’等中,见于抉择。这里也是在抉择义中。‘我的或法的或僧的’,显示种种各别抉择,所以说‘vā字是抉择之义’。‘para’一词则确实有‘其他’之义,如‘我若说法,他人却不了解我’等中;有‘增上’之义,如‘根上下’等中;有‘后来’之义,如‘从后来’等中;有‘相反’之义,如‘已生起的他宗善以法善折伏而折伏’等中;这里也是相反之义,以‘相违的众生’这句话显示。与教法相违的敌对众生,这就是意思。‘ta’一词则涉及前面所说的、与毁谤行为相关的含义,所以说‘凡说毁谤者,于彼’。巴利
Kasmāti āha ‘‘aṭṭhuppattiyaṃ hī’’tiādi. Vaṇṇāvaṇṇeti nimitte bhummaṃ, vaṇṇasaddena cettha ‘‘acchariyaṃ āvuso’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.4) bhikkhusaṅghena vuttopi vaṇṇo saṅgahito. Tampi hi aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave aññe dhammā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.28) upari desanaṃ ārabhissati. Tadeva vivarati ‘‘ācariyo’’tiādinā. ‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’nti imissā desanāya brahmadattena vuttaṃ vaṇṇaṃ aṭṭhuppattiṃ katvā desitattā āha ‘‘antevāsī vaṇṇa’’nti. Idāni pāḷiyā sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘itī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Desanākusaloti ‘‘imissā aṭṭhuppattiyā ayaṃ desanā sambhavatī’’ti desanāya kusalo, etena pakaraṇānuguṇaṃ bhagavato thomanamakāsi. Esā hi saṃvaṇṇanakānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ tattha tattha pakaraṇādhigataguṇena bhagavato thomanā. Vā-saddo cettha upamānasamuccayasaṃsayavacanavossaggapadapūraṇasadisavikappādīsu bahūsvatthesu dissati. Tathā hesa ‘‘paṇḍitovāpi tena so’’tiādīsu upamāne dissati, sadisabhāveti attho. ‘‘Taṃ vāpi dhīrā muniṃ pavedayantī’’tiādīsu (su. ni.213) samuccaye. ‘‘Ke vā ime kassa vā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 296) saṃsaye. ‘‘Ayaṃ vā (ayañca) (dī. ni. 1.181) imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.181) vacanavossagge. ‘‘Na vāyaṃ kumārako mattamaññāsī’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.154) padapūraṇe. ‘‘Madhuṃ vā maññati bālo, yāva pāpaṃ na paccatī’’tiādīsu (dha. pa. 69) sadise. ‘‘Ye hi keci bhikkhave, samaṇā vā brāhmaṇā vā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.170; saṃ. ni. 5.1092) vikappe. Idhāpi vikappeyeva. Mama vā dhammassa vā saṅghassa vāti vividhā visuṃ vikappanassa jotakattāti āha ‘‘vā-saddo vikappanattho’’ti. Para-saddo pana attheva aññattho ‘‘ahañceva kho pana dhammaṃ deseyyaṃ, pare ca me na ājāneyyu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.64; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; mahāva. 7, 8) atthi adhikattho ‘‘indriyaparopariyatta’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 814; a. ni. 10.21; ma. ni. 1.148; paṭi. ma. 1.68; 1.111) atthi pacchābhāgattho ‘‘parato āgamissatī’’tiādīsu. Atthi paccanīkattho ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahitaṃ niggahetvā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.168; saṃ. ni. 5.822; a. ni. 8.70; udā. 51) idhāpi paccanīkatthoti dasseti ‘‘paṭiviruddhā sattā’’ti iminā. Sāsanassa paccanīkabhūtā paccatthikā sattāti attho. Ta-saddo pareti vuttamatthaṃ avaṇṇabhāsanakiriyāvisiṭṭhaṃ parāmasatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘ye avaṇṇaṃ vadanti, tesū’’ti.
难道他们对那些人不生怨恨吗?因为对方功德广大,所以没有怨恨。那为什么还要那样说呢?先指出这种责难的过失,然后用“kiñcāpī”(尽管)等话来消除它。“尽管没有”,意思是“然而即便如此”。在“Īdisesupī”(在这样的情况下也)当中,pi这个字表示可能性,因此表达这样的推断:即使是以三宝为对象,也不应该生起不善心,更何况是以轮回的利益和世间的利益为对象呢。教理之法本身就是以引导正法为意义,所以叫“法引导”。Āhanati的意思是紧紧地碰触、伤害、阻碍或激怒。在某些版本中看到“etthā”(在这里)的读法,那个读法是后来写上去的,因为它与随顺古本的复注相矛盾,而且在义理上也说不通。虽然忧等心所也能“打击”,但这个词在这里专指“愤怒”的膨胀,所以用“这是愤怒的同义词”来显示这一点。先指出组成部分,然后在那里以同类的方式说明含义,所以这样说。Adhivacana是指作为上位统摄而使用的词,或者已通用的词,也就是“名称”的意思。其他地方也是这样。在这里,为了彰显自性法上并没有别的作者,所以用“āhanatī”这个带有作者义的“āghāta”一词来显示。也可以理解为“以这个来打击”,或者“打击本身”就是āghāta,这样从事用义的角度也说得通。“Appatītā”这个词的含义已说为“不满足、不悦”。这里则是以通俗的同义方式显示apaccaya一词的词源分析,但通过那个入口,因为不依靠它,所以应该理解为appaccaya。“Abhirādhayati”就是成就。Ettha指在这三处。Dvīhi指通过āghāta和anabhiraddhi这两个词。Ekena指通过apaccaya这个词。如果只取这么多,那么与它们相应的心所就没有被取到,而且也不可能不取它们,因为它们具有同一生起等自性。为了澄清这个责难,说了“tesaṃ”等话。tesaṃ指如前所说的行蕴和受蕴的一部分。Sesānaṃ指剩下的一部分行蕴以及想蕴和识蕴。Karaṇa指生起。因为对于āghāta等的生起,各种条件的聚合在这里称为“karaṇa”,但从意义上说那就是生起。经文中说“na karaṇīyā”(不应作),就是针对不生起它们而说的。由于它们具有同一生起、同一灭去、同一所缘、同一依处,所以按照各自的情况,它们确实是被遮止的。巴利
Nanu tesaṃ āghāto natthi guṇamahattattā, atha kasmā evaṃ vuttanti codanālesaṃ dassetvā tadapaneti ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādinā. Kiñcāpi natthi, atha kho tathāpīti attho. Īdisesupīti ettha pi-saddo sambhāvanattho, tena ratanattayanimittampi akusalacittaṃ na uppādetabbaṃ, pageva vaṭṭāmisalokāmisanimittanti sambhāveti. Pariyattidhammoyeva saddhammanayanaṭṭhena nettīti dhammanetti. Āhanatīti ābhuso ghaṭṭeti, hiṃsati vā, vibādhati, upatāpeti cāti attho. Katthaci ‘‘etthā’’ti pāṭho dissati, so pacchālikhito porāṇapāṭhānugatāya ṭīkāya virodhattā, atthayuttiyā ca abhāvato. Yadipi domanassādayo ca āhananti, kopeyeva panāyaṃ niruḷhoti dasseti ‘‘kopassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti iminā. Avayavatthañhi dassetvā tattha pariyāyena atthaṃ dassento evamāha. Adhivacananti ca adhikicca pavattaṃ vacanaṃ, pasiddhaṃ vā vacanaṃ, nāmanti attho. Evamitaresupi. Ettha ca sabhāvadhammato aññassa kattuabhāvajotanatthaṃ ‘‘āhanatī’’ti kattutthe āghātasaddaṃ dasseti. Āhanati etena, āhananamattaṃ vā āghātoti karaṇabhāvatthāpi sambhavantiyeva. ‘‘Appatītā’’ti etassattho ‘‘atuṭṭhā asomanassikā’’ti vutto, idaṃ pana pākaṭapariyāyena apaccayasaddassa nibbacanadassanaṃ, tammukhena pana na pacceti tenāti appaccayoti kātabbaṃ. Abhirādhayatīti sādhayati. Etthāti etesu tīsu padesu. Dvīhīti āghātaanabhiraddhipadehi. Ekenāti apaccayapadena. Ettakesu gahitesu taṃsampayuttā aggahitā siyuṃ, na ca sakkā tepi aggahituṃ ekuppādādisabhāvattāti codanaṃ visodhetuṃ ‘‘tesa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ, tesanti yathāvuttānaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhavedanākkhandhekadesānaṃ. Sesānanti saññāviññāṇāvasiṭṭhasaṅkhārakkhandhekadesānaṃ. Karaṇanti uppādanaṃ. Āghātādīnañhi pavattiyā paccayasamavāyanaṃ idha ‘‘karaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, taṃ pana atthato uppādanameva. Tadanuppādanañhi sandhāya pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘na karaṇīyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paṭikkhittameva yathārahaṃ ekuppādanirodhārammaṇavatthubhāvato.
这里说的“其中”,就是指那个心的过失。用“对那些说恶语的人”这句话,是在显示依处义,也就是第七格表示处所。为了显示所缘义或自性相,就说“或对那个恶语”。因为无功德或毁谤不可能成为嗔和忧的依处,这是由于它们跟随那说恶语的人。关于“assatha”,是通过与“ce”结合,显示第七格的形式属于假设的范围,所以用“bhaveyyātha”来说明。有人说:说“bhaveyyātha ce, yadi bhaveyyāthā”时,是在依次表明这些词前后搭配。用“因怒而嗔怒,因忧而不悦”这句话,和前面“依第一种方式”等说法,通过显示并无别的含义来成立。“你们的”这个意思,与“tumha”一词同义;“我们的”这个意思,与“amha”一词同义,就像“tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare”那样,所以说“就是你们的”。因为依意义而转换了词性,所以说“以那不满”。说到“障碍”时,由于从上下文可知是指沙门法的各种殊胜,而且词在表达已知意义时可以随意使用,所以说“是初禅等的障碍”。这里“障碍”一词,是就心的过失不应造作而说的原因之语。因为正是由于你们有那样的嗔等,才会成为初禅等的障碍,所以用意是:以嗔等为表现形式的嗔害等是不应做的。由此显示:我不是以一切知者的身份来阻止你们那样做,而正是以这个理由。然而,这个说明理由的话,因为能显示过患,所以应看作就是下面所说的“显示过患”。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ manopadose. ‘‘Tesu avaṇṇabhāsakesū’’ti iminā ādhāratthe bhummaṃ dasseti. Nimittatthe, bhāvalakkhaṇe vā etaṃ bhummanti āha ‘‘tasmiṃ vā avaṇṇe’’ti. Na hi aguṇo, nindā vā kopadomanassānaṃ ādhāro sambhavati tabbhāsakāyattattā tesaṃ. Assathāti sattamiyā rūpaṃ ce-saddayogena parikappanavisayattāti dasseti ‘‘bhaveyyāthā’’ti iminā. ‘‘Bhaveyyātha ce, yadi bhaveyyāthā’ti ca vadanto ‘yathākkamaṃ pubbāparayogino ete saddā’ti ñāpetī’’ti vadanti. ‘‘Kupitā kopena anattamanā domanassenā’’ti iminā ‘‘evaṃ paṭhamena nayenā’’tiādinā vuttavacanaṃ atthantarābhāvadassanena samattheti. ‘‘Tumhāka’’nti iminā samānattho ‘‘tumha’’nti eko saddo ‘‘amhāka’’nti iminā samānattho ‘‘amha’’nti saddo viya yathā ‘‘tasmā hi amhaṃ daharā na mīyare’’ti (jā. 1.93) āha ‘‘tumhākaṃyevā’’ti. Atthavasā liṅgavipariyāyoti katvā ‘‘tāya ca anattamanatāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Antarāyo’’ti vutte samaṇadhammavisesānanti atthassa pakaraṇato viññāyamānattā, viññāyamānatthassa ca saddassa payoge kāmacārattā ‘‘paṭhamajjhānādīnaṃ antarāyo’’ti vuttaṃ. Ettha ca ‘‘antarāyo’’ti idaṃ manopadosassa akaraṇīyatāya kāraṇavacanaṃ. Yasmā tumhākameva tena kopādinā paṭhamajjhānādīnamantarāyo bhaveyya, tasmā te kopādipariyāyena vuttā āghātādayo na karaṇīyāti adhippāyo, tena ‘‘nāhaṃ sabbaññū’’ti issarabhāvena tumhe tato nivāremi, atha kho imināva kāraṇenāti dasseti. Taṃ pana kāraṇavacanaṃ yasmā ādīnavavibhāvanaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘ādīnavaṃ dassento’’ti heṭṭhā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这种心的过失不只是在隔了一段时间之后才障碍利益和安乐,就连当下这一刹那应当生起的利益和安乐,它也会障碍。为了让心过失的过患显得更加确凿有力,才说了“api nū”等话,应当这样把前后文连起来理解。Paresa 是指除了自己以外的其他人,意思是“他们的”,而不是像“别人说坏话”等地方那样指敌对的众生,所以说了“yesaṃ kesañci”(无论哪些人的)。接着用“kupito hi”等话来成立这个意思。在巴利文中,了知善说与恶说之言,也只有通过了知其中的含义才能成立,所以说“subhāsitadubbhāsitassa atthaṃ”(善说与恶说的含义)。巴利
So pana manopadoso na kevalaṃ kālantarabhāvinoyeva hitasukhassa antarāyakaro, atha kho taṅkhaṇapavattanārahassapi hitasukhassa antarāyakaroti manopadose ādīnavaṃ daḷhataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘api nū’’tiādimāhātipi sambandho vattabbo. Paresanti ye attato aññe, tesanti attho, na pana ‘‘pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādīsu viya paṭiviruddhasattānanti āha ‘‘yesaṃ kesañcī’’ti. Tadevatthaṃ samattheti ‘‘kupito hī’’tiādinā. Pāḷiyaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitavacanajānanampi tadatthajānaneneva siddhanti āha ‘‘subhāsitadubbhāsitassa attha’’nti.
“盲暗”是指造成盲目状态的黑暗,或者极深的黑暗。那黑暗征服、压倒一个人,对他而言就是盲暗,这是连贯的理解。或者,yaṃ 是依处义的主格形式,意思是:在什么时候被征服,那时就成为盲暗;或者这是原因的说明:由于什么原因而被征服,就由于那个原因而成为盲暗。这样一来,因为 yaṃ 和 taṃ 这两个词总是相互关联,所以应当补入“yadā”(何时)。又或者,这是对动作的指取:所谓“嗔征服”,当说到嗔的这种征服作用时,这就是盲暗。因此应当这样连接理解:发怒的人不知义,发怒的人不见法。这里的“义”和“法”,是指巴利语的意义和巴利语的法。“心恼坏”是指因为舍弃了心的本来状态而使心染污。“从内部”是指从自身内部,或者因为嗔而从心中生起怖畏。“此”是指这样自性的嗔,或者指嗔能产生无益等种种表现。巴利
Andhaṃtamanti andhabhāvakaraṃ tamaṃ, ativiya vā tamaṃ. Yaṃ naraṃ sahate abhibhavati, tassa andhatamanti sambandho. Yanti vā bhummatthe paccattavacanaṃ, yasmiṃ kāle sahate, tadā andhatamaṃ hotīti attho , kāraṇaniddeso vā, yena kāraṇena sahate, tena andhatamanti. Evaṃ sati yaṃtaṃ-saddānaṃ niccasambandhattā ‘‘yadā’’ti ajjhāharitabbaṃ. Kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā etaṃ, ‘‘kodho sahate’’ti yadetaṃ kodhassa abhibhavanaṃ vuttaṃ, etaṃ andhatamanti. Tato ca kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passatīti yojetabbaṃ. Atthaṃ dhammanti pāḷiatthaṃ, pāḷidhammañca. Cittappakopanoti cittassa pakatibhāvavijahanena padūsako. Antaratoti abbhantarato, cittato vā kodhavasena bhayaṃ jātaṃ. Nti tathāsabhāvaṃ kodhaṃ, kodhassa vā anatthajananādippakāraṃ.
“于一切处”是指在所有第一、第二、第三种方法中。“对诋毁应采取的态度”是论题。因为诋毁者不是(直接针对的)对象,所以“tatrā”一词的含义就显示为“于那诋毁中”。“不实”是指被捏造出来的话,意思是那些话是不真实的。“以不实”则是显示以不实的状态本身,因为这是以状态为主而省略了状态词,所以用“以不实的状态”来说明。“如是此”等是为了显示驳斥方式的示例,因此说了“如何”等。“于彼处”是指在那些言语中。“关联”是指意图与目的。“沉默”是表示不说话的助词,这里是中性名词。说了“如是此不实”之后,再以“你们所……”等来展开其义。“以此亦”中的“亦”字汇集了多种理由。接着说明理由的实质:“正是遍知者”等。“唯”字应连接到三处:因为正是遍知者而非非遍知者,因为正是善说而非恶说,因为正是善行而非恶行,以这些理由也应驳斥,这就是所说的意思。对于“为何是遍知者”等诘问,也应以显示其理由来驳斥,所以说“于彼处有此因与彼因”。“于彼处”是指在那些遍知等之中。“此因与彼因”是指以种种方式显示理由与理据后,应对“非遍知者”等言论加以驳斥,这是其含义。此处的理由是:我们的导师正是遍知者,因为他宣说无颠倒的法;法是善说的,因为它决定导向解脱;僧团是善行的,因为它已远离烦恼。应知此处显示理由与理据,正是对“非遍知者”等言论的驳斥,因为如此显示即是那些言论的理由。因为理由的理由也称为“理由”,正如依处的依处也称为“依处”,如说“草中饭柔软,于楼阁中说法”。第二句是指“不真实”一词。第一句是指“不实”一词。第四句是指“然而此事不存在于我等”一词。第三句是指“我等无此”一词。种种在同一意义中发生的话语为“异说”,那即是“同义词”,或以“语”为义,因为意义由音声而可说,如“世尊之语为最上,世尊之语为最胜”等。由于种种自性而离于单一语词者,依上述方法为“同义词”,即所谓“异名之语”。巴利
Sabbatthāpīti sabbesupi paṭhamadutiyatatiyanayesu. ‘‘Avaṇṇe paṭipajjitabbākāra’’nti adhikāro. Avaṇṇabhāsakānamavisayattā ‘‘tatrā’’ti padassa tasmiṃ avaṇṇeti atthova dassito. Abhūtanti kattubhūtaṃ vacanaṃ, yaṃ vacanaṃ abhūtaṃ hotīti attho. Abhūtatoti pana abhūtatākiriyāva bhāvappadhānattā, bhāvalopattā cāti dasseti ‘‘abhūtabhāvenevā’’ti iminā. ‘‘Itipeta’’ntiādi nibbeṭhanākāranidassananti dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tatrāti tasmiṃ vacane. Yojanāti adhippāyapayojanā. Tuṇhīti abhāsanatthe nipāto, bhāvanapuṃsako cesa. ‘‘Itipetaṃ abhūta’’nti vatvā ‘‘yaṃ tumhehī’’tiādinā tadatthaṃ vivarati. Imināpīti pi-saddena anekavidhaṃ kāraṇaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Kāraṇasarūpamāha ‘‘sabbaññuyevā’’tiādinā. Eva-saddo tīsupi padesu yojetabbo, sabbaññubhāvato na asabbaññū, svākkhātattā na durakkhāto, suppaṭipannattā na duppaṭipannoti imināpi kāraṇena nibbeṭhetabbanti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Kasmā pana sabbaññū’’tiādipaṭicodanāyapi taṃkāraṇadassanena nibbeṭhetabbamevāti āha ‘‘tatra idañcidañca kāraṇa’’nti. Tatrāti tesu sabbaññutādīsu. Idañca idañca kāraṇanti anekavidhena kāraṇānukāraṇaṃ dassetvā ‘‘na sabbaññū’’tiādivacanaṃ nibbeṭhetabbanti attho. Tatridaṃ kāraṇaṃ – sabbaññū eva amhākaṃ satthā aviparītadhammadesanattā. Svākkhāto eva dhammo ekantaniyyānikattā. Suppaṭipanno eva saṅgho saṃkilesarahitattāti. Kāraṇānukāraṇadassanampettha asabbaññutādivacana-nibbeṭhanameva tathādassanassa tesampi kāraṇabhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāraṇakāraṇampi hi ‘‘kāraṇa’’ntveva vuccati, patiṭṭhānapatiṭṭhānampi ‘‘patiṭṭhāna’’ntveva yathā ‘‘tiṇehi bhattaṃ siniddhaṃ, pāsāde dhammamajjhāyatī’’ti. Dutiyaṃ padanti ‘‘ataccha’’nti padaṃ. Paṭhamassa padassāti ‘‘abhūta’’nti padassa. Catutthanti ‘‘na ca panetaṃ amhesu saṃvijjatī’’ti padaṃ. Tatiyassāti ‘‘natthi cetaṃ amhesū’’ti padassa. Vividhamekattheyeva pavattaṃ vacanaṃ vivacanaṃ, tadeva vevacanaṃ, vacananti vā attho saddena vacanīyattā ‘‘bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭhaṃ, bhagavāti vacanamuttama’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1 ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1; a. ni. 1.rūpādivaggavaṇṇanā; pārā. aṭṭha. 1.1) viya. Nānāsabhāvato vigataṃ vacanaṃ yassāti vevacanaṃ vuttanayena, pariyāyavacananti attho.
这里有人问:为什么在这里要说同义词呢?难道单凭每一个词本身,想要表达的意思就已经成立了吗?既然已经成立,那这些同义词又有什么用呢?因为那样只会造成堆砌篇幅等多种毛病。而且,如果那话该说,就应该只说那个,而不是别的,不是吗?回答是:在说法的时候,以及为了将来,为了让某些人以某种方式领悟那个意思,所以说了同义词。因为在接受说法的人当中,如果有人事先对其中某个同义词作了这样的约定——“这是表达这个意思的话”,那么他就能通过那个词领悟那个意思。再者,在那个时候,有些人心里散乱、注意力转到别处、或者理解颠倒了,为了让他们通过另一种表达方式也能明白那个意思,所以也说了同义词。因为如果有人没听到某个词,由于缺了那个词,他们可能完全无法理解上面所说的完整意思;但说了同义词之后,凭借同义词的力量,就能完整地理解意思。或者,为了不让钝根的人反复以那个意思的特征来确认时产生迷惑,所以说了同义词。因为钝根的人只凭一个词去确定一个意思时会产生迷惑,而以多种表达方式去确定同一个意思时,就不会那样迷惑,因为以种种方式发出的声音都只指向同一个意思,所以想要表达的意思就能确定下来。巴利
Etthāha – kasmā panettha pariyāyavacanaṃ vuttaṃ, nanu ekekapadavaseneva adhippeto attho siddho, evaṃ siddhe sati kimete tena pariyāyavacanena. Tadetañhi ganthagāravādianekadosakaraṃ, yadi ca taṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, tadeva vuttaṃ assa, na tadaññanti? Vuccate – desanākāle, hi āyatiñca kassaci kathañci tadatthapaṭivedhanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Desanāpaṭiggāhakesu hi yo tesaṃ pariyāyavacanānaṃ yaṃ pubbe saṅketaṃ karoti ‘‘idamimassatthassa vacana’’nti, tassa teneva tadatthapaṭivedho hoti. Apica tasmiṃ khaṇe vikkhittacittānaṃ aññavihitānaṃ vipariyāyānaṃ aññena pariyāyena tadatthāvabodhanatthampi pariyāyavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Yañhi ye na suṇanti, tapparihāyanavasena tesaṃ sabbathā paripuṇṇassa yathāvuttassa atthassa anavabodho siyā, pariyāyavacane pana vutte tabbasena paripuṇṇamatthāvabodho hoti. Atha vā mandabuddhīnaṃ punappunaṃ tadatthalakkhaṇena asammohanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ vuttaṃ. Mandabuddhīnañhi ekeneva padena ekatthassa sallakkhaṇena sammoho hoti, anekena pariyāyena pana ekatthassa sallakkhaṇena tathāsammoho na hoti anekappavattinimittena ekattheyeva pavattasaddena yathādhippetassa atthassa nicchitattā.
另一种说法:应当知道,说同义语也是为了排除这样一种对意义的臆测,即“许多意义也可能有相同的文句”。因为即使有许多意义,由于可以用一个词来表达,所以文句相同,听者对于上面所说的这个词就会生起“到底想要表达的是这个意义,还是那个意义”的臆测;而同义语则通过彼此区分来避免这种臆测。经中又说:巴利
Aparo nayo – ‘‘anekepi atthā samānabyañjanā hontī’’ti yā atthantaraparikappanā siyā, tassā parivajjanatthampi pariyāyavacanaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Anekesampi hi atthānaṃ ekapadavacanīyatāvasena samānabyañjanattā yathāvuttassa padassa ‘‘ayamattho nu kho adhippeto, udāhu ayamatthovā’’ti pavattaṃ sotūnamatthantaraparikappanaṃ vevacanaṃ aññamaññaṃ bhedakavasena parivajjeti. Vuttañca –
一个词有多种用法,并不能表明它只表达某个特定的意义。
通过有根据的方式来表达,而这种方式本身又能加以区分。巴利
‘‘Nekatthavuttiyā saddo, na visesatthañāpako; Pariyāyena yutto tu, pariyāyo ca bhedako’’ti.
另一种说法:即使不是别的什么意思,只是为了用各种不同的名称施设来说明各种含义,这种方便说法也是应该说的。因为说了方便说法之后,听者就能以多种方式理解名称施设:“这个含义也有这个、这个名称。”由此就产生了对各种施设的熟练,就像熟悉《尼犍度论》那样。而且,方便说法也能帮助说法者顺利地把经典的含义安立在自己心中,并让别人明白。因为通过说方便说法,说法者把经典的含义安立、放置在自己心中,然后让别人听懂,这就容易成就。或者,世尊开示方便说法,是为了彰显他自己所证得的法无碍解等成就,也是为了向应受调伏的人在那里播下种子。因为还没有证得这种成就的人,不可能这样说法。而通过这方便说法,随着所听到的内容,去修习那种法无碍解等成就,再加上对其他善行的充分培养,就能播下被称为福德的种子。当这样的成就被人知道时,谁不会渴望它呢?何必多说。由于正自觉者善巧通达了法界,他在一切含义上都有无碍的智慧行持,在一切音声言说上也是如此,所以他能用种种方式让同一个含义被人领悟,其中没有迟钝,也没有广说,说法也不会因此减损,这正是佛陀独有的法。因为遍知智善巧通达,所以就像无碍解智一样,以那种智慧在含义、法、词上都能无碍地运作,以佛陀的威神之力,用种种方式让同一个含义被人领悟,而不是在那种音声言说上,或者在那样领悟上有所迟钝,因为正确的领悟本身就是目的;也不会因为那样说就使含义变得冗长,因为同一个含义要让人容易理解,自有其善巧方便;也不会因为那样说就使说法减损,因为那种说法本身就是说法的成就。因此,方便说法是有利益的,也不应该把它看成是执著文句等种种过失。至于说“如果它应该被说,那就只说它好了,不要说别的”,这也不合理,因为另有目的存在。因为不说那个,而说别的,在说法的时候,即使听众心已安定,也能正确地领受,针对各自语句中所含的现起相,就能证得那个含义;否则,如果只是反复说同一个语句,他们就不能证得那个含义。这里也有偈颂:巴利
Aparo nayo – anaññassāpi pariyāyavacanassa vacane anekāhi tāhi tāhi nāmapaññattīhi tesaṃ tesaṃ atthānaṃ paññāpanatthampi pariyāyavacanaṃ vattabbaṃ hoti. Tathā hi pariyāyavacane vutte ‘‘imassatthassa idamidampi nāma’’nti sotūnaṃ anekadhā nāmapaññattivijānanaṃ. Tato ca taṃtaṃpaññattikosallaṃ hoti seyyathāpi nighaṇṭusatthe paricayataṃ. Apica dhammakathikānaṃ tantiatthupanibandhanaparāvabodhanānaṃ sukhasiddhiyāpi pariyāyavacanaṃ. Tabbacanena hi dhammadesakānaṃ tantiatthassa attano citte upanibandhanena ṭhapanena paresaṃ sotūnamavabodhanaṃ sukhasiddhaṃ hoti. Atha vā sammāsambuddhassa attano dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattiyā vibhāvanatthaṃ, veneyyānañca tattha bījavāpanatthaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ bhagavā niddisati. Tadasampattikassa hi tathāvacanaṃ na sambhavati. Tena ca pariyāyavacanena yathāsutena tassaṃ dhammaniruttipaṭisambhidāsampattiyaṃ tapparicaraṇena, tadaññasucaritasamupabrūhanena ca puññasaṅkhātassa bījassa vapanaṃ sambhavati. Ko hi īdisāya sampattiyā viññāyamānāya tadetaṃ nābhipattheyyāti, kiṃ vā bahunā. Yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā sammāsambuddho yathā sabbasmiṃ atthe appaṭihatañāṇacāro, tathā sabbasmiṃ saddavohāreti ekampi atthaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi bodheti, natthi tattha dandhāyitattaṃ vitthāritattaṃ, nāpi dhammadesanāya hāni, āveṇiko cāyaṃ buddhadhammo. Sabbaññutaññāṇassa hi suppaṭividitabhāvena paṭisambhidāñāṇehi viya tenapi ñāṇena atthe, dhamme, niruttiyā ca appaṭihatavuttitāya buddhalīḷāya ekampi atthaṃ anekehi pariyāyehi bodheti, na pana tasmiṃ saddavohāre, tathābodhane vā mandabhāvo sammābodhanassa sādhanattā, na ca tena atthassa vitthārabhāvo ekassevatthassa desetabbassa subbijānanakāraṇattā, nāpi tabbacanena dhammadesanāhāni tassa desanāsampattibhāvato. Tasmā sātthakaṃ pariyāyavacanaṃ, na cāpi taṃ ganthagāravādianekadosakaranti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yaṃ panetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘yadi ca taṃ vattabbaṃ siyā, tadeva vuttaṃ assa, na tadañña’’nti, tampi na yuttaṃ payojanantarasambhavato. Tadeva hi avatvā tadaññassa vacanena desanākkhaṇe samāhitacittānampi sammadeva paṭiggaṇhantānaṃ taṃtaṃpadantogadhapavattinimittamārabbha tadatthādhigamo hoti, itarathā tasmiṃyeva pade punappunaṃ vutte tesaṃ tadatthānadhigatatā siyāti. Honti cettha –
无论用什么方式,为了让人觉悟,从别的说法中……
对心散乱的人,也用方便说法来讲。
为了不让愚钝的人误解,也为了排除其他含义;
为了确立各种名称的既定含义,而作同义词的解说。
为了让说法的人容易理解经文的义理,
为了让人明白法和言辞,才作了这种同义解释的说法。
为了给应当受调伏的众生在那里播下种子,也是为了自己;
借着法界的游戏化现,说出了种种方便教法。
但如果不直接说出那件事,而是借由其他方式让人领悟;
是为了让正确受持的人通达义利而作的。巴利
‘‘Yena kenaci atthassa, bodhāya aññasaddato; Vikkhittakamanānampi, pariyāyakathā katā. Mandānañca amūḷhatthaṃ, atthantaranisedhayā; Taṃtaṃnāmaniruḷhatthaṃ, pariyāyakathā katā. Desakānaṃ sukaratthaṃ, tantiatthāvabodhane; Dhammaniruttibodhatthaṃ, pariyāyakathā katā. Veneyyānaṃ tattha bījavāpanatthañca attano; Dhammadhātuyā līḷāya, pariyāyakathā katā. Tadeva tu avatvāna, tadaññehi pabodhanaṃ; Sammāpaṭiggaṇhantānaṃ, atthādhigamāya kata’’nti.
这种辩驳只适用于这类情况,并不是在任何地方都该用,为了说明这一点,才说了“而这个”等话。其中“唯在指责时”是说,不管有没有说出看似合理的理由,都只是站在指出过失的立场上进行指责。“并非在一切处”的意思是:不只是在辱骂、呵斥、轻蔑等一切情况下都要作辩驳。他用“如果”等话把同一个道理讲清楚。“他应被怀疑”这句,正是以这样的理由指出应当辩驳。“你是骆驼”等话,是对“并非在一切处”的展开说明。依据生、名、种姓、业、技艺、病、相、烦恼、犯戒这十种骂人的事,名为骂。只有安忍才是忍耐,而不是审察忍等,所以叫安忍忍。巴利
Idaṃ pana nibbeṭhanaṃ īdiseyeva, na sabbattha kātabbanti dassento ‘‘idañcā’’tiādimāha. Tattha avaṇṇeyevāti kāraṇapatirūpaṃ vatvā, avatvā vā dosapatiṭṭhāpanavasena nindāya eva. Na sabbatthāti na kevalaṃ akkosanakhuṃsanavambhanādīsu sabbattha nibbeṭhanaṃ kātabbanti attho. Tadevatthaṃ ‘‘yadi hī’’tiādinā pākaṭaṃ karoti. ‘‘Sāsaṅkanīyo hotī’’ti vuttaṃ tathānibbeṭhetabbatāya kāraṇameva ‘‘tasmā’’ti paṭiniddisati. ‘‘Oṭṭhosī’’tiādi ‘‘na sabbatthā’’ti etassa vivaraṇaṃ. Jātināmagottakammasippaābādha liṅga kilesa āpatti akkosanasaṅkhātehi dasahi akkosavatthūhi. Adhivāsanameva khanti, na diṭṭhinijjhānakkhamanādayoti adhivāsanakhanti.
6 6. 这样,在非称赞的场合做了说明之后,现在为了也在称赞的场合做说明,而说了“如是”等话。其中,“非称赞的场合”指显示非称赞的地方。“如常者的特征”在这里,“如常者”依据《大义释》所解释的“以五种行相为如常者:于可爱与不可爱中为如常者,已度脱为如常者,已渡越为如常者,已解脱为如常者,依彼而说为如常者”,在这五种含义中,这里取第一种含义。对此的解释如下——巴利
6. Evaṃ avaṇṇabhūmiyā saṃvaṇṇanaṃ katvā idāni vaṇṇabhūmiyāpi saṃvaṇṇanaṃ kātumāha ‘‘eva’’ntiādi. Tattha avaṇṇabhūmiyanti avaṇṇappakāsanaṭṭhāne. Tādilakkhaṇanti ettha ‘‘pañcahākārehi tādī iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī, cattāvīti tādī, tiṇṇāvīti tādī, muttāvīti tādī, taṃniddesā tādī’’ti (mahāni. 38) niddesanayena pañcasu atthesu idha paṭhamenatthena tādī. Tatrāyaṃ niddeso –
阿罗汉怎样在可爱与不可爱中保持如如不动?阿罗汉在得到利养时如如不动,在得不到利养时也如如不动;在有眷属时、无眷属时,在赞叹时、讥毁时,在快乐时、痛苦时,都如如不动。即使有人用香料涂他一只手臂,又用斧头砍他另一只手臂,在他那里没有贪,在他那里没有瞋;他已断除随顺与瞋恚,超越了一切欣喜与忧戚,超越了顺与逆。这样,阿罗汉在可爱与不可爱中就是如如不动。巴利
Kathaṃ arahā iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī, arahā lābhepi tādī, alābhepi tādī, yasepi, ayasepi, pasaṃsāyapi, nindāyapi, sukhepi , dukkhepi tādī, ekañce bāhaṃ gandhena limpeyyuṃ, ekañce bāhaṃ vāsiyā taccheyyuṃ, amusmiṃ natthi rāgo, amusmiṃ natthi paṭigho , anunayapaṭighavippahīno ugghāṭinigghāṭivītivatto, anurodhavirodhasamatikkanto, evaṃ arahā iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādīti (mahāni. 38).
从词义上说,因为看起来就像那样,所以叫“如者”;意思是,他看可爱的和不可爱的都一样。它的特征就是“如者相”,也就是在可爱与不可爱中平等看待的本性。或者说,因为被看成就像那样,所以叫“如者”,那本身就是本性,那本身就是特征,也就是“如者相”。在称赞的层面上显示如者相,这是这里的关联。“para”这个词是“其他”的意思,所以说了“任何……”等话。“ānanda”(喜乐)是指极度欢喜,具有它的众生通过它而欢喜,这显示“ānanda”一词有“作具”之义。美丽的心是“sumano”,心,或者有美丽之心的,是“sumano”,具有它的个人。难道不是说,在是心之表示的情况下,与心所之乐的意义相应是合理的;而在是个人之表示的情况下,则心本身就是意义,而不是心所之乐,因为“sumana”一词是相对于实体概念而转起的,如“有杖者”、“有顶髻者”等?确实如此,在考虑实体时是这样;但这里不考虑那个,而是考虑与那个实体相连的、作为根本原因的、心所之乐本身,“sumana”一词才转起,所以在这里也是心所之乐本身作为意义而成立,因此说“这是心所之乐的别名”。因为通过这句话,其他心所也由于与心相连、由于是心的作用,而随其所应成为喜悦的状态,所以不会遭到责难,因为那是习惯用语,如“莲花”等,他这样回避。它鼓胀,所以是“ubbilaṃ”,它破坏先前的状态而达到特殊,这是意思。那本身就是“ubbilāvitaṃ”,由于其他缘的到来等。或者向上飘动,所以是“ubbilāvitaṃ”,把“a”音变成“i”音和“ā”音,因为心本身被称为“cetaso”。但在“taddhita”成立时,那是不离那词的,因为所说的一般性,或者因为那个词是名词,所以为了显示“是谁的”这一关联特殊结合而说“cetaso”,说了“kassā”等。在类似情况下也是这个道理。由于它生起,身和心就像被风吹胀的皮囊一样,达到膨胀的状态,那是基于家的、掉举的喜的别名,他通过“uddhaccāvahāyā”等显示其本质。“uddhaccāvahāyā”是指带来掉举状态的。使心浮起,使心成为浮起的,是“ubbilāpanā”,那本身就是喜,是它的。通过蕴而说法之差别,说了“idhāpī”等。考虑到“avaṇṇabhūmi”,这个“api”一词如“这也是波罗夷”等中一样,而在这里,虽然那些比丘没有浮起,但为了遮止未来善男子在如此处所生起不善,他建立了法门。通过两个词说了行蕴,通过一个词说了受蕴,在这里也可以按照注疏中所说“以它们为根据,其余相应法的作被遮止”而了知,所以没有说。按照“api一词是考虑之义”等所说,这里的意义应随其所应而了知。巴利
Vacanattho pana tamiva dissatīti tādī, iṭṭhamiva aniṭṭhampi passatīti attho. Tassa lakkhaṇaṃ tādilakkhaṇaṃ, iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu samapekkhanasabhāvo. Atha vā tamiva dissate tādī, so eva sabhāvo, tadeva lakkhaṇaṃ tādilakkhaṇanti. Vaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ tādilakkhaṇaṃ dassetunti sambandho. Para-saddo aññattheti āha ‘‘ye kecī’’tiādi. Ānandanti bhusaṃ pamodanti taṃsamaṅgino sattā etenāti ānandasaddassa karaṇatthataṃ dasseti. Sobhanamano sumano, cittaṃ, sobhanaṃ vā mano yassāti sumano, taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo. Nanu ca cittavācakabhāve sati cetasikasukhassa bhāvatthatā yuttā, puggalavācakabhāve pana cittameva bhāvattho siyā, na cetasikasukhaṃ, sumanasaddassa dabbanimittaṃ pati pavattattā yathā ‘‘daṇḍittaṃ sikhitta’’ntiādīti? Saccametaṃ dabbe apekkhite, idha pana tadanapekkhitvā tena dabbena yuttaṃ mūlanimittabhūtaṃ cetasikasukhameva apekkhitvā sumanasaddo pavatto, tasmā etthāpi cetasikasukhameva bhāvattho sambhavati, tenāha ‘‘cetasikasukhassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Etena hi vacanena tadaññacetasikānampi cittapaṭibaddhattā, cittakiriyattā ca yathāsambhavaṃ somanassabhāvo āpajjatīti codanaṃ nāpajjateva ruḷhisaddattā tassa yathā ‘‘paṅkaja’’nti pariharati. Ubbilayatīti ubbilaṃ, bhindati purimāvatthāya visesaṃ āpajjatīti attho. Tadeva ubbilāvitaṃ paccayantarāgamādivasena. Uddhaṃ palavatīti vā ubbilāvitaṃ akārānaṃ ikāraṃ, ākārañca katvā, cittameva ‘‘cetaso’’ti vuttattā. Taddhite pana siddhe taṃ abyatirittaṃ tasmiṃ pade vacanīyassa sāmaññabhāvato, tassa vā saddassa nāmapadattā, tasmā kassāti sambandhīvisesānuyoge ‘‘cetaso’’ti vuttanti dassetuṃ ‘‘kassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Esa nayo īdisesu. Yāya uppannāya kāyacittaṃ vātapūritabhastā viya uddhumāyanākārappattaṃ hoti tassā gehasitāya odagyapītiyā etaṃ adhivacananti sarūpaṃ dasseti ‘‘uddhaccāvahāyā’’tiādinā. Uddhaccāvahāyāti uddhatabhāvāvahāya. Uppilāpeti cittaṃ uppilāvitaṃ karotīti ubbilāpanā, sā eva pīti, tassā. Khandhavasena dhammavisesattaṃ āha ‘‘idhāpī’’tiādinā. Avaṇṇabhūmimapekkhāya api-saddo ‘‘ayampi pārājiko’’tiādīsu (pārā. 1.89, 91, 167, 171, 195, 197) viya, idha ca kiñcāpi tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ubbilāvitameva natthi, atha kho āyatiṃ kulaputtānaṃ edisesupi ṭhānesu akusaluppattiṃ paṭisedhento dhammanettiṃ ṭhapetīti. Dvīhi padehi saṅkhārakkhandho, ekena vedanākkhandho vuttoti etthāpi ‘‘tesaṃ vasena sesānaṃ sampayuttadhammānaṃ karaṇaṃ paṭikkhittamevā’’ti ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttanayena sakkā viññātunti na vuttaṃ. ‘‘Pi-saddo sambhāvanattho’’tiādinā vuttanayena cettha attho yathāsambhavaṃ veditabbo.
“那障碍就会是你们的”——这里“障碍”一词的意思,也要按照我们在下面贬斥部分中说过的方式去理解,比如“是对膨胀状态者不可为之事的表述”等等。这里取了“喜悦的、膨胀的”所显示的“喜”本身,然后说“以那膨胀的状态”。因为不含喜悦的喜是不存在的,所以单凭那句话本身,“善心”所显示的喜悦也就自然成立了,注释是这么说的。或者也可以这样理解:喜悦能造成障碍是显而易见的,喜则不那么明显,所以注释才那样说。为什么这么问呢?提问者把前面所说的含义不加区分地放在心里,然后提出了质问。论师承认那含义是“真实的”,然后用“然而那……”等话,以分别解说的方式来回应。巴利
Tumhaṃyevassa tena antarāyoti etthāpi ‘‘antarāyo’’ti idaṃ ‘‘ubbilāvitattassa akaraṇīyatākāraṇavacana’’tiādinā heṭṭhā avaṇṇapakkhe amhehi vuttanayānusārena attho daṭṭhabbo. Ettha ca ‘‘ānandino ubbilāvitā’’ti dīpitaṃ pītimeva gahetvā ‘‘tena ubbilāvitattenā’’ti vacanaṃ somanassarahitāya pītiyā abhāvato tabbacaneneva ‘‘sumanā’’ti dīpitaṃ somanassampi siddhamevāti katvā vuttaṃ. Atha vā somanassassa antarāyakaratā pākaṭā, na tathā pītiyāti evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kasmā panetanti yathāvuttaṃ atthaṃ avibhāgato manasi katvā codeti. Ācariyo ‘‘sacca’’nti tamatthaṃ paṭijānitvā ‘‘taṃ panā’’tiādinā vibhajjabyākaraṇavasena pariharati.
这里,“此”是指对阿难等人不可做之事的说法;“难道不是世尊所称赞的吗”则是连接语。所谓“佛”,是对称扬者而言,也就是对那些随念功德而说“佛”这个词的善人们说的。“以全部”是指以整体性、以完整的状态。“赡部洲的”是就它作为组成部分而说的关联语。不过另一些人说:“‘赡部洲的’是属格,但表达的是工具格的意义。”按照他们的看法,应当把“全部”和“赡部洲”这两个词看作同位关系,而工具格的说法则带有从格的意义。“更不必说从一部分了”——这里的“更”表示推断、设想。“等”这个词在这里……巴利
Tattha etanti ānandādīnamakaraṇīyatāvacanaṃ, nanu bhagavatā vaṇṇitanti sambandho. Buddhoti kittayantassāti ‘‘buddho’’ti vacanaṃ guṇānussaraṇavasena kathentassa sādhujanassa. Kasiṇenāti kasiṇatāya sakalabhāvena. Jambudīpassāti cetassa avayavabhāvena sambandhīvacanaṃ. Apare pana ‘‘jambudīpassāti karaṇavacanatthe sāmivacana’’ti vadanti, tesaṃ matena kasiṇajambudīpasaddānaṃ samānādhikaraṇabhāvo daṭṭhabbo, karaṇavacanañca nissakkatthe. Pageva ekadesato panāti api-saddo sambhāvane. Ādi-saddena cettha –
优陀夷,别难过。就算阿难还没有离贪就死去,凭着他这份对佛法的清净信心,他也会七次做天王,七次在这赡部洲做大国王。而且,优陀夷,阿难在这一生就会证入般涅槃。巴利
‘‘Mā soci udāyi, ānando avītarāgo kālaṃ kareyya, tena cittappasādena sattakkhattuṃ devarajjaṃ kāreyya, sattakkhattuṃ imasmiṃyeva jambudīpe mahārajjaṃ kāreyya, apica udāyi ānando diṭṭheva dhamme parinibbāyissatī’’tiādisuttaṃ (a. ni. 3.81) –
“所摄”:就是其他经里所说的喜与悦。“依出离”:就是依止于从欲乐出离的善法。“此处”:就是在这部经里。“依家”:就是依止于被称为家的欲乐,因为在家人一向习惯这些。为什么说指的是同一种呢?所以说“idamhi”等。为了把“与尊者阐那所生起的相似”这个意思说清楚、成立起来,所以说了“teneva”等。由于对世尊和法怀有在家人那样的爱著,他没能生起殊胜。在般涅槃时:或者指世尊临近般涅槃时,被世尊制定的惩罚所呵责;或者指世尊般涅槃后,被僧团呵责而生起。以梵罚:就是以“比丘们不应与某人说话,不应劝诫他,不应教导他”这样的梵罚。被呵责:就是被警策。因此:因为依家而起的喜与悦是禅那等的障碍。世尊在《帝释问经》中确实说过:“天帝,我说喜有两种:应亲近的和不应亲近的。”巴利
Saṅgahitaṃ. Nti suttantare vuttaṃ pītisomanassaṃ. Nekkhammassitanti kāmato nikkhamane kusaladhamme nissitaṃ. Idhāti imasmiṃ sutte. Gehassitanti gehavāsīnaṃ samudāciṇṇato gehasaṅkhāte kāmaguṇe nissitaṃ. Kasmā tadevidhādhippetanti āha ‘‘idañhī’’tiādi. ‘‘Āyasmato channassa uppannasadisa’’nti vuttamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ, samatthetuṃ vā ‘‘tenevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Visesaṃ nibbattetuṃ nāsakkhi bhagavati, dhamme ca pavattagehassitapematāya. Parinibbānakāleti parinibbānāsannakāle bhagavatā paññattena tajjitoti vā sambandho. Parinibbānakāleti vā bhagavato parinibbutakāle saṅghena tajjito nibbattetīti vā sambandho. Brahmadaṇḍenāti ‘‘bhikkhūhi itthannāmo neva vattabbo, na ovaditabbo, nānusāsitabbo’’ti (cūḷava. 445) katena brahmadaṇḍena. Tajjitoti saṃvejito. Tasmāti yasmā gehassitapītisomanassaṃ jhānādīnaṃ antarāyakaraṃ, tasmā. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā sakkapañhasutte ‘‘somanassaṃpāhaṃ devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.359).
“Ayañhi”等话,是用理由来证明同一个意思。因为它是和贪相应的,所以会成为障碍。这里本来应该说“这是和贪相应的喜与悦”,但既然提到了喜,悦也就一并被包含了,因为不存在离开悦的喜。按照前面所说的方式,这里取的其实只是喜。再者,因为经中对可修习与不可修习作了区分,悦的障碍作用很明显,喜却不是那样,所以特别以“与贪相应”这一点来区分说明喜。为了把它和非称赞的部分联系起来并说得清楚,所以说了“lobho cā”等话。所谓“如瞋一样”,就是和非称赞的部分所说的瞋一样。“Luddho”等偈颂的意思,应按照“kuddho”等偈颂中所说的方式来理解。巴利
‘‘Ayañhī’’tiādinā tadevatthaṃ kāraṇato samattheti. Rāgasahitattā hi sā antarāyakarāti. Ettha pana ‘‘idañhi rāgasañhitaṃ pītisomanassa’’nti vattabbaṃ siyā, tathāpi pītiggahaṇena somanassampi gahitameva hoti somanassarahitāya pītiyā abhāvatoti heṭṭhā vuttanayena pītiyeva gahitā. Apica sevitabbāsevitabbavibhāgassa sutte vacanato somanassassa pākaṭo antarāyakarabhāvo, na tathā pītiyāti sāyeva rāgasahitatthena visesetvā vuttā. Avaṇṇabhūmiyā saddhiṃ sambandhitvā pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘lobho cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kodhasadisovāti avaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ vuttakodhasadiso eva. ‘‘Luddho’’tiādigāthānaṃ ‘‘kuddho’’tiādigāthāsu vuttanayena attho daṭṭhabbo.
“比丘们,如果其他人称赞我,或者称赞法,或者称赞僧,而你们对此感到欢喜、喜悦、兴奋,那你们还能分辨别人说的是说得好还是说得不好吗?”“不能,尊者。”这叫作第三轮。按照在“不称赞”部分所说的方式,应当把它放到第三轮的位置上来处理。因为在说法的时候,没有需要靠这一轮来觉悟的众生,所以这一轮在说法中没有出现,但从意义上说,它已经存在了。为了说明它像《论事》那样以广说的方式存在,所以说了“tatiyavāro panā”等话,以此表明:在作注释时,应当为了那些能这样理解的众生而引出这一轮并加以注释。以“yatheva hi”等话阐明同一意义的成立。关联是:正如愤怒的人不能了知义理。巴利
‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, dhammassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, saṅghassa vā vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ, tatra ce tumhe assatha ānandino sumanā ubbilāvitā , api nu tumhe paresaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitaṃ ājāneyyāthāti? No hetaṃ bhante’’ti ayaṃ tatiyavāro nāma avaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ vuttanayavasena tatiyavāraṭṭhāne nīharitabbattā, so desanākāle tena vārena bodhetabbapuggalābhāvato desanāya anāgatopi tadatthasambhavato atthato āgatoyeva. Yathā taṃ vitthāravasena kathāvatthuppakaraṇanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tatiyavāro panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, etena saṃvaṇṇanākāle tathābujjhanakasattānaṃ vasena so vāro ānetvā saṃvaṇṇetabboti dasseti. ‘‘Yatheva hī’’tiādinā tadevatthasambhavaṃ vibhāveti. Kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti yathevāti sambandho.
在显示应当如何修行的第四轮中,这是承接前面所说的第三轮而应当说明的内容。从“你们的导师”这句话开始,一直到“以这个理由也是真实的”这句话为止,都是连接起来的。“So hi bhagavā”等语句是对此的解释。其中,“itipi”的意思就是“以这个理由”。详细展开见于《清净道论》。即使经中说“如实告知已受具足戒者,无犯”,也只应当告知同类的人,所以说“只应向同类的比丘承认”。因为只有他们才希望他得到利益,也认为他的话可信,由此可以说,这论证了前面所说的“显示了教法的不虚妄”。从“Evañhi”等语句是说明理由的话。恶欲既已被避开,或者它成为作者,二者是有联系的。“不虚妄”是指以能导出的方式而不欺骗。依照所说的方式,是指依照“在那里,你们……”即“在那个赞颂中,你们……”等,以及“第二句是第一句的同义词,第四句是第三句的同义词”等所说的方式。巴利
Paṭipajjitabbākāradassanavāreti yathāvuttaṃ tatiyavāraṃ upādāya vattabbe catutthavāre. ‘‘Tumhākaṃ satthā’’ti vacanato pabhuti yāva ‘‘imināpi kāraṇena taccha’’nti vacanaṃ, tāva yojanā. ‘‘So hi bhagavā’’tiādi tabbivaraṇaṃ. Tattha itipīti imināpi kāraṇena. Vitthāro visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 123 ādayo) ‘‘anāpatti upasampannassa bhūtaṃ ārocetī’’ti (pāci. 77) vuttepi sabhāgānameva ārocanaṃ yuttanti āha ‘‘sabhāgānaṃ bhikkhūnaṃyeva paṭijānitabba’’nti. Teyeva hi tassa atthakāmā, saddheyyavacanattañca maññanti, tato ca ‘‘sāsanassa amoghatā dīpitā hotī’’ti vuttatthasamatthanaṃ siyā. ‘‘Evañhī’’tiādi kāraṇavacanaṃ. Pāpicchatā ceva parivajjitā, kattubhūtā vā sā, hotīti sambandho. Amoghatāti niyyānikabhāvena atucchatā. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘tatra tumhehīti tasmiṃ vaṇṇe tumhehī’’tiādinā ceva ‘‘dutiyaṃ padaṃ paṭhamassa padassa, catutthañca tatiyassa vevacana’’ntiādinā ca vuttanayena.
7 “什么是连结?”这个提问,是因为有人可能会问:“难道仅仅凭这些已经说过的称赞和非称赞,说法就已经与主题相连、达到目的了吗?”由于这种质疑可能出现,所以才提出这个问题。“以称赞和非称赞”:就是通过这两者之词。因为就像对意义的解释一样,也有对音声的解释,这是文字学者的看法。或者说,因为这是如此说的理由,又因为它是组成部分,所以说“以句”。“以非称赞和称赞”:则是依无德与有德、依贬斥与赞扬来显示其自性。阿阇梨法护长老说:“由于没有根据,所以没有需要回答的内容,因此他退回了。”详细展开来说,由于说法时没有应被教化的众生,所以到此为止是合适的,世尊正是出于这样的心意,因没有说法的必要而退回,正如在称赞地中的第三轮也应这样看待。同样,由于有应被教化的众生,有需要回答的内容已经成立,所以说法便继续下去。“Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ”这里,iti 一词表示开始之义,因为它也延续到下文,因此他将说“idha panā”等。在显示了到此为止这是关于称赞的连结之后,为了显示在这两种称赞中,这是关于梵天所给称赞的连结,所以说“so panā”等。他将在后面阐明空性时,以“atthi bhikkhave”等显示连结。巴利
7.Ko anusandhīti pucchā ‘‘nanu ettakeneva yathāvuttehi avaṇṇavaṇṇehi sambandhā desanāmatthakaṃ pattā’’ti anuyogasambhavato katā. Vaṇṇena ca avaṇṇena cāti tadubhayapadena. Atthaniddeso viya hi saddaniddesopīti akkharacintakā. Atha vā tathābhāsanassa kāraṇattā, koṭṭhāsattā ca ‘‘padehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Avaṇṇena ca vaṇṇena cāti pana aguṇaguṇavasena, nindāpasaṃsāvasena ca sarūpadassanaṃ. ‘‘Nivatto amūlakatāya vissajjetabbatābhāvato’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ. Taṃ vitthāretvā desanāya bodhetabbapuggalābhāvato ettakāva sā yuttarūpāti bhagavato ajjhāsayeneva adesanābhāvena nivatto, yathā taṃ vaṇṇabhūmiyaṃ tatiyavārotipi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā bodhetabbapuggalasambhavena vissajjetabbatāya adhigatabhāvato anuvattatiyeva. Itipetaṃ bhūtanti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho taduparipi anuvattakattā, tena vakkhati ‘‘idha panā’’tiādi. Ettāvatā ayaṃ vaṇṇānusandhīti dassetvā duvidhesu pana tesu vaṇṇesu brahmadattassa vaṇṇānusandhīti dassento ‘‘so panā’’tiādimāha. Upari suññatāpakāsane anusandhiṃ dassessati ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.28).
像这样,通过问答的方式说明了整体含义之后,现在以“其中”等语来显示各部分含义。因为只是少许,又因为从四周、从一切方面被切分,所以称为“小”,因此说“appamattakaṃ是小的名称”。“量”称为尺度,因为被计量、被限定。以复合词的方式,“appamattakaṃ”如同“bahuputtako”(多子者)一样,在“oramattaka”(少许)中也是如此。正是通过这一点,也表明了“appā mattā appamattā, sā etassāti appamattakaṃ”等说法中ka后缀是有意义的,因为意义上并无差别。由于“mattaka”一词没有独立意义,“sīlamattakaṃ”就只是指戒本身。所谓没有独立意义,是说它自身的意义要依前一个词的意义才能成立。语法学家们说:词并非完全没有意义。那么,以世尊的波罗蜜威力,难道会有一个无意义的音节从他殊胜之口说出吗?而且整个教典据说处处都在阐明四圣谛,那它的无意义性又怎么能成立呢?确实如此,但那个词也是依照由另一词所表达之意义的限定方式来表达那被表达的意义,然而那意义即使没有那个词,仅凭另一个词也能被了知,因此才说它是无意义的。我们不是说过“没有独立意义……因为要依前一个词的意义才能成立”吗?再者,世尊的说法是随顺所化众生的意乐而进行的,而所化众生在无始轮回中对世间语词早已熟习其心,世间即使没有别的意义可了知,也可见到出于言辞流畅等而使用语词,如“labbhati palabbhati, khañjati nikhañjati, āgacchati paccāgacchati”等。对于如此熟习的人来说,以那样方式的语词使用来了知意义是容易的,因此说了无意义语词的使用。如此于一切处。这里也有偈颂——巴利
Evaṃ pucchāvissajjanāmukhena samudāyatthataṃ vatvā idāni avayavatthataṃ dasseti ‘‘tatthā’’tiādinā. Appameva parito samantato khaṇḍitattā parittaṃ nāmāti āha ‘‘appamattakanti parittassa nāma’’nti. Mattā vuccati pamāṇaṃ mīyate parimīyateti katvā. Samāsantakakārena appamattakaṃ yathā ‘‘bahuputtako’’ti, evaṃ oramattakepi. Eteneva ‘‘appā mattā appamattā, sā etassāti appamattaka’’ntiādinā kapaccayassa sātthakatampi dasseti atthato abhinnattā. Mattakasaddassa anatthakabhāvato sīlameva sīlamattakaṃ. Anatthakabhāvoti ca sakatthatā purimapadattheyeva pavattanato. Na hi saddā kevalaṃ anatthakā bhavantīti akkharacintakā. Nanu ca bhagavato pāramitānubhāvena niratthakamekakkharampi mukhavaraṃ nārohati, sakalañca pariyattisāsanaṃ pade pade catusaccappakāsananti vuttaṃ, kathaṃ tassa anatthakatā sambhavatīti? Saccaṃ, tampi padantarābhihitassa atthassa visesanavasena tadabhihitaṃ atthaṃ vadati eva, so pana attho vināpi tena padantareneva sakkā viññātunti anatthakamicceva vuttanti. Nanu avocumha ‘‘anatthakabhāvo…pe… pavattanato’’ti. Apica vineyyajjhāsayānurūpavasena bhagavato desanā pavattati, vineyyā ca anādimatisaṃsāre lokiyesuyeva saddesu paribhāvitacittā, loke ca asatipi atthantarāvabodhe vācāsiliṭṭhatādivasena saddapayogo dissati ‘‘labbhati palabbhati, khañjati nikhañjati, āgacchati paccāgacchatī’’tiādinā. Tathāparicitānañca tathāvidheneva saddapayogena atthāvagamo sukho hotīti anatthakasaddapayogo vuttoti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Hoti cettha –
为了区分其他词句所表达的含义;
为了令所应调伏的众生觉悟,才宣说这样无意义的语句。巴利
‘‘Padantaravacanīya-ssatthassa visesanāya; Bodhanāya vineyyānaṃ, tathānatthapadaṃ vade’’ti.
或者,“戒量”这里的“量”字,作用是排除修饰,就像“唯无寻有伺的法”“唯意界,即意界”等处的用法一样。因为“少许、下劣”这两个词已经从一般意义上说明了含义,而“戒量”这个词则是从特别意义上说的;为了显示可以这样作语源解释——“戒本身就是戒量,那本身就是戒量”——所以说了“戒本身就是戒量”。巴利
Atha vā sīlamattakanti ettha matta-saddo visesanivattiattho ‘‘avitakkavicāramattā dhammā (dha. sa. tikamātikā) manomattā dhātu manodhātū’’ti (dha. sa. mūlaṭī. 499) ca ādīsu viya. ‘‘Appamattakaṃ oramattaka’’nti padadvayena sāmaññato vuttoyeva hi attho ‘‘sīlamattaka’’nti padena visesato vutto, tena ca sīlaṃ eva sīlamattaṃ, tadeva sīlamattakanti nibbacanaṃ kātabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘sīlameva sīlamattaka’’nti vuttaṃ.
不过,这是注释书之外的一种解释方式。在“oramattakaṃ”这个词里,“ora”指的是此岸的部分,就像“orato bhogaṃ”“oraṃ pāraṃ”等用法中的那样。或者,“ora”这个词有“下方”的意思,就像“oraṃ āgamanāya ye paccayā, te orambhāgiyāni saṃyojanāni”(为了来到此岸的那些缘,它们就是下分结)等用法中的那样。因为戒相对于定和慧来说,属于此岸的部分,属于下方的部分,在这两种情况下,都可以按照“ore pavattaṃ mattaṃ yassā”这样的方式来分析词义。在“sīlamattakaṃ”这个词里,“matta”这个词表示“少”,就像“bhesajjamattā”(少量的药)等用法中的那样。或者,为了说明在戒当中也只取一部分,这里用了表示“少”的“matta”这个词。因为事实上,依止于根律仪的戒等在这里并没有被纳入教导。为什么呢?因为它们不像巴帝摩卡防护戒和活命遍净戒那样,在一切凡夫中都显而易见。在这里,“matta”是中性词,用来排除修饰成分。而在表示数量本义时,“matta”或“mattā”则是中性或阴性词。巴利
Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – oramattakanti ettha oranti apārabhāgo ‘‘orato bhogaṃ (mahāva. 66) oraṃ pāra’’ntiādīsu viya. Atha vā heṭṭhāattho orasaddo oraṃ āgamanāya ye paccayā, te orambhāgiyāni saṃyojanānītiādīsu viya. Sīlañhi samādhipaññāyo apekkhitvā apārabhāge, heṭṭhābhāge ca hoti, ubhayatthāpi ‘‘ore pavattaṃ mattaṃ yassā’’tiādinā viggaho. Sīlamattakanti etthāpi mattasaddo amahatthavācako ‘‘bhesajjamattā’’tiādīsu viya. Atha vā sīlepi tadekadesasseva saṅgahaṇatthaṃ amahatthavācako ettha mattasaddo vutto. Tathā hi indriyasaṃvarapaccayasannissitasīlāni idha desanaṃ anāruḷhāni. Kasmāti ce? Yasmā tāni pātimokkhasaṃvaraājīvapārisuddhisīlāni viya na sabbaputhujjanesu pākaṭānīti. Mattanti cettha visesanivattiatthe napuṃsakaliṅgaṃ. Pamāṇappakatthesu pana ‘‘matta’’nti vā ‘‘mattā’’ti vā napuṃsakitthiliṅgaṃ.
“这是所说的”等语句,结合上下文,显示总括之义。关联是:以那种戒,他可能会说,这就名为“戒量”。“我说功德,即使付出了努力”这句,是对“正在说功德”的解释。由此说明“māna”这个词尾具有能力之义,正如“诸比丘,有一人出现在世间就出现”等中的用法。不说“正在付出努力”,而说“付出了努力”,是为了说明以“tvā”等词尾结尾的词,和以“māna”词尾结尾的词一样,也指向其他动作。“对此可能会有”等语句(“对此”指“appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ”等语句),是不了解隐晦所说之义,只取显明之义,而认为与经部相违的某人的这种指责可能会有。对此,即在那“appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ”等语句中。以戒致力于业处修习者为瑜伽行者,指瑜伽行者的……巴利
‘‘Idaṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādinā saha yojanāya piṇḍatthaṃ dasseti. Yena sīlena vadeyya, etaṃ sīlamattakaṃ nāmāti sambandho. ‘‘Vaṇṇaṃ vadāmīti ussāhaṃ katvāpī’’ti idaṃ ‘‘vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno’’ti etassa vivaraṇaṃ. Etena hi ‘‘ekapuggalo bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 1.170) viya mānasaddassa sāmatthiyatthataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Ussāhaṃ kurumāno’’ti avatvā ‘‘katvā’’ti ca vacanaṃ tvādipaccayantapadānamiva mānantapaccayantapadānampi parakiriyāpekkhamevāti dassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Tattha siyā’’tiādinā sandhāyabhāsitamatthaṃ ajānitvā nītatthameva gahetvā suttantaravirodhitaṃ maññamānassa kassaci īdisī codanā siyāti dasseti. Tatthāti tasmiṃ ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādivacane (dī. ni. 1.7). Kammaṭṭhānabhāvane yuñjati sīlenāti yogī, tassa.
装饰就是美化,是打扮的行为。或者说,因为靠它来装饰,所以叫装饰,比如耳环之类的饰物。装点就是被装饰,是填补欠缺的地方。或者说,因为靠它来装点,所以叫装点,比如面部香粉之类用来填补欠缺的用具。不过在这里,是依照相似的说法,或者依照派生词的用法,直接把戒本身这样称呼。“为了装饰”是指装饰的原因,意思是前往装饰行为的起因。或者说,以戒来装饰的人就是“装饰者”,即具有装饰本性的人。这里本来是复数含义,但随顺类别而用了单数。有些人认为在“举例”的意义上也应该用单数,这是不对的,因为音韵学中没有这样的先例,道理上也说不通。既然是用单数来指示,怎么能合理地用于“举例”呢?因为在同一个意义中,并不存在另一个需要被举例的意义。所以,应当把这看作倒置用法,实际是复数含义,意思是“具有装饰本性的诸戒”。因为阿阇梨法护长老也在这里作了同样的判定。“最上”就是最殊胜的状态。巴利
Alaṅkaraṇaṃ vibhūsanaṃ alaṅkāro, pasādhanakiriyā. Alaṃ karoti etenevāti vā alaṅkāro, kuṇḍalādipasādhanaṃ. Maṇḍīyate maṇḍanaṃ, ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃ. Maṇḍīyati etenāti vā maṇḍanaṃ, mukhacuṇṇādiūnapūraṇopakaraṇaṃ. Idha pana sadisavohārena, taddhitavasena vā sīlameva tathā vuttaṃ. Maṇḍaneti maṇḍanahetu, maṇḍanakiriyānimittaṃ gatoti attho. Atha vā maṇḍati sīlenāti maṇḍano, maṇḍanajātiko puriso. Bahumhi cetaṃ jātyāpekkhāya ekavacanaṃ. Ubbāhanatthepi hi ekavacanamicchanti keci, tadayuttameva saddasatthe anāgatattā, atthayuttiyā ca abhāvato. Kathañhi ekavacananiddiṭṭhato ubbāhanakaraṇaṃ yuttaṃ siyā ekasmiṃ yevatthe ubbāhitabbassa aññassatthassa abhāvato. Tasmā vipallāsavasena bahvatthe idaṃ ekavacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, maṇḍanasīlesūti attho. Ācariyadhammapālattherenapi hi ayamevidha vinicchayo (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7) vutto. Aggatanti uttamabhāvaṃ.
关联是这样的:他可能会期望“我将会成为这样”。“这样”指的是“会成为”。“圆满行者”这里的“iti”一词表示“等等”的意思,或者表示“方式”的意思,通过它,就展示出了整部《戒德称赞经》。巴利
Assaṃ bhavissāmīti ākaṅkheyyāti sambandho. Assāti bhaveyya. Paripūrakārīti cettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena sakalampi sīlathomanasuttaṃ dasseti.
就像鸟护着蛋一样,在这里也是用表示那个意思的“iti”这个词——巴利
Kikīva aṇḍanti etthāpi tadatthena iti-saddena –
就像鸟护着蛋,就像牦牛护着尾巴,
就像爱自己的孩子,就像守护自己唯一的眼睛;
同样地,守护好戒行,
你们要始终心怀恭敬,好好去做。巴利
‘‘Kikīva aṇḍaṃ camarīva vāladhiṃ, Piyaṃva puttaṃ nayanaṃva ekakaṃ; Tatheva sīlaṃ anurakkhamānā, Supesalā hotha sadā sagāravā’’ti. (visuddhi. 1.19); –
他接着把偈颂收摄起来。说了“花香”之后,为了用其中一部分来说明,就说了“不是栴檀”等话。因为栴檀、多伽罗、茉莉花与花香相伴出现,所以说它们的气味就是花香。“花香”的意思是花以及花之外其余的气味。或者说,除了多伽罗和茉莉花之外剩下的气味,就叫作“花香”。在“善人的香”这一句里,这里的“香”要么是以相似名称来称呼戒,要么是以派生用法来指戒。或者,由戒所引发的美名声,按照前面所说的方式,被理解为“香”。因为戒是名声的因由。正如经中所说:“具戒者的美名远扬。”善人散发香气,以各种方式散发香气,因为他就像那些能散发香气的树木一样。巴利
Gāthaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. ‘‘Pupphagandho’’ti vatvā tadekadesena dassetuṃ ‘‘na candana’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Candanaṃ tagaraṃ mallikāti hi taṃsahacaraṇato tesaṃ gandhova vutto. Pupphagandhoti ca pupphañca tadavaseso gandho cāti attho. Tagaramallikāhi vā avasiṭṭho ‘‘pupphagandho’’ti vutto. Satañca gandhoti ettha sīlameva sadisavohārena vā taddhitavasena vā gandho. Sīlanibandhano vā thutighoso vuttanayena ‘‘gandho’’ti adhippeto. Sīlañhi kittiyā nimittaṃ. Yathāha ‘‘sīlavato kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggacchatī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.150; 3.316; a. ni. 5.213; mahāva. 785; udā. 76). Sappuriso pavāyati pakārehi gandhati tassa gandhūpagarukkhapaṭibhāgattā.
“Vassikī”就是素馨花,也有写成“vassika”的读法,意思一样。香本身就是香这一类,或者是香的种类。“Yvāyaṃ”就是“那一种”,整句关联起来的意思是:那最上等的香随风飘散。巴利
Vassikīti sumanapupphaṃ, ‘‘vassika’’ntipi pāṭho, tadatthova. Gandhā eva gandhajātā, gandhappakārā vā. Yvāyanti yadidaṃ, uttamo gandho vātīti sambandho.
“正智解脱者”,是指正确了知之后而解脱,或者依最上道而解脱。“不得道”,是指得不到它的因由,或者不能了知。巴利
Sammadaññā vimuttānanti sammā aññāya jānitvā, aggamaggena vā vimuttānaṃ. Maggaṃ na vindatīti kāraṇaṃ na labhati, na jānāti vā.
“立于戒”这句偈颂的简要含义是:一个有智慧的人,凭借结生慧而具足智慧,热诚、有精进力,又凭护持慧而善巧,这样的比丘——被称为“人”——在戒上站稳之后,修习以戒为增上力而说的定,也就是在修习定;以修习为因,同样修习慧与观,就能解开、应当解开、也有能力解开这被称为内结与外结的结缚。巴利
‘‘Sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’ti gāthāya paṭisandhipaññāya sapañño ātāpī vīriyavā pārihārikapaññāya nipako narasaṅkhāto bhikkhu sīle patiṭṭhāya cittaṃ tappadhānena vuttaṃ samādhiṃ bhāvayaṃ bhāvayanto bhāvanāhetu tathā paññaṃ vipassanañca imaṃ antojaṭābahijaṭāsaṅkhātaṃ jaṭaṃ vijaṭaye vijaṭeyya vijaṭituṃ samattheyyāti saṅkhepattho.
依止于地,是指以执取地味的方式依止于地;而在戒方面,则应当看作是以圆满戒行作为依止和立足处。巴利
Pathaviṃ nissāyāti pathaviṃ rasaggahaṇavasena nissāya, sīlasmiṃ pana paripūraṇavasena nissāya patiṭṭhānaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
因为所比较的双方有微小与巨大的差别,就像此岸与彼岸等一样,只是基于相对比较而作出的假名施设,所以为了解释“相对于上面的功德而说”这句话,才说“互相比较而说”。这里“hi”这个词表示原因,因此就显示出这个原因:戒虽然以作为基础这一点对定有很大的帮助,但如果相对于定在威神力等功德上的殊胜来说,连十六分之一都达不到;定相对于慧也是如此。所以接着说“因此”等等。“达不到”是指以功德相等的程度达不到,也就是不相等的意思。“上面的”是指定与慧。“相对于……而说”是指作为支撑而说。因为那样的施设即是支撑。 “下面的”是指戒与定两者。巴利
Appakamahantatāya pārāpārādi viya upanidhāpaññattibhāvato aññamaññaṃ upanidhāya āhāti vissajjetuṃ ‘‘upari guṇe upanidhāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sīlañhīti ettha hi-saddo kāraṇattho, tenidaṃ kāraṇaṃ dasseti ‘‘yasmā sīlaṃ kiñcāpi patiṭṭhābhāvena samādhissa bahūpakāraṃ, pabhāvādiguṇavisese panassa upanidhāya kalampi bhāgaṃ na upeti, tathā samādhi ca paññāyā’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Na pāpuṇātīti guṇasamabhāvena na sampāpuṇāti, na sametīti vuttaṃ hoti. Uparimanti samādhipaññaṃ. Upanidhāyāti upatthambhaṃ katvā. Tañhi tādisāya paññattiyā upatthambhanaṃ hoti. Heṭṭhimanti sīlasamādhidvayaṃ.
“如何”等语是详细展开的说明。这里关于康达巴树根的神变之说,应当这样理解:即使戒在任何方面都达不到定,这里仍然以较为明显的神变方式,通过譬喻的方法来阐明这个道理。“阿毗……摧伏外道”这一段,则是为了显示那个双神变的极其显著,同时也为了显示它与其他在菩提树下、亲族集会等处所行的神变有所不同。因为从成正觉后的第八天起,为了消除诸天心中“他到底是不是佛”的疑惑,世尊在空中化现出宝石经行处,在上面经行而示现神变;此后第二年回到亲族之城迦毗罗卫城的尼拘律园,在亲族集会时,为了去除他们的骄慢与陶醉,又行了双神变。其中“从成正觉”是指从成正觉之时起。“舍卫城城门”是指舍卫城的南门。“康达巴树根”是指因名为康达的波斯匿王园林守护者所栽种,故名为康达巴的树根下。为了行双神变,世尊心中生起“应当寻求与此相应的处所”之念时,有些说这是帝释天王命令毗首羯磨所造的宝珠殿堂等;另一些说这是世尊所化现的。然而在许多义注中说:“殿堂是帝释天王命令毗首羯磨天子所造,经行处则是世尊所化现的。”由诸天所持的白伞可知其义,因为其他人不可能如此。“十二由旬的大众”这是就四方各十二由旬的人众而言。据说那时从一万世界界域充满到铁围山间,诸天与梵天也都聚集而来。若有谁能作这样的神变,就让他来吧——因为这与呵责相似,所以说“显示自己承担”。所谓自己承担,即是以努力、受持对治之法来执取。摧伏外道是指对那些先前以诡诈之心起来说“我们要行神变”的外道们的摧伏,而这也正是使他们不能如此做到。这整个词组应与“双神变”这一词相连。从王舍城长者生起檀香木钵之事开始,这里一切都应当说明。巴利
‘‘Katha’’ntiādi vitthāravacanaṃ. Kaṇḍambamūlikapāṭihāriyakathanañcettha yathākathañcipi sīlassa samādhimapāpuṇatāsiddhiyevidhādhippetāti pākaṭatarapāṭihāriyabhāvena, nidassananayena cāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Abhi…pe… titthiyamaddana’’nti idaṃ pana tassa yamakapāṭihāriyassa supākaṭabhāvadassanatthaṃ, aññehi bodhimūle ñātisamāgamādīsu ca katapāṭihāriyehi visesadassanatthañca vuttaṃ. Sambodhito hi aṭṭhamepi divase devatānaṃ ‘‘buddho vā no vā’’ti uppannakaṅkhāvidhamanatthaṃ ākāse ratanacaṅkamaṃ māpetvā caṅkamanto pāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi, tato dutiyasaṃvacchare kulanagaragato kapilavatthupure nigrodhārāme ñātīnaṃ samāgamepi tesaṃ mānamadappahānatthaṃ yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ akāsi. Tattha abhisambodhitoti abhisambujjhanakālato. Sāvatthinagaradvāreti sāvatthinagarassa dakkhiṇadvāre. Kaṇḍambarukkhamūleti kaṇḍena nāma pasenadirañño uyyānapālena ropitattā kaṇḍambanāmakassa rukkhassa mūle. Yamakapāṭihāriyakaraṇatthāya bhagavato citte uppanne ‘‘tadanucchavikaṃ ṭhānaṃ icchitabba’’nti ratanamaṇḍapādi sakkena devaraññā āṇattena vissakammunā katanti vadanti keci. Bhagavatā nimmitanti apare. Aṭṭhakathāsu pana anekāsu ‘‘sakkena devānamindena āṇāpitena vissakammadevaputtena maṇḍapo kato, caṅkamo pana bhagavatā nimmito’’ti vuttaṃ. Dibbasetacchatte devatāhi dhāriyamāneti attho viññāyati aññesamasambhavato. ‘‘Dvādasayojanāya parisāyā’’ti idaṃ catūsu disāsu paccekaṃ dvādasayojanaṃ manussaparisaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tadā kira dasasahassilokadhātuto cakkavāḷagabbhaṃ paripūretvā devabrahmānopi sannipatiṃsu. Yo koci evarūpaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ kātuṃ samattho ce, so āgacchatūti codanāsadisattā vuttaṃ ‘‘attādānaparidīpana’’nti. Attādānañhi anuyogo paṭipakkhassa attassa ādānaṃ gahaṇanti katvā. Titthiyamaddananti ‘‘pāṭihāriyaṃ karissāmā’’ti kuhāyanavasena pubbe uṭṭhitānaṃ titthiyānaṃ maddanaṃ, tañca tathā kātuṃ asamatthatāsampādanameva. Tadetaṃ padadvayaṃ ‘‘yamakapāṭihāriya’’nti etena sambandhitabbaṃ. Rājagahaseṭṭhino candanaghaṭikuppattito paṭṭhāya sabbameva cettha vattabbaṃ.
“从上半身”等,是显示《无碍解道》(Paṭisambhidāmagga 1.116)中所说的方式,因此说“依如是等方式而展开”,以及“一切应当详细解说”。在这里,还有一段巴利文的剩余部分——巴利
Uparimakāyatotiādi paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.116) āgatanayadassanaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘itiādinayappavatta’’nti, ‘‘sabbaṃ vitthāretabba’’nti ca. Tatthāyaṃ pāḷiseso –
从下半身不断冒出大火堆,从上半身不断冒出水流。前身出火,后身出水。后身出火,前身出水。右眼出火,左眼出水。左眼出火,右眼出水。右耳孔出火,左耳孔出水。左耳孔出火,右耳孔出水。右鼻孔出火,左鼻孔出水。左鼻孔出火,右鼻孔出水。右肩顶出火,左肩顶出水。左肩顶出火,右肩顶出水。右手出火,左手出水。左手出火,右手出水。右侧出火,左侧出水。左侧出火,右侧出水。右脚出火,左脚出水。左脚出火,右脚出水。一根根手指出火,手指之间的缝隙出水。手指之间的缝隙出火,一根根手指出水。一根根毛孔出火,一根根毛孔出水。从一根根毛孔不断冒出大火堆,从一根根毛孔不断冒出水流。巴利
‘‘Heṭṭhimakāyato aggikkhandho pavattati, uparimakāyato udakadhārā pavattati. Puratthimakāyato aggi, pacchimakāyato udakaṃ. Pacchimakāyato aggi, puratthimakāyato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇaakkhito aggi, vāmaakkhito udakaṃ. Vāmaakkhito aggi, dakkhiṇaakkhito udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato aggi, vāmakaṇṇasotato udakaṃ. Vāmakaṇṇasotato aggi, dakkhiṇakaṇṇasotato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato aggi, vāmanāsikāsotato udakaṃ. Vāmanāsikāsotato aggi, dakkhiṇanāsikāsotato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato aggi, vāmaaṃsakūṭato udakaṃ. Vāmaaṃsakūṭato aggi, dakkhiṇaaṃsakūṭato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇahatthato aggi, vāmahatthato udakaṃ. Vāmahatthato aggi, dakkhiṇahatthato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇapassato aggi, vāmapassato udakaṃ. Vāmapassato aggi, dakkhiṇapassato udakaṃ. Dakkhiṇapādato aggi, vāmapādato udakaṃ. Vāmapādato aggi, dakkhiṇapādato udakaṃ. Aṅgulaṅgulehi aggi, aṅgulantarikāhi udakaṃ. Aṅgulantarikāhi aggi, aṅgulaṅgulehi udakaṃ. Ekekalomato aggi, ekekalomato udakaṃ. Lomakūpato lomakūpato aggikkhandho pavattati, lomakūpato lomakūpato udakadhārā pavattatī’’ti.
不过在注疏里,只出现了“从一一毛孔”这样的说法。巴利
Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘ekekalomakūpato’’ icceva (paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.116) āgataṃ.
关于“六种颜色”这里,青、黄、赤、白、红褐、明净,这全部也是巴利文中的剩余部分,按照省略重复的规则,用“等”字来显示。在这里,“六种颜色”和“成对成对生起的颜色”之间的关系,要依照剩余文句来理解,因此接下来会说“第二道、第二道光芒”等等。因为在那一部分,是以它们成对成对生起的方式,来说明转向、遍作、决志各自分别生起。不过有些人说,“六种颜色”和前文“火蕴、水流”等词句相关联,这是不恰当的,因为为了火蕴和水流,接下来要说的其实是遍入火遍和风遍。或者也可以按主格来关联,说“六种颜色生起六种颜色”,就像“即使一位比丘不希望那位比丘尼退失”这个例子一样。因为语法学家们在主语和述词的使用中,常常把主词的语形也用在述词的位置上。巴利
Channaṃ vaṇṇānanti etthāpi nīlānaṃ pītakānaṃ lohitakānaṃ odātānaṃ mañjiṭṭhānaṃ pabhassarānanti ayaṃ sabbopi pāḷiseso peyyālanayena, ādi-saddena ca dassito. Ettha ca channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ ubbāhanabhūtānaṃ yamakā yamakā vaṇṇā pavattantīti pāṭhasesena sambandho, tena vakkhati ‘‘dutiyā dutiyā rasmiyo’’tiādi. Tattha hi tāsaṃ yamakaṃ yamakaṃ pavattanākārena saha āvajjanaparikammādhiṭṭhānānaṃ visuṃ pavatti dassitā. Keci pana ‘‘channaṃ vaṇṇāna’’nti etassa ‘‘aggikkhandho udakadhārā’’ti purimehi padehi sambandhaṃ vadanti, tadayuttameva aggikkhandhaudakadhārānaṃ atthāya tejokasiṇavāyokasiṇānaṃ samāpajjanassa vakkhamānattā. Channaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ chabbaṇṇā pavattantīti kattuvasena vā sambandho yathā ‘‘ekassa cepi bhikkhuno na paṭibhāseyya taṃ bhikkhuniṃ apasādetu’’nti (pāci. 558). Kattukammesu hi bahulā sāmivacanaṃ ākhyātapayogepi icchanti neruttikā.
这样按经文的理路展示了双神变之后,现在再按注疏的理路来阐发。他按逆关联的理路,为了先解释“六种色”这个词,说出了“彼”等语句。其中,“彼”指世尊。“金色光芒”,这是因那些光芒大多呈黄色而说的,意思是在以六色光芒作庄严的时候。因为那些光芒也从轮围山内部涌出,触到梵天界后折返,只收束在轮围山的环口。一个轮围山的内部,像弯曲的肘木一样,成为一片光明的菩提场。“第二、第二道光芒”,就是前前、后后次第生起的光芒。为什么用“如”字来表示相似的相状呢?他说了“二心”等。一刹那间,二心是不能同时生起的;靠这两个原因,它们就这样显现,也正如所说的那样消融,这就是他的意思。“有分随护”,就是以有分而随护,或者说,是以有分名为随护,也就是称作有分坠落。“惯习自在”,就是通过转向、入定等五种方式反复修习而获得自在。他提出质问:难道不能在一心生起时也生起两道光芒吗?以“而彼彼光芒”等作答。由于心路不同,转向心、遍作心,由于所缘不同,决志心路也各自分别生起。在转向结束时三次生起的速行心,在这里就以遍作之名来说。巴利
Evaṃ pāḷinayena yamakapāṭihāriyaṃ dassetvā idāni taṃ aṭṭhakathānayena vivaranto paccāsattinayena ‘‘channaṃ vaṇṇāna’’nti padameva paṭhamaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tassā’’tiādimāha. Tattha tassāti bhagavato. ‘‘Suvaṇṇavaṇṇā rasmiyo’’ti idaṃ tāsaṃ pītābhānaṃ yebhuyyatāya vuttaṃ, chabbaṇṇāhi rasmīhi alaṅkaraṇakālo viyāti attho. Tāpi hi cakkavāḷagabbhato uggantvā brahmalokamāhacca paṭinivattitvā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭimeva gaṇhiṃsu. Ekacakkavāḷagabbhaṃ vaṅkagopānasikaṃ viya bodhigharaṃ ahosi ekālokaṃ. Dutiyā dutiyā rasmiyoti purimapurimato pacchā pacchā nikkhantā rasmiyo. Kasmā sadisākāravasena ‘‘viyā’’ti vacanaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘dvinnañcā’’tiādi. Dvinnañca cittānaṃ ekakkhaṇe pavatti nāma natthi, yehi tā evaṃ siyuṃ, tathāpi iminā kāraṇadvayena evameva khāyantīti adhippāyo. Bhavaṅgaparivāsassāti bhavaṅgavasena parivasanassa, bhavaṅgasaṅkhātassa parivasanassa vā, bhavaṅgapatanassāti vuttaṃ hoti. Āciṇṇavasitāyāti āvajjanasamāpajjanādīhi pañcahākārehi samāciṇṇaparicayatāya. Nanu ca ekassāpi cittassa pavattiyā dve kisso rasmiyopi sambhaveyyunti anuyogamapaneti ‘‘tassā tassā pana rasmiyā’’tiādinā. Cittavāranānattā āvajjanaparikammacittāni, kasiṇanānattā adhiṭṭhānacittavārānipi visuṃ visuṃyeva pavattanti. Āvajjanāvasāne tikkhattuṃ pavattajavanāni parikammanāmeneva idha vuttāni.
“这是什么意思呢?”他这样问,然后说“为了青光之义”等等。“为了红褐光芒之义而修赤遍,为了明净光芒之义而修黄遍”——这句话,在已经说明了红、黄两种光芒的因之后就已经成立了,所以没有再另外说。因为这两种正是红褐与明净光芒的殊胜分类。“为了火蕴之义”等语句,是对“从上身”等话的解释。火蕴和水蕴也互不混杂,向上涌升到梵天界后,落入轮围山的环口之中。然而在那一天,导师对于那些对法和神变生起净信的人,随他们各自的意乐而宣说相应的法、示现相应的神变。这样说法和示现神变的时候,大众便获得了法现观。在那集会中,他看不到有谁能摄心而堪能提问,于是便化现了一尊化佛,由化佛发问,导师作答。导师回答化佛所问的问题;当导师经行时,化佛就在站立等处做其中一种威仪;当化佛经行时,导师就在站立等处做其中一种威仪。为了显示这个意义,说了“导师经行”等语句。“一切皆应广说”,这是指出:以“导师站立,化佛或经行或坐着或躺着”等,在四种威仪中,依导师方面有四种,依化佛方面有四种,总共八种都应广说而展开。由于戒只是作为定的立足处便停止,依止于定,上述这一切神变作用才得以生起,所以说这纯粹是定的作用,即“于此亦一”等语句。巴利
Kathanti āha ‘‘nīlarasmiatthāya hī’’tiādi. ‘‘Mañjiṭṭharasmiatthāya lohitakasiṇaṃ, pabhassararasmiatthāya pītakasiṇa’’nti idaṃ lohitapītarasmīnaṃ kāraṇeyeva vutte siddhanti na vuttaṃ. Tāsameva hi mañjiṭṭhapabhassararasmiyo visesapabhedabhūtāti. ‘‘Aggikkhandhatthāyā’’tiādinā ‘‘uparimakāyato’’tiādīnaṃ vivaraṇaṃ. Aggikkhandhaudakakkhandhāpi aññamaññaasammissā yāva brahmalokā uggantvā cakkavāḷamukhavaṭṭiyaṃ patiṃsu, taṃ divasaṃ pana satthā yo yo yasmiṃ yasmiṃ dhamme ca pāṭihāriye ca pasanno, tassa tassa ajjhāsayavasena taṃ taṃ dhammañca kathesi, pāṭihāriyañca dassesi, evaṃ dhamme bhāsiyamāne, pāṭihāriye ca kariyamāne mahājano dhammābhisamayo ahosi. Tasmiñca samāgame attano manaṃ gahetvā pañhaṃ pucchituṃ samatthaṃ adisvā nimmitaṃ buddhaṃ māpesi, tena pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ satthā vissajjesi. Satthārā pucchitaṃ pañhaṃ so vissajjesi, satthu caṅkamanakāle nimmito ṭhānādīsu aññataraṃ kappesi, tassa caṅkamanakāle satthā ṭhānādīsu aññataraṃ kappesīti etamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘satthā caṅkamatī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sabbaṃ vitthāretabba’’nti etena ‘‘satthā tiṭṭhati, nimmito caṅkamati vā nisīdati vā seyyaṃ vā kappetī’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.116) catūsu iriyāpathesu ekekamūlakā satthupakkhe cattāro , nimmitapakkhe cattāroti sabbe aṭṭha vārā vitthāretvā vattabbāti dasseti. Yasmā sīlaṃ samādhissa patiṭṭhāmattameva hutvā nivattati, samādhiyeva tattha patiṭṭhāya yathāvuttaṃ sabbaṃ pāṭihāriyakiccaṃ pavatteti, tasmā tadetaṃ samādhikiccamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ettha ekampī’’tiādi.
“然而,凡……”这些语句说明了定不能达到慧,意思是:所通达的,这通达就是慧的作用。接着用“世尊……”等语句按顺序显示这一点。“百千劫又四不可计数”,这是从在燃灯佛足下最初发愿时开始说的。应当知道,在那之前,他在那一生中如果愿意,也已经累积了足以证得声闻菩提的那么多福德资粮。正因为如此,在《佛种姓》等所说的“人身、性别具足、因、见师”等八法中,他具备了因具足。不过,有些人以心誓愿和语誓愿为依据,把不可计数作种种划分,说成是前资粮,这是不合理的,因为所收录的注释书中并没有那样说。那些注释书确实依照前面所说的方式,只显示了最初发愿之前的因具足。二十九岁时离家出家,这是关联。由于菩萨具有堪受轮宝的福德,具足转轮圣王的祥瑞,所以他的住处被称为“转轮圣王祥瑞所居处”。住所,指的是名为欢喜、极欢喜、善净的宫殿。勤行瑜伽,是指通过难行而修习最上精进。巴利
‘‘Yaṃ panā’’tiādinā samādhissa paññamapāpuṇatā vibhāvitā, yaṃ pana paṭivijjhi, idaṃ paṭivijjhanaṃ paññākiccanti attho. Taṃ anukkamato dasseti ‘‘bhagavā’’tiādinā. ‘‘Kappasatasahassādhikāni cattāri asaṅkhyeyyānī’’ti idaṃ dīpaṅkarapādamūle katapaṭhamābhinīhārato paṭṭhāya vuttaṃ, tato pubbepi yattakena tasmiṃ bhave icchanto sāvakabodhiṃ pattuṃ sakkuṇeyya, tattakaṃ puññasambhāraṃ samupacinīti veditabbaṃ. Tatoyeva hi ‘‘manussattaṃ liṅgasampatti, hetu satthāradassana’’ntiādinā (bu. vaṃ. 59) vuttesu aṭṭhadhammesu hetusampannatā ahosi. Keci pana manopaṇidhānavacīpaṇidhānavasena anekadhā asaṅkhyeyyaparicchedaṃ katvā pubbasambhāraṃ vadanti, tadayuttameva saṅgahāruḷhāsu aṭṭhakathāsu tathā avuttattā. Tāsu hi yathāvuttanayena paṭhamābhinīhārato pubbe hetusampannatāyeva dassitā. Ekūnatiṃsavassakāle nikkhamma pabbajitvāti sambandho. Cakkaratanārahapuññavantatāya bodhisatto cakkavattisirisampannoti tassa nivāsabhavanaṃ ‘‘cakkavattisirinivāsabhūta’’nti vuttaṃ. Bhavanāti rammasurammasubhasaṅkhātā niketanā. Padhānayoganti dukkaracariyāya uttamavīriyānuyogaṃ.
据说,在优楼频螺的将军村里,有个富家女叫善生,她后来在近事女中皈依第一,是具寿耶舍长老的母亲,名为苏阇多的富主之妻。她到了出嫁的年纪,在尼连禅河边的榕树下发了个愿:“如果我嫁到同族人家,头一胎生下儿子,我就用乳粥来作供养。”她这个愿实现了。她先让七头母牛在嫩竹林里吃草,得到这七头母牛生的女儿牛,又照样放牧,再得到它们的女儿牛,就这样一代代传下来,一直到第七代的母牛、女儿牛、孙女牛、曾孙女牛……她取了这些牛挤出的奶,开始煮乳粥。就在那时,大梵天在上方撑起一把三由旬大的白色伞盖,帝释天点燃了火,遍及全世界的诸天神投入了存在的滋味,乳粥右旋而煮。她将乳粥连同价值十万的金碗一起献给菩萨后便离去了。于是菩萨接过乳粥,在尼连禅河畔名为善住的地方,做成四十九口之量而食用。关于此事说:“在毗舍佉月满月日,在优楼频螺村,食用了善生女投入两种天食的蜜乳粥。”其中“善生女”指具寿耶舍长老的母亲、后来在皈依处获得第一的名为善生的富主之妻。随顺诸支分的味之精华、能资助体力、依于大种的某种特胜名为“活力素”,它从天界投入此中,故为“投入天食”。既可饮又可食,故为“乳粥”,是做成液状饮、做成团状食的殊胜食物;以蜜浇注的乳粥为“蜜乳粥”,即此。巴利
Uruvelāyaṃ kira senānigame kuṭumbikassa dhītā sujātā nāma dārikā vayappattā nerañjarāya tīre nigrodhamūle patthanamakāsi ‘‘sacāhaṃ samajātikaṃ kulagharaṃ gantvā paṭhamagabbhe puttaṃ labhissāmi, khīrapāyāsena balikammaṃ karissāmī’’ti, (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.284; jā. aṭṭha. 1.avidūre nidānakathā) tassā sā patthanā samijjhi. Sā satta dhenuyo laṭṭhivane khādāpetvā tāsampi dhītaro gāviyo laddhā tatheva khādāpetvā puna tāsampi dhītaro tathevāti sattaputtinattipanattiparamparāgatāhi dhenūhi khīraṃ gahetvā khīrapāyāsaṃ pacitumārabhi. Tasmiṃ khaṇe mahābrahmā tiyojanikaṃ setacchattaṃ upari dhāresi, sakko devarājā aggiṃ ujjālesi, sakalaloke vijjamānarasaṃ devatā pakkhipiṃsu, pāyāsaṃ dakkhiṇāvaṭṭaṃ hutvā pacati, taṃ sā suvaṇṇapātiyā satasahassagghanikāya saheva bodhisattassa datvā pakkāmi. Atha bodhisatto taṃ gahetvā nerañjarāya tīre suppatiṭṭhite nāma titthe ekatālaṭṭhippamāṇe ekūnapaññāsapiṇḍe karonto paribhuñji, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘visākhāpuṇṇamāyaṃ uruvelagāme sujātāya dvinnaṃ pakkhittadibbojaṃ madhupāyāsaṃ paribhuñjitvā’’ti. Tattha sujātāyāti āyasmato yasattherassa mātubhūtāya pacchā saraṇagamanaṭṭhāne etadaggappattāya sujātāya nāma seṭṭhibhariyāya. Aṅgamaṅgānusārino rasassa sāro upatthambhabalakaro bhūtanissito eko viseso ojā nāma, sā divi bhavā pakkhittā etthāti pakkhittadibbojo, taṃ. Pātabbo ca so asitabbo cāti pāyāso, rasaṃ katvā pivituṃ, ālopaṃ katvā ca bhuñjituṃ yutto bhojanaviseso, madhunā sitto pāyāso madhupāyāso, taṃ.
此后,因为他在尼连禅河岸边的大娑罗林中,以种种等至作了昼间禅住,所以说“傍晚时分”等话。详细内容应在各处(相关注释中)取来理解。“由南向北”是就昼间住后进入菩提树的道路而说的,意思是:沿着一条笔直、由南向北、被诸天装饰过的道路。也有人这样说:“‘由南向北’是以首尾来涵盖中间,显示了省略的用法,因为这样才能与《本生经因缘》中所说的‘从南、西、北方的方位进入菩提道场而站立’这句话相符。”另一些人说:从南方应去的北方方位就叫“南北方”,从那里进入。然而有些人说:“这里的‘uttara’一词是道路的意思。如果它是指方位,就应该说‘dakkhiṇuttarāya’。”这种说法不对,因为像“北方的河是悉多河,深不可渡”这类句子中,也显示了“uttara”一词有方位义的用法,而且“uttara”一词作为道路义并未出现。再者,这是就方位部分而说的,因为方位部分也就是方位。然后,在途中,他从一位名叫索提耶的运草婆罗门那里接过八把吉祥草,前往那如同安阇那山一般、在一切菩萨获得安稳之处生长起来的、作为菩提树庄严的菩提道场,右绕三匝后,站在南方部分。然而,那位大士无论走到南方部分、西方部分还是北方部分站立,那些地方都像莲花叶上的水滴一样震动不已。于是他想:“这整个地方都不能承受我的功德。”便走向东方部分,在那里,一个跏趺座大小的地方变得纹丝不动。只有那个地方才真正称为“菩提道场”。大士心想“这是摧毁烦恼之处”,便站在东北方部分,在那不动之处,抓住那些草的顶端摇动,顿时出现了一座十四肘长的座具,那些草也以种种形态呈现,仿佛在垫子上画了线一般。他在那里盘起三折跏趺座,以具足四支的慈心修习为先导,决意具足四支的精进,然后坐下。为了简略地开示此义,所以说“进入菩提道场”等话。巴利
Tato nerañjarāya tīre mahāsālavane nānāsamāpattīhi divāvihārassa katattā ‘‘sāyanhasamaye’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vitthāro tattha tattha gahetabbo. Dakkhiṇuttarenāti divāvihārato bodhiyā pavisanamaggaṃ sandhāyāha, ujukaṃ dakkhiṇuttaragatena devatāhi alaṅkatena maggenāti attho . Evampi vadanti ‘‘dakkhiṇuttarenāti dakkhiṇapacchimuttarena ādiavasānagahaṇena majjhimassāpi gahitattā, tathā luttapayogassa ca dassanato. Evañhi sati ‘dakkhiṇapacchimuttaradisābhāgena bodhimaṇḍaṃ pavisitvā tiṭṭhatī’ti (jā. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā) jātakanidāne vuttavacanena sametī’’ti. Dakkhiṇadisato gantabbo uttaradisābhāgo dakkhiṇuttaro, tena pavisitvāti apare. Keci pana ‘‘uttarasaddo cettha maggavācako. Yadi hi disāvācako bhaveyya, ‘dakkhiṇuttarāyā’ti vadeyyā’’ti, taṃ na ‘‘uttarena nadī sīdā, gambhīrā duratikkamā’’tiādinā disāvācakassāpi enayogassa dassanato, uttarasaddassa ca maggavācakassa anāgatattā. Apica disābhāgaṃ sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Disābhāgopi hi disā evāti. Atha antarāmagge sotthiyena nāma tiṇahārakabrāhmaṇena dinnā aṭṭha kusatiṇamuṭṭhiyo gahetvā asitañcanagirisaṅkāsaṃ sabbabodhisattānamassāsajananaṭṭhāne samāviruḷhaṃ bodhiyā maṇḍanabhūtaṃ bodhimaṇḍamupagantvā tikkhattuṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā dakkhiṇadisābhāge aṭṭhāsi, so pana padeso paduminipatte udakabindu viya pakampittha, tato pacchimadisābhāgaṃ, uttaradisābhāgañca gantvā tiṭṭhantepi mahāpurise tatheva te akampiṃsu, tato ‘‘nāyaṃ sabbopi padeso mama guṇaṃ sandhāretuṃ samattho’’ti puratthimadisābhāgamagamāsi, tattha pallaṅkappamāṇaṃ niccalamahosi, tasseva ca nippariyāyena bodhimaṇḍasamaññā, mahāpuriso ‘‘idaṃ kilesaviddhaṃsanaṭṭhāna’’nti sanniṭṭhānaṃ katvā pubbuttaradisābhāge ṭhito tattha akampanappadese tāni tiṇāni agge gahetvā sañcālesi, tāvadeva cuddasahattho pallaṅko ahosi, tānipi tiṇāni vicittākārena tūlikāya lekhā gahitāni viya ahesuṃ. So tattha tisandhipallaṅkaṃ ābhujitvā caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ pubbaṅgamaṃ katvā caturaṅgikaṃ vīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā nisīdi, tamatthaṃ saṅkhipitvā dassento ‘‘bodhimaṇḍaṃ pavisitvā’’tiādimāha.
在这里,“菩提”指的是阿拉汉道智和一切知智。它因为力量坚固而在这里显得庄严、清净,所以叫“菩提场”。从直接意义上说,指的是前面所说的那个地方;从引申意义上说,这里指的是树王。正如阿难陀长老所说:“‘菩提场’这个词只应理解为最初成正觉的地方,而不是随便哪棵菩提树所在的地方。”就是这个意思。巴利
Tattha bodhi vuccati arahattamaggañāṇaṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇañca, sā maṇḍati thāmagatatāya pasīdati etthāti bodhimaṇḍo, nippariyāyena yathāvuttappadeso, pariyāyena pana idha dumarājā. Tathā hi ācariyānandattherena vuttaṃ ‘‘bodhimaṇḍasaddopaṭhamābhisambuddhaṭṭhāne eva daṭṭhabbo, na yattha katthaci bodhirukkhassa patiṭṭhitaṭṭhāne’’ti, taṃ.
以战胜魔罗、获得一切知智等,让世尊感到安稳,这就是“阿说他”(assattha,安稳)的意思。在古来的语法传统中,人们认为前缀ā加在√sas词根上时,有教导和满足的意思;而世间也把它叫做“叶动树”或“象座树”。因为它长得极高,位于不可战胜之地的顶端,又生长在成就一切佛功德之处,所以是树中之王,称为“树王”;它既是阿说他树,又是树王,所以叫“阿说他树王”。依两条大腿与膝盖之间的连接处,以及大腿根部与髋部的连接处,共有三个关节;或者依形状来说有三个角,所以叫“三关节”。这也就是跏趺坐,即绑腿而坐、四周环绕形成座位的坐法;在词形变化中,把ra音变成la音并加以重叠;或者以三个关节为特征的跏趺坐,就叫“三关节跏趺座”。Ābhujitvā就是绑好,意思是把两只脚整齐地放好。详细解释将在《沙门果经注》中说到。对自身、朋友、中立者、怨敌这四种人平等地修,就是具足四支的慈心业处。“具足四支”这一说法,也应该与“精进决意”结合起来理解。因为那也……巴利
Māravijayasabbaññutaññāṇapaṭilābhādīhi bhagavantaṃ assāsetīti assattho. Āpubbañhi sāsasaddaṃ anusiṭṭhitosanesu icchanti, yaṃ tu loke ‘‘caladalo, kuñjarāsano’’ tipi vadanti. Accuggatabhāvena, ajeyyabhūmisīsagatabhāvena, sakalasabbaññuguṇapaṭilābhaṭṭhānaviruḷhabhāvena ca dumānaṃ rājāti dumarājā, assattho ca so dumarājā cāti assatthadumarājā taṃ. Dvinnaṃ ūrujāṇusandhīnaṃ, ūrumūlakaṭisandhissa ca vasena tayo sandhayo, saṇṭhānavasena vā tayo koṇā yassāti tisandhi, sveva pallaṅko ūrubaddhāsanaṃ parisamantato aṅkanaṃ āsananti atthena ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ, dvibhāvañca katvā, tīhi vā sandhīhi lakkhito pallaṅko tisandhipallaṅko, taṃ. Ābhujitvāti ābandhitvā, ubho pāde samañchite katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Vitthāro sāmaññaphalasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.216) āgamissati. Attā, mitto, majjhatto, verīti catūsupi samappavattanavasena caturaṅgasamannāgataṃ mettākammaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Caturaṅgasamannāgata’’nti idaṃ pana ‘‘vīriyādhiṭṭhāna’’nti etenāpi yojetabbaṃ. Tampi hi –
就算皮、筋、骨都留下来,就算我身上的血肉都干枯,只要还没证得凭人的力量、人的精进、人的勇猛所能证得的东西,我就绝不让精进停下来。巴利
Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohitaṃ, yaṃ taṃ purisathāmena purisavīriyena purisaparakkamena pattabbaṃ, na taṃ apāpuṇitvā vīriyassa saṇṭhānaṃ bhavissatī’’ti (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 1.266; a. ni. 3.51; a. ni. 8.13; mahāni. 17, 196) –
按照前面所说的方式,就是具足四支。巴利
Vuttanayena caturaṅgasamannāgatameva.
因为宽度有十四肘,所以叫“十四肘座”。从四周划定边界、标记范围,所以叫“跏趺座”(pallaṅka)——这是把 ra 音变成 la 音,再把那个音重叠起来。另外,注释书里说“这里是摧破烦恼的地方”,所以“palla”就是摧破烦恼,在这里起作用,因此叫 pallaṅka,这是按增入随韵来理解,或者按不变复合词来理解。既是十四肘,又是跏趺座,而且以最上、最可希求的意义称为“殊胜”(vara),所以合称“十四肘殊胜跏趺座”(cuddasahatthapallaṅkavara);到那里去、在那里活动、坐在那里的人,也依这个来称呼。这里十四肘应当理解为宽度。因为那些草凭借无量福德的威力,显现为十四肘宽的跏趺座,并不是那些八握长的草变成了十四肘高的东西。所以这里说“铺了草席”,《法句经注》等也说“铺草……面向东方而坐”。别处又说“在草座上,被认可为十四肘”。但有些人凭想象说“只是以高耸的程度算十四肘”,这不能采纳,因为与上面说的理由和证据相违背。虽然在《满足希求》的《增支部》注释里有这样的文句:“右绕菩提树三圈,登上菩提座,在十四肘高的地方铺草席,决意四支精进而坐时”,但应当知道那里“高”(ubbedha)这个词其实是表示宽度的,就像《大莲华本生》里说“横着十六肘高,竖着说千肘”那样。因此那部注释里说:“横着十六肘高,就是宽度有十六块田垄那么宽。”否则的话,就成了把草席铺在空中,而不是铺在不动的地面上,因为铺草席要有承载它的地方,而这个意思并不是想要的,因为别处并没有这样说。巴利
Cuddasa hatthā vitthatappamāṇabhāvena yassāti cuddasahattho. Parisamantato aṅkīyate lakkhīyate paricchedavasenāti pallaṅko ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ, tassa ca dvittaṃ katvā. Apica ‘‘idaṃ kilesaviddhaṃsanaṭṭhāna’’nti aṭṭhakathāsu vacanato pallaṃ kilesaviddhaṃsanaṃ karoti etthāti pallaṅko niggahitāgamavasena, aluttasamāsavasena vā, cuddasahattho ca so pallaṅko ca, sveva uttamaṭṭhena patthanīyaṭṭhena ca varoti cuddasahatthapallaṅkavaro, tattha gato pavatto nisinno tathā. Cuddasahatthatā cettha vitthāravasena gahetabbā. Tāniyeva hi tiṇāni aparimitapuññānubhāvato cuddasahatthavitthatapallaṅkabhāvena pavattāni, na ca tāni aṭṭhamuṭṭhippamāṇāni cuddasahatthaaccuggatāni sambhavanti . Tatoyeva ca idha ‘‘tiṇasantharaṃ santharitvā’’ti vuttaṃ, dhammapadaṭṭhakathādīsu ca ‘‘tiṇāni santharitvā…pe… puratthimābhimukho nisīditvā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1.sāriputtheravaṇṇanā; dha. sa. aṭṭha. 1.nidānakathā). Aññattha ca ‘‘tiṇāsane cuddasahatthasammate’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘accuggatabhāveneva cuddasahattho’’ti yathā tathā parikappanāvasena vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ yathāvuttena kāraṇena, sādhakena ca viruddhattā. Kāmañca manorathapūraṇiyā caturaṅguttaravaṇṇanāya ‘‘tikkhattuṃ bodhiṃ padakkhiṇaṃ katvā bodhimaṇḍaṃ āruyha cuddasahatthubbedhe ṭhāne tiṇasantharaṃ santharitvā caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhāya nisinnakālato’’ti (a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.33) pāṭho dissati, tathāpi tattha ubbedhasaddo vitthāravācakoti veditabbo, yathā ‘‘tiriyaṃ soḷasubbedho, uddhamāhu sahassadhā’’ti (jā. 1.3.40) mahāpanādajātake. Tathā hi tadaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tiriyaṃ soḷasubbedhoti vitthārato soḷasakaṇḍapātavitthāro ahosī’’ti (jātaka aṭṭha. 2-302 piṭṭhe). Aññathā hi ākāseyeva ukkhipitvā tiṇasantharaṇaṃ kataṃ, na acalapadeseti attho āpajjeyya santharaṇakiriyādhārabhāvato tassa, so cattho anadhippeto aññattha anāgatattāti.
把银块放在背后,这个比喻是这样关联的。“Atthaṃ”指后面的山。“魔军”指魔罗、魔罗的军队,或者魔罗的能力。“宿住”指过去世所住的诸蕴。“天眼”指天眼智。以“这个世间确实陷入了困境”等语,通过老死这一入口,把智慧引入缘起。关于入出息第四禅,这里也要把“一切诸佛所惯行”作格的变化来连接,因为他们说那也确实是诸佛所惯行的。“作为基础”指作为原因,或者作为依止。增长毗婆舍那:为了含摄被称为漏尽智的大金刚智的胎藏,通过三十六万亿种方式修习毗婆舍那。为了证得一切知智,以无间法随观的方式,对种种行相的行作意观察;通过三十六万亿种方式生起的毗婆舍那智,也被称为“大金刚智”;而二十四万亿数的日常运用等至的前行与后行智也是如此。但这里只指道智,特别是最上道智,因此应当知道只有它才是毗婆舍那的胎藏。“一切佛功德”指一切知智等无余的佛功德。以它为依止,定就转起,所以说“这是它的智慧作用”。“它的”指世尊的。巴利
Rajatakkhandhaṃ piṭṭhito katvā viyāti sambandho. Atthanti pacchimapabbataṃ. Mārabalanti māraṃ, mārabalañca, mārassa vā sāmatthiyaṃ. Pubbenivāsanti pubbe nivutthakkhandhaṃ. Dibbacakkhunti dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4) jarāmaraṇamukhena paccayākāre ñāṇaṃ otāretvā. Ānāpānacatutthajjhānanti etthāpi ‘‘sabbabuddhānaṃ āciṇṇa’’nti vibhattivipariṇāmaṃ katvā yojetabbaṃ. Tampi hi buddhānamāciṇṇamevāti vadanti. Pādakaṃ katvāti kāraṇaṃ, patiṭṭhānaṃ vā katvā. ‘‘Vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvāti chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena āsavakkhayañāṇasaṅkhātamahāvajirañāṇagabbhaṃ gaṇhāpanavasena vipassanaṃ bhāvetvā. Sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamāya anupadadhammavipassanāvasena anekākāravokāre saṅkhāre sammasato chattiṃsakoṭisatasahassamukhena pavattaṃ vipassanāñāṇampi hi ‘‘mahāvajirañāṇa’’nti vuccati, catuvīsatikoṭisatasahassasaṅkhyāya devasikaṃ vaḷañjanakasamāpattīnaṃ purecarānucarañāṇampi. Idha pana maggañāṇameva, visesato ca aggamaggañāṇaṃ, tasmā tasseva vipassanāgabbhabhāvo veditabboti. Sabbabuddhaguṇeti sabbaññutādiniravasesabuddhaguṇe. Tassā pādakaṃ katvā samādhi nivattoti vuttaṃ ‘‘idamassa paññākicca’’nti. Assāti bhagavato.
这里用“比如在手中”等比喻来说明。所谓“手中”,是指手掌里或拳头里。“钵”是指小碟子。“罐”是指打水的罐子。能装三十二斗的容器,叫小池或水坑。比它更大的叫大瓮。比那还大的叫大缸。“沼地”是指小水塘。“河段”是指峡谷。在轮围山山脚边的海,是轮围大洋。在须弥山山脚的大海,是就山间海而说的。用“钵”等词,也是换一种方式说明同样的意思。关联起来就是“如同……是微小的”。为了表明那段经文释义所讲的正是它的功德,所以说“因此他说”等等。一切地方都是这样。巴利
‘‘Tattha yathā hatthe’’tiādinā upamāya pākaṭīkaraṇaṃ. Hattheti hatthapasate, karapuṭe vā. Pātiyanti sarāvake. Ghaṭeti udakaharaṇaghaṭe. Dvattiṃsadoṇagaṇhanappamāṇaṃ kuṇḍaṃ kolambo. Tato mahatarā cāṭi. Tatopi mahatī mahākumbhī. Soṇḍī kusobbho. Nadībhāgo kandaro. Cakkavāḷapādesu samuddo cakkavāḷamahāsamuddo.Sinerupādake mahāsamuddeti sīdantarasamuddaṃ sandhāyāha. ‘‘Pātiya’’ntiādināpi tadevatthaṃ pakārantarena vibhāveti. Parittaṃ hoti yathāti sambandho. Yassā pāḷiyā atthavibhāvanatthāya yā saṃvaṇṇanā vuttā, tadeva tassā guṇabhāvena dassetuṃ ‘‘tenāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sabbattha.
“两种凡夫”这类说法,只是为了显示凡夫当中可以分出的类别,并不是像《根本法门经》注释等地方那样,为了辨别凡夫的具体差别而说,因为这里指的正是毫无例外的全部凡夫。一切凡夫都无法阐明世尊的殊胜功德,凡夫暂且不说,就连有学圣者和独觉佛,也完全不是佛功德的境界。正如接下来要说的“入流者”等等。由于种姓上的关联,阿底迦是太阳天子的亲属,所以称为阿底迦亲族。因此《义释》中说:巴利
‘‘Duve puthujjanā’’tiādi puthujjanesu labbhamānavibhāgadassanatthameva vuttaṃ, na pana mūlapariyāyasaṃvaṇṇanādīsu (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.2) viya puthujjanavisesaniddhāraṇatthaṃ niravasesaputhujjanasseva idha adhippetattā. Sabbopi hi puthujjano bhagavato upariguṇe vibhāvetuṃ na sakkoti, tiṭṭhatu tāva puthujjano, ariyasāvakapaccekabuddhānampi avisayā eva buddhaguṇā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sotāpanno’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7). Gottasambandhatāya ādiccassa sūriyadevaputtassa bandhūti ādiccabandhu, tena vuttaṃ niddese –
太阳被称为“阿底迦”。太阳的种姓是乔达摩,世尊的种姓也是乔达摩;世尊是太阳的种姓亲属、种姓亲族,因此佛陀是太阳族。巴利
‘‘Ādicco vuccati sūriyo. Sūriyo gotamo gottena, bhagavāpi gotamo gottena, bhagavā sūriyassa gottañātako gottabandhu, tasmā buddho ādiccabandhū’’ti (mahāni. 150; cūḷani. 99).
有些精通语音的人则主张读作“buddhassādiccabandhunā”,也就是“佛陀是太阳族”。他们的理解是:他以种姓与太阳族相同,因此是被称为种姓上的亲戚;而佛陀既是觉者,又是太阳族的亲戚。不过,因为通晓蕴论等典籍也能成为多闻,成为了知烦恼和随烦恼的因,正如所说的那样——巴利
Saddavidū pana ‘‘buddhassādiccabandhunā’’ti pāṭhamicchanti. Ādiccassa bandhunā gottena samāno gottasaṅkhāto bandhu yassa, buddho ca so ādiccabandhu cāti katvā. Yasmā pana khandhakathādikosallenāpi upakkilesānupakkilesānaṃ jānanahetubhūtaṃ bāhusaccaṃ hoti, yathāha –
尊者,怎样才算多闻呢?比丘对蕴善巧,对界……对处……对缘起善巧,到这个程度,比丘就算多闻了。巴利
‘‘Kittāvatā nu kho bhante bahussuto hotīti? Yato kho bhikkhu khandhakusalo hoti. Dhātu…pe… āyatana…pe… paṭiccasamuppādakusalo hoti, ettāvatā kho bhikkhu bahussuto hotī’’ti.
因此,才有了“对于蕴、界、处等……”这样的说法。这里的“等”字一直涵盖到缘起。其中,让文句熟练上口,叫做诵习;反复询问其中的含义,叫做遍问;依靠注释,把含义与耳门连结起来,叫做听闻;通过妥善安立和善巧引导文句与含义来护持法,叫做持。对这样从听闻中积累起来的法义进行思虑、以意观察、再作审察。巴利
Tasmā ‘‘yassa khandhadhātuāyatanādīsū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena cettha yāva paṭiccasamuppādā saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha vācuggatakaraṇaṃ uggaho. Atthassa paripucchanaṃ paripucchā. Aṭṭhakathāvasena atthassa sotadvārapaṭibaddhatākaraṇaṃ savanaṃ. Byañjanatthānaṃ sunikkhepasunayanena dhammassa pariharaṇaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Evaṃ sutadhātaparicitānaṃ vitakkanaṃ manasānupekkhanaṃ paccavekkhaṇaṃ.
像这样显示了分类之后,又用“两种”等说法来显示词义。“众多”指的是种种烦恼等。“因为包含在凡夫中”,意思是说,因为在许多人的内部共同存在,所以叫凡夫,这就是它们之间的关联。又,这个人是众多的,也就是这个人是以众多、各别的方式被计入的。因此,关联就是:所以叫凡夫。像这样,对于用偈颂简略显示的意义,用“因为他……”等来详细说明。通过“种种”这个词,显示这里的“众多”一词是多义。巴利
Evaṃ pabhedaṃ dassetvā vacanatthampi dasseti ‘‘duvidho’’tiādinā. Puthūnanti anekavidhānaṃ kilesādīnaṃ. Puthujjanantogadhattāti bahūnaṃ janānaṃ abbhantare samavarodhabhāvato puthujjanoti sambandho. Puthucāyaṃ janoti puthu eva visuṃyeva ayaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gato. Itīti tasmā puthujjanoti sambandho. Evaṃ gāthābandhena saṅkhepato dassitamatthaṃ ‘‘so hī’’tiādinā vivarati. ‘‘Nānappakārāna’’nti iminā puthu-saddo idha bahvatthoti dasseti.
用“等”这个字所涵盖的意义,以及能说明这一意义的、按照浇灌芒果和沐浴重物那样的方式,开示《义释》文本时说“如说……”等。有身见没有被摧毁,而且众多、大量地存在于他们当中,所以叫“众多未被摧毁有身见者”;这里表明的意思是:因为未被摧毁,所以产生众多有身见;或者,是由众多有身见所产生。或者,“人”这个词本身就表达未被摧毁的意思,因此也可以表明:产生众多有身见而不摧毁;或者,人未被摧毁,而众多有身见存在于他们当中,这里应当看到形容词后置,就像“火已点燃”那样。“面朝众多师者”这句显示了词源:众多的人以他们为师。在“未从一切趣出离者”中,意思是:应当由业和烦恼产生,或者众生在这里产生,所以叫“人”;趣也是如此,一切众多的趣都是他们的“人”。用“他们造作种种不同的行”这句说明:众生由这些产生,所以叫“人”,也就是福行等;种种不同的“人”即行存在于他们当中,或者他们产生、造作种种不同的行。此后“他们被种种不同的暴流冲走”等三种意义,是为了显示词源:众生由这些产生,所以叫“人”,即欲暴流等、贪热等、贪遍烧等,或者一切烦恼遍烧。种种不同的这些存在于他们当中,或者由这些而产生、被冲走、被烧热、被遍烧。说“染着、贪着”等是同义词。巴利
Ādi-saddena saṅgahitamatthaṃ, tadatthassa ca sādhakaṃ ambasecanagarusinānanayena niddesapāḷiyā dassento ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādimāha. Avihatā sakkāyadiṭṭhiyo, puthu bahukā tā etesanti puthuavihatasakkāyadiṭṭhikā, etena avihatattā puthu sakkāyadiṭṭhiyo janenti, puthūhi vā sakkāyadiṭṭhīhi janitāti atthaṃ dasseti. Avihatatthameva vā janasaddo vadati, tasmā puthu sakkāyadiṭṭhiyo janenti na vihananti, janā vā avihatā puthu sakkāyadiṭṭhiyo etesanti atthaṃ dassetītipi vaṭṭati, visesanaparanipātanañcettha daṭṭhabbaṃ yathā ‘‘agyāhito’’ti. ‘‘Puthu satthārānaṃ mukhullokikā’’ti etena puthu bahavo janā satthāro etesanti nibbacanaṃ dassitaṃ. Puthu sabbagatīhi avuṭṭhitāti ettha pana kammakilesehi janetabbā, jāyanti vā sattā etthāti janā, gatiyo, puthu sabbā eva janā gatiyo etesanti vacanattho. ‘‘Puthu nānābhisaṅkhāreabhisaṅkharontī’’ti etena ca jāyanti etehi sattāti janā, puññābhisaṅkhārādayo, puthu nānāvidhā janā saṅkhārā etesaṃ vijjanti, puthu vā nānābhisaṅkhāre janenti abhisaṅkharontīti atthamāha. Tato paraṃ pana ‘‘puthu nānāoghehi vuyhantī’’tiādiatthattayaṃ janenti etehi sattāti janā, kāmoghādayo, rāgasantāpādayo, rāgapariḷāhādayo ca, sabbepi vā kilesapariḷāhā. Puthu nānappakārā te etesaṃ vijjanti, tehi vā janenti vuyhanti, santāpenti, pariḍahanti cāti nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. ‘‘Rattā giddhā’’tiādi pariyāyavacanaṃ.
另外,“染着”就像布被染料染上一样,心被能令心变异的欲贪所染。“贪求”是以渴望为本性,因强烈的贪求而贪求。“结缚”就像被绑住一样,以难以解脱的状态系缚在那里。“迷醉”就像因烦恼之毒而失去知觉,陷入不辨他事的愚痴。“吞没”就像把东西当成不与别人共有一样,吞下去、消化掉之后停在那里。“附着”就像牛被荆棘挂住,或者像掉进大泥沼、鼻尖沾满泥的人,以无法拔出的状态沉陷其中。“缠缚”就像猿猴被粘胶粘住,依着五根而被粘缚。“障碍”就是被系连,或者被逼恼,这个意思在《增支部注》里说过。通过这些话显示:“人”是由此产生的,即“贪、贪求”之类;种种不同的“人”就是贪等存在于他们之中;或者,在众多五种欲乐对象中,人们染着、贪求……乃至障碍。巴利
Api ca rattāti vatthaṃ viya raṅgajātena cittassa vipariṇāmakarena chandarāgena rattā. Giddhāti abhikaṅkhanasabhāvena abhigijjhanena giddhā. Gathitāti ganthitā viya dummocanīyabhāvena tattha paṭibaddhā. Mucchitāti kilesāvisanavasena visaññībhūtā viya anaññakiccamohaṃ samāpannā. Ajjhosannāti anaññāsādhāraṇe viya katvā gilitvā pariniṭṭhapetvā ṭhitā. Laggāti gāvo kaṇṭake viya āsattā, mahāpalipe vā patanena nāsikaggapalipannapuriso viya uddharitumasakkuṇeyyabhāvena nimuggā. Laggitāti makkaṭālepena viya makkaṭo pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ vasena āsaṅgitā, palibuddhāti sambaddhā, upaddutā vāti ayamattho aṅguttaraṭīkāyaṃ (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.51) vutto. Etena jāyatīti jano, ‘‘rāgo gedho’’ti evamādiko, puthu nānāvidho jano rāgādiko etesaṃ, puthūsu vā pañcasu kāmaguṇesu janā rattā giddhā…pe… palibuddhāti atthaṃ dasseti.
“被覆”等也只是同义的表达方式。再者,“被覆”就是被遮蔽;“被阻”就是被阻挡;“被缠缚”就是被缠绕、被包裹;“被封闭”就是被关合;“被隐藏”就是被遮盖;“被倒覆”就是面朝下倒伏——这些就在同一处(《增支部注》1.51)说过。这里,“人们”就是由这些法所生起的意思,所以叫“生者”,也就是盖;种种不同的众生有这些盖,或者众生被种种盖所覆……乃至被倒覆——这是在展示词源解释。在种种低劣的行为中出生,或者众生存在于种种人的内部,或者众生众多——通过“种种”等词语显示这个含义,以此开显第三句,或者使其成立。而通过“种种”等词语则开显第四句。与种种混杂在一起的众生就是凡夫,这就是这里的词义。巴利
‘‘Āvutā’’tiādipi pariyāyavacanameva. Apica ‘‘āvutāti āvaritā. Nivutāti nivāritā. Ophutāti paliguṇṭhitā, pariyonaddhā vā. Pihitāti pidahitā. Paṭicchannāti chāditā. Paṭikujjitāti heṭṭhāmukhajātā’’ti tattheva (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.51) vuttaṃ. Ettha ca janenti etehīti janā, nīvaraṇā, puthu nānāvidhā janā nīvaraṇā etesaṃ, puthūhi vā nīvaraṇehi janā āvutā…pe… paṭikujjitāti nibbacanaṃ dasseti. Puthūsu nīcadhammasamācāresu jāyati, puthūnaṃ vā abbhantare jano antogadho, puthu vā bahuko janoti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘puthūna’’ntiādinā, etena ca tatiyapādaṃ vivarati, samattheti vā. ‘‘Puthuvā’’tiādinā pana catutthapādaṃ. Puthu visaṃsaṭṭho eva jano puthujjanoti ayañhettha vacanattho.
世尊是因为具备哪些殊胜功德、以这些功德为根据,才得到“如来”这个称呼的?为了说明这一点,才说了“以八种理由,世尊是如来”等话。因为一个词可以依据多种生起的根据,从多个方面显示意义,而世尊的一切名号,也都是以众多功德为根据的。正如所说的——巴利
Yehi guṇavisesehi nimittabhūtehi bhagavati ‘‘tathāgato’’ti ayaṃ samaññā pavattā, taṃ dassanatthaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhahi kāraṇehi bhagavā tathāgato’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekopi hi saddo anekapavattinimittamadhikicca anekadhā atthappakāsako, bhagavato ca sabbepi nāmasaddā anekaguṇanemittikāyeva. Yathāha –
大圣者有无量无数的名称,每一个都伴随着他的功德。
以功德来命名,即使从成千上万的名字当中也是如此。巴利
‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino; Guṇena nāmamuddheyyaṃ, api nāmasahassato’’ti. (dha. sa. 1313; udā. aṭṭha. 57; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.76; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.413);
如果有人追问“那些到底是什么”,就先简略指出它们的体相,再用“如何”等话来详细说明。这里“如来”一词中的“如”字,是为了限定形态、成立譬喻。“来”字应当理解为“行道而来”,而不是像“以智而来,已来到真实相”等处所说的“智来”,也不是像“大沙门已经来到摩揭陀的基利跋耆”等处所说的“身来”等意思。因为共通名称的显示,是从殊胜义的角度确立的;而带有殊胜义的共通名称,也只能用在殊胜义上。这里用来限定形态、成立譬喻的“如”字,是以悲悯为主导,从大悲门出发,以过去诸佛所行的道为范例,从共通层面显示这种形态,所以说“如同一切世间中”等等。由于“那”和“此”这些词具有绝对关联,在这里显示“如”字之义时,就用“如同”一词把意思表明出来。接着又以“如同毗婆尸世尊”等话详细展开。这里应当理解:毗婆尸等六位正自觉者在《大本经》等中已有大量解说,极为著名,又因为离得近,所以依他们来显示这种行道。“来”——如同那样,“如”而来,在一切处都是这样关联。又用“这说的是什么”等话,把同样的内容再指出一遍。其中“以哪种愿”是指具备八种要素的大愿,即依人的身份、男根具足、因、见导师、出家、功德具足、供养、欲愿这八项。因为一切诸佛的最初发愿,都是靠这种愿而成就的。这里应当理解,“愿”是根本誓愿的别名。巴利
Kāni pana tānīti anuyoge sati paṭhamaṃ tassarūpaṃ saṅkhepato uddisitvā ‘‘katha’’ntiādinā niddisati. Tathā āgatoti ettha ākāraniyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo. Sāmaññajotanāya visesāvaṭṭhānato, visesatthinā ca sāmaññasaddassāpi visesattheyeva anupayujjitabbato paṭipadāgamanattho āgata saddo daṭṭhabbo, na ñāṇagamanattho tathalakkhaṇaṃ āgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.3.78; a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.170; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.43; itivu. aṭṭha. 38; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.37; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 2; mahāni. aṭṭha. 14) viya , nāpi kāyagamanādi attho ‘‘āgato kho mahāsamaṇo, māgadhānaṃ giribbaja’’ntiādīsu (mahāva. 53) viya. Tattha yassa ākārassa niyamanavasena opammasampaṭipādanattho tathā-saddo, tadākāraṃ karuṇāpadhānattā tassa mahākaruṇāmukhena purimabuddhānaṃ āgamanapaṭipadāya udāharaṇavasena sāmaññato dassento ‘‘yathā sabbaloke’’tiādimāha. Yaṃtaṃ-saddānaṃ ekantasambandhabhāvato cettha tathā-saddassatthadassane yathā-saddena attho vibhāvito. Tadeva vitthāreti ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā’’tiādinā, vipassīādīnañcettha channaṃ sammāsambuddhānaṃ mahāpadānasuttādīsu (dī. ni. 2.4) sampahulaniddesena (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.sambahulaparicchedavaṇṇanā) supākaṭattā, āsannattā ca tesaṃ vasena taṃ paṭipadaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Āgato yathā, tathā āgatoti sabbatra sambandho. ‘‘Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādināpi tadeva paṭiniddisati. Tattha yena abhinīhārenāti manussattaliṅgasampattihetusatthāradassanapabbajjāguṇasampattiadhikārachandānaṃ vasena aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatena mahāpaṇidhānena . Sabbesañhi buddhānaṃ paṭhamapaṇidhānaṃ imināva nīhārena samijjhati. Abhinīhāroti cettha mūlapaṇidhānassetaṃ adhivacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
这样,通过大誓愿的力量显示了“如来”这个词的含义之后,现在再通过圆满波罗蜜的角度来显示,所以说“或者”等语。在这里,法护长老在《长部复注》1.7中以“在此,为了让经师们对大菩提之道生起善巧,这是关于波罗蜜的详细论述”等语所阐述的关于波罗蜜的抉择之论,虽然由我们在这里讲述会显得像是增加篇幅,然而因为这部注释是为了后来清除放逸所写的错误、以及穷尽剩余含义而作的,所以那段波罗蜜之论也应该在这里讲述。因此,将从那里以及《行藏注》中引述,适当地配上偈颂来庄严,并澄清含义与意趣。怎么说呢?巴利
Evaṃ mahābhinīhāravasena ‘‘tathāgato’’ti padassa atthaṃ dassetvā idāni pāramīpūraṇavasenapi dassetuṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. ‘‘Ettha ca suttantikānaṃ mahābodhiyānapaṭipadāya kosallajananatthaṃ pāramīsu ayaṃ vitthārakathā’’tiādinā ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7) yā pāramīsu vinicchayakathā vuttā, kiñcāpi sā amhehi idha vuccamānā ganthavitthārakarā viya bhavissati, yasmā panāyaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā etissaṃ pacchā pamādalekhavisodhanavasena, tadavasesatthapariyādānavasena ca pavattā, tasmā sāpi pāramīkathā idha vattabbāyevāti tato ceva cariyāpiṭakaṭṭhakathāto ca āharitvā yathārahaṃ gāthābandhehi samalaṅkaritvā atthamadhippāyañca visodhayamānā bhavissati. Kathaṃ?
这些波罗蜜是什么?它们以什么含义得名?又有多少种?
它们的次第是什么?又有哪些特相等,从一切方面来说?
什么是缘?什么是杂染?什么是与杂染相对治的清净?
修行的分类,还有摄和成就,也是这样。
靠什么才能成就?它的功德是什么?它的果又是什么?
把这些问题解答完,接下来就会有判定。巴利
Kā panetā pāramiyo, kenaṭṭhena katīvidhā; Ko ca tāsaṃ kamo kāni, lakkhaṇādīni sabbathā. Ko paccayo, saṃkileso, vodānaṃ paṭipakkhako; Paṭipattivibhāgo ca, saṅgaho sampadā tathā. Kittakena sampādanaṃ, ānisaṃso ca kiṃ phalaṃ; Pañhametaṃ vissajjitvā, bhavissati vinicchayo.
对此,回答如下——巴利
Tatridaṃ vissajjanaṃ –
那么,这些波罗蜜是什么呢?巴利
Kā panetā pāramiyoti –
对于任何具备善巧方便的人,除了渴爱、慢等之外,那被智所摄持的,即被阐明为波罗蜜。
被智慧所掌握的,那就被说明是波罗蜜。巴利
Taṇhāmānādimaññatra, upāyakusalena yā; Ñāṇena pariggahitā, pāramī sā vibhāvitā.
那些布施等善行,因为没有被渴爱、我慢等所损害,又被悲悯和善巧方便所摄持,所以被称为功德,并被说明为“波罗蜜”。巴利
Taṇhāmānādinā hi anupahatā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā dānādayo guṇasaṅkhātā etā kiriyā ‘‘pāramī’’ti vibhāvitā.
“波罗蜜”是以什么含义得名的?——巴利
Kenaṭṭhena pāramiyoti –
以最殊胜、最究竟的意义来说,这就是波罗蜜;同样地,
业、体性、布施等,从二次派生词的角度,被理解为三种。
使人圆满,也尊崇他人;又使他人沉沦,使人迷醉。
他这样衡量、这样思量,或者说“mināti”就是无上者。
在彼岸沉醉,净化,或者以慢而醉,或者沉醉。
以“māyā”一词,他了知那;又以“minoti”“mināti”同样地(了知)。
波罗蜜:大士;不过,按照所说的方式,
正是依这三种派生义,才认定这是“波罗蜜”。巴利
Paramo uttamaṭṭhena, tassāyaṃ pāramī tathā; Kammaṃ bhāvoti dānādi, taddhitato tidhā matā. Pūreti mavati pare, paraṃ majjati mayati; Munāti minoti tathā, minātīti vā paramo. Pāre majjati sodheti, mavati mayatīti vā; Māyeti taṃ vā munāti, minoti mināti tathā. Pāramīti mahāsatto, vuttānusārato pana; Taddhitatthattayeneva, pāramīti ayaṃ matā.
因为和布施、持戒等功德的殊胜结合,大菩萨在众生中最为殊胜,所以叫“最上者”(paramo);这最上者的状态或行为,就是“波罗蜜”(pāramī),也就是布施等行为。或者,按词源解释,“最上者”(paramo)的意思是“充满、完成”(parati pūreti),菩萨是布施等功德的圆满者和守护者;这最上者的状态或行为,就是波罗蜜。再者,最上者以功德的殊胜结合,把其他众生系缚在自己身上(mavati bandhati);或者超越、净化烦恼垢染(paraṃ majjati);或者以殊胜智慧通达最胜涅槃(paraṃ mayati gacchati);或者以成为标准的殊胜智慧,像了知此世一样了知、判别他世(paraṃ munāti paricchindati);或者把极其殊胜的戒等功德群纳入自身相续中(paraṃ minoti pakkhipati);或者摧残、伤害与自身法身相异的、敌对或破坏其利益的烦恼贼群(paraṃ mināti hiṃsati),所以叫“最上者”,即大士。依照“这最上者的”等所说方式,就是波罗蜜。或者,在彼岸涅槃中净化、清净(pāre majjati sujjhati),并净化众生;或者把众生系缚、连结到那里(mavati bandhati yojeti);或者通达那里(mayati gacchati),并引导众生到达(māyeti gameti);或者如实了知、判别那里(munāti paricchindati);或者把众生投入那里(minoti pakkhipati);或者在那里摧残、伤害众生的烦恼敌(mināti hiṃsati),所以叫“波罗蜜”(pāramī),即大士。依照“这的”等所说方式,布施等行为本身就是波罗蜜。应当以这种方式了知波罗蜜的词义。巴利
Dānasīlādiguṇavisesayogena hi sattuttamatāya mahābodhisatto paramo, tassa ayaṃ, bhāvo, kammanti vā pāramī, dānādikiriyā. Atha vā parati pūretīti paramo niruttinayena, dānādiguṇānaṃ pūrako, pālako ca bodhisatto, paramassa ayaṃ, bhāvo, kammaṃ vā pāramī. Apica pare satte mavati attani bandhati guṇavisesayogena, paraṃ vā atirekaṃ majjati saṃkilesamalato, paraṃ vā seṭṭhaṃ nibbānaṃ visesena mayati gacchati, paraṃ vā lokaṃ pamāṇabhūtena ñāṇavisesena idhalokamiva munāti paricchindati, paraṃ vā ativiya sīlādiguṇagaṇaṃ attano santāne minoti pakkhipati, paraṃ vā attabhūtato dhammakāyato aññaṃ, paṭipakkhaṃ vā tadanatthakaraṃ kilesacoragaṇaṃ mināti hiṃsatīti paramo, mahāsatto, ‘‘paramassa aya’’ntiādinā vuttanayena pāramī. Pāre vā nibbāne majjati sujjhati, satte ca sodheti, tattha vā satte mavati bandhati yojeti, taṃ vā mayati gacchati, satte ca māyeti gameti, taṃ vā yāthāvato munāti paricchindati, tattha vā satte minoti pakkhipati, tattha vā sattānaṃ kilesāriṃ mināti hiṃsatīti pāramī, mahāsatto, ‘‘tassa aya’’ntiādinā dānādikiriyāva pāramīti. Iminā nayena pāramīnaṃ vacanattho veditabbo.
问有多少种?简略来说有十种,这些在《佛种姓经》的经文中已经按它们各自的样子出现了。就像所说的:“我探究时,首先见到了布施波罗蜜”等等。又如同所说的——巴利
Katividhāti saṅkhepato dasavidhā, tā pana buddhavaṃsapāḷiyaṃ (bu. vaṃ. 1.76) sarūpato āgatāyeva. Yathāha ‘‘vicinanto tadādakkhiṃ, paṭhamaṃ dānapārami’’ntiādi (bu. vaṃ. 2.116). Yathā cāha –
尊者,有多少种成佛之法?舍利弗,有十种成佛之法。哪十种?舍利弗,布施是成佛之法,持戒、出离、智慧、精进、忍耐、真实、决意、慈、舍也是成佛之法。舍利弗,这些就是十种成佛之法。世尊说了这些。善逝说了这些之后,导师又进一步说道:巴利
‘‘Kati nu kho bhante buddhakārakā dhammāti? Dasa kho sāriputta buddhakārakā dhammā, katame dasa? Dānaṃ kho sāriputta buddhakārako dhammo, sīlaṃ nekkhammaṃ paññā vīriyaṃ khanti saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ mettā upekkhā buddhakārako dhammo, ime kho sāriputta dasa buddhakārakā dhammāti. Idamavoca bhagavā, idaṃ vatvāna sugato athāparaṃ etadavoca satthā –
布施、持戒、出离,以及慧与精进为第五;
忍辱、真实、决意,慈与舍,这就是那十种。巴利
‘Dānaṃ sīlañca nekkhammaṃ, paññāvīriyena pañcamaṃ; Khantisaccamadhiṭṭhānaṃ, mettupekkhāti te dasā’ti’’. (bu. vaṃ. 1.76);
不过,有些人说是六种,这是按照它们所含摄的内容来说的。那种含摄关系后面会说明。巴利
Keci pana ‘‘chabbidhā’’ti vadanti, taṃ etāsaṃ saṅgahavasena vuttaṃ. So pana saṅgaho parato āvi bhavissati.
那么,什么是它们的次第呢?这里所说的“次第”,是指说法的次第。而这个次第以最初的受持为因,受持又以探究为因。所以,就像最初发愿时通过探究而受持的那样,也就那样宣说。正如经中所说:“我在探究时,首先见到了布施波罗蜜”等等。因此,这样说:巴利
Ko ca tāsaṃ kamoti ettha kamo nāma desanākkamo, so ca paṭhamasamādānahetuko, samādānaṃ pavicayahetukaṃ, iti yathā ādimhi paṭhamābhinīhārakāle pavicitā, samādinnā ca, tathā desitā. Yathāha ‘‘vicinanto tadādakkhiṃ, paṭhamaṃ dānapārami’’ntiādi (bu. vaṃ. 2.116) tenetaṃ vuccati –
这个次第,首先依据最初受持而被称为宣说。
或者,也因为彼此之间有许多帮助。巴利
‘‘Paṭhamaṃ samādānatā-vasenāyaṃ kamo ruto; Atha vā aññamaññassa, bahūpakāratopi cā’’ti.
在这里,布施对戒很有帮助,而且容易做,所以放在最开始讲。不过,布施如果被戒守护,就会有大果报、大利益,所以在布施之后接着讲戒。戒被出离守护……出离被慧守护……慧被精进守护……精进被忍耐守护……忍耐被谛守护……谛被决意守护……决意被慈守护……慈被舍守护时,就有大果报、大利益,所以在慈之后接着讲舍。而应当知道,舍被悲守护,悲也被舍守护。那么,大悲的菩萨怎么对众生有舍心呢?有些论师说,对于适合修舍的对象,他们有时候有舍心,但不是在所有地方、任何时候都这样。另一些论师则说,他们不是对众生有舍心,而是对众生所做的伤害有舍心——在这里,这个说法才合理。巴利
Tattha hi dānaṃ sīlassa bahūpakāraṃ, sukarañcāti taṃ ādimhi vuttaṃ. Dānaṃ pana sīlapariggahitaṃ mahapphalaṃ hoti mahānisaṃsanti dānānantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Sīlaṃ nekkhammapariggahitaṃ…pe… nekkhammaṃ paññāpariggahitaṃ…pe… paññā vīriyapariggahitā…pe… vīriyaṃ khantipariggahitaṃ…pe… khanti saccapariggahitā…pe… saccaṃ adhiṭṭhānapariggahitaṃ…pe… adhiṭṭhānaṃ mettāpariggahitaṃ…pe… mettā upekkhāpariggahitā mahapphalā hoti mahānisaṃsāti mettānantaraṃ upekkhā vuttā. Upekkhā pana karuṇāpariggahitā, karuṇā ca upekkhāpariggahitāti veditabbā. Kathaṃ pana mahākāruṇikā bodhisattā sattesu upekkhakā hontīti? Upekkhitabbayuttakesu kañci kālaṃ upekkhakā honti, na pana sabbattha, sabbadā cāti keci. Apare pana na ca sattesu upekkhakā, sattakatesu pana vippakāresu upekkhakā hontīti, idamevettha yuttaṃ.
也由普遍共通等种种原因而宣说。
布施被放在最前面宣说,其余诸法则是随顺前面这些而来的。巴利
Sabbasādhāraṇatādi-kāraṇehipi īritaṃ; Dānaṃ ādimhi sesā tu, purimepi apekkhakā.
布施之所以放在最开始说,是因为它在普通人中也普遍流行,是一切众生共通的,果报小,又容易做。接着布施之后说戒,是因为:从施者和受者双方清净的角度,说明了利益他人;从遮止伤害他人的角度来说;说了作持的法之后,再说止持的法;说了财富成就的因之后,再说来世成就的因。接着戒之后说出离,是因为:出离依靠戒的成就而圆满;说了身语善行之后,再说意善行;戒清净的人能轻易安乐地成就禅那;通过断除行为上的过失而说了加行清净之后,再从断除烦恼过失的角度说意乐清净;对于安住在断除违犯状态的人,说断除缠缚。接着出离之后说慧,是因为:慧依靠出离的成就而清净;在没有禅那的情况下,就说没有慧。因为慧以定为直接依处,定以慧为显现。说了止的相之后,再说舍的相;通过利益他人的禅那,再说利益他人的方便善巧。接着慧之后说精进,是因为:通过发起精进,慧的作用得以成就;说了对众生、空、法的审察忍之后,再说为了利益众生而发起的稀有难得;说了舍的相之后,再说策励的相;说了审虑而行之后,再说奋起,因为审虑而行的人,他的奋起能带来殊胜的果报。巴利
Pacurajanesupi hi pavattiyā sabbasattasādhāraṇattā, appaphalattā, sukarattā ca dānaṃ ādimhi vuttaṃ. Sīlena dāyakapaṭiggāhakasuddhito parānuggahaṃ vatvā parapīḷānivattivacanato, kiriyadhammaṃ vatvā akiriyadhammavacanato, bhogasampattihetuṃ vatvā bhavasampattihetuvacanato ca dānassānantaraṃ sīlaṃ vuttaṃ. Nekkhammena sīlasampattisiddhito, kāyavacīsucaritaṃ vatvā manosucaritavacanato, visuddhasīlassa sukheneva jhānasamijjhanato, kammāparādhappahānena payogasuddhiṃ vatvā kilesāparādhappahānena āsayasuddhivacanato, vītikkamappahāne ṭhitassa pariyuṭṭhānappahānavacanato ca sīlassānantaraṃ nekkhammaṃ vuttaṃ. Paññāya nekkhammassa siddhiparisuddhito, jhānābhāve paññābhāvavacanato. Samādhipadaṭṭhānā hi paññā, paññāpaccupaṭṭhāno ca samādhi. Samathanimittaṃ vatvā upekkhānimittavacanato, parahitajjhānena parahitakaraṇūpāyakosallavacanato ca nekkhammassānantaraṃ paññā vuttā. Vīriyārambhena paññākiccasiddhito, sattasuññatādhammanijjhānakkhantiṃ vatvā sattahitāya ārambhassa acchariyatāvacanato, upekkhānimittaṃ vatvā paggahanimittavacanato, nisammakāritaṃ vatvā uṭṭhānavacanato ca. Nisammakārino hi uṭṭhānaṃ phalavisesamāvahatīti paññāyānantaraṃ vīriyaṃ vuttaṃ.
以精进成就忍耐。因为具足精进的人,由于已经发起精进,能够克服诸行所带来的苦而安住。因为精进本身具有忍耐这一庄严的特质,具足精进者的忍耐才会焕发光彩。先说策励相,再说止息相,是为了说明过度精进能断除掉举的过失。因为以法审察安忍,掉举的过失便得以断除。这也是在说明具足精进者能持续不断地去做,因为多修忍耐而不掉举的人,就是能持续不断去做的人。又说明具足不放逸者,在发起利他事业时,没有对回报的渴爱。因为若能如实以法审察,就不会有渴爱。在发起利他事业时,纵然面对他人施加的极大痛苦也能忍受,所以在精进之后宣说忍耐。以谛来成就忍耐的久住与坚定,说了对作恶者不报复的忍耐之后,再说对其作利益时的不虚诳,由此说明忍耐不被诽谤的言语所动摇而保持说真实语;说了对众生、空性和法的安忍审察之后,再说由此所增长的智谛,因此在忍耐之后宣说谛。由决意成就谛,因为不动摇决意者的远离虚诳才得以成就。说了不虚诳之后,再说于其中不动摇的状态,因为真实所带来的联结,能令人在布施等中随顺承诺而不动摇地转起。说了智谛之后,再说于诸资粮中转起直至究竟,因为具如实智者,能在菩提资粮中决意,并令其达到究竟。由于不被敌对法所动摇,所以在谛之后宣说决意。以慈成就利他行为的决意,说了决意之后,再说带来利益,因为安住于决意菩提资粮的人,就是安住于慈的人。由于不动摇的决意不被剥夺其承诺,承诺才得以成立,所以在决意之后宣说慈。以舍使慈得以清净,说了对众生带来利益之后,再说对他们犯过失时保持中立;说了修慈之后,再说由慈所等流的修习;说了“即使对想要利益众生的人也保持舍”这一稀有功德,所以在慈之后宣说舍。应当如此了知这些的次第。巴利
Vīriyena titikkhāsiddhito. Vīriyavā hi āraddhavīriyattā sattasaṅkhārehi upanītaṃ dukkhaṃ abhibhuyya viharati. Vīriyassa titikkhālaṅkārabhāvato. Vīriyavato hi titikkhā sobhati. Paggahanimittaṃ vatvā samathanimittavacanato, accārambhena uddhaccadosappahānavacanato. Dhammanijjhānakkhantiyā hi uddhaccadoso pahīyati. Vīriyavato sātaccakaraṇavacanato. Khantibahulo hi anuddhato sātaccakārī hoti. Appamādavato parahitakiriyārambhe paccupakārataṇhābhāvavacanato. Yāthāvato dhammanijjhāne hi sati taṇhā na hoti. Parahitārambhe paramepi parakatadukkhasahanatāvacanato ca vīriyassānantaraṃ khanti vuttā. Saccena khantiyā cirādhiṭṭhānato, apakārino apakārakhantiṃ vatvā tadupakārakaraṇe avisaṃvādavacanato, khantiyā apavādavācāvikampanena bhūtavāditāya avijahanavacanato, sattasuññatādhamma-nijjhānakkhantiṃ vatvā tadupabrūhitañāṇasaccassa vacanato ca khantiyānantaraṃ saccaṃ vuttaṃ. Adhiṭṭhānena saccasiddhito. Acalādhiṭṭhānassa hi virati sijjhati. Avisaṃvāditaṃ vatvā tattha acalabhāvavacanato. Saccasandho hi dānādīsu paṭiññānurūpaṃ niccalo pavattati. Ñāṇasaccaṃ vatvā sambhāresu pavattiniṭṭhāpanavacanato. Yathābhūtañāṇavā hi bodhisambhāresu adhiṭṭhāti, te ca niṭṭhāpeti. Paṭipakkhehi akampiyabhāvato ca saccassānantaraṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ vuttaṃ. Mettāya parahitakaraṇasamādānādhiṭṭhānasiddhito, adhiṭṭhānaṃ vatvā hitūpasaṃhāravacanato. Bodhisambhāre hi adhitiṭṭhamāno mettāvihārī hoti. Acalādhiṭṭhānassa samādānāvikopanena samādānasambhavato ca adhiṭṭhānassānantaraṃ mettā vuttā. Upekkhāya mettāvisuddhito, sattesu hitūpasaṃhāraṃ vatvā tadaparādhesu udāsīnatāvacanato, mettābhāvanaṃ vatvā tannissandabhāvanāvacanato, ‘‘hitakāmasattepi upekkhako’’ti acchariyaguṇatāvacanato ca mettāyānantaraṃ upekkhā vuttāti evametāsaṃ kamo veditabbo.
那么在这里,笼统地说,“一切”的相、味等是什么呢?巴利
Kāni lakkhaṇādīni sabbathāti ettha pana avisesena –
利益他人,就被称为相。
能带来利益,又毫不动摇,它的滋味是希望他人得到好处。
现起为佛的境界,被称为悲与智;巴利
Paresamanuggahaṇaṃ , lakkhaṇanti pavuccati; Upakāro akampo ca, raso hitesitāpi ca. Buddhattaṃ paccupaṭṭhānaṃ, dayā ñāṇaṃ pavuccati;
所谓近因,就是它们各自按类别区分开来。巴利
Padaṭṭhānanti tāsantu, paccekaṃ tāni bhedato.
其实,一切波罗蜜都以利益他人为特征,以帮助他人为作用,或者以不可动摇为作用,以希求他人利益为显现,或者以佛果为显现,以大悲为近因,或者以悲心与善巧方便为近因。巴利
Sabbāpi hi pāramiyo parānuggahalakkhaṇā, paresaṃ upakārakaraṇarasā, avikampanarasā vā, hitesitāpaccupaṭṭhānā, buddhattapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, mahākaruṇāpadaṭṭhānā, karuṇūpāyakosallapadaṭṭhānā vā.
具体来说,因为以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、能舍下自身受用物的思,就是布施波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的身善行和语善行,从意义上说,就是远离不该做的事、以及去做该做的事的思等,就是戒波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、以见到过患为先导、从欲界生存中出离的心生起,就是出离波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、对诸法的共相和别相的觉知,就是慧波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、以身和心发起利益他人的努力,就是精进波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、能忍受众生和诸行所带来的伤害、以无嗔为主导、以那种方式生起的心,就是忍波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、以离妄之思等为种类的绝不欺骗,就是真实波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、称为不可动摇的坚定决意、以那种方式生起的心,就是决意波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、给世间带来利益和安乐,从意义上说就是无嗔,也就是慈波罗蜜。以悲心和善巧方便所摄持的、摧破贪恋和嗔恨、在可意和不可意的众生及诸行中平等而行,就是舍波罗蜜。巴利
Visesena pana yasmā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā attupakaraṇapariccāgacetanā dānapāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ kāyavacīsucaritaṃ atthato akattabbavirati, kattabbakaraṇacetanādayo ca sīlapāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamo kāmabhavehi nikkhamanacittuppādo nekkhammapāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito dhammānaṃ sāmaññavisesalakkhaṇāvabodho paññāpāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito kāyacittehi parahitārambho vīriyapāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito sattasaṅkhārāparādhasahanasaṅkhāto adosappadhāno tadākārappavatto cittuppādo khantipāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitaṃ viraticetanādibhedaṃ avisaṃvādanaṃ saccapāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito acalasamādānādhiṭṭhānasaṅkhāto tadākārappavatto cittuppādo adhiṭṭhānapāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahito lokassa hitasukhūpasaṃhāro atthato abyāpādo mettāpāramī. Karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā anunayapaṭighaviddhaṃsanasaṅkhātā iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu sattasaṅkhāresu samappavatti upekkhāpāramī.
因此,布施以舍弃为特相,以摧毁对所施之物的贪著为作用,以不执著为显现,或者以拥有和不拥有(世间福报)的成就为显现,以应当施舍之物为近因。戒以守护为特相,以专注为特相,或者以建立为特相——这就是所说的意思。以摧毁破戒为作用,或者以无过失为作用,以清净为显现,以惭和愧为近因。出离以从欲界和存在界出离为特相,以揭示它们的过患为作用,以从那里转向远离为显现,以悚惧为近因。慧以如实通达为特相,或者以无谬误地通达为特相,就像善射者迅速射中目标一样;以照亮所缘为作用,就像灯一样;以不迷惑为显现,就像在森林中善于引导的人一样;以定为近因,或者以四谛为近因。精进以勇猛为特相,以支撑为作用,以不消沉为显现,以发起精进的依处为近因,或者以悚惧为近因。巴利
Tasmā pariccāgalakkhaṇaṃ dānaṃ, deyyadhamme lobhaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, anāsattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, bhavavibhavasampattipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ vā, pariccajitabbavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlanalakkhaṇaṃ sīlaṃ, samādhānalakkhaṇaṃ, patiṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ vāti vuttaṃ hoti. Dussīlyaviddhaṃsanarasaṃ, anavajjarasaṃ vā, soceyyapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, hirottappapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Kāmato, bhavato ca nikkhamanalakkhaṇaṃ nekkhammaṃ, tadādīnavavibhāvanarasaṃ, tatoyeva vimukhabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Yathāsabhāvapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā paññā, akkhalitapaṭivedhalakkhaṇā vā kusalissāsakhittausupaṭivedho viya, visayobhāsanarasā padīpo viya, asammohapaccupaṭṭhānā araññagatasudesako viya, samādhipadaṭṭhānā , catusaccapadaṭṭhānā vā. Ussāhalakkhaṇaṃ vīriyaṃ, upatthambhanarasaṃ, asaṃsīdanapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, vīriyārambhavatthupadaṭṭhānaṃ, saṃvegapadaṭṭhānaṃ vā.
忍耐的特相是堪忍,作用是忍受可意与不可意,现起是安忍或不违逆,近因是如实见。真实的特相是不欺诳,作用是如实显现,现起是善妙,近因是柔和。决意的特相是在菩提资粮中坚定确立,作用是克服它们的对立面,现起是在那方面不动摇,近因是菩提资粮。慈的特相是生起利益的行相,作用是带来利益,或作用是平息嗔恨,现起是柔和,近因是见到众生的可爱之处。舍的特相是生起中舍的行相,作用是平等看待,现起是平息嗔恨与贪爱,近因是省思业为自所有。在这里,由于布施等被悲悯与方便善巧所摄持,舍离等特相因此成为殊胜的,所以应当说到悲悯与方便善巧,因为正是由此它们才获得波罗蜜的称号。确实,除了正自觉者等的大愿之外,不被悲悯与方便善巧所摄持而导向轮回的布施等,并不能获得波罗蜜的称号。巴利
Khamanalakkhaṇā khanti, iṭṭhāniṭṭhasahanarasā, adhivāsanapaccupaṭṭhānā, avirodhapaccupaṭṭhānā vā, yathābhūtadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Avisaṃvādanalakkhaṇaṃ saccaṃ, yāthāvavibhāvanarasaṃ, sādhutāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, soraccapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Bodhisambhāresu adhiṭṭhānalakkhaṇaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ paṭipakkhābhibhavanarasaṃ, tattha acalatāpaccupaṭṭhānaṃ, bodhisambhārapadaṭṭhānaṃ. Hitākārappavattilakkhaṇā mettā, hitūpasaṃhārarasā, āghātavinayanarasā vā, sommabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā, sattānaṃ manāpabhāvadassanapadaṭṭhānā. Majjhattākārappavattilakkhaṇā upekkhā, samabhāvadassanarasā, paṭighānunayavūpasamapaccupaṭṭhānā, kammassakatāpaccavekkhaṇapadaṭṭhānā. Ettha ca karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitatā dānādīnaṃ pariccāgādilakkhaṇassa visesanabhāvena vattabbā, yato tāni pāramīsaṅkhyaṃ labhanti. Na hi sammāsambodhiyādipatthanamaññatra akaruṇūpāyakosallapariggahitāni vaṭṭagāmīni dānādīni pāramīsaṅkhyaṃ labhantīti.
发愿成佛之心、悲悯和智慧,是她们的因缘;
同样地,还有精进、大资具、处所,以及利益之行等。巴利
Abhinīhāro ca tāsaṃ, dayā ñāṇañca paccayo; Ussāhummaṅgavatthānaṃ, hitācārādayo tathā.
发愿首先是一切波罗蜜的因缘。这个发愿,就是由“得人身、具足男根”等八种条件聚合而成,并以“我已得度,愿我令他人得度;我已解脱,愿我令他人解脱;我已觉悟,愿我令他人觉悟;我已清净,愿我令他人清净;我已调御,愿我令他人调御;我已寂静,愿我令他人寂静;我已安稳,愿我令他人安稳;我已般涅槃,愿我令他人般涅槃”等方式生起的发愿,它毫无例外地是一切波罗蜜的因缘。正是因为这种发愿的推动,大丈夫们才能对波罗蜜进行考察、现起、受持、决意和成就。而这个发愿,从意义上说,就是由八种条件聚合而如此生起的心念:“啊!愿我证得无上正等觉,成办一切有情的利益与安乐。”这种名为“愿”的发愿,是缘于不可思议的佛地和无量世间利益而生起的,应当看作是一切成就佛陀之法的根本,是最极殊胜、最极善妙、具有无量光辉的殊胜福德。巴利
Abhinīhāro tāva pāramīnaṃ sabbāsampi paccayo. Yo hi ayaṃ ‘‘manussattaṃ liṅgasampattī’’tiādi (bu. vaṃ. 2.59) aṭṭhadhammasamodhānasampādito ‘‘tiṇṇo tāreyyaṃ mutto moceyyaṃ, buddho bodheyyaṃ suddho sodheyyaṃ, danto dameyyaṃ, santo sameyyaṃ, assattho assāseyyaṃ, parinibbuto parinibbāpeyya’’ntiādinā pavatto abhinīhāro, so avisesena sabbapāramīnaṃ paccayo. Tappavattiyā hi uddhaṃ pāramīnaṃ pavicayupaṭṭhānasamādānādhiṭṭhānanipphattiyo mahāpurisānaṃ sambhavanti, abhinīhāro ca nāmesa atthato bhesamaṭṭhaṅgānaṃ samodhānena tathāpavatto cittuppādo, ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjheyyaṃ, sabbasattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ nipphādeyya’’ntiādipatthanāsaṅkhāto acinteyyaṃ buddhabhūmiṃ, aparimāṇaṃ lokahitañca ārabbha pavattiyā sabbabuddhakārakadhammamūlabhūto paramabhaddako paramakalyāṇo aparimeyyappabhāvo puññavisesoti daṭṭhabbo.
当他生起时,这位大人就同时被称为已经踏上大菩提乘的修行之路,因为他已经证得决定性的不退转状态,而且从此以后具有不退转的本性,所以获得“菩萨”这个通称。他对正等觉具有完全的端正心意,并且具备修学菩提资粮的能力,这些都安住于他。确实,由于上述决意得以成就,大人们以证得一切智智的先兆——自觉之智,如实审察一切波罗蜜,受持之后依次圆满,就像那位已作大决意的须弥陀智者一样。正如所说:巴利
Tassa ca uppattiyā saheva mahāpuriso mahābodhiyānapaṭipattiṃ otiṇṇo nāma hoti, niyatabhāvasamadhigamanato, tato ca anivattanasabhāvato ‘‘bodhisatto’’ti samaññaṃ labhati, sabbabhāgena sammāsambodhiyaṃ sammāsattamānasatā, bodhisambhāre sikkhāsamatthatā cassa santiṭṭhati. Yathāvuttābhinīhārasamijjhanena hi mahāpurisā sabbaññutaññāṇādhigamanapubbaliṅgena sayambhuñāṇena sammadeva sabbapāramiyo vicinitvā samādāya anukkamena paripūrenti, yathā taṃ katamahābhinīhāro sumedhapaṇḍito. Yathāha –
来吧,我要从这边到那边,仔细审察那些能成就佛果的诸法。
上方、下方、十个方向,凡是法界所及之处;
那时我反复观察,第一次见到布施波罗蜜。巴利
‘‘Handa buddhakare dhamme, vicināmi ito cito; Uddhaṃ adho dasa disā, yāvatā dhammadhātuyā; Vicinanto tadā dakkhiṃ, paṭhamaṃ dānapārami’’nti. (bu. vaṃ. 2.115, 116); –
详细解释。不过,从特相等角度来说,这个决意确实是以正等正觉的愿为特相,以“啊,愿我证得无上正等正觉,成办一切众生的利益与安乐”这类愿望为作用,以成为菩提资粮之因的状态为现起,以大悲为近因,或者以具足依止为近因。巴利
Vitthāro. Lakkhaṇādito panesa sammadeva sammāsambodhipaṇidhānalakkhaṇo, ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambujjheyyaṃ, sabbasattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ nipphādeyya’’ntiādipatthanāraso, bodhisambhārahetubhāvapaccupaṭṭhāno, mahākaruṇāpadaṭṭhāno, upanissayasampattipadaṭṭhāno vā.
这个决意有四种缘、四种因和四种力,应当知道。其中,什么是大决意的四种缘呢?在这里,大丈夫看见如来以大佛威力示现稀有奇特的神变。他依靠这个,以它为所缘,心就安住在求大菩提上:“这法界确实有大威力,因为世尊彻底通达了它,才有这样稀有奇特的法,才有不可思议的威力。”他依靠所见到的这种大威力,以它为缘,决心求正觉,把心安立在那里,这是大决意的第一种缘。巴利
Tassa pana abhinīhārassa cattāro paccayā, cattāro hetū, cattāri ca balāni veditabbāni. Tattha katame cattāro paccayā mahābhinīhārāya? Idha mahāpuriso passati tathāgataṃ mahatā buddhānubhāvena acchariyabbhutaṃ pāṭihāriyaṃ karontaṃ, tassa taṃ nissāya taṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā mahābodhiyaṃ cittaṃ santiṭṭhati ‘‘mahānubhāvā vatāyaṃ dhammadhātu, yassā suppaṭividdhattā bhagavā evaṃ acchariyabbhutadhammo, acinteyyānubhāvo cā’’ti, so tameva mahānubhāvadassanaṃ nissāya taṃ paccayaṃ katvā sambodhiyaṃ adhimuccanto tattha cittaṃ ṭhapeti, ayaṃ paṭhamo paccayo mahābhinīhārāya.
他并没有亲眼看见如来如上所说的那种大威力,而是听到别人说“世尊是这样这样的”,他依靠这个、以这个为条件,决心要证得正觉,把心定在那上面,这是大决意的第二个条件。巴利
Na heva kho passati tathāgatassa yathāvuttaṃ mahānubhāvataṃ, apica kho suṇāti ‘‘ediso ca ediso ca bhagavā’’ti, so taṃ nissāya taṃ paccayaṃ katvā sambodhiyaṃ adhimuccanto tattha cittaṃ ṭhapeti, ayaṃ dutiyo paccayo mahābhinīhārāya.
他并没有亲眼见到如来如上所说的大威力,也没有从别人那里听到这些,而是当如来讲法时,听到与佛陀威力相应的法,比如“诸比丘,如来具足十力”等等,他依靠这个……(中略)……这是大誓愿的第三种缘。巴利
Na heva kho passati tathāgatassa yathāvuttaṃ mahānubhāvataṃ, nāpi taṃ parato suṇāti, apica kho tathāgatassa dhammaṃ desentassa ‘‘dasabalasamannāgato bhikkhave, tathāgato’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.21) buddhānubhāvapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammaṃ suṇāti, so taṃ nissāya…pe… ayaṃ tatiyo paccayo mahābhinīhārāya.
他并没有亲眼见到如来如上所说的大威力,也没有从别人那里听到,也没有听闻如来的法,然而他志趣高远、心向善法,只是尊重法、敬重法、恭敬法、供养法、礼敬法,心里想:“我要护持这佛种姓、佛幢、佛传承、佛之法性。”他依靠这个……乃至……安住其心,这就是大誓愿的第四种缘。巴利
Na heva kho passati tathāgatassa yathāvuttaṃ mahānubhāvataṃ, nāpi taṃ parato suṇāti, nāpi tathāgatassa dhammaṃ suṇāti, apica kho uḷārajjhāsayo kalyāṇādhimuttiko ‘‘ahametaṃ buddhavaṃsaṃ buddhatantiṃ buddhapaveṇiṃ buddadhammataṃ paripālessāmī’’ti yāvadeva dhammaññeva sakkaronto garuṃ karonto mānento pūjento dhammaṃ apacayamāno taṃ nissāya…pe… ṭhapeti, ayaṃ catuttho paccayo mahābhinīhārāyāti.
哪四种是成就大誓愿的因呢?在这里,大丈夫天生就具足强有力的宿世善缘,过去诸佛在世时已经积下了功德,这是成就大誓愿的第一种因。再者,大丈夫天生就怀着悲悯之心,心志坚定地倾向于悲悯,想要拔除众生的痛苦,甚至愿意舍弃自己的身体和性命,这是成就大誓愿的第二种因。再者,大丈夫为了众生的利益,要从整个轮回的痛苦中解脱出来,修行种种艰难的行持,即使长年累月地精进努力,也不厌倦、不畏惧,直到达成心中所愿,这是成就大誓愿的第三种因。再者,大丈夫亲近善友,善友能使他远离有害之事,安立在有益之事上,这是成就大誓愿的第四种因。巴利
Katame cattāro hetū mahābhinīhārāya? Idha mahāpuriso pakatiyā upanissayasampanno hoti purimakesu buddhesu katādhikāro, ayaṃ paṭhamo hetu mahābhinīhārāya. Puna caparaṃ mahāpuriso pakatiyāpi karuṇājjhāsayo hoti karuṇādhimutto sattānaṃ dukkhaṃ apanetukāmo, apica attano kāyañca jīvitañca pariccaji, ayaṃ dutiyo hetu mahābhinīhārāya. Puna caparaṃ mahāpuriso sakalatopi vaṭṭadukkhato sattahitāya dukkaracariyato sucirampi kālaṃ ghaṭento vāyamanto anibbinno hoti anutrāsī, yāva icchitatthanipphatti, ayaṃ tatiyo hetu mahābhinīhārāya. Puna caparaṃ mahāpuriso kalyāṇamittasannissito hoti, yo ahitato naṃ nivāreti, hite patiṭṭhāpeti, ayaṃ catuttho hetu mahābhinīhārāya.
在这里,伟人的亲依止成就是这样:他的志向完全倾向于正觉、朝向正觉、面向正觉,也同样完全倾向于为众生做利益之事。因为他曾在过去诸佛面前,用心和语言发愿:“我也要成为这样的正自觉者,如实为众生带来利益和安乐。”对于这样具足亲依止的人,就会出现这些亲依止成就的相。具足这些相的人,跟声闻菩提者、独觉菩提者相比,在根器、修行方式和善巧方面,会显现出极大的殊胜和巨大的差别。在这里,具足亲依止的伟人,根器清明、智慧清明,其他人则不是这样。他为利益他人而修行,不是为利益自己。就像他为众多人的利益、众多人的安乐、为悲悯世间、为诸天与人的利益、好处和安乐而修行,其他人则不是这样。而且在这方面,他凭借应机而发的辩才和了知处与非处的善巧,带来了善巧。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ mahāpurisassa upanissayasampadā – ekantenevassa yathā ajjhāsayo sambodhininno hoti sambodhipoṇo sambodhipabbhāro, tathā sattānaṃ hitacariyāya, yato anena purimabuddhānaṃ santike sambodhiyā paṇidhānaṃ kataṃ hoti manasā, vācāya ca ‘‘ahampi ediso sammāsambuddho hutvā sammadeva sattānaṃ hitasukhaṃ nipphādeyya’’nti. Evaṃ sampannūpanissayassa panassa imāni upanissayasampattiyā liṅgāni sambhavanti, yehi samannāgatassa sāvakabodhisattehi, paccekabodhisattehi ca mahāviseso mahantaṃ nānākaraṇaṃ paññāyati indriyato, paṭipattito, kosallato ca. Idha hi upanissayasampanno mahāpuriso yathā visadindriyo hoti visadañāṇo, na tathā itare. Parahitāya paṭipanno hoti, no attahitāya. Tathā hi so yathā bahujanahitāya bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṃ paṭipajji, na tathā itare, tattha ca kosallaṃ āvahati ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena, ṭhānāṭhānakusalatāya ca.
同样,伟人天生就有布施的倾向,喜欢布施。只要有可以布施的东西,他就一定会布施,不会在布施上退缩。他恒常不断地实践分享的习惯,布施时满心欢喜、心怀恭敬,而不是冷漠无感。即使做了很大的布施,他也不会因此就满足,更何况是小布施呢。他还鼓励别人也去做,称赞布施,讲说与布施相关的法。看到别人在布施,他也由衷欢喜。在别人恐惧害怕的时候,他给予无畏。像这样等等,就是具有布施倾向的伟人,其布施波罗蜜的表现。巴利
Tathā mahāpuriso pakatiyā dānajjhāsayo hoti dānābhirato, sati deyyadhamme detiyeva, na dānato saṅkocaṃ āpajjati, satataṃ samitaṃ saṃvibhāgasīlo hoti, pamuditova deti ādarajāto, na udāsīnacitto, mahantampi dānaṃ datvā neva dānena santuṭṭho hoti, pageva appaṃ. Paresañca ussāhaṃ janento dāne vaṇṇaṃ bhāsati, dānapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammakathaṃ karoti, aññe ca paresaṃ dente disvā attamano hoti, bhayaṭṭhānesu ca paresaṃ abhayaṃ detīti evamādīni dānajjhāsayassa mahāpurisassa dānapāramiyā liṅgāni.
同样,他对杀生等恶行感到羞耻,也感到害怕,本性不会伤害众生,性情柔和,安乐于善行,不狡诈,不虚伪,本性正直,容易接受教导,具备让人容易教导他的品德,性情柔软,不顽固,不傲慢。他不拿别人的东西,哪怕是一根草、一片叶子。别人把手里的寄存物或欠债交给他,他不会欺骗对方。如果别人对自己的财物糊涂了、忘了,他会告诉对方并归还,不让它落到别人手里。他不贪心,对别人拥有的东西连一丝恶念都不生起。他远远避开女人带来的灾祸等。他说真话,说话真实可靠,让分裂的人和好,让和睦的人更加和睦,说让人爱听的话,先微笑再开口,主动先打招呼,说有益的话,说符合法的话。他没有贪求,没有嗔恨心,没有颠倒的见解,以“业是自己所作”的智慧,以及随顺真理的智慧来观察。他知恩感恩,恭敬长辈,生活极其清净,喜爱法,也劝导别人学法。他用一切方式让众生远离不该做的事,把他们安立在该做的事上,自己也在这件事上努力。如果自己做了不该做的事,就立刻远离。像这样等等,就是具有戒的志向的大士,其戒波罗蜜的标志。巴利
Tathā pāṇātipātādīhi pāpadhammehi hirīyati ottappati, sattānaṃ aviheṭhanajātiko hoti, sorato sukhasīlo asaṭho amāyāvī ujujātiko subbaco sovacassakaraṇīyehi dhammehi samannāgato mudujātiko athaddho anatimānī, parasantakaṃ nādiyati antamaso tiṇasalākamupādāya, attano hatthe nikkhittaṃ iṇaṃ vā gahetvā paraṃ na visaṃvādeti, parasmiṃ vā attano santake byāmūḷhe, vissarite vā taṃ saññāpetvā paṭipādeti yathā taṃ na parahatthagataṃ hoti, aloluppo hoti, parapariggahitesu pāpakaṃ cittampi na uppādeti, itthibyasanādīni dūrato parivajjeti, saccavādī saccasandho bhinnānaṃ sandhātā sahitānaṃ anuppadātā piyavādī mihitapubbaṅgamo pubbabhāsī atthavādī dhammavādī anabhijjhālu abyāpannacitto aviparītadassano kammassakatāñāṇena, saccānulomikañāṇena ca, kataññū katavedī vuḍḍhāpacāyī suvisuddhājīvo dhammakāmo, paresampi dhamme samādapetā sabbena sabbaṃ akiccato satte nivāretā kiccesu patiṭṭhapetā attanā ca tattha kicce yogaṃ āpajjitā, katvā vā pana sayaṃ akattabbaṃ sīghaññeva tato paṭivirato hotīti evamādīni sīlajjhāsayassa mahāpurisassa sīlapāramiyā liṅgāni.
同样,他的烦恼轻微,盖障也轻微,内心倾向于远离,很少散乱。恶不善的寻思不会随顺他的心。当他安住于远离时,心毫不费力地就得定。即使对敌对的一方,慈心也能迅速安住,更何况对其他的人。他有正念,对很久以前做过的事、很久以前说过的话,都能好好记住、随念不忘。他有智慧,具备法光之慧。对于种种应当做的事,他审察明辨。为了众生的利益,他精勤努力。他具备忍辱之力,能忍受一切。他的誓愿不动摇,受持坚固。在应当以舍心对待的事物上,他能保持舍心。像这样一类,应当依照大士出离心等,了知它们是出离波罗蜜等的征相。巴利
Tathā mandakileso hoti mandanīvaraṇo pavivekajjhāsayo avikkhepabahulo, na tassa pāpakā vitakkā cittamanvāssavanti, vivekagatassa cassa appakasireneva cittaṃ samādhiyati, amittapakkhepi tuvaṭaṃ mettacittatā santiṭṭhati, pageva itarasmiṃ, satimā ca hoti cirakatampi cirabhāsitampi susaritā anussaritā, medhāvī ca hoti dhammojapaññāya samannāgato, nipako ca hoti tāsu tāsu itikattabbatāsu, āraddhavīriyo ca hoti sattānaṃ hitakiriyāsu, khantibalasamannāgato ca hoti sabbasaho, acalādhiṭṭhāno ca hoti daḷhasamādāno, ajjhupekkhako ca hoti upekkhāṭhānīyesu dhammesūti evamādīni mahāpurisassa nekkhammajjhāsayādīnaṃ vasena nekkhammapāramiyādīnaṃ liṅgāni veditabbāni.
具备这些菩提资粮特征的伟人,前面说过“依止善友是大誓愿的因”,这里简要说明善友的特征:善友具备信、戒、闻、施、精进、念、定、慧。其中,因为具备信,他相信如来的菩提、业和业果,因此不放弃作为正等觉之因的、利益众生的志向。因为具备戒,他受到众生喜爱、可意、受尊重、值得培养,能劝诫、能呵责恶行、能说法、能接受别人的话。因为具备闻,他能宣说给众生带来利益和安乐的甚深法义。因为具备施,他少欲、专注、知足、独处、不与人混杂。因为具备精进,他为众生的利益而努力行动。因为具备念,他在无过失的法上保持正念现前。因为具备定,他不散乱,心得专注。因为具备慧,他如实了知而不颠倒。他以念探寻善法的去向,以慧如实了知众生的利益与不利,以定在那里心得一境,以精进阻止众生做不利的事,引导他们做有利的事。因此说:巴利
Evametehi bodhisambhāraliṅgehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘mahābhinīhārāya kalyāṇamittasannissayo hetū’’ti, tatridaṃ saṅkhepato kalyāṇamittalakkhaṇaṃ – idha kalyāṇamitto saddhāsampanno hoti sīlasampanno sutasampanno cāgavīriyasatisamādhipaññāsampanno. Tattha saddhāsampattiyā saddahati tathāgatassa bodhiṃ kammaṃ, kammaphalañca, tena sammāsambodhiyā hetubhūtaṃ sattesu hitesitaṃ na pariccajati. Sīlasampattiyā sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo garu bhāvanīyo codako pāpagarahiko vattā vacanakkhamo. Sutasampattiyā sattānaṃ hitasukhāvahaṃ gambhīraṃ dhammakathaṃ kattā hoti. Cāgasampattiyā appiccho hoti samāhito santuṭṭho pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho. Vīriyasampattiyā āraddhavīriyo hoti sattānaṃ hitapaṭipattiyā. Satisampattiyā upaṭṭhitassatī hoti anavajjesu dhammesu. Samādhisampattiyā avikkhitto hoti samāhitacitto. Paññāsampattiyā aviparītaṃ pajānāti. So satiyā kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ gatiyo samanvesamāno paññāya sattānaṃ hitāhitaṃ yathābhūtaṃ jānitvā samādhinā tattha ekaggacitto hutvā vīriyena ahitā satte nisedhetvā hite niyojeti. Tenāha –
可爱、可敬、值得尊重,能直言劝告,也能接受别人的话。
能讲说深奥的话,却不引导人于非处。巴利
‘‘Piyo garu bhāvanīyo, vattā ca vacanakkhamo; Gambhīrañca kathaṃ kattā, no caṭṭhāne niyojako’’ti. (a. ni. 7.37; netti. 113);
大士依靠具足这样功德的善友,就能正确地净化自己亲依止的成就。他成为意乐和行为都极其清净的人,具足四种力,不久就整合八支,发起大誓愿,安住在菩萨的状态中,成为不退转、必定趣向正觉彼岸的人。巴利
Evaṃ guṇasamannāgataṃva kalyāṇamittaṃ upanissāya mahāpuriso attano upanissayasampattiṃ sammadeva pariyodapeti. Suvisuddhāsayapayogova hutvā catūhi balehi samannāgato nacireneva aṭṭhaṅge samodhānetvā mahābhinīhāraṃ karonto bodhisattabhāve patiṭṭhahati anivattidhammo niyato sambodhiparāyaṇo.
在这四种力当中,第一种是内自力:在正等觉这件事上,以法为自尊、以对法的恭敬为依靠,生起欢喜、完全倾向的心。依靠这个,大士以自己为尊、以惭为依靠,具足誓愿,圆满诸波罗蜜,证得正等觉。第二种是外力:在正等觉这件事上,以依靠他人为缘,生起欢喜、完全倾向的心。依靠这个,大士以世间为尊、以愧为依靠,具足誓愿,圆满诸波罗蜜,证得正等觉。第三种是依止力:在正等觉这件事上,以依止条件的圆满为缘,生起欢喜、完全倾向的心。依靠这个,大士成为利根者、界清净者、以念为依靠,具足誓愿,圆满诸波罗蜜,证得正等觉。第四种是加行力:在正等觉这件事上,以与彼相应的加行圆满——恭敬而行、持续而行——生起欢喜、完全倾向的心。依靠这个,大士成为加行清净者、不间断而行者,具足誓愿,圆满诸波罗蜜,证得正等觉。就这样,这个由四种缘、四种因、四种力所成就、由八支和合而圆满的誓愿,因为是根本因的缘故,成为诸波罗蜜的缘。巴利
Tassimāni cattāri balāni ajjhattikabalaṃ yā sammāsambodhiyaṃ attasannissayā dhammagāravena abhiruci ekantaninnajjhāsayatā, yāya mahāpuriso attādhipatilajjāsannissayo, abhinīhārasampanno ca hutvā pāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇāti. Bāhirabalaṃ yā sammāsambodhiyaṃ parasannissayā abhiruci ekantaninnajjhāsayatā, yāya mahāpuriso lokādhipatiottappanasannissayo, abhinīhārasampanno ca hutvā pāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇāti. Upanissayabalaṃ yā sammāsambodhiyaṃ upanissayasampattiyā abhiruci ekantaninnajjhāsayatā, yāya mahāpuriso tikkhindriyo, visadadhātuko, satisannissayo, abhinīhārasampanno ca hutvā pāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇāti. Payogabalaṃ yā sammāsambodhiyā tajjā payogasampadā sakkaccakāritā sātaccakāritā, yāya mahāpuriso visuddhapayogo, nirantarakārī, abhinīhārasampanno ca hutvā pāramiyo pūretvā sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇāti. Evamayaṃ catūhi paccayehi, catūhi hetūhi, catūhi ca balehi sampannasamudāgamo aṭṭhaṅgasamodhānasampādito abhinīhāro pāramīnaṃ paccayo hoti mūlakāraṇabhāvato.
当大士的修行展开时,有四种稀有难得、未曾有过的法得以建立:他以慈爱之心摄受一切众生,就像对待自己的亲生儿子一样;他的心不会再因为烦恼杂染而变得染污;他的意乐和行动都是为了给众生带来利益和安乐;他自己成佛所需的种种法也一层层不断增长、逐渐圆满成熟。由于这样,大士以更广大的福德之流和善行之流不断增长为助缘,具足了安乐的滋养,成为众生应当供养的对象、最上的恭敬处,也是无与伦比的福田。应当知道,这样的大誓愿具有种种功德、种种利益,是诸波罗蜜的助缘。巴利
Yassa ca pavattiyā mahāpurise cattāro acchariyā abbhutā dhammā patiṭṭhahanti, sabbaṃ sattanikāyaṃ attano orasaputtaṃ viya piyacittena pariggaṇhāti, na cassa cittaṃ puna saṃkilesavasena saṃkilissati, sattānaṃ hitasukhāvaho cassa ajjhāsayo, payogo ca hoti, attano ca buddhakārakadhammā uparūpari vaḍḍhanti, paripaccanti ca, yato mahāpuriso uḷāratarena puññābhisandena kusalābhisandena pavaḍḍhiyā [pavattiyā (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā)] paccayena sukhassāhārena samannāgato sattānaṃ dakkhiṇeyyo uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhānaṃ, asadisaṃ puññakkhettañca hoti. Evamanekaguṇo anekānisaṃso mahābhinīhāro pāramīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbo.
就像大誓愿一样,大悲和方便善巧也是如此。这里所说的方便善巧,就是让布施等成为菩提资粮的智慧。凭借这些大悲与方便善巧,大士们不贪著自身的安乐,不间断地致力于让众生获得安乐,在极难行持的伟大菩萨行中毫不退缩,而且在见到、听到、忆念众生的各种情境中,都能成为众生获得利益与安乐的因。正因为如此,依靠智慧成就佛果,依靠大悲成就佛的事业。依靠智慧自己渡到彼岸,依靠大悲渡他人到彼岸。依靠智慧遍知他人的苦,依靠大悲着手解除他人的苦。依靠智慧厌离苦,依靠大悲接受苦。依靠智慧朝向涅槃,依靠大悲不证入涅槃。同样,依靠大悲朝向轮回,依靠智慧对轮回不生欢喜。依靠智慧对一切处离染,但因为随顺大悲,所以并非不摄受一切众生;依靠大悲怜悯一切众生,但因为随顺智慧,所以并非对一切处都心怀贪著。依靠智慧没有我执和我所执,依靠大悲没有懈怠和怯弱。巴利
Yathā ca mahābhinīhāro, evaṃ mahākaruṇā, upāyakosallañca. Tattha upāyakosallaṃ nāma dānādīnaṃ bodhisambhārabhāvassa nimittabhūtā paññā, yāhi mahākaruṇūpāyakosallatāhi mahāpurisānaṃ attasukhanirapekkhatā, nirantaraṃ parasukhakaraṇapasutatā, sudukkarehi mahābodhisattacaritehi visādābhāvo, pasādasaṃvuddhidassanasavanānussaraṇāvatthāsupi sattānaṃ hitasukhapaṭilābhahetubhāvo ca sampajjati. Tathā hi tassa paññāya buddhabhāvasiddhi, karuṇāya buddhakammasiddhi. Paññāya sayaṃ tarati, karuṇāya pare tāreti. Paññāya paradukkhaṃ parijānāti, karuṇāya paradukkhapaṭikāraṃ ārabhati. Paññāya dukkhaṃ nibbindati, karuṇāya dukkhaṃ sampaṭicchati. Paññāya nibbānābhimukho hoti, karuṇāya taṃ na pāpuṇāti. Tathā karuṇāya saṃsārābhimukho hoti, paññāya tatra nābhiramati. Paññāya sabbattha virajjati, karuṇānugatattā na ca na sabbesamanuggahāya pavatto, karuṇāya sabbepi anukampati, paññānugatattā na ca na sabbattha virattacitto. Paññāya ahaṃkāramamaṃkārābhāvo, karuṇāya ālasiyadīnatābhāvo.
同样地,通过慧与悲,依次成就了自护与他护、坚毅与勇猛、不自苦且不苦他、自利与他利的圆满、无畏与不令人恐惧、以法为主与以世间为主、知恩与先报恩、无明与贪爱的远离、明与行的成就、力与无畏的圆满。对于一切波罗蜜之果来说,慧与悲尤其作为方法,因此是诸波罗蜜的缘。而这两者,正如对诸波罗蜜一样,也是誓愿的缘。巴利
Tathā paññākaruṇāhi yathākkamaṃ attanāthaparanāthatā, dhīravīrabhāvo, anattantapāparantapatā, attahitaparahitanipphatti, nibbhayābhīsanakabhāvo, dhammādhipatilokādhipatitā, kataññupubbakāribhāvo, mohataṇhāvigamo, vijjācaraṇasiddhi, balavesārajjanipphattīti sabbassāpi pāramitāphalassa visesena upāyabhāvato paññā karuṇā pāramīnaṃ paccayo. Idaṃ pana dvayaṃ pāramīnaṃ viya paṇidhānassāpi paccayo.
同样地,应当知道:精勤、慧解、安住、利行也是诸波罗蜜的助缘。那些被称为“佛地”的,是佛位生起的依处。其中,精勤是指对菩提资粮的策励精进;慧解是指在菩提资粮中作为方便善巧的慧;安住是指决意,即不动摇的决意性;利行是指修慈和修悲。如所说:巴利
Tathā ussāhaummaṅgaavatthānahitacariyā ca pāramīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbo. Yā ca buddhabhāvassa uppattiṭṭhānatāya ‘‘buddhabhūmiyo’’ti vuccanti. Tattha ussāho nāma bodhisambhārānaṃ abbhussāhanavīriyaṃ. Ummaṅgo nāma bodhisambhāresu upāyakosallabhūtā paññā. Avatthānaṃ nāma adhiṭṭhānaṃ, acalādhiṭṭhānatā. Hitacariyā nāma mettābhāvanā, karuṇābhāvanā ca. Yathāha –
尊者,佛地有几种呢?舍利弗,有四种佛地。是哪四种呢?有热忱,也就是精进;有探究,也就是智慧的修习;有安住,也就是决意;有利他之行,也就是慈心的修习。舍利弗,这就是四种佛地。巴利
‘‘Kati pana bhante, buddhabhūmiyoti? Catasso kho sāriputta, buddhabhūmiyo. Katamā catasso? Ussāho ca hoti vīriyaṃ, ummaṅgo ca hoti paññābhāvanā, avatthānañca hoti adhiṭṭhānaṃ, hitacariyā ca hoti mettābhāvanā. Imā kho sāriputta, catasso buddhabhūmiyo’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34).
同样地,还有六种意乐,按出离、远离、无贪、无嗔、无痴、解脱来区分。这话确实说过:巴利
Tathā nekkhammapavivekaalobhādosāmohanissaraṇappabhedā ca cha ajjhāsayā. Vuttañhetaṃ –
菩萨以出离为意乐,所以在诸欲中看到过患,在居家生活中也看到过患;菩萨以独处远离为意乐,所以在聚会交往中看到过患。无贪……在贪……无瞋……在瞋……无痴……在痴……出离……在一切生存状态中看到过患。巴利
‘‘Nekkhammajjhāsayā ca bodhisattā kāmesu, gharāvāse ca dosadassāvino, pavivekajjhāsayā ca bodhisattā saṅgaṇikāya dosadassāvino. Alobha…pe… lobhe…pe… adosa…pe… dose…pe… amoha…pe… mohe…pe… nissaraṇa…pe… sabbabhavesu dosadassāvino’’ti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34; visuddhi. 1.49).
因此要知道,这六种意乐也是波罗蜜的助缘。因为如果没有看见贪等烦恼的过患,也没有让无贪等善法增长,布施等波罗蜜就不可能生起。正是由于无贪等善法增长,心才会倾向于施舍等,才会有无贪的意乐等;同样,布施的意乐等也是这样。正如所说的:巴利
Tasmā ete ca cha ajjhāsayāpi pāramīnaṃ paccayāti veditabbā. Na hi lobhādīsu ādīnavadassanena, alobhādīnaṃ adhikabhāvena ca vinā dānādipāramiyo sambhavanti. Alobhādīnañhi adhikabhāvena pariccāgādininnacittatā, alobhajjhāsayāditā cāti, yathā cete, evaṃ dānajjhāsayatādayopi. Yathāha –
尊者,为觉悟而修行的菩萨有多少种意乐?舍利弗,为觉悟而修行的菩萨有十种意乐。哪十种呢?舍利弗,布施意乐,菩萨看见悭吝的过患;持戒意乐……看见不守戒的过患……出离意乐……看见诸欲的过患……如实智意乐……看见疑惑的过患……精进意乐……看见懈怠的过患……安忍意乐……看见不忍的过患……真实意乐……看见欺骗的过患……决意意乐……看见没有决意的过患……慈意乐……看见嗔害的过患……舍意乐……看见在苦乐中执着的过患。巴利
‘‘Kati pana bhante bodhāya carantānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ ajjhāsayāti? Dasa kho sāriputta, bodhāya carantānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ ajjhāsayā. Katame dasa? Dānajjhāsayā sāriputta, bodhisattā macchere dosadassāvino. Sīla…pe… asaṃvare…pe… nekkhamma…pe… kāmesu…pe… yathābhūtañāṇa…pe… vicikicchāya.…Pe… vīriya …pe… kosajje…pe… khanti…pe… akkhantiyaṃ…pe… sacca…pe… visaṃvādane…pe… adhiṭṭhāna…pe… anadhiṭṭhāne…pe… mettā…pe… byāpāde…pe… upekkhā…pe… sukhadukkhesu ādīnavadassāvino’’ti.
在这些当中,以见到悭吝、不守戒、贪欲、疑惑、懈怠、不能忍、说妄语、没有决意、嗔恨、苦乐等的过患为先导,被称为心倾向于布施等的心态,也就是布施意乐等,是布施等波罗蜜生起的缘。同样,对于不舍与舍等,依次观察它们的过患和功德,也是布施等波罗蜜的缘。巴利
Etesu hi maccheraasaṃvarakāmavicikicchākosajjaakkhantivisaṃvādanaanadhiṭṭhāna- byāpādasukhadukkhasaṅkhātesu ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamā dānādininnacittatāsaṅkhātā dānajjhāsayatādayo dānādipāramīnaṃ nibbattiyā paccayo. Tathā apariccāgapariccāgādīsu yathākkamaṃ ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇampi dānādipāramīnaṃ paccayo hoti.
在这里,观察的方法是这样的:众生的心执着于田地、宅地、金银、牛、水牛、奴仆、婢女、子女、妻子等财物,因为田地等作为欲乐的对象,是极受人贪求的;因为会被国王、盗贼等共同夺走;因为会成为争吵的根源;因为会招来仇敌;因为没有坚实可靠之处;因为在获取和守护它们时,会成为伤害他人的原因;因为它们是毁灭的征兆,会带来忧伤等种种灾祸;又因为这种执着,会成为被悭吝之垢缠缚的心投生恶趣的原因。像这样,所执取的事物就叫做能带来种种广大无益之物。唯有舍弃它们,才是唯一的安稳之道,所以应当在舍弃上不放逸。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ paccavekkhaṇāvidhi – khettavatthuhiraññasuvaṇṇagomahiṃ sadāsīdāsaputtadārādipariggahabyāsattacittānaṃ sattānaṃ khettādīnaṃ vatthukāmabhāvena bahupatthanīyabhāvato, rājacorādisādhāraṇabhāvato, vivādādhiṭṭhānato, sapattakaraṇato, nissārato, paṭilābhaparipālanesu paraviheṭhanahetubhāvato, vināsanimittañcasokādianekavihitabyasanāvahato tadāsattinidānañca maccheramalapariyuṭṭhitacittānaṃ apāyūpapattihetubhāvatoti evaṃ vividhavipulānatthāvahāni pariggahitavatthūni nāma, tesaṃ pariccāgoyeveko sotthibhāvoti pariccāge appamādo karaṇīyo.
另外,还应该这样观察:乞求者在乞求时,因为说出自己的秘密,所以是我的可信赖者;因为他教导我“应该舍弃财物,带着自己的所有前往他世”,所以是我的教导者;在这个像着火的房屋一样、被死亡之火燃烧的世间,因为他从我这里取走财物,所以是我的搬运同伴;他又是被搬运走的财物的存放处;在名为布施的善业中,因为他是同伴,又因为他是成就一切成就中最殊胜、极难得的佛地成就之因,所以是最上的善友。巴利
Apica ‘‘yācako yācamāno attano guyhassa ācikkhanato mayhaṃ vissāsiko’’ti ca ‘‘pahāya gamanīyaṃ attano santakaṃ gahetvā paralokaṃ yāhītiupadisanato mayhaṃ upadesako’’ti ca ‘‘āditte viya agāre maraṇagginā āditte loke tato mayhaṃ santakassa apaharaṇato apavāhakasahāyo’’ti ca ‘‘apavāhitassa cassa ajjhāpananikkhepaṭṭhānabhūto’’ti ca ‘‘dānasaṅkhāte kalyāṇakammasmiṃ sahāyabhāvato, sabbasampattīnaṃ aggabhūtāya paramadullabhāya buddhabhūmiyā sampattihetubhāvato ca paramo kalyāṇamitto’’ti ca paccavekkhitabbaṃ.
同样地,应当建立起倾向于舍弃的心,这样思惟:我因为这种殊胜的业而受到尊敬,所以这份尊敬不应落空;生命终究会坏灭,即使没人乞求,我也应当施与,更何况有人乞求的时候;即使那些具有殊胜意乐的人寻访而来,也应当施与,何况他是自己来的,这正是我的福德所致;乞者以乞求布施为缘由,这其实是对我的饶益;就像我自己一样,这世间一切众生都应当由我来饶益;如果没有乞者,我的布施波罗蜜怎么能圆满呢;正是为了乞者,我才应当保有一切财物;乞者们什么时候才能不用向我乞求,就自己来取走我的东西;我怎样才能成为乞者所亲爱、所悦意的人;或者,他们怎样才能成为我所亲爱、所悦意的人;我怎样才能在布施时和布施之后,内心满足、欢喜、生起喜悦和愉悦;我怎样才能既有乞者,又有殊胜的布施意乐;我怎样才能不用被乞求,就了解乞者的心意而施与;当有财物也有乞者的时候,如果不施与,那就是对我极大的欺骗;我怎样才能舍弃自己的肢体乃至生命。应当这样修习倾向于舍弃的心。巴利
Tathā ‘‘uḷāre kammani anenāhaṃ sambhāvito, tasmā sā sambhāvanā avitathā kātabbā’’ti ca ‘‘ekantabheditāya jīvitassa āyācitenāpi mayā dātabbaṃ, pageva yācitenā’’ti ca ‘‘uḷārajjhāsayehi gavesitvāpi dātabbo, [dātabbato (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā)] sayamevāgato mama puññenā’’ti ca ‘‘yācakassa dānāpadesena mayhamevāyamanuggaho’’ti ca ‘‘ahaṃ viya ayaṃ sabbopi loko mayā anuggahetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘asati yācake kathaṃ mayhaṃ dānapāramī pūreyyā’’ti ca ‘‘yācakānamevatthāya mayā sabbopi pariggahetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘ayācitvāpi maṃ mama santakaṃ yācakā kadā sayameva gaṇheyyu’’nti ca ‘‘kathamahaṃ yācakānaṃ piyo cassaṃ manāpo’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vā te mayhaṃ piyā cassu manāpā’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhaṃ dadamāno datvāpi ca attamano assaṃ pamudito pītisomanassajāto’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vā me yācakā bhaveyyuṃ, uḷāro ca dānajjhāsayo’’ti ca ‘‘kathaṃ vāhamayācito eva yācakānaṃ hadayamaññāya dadeyya’’nti ‘‘sati dhane, yācake ca apariccāgo mahatī mayhaṃ vañcanā’’ti ca ‘‘kathamahaṃ attano aṅgāni, jīvitañcāpi pariccajeyya’’nti ca cāganinnatā upaṭṭhapetabbā.
另外,应当生起对财物无所期待的心,这样想:所谓财物,本来就是毫无留恋地跟着施主走的,就像那毫无留恋就蜇人的蝎子一样。如果来乞求的是自己喜爱的人,就应当生起欢喜心:我喜爱的人来向我乞求了。如果来乞求的是无关的中等人,就应当生起欢喜心:这个人来向我乞求,凭这次舍弃,他一定会成为我的朋友。因为布施的人,对乞求者来说本来就是可亲的。如果来乞求的是仇人,那就更应当特别生起欢喜心:我的对头来向我乞求了,这个人通过这次舍弃,连仇人也会变成可亲的朋友。这样一来,就像对喜爱的人一样,对中等人和仇人也都要先以慈心为先导,把悲悯提起来,然后才布施。巴利
Apica ‘‘attho nāmāyaṃ nirapekkhaṃ dāyakamanugacchati yathā taṃ nirapekkhaṃ khepakaṃ kiṭako’’ti atthe nirapekkhatāya cittaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Yācamāno pana yadi piyapuggalo hoti ‘‘piyo maṃ yācatī’’ti somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Atha udāsīnapuggalo hoti ‘‘ayaṃ maṃ yācamāno addhā iminā pariccāgena mitto hotī’’ti somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Dadanto hi yācakānaṃ piyo hotīti. Atha pana verīpuggalo yācati, ‘‘paccatthiko maṃ yācati, ayaṃ maṃ yācamāno addhā iminā pariccāgena verīpi piyo mitto hotī’’ti visesato somanassaṃ uppādetabbaṃ. Evaṃ piyapuggale viya majjhattaverīpuggalesupi mettāpubbaṅgamaṃ karuṇaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāva dātabbaṃ.
如果因为长久串习,对可作为布施之物的东西生起了贪,菩萨行者就该这样反省:善士啊,你当初为了正觉而发愿时,不是已经把身体舍弃,用来利益一切众生了吗?而舍弃身体所成就的就是福德。现在你竟然还对外在的事物生起执著,这就像大象洗澡一样,洗了又脏,毫无意义。所以,你不应该对任何地方生起执著。就像一棵大药树站在那里,需要根的人来取根,需要树皮、树干、树枝、大枝、小枝、叶、花、果的人来取果,那棵树不会生起这样的念头:他们在拿我的东西。同样,我既然为了利益一切世间而努力,当这个充满大苦、不知感恩、恒常不净的身体被用来利益他人时,连极微小的错误念头都不应该生起。在这里,内在和外在的大种——那些注定会坏灭、离散、毁坏的法——又有什么差别呢?所谓这是我的,这是我,这是我的自我,这种执著纯粹只是愚痴的迷乱而已。所以,对外在的大种如此,对内在的大种,如手、脚、眼等,以及肉等,也应当无所顾恋,以需要的人就拿去吧这样的舍离心而住。能这样反省、为证正觉而精进、对身体和生命都无所顾恋的菩萨,身语意三业自然很容易就变得非常清净。他身语意业清净,活命清净,安住于正行,又具备善巧方便,就能以更多的布施之物施舍,以无畏施和正法施来利益一切众生。这就是在布施波罗蜜中反省的方法。巴利
Sace panassa cirakālaṃ paribhāvitattā lobhassa deyyadhammavisayā lobhadhammā uppajjeyyuṃ, tena bodhisattapaṭiññena iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘nanu tayā sappurisa sambodhāya abhinīhāraṃ karontena sabbasattānamupakārāya ayaṃ kāyo nissaṭṭho, tappariccāgamayañca puññaṃ, tattha nāma te bāhirepi vatthusmiṃ abhisaṅgappavatti hatthisinānasadisī hoti, tasmā tayā na katthaci abhisaṅgo uppādetabbo. Seyyathāpi nāma mahato bhesajjarukkhassa tiṭṭhato mūlaṃ mūlatthikā haranti, papaṭikaṃ, tacaṃ, khandhaṃ, viṭapaṃ, sākhaṃ, palāsaṃ, pupphaṃ, phalaṃ phalatthikā haranti, na tassa rukkhassa ‘mayhaṃ santakaṃ ete harantī’ti vitakkasamudācāro hoti, evameva sabbalokahitāya ussukkamāpajjantena mayā mahādukkhe akataññuke niccāsucimhi kāye paresaṃ upakārāya viniyujjamāne aṇumattopi micchāvitakko na uppādetabbo. Ko vā ettha viseso ajjhattikabāhiresu mahābhūtesu ekantabhedanavikiraṇaviddhaṃsanadhammesu. Kevalaṃ pana sammohavijambhitametaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’ti abhiniveso, tasmā bāhiresu mahābhūtesu viya ajjhattikesupi karacaraṇanayanādīsu, maṃsādīsu ca anapekkhena hutvā ‘taṃ tadatthikā harantū’ti nissaṭṭhacittena bhavitabba’’nti. Evaṃ paṭisañcikkhato cassa sambodhāya pahitattassa kāyajīvitesu nirapekkhassa appakasireneva kāyavacīmanokammāni suvisuddhāni honti, so visuddhakāyavacīmanokammanto visuddhājīvo ñāyapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito āyāpāyupāyakosallasamannāgamena bhiyyoso mattāya deyyadhammapariccāgena, abhayadānasaddhammadānehi ca sabbasatte anuggaṇhituṃ samattho hoti, ayaṃ tāva dānapāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇānayo.
对于戒波罗蜜,应当这样观察:这个戒,是洗净嗔恨污垢的水——那种污垢不是恒河水等能洗掉的;是消除贪欲等热恼的良方——那种热恼不是檀香等能去除的;是善士独有的庄严,不同于珍珠、宝冠、耳环等普通人所用的装饰;是能传遍各方、名声远扬、任何时候都相宜的妙香;因为能带来刹帝利大富豪以及天人们的礼敬等,所以是最殊胜的调伏咒;是登上四大王天等天界的阶梯;是证得禅那与神通的途径;是通往涅槃大城的道路;是声闻菩提、缘觉菩提、正等正觉的立足处。而且,无论想要什么、希求什么,它都能使那些愿望实现,因此胜过如意宝珠、如意树等。世尊确实这样说过:“比丘们,持戒者的心愿因为清净而实现。”还有另外的说法:“比丘们,如果比丘希望被同梵行者喜爱、满意、尊重、敬重,就应当在戒上圆满修习”等等。同样,依据“阿难,善戒以无悔为目的”以及“居士们,持戒具戒者有五种利益”等经文,应当观察戒的功德;依据火聚喻经等,应当观察没有戒的过患。巴利
Sīlapāramiyaṃ pana evaṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ – ‘‘idañhi sīlaṃ nāma gaṅgodakādīhi visodhetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa dosamalassa vikkhālanajalaṃ, haricandanādīhi vinetuṃ asakkuṇeyyassa rāgādipariḷāhassa vinayanaṃ, muttāhāramakuṭakuṇḍalādīhi pacurajanālaṅkārehi asādhāraṇo sādhūnamalaṅkāraviseso, sabbadisāvāyanako atikittimo [sabbadisāvāyanato akittimo (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathāvaṇṇanā; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7)] sabbakālānurūpo ca surabhigandho, khattiyamahāsālādīhi, devatāhi ca vandanīyādibhāvāvahanato paramo vasīkaraṇamanto, cātumahārājikādidevalokārohaṇasopānapanti, jhānābhiññānaṃ adhigamūpāyo, nibbānamahānagarassa sampāpakamaggo, sāvakabodhipaccekabodhisammāsambodhīnaṃ patiṭṭhānabhūmi, yaṃ yaṃ vā panicchitaṃ patthitaṃ, tassa tassa samijjhanūpāyabhāvato cintāmaṇikapparukkhādike ca atiseti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘ijjhati bhikkhave, sīlavato cetopaṇidhi visuddhattā’’ti (dī. ni. 3.337; saṃ. ni. 4.352; a. ni. 8.35). Aparampi vuttaṃ ‘‘ākaṅkheyya ce bhikkhave, bhikkhu sabrahmacārīnaṃ piyo ca assaṃ manāpo ca garu ca bhāvanīyo cāti, sīlesvevassa paripūrakārī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.65). Tathā ‘‘avippaṭisāratthāni kho ānanda kusalāni sīlānī’’ti, (a. ni. 10.1; 11.1) ‘‘pañcime gahapatayo, ānisaṃsā sīlavato sīlasampadāyā’’tiādisuttānañca (dī. ni. 2.150; a. ni. 5.213; udā. 76; mahāva. 385) vasena sīlaguṇā paccavekkhitabbā. Tathā aggikkhandhopamasuttādīnaṃ (a. ni. 7.72) vasena sīlavirahe ādīnavā.
另外,应当从这些方面来观察戒:它是喜与悦的来源;它让人没有自责、没有他人谴责、没有刑罚和恶趣的恐惧;它被智者称赞;它是无悔的因;它是最高的安稳处;它胜过家族、财富、权位、寿命、容貌、亲属、朋友等种种成就。因为持戒的人,由于自己戒行圆满,会生起极大的喜与悦,心里想:我确实做了善行,做了好事,做了能保护自己免于恐惧的事。巴利
Apica pītisomanassanimittato, attānuvādaparānuvādadaṇḍaduggatibhayābhāvato, viññūhi pāsaṃsabhāvato, avippaṭisārahetuto, paramasotthiṭṭhānato, kulasāpateyyādhipateyyajīvitarūpaṭṭhānabandhumittasampattīnaṃ atisayanato ca sīlaṃ paccavekkhitabbaṃ. Sīlavato hi attano sīlasampadāhetu mahantaṃ pītisomanassaṃ uppajjati ‘‘kataṃ vata mayā kusalaṃ, kataṃ kalyāṇaṃ, kataṃ bhīruttāṇa’’nti.
同样地,持戒者不会自我责备,也不会被智者批评,而且堕入恶道、遭受刑罚的恐惧根本不存在;智者还会称赞说:“这位持戒者是个具足善法的人。”同样地,破戒者心里会生起追悔:“我确实做了恶事,做了残忍的事,做了罪过的事。”而持戒者不会有这种追悔。戒以不放逸为根基,通过避免财产损失等途径成办大利益,是吉祥的,因此是最高的安稳处。即使出身低贱,持戒者也会受到刹帝利豪门等的恭敬,所以戒的具足胜过家世的具足。《沙门果经》中即将说到的“大王,你意下如何?假如你这里有一个奴仆、劳工……”等话,在这里可以作为证明。戒不与盗贼等共通,能跟随到后世,有大果报,是止等功德的根基,因此胜过外在的财富和资产。戒是最高心自在的根基,因此胜过刹帝利等的权位。因为众生在各类众生趣中的权位,是以戒为因的;而且比起百年等长久的寿命,经中说持戒者即使只有一日之命也更为殊胜,又说虽然有生命,舍弃学处就等于死亡,所以戒比生命更殊胜。戒能带来连怨敌也喜爱的状态,不被衰老、疾病、衰败所压倒,因此胜过容貌的具足。戒是宫殿、楼阁等种种住处,也是国王、太子、将军等种种地位中殊胜快乐的根基,因此胜过这些。戒能对本性清净、亲近身边的亲族和朋友成办究竟的利益,又能跟随到后世,因此胜过他们。《法句经》中“母亲父亲不能做那件事”等话,在这里可以作为证明。同样地,象、马、车、步兵等军队,以及咒语、解毒、安稳的运用,对难以守护、无依无靠的人而言,是难以守护的;而戒作为保护,是依靠自己、不依赖他人、领域广大的,因此戒本身更为殊胜。因此说:“法确实保护行法的人。”这样,当人观察戒具足如此种种功德时,不圆满的戒具足就会达到圆满,不清净的戒就会达到清净。巴利
Tathā sīlavato attā na upavadati, na ca pare viññū, daṇḍaduggatibhayānañca sambhavoyeva natthi, ‘‘sīlavā purisapuggalo kalyāṇadhammo’’ti viññūnaṃ pāsaṃso ca hoti. Tathā sīlavato yvāyaṃ ‘‘kataṃ vata mayā pāpaṃ, kataṃ luddaṃ, kataṃ kibbisa’’nti dussīlassa vippaṭisāro uppajjati, so na hoti. Sīlañca nāmetaṃ appamādādhiṭṭhānato, bhogabyasanādiparihāramukhena mahato atthassa sādhanato, maṅgalabhāvato, paramaṃ sotthiṭṭhānaṃ. Nihīnajaccopi sīlavā khattiyamahāsālādīnaṃ pūjanīyo hotīti kulasampattiṃ atiseti sīlasampadā, ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññasi mahārāja, idha te assa dāso kammakaro’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.183) vakkhamānasāmaññasuttavacanañcettha sādhakaṃ, corādīhi asādhāraṇato, paralokānugamanato, mahapphalabhāvato, samathādiguṇādhiṭṭhānato ca bāhiradhanaṃ sāpateyyaṃ atiseti sīlaṃ. Paramassa cittissariyassa adhiṭṭhānabhāvato khattiyādīnamissariyaṃ atiseti sīlaṃ. Sīlanimittañhi taṃtaṃsattanikāyesu sattānamissariyaṃ, vassasatādidīghappamāṇato ca jīvitato ekāhampi sīlavato jīvitassa visiṭṭhatāvacanato, satipi jīvite sikkhānikkhipanassa maraṇatāvacanato ca sīlaṃ jīvitato visiṭṭhataraṃ. Verīnampi manuññabhāvāvahanato, jarārogavipattīhi anabhibhavanīyato ca rūpasampattiṃ atiseti sīlaṃ. Pāsādahammiyādiṭṭhānappabhede rājayuvarājasenāpatiādiṭhānavisese ca sukhavisesādhiṭṭhānabhāvato atiseti sīlaṃ. Sabhāvasiniddhe santikāvacarepi bandhujane, mittajane ca ekantahitasampādanato, paralokānugamanato ca atiseti sīlaṃ. ‘‘Na taṃ mātā pitā kayirā’’tiādi (dha. pa. 43) vacanañcettha sādhakaṃ. Tathā hatthiassarathapattibalakāyehi, mantāgadasotthānapayogehi ca durārakkhānamanāthānaṃ attādhīnato, anaparādhīnato, mahāvisayato ca ārakkhabhāvena sīlameva visiṭṭhataraṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘dhammo have rakkhati dhammacāri’’ntiādi (theragā. 303; jā. 1.10.102). Evamanekaguṇasamannāgataṃ sīlanti paccavekkhantassa aparipuṇṇā ceva sīlasampadā pāripūriṃ gacchati, aparisuddhā ca pārisuddhiṃ.
如果因为长期串习,与戒相违的嗔等法偶尔还是会生起,那么这位已经发了菩萨誓愿的人就应该这样思惟:你不是已经发愿要为觉悟而努力了吗?戒行不圆满的话,连世间的成就都尚且不能得到、难以成办,更何况出世间的成就呢?戒是一切成就的根本,是正自觉的基础,必须让戒达到最圆满的程度。因此,应当像“如鸡护卵”等所说的那样,好好地守护戒,你要成为一个真正戒行清净的人。巴利
Sace panassa dīgharattaṃ paricayena sīlapaṭipakkhadhammā dosādayo antarantarā uppajjeyyuṃ, tena bodhisattapaṭiññena evaṃ paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘nanu tayā bodhāya paṇidhānaṃ kataṃ, sīlavekallena ca na sakkā na ca sukarā lokiyāpi sampattiyo pāpuṇituṃ, pageva lokuttarā’’ti. Sabbasampattīnamaggabhūtāya sammāsambodhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhūtena sīlena paramukkaṃsagatena bhavitabbaṃ, tasmā ‘‘kikīva aṇḍa’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7; visuddhi. 1.19) vuttanayena sammadeva sīlaṃ rakkhantena suṭṭhu tayā pesalena bhavitabbaṃ.
另外,你应当通过说法,在三乘中接引众生、使他们成熟。戒行有缺失的人,他的话就不可信,就像不懂适宜饮食的医生给人治病一样。所以应当这样想:“我怎样才能成为可信的人,然后去接引众生、使他们成熟呢?”因此,必须具备本性清净的戒。再说,我能依靠禅那等殊胜功德来利益众生,而般若波罗蜜等的圆满以及禅那等功德,如果离开戒的清净,就不可能生起,所以必须把戒清净好。巴利
Apica tayā dhammadesanāya yānattaye sattānamavatāraṇaparipācanāni kātabbāni, sīlavekallassa ca vacanaṃ na paccetabbaṃ hoti, asappāyāhāravicārassa viya vejjassa tikicchanaṃ, tasmā ‘‘kathāhaṃ saddheyyo hutvā sattānamavatāraṇaparipācanāni kareyya’’nti sabhāvaparisuddhasīlena bhavitabbaṃ. Kiñca jhānādiguṇavisesayogena me sattānamupakārakaraṇasamatthatā, paññāpāramīādiparipūraṇañca jhānādayo guṇā ca sīlapārisuddhiṃ vinā na sambhavantīti sammadeva sīlaṃ sodhetabbaṃ.
同样地,要观察在家的过患,依据“在家生活是拥挤的、是尘垢之路”等经文;要观察诸欲的过患,依据“诸欲如骸骨”等经文,以及“母亲也会和儿子争吵”等经文;要观察贪欲等的过患,依据“譬如有人借了钱去经营事业”等经文。先以这些过患的观察作为前提,再反过来依据“出家如空旷之处”等经文,通过思惟出家等的功德来省察出离波罗蜜。这里是简要的说明,详细内容则应当依据《苦蕴经》《蛇喻经》等来了知。巴利
Tathā ‘‘sambādho gharāvāso rajopatho’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.111; ma. ni. 1.291, 371; 2.10; 3.13, 218; saṃ. ni. 2.154; 5.1002; a. ni. 10.99; netti. 94) gharāvāse, ‘‘aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā kāmā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.234; 2.42; pāci. 417; cūḷani. 147) ‘‘mātāpi puttena vivadatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.168) ca kāmesu, ‘‘seyyathāpi puriso iṇaṃ ādāya kammante payojeyyā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.426) kāmacchandādīsu ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamā, vuttavipariyāyena ‘‘abbhokāso pabbajjā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.191, 398; ma. ni. 1.291, 371; 2.10; 3.13, 218; saṃ. ni. 1.291; saṃ. ni. 5.1002; a. ni. 10.99; netti. 98) pabbajjādīsu ānisaṃsāpaṭisaṅkhāvasena nekkhammapāramiyaṃ paccavekkhaṇā kātabbā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana dukkhakkhandhaāsivisopamasuttādi (ma. ni. 1.163, 175; saṃ. ni. 4.238) vasena veditabbo.
同样地,应当思惟智慧的功德:“如果没有智慧,布施等法就不能清净,也不能各自发挥应有的作用。”就像没有生命,身体就不好看,也不能在自身的活动中发挥作用;又像眼等诸根离开识,就不能在各自的境界中完成各自的功能;同样,信等诸根离开智慧,也不能在各自的功能上发挥作用。因此,在施舍等修行中,智慧是首要的原因。因为那些已经睁开智慧之眼的大士、菩萨们,即使施舍了自己的肢节,也不自赞、不毁他,像药树一样没有分别,在三时中都心生喜悦。正是因为以智慧与方便善巧相结合,舍弃自身才因利益他人而成为布施波罗蜜。若仅为自利的布施,就像粪土一样。巴利
Tathā ‘‘paññāya vinā dānādayo dhammā na visujjhanti, yathāsakaṃ byāpārasamatthā ca na hontī’’ti paññāya guṇā manasi kātabbā. Yatheva hi jīvitena vinā sarīrayantaṃ na sobhati, na ca attano kiriyāsu paṭipattisamatthaṃ hoti. Yathā ca cakkhādīni indriyāni viññāṇena vinā yathāsakaṃ visayesu kiccaṃ kātuṃ nappahonti, evaṃ saddhādīni indriyāni paññāya vinā sakakiccapaṭipattiyamasamatthānīti pariccāgādipaṭipattiyaṃ paññā padhānakāraṇaṃ. Ummīlitapaññācakkhukā hi mahāsattā bodhisattā attano aṅgapaccaṅgānipi datvā anattukkaṃsakā, aparavambhakā ca honti, bhesajjarukkhā viya vikapparahitā kālattayepi somanassajātā. Paññāvasena hi upāyakosallayogato pariccāgo parahitapavattiyā dānapāramibhāvaṃ upeti. Attatthañhi dānaṃ muddhasadisaṃ [vuddhisadisaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7)] hoti.
同样,如果没有智慧,就无法脱离渴爱等烦恼,连戒的清净都根本谈不上,更不用说成为一切知智功德的依处了。只有具足智慧的人,才能清楚地观察到在家生活、感官享乐和轮回中的种种过患,以及出家、禅那等至和涅槃的种种功德,于是出家修行,成就禅那等至,心向涅槃,并且也让别人安住于此。巴利
Tathā paññāya abhāvena taṇhādisaṃkilesāviyogato sīlassa visuddhiyeva na sambhavati, kuto sabbaññuguṇādhiṭṭhānabhāvo. Paññavā eva ca gharāvāse kāmaguṇesu saṃsāre ca ādīnavaṃ, pabbajjāya jhānasamāpattiyaṃ nibbāne ca ānisaṃsaṃ suṭṭhu sallakkhento pabbajitvā jhānasamāpattiyo nibbattetvā nibbānaninno, pare ca tattha patiṭṭhapeti.
精进如果离开了智慧,就成办不了自己想要的目标,因为它很难真正启动。与其勉强去启动,还不如干脆不启动。可是,如果精进和智慧在一起,那就没有什么难以达成的事,因为它有正确的方法去实践。同样,只有有智慧的人才能做到忍受他人伤害等事情,没有智慧的人做不到。对缺乏智慧的人来说,别人施加的伤害只会让他以不能忍的方式增长敌对;而对有智慧的人来说,那些伤害反而因为忍辱的成就在增长,而变得稳固。只有有智慧的人才能如实了知三谛、它们的因以及它们的对立面,从而不欺骗他人。同样,依靠智慧的力量支撑自己,以坚定的成就,在一切波罗蜜中不动摇地坚持自己的誓愿。只有有智慧的人才能不作亲、中、怨的分别,在一切处都善于带来利益。同样,依靠智慧的力量,在利衰等世间法现前时,能以不变异的心保持中舍。这样,智慧就是一切波罗蜜清净的原因,应当如此省察智慧的功德。巴利
Vīriyañca paññārahitaṃ yathicchitamatthaṃ na sādheti durārambhabhāvato. Anārambhoyeva hi durārambhato seyyo, paññāsahitena pana vīriyena na kiñci duradhigamaṃ upāyapaṭipattito. Tathā paññavā eva parāpakārādīnamadhivāsakajātiyo hoti, na duppañño. Paññāvirahitassa ca parehi upanītā apakārā khantiyā paṭipakkhameva anubrūhenti. Paññavato pana te khantisampattiyā anubrūhanavasena assā thirabhāvāya saṃvattanti. Paññavā eva tīṇipi saccāni tesaṃ kāraṇāni paṭipakkhe ca yathābhūtaṃ jānitvā paresaṃ avisaṃvādako hoti. Tathā paññābalena attānamupatthambhetvā dhitisampadāya sabbapāramīsu acalasamādānādhiṭṭhāno hoti. Paññavā eva ca piyamajjhattaverivibhāgamakatvā sabbattha hitūpasaṃhārakusalo hoti. Tathā paññāvasena lābhālābhādilokadhammasannipāte nibbikāratāya majjhatto hoti. Evaṃ sabbāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ paññāva pārisuddhihetūti paññāguṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
而且,如果没有智慧,就不会有见地方面的成就;没有正见方面的成就,就不会有戒行方面的成就;缺少戒与正见成就的人,也不会有定方面的成就;心没有得定的人,连自己的利益都无法成办,更不用说殊胜的利他了。菩萨应当这样自我教诫:“你既然已经为了利他而修行,难道不应该认真致力于智慧的清净吗?”大士依靠智慧的威力,安住于四种依处,以四种摄事利益世间,引导众生进入出离之道,并使他们的诸根成熟。同样,以智慧之力,在蕴、处、界等方面广泛地简择,如实了知流转与还灭,把布施等种种功德导向顺决择分,成为圆满修习菩萨学处的人。像这样以种种方式确定智慧的功德之后,就应当修习智慧波罗蜜。巴利
Apica paññāya vinā na dassanasampatti, antarena ca diṭṭhisampadaṃ na sīlasampadā, sīladiṭṭhisampadārahitassa ca na samādhisampadā, asamāhitena ca na sakkā attahitamattampi sādhetuṃ, pageva ukkaṃsagataṃ parahitanti. ‘‘Nanu tayā parahitāya paṭipannena sakkaccaṃ paññāpārisuddhiyā āyogo karaṇīyo’’ti bodhisattena attā ovaditabbo. Paññānubhāvena hi mahāsatto caturadhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhito catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi lokaṃ anuggaṇhanto satte niyyānamagge avatāreti, indriyāni ca nesaṃ paripāceti. Tathā paññābalena khandhāyatanādīsu pavicayabahulo pavattinivattiyo yāthāvato parijānanto dānādayo guṇavisese nibbedhabhāgiyabhāvaṃ nayanto bodhisattasikkhāya paripūrakārī hotīti evamādinā anekākāravokāre paññāguṇe vavatthapetvā paññāpāramī anubrūhetabbā.
同样地,即使是眼前看得见的世间事业,精进低劣的人也做不成;而发起精进、不计疲劳的人,就没有什么真正难以达到的事。精进低劣的人,连“我要把一切众生从轮回的大洪流中救渡出来”这样的心愿都发不起来。中等精进的人虽然发起了,却中途就放弃了。上等精进的人不顾自己的安乐,一旦发起,就能达到彼岸。应当这样来省察精进的圆满成就。巴利
Tathā dissamānapārānipi lokiyāni kammāni nihīnavīriyena pāpuṇitumasakkuṇeyyāni, agaṇitakhedena pana āraddhavīriyena duradhigamaṃ nāma natthi. Nihīnavīriyo hi ‘‘saṃsāramahoghato sabbasatte santāressāmī’’ti ārabhitumeva na sakkuṇoti. Majjhimo pana ārabhitvāna antarāvosānamāpajjati. Ukkaṭṭhavīriyo pana attasukhanirapekkho ārabhitvā pāramadhigacchatīti vīriyasampatti paccavekkhitabbā.
再者,应当从这些角度来观察精进的功德:如果有人只是为了把自己从轮回的泥沼里拔出来而发起精进,一旦精进松懈,他的愿望尚且不可能实现,更何况那些为了救度包括天人在内的整个世间而发下大誓愿的人呢。又因为贪等烦恼群就像醉狂的大象一样难以制止,由它们引发的种种造业就像举刀杀人的凶手一样可怕,它们所带来的恶趣则永远张着大口等着,而那些把人引向恶趣的恶友又始终伴随左右,如果听从他们的教诫去做,就只会一直停留在凡夫的境地,所以应当自己从轮回的痛苦中解脱出来。又,邪思惟依靠精进的力量就能被远远抛开。又,如果靠自己的精进就能证得正觉,那这里还有什么难事呢。应当以这样的方式来观察精进的功德。巴利
Apica ‘‘yassa attano eva saṃsārapaṅkato samuddharaṇatthamārambho, tassāpi vīriyassa sithilabhāvena manorathānaṃ matthakappatti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ, pageva sadevakassa lokassa samuddharaṇatthaṃ katābhinīhārenā’’ti ca ‘‘rāgādīnaṃ dosagaṇānaṃ mattamahānāgānamiva dunnivāraṇabhāvato, tannidānānañca kammasamādānānaṃ ukkhittāsikavadhakasadisabhāvato, tannimittānañca duggatīnaṃ sabbadā vivaṭamukhabhāvato, tattha niyojakānañca pāpamittānaṃ sadā sannihitabhāvato, tadovādakāritāya ca vasalassa puthujjanabhāvassa sati sambhave yuttaṃ sayameva saṃsāradukkhato nissaritu’’nti ca ‘‘micchāvitakkā vīriyānubhāvena dūrī bhavantī’’ti ca ‘‘yadi pana sambodhiṃ attādhīnena vīriyena sakkā samadhigantuṃ, kimettha dukkara’’nti ca evamādinā nayena vīriyaguṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
同样地,应当这样作意:所谓忍辱,由于能摧毁与一切功德完全对立的忿怒,所以是善士们成就功德时无碍的武器,是能降伏他者的庄严,是沙门婆罗门的力量成就,是熄灭忿怒之火的水流,是美名善声的生起之处,是平息恶人语毒的咒药,是安住于防护者的至高坚定本性,因心地深沉而如大海,是嗔恚大苦海的海岸,是恶趣之门的门闩,是通往天界梵界的阶梯,是一切功德的安住之地,是至高无上的身语意清净。
此外还应这样省察:这些众生因为没有忍辱的成就,所以在现世备受煎熬,在来世也因随顺应受煎熬之法而受苦。
又:虽然因他人加害而生起痛苦,但承受这苦的田地是我自身,作为种子的业也是我自己所造。
又:这苦是在替我偿债。
又:如果没有加害者,我的忍辱成就又从何而来?
又:即使这个人现在加害于我,过去他也曾对我有恩。
又:加害本身正是忍辱的因缘,所以其实是帮助。
又:这一切众生都像我的孩子,对于孩子犯下的过失,谁会生气呢?
又:这个众生是被忿怒鬼附身才冒犯我,我应当调伏那附身的忿怒鬼。
又:由这个加害而生的痛苦,我也是它的因缘。
又:那些造成加害的法、在何处造成,一切都在那一刹那灭去了,如今我该对谁、因何而生气?
又:一切法无我,谁能冒犯谁呢?
这样反复观照,就应当增长忍辱的成就。巴利
Tathā ‘‘khanti nāmāyaṃ niravasesaguṇapaṭipakkhassa kodhassa vidhamanato guṇasampādane sādhūnaṃ appaṭihatamāyudhaṃ, parābhibhavane samatthānamalaṅkāro, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ balasampadā, kodhaggivinayanā udakadhārā, kalyāṇakittisaddassa sañjātideso, pāpapuggalānaṃ vacīvisavūpasamakaro mantāgado, saṃvare ṭhitānaṃ paramā dhīrapakati, gambhīrāsayatāya sāgaro, dosamahāsāgarassa velā, apāyadvārassa pidhānakavāṭaṃ devabrahmalokānaṃ ārohaṇasopānaṃ, sabbaguṇānamadhivāsabhūmi, uttamā kāyavacīmanovisuddhī’’ti manasi kātabbaṃ. Apica ‘‘ete sattā khantisampattiyā abhāvato idhaloke tapanti, paraloke ca tapanīyadhammānuyogato’’ti ca ‘‘yadipi parāpakāranimittaṃ dukkhaṃ uppajjati, tassa pana dukkhassa khettabhūto attabhāvo, bījabhūtañca kammaṃ mayāva abhisaṅkhata’’nti ca ‘‘tassa ca dukkhassa āṇaṇyakaraṇameta’’nti ca ‘‘apakārake asati kathaṃ mayhaṃ khantisampadā sambhavatī’’ti ca ‘‘yadipāyaṃ etarahi apakārako , ayaṃ nāma pubbe anena mayhaṃ upakāro kato’’ti ca ‘‘apakāro eva vā khantinimittatāya upakāro’’ti ca ‘‘sabbepime sattā mayhaṃ puttasadisā, puttakatāparādhesu ca ko kujjhissatī’’ti ca ‘‘yena kodhabhūtāvesena ayaṃ mayhaṃ aparajjhati, svāyaṃ kodhabhūtāveso mayā vinetabbo’’ti ca ‘‘yena apakārena idaṃ mayhaṃ dukkhaṃ uppannaṃ, tassa ahampi nimitta’’nti ca ‘‘yehi dhammehi apakāro kato, yattha ca kato, sabbepi te tasmiṃyeva khaṇe niruddhā, kassidāni kena kopo kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘anattatāya sabbadhammānaṃ ko kassa aparajjhatī’’ti ca paccavekkhantena khantisampadā brūhetabbā.
如果因为长期串习,以他人伤害为因的嗔怒占据了心并持续不退,那就应当这样思惟:忍辱正是对治他人伤害、以相反方式回应并反过来利益对方的方法;他人的伤害通过让我生起痛苦,成为信心的苦因,也成为对一切世间不欢喜想的因缘;这属于根门的本性,也就是可意与不可意境界的接触,在那里,希望“我不要遇到不可意境界”,这怎么可能得到呢;被嗔怒控制的众生,因嗔怒而疯狂、心散乱,对这样的人,以怨报怨又能怎样呢;所有这些众生,都被正自觉者像亲生儿子一样护念,因此我不应对他们心生嗔怒;当对方有过失时,对于有功德的人我不应生嗔怒;如果没有功德,因为任何人都没有功德,就更应当特别悲悯;因嗔怒,我的功德和名声会减损;因发怒,丑陋、痛苦、恶卧等以及怨敌所喜爱的东西都会来到我身上;这嗔怒就是造成一切苦害、毁坏一切乐利的强敌;若有忍辱,就没有任何怨敌;如果对方有过失,因这过失之相,未来将得到的痛苦,若我有忍辱,就不会有那痛苦;我这样思量、发怒,只会随顺怨敌;若我被忍辱战胜了嗔怒,那怨敌就成了它的奴隶,才算真正被击败;以嗔怒为因,舍弃忍辱的功德,对我不合适;若有嗔怒,功德相违、对立之法现前,我的戒等法怎能圆满?若没有这些,我又怎能利益众生众多,并依照所立誓愿达到最上的成就?若有忍辱,因外境散乱不存在,心得定者便能以无常观诸行、以苦观诸行、以无我观一切法,并因涅槃是无为、不死、寂静、殊胜等状态而堪忍思惟,也能堪忍思惟“佛与法不可思议、不可测量、广大”;从此,安住于随顺忍中,堪忍思惟:这些法都只是法而已,没有我、没有我所,依各自的缘而生起、灭去,不从任何地方来,也不去往任何地方,也不在任何地方停留,在这里也没有谁对谁做什么;这样便不执著我、我所,由此菩萨决定趣向菩提,成为不退转法。像这样等,应当了知为对忍辱波罗蜜的观察。巴利
Yadi panassa dīgharattaṃ paricayena parāpakāranimittako kodho cittaṃ pariyādāya tiṭṭheyya, tena iti paṭisañcikkhitabbaṃ ‘‘khanti nāmesā parāpakārassa paṭipakkhapaṭipattīnaṃ paccupakārakāraṇa’’nti ca ‘‘apakāro ca mayhaṃ dukkhuppādanena dukkhupanisāya saddhāya, sabbaloke anabhiratisaññāya ca paccayo’’ti ca ‘‘indriyapakatiresā, yadidaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhavisayasamāyogo, tattha aniṭṭhavisayasamāyogo mayhaṃ na siyāti taṃ kutettha labbhā’’ti ca ‘‘kodhavasiko satto kodhena ummatto vikkhittacitto, tattha kiṃ paccapakārenā’’ti ca ‘‘sabbepime sattā sammāsambuddhena orasaputtā viya paripālitā, tasmā na tattha mayā cittakopo kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘aparādhake ca sati guṇe guṇavati mayā kopo na kātabbo’’ti ca ‘‘asati guṇe kassacipi guṇassābhāvato visesena karuṇāyitabbo’’ti ca ‘‘kopena mayhaṃ guṇayasā nihīyantī’’ti ca ‘‘kujjhanena mayhaṃ dubbaṇṇadukkhaseyyādayo sapattakantā āgacchantī’’ti ca ‘‘kodho ca nāmāyaṃ sabbadukkhāhitakārako sabbasukhahitavināsako balavā paccatthiko’’ti ca ‘‘sati ca khantiyā na koci paccatthiko’’ti ca ‘‘aparādhakena aparādhanimittaṃ yaṃ dukkhaṃ āyatiṃ laddhabbaṃ, sati ca khantiyā mayhaṃ tadabhāvo’’ti ca ‘‘cintentena, kujjhantena ca mayā paccatthikoyeva anuvattito’’ti ca ‘‘kodhe ca mayā khantiyā abhibhūte tassa dāsabhūto paccatthiko sammadeva abhibhūto’’ti ca ‘‘kodhanimittaṃ khantiguṇapariccāgo mayhaṃ na yutto’’ti ca ‘‘sati ca kodhe guṇavirodhapaccanīkadhamme kathaṃ me sīlādidhammā pāripūriṃ gaccheyyuṃ, asati ca tesu kathāhaṃ sattānaṃ upakārabahulo paṭiññānurūpaṃ uttamaṃ sampattiṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti ca ‘‘khantiyā ca sati bahiddhā vikkhepābhāvato samāhitassa sabbe saṅkhārā aniccato dukkhato sabbe dhammā anattato nibbānaṃ asaṅkhatāmatasantapaṇītatādibhāvato nijjhānaṃ khamanti, ‘buddhadhammā ca acinteyyāparimeyyappabhavā’ti’’, tato ca ‘‘anulomikakhantiyaṃ ṭhito ‘kevalā ime attattaniyabhāvarahitā dhammamattā yathāsakaṃ paccayehi uppajjanti vinassanti, na kutoci āgacchanti, na kuhiñci gacchanti, na ca katthaci patiṭṭhitā, na cettha koci kassaci byāpāro’ti ahaṃkāramamaṃkārānadhiṭṭhānatā nijjhānaṃ khamati, yena bodhisatto bodhiyā niyato anāvattidhammo hotī’’ti evamādinā khantipāramiyā paccavekkhaṇā veditabbā.
同样地,应当从这些角度来观察真实波罗蜜的成就:没有真实,戒等就无法存在,也不可能有与誓愿相符的修行;违越真实法,一切恶法就会聚集;说话不真实的人,他的话不会被人相信,未来也会导致言语不被接受;具足真实的人,是一切功德的依止;以真实为依止,一切菩提资粮才能清净和圆满;不违背自性法,就能完成一切菩提资粮的作用,菩萨的修行也因此得以圆满。巴利
Tathā ‘‘saccena vinā sīlādīnamasambhavato, paṭiññānurūpapaṭipattiyā abhāvato, saccadhammātikkame ca sabbapāpadhammānaṃ samosaraṇabhāvato, asaccasandhassa appaccayikabhāvato, āyatiñca anādeyyavacanatāvahanato, sampannasaccassa sabbaguṇādhiṭṭhānabhāvato, saccādhiṭṭhānena sabbasambodhisambhārānaṃ pārisuddhipāripūrisamanvāyato, sabhāvadhammāvisaṃvādanena sabbabodhisambhārakiccakaraṇato , bodhisattapaṭipattiyā ca parinipphattito’’tiādinā saccapāramiyā sampattiyo paccavekkhitabbā.
同样地,应当依照“在布施等当中坚固地受持,当与这些相对立的条件聚集时,对他们保持不动摇的决意,而在那里若没有坚毅与勇猛的特质,布施等资粮就不能成为正觉的因”等这样的方式,来观察决意的功德。巴利
Tathā ‘‘dānādīsu daḷhasamādānaṃ, tappaṭipakkhasannipāte ca nesaṃ acalādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tattha ca dhīravīrabhāvaṃ vinā na dānādisambhārā sambodhinimittā sambhavantī’’tiādinā adhiṭṭhānaguṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
同样地,应当这样观察慈的功德:
即使是一个安住于只求自利的人,如果没有利益众生的心,尚且不可能获得今生与来世的成就,更何况是想要把一切众生都安立在涅槃成就中的人呢?
后来想要为一切众生求得出世间成就的人,现在先希求世间成就,这是合宜的。
现在如果仅仅以意愿尚且不能为他人带来利益与安乐,什么时候我才能通过实际行动来达成呢?
现在被我以利益与安乐所养育的这些众生,将来会成为与我分享佛法的同伴。
没有这些众生,我的菩提资粮就不会生起。因此,由于他们是成就一切佛功德庄严的原因,他们对我来说就是最殊胜的福田、无上的善行处、最上的恭敬处。
应当对一切众生特别地建立起利益他们的意愿。而且,从悲的决意来说,也应当在一切众生中修习慈心。因为以没有界限的心致力于为众生带来利益与安乐的人,想要拔除众生不利与痛苦的心念就会强而有力地生起,并且根深蒂固。而悲是一切成佛之法的开端、前行、依止、根本、入口和首要。
应当以这样的方式观察慈的功德。巴利
Tathā ‘‘attahitamatte avatiṭṭhantenāpi sattesu hitacittataṃ vinā na sakkā idhalokaparalokasampattiyo pāpuṇituṃ, pageva sabbasatte nibbānasampattiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpetukāmenā’’ti ca ‘‘pacchā sabbasattānaṃ lokuttarasampattimākaṅkhantena idāni lokiyasampattimākaṅkhā yuttarūpā’’ti ca ‘‘idāni āsayamattena paresaṃ hitasukhūpasaṃhāraṃ kātumasakkonto kadā payogena taṃ sādhayissāmī’’ti ca ‘‘idāni mayā hitasukhūpasaṃhārena saṃvaddhitā pacchā dhammasaṃvibhāgasahāyā mayhaṃ bhavissantī’’ti ca ‘‘etehi vinā na mayhaṃ bodhisambhārā sambhavanti, tasmā sabbabuddhaguṇavibhūtinipphattikāraṇattā mayhaṃ ete paramaṃ puññakkhettaṃ anuttaraṃ kusalāyatanaṃ uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhāna’’nti ca ‘‘savisesaṃ sabbesupi sattesu hitajjhāsayatā paccupaṭṭhapetabbā, kiñca karuṇādhiṭṭhānatopi sabbasattesu mettā anubrūhetabbā. Vimariyādīkatena hi cetasā sattesu hitasukhūpasaṃhāraniratassa tesaṃ ahitadukkhāpanayanakāmatā balavatī uppajjati daḷhamūlā, karuṇā ca sabbesaṃ buddhakārakadhammānaṃ ādi caraṇaṃ patiṭṭhā mūlaṃ mukhaṃ pamukha’’nti evamādinā mettāguṇā paccavekkhitabbā.
同样地,应当从这些角度来审察舍波罗蜜:如果没有舍心,众生所做的种种不当行为就会让心发生变异,而一旦心发生变异,布施等资粮就根本不可能成就;如果心被慈爱所滋润,但缺少舍心,资粮就不能清净;对诸行没有舍心的人,无法把福德资粮以及它的果报回向给众生的利益;如果没有舍心,就无法对施物和受者不作分别而加以施舍;没有舍心的人,无法不顾生活资具或生命的障碍,去成就戒的清净。再者,依靠舍心,以不喜不乐为伴的出离之力才能成就;通过观察投生的情况,一切资粮的作用才能完成;对过度精进的人如果不加以舍置,就无法完成精勤的作用;只有具备舍心的人,才能生起忍耐和审察;依靠舍心,才能不欺诳众生和诸行;以舍心对待世间法,才能对所受持的法成就不动摇的决意;对他人损害等事不加关注,才能成就慈心而住。如此,一切正觉资粮的受持、决意、圆满和成就,都依靠舍的力量而得以完成。应当以这些方式审察舍波罗蜜。这样,应当知道,对不舍与舍等依次观察过患和功德,是布施等波罗蜜的助缘。巴利
Tathā ‘‘upekkhāya abhāve sattehi katā vippakārā cittassa vikāraṃ uppādeyyuṃ, sati ca cittavikāre dānādisambhārānaṃ sambhavo eva natthī’’ti ca ‘‘mettāsinehena sinehite citte upekkhāya vinā sambhārānaṃ pārisuddhi na hotī’’ti ca ‘‘anupekkhako saṅkhāresu puññasambhāraṃ, tabbipākañca sattahitatthaṃ pariṇāmetuṃ na sakkotī’’ti ca upekkhāya abhāve deyyadhammapaṭiggāhakānaṃ vibhāgamakatvā pariccajituṃ na sakkotī’’ti ca ‘‘upekkhārahitena jīvitaparikkhārānaṃ, jīvitassa vā antarāyaṃ amanasikaritvā sīlavisodhanaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā’’ti ca tathā ‘‘upekkhāvasena aratiratisahasseva nekkhammabalasiddhito, upapattito ikkhanavaseneva sabbasambhārakiccanipphattito, accāraddhavīriyassa anupekkhane padhānakiccākaraṇato, upekkhato eva titikkhānijjhānasambhavato, upekkhāvasena sattasaṅkhārānaṃ avisaṃvādanato, lokadhammānaṃ ajjhupekkhanena samādinnadhammesu acalādhiṭṭhānasiddhito, parāpakārādīsu anābhogavaseneva mettāvihāranipphattitoti sabbasambodhisambhārānaṃ samādānādhiṭṭhānapāripūrinipphattiyo upekkhānubhāvena sampajjantī’’ti evamādinā nayena upekkhāpāramī paccavekkhitabbā. Evaṃ apariccāgapariccāgādīsu yathākkamaṃ ādīnavānisaṃsapaccavekkhaṇā dānādipāramīnaṃ paccayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
同样地,十五种行法连同它们的资具,以及五种神通。其中,行法指的是:戒的防护、守护根门、饮食知量、勤修觉醒、七种正法,以及四种禅那。在这些当中,戒等四种行法以及十三种头陀支法、少欲等法,是它们的资具。在七种正法方面,对于信来说,随念佛、随念法、随念僧、随念戒、随念施、随念天、随念寂止,回避粗涩的人,亲近温和的人,审察能令生净信的法,以及倾向于这些,是资具。对于惭与愧来说,审察不善的过患、审察恶趣的过患、审察善法的支撑力、回避无惭无愧的人、亲近具足惭愧的人、倾向于这些,是资具。对于多闻来说,事先的努力、好问的品格、专心投入正法、熟悉无过失的学处、根器成熟、远离烦恼、回避寡闻的人、亲近多闻的人、倾向于这些,是资具。对于精进来说,审察恶趣的怖畏、审察修行之道、审察法的伟大、驱除昏沉与睡眠、回避懈怠的人、亲近已发起精进的人、审察正勤、倾向于这些,是资具。对于念来说,念与正知、回避失念的人、亲近现起正念的人、倾向于这些,是资具。对于慧来说,好问的品格、令事行清净、令诸根平衡、回避智慧低劣的人、亲近具足智慧的人、审察深智行处的经典、审察法的伟大、倾向于这些,是资具。对于四种禅那来说,戒等四种清净、在三十八种所缘中的前分修习,以及转向等自在力,是资具。巴利
Tathā saparikkhārā pañcadasa caraṇadhammā pañca ca abhiññāyo. Tattha caraṇadhammā nāma sīlasaṃvaro, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā jāgariyānuyogo, satta saddhammā, cattāri jhānāni ca. Tesu sīlādīnaṃ catunnaṃ terasapi dhutaṅgadhammā, appicchatādayo ca parikkhārā. Saddhammesu saddhāya buddhadhammasaṅghasīlacāgadevatupasamānussati lūkhapuggalaparivajjanā, siniddhapuggalasevanā, sampasādanīyadhammapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatā ca parikkhārā. Hirottappānaṃ akusalādīnavapaccavekkhaṇā, apāyādīnavapaccavekkhaṇā , kusaladhammūpatthambhabhāvapaccavekkhaṇā, hirottapparahitapuggalaparivajjanā, hirottappasampannapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatā ca. Bāhusaccassa pubbayogo, paripucchakabhāvo, saddhammābhiyogo, anavajjavijjāṭṭhānādiparicayo, paripakkindriyatā, kilesadūrībhāvo, appassutapuggalaparivajjanā bahussutapuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatā ca. Vīriyassa apāyabhayapaccavekkhaṇā, gamanavīthipaccavekkhaṇā, dhammamahattapaccavekkhaṇā, thinamiddhavinodanā, kusītapuggalaparivajjanā, āraddhavīriyapuggalasevanā, sammappadhānapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatā ca. Satiyā satisampajaññaṃ, muṭṭhassatipuggalaparivajjanā upaṭṭhitassatipuggalasevanā, tadadhimuttatā ca. Paññāya paripucchakabhāvo, vatthuvisadakiriyā, indriyasamattapaṭipādanā, duppaññapuggalaparivajjanā, paññavantapuggalasevanā, gambhīrañāṇacariyasuttantapaccavekkhaṇā, dhammamahattapaccavekkhaṇā, tadadhimuttatā ca. Catunnaṃ jhānānaṃ sīlādicatukkaṃ, aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu pubbabhāgabhāvanā, āvajjanādivasībhāvakaraṇañca parikkhārā.
在这里,应当根据情况说明:以戒等令加行清净,就能为众生带来无畏布施;以意乐清净,就能带来财物布施;以两者都清净,就能带来法布施——像这样,行法等就成为布施等资粮的助缘。不过,因为怕太冗长,我们没有展开细说。同样,成就轮等也应当理解为布施等的助缘。巴利
Tattha sīlādīhi payogasuddhiyā sattānaṃ abhayadāne, āsayasuddhiyā āmisadāne, ubhayasuddhiyā dhammadāne samatthohotītiādinā caraṇādīnaṃ dānādisambhārapaccayatā yathārahaṃ niddhāretabbā. Ativitthārabhayena pana mayaṃ na vitthārayimha. Tathā sampatticakkādayopi dānādīnaṃ paccayoti veditabbā.
什么是杂染?在这里——巴利
Ko saṃkilesoti ettha –
被渴爱等所执取的状态,就是她们的杂染;
从共通和个别两方面,按各自适合的方式加以区分。巴利
Taṇhādīhi parāmaṭṭha-bhāvo tāsaṃ kilissanaṃ; Sāmaññato visesena, yathārahaṃ vikappatā.
总的来说,被渴爱等所执取的状态,就是诸波罗蜜的杂染。具体来说,对施物和受施者的分别,是布施波罗蜜的杂染;对众生和时间的分别,是戒波罗蜜的杂染;对欲有和它的止息生起欢喜或不欢喜的分别,是出离波罗蜜的杂染;“我”和“我的”的分别,是慧波罗蜜的杂染;昏沉和掉举的分别,是精进波罗蜜的杂染;自他的分别,是忍波罗蜜的杂染;把未见等当作已见等的分别,是谛波罗蜜的杂染;对菩提资粮和它的对立面生起过患与功德的分别,是决意波罗蜜的杂染;利益与损害的分别,是慈波罗蜜的杂染;可爱与不可爱的分别,是舍波罗蜜的杂染。应当知道,这些就是杂染。巴利
Avisesena hi taṇhādīhi parāmaṭṭhabhāvo pāramīnaṃ saṃkileso. Visesena pana deyyadhammapaṭiggāhakavikappā dānapāramiyā saṃkileso. Sattakālavikappā sīlapāramiyā. Kāmabhavatadupasamesu abhiratianabhirativikappā nekkhammapāramiyā. ‘‘Ahaṃ mamā’’ti vikappā paññāpāramiyā. Līnuddhaccavikappā vīriyapāramiyā. Attaparavikappā khantipāramiyā. Adiṭṭhādīsu diṭṭhādivikappā saccapāramiyā. Bodhisambhāratabbipakkhesu dosaguṇavikappā adhiṭṭhānapāramiyā. Hitāhitavikappā mettāpāramiyā. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhavikappā upekkhāpāramiyā saṃkilesoti veditabbo.
不被渴爱等毁灭,远离种种分别。
应当以智慧了知,这就是“清净”,那些也同样如此。巴利
Taṇhādīhi aghātatā, rahitatā vikappānaṃ; Vodānanti vijāniyā, sabbāsameva tāsampi.
因为不被渴爱、慢、见、忿、恨、贬损、轻蔑、嫉、悭、谄、诳、顽固、争强、骄醉、放逸等烦恼所损害,又远离了对施物和受施者的分别等,布施等波罗蜜才会变得清净、明净。巴利
Anupaghātā hi taṇhā māna diṭṭhi kodhu panāha makkha palāsa issāmacchariya māyā sāṭheyya thambha sārambha mada pamādādīhi kilesehi deyyapaṭiggāhakavikappādirahitā ca dānādipāramiyo parisuddhā pabhassarā bhavantīti.
什么是对治?巴利
Ko paṭipakkhoti –
不善和烦恼,从没有差别的角度来看,就是对立面。
从差别来说,前面也已经讲过悭吝等。巴利
Akusalā kilesā ca, paṭipakkhā abhedato; Bhedato pana pubbepi, vuttā macchariyādayo.
总的来说,一切不善法和一切烦恼都是这些(波罗蜜)的对立面。具体来说,应当知道就是前面所说的悭吝等。
此外,从布施的施者、受者和果报来看:布施因为具备无贪、无嗔、无痴的功德,所以是贪嗔痴的对治;戒因为远离身、语、意三方面的歪曲,所以是贪等的对治;出离因为避免沉溺欲乐、伤害他人和折磨自己,所以是贪等三种过失的对治;慧因为能使贪等变得盲目,又能使智慧不盲目,所以是贪等的对治;精进因为以不退缩、不散乱的如理努力而行,所以是贪等的对治;忍耐因为能忍受可意和不可意(以及空性),所以是贪等的对治;真实因为无论他人对自己有利益还是有损害,都能如实而行,所以是贪等的对治;决意因为不被世间法所压倒,对自己所受持的资具不动摇,所以是贪等的对治;慈因为远离诸盖障,所以是贪等的对治;舍因为能破除对可意和不可意的贪恋与嗔恨,平等而行,所以是贪等的对治。应当这样理解。巴利
Avisesena hi sabbepi akusalā dhammā, sabbepi kilesā ca etāsaṃ paṭipakkhā. Visesena pana pubbe vuttā macchariyādayoti veditabbā. Apica deyyapaṭiggāhakadānaphalesu alobhādosāmohaguṇayogato lobhadosamohapaṭipakkhaṃ dānaṃ, kāyādidosattayavaṅkāpagamato lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ sīlaṃ, kāmasukhaparūpaghātaattakilamathaparivajjanato dosattayapaṭipakkhaṃ nekkhammaṃ, lobhādīnaṃ andhīkaraṇato, ñāṇassa ca anandhīkaraṇato lobhādipaṭipakkhā paññā, alīnānuddhatañāyārambhavasena lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ vīriyaṃ, iṭṭhāniṭṭhasuññatānaṃ khamanato lobhādipaṭipakkhā khanti, satipi paresaṃ upakāre, apakāre ca yathābhūtappavattiyā lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ saccaṃ, lokadhamme abhibhuyya yathāsamādinnesu sambhāresu acalanato lobhādipaṭipakkhaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, nīvaraṇavivekato lobhādipaṭipakkhā mettā, iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu anunayapaṭighaviddhaṃsanato, samappavattito ca lobhādipaṭipakkhā upekkhāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
布施等行相本身,以种种方式被生起。
应当知道,这就是在圆满波罗蜜的次第中的修行。巴利
Dānākārādayo eva, uppāditā anekadhā; Paṭipattīti viññeyyā, pāramīpūraṇakkame.
布施波罗蜜的修行,首先是通过舍弃能带来舒适的身体与生命、消除他人的恐惧、以及开示正法,以种种方式饶益众生。其中,根据所施之物,布施分为三种:财物施、无畏施、法施。对菩萨来说,所施之物分为内物和外物两种。外物有十种:食物、饮料、衣服、车乘、花鬘、香、涂香、床具、住所、灯明。这些食物等,又按嚼食、啖食等类别而有多种。同样,从色所缘到法所缘,按所缘分为六种;色所缘等又按青色等类别而有多种。同样,按摩尼、金、银、珍珠、珊瑚等,田地、宅地、园林等,以及奴仆、婢女、牛、水牛等种种物品资具,也有多种类别。巴利
Dānapāramiyā hi tāva sukhūpakaraṇasarīrajīvitapariccāgena, bhayāpanayanena, dhammopadesena ca bahudhā sattānaṃ anuggahakaraṇaṃ paṭipatti. Tattha āmisadānaṃ abhayadānaṃ dhammadānanti dātabbavatthuvasena tividhaṃ dānaṃ. Tesu bodhisattassa dātabbavatthu ajjhattikaṃ, bāhiranti duvidhaṃ. Tattha bāhiraṃ annaṃ pānaṃ vatthaṃ yānaṃ mālā gandhaṃ vilepanaṃ seyyā āvasathaṃ padīpeyyanti dasavidhaṃ. Annādīnaṃ khādanīyabhojanīyādivibhāgena anekavidhañca. Tathā rūpārammaṇaṃ yāva dhammārammaṇanti ārammaṇato chabbidhaṃ. Rūpārammaṇādīnañca nīlādivibhāgena anekavidhaṃ. Tathā maṇikanakarajatamuttāpavāḷādikhettavatthuārāmādi dāsīdāsagomahiṃsādinānāvidhavatthūpakaraṇavasena anekavidhaṃ.
在这里,大士布施外物时,自己心里清楚:“谁需要什么,就给他什么;布施的人也知道他需要它。”所以即使没人来求,他也会布施,何况有人来求呢。他以放舍的心布施,不是以不舍的心。他布施足够的东西,不是不够的东西。有可布施的东西时,他不为了得到回报而布施;没有可布施的东西、但有足够的东西时,他就分给值得分享的人。他不布施会伤害别人的刀、毒、麻醉品之类的东西,也不布施带来无益和放逸的玩具;对生病的乞求者,他不布施不适宜的饮料食物等,也不布施没有限量的,而是布施适量且适宜的。巴利
Tattha mahāpuriso bāhiraṃ vatthuṃ dento ‘‘yo yena atthiko, taṃ tasseva deti. Dento ca tassa atthiko’’ti sayameva jānanto ayācitopi deti, pageva yācito. Muttacāgo deti, no amuttacāgo. Pariyattaṃ deti, no apariyattaṃ. Sati deyyadhamme paccupakārasannissito na deti, asati deyyadhamme, pariyatte ca saṃvibhāgārahaṃ vibhajati. Na ca deti parūpaghātāvahaṃ satthavisamajjādikaṃ, nāpi kīḷanakaṃ, yaṃ anatthupasaṃhitaṃ, pamādāvahañca, na ca gilānassa yācakassa pānabhojanādiasappāyaṃ, pamāṇarahitaṃ vā deti, pamāṇayuttaṃ pana sappāyameva deti.
同样地,当有人乞求时,他给在家人适合在家人的东西,给出家人适合出家人的东西。布施时,他不让父母、亲戚、血亲、朋友、同伴、子女、妻子、奴仆、佣人中的任何一个人受到伤害。他不会先答应给殊胜的施物,后来却给粗劣的。他不会为了利养、恭敬、名声而布施,不会为了回报而布施,除了为了正等觉之外,不会期望果报而布施。他也不会因为被乞求,或者因为厌恶施物才布施。对于不守戒的乞求者,即使他们辱骂、诽谤,他也不会把布施丢弃不做,反而以清净的信心、带着悲悯,恭敬地布施。他不会出于好奇或迷信吉兆而布施,而是因为深信业果才布施。他也不会用侍奉等手段让乞求者感到疲惫后才布施,而是不让他们劳累就布施。他不会怀着欺骗他人或挑拨离间的意图而布施,而是以没有染污的心布施。他也不会说粗恶的话、皱着眉头布施,而是说亲切的话、先开口问候、面带微笑地布施。对于任何施物,如果因为它殊胜可爱、或者因为长久熟悉、或者因为贪著的本性,而使得贪欲变得特别强烈,菩萨一旦察觉,就立刻把它去除,甚至主动去寻找乞求者来布施。如果施物微少,而乞求者已经来到面前,他不会犹豫考虑,甚至会自己跑着去布施,以此恭敬乞求者,就像那位不求名声的智者一样。大士在被乞求自己的子女、妻子、奴仆、佣人时,如果他们还没有被安抚好、正心生忧恼,他不会布施给乞求者;只有当他们被妥善安抚、心生欢喜之后,他才布施。布施时,如果知道对方是夜叉、罗刹、毗舍遮等,或者是从事残酷行业的人,他不会布施。同样地,他也不会把王国布施给这类人。对于那些行为对世间有害、带来痛苦、造成不利的人,他不布施;而对于那些如法、以法治理世间的人,他才把王国布施给他们。以上应当了知的是关于外物布施的实践。巴利
Tathā yācito gahaṭṭhānaṃ gahaṭṭhānucchavikaṃ deti, pabbajitānaṃ pabbajitānucchavikaṃ deti. Mātāpitaro ñātisālohitā mittāmaccā puttadāradāsakammakarāti etesu kassaci pīḷaṃ ajanento deti, na ca uḷāraṃ deyyadhammaṃ paṭijānitvā lūkhaṃ deti, na ca lābhasakkārasilokasannissito deti, na ca paccupakārasannissito deti, na ca phalapāṭikaṅkhī deti aññatra sammāsambodhiyā, na ca yācito, deyyadhammaṃ vā jigucchanto deti, na ca asaññatānaṃ yācakānaṃ akkosakaparibhāsakānampi apaviddhā dānaṃ deti, aññadatthu pasannacitto anukampanto sakkaccameva deti, na ca kotūhalamaṅgaliko hutvā deti, kammaphalameva pana saddahanto deti, nāpi yācake payirupāsanādīhi saṃkilametvā deti, aparikilamento eva pana deti, na ca paresaṃ vañcanādhippāyo, bhedādhippāyo vā dānaṃ deti, asaṃkiliṭṭhacittova deti, nāpi pharusavāco bhākuṭikamukho dānaṃ deti, piyavādī ca pana pubbabhāsī mihitasitavacano hutvā deti, yasmiṃ ce deyyadhamme uḷāramanuññatāya vā ciraparicayena vā gedhasabhāvatāya vā lobhadhammo adhimatto hoti, jānanto bodhisatto taṃ khippameva paṭivinodayitvā yācake pariyesetvāpi deti, yañca deyyavatthu parittaṃ, yācakopi paccupaṭṭhito, taṃ acintetvā api attānaṃ dhāvitvā dento yācakaṃ sammāneti yathā taṃ akittipaṇḍito, na ca mahāpuriso attano puttadāradāsakammakaraporise yācito te asaññāpite domanassappatte yācakānaṃ deti, sammadeva pana saññāpite somanassappatte deti, dento ca yakkharakkhasapisācādīnaṃ vā manussānaṃ vā kurūrakammantānaṃ jānanto na deti, tathā rajjampi tādisānaṃ na deti, ye lokassa ahitāya dukkhāya anatthāya paṭipajjanti, ye pana dhammikā dhammena lokaṃ pālenti, tesaṃ rajjadānaṃ deti. Evaṃ tāva bāhiradāne paṭipatti veditabbā.
内在之物的布施也应当从两个方面来理解。怎样理解呢?就像有人为了衣食而把自己交给别人,进入被支配的状态,沦为奴仆;同样,大士为了正觉,以无所贪著的心,希望给众生带来无上的利益与安乐,想要圆满自己的布施波罗蜜,而把自己交给别人,进入被支配的状态,成为可随意使唤的人。对于需要手、脚、眼睛等肢体器官的人,他毫不动摇、毫不退缩地施与,对此不贪著,不退缩,就像对外在之物一样。同样,大士以两种方式舍弃外在之物:或者让乞求者随意享用,满足他们的心愿;或者为了成就自己的自在。其中,他以彻底放舍之心这样说:“我要以无执著的状态证得正觉。”内在之物的布施也应当这样理解。巴利
Ajjhattikadānampi dvīhākārehi veditabbaṃ. Kathaṃ? Yathā nāma koci puriso ghāsacchādanahetu attānaṃ parassa nissajjati, vidheyyabhāvaṃ upagacchati dāsabyaṃ, evameva mahāpuriso sambodhihetu nirāmisacitto sattānaṃ anuttaraṃ hitasukhaṃ icchanto attano dānapāramiṃ paripūretukāmo attānaṃ parassa nissajjati, vidheyyabhāvaṃ upagacchati yathākāmakaraṇīyataṃ, karacaraṇanayanādiaṅgapaccaṅgaṃ tena tena atthikānaṃ akampito alīno anuppadeti, na tattha sajjati, na saṅkocaṃ āpajjati yathā taṃ bāhiravatthusmiṃ. Tathā hi mahāpuriso dvīhākārehi bāhiravatthuṃ pariccajati yathāsukhaṃ paribhogāya vā yācakānaṃ, tesaṃ manorathaṃ pūrento attano vasībhāvāya vā. Tattha sabbena sabbaṃ muttacāgo evamāha ‘‘nissaṅgabhāvenāhaṃ sambodhiṃ pāpuṇissāmī’’ti, evaṃ ajjhattikavatthusmimpi veditabbaṃ.
在这里,如果布施自己身上的东西能真正只给乞求者带来利益,他就布施,否则不布施。大士明知魔罗或魔众天神怀着伤害的意图,也不会把自己的身体或肢体布施给他们,心想:“别让他们因此造下恶业。”就像对魔众天神一样,对被他附身的人他也不布施,对疯子也不布施。但对其他人,只要有人来乞求,他就立刻布施,因为这样的乞求极其难得,这样的布施也极其难行。巴利
Tattha yaṃ ajjhattikavatthu diyyamānaṃ yācakassa ekanteneva hitāya saṃvattati, taṃ deti, na itaraṃ. Na ca mahāpuriso mārassa, mārakāyikānaṃ vā devatānaṃ vihiṃsādhippāyānaṃ attano attabhāvaṃ , aṅgapaccaṅgāni vā jānamāno deti ‘‘mā tesaṃ anattho ahosī’’ti. Yathā ca mārakāyikānaṃ, evaṃ tehi anvāviṭṭhānampi na deti, nāpi ummattakānaṃ, itaresaṃ pana yāciyamāno samanantarameva deti tādisāya yācanāya dullabhabhāvato, tādisassa ca dānassa dukkarabhāvato.
无畏施则是:当众生面临来自国王、盗贼、火、水、怨敌、狮虎等猛兽、龙、夜叉、罗刹、毕舍遮等的恐惧时,以从这些恐惧中救护他们的方式来进行布施。巴利
Abhayadānaṃ pana rājato corato aggito udakato verīpuggalato sīhabyagghādivāḷamigato nāgayakkharakkhasapisācādito sattānaṃ bhaye paccupaṭṭhite tato parittāṇabhāvena dātabbaṃ.
法施则是心无杂染的人所做的没有颠倒的佛法开示。他的教导按现世、来世和究竟义来说,确实能带来利益,借此让还没进入教法的人进入,让已经进入的人走向成熟。这里的方法是:简略来说,先是布施论、戒论、生天论、诸欲的过患、杂染与污秽,以及出离的功德。详细来说,对于心志倾向于声闻菩提的人,则依次第称扬皈依、戒的防护、守护根门、饮食知节量、勤修不眠、七种正法,在三十八种所缘中以修业处的方式修止,在色等起始处依适当方式安住于观,并以清净道的修行正确把握,成就三明、六通、四无碍解和声闻菩提等功德,随其所宜在各处令其安立并净化。同样,对于心志倾向于独觉菩提和正等菩提的人,则随其所宜,通过称扬布施等波罗蜜的自性、作用、特相等,在三种阶段中显示诸佛的大威神力,令其在二乘中安立并净化。大士就是这样对众生行法施。巴利
Dhammadānaṃ pana asaṃkiliṭṭhacittassa aviparītadhammadesanā. Opāyiko hi tassa upadeso diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthavasena, yena sāsane anotiṇṇānaṃ avatāraṇaṃ otiṇṇānaṃ paripācanaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ nayo – saṅkhepato tāva dānakathā sīlakathā saggakathā kāmānaṃ ādīnavo saṃkileso okāro ca nekkhamme ānisaṃso. Vitthārato pana sāvakabodhiyaṃ adhimuttacittānaṃ saraṇagamanaṃ, sīlasaṃvaro, indriyesu guttadvāratā, bhojane mattaññutā, jāgariyānuyogo, satta saddhammā, aṭṭhatiṃsāya ārammaṇesu kammakaraṇavasena samathānuyogo, rūpamukhādīsu vipassanābhinivesesu yathārahaṃ abhinivesanamukhena vipassanānuyogo, tathā visuddhipaṭipadāya sammattagahaṇaṃ, tisso vijjā, cha abhiññā, catasso paṭisambhidā, sāvakabodhīti etesaṃ guṇasaṃkittanavasena yathārahaṃ tattha tattha patiṭṭhāpanā, pariyodapanā ca. Tathā paccekabodhiyaṃ, sammāsambodhiyañca adhimuttacittānaṃ yathārahaṃ dānādipāramīnaṃ sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇādisaṃkittanamukhena tīsupi avatthābhedesu tesaṃ buddhānaṃ mahānubhāvatāvibhāvanena yānadvaye patiṭṭhāpanā, pariyodapanā ca. Evaṃ mahāpuriso sattānaṃ dhammadānaṃ deti.
大士这样行财物布施时,心里想:“愿我通过这份布施,让众生获得寿命、容貌、安乐、力量、辩才等种种圆满,以及殊胜可爱的最高果报。”于是布施食物。为了让众生止息欲贪烦恼的干渴,他布施饮品。为了成就金色的肤色,以及惭与愧这两种庄严,他布施衣服。为了成就神变和涅槃之乐,他布施车乘。为了成就戒香,他布施香料。为了成就佛陀功德的光辉,他布施花鬘和涂香。为了成就菩提座,他布施座位。为了成就如来的卧具,他布施床铺。为了成就皈依之处,他布施住所。为了获得五眼,他布施灯烛。巴利
Tathā mahāpuriso āmisadānaṃ dento ‘‘imināhaṃ dānena sattānaṃ āyuvaṇṇasukhabalapaṭibhānādisampattiñca ramaṇīyaṃ aggaphalasampattiñca nipphādeyya’’nti annaṃ deti, tathā sattānaṃ kāmakilesapipāsavūpasamāya pānaṃ deti, tathā suvaṇṇavaṇṇatāya, hirottappālaṅkārassa ca nipphattiyā vatthāni deti, tathā iddhividhassa ceva nibbānasukhassa ca nipphattiyā yānaṃ deti, tathā sīlagandhanipphattiyā gandhaṃ deti, tathā buddhaguṇasobhānipphattiyā mālāvilepanaṃ deti, tathā bodhimaṇḍāsananipphattiyā āsanaṃ deti, tathāgataseyyanipphattiyā seyyaṃ deti, saraṇabhāvanipphattiyā āvasathaṃ deti, pañcacakkhupaṭilābhāya padīpeyyaṃ deti.
为了成就一寻身光,他布施色施;为了成就梵音,他布施声施;为了成为一切世间所喜爱,他布施味施;为了成就佛陀的细软之身,他布施触施;为了成就无老无死,他布施药施;为了令众生从烦恼的奴役中解脱,他布施解放奴仆施;为了对正法生起喜乐,他布施无过失的游戏娱乐之因施;为了令一切众生以圣洁的出生成为自己的儿子,他布施子施;为了成为一切世间的依怙,他布施妻施;为了成就妙相具足,他布施金、摩尼、珍珠、珊瑚等施;为了成就随形好具足,他布施种种装饰品施;为了证得正法宝藏,他布施财富宝藏施;为了成就法王之位,他布施王位施;为了成就布施等功德,他布施园林、苑囿等林园施;为了以轮相之足走向菩提座,他布施足施;为了给予众生渡过四瀑流的正法之手,他布施手施;为了获得信根等,他布施耳、鼻等施;为了获得一切眼,他布施眼施;心想“愿我此身,在见、闻、忆念、承事等一切时中,能为一切众生带来利益与安乐,并为一切世间所依止”,他布施肉、血等施;心想“愿我成为一切世间之最上者”,他布施头顶施。巴利
Byāmappabhānipphattiyā rūpadānaṃ deti, brahmassaranipphattiyā saddadānaṃ deti, sabbalokassa piyabhāvāya rasadānaṃ deti, buddhasukhumālabhāvāya phoṭṭhabbadānaṃ deti, ajarāmaraṇabhāvāya bhesajjadānaṃ deti, kilesadāsabyavimocanatthaṃ dāsānaṃ bhujissatādānaṃ deti, saddhammābhiratiyā anavajjakhiḍḍāratihetudānaṃ deti, sabbepi satte ariyāya jātiyā attano puttabhāvūpanayanāya puttadānaṃ deti, sakalassāpi lokassa patibhāvūpagamanāya dāradānaṃ deti, subhalakkhaṇasampattiyā suvaṇṇamaṇimuttāpavāḷādidānaṃ, anubyañjanasampattiyā nānāvidhavibhūsanadānaṃ, saddhammakosādhigamāya vittakosadānaṃ, dhammarājabhāvāya rajjadānaṃ, dānādisampattiyā ārāmuyyānādivanadānaṃ, cakkaṅkitehi pādehi bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamanāya caraṇadānaṃ, caturoghanittharaṇe sattānaṃ saddhammahatthadānatthaṃ hatthadānaṃ, saddhindriyādipaṭilābhāya kaṇṇanāsādidānaṃ, samantacakkhupaṭilābhāya cakkhudānaṃ, ‘‘dassanasavanānussaraṇapāricariyādīsu sabbakālaṃ sabbasattānaṃ hitasukhāvaho sabbalokena ca upajīvitabbo me kāyo bhaveyyā’’ti maṃsalohitādidānaṃ. ‘‘Sabbalokuttamo bhaveyya’’nti uttamaṅgadānaṃ deti.
他这样布施时,不是出于不正当的谋生方式而给,不是通过伤害别人而给,不是因为害怕而给,不是因为羞愧而给,不是因为对受施者生气而给,不是明明有精致的东西却给粗糙的,不是靠夸耀自己而给,不是靠贬低别人而给,不是冲着果报而给,不是因为讨厌乞讨者而给,不是随随便便漫不经心地给;而是恭恭敬敬地给,亲手给,按时给,怀着敬意给,不分彼此地给,在早中晚三个时段都满心欢喜地给。而且给了之后不会后悔,不会因为对方是受施者就摆出傲慢或轻慢的态度,对受施者说话亲切,懂得感恩、乐于布施,连身边的财物一起给出去。因为他布施食物时,心里想的是“我要连带着其他东西一起给”,于是就连同衣服等一起给;同样,布施衣服时,心里想的是“我要连带着其他东西一起给”,于是就连同食物等一起给。布施饮品等也是同样的道理。同样,布施色尘时,也把其他所缘作为它的配套一起给;其余的布施也都是如此。巴利
Evaṃ dadanto ca na anesanāya deti, na paropaghātena, na bhayena, na lajjāya, na dakkhiṇeyyarosanena, na paṇīte sati lūkhaṃ, na attukkaṃsanena, na paravambhanena, na phalābhikaṅkhāya, na yācakajigucchāya, na acittīkārena, atha kho sakkaccaṃ deti, sahatthena deti, kālena deti, cittiṃ katvā deti, avibhāgena deti, tīsu kālesu somanassiko deti, tato eva ca datvā na pacchānutāpī hoti, na paṭiggāhakavasena mānāvamānaṃ karoti, paṭiggāhakānaṃ piyasamudācāro hoti vadaññū yācayogo saparivāradāyako. Annadānañhi dento ‘‘taṃ saparivāraṃ katvā dassāmī’’ti vatthādīhi saddhiṃ deti, tathā vatthadānaṃ dento ‘‘taṃ saparivāraṃ katvā dassāmī’’ti annādīhi saddhiṃ deti. Pānadānādīsupi eseva nayo, tathā rūpadānaṃ dento itarārammaṇānipi tassa parivāraṃ katvā deti, evaṃ sesesupi.
在这里,所谓色施,就是拿到青、黄、红、白等颜色的花、布、矿物等任何一种东西后,因为执取颜色的缘故而把它折起来,心里想:“我要行色施,这是我的色施”,然后把布施建立在那样的应受供养者身上——这就叫作色施。巴利
Tattha rūpadānaṃ nāma nīlapītalohitodātādivaṇṇādīsu pupphavatthadhātūsu aññataraṃ labhitvā rūpavasena ābhujitvā ‘‘rūpadānaṃ dassāmi, rūpadānaṃ mayha’’nti cintetvā tādise dakkhiṇeyye dānaṃ patiṭṭhāpeti, etaṃ rūpadānaṃ nāma.
声施则要依据鼓声等来理解。在这里,声音不像球茎、根块那样能被拔取出来,也不像青莲花束那样能被拿在手里送人;但如果依托某个具体物品来布施,那就叫作声施。因此,当有人想“我要行声施”,用鼓、铙钹等某种乐器向三宝献供,或让别人献供;或者想“我要行声施,这是我的声施”而让人安置鼓等;或者向说法师布施润喉的药、油、糖蜜等;或者自己宣告来听法、唱诵偈颂、说法、作亲近座谈、作随喜开示,或让别人做这些——那时候,就叫作声施。巴利
Saddadānaṃ pana bherīsaddādivasena veditabbaṃ. Tattha saddaṃ kandamūlāni viya uppāṭetvā, nīluppalahatthakaṃ viya ca hatthe ṭhapetvā dātuṃ na sakkoti, savatthukaṃ pana katvā dadanto saddadānaṃ deti nāma, tasmā yadā ‘‘saddadānaṃ dassāmī’’ti bherīmudiṅgādīsu aññatarena tūriyena tiṇṇaṃ ratanānaṃ upahāraṃ karoti, kāreti ca, ‘‘saddadānaṃ dassāmi, saddadānaṃ me’’ti bherīādīni ṭhapāpeti, dhammakathikānaṃ pana saddabhesajjaṃ, telaphāṇitādīni ca deti, dhammassavanaṃ ghoseti, sarabhaññaṃ bhaṇati, dhammakathaṃ katheti, upanisinnakathaṃ, anumodanakathañca karoti, kāreti ca, tadā saddadānaṃ nāma hoti.
同样地,在根香等香物中,得到任何一种令人贪著的香物,或者只是研磨好的香粉等任何香,然后以香为缘而作意:“我要行香施,这是我的香施”,于是向佛宝等作供养,也让人作供养;或者为了供香而施舍沉香、旃檀等有香之物,这就是香施。巴利
Tathā mūlagandhādīsu aññataraṃ rajanīyaṃ gandhavatthuṃ, pisitameva vā gandhaṃ yaṃ kiñci labhitvā gandhavasena ābhujitvā ‘‘gandhadānaṃ dassāmi, gandhadānaṃ mayha’’nti buddharatanādīnaṃ pūjaṃ karoti, kāreti ca, gandhapūjanatthāya agarucandanādike gandhavatthuke pariccajati, idaṃ gandhadānaṃ.
同样地,在根味等当中,得到任何一种令人贪著的味物之后,以味为缘而作意,心想“我要作味施,这是我的味施”,然后布施给应受供养的人;或者把那味物本身,或者牛等其他东西施舍出去,这就是味施。巴利
Tathā mūlarasādīsu yaṃ kiñci rajanīyaṃ rasavatthuṃ labhitvā rasavasena ābhujitvā ‘‘rasadānaṃ dassāmi, rasadānaṃ mayha’’nti dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ deti, rasavatthumeva vā aññaṃ gavādikaṃ pariccajati, idaṃ rasadānaṃ.
同样,触施也要从床、椅等,以及铺具、盖物等来理解。当拿到床、椅、坐垫、枕头之类,或者下衣、上衣之类,触感舒适、令人贪爱、没有过失的触物之后,以触为缘作意,心想“我要作触施,这是我的触施”,而布施给应供者;拿到所说的触物之后施舍出去,这就是触施。巴利
Tathā phoṭṭhabbadānaṃ mañcapīṭhādivasena, attharaṇapāvuraṇādivasena ca veditabbaṃ. Yadā hi mañcapīṭhabhisibibbohanādikaṃ, nivāsanapārupanādikaṃ vā sukhasamphassaṃ rajanīyaṃ anavajjaṃ phoṭṭhabbavatthuṃ labhitvā phoṭṭhabbavasena ābhujitvā ‘‘phoṭṭhabbadānaṃ dassāmi, phoṭṭhabbadānaṃ mayha’’nti dakkhiṇeyyānaṃ deti. Yathāvuttaṃ phoṭṭhabbavatthuṃ labhitvā pariccajati, etaṃ phoṭṭhabbadānaṃ.
法施则因为是以法为所缘,所以要从营养、饮品和生命这三方面来理解。在营养等当中,得到某种可意的法物后,以法为所缘作意,心想“我要作法施,这是我的法施”,于是布施酥油、生酥等营养施,布施芒果饮等八种饮施;作意“这是命施”,而布施签饭、半月食等;为被病苦逼恼的病人延请医生,让人解开渔网,破坏鱼笼,毁坏鸟笼,让被捆绑的众生从束缚中解脱;让人敲响禁止杀生的大鼓;还为保护众生的生命而亲自做或让人做其他这类事情——这就叫作法施。巴利
Dhammadānaṃ pana dhammārammaṇassa adhippetattā ojāpānajīvitavasena veditabbaṃ. Ojādīsu hi aññataraṃ rajanīyaṃ dhammavatthuṃ labhitvā dhammārammaṇavasena ābhujitvā ‘‘dhammadānaṃ dassāmi, dhammadānaṃ mayha’’nti sappinavanītādi ojadānaṃ deti, ambapānādiaṭṭhavidhaṃ pānadānaṃ deti, jīvitadānanti ābhujitvā salākabhattapakkhikabhattādīni deti. Aphāsukabhāvena abhibhūtānaṃ byādhikānaṃ vejjaṃ paṭṭhapeti, jālaṃ phālāpeti, kumīnaṃ viddhaṃsāpeti, sakuṇapañjaraṃ viddhaṃsāpeti, bandhanena baddhānaṃ sattānaṃ bandhanamokkhaṃ kāreti, māghātabheriṃ carāpeti, aññānipi sattānaṃ jīvitaparittāṇatthaṃ evarūpāni kammāni karoti, kārāpeti ca, idaṃ dhammadānaṃ nāma.
他把这一切如上所说的布施成就,都回向给整个世间的利益与安乐,也回向给自己不动摇的解脱、不灭的意愿、不灭的精进、不灭的定、不灭的辩才、不灭的禅那,以及不灭的正等觉。而正在修习这布施波罗蜜的大士,应当在生命上建立起无常想;同样,对财物应当作意它们是众人共有的;对众生则应当恒常不断地建立起大悲。这样一来,当他从财物中获取应当获取的精髓时,就像从着火的房子里取出全部财产、也把自己带出来一样,什么都不留下,在哪里都不作分别,只是毫无牵挂地彻底施舍出去。这就是布施波罗蜜的修行次第。巴利
Sabbampetaṃ yathāvuttadānasampadaṃ sakalalokahitasukhāya pariṇāmeti attano ca akuppāya vimuttiyā aparikkhayassa chandassa aparikkhayassa vīriyassa aparikkhayassa samādhissa aparikkhayassa paṭibhānassa aparikkhayassa jhānassa aparikkhayāya sammāsambodhiyā pariṇāmeti , imañca dānapāramiṃ paṭipajjantena mahāsattena jīvite aniccasaññā paccupaṭṭhapetabbā. Tathā bhogesu, bahusādhāraṇatā ca nesaṃ manasi kātabbā, sattesu ca mahākaruṇā satataṃ samitaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetabbā. Evañhi bhogehi gahetabbasāraṃ gaṇhanto ādittato viya agārato sabbaṃ sāpateyyaṃ, attānañca bahi nīharanto na kiñci seseti, na katthaci vibhāgaṃ karoti, aññadatthu nirapekkho nissajjati eva. Ayaṃ tāva dānapāramiyā paṭipattikkamo.
戒波罗蜜的修行次第是这样的:因为想要用一切智者的戒德庄严来庄严众生的大士,首先必须从最初开始清净自己的戒。其中,戒通过四种方式得到清净:意乐的清净、受持的清净、不违犯的清净,以及违犯后加以显露的清净。由于意乐清净,有些人以自己为主导,本性厌恶恶行,在内心中建立起惭,行为极为清净;同样,由于从他人处受持,有些人以世间为主导,对恶行感到恐惧,建立起愧,行为极为清净。这样,这两种人都因不违犯而安住于戒中。然而,有时因为失去正念,戒可能会出现破损等情况,这时就依靠上述具足的惭与愧,迅速通过出罪等方式使其恢复清净。巴利
Sīlapāramiyā pana ayaṃ paṭipattikkamo – yasmā sabbaññusīlālaṅkārehi satte alaṅkaritukāmena mahāpurisena ādito attano eva tāva sīlaṃ visodhetabbaṃ. Tattha catūhākārehi sīlaṃ visujjhati ajjhāsayavisuddhito, samādānato, avītikkamanato, sati vītikkame puna pākaṭīkaraṇato ca. Visuddhāsayatāya hi ekacco attādhipati hutvā pāpajigucchanasabhāvo ajjhattaṃ hiridhammaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā suparisuddhasamācāro hoti, tathā parato samādāne sati ekacco lokādhipati hutvā pāpato uttasanto ottappadhammaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā suparisuddhasamācāro hoti, iti ubhayathāpi ete avītikkamanato sīle patiṭṭhahanti. Atha ca pana kadāci satisammosena sīlassa khaṇḍādibhāvo siyā, tāyayeva yathāvuttāya hirottappasampattiyā khippameva naṃ vuṭṭhānādinā paṭipākatikaṃ karontīti.
这个戒有两种:禁止戒和行持戒。其中,菩萨在禁止戒方面的修行次第是这样的:他应当对一切众生怀有悲愍之心,以至于即使在梦中也不会生起嗔恨;由于远离侵占他人财物,他不应像碰毒蛇一样去执取他人的东西。如果他是出家人,就远离非梵行,断除七种淫欲的结合,更不用说与别人的妻子行淫了。如果是在家人,对别人的妻子也始终不起恶念。说话时,只说真实、有益、可爱、适度且适时的法语。在任何情况下都不贪求,没有嗔恨心,没有颠倒的见解,并且具备业自作智。对于和合相处、正行的人,他有坚定的信仰和深厚的爱意。巴利
Tayidaṃ sīlaṃ vārittaṃ cārittanti duvidhaṃ. Tatthāyaṃ bodhisattassa vārittasīle paṭipattikkamo – tena sabbasattesu tathā dayāpannacittena bhavitabbaṃ, yathā supinantenapi na āghāto uppajjeyya, parūpakaraṇaviratatāya parasantako alagaddo viya na parāmasitabbo. Sace pabbajito hoti, abrahmacariyatopi ārācārī hoti sattavidhamethunasaṃyogavirato, pageva paradāragamanato. Gahaṭṭho samāno paresaṃ dāresu sadā pāpakaṃ cittampi na uppādeti. Kathento saccaṃ hitaṃ piyaṃ parimitameva ca kālena dhammiṃ kathaṃ bhāsitā hoti. Sabbattha anabhijjhālu , abyāpannacitto, aviparītadassano kammassakatāñāṇena ca samannāgato. Samaggatesu sammāpaṭipannesu niviṭṭhasaddho hoti niviṭṭhapemoti.
就这样,他远离了作为四恶趣轮回之苦根本的不善业道和不善法,立足于作为天界与解脱根本的善业道和善法。由于这位大士意乐清净、修行精勤,众生所期望的、与利益安乐相应的心愿都迅速迅速地实现,圆满种种波罗蜜。他确实就是这样的人。其中,由于远离杀生,他给一切众生无畏,毫不费力就成就慈心修习,获得十一种慈心的功德:少病、少恼、长寿、多乐,获得殊胜相好,并断除嗔恚的习气。同样,由于远离不与取,他获得盗贼等无法共夺的财富,不被他人猜疑,为人所爱、可意、可信赖,在种种生命成就中心不贪著,乐于布施,并断除贪欲的习气。由于远离非梵行,他成为无贪者,身心寂静,为众生所爱、可意、不被猜疑,善美的名声远扬,对女人心不贪著,意乐无贪,多修出离,获得殊胜相好,并断除贪欲的习气。巴利
Iti caturāpāyavaṭṭadukkhānaṃ pathabhūtehi akusalakammapathehi, akusaladhammehi ca oramitvā saggamokkhānaṃ pathabhūtesu kusalakammapathesu, kusaladhammesu ca patiṭṭhitassa mahāpurisassa parisuddhāsayapayogato yathābhipatthitā sattānaṃ hitasukhūpasañhitā manorathā sīghaṃ sīghaṃ abhinipphajjanti, pāramiyo paripūrenti. Evaṃbhūto hi ayaṃ. Tattha hiṃsānivattiyā sabbasattānaṃ abhayadānaṃ deti, appakasireneva mettābhāvanaṃ sampādeti, ekādasa mettānisaṃse adhigacchati, appābādho hoti appātaṅko, dīghāyuko sukhabahulo, lakkhaṇavisese pāpuṇāti, dosavāsanañca samucchindati. Tathā adinnādānanivattiyā corādīhi asādhāraṇe bhoge adhigacchati, parehi anāsaṅkanīyo, piyo, manāpo, vissāsanīyo, bhavasampattīsu alaggacitto pariccāgasīlo, lobhavāsanañca samucchindati. Abrahmacariyanivattiyā alobho hoti santakāyacitto, sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo aparisaṅkanīyo, kalyāṇo cassa kittisaddo abbhuggacchati, alaggacitto hoti mātugāmesu aluddhāsayo, nekkhammabahulo, lakkhaṇavisese adhigacchati, lobhavāsanañca samucchindati.
因为远离妄语,他成为众生的衡量标准,值得信赖,言语可靠,所说的话能被接受;他受到天神喜爱,令人欢喜,口中散发芳香,身语行为都由正法守护;他获得种种殊胜的身相特征,并断除烦恼的习气。因为远离离间语,他不被他人的挑拨所分裂,拥有不可分裂的眷属,对正法有不可破坏的信心,是坚定的朋友;即使对过去生中相识的众生,也一向令人喜爱,杂染很少。因为远离粗恶语,他受到众生喜爱,令人欢喜,性情柔和,言语甜美,受人尊重,而且他的声音生来就具备八种支分。因为远离无意义的闲谈,他受到众生喜爱,令人欢喜,也受人敬重,言语能被接受,说话有节制,具有大势力、大威德,善于以应机而起的辩才解答问题,并且在佛的境界中,能以一句话为众多语言、众多众生的众多问题作出解答。巴利
Musāvādanivattiyā sattānaṃ pamāṇabhūto hoti paccayiko theto ādeyyavacano devatānaṃ piyo manāpo surabhigandhamukho asaddhammārakkhitakāyavacīsamācāro, lakkhaṇavisese adhigacchati, kilesavāsanañca samucchindati. Pesuññanivattiyā parūpakkamehi abhejjakāyo hoti abhejjaparivāro, saddhamme ca abhejjanakasaddho, daḷhamitto bhavantaraparicitānampi sattānaṃ ekantapiyo, asaṃkilesabahulo. Pharusavācānivattiyā sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo sukhasīlo madhuravacano sambhāvanīyo, aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato cassa saro nibbattati. Samphappalāpanivattiyā sattānaṃ piyo hoti manāpo, garubhāvanīyo ca, ādeyyavacano parimitālāpo, mahesakkho ca hoti mahānubhāvo, ṭhānuppattikena paṭibhānena pañhābyākaraṇakusalo, buddhabhūmiyañca ekāya eva vācāya anekabhāsānaṃ sattānaṃ anekesaṃ pañhānaṃ byākaraṇasamattho hoti.
由于没有贪求,他容易得到财物,对殊胜的财富也能生起欢喜心,受到刹帝利大户等人士的认可,不会被敌人战胜,不会遭遇根身残缺,而且无人能与他相比。由于没有嗔恨,他看起来令人喜爱,受到众生的尊重;又因为随喜他人的利益,他很轻松就能让众生生起信心;他性情不粗鲁,安住在慈心中,具有大威德、大势力。由于没有邪见,他能遇到善友,即使被人砍头也不造恶业;因为见到业果自作自受的道理,他不迷信吉凶预兆;他对正法的信心已经确立、扎根,相信如来的菩提;在中间阶段不会贪著,就像粪堆里的天鹅一样;他善于辨别三相,最终获得无碍智;而且在还没有达到菩提之前,他在各类众生中都是最殊胜的,能获得极其广大的成就。巴利
Anabhijjhālutāya akicchalābhī hoti, uḷāresu ca bhogesu ruciṃ paṭilabhati, khattiyamahāsālādīnaṃ sammato hoti, paccatthikehi anabhibhavanīyo, indriyavekallaṃ na pāpuṇāti, appaṭipuggalo ca hoti. Abyāpādena piyadassano hoti sattānaṃ sambhāvanīyo, parahitābhinanditāya ca satte appakasireneva pasādeti, alūkhasabhāvo ca hoti mettāvihārī, mahesakkho ca hoti mahānubhāvo. Micchādassanābhāvena kalyāṇe sahāye paṭilabhati, sīsacchedaṃ pāpuṇantopi pāpakammaṃ na karoti, kammassakatādassanato akotūhalamaṅgaliko ca hoti, saddhamme cassa saddhā patiṭṭhitā hoti mūlajātā, saddahati ca tathāgatānaṃ bodhiṃ, samayantaresu nābhiramati ukkāraṭṭhāne rājahaṃso viya, lakkhaṇattayavijānane kusalo hoti, ante ca anāvaraṇañāṇalābhī, yāva ca bodhiṃ na pāpuṇāti, tāva tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sattanikāye ukkaṭṭhukkaṭṭho hoti, uḷāruḷārasampattiyo pāpuṇāti.
应当这样生起深深的敬重:这个戒,是一切成就的根基,是一切佛陀功德的生起之处,是一切成佛之法的开端、前行、原因、入口和先导。然后,以念和正知的力量,在身体和语言的约束、感官的调伏、谋生方式的清净、以及受用生活用品方面,保持不放逸。要把利养、恭敬和名声看作像举剑的敌人一样,依照“像母鸡护蛋”等经文所说的方式,认真地把戒修习圆满。以上就是止持戒的修行次第。巴利
‘‘Iti hidaṃ sīlaṃ nāma sabbasampattīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ pabhavabhūmi, sabbabuddhakārakadhammānaṃ ādi caraṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ mukhaṃ pamukha’’nti bahumānaṃ uppādetvā kāyavacīsaṃyame, indriyadamane, ājīvapārisuddhiyaṃ, paccayaparibhoge ca satisampajaññabalena appamatto hoti, lābhasakkārasilokaṃ ukkhittāsikapaccatthikaṃ viya sallakkhetvā ‘‘kikīva aṇḍa’’ntiādinā (visuddhi. 1.7; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) vuttanayena sakkaccaṃ sīlaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Ayaṃ tāva vārittasīle paṭipattikkamo.
关于行持戒,修行方式应当这样理解:在这里,菩萨会适时对善知识以及值得尊敬的人行礼、起身迎接、合掌、恭敬致意,也会适时去侍奉他们;对生病的人,会亲自照顾身体,也会用言语去问候;听到好的说法,会称赞说得好;会赞扬有德者的功德;别人伤害自己时能忍耐;别人帮助过自己会一直记得;会随喜他人的福德;会把自己的福德回向给正等觉;任何时候在善法上都不放逸;发现自己的过失就当作过失,如实向同法修行的人发露;并且更进一步,把正行道真正圆满地修到底。巴利
Cārittasīle pana paṭipatti evaṃ veditabbā – idha bodhisatto kalyāṇamittānaṃ garuṭṭhāniyānaṃ abhivādanaṃ paccuṭṭhānaṃ añjalikammaṃ sāmīcikammaṃ kālena kālaṃ kattā hoti, tathā tesaṃ kālena kālaṃ upaṭṭhānaṃ kattā hoti, gilānānaṃ kāyaveyyāvaṭikaṃ, vācāya pucchanañca kattā hoti, subhāsitapadāni sutvā sādhukāraṃ kattā hoti, guṇavantānaṃ guṇe vaṇṇetā, paresaṃ apakāre khantā, upakāre anussaritā, puññāni anumoditā, attano puññāni sammāsambodhiyā pariṇāmetā, sabbakālaṃ appamādavihārī kusalesu dhammesu, sati accaye accayato disvā tādisānaṃ sahadhammikānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ āvi kattā, uttariñca sammāpaṭipattiṃ sammadeva paripūretā.
同样地,对于适合自己、能带来真实利益、应当为众生做的事,他不懈怠,以友善的态度去做。当众生遭遇疾病等痛苦时,他随宜给予对治;当有人遭遇亲属、财产等不幸时,他为其消除忧愁;他安住在救拔他人的本性中,对应当呵责的人依法呵责,目的只是让他们脱离不善、安立在善法中;对应当鼓励的人,也依法鼓励。他听闻过去那些大菩萨最殊胜、极其难行、具有不可思议威力的行迹——这些行迹为众生带来究竟的利益和安乐,也使他们的菩提资粮得以真正圆满成熟——听后不惊恐、不畏惧,心里这样想:“那些大人也是人,但他们通过逐步修学、圆满修习,达到了那样殊胜的威力成就,在菩提资粮上达到了最高圆满。所以我也应当依照戒等学处如实修行,通过这样的修行,我也将逐步圆满修学,最终决定证得究竟的果位。”他以信心为先导,不放弃精进,如实圆满地修持戒等学处。巴利
Tathā attano anurūpāsu atthūpasaṃhitāsu sattānaṃ itikattabbatāpurekkhāro analaso sahāyabhāvaṃ upagacchati. Uppannesu ca sattānaṃ byādhiādidukkhesu yathārahaṃ patikāravidhāyako, ñātibhogādibyasanapatitesu sokapanodano, ullumpanasabhāvāvaṭṭhito hutvā niggahārahānaṃ dhammeneva niggaṇhanako yāvadeva akusalā vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpanāya, paggahārahānaṃ dhammeneva paggaṇhanako. Yāni purimakānaṃ mahābodhisattānaṃ uḷāratamāni paramadukkarāni acinteyyānubhāvāni sattānaṃ ekantahitasukhāvahāni caritāni, yehi nesaṃ bodhisambhārā sammadeva paripākaṃ agamiṃsu, tāni sutvā anubbiggo anutrāso ‘‘tepi mahāpurisā manussā eva, anukkamena pana sikkhāpāripūriyā bhāvitattā tādisāya uḷāratamāya ānubhāvasampattiyā bodhisambhāresu ukkaṃsapāramippattā ahesuṃ, tasmā mayāpi sīlādisikkhāsu sammadeva tathā paṭipajjitabbaṃ, yāya paṭipattiyā ahampi anukkamena sikkhaṃ paripūretvā ekantato padaṃ anupāpuṇissāmī’’ti saddhāpurecārikaṃ vīriyaṃ avissajjanto sammadeva sīlesu paripūrakārī hoti.
同样地,他隐藏自己的善德,却显露自己的过失;少欲、知足、远离、不与人混杂;能忍受痛苦,具有不颠倒的见解;不浮躁、不骄慢、不轻率、不饶舌、不说散乱的话;守护根门,内心寂静;远离诡诈等邪命,具足正行与行处;对极微小的过失也见到怖畏,受持学处而学习。他精进努力,心志坚定,对身体和生命都不顾惜;即使对身体或生命有极微小的顾恋,也不容忍,而是舍弃、驱除,更何况强烈的顾恋。所有导致破戒的忿怒、怨恨等烦恼与随烦恼,他都舍弃、驱除。他不因微小的殊胜证得而满足,不退缩,为了证得更高更上的殊胜而精勤努力。巴利
Tathā paṭicchannakalyāṇo hoti vivaṭāparādho, appiccho santuṭṭho pavivitto asaṃsaṭṭho dukkhasaho aviparītadassanajātiko anuddhato anunnaḷo acapalo amukharo avikiṇṇavāco saṃvutindriyo santamānaso kuhanādimicchājīvavirahito ācāragocarasampanno, aṇumattesu vajjesu bhayadassāvī samādāya sikkhati sikkhāpadesu, āraddhavīriyo pahitatto kāye ca jīvite ca nirapekkho, appamattakampi kāye, jīvite vā apekkhaṃ nādhivāseti pajahati vinodeti, pageva adhimattaṃ. Sabbepi dussīlyahetubhūte kodhupanāhādike kilesupakkilese pajahati vinodeti, appamattakena visesādhigamena aparituṭṭho hoti, na saṅkocaṃ āpajjati, uparūparivisesādhigamāya vāyamati.
他不会让自己已经得到的成就退失或停滞,而是这样成为盲人的引路者:为盲人指示道路;对聋人用手势打信号,让他们明白意思;对哑巴也一样。对跛脚的人,他给座位,或者扶着他走。对没有信心的人,他努力让他们获得信心;对懒惰的人,他努力激发他们的干劲;对忘失正念的人,他努力让他们提起正念;对心散乱的人,他努力让他们成就定力;对智慧低劣的人,他努力让他们获得智慧。对被子欲贪缠住的人,他努力帮他们去除欲贪;对被子嗔恨、昏沉睡眠、掉举恶作、疑惑缠住的人,他努力帮他们去除疑惑;对被欲寻等不善寻控制的人,他努力帮他们去除欲寻等邪寻。对曾经先帮助过自己的众生,他念着这份恩情,主动先开口说话,说亲切的话,做能团结人的事,用同等或更多的回报来恭敬对待他们。巴利
Yena yathāladdhā sampatti hānabhāgiyā vā ṭhitibhāgiyā vā na hoti, tathā mahāpuriso andhānaṃ pariṇāyako hoti, maggaṃ ācikkhati, badhirānaṃ hatthamuddāya saññaṃ deti, atthamanuggāheti, tathā mūgānaṃ. Pīṭhasappikānaṃ pīṭhaṃ deti, vāheti vā. Assaddhānaṃ saddhāpaṭilābhāya vāyamati, kusītānaṃ ussāhajananāya, muṭṭhassatīnaṃ satisamāyogāya. Vibbhantattānaṃ samādhisampadāya, duppaññānaṃ paññādhigamāya vāyamati. Kāmacchandapariyuṭṭhitānaṃ kāmacchandapaṭivinodanāya vāyamati. Byāpādathinamiddhauddhaccakukkuccavicikicchāpariyuṭṭhitānaṃ vicikicchāvinodanāya vāyamati. Kāmavitakkādipakatānaṃ kāmavitakkādimicchāvitakkavinodanāya vāyamati. Pubbakārīnaṃ sattānaṃ kataññutaṃ nissāya pubbabhāsī piyavādī saṅgāhako sadisena, adhikena vā paccupakāre sammānetā hoti.
在遇到灾难时,他履行同伴应尽的职责。他了解各类众生的习性和本性,知道该和谁以什么方式相处,就以那种方式与之相处;知道对谁该以什么方式对待,就以那种方式对待。而这一切都是为了让对方从不善中脱离出来、安立在善法中,而不是别的目的。因为菩萨护念他人的心,纯粹是为了增长善法。因此,即使怀着利他的心意,也不该对他人鲁莽行事,不该呵斥对方,不该让对方感到羞惭,不该引发他人的悔恨,不该在应当责备的场合去指责,不该在对方行持比自己低时把自己摆得更高,也不该在一切时候完全不与人交往,不该过度交往,不该在不合适的时间交往。巴利
Āpadāsu sahāyakiccaṃ anutiṭṭhati, tesaṃ tesañca sattānaṃ pakatiṃ, sabhāvañca parijānitvā yehi yathā saṃvasitabbaṃ hoti, tehi tathā saṃvasati. Yesu ca yathā paṭipajjitabbaṃ hoti, tesu tathā paṭipajjati. Tañca kho akusalato vuṭṭhāpetvā kusale patiṭṭhāpanavasena, na aññathā. Paracittānurakkhaṇā hi bodhisattānaṃ yāvadeva kusalābhivaḍḍhiyā. Tathā hitajjhāsayenāpi paro na sāhasitabbo, na bhaṇḍitabbo, na maṅkubhāvamāpādetabbo, na parassa kukkuccaṃ uppādetabbaṃ, na niggahaṭṭhāne codetabbo, na nīcataraṃ paṭipannassa attā uccatare ṭhapetabbo, na ca paresu sabbena sabbaṃ asevinā bhavitabbaṃ, na atisevinā, na akālasevinā bhavitabbaṃ.
对于合适的众生,他会根据地点和时间去亲近交往;不在别人面前指责自己喜欢的人,也不称赞自己不喜欢的人;不会因为关系亲密就盲目信任;不拒绝如法的邀请;不越过规矩;不接受超出限度的东西。对具足信心的人,用讲说信心功德的方式让他们欢喜;对具足戒、多闻、布施、智慧的人,用讲说智慧功德的方式让他们欢喜。如果菩萨已经获得神通力,就用神通力对放逸的众生随其根机示现地狱等景象,让他们生起警醒,然后把没有信心等的人安立在信心等功德中,引导他们进入教法,让已经具足信心等功德的人得以成熟。应当知道,这位大人的行为所生起的无量福德之流和善法之流,就这样一层一层不断增长。巴利
Yutte pana satte desakālānurūpaṃ sevati, na ca paresaṃ purato piyepi garahati, appiye vā pasaṃsati, na adhiṭṭhāya vissāsī hoti, na dhammikaṃ upanimantanaṃ paṭikkhipati, na paññattiṃ upagacchati, nādhikaṃ paṭiggaṇhāti, saddhāsampanne saddhānisaṃsakathāya sampahaṃseti, sīlasutacāgapaññāsampanne paññānisaṃsakathāya sampahaṃseti. Sace pana bodhisatto abhiññābalappatto hoti, pamādāpanne satte abhiññābalena yathārahaṃ nirayādike dassento saṃvejetvā assaddhādike saddhādīsu patiṭṭhāpeti, sāsane otāreti, saddhādiguṇasampanne paripāceti. Evamassa mahāpurisassa cārittabhūto aparimāṇo puññābhisando kusalābhisando uparūpari abhivaḍḍhatīti veditabbaṃ.
另外,《清净道论》里已经用“什么是戒?戒以什么为含义?”这样的提问,再以“远离杀生等的人,或者圆满履行义务与实践的人的思等法就是戒”这样的方式,从各种角度对戒作了详细论述,这些内容都应该引到这里来说。只不过在那里,戒的论述是就声闻和菩萨而说的,而在这里,应该就大菩萨来说,以悲悯和方便善巧为先导,这就是唯一的差别。因为这位大人不会把戒回向给自己从恶趣中解脱、从烦恼中解脱,也不会回向给善趣中的王位成就,不会回向给转轮王、天人、帝释、魔、梵天的成就;同样,他不会回向给自己获得三明、六通、四无碍解,不会回向给声闻菩提,不会回向给缘觉菩提,而只是回向给以一切智的状态,为一切众生成就无上的戒庄严。这就是戒波罗蜜的修行次第。巴利
Apica yā sā ‘‘kiṃ sīlaṃ, kenaṭṭhena sīla’’ntiādinā pucchaṃ katvā ‘‘pāṇātipātādīhi viramantassa, vattapaṭipattiṃ vā pūrentassa cetanādayo dhammā sīla’’ntiādinā nayena nānappakārato sīlassa vitthārakathā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.6) vuttā, sā sabbāpi idha āharitvā vattabbā. Kevalañhi tattha sāvakabodhisattavasena sīlakathā āgatā, idha mahābodhisattavasena karuṇūpāyakosallapubbaṅgamaṃ katvā vattabbāti ayameva viseso. Yato idaṃ sīlaṃ mahāpuriso yathā na attano duggatiyaṃ parikilesavimuttiyā, sugatiyampi na rajjasampattiyā, na cakkavattī, na deva, na sakka, na māra, na brahmasampattiyā pariṇāmeti, tathā na attano tevijjatāya, na chaḷabhiññatāya, na catupaṭisambhidādhigamāya, na sāvakabodhiyā, na paccekabodhiyā pariṇāmeti, atha kho sabbaññubhāvena sabbasattānaṃ anuttarasīlālaṅkārasampādanatthameva pariṇāmetīti ayaṃ sīlapāramiyā paṭipattikkamo.
同样地,因为以悲悯和善巧方便所摄持、以见过患为先导、由脱离欲乐与生存而现起的善心生起,就是出离波罗蜜。因此要这样观察在家生活的过患:家是一切烦恼染污的住处;儿女妻室等造成极大的拥挤束缚;农耕、经商等各种事务缠身,令人心思散乱;所以在家的生活没有机会享受出离的快乐等。而欲乐则像黏在刀刃上的一滴蜜,又像芭蕉树一样,尝起来只有一点点甜味,却带来巨大的祸患;应当像用闪电照亮才能看见的舞蹈一样,只能极短暂地存在;应当像疯子的装饰一样,是以颠倒想而体验的;像涂了粪的遮盖物一样,是令人排斥的东西;像用浸过水的手指去喝盐水一样,越喝越渴;像饥饿的人吃自己的食物一样,伴随着病痛;像诱饵之肉一样,是招致灾祸的原因;像烈火灼烧一样,在过去、现在、未来三世都是产生痛苦的根源;像猴胶一样,是束缚的因缘;像杀手身上覆盖的花蔓一样,掩盖着无益之事;像住在敌方的村庄一样,是充满恐惧的地方;像养育敌人一样,成为烦恼魔等的食物;像六种利得的圆满一样,终将坏灭而带来痛苦;像树洞里的火一样,从内部焚烧;像悬挂在古井边的草根上的蜜团一样,有种种过患;像喝盐水一样,是产生干渴的原因;像烈酒一样,是下等人所亲近的;因为满足感极少,所以像骸骨喻一样。以这样的方式观察过患之后,再从相反的方面看出离的利益,心便倾注、倾向、朝向出离的寂静之乐等,这样来修习出离波罗蜜。巴利
Tathā yasmā karuṇūpāyakosallapariggahitā ādīnavadassanapubbaṅgamā kāmehi ca bhavehi ca nikkhamanavasena pavattā kusalacittuppatti nekkhammapāramī, tasmā sakalasaṃkilesanivāsanaṭṭhānatāya, puttadārādīhi mahāsambādhatāya, kasivāṇijjādinānāvikammantādhiṭṭhānabyākulatāya ca gharāvāsassa nekkhammasukhādīnaṃ anokāsataṃ, kāmānañca ‘‘satthadhārālaggamadhubindu viya ca kadalī viya ca avaleyhamānaparittassādavipulānatthānubandhā’’ti ca vijjulatobhāsena gahetabbaṃ naccaṃ viya parittakālūpalabbhā, ummattakālaṅkāro viya viparītasaññāya anubhavitabbā, karīsāvacchādanamukhaṃ viya paṭikārabhūtā, udake temitaṅguliyā nisārudakapānaṃ viya atittikarā, chātajjhattabhojanaṃ viya sābādhā, balisāmisaṃ viya byāsanupanipātakāraṇā (byasanasannipātakāraṇā – dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7), aggisantāpo viya kālattayepi dukkhuppattihetubhūtā, makkaṭālepo viya bandhananimittā, ghātakāvacchādanakimālayo viya anatthacchādanā, sapattagāmavāso viya bhayaṭṭhānabhūtā, paccatthikaposako viya kilesamārādīnaṃ āmisabhūtā, chaṇasampattiyo viya vipariṇāmadukkhā, koṭaraggi viya antodāhakā, purāṇakūpāvalambabīraṇamadhupiṇḍaṃ viya anekādīnavā, loṇūdakapānaṃ viya pipāsāhetubhūtā, surāmerayaṃ viya nīcajanasevitā , appassādatāya aṭṭhikaṅkalūpamā’’tiādinā ca nayena ādīnavaṃ sallakkhetvā tabbipariyāyena nekkhamme ānisaṃsaṃ passantena nekkhammapavivekaupasamasukhādīsu ninnapoṇapabbhāracittena nekkhammapāramiyaṃ paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
既然出离是以出家为根本,那么首先就应当出家。正在实践出家的伟大菩萨,在没有佛出世的时代,应当在主张业论、主张行为有效果的苦行者和游行者那里出家。但当正等正觉者已经出现于世时,就必须在他们的教法中出家。出家之后,要安住在前面所说的戒上,为了清净那戒波罗蜜,就应当受持头陀功德。因为受持头陀法的大人物,若能正确地守护这些头陀功德,就能以少欲、知足、减损、远离、不杂住、精进勤勉等功德之水,洗掉烦恼尘垢,具备无可指责的戒与禁戒功德,行为清净,安立于前三种古圣种,进而达到被称为第四圣种的“乐于修习”,随其相应,在四十种所缘中证得近行定与安止定不同层次的禅那而安住。这样,他的出离波罗蜜才算真正圆满。在这里,十三种头陀法,加上十遍、十不净、十随念、四梵住、四无色定、一想、一差别,共四十种止的修行业处,以及修习的方法,本来都应该详细说明。但这一切在《清净道论》中已经全面详细地讲过了,所以应当依照那里所说的方法来理解。不过那里是依声闻弟子的立场说的,这里是依大菩萨的立场,以悲悯和善巧方便为先导来说的,这就是差别所在。应当这样理解这里出离波罗蜜的修行次第。巴利
Yasmā pana nekkhammaṃ pabbajjāmūlakaṃ, tasmā pabbajjā tāva anuṭṭhātabbā. Pabbajjamanutiṭṭhantena mahāsattena asati buddhuppāde kammavādīnaṃ kiriyavādīnaṃ tāpasaparibbājakānaṃ pabbajjā anuṭṭhātabbā. Uppannesu pana sammāsambuddhesu tesaṃ sāsane eva pabbajitabbaṃ. Pabbajitvā ca yathāvutte sīle patiṭṭhitena tassā eva sīlapāramiyā vodāpanatthaṃ dhutaguṇā samādātabbā. Samādinnadhutadhammā hi mahāpurisā sammadeva te pariharantā appicchāsantuṭṭhasallekhapavivekaasaṃsaggavīriyārambhasubharatādiguṇasalilavikkhālitakilesamalatāya anavajjasīlavataguṇaparisuddhasamācārā porāṇe ariyavaṃsattaye patiṭṭhitā catutthaṃ bhāvanārāmatāsaṅkhātaṃ ariyavaṃsaṃ gantuṃ cattārīsāya ārammaṇesu yathārahaṃ upacārappanābhedaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharanti. Evañhissa sammadeva nekkhammapāramī pāripūritā hoti. Imasmiṃ pana ṭhāne terasahi dhutadhammehi saddhiṃ dasa kasiṇāni dasāsubhāni dasānussatiyo cattāro brahmavihārā cattāro āruppā ekā saññā ekaṃ vavatthānanti cattārīsa samādhibhāvanākammaṭṭhānāni, bhāvanāvidhānañca vitthārato vattabbāni, taṃ panetaṃ sabbaṃ yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.22, 47) sabbākārato vitthāretvā vuttaṃ, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kevalañhi tattha sāvakabodhisattassa vasena vuttaṃ, idha mahābodhisattassa vasena karuṇūpāyakosallapubbaṅgamaṃ katvā vattabbanti ayameva viseso. Evamettha nekkhammapāramiyā paṭipattikkamo veditabbo.
同样,想要成就慧波罗蜜的人,因为慧就像光明,不会和黑暗般的愚痴同时存在,所以菩萨首先要避开那些造成愚痴的原因。这里说的造成愚痴的原因有:不乐、昏沉、打哈欠、懒惰、喜欢聚众嬉闹、有睡眠的习气、没有听闻佛法的意愿、对法没有兴趣、错误的固执、不肯请教别人、不妥善照顾身体、心不专一、亲近愚笨的人、不亲近有智慧的人、轻视自己、错误的思惟、颠倒的执著、身体沉重迟钝、没有紧迫感、五盖。简单来说,如果一个人不断接触这些低劣的状态,还没生起的慧就不会生起,已经生起的慧也会退失。以上就是造成愚痴的原因。避开这些的人,应当多闻,并在禅那等方面精进用功。巴利
Tathā paññāpāramiṃ sampādetukāmena yasmā paññā āloko viya andhakārena mohena saha na vattati, tasmā mohakāraṇāni tāva bodhisattena parivajjetabbāni. Tatthimāni mohakāraṇāni-arati tandī vijambhitā ālasiyaṃ gaṇasaṅgaṇikārāmatā niddāsīlatā anicchayasīlatā ñāṇasmiṃ akutūhalatā micchādhimāno aparipucchakatā kāyassa nasammāparihāro asamāhitacittatā duppaññānaṃ puggalānaṃ sevanā paññavantānaṃ apayirupāsanā attaparibhavo micchāvikappo viparītābhiniveso kāyadaḷhībahulatā asaṃvegasīlatā pañca nīvaraṇāni, saṅkhepato yevāpanadhamme āsevato anuppannā paññā nuppajjati, uppannā parihāyati , iti imāni mohakāraṇāni, tāni parivajjantena bāhusacce, jhānādīsu ca yogo karaṇīyo.
在这里,多闻的所缘分类是:五蕴、十二处、十八界、四谛、二十二根、十二支缘起,以及四念处等善法等的分类,还有世间无可指责的种种明处,以及为众生利益安乐而施设的论典差别。如此,以善巧方便为先导的慧、念和精进,对这一切所闻的领域,通过善取、听闻、受持、修习、请问而深入,又通过在其中安立他人,应当生起闻所成慧;同样,在众生应作之事中,成为随顺处之慧、成为趣入有与趣入善巧方便之慧,依止利益,随其所应而转起;同样,通过蕴等自性法的相与推度门,以及通过忍可审察,应当生起思所成慧。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ bāhusaccassa visayavibhāgo – pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni aṭṭhārasa dhātuyo cattāri saccāni bāvīsatindriyāni dvādasapadiko paṭiccasamuppādo, tathā satipaṭṭhānādayo kusalādidhammappabhedā ca, yāni ca loke anavajjāni vijjāṭṭhānāni, yo ca sattānaṃ hitasukhavidhānanayo byākaraṇaviseso. Iti evaṃ pakāraṃ sakalameva sutavisayaṃ upāyakosallapubbaṅgamāya paññāya, satiyā, vīriyena ca sādhukaṃ uggahaṇasavanadhāraṇaparicayaparipucchāhi ogāhetvā tattha ca paresaṃ patiṭṭhāpanena sutamayā paññā nibbattetabbā, tathā sattānaṃ itikattabbatāsu ṭhānuppattikā paṭibhānabhūtā, āyāpāyaupāyakosallabhūtā ca paññā hitesitaṃ nissāya tattha tattha yathārahaṃ pavattetabbā, tathā khandhādīnaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ ākāraparitakkanamukhena ceva nijjhānaṃ khamāpentena ca cintāmayā paññā nibbattetabbā.
不过,应当通过把握蕴等法的自相与共相,来生起世间遍知,从而圆满前行阶段的修慧。也就是说,要这样观察:这个只是名色而已,它们随各自的因缘条件而生起、也随因缘条件而灭去,在这里没有一个“作者”,也没有一个“令作者”。因为存在之后又消失,所以是无常;因为生灭逼迫,所以是苦;因为不能自主控制,所以是无我。对内在的法与外在的法不加区分地遍知,舍弃对它们的执著,也让别人舍弃这种执著,仅仅出于悲悯,在佛的功德还没有亲自现前之前,把众生引导进入三乘、使他们成熟并安立其中,令禅那、解脱、等持、等至以及神通达到世间自在的境界,智慧便到达了顶点。巴利
Khandhādīnaṃyeva pana salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇapariggahaṇavasena lokiyapariññaṃ nibbattentena pubbabhāgabhāvanāpaññā sampādetabbā. Evañhi ‘‘nāmarūpamattamidaṃ, yathārahaṃ paccayehi uppajjati ceva nirujjhati ca, na ettha koci kattā vā kāretā vā, hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccaṃ, udayabbayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhaṃ, avasavattanaṭṭhena anattā’’ti ajjhattikadhamme, bāhirakadhamme ca nibbisesaṃ parijānanto tattha āsaṅgaṃ pajahanto, pare ca tattha taṃ pajahāpento kevalaṃ karuṇāvaseneva yāva na buddhaguṇā hatthatalaṃ āgacchanti, tāva yānattaye satte avatāraṇaparipācanehi patiṭṭhāpento, jhānavimokkhasamādhisamāpattiyo, abhiññāyo ca lokiyavasībhāvaṃ pāpento paññāya matthakaṃ pāpuṇāti.
在这里,那些被称为五种世间神通的修习慧,也就是神变智、天耳界智、他心智、宿住随念智、天眼智、随业趣智、未来分智,以及伴随这些的一切;还有另一类修习慧,是在蕴、处、界、根、谛、缘起等各类别的四地诸法中,通过学习与提问而熟悉了知之后,立足于戒清净和心清净这两个根本清净,进而圆满见清净、度疑清净、道非道智见清净、行道智见清净、智见清净这五个主体清净而应当修习的,包括世间与出世间两种。关于这些修习慧的圆满方法,因为在《清净道论》中已经依据“其中,想要施展‘一身变多身’等神通变化的初修瑜伽者”等说法(《清净道论》2.365),以及“蕴就是五蕴:色蕴、受蕴、想蕴、行蕴、识蕴”等说法(《清净道论》2.431),连同所缘与能缘的区分,从各个方面详细阐述了,所以应当依照那里所说的方式来了知。不过,那里是就声闻和菩萨而说慧,这里则应当就大菩萨,以悲和方便善巧为先导来说。不把观安立在智见清净,而只安立在行道智见清净,这就是这里的差别。如此,应当了知般若波罗蜜的修行次第。巴利
Tattha yācimā iddhividhañāṇaṃ dibbasotadhātuñāṇaṃ cetopariyañāṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇaṃ dibbacakkhuñāṇaṃ yathākammūpagañāṇaṃ anāgataṃsañāṇanti saparibhaṇḍā pañcalokiyābhiññāsaṅkhātā bhāvanāpaññā, yā ca khandhāyatanadhātuindriyasaccapaṭiccasamuppādādibhedesu catubhūmakesu dhammesu uggahaparipucchāvasena ñāṇaparicayaṃ katvā sīlavisuddhi cittavisuddhīti mūlabhūtāsu imāsu dvīsu visuddhīsu patiṭṭhāya diṭṭhivisuddhi kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti sarīrabhūtā imā pañca visuddhiyo sampādentena bhāvetabbā lokiyalokuttarabhedā bhāvanāpaññā, tāsaṃ sampādanavidhānaṃ yasmā ‘‘tattha ‘ekopi hutvā bahudhā hotī’tiādikaṃ iddhivikubbanaṃ kātukāmena ādikammikena yoginā’’tiādinā, (visuddhi. 2.365) ‘‘khandhāti pañcha khandhā rūpakkhandho vedanākkhandho saññākkhandho saṅkhārakkhandho viññāṇakkhandho’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 2.431) ca visayavisayivibhāgena (visayavibhāgena – cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā) saddhiṃ visuddhimagge sabbākārato vitthāretvā vuttaṃ, tasmā tattha vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Kevalañhi tattha sāvakabodhisattassa vasena paññā āgatā, idha mahābodhisattassa vasena karuṇūpāyakosallapubbaṅgamaṃ katvā vattabbā. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhiṃ apāpetvā paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhiyaṃyeva vipassanā ṭhapetabbāti ayameva visesoti. Evamettha paññāpāramiyā paṭipattikkamo veditabbo.
同样地,因为已经为成正等觉发过愿的大士,为了圆满波罗蜜,必须时时刻刻精勤努力、做好准备,所以应当每天每天这样反省:“今天我积累了什么样的福德资粮,或者智慧资粮?我做了什么利益他人的事?”为了利益众生,应当发起精进;应当以无所顾恋的心,把自己所拥有的财物、身体和生命,都舍弃出去,用来利益一切众生;无论以身、以语做什么业,这一切都应当以心倾向菩提来做,应当回向菩提;应当以远离一切粗妙欲望的心来安住;对于一切应当做的事,都应当运用善巧方便去实行。巴利
Tathā yasmā sammāsambodhiyā katābhinīhārena mahāsattena pāramīparipūraṇatthaṃ sabbakālaṃ yuttappayuttena bhavitabbaṃ ābaddhaparikaraṇena, tasmā kālena kālaṃ ‘‘ko nu kho ajja mayā puññasambhāro, ñāṇasambhāro vā upacito, kiṃ vā mayā parahitaṃ kata’’nti divase divase paccavekkhantena sattahitatthaṃ ussāho karaṇīyo, sabbesampi sattānaṃ upakārāya attano pariggahabhūtaṃ vatthuṃ, kāyaṃ, jīvitañca nirapekkhanacittena ossajjitabbaṃ, yaṃ kiñci kammaṃ karoti kāyena, vācāya vā, taṃ sabbaṃ sambodhiyaṃ ninnacitteneva kātabbaṃ, bodhiyā pariṇāmetabbaṃ, uḷārehi, ittarehi ca kāmehi vinivattacitteneva bhavitabbaṃ, sabbāsu ca itikattabbatāsu upāyakosallaṃ paccupaṭṭhapetvā paṭipajjitabbaṃ.
对于每一个众生的利益,都应当以已发起精进的心去做,能忍受一切可意与不可意等境遇,不欺骗任何人。应当以没有界限的慈和悲,遍及一切众生。凡是众生所生起的任何痛苦,都应当愿自己来承受这一切。应当随喜一切众生的福德,应当反复观察诸佛的伟大与广大威神力;无论以身或口造作什么业,那一切都应当以菩提心为先导来做。因为用这种方法,在布施等善行中精勤努力、具足力量、坚固精进的大士、菩萨,他的福德资粮和智慧资粮,日日都在无量无边地积聚。巴利
Tasmiṃ tasmiñca sattahite āraddhavīriyena bhavitabbaṃ iṭṭhāniṭṭhādisabbasahena avisaṃvādinā. Sabbepi sattā anodhiso mettāya, karuṇāya ca pharitabbā. Yā kāci sattānaṃ dukkhuppatti, sabbā sā attani pāṭikaṅkhitabbā. Sabbesañca sattānaṃ puññaṃ abbhanumoditabbaṃ, buddhānaṃ mahantatā mahānubhāvatā abhiṇhaṃ paccavekkhitabbā, yañca kiñci kammaṃ karoti kāyena, vācāya vā, taṃ sabbaṃ bodhicittapubbaṅgamaṃ kātabbaṃ. Iminā hi upāyena dānādīsu yuttappayuttassa thāmavato daḷhaparakkamassa mahāsattassa bodhisattassa aparimeyyo puññasambhāro, ñāṇasambhāro ca divase divase upacīyati.
而且,为了众生的受用和护持,菩萨要舍弃自己的身体和生命,去寻求并生起对治饥饿、口渴、寒冷、炎热、风吹、日晒等痛苦的方法。他自己通过前面所说的对治痛苦而获得的快乐,以及在可爱的园林、花园、殿堂、池塘等处,在森林僻静处,因为身心热恼止息而达到彻底清凉,从而亲身获得的快乐;还有他听到“诸佛、随觉者、独觉者以及大菩萨们都安住在出离的修行中”,以及“他们正体验着像这样名为现法乐住的禅定与等至之乐”——这一切,他都毫无分别地回向给一切众生。这就是安住在尚未得定的阶段的人的修行方式。巴利
Apica sattānaṃ paribhogatthaṃ, paripālanatthañca attano sarīraṃ, jīvitañca pariccajitvā khuppipāsasītuṇhavātātapādidukkhapatikāro pariyesitabbo ca uppādetabbo ca, yañca yathāvuttadukkhapatikārajaṃ sukhaṃ attanā paṭilabhati, tathā ramaṇīyesu ārāmuyyānapāsādataḷākādīsu , araññāyatanesu ca kāyacittasantāpābhāvena abhinibbutattā attanā sukhaṃ paṭilabhati, yañca suṇāti ‘‘buddhānubuddhapaccekabuddhā, mahābodhisattā ca nekkhammapaṭipattiyaṃ ṭhitā’’ti ca ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikasukhavihārabhūtaṃ īdisaṃ nāma jhānasamāpattisukhamanubhavantī’’ti ca, taṃ sabbaṃ sattesu anodhiso upasaṃharati. Ayaṃ tāva nayo asamāhitabhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhitassa.
已经安住在定境界的人,把自己亲身经验到的、由殊胜证得所产生的喜、轻安、乐、定以及如实智,以信解之心投向众生、回向给众生。他这样观察:众生沉没在巨大的轮回之苦中,也沉没在作为轮回之苦根源的烦恼和造作之苦中。他看到地狱里的众生,不间断地、长时期地感受着由砍、割、劈、蒸、磨、伤害、火烧等所产生的苦——剧烈、粗重、刺痛;看到畜生道的众生,因为互相嗔怒、互相惊吓、互相伤害、互相奴役等等,而承受巨大的痛苦;看到饿鬼道的众生,身体被火焰包围,被饥渴、风热等煎熬烧烤,吃的是呕吐物、唾液之类的东西,举起双臂哭喊,感受着焦渴等巨大的痛苦;看到人们为了谋生而遭遇巨大的不幸和灾难,因为被砍手等刑罚,因为丑陋难看、贫穷等处境,因为饥渴等疾病,因为被强者欺压,因为替别人负重,因为受他人控制,而感受着与地狱、饿鬼、畜生三恶道没有差别的苦;看到欲界天人,心被对感官享受的追逐所散乱,被贪欲等热恼燃烧,就像风吹起火、干柴堆燃起大火团一样,热恼从未止息,也没有被调伏,受着烦恼的控制;又看到色界和无色界的天人,就像用大力气飞入遥远虚空的飞鸟,又像被有力的大手远远抛出的箭——他观察到:即使他们的生命延续很久,也终究不是永恒的,最终仍要坠落,逃不过生、老、死。于是他生起极大的警醒和紧迫感,以慈心和悲心,无差别地遍及一切众生。这样,他以身、语、意不间断地积聚菩提资粮,圆满诸波罗蜜。如此恭敬而行、持续而行、不退转而行的人,应当发起勇猛精进,圆满精进波罗蜜。巴利
Samāhitabhūmiyaṃ pana patiṭṭhito attanā yathānubhūtaṃ visesādhigamanibbattaṃ pītiṃ, passaddhiṃ, sukhaṃ, samādhiṃ, yathābhūtañāṇañca sattesu adhimuccanto upasaṃharati pariṇāmeti, tathā mahati saṃsāradukkhe, tassa ca nimittabhūte kilesābhisaṅkhāradukkhe nimuggaṃ sattanikāyaṃ disvā tatrāpi khādanachedanabhedanasedanapisanahiṃsanaaggisantāpādijanitā dukkhā tibbā kharā kaṭukā vedanā nirantaraṃ cirakālaṃ vedayante narake, aññamaññaṃ kujjhanasantāsanavisodhanahiṃsanaparādhīnatādīhi mahādukkhaṃ anubhavante tiracchānagate, jotimālākulasarīre khuppipāsavātātapādīhi ḍayhamāne, visussamāne ca vantakheḷādiāhāre, uddhabāhu viravante nijjhāmataṇhikādike mahādukkhaṃ vedayamāne pete ca pariyeṭṭhimūlakaṃ mahantaṃ anayabyasanaṃ pāpuṇante hatthacchedādikaraṇayogena dubbaṇṇaduddasikadaliddādibhāvena khuppipāsādiābādhayogena balavantehi abhibhavanīyato, paresaṃ vahanato, parādhīnato ca narake, pete, tiracchānagate ca atisayante apāyadukkhanibbisesaṃ dukkhamanubhavante manusse ca tathā visayaparibhogavikkhittacittatāya rāgādipariḷāhena ḍayhamāne vātavegasamuṭṭhitajālāsamiddhasukkhakaṭṭhasannipāte aggikkhandhe viya anupasantapariḷāhavuttike anupasantanihataparādhīne (anihataparādhīne dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7) kāmāvacaradeve ca mahatā vāyāmena vidūramākāsaṃ vigāhitasakuntā viya, balavatā dūre pāṇinā khittasarā viya ca ‘‘satipi cirappavattiyaṃ anaccantikatāya pātapariyosānā anatikkantajātijarāmaraṇā evā’’ti rūpāvacarārūpāvacaradeve ca passantena mahantaṃ saṃvegaṃ paccupaṭṭhāpetvā mettāya, karuṇāya ca anodhiso sattā pharitabbā. Evaṃ kāyena, vācāya, manasā ca bodhisambhāre nirantaraṃ upacinantena yathā pāramiyo paripūrenti, evaṃ sakkaccakārinā sātaccakārinā anolīnavuttinā ussāho pavattetabbo, vīriyapāramī paripūretabbā.
再者,佛果是以不可思议、不可计量、广大、崇高、无垢、无可比拟、远离烦恼的功德聚积为因的。能策励并令人生起欢喜的精进,其威力本身就是不可思议的,普通人连听闻都做不到,更不用说去实践了。就像这样:三种发愿心的生起、四种佛地、四种摄事、悲心一味、以证悟佛法为殊胜助缘、审察忍、于一切法无所染着、于一切众生视如爱子、于轮回之苦不疲倦、施舍一切可施之物、对此也不生起骄慢、增上戒等诸种决意、在其中坚定不移、于善行怀有喜乐、心倾向于远离、勤修禅定、于无过失之法不知满足、以利益他人的心意对听闻之法加以宣说并坚固发起、具备坚毅勇猛、面对他人的诽谤与伤害心不动摇、真实决意、于诸等至得自在、于神通得威力、通达三相、致力于念处等而积集出世间道的资粮、进入九种出世间法。如此等一切菩提资粮的修行,都是依靠精进的威力才得以成就。因此,从发愿一直到成就大菩提,都不应舍弃精进,应当恭敬地、不间断地修习,使它一层比一层更加殊胜。当所说的精进成就时,忍辱、真实、决意等,以及布施、持戒等,一切菩提资粮都因为依止于它而自然圆满。对于忍辱等法,也应当按这个道理来了知修行。巴利
Apica ‘‘acinteyyāparimeyyavipuloḷāravimalanirupamanirupakkilesaguṇagaṇanicayanidānabhūtassa buddhabhāvassa ussakkitvā sampahaṃsanayoggaṃ vīriyaṃ nāma acinteyyānubhāvameva, yaṃ na pacurajanā sotumpi sakkuṇanti, pageva paṭipajjituṃ. Tathā hi tividhā abhinīhāracittuppatti, catasso buddhabhūmiyo, (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34) cattāri saṅgahavatthūni , (dī. ni. 3.210; a. ni. 4.32) karuṇekarasatā, buddhadhammesu sacchikaraṇena visesappaccayo, nijjhānakkhanti, sabbadhammesu nirupalepo, sabbasattesu piyaputtasaññā, saṃsāradukkhehi aparikhedo, sabbadeyyadhammapariccāgo, tena ca niratimānatā, adhisīlādiadhiṭṭhānaṃ, tattha ca acañcalatā, kusalakiriyāsu pītipāmojjatā, vivekaninnacittatā, jhānānuyogo, anavajjadhammesu atittiyatā, yathāsutassa dhammassa paresaṃ hitajjhāsayena desanāya ārambhadaḷhatā, dhīravīrabhāvo, parāpavādaparāpakāresu vikārābhāvo, saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, samāpattīsu vasībhāvo, abhiññāsu balappatti, lakkhaṇattayāvabodho, satipaṭṭhānādīsu abhiyogena lokuttaramaggasambhārasambharaṇaṃ, navalokuttarāvakkantī’’ti evamādikā sabbāpi bodhisambhārapaṭipatti vīriyānubhāveneva samijjhatīti abhinīhārato yāva mahābodhi anossajjantena sakkaccaṃ nirantaraṃ vīriyaṃ yathā uparūpari visesāvahaṃ hoti, evaṃ sampādetabbaṃ. Sampajjamāne ca yathāvutte vīriye, khantisaccādhiṭṭhānādayo ca dānasīlādayo ca sabbepi bodhisambhārā tadadhīnavuttitāya sampannā eva hontītikhantiādīsupi imināva nayena paṭipatti veditabbā.
就这样,菩萨以布施舍弃自己的安乐资具来给众生带来种种利益,这是布施的修行;以持戒守护众生的生命、财产、妻儿,不挑拨离间,说亲切有益的话,不伤害他们等,这是持戒的修行;以出离,通过接受众生的物质供养、法布施等方式,对他们做种种利益之事,这是出离的修行;以智慧,善巧掌握利益众生的方法;以精进,在利益众生时发起努力、持续不懈;以忍辱,忍受众生对自己的冒犯;以真实,不欺骗众生,为他们的利益而行动,不违背承诺等;以决意,即使在利益众生时遭遇损失也不动摇;以慈心,常念众生的利益与安乐;以舍心,在众生对自己有恩或有损时都不改变心态。应当知道,菩萨如此缘无量众生、悲悯一切众生,他所积聚的不与凡夫共有的无量福德与智慧资粮,就是这里的修行。而前面所说的这些修行得以成就的条件,就是认真恭敬地去完成它们。巴利
Iti sattānaṃ sukhūpakaraṇapariccāgena bahudhānuggahakaraṇaṃ dānena paṭipatti, sīlena tesaṃ jīvitasāpateyyadārarakkhābhedapiyahitavacanāvihiṃsādikaraṇāni, nekkhammena tesaṃ āmisapaṭiggahaṇadhammadānādinā anekavidhā hitacariyā, paññāya tesaṃ hitakaraṇūpāyakosallaṃ, vīriyena tattha ussāhārambhaasaṃhīrakaraṇāni, khantiyā tadaparādhasahanaṃ, saccena nesaṃ avañcanatadupakārakiriyāsamādānāvisaṃvādanādi, adhiṭṭhānena tadupakaraṇe anatthasampātepi acalanaṃ, mettāya nesaṃ hitasukhānucintanaṃ, upekkhāya nesaṃ upakārāpakāresu vikārānāpattīti evaṃ aparimāṇe satte ārabbha anukampitasabbasattassa bodhisattassa puthujjanehi asādhāraṇo aparimāṇo puññañāṇasambhārupacayo ettha paṭipattīti veditabbaṃ. Yo cetāsaṃ paccayo vutto, tattha ca sakkaccaṃ sampādanaṃ.
这些从共性类别来分,共有十种分类。
每一类各有三种,合起来正好三十种。巴利
Sāmaññabhedato etā, dasavidhā vibhāgato; Tidhā hutvāna paccekaṃ, samatiṃsavidhā samaṃ.
十波罗蜜、十副波罗蜜、十究竟波罗蜜,这样一共就是三十种波罗蜜。对此,有些人说:已经发下誓愿的菩萨,其心倾向于做利益他人的事,那些与黑法混杂在一起的善法,是波罗蜜;不与黑法混杂的善法,是副波罗蜜;既不是黑法也不是善法的法,是究竟波罗蜜。另一些人说:在积累修行的时候正在圆满的,是波罗蜜;在菩萨阶段已经圆满的,是副波罗蜜;在佛的阶段以一切方式完全圆满的,是究竟波罗蜜。或者说:在菩萨阶段,因为做利益他人的事,所以是波罗蜜;因为做利益自己的事,所以是副波罗蜜;在佛的阶段,因为获得力与无畏,圆满自他双方的利益,所以是究竟波罗蜜。这样,按照开头、中间、结尾,也就是发愿、开始修行、最终完成这三个阶段,来区分它们。还有其他人说:对于已经止息嗔恨、以悲心为本性、达到了有之乐、解脱之乐、最高之乐的人来说,按照所积累福德的差别,而有这些区分。巴利
Dasa pāramiyo dasa upapāramiyo dasa paramatthapāramiyoti hi samatiṃsa pāramiyo. Tattha ‘‘katābhinīhārassa bodhisattassa parahitakaraṇābhininnāsayapayogassa kaṇhadhammavokiṇṇā sukkā dhammā pāramiyo, tehi avokiṇṇā sukkā dhammā upapāramiyo, akaṇhā asukkā dhammā paramatthapāramiyo’’ti keci. ‘‘Samudāgamanakālesu pūriyamānā pāramiyo, bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ puṇṇā upapāramiyo, buddhabhūmiyaṃ sabbākāraparipuṇṇā paramatthapāramiyo. Bodhisattabhūmiyaṃ vā parahitakaraṇato pāramiyo, attahitakaraṇato upapāramiyo, buddhabhūmiyaṃ balavesārajjasamadhigamena ubhayahitaparipūraṇato paramatthapāramiyoti evaṃ ādimajjhapariyosānesu paṇidhānārambhapariniṭṭhānesu tesaṃ vibhāgo’’ti apare. ‘‘Dosupasamakaruṇāpakatikānaṃ bhavasukhavimuttisukhaparamasukhappattānaṃ puññūpacayabhedato tabbibhāgo’’ti aññe.
有些人说:以惭、愧、念为依靠,以出世间法为增上,重视戒、定、慧,能度、正度、将度众生的随觉者、独觉者、正自觉者,由于波罗蜜、近波罗蜜、最上波罗蜜而证得三种菩提,因此有如上所说的分类。
另一些人说:从心意决意开始,到语决意之间所生起的资粮是波罗蜜;从语决意开始,到身决意之间所生起的是近波罗蜜;从身决意开始则是究竟波罗蜜。
还有一些人说:以随喜他人福德所生起的资粮是波罗蜜,以促使他人去做所生起的是近波罗蜜,以自己亲自去做所生起的是究竟波罗蜜。
同样,有些人说:能带来生存之乐的福德与智慧资粮是波罗蜜,能带来自己涅槃之乐的是近波罗蜜,能带来他人这两种乐的是究竟波罗蜜。巴利
‘‘Lajjāsatimānāpassayānaṃ lokuttaradhammādhipatīnaṃ sīlasamādhipaññāgarukānaṃ tāritataritatārayitūnaṃ anubuddhapaccekabuddhasammāsambuddhānaṃ pāramīupapāramīparamatthapāramīhi bodhittayappattito yathāvuttavibhāgo’’ti keci. ‘‘Cittapaṇidhito yāva vacīpaṇidhi, tāva pavattā sambhārā pāramiyo , vacīpaṇidhito yāva kāyapaṇidhi, tāva pavattā upapāramiyo, kāyapaṇidhito pabhuti paramatthapāramiyo’’ti apare. Aññe pana ‘‘parapuññānumodanavasena pavattā sambhārā pāramiyo, paresaṃ kārāpanavasena pavattā upapāramiyo, sayaṃ karaṇavasena pavattā paramatthapāramiyo’’ti vadanti. Tathā ‘‘bhavasukhāvaho puññañāṇasambhāro pāramī, attano nibbānasukhāvaho upapāramī, paresaṃ tadubhayasukhāvaho paramatthapāramī’’ti eke.
把子女、妻子、财产等生活用具施舍出去,就是布施波罗蜜;把自己的肢体施舍出去,就是布施近波罗蜜;把自己的生命施舍出去,就是布施最上波罗蜜。同样,为了不违越而守护子女、妻子等三种施舍对象,由此产生三种戒波罗蜜;对这三种对象——生活用具、肢体、生命——断除贪著而舍离,由此产生三种出离波罗蜜;断除对生活用具、肢体、生命的渴爱,为众生判断有利与不利,由此产生三种慧波罗蜜;按照前面所说的各种施舍等而努力精进,由此产生三种精进波罗蜜;对障碍生活用具、肢体、生命的人能够忍受,由此产生三种忍波罗蜜;为了生活用具、肢体、生命也不舍弃真实,由此产生三种真实波罗蜜;布施等波罗蜜只有依靠不动摇的决意才能成就,所以即使生活用具等被毁坏,也以不动摇的决意而产生三种决意波罗蜜;对毁坏生活用具等的众生也不舍弃慈心,由此产生三种慈波罗蜜;在前面所说的三种对象上,对众生的饶益与损害都保持平等中舍,由此产生三种舍波罗蜜。应当以这样的方式来了知这些波罗蜜的分类。巴利
Puttadāradhanādiupakaraṇapariccāgo pana dānapāramī, attano aṅgapariccāgo dānaupapāramī, attano jīvitapariccāgo dānaparamatthapāramī. Tathā puttadārādikassa tividhassāpi hetu avītikkamanavasena tisso sīlapāramiyo, tesu eva tividhesu vatthūsu ālayaṃ upacchinditvā nikkhamanavasena tisso nekkhammapāramiyo, upakaraṇaaṅgajīvitataṇhaṃ samūhanitvā sattānaṃ hitāhitavinicchayakaraṇavasena tisso paññāpāramiyo, yathāvuttabhedānaṃ pariccāgādīnaṃ vāyamanavasena tisso vīriyapāramiyo, upakaraṇaaṅgajīvitantarāyakarānaṃ khamanavasena tisso khantipāramiyo, upakaraṇaaṅgajīvitahetu saccāpariccāgavasena tisso saccapāramiyo, dānādipāramiyo akuppādhiṭṭhānavaseneva samijjhantīti upakaraṇādivināsepi acalādhiṭṭhānavasena tisso adhiṭṭhānapāramiyo, upakaraṇādivighātakesupi sattesu mettāya avijahanavasena tisso mettāpāramiyo, yathāvuttavatthuttayassa upakārāpakāresu sattasaṅkhāresu majjhattatāpaṭilābhavasena tisso upekkhāpāramiyoti evamādinā etāsaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo.
关于“总摄”在这里的意思——巴利
Kosaṅgahoti ettha pana –
按分类有三十种,按归纳则摄为十种。
这些其实有六种,应当通过成对等方式来达成。巴利
Yathā vibhāgato tiṃsa-vidhā saṅgahato dasa; Chappakārāva etāsu, yugaḷādīhi sādhaye.
这些波罗蜜按类别分有三十种,按布施波罗蜜等本质分有十种;同样,按布施、持戒、忍辱、精进、禅定、智慧的本质分有六种。其中,出离波罗蜜被戒波罗蜜所含摄,因为出离就是出家这件事。若从远离五盖的角度说,则被禅定波罗蜜所含摄;若从善法的角度说,则被全部六种波罗蜜所含摄。真实波罗蜜只是戒波罗蜜的一部分,这是就语真实和离妄语真实这两方面说的。若就智真实这方面说,则被智慧波罗蜜所含摄。慈波罗蜜只被禅定波罗蜜所含摄,舍波罗蜜被禅定波罗蜜和智慧波罗蜜所含摄,决意波罗蜜则被一切波罗蜜所含摄。巴利
Yathā hi esā vibhāgato tiṃsavidhāpi dānapāramiādibhāvato dasavidhā, evaṃ dānasīlakhantivīriyajhānapaññāsabhāvena chabbidhā. Etāsu hi nekkhammapāramī sīlapāramiyā saṅgahitā tassā pabbajjābhāve. Nīvaraṇavivekabhāve pana jhānapāramiyā, kusaladhammabhāve chahipi saṅgahitā, saccapāramī sīlapāramiyā ekadesā eva vacīsaccaviratisaccapakkhe. Ñāṇasaccapakkhe pana paññāpāramiyā saṅgahitā, mettāpāramī jhānapāramiyā eva, upekkhāpāramī jhānapaññāpāramīhi, adhiṭṭhānapāramī sabbāhipi saṅgahitāti.
这六种功德,也就是布施等六种,彼此相互关联,能够成就十五对组合等等。具体是哪些呢?布施与戒这一对,成就做利益他人和不做损害他人这一对;布施与忍这一对,成就无贪与无嗔这一对;布施与精进这一对,成就舍与闻这一对;布施与禅那这一对,成就断除欲贪与断除嗔恨这一对;布施与智慧这一对,成就圣乘与重担这一对;戒与忍这一对,成就加行清净与意乐清净这一对;戒与精进这一对,成就两种修习这一对;戒与禅那这一对,成就断除破戒与断除随眠这一对;戒与智慧这一对,成就两种布施这一对;忍与精进这一对,成就堪忍与威光这一对;忍与禅那这一对,成就断除违逆与随顺这一对;忍与智慧这一对,成就证悟空性与堪忍这一对;精进与禅那这一对,成就策励与不散乱这一对;精进与智慧这一对,成就两种依止这一对;禅那与智慧这一对,成就两种乘这一对。布施、戒、忍这三项组合,成就断贪、断嗔、断痴这三项组合;布施、戒、精进这三项组合,成就受用坚实、命坚实、身坚实这三项组合;布施、戒、禅那这三项组合,成就三种福行事这三项组合;布施、戒、智慧这三项组合,成就财施、无畏施、法施这三项组合。像这样,其余的三项组合、四项组合等等,也应当根据具体情况搭配成三项组合、四项组合等等。巴利
Etesañca dānādīnaṃ channaṃ guṇānaṃ aññamaññasambandhānaṃ pañcadasa yugaḷādīni pañcadasa yugaḷādisādhakāni honti. Seyyathidaṃ? Dānasīlayugaḷena parahitāhitānaṃ karaṇākaraṇayugaḷasiddhi, dānakhantiyugaḷena alobhādosayugaḷasiddhi, dānavīriyayugaḷena cāgasutayugaḷasiddhi, dānajhānayugaḷena kāmadosappahānayugaḷasiddhi, dānapaññāyugaḷena ariyayānadhurayugaḷasiddhi, sīlakhantidvayena payogāsayasuddhadvayasiddhi, sīlavīriyadvayena bhāvanādvayasiddhi, sīlajhānadvayena dussīlyapariyuṭṭhānappahānadvayasiddhi, sīlapaññādvayena dānadvayasiddhi, khantivīriyadvayena khamātejadvayasiddhi, khantijhānadukena virodhānurodhappahānadukasiddhi, khantipaññādukena suññatākhantipaṭivedhadukasiddhi, vīriyajhānadukena paggahāvikkhepadukasiddhi, vīriyapaññādukena saraṇadukasiddhi, jhānapaññādukena yānadukasiddhi. Dānasīlakhantitikena lobhadosamohappahānatikasiddhi, dānasīlavīriyatikena bhogajīvitakāyasārādānatikasiddhi, dānasīlajhānatikena puññakiriyavatthutikasiddhi, dānasīlapaññātikena āmisābhayadhammadānatikasiddhīti evaṃ itarehipi tikehi, catukkādīhi ca yathāsambhavaṃ tikāni, catukkādīni ca yojetabbāni.
应当知道,这六种波罗蜜同样可以由四种决意来统摄。因为从总摄一切波罗蜜的整体来说,有四种决意。哪四种呢?就是:谛决意、舍决意、寂止决意、慧决意。其中,依它而住立,或于其中住立,或只是住立本身,所以叫决意;那既是谛又是决意,或者是谛的决意,或者谛是它的决意,所以叫谛决意。其余几种也是这样。其中,总的来说:已经发下誓愿、悲悯一切众生的大士,由于摄持一切波罗蜜而符合自己的承诺,这就是谛决意;由于舍弃它们(波罗蜜)的对立面,这就是舍决意;由于以一切波罗蜜的功德而寂止,这就是寂止决意;由于以这些功德,在利益他人方面有方便善巧,这就是慧决意。巴利
Evaṃ chabbidhānampi pana imāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi saṅgaho veditabbo. Sabbapāramīnaṃ samūhasaṅgahato hi cattāri adhiṭṭhānāni. Seyyathidaṃ? Saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, paññādhiṭṭhānanti. Tattha adhitiṭṭhati etena, ettha vā adhitiṭṭhati, adhiṭṭhānamattameva vā tanti adhiṭṭhānaṃ, saccañca taṃ adhiṭṭhānañca, saccassa vā adhiṭṭhānaṃ, saccaṃ vā adhiṭṭhānametassāti saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ sesesupi. Tattha avisesato tāva katābhinīhārassa anukampitasabbasattassa mahāsattassa paṭiññānurūpaṃ sabbapāramīpariggahato saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tesaṃ paṭipakkhapariccāgato cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, sabbapāramitāguṇehi upasamanato upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tehi eva parahitesu upāyakosallato paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ.
尤其是,从“不欺骗乞求的人,我会布施”这一承诺来看,由于不违背承诺而布施,由于不违背布施而随喜,由于舍弃悭吝等对立面,由于在施物、受施者、布施和应施之法衰败时平息贪、嗔、痴、怖,由于如理、适时、如法地布施,以及由于以慧为最上——布施就是诸善法四种决意的近因。同样,戒也是四种决意的近因:由于不违犯所受持的律仪,由于舍弃恶戒,由于平息恶行,以及由于以慧为最上。忍也是四种决意的近因:由于如所承诺而忍耐,由于舍弃对已犯过失的分别计较,由于平息嗔恚的缠缚,以及由于以慧为最上。精进也是四种决意的近因:由于随顺承诺而行利他,由于舍弃感官享乐的对境,由于平息不善法,以及由于以慧为最上。禅那也是四种决意的近因:由于随顺承诺而思虑世间利益,由于舍弃五盖,由于平息心的躁动,以及由于以慧为最上。慧也是四种决意的近因:由于如所承诺而善巧于利他的方法,由于舍弃非方便的行为,由于平息痴所生的热恼,以及由于获得一切知智。巴利
Visesato pana ‘‘yācakānaṃ janānaṃ avisaṃvādetvā dassāmī’’ti paṭijānanato, paṭiññaṃ avisaṃvādetvā dānato, dānaṃ avisaṃvādetvā anumodanato , macchariyādipaṭipakkhapariccāgato, deyyapaṭiggāhakadānadeyyadhammakkhayesu lobhadosamohabhayavūpasamanato, yathārahaṃ yathākālaṃ yathāvidhānañca dānato, paññuttarato ca kusaladhammānaṃ caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ dānaṃ. Tathā saṃvarasamādānassa avītikkamanato, dussīlyapariccāgato, duccaritavūpasamanato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ sīlaṃ. Yathāpaṭiññaṃ khamanato, katāparādhavikappapariccāgato, kodhapariyuṭṭhānavūpasamanato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānākhanti. Paṭiññānurūpaṃ parahitakaraṇato, visayapariccāgato, akusalavūpasamanato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ vīriyaṃ. Paṭiññānurūpaṃ lokahitānucintanato, nīvaraṇapariccāgato, cittavūpasamanato, paññuttarato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānaṃ jhānaṃ. Yathāpaṭiññaṃ parahitūpāyakosallato, anupāyakiriyapariccāgato, mohajapariḷāhavūpasamanato, sabbaññutāpaṭilābhato ca caturadhiṭṭhānapadaṭṭhānā paññā.
在这里,通过随顺所承诺的可知之法而有谛的立足处,通过舍弃物欲和烦恼欲而有舍的立足处,通过平息嗔恨与痛苦而有寂止的立足处,通过随觉与通达而有慧的立足处。被三种谛所包含、与三种过失相对立的,是谛的立足处;被三种舍所包含、与三种过失相对立的,是舍的立足处;被三种寂止所包含、与三种过失相对立的,是寂止的立足处;被三种智所包含、与三种过失相对立的,是慧的立足处。舍、寂止、慧这三种立足处被谛的立足处所包含,因为不违背承诺、随顺所承诺;谛、寂止、慧这三种立足处被舍的立足处所包含,因为舍弃对立面,而且是一切舍弃的结果;谛、舍、慧这三种立足处被寂止的立足处所包含,因为平息烦恼的热恼和业的热恼;谛、舍、寂止这三种立足处被慧的立足处所包含,因为以智为先导,并且随智而行。如此,一切波罗蜜都以谛为根本、以舍为庄严、以寂止为修习、以慧为清净。因为谛是它们生起的因,舍是摄受的因,寂止是圆满的因,慧是清净的因。同样,在最初阶段是谛的立足处,因为承诺了谛;在中间阶段是舍的立足处,因为已发愿的人为了利益他人而舍弃自我;在最后阶段是寂止的立足处,因为以一切寂止为最终归宿。在初、中、后三个阶段都有慧的立足处,因为它存在时这些才能生起,不存在时就不能生起,而且它是按照所承诺的那样生起的。巴利
Tattha ñeyyapaṭiññānuvidhānehi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, vatthukāmakilesakāmapariccāgehi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, dosadukkhavūpasamehi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, anubodhapaṭivedhehi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tividhasaccapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhacāgapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhavūpasamapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ, tividhañāṇapariggahitaṃ dosattayavirodhi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Saccādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni cāgūpasamapaññādhiṭṭhānāni avisaṃvādanato, paṭiññānuvidhānato ca. Cāgādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccūpasamapaññādhiṭṭhānāni paṭipakkhapariccāgato, sabbapariccāgaphalattā ca. Upasamādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccacāgapaññādhiṭṭhānāni kilesapariḷāhūpasamanato, kammapariḷāhūpasamanato ca. Paññādhiṭṭhānapariggahitāni saccacāgūpasamādhiṭṭhānāni ñāṇapubbaṅgamato, ñāṇānuparivattanato cāti evaṃ sabbāpi pāramiyo saccappabhāvitā cāgaparibyañjitā upasamopabrūhitā paññāparisuddhā. Saccañhi etāsaṃ janakahetu, cāgo paṭiggāhakahetu, upasamo paribuddhihetu paññā pārisuddhihetu. Tathā ādimhi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ saccapaṭiññattā, majjhe cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ katapaṇidhānassa parahitāya attapariccāgato, ante upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ sabbūpasamapariyosānattā. Ādimajjhapariyosānesu paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ tasmiṃ sati sambhavato, asati asambhavato, yathāpaṭiññañca sambhavato.
在这里,大人们始终以能利益自己和他人、让人尊重喜爱的谛与舍这两种依处,在家时用财物布施来帮助他人;同样,以能利益自己和他人、让人尊重喜爱的寂止与慧这两种依处,出家时用法布施来帮助他人。巴利
Tattha mahāpurisā satataṃ attahitaparahitakarehi garupiyabhāvakarehi saccacāgādhiṭṭhānehi gihibhūtā āmisadānena pare anuggaṇhanti. Tathā attahitaparahitakarehi, garupiyabhāvakarehi, upasamapaññādhiṭṭhānehi ca pabbajitabhūtā dhammadānena pare anuggaṇhanti.
关于这一点,有人认为:菩萨在最后一生中圆满四种依处;因为圆满四种依处的人,才会投生到最后的生命存在中。就在那最后一生里,入胎和出家时,由于慧依处的成就,他具念、正知;由于谛依处的圆满,他出生后朝北走了七步,环顾一切方向,以随顺真理的语言三遍发出狮子吼:“我是世间最上者,我是世间最胜者,我是世间最尊者。”由于寂止依处的成就,他看见老人、病人、死人、出家人时,善于了知四法要,从而止息了对青春、健康、寿命和福报成就的骄慢。由于舍依处的成就,他对广大的亲族眷属以及手中掌握的转轮王权,毫不留恋地舍弃。巴利
Tattha antimabhave bodhisattassa caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ. Paripuṇṇacaturadhiṭṭhānassa hi carimakabhavūpapattīti eke. Tatrāpi hi gabbhāvakkantiabhinikkhamanesu paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena sato sampajāno saccādhiṭṭhānapāripūriyā sampatijāto uttarābhimukho sattapadavītihārena gantvā sabbā disā oloketvā saccānuparivattinā vacasā ‘‘aggohamasmi lokassa, jeṭṭhohamasmi lokassa, seṭṭhohamasmi lokassā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.31; ma. ni. 3.207) tikkhattuṃ sīhanādaṃ nadi, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena jiṇṇāturamatapabbajitadassāvino catudhammappadesakovidassa yobbanārogyajīvitasampattimadānaṃ upasamo, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena mahato ñātiparivaṭṭassa, hatthagatassa ca cakkavattirajjassa anapekkhapariccāgoti.
有人说:在第二处,也就是正等觉时,四依处得以圆满。因为在正等觉时,由于谛依处的成就,如所承诺的那样现观四圣谛,所以谛依处圆满;由于舍依处的成就,舍离一切烦恼和随烦恼,所以舍依处圆满;由于寂止依处的成就,获得最上的寂止成就,所以寂止依处圆满;由于慧依处的成就,获得无碍智,所以慧依处圆满。然而这种说法不能成立,因为正等觉本身也只是胜义层面的状态。巴利
Dutiye ṭhāne abhisambodhiyaṃ caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇanti keci. Tattha hi yathāpaṭiññaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ abhisamayo. Tato hi saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena sabbakilesupakkilesapariccāgo. Tato hi cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena paramūpasamasampatti. Tato hi upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ. Paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābho. Tato hi paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti, taṃ asiddhaṃ abhisambodhiyāpi paramatthabhāvato.
另一些人说:在第三处,也就是转法轮的时候,四依处圆满。因为在转法轮时,由谛依处而来,以十二种方式宣说圣谛,所以谛依处圆满;由舍依处而来,举行正法的大布施,所以舍依处圆满;由寂止依处而来,自己寂止并令他人寂止,所以寂止依处圆满;由慧依处而来,了知所化众生的根性倾向等,所以慧依处圆满。但这种说法也不成立,因为佛陀的事业尚未完成。巴利
Tatiye ṭhāne dhammacakkappavattane caturadhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti aññe. Tattha hi saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa dvādasahi ākārehi ariyasaccadesanāya saccādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saddhammamahāyāgakaraṇena cāgādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa sayaṃ upasantassa paresaṃ upasamanena upasamādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa vineyyānaṃ āsayādiparijānanena paññādhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti, tadapi asiddhaṃ apariyositattā buddhakiccassa.
另一些人说:在第四处,也就是般涅槃时,四依处圆满。因为在般涅槃时,由于已经般涅槃,胜义谛得以成就,所以谛依处圆满;由于舍离一切依着,所以舍依处圆满;由于一切行寂止,所以寂止依处圆满;由于以慧的作用而般涅槃,所以慧依处圆满。巴利
Catutthe ṭhāne parinibbāne caturadhiṭṭhānaṃ paripuṇṇanti apare. Tatra hi parinibbutattā paramatthasaccasampattiyā saccādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, sabbūpadhipaṭinissaggena cāgādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, sabbasaṅkhārūpasamena upasamādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, paññāpayojanaparinibbānena paññādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇanti.
在这里应当知道:大士在慈心的领域里,尤其是在出生时,由真实依止所生起的真实依止圆满,表现得格外明显;在悲心的领域里,尤其是在成正觉时,由智慧依止所生起的智慧依止圆满,表现得格外明显;在喜心的领域里,尤其是在转法轮时,由舍离依止所生起的舍离依止圆满,表现得格外明显;在舍心的领域里,尤其是在般涅槃时,由寂静依止所生起的寂静依止圆满,表现得格外明显。巴利
Tatra mahāpurisassa visesena mettākhette abhijātiyaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saccādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena karuṇākhette abhisambodhiyaṃ paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa paññādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena muditākhette dhammacakkappavattane cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa cāgādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattaṃ, visesena upekkhākhette parinibbāne upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa upasamādhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇamabhibyattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
在这里也应当通过共住来了知由真实坚定所生的戒,通过交往来了知由舍离坚定所生的清净,通过危难来了知由寂静坚定所生的坚毅,通过讨论来了知由智慧坚定所生的慧。如此应当了知戒清净、活命清净、心清净、见清净。同样地,由于真实坚定的生起,因为不欺诳,所以不走向嗔恚的邪道;由于舍离坚定的生起,因为不执著,所以不走向贪欲的邪道;由于寂静坚定的生起,因为不逼迫,所以不走向怖畏的邪道;由于智慧坚定的生起,因为如实觉知,所以不走向愚痴的邪道。巴利
Tatrāpi saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saṃvāsena sīlaṃ veditabbaṃ, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa saṃvohārena soceyyaṃ veditabbaṃ, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa āpadāsu thāmo veditabbo, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgatassa sākacchāya paññā veditabbā. Evaṃ sīlājīvacittadiṭṭhivisuddhiyo veditabbā. Tathā saccādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena dosāgatiṃ na gacchati avisaṃvādanato, cāgādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena chandāgatiṃ na gacchati anabhisaṅgato, upasamādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena bhayāgatiṃ na gacchati anuparodhato, paññādhiṭṭhānasamudāgamena mohāgatiṃ na gacchati yathābhūtāvabodhato.
同样地,通过第一种依止,没有嗔恨的人能够忍受;通过第二种依止,没有贪欲的人能够受用;通过第三种依止,没有恐惧的人能够避开;通过第四种依止,没有愚痴的人能够驱除。通过第一种依止,生起出离之乐;通过其余几种依止,生起远离之乐、寂静之乐和正觉之乐。同样地,由这四种依止依次生起:远离所生的喜与乐、由定所生的喜与乐、由无喜所生的身乐,以及舍念清净之乐。应当知道,如此以四种与众多功德相伴的依止,就统摄了一切波罗蜜的聚集。正如一切波罗蜜由四种依止所统摄,也应当看作由悲与慧所统摄。因为一切菩提资粮都被悲与慧所统摄。确实,被悲与慧所摄持的布施等功德,才成为以成就佛果为最终目标的大菩提资粮。应当这样理解这些的统摄关系。巴利
Tathā paṭhamena aduṭṭho adhivāseti, dutiyena aluddho paṭisevati, tatiyena abhīto parivajjeti, catutthena asaṃmūḷho vinodeti. Paṭhamena nekkhammasukhuppatti, itarehi pavivekaupasamasambodhisukhuppattiyo honti. Tathā vivekajapītisukhasamādhijapītisukhaapītijakāyasukha satipārisuddhijaupekkhāsukhuppattiyo etehi catūhi yathākkamaṃ hontīti. Evamanekaguṇānubandhehi catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi sabbapāramisamūhasaṅgaho veditabbo. Yathā ca catūhi adhiṭṭhānehi sabbapāramisaṅgaho, evaṃ karuṇāpaññāhipīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sabbopi hi bodhisambhāro karuṇāpaññāhi saṅgahito. Karuṇāpaññāpariggahitā hi dānādiguṇā mahābodhisambhārā bhavanti buddhattasiddhipariyosānāti. Evametāsaṃ saṅgaho veditabbo.
圆满成就的方法——巴利
Kosampādanūpāyoti –
而这一切的善巧方法,就是让它们全部圆满成就。
无缺、自我奉献等,被认为是这样。巴利
Sabbāsaṃ pana tāsampi, upāyoti sampādane; Avekallādayo atta-niyyātanādayo matā.
其实,对于福德等一切资粮,为了正等觉而毫无遗漏地全部积集,这靠的是“无缺而行”这一支。在这当中,恭敬而行靠的是尊重与敬奉;持续而行靠的是不间断地精勤;长久的时间等结合,则是靠中途不中断。至于它的时间限度,后面会清楚说明。这样,这四支结合就是成就这些波罗蜜的方法。巴利
Sakalassāpi hi puññādisambhārassa sammāsambodhiṃ uddissa anavasesasambharaṇaṃ avekallakāritāyogena, tattha ca sakkaccakāritā ādarabahumānayogena, sātaccakāritā nirantarapayogena, cirakālādiyogo ca antarā avosānāpajjanenāti. Taṃ panassa kālaparimāṇaṃ parato āvi bhavissati. Iti caturaṅgayogo etāsaṃ pāramīnaṃ sampādanūpāyo.
同样,大士为觉悟而修行时,应当在诸佛面前、在正等觉之前,先把自己奉献出去:“我把这个自身奉献给诸佛。”而且,在获得种种执取之物以前,就要先在布施这一门径上舍弃掉:“凡是我生起的任何活命资具,只要有乞求者来,我就全部施予;他们拿过之后剩下的,我才自己受用。”巴利
Tathā mahāsattena bodhāya paṭipajjantena sammāsambodhāya buddhānaṃ puretarameva attā niyyātetabbo ‘‘imāhaṃ attabhāvaṃ buddhānaṃ niyyātemī’’ti. Taṃ taṃ pariggahavatthuñca paṭilābhato puretarameva dānamukhe nissajjitabbaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñci mayhaṃ uppajjanakaṃ jīvitaparikkhārajātaṃ, taṃ sabbaṃ sati yācake dassāmi, tesaṃ pana dinnāvasesaṃ eva mayā paribhuñjitabba’’nti.
当他这样为了真正的舍离而正确地作意之后,无论生起的是没有心识的执著物,还是有情识的执著物,其中,有四种布施的束缚:过去在布施上没有积累习气、执著物太少、执著物殊胜可爱、以及担心耗尽的想法。当大菩萨面对现有的可施之物、乞者又已现前时,如果心不投入、不趋向布施,就应当由此得出结论:“我一定过去在布施上没有积累习气,所以现在想布施的意愿无法在心中建立。”于是他想:“从今以后,我的心要乐于布施。来吧,我从现在起就布施,难道我不是早就把执著物舍给乞者了吗?”他就这样行布施,放下执著、双手舒展、乐于舍弃、回应乞求、乐于分享布施。这样,大士的第一种布施束缚就被击破、摧毁、断除了。巴利
Evañhissa sammadeva pariccāgāya kate cittābhisaṅkhāre yaṃ uppajjati pariggahavatthu aviññāṇakaṃ, saviññāṇakaṃ vā, tattha ye ime pubbe dāne akataparicayo, pariggahavatthussa parittabhāvo, uḷāramanuññatā, parikkhayacintāti cattāro dānavinibandhā. Tesu yadā mahābodhisattassa saṃvijjamānesu deyyadhammesu, paccupaṭṭhite ca yācakajane dāne cittaṃ na pakkhandati na kamati, tena niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ ‘‘addhāhaṃ dāne pubbe akataparicayo, tena me etarahi dātukamyatā citte na saṇṭhātī’’ti. So ‘‘evaṃ me ito paraṃ dānābhirataṃ cittaṃ bhavissati, handāhaṃ ito paṭṭhāya dānaṃ dassāmi, nanu mayā paṭikacceva pariggahavatthuṃ yācakānaṃ pariccatta’’nti dānaṃ deti muttacāgo payatapāṇi vossaggarato yācayogo dānasaṃvibhāgarato. Evaṃ mahāsattassa paṭhamo dānavinibandho hato hoti vihato samucchinno.
同样,大士在应施之物微少、资具匮乏时,就这样思惟:我过去因为没有布施的习惯,如今才落得资具匮乏。所以现在,即使要用微少、低劣、随所得而有的施物,哪怕逼迫自己,也应当行布施,好让我在未来世也能把布施波罗蜜修到圆满。于是他以种种方式行布施:放手而施、亲手而施、乐于舍弃、有求必应、乐于分享布施。就这样,大士的第二布施系缚被击破、被摧毁、被断除。巴利
Tathā mahāsatto deyyadhammassa parittabhāve sati paccayavekalle iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘ahaṃ kho pubbe adānasīlatāya etarahi evaṃ paccayavekallo jāto, tasmā idāni mayā parittena vā hīnena vā yathāladdhena deyyadhammena attānaṃ pīḷetvāpi dānameva dātabbaṃ, yenāhaṃ āyatimpi dānapāramiṃ matthakaṃ pāpessāmī’’ti so itarītarena dānaṃ deti muttacāgo payatapāṇi vossaggarato yācayogo dānasaṃvibhāgarato. Evaṃ mahāsattassa dutiyo dānavinibandho hato hoti vihato samucchinno.
同样,当应施之物殊胜又可爱,而“不想布施”的心生起时,大士就这样思惟:“善士,你不是已经发愿求取那最殊胜、最无上的正自觉吗?因此,为了这个目标,你理应把殊胜又可爱的应施之物布施出去。”于是,他布施殊胜又可爱的东西:他放得下、手伸得开、乐于舍弃、有求必应、乐于与人分享布施。就这样,大士的第三种布施系缚被击破、被摧毁、被彻底断除。巴利
Tathā mahāsatto deyyadhammassa uḷāramanuññatāya adātukamyatācitte uppajjamāne iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘nanu tayā sappurisa uḷāratamā sabbaseṭṭhā sammāsambodhi abhipatthitā, tasmā tadatthaṃ tayā uḷāramanuññe eva deyyadhamme dātuṃ yuttarūpa’’nti. So uḷāraṃ, manuññañca dānaṃ deti muttacāgo payatapāṇi vossaggarato yācayogo dānasaṃvibhāgarato. Evaṃ mahāpurisassa tatiyo dānavinibandho hato hoti vihato samucchinno.
同样地,大士在布施时,如果看到施物快要耗尽,他就这样思量:“这本来就是财富的常态,也就是终归会耗尽、终归会消散。再说,正因为我过去没有做过这样的布施,现在才会看到财富耗尽。那我就用随所得来的施物,不管少还是多,只管布施,凭这个让我在未来达到布施波罗蜜的顶点。”他就随所得而布施:放得下、手伸得开、乐于舍弃、有求必应、乐于与人分享布施。就这样,大士的第四种布施障碍被击破、摧毁、根除了。同样,凡是成为布施波罗蜜障碍的各种不利因素,都要按各自的情况审察之后加以消除,这就是方法。就像布施波罗蜜一样,持戒波罗蜜等也应当这样看待。巴利
Tathā mahāsatto dānaṃ dento yadā deyyadhammassa parikkhayaṃ passati, so iti paṭisañcikkhati ‘‘ayaṃ kho bhogānaṃ sabhāvo, yadidaṃ khayadhammatā vayadhammatā, apica me pubbe tādisassa dānassa akatattā evaṃ bhogānaṃ parikkhayo dissati, handāhaṃ yathāladdhena deyyadhammena parittena vā, vipulena vā dānameva dadeyyaṃ, yenāhaṃ āyatiṃ dānapāramiyā matthakaṃ pāpuṇissāmī’ti. So yathāladdhena dānaṃ deti muttacāgo payatapāṇi vossaggarato yācayogo dānasaṃvibhāgarato. Evaṃ mahāsattassa catuttho dānavinibandho hato hoti vihato samucchinno. Evaṃ ye ye dānapāramiyā vinibandhabhūtā anatthā, tesaṃ tesaṃ yathārahaṃ paccavekkhitvā paṭivinodanaṃ upāyo. Yathā ca dānapāramiyā, evaṃ sīlapāramiādīsupi daṭṭhabbaṃ.
还有,大士把自身奉献给诸佛,这本身就是圆满成就一切波罗蜜的方法。已经把自己奉献给诸佛、安住于此的大丈夫,在处处为圆满菩提资粮而努力精进时,面对那些会断绝身体和安乐资具的难行之事,面对众生种种造作所带来的、难以应对的、猛烈夺命的灾祸,他心里想:“这个身体我已经献给诸佛了,无论在这里发生什么,都随它去吧。”因此,他不会动摇,不会颤抖,连一丝一毫的变异都不会有,反而在善法的开端上,决心坚固不动。这样看来,把自己奉献出去,也是成就这些波罗蜜的方法。巴利
Apica yaṃ mahāsattassa buddhānaṃ attasanniyyātanaṃ, taṃ sammadeva sabbapāramīnaṃ sampādanūpāyo, buddhānañca attānaṃ niyyātetvā ṭhito mahāpuriso tattha tattha bodhisambhārapāripūriyā ghaṭento vāyamanto sarīrassa, sukhūpakaraṇānañca upacchedakesu dussahesupi kiccesu (kicchesu cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā) durabhisambhavesupi sattasaṅkhārasamupanītesu anatthesu tibbesu pāṇaharesu ‘‘ayaṃ mayā attabhāvo buddhānaṃ pariccatto, yaṃ vā taṃ vā ettha hotū’’ti tannimittaṃ na kampati na vedhati īsakampi aññathattaṃ na gacchati, kusalārambhe aññadatthu acalādhiṭṭhāno ca hoti, evaṃ attasanniyyātanampi etāsaṃ sampādanūpāyo.
另外,简单来说,已经发下大愿的人,要彻底耗尽对自己的贪爱,同时不断增长对他人的关爱,这就是成就这些波罗蜜的方法。因为,为了证得正等正觉而发下大愿的大士,通过如实了知一切法而不被任何法所染着,对自己的贪爱就会彻底耗尽、枯竭;而由于与大悲相应,他把一切众生看作像自己亲爱的孩子一样,对他们的慈爱与悲悯之爱就会不断增长。因此,这位大丈夫随着时机和情况,在自他相续中去除贪、嗔、痴,远离悭吝等菩提资粮的障碍,以布施、爱语、利行、同事这四种摄事,依止于四种决意,彻底地摄受众人,引导他们进入三乘并使他们成熟。巴利
Apica samāsato katābhinīhārassa attani sinehassa pariyādānaṃ, (parisosanaṃ cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā) paresu ca sinehassa parivaḍḍhanaṃ etāsaṃ sampādanūpāyo. Sammāsambodhisamadhigamāya hi katamahāpaṇidhānassa mahāsattassa yāthāvato parijānanena sabbesu dhammesu anupalittassa attani sineho parikkhayaṃ pariyādānaṃ gacchati, mahākaruṇāsamāyogavasena (samāsevanena cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā) pana piyaputte viya sabbasatte sampassamānassa tesu mettākaruṇāsineho parivaḍḍhati, tato ca taṃ tadāvatthānurūpaṃ attaparasantānesu lobhadosamohavigamena vidūrīkatamacchariyādibodhisambhārapaṭipakkho mahāpuriso dānapiyavacanaatthacariyā samānattatāsaṅkhātehi catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi (dī. ni. 3.313; a. ni. 4.32) caturadhiṭṭhānānugatehi accantaṃ janassa saṅgahakaraṇena upari yānattaye avatāraṇaṃ, paripācanañca karoti.
大士们的大悲与大慧,以布施为庄严;布施以爱语为庄严;爱语以利行为庄严;利行以同事为庄严,彼此互相庄严、互相摄持。因为大士们把一切众生看作和自己没有差别,在修集菩提资粮时,于一切处都与众生同苦同乐,因此成就了同事。即使是已经成佛的诸佛,也是以这四种摄事,依靠四种决意而圆满通达,通过彻底摄受众生来成就教化。正自觉者的布施,是以舍决意而圆满通达的;爱语是以真谛决意而圆满通达的;利行是以智慧决意而圆满通达的;同事是以寂静决意而圆满通达的。因为如来与一切声闻、独觉佛在般涅槃中是同事的,在那里他们没有差别地成为一体。因此说“解脱没有差别”。在这里有偈颂:巴利
Mahāsattānañhi mahākaruṇā, mahāpaññā ca dānena alaṅkatā, dānaṃ piyavacanena, piyavacanaṃ atthacariyāya, atthacariyā samānattatāya alaṅkatā, saṅgahitā ca. Tesañhi sabbepi satte attanā nibbisese katvā bodhisambhāresu paṭipajjantānaṃ sabbattha samānasukhadukkhatāya samānattatāsiddhi. Buddhabhūtānampi ca teheva catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi caturadhiṭṭhānena paripūritābhibuddhehi janassa accantikasaṅgahakaraṇena abhivinayanaṃ sijjhati. Dānañhi sammāsambuddhānaṃ cāgādhiṭṭhānena paripūritābhibuddhaṃ. Piyavacanaṃ saccādhiṭṭhānena, atthacariyā paññādhiṭṭhānena, samānattatā upasamādhiṭṭhānena paripūritābhibuddhā. Tathāgatānañhi sabbasāvakapaccekabuddhehi samānattatā parinibbāne. Tatra hi nesaṃ avisesato ekībhāvo. Tenevāha ‘‘natthi vimuttiyā nānatta’’ti. Honti cettha –
真实、慷慨、寂静、有慧、悲悯者,
已经具足一切资粮的人,还有什么目标不能达成呢?
具足大悲的导师,利他,又安住于舍心;
他对一切都不执着,真是稀有难得的胜利者啊。
对一切法已经离染,对众生也保持舍心;
他总是为了众生的利益而努力——啊,这位战胜一切的人真是不可思议!
任何时候,为了利益和安乐一切众生;
他精勤不懈,真是稀有难得的胜利者!
要多少时间才能完成?
按智慧增上等分类,以及略说知者等分类。
依三类菩萨,其时间亦被承认为三种。巴利
‘‘Sacco cāgī upasanto, paññavā anukampako; Sambhatasabbasambhāro, kaṃ nāmatthaṃ na sādhaye. Mahākāruṇiko satthā, hitesī ca upekkhako; Nirapekkho ca sabbattha, aho acchariyo jino. Viratto sabbadhammesu, sattesu ca upekkhako; Sadā sattahite yutto, aho acchariyo jino. Sabbadā sabbasattānaṃ, hitāya ca sukhāya ca; Uyyutto akilāsū ca, aho acchariyo jino’’ti. (cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā); Kittakenakālena sampādananti – Paññādhikādibhedena, ugghāṭitaññuādinā; Tiṇṇampi bodhisattānaṃ, vasā kālo tidhā mato.
按最低的限度来说,是四阿僧祇劫加十万大劫;按中等的限度来说,是八阿僧祇劫加十万大劫;按最高的限度来说,则是十六阿僧祇劫加十万大劫。这些差别应当依次理解为:慧增上、信增上、精进增上。慧增上的人,信弱而慧锐利;信增上的人,慧中等;精进增上的人,慧弱。而正自觉应当以慧的力量证得——这是注释书中说的。巴利
Heṭṭhimena hi tāva paricchedena cattāri asaṅkhyeyyāni, mahākappānaṃ satasahassañca, majjhimena aṭṭha asaṅkhyeyyāni, mahākappānaṃ satasahassañca, uparimena pana soḷasa asaṅkhyeyyāni, mahākappānaṃ satasahassañca. Ete ca bhedā yathākkamaṃ paññādhikasaddhādhikavīriyādhikavasena veditabbā. Paññādhikānañhi saddhā mandā hoti, paññā tikkhā. Saddhādhikānaṃ paññā majjhimā hoti. Vīriyādhikānaṃ paññā mandā. Paññānubhāvena ca sammāsambodhi abhigantabbāti (su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34 atthato samānaṃ) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ.
另有一些人说:“菩萨的这三种时间差别,是由精进的锐利、中等、柔和而形成的。”他们还说:“如果不作区分,那么对于能令解脱成熟的诸法,随着它们锐利、中等、柔和的差别,按照前面所说的不同时间阶段,菩萨的菩提资粮就在那些阶段中逐渐圆满,因此这三种时间差别是合理的。”如此,菩萨在发愿的那一刻有三种类型:一种是略说即知者,一种是广说才知者,一种是可以引导者。其中,略说即知者如果在正自觉者面前听四句偈,在第三句还没结束时,就已经有能力连同六神通和无碍解一起证得阿拉汉果——如果他志向的是声闻菩提的话。巴利
Apare pana ‘‘vīriyassa tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvena bodhisattānaṃ ayaṃ kālavibhāgo’’ti vadanti, avisesena pana vimuttiparipācanīyānaṃ dhammānaṃ tikkhamajjhimamudubhāvena yathāvuttakālabhedena bodhisambhārā tesaṃ pāripūriṃ gacchantīti tayopete kālabhedā yuttātipi vadanti. Evaṃ tividhā hi bodhisattā abhinīhārakkhaṇe bhavanti eko ugghaṭitaññū, eko vipañcitaññū, eko neyyoti. Tesu yo ugghaṭitaññū, so sammāsambuddhassa sammukhā catuppadagāthaṃ suṇanto gāthāya tatiyapade apariyosite eva chahi abhiññāhi saha paṭisambhidāhi arahattaṃ adhigantuṃ samatthupanissayo hoti, sace sāvakabodhiyaṃ adhimutto siyā.
第二种人,在世尊面前听四句偈时,偈颂的第四句还没听完,就已经具备了以六种神通证得阿罗汉果的充分近依,如果他当时的心志是倾向于声闻菩提的话。巴利
Dutiyo bhagavato sammukhā catuppadagāthaṃ suṇanto apariyosite eva gāthāya catutthapade chahi abhiññāhi arahattaṃ adhigantuṃ samatthupanissayo hoti, yadi sāvakabodhiyaṃ adhimutto siyā.
另一个人在世尊面前听了四句偈,偈颂结束时,就具备了以六种神通证得阿罗汉果的充分近依。巴利
Itaro pana bhagavato sammukhā catuppadagāthaṃ sutvā pariyositāya gāthāya chahi abhiññāhi arahattaṃ adhigantuṃ samatthupanissayo hoti.
这三类人虽然发愿的时间不同,但都在诸佛面前得到授记,然后次第修满波罗蜜,按照前面所说的不同时间阶段,在相应的时候证得正自觉。不过,如果在那些不同的时间阶段里还没有修满,那么这些大士即使每天行像须大拏太子那样的广大布施,即使修习与布施相应的戒等一切波罗蜜法,即使舍弃五种大舍,即使把亲族利益、世间利益、佛利益修到极点,在这中间也绝不可能成为正自觉者。为什么?因为智慧还没有成熟,成佛之法也还没有圆满。就像庄稼要按一定的时间才能长成一样,正自觉也是按前面所说的时间界限来圆满成就的;在那段时间里,即使以全部精进努力,也不可能证得。应当知道,波罗蜜的圆满是依照前面所说的特定时间阶段而成就的。巴利
Tayopete vinā kālabhedena katābhinīhārā, buddhānaṃ santike laddhabyākaraṇā ca anukkamena pāramiyo pūrentā yathākkamaṃ yathāvuttabhedena kālena sammāsambodhiṃ pāpuṇanti. Tesu tesu pana kālabhedesu aparipuṇṇesu te te mahāsattā divase divase vessantaradānasadisaṃ mahādānaṃ dentāpi tadanurūpe sīlādisabbapāramidhamme ācinantāpi pañca mahāpariccāge pariccajantāpi ñātatthacariyaṃ lokatthacariyaṃ buddhatthacariyaṃ paramakoṭiṃ pāpentāpi antarāva sammāsambuddhā bhavissantīti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Kasmā? Ñāṇassa aparipaccanato, buddhakārakadhammānañca apariniṭṭhānato. Paricchinnakālanipphāditaṃ viya hi sassaṃ yathāvuttakālaparicchedena parinipphāditā sammāsambodhi tadantarā pana sabbussāhena vāyamantenāpi na sakkā adhigantunti pāramipāripūri yathāvuttakālavisesena sampajjatīti veditabbaṃ.
那些已经发愿的菩萨们——巴利
Ye te katābhinīhārānaṃ bodhisattānaṃ –
这样具足一切支分的人,已在菩提道上决定不退。
在漫长的轮回中流转,哪怕经历数十亿劫。
他们不会投生到无间地狱,也不会投生到世界之间的地狱。
他们不再有焦渴的渴望,也没有饥饿和干渴,不会投生为黑齿鬼。
他们不会变成微小的生命,即使投生到恶趣。
投生到人间的人,不会天生就是盲人。
听觉没有残缺,也不会成为哑巴或瘫痪者。
他们不会投生为女人,也不会成为双性人或黄门。
已决定证得菩提的人,不再属于三界所摄。
已从无间业中解脱,在一切处都清净行境。
他们不亲近邪见,因为已经看清了业与行为的关系。
即使住在天界,也不会投生到无想天。
在净居天的天神当中,并不存在所谓的“因”。
善士们倾向于出离,对种种生命存在都不再纠缠。
他们实践着利益世间的行为,圆满一切波罗蜜。巴利
‘‘Evaṃ sabbaṅgasampannā, bodhiyā niyatā narā; Saṃsaraṃ dīghamaddhānaṃ, kappakoṭisatehipi. Avīcimhi nuppajjanti, tathā lokantaresu ca; Nijjhāmataṇhā khuppipāsā, na honti kālakañcikā. (kālakañcikā cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā); Na honti khuddakā pāṇā, upapajjantāpi duggatiṃ; Jāyamānā manussesu, jaccandhā na bhavanti te. Sotavekallatā natthi, na bhavanti mūgapakkhikā; Itthibhāvaṃ na gacchanti, ubhatobyañjanapaṇḍakā. Na bhavanti pariyāpannā, bodhiyā niyatā narā; Muttā ānantarikehi, sabbattha suddhagocarā. Micchādiṭṭhiṃ na sevanti, kammakiriyadassanā; Vasamānāpi saggesu, asaññaṃ nupapajjare. Suddhāvāsesu devesu, hetu nāma na vijjati; Nekkhammaninnā sappurisā, visaṃyuttā bhavābhave; Caranti lokatthacariyāyo, pūrenti sabbapāramī’’ti. (aṭṭhasā. nidānakathā; cariyā. pakiṇṇakakathā; apa. aṭṭha. 1.dūrenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.dūrenidānakathā; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 27.dūrenidānakathā); –
这些被如此赞叹的利益,以及“阿难,菩萨具念正知,从兜率天身殁后,进入母胎”等经文所说的十六种希有未曾有法;还有“寒冷消失,炎热止息”等,以及“舍利弗,菩萨诞生时,这一万世界震动、大震动、剧烈震动”等所说的三十二种前兆;另外,菩萨种种愿望得以实现、在业等处获得自在等,在《本生》《佛种姓》等各处所显示的各种利益——这一切都属于这些利益。同样,应当知道,按照上述分类,还有无贪、无嗔等成对的功德等。巴利
Evaṃ saṃvaṇṇitā ānisaṃsā, ye ca ‘‘sato sampajāno ānanda bodhisatto tusitā kāyā cavitvā mātukucchiṃ okkamatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.204) soḷasa acchariyabbhutadhammappakārā, ye ca ‘‘sītaṃ byapagataṃ hoti, uṇhañca vūpasamatī’’tiādinā, (khu. ni. 4-313 piṭṭhe) ‘‘jāyamāne kho sāriputta, bodhisatte ayaṃ dasasahassilokadhātu saṅkampati sampakampati sampavedhatī’’tiādinā ca dvattiṃsa pubbanimittappakārā, ye vā panaññepi bodhisattānaṃ adhippāyasamijjhanaṃ, kammādīsu ca vasibhāvoti evamādayo tattha tattha jātakabuddhavaṃsādīsu dassitappakārā ānisaṃsā, te sabbepi etāsaṃ ānisaṃsā, tathā yathānidassitabhedā alobhādosādiguṇayugaḷādayo cāti veditabbā.
另外,从菩萨最初发愿开始,因为一心想要利益一切众生,他就像一切众生的父亲一样;因为功德殊胜,他成为应当受人供养、值得敬重、值得尊崇的人,也是最上的福田;大多数人都喜欢他,非人也喜欢他,诸天一直守护他;因为他的身心相续被慈和悲彻底浸润,所以猛兽之类的众生也伤害不了他;无论他投生到哪一类众生当中,凭着福德的殊胜,他都在容貌、名声、快乐、力量、统御力等方面胜过其他众生。巴利
Apica yasmā bodhisatto abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya sabbasattānaṃ pitusamo hoti hitesitāya, dakkhiṇeyyako garu bhāvanīyo paramañca puññakkhettaṃ hoti guṇavisesayogena, yebhuyyena ca manussānaṃ piyo hoti, amanussānaṃ piyo hoti, devatāhi anupālīyati, mettākaruṇāparibhāvitasantānatāya vāḷamigādīhi ca anabhibhavanīyo hoti, yasmiṃ yasmiñca sattanikāye paccājāyati, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ uḷārena vaṇṇena uḷārena yasena uḷārena sukhena uḷārena balena uḷārena ādhipateyyena aññe satte abhibhavati puññavisesayogato.
他少病、少恼,他的信极为清净明澈,精进极为清净,念、定、慧也极为清净明澈;他烦恼轻微,忧恼轻微,热恼轻微。正因为烦恼轻微,他很容易受教,能随顺领受;他有忍耐,柔和,友善,善于与人交往;他不愤怒,不怀恨,不覆藏,不傲慢,不嫉妒,不悭吝,不狡诈,不虚伪,不顽固,不高傲,不躁动,不放逸;他能止息他人带来的恼害,也不去恼害他人。无论他住在哪个村落或田地,那里的众生大多不会生起怖畏等灾患,已经生起的也会平息。即使他投生到恶趣中,在那里也不会像普通大众那样被剧烈的痛苦所逼迫,反而会生起更强的悚惧与畏惧。因此应当知道,大士无论生于哪一存在中,随其所应获得的这些如父亲般堪受供养等种种殊胜功德,就是(发愿的)利益。巴利
Appābādho hoti appātaṅko, suvisuddhā cassa saddhā hoti suvisadā, suvisuddhaṃ vīriyaṃ, sati samādhi paññā suvisadā, mandakileso hoti mandadaratho mandapariḷāho, kilesānaṃ mandabhāveneva subbaco hoti padakkhiṇaggāhī, khamo hoti sorato, sakhilo hoti paṭisandhārakusalo , akodhano hoti anupanāhī, amakkhī hoti apaḷāsī, anissukī hoti amaccharī, asaṭho hoti amāyāvī, athaddho hoti anatimānī, asāraddho hoti appamatto , parato upatāpasaho hoti paresaṃ anupatāpī, yasmiñca gāmakhette paṭivasati, tattha sattānaṃ bhayādayo upaddavā yebhuyyena anuppannā nuppajjanti, uppannā ca vūpasamanti, yesu ca apāyesu uppajjati, na tattha pacurajano viya dukkhena adhimattaṃ pīḷīyati, bhiyyoso mattāya saṃvegabhayamāpajjati. Tasmā mahāpurisassa yathārahaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhave labbhamānā ete sattānaṃ pitusamatādakkhiṇeyyatādayo guṇavisesā ānisaṃsāti veditabbā.
同样地,寿命具足、容貌具足、出身具足、权势具足、言语可信、大威神力,这些也应当知道是大人波罗蜜的利益果报。其中,寿命具足,是指在每一次投生中都能长寿、久住世间,因此能让已经发起的种种善行修到圆满,并积累许多善业。容貌具足,是指相貌端正、好看、令人欢喜,因此能让那些只看外表的众生生起信心,受到他们的敬重。出身具足,是指投生在高贵家族中,因此即使是那些被出身等骄慢冲昏头的众生,也会来亲近他、侍奉他,从而放下骄慢。权势具足,是指拥有大财富、大势力、大随从,因此能用四种摄受之法摄受应当摄受的人,也能如法地惩治应当惩治的人。言语可信,是指说的话值得信赖、真实可靠,因此成为众生衡量是非的标准,他的命令没有人敢违抗。大威神力,是指威德广大,因此不会被别人压制,反而能以法、以公正、以真实的功德去折伏别人。应当知道,这些寿命具足等等,既是大人波罗蜜的利益果报,本身也是无量福德资粮增长的原因,是在三乘中引导众生、令其成熟的原因。巴利
Tathā āyusampadā rūpasampadā kulasampadā issariyasampadā ādeyyavacanatā mahānubhāvatāti etepi mahāpurisassa pāramīnaṃ ānisaṃsāti veditabbā. Tattha āyusampadā nāma tassaṃ tassaṃ upapattiyaṃ dīghāyukatā ciraṭṭhitikatā, tāya yathāraddhāni kusalasamādānāni pariyosāpeti, bahuñca kusalaṃ upacinoti. Rūpasampadā nāma abhirūpatā dassanīyatā pāsādikatā, tāya rūpappamāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ pasādāvaho hoti sambhāvanīyo. Kulasampadā nāma uḷāresu kulesu abhinibbatti, tāya [jātimadādimadasattānampi (madamattānampi cariyā. aṭṭha. pakiṇṇakakathā)] upasaṅkamanīyo hoti payirupāsanīyo, tena te nibbisevane karonti. Issariyasampadā nāma mahāvibhavatā, mahesakkhatā, mahāparivāratā ca, tāhi saṅgahitabbe catūhi saṅgahavatthūhi (dī. ni. 3.313; a. ni. 1.256) saṅgahituṃ, niggahetabbe dhammena niggahetuñca samattho hoti. Ādeyyavacanatā nāma saddheyyatā paccayikatā, tāya sattānaṃ pamāṇabhūto hoti, alaṅghanīyā cassa āṇā hoti. Mahānubhāvatā nāma pabhāvamahantatā, tāya parehi na abhibhuyyati, sayameva pana pare aññadatthu abhibhavati dhammena, samena, yathābhūtaguṇehi ca, evametesaṃ āyusampadādayo mahāpurisassa pāramīnaṃ ānisaṃsā, sayañca aparimāṇassa puññasambhārassa parivuddhihetubhūtā yānattaye sattānaṃ avatāraṇassa paripācanassa kāraṇabhūtāti veditabbā.
简略来说,应当知道她们的果报就是正等正觉。
从广说的角度看,它们被认为是无量、不可计量的功德聚集。巴利
Sammāsambuddhatā tāsaṃ, jaññā phalaṃ samāsato; Vitthārato anantāpa-meyyā guṇagaṇā matā.
简单来说,正等正觉的成就就是这些(波罗蜜)的果。详细来说,则以三十二大丈夫相、八十种随形好、一寻身光等无数功德庄严的色身成就为基础,以十力、四无畏、六不共智、十八不共法等无边功德聚集所庄严、光辉灿烂的法身之威德——而诸佛功德,即使正等正觉者用许多劫的时间来说,也无法说到尽头,这就是它们的果。世尊也确实这样说过:巴利
Samāsato hi tāva sammāsambuddhabhāvo etāsaṃ phalaṃ. Vitthārato pana bāttiṃsamahāpurisalakkhaṇa (dī. ni. 2.33 ādayo; 3.198; ma. ni. 2.386) asītānubyañjana, byāmappabhādianekaguṇagaṇasamujjalarūpakāyasampattiadhiṭṭhānā dasabala- (ma. ni. 4.8; a. ni. 10.21) catuvesārajja- (a. ni. 4.8) chaasādhāraṇañāṇaaṭṭhārasāveṇikabuddhadhamma- (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 3.305;) pabhutianantāparimāṇaguṇasamudayopasobhinī dhammakāyasirī, yāvatā pana buddhaguṇā ye anekehipi kappehi sammāsambuddhenāpi vācāya pariyosāpetuṃ na sakkā, idameva tāsaṃ phalaṃ. Vuttañcetaṃ bhagavatā –
即使是佛陀,也还是要赞叹佛陀的功德,
就算用整整一劫,甚至更久的时间,不说别的
哪怕经过极其漫长的时间,劫也会耗尽。
如来的功德也不会耗尽。巴利
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.304; 3.141; udā. aṭṭha. 53; cariyā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā, pakiṇṇakakathā) –
在这里,关于波罗蜜的杂论应当这样理解。巴利
Evamettha pāramīsu pakiṇṇakakathā veditabbā.
为了说明依照前面所说的修行方法,前面所说的各类波罗蜜已经修满的状态,所以经文说“修满三十波罗蜜”。虽然各种大舍离本来就属于布施波罗蜜,但为了显示它们作为舍离的殊胜性,为了显示它们是殊胜的资粮,也为了显示它们极其难行,所以把它们单独提出来说。同样,在肢节舍离之外,把眼舍离单独提出来;在财物和王位舍离之外,把妻子儿女舍离单独提出来——虽然它们同属于对执著之物的舍离,也还是单独列出。这正是阿阇梨法护长老所说的。阿阇梨舍利弗长老在《增支部复注》中也这样说。不过在有些地方,则把妻子儿女舍离单独列出之后,又把眼舍离,或者另外加上生命舍离、王位舍离分别列出,而说为五种大舍离。巴利
Evaṃ yathāvuttāya paṭipadāya yathāvuttavibhāgānaṃ pāramīnaṃ pūritabhāvaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā’’ti. Satipi mahāpariccāgānaṃ dānapāramibhāve pariccāgavisesabhāvadassanatthaṃ, visesasambhāratādassanatthaṃ, sudukkarabhāvadassanatthañca tesaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ, tatoyeva ca aṅgapariccāgato nayanapariccāgassa, pariggahapariccāgabhāvasāmaññepi dhanarajjapariccāgato puttadārapariccāgassa visuṃ gahaṇaṃ kataṃ, tathāyeva ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7) vuttaṃ. Ācariyasāriputtattherenapi aṅguttaraṭīkāyaṃ, (a. ni. ṭī. 1.ekapuggalavaggassa paṭhame) katthaci pana puttadārapariccāge visuṃ katvā nayanapariccāgamaññatra jīvitapariccāgaṃ vā pakkhipitvā rajjapariccāgamaññatra pañca mahāpariccāge vadanti.
与被称为“往返义务”的前行修行一起,成就神通与等至,这就是前方便。在布施等修行中成就特别殊胜的修行,就是前行。或者说,收录在《行藏》里的那些修行,就是前行。不过有些人说:“发愿是前方便,布施等修行或者依身远离而修的独处修行是前行。”为了向众生揭示布施等以及少欲知足等在轮回和涅槃中的过患与功德,为了让他们安立于、成熟于三种菩提而进行的说法,就是法教示。为亲属的利益而行的修行,是亲属利益行,那也是基于悲悯。由“等”这个字,还包括世间利益行等。依业自性智,依对无过失的业处、工巧处、明处的熟悉,依对蕴、处等的熟悉,依对三相的审察而进行的智的活动,就是慧行——这实质上就是般若波罗蜜,但为了显示智的资粮而单独列出。“极”是指边际、最上。这里的“如是,我们的世尊也出现”一句,也与“修满布施波罗蜜”等文存在连结。巴利
Gatapaccāgatikavattasaṅkhātāya (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.9; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.10.9; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.368; vibha. aṭṭha. 523; su. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.35) pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya saddhiṃ abhiññāsamāpattinipphādanaṃ pubbayogo. Dānādīsuyeva sātisayapaṭipattinipphādanaṃ pubbacariyā. Yā vā cariyāpiṭakasaṅgahitā, sā pubbacariyā. Keci pana ‘‘abhinīhāro pubbayogo. Dānādipaṭipatti vā kāyavivekavasena ekacariyā vā pubbacariyā’’ti vadanti. Dānādīnañceva appicchatādīnañca saṃsāranibbānesu ādīnavānisaṃsānañca vibhāvanavasena, sattānaṃ bodhittaye patiṭṭhāpanaparipācanavasena ca pavattā kathā dhammakkhānaṃ. Ñātīnamatthassa cariyā ñātatthacariyā, sāpi karuṇāyanavaseneva. Ādi-saddena lokatthacariyādayo saṅgaṇhāti. Kammassakatāñāṇavasena, anavajjakammāyatanasippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānaparicayavasena, khandhāyatanādiparicayavasena, lakkhaṇattayatīraṇavasena ca ñāṇacāro buddhicariyā, sā panatthato paññāpāramīyeva, ñāṇasambhāradassanatthaṃ pana visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Koṭinti pariyantaṃ ukkaṃsaṃ. Tathā amhākampi bhagavā āgatoti etthāpi ‘‘dānapāramiṃ pūretvā’’tiādinā sambandho.
像这样,先通过圆满波罗蜜的角度说明了“如来”这个词的含义,现在再从菩提分法的角度来说明,于是说了“四念处”等。在这里,通过举出念处等,是把到来的修行之道推到了顶点来显示,因为只应当取用属于道和果的法;或者,念处等应当看作已经包含了观智,因为这里取用的是前行之道。培育,就是让它生起。增长,就是让它扩展。在这里,用“由何发愿”等说明了修行之道的开头,用“圆满布施波罗蜜”等说明了中间部分,用“四念处”等说明了结尾。因此应当知道,这三种方式的差别,正是为了显示作为所说“到来”之因的修行殊胜。现在,为了用偈颂的形式显示由上述三种义理组合所成就的第一种原因,说了“正如”等。这里的连接是:正如毗婆尸等圣者在这个世间,以上述三种原因成就了一切知性而来,同样,这位具足五眼的释迦牟尼,也因某种原因而来,所以称为如来。巴利
Evaṃ pāramipūraṇavasena ‘‘tathā āgato’’ti padassatthaṃ dassetvā idāni bodhipakkhiyadhammavasenapi dassento ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne’’tiādimāha. Tattha satipaṭṭhānādiggahaṇena āgamanapaṭipadaṃ matthakaṃ pāpetvā dasseti maggaphalapakkhikānaññeva gahetabbattā, vipassanāsaṅgahitā eva vā satipaṭṭhānādayo daṭṭhabbā pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya gahaṇato. Bhāvetvāti uppādetvā. Brūhetvāti vaḍḍhetvā. Ettha ca ‘‘yena abhinīhārenā’’tiādinā āgamanapaṭipadāyaādiṃ dasseti, ‘‘dānapāramiṃ pūretvā’’tiādinā majjhe, ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhāne’’tiādinā pariyosānaṃ. Tasmā ‘‘āgato’’ti vuttassa āgamanassa kāraṇabhūtapaṭipadāvisesadassanaṃyeva tiṇṇaṃ nayānaṃ visesoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idāni yathāvuttena atthayojanattayena siddhaṃ paṭhamakāraṇameva gāthābandhavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘yathevā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha idhalokamhi vipassiādayo munayo sabbaññubhāvaṃ yathāvuttena kāraṇattayena āgatā yatheva, tathā pañcahi cakkhūhi cakkhumā ayaṃ sakyamunipi yena kāraṇena āgato, tenesa tathāgato nāma vuccatīti yojanā.
“刚出生”是指:从人们手中被接过来之后,才出生不久,而不是指刚从母胎里出来。因为大士刚从母胎出来时,先是梵天们用金网接住;从他们手中,四大天王用羚羊皮垫接住;再从他们手中,人们用细布垫接住。正如后面将要说的:“从人们手中被接过来之后,站在大地上。”“如何”等,是详细展示。正如世尊在《大本经》的教说中所说。白色伞盖,是指天界的白色伞盖。被持举,就是被撑着。现在也有“被持举着”的读法。这里应当知道,仅仅提到伞盖,就已经包含了剑等五种王权之物。因为剑、拂尘、孔雀羽扇、牦牛尾拂尘、头巾等,当时也和伞盖一起出现了。而且那时只显现了伞盖等物,并没有显现拿伞盖等物的人。这是法护长老所说,舍利弗长老在《增支部复注》中也这样说。因此,拂尘等也获得了王权之物的名称。再者,其意思是:剑等是王权之物,而拂尘等其他物品当时也出现了,所以那样说。巴利
Sampatijātoti manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā muhuttajāto, na pana mātukucchito nikkhantamatto mātukucchito nikkhantamattañhi mahāsattaṃ paṭhamaṃ brahmāno suvaṇṇajālena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, tesaṃ hatthato cattāro mahārājāno ajinappaveṇiyā, tesaṃ hatthato manussā dukūlacumbaṭakena paṭiggaṇhiṃsu, ‘‘manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā pathaviyaṃ patiṭṭhito’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.31) vakkhati. ‘‘Kathañcā’’tiādi vitthāradassanaṃ. Yathāha bhagavā mahāpadānadesanāyaṃ. Setamhi chatteti dibbasetacchatte. Anuhīramāneti dhāriyamāne. ‘‘Anudhāriyamāne’’tipi idāni pāṭho. ‘‘Ettha ca chattaggahaṇeneva khaggadīni pañca kakudhabhaṇḍānipi gahitānevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Khaggatālavaṇṭamorahatthakavālabījanīuṇhīsapaṭṭāpi hi chattena saha tadā upaṭṭhitā ahesuṃ. Chattādīniyeva ca tadā paññāyiṃsu, na chattādigāhakā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7) ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ, ācariyasāriputtattherenāpi aṅguttaraṭīkāyaṃ (a. ni. ṭī. 1.ekapuggalavaggassa paṭhame) evaṃ sati tālavaṇṭādīnampi kakudhabhaṇḍasamaññā. Apica khaggādīni kakudhabhaṇḍāni, tadaññānipi tālavaṇṭādīni tadā upaṭṭhitānīti adhippāyena tathā vuttaṃ.
“一切方”就是十方。“观察”的意思是:当凭借福德威力而出现“开显世界”的神变时,他用肉眼看着显现出来的万世界。这一观察一切方,并不是在走完七步之后才做的,因为最初就已经观察过了。大士从人们手中脱出后,先看了东方。在那里,天与人用香花等供养,并说:“大人,这里没有能和您相等的人,何况胜过您的?”像这样,他观察了四方、四隅、下方、上方这一切方,到处都看不到与自己相等的人,然后才说“这是北方”,接着走了七步。这是法护长老和舍利弗长老说的。《大本经注》也是这样描述的。所以应当知道:先观察一切方,再走七步,然后才说出如牛王般的话。不过,在这里以及其他注疏中,从双足平立开始,一直到说出如牛王般的话,按顺序说明其前兆时说:“站在第七步上观察一切方,是获得一切知无碍智的前兆”等等,只要这样不与前说相违,就应这样理解其义。而“站在第七步上”这一文句,是因为后来抄写错乱,所以这种语序在《大本经注》中看不到。“如牛王般的”,即最上的、不可动摇的、无所畏惧的。因为这是牛王的特质,所以这种话称为“如牛王般的”,也就是英勇的状态。与此相应,这话语便被称为“如牛王般”。“最高”即一切之中最先的。“最尊”“最胜”也都是它的同义词。若只按词义说,“最高”就是功德上最为首要;“最尊”就是单从功德上说,在一切人中最为年长,也就是说功德上最为老大;“最胜”就是单从功德上说,在一切人中最为殊胜。“世间”一词,是在表示分离格意义的属格中,以属格形式出现。他记说:“这是最后一生,今后不再有后有。”也就是说,在现在这个生命中应当证得的阿罗汉果,他作了记说;因为随着那阿罗汉果的证得,便不再有后有。巴利
Sabbā ca disāti dasa disā. Anuviloketīti puññānubhāvena lokavivaraṇapāṭihāriye jāte paññāyamānaṃ dasasahassilokadhātuṃ maṃsacakkhunāva oloketīti attho. Nayidaṃ sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ sattapadavītihāruttarakālaṃ paṭhamamevānuvilokanato. Mahāsatto hi manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā puratthimaṃ disaṃ olokesi. Tattha devamanussā gandhamālādīhi pūjayamānā ‘‘mahāpurisa idha tumhehi sadisopi natthi, kuto tayā uttaritaro’’ti āhaṃsu. Evaṃ catasso disā catasso anudisā heṭṭhā uparīti sabbā disāanuviloketvā sabbattha attanā sadisamadisvā ‘‘ayaṃ uttarā disā’’ti sattapadavītihārena agamāsīti ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7) ācariyasāriputtattherena (a. ni. ṭī. 1.ekapuggalavaggassa paṭhame) ca vuttaṃ. Mahāpadānasuttaṭṭhakathāyampi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.31) evameva vaṇṇitaṃ. Tasmā sattapadavītihārato paṭhamaṃ sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ katvā sattapadavītihārena gantvā tadupari āsabhiṃ vācaṃ bhāsatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idha, pana aññāsu ca aṭṭhakathāsu samehi pādehi patiṭṭhahanato paṭṭhāya yāva āsabhīvācābhāsanaṃ tāva yathākkamaṃ eva pubbanimittabhāvaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘sattamapadūpari ṭhatvā sabbadisānuvilokanaṃ sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassā’’tiādīni vadati, evampi yathā na virujjhati, tathā eva attho gahetabbo. ‘‘Sattamapadūpari ṭhatvā’’ti ca pāṭho pacchā pamādalekhavasena edisena vacanakkamena mahāpadānaṭṭhakathāyamadissamānattāti. Āsabhinti uttamaṃ, akampanikaṃ vā, nibbhayanti attho. Usabhassa idanti hi āsabhaṃ, sūrabhāvo, tena yuttattā panāyaṃ vācā ‘‘āsabhī’’ti vuccati. Aggoti sabbapaṭhamo. Jeṭṭho, seṭṭhoti ca tasseva vevacanaṃ. Saddatthamattato pana aggoti guṇehi sabbapadhāno. Jeṭṭhoti guṇavaseneva sabbesaṃ vuddhatamo, guṇehi mahallakatamoti vuttaṃ hoti. Seṭṭhoti guṇavaseneva sabbesaṃ pasaṭṭhatamo. Lokassāti vibhattāvadhibhūte nissakkatthe sāmivacanaṃ. Ayamantimā jāti, natthi dāni punabbhavoti imasmiṃ attabhāve pattabbaṃ arahattaṃ byākāsi tabbaseneva punabbhavābhāvato.
现在,为了说明如来(降世)的情形,说了“而这正是他的……”等话。它们之间的关联是:作为前兆,所以是真实不虚的。“殊胜证得”,指的是殊胜功德的证得。接着用“因为凡是……”等话,把那个意思详细地展示出来。其中,“凡是”是指代动作,因此它在这里指代“站立”中那种自然站立的动作。“这是他的”,意思是这个站立是属于世尊的。在“获得”这个词上,这是表示所属者,或者表示行为者。所谓前兆,就是对于那被称为他将获得的、未来才会生起的利益,最先出现的、能让人认知的原因。因为世尊证得稀有奇妙的殊胜功德时,就像五大梦等一样,这些能让人认知的征兆会显现出来,正如世间有福德的人证得殊胜福果时那样。巴利
Idāni tathāgamanaṃ sambhāvento ‘‘tañcassā’’tiādimāha. Pubbanimittabhāvena tathaṃ avitathanti sambandho. Visesādhigamānanti guṇavisesādhigamānaṃ. Tadevatthaṃ vitthārato dasseti ‘‘yañhī’’tiādinā . Tattha yanti kiriyāparāmasanaṃ, tena ‘‘patiṭṭhahī’’ti ettha pakatiyatthaṃpatiṭṭhānakiriyaṃ parāmasati. Idamassāti idaṃ patiṭṭhahanaṃ assa bhagavato. Paṭilābhasadde sāminiddeso cesa, kattuniddeso vā. Pubbanimittanti tappaṭilābhasaṅkhātassa āyatiṃ uppajjamānakassa hitassa paṭhamaṃ pavattaṃ sañjānanakāraṇaṃ. Bhagavato hi acchariyabbhutaguṇavisesādhigamane pañca mahāsupinādayo viya etāni sañjānananimittāni pātubhavanti, yathā taṃ loke puññavantānaṃ puññaphalavisesādhigamaneti.
所谓“一切世间最上状态”,就是指在一切世间中最为殊胜的状态,或者说超越一切世间的状态。七步就是七个步子;它的跨行,就是特别地跨越,叫做七步跨行,意思是安立七步。另外据说,在行走时,两步之间相隔只有一拃手的距离。巴利
Sabbalokuttarabhāvassāti sabbalokānamuttamabhāvassa, sabbalokātikkamanabhāvassa vā. Satta padāni sattapadaṃ, tassa vītihāro visesena atiharaṇaṃ sattapadavītihāro, sattapadanikkhepoti attho. So pana samagamane dvinnaṃ padānamantare muṭṭhiratanamattanti vuttaṃ.
有很多分枝、上千个圆环的
众天神在空中举着伞盖。
金柄拂尘来回拂动,
看不见那些拿拂尘和伞盖的人。巴利
‘‘Anekasākhañca sahassamaṇḍalaṃ, Chattaṃ marū dhārayumantalikkhe; Suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarā, Na dissare cāmarachattagāhakā’’ti. (su. ni. 693); –
在《经集》的《那罗迦经》里,针对具寿阿难长老所说的缘起偈句,说了“金柄拂尘来回拂动”这一句。“此处”就是指这个偈句之中。《大本经》因为还没有讲到未来,所以应理解为对拂尘树作了那样的表述。按照那里所说的来看,这里是说它作为前兆。所谓“拂尘”(camara),是一种特别的鹿。用它的尾毛做成属于王权的拂尘,那个(尾毛)就叫cāmarī。它的挥动也是如此,称为“所说的拂尘挥动”。“获得最胜无垢白伞盖之阿拉汉解脱”,指获得名为阿拉汉果等至的最胜无垢白伞盖。在“第七步之上”这句中,“步”一词是“步的区分”之意,因此是“在第七步的区分之上”的意思。正是一切知智本身,因为在一切处无碍而行,所以无障,因此说“获得一切知无障智”。同样,这位世尊……乃至……在“前兆的修习”这句中,因为“凡……”等语属于主要部分,且是正在说明的,所以没有说出;以此显示,依生来之法性而生的种种差别,是一切菩萨所共通的。因为它们是由巴拉密所流出的。巴利
Suttanipāte nāḷakasutte āyasmatā ānandattherena vuttaṃ nidānagāthāpadaṃ sandhāya ‘‘suvaṇṇadaṇḍā vītipatanti cāmarāti etthā’’ti vuttaṃ. Etthāti hi etasmiṃ gāthāpadeti attho. Mahāpadānasutte anāgatattā pana cāmarukkhepassa tathā vacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tattha āgatānusārena hi idha pubbanimittabhāvaṃ vadati, camaro nāma migaviseso. Yassa vālena rājakakudhabhūtaṃ vālabījaniṃ karonti, tassa ayanti cāmarī. Tassā ukkhepo tathā, vutto soti vuttacāmarukkhepo. Arahattavimuttivaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassāti arahattaphalasamāpattisaṅkhātavaravimalasetacchattapaṭilābhassa. Sattamapadūparīti ettha pada-saddo padavaḷañjanavācako, tasmā sattamassa padavaḷañjanassa uparīti attho. Sabbaññutaññāṇameva sabbattha appaṭihatacāratāya anāvaraṇanti āha ‘‘sabbaññutānāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhassā’’ti. Tathā ayaṃ bhagavā…pe… pubbanimittabhāvanāti ettha ‘‘yañhī’’tiādi adhikārattā, gamyamānattā ca na vuttaṃ, etena ca abhijātiyaṃ dhammatāvasena uppajjanakavisesā sabbabodhisattānaṃ sādhāraṇāti dasseti. Pāramitānissandā hi te.
“古师”指的是注释书的老师们。就像牛王憍梵波提用平齐的双足触地,因为他能承载诸天与珍宝,所以大地被称为“持宝者”;同样,那位乔达摩刚刚从众人手中脱出、才出生片刻,就用平齐的双足触到了大地。这是“迈步”的意思,也就是行走。“七步”指七个文句所标示的位置。这里的业格用于表示究竟结合,或者应看作省略了后词,以“七步之回”作为工具格来理解。“诸天”指那些依其界限而具有死亡本性者。“平等”指以观察的平等而平等、相似。因为当大人观察一方时,其余各方也是如此,他的观察在任何地方都没有障碍;或者说,“平等”是指适于观察。因为那时菩萨面前各方并没有出现丑陋可怖、不平等的样子,他发出具足八支、如舒展妙音般可解的语言,就像站在山顶的狮子发出吼声一样。巴利
Porāṇāti aṭṭhakathācariyā. Gavampati usabho samehi pādehi vasūnaṃ ratanānaṃ dhāraṇato vasundarasaṅkhātaṃ bhūmiṃ phusī yathā, tathā manussānaṃ hatthato muccitvā muhuttajāto so gotamo samehi pādehi vasundharaṃ phusīti attho. Vikkamīti agamāsi. Satta padānīti sattapadavaḷañjanaṭṭhānāni. Accantasaṃyoge cetaṃ upayogavacanaṃ, sattapadavārehīti vā karaṇattho uttarapadalopavasena daṭṭhabbo. Marūti devā yathāmariyādaṃ maraṇasabhāvato. Samāti vilokanasamatāya samā sadisiyo. Mahāpuriso hi yathā ekaṃ disaṃ vilokesi, evaṃ sesadisāpi, na katthaci vilokane vinibandho tassa ahosi, samāti vā viloketuṃ yuttāti attho. Na hi tadā bodhisattassa virūpabībhacchavisamarūpāni viloketumayuttāni disāsu upaṭṭhahanti , vissaṭṭhamañjūviññeyyādivasena aṭṭhaṅgupetaṃ giraṃ abbhudīrayi pabbatamuddhaniṭṭhito sīho yathā abhinadīti attho.
像这样,先用“行走”这个意思上的“去”字来说明“如来”这个词;现在为了用“智慧行走”这个意思来说明,就说了“或者”等话。其中,在“如毗婆尸世尊”等句子里,也应该配合“以出离而断除欲贪”等话来理解。“以出离”是指以无贪为主的善心生起。因为善法在这里就是出离,它对所有的欲贪都能对治,并不只是指出家等。“以初禅”也有人这样说,但那并不恰当,因为这里要的只是初禅的前分行道。“断除”就是舍弃。“去”是指以智慧行走而进入更上的殊胜。或者,“断除”是断除的原因,或者断除存在时。因为“tvā”这个语尾在“成为帝释而生起”等句子里,有原因和表相的意思。而这里说的“去”,指的是觉悟或修行之道,它以断除欲贪等为原因,也以断除欲贪等为表相。这个道理在“破斥”等句子里也一样。“以无瞋”是指以慈。“以光明想”是指通过作意让光明显著而生起的光明认知。“以不散乱”是指以定。“以法决定”是指对善等诸法如实决断;也有人说是指对有因缘的名色作出决定。巴利
Evaṃ kāyagamanatthena gatasaddena tathāgatasaddaṃ niddisitvā idāni ñāṇagamanatthena niddisituṃ ‘‘atha vā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘yathā vipassī bhagavā’’tiādīsupi ‘‘nekkhammena kāmacchandaṃ pahāyā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Nekkhammenāti alobhapadhānena kusalacittuppādena. Kusalā hi dhammā idha nekkhammaṃ tesaṃ sabbesampi kāmacchandapaṭipakkhattā, na pabbajjādayo eva. ‘‘Paṭhamajjhānenā’’tipi vadanti keci, tadayuttameva paṭhamajjhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya eva idha icchitattā. Pahāyāti pajahitvā. Gatoti uttarivisesaṃ ñāṇagamanena paṭipanno. Pahāyāti vā pahānahetu, pahāne vā sati. Hetulakkhaṇatthesu hi ayaṃ tvā-saddo ‘‘sakko hutvā nibbattī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.355) viya. Kāmacchandādippahānahetukañca ‘‘gato’’ti ettha vuttaṃ avabodhasaṅkhātaṃ, paṭipattisaṅkhātaṃ vā gamanaṃ kāmacchandādippahānena ca taṃ lakkhīyati, esa nayo ‘‘padāletvā’’tiādīsupi. Abyāpādenāti mettāya. Ālokasaññāyāti vibhūtaṃ katvā manasikārena upaṭṭhitālokasañjānanena. Avikkhepenāti samādhinā. Dhammavavatthānenāti kusalādidhammānaṃ yāthāvanicchayena, sappaccayanāmarūpavavatthānenātipi vadanti.
像这样,通过断除欲贪等诸盖,世尊依据“于世间断除贪”等语所说的初禅前行道,显示了以智行而殊胜的如来性;现在,为了连同方法一起,用八等至和十八种大观智来说明这一点,所以说了“以智”等话。因为,通过去除那成为名色把握与度疑之障碍的无明,安住于已遍知状态的人,其无常想等才能成就;因此,破除无明是观的方便。同样,在禅那等至中,以欢喜为相的喜悦,通过去除其中的不喜而证得禅那等,所以去除不喜是等至的方便。然而,虽然接下来应当按等至与观的次第来说明,但为了显示无明的盖性也包含在前面以欲贪等所显示的诸盖之中,应当理解这里是打乱次第来说的。巴利
Evaṃ kāmacchandādinīvaraṇappahānena ‘‘abhijjhaṃ loke pahāyā’’tiādinā vuttāya paṭhamajjhānassa pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya bhagavato ñāṇagamanavisiṭṭhaṃ tathāgatabhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni saha upāyena aṭṭhahi samāpattīhi, aṭṭhārasahi ca mahāvipassanāhi taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ñāṇenā’’tiādimāha. Nāmarūpapariggahakaṅkhāvitaraṇānañhi vinibandhabhūtassa mohassa dūrīkaraṇena ñātapariññāyaṃ ṭhitassa aniccasaññādayo sijjhanti, tasmā avijjāpadālanaṃ vipassanāya upāyo. Tathā jhānasamāpattīsu abhiratinimittena pāmojjena, tattha anabhiratiyā vinoditāya jhānādīnaṃ samadhigamoti samāpattiyā arativinodanaṃ upāyo. Samāpattivipassanānukkamena pana upari vakkhamānanayena niddisitabbepi nīvaraṇasabhāvāya avijjāya heṭṭhā kāmacchandādivasena dassitanīvaraṇesupi saṅgahadassanatthaṃ uppaṭipāṭiniddeso daṭṭhabbo.
诸盖就像门扇,以进入等至住为因由,所以说“打开盖门”。正如在《中部·根本五十经》的《蚁冢经》中所说“夜间反复思惟、反复观察后,白天从事各种工作”,那里指的是寻与伺的寂止,因此这里说“平息寻伺之烟”,意思是平息被称为寻与伺的烟。“寻伺”只是现在的读法,这并不是古传的读法,因为阿阇梨法护长老和阿阇梨舍利弗长老所引用的正是前面所说的那种读法。“离染”的意思是厌弃,或者超越。这个词在“由于离喜……”等语境中兼有这两种意思。虽然苦在初禅的近行阶段就已经被断除,乐在第四禅的近行阶段就已经被断除,但这里是就彻底断除而说的,所以说“以第四禅断除苦乐”。巴利
Samāpattivihārapavesananibandhanena nīvaraṇāni kavāṭasadisānīti āha ‘‘nīvaraṇakavāṭaṃ ugghāṭetvā’’ti. ‘‘Rattiṃ anuvitakketvā anuvicāretvā divā kammante payojetī’’ti majjhimāgamavare mūlapaṇṇāsake vammikasutte (ma. ni. 1.249) vuttaṭṭhāne viya vitakkavicārā vūpasamā [dhūmāyanā (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.7)] adhippetāti sandhāya ‘‘vitakkavicāradhūmaṃ vūpasametvā’’ti vuttaṃ, vitakkavicārasaṅkhātaṃ dhūmaṃ vūpasametvāti attho. ‘‘Vitakkavicāra’’micceva adhunā pāṭho, so na porāṇo ācariyadhammapālattherena, ācariyasāriputtattherena ca yathāvuttapāṭhasseva uddhatattā. Virājetvāti jigucchitvā, samatikkamitvā vā. Tadubhayattho hesa ‘‘pītiyā ca virāgā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.7; ma. ni. 3.155; pārā. 11; vibha. 625) viya. Kāmaṃ paṭhamajjhānūpacāre eva dukkhaṃ, catutthajjhānūpacāre eva ca sukhaṃ pahīyati, atisayappahānaṃ pana sandhāyāha ‘‘catutthajjhānena sukhadukkhaṃ pahāyā’’ti.
“色想”是以想为主,说的是色界禅那以及以它们为所缘的想。因为色界禅那也被称为“色”,这是省略了后面的词,就像“有色者见诸色”等说法那样;它的所缘——遍相色,也同样被称为“色”,这是省略了前面的词,就像“在外见诸色,或美或丑”等说法那样。所以在这里,对于色、色禅那,与它们俱行的想就是“色想”,这样以想为主来说色界禅那;说“具足色想”,意思就是具足色想。应当知道,这也是地遍等各种不同所缘的另一种说法。“有对想”是指依眼等诸根和色等诸所缘的阻碍、碰击、境与有境的和合而生起的、与五双识俱行的想。“种种想”是四十四种想的另一种说法,即八种欲界善想、十二种不善想、十一种欲界善异熟想、两种不善异熟想、十一种欲界唯作想。因为这些想在色、声等各种各样、各自不同本性的境界中活动,又因为彼此不同、本性各异、互不相似,所以称为“种种想”。巴利
Rūpasaññāti saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānāni ceva tadārammaṇāni ca vuttāni. Rūpāvacarajjhānampi hi ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuccati uttarapadalopena ‘‘rūpī rūpāni passatī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 248) tassa ārammaṇampi kasiṇarūpaṃ purimapadalopena ‘‘bahiddhā rūpāni passati suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇānī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 223 ādayo) tasmā idha rūpe rūpajjhāne taṃsahagatā saññā rūpasaññāti evaṃ saññāsīsena rūpāvacarajjhānāni vuttāni, rūpaṃ saññā assāti rūpasaññaṃ, rūpasaññāsamannāgatanti vuttaṃ hoti. Evaṃ pathavīkasiṇādibhedassa tadārammaṇassa cetaṃ adhivacananti veditabbaṃ. Paṭighasaññāti cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ, rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇānañca paṭighātena paṭihananena visayivisayasamodhānena samuppannā dvipañcaviññāṇasahagatā saññā. Nānattasaññāti aṭṭha kāmāvacarakusalasaññā, dvādasa akusalasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakusalavipākasaññā, dve akusalavipākasaññā, ekādasa kāmāvacarakiriyasaññāti etāsaṃ catucattālīsasaññānametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Etā hi yasmā rūpasaddādibhede nānatte nānāsabhāve gocare pavattanti, yasmā ca nānattā nānāsabhāvā aññamaññaṃ asadisā, tasmā ‘‘nānattasaññā’’ti vuccanti.
无常随观,就是观“无常”,或者以无常的方式观察。它是执取三界诸法的无常性而生起的毗婆舍那,这个名称就叫做无常随观。常想,是指在有为法上生起“常、永恒”这样的错误想。这里应该知道,是以想为首,同时也包含了邪见和心。以下各项也是同样的道理。厌离随观,是指以厌离诸行的方式生起的随观。喜,是指带有喜的渴爱。离染随观,是指以离染诸行的方式生起的随观。灭随观,是指观诸行的灭,或者这样观察:“那些行确实灭尽,未来不再以集起的方式生起。”这样的随观就是灭随观。因此说“以灭随观而灭,不以集起”。因为这是已经达到强盛状态的欲解脱。舍遣随观,是指以舍遣的方式生起的随观。因为这是谛观而安住。取,是指以常等的方式执取。密集想,是指依相续、聚集、作用、所缘而执为一。积集,就是造作。变异,是指特殊状态的出现。坚想,是指执取坚固性的想。相,是指依聚集等密集、以作用的分限而显现诸行的有形体。愿求,是指贪等愿求。从义理上说,这就是依渴爱而在诸行中倾向。巴利
Aniccassa , aniccanti vā anupassanā aniccānupassanā, tebhūmakadhammānaṃ aniccataṃ gahetvā pavattāya vipassanāyetaṃ nāmaṃ. Niccasaññanti saṅkhatadhamme ‘‘niccā sassatā’’ti pavattamicchāsaññaṃ, saññāsīsena cettha diṭṭhicittānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Nibbidānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu nibbindanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nandinti sappītikataṇhaṃ. Virāgānupassanāyāti saṅkhāresu virajjanākārena pavattāya anupassanāya. Nirodhānupassanāyāti saṅkhārānaṃ nirodhassa anupassanāya, ‘‘te saṅkhārā nirujjhantiyeva, āyatiṃ samudayavasena na uppajjantī’’ti evaṃ vā anupassanā nirodhānupassanā. Tenevāha ‘‘nirodhānupassanāya nirodheti, no samudetī’’ti. Muñcitukamyatā hi ayaṃ balappattāti. Paṭinissajjanākārena pavattā anupassanā paṭinissaggānupassanā. Paṭisaṅkhāsantiṭṭhanā hi ayaṃ. Ādānanti niccādivasena gahaṇaṃ. Santatisamūhakiccārammaṇānaṃ vasena ekattaggahaṇaṃ ghanasaññā.Āyūhanaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ. Avatthāvisesāpatti vipariṇāmo.Dhuvasaññanti thirabhāvaggahaṇasaññaṃ. Nimittanti samūhādighanavasena sakiccaparicchedatāya saṅkhārānaṃ saviggahataṃ. Paṇidhinti rāgādipaṇidhiṃ. Sā panatthato taṇhāvasena saṅkhāresu ninnatā.
“执著”就是我见。以无常等方式审察一切法,就是增上慧法观。“执取坚实”是指在无坚实中执取坚实的那种颠倒想。认为“世间是由自在天等所造作而生起”的执著,叫作痴执著。不过有些人说:“‘我过去是否存在’等生起的疑惑,就是痴执著。”在诸行中执取有庇护、有皈依之处,就是阿赖耶执著。由于有“乐于阿赖耶、喜于阿赖耶”的说法,阿赖耶指的是渴爱;有些人则认为,这渴爱依眼等、色等以执著的方式生起,所以叫阿赖耶执著。“如此这般的诸行被舍遣”而生起的智,是审察随观。由于从轮转离去,故为离转,即涅槃;以彼为所缘而生的随观,称为离转随观,即种姓智。“结缚执著”是指以结缚的方式在诸行中执著。“于见一处”,是指与见俱生一处、断一处。“粗”,是相对于上道所断的烦恼而言;否则,见所断及第二道所断的烦恼也是粗的,那么它们也应可说为“粗”了。“细”,是细。此处“俱”字即同彼性。这是相对于下道所断而言。“一切烦恼”,是指残余的一切烦恼,因为初道等已断的烦恼不再被断。此处“一切”一词是就一分而言,如“一切皆惧于杖”等。巴利
Abhinivesanti attānudiṭṭhiṃ. Aniccādivasena sabbadhammatīraṇaṃ adhipaññādhammavipassanā. Sārādānābhinivisenti asāre sāraggahaṇavipallāsaṃ. Issarakuttādivasena loko samuppannoti abhiniveso sammohābhiniveso nāma. Keci pana ‘‘ahosiṃ nu kho ahamatītamaddhāna’ntiādinā pavattasaṃsayāpatti sammohābhiniveso’’ti vadanti. Saṅkhāresu leṇatāṇabhāvaggahaṇaṃ ālayābhiniveso. ‘‘Ālayaratā ālayasamuditā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.64; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; mahāva. 7, 8) vacanato ālayo vuccati taṇhā, sāyeva cakkhādīsu, rūpādīsu ca abhinivesavasena pavattiyā ālayābhinivesoti keci. ‘‘Evaṃvidhā saṅkhārā paṭinissajjīyantī’ti pavattañāṇaṃ paṭisaṅkhānupassanā. Vaṭṭato vigatattā vivaṭṭaṃ, nibbānaṃ, tattha ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātena anupassanena pavattiyā vivaṭṭānupassanā, gotrabhu. Saṃyogābhinivesanti saṃyujjanavasena saṅkhāresu abhinivisanaṃ. Diṭṭhekaṭṭheti diṭṭhiyā sahajātekaṭṭhe, pahānekaṭṭhe ca. Oḷāriketi uparimaggavajjhe kilese apekkhitvā vuttaṃ, aññathā dassanapahātabbā ca dutiyamaggavajjhehipi oḷārikāti tesampi tabbacanīyatā siyā. Aṇusahagateti aṇubhūte. Tabbhāvavuttiko hi ettha sahagatasaddo. Idaṃ pana heṭṭhimamaggavajjhe apekkhitvā vuttaṃ . Sabbakileseti avasiṭṭhasabbakilese. Na hi paṭhamādimaggehi pahīnā kilesā puna pahīyanti. Sabbasaddo cettha sappadesavisayo ‘‘sabbe tasanti daṇḍassā’’tiādīsu viya (dha. pa. 129).
坚硬性就是粗硬的状态。流动就是液体的状态。就像被世间风吹胀的皮囊那样,使各个色聚膨胀或变得僵硬,这就是扩展。即使存在其他色聚,当其他色聚与其他色聚相接触时,各个色聚仍然保持分离的状态,这就是色法的边界,也就是虚空。对于那些划定了界限的色聚来说,虚空并不与它们接触;否则,诸界的界限性就不存在了,因为会变成遍满的状态。在某个色聚中,诸界划定了界限,它们在那里不接触的状态,就是不接触的特征。因此,世尊在解说虚空界时说:不与四大种接触。巴利
Kakkhaḷattaṃ kaṭhinabhāvo. Paggharaṇaṃ dravabhāvo. Lokiyavāyunā bhastassa viya yena taṃtaṃkalāpassa uddhumāyanaṃ, thambhabhāvo vā, taṃ vitthambhanaṃ. Vijjamānepi kalāpantarabhūtānaṃ kalāpantarabhūtehi phuṭṭhabhāve taṃtaṃbhūtavivittatā rūpapariyanto ākāsoti yesaṃ yo paricchedo, tehi so asamphuṭṭhova, aññathā bhūtānaṃ paricchedabhāvo na siyā byāpitabhāvāpattito. Yasmiṃ kalāpe bhūtānaṃ paricchedo, tehi tattha asamphuṭṭhabhāvo asamphuṭṭhalakkhaṇaṃ, tenāha bhagavā ākāsadhātuniddese ‘‘asamphuṭṭho catūhi mahābhūtehī’’ti (dha. sa. 637).
当互相违逆的诸缘聚集在一起时,就出现各不相同的生起,这就是“变坏”。因为思是主导,所以对于行蕴的诸法,是依着思而说“诸行有造作的特相”。确实,在经分别的行蕴分别中,也是以“眼触所生的思”等说法,唯独把思分别出来。而造作的特相就是思。正如所说:“其中,什么是福行?就是善的思”等等。把相应诸法安放在所缘上,就是引导;随顺、跟随所缘,就是随行;具有遍满性,就是遍满。胜解就是信,就是确信。“由于不信”是以不信为原因,这里的处格表示原因,对懈怠等也是如此。身心热恼的止息,是寂止的特相。当增上心远离昏沉和掉举而运作时,对策励、抑制和随喜都不去插手,这就是舍,也就是观察,因为它断除了偏袒。巴利
Virodhipaccayasannipāte visadisuppatti ruppanaṃ. Cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhadhammānaṃ cetanāvasenetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇalakkhaṇa’’nti. Tathā hi suttantabhājaniye saṅkhārakkhandhavibhaṅge ‘‘cakkhusamphassajā cetanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 12) cetanāva vibhattā. Abhisaṅkhāralakkhaṇā ca cetanā. Yathāha ‘‘tattha katamo puññābhisaṅkhāro, kusalā cetanā’’tiādi (vibha. 226) sampayuttadhammānaṃ ārammaṇe ṭhapanaṃ abhiniropanaṃ. Ārammaṇānamanubandhanaṃ anumajjanaṃ. Savipphārikatā pharaṇaṃ. Adhimuccanaṃ saddahanaṃ adhimokkho. Assaddhiyeti assaddhiyahetu. Nimittatthe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Esa nayo kosajjādīsupi. Kāyacittapariḷāhūpasamo vūpasamalakkhaṇaṃ. Līnuddhaccarahite adhicitte vattamāne paggahaniggahasampahaṃsanesu abyāvaṭatāya ajjhupekkhanaṃ paṭisaṅkhānaṃ pakkhapātupacchedato.
正语能摄受相应诸法,以及以正语为缘的善说和听者,因为它能摄受。为什么?因为妄语等有欺骗等作用,是粗涩的、不摄受的;正语与它们相反,具有摄受的自性,是柔润的。所以正语有摄受的相。身体的造作能发起某些应作之事,而它本身就是发起时的精勤努力——这称为正业,应视为有发起的相。或者,将相应诸法提起,如同身体的造作提起重担一般,这就是发起。对于活着的众生,或者对于相应诸法,命根的运作只是正命的清净与洁白。巴利
Musāvādādīnaṃ visaṃvādanādikiccatāya lūkhānaṃ apariggāhakānaṃ paṭipakkhabhāvato pariggāhakasabhāvā sammāvācā siniddhabhāvato sampayuttadhamme, sammāvācāpaccayasubhāsitaṃ sotārañca puggalaṃ pariggaṇhātīti sā pariggahalakkhaṇā. Kāyikakiriyā kiñci kattabbaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti, sayañca samuṭṭhānaṃ ghaṭanaṃ hotīti sammākammantasaṅkhātā virati samuṭṭhānalakkhaṇāti daṭṭhabbā, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā ukkhipanaṃ samuṭṭhānaṃ kāyikakiriyāya bhārukkhipanaṃ viya. Jīvamānassa sattassa, sampayuttadhammānaṃ vā jīvitindriyavuttiyā, ājīvasseva vā suddhi vodānaṃ.
这里说的“行”,指的是思,而不是像“诸行、行蕴”等地方所说的五十种心所那样,所以说“诸行的相是思”。因为以无明为缘的福行等,本身就是思。朝向所缘的状态就是倾向。转起就是处,因为心和心所是依六处而转起的。关于“渴爱有因的相”:在这里,对轮回来说,渴爱能作为产生的因,这就是渴爱的因相;而对后面要说的道来说,则是能到达涅槃,这是它们之间的差别。执取所缘的相。为了再生而积累的相。从有情和命我中空无的相。精勤就是策励。成就就是圆满。从轮回中出离就是出离。不颠倒的状态就是真实相。彼此不相超越就是一味,也就是不增不减的状态。名为双运的止与观,因为彼此资助,所以应像双轭一样结合起来。也有人说这是“信与慧、策励与不散乱”。心清净就是定,见清净就是慧。灭尽就是烦恼灭尽的道,在它里面生起的、名为正见的智,有断除烦恼的相。因为烦恼不再生起而达到究竟,所以不生就是果。烦恼的止息就是轻安。欲就是想做的欲。所依立的状态就是根本相。因为能成办所缘而成为相应诸法生起的因,所以有等起相。由境等聚集而可被执取的行相就是合集,就像“三者的会合就是触”等句中所说的“会合”。或者,相应诸法由它而平等、正当地安置、被合摄,所以也叫合集,这就是触;触的存在就是合集相。诸法在其中集会、聚合,所以叫集会处,这就是受;因为离开受,相应诸法便不转起,仿佛是为了领纳受而集会一般,所以这样说;受的存在就是集会相。像殿堂等中椽木的顶尖一样,相应诸法中的为首者就是为首相。因为念遍于一切处,念对相应诸法的主导性就是增上相。比那相应法、或比那些相应法更超上、更主要的就是更上,它的存在就是更上相,因为诸善法以慧为最上。解脱就是果,因为它是从诸烦恼中解脱而得的;而它因为是戒等功德精华的最极殊胜,所以是精华;因为再没有超过它的法,所以是究竟。应当知道,这种相的分类,是依六界、五禅支等,随顺各该经句、依照古注所传的方式而说的。正因如此,前面已说过的某些法,为了以另一种方式阐明,又被重新显示出来。也正因此,才依据“诸法以欲为根、以作意为等起、以触为合集、以受为集会处”“诸善法以慧为最上”“此梵行以解脱为精华”“朋友,此梵行深入涅槃、以涅槃为究竟”等经句,而说“欲的根本相”等。注释者以“如是”等语,显示“诸法的如是不虚之相已传来”之义。而这里的“趣”,说的正是智之趣。虽然“已趣”一词也有了知之义,但因为它正是由智之趣义而成立,所以没有另说;这里“ā”一词只是随顺“gata”一词而已。所以说“已达、已随达”。巴利
‘‘Saṅkhārā’’ti idha cetanā adhippetā, na pana ‘‘saṅkhārā saṅkhārakkhandho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 583, 985; vibha. 1, 20, 52) viya samapaññāsacetasikāti vuttaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārānaṃ cetanālakkhaṇa’’nti. Avijjāpaccayā hi puññābhisaṅkhārādikāva cetanā. Ārammaṇābhimukhabhāvo namanaṃ. Āyatanaṃ pavattanaṃ. Saḷāyatanavasena hi cittacetasikānaṃ pavatti. Taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇati ettha vaṭṭassa janakahetubhāvo taṇhāya hetulakkhaṇaṃ, maggassa pana vakkhamānassa nibbānasampāpakattanti ayametesaṃ viseso. Ārammaṇassa gahaṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Puna uppattiyā āyūhanalakkhaṇaṃ. Sattajīvato suññatālakkhaṇaṃ. Padahanaṃ ussāhanaṃ. Ijjhanaṃ sampatti. Vaṭṭato nissaraṇaṃ niyyānaṃ. Aviparītabhāvo tathalakkhaṇaṃ. Aññamaññānativattanaṃ ekaraso, anūnādhikabhāvova. Yuganaddhā nāma samathavipassanā aññamaññopakāratāya yugaḷavasena bandhitabbato. ‘‘Saddhāpaññā paggahāvikkhepā’’tipi vadanti. Cittavisuddhi nāma samādhi. Diṭṭhivisuddhi nāma paññā. Khayoti kilesakkhayo maggo, tasmiṃ pavattassa sammādiṭṭhisaṅkhātassa ñāṇassa samucchedanalakkhaṇaṃ. Kilesānamanuppādapariyosānatāya anuppādo, phalaṃ. Kilesavūpasamo passaddhi. Chandassāti kattukāmatāchandassa. Patiṭṭhābhāvo mūlalakkhaṇaṃ. Ārammaṇapaṭipādakatāya sampayutta-dhammānamuppattihetutā samuṭṭhāpanalakkhaṇaṃ. Visayādisannipātena gahetabbākāro samodhānaṃ. Yā ‘‘saṅgatī’’ti vuccati ‘‘tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’tiādīsu. Samaṃ, sammā vā odahanti sampiṇḍitā bhavanti sampayuttadhammā anenātipi samodhānaṃ, phasso, tabbhāvo samodhānalakkhaṇaṃ. Samosaranti sannipatanti etthāti samosaraṇaṃ, vedanā. Tāya hi vinā appavattamānā sampayuttadhammā vedanānubhavananimittaṃ samosaṭā viya hontīti evaṃ vuttaṃ, tabbhāvo samosaraṇalakkhaṇaṃ. Pāsādādīsu gopānasīnaṃ kūṭaṃ viya sampayuttadhammānaṃ pāmokkhabhāvo pamukhalakkhaṇaṃ. Satiyā sabbatthakattā sampayuttānaṃ adhipatibhāvo ādhipateyyalakkhaṇaṃ. Tato sampayuttadhammato, tesaṃ vā sampayuttadhammānaṃ uttari padhānaṃ tatuttari, tabbhāvo tatuttariyalakkhaṇaṃ. Paññuttarā hi kusalā dhammā. Vimuttīti phalaṃ kilesehi vimuccitthāti katvā. Taṃ pana sīlādiguṇasārassa paramukkaṃsabhāvena sāraṃ. Tato uttari dhammassābhāvato pariyosānaṃ. Ayañca lakkhaṇavibhāgo chadhātupañcajhānaṅgādivasena taṃtaṃsuttapadānusārena porāṇaṭṭhakathāyamāgatanayena vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi pubbe vuttopi koci dhammo pariyāyantarappakāsanatthaṃ puna dassito. Tato eva ca ‘‘chandamūlakā dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti ‘‘paññuttarā kusalā dhammā’’ti, ‘‘vimuttisāramidaṃ brahmacariya’’nti, ‘‘nibbānogadhañhi āvuso brahmacariyaṃ nibbānapariyosāna’’nti [saṃ. ni. 3.512 (atthato samānaṃ)] ca suttapadānaṃ vasena chandassa mūlalakkhaṇa’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tesaṃ tesaṃ dhammānaṃ tathaṃ avitathaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ āgatoti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘eva’’ntiādinā. Taṃ pana gamanaṃ idha ñāṇagamanamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ñāṇagatiyā’’ti. Satipi gatasaddassa avabodhanatthabhāve ñāṇagamanattheneveso siddhoti na vutto. Ā-saddassa cettha gatasaddānuvattimattameva. Tenāha ‘‘patto anuppatto’’ti.
因为本质不颠倒,所以说“四圣谛就叫如法”。因为本质不颠倒,所以是“如”;因为本质不虚妄,所以是“不虚如”;因为没有任何变异,所以是“不异如”。针对《谛相应》等经典中出现的关于圆满四谛的完整论述,这里说“以上就是详细解释”。说了“因此”之后,用“因为如实觉悟了它们”这句话,指出那是不应该再执取的。在类似的情况下,方法也是如此。巴利
Aviparītasabhāvattā ‘‘tathadhammā nāma cattāri ariyasaccānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Aviparītasabhāvato tathāni. Amusāsabhāvato avitathāni. Aññākārarahitato anaññathāni. Saccasaṃyuttādīsu āgataṃ paripuṇṇasaccacatukkakathaṃ sandhāya ‘‘iti vitthāro’’ti āha. ‘‘Tasmā’’ti vatvā tadaparāmasitabbameva dasseti ‘‘tathānaṃ abhisambuddhattā’’ti iminā. Esa nayo īdisesu.
这样用谛理显示了第四项原因之后,现在为了也从缘与缘所生的状态、以及不颠倒的本质这一点,来显示那些如实存在的缘起支,而说了“再者”等话。其中,“由生之缘而生起、集起之义”是指:由生之缘而生起之后,与自身的缘相应、次第向上生起的本质,也就是“随转之义”。或者,“已生之义”和“集起之义”合起来就是“已生集起之义”,这是在前一词中省略后一词的做法。因为语法学家们也主张,在集合性相违复合词中可以用阳性词。在这里,并不是离开生而有老死,也不是离开生而从别处而有,所以是“由生之缘已生之义”;同样地,正是从生而集起,所以是“由生之缘集起之义”。这话的意思是:无论哪一种生,以何种方式成为缘,就随其缘而显现出那样的本质。在缘这一方面,所谓“无明对诸行的缘之义”,在这里并不是说无明不是诸行的缘,也不是说离开无明诸行还能生起。无论哪一种无明,对哪些诸行,以何种方式成为缘,这就是无明对诸行的缘之义、缘的本质。“如是诸法”指缘相诸法。就像“善逝”等处那样,是着眼于“去”这个字有“觉悟”的意思,才说“由于觉悟”,并不是取“智行”的意思。因为“行”和“觉悟”义的词是互相通用的。因此,“这里‘去’字是觉悟义”是根本立场,或者是因为所表达之义而没有采用。巴利
Evaṃ saccavasena catutthakāraṇaṃ dassetvā idāni paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena aviparītasabhāvattā tathabhūtānaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ vasenāpi dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha. Tattha jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭhoti jātipaccayā sambhūtaṃ hutvā sahitassa attano paccayānurūpassa uddhaṃ uddhaṃ āgatasabhāvo, anupavattaṭṭhoti attho. Atha vā sambhūtaṭṭho ca samudāgataṭṭho ca sambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho pubbapade uttarapadalopavasena. Samāhāradvandepi hi pulliṅgamicchanti neruttikā. Na cettha jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na hoti, na ca jātiṃ vinā aññato hotīti jātipaccayasambhūtaṭṭho. Itthameva jātito samudāgacchatīti jāti paccayasamudāgataṭṭho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – yā yā jāti yathā yathā paccayo hoti, tadanurūpaṃ pātubhūtasabhāvoti. Paccayapakkhe pana avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭhoti ettha na avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo na hoti, na ca avijjaṃ vinā saṅkhārā uppajjanti. Yā yā avijjā yesaṃ yesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ yathā yathā paccayo hoti, ayaṃ avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayaṭṭho paccayasabhāvoti attho. Tathānaṃ dhammānanti paccayākāradhammānaṃ. ‘‘Sugato’’tiādīsu (pārā. 1) viya gamusaddassa buddhiyatthataṃ sandhāya ‘‘abhisambuddhattā’’ti vuttaṃ, na ñāṇagamanatthaṃ. Gatibuddhiyatthā hi saddā aññamaññapariyāyā. Tasmā ‘‘abhisambuddhattho hettha gatasaddo’’ti adhikāro, gamyamānattā vā na payutto.
凡是以色为所缘的法存在,世尊都了知、都看见,这是它们之间的关联。“于天界……众生”是“存在”一词的依托处;再者,就无量世界来说,这是根据住在那些世界里的众生而说,或者根据所缘境出现在眼前而说。应当这样连接:由那位世尊所分别的那个色处,正是如此。对于“正是如此、不偏离如此”的状态,说出它的原因:“以如此了知、如此看见”。因为“以一切方式了知故、看见故”,这两个词里已经包含了原因。“依可爱、不可爱等”这里,用“等”字把中等也包括进去。同样,也把过去、未来、现在、细小、内部、外部、二者等等的差别包括进去。“依可得的词句”是指:依据“色处是所见,声处是所闻,香处、味处、触处是所触,一切色是意所识”这一说法,“所见”一词和“所识”一词在色所缘中是找得到的。色所缘有可爱、不可爱、中等、细小、过去、未来、现在、内部、外部、所见、所识、色、色处、色界、色聚、可见、有对、青色、黄色等等许多名称。因为通过“依可爱、不可爱等”等说法,从它自身的样貌上指出了它有多种名称。“以十三番”是指:《法集论》色品中出现的十三种解说番。在这里,每一番中又按四种四种的安立方式,所以说“以五十二种方式”。“正是如此”是指:依照所说的了知而有不退转的教说,依照所说的看见而有不错乱的见,所以确实是真实的。为了用《增支部》的《迦罗迦罗摩经》来证明这个道理,而说“此亦曾如是说”等。这里的“亦”字表示强调,由此表明所说之义的坚固;或者有总摄的意思,即“不仅是我如此,世尊也如此”。“已随行”指已遍行。“我知、我已知”是通过现在时和过去时中智的生起来显示,由此也以理路显示了未来时中智的生起。而“已了知”一词,因为通于三世,如“所见、所闻、所触”等,是不限定时间的,意思是“令明显而知”。以此显示:“别人虽然也知道,但我令它明显而了知。”因为世尊用这些词句,说示了名为一切智地的境界。“不现起”是指:如来不以渴爱或邪见、以我我所执,而于那六门所缘现起、不趋近。用这个词句,说示了漏尽地的境界。如同色所缘等诸法具有那样的本质、那样的行相,如来就如实、如行相地行、见、知那些诸法,所以是如来——针对这个道理,而说“于如实见之义”。因为“界”这个词有多种含义。有些人依词源学方法,或依“毕苏陀罗等类”的加入,把“见”字省略,把“来”字增入,而在这里解释“如来”一词的成立,但那是不合理的,因为舍弃了现有的词而取用不现有的词。《佛种姓经注》中也曾这样说:巴利
Yaṃ rūpārammaṇaṃ nāma atthi, taṃ bhagavā jānāti passatīti sambandho. Sadevake…pe… pajāyāti ādhāro ‘‘atthī’’ti padeti puna aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsaūti taṃnivāsasattāpekkhāya, āpāthagamanāpekkhāya vā vuttaṃ. Tena bhagavatā vibhajjamānaṃ taṃ rūpāyatanaṃ tathameva hotīti yojetabbaṃ. Tathāvitathabhāve kāraṇamāha ‘‘evaṃ jānatā passatā’’ti. Sabbākārato ñātattā passitattāti hi hetvantogadhametaṃ padadvayaṃ. Iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasenāti ettha ādi-saddena majjhattaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tathā atītānāgatapaccuppannaparittaajjhattabahiddhātadubhayādibhedampi. Labbhamānakapadavasenāti ‘‘rūpāyatanaṃ diṭṭhaṃ saddāyatanaṃ sutaṃ gandhāyatanaṃ rasāyatanaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanaṃ mutaṃ sabbaṃ rūpaṃ manasā viññāta’’nti (dha. sa. 966) vacanato diṭṭhapadañca viññātapadañca rūpārammaṇe labbhati. Rūpārammaṇaṃ iṭṭhaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ majjhattaṃ parittaṃ atītaṃ anāgataṃ paccuppannaṃ ajjhattaṃ bahiddhā diṭṭhaṃ viññātaṃ rūpaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ rūpadhātu vaṇṇanibhā sanidassanaṃ sappaṭighaṃ nīlaṃ pītakanti evamādīhi anekehi nāmehi. ‘‘Iṭṭhāniṭṭhādivasenā’’tiādinā hi anekanāmabhāvaṃ sarūpato nidasseti. Terasahi vārehīti dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ rūpakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 615) āgate terasa niddesavāre sandhāyāha. Ekekasmiṃ vāre cettha catunnaṃ catunnaṃ vavatthāpananayānaṃ vasena ‘‘dvipaññāsāya nayehī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathamevāti yathāvuttena jānanena appaṭivattiyadesanatāya, yathāvuttena ca passanena aviparītadassitāya saccameva. Tamatthaṃ caturaṅguttare kāḷakārāmasuttena (a. ni. 4.24) sādhento ‘‘vuttañceta’’ntiādimāha. Ca-saddo cettha daḷhīkaraṇajotako, tena yathāvuttassatthassa daḷhīkaraṇaṃ joteti, sampiṇḍanattho vā aṭṭhānapayutto, na kevalaṃ mayā eva, atha kho bhagavatāpīti. Anuvicaritanti paricaritaṃ. Jānāmi abbhaññāsinti paccuppannātītakālesu ñāṇappavattidassanena anāgatepi ñāṇappavatti dassitāyeva nayato dassitattā. Vidita-saddo pana anāmaṭṭhakālaviseso kālattayasādhāraṇattā ‘‘diṭṭhaṃ suttaṃ muta’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 3.187; ma. ni. 1.7; saṃ. ni. 2.208; a. ni. 4.23; paṭi. ma. 1.121) viya, pākaṭaṃ katvā ñātanti attho, iminā cetaṃ dasseti ‘‘aññe jānantiyeva, mayā pana pākaṭaṃ katvā vidita’’nti. Bhagavatā hi imehi padehi sabbaññubhūmi nāma kathitā. Na upaṭṭhāsīti taṃ chadvārikamārammaṇaṃ taṇhāya vā diṭṭhiyā vā tathāgato attattaniyavasena na upaṭṭhāsi na upagacchati, iminā pana padena khīṇāsavabhūmi kathitā. Yathā rūpārammaṇādayo dhammā yaṃsabhāvā, yaṃpakārā ca, tathā te dhamme taṃsabhāve taṃpakāre gamati passati jānātīti tathāgatoti imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tathadassīatthe’’ti vuttaṃ. Anekatthā hi dhātusaddā. Keci pana niruttinayena, pisodarādigaṇapakkhepena (pārā. aṭṭha. 1; visuddhi. 1.142) vā dassī-saddalopaṃ, āgata-saddassa cāgamaṃ katvā ‘‘tathāgato’’ti padasiddhimettha vaṇṇenti, tadayuttameva vijjamānapadaṃ chaḍḍetvā avijjamānapadassa gahaṇato. Vuttañca buddhavaṃsaṭṭhakathāyaṃ –
凡是以这样的方式了知、随观诸法的人,
如实见者就是正自觉者,因此被称为如来。巴利
‘‘Tathākārena yo dhamme, jānāti anupassati; Tathadassīti sambuddho, tasmā vutto tathāgato’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. ratanacaṅkamanakaṇḍavaṇṇanā);
在这里,先说了“随观”这个词所表达的意思,为了指出它就是智见本身,所以说了“了知”;而为了说明从词语中获得的意义,又说了“如实见者”。巴利
Ettha ‘‘anupassatī’’ti āgatasaddatthaṃ vatvā tadidaṃ ñāṇapassanamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘jānātī’’ti, saddādhigatamatthaṃ pana vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tathadassī’’ti ca vuttaṃ.
所谓“夜”,是指某一个夜晚。或者,这是表示绝对关联的用法,因为属于那一夜一部分的证悟刹那具有绝对关联;也可以认为,整个这一夜都是为证悟而精勤的时间,所以从引申义上说也属于绝对关联。由于位于大地发出巨响、大地震动之处的最顶端,不被其他任何东西所击败,所以叫“不败”;那同一个就是草座,因此叫“不败草座”,即在那上面。“三魔”,指烦恼魔、行魔、天子魔。这里是按直接义说的;若按引申义,则应依照前面所说的方法,理解为降伏五种魔。“顶”,指名为能力的头。“此中间”,指两个夜之间。“乃至第一觉悟”等语,是以四十五年这一时限内所含的区分来限定并特别说明。其中,限定为二十年的称为第一觉悟,这在律藏注释书中已有说明。而且,那部注释书本身也说:“世尊在第一觉悟的二十年间,并没有固定的常随侍者。”(《律注》1.16)正因如此,才说“第一觉悟即二十年”。然而,法护阿阇梨长老说:“在四十五年中,最初的十五年为第一觉悟。”若依此说,则中间十五年为中觉悟,最后十五年为后觉悟,三种觉悟的年数就相等,这也是合理的。因为以十五年为一份,正好满四十五年。不过,注释书中以十五年计的第一觉悟,也可以包含在二十年的第一觉悟之中,所以说“在第一觉悟的二十年间”,这样理解也可以。“凡经”等语,是与此相连的。巴利
Yaṃrattinti yassa rattiyaṃ, accantasaṃyoge vā etaṃ upayogavacanaṃ rattekadesabhūtassa abhisambujjhanakkhaṇassa accantasaṃyogattā, sakalāpi vā esā ratti abhisambodhāya padahanakālattā pariyāyena accantasaṃyogabhūtāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pathavīpukkhalaniruttarabhūmisīsagatattā na parājito aññehi etthāti aparājito, sveva pallaṅkoti aparājitapallaṅko, tasmiṃ. Tiṇṇaṃmārānanti kilesābhisaṅkhāradevaputtamārānaṃ, idañca nippariyāyato vuttaṃ, pariyāyato pana heṭṭhā vuttanayena pañcannampi mārānaṃ maddanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Matthakanti sāmatthiyasaṅkhātaṃ sīsaṃ. Etthantareti ubhinnaṃ rattīnamantare. ‘‘Paṭhamabodhiyāpī’’tiādinā pañcacattālīsavassaparimāṇakālameva antogadhabhedena niyametvā viseseti. Tāsu pana vīsativassaparicchinnā paṭhamabodhīti vinayagaṇṭhipade vuttaṃ, tañca tadaṭṭhakathāyameva ‘‘bhagavato hi paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare nibaddhupaṭṭhāko nāma natthī’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.16) kathitattā paṭhamabodhi nāma vīsativassānīti gahetvā vuttaṃ. Ācariyadhammapālattherena pana ‘‘pañcacattālīsāya vassesu ādito pannarasa vassāni paṭhamabodhī’’ti vuttaṃ, evañca sati majjhe pannarasa vassāni majjhimabodhi, ante pannarasa vassāni pacchimabodhīti tiṇṇaṃ bodhīnaṃ samappamāṇatā siyā, tampi yuttaṃ. Pannarasatikena hi pañcacattālīsavassāni paripūrenti. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana pannarasavassappamāṇāya paṭhamabodhiyā vīsativassesuyeva antogadhattā ‘‘paṭhamabodhiyaṃ vīsativassantare’’ti vuttanti evampi sakkā viññātuṃ. ‘‘Yaṃ sutta’’ntiādinā sambandho.
因为没有过失,所以无可指责、不该受责备。因为没有什么可添加的,所以不缺少。因为没有什么可去除的,所以不多余。因为意义和文句等都圆满具备,所以一切方面都完整无缺。能令摧破,所以叫摧破。乃至一发端量,就是连一根毛发的尖端那么一点点的量。失坏,就是弄错了、虚假地说了。一印,就是以同一个王印为标记。一管,就是用同一管或同一瓠来量。一秤,就是用同一杆秤来称。如是即是,是说所说的意思正是这样,而不是别的,这是从差别对比来显示;由此说明,所说的那个意思,因为必定能完全实现那个意思,所以就像世尊所说的那样,确实就是如此,以此显示教导没有颠倒。欲义,这里表示希求那个意思而说,这就是如来的词源解释:把 da 变成 ta,又按照语词规则加上 ā 音,或者随词根而带有 ā 音,这里就是这样显示词源的。巴利
Niddosatāya anupavajjaṃ anupavadanīyaṃ. Pakkhipitabbābhāvena anūnaṃ. Apanetabbābhāvena anadhikaṃ. Atthabyañjanādisampattiyā sabbākāraparipuṇṇaṃ. Nimmadanahetu nimmadanaṃ. Vālaggamattampīti vāladhilomassa koṭippamāṇampi. Avakkhalitanti virādhitaṃ musā bhaṇitaṃ. Ekamuddikāyāti ekarājalañchanena. Ekanāḷiyāti ekāḷhakena, ekatumbena vā. Ekatulāyāti ekamānena. ‘‘Tathamevā’’ti vuttamevatthaṃ no aññathāti byatirekato dasseti, tena yadatthaṃ bhāsitaṃ, ekantena tadatthanipphādanato yathā bhāsitaṃ bhagavatā, tathāyevāti aviparītadesanataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Gadattho’’ti etena tathaṃ gadati bhāsatīti tathāgato da-kārassa ta-kāraṃ, niruttinayena ca ākārāgamaṃ katvā, dhātusaddānugatena vā ākārenāti nibbacanaṃ dasseti.
就像在“善逝”等词(《律注》1)中那样,先通过分析词根和词形的构词方式来展示词源,接着为了也能用外在含义的简要说明来展示,所以说了“复次”等话。“极说”(āgadana),因为能成就一切利益,所以是极说,也就是言语;或者,其中的ā这个音只是表示它本身的存在而已。巴利
Evaṃ ‘‘sugato’’tiādīsu (pārā. 1) viya dhātusaddanipphattiparikappena niruttiṃ dassetvā bāhiratthasamāsenapi dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āgadananti sabbahitanipphādanato bhusaṃ kathanaṃ vacanaṃ, tabbhāvamatto vā ā-saddo.
所谓“如来”,就是“这样去的人”。或者说,言语怎样进行,身体也怎样进行;身体怎样进行,言语也怎样进行,所以叫如来,这就是它的意思。为了说明这同一个词源解释,才说了“世尊”等话。其中,通过“已去、已行”和“已去、已行”这些说法,依身业和语业互相随顺、不相违背的意乐,说明这里身和语的运行是用“去”(gata)这个词来表达的;通过“如是存在者”等话,说明外在义略释;通过“如是这样”这句话,由于“如”(yathā)和“那样”(taṃ)两词之间有不偏离的关联,所以一说“那样”,“如”的意思就自然显现出来,这是说明“那样”这个词的含义;通过“说者、作者”,说明运行的具体样态;通过“世尊”等话,说明如说而作等的原因。“如是存在者”,就是按如说而作等方式而运行的人,或者已经达到这种方式的人。“即”,是指示所说的这种方式。然而,因为这里“去”这个词也能表示言语的运行,所以即使依“如说而去”也能成立“如来”这个意思;但那个意思前面已经用另一种方式显示过了,因此为了说明其余的道理,就通过“如作”这个意思来说“由如此如作,所以是如来”。并且说——巴利
Tathā gatamassāti tathāgato. Yathā vācāya gataṃ pavatti, tathā kāyassa, yathā vā kāyassa gataṃ pavatti, tathā vācāya assa, tasmā tathāgatoti attho. Tadeva nibbacanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavato’’tiādimāha. Tattha hi ‘‘gato pavatto, gatā pavattā’’ti ca etena kāyavacīkiriyānaṃ aññamaññānulomanavacanicchāya kāyassa, vācāya ca pavatti idha gata-saddena kathitāti dasseti, ‘‘evaṃbhūtassā’’tiādinā bāhiratthasamāsaṃ, ‘‘yathā tathā’’ti etena yaṃtaṃ-saddānaṃ abyabhicāritasambandhatāya ‘‘tathā’’ti vutte ‘‘yathā’’ti ayamattho upaṭṭhitoyeva hotīti tathāsaddatthaṃ, ‘‘vādī kārī’’ti etena pavattisarūpaṃ, ‘‘bhagavato hī’’ti etena yathāvādītathākāritādikāraṇanti. ‘‘Evaṃbhūtassā’’ti yathāvādītathākāritādinā pakārena pavattassa, imaṃ pakāraṃ vā pattassa. Itīti vuttappakāraṃ niddisati. Yasmā panettha gata-saddo vācāya pavattimpi dasseti, tasmā kāmaṃ tathāvāditāya tathāgatoti ayampi attho siddho hoti, so pana pubbe pakārantarena dassitoti pārisesanayena tathākāritāatthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃ tathākāritāya tathāgato’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttañca –
就像他的言语所表现的那样,
身体也这样去了,因为……
身体怎样,言语也怎样,
从此,导师就是如来。巴利
‘‘Yathā vācā gatā yassa, Tathā kāyo gato yato; Yathā kāyo tathā vācā, Tato satthā tathāgato’’ti.
“以有顶为边际”这句话,是就语义关联来说的。不过有些人主张“就像横向一样,上方和下方也有无量的世界系”,应当知道,这段话正是为了否定他们的这种说法才这样说的。“解脱”,是指果。“解脱智见”,是指被称为审察智的那种见。“等同”,就是相似。“量度”,是指衡量的依据。以功德胜过他人、压倒他人,也就是超胜他人,所以叫“胜伏者”。不被他人胜过、不被他人压倒,所以叫“不被胜伏者”。“决定”是表示肯定语气的助词。以见之义叫“见者”,意思是看见一切。能让他人随自己的意志而转,所以叫“自在者”。巴利
Bhavaggaṃ pariyantaṃ katvāti sambandho. Yaṃ paneke vadanti ‘‘tiriyaṃ viya upari, adho ca santi aparimāṇā lokadhātuyo’’ti, tesaṃ taṃ paṭisedhetuṃ evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vimuttiyāti phalena. Vimuttiñāṇadassanenāti paccavekkhaṇāñāṇasaṅkhātena dassanena. Tuloti sadiso. Pamāṇanti minanakāraṇaṃ. Pare abhibhavati guṇena ajjhottharati adhiko bhavatīti abhibhū. Parehi na abhibhūto ajjhotthaṭoti anabhibhūto.Aññadatthūti ekaṃsavacane nipāto. Dassanavasena daso, sabbaṃ passatīti attho. Pare attano vasaṃ vattetīti vasavattī.
“以征服之义名为如来”这个说法,不能直接从字面上得到;为了说明从字面上确实可以这样理解,才说了“即于彼处”等话。其中,“药”是指天界的药,能消除疾病、摧毁疾病,或者说因为靠它没有病,所以叫药。以相似的道理,这里教法展现的庄严和福德积聚也可以称为药,所以说“犹如药”。依靠法界而达到教法展现的昂扬,这就是教法展现的庄严。而“法界”就是指一切知智,因为凭它了知诸法的种种差别后,能相应地开示教法。教法展现本身就是教法展现的时机,譬如“布施所成、持戒所成”;然而如今在许多书本中,maya这个词都看不到。“福德积聚”是指殊胜的,或者说超胜而成为智等资粮的福德。“以此”等话是譬喻的完成。而“以此”,是指以此二者——教法之庄严展现与福德之积聚——彼世尊征服,应如此连结。“如是”等话显示外在义合成词。以征服一切世间故为“如”,不是别的样子,这就是所说的意思。巴利
‘‘Abhibhavanaṭṭhena tathāgato’’ti ayaṃ na saddato labbhati, saddato pana evanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tatreva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha agadoti dibbāgado agaṃ rogaṃ dāti avakhaṇḍati, natthi vā gado rogo etenāti katvā , tassadisaṭṭhena idha desanāvilāsassa, puññussayassa ca agadatā labbhatīti āha ‘‘agado viyā’’ti. Yāya dhammadhātuyā desanāvijambhanappattā, sā desanāvilāso. Dhammadhātaūti ca sabbaññutaññāṇameva. Tena hi dhammānamākārabhedaṃ ñatvā tadanurūpaṃ desanaṃ niyāmeti. Desanāvilāsoyeva desanāvilāsamayo yathā ‘‘dānamayaṃ sīlamaya’’nti (dī. ni. 3.305; itivu. 60; netti. 34) adhunā pana potthakesu bahūsupi maya-saddo na dissati. Puññussayoti ussanaṃ, atirekaṃ vā ñāṇādisambhārabhūtaṃ puññaṃ. ‘‘Tenā’’tiādi opammasampādanaṃ. Tenāti ca tadubhayena desanāvilāsena ceva puññussayena ca so bhagavā abhibhavatīti sambandho. ‘‘Itī’’tiādinā bāhiratthasamāsaṃ dasseti. Sabbalokābhibhavanena tatho, na aññathāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“如实而去者”是就前面三谛说的;“已如实到达者”则是就最后一谛说的。这里按照四谛的次第,说明了“去”这个字的四种含义。当有表义词放在旁边时,前缀和不变词的作用就是把它要表达的意思显示出来,因此“去”这个字本身不带前缀时,就表示“已了知”和“已过去”的意思,所以用“已了知、已过去”来说明这一点。巴利
Tathāya gatoti purimasaccattayaṃ sandhāyāha, tathaṃ gatoti pana pacchimasaccaṃ. Catusaccānukkamena cettha gata-saddassa atthacatukkaṃ vuttaṃ. Vācakasaddasannidhāne upasagganipātānaṃ tadatthajotanabhāvena pavattanato gata-saddoyeva anupasaggo avagatatthaṃ, atītatthañca vadatīti dasseti ‘‘avagato atīto’’ti iminā.
“其中”等语是对它的解释。“世间”指作为苦谛的世间。“以如实遍知”应当这样连接起来理解。“导向世间灭尽之道”指圣道,而不只是证悟本身。为了说明在这里应当完成的事也已经完成,所以用“如来已从世间脱离”等话,在四谛中也说了第二种情况,或者用这些来说明证悟之因。正因为这样,那些谛才被他证悟。“诸比丘,凡在这有天神、魔、梵天的世间,在这有沙门、婆罗门、天神、人的众生中,被见、被闻、被觉、被知、被获得、被寻求、被以心随寻的,这一切都被如来证悟,因此称为如来”这一在《增支部》第四集中所说的经文,以这段重复语的形式显示出来,而那也只是因为义理相关联,并不是因为能成就此义。因为那重复语所指示的经文显示了那样的义理,所以能成就此义。以“它的义理也应这样理解”这句话,作所立与能立的结合。“此亦”等语显示如来一词的广大境域,以及八种如前所说的理由的示例而已。其中,“此”是指以极广的形式所说的八种理由,“亦”字或“api”字表示可能,如“此亦仅是入门而已,何况其余”。“于显示如来性”是指在显示如来之名。因为世尊以功德名为如来,而以名字说,世尊有“如来”一词。所以说:“阿僧祇的名号,是具有功德的伟大仙人的”等。为了说明如不放逸品那样,如来一词统摄一切佛功德,即一切善法的实践,说了“以一切方式”等。应称赞,这是假设的说法:“应称赞或不应称赞。”而且说:
“此”是指以广略形式所说的八种理由,“亦”字表示可能,“此亦仅是入门而已,何况其余”。“于显示如来性”是指在显了如来之名。“诸比丘,凡在这有天神、魔、梵天的世间,在这有沙门、婆罗门、天神、人的众生中,被见、被闻、被觉、被知、被获得、被寻求、被以心随寻的,这一切都被如来证悟,因此称为如来”这一在《增支部》第四集中所说的经文,以这段重复语的形式显示出来,而那也只是因为义理相关联,并不是因为能成就此义。因为那重复语所指示的经文显示了那样的义理,所以能成就此义。以“它的义理也应这样理解”这句话,作所立与能立的结合。“此亦”等语显示如来一词的广大境域,以及八种如前所说的理由的示例而已。其中,“此”是指以极广的形式所说的八种理由,“亦”字或“api”字表示可能,如“此亦仅是入门而已,何况其余”。“于显示如来性”是指在显示如来之名。因为世尊以功德名为如来,而以名字说,世尊有“如来”一词。所以说:“阿僧祇的名号,是具有功德的伟大仙人的”等。为了说明如不放逸品那样,如来一词统摄一切佛功德,即一切善法的实践,说了“以一切方式”等。应称赞,这是假设的说法:“应称赞或不应称赞。”而且说:巴利
‘‘Tatthā’’tiādi tabbivaraṇaṃ. Lokanti dukkhasaccabhūtaṃ lokaṃ. Tathāya tīraṇapariññāyāti yojetabbaṃ. Lokanirodhagāminiṃ paṭipadanti ariyamaggaṃ, na pana abhisambujjhanamattaṃ. Tattha kattabbakiccampi katamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘lokasmā tathāgato visaṃyutto’’tiādinā saccacatukkepi dutiyapakkhaṃ vuttaṃ, abhisambujjhanahetuṃ vā etehi dasseti. Tatoyeva hi tāni abhisambuddhoti. ‘‘Yaṃ bhikkhave, sadevakassa lokassa samārakassa sabrahmakassa sassamaṇabrāhmaṇiyā pajāya sadevamanussāya diṭṭhaṃ sutaṃ mutaṃ viññātaṃ pattaṃ pariyesitaṃ anuvicaritaṃ manasā, sabbaṃ taṃ tathāgatena abhisambuddhaṃ, tasmā tathāgatoti vuccatī’’ti (a. ni. 4.23) aṅguttarāgame catukkanipāte āgataṃ pāḷimimaṃ peyyālamukhena dasseti, tañca atthasambandhatāya eva, na imassatthassa sādhakatāya. Sā hi peyyālaniddiṭṭhā pāḷi tathadassitā atthassa sādhikāti. ‘‘Tassapi evaṃ attho veditabbo’’ti iminā sādhyasādhakasaṃsandanaṃ karoti. ‘‘Idampi cā’’tiādinā tathāgatapadassa mahāvisayataṃ , aṭṭhavidhassāpi yathāvuttakāraṇassa nidassanamattañca dasseti. Tattha idanti atibyāsarūpena vuttaṃ aṭṭhavidhaṃ kāraṇaṃ, pi-saddo, api-saddo vā sambhāvane ‘‘itthampi mukhamattameva, pageva aññathā’’ti. Tathāgatabhāvadīpaneti tathāgatanāmadīpane. Guṇena hi bhagavā tathāgato nāma, nāmena ca bhagavati tathāgata-saddoti. ‘‘Asaṅkhyeyyāni nāmāni, saguṇena mahesino’’tiādi (udā. aṭṭha. 306; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.277) hi vuttaṃ. Appamādapadaṃ viya sakalakusaladhammapaṭipattiyā sabbabuddhaguṇānaṃ tathāgatapadaṃ saṅgāhakanti dassetuṃ ‘‘sabbākārenā’’tiādimāha . Vaṇṇeyyāti parikappavacanametaṃ ‘‘vaṇṇeyya vā, na vā vaṇṇeyyā’’ti. Vuttañca –
即使是佛陀,也应当赞叹佛陀的功德,
就算不说其他话,讲上一整劫,
劫数会在漫长久远的间隔中耗尽,
如来的功德也不会灭尽。巴利
‘‘Buddhopi buddhassa bhaṇeyya vaṇṇaṃ, Kappampi ce aññamabhāsamāno; Khīyetha kappo ciradīghamantare, Vaṇṇo na khīyetha tathāgatassā’’ti. (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.304; 3.141; udā. aṭṭha. 52; apa. aṭṭha. 2.7.20; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. koṇḍaññabuddhavaṃsavaṇṇanā; cariyā. pakiṇṇakakathā); –
有些人则说,这里的“可能”义,就像“他能解开这个结”等句子里的用法一样。巴利
Samatthane vā etaṃ ‘‘so imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭa’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.23) viyātipi vadanti keci.
这里还有一种注释书之外的理路:从最初发愿开始,一直到成正觉,在这整个过程中,因为大菩提乘的修行不存在退失的阶段,也不存在被杂染所阻碍的阶段,所以如来完全按照当初的愿来修行,与自己的发愿相随顺,因此称为如来。或者说,因为具有大神通,又通过最高程度的无碍解和无障碍的智慧,在任何地方都没有阻碍,所以他的身、语、意的一切行动、去处和活动都随心所欲,因此称为如来。再者,世间上“种类”“相应”“已去”“方式”这些词看起来意思相同,所以就像毗婆尸等世尊具足一切知者的一切功德、属于那一类,这位世尊也属于那一类,因此称为如来;就像那些世尊依照所说的道理而相应,这位世尊也依照那个道理而相应,因此称为如来。还有另一种理路:因为“真实”“如实”“如”是智慧的代名词,所以以如实之智而来,因此称为如来。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – abhinīhārato paṭṭhāya yāva sammāsambodhi, etthantare mahābodhiyānapaṭipattiyā hānaṭṭhānasaṃkilesanivattīnaṃ abhāvato yathāpaṇidhānaṃ tathāgato abhinīhārānurūpaṃ paṭipannoti tathāgato. Atha vā mahiddhikatāya, paṭisambhidānaṃ ukkaṃsādhigamena anāvaraṇañāṇatāya ca katthacipi paṭighātābhāvato yathāruci, tathā kāyavacīcittānaṃ gatāni gamanāni pavattiyo etassāti tathāgato. Apica yasmā loke vidhayuttagatapakārasaddā samānatthā dissanti, tasmā yathā vidhā vipassiādayo bhagavanto nikhilasabbaññuguṇasamaṅgitāya, ayampi bhagavā tathā vidhoti tathāgato, yathā yuttā ca te bhagavanto vuttanayena, ayampi bhagavā tathā yuttoti tathāgato. Aparo nayo-yasmā saccaṃ tacchaṃ tathanti ñāṇassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ, tasmā tathena ñāṇena āgatoti tathāgatoti.
已经舍断了欲等垢染,就像那些已经如此前行的人一样,
毗婆尸等(过去七佛中的前六位)以定与智(证得)
释迦牟尼大仙,持有光辉者。
如来就这样被称为。
以及如实了知界、处等的特相,
从自性、共相与差别的区分来说
战胜五魔的胜者,以自证自悟的智慧而圆满具足,
释迦族的雄牛,被称为如来。
以遍知一切的佛眼,如实照见诸谛,
同样地,此缘性也以一切方式(存在)。
由于不随他人所引者,他得以阐明。
这位胜者因为如实,所以是如来。
即使在种种不同的世间界中,
在胜者的色处等所行境中,
在种种不同的变化中,也同样如实看见,
如来由此是遍眼者。
当他确实按法的本来面目来说法,
他的言行随顺自己。
他凭种种功德胜过世间,在世间自在而行。
如来也因此是世间导师。
按照他的发愿和意愿,
随着实际发生的言语、行为和内心的状态而转起。
往昔那些大仙以何种方式、在何处,
那位胜者、如来,也是这样的。
就像过去的善逝们那样,他们也同样与之相应契合,
他同样如此相应契合,并且以如实之智了知。
他具足于此,拥有遍及四周的眼力,
如来被称为释迦族的牛王。巴利
‘‘Pahāya kāmādimale yathā gatā, Samādhiñāṇehi vipassiādayo; Mahesino sakyamunī jutindharo, Tathā gato tena tathāgato mato. Tathañca dhātāyatanādilakkhaṇaṃ, Sabhāvasāmaññavibhāgabhedato; Sayambhuñāṇena jino samāgato, Tathāgato vuccati sakyapuṅgavo. Tathāni saccāni samantacakkhunā, Tathā idappaccayatā ca sabbaso; Anaññaneyyena yato vibhāvitā, Yāthāvato tena jino tathāgato. Anekabhedāsupi lokadhātūsu, Jinassa rūpāyatanādigocare; Vicittabhede tathameva dassanaṃ, Tathāgato tena samantalocano. Yato ca dhammaṃ tathameva bhāsati, Karoti vācāyanulomamattano; Guṇehi lokaṃ abhibhuyyirīyati, Tathāgato tenapi lokanāyako. Yathābhinīhāramato yathāruci, Pavattavācātanucittabhāvato; Yathāvidhā yena purā mahesino, Tathāvidho tena jino tathāgato. Yathā ca yuttā sugatā purātanā, Tathāva yutto tathañāṇato ca so; Samāgato tena samantalocano, Tathāgato vuccati sakyapuṅgavo’’ti. (itivu. aṭṭha. 38 thokaṃ visadisaṃ); –
“诸比丘,那是什么?”这是谁在问?于是说“由何者”等等。这样从总体上说明,前面所说的仅仅关于戒的那部分是提问,接着为了说明提问的特殊性质,就按照提取要义的方式,展示《大义释》(《大义释》150)中出现的全部提问,即“其中,所谓提问”等等。那里的“其中”,就是指“他问‘那是什么’”这一处,也就是这里从总体上所说的提问语句之中。巴利
‘‘Katamañca taṃ bhikkhave’’ti ayaṃ kassa pucchāti āha ‘‘yenā’’tiādi. Evaṃ sāmaññato yathāvuttassa sīlamattakassa pucchābhāvaṃ dassetvā idāni pucchāvisesabhāvañāpanatthaṃ mahāniddese (mahāni. 150) āgatā sabbāva pucchā atthuddhāravasena dasseti ‘‘tattha pucchā nāmā’’tiādinā. Tattha tatthāti ‘‘taṃ katamanti pucchatī’’ti ettha yadetaṃ sāmaññato pucchāvacanaṃ vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ.
“本性”,是指自己的法性,意思是它自己就是这样。“相”,是指任何想要被了解的自性。“未识”,是指没有被与见等殊胜相应的智了知,或者没有被其他任何一种智了知。因为智、见、衡量、审察,是状态上的种种差别。“未见”,是指没有被作为见的智像现前一样看见。“未量”,是指没有被作为衡量的智衡量为“它有这么多”。“未审”,是指没有被作为审察的智完成“正是如此”这样的智的作用。“未显”,是指对智来说不显著。“未阐明”,是指没有被智弄得显著。 “它的”,是指前面所说的那种相。“未见之照明”,是指依它而照明、开显未见者。“为了对论”,是指为了通过讨论来作出决断。所谓对论,就是通过讨论来作出决断。“已见之对论”,是指依它来对论已见之法。在“陷入疑惑”等句中,更加坚固地住立的疑,就是“疑惑”;不太过度、只是心的散动,就是“犹豫”;比那更轻微的,以“是这样呢,还是不是这样呢”等方式,像分成两边一样生起,就是“二心”。因为心依它而二分、动摇,所以叫“二心”;把它作为因缘,或者作为有自身义的缘,由此生起,或者此法已在他心中生起,因此他名为“二心生起者”。“犹豫之断除”,是指依它而断除犹豫。针对《无我相经》等中出现的、与五蕴相关的问题,说“一切都应当说”。依随许而问,就是“随许问”。因为以“诸比丘,你们怎么想”等发问时,就是在问“你们的随许是什么”。 “想说”,是指有想说的欲望。在“陷入无知”等句中,这里省略了ya音,或者是在表示手段的意义上用了单数语尾;或者也可以说,由于有想说的欲望而发问,所以“想说之问”就是“想说问”。但从意义上看,应当知道,这一切都是如此生起的话语,或者是能生起它的心之生起。巴利
Pakatiyāti attano dhammatāya, sayamevāti vuttaṃ hoti. Lakkhaṇanti yo koci ñātumicchito sabhāvo. Aññātanti dassanādivisesayuttena, itarena vā yena kenacipi ñāṇena aññātaṃ. Avatthāvisesāni hi ñāṇadassanatulanatīraṇāni. Adiṭṭhanti dassanabhūtena ñāṇena paccakkhamiva adiṭṭhaṃ. Atulitanti ‘‘ettakameta’’nti tulanabhūtena atulitaṃ. Atīritanti ‘‘evamevida’’nti tīraṇabhūtena akatañāṇakiriyāsamāpanaṃ. Avibhūtanti ñāṇassa apākaṭabhūtaṃ. Avibhāvitanti ñāṇena apākaṭakataṃ. Tassāti yathāvuttalakkhaṇassa. Adiṭṭhaṃ jotīyati pakāsīyati etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā. Saṃsandanatthāyāti sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇatthāya. Saṃsandanañhi sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Diṭṭhaṃ saṃsandīyati etāyāti diṭṭhasaṃsandanā.‘‘Saṃsayapakkhando’’tiādīsu daḷhataraṃniviṭṭhā vicikicchā saṃsayo. Nātisaṃsappanamatibhedamattaṃ vimati. Tatopi appataraṃ ‘‘evaṃ nu kho, na nu kho’’tiādinā dvidhā viya pavattaṃ dveḷhakaṃ. Dvidhā elati kampati cittametenāti hi dveḷhakaṃ hapaccayaṃ, sakatthavuttikapaccayañca katvā, tena jāto, taṃ vā jātaṃ yassāti dveḷhakajāto. Vimati chijjati etāyāti vimaticchedanā.Anattalakkhaṇasuttādīsu (saṃ. ni. 3.59) āgataṃ khandhapañcakapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ pucchaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sabbaṃ vattabba’’nti. Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā.‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha bhikkhave’’tiādipucchāya hi ‘‘kā tumhākaṃ anumatī’’ti anumati pucchitā hoti. Kathetukamyatāti kathetukāmatāya. ‘‘Aññāṇatā āpajjatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 295) viya hi ettha ya-kāralopo, karaṇatthe vā paccattavacanaṃ, kathetukamyatāya vā pucchā kathetukamyatāpucchātipi vaṭṭati. Atthato pana sabbāpi tathā pavattavacanaṃ, taduppādako vā cittuppādoti veditabbaṃ.
为了说明这个被引用的释义方法的目的,也就是要让人明白那种特殊提问的性质,所以说“在这些之中”等等。心的作意就是专注。强烈而周遍的游移,就是“疑”,也就是四处攀缘、到处游移。一切疑都被断除了,因为以一切知智为近因的最上道已经将它彻底断除。由于依他人的同意以及自己想要说法的意愿而说法,而且这在各处都能见到,所以说“然而,其余两种提问,只存在于诸佛之中”。至于那些在释义中还以“依众生而立的提问、依法而立的提问、依一而立的提问、依多而立的提问”等方式出现的其他多种提问,应当知道,这里对它们全都不作拣择,只是为了给出方法,意思是:“仅凭这些就足够了,有意者应依此方法自行拣择审察。”巴利
Yadatthaṃ panāyaṃ niddesanayo āharito, tassa pucchāvisesabhāvassa ñāpanatthaṃ ‘‘imāsū’’tiādimāha. Cittābhogo samannāhāro. Bhusaṃ, samantato ca saṃsappanā kaṅkhā āsappanā, parisappanā ca. Sabbā kaṅkhā chinnā sabbaññutaññāṇapadaṭṭhānena aggamaggena samucchindanato. Paresaṃ anumatiyā, kathetukamyatāya ca dhammadesanāsambhavato, tathā eva tattha tattha diṭṭhattā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘avasesā pana dve pucchā buddhānaṃ atthī’’ti. Yā panetā ‘‘sattādhiṭṭhānā pucchā dhammādhiṭṭhānā pucchā ekādhiṭṭhānā pucchā anekādhiṭṭhānā pucchā’’tiādinā aparāpi anekadhā pucchāyo niddese āgatā, tā sabbāpi niddhāretvā idha avicayanaṃ ‘‘alaṃ ettāvatāva, atthikehi pana iminā nayena niddhāretvā vicetabbā’’ti nayadānassa sijjhanatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
8 这个“问”本身只有在有解答时才是合适的,所以为了催促对方,才说了“现在”等话。“令其过度落下”就叫“过度落下”。这里“过度”这个词是“超过”的意思。而迅速本身就是一种超过,因此,对于本性就是要落下的事物,在它还没落下的中间就让它超额地落下,也就是不给它慢慢落下的机会,而是让它迅速地落下,这就是它的意思。或者,是“压伏”的意思,即超越之后,用武器等压伏而令其落下,这就是世俗语言中说的“过度落下”。但从义理上说,因为依据上下文等可以理解,所以说“杀生就是杀害有情”,这才是真正的意旨。从世俗施设的角度来说,“有情”就是诸蕴的相续,因为在那相续之上假立了“有情”这个名称。而且也曾这样说过:巴利
8. Pucchā ca nāmesā vissajjanāya satiyeva yuttarūpāti codanāya ‘‘idānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Atipātanaṃ atipāto.Ati-saddo cettha atirekattho. Sīghabhāvo eva ca atirekatā, tasmā saraseneva patanasabhāvassa antarā eva atirekaṃ pātanaṃ, saṇikaṃ patituṃ adatvā sīghaṃ pātananti attho, abhibhavanattho vā, atikkamma satthādīhi abhibhavitvā pātananti vuttaṃ hoti, vohāravacanametaṃ ‘‘atipāto’’ti. Atthato pana pakaraṇādivasenādhigatattā pāṇavadho pāṇaghātoti vuttaṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Vohāratoti paññattito. Sattoti khandhasantāno. Tattha hi sattapaññatti. Vuttañca –
就像有了各种部件的组合,才有“车”这个声音(名称)一样;
当诸蕴存在时,就形成了“有情”这个世俗共许的说法。巴利
‘‘Yathā hi aṅgasambhārā, hoti saddo ratho iti; Evaṃ khandhesu santesu, hoti sattoti sammutī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.171);
“命根”是指色命根和非色命根。色命根一旦被破坏,另一个(非色命根)也因为与它相关联而随之消失。那么,为什么这里用单数来解说“杀害有情”以及“这里说的‘有情’是从世俗习惯上说的众生”呢?这里要表达的,难道不是远离杀害一切毫无剩余的有情吗?因为下文确实会这样说:“悲悯一切有情众生”等等(《长部注》1.7),用的是复数。确实如此。不过,这里是按照有情这一共同性质而用单数来解说;而在那里,因为紧挨着“一切”这个词,复数含义已经很容易看出来了,所以不再按共同性质来说,而是为了表达其中的差别才用复数解说。还有更进一步的理由:应当知道,这种措辞上的差别也是为了说明这样一个要点——从共同性质方面说是防护的受持,从具体差别方面说是防护的类别。因为“杀害有情”等说法是在显示防护的类别,而“一切有情众生”等说法则是在显示防护的受持。不过,精通声明的论师们说:“在这类场合,只是依据种类和实体而措辞有所不同,从意义上看则是一样的。”巴利
Jīvitindriyanti rūpārūpajīvitindriyaṃ. Rūpajīvitindriye hi vikopite itarampi taṃsambandhatāya vinassati. Kasmā panettha ‘‘pāṇassa atipāto’’ti, ‘‘pāṇoti cettha vohārato satto’’ti ca ekavacananiddeso kato, nanu niravasesānaṃ pāṇānaṃ atipātato virati idha adhippetā. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti sabbe pāṇabhūte’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.7) bahuvacananiddesanti? Saccametaṃ, pāṇabhāvasāmaññena panettha ekavacananiddeso kato, tattha pana sabbasaddasannidhānena puthuttaṃ suviññāyamānamevāti sāmaññaniddesamakatvā bhedavacanicchāvasena bahuvacananiddeso kato. Kiñca bhiyyo – sāmaññato saṃvarasamādānaṃ, tabbisesato saṃvarabhedoti imassa visesassa ñāpanatthampi ayaṃ vacanabhedo katoti veditabbo. ‘‘Pāṇassa atipāto’’tiādi hi saṃvarabhedadassanaṃ. ‘‘Sabbe pāṇabhūte’’tiādi pana saṃvarasamādānadassananti. Saddavidū pana ‘‘īdisesu ṭhānesu jātidabbāpekkhavasena vacanabhedamattaṃ, atthato samāna’’nti vadanti.
这里说的“有情”,是指前面所说的那两类有情。“有有情想者”,是指具有有情想的个人。当某人正在造作某种思时,对于作为命根所依的诸大种,由于施加了加行,那些以这些大种为缘而将会生起的诸大种就不会生起——这种能发起如此加行的思,就叫做杀生。所以说“能发起断除命根的加行”:意思是,对于断除命根的身业和语业,它能在其所依的诸大种中发起。因为已经被施加加行的诸大种,不像先前的诸大种那样清净明净,所以不能成为同类诸大种的因。因此,当对这些大种施加加行时,如果没有障碍,此后应当生起的诸大种,以及依止于它们的命根,就会被断除。通过“身门与语门”这句话,驳斥了诡辩派的主张:他们认为发生在意门的杀心就是杀生。巴利
Tasmiṃ pana pāṇeti yathāvutte dubbidhepi pāṇe. Pāṇasaññinoti pāṇasaññāsamaṅgino puggalassa . Yāya pana cetanāya pavattamānassa jīvitindriyassa nissayabhūtesu mahābhūtesu upakkamakaraṇahetu taṃmahābhūtapaccayā uppajjanakamahābhūtā nuppajjissanti, sā tādisapayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā pāṇātipātoti āha ‘‘jīvitindriyupacchedakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā’’ti, jīvitindriyupacchedakassa kāyavacīpayogassa tannissayesu mahābhūtesu samuṭṭhāpikāti attho. Laddhupakkamāni hi bhūtāni purimabhūtāni viya na visadāni, tasmā samānajātiyānaṃ bhūtānaṃ kāraṇāni na hontīti tesuyeva upakkame kate tato parānaṃ asati antarāye uppajjamānānaṃ bhūtānaṃ, tannissitassa ca jīvitindriyassa upacchedo hoti. ‘‘Kāyavacīdvārāna’’nti etena vitaṇḍavādimataṃ manodvāre pavattāya vadhakacetanāya pāṇātipātabhāvaṃ paṭikkhipati.
罪过之所以重大,应当从加行、对象等方面的重大,以及由这些条件所生起的思力量强盛来理解。因为即使只是一次加行,若能迅速成办,又因为成办事务的速行心多次生起而获得了串习,依决意之思的力量,加行便成为重大。有时,即使对小的和大的众生,加行是一样的,但杀大者所生起的思更为强烈,所以对象方面也有重大性。这样,这两者都是由于思的力量强盛才成立的。再者,即使加行和对象都不重大,如果所杀者功德广大,那么就像在殊胜的田地里生起的饶益思能成就殊胜果报一样,损害思也同样强而有力,生起得更为强烈,因此应当知道它的罪过重大。所以论中说“对于有功德者”等。而通过“烦恼”等语句,则显示:即使加行、对象和功德都不重大,由于烦恼和加行的软弱或猛烈,依思的羸弱或强盛,应当知道有罪过小与罪过大的差别。巴利
Payogavatthumahantatādīhi mahāsāvajjatā tehi paccayehi uppajjamānāya cetanāya balavabhāvato veditabbā. Ekassāpi hi payogassa sahasā nipphādanavasena, kiccasādhikāya bahukkhattuṃ pavattajavanehi laddhāsevanāya ca sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya vasena payogassa mahantabhāvo. Satipi kadāci khuddake ceva mahante ca pāṇe payogassa samabhāve mahantaṃ hanantassa cetanā tibbatarā uppajjatīti vatthussa mahantabhāvo. Iti ubhayampetaṃ cetanāya balavabhāveneva hoti. Satipi ca payogavatthūnaṃ amahantabhāve hantabbassa guṇamahattenapi tattha pavattaupakāracetanā viya khettavisesanipphattiyā apakāracetanāpi balavatī, tibbatarā ca uppajjatīti tassā mahāsāvajjatā daṭṭhabbā . Tenāha ‘‘guṇavantesū’’tiādi. ‘‘Kilesāna’’ntiādinā pana satipi payogavatthuguṇānaṃ amahantabhāve kilesupakkamānaṃ mudutibbatāya cetanāya dubbalabalavabhāvavasena appasāvajjamahāsāvajjabhāvo veditabboti dasseti.
这些被称为“资具”或“支分”,是因为它们被拿来支撑、携带。其中,有情想和杀心也可以属于前行阶段。而加行则是由杀思所引发,与杀思同时生起。不过,具足五支的杀生思,应当看作脱离这五支。这个原则在不与取等其他条目中也同样适用。巴利
Sambharīyanti saharīyanti etehīti sambhārā, aṅgāni. Tesu pāṇasaññitā, vadhakacittañca pubbabhāgiyānipi honti. Upakkamo pana vadhakacetanāsamuṭṭhāpito sahajātova. Pañcasambhāravatī pana pāṇātipātacetanāti sā pañcasambhāravinimuttā daṭṭhabbā. Esa nayo adinnādānādīsupi.
这里有人提出疑问:在每一刹那都自然坏灭的诸行当中,到底是谁在杀?又是谁被杀?如果说能杀和所杀是心和心所的相续,那么它并不能用折磨、切断、破坏等方式去伤害对方,自己也不会被这样伤害。如果说是色身的相续,那色身没有心识,就像木头和石块一样,因此不可能像在死尸上那样,通过切割等方式构成杀生。再说,杀生的加行,是施加在过去的诸行上,还是未来的诸行上,或者现在的诸行上?首先,不可能施加在过去和未来的诸行上,因为它们根本不存在。如果说是施加在现在的诸行上,现在的诸行刹那即灭,它们的本性就是趋向坏灭,那么加行就完全没有意义了。而且,如果坏灭不需要任何原因,那么死亡就不是由打击等加行造成的;再加上诸行本身没有造作者,那这个加行又是谁的加行呢?由于刹那生灭的缘故,与杀意同时坏灭的东西不可能持续到作用完成的那一刻,那么又是谁被杀生之业所系缚呢?巴利
Etthāha – khaṇe khaṇe nirujjhanasabhāvesu saṅkhāresu ko hanti, ko vā haññati, yadi cittacetasikasantāno, evaṃ so anupatāpanachedanabhedanādivasena na vikopanasamattho, nāpi vikopanīyo, atha rūpasantāno, evampi so acetanatāya kaṭṭhakaliṅgarūpamoti na tattha chedanādinā pāṇātipāto labbhati yathā matasarīre. Payogopi pāṇātipātassa paharaṇappakārādiatītesu vā saṅkhāresu bhaveyya, anāgatesu vā paccuppannesu vā. Tattha na tāva atītānāgatesu sambhavati tesaṃ abhāvato. Paccuppannesu ca saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikattā saraseneva nirujjhanasabhāvatāya vināsābhimukhesu nippayojano eva payogo siyā. Vināsassa ca kāraṇarahitattā na paharaṇappakārādipayogahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, nirīhakatāya ca saṅkhārānaṃ kassa so payogo, khaṇikattā vadhādhippāyasamakālabhijjanakassa kiriyāpariyosānakālānavaṭṭhānato kassa vā pāṇātipātakammabaddhoti?
答曰:与杀心相应的诸行聚集,被称为“有情”,它就是杀害者。由于他发起的杀生加行,使得先前存在的识和命根离开,于是那个本应在没有造作上述杀生加行时生起的、作为“死亡”这一假名安立之依据的色法与无色法聚集,就被杀害了。或者,纯粹的心与心所的相续也被杀害。虽然杀生加行并不直接作用于心与心所的相续,但在五蕴有中,它依色相续而运作,当他人对色相续施加断除命根的加行,导致能障碍其生起的不同类色法产生时,心与心所的相续就被破坏而中断。因此,杀生并非不可能成立,杀生也不是无因的,加行也不是没有作用的——因为依所造的加行之力,本应紧接着生起的诸行聚集便不再那样生起。由于刹那生灭的诸行的刹那死亡,在这里并不被认定为通常所说的“死”,而相续的死亡则如前所述是有原因的,所以死不是无因的。杀生加行也不是没有作者,因为即使在无所造作的诸行中,仅凭它们作为助缘而存在、各自决定产生相应果报的诸因,就可以安立“作者”的假名,就像说“灯照亮”、“月亮是月天子”一样。而且,并非只有与杀心俱起的心与心所聚集才被承认为杀生,因为承认它是依相续而安住的;而依相续运转的灯等,也可见能成就自身的作用。因此,确实有被杀生之业所系缚的。这个道理在不与取等其余事例中,也应随各自情况加以阐明。巴利
Vuccate – vadhakacetanāsahito saṅkhārānaṃ puñjo sattasaṅkhāto hanti, tena pavattitavadhappayoganimittāpagatusmāviññāṇajīvitindriyo matavohārappavattinibandhano yathāvuttavadhappayogākaraṇe uppajjanāraho rūpārūpadhammasamūho haññati, kevalo vā cittacetasikasantāno, vadhappayogāvisayabhāvepi tassa pañcavokārabhave rūpasantānādhīnavuttitāya rūpasantāne parena payojitajīvitindriyupacchedakapayogavasena tannibbattivibandhakavisadisarūpuppattiyā vihate vicchedo hotīti na pāṇātipātassa asambhavo, nāpi ahetuko pāṇātipāto, na ca payogo nippayojano paccuppannesu saṅkhāresu katapayogavasena tadanantaraṃ uppajjanārahassa saṅkhārakalāpassa tathāanuppattito, khaṇikānaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikamaraṇassa idha maraṇabhāvena anadhippetattā santatimaraṇassa ca yathāvuttanayena sahetukabhāvato na ahetukaṃ maraṇaṃ, na ca katturahito pāṇātipātappayogo nirīhakesupi saṅkhāresu sannihitatāmattena upakārakesu attano attano anurūpaphaluppādananiyatesu kāraṇesu kattuvohārasiddhito yathā ‘‘padīpo pakāseti, nisākaro candimā’’ti, na ca kevalassa vadhādhippāyasahabhuno cittacetasikakalāpassa pāṇātipāto icchito santānavasena avaṭṭhitasseva paṭijānanato, santānavasena pavattamānānañca padīpādīnaṃ attakiriyāsiddhi dissatīti attheva pāṇātipātena kammabaddhoti. Ayañca vicāro adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ vibhāvetabbo.
亲手杀,是指自己动手杀时,用身体或身体所带的东西去打。令杀,是指命令别人时说“你这样射死或打死他”这样的吩咐。投掷杀,是指想杀远处的人时,用身体或身体所带的东西投掷刀、陷阱、石块等。固定杀,是指想用不能移动的工具杀人时,布置坑陷、险处,或者安排药物。咒术杀,是指为了杀人而念咒,像阿闼婆术士那样。阿闼婆术士确实施行阿闼婆术,当城市被围或战事发生时,让敌方和仇敌的军队染上瘟疫、灾祸、疾病、热病、剧痛、霍乱、痢疾。持明者则转动明咒,当城市被围……中略……让人得痢疾。神通杀,是指由业报所生的神通,比如用牙撞击等。据说,父王狮子王用牙撞击,使小须摩那居士死亡。通过“然而在这个义理上”等语句,避免了偏重论著,又通过“有需要的人”等语句,使这个义理没有缺减。因为这里虽然没有直接说出这个义理,但已经通过指示显示出来,所以没有缺减,是圆满的。巴利
Sāhatthikoti sayaṃ mārentassa kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paharaṇaṃ. Āṇattikoti aññaṃ āṇāpentassa ‘‘evaṃ vijjhitvā vā paharitvā vā mārehī’’ti āṇāpanaṃ. Nissaggiyoti dūre ṭhitaṃ māretukāmassa kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā usuyantapāsāṇādīnaṃ nissajjanaṃ. Thāvaroti asañcārimena upakaraṇena māretukāmassa opātāpassenaupanikkhipanaṃ, bhesajjasaṃvidhānañca. Vijjāmayoti māraṇatthaṃ mantaparijappanaṃ āthabbaṇikādīnaṃ viya. Āthabbaṇikā hi āthabbaṇaṃ payojenti nagare vā ruddhe saṅgāme vā paccupaṭṭhite paṭisenāya paccatthikesu paccāmittesu ītiṃ uppādenti upaddavaṃ uppādenti rogaṃ uppādenti pajjarakaṃ uppādenti sūcikaṃ uppādenti visūcikaṃ karonti pakkhandiyaṃ karonti. Vijjādharā ca vijjaṃ parivattetvā nagare vā ruddhe…pe… pakkhandiyaṃ karonti. Iddhimayoti kammavipākajiddhimayo dāṭhākoṭanādīni viya. Piturañño kira sīhaḷanarindassa dāṭhākoṭanena cūḷasumanakuṭumbiyassa maraṇaṃ hoti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ panatthe’’tiādinā ganthagāravaṃ pariharitvā tassa anūnabhāvampi karoti ‘‘atthikehī’’tiādinā. Idha avuttopi hi esa attho atidisanena vutto viya anūno paripuṇṇoti.
破戒的状态就是破戒性,也就是前面所说的思。在“舍断已”这个词里,“tvā”这个后缀表示在前的时间,所以说“从已断的时候开始”;或者也可以从因的意义上来理解,因此这样解释。这是要显示:这里指的是以舍断为因、属于正断类的远离。因为依靠业尽智断除了杀生破戒,世尊才被称为彻底远离了它,这是就正断来说的,因为这里指的是舍断和远离。虽然“舍断已”和“远离”这两个词所表达的舍断与远离并没有时间上的先后,但从作为缘的道法(正见等)和缘所生的法(正语等)之间的缘与缘所生关系来看,即使是同时生起的,也可以像有前后那样来把握。因为缘以其缘的力量先已存在,之后缘所生才依缘力而生起,所以在把握和表述的方式上,对于作为俱生缘等的正见等能断法,在“断”的作用上可以赋予前时的说法;对于作为其缘所生的远离等,在“离”的作用上则可以称为后时。因此,在经文中应该这样理解其义:由正见等舍断了杀生,由正语等远离了杀生。巴利
Dussīlassa bhāvo dussīlyaṃ, yathāvuttā cetanā. ‘‘Pahāyā’’ti ettha tvā-saddo pubbakāleti āha ‘‘pahīnakālato paṭṭhāyā’’ti, hetuatthataṃ vā sandhāya evaṃ vuttaṃ. Etena hi pahānahetukā idhādhippetā samucchedanikā viratīti dasseti. Kammakkhayañāṇena hi pāṇātipātadussīlyassa pahīnattā bhagavā accantameva tato paṭiviratoti vuccati samucchedavasena pahānaviratīnamadhippetattā. Kiñcāpi ‘‘pahāya paṭivirato’’ti padehi vuttānaṃ pahānaviramaṇānaṃ purimapacchimakālatā natthi, maggadhammānaṃ pana sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ, paccayabhūtānaṃ sammāvācādīnañca paccayuppannabhūtānaṃ paccayapaccayuppannabhāve apekkhite sahajātānampi paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena gahaṇaṃ purimapacchimabhāvena viya hoti. Paccayo hi purimataraṃ paccayasattiyā ṭhito, tato paraṃ paccayuppannaṃ paccayasattiṃ paṭicca pavattati, tasmā gahaṇappavattiākāravasena sahajātādipaccayabhūtesu sammādiṭṭhiādīsu pahāyakadhammesu pahānakiriyāya purimakālavohāro, tappaccayuppannāsu ca viratīsu viramaṇakiriyāya aparakālavohāro sambhavati. Tasmā ‘‘sammādiṭṭhiādīhi pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya sammāvācādīhi pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’ti pāḷiyaṃ attho daṭṭhabbo.
不过,这里有一种不依赖注释书的解释方式:舍断要按“正断”的意思来理解,远离要按“寂止”的意思来理解。因此,意思是:通过道舍断了杀生,通过果远离了杀生。另外,“杀生”是指众生借此而被杀害,也就是构成杀生原因的那一堆法。那是什么呢?就是无惭、无愧、痴、害等烦恼。因为世尊以圣道舍断并根除了这些烦恼,由于烦恼已被断除,以它们为因的业就不再产生,所以他彻底远离了杀生这种破戒行为。因此,意思是:通过道舍断了被称为杀生的那些烦恼,从而远离了杀生破戒的思。这个道理也适用于“舍断不与取已”等说法。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – pahānaṃ samucchedavasena viratipaṭippassaddhivasena yojetabbā, tasmā maggena pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya phalena pāṇātipātā paṭiviratoti attho. Apica pāṇo atipātīyati etenāti pāṇātipāto, pāṇaghātahetubhūto dhammasamūho. Ko paneso? Ahirikānottappadosamohavihiṃsādayo kilesā. Te hi bhagavā ariyamaggena pahāya samugghāṭetvā pāṇātipātadussīlyato accantameva paṭivirato kilesesu pahīnesu tannimittakammassa anuppajjanato, tasmā maggena pāṇātipātaṃ yathāvuttakilesaṃ pahāya teneva pāṇātipātā dussīlyacetanā paṭiviratoti attho. Esa nayo ‘‘adinnādānaṃ pahāyā’’tiādīsupi.
“Orato virato”是一种同义替换的说法,或者是因为“pati”和“vi”这两个前缀要分别搭配,才这样说的。所谓“orato”,就是“avarato”,意思是面向而乐于安住,借此显示出以正直的远离而具有的殊胜。这也是“已远离者”的意思。“virato”意思是殊胜地乐于安住,借此说明连同习气一起远离的状态;两者合起来,则表明正断远离的状态。至于“eva”这个词,是为了显示那种远离在时间等方面没有局限而说的,它应当同时搭配两处。就像其他受持远离戒的人,因为心不稳定,或者为了利养、活命等原因而毁坏了所受持的戒,世尊却不是这样,因为他已彻底断除杀生,所以是绝对远离者。用“他没有……”等语句,从所遮止的意义上,证实了由“eva”一词所显示的上述含义。其中,“我将违犯”等生起的法,要与“伴随残余”的文句连起来理解。那些法是与无过失的法混杂在一起、间或生起的微弱的有过失法。又因为智者观察身语的行为后,能够知道“这个人的烦恼生起了”,所以就用这种方式称之为“眼耳所识知”,并不是因为它们是眼识、耳识的所缘。因此,应当理解为:通过相关的论述,以眼、耳,或者依止眼耳而生起的识,观察到身语的行为后,以意识了知。“身业”是指由身体所作、能成办杀生等的强有力的不善法。“黑色”也是注疏中摘录的文句,意思是属于黑分的有力不善法。以“以此”等语句给出方法,而那又是在“舍离不与取、远离不与取”等语句中。巴利
Oratoviratoti pariyāyavacanametaṃ, pati-visaddānaṃ vā paccekaṃ yojetabbato tathā vuttaṃ. Oratoti hi avarato abhimukhaṃ rato, tena ujukaṃ viramaṇavasena sātisayataṃ dasseti. Paṭiratassa cetaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Viratoti visesena rato, tena saha vāsanāya viramaṇabhāvaṃ, ubhayena pana samucchedaviratibhāvaṃ vibhāveti. Eva-saddo pana tassā viratiyā kālādivasena apariyantataṃ dassetuṃ vutto. So ubhayattha yojetabbo. Yathā hi aññe samādinnaviratikāpi anavaṭṭhitacittatāya lābhajīvitādihetu samādānaṃ bhinnanti, na evaṃ bhagavā, sabbaso pahīnapāṇātipātattā panesa accantavirato evāti. ‘‘Natthi tassā’’tiādinā eva-saddena dassitaṃ yathāvuttamatthaṃ nivattetabbatthavasena samattheti. Tattha vītikkamissāmīti uppajjanakā dhammāti saha pāṭhasesena sambandho. Te pana anavajjadhammehi vokiṇṇā antarantarā uppajjanakā dubbalā sāvajjā dhammā, yasmā ca ‘‘kāyavacīpayogaṃ upalabhitvā imassa kilesā uppannā’’ti viññunā sakkā ñātuṃ, tasmā te imināva pariyāyena ‘‘cakkhusotaviññeyyā’’ti vuttā, na pana cakkhusotaviññāṇārammaṇattā. Ato sasambhārakathāya cakkhusotehi, tannissitaviññāṇehi vā kāyikavācasikapayogamupalabhitvā manoviññāṇena viññeyyāti attho daṭṭhabbo. Kāyikāti kāyena katā pāṇātipātādinipphādakā balavanto akusalā. ‘‘Kāḷakā’’ tipi ṭīkāyaṃ uddhatapāṭho, kaṇhapakkhikā balavanto akusalāti attho. ‘‘Imināvā’’tiādinā nayadānaṃ karoti, tañca kho ‘‘adinnādānaṃ pahāya adinnādānā paṭivirato’’tiādipadesu.
“平息诸恶者,是为沙门”,这是乔达摩的名称,因为与种姓相关联而称为乔达摩。着眼于这个含义,所以说“沙门即世尊”等。依种姓而获得名称,这就是其中的关联。由于此开示是顺着梵授天所赞叹的功德而展开,而且他也赞叹了比丘僧,因此比丘僧的功德也应当按所述之理来阐述,但并没有阐述。为了排除“难道比丘僧没有远离杀生吗”这样的质问,而说“并非仅仅……”等。既然如此,为什么不阐述?为了回应再次的质问,便说“然而开示……”等。“如此”就是如此。巴利
Pāpe sametīti samaṇo, gotamasamaññā, tena gottenasambandho gotamoti atthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘samaṇoti bhagavā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gottavasena laddhavohāroti sambandho. Brahmadattena bhāsitavaṇṇānusandhiyā imissā desanāya pavattanato, tena ca bhikkhusaṅghavaṇṇassāpi bhāsitattā bhikkhusaṅghavaṇṇopi vuttanayena desitabbo, so na desito. Kiṃ so pāṇātipātā paṭiviratabhāvo bhikkhusaṅghassa na vijjatīti anuyogamapanento ‘‘na kevalañcā’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ sati kasmā na desitoti punānuyogaṃ pariharati ‘‘desanā panā’’tiādinā. Evanti evameva.
这里要表达的意趣是这样的:世尊想以“诸比丘,还有别的法……”这类话为开端,围绕那些不共于他人的佛陀功德,把上面的开示进一步展开,所以从一开始就以“若要称赞如来,应当说……”这样的话,完全依佛陀功德这一角度来开始说法,而不是也依比丘僧的功德来说。因为这是世尊说法的一贯做法:即使能够显示一味平等的说法,对某些内容仍然不取用。比如在色蕴部分讲二法等等,以及那些分别解说中,就没有取用心所依处。因为与其他依处性质不同,说法就会有差别。正如眼识等必定以眼等为依处,意识却不是必定以心所依处为依处,因为在无色界中没有心所依处。而依处二法等的说法,是依“依”与“所依”的关系来展开的,如“有色法是眼识的依处,有色法不是眼识的依处”等等。即使对于必定以心所依处为依的意识,若在二法等等中说“有色法是意识的依处”等,也不会有与之相应的所缘二法等等。因为不能说“有色法是意识的所缘,有色法不是意识的所缘”,由于不存在不是它所缘的色法。这样一来,依处二法与所缘二法就成了不同性质,说法就不会是一味的了,所以不说。同样,在摄心品中,因为没有按心生起的分别单独来说,所以在解答“无寻无伺”这一句时,不能只说“有伺”;在解答“有寻有伺”这一句时,虽然可以取用寻,却也没有举出来。否则就应该说“有寻”。同样,这里比丘僧的功德也没有被说到。虽然从字面上确实没有这样说,但从义理上,因为这段开示是顺着梵授天所赞叹的功德而展开的,所以应当加以阐明,因此说“然而从义理上……”等等。巴利
Etthāyamadhippāyo –‘‘atthi bhikkhave, aññe ca dhammā’’tiādinā anaññasādhāraṇe buddhaguṇe ārabbha upari desanaṃ vaḍḍhetukāmo bhagavā ādito paṭṭhāya ‘‘tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyyā’’tiādinā buddhaguṇavaseneva desanaṃ ārabhi, na bhikkhusaṅghaguṇavasenāpi. Esā hi bhagavato desanāya pakati, yadidaṃ ekaraseneva desanaṃ dassetuṃ labbhamānassāpi kassaci aggahaṇaṃ. Tathā hi rūpakaṇḍe dukādīsu, tanniddesesu ca hadayavatthu na gahitaṃ. Itaravatthūhi asamānagatikattā desanābhedo hotīti. Yathā hi cakkhuviññāṇādīni ekantato cakkhādinissayāni, na evaṃ manoviññāṇaṃ ekantena hadayavatthunissayaṃ āruppe tadabhāvato, nissayanissitavasena ca vatthudukādidesanā pavattā ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthu, atthi rūpaṃ na cakkhuviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā. Yampi manoviññāṇaṃ ekantato hadayavatthunissayaṃ, tassa vasena ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa vatthū’’tiādinā dukādīsu vuccamānesupi na tadanurūpā ārammaṇadukādayo sambhavanti. Na hi ‘‘atthi rūpaṃ manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇaṃ, atthi rūpaṃ na manoviññāṇassa ārammaṇa’’nti sakkā vattuṃ tadanārammaṇarūpassābhāvatoti vatthārammaṇadukā bhinnagatikā siyuṃ, tasmā na ekarasā desanā bhaveyyāti na vuttaṃ, tathā nikkhepakaṇḍe cittuppādavibhāgena visuṃ avuccamānattā avitakkaavicārapadavissajjane ‘‘vicāro cā’’ti vattuṃ na sakkāti āvitakkavicāramattapadavissajane labbhamānopi vitakko na uddhato. Aññathā hi ‘‘vitakko cā’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, evamevidhāpi bhikkhusaṅghaguṇo na desitoti. Kāmaṃ saddato evaṃ na desito, atthato pana brahmadattena bhāsitavaṇṇassa anusandhidassanavasena imissā desanāya āraddhattā dīpetuṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘atthaṃ panā’’tiādi.
这里应当这样说明:要详细展开说:“舍弃杀生、远离杀生之后,沙门乔达摩的弟子僧团已经放下了棍杖、放下了刀剑。”有人会问:难道法的功德不是由梵授王说过的吗?确实说过。不过,那些功德来自正等正觉者,又为圣僧团所拥有,而且法的功德是依法的威力而成就的,所以只要说明这两者的功德,也就等于说明了法的功德,因此没有单独把它提出来说。因为正是依靠正法的威力,世尊和比丘僧团才有能力舍弃杀生等。为了从实际情形说明避免伤害他人这一点,才说“放下棍杖和刀剑”这些话,所以接着又说“为了伤害他人”等等。“不回转”就是不转向、不往来。已经放下棍杖的人,就叫“已放下棍杖”;同样,已放下刀剑的人,就叫“已放下刀剑”。这里,中等身材的人四肘长的棍杖,就是“棍杖”;其余像锤子、剑之类的,就是“刀剑”。因此说“在这里”等等。因为它是用来伤害的,也就是恼害性的,所以这样说,是为了显示“用它来切割、伤害,所以叫刀剑”这个意思。为了把“为了伤害他人”等话里包含的意义展开说明,才说“然而,某些”等等。哪一种算是旧的呢?他的,或者他所依靠的棍杖,就是手杖。用来清洁牙齿的合适木片,是齿木,不是用来清洁牙齿的木片。也有“齿木刀”这种读法,意思是切割齿木的小刀。能完成剪指甲等小事情的小工具,就是小刀。这一段话是依比丘僧团来说的。因为前面已经说过“也应当依比丘僧团来说明”,所以这里也通过其中一部分来说明。巴利
Tatthāyaṃ dīpanā – ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato samaṇassa gotamassa sāvakasaṅgho nihitadaṇḍo nihitasattho’’ti vitthāretabbaṃ. Nanu dhammassāpi vaṇṇo brahmadattena bhāsitoti? Saccaṃ bhāsito, so pana sammāsambuddhapabhavattā, ariyasaṅghādhārattā ca dhammassa dhammānubhāvasiddhattā ca tesaṃ, tadubhayavaṇṇadīpaneneva dīpitoti visuṃ na uddhato. Saddhammānubhāveneva hi bhagavā, bhikkhusaṅgho ca pāṇātipātādippahānasamattho hoti. Atthāpattivasena paraviheṭhanassa parivajjitabhāvadīpanatthaṃ daṇḍasatthānaṃ nikkhepavacanti āha ‘‘parūpaghātatthāyā’’tiādi. Avattanatoti apavattanato, asañcaraṇato vā. Nikkhitto daṇḍo yenāti nikkhittadaṇḍo. Tathā nikkhittasattho. Majjhimassa purisassa catuhatthappamāṇo cettha daṇḍo. Tadavaseso muggarakhaggādayo satthaṃ, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādi. Viheṭhanabhāvatoti vihiṃ sanabhāvato, etena sasati hiṃsati anenāti satthanti atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Parūpaghātatthāyā’’tiādinā āpannamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kataro jiṇṇo, tassa, tenavā ālambito daṇḍo kattaradaṇḍo. Dantasodhanaṃ kātuṃ yoggaṃ kaṭṭhaṃ dantakaṭṭhaṃ, na pana dantasodhanakaṭṭhaṃ. ‘‘Dantakaṭṭhavāsiṃ vā’’tipi pāṭho, dantakaṭṭhacchedanakavāsinti attho. Khuddakaṃ nakhacchedanādikiccanipphādakaṃ satthaṃ pipphalikaṃ. Idaṃ pana bhikkhusaṅghādhīnavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhusaṅghavasenapi dīpetuṃ vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttatā tassāpi ekadesena dīpanatthaṃ vuttaṃ.
“惭”这个词有羞耻的意思,所以论师说“以厌恶恶行为相”。诸佛确实尊重法,而法又以自身为依止,因此这里说的是以自己为尊的惭,而不是以世间为尊的愧。另外,“有惭者”这个说法里,虽然只说了惭,其实愧也已经包含在内了,所以应该把“惭”看作惭和愧的同义词。因为如果没有对恶行的恐惧,就不可能有对恶行的厌恶;或者说,如果没有惭,就不可能有对恶行的恐惧。
那为什么说“具足悲悯、慈心状态”呢?难道“悲悯”这个词在“具足悲悯”等用法中,不也通于悲吗?确实如此。不过,这里的“悲悯”一词是在含有保护之义的情况下使用的,它可以通于慈和悲两者;而在这里,因为后面马上就要讲到悲,所以说它指的是慈。
“慈”就是柔软、爱恋,具有这种状态的就是有慈,具有这种心意的就是慈心,或者与慈相应的心为它所有,这种状态就是慈心状态——也就是说,慈本身作为根本因,通过这种相状,在个人身上生起智和言说。巴利
Lajjā-saddo hiriatthoti āha ‘‘pāpajigucchanalakkhaṇāyā’’ti. Dhammagarutāya hi buddhānaṃ, dhammassa ca attādhīnattā attādhipatibhūtā lajjāva vuttā, na lokādhipatibhūtaṃ ottappaṃ. Apica ‘‘lajjī’’ti ettha vuttalajjāya ottappampi vuttameva, tasmā lajjāti hiriottappānamadhivacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi pāpajigucchanaṃ pāputtāsanarahitaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ nāma atthīti. ‘‘Dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpanno’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu dayā-saddo ‘‘dayāpanno’’tiādīsu karuṇāyapi vattatīti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana dayāsaddo anurakkhaṇatthaṃ antonītaṃ katvā pavattamāno mettāya, karuṇāya ca pavattatīti idha mettāya pavattamāno vutto karuṇāya, vakkhamānattā. Midati sinehatīti mettā, sā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, mettaṃ cittaṃ etassāti mettacitto, mettāya sampayuttaṃ cittaṃ etassāti vā, tassa bhāvo mettacittatā mettā eva mūlabhūtena tannimittena puggalasmiṃ buddhiyā, saddassa ca pavattanato.
“有生命的存在”是指“有生命的种类”,这是已经说过的。如果这样理解,就应该做这样的词义解释:那些有生命、有存在的,就是“有生命的存在”。或者换个说法,因为具有命根,所以被称为“有生命”;又因为随各自的业而运转,所以被称为“存在”,意思就是这样的众生。“怜悯者”就是有悲悯心的人。然而,因为慈是悲的殊胜助缘,所以作为前一句含义的慈,就以助缘的身份被说成“正是以这种具有悲悯的状态”。通过这句话把握了悲之后,那些能成就远离杀生的法——惭、慈、悲——的具足,就依次由三个词句显示出来。因为想要去除他人的痛苦,本身就是利益和怜悯,所以这个含义必定应该被接受。从这段巴利文和它的注释,可以看出那种远离是依于众生而没有边际的。巴利
‘‘Pāṇabhūteti pāṇajāte’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sati pāṇo bhūto yesanti pāṇabhūtāti nibbacanaṃ kattabbaṃ. Atha vā jīvitindriyasamaṅgitāya pāṇasaṅkhāte taṃtaṃkammānurūpaṃ pavattanato bhūtanāmake satteti attho. Anukampakoti karuṇāyanako. Yasmā pana mettā karuṇāya visesapaccayo hoti, tasmā purimapadatthabhūtā mettā eva paccayabhāvena ‘‘tāya eva dayāpannatāyā’’ti vuttā. Iminā hi padena karuṇāya gahitāya yehi dhammehi pāṇātipātā paṭivirati sampajjati, tehi lajjāmettākaruṇāhi samaṅgibhāvo yathākkamaṃ padattayena dassito. Paradukkhāpanayanakāmatāpi hi hitānukampanamevāti avassaṃ ayamattho sampaṭicchitabboti. Imāya pāḷiyā, saṃvaṇṇanāya ca tassā viratiyā sattavasena apariyantataṃ dasseti.
“住”这个说法里,“vi”这个前缀表示切断,“hara”这个词表示引导;而这里的引导,指的就是运作、维持或保护,所以说“活动、维持、延续、保护”。“维持”和“延续”在这里只是同义的说法。因此应当这样理解:以刚才所说的那种状态,用另一种姿势切断在一种姿势中生起的苦,把它带走、让它继续运作,或者维持、保护这个身体。至于“iti vā hi”里的“hi”,只是让语句顺畅而已,并没有额外要表达的意思,所以说“或者,比丘们,是这样”。分别安立本身就是分别的意思,而它只有在存在多种不同含义时才能成立,多种不同含义会在后面说明,所以说“上面未给予……等待”。“如是”等话,是为了避免对文本过度执著,或者是为了指示方法。巴利
Viharatīti ettha vi-saddo vicchindanatthe, hara-saddo nayanatthe, nayanañca nāmetaṃ idha pavattanaṃ, yāpanaṃ, pālanaṃ vāti āha ‘‘iriyati yapeti yāpeti pāletī’’ti. Yapeti yāpetīti cettha pariyāyavacanaṃ. Tasmā yathāvuttappakāro hutvā ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā harati pavatteti, attabhāvaṃ vā yāpeti pāletīti attho veditabbo. Iti vā hīti ettha hi-saddo vacanasiliṭṭhatāmatte kassacipi tena jotitatthassa abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ vā bhikkhave’’ti. Visuṃ kappanameva attho vikappatthoti so anekabhinnesuyeva atthesu labbhati, anekabhedā ca atthā uparivakkhamānā evāti vuttaṃ ‘‘upari adinnā…pe… apekkhitvā’’ti. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi ganthagāravapariharaṇaṃ, nayadānaṃ vā.
现在,为了显示归纳的意思,说了“然而,在这里”等话。其中,“不杀”就是不伤害;“不令杀”就是不杀害。“在这里”就是指在杀生这件事上。“随喜”就是满意。“啊,真是稀有啊,贤者!”意思是确实绝对稀有。“只是行仪戒”就是仅仅指善人的行为规范。“只”这个词在这里是为了排除限定,借此显示:即使是具有根律仪等功德的人,也不能说出如来的赞叹。因为在这里,根律仪、资具受用戒等戒并未分别说明。“eva”这个词只是填补句子,或者以“只”这个词对所说道理作决定,以“eva”这个词能够说出“只是行仪戒”,这是结论。在如此等情形中。“诸比丘,凡夫这样说如来的赞叹时,也只能依此语之能力而说,不能说出其上的功德。”由于“我将为你们进一步宣说”这句话使意义得以成立,为了显示这已成立的意义,说了“上来的不共状态”等。然而,以“不仅如此”等语通过区分个人,显示了“凡夫”这一词只是举例。以“从此以后”等语避免对经典的轻慢。前面所说的词是前词,并非前词就是那样,也不是前词或非前词,那个词就是那样。巴利
Idāni sampiṇḍanatthaṃ dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panetthā’’tiādimāha. Tattha na hanatīti na hiṃsati. Na ghātetīti na vadhati. Tatthāti pāṇātipāte. Samanuññoti santuṭṭho. Aho vata reti bhonto ekaṃsato acchariyāti attho. Ācārasīlamattakanti sādhujanācāramattakaṃ, matta-saddo cettha visesanivattiattho, tena indriyasaṃvarādiguṇehipi lokiyaputhujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vattuṃ na sakkotīti dasseti. Tathā hi indriyasaṃvarapaccayaparibhogasīlāni idha na vibhattāni. Eva-saddo padapūraṇamattaṃ, matta-saddena vā yathāvuttatthassāvadhāraṇaṃ karoti, eva-saddena ācārasīlameva vattuṃ sakkotīti sanniṭṭhānaṃ. Evamīdisesu. ‘‘Iti vā hi bhikkhave puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyyā’’ti vacanasāmatthiyeneva taduttari guṇaṃ vattuṃ na sakkhissati. ‘‘Taṃ vo upari vakkhāmī’’ti ca atthassāpajjanato tathāpannamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upari asādhāraṇabhāva’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Na kevalañcā’’tiādinā puggalavivecanena pana ‘‘puthujjano’’ti idaṃ nidassanamattanti dassitaṃ. ‘‘Ito para’’ntiādinā ganthagāravaṃ pariharati. Pubbe vuttaṃ padaṃ pubbapadaṃ,na pubbapadaṃ tathā, na pubbaṃ vā apubbaṃ, tameva padaṃ tathā.
因为词根与词缀结合后,词根能表达特定的意义,所以“ādāna”(取)应当理解为“gahaṇa”(拿取),因此接着说“haraṇa”(带走)等等。“parassa”(他人的)是指从自己所有物来说属于他人的所有物;或者,凡是与自己不同的那个人,就叫做“para”(他人),那么他的所有物也可以称为“paranti”(他人的)。也有“parasaṃharaṇa”(带走他人之物)这样的读法,这里的“saṃ”有财富的意思,所以说的就是带走他人的财物。盗贼称为“thena”,他的状态就是“theyya”(偷盗),也就是盗贼的行为;“corikā”是盗贼的动作。为了说明这个含义,用“tattha”等话来解释。“tattha”是指在“ādinnādāna”(不与取)这个词中。在这里,“adinna”(未给予)只指他人所执持的东西,而不是像关于齿木的学处那样,指未被执持的或自己所有的东西,这是这里的意趣。“yattha paro”等文句,通过重复等方式与前后两处都有关联。因此应当这样连接:“那称为他人所执持之物,于那他人所执持之物中”。“yathākāmaṃ karoti”(随心所欲而行)就是“yathākāmakārī”(随心所欲者),他的状态就是“yathākāmakaritā”(随心所欲性),即那个。意思是:随自己的喜好而行。因为是自己所有物,所以依财物罚和王罚来说不应受罚;又依呵责和驱摈等来说,是没有过失的。用那个工具去取那他人所执持之物,所以叫“tadādāyaka”(取彼者),那就是方便;令它生起,所以叫“tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā”(取彼者方便之发起者)。偷盗的思本身就是“theyyacetanā”(盗心)。依微小和价值低等来说“hīna”(劣);依广大和价值高等来说“paṇīta”(胜)。为什么?因为所依的劣性是可以知道的,所以没有说。在劣的情况下,对劣质的所有物,其思是弱的;在胜的情况下,对优质的所有物,其思是强的,所以依照上面所说的理由,应当知道少过和多过。然而诸师把劣胜和微小广大分开来取,说:“在这里,对微小的他人所有物,是少过;对广大的,是多过。为什么?因为加行广大。如果所依的性质相等,那么依烦恼和加行的柔和性来说是少过,依猛烈性来说是多过。”这个说法也应当采用。巴利
Saddantarayogena dhātūnamatthavisesavācakattā ‘‘ādāna’’nti etassa gahaṇanti attho daṭṭhabbo, tenāha ‘‘haraṇa’’ntiādi. Parassāti attasantakato parabhūtassa santakassa, yo vā attato añño, so puggalo paro nāma, tassa idaṃ parantipi yujjati, ‘‘parasaṃharaṇa’’ntipi pāṭho, saṃ-saddo cettha dhanattho,parasantakaharaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Theno vuccati coro, tassa bhāvo theyyaṃ, corakammaṃ. Corikāti corassa kiriyā. Tadatthaṃ vivarati ‘‘tatthā’’tiādinā. Tatthāti ‘‘ādinnādāna’’nti pade. Parapariggahitameva ettha adinnaṃ, na pana dantapoṇasikkhāpade viya appaṭiggahitakaṃ attasantakanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Yattha paro’’tiādi ubhayattha sambandho āvuttiyādinayena. Tasmā ‘‘taṃ parapariggahitaṃ nāma, tasmiṃ parapariggahite’’ti ca yojetabbaṃ. Yathākāmaṃ karotīti yathākāmakārī, tassa bhāvo yathākāmakaritā, taṃ. Tathārucikaraṇaṃ āpajjantoti attho. Sasantakattā adaṇḍāraho dhanadaṇḍarājadaṇḍavasena. Anupavajjo ca codanāsāraṇādivasena. Taṃ parapariggahitaṃ ādiyati etenāti tadādāyako, sveva upakkamo, taṃ samuṭṭhāpetīti tadādāyakaupakkamasamuṭṭhāpikā. Theyyā eva cetanā theyyacetanā. Khuddakatāappagghatādivasena hīne. Mahantatāmahagghatādivasena paṇīte. Kasmā? Vatthuhīnatāyāti gamyamānattā na vuttaṃ, hīne, hīnaguṇānaṃ santake ca cetanā dubbalā, paṇīte, paṇītaguṇānaṃ santake ca balavatīti heṭṭhā vuttanayena tehi kāraṇehi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā veditabbā. Ācariyā pana hīnapaṇītato khuddakamahante visuṃ gahetvā ‘‘idhāpi khuddake parasantake appasāvajjaṃ, mahante mahāsāvajjaṃ. Kasmā? Payogamahantatāya. Vatthuguṇānaṃ pana samabhāve sati kilesānamupakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjaṃ, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjanti ayampi nayo yojetabbo’’ti vadanti.
这里说的“亲手取”等:亲手拿别人的东西,叫亲手取。叫别人去拿,叫命令取。站在内关税口,把东西扔到外关税口再拿,叫抛置取。用能达成目的的方式偷取,比如对人说“你能拿的时候就偷某件东西”,或者用命令的方式,或者随时用毁坏别人财物的手段,比如在盛油的瓮里塞入细布衣、皮革片之类再拿走,这叫固定取。靠念咒拿取,叫明术取。不用咒语,而是靠身业语业的作用,以类似神通的力量把别人的东西拉过来,叫神通取。神通取这种偷盗行为,只有在身业语业的作用存在时才发生,不存在时就不会发生。正如经文所说:“诸比丘,有神通者在神通范围内,无犯。”这些行为都是随相应情况而起的,这就是它们的关联。因为所有这些行为并非在一切偷盗情形中都能发生,所以说“随相应情况”。巴利
Sāhatthikādayoti ettha parasantakassa sahatthā gahaṇaṃ sāhatthiko. Aññe āṇāpetvā gahaṇaṃ āṇattiko. Antosuṅkaghāte ṭhitena bahisuṅkaghātaṃ pātetvā gahaṇaṃ nissaggiyo. ‘‘Asukaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ yadā sakkosi, tadā avaharā’’ti atthasādhakāvahāranipphādakena, āṇāpanena vā, yadā kadāci parasantakavināsakena sappitelakumbhiādīsu dukūlasāṭakacammakhaṇḍādipakkhipanādinā vā gahaṇaṃ thāvaro. Mantaparijappanena gahaṇaṃ vijjāmayo. Vinā mantena, kāyavacīpayogehi tādisaiddhiyogena parasantakassa ākaḍḍhanaṃ iddhimayo. Kāyavacīpayogesu hi santesuyeva iddhimayo avaharaṇapayogo hoti, no asantesu. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘anāpatti bhikkhave, iddhimassa iddhivisaye’’ti (pārā. 159), te ca kho payogā yathānurūpaṃ pavattāti sambandho. Tesaṃ pana payogānaṃ sabbesaṃ sabbattha avahāresu asambhavato ‘‘yathānurūpa’’nti vuttaṃ.
把窗门等破坏后,趁人不看见而拿走;或者用假秤、假筹码、假钱币等欺骗手段而拿走,这叫偷取。用暴力、用势力压制对方、恐吓对方,或者让对方心生恐惧而拿走,这叫强取。把别人的东西藏起来再拿走,这叫隐取。根据物品存放的位置事先盘算好再拿走,这叫计取。把草标记移换位置再拿走,这叫草取。这里用“iti”这个词,是以“等等”的含义,或者以举例的方式,应当知道其余四个五组也都被包括在内了。因为五个五组合起来共二十五种取走方式,全部都是不予取——不论是未经告知而取,还是圣者以告知的方式而取,意思都是“已给予”。说“取已给予之物”,这是从实际行为上显示清净的状态;说“期待已给予之物”,这是从内心意乐上说的,所以接着说“以心”等等。巴利
Sandhicchedādīni katvā adissamānena vā, kūṭamānakūṭakahāpaṇādīhi vañcanena vā, avaharaṇaṃ theyyāvahāro. Pasayha balasā abhibhuyya santajjetvā, bhayaṃ dassetvā vā avaharaṇaṃ pasayhāvahāro. Parabhaṇḍaṃ paṭicchādetvā avaharaṇaṃ paṭicchannāvahāro. Bhaṇḍokāsaparikappavasena parikappetvā avaharaṇaṃ parikappāvahāro. Kusaṃ saṅkāmetvā avaharaṇaṃ kusāvahāro.Iti-saddena cettha ādiatthena, nidassananayena vā avasesā cattāro pañcakāpi gahitāti veditabbaṃ. Pañcannañhi pañcakānaṃ samodhānabhūtā pañcavīsati avahārā sabbepi adinnādānameva, aviññattiyā vā ariyāya viññattiyā vā dinnamevāti attho. ‘‘Dinnādāyī’’ti idaṃ payogato parisuddhabhāvadassanaṃ. ‘‘Dinnapāṭikaṅkhī’’ti idaṃ pana āsayatoti āha ‘‘cittenā’’tiādi.
这里,“athena”中的“a”是替代“na”的,“a”也可以是一个独立的不变词,意思就是“na”。为了说明这一点,所以用了“na thenena”(不是以偷盗)这个说法。这是为了显示在巴利语中,根据句义分析所呈现的语法变化形式,与复合词的构成方式相似。不过,当按照上下文所确定的含义来辨析时,这里正是因为“athena”(非偷盗)本身而成就了清净,因为这一段讲的是不与取,所以注释者说“唯以非偷盗而成为清净者”,以此显示这是一种因果修饰的说法。所谓“attā”(我),就是“我慢所立足之处”,也就是“自体”。而对世尊来说,这是随顺世俗习惯的说法,就像对离贪的众生所用的称呼那样。或者,“attā”的意思是“带来轮回之苦”,所以说“以自体”。为了表明这三个词也都是表示状态特征的具格,所以说“以非偷盗者……成为……”。意思是:以非偷盗的自己,成为非偷盗的状态;以清净的自己,成为清净的状态而安住。巴利
Athenenāti ettha -saddo na-saddassa kāriyo, a-saddo vā eko nipāto na-saddatthoti dassetuṃ ‘‘na thenenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ dissamānavākyāvatthikavibhattiyantapaṭirūpakatākaraṇena saddhiṃ samāsadassanametaṃ. Pakaraṇādhigate pana atthe viveciyamāne idha athenatoyeva sucibhūtatā adhigamīyati adinnādānādhikārattāti āha ‘‘athenattāyeva sucibhūtenā’’ti tena hetālaṅkāravacanametanti dasseti. Āhito ahaṃmāno etthāti attā, attabhāvo. Bhagavato pana so ruḷhiyā yathā taṃ nicchandarāgesu sattavohāro. Adati vā saṃsāradukkhanti attā, tenāha ‘‘attabhāvenā’’ti. Padattayepi itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacananti ñāpetuṃ ‘‘athenaṃ…pe… katvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Athenena attanā athenattā hutvā sucibhūtena attanā sucibhūtattā hutvā viharatītipi attho.
“其余”指的是“舍断后远离”这一类说法。那在前文已经说过了。虽然这里没有用“学处”这个名称来讲远离,但在其他经文以及律、阿毗达摩中,按照通行的说法,远离和思因为是增上戒学的立足处,又是其中一部分,所以就应该叫“学处”,因此说“在第一条学处中”。这里虽然没有说“有惭耻心、具悲悯”,但依上下文和义理,应当知道已经说了。因为惭耻等是断除杀生的特别助缘,同样也是断除不予取的特别助缘。这个道理对后面几条也一样。或者,“以清净者”就是指具足惭、愧等,并且断除了无惭等,这已经说过了,所以没有说“有惭耻心、具悲悯”。巴利
Sesanti ‘‘pahāya paṭivirato’’ti evamādikaṃ. Tañhi pubbe vuttanayaṃ. Kiñcāpi nayidha sikkhāpadavohārena virati vuttā, ito aññesu pana suttapadesesu, vinayābhidhammesu ca pavattavohārena viratiyo, cetanā ca adhisīlasikkhānamadhiṭṭhānabhāvato, tesamaññatarakoṭṭhāsabhāvato ca ‘‘sikkhāpada’’ntveva vattabbāti āha ‘‘paṭhamasikkhāpade’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘lajjī dayāpanno’’ti na vuttaṃ, adhikāravasena, pana atthato ca vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi lajjādayo pāṇātipātappahānassa visesapaccayo, evaṃ adinnādānappahānassāpīti. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Atha vā sucibhūtenāti hirottappādisamannāgamanaṃ, ahirikādīnañca pahānaṃ vuttamevāti ‘‘lajjī dayāpanno’’ti na vuttaṃ.
这里“梵”这个词是指最胜的。不是梵的、低劣的人,或者非梵的、低劣的行为和生活方式,就是“非梵行”,也就是淫欲法。梵是最胜的、殊胜的行为,这里指远离淫欲。“不行”就是不去做,意思是远离那种行为,所以说“远离非梵行”。“远行者”:淫欲被称为“远”的行为,因为远离它而具有这个名称,所以叫“远行者”;或者远离淫欲法之后又去实践这种远离,也可以叫“远行者”。为了说明“淫欲”是双方被贪欲缠缚而生的相似意义,所以用“依贪欲缠缚之力”等话来说明。不善的、非法的方式就是“非法”,因此这样说。按照不加区分的通称,用“村落”一词就涵盖了住在村落里的人,所以说“村落居民”,也可以理解为“住在村落者的法”。这里因为说的是“远行者”,所以巴利语中不说“淫欲”而说“村落法”。巴利
Brahma-saddo idha seṭṭhavācako, abrahmānaṃ nihīnānaṃ, abrahmaṃ vā nihīnaṃ cariyaṃ vutti abrahmacariyaṃ, methunadhammo. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ ācāranti methunaviratiṃ. Na ācaratīti anācārī, [ārācārī (dī. ni. 1.8)] tadācāravirahitoti attho, tenāha ‘‘abrahmacariyato dūracārī’’ti. Dūro methunasaṅkhāto ācāro, so virahena yassatthīti dūracārī, methunadhammato vā dūro hutvā tabbiratiṃ ācaratīti dūracārītipi vaṭṭati. Mithunānaṃ rāgapariyuṭṭhānena sadisānaṃ ubhinnaṃ ayaṃ methunoti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘rāgapariyuṭṭhānavasenā’’tiādinā. Asataṃ dhammo ācāroti asaddhammo, tasmā. Abhedavohārena gāmasaddeneva gāmavāsino gahitāti vuttaṃ ‘‘gāmavāsīna’’nti, gāme vasataṃ dhammotipi yujjati. ‘‘Dūracārī’’ti cettha vacanato, pāḷiyaṃ vā ‘‘methunā’’ tveva avatvā ‘‘gāmadhammā’’tipi vuttattā
婆罗门,在这里,有些沙门或婆罗门自称是如法梵行者,确实不与女人发生两两交合,但他却接受女人为他涂油、按摩、沐浴、揉擦。他贪著于此,渴求于此,由此感到陶醉。婆罗门,这也是梵行的破损、漏洞、残缺、污点。婆罗门,这就叫做行不清净的梵行,被淫欲的结缚所系,不能从生、老、死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼中解脱,我说他不能从苦中解脱。巴利
‘‘Idha brāhmaṇa, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā sammā brahmacārī paṭijānamāno na heva kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, apica kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaparimaddananhāpanasambāhanaṃ sādiyati, so taṃ assādeti, taṃ nikāmeti, tena ca vittiṃ āpajjati, idampi kho brāhmaṇa brahmacariyassa khaṇḍampi chiddampi sabalampi kammāsampi, ayaṃ vuccati brāhmaṇa aparisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carati saṃyutto methunena saṃyogena, na parimuccati jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, na parimuccati dukkhasmāti vadāmi.
再者……甚至他也不接受对女人的涂油、按摩、沐浴、揉擦,可是他却和女人一起嬉笑、玩耍、嬉闹……甚至他也不和女人一起嬉笑、玩耍、嬉闹,可是他却用眼睛盯着女人的眼睛看……甚至他也不盯着女人的眼睛看,可是他却隔着墙壁或篱笆,听女人的笑声、说话声、歌声、哭声……甚至他也不隔着墙壁或篱笆听女人的笑声、说话声、歌声、哭声,可是他却回忆起以前和女人一起嬉笑、聊天、玩耍的事……甚至他也不回忆以前和女人一起嬉笑、聊天、玩耍的事,可是他却看见居士或居士的儿子享受、拥有、受用五种欲乐……甚至他也没看见居士或居士的儿子享受、拥有、受用五种欲乐,可是他却发愿投生到某类天众那里而修梵行:“依靠这样的戒,或者禁戒,或者苦行,或者梵行,我将会成为天人,或者某位天人。”他贪著于此,渴求于此,并由此陷入陶醉。婆罗门,这也是梵行的破损、裂口、有垢、斑点。婆罗门,这被称为行不清净的梵行,被淫欲的结缚所系,不能从生、老、死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼中解脱,我说他不能从苦中解脱。巴利
Puna caparaṃ…pe… napi mātugāmassa ucchādanaparimandananhāpanasambāhanaṃ sādiyati, apica kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ sañjagghati saṃkīḷati saṃkelāyati…pe… napi mātugāmena saddhiṃ sañjagghati saṃkīḷati saṃkelāyati, apica kho mātugāmassa cakkhunā cakkhuṃ upanijjhāyati pekkhati…pe… napi mātugāmassa cakkhunā cakkhuṃ upanijjhāyati pekkhati, apica kho mātugāmassa saddaṃ suṇāti tirokuṭṭaṃ vā tiropākāraṃ vā hasantiyā vā bhaṇantiyā vā gāyantiyā vā rodantiyā vā…pe… napi mātugāmassa saddaṃ suṇāti tirokuṭṭaṃ vā tiropākāraṃ vā hasantiyā vā bhaṇantiyā vā gāyantiyā vā rodantiyā vā, apica kho yānissa tāni pubbe mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasitalapitakīḷitāni, tāni anussarati…pe… napi yānissa tāni pubbe mātugāmena saddhiṃ hasitalapitakīḷitāni, tāni anussarati, apica kho passati gahapatiṃ vā gahapatiputtaṃ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṃ samaṅgibhūtaṃ paricārayamānaṃ…pe… napi passati gahapatiṃ vā gahapatiputtaṃ vā pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitaṃ samaṅgibhūtaṃ paricārayamānaṃ, apica kho aññataraṃ devanikāyaṃ paṇidhāya brahmacariyaṃ carati ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena vā vatena vā tapena vā brahmacariyena vā devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti. So taṃ assādeti, taṃ nikāmeti, tena ca vittiṃ āpajjati. Idampi kho brāhmaṇa brahmacariyassa khaṇḍampi chiddampi sabalampi kammāsampi. Ayaṃ vuccati brāhmaṇa, aparisuddhaṃ brahmacariyaṃ carati saṃyutto methunena saṃyogena, na parimuccati jātiyā jarāya maraṇena sokehi paridevehi dukkhehi domanassehi upāyāsehi, na parimuccati dukkhasmāti vadāmī’’ti (a. ni. 7.50) –
《增支部·七集》的《贾努索尼经》里讲到的七种淫欲结合,也应该看成这里已经显示了远离。在这里,以亲近非法为目的、通过身门生起、能促成行道与邪行的思,就是非梵行。而在五学处的次第中,说到欲邪行时,应当把违犯不可行处的思,按照前面所说的那样,归入欲邪行。巴利
Aṅguttarāgame sattakanipāte jāṇusoṇisutte āgatā sattavidhamethunasaṃyogāpi paṭivirati dassitāti daṭṭhabbā. Idhāpi asaddhammasevanādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā maggenamaggapaṭipattisamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā abrahmacariyaṃ . Pañcasikkhāpadakkame micchācāre pana agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā yathāvuttā kāmesu micchācāroti yojetabbaṃ.
在这里,所谓“不可行处”,对男子来说,首先是母守护等十种女人,以及财买等十种女人,共二十种女人。对女人来说,则是财买等十种,加上有守护、有惩罚等十二种之外的其他男子。不过,有人主张“欲邪行有四种:非时、非处、非肢、非法”,他们只是就邪行本身作了一种臆测而已。因为发生在可行处范围内的邪行,根本不可能成为欲邪行。而这种邪行无论哪一种,在对方没有德行时罪过较轻,在对方有德行时罪过较重。即使对方没有德行,若是强行侵犯,罪过也重;若双方意愿相同,罪过轻;即使意愿相同,若烦恼和加行都轻微,罪过轻;若猛烈,则罪过重——应当这样理解。巴利
Tattha agamanīyaṭṭhānaṃ nāma purisānaṃ tāva māturakkhitādayo dasa, dhanakkītādayo dasāti vīsati itthiyo. Itthīsu pana dasannaṃ dhanakkītādīnaṃ, sārakkhasaparidaṇḍānañca vasena dvādasannaṃ aññe purisā. Ye paneke vadanti ‘‘cattāro kāmesu micchācārā akālo, adeso, anaṅgo, adhammo cā’’ti, te vippaṭipattimattaṃ pati parikappetvā vadanti. Na hi sāgamanīyaṭṭhāne pavattā vippaṭipatti micchācāro nāma sambhavati. Sā panesā duvidhāpi vippaṭipatti guṇavirahite appasāvajjā, guṇasampanne mahāsāvajjā. Guṇarahitepi ca abhibhavitvā vippaṭipatti mahāsāvajjā, ubhinnaṃ samānacchandabhāve appasāvajjā, samānacchandabhāvepi kilesānaṃ, upakkamānañca mudutāya appasāvajjā, tibbatāya mahāsāvajjāti veditabbaṃ.
关于那个非梵行,有两个构成条件:想与他人行淫的心,以及以正道或邪道而行。而欲邪行则有四个构成条件:不可行淫的对象、对那对象生起行淫之心、实际行淫的行为、以及容忍以正道或邪道而行。由于注疏中说“四个条件”,有些人便主张:在被强迫侵犯时,即使容忍了以正道或邪道而行,但因为先前没有生起行淫的意图和加行,被强迫的人不构成欲邪行。可是,只要有行淫之心而缺乏加行,这并不能作为判定标准,因为女性通常没有行淫的加行,通常只有男子才有行淫的加行。照这种说法就会得出:女子先起了行淫之心,然后坐着或躺着,也不构成欲邪行。因此,这是以男子为主来说“四个条件”的。否则,有些人就会说:当女性主动做男子的行为时,由于男子也缺乏行淫的加行,所以也不构成欲邪行。巴利
Tassa pana abrahmacariyassa dve sambhārā sevetukāmatācittaṃ, maggenamaggapaṭipattīti. Micchācārassa pana cattāro sambhārā agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ, sevanāpayogo, maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsananti evaṃ aṭṭhakathāsu ‘‘cattāro sambhārā’’ti (dha. sa. akusalakammapathakathā; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.1.89; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.109-111) vuttattā abhibhavitvā vītikkamane maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsane satipi purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato abhibhuyyamānassa micchācāro na hotīti vadanti keci. Sevanacitte sati payogābhāvo na pamāṇaṃ itthiyā sevanapayogassa yebhuyyena abhāvato, purisasseva yebhuyyena sevanapayogo hotīti itthiyā puretaraṃ sevanacittaṃ upaṭṭhapetvā nisinnāya [nipannāya (dha. sa. anuṭī. kammakathāvaṇṇanā)] micchācāro na siyāti āpajjati. Tasmā purisassa vasena ukkaṃsato ‘‘cattāro sambhārā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññathā hi itthiyā purisakiccakaraṇakāle purisassāpi sevanāpayogābhāvato micchācāro na siyāti vadanti eke.
关于这一点,这里的定论是:如果是由自己主动欢喜而做的,那么仅仅因为从事了行淫的行为,就成立行淫之心,因此有“不可行境”“行淫行为”“以道或非道方式的接受”这三项;如果是被强力逼迫而做的,因为先前没有生起行淫的意图和加行,所以有“不可行境”、对此的“行淫心”“以道或非道方式的接受”这三项。如果按无所遗漏的归纳方式,则如前所说有四项,这也只是某些人的主张,应当审察之后再做取舍——《阿毗达摩小注》(《法集论小注·不善业道解说》)中是这样说的。一种加行只是亲手所做。巴利
Idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – attano ruciyā pavattitassa sevanāpayogeneva sevanacittatāsiddhito agamanīyavatthu, sevanāpayogo, maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsananti tayo, balakkārena pavattitassa purimuppannasevanābhisandhipayogābhāvato agamanīyavatthu, tasmiṃ sevanacittaṃ , maggenamaggapaṭipattiadhivāsananti tayo, anavasesaggahaṇena pana vuttanayena cattāroti, tampi keciyeva vadanti, vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbanti abhidhammānuṭīkāyaṃ (dha. sa. anuṭī. akusalakammapathakathāvaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Eko payogo sāhatthikova.
9 “妄语”一词是第三格词尾,或是第二格的不变词,是“邪妄”的同义词,以行动为重点,所以说“以欺骗为先导”等等。“先做”就是先导,谁有欺骗的先导,就是那样的人。为了说明他已经达到业道,所以说“破坏利益”,意思是破坏他人的利益。不过,妄语也会因为不愿把自己拥有的东西给别人,或者出于开玩笑的意图而发生。以言语造作的、以精勤为根本的行动,是语表业。同样,以身造作的,是身表业。欺骗的意图存在于前分刹那和当下刹那。正如所说:“他事先想‘我要说妄语’,正在说的时候想‘我正在说妄语’”,这两者正是构成要素。而所说的“说了之后他想‘我已经说了妄语’”,则有也可以,没有也可以,这并不是关键。“他的”指欺骗者的,与“思”相连。“以此说违实之语”所以是“欺骗”,那本身就是身语表业,令它生起,所以是这样。以这个称为妄语的身语表业,或者说、告知、令生起称为妄语的身语表业,所以说“妄语”的意思。当说到“语”时,欺骗心、由它而生的精勤、他人对那层意义的了知,这三种特征就已经显示出来了。巴利
9.Musāti tatiyanto, dutiyanto vā nipāto micchāpariyāyo, kiriyāpadhānoti āha ‘‘visaṃvādanapurekkhārassā’’tiādi. Pure karaṇaṃ purekkhāro, visaṃvādanassa purekkhāro yassāti tathā, tassa kammapathappattameva dassetuṃ ‘‘atthabhañjanako’’ti vuttaṃ, parassa hitavināsakoti attho. Musāvādo pana sasantakassa adātukāmatāya, hasādhippāyena ca bhavati. Vacasā katā vāyāmappadhānā kiriyā vacīpayogo. Tathā kāyena katā kāyapayogo. Visaṃvādanādhippāyo pubbabhāgakkhaṇe, taṅkhaṇe ca. Vuttañhi ‘‘pubbevassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇissa’nti, bhaṇantassa hoti ‘musā bhaṇāmī’ti’’ (pārā. 200; pāci. 4) etadeva hi dvayaṃ aṅgabhūtaṃ. Itaraṃ ‘‘bhaṇitassa hoti ‘musā mayā bhaṇita’nti’’ (pārā. 200; pāci. 4) vuttaṃ pana hotu vā, mā vā, akāraṇametaṃ. Assāti visaṃvādakassa. ‘‘Cetanā’’ti etena sambandho. Visaṃ vādeti etenāti visaṃvādanaṃ, tadeva kāyavacīpayogo, taṃ samuṭṭhāpetīti tathā, iminā musāsaṅkhātena kāyavacīpayogena, musāsaṅkhātaṃ vā kāyavacīpayogaṃ vadati viññāpeti, samuṭṭhāpeti vā etenāti musāvādoti atthamāha. ‘‘Vādo’’ti vutte visaṃvādanacittaṃ, tajjo vāyāmo, parassa tadatthavijānananti lakkhaṇattayaṃ vibhāvitameva hoti.
“不实之事”这个特相之所以没有讲清楚,是因为“musā”这个词是表示被称为行为的动作。所以在这里,由于这种解释方式没有把特相说周全,而“musā”这个词又可能表示“应被欺骗的对象”,为了完整地展示妄语的特相,才说了“另一种方式”等话。从特相来说,就是从自性来说。“如是”就是以那种方式。“令身表、语表生起”就是令表业生起。不过在这种解释方式中,应当这样理解“妄语”的词源:以此说出、告知不实之事,所以叫妄语。从“他破坏其利益”等话开始,是就达到业道者依事而说明罪轻或罪重。被破坏利益的人,如果功德小,罪就轻;如果功德大,罪就重,就像不与取中也可以依功德来套用这个道理。依烦恼的软弱或强烈,也能得到罪轻或罪重的分别。巴利
‘‘Atathaṃ vatthu’’nti lakkhaṇaṃ pana avibhāvitameva musā-saddassa payogasaṅkhātakiriyāvācakattā. Tasmā idha naye lakkhaṇassa abyāpitatāya, musā-saddassa ca visaṃvāditabbatthavācakatāsambhavato paripuṇṇaṃ katvā musāvādalakkhaṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aparo nayo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Lakkhaṇatoti sabhāvato. Tathāti tena tathākārena. Kāyavacīviññattiyo samuṭṭhāpetīti viññattisamuṭṭhāpikā. Imasmiṃ pana naye musā vatthu vadīyati vuccati etenāti musāvādoti nibbacanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘So yamattha’’ntiādinā kammapathappattassa vatthuvasena appasāvajjamahāsāvajjabhāvamāha. Yassa atthaṃ bhañjati, tassa appaguṇatāya appasāvajjo , mahāguṇatāya mahāsāvajjoti adinnādāne viya guṇavasenāpi yojetabbaṃ. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenāpi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā labbhatiyeva.
“再者”等语,是在说明:即便是通常所说的妄语,也有轻罪和重罪的区别。“因为不愿给出自己的财物”以及“出于嬉笑的意图”,这些都是就通常的妄语来说的。在这两种情况下,同样都是以欺骗为前提才算妄语,并不是只要说了话就算。不过,在那种情况下,思心所的力量不强,所以说是轻罪。“如河”就是像河流一样。为了补足所缺之义而说的话,叫作填补语,意思就是说得超出了事实。巴利
‘‘Apicā’’tiādinā musāvādasāmaññassāpi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjabhāvaṃ dasseti. Attano santakaṃ adātukāmatāyāti, hi hasādhippāyenāti ca musāvādasāmaññato vuttaṃ. Ubhayatthāpi ca visaṃvādanapurekkhāreneva musāvādo, na pana vacanamattena. Tattha pana cetanā balavatī na hotīti appasāvajjatā vuttā. Nadī maññeti nadī viya. Appatāya ūnassa atthassa pūraṇavasena pavattā kathā pūraṇakathā, bahutarabhāvena vuttakathāti vuttaṃ hoti.
以这种方式生起的,就是与那欺骗相随顺的,意思是与那种欺骗相符合。“精勤”是以精勤为首要而说的加行。因为这里所指的是以精进为根本的身业和语业,并不是仅仅精勤本身。即使是以欺骗的意图做了加行,但如果对方没有理解那个意思,欺骗就不能成立,所以对方理解那个意思也被说成是一个组成部分。不过有些人说“说不真实的话、欺骗的心、对方理解那个意思”是三个组成部分。有人可能会认为只有亲手去做才算亲手所作,为了阻止这种想法,就说了“他以身或……”等话。如果以那个动作,对方知道了那个意思,这是指当下就知道,或者因为迟钝而思考之后后来才知道,是针对这种情况说的。“此人”指欺骗者。正是在使动作生起的思心所那个刹那——也就是使身业、语业生起的思心所生起的那个刹那。被妄语业所系缚,就是与称为欺骗思的妄语业相连接,或者说是被它粘住的意思。即使对方因为迟钝而思考之后很久才知道那个意思,由于是由决定思所产生的,所以就在那个刹那即被系缚,这就是所说的意思。巴利
Tenākārena jāto tajjo, tassa visaṃvādanassa anurūpoti attho. Vāyāmoti vāyāmasīsena payogamāha. Vīriyappadhānā hi kāyikavācasikakiriyā idha adhippetā, na vāyāmamattaṃ. Visaṃvādanādhippāyena payoge katepi aparena tasmiṃ atthe aviññāte visaṃvādanassa asijjhanato parassa tadatthavijānanampi ekasambhārabhāvena vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘abhūtavacanaṃ, visaṃvādanacittaṃ, parassa tadatthavijānana’’nti tayo sambhāre vadanti. Kāyikova sāhatthikoti koci maññeyyāti taṃ nivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘so kāyena vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tāya ce kiriyāya paro tamatthaṃ jānātīti taṅkhaṇe vā dandhatāya vicāretvā pacchā vā jānanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ayanti visaṃvādako. Kiriyasamuṭṭhāpikacetanākkhaṇeyevāti kāyikavācasikakiriyasamuṭṭhāpikāya cetanāya pavattakkhaṇe eva. Musāvādakammunā bajjhatīti visaṃvādanacetanāsaṅkhātena musāvādakammunā sambandhīyati, allīyatīti vā attho. Sacepi dandhatāya vicāretvā pacchā cirenāpi paro tadatthaṃ jānāti, sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāya nibbattattā taṅkhaṇeyeva bajjhatīti vuttaṃ hoti.
“单一的努力,或者是亲手努力”这句话,是依照古注中传承下来的方式说的。在这里,结集注的作者为了展示自己见解上的分歧,才说了“然而因为……”等话。其中,通过“如同……如此……”这一表述说明:就像亲手努力一样,教令等也应被纳入;不纳入是没有理由的,因为教令等和亲手努力一样,都具有欺骗他人的性质。“这是他的……即使教令时也……”是纳入教令的理由;“将叶片……即使放下时也……”是纳入放下的理由;“这个意义……即使放置时也……”是纳入放置的理由。因为“欺骗”一词在所有这些情况下都有关联。“写下叶片”是指在棕榈叶等叶片上用文字书写;或者“叶片”一词是处格,用作宾格。因此所说的“在墙外等处”,意思是在叶片上用笔写下文字。“应审察后采纳”,是因为自己的见解完全薄弱,出于不自我夸耀而说的。这里还有什么需要讨论的理由呢?因为自己已经审察过了。巴利
‘‘Eko payogo sāhatthikovā’’ti idaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathāsu āgatanayena vuttanti idha saṅgahaṭṭhakathāya saṅgahakārassa attano matibhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘yathā…pe… tathā’’ti etena sāhatthiko viya āṇattikādayopi gahetabbā, aggahaṇe kāraṇaṃ natthi parassa visaṃvādanabhāvena tassadisattāti dasseti , ‘‘idamassa…pe… āṇāpentopī’’ti āṇattikassa gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ, ‘‘paṇṇaṃ…pe… nissajjantopī’’ti nissaggiyassa, ‘‘ayamattho…pe… ṭhapentopī’’ti thāvarassa. Yasmā visaṃvādetīti sabbattha sambandho. Paṇṇaṃ likhitvāti tālādīnaṃ paṇṇaṃ akkharena likhitvā, paṇṇanti vā bhummatthe upayogavacanaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tirokuṭṭādīsū’’ti [kuḍḍādīsu (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8)] paṇṇe akkharaṃ lekhaniyā likhitvāti attho. Vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbāti attanomatiyā sabbadubbalattā anattukkaṃsanena vuttaṃ. Kiñhettha vicāretabbakāraṇaṃ atthi sayameva vicāritattā.
“谛”是指真实语。以真实语来说,后一句真实语是依前一句真实语而说的。从缘的角度,针对界与词尾的省略,才说“连结”。而通达声音的人则说——巴利
Saccanti vacīsaccaṃ, saccena saccanti purimena vacīsaccena pacchimaṃ vacīsaccaṃ. Paccayavasena dhātupadantalopaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sandahatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Saddavidū pana –
前缀vi-用在“做”这个词上,前缀abhi-则用在“说”这个词上。
以词前接“ni”表示“放置”之义,以词前接“ā”表示“上升、安放”之义,二者结合于“连接”等语境中。巴利
‘‘Vipubbo dhā karotyatthe, abhipubbo tu bhāsane; Nyāsaṃpubbo yathāyogaṃ, nyāsāropanasandhisū’’ti. –
他们把“dhā”这个音本身读作“结合”的意思。所以应该这样理解:这是从引申义的角度说“连接”。接着用“不间隔”等话说明这个意图。“凡确实……”等话是对这一点的解释。“因为被隔开”是指被间隔、被分隔。“不是那样”是指不是那种说法的性质。即使为了活命,更何况为了别的理由——这里的“api”一词是表示设想的意思。巴利
Dhā-saddameva ghaṭanatthe paṭhanti. Tasmā pariyāyavasena ‘‘sandahatī’’ti vuttantipi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tadadhippāyaṃ dasseti ‘‘na antarantarā’’tiādinā. ‘‘Yo hī’’tiādi tabbivaraṇaṃ. Antaritattāti antarā paricchinnattā. Na tādisoti na evaṃvadanasabhāvo. Jīvitahetupi, pageva aññahetūti api-saddo sambhāvanattho.
“以真实、坚固”等说法中,就像《中部》1.19那样,theta这个词是thira(坚固)的同义词;而坚固性应当结合“说真实语”这一主题,从话语的角度来理解,所以说“意思是坚固之语”。因为“存在的状态”就是theto,即坚固性,由于与它相应的缘故,这里的人被称为theto(坚固者)。Haliddī是一种金色块茎所成的姜黄类植物。Thusa是指谷物的外皮,也就是谷壳。Kumbhaṇḍa是一种果实硕大、能做成汤的藤类植物。Indakhīlo是指深深埋入地下的门柱。就像姜黄的染色等,因为本性不稳定,所以不坚固;同样,如果一个人的话语不坚固,他就是“不坚固之语”。就像石头上刻的字等,因为本性稳固,所以坚固;同样,如果一个人的话语坚固,他就是“坚固之语”。应当这样搭配:姜黄的染色等是“不坚固之语”的比喻。这些就是对话语的比喻。巴利
‘‘Saccato thetato’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.19) viya theta-saddo thirapariyāyo, thirabhāvo ca saccavāditādhikārattā kathāvasena veditabboti āha ‘‘thirakathoti attho’’ti. Thitassa bhāvoti hi theto, thirabhāvo, tena yuttattā puggalo idha theto nāma. Haliddīti suvaṇṇavaṇṇakandanipphattako gacchaviseso. Thuso nāma dhaññattaco, dhaññapalāso ca. Kumbhaṇḍanti mahāphalo sūpasampādako latāviseso. Indakhīlo nāma gambhīranemo esikāthambho. Yathā haliddirāgādayo anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya na ṭhitā, evaṃ na ṭhitā kathā etassāti naṭhitakatho [nathirakatho (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8)] yathā pāsāṇalekhādayo avaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya ṭhitā, evaṃ ṭhitā kathā etassāti ṭhitakathoti [thirakatho (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8)] haliddirāgādayo yathā kathāya upamāyo honti, evaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Kathāya hi etā upamāyoti.
有人问:既然“信”是依凭、是趣向、是运转的所在,那它就叫“所依凭者”,所以论师说“应被依凭者”。所谓“应被依凭者”,就是应当趣向、应当运转的“信”,加上“ya”这个字母,就成了“pattiyāyitabbā”这个词。这个“应被依凭者”属于那个人,所以说“应被信靠者”。为了通过反面和正面两种方式说明这个意思,论师说了“有一类人……”等话。之所以这样说,是因为欺骗的缘故,所以应当被说成是“不可信靠的”;而在另一种情况下,则因为不欺骗,所以是可信靠的,这就是论师的意图。用“世间”这个词,是为了说明在“世间的”这一表达中,第六格是表示动作的对象。巴利
Pattisaṅkhātā saddhā ayati pavattati etthāti paccayikoti āha ‘‘pattiyāyitabbako’’ti. Pattiyā ayitabbā pavattetabbāti pattiyāyitabbā ya-kārāgamena, vācā. Sā etassāti pattiyāyitabbako, tenāha ‘‘saddhāyitabbako’’ti. Tadevatthaṃ byatirekena, anvayena ca dassetuṃ ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vattabbataṃ āpajjati visaṃvādanato. Itarapakkhe ca avisaṃvādanatoti adhippāyo. ‘‘Loka’’nti etena ‘‘lokassā’’ti ettha kammatthe chaṭṭhīti dasseti.
虽然在别处的《阿毗达摩注》中(如《法集论注·不善业道论》《中部》第89经等),各自有不同的经文顺序,但这里按照注释的次序,要把三个词合在一起统一解释,所以说了“以何种语……”等话,其中“以何种语而行”是连接关系。所谓“对他人的”,就是为了破坏那个人而说出那话,指的是那个人。而“与”字在这里用得不对,它应当用在两个业之上,以显示它们是并列组合的关系。“空无”是指因为缺乏所爱而空虚无有。“那”是指前面所说的、以声音为本质的语,通过这个也显示了“所爱”和“空无”合起来就是“所爱空无”,即“以这个对所爱空无而行”,按“离间语”的词源解释就是“离间”,或者“离间”就是“破坏”,把和合的众生破坏成分裂的、各自为部分的状态,这就是它的含义。巴利
Satipi paccekaṃ pāṭhakkame aññāsu abhidhammaṭṭhakathā dīsu (dha. sa. aṭṭha. akusalakammapathakathā; ma. ni. 1.89) saṃvaṇṇanākkamena tiṇṇampi padānaṃ ekatthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘yāya vācāyā’’tiādimāha, yāya vācāya karotīti sambandho. Parassāti yaṃ bhindituṃ taṃ vācaṃ bhāsati, tassa. Ca-saddo aṭṭhānapayutto, so dvandagabbhabhāvaṃ jotetuṃ kammadvaye payujjitabbo. Suññabhāvanti piyavirahitatāya rittabhāvaṃ. Sāti yathāvuttā saddasabhāvā vācā, etena piyañca suññañca piyasuññaṃ, taṃ karoti etāyāti pisuṇā niruttinayenāti vacanatthaṃ dasseti, pisatīti vā pisuṇā, samagge satte avayavabhūte vaggabhinne karotīti attho.
粗恶:因为缺少柔和,所以粗糙。说它“本身也粗恶”,是因为它从忧恼中生起,本性就是生硬的。由于本质粗恶,所以并不悦耳;由于义理有失,所以不能打动人心。在这里,第一种解释方式中,应当理解“粗恶语”这个说法,是依据“作粗恶”的词义,或者依据果报的转用而来。第二种解释方式中,则应看到“粗恶语”这个说法,是因为像刺入要害一样地发出,极端坚硬,依世俗惯用语而从本性得名,或者依原因的转用而来。巴利
Pharusanti sinehābhāvena lūkhaṃ. Sayampi pharusāti domanassasamuṭṭhitattā sabhāvena sayampi kakkasā. Pharusasabhāvato neva kaṇṇasukhā. Atthavipannatāya na hadayaṅgamā. Ettha pana paṭhamanaye pharusaṃ karotīti vacanatthena vā phalūpacārena vā vācāya pharusasaddappavatti veditabbā. Dutiyanaye mammacchedavasena pavattiyā ekantaniṭṭhuratāya ruḷhisaddavasena sabhāvena, kāraṇūpacārena vā vācāya pharusasaddappavatti daṭṭhabbā.
“Yena”指的是被称为“谷壳”的那种没有意义的话。“Sampha”这个词:所说的“sa”是乐和利益的意思,“phalati”是打击、破坏、灭除的意思,由此得名“sampha”,指对自己和他人都不带来任何利益的任何东西,所以说“没有意义”。这是为了说明“samphappalāpa(绮语)”这个词的含义:用这个来说无意义的话,所以叫绮语。巴利
Yenāti palāpasaṅkhātena niratthakavacanena. Samphanti ‘‘sa’’nti vuttaṃ sukhaṃ, hitañca phalati paharati vināsetīti atthena ‘‘sampha’’nti laddhanāmaṃ attano, paresañca anupakārakaṃ yaṃ kiñci atthaṃ, tenāha ‘‘niratthaka’’nti, iminā samphaṃ palapati etenāti samphappalāpoti vacanatthaṃ dasseti.
“Tesaṃ”等说法,是通过果报的名称来说明思中生起离间语等言语。“Sā eva”等说法,则是阐明思生起分别的因。其中,由于“pahāya”等词紧接出现,而且它本身理应被断除,所以合理可知所指的就是这个意思。巴利
‘‘Tesa’’ntiādinā cetanāya phalavohārena pisuṇādisaddappavatti vuttā. ‘‘Sā evā’’tiādinā pana cetanāya pavattiparikappanāya hetuṃ vibhāveti. Tattha ‘‘pahāyā’’tiādivacanasannidhānato tassāyeva ca pahātabbatā yuttito adhippetāti attho.
其中,“tattha”是指在那些离间语等当中。“saṃkiliṭṭhacittassa”是指被贪或嗔所逼迫、折磨、染污的心,这里说的就是“dūsitacittassa”,并与“思”相关联。意思是:他为了自己所喜爱的人,和某人一起说离间的话。之所以称为“离间思即离间语”,是因为人们用这种思来说离间的话。在复合词的解释中,应按主要意义来理解;在分解解释中,则应按借代义来看待。对谁做离间,如果对方原本没有分裂,罪过较轻;如果已经分裂,罪过较重。同样,也应结合烦恼的弱强差别来理解。巴利
Tatthāti tāsu pisuṇavācādīsu. Saṃkiliṭṭhacittassāti lobhena, dosena vā vibādhitacittassa, upatāpitacittassa vā, dūsitacittassāti vuttaṃ hoti, ‘‘cetanā’’ti etena sambandho. Yena saha paresaṃ bhedāya vadati, tassa attano piyakamyatāyāti attho. Cetanā pisuṇavācā nāma pisuṇaṃ vadanti etāyāti katvā. Samāsavisaye hi mukhyavasena attho gahetabbo, byāsavisaye upacāravasenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yassa yato bhedaṃ karoti, tesu abhinnesu appasāvajjaṃ, bhinnesu mahāsāvajjaṃ. Tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvisesesupi yojetabbaṃ.
如果对某人说离间的话,不管那个人有没有因此分裂,只要让对方听懂了这个意思,就算犯戒,所以说“tassa tadatthavijānana”(让对方了解这个意思)。把“以分裂为目的”和“为自己所喜爱”这两种情况分别加进去,就有四种。不过,业道真正成立,只有在对方已经分裂的时候。为了说明这些话是针对那些即使不在眼前、却在自己心里盘算的人而说的,所以说了“yesaṃ”等句子。“Ito”是指在这一点上,应该理解为:这里所说的那些人,是从谁那里听来的。巴利
Yassa pesuññaṃ upasaṃharati, so bhijjatu vā, mā vā, tassa tadatthaviññāpanameva pamāṇanti āha ‘‘tassa tadatthavijānana’’nti. Bhedapurekkhāratāpiyakamyatānamekekapakkhipanena cattāro. Kammapathappatti pana bhinne eva. Imesanti aniyamatāya parammukhāpavattānampi attano buddhiyaṃ parivattamāne sandhāya vuttanti dassetuṃ ‘‘yesa’’ntiādimāha. Itoti idha padese, vuttānaṃ yesaṃ santike sutanti yojetabbaṃ.
“Dvinnaṃ”是举例的说法,因为也可以统摄许多人之间的和合。“Mittānaṃ”等词中,“sandhāna”(和合)是所做之事,以此显示巴利文中“bhinnānaṃ”一词是业格的性质。所谓做和合之事,就是做与他们相适合的事,所以说“anukattā”(随顺者)。“Anuppadātā”指给予随助者,或者以随顺的方式给予者。那么,是给谁随助和随顺呢?因为说了“sahitānaṃ”(和合者),所以知道是给和合,因此说“sandhānānuppadātā”(和合的随助给予者)。又因为以随助和随顺的方式给予、接受或守护和合,使它坚固,所以说“daḷhīkammaṃ kattā”(做坚固之事者)。“Ārāma”指在其中喜乐,也就是乐园。和合是应当喜乐之处,所以依其所执持而说其修饰语。也有人读作“samagge”(在和合者中),但这不合理,因为与“yattha”等语相矛盾。不过,即使没有这个形式,这个意思也能成立,所以说“这里的意思就是这样”:samaggesu 指在和合的众人之中,因此说“te pahāyā”等。通过“nandatī”显示,它也有自然具有的作格或业格意义。以自然具有的意义,“见已闻已”等语就非常合理。以和合为工具,所以叫“samaggakaraṇī”(做和合者)。那就是言语,说了它,所以用“yā vācā”等来说明。以那言语做和合。像“僧团和合是乐,和合者之苦行是乐”等(法句经194),这正是显示和合的利益,所以说“唯是显示和合之德”。其余者,就是与此相反的离间语。巴利
‘‘Dvinna’’nti nidassanavacanaṃ bahūnampi sandhānato. ‘‘Mittāna’’ntiādi ‘‘sandhāna’’nti ettha kammaṃ, tena pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘bhinnāna’’nti etassa kammabhāvaṃ dasseti. Sandhānakaraṇañca nāma tesamanurūpakaraṇamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘anukattā’’ti. Anuppadātāti anubalappadātā, anuvattanavasena vā padātā. Kassa pana anubalappadānaṃ, anuvattanañcāti? ‘‘Sahitāna’’nti vuttattā sandhānassāti viññāyatīti āha ‘‘sandhānānuppadātā’’ti. Yasmā pana anubalavasena, anuvattanavasena ca sandhānassa padānaṃ ādānaṃ, rakkhaṇaṃ vā daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘daḷhīkammaṃ kattā’’ti. Āramanti etthāti ārāmo. Ramitabbaṭṭhānaṃ samaggoti hi tadadhiṭṭhānānaṃ vasena tabbisesanatā vuttā. ‘‘Samagge’’tipi paṭhanti, tadayuttaṃ ‘‘yatthā’’tiādivacanena viruddhattā. Yasmā pana ākārena vināpi ayamattho labbhati, tasmā ‘‘ayamevettha attho’’ti vuttaṃ samaggesūti samaggabhūtesu janakāyesu, tenāha ‘‘te pahāyā’’tiādi. Tappakatiyatthopi kattuatthovāti dasseti ‘‘nandatī’’ti iminā. Tappakatiyatthena hi ‘‘disvāpi sutvāpī’’ti vacanaṃ supapannaṃ hoti. Samagge karoti etāyāti samaggakaraṇī. Sāyeva vācā, taṃ bhāsitāti atthamāha ‘‘yā vācā’’tiādinā. Tāya vācāya samaggakaraṇaṃ nāma. ‘‘Sukhā saṅghassa sāmaggī, samaggānaṃ tapo sukho’’tiādinā (dha. pa. 194) samaggānisaṃsadassanamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sāmaggiguṇaparidīpikamevā’’ti. Itaranti tabbiparītaṃ bhedanikaṃ vācaṃ.
“要害”是指疮疖。不过在这里,因为与疮疖相似,骂詈的所依事就被称为“要害”。就像疮疖被任何东西碰到时,心会极度痛苦;同样,在种姓等十种骂詈的所依事上,仅仅被粗恶语触及,心就会极度痛苦。因此这样说:“如同要害一样是要害,当这些仅仅被粗恶语触及,就像疮疖被碰到一样,心会极度痛苦——它们是什么呢?就是种姓等骂詈的所依事。”另有人说:“身体某个部位被刀等击中而剧烈疼痛,那叫‘mamma’(要害)。这里,心以粗恶语为缘而剧烈疼痛,称为忧,那就像要害一样,所以叫‘mamma’(要害)。”那些要害被它切断、破裂,因此是“断要害者”,那也就是身语业,它使那些生起,因此是如此。纯粹粗恶的思就是粗恶语,他们以这说出粗恶,因此。不说“粗恶思”而说“纯粹粗恶思”,是为了表明:由于嗔心性,只有粗恶思才被意指,而不是仅以听闻上的粗恶性。那是指纯粹粗恶思本身。为了显现,是为了使粗恶语的状态明显。或者那是指纯粹粗恶思本身,意思是粗恶语的状态。就在那里,即依照母亲所说的方式,意思是生起、随逐。真实语,即那以口所说的“凶暴的母虎随逐他”这句话,在母亲心中没有,因此“那不要发生,但愿连莲花叶也不要落在我上面”这个理由,她以心思维,那才在母亲心中有,因此“但愿那发生”就是作真实,或应作的真实。就在那里,即在生起之处。如被绑住,即像用绳索等束缚住一样。这样,“断要害者”在这里,应知仅以听闻上的粗恶性而成为断要害者。巴利
Mammānīti duṭṭhārūni, tassadisatāya pana idha akkosavatthūni ‘‘mammānī’’ti vuccanti. Yathā hi duṭṭhārūsu yena kenaci vatthunā ghaṭitesu cittaṃ adhimattaṃ dukkhappattaṃ hoti, tathā tesu dasasujātiādīsu akkosavatthūsu pharusavācāya phusitamattesūti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘mammāni viya mammāni, yesu pharusavācāya chupitamattesu duṭṭhārūsu viya ghaṭṭitesu cittaṃ adhimattaṃ dukkhappattaṃ hoti, kāni pana tāni? Jātiādīni akkosavatthūnī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9) ‘‘yassa sarīrappadesassa satthādipaṭihanena bhusaṃ rujjanaṃ, so mammaṃ nāma. Idha pana yassa cittassa pharusavācāvasena domanassasaṅkhātaṃ bhusaṃ rujjanaṃ, taṃ mammaṃ viyāti mamma’’nti apare. Tāni mammāni chijjanti bhijjanti yenāti mammacchedako, sveva kāyavacīpayogo, tāni samuṭṭhāpetīti tathā. Ekantapharusacetanā pharusā vācā pharusaṃ vadanti etāyāti katvā. ‘‘Pharusacetanā’’ icceva avatvā ‘‘ekantapharusacetanā’’ti vacanaṃ duṭṭhacittatāya eva pharusacetanā adhippetā, na pana savanapharusatāmattenāti ñāpanatthaṃ. Tassāti ekantapharusacetanāya eva. Āvibhāvatthanti pharusavācābhāvassa pākaṭakaraṇatthaṃ. Tassāti vā ekantapharusacetanāya eva, pharusavācābhāvassāti attho. Tathevāti mātuvuttākāreneva, uṭṭhāsi anubandhitunti attho. Saccakiriyanti yaṃ ‘‘caṇḍā taṃ mahiṃsī anubandhatū’’ti vacanaṃ mukhena kathesi, taṃ mātucitte natthi, tasmā ‘‘taṃ mā hotu, yaṃ pana uppalapattampi mayhaṃ upari na patatū’’ti kāraṇaṃ cittena cintesi, tadeva mātucitte atthi, tasmā ‘‘tameva hotū’’ti saccakaraṇaṃ, kattabbasaccaṃ vā. Tatthevāti uṭṭhānaṭṭhāneyeva. Baddhā viyāti yottādinā paribandhi viya. Evaṃ mammacchedakoti ettha savanapharusatāmattena mammacchedakatā veditabbā.
“努力”是指言语上的努力。“由于心的柔和状态”,是在说明完全没有粗恶的思。正因为如此,粗恶语才不构成业道,但应当知道,它作为业的性质仍然无法被阻止。用“因为父母……”等话,也同样论证了这个道理。这样,通过反面的方式,论证了由于思的粗恶才有粗恶语之后,现在为了从正面的方式论证同一道理,而说了“如同……”等话。意思是:并非不是粗恶语,而确实就是粗恶语,那只是粗恶的言辞。所谓“粗恶语”,就是指那言语。“对谁”是指对那个人。巴利
Payogoti vacīpayogo. Cittasaṇhatāyāti ekantapharusacetanāya abhāvamāha. Tatoyeva hi pharusavācā na hoti kammapathappattā, kammabhāvaṃ pana na sakkā vāretunti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Mātāpitaro hī’’tiādināpi tadevatthaṃ samattheti. Evaṃ byatirekavasena cetanāpharusatāya pharusavācābhāvaṃ sādhetvā idāni tameva anvayavasena sādhetuṃ ‘‘yathā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Apharusā vācā na hoti pharusā vācā hotiyevāti attho sāti pharusavācā. Yanti puggalaṃ.
在这里也一样,还没达到业道程度的粗恶语过失轻,其他的则过失重。同样,也应结合烦恼的柔软与猛烈之分来套用。不过有些人说:“粗恶语是针对某人当面说出的,才算成立。”另一些人则说:“背后说也仍然是粗恶语。”在这里,这样的理解或许才合理:当面说的时候,因为无恭敬等心态比较强,所以思也比较强,而且对方能知道这话的意思;背后说就不是这样。然而,就像对已经死去的人辱骂、在坟场做了忍耐宽恕能阻止毁谤之难发生一样,同样可以知道:背后说的也仍然是粗恶语。因此应当看到:当面和背后两种情况都能成立粗恶语。因为确实,除了“对方知道这话的意思”之外,其余三项——发起、烦恼、对象——在注释书里就是它成立的条件。“瞋忿心”是就辱骂的意图说的,不是就杀害的意图说的。因为如果有杀害的意图,在心恼怒时就已经成办了杀业的意义;如果没有杀成,那就随其所应,只成为杀生或瞋恚而已。巴利
Etthāpi kammapathabhāvaṃ appattā appasāvajjā, itarā mahāsāvajjā. Tathā kilesānaṃ mudutibbatābhedepi yojetabbaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘yaṃ uddissa pharusavācā payujjati, tassa sammukhāyeva sīsaṃ etī’’ti vadanti, eke pana ‘‘parammukhāpi pharusavācā hotiyevā’’ti. Tatthāyamadhippāyo yutto siyā, sammukhā payoge agāravādīnaṃ balavabhāvato siyā cetanā balavatī, parassa ca tadatthavijānanaṃ, na tathā parammukhā. Yathā pana akkosite mate āḷahane katā khamanā upavādantarāyaṃ nivatteti, evaṃ parammukhā payuttāpi pharusavācā hotiyevāti sakkā ñātunti, tasmā ubhayatthāpi pharusavācā sambhavatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi parassa tadatthavijānanamaññatra tayova tassā sambhārā aṭṭhakathāsu vuttāti. Kupitacittanti akkosanādhippāyeneva vuttaṃ, na pana maraṇādhippāyena. Maraṇādhippāyena hi sati cittakope atthasiddhiyā, tadabhāve ca yathārahaṃ pāṇātipātabyāpādāva honti.
Elaṃ 称为嗔,因为它使心摇动,或者使那个人动摇。在此处——巴利
Elaṃ vuccati doso ilati cittaṃ, puggalo vā kampati etenāti katvā. Etthāti –
无过失之支、白色伞盖,单轮之车正在行进;
看那没有烦恼的人走来,他已切断渴爱的水流,不再被束缚。巴利
‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo, ekāro vattatī ratho; Anīghaṃ passa āyantaṃ, chinnasotaṃ abandhana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 4.347; udā. 65; peṭako. 25); –
关于这首优陀那偈颂:这里的“戒”,因为无过失,所以被称为“无过失”。正因如此,质多居士在《相应部·六处品》中被尊者迦摩浮问到时说:“尊者,‘无过失支分’确实是戒的同义词。”所谓言语,其自性就是声音,系属于种种特定的意义,因此像美味一样,言辞甜美,意义也具有那样的性质。所以就说“以言辞的甜美来指意义,以意义的甜美”。在世间也能看到形容词后置的用法,比如“火被供奉”之类。再者,如果从支分来看,应当说“耳中刺”;“圆满”是指功德圆满,因此说“以功德圆满”。又说“如古时成长的城市女子”,或者说像那样的女子,言语也是“城市的”,因此以“古时”等语来说明其义。“柔软”是指非常年轻。但在所喻的一方,由于不粗涩,柔软的状态本身就是柔软性。“城市”一词在这里是居住于该地者的称呼,如同“村庄来了”等语中是伴随关系,因此说“城市居民”。这“此”是指与彼相关的言说。“如是之语”是指以三种意义所说明的语。“可爱”是指被欲求、满足,如“已离去”之语,或者“慢”字有“末端”之义,即被欲求之义。如“不犯,对不随诵者”,令意欢喜、增长,故为“可意”,因此说“令心增长”。如是作者之义。因此“对众多人”在此关联中是主格,不像前面那样是作者格。巴利
Imissā udānagāthāya. Sīlañhettha niddosatāya ‘‘nela’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha citto gahapati āyasmatā kāmabhūtherena puṭṭho saṃyuttāgamavare saḷāyatanavagge ‘‘nelaṅga’’nti kho bhante sīlānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.347) vācā nāma saddasabhāvā taṃtadatthanibandhanāti sādurasasadisattā madhurameva byañjanaṃ, attho ca tabbhāvatoti atthameva sandhāya byañjanamadhuratāya, atthamadhuratāyā’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Visesanaparanipātopi hi loke dissati ‘‘agyāhito’’tiādīsu. Apica avayavāpekkhane sati ‘‘madhuraṃ byañjanaṃ yassā’’tiādinā vattabbo. Sukhāti sukhakaraṇī, sukhahetūti vuttaṃ hoti. Kaṇṇasūlanti kaṇṇasaṅkuṃ. Kaṇṇasaddena cettha sotaviññāṇapaṭibaddhatadanuvattakā viññāṇavīthiyo gahitā. Vohārakathā hesā suttantadesanā, tassā vaṇṇanā ca, tathā ceva vuttaṃ ‘‘sakalasarīre kopaṃ, pema’’nti ca. Na hi hadayavatthunissito kopo, pemo ca sakalasarīre vattati. Esa nayo īdisesu. Sukhena cittaṃ pavisati yathāvuttakāraṇadvayenāti attho, aluttasamāso cesa yathā ‘‘amataṅgato’’ti. Pureti guṇapāripure, tenāha ‘‘guṇaparipuṇṇatāyā’’ti. Pure saṃvaḍḍhā porī, tādisā nārī viyāti vācāpi porīti atthamāha ‘‘pure’’tiādinā. Sukumārāti sutaruṇā. Upameyyapakkhe pana apharusatāya mudukabhāvo eva sukumāratā. Purassāti ettha pura-saddo tannivāsīvācako sahacaraṇavasena ‘‘gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu viya, tenevāha ‘‘nagaravāsīna’’nti. Esāti taṃsambandhīniddesā vācā. Evarūpī kathāti atthattayena pakāsitā kathā. Kantāti kāmitā tuṭṭhā yathā ‘‘pakkanto’’ti, māna-saddassa vā antabyappadeso, kāmiyamānāti attho. Yathā ‘‘anāpatti asamanubhāsantassā’’ti (pārā. 416, 430, 441) manaṃ appeti vaḍḍhetīti manāpā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittavuḍḍhikarā’’ti. Tathākārinīti attho. Ato bahuno janassāti idha sambandhe sāmivacanaṃ, na tu purimasmiṃ viya kattari.
就算他们想表达的意思确实存在,但因为这种话没有实际利益,所以按照所说内容的同义说法,它根本算不上“有义”,因此说“传达无义”。另外,因为没有实际用处,所以是“无义”;而言语就是传达这种无义的东西,这样解释也可以。不善的思就是绮语,因为靠它来说无意义的话。习行、修习、多作。为了让某人接受而说出的话,如果那人没接受,就是轻罪;如果接受了,就是重罪。也应该根据烦恼的软弱或强烈程度,来配合判定轻罪和重罪。名为婆罗多的两兄弟国王打仗的故事,十首夜叉抢走悉多天女的故事,罗摩王把她夺回来的故事,以及现在外道们所熟悉的、用梵语写成的《罗摩往世书》《婆罗多往世书》等故事——像这一类没有意义的话,就是绮语,所以说“婆罗多……中略……重视”。巴利
Kāmaṃ tehi vattumicchito attho sambhavati, so pana aphalattā bhāsitatthapariyāyena atthoyeva nāma na hotīti āha ‘‘anatthaviññāpikā’’ti. Apica payojanatthābhāvato anatthā, vācā, taṃ viññāpikātipi vaṭṭati. Akusalacetanā samphappalāpo samphaṃ palapanti etāyāti katvā. Āsevanaṃ bhāvanaṃ bahulīkaraṇaṃ. Yaṃ janaṃ gāhāpayituṃ pavattito, tena aggahite appasāvajjo, gahite mahāsāvajjo. Kilesānaṃ mudutibbatāvasenāpi appasāvajjamahāsāvajjatā yojetabbā. Bhāratanāmakānaṃ dvebhātukarājūnaṃ yuddhakathā, dasagiriyakkhena sītāya nāma deviyā āharaṇakathā, rāmaraññā paccāharaṇakathā , yathā taṃ adhunā bāhirakehi paricayitā sakkaṭabhāsāya gaṇṭhitā rāmapurāṇabhāratapurāṇādikathāti, evamādikā niratthakakathā samphappalāpoti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhārata…pe… purekkhāratā’’ti.
“适时而语”等句,是为了显示远离杂秽语者的修行方式,就像“远离杀生”等句(长部1.8, 194)是为了显示断除杀生的修行方式一样。因为当说到“断除杀生而住”时,会有人疑问“怎样才是断除杀生呢”,所以接着说“远离杀生”。那远离又是什么样的呢?所以说“放下棍杖、放下刀剑”。放下棍杖和刀剑又是什么样的呢?所以说“有惭耻心”等。这样,后面的每一句都是在说明前面那一句的具体做法。对不与取等其余各条,也应照此随文配合理解。因此说“‘适时而语’等句,是显示远离杂秽语者的修行方式”。即使是有利益的言语,如果说的时机不对,也可能不带来利益,也就是说不能传达利益,所以为了显示断除杂秽语的人应当避免不适时之语,而说“适时而语”。即使能适时而说,也应当避免在自他两方面都无根据的不实之语,所以说“实语者”。即使说真实语,也应当只说能带来此世与来世利益的话,所以说“义语者”。即使说义利之语,也不应只说依止世间法的话,而应说依止出世间法的话,所以说“法语者”。为了显示义利如何依止出世间法,所以说“律语者”。巴利
‘‘Kālavādī’’tiādi samphappalāpā paṭiviratassa paṭipattisandassanaṃ yathā ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.8, 194) pāṇātipātappahānassa paṭipattidassanaṃ. ‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya viharatī’’ti hi vutte kathaṃ pāṇātipātappahānaṃ hotīti apekkhāsambhavato ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sā pana virati kathanti āha ‘‘nihitadaṇḍo nihita sattho’’ti. Tañca daṇḍasatthanidhānaṃ kathanti vuttaṃ ‘‘lajjī’’tiādi. Evaṃ uttaruttaraṃ purimassa purimassa upāyasandassanaṃ. Tathā adinnādānādīsupi yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘kālavādītiādi samphappalāpā paṭiviratassa paṭipattisandassana’’nti. Atthasaṃhitāpi hi vācā ayuttakālapayogena atthāvahā na siyāti anatthaviññāpanabhāvaṃ anulometi, tasmā samphappalāpaṃ pajahantena akālavāditā parivajjetabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘kālavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāle vadantenāpi ubhayattha asādhanato abhūtaṃ parivajjetabbanti āha ‘‘bhūtavādī’’ti. Bhūtañca vadantena yaṃ idhalokaparalokahitasampādanakaṃ, tadeva vattabbanti vuttaṃ ‘‘atthavādī’’ti. Atthaṃ vadantenāpi na lokiyadhammanissitameva vattabbaṃ, atha kho lokuttaradhammanissitampīti āha ‘‘dhammavādī’’ti. Yathā ca attho lokuttaradhammanissito hoti, tathā dassanatthaṃ ‘‘vinayavādī’’ti vuttaṃ.
波罗提木叉防护、念防护、智防护、忍防护、精进防护这五种防护律仪,以及彼分断除、镇伏断除、正断断除、止息断除、出离断除这五种断除律仪,当依据它们来宣说时,由于这个义理是证得涅槃的因,所以它就依止于出世间法。如此,具足殊胜功德的义理在被宣说时,如果有说法的善巧,就会光彩夺目,也能产生实际作用,否则就不是这样。为了说明这一点,所以说“说含藏之语”。现在,为了阐明这种说法善巧,接着说了“适时”等话。在由意乐、事缘和提问所进入的说法范畴中,先观察并分辨一向答等记别的区分,然后随顺各个时机,显示搁置、理由、譬喻、连贯等,以有限而有节制的方式,含摄深广、多义、广略的说法,使他人能随自己的意乐而安立于胜义成就之中,这就叫作“说法善巧者”。在这里,也应该这样理解义理的配合。巴利
Pātimokkhasaṃvaro, satiñāṇakhantivīriyasaṃvaroti hi pañcannaṃ saṃvaravinayānaṃ tadaṅgappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanasamucchedapaṭippassaddhinissaraṇappahānanti pañcannaṃ pahānavinayānañca vasena vuccamāno attho nibbānādhigamahetubhāvato lokuttaradhammasannissito hoti. Evaṃ guṇavisesayutto ca attho vuccamāno desanākosalle sati sobhati, kiccakaro ca hoti, nāññathāti dassetuṃ ‘‘nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni tameva desanākosallaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kālenā’’tiādimāha. Ajjhāsayaṭṭhuppattīnaṃ, pucchāya ca vasena otiṇṇe desanāvisaye ekaṃsādibyākaraṇavibhāgaṃ sallakkhetvā ṭhapanāhetudāharaṇasaṃsandanāni taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ vibhāventiyā parimitaparicchinnarūpāya gambhīrudānapahūtatthavitthārasaṅgāhikāya desanāya pare yathājjhāsayaṃ paramatthasiddhiyaṃ patiṭṭhāpento ‘‘desanākusalo’’ti vuccatīti evametthāpi atthayojanā veditabbā.
“应当说的时候”是指适合说应当说的话的时机,或者说是在那时应当运用言语的时机。因为就是按照自身的本性而真实,所以他说“就是本性本身”。“说义利者”就是讲说义利的人。而讲说义利,就是只讲说依止于义利的言语,出于这个意图,所以说“使其依止于现世与来世的义利”。“说法者”等等说法中,也是同样的道理。巴利
Vattabbayuttakālanti vattabbavacanassa anurūpakālaṃ, tattha vā payujjitabbakālaṃ. Sabhāvavaseneva bhūtatāti āha ‘‘sabhāvamevā’’ti. Atthaṃ vadatīti atthavādī. Atthavadanañca tannissitavācākathanamevāti adhippāyena vuttaṃ ‘‘diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikatthasannissitameva katvā’’ti. Dhammavādī’’tiādīsupi eseva nayo.
“藏”就是在这里储藏、积聚,所以叫藏,也就是放置的地方。当说“有处”时,也可以理解为适合放在那个地方,因此说“于心中”等。即使是含藏之语,也只有适时才带来利益,为了显示“适时”正是“说含藏之语”所期待的话,所以说“如此”等。为了产生想要的意义而应被指示,或者通过它指示想要的意义,所以叫“所依”,也就是譬喻、理由、例证等因由。与这些一起存在,所以叫“有所依”,指言语,因此说“带有譬喻、带有理由的意思”。显示了界限,就是显示了尽其可能的终结界限,因此说“如……而说”,因为未达顶峰的言说不能称为带来利益。在“伴随义利”中,“义”这个词是所说义的同义词,所以说“以众多……”等。所说义就是依随音声所获得的一切意义,包括本性义、缘起义、状态义等。正因如此,世尊的话,即使只是一偈一句,也能以略说、广说、一性、多种、喜引、回转等方法,以众多方式展现不可穷尽的意义。这样从义的共相作了注释后,又从想要的意义的殊相来注释,所以说“或……”等,因为这里取的正是义语者想要说的意义。难道不是所有人的言语都伴随自己想要的意义吗?这里还有什么可说的呢?为了澄清这内在的质问,所以说“非他”等。就是不先搁置一个意义,然后以不连贯的方式再说另一个意义;而是以已经安置的连贯方式,终结而说。这就是其意趣。巴利
Nidheti sannidhānaṃ karoti etthāti nidhānaṃ. Ṭhapanokāso. ‘‘Ṭhānavatī’’ti vutte tasmiṃ ṭhāne ṭhapetuṃ yuttātipi attho sambhavatīti āha ‘‘hadaye’’tiādi. Nidhānavatīpi vācā kālayuttāva atthāvahā, tasmā ‘‘kālenā’’ti idaṃ ‘‘nidhānavatiṃ’’ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti etassāpekkhavacananti dasseti ‘‘evarūpi’’ntiādinā. Icchitatthanibbattanatthaṃ apadisitabbo, apadisīyati vā icchitattho anenāti apadeso, upamā, hetudāharaṇādikāraṇaṃ vā, tena saha vattatīti sāpadesā, vācā, tenāha ‘‘saupamaṃ sakāraṇanti attho’’ti. Paricchedaṃ dassetvāti yāvatā pariyosānaṃ sambhavati, tāvatā mariyādaṃ dassetvā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathā…pe… bhāsatī’’ti. Sikhamappattā hi kathā atthāvahā nāma na hoti. Atthasaṃhitanti ettha attha-saddo bhāsitatthapariyāyoti vuttaṃ ‘‘anekehipī’’tiādi. Bhāsitattho ca nāma saddānusārena adhigato sabbopi pakatyatthapaccayatthabhāvatthādiko, tatoyeva bhagavato vacanaṃ ekagāthāpadampi saṅkhepavitthārādiekattādinandiyāvattādinayehi anekehipi niddhāraṇakkhamatāya pariyādātumasakkuṇeyyaṃ atthamāvahatīti. Evaṃ atthasāmaññato saṃvaṇṇetvā icchitatthavisesatopi saṃvaṇṇetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ vā’’tiādimāha. Atthavādinā vattumicchitatthoyeva hi idha gahito. Nanu sabbesampi vacanaṃ attanā icchitatthasahitaṃyeva, kimettha vattabbaṃ atthīti antolīnacodanaṃ parisodheti ‘‘na añña’’ntiādinā. Aññamatthaṃ paṭhamaṃ nikkhipitvā ananusandhivasena pacchā aññamatthaṃ na bhāsati. Yathānikkhittānusandhivaseneva pariyosāpetvā kathetīti adhippāyo.
10 世尊已经按顺序逐条分析了七组根本学处。断除贪欲等虽然也属于防护戒的范围,但因为它被更高的功德所涵盖,又不是世间凡夫所能触及的境界,所以为了把它归入上分教法,世尊先把它放在一边,转而分析普通人都知道的威仪戒,于是说了“伤害种子与植物之行”等话。这就是经文在这里的关联。
其中,“依这些而生、依这些而长”的,就是种子。当各种条件聚合时,它们能促使相似的果实产生,具有特殊的因缘作用,这是对有生长能力的核、果实等的称呼。“已存在、曾存在”的,就是生物,意思是“出生、增长”以及“已生、已增长”。对于正在生长的和已经长成安住的树木、灌木等,这是按顺序给的名称:根已长好、呈现绿色的幼树和灌木,叫“出生、增长”;已经长成安住的大树和灌木,叫“已生、已增长”。“聚落”就是聚集,是纯粹八法的聚集;种子和生物——也就是按这样获得名称的八法——的聚落,或者它们本身就是聚落。因为离开了部分,整体就不存在,所以按这两种含义,这里取的就是那些草、树、藤蔓等。巴利
10. Evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā sattamūlasikkhāpadāni vibhajitvā satipi abhijjhādippahānassa saṃvarasīlasaṅgahe upariguṇasaṅgahato, lokiyaputhujjanāvisayato ca uttaridesanāya saṅgahituṃ taṃ pariharitvā pacurajanapākaṭaṃ ācārasīlameva vibhajanto bhagavā ‘‘bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā’’tiādimāhāti pāḷiyaṃ sambandho vattabbo. Tattha vijāyanti viruhanti etehīti bījāni. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhanasamatthānaṃ sāraphalādīnametaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bhavanti, ahuvunti cāti bhūtā, jāyanti vaḍḍhanti jātā, vaḍḍhitā cāti attho. Vaḍḍhamānakānaṃ vaḍḍhitvā, ṭhitānañca rukkhagacchādīnaṃ yathākkamamadhivacanaṃ. Viruḷhamūlā hi nīlabhāvaṃ āpajjantā taruṇarukkhagacchā jāyanti vaḍḍhantīti vuccanti. Vaḍḍhitvā ṭhitā mahantā rukkhagacchā jātā vaḍḍhitāti. Gāmoti samūho, so ca suddhaṭṭhakadhammarāsi, bījānaṃ, bhūtānañca tathāladdhasamaññānaṃ aṭṭhadhammānaṃ gāmo, teyeva vā gāmoti tathā. Avayavavinimuttassa hi samudāyassa abhāvato duvidhenāpi atthena teyeva tiṇarukkhalatādayo gayhanti.
另外,树木、灌木等扎根在大地上,呈现出绿色,就被天神们执取为住处,所以,因为这里是众生的居住之处,村落也被叫做“生物聚落”。为了说明它们的自相,经文说“根种子”等等。根本身就是种子,所以叫根种子。其余几句也是这样。节种子就是茎节种子。因为当其他条件具备时,它们能作为特殊原因,产生相似的果实,所以“种子”这个词在能生长的坚实果实上已经通用;为了成立这个意思,在某些情况下也用在根等上面。为了排除从根等生起的误解,就用一个“种子”来特别区分,说成“种子种子”,就像说“色色、苦苦”一样。青草、树木等,就是新鲜的草和新鲜的树木等。“等”字还包括药草、灌木、藤蔓等。这里的“加害”指破坏,而破坏就是砍伐等,所以说“以砍伐、劈裂、煮烧等方式”。难道树木等因为没有心识就不是生命吗?要知道,它们没有心识,是因为没有挣扎的动作,被砍断后还能再生,属于不同种类,不包含在四生之中。不过,增长在珊瑚、石盐等上面也存在,所以增长并不是它们有生命的理由。而它们取境也只是假想,就像吉婆草等的梦一样;同样,辛辣、酸涩等味道引起的欲求也是如此。那么,为什么这里要求远离对种子聚落和生物聚落的加害呢?因为随顺沙门法,以及怜悯依止于它们的众生。因此,世尊在讲到阿罗婆迦人砍树等事时说:“愚人们!人们对于树有命想”等等。巴利
Apica bhūmiyaṃ patiṭṭhahitvā haritabhāvamāpannā rukkhagacchādayo devatā pariggayhanti, tasmā bhūtānaṃ nivāsanaṭṭhānatāya gāmoti bhūtagāmotipi vadanti, te sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘mūlabīja’’ntiādimāha. Mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi ayaṃ nayo. Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhanasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bīja-saddo tadatthasiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bīja-saddena visesetvā ‘‘bījabīja’’nti vuttaṃ yathā ‘‘rūpaṃrūpaṃ, dukkhadukkha’’nti ca. Nīlatiṇarukkhādikassāti allatiṇassa ceva allarukkhādikassa ca. Ādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādayo veditabbā. Samārambho idha vikopanaṃ, tañca chedanādiyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘chedanabhedanapacanādibhāvenā’’ti. Nanu ca rukkhādayo cittarahitatāya na jīvā, cittarahitatā ca paripphandanābhāvato, chinne viruhanato, visadisajātikabhāvato, catuyoniapariyāpannato ca veditabbā. Vuḍḍhi pana pavāḷasilālavaṇādīnampi vijjatīti na tesaṃ jīvatābhāve kāraṇaṃ. Visayaggahaṇañca nesaṃ parikappanāmattaṃ supanaṃ viya ciñcādīnaṃ, tathā kaṭukambilāsādinā dohaḷādayo. Tattha kasmā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirati icchitāti? Samaṇasāruppato, tannissitasattānukampanato ca. Tenevāha āḷavakānaṃ rukkhacchedanādivatthūsu ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisā manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi (pārā. 89).
一天只吃一顿饭,这叫做“一食”。对于有这种习惯的人来说,他在一天当中只吃一次,所以叫“一食者”。关于这一顿饭应该在什么时候吃,注释里说“早餐之食”等等,意思是在两顿饭当中,指的是早餐那一顿。早上该吃的那份叫早餐,傍晚该吃的那份叫晚餐,那顿饭也是这样称呼。这里“一”这个字是用来限定日中的时段,而不是指包含在这个时段里的次数,所以用“因此”等话来加以说明。巴利
Ekaṃ bhattaṃ ekabhattaṃ, tamassa atthi ekasmiṃ divase ekavārameva bhuñjanatoti ekabhattiko. Tayidaṃ ekabhattaṃ kadā bhuñjitabbanti sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pātarāsabhatta’’ntiādi, dvīsu bhattesu pātarāsabhattaṃ sandhāyāhāti adhippāyo. Pāto asitabbanti pātarāsaṃ. Sāyaṃ asitabbanti sāyamāsaṃ, tadeva bhattaṃ tathā. Eka-saddo cettha majjhanhikakālaparicchedabhāvena payutto, na tadantogadhavārabhāvenāti dasseti ‘‘tasmā’’tiādinā.
夜间进食,因为省略了后分(uttarapada),所以用“夜”这个词来表示;或者按照后缀构词法(taddhita),也同样能产生这个意思,因此说“夜晚的”等等。从黎明出现开始一直到正午,这是诸佛等圣者们惯常实行的进食时间,除此之外就是非时。在这里,由于第二句已经遮止了夜间进食,所以午后在这里就是非时;为了用排除其余的方式说明第三句的含义,就说“超过正午”等等。这里“食”这个词是行为成就词(bhāvasādhana),表示吞咽的意思,所以用“直到日落为食”这句话来说明。那么,那是吞咽什么东西呢?因为非时药等是允许的,而“非时食”这个词只约定俗成地用于吞咽时药,所以应理解为“时药”。这是此处注释中诸位师长的补充方法:从应食用的意义上说为“食”,粥、饭等一切时药之物都是如此。又如同在“夜止”中,夜间进食用“夜”这个词来表示;同样,这里用“食”这个词来表示进食吞咽。在非时进食就是非时食,由此远离非时食。意思就是在非时吞咽时药之物。这样的功德庄严并非只存在于佛世,所以说“阿诺玛河岸”等等。这是圣典中的衔接次第:因为一天只吃一次而说“一食者”时,可能也会有夜间进食,为了遮止这种情况而说“夜止”。这样一来,傍晚进食的人也可能成为一食者,为了消除这个疑问而说“远离非时食”。巴利
Rattiyā bhojanaṃ uttarapadalopato rattisaddena vuttaṃ, taddhitavasena vā tathāyevādhippāyasambhavato, tenāha ‘‘rattiyā’’tiādi. Aruṇuggamanato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā ayaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Tattha dutiyapadena rattibhojanassa paṭikkhittattā aparanhova idha vikāloti pārisesanayena tatiyapadassa atthaṃ dīpetuṃ ‘‘atikkante majjhanhike’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhāvasādhano cettha bhojana-saddo ajjhoharaṇatthavācakoti dīpeti ‘‘yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojana’’nti iminā. Kassa pana tadajjhoharaṇanti? Yāmakālikādīnamanuññātattā, vikālabhojanasaddassa ca yāvakālikajjhoharaṇeyeva niruḷhattā ‘‘yāvakālikassā’’ti viññāyati. Ayaṃ panettha aṭṭhakathāvaseso ācariyānaṃ nayo – bhuñjitabbaṭṭhena bhojanaṃ, yāgubhattādi sabbaṃ yāvakālikavatthu . Yathā ca ‘‘rattūparato’’ti ettha rattibhojanaṃ rattisaddena vuccati, evamettha bhojanajjhoharaṇaṃ bhojanasaddena. Vikāle bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ, tato vikālabhojanā. Vikāle yāvakālikavatthussa ajjhoharaṇāti atthoti. Īdisā guṇavibhūti na buddhakāleyevāti āha ‘‘anomānadītīre’’tiādi. Ayaṃ pana pāḷiyaṃ anusandhikkamo – ekasmiṃ divase ekavārameva bhuñjanato ‘‘ekabhattiko’’ti vutte rattibhojanopi siyāti tannivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘rattūparato’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sati sāyanhabhojīpi ekabhattiko siyāti tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘‘virato vikālabhojanā’’ti vuttanti.
简略地说,世尊的教法是按照“诸恶莫作”等偈颂的方式流传的,而观看舞蹈等表演,因为是从有贪欲的状态生起的,所以不符合教法,因此说“因为不符合教法”。所谓visūka,就是刺穿教法、以不符合的方式伤害教法,意思是与教法相违背。这里用“像刺桩一样”来打比方,意思是像一种叫paṭāṇī的桩子那样。也有人解释说,“visūka”这个词本身就是“变成刺桩”的意思。自己跳舞,或者让别人跳舞,因为“舞”这件事在本质上是一样的,所以在圣典里只用一个“舞”字就涵盖了,这是用总说的方式,或者用省略的方式。同样,用“歌”和“乐”这两个字,也分别涵盖了自唱与令唱、自奏与令奏,所以说“以自舞、令舞等方式”。这些词本身表示的是纯粹的原因,因此兼有两层含义。舞、歌、乐以及visūka的观看,合在一起就是“舞歌乐visūka观看”,这里按合集的方式视为一体。不过注释书里则随顺经文,为了显示与“应分句”的语句共同构成合集复合词,才说“舞等”这样的话。在一切类似的地方都应这样理解。(在观看方面遮止了孔雀舞等,也应该理解为在令舞方面同样遮止。)“因为舞等”这些话,是用来证成前面所说的含义。这里,用“观看”也涵盖了“听”,这是用省略的方式;或者,因为各自对境的了别本质,在五识中听闻的作用也可以归入观看之中,所以只说“观看”。正因为如此,才说“以五识不认取任何法,除了极微弱的转起之外”。巴利
Saṅkhepato ‘‘sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124) nayappavattaṃ bhagavato sāsanaṃ sachandarāgappavattito naccādīnaṃ dassanaṃ nānulometīti āha ‘‘sāsanassa ananulomattā’’ti. Visucati sāsanaṃ vijjhati ananulomikabhāvenāti visūkaṃ, paṭiviruddhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tatra upamaṃ dasseti ‘‘paṭāṇībhūta’’nti iminā, paṭāṇīsaṅkhātaṃ kīlaṃ viya bhūtanti attho. ‘‘Visūka’’nti etassa paṭāṇībhūtanti atthamāhātipi vadanti. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ, parehi payojāpiyamānañca naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññato pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva naccasaddena sāmaññaniddesanayena gahitaṃ, ekasesanayena vā. Tathā gītavāditasaddehi gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanānīti āha ‘‘naccananaccāpanādivasenā’’ti. Suddhahetutājotanavasena hi dvādhippāyikā ete saddā. Naccañca gītañca vāditañca visūkadassanañca naccagītavāditavisūkadassanaṃ, samāhāravasenettha ekattaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana yathāpāṭhaṃ vākyāvatthikantavacanena saha samuccayasamāsadassanatthaṃ ‘‘naccā cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Evaṃ sabbattha īdisesu. (Dassanavisaye mayūranaccādipaṭikkhipanena naccāpanavisayepi paṭikkhipanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ) ‘‘naccādīni hī’’tiādinā yathāvuttatthasamatthanaṃ. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena, yathāsakaṃ vā visayassa ālocanasabhāvatāya pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasambhavato ‘‘dassanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kiñci dhammaṃ paṭijānāti aññatra atinipātamattā’’ti.
“且见颠倒”这句话,是在说明:对于不颠倒的歌唱,有时允许听。正如《胜义光明》《小部·小诵注》中所说:“即使与法相应的歌唱也不允许,但与歌唱相应的法则允许。”在某些传本中,此处可见到否定词颠倒的读法。不论哪种情况,都应这样理解:如果歌唱即使随顺法义、与义理相合,也不允许;如果法即使附带着歌声,则允许。因为“诸比丘,不应以歌声唱诵法,若唱诵者,犯恶作”这一教诫,禁止的是唱诵,而不是听受。由于这条学处是单独制定的,所以可以知道:“即使以歌声宣出的法,也不属于歌唱。”而《帝释所问经义注》在辨析应当亲近与不应亲近的声音时说:“凡依义、依法,即便出自陶工之歌,听者若生起净信,或生起厌离,这样的声音应当亲近。”这是仅就未受持学处者而言“应当亲近”。应当知道,对于已受持学处者,听这类声音会破坏学处的防护,因为那是歌唱。正如律注中所说:“所谓歌唱,无论是舞者等所唱,或是诸圣者在般涅槃时含摄三宝功德的善巧嬉戏之歌,或是不自制比丘的唱法之歌,乃至齿音歌,即在事前发出‘我们将唱’之轻吟,这一切皆名为歌唱。”巴利
‘‘Visūkabhūtā dassanā cā’’ti etena avisūkabhūtassa pana gītassa savanaṃ kadāci vaṭṭatīti dasseti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ paramatthajotikāya khuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāya ‘‘dhammūpasaṃhitampi cettha gītaṃ na vaṭṭati, gītūpasaṃhito pana dhammo vaṭṭatī’’ti (khu. pā. aṭṭha. pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) katthaci pana na-kāravipariyāyena pāṭho dissati. Ubhayatthāpi ca gīto ce dhammānulomatthapaṭisaṃyuttopi na vaṭṭati, dhammo ce gītasaddapaṭisaṃyuttopi vaṭṭatīti adhippāyo veditabbo. ‘‘Na bhikkhave, gītassarena dhammo gāyitabbo, yo gāyeyya, āpatti dukkaṭassā’’ti (cūḷava. 149) hi desanāya eva paṭikkhepo, na savanāya. Imassa ca sikkhāpadassa visuṃ paññāpanato viññāyati ‘‘gītassarena desitopi dhammo na gīto’’ti. Yañca sakkapañhasuttavaṇṇanāyaṃ sevitabbāsevitabbasaddaṃ niddharantena ‘‘yaṃ pana atthanissitaṃ dhammanissitaṃ kumbhadāsigītampi suṇantassa pasādo vā uppajjati, nibbidā vā saṇṭhāti, evarūpo saddo sevitabbo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.365) vuttaṃ, taṃ asamādānasikkhāpadassa sevitabbatāmattapariyāyena vuttaṃ. Samādānasikkhāpadassa hi evarūpaṃ suṇantassa sikkhāpadasaṃvaraṃ bhijjati gītasaddabhāvatoti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi vinayaṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ ‘‘gītanti naṭādīnaṃ vā gītaṃ hotu, ariyānaṃ parinibbānakāle ratanattayaguṇūpasaṃhitaṃ sādhukīḷanagītaṃ vā, asaṃyatabhikkhūnaṃ dhammabhāṇakagītaṃ vā, antamaso dantagītampi, yaṃ ‘‘gāyissāmā’’ti pubbabhāge okūjitaṃ karonti, sabbametaṃ gītaṃ nāmā’’ti (pāci. aṭṭha. 835; vi. saṅga. aṭṭha. 34.25).
虽然“花鬘”这个词在世间通常指串好的花,但在教法里,按照惯用法,也适用于没有串好的花。所以,无论什么花,串好的或没串好的,都应该看作“花鬘”,因此说“任何花”。“任何香”在这里指涂香粉、熏香等之外的其他任何香类。就像前面所说的那样,这个词在所说含义之外,也能表达特定的意思。“令皮肤染色”,指为了用涂香涂染皮肤而捣碎准备好的任何香粉。“佩戴”就是持用。“填补不足”就是装饰。由香和令皮肤染色而感到欢喜,就是“装饰”。为了说明这个意思,从人的角度说“在那里佩戴”等等。同样,《中部义注》里也是这样说的,而《胜义灯》和《小部·小诵注》里只说“对于花鬘等,受持等应依次配合”。配合时,也应该按照所说的方式。这又是什么原因呢?所以说“以何”等等。以哪种恶戒思来做,这就是这里的原因。“从彼远离”应该和两处都连起来理解,由此也显示“花鬘……乃至……装饰之处,或者花鬘……乃至……装饰本身即是处”这样的复合词。因为当时那种形态的思等法,本身就是持用等行为。在那里,与思相应诸法的原因,是因为它们俱生等而能资助,也因为它们是主要的。因为经中说:“思已而以身、语、意造业。”而作为持用等本身的思,就是处。“处”这个词应该分别配合,因为从复合词中可以听出这个意思。巴利
Kiñcāpi mālā-saddo loke baddhapupphavācako, sāsane pana ruḷhiyā abaddhapupphesupi vaṭṭati, tasmā yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ baddhamabaddhaṃ vā, taṃ sabbaṃ ‘‘mālā’’ tveva daṭṭhabbanti āha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci puppha’’nti. ‘‘Yaṃ kiñci gandha’’nti cettha vāsacuṇṇadhūpādikaṃ vilepanato aññaṃ yaṃ kiñci gandhajātaṃ. Vuttatthaṃ viya hi vuccamānatthamantarenāpi saddo atthavisesavācako. Chavirāgakaraṇanti vilepanena chaviyā rañjanatthaṃ pisitvā paṭiyattaṃ yaṃ kiñci gandhacuṇṇaṃ. Piḷandhanaṃ dhāraṇaṃ. Ūnaṭṭhānapūraṇaṃ maṇḍanaṃ. Gandhavasena, chavirāgavasena ca sādiyanaṃ vibhūsanaṃ. Tadevatthaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena dīpeti ‘‘tattha piḷandhanto’’tiādinā. Tathā ceva majjhimaṭṭhakathāyampi (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 3.147) vuttaṃ, paramatthajotikāyaṃ pana khuddakapāṭhaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘mālādīsu dhāraṇādīni yathāsaṅkhyaṃ yojetabbānī’’ti (khu. pā. aṭṭha. pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ettakameva vuttaṃ. Tatthāpi yojentena yathāvuttanayeneva yojetabbāni. Kiṃ panetaṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘yāyā’’tiādi. Yāya dussīlyacetanāya karoti, sā idha kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Tato paṭivirato’’ti hi ubhayattha sambandhitabbaṃ, eteneva ‘‘mālā…pe… vibhūsanānaṃ ṭhānaṃ, mālā…pe… vibhūsanāneva vā ṭhāna’’nti samāsampi dasseti. Tadākārappavatto cetanādidhammoyeva hi dhāraṇādikiriyā. Tattha ca cetanāsampayuttadhammānaṃ kāraṇaṃ sahajātādopakārakato, padhānato ca. ‘‘Cetayitvā kammaṃ karoti kāyena vācāya manasā’’ti (a. ni. 6.63) hi vuttaṃ. Dhāraṇādibhūtā eva ca cetanā ṭhānanti. Ṭhāna-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo dvandapadato suyyamānattā.
“高”(ucca)这个词,因为与带a词尾的(词)同义,所以是用一个带a词尾的、表示“高耸的”的词来说明它,因此说“超过量度”。“卧”(seti)——在这里就是卧具,也就是床等。因为缺乏与沙门身份相符的庄严,又被在家人看作最上等的,所以不许可用的敷具就是这里所说的“大卧具”。为了说明这一点,所以说“不许可用的敷具”。在这里应当知道,坐具已经被卧具所包含。因为所依之处被禁止时,依于该处的行为也就同样被禁止了,所以只说“高床大床”。从意义上说,应当知道这是通过远离受用那些坐卧之事来显示的。或者,“高床大床”这个说法是依照省略法,就像“名色为缘六处”那样;在这个分类中,因为坐先于卧,所以取了卧就已经取了坐。由于表示动作的āsana(坐)和sayana(卧)这两个词被省略了,律复注中说这是后词省略的说明。巴利
Uccāti uccasaddena akārantena samānatthaṃ ākārantaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ accuggatavācakanti āha ‘‘pamāṇātikkanta’’nti. Seti etthāti sayanaṃ, mañcādi. Samaṇasārupparahitattā, gahaṭṭhehi ca seṭṭhasammatattā akappiyapaccattharaṇaṃ ‘‘mahāsayana’’nti idhādhippetanti dassetuṃ ‘‘akappiyattharaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ. Nisīdanaṃ panettha sayaneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārakiriyāpi paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Atthato pana tadupabhogabhūtanisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’ti esa niddeso ekasesanayena yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1) etasmimpi vikappe āsanapubbakattā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇeneva āsanampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Kiriyāvācakaāsanasayanasaddalopato uttarapadalopaniddesotipi vinayaṭīkāyaṃ (vi. vi. ṭī. 2.106) vuttaṃ.
金从出生时起就没有变坏,所以叫“生金”,也就是黄金,指佛陀的肤色。因为它的白色能让人染着,或者众生在这上面染着,所以叫“银”,就像“他们不越过”这句话里的用法。按照“四粒米为一豆,两豆为一摩沙迦”所说的标准,二十摩沙迦算一个青铜迦波拏,或者粗环钱之类,随各地习俗而定的迦波拏。用铜等做成的,就是铜钱之类。“进入交易”是指被接受受用的说法。交易就是指买卖的一切商业行为。从别人那里让人拿取,以及对存放的东西表示欢喜,这两种情况都算接受,所以说“不让人拿取,不对存放的东西表示欢喜”。或者,接受有三种:通过身体、通过语言、通过心意。其中,通过身体接受是拿取,通过语言接受是让人拿取,通过心意接受是欢喜。这三种接受,用总说或省略的方式来说,就叫做接受,所以说“他既不拿取”等等。这个道理也适用于接受生谷等。巴利
Jātameva rūpamassa na vippakāranti jātarūpaṃ, satthuvaṇṇaṃ. Rañjīyati setavaṇṇatāya, rañjanti vā ettha sattāti rajataṃ yathā ‘‘nesaṃ padakkanta’’nti. ‘‘Cattāro vīhayo guñjā, dve guñjā māsako bhave’’ti vuttalakkhaṇena vīsatimāsako nīlakahāpaṇo vā dudradāmakādiko vā taṃtaṃdesavohārānurūpaṃ kato kahāpaṇo. Lohādīhi kato lohamāsakādiko. Ye vohāraṃ gacchantīti pariyādānavacanaṃ. Vohāranti ca kayavikkayavasena sabbohāraṃ. Aññehi gāhāpane, upanikkhittasādiyane ca paṭiggahaṇattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘na uggaṇhāpeti na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatī’’ti. Atha vā tividhaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasā. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahaṇaṃ. Vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ. Manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyanaṃ. Tividhampetaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā gahetvā paṭiggahaṇāti vuttanti āha ‘‘neva naṃ uggaṇhātī’’tiādi. Esa nayo āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇātiādīsupi.
野谷等杂谷既然已经包含在稻等根生谷里,所以说“七种也是如此”。六十天成熟的,是善谷中殊胜的一类,名叫稻,因为“被称誉”而得名。而在《物质功德的阐明》中则说:巴利
Nīvārādiupadhaññassa sāliyādimūladhaññantogadhattā ‘‘sattavidhassāpī’’ti vuttaṃ. Saṭṭhidinaparipāko sukadhaññaviseso sāli nāma salīyate sīlāghateti katvā. Dabbaguṇapakāse pana –
另外,谷物按稻、六十日熟谷和普通稻谷分成三类;
那里有冬季的稻谷,也有夏季生长的六十日稻;
稻谷被称为vīhi,据说是在雨季时生长,或者说是在雨季时成熟。巴利
‘‘Atha dhaññaṃ tidhā sāli-saṭṭhikavīhibhedato; Sālayo hemantā tatra, saṭṭhikā gimhajā api; Vīhayo tvāsaḷhākhyātā, vassakālasamubbha vā’’ti. –
已说。稻谷,因为能维持、能增长众生的生命,所以叫vīhi,也就是谷物。大麦叫yava,意思是应当被混合,因为它太粗糙,要掺别的东西才能吃。小麦叫godhūma,意思是缠绕、贯穿、阻碍,也叫“蛮族的食物”。小米叫kaṅgu,因为美好而令人喜爱,是一种特别细小的谷物。稗子叫varaka,因为太粗糙而受到排斥,或者因为能消除饥饿而被人食用。䅟子叫kudrūsaka,意思是败坏血液,因为会改变肤色,也叫“govaḍḍhana”。这七种以及它们的各类,因为善于储存、善于滋养,所以称为“谷物”。用“不仅……”等话,是表示这里用“受持”这个词来说明接受和执取。在这些情况中也是如此。因为世尊说过“诸比丘,我允许五种脂肪药:熊脂、鱼脂、鳄鱼脂、猪脂、驴脂”,所以这五种药也属于特别开许的。然而,因为说过“按时受持”,所以受持是允许的,因此说“除了特别开许的以外”。为了表明“肉”这个词也包括鱼肉,所以说“生肉和鱼”,应当知道,三净鱼肉——不见、不闻、不疑——是允许的,或者通过说明其用法,显示了异形单剩法。巴利
Vuttaṃ. Vahati, brūheti vā sattānaṃ jīvitanti vīhi, sassaṃ. Yuvitabbo missitabboti yavo. So hi atilūkhatāya aññena missetvā paribhuñjīyati. Gudhati parivedhati palibuddhatīti godhūmo, yaṃ ‘‘milakkhabhojana’’ntipi vadanti. Sobhanattā kamanīyabhāvaṃ gacchatīti kaṅgu, atisukhumadhaññaviseso. Varīyati atilūkhatāya nivārīyati, khuddāpaṭivinayanato vā bhajīyatīti varako. Koraṃ rudhiraṃ dūsatīti kudrūsako, vaṇṇasaṅkamanena yo ‘‘govaḍḍhano’’tipi vuccati. Tāni sattapi sappabhedā nidhāne posane sādhuttena ‘‘dhaññānī’’ti vuccanti. ‘‘Na kevalañcā’’tiādinā sampaṭicchanaṃ, parāmasanañca idha paṭiggahaṇasaddena vuttanti dasseti. Evamīdisesu. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave, vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sūkaravasaṃ gadrabhavasa’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā idaṃ pañcavidhampi bhesajjaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ nāma. Tassa pana ‘‘kāle paṭiggahita’’nti vuttattā paṭiggahaṇaṃ vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘aññatra odissa anuññātā’’ti. Maṃsa-saddena macchānampi maṃsaṃ gahitaṃ evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘āmakamaṃsamacchāna’’nti vuttaṃ, tikoṭiparisuddhaṃ macchamaṃsaṃ anuññātaṃ adiṭṭhaṃ, asutaṃ, aparisaṅkitanti vā payogassa dassanato virūpekasesanayo dassito anenāti veditabbaṃ.
八岁是女孩,十岁是少女;
到了十二岁时,就被称为少女。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhavassā bhave gorī, dasavassā tu kaññakā; Sampatte dvādasavasse, kumārītibhidhīyate’’ti. –
他们说。不过在这里,按照是否与男子有过交往来区分女人和少女,所以说“女人,就是与男子有过交往的”。所谓“依奴仆之称谓”,就是依照奴仆的称呼方式。所谓“如此说”,就是依那种如法的言说而说的时候。为了指明律藏注释书中得出的判断,所以说“依律藏”。这一点应当从《小屋戒》的解说等(《波罗夷注释》364)中取来理解。巴利
Vadanti . Idha pana purisantaragatāgatavasena itthikumārikābhedoti āha ‘‘itthīti purisantaragatā’’tiādi. Dāsidāsavasenevāti dāsidāsavohāravaseneva. Evaṃ vutteti tādisena kappiyavacanena vutte. Vinayaṭṭhakathāsu āgatavinicchayaṃ sandhāya ‘‘vinayavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. So kuṭikārasikkhāpadavaṇṇanādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 364) gahetabbo.
人们在这里撒下种子,或者撒下的种子在这里受到保护,所以叫“田”,也就是稻田,因此说“其中生长早熟谷”。所谓“早熟谷”,是指在晚熟谷之前生长的谷物,把“na”变成“ṇa”,也就是稻米等。为了显示“园地”的意思——晚熟谷在这里住立、安住,所以说“园地”等。晚熟谷,按照前面说的方式,就是早熟谷之后生长的谷物。这样显示了与注释书方法相符的意思之后,现在为了显示与律藏正文“田,就是生长早熟谷或晚熟谷的地方”(《波罗夷》104)相符的意思,所以说“或者在哪里”等。“为了那个目的”,就是为了田的目的。“未作地”,就是没有经过整治、专门用于这个目的的地块。以“田与园地”等,显示这仅仅是举例。以“等”字包含了池塘、水井等。巴利
Bījaṃ khipanti ettha, khittaṃ vā bījaṃ tāyatīti khettaṃ, kedāroti āha ‘‘yasmiṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ ruhatī’’ti. Aparaṇṇassa pubbe pavattamannaṃ pubbaṇṇaṃ na-kārassa ṇa-kāraṃ katvā, sāliādi . Vasanti patiṭṭhahanti aparaṇṇāni etthāti vatthūti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘vatthu nāmā’’tiādinā. Pubbaṇṇassa aparaṃ pavattamannaṃ aparaṇṇaṃ vuttanayena. Evaṃ aṭṭhakathānayānurūpaṃ atthaṃ dassetvā idāni ‘‘khettaṃ nāma yattha pubbaṇṇaṃ vā aparaṇṇaṃ vā jāyatī’’ti (pārā. 104) vuttavinayapāḷinayānurūpampi atthaṃ dassento ‘‘yattha vā’’tiādimāha. Tadatthāyāti khettatthāya. Akatabhūmibhāgoti aparisaṅkhato taduddesiko bhūmibhāgo. ‘‘Khettavatthu sīsenā’’tiādinā nidassanamattametanti dasseti. Ādi-saddena pokkharaṇīkūpādayo saṅgahitā.
属于使者的,或者应该由使者去做的,就是使者的事务。信,是书面的教令。口信,是口头的教令。从一家到另一家,就是从某一家到另一家。小行,是比使者之行更少的行走,也就是不长途跋涉、短途行走的意思。对这两者的反复从事,就叫从事,所以说“做这两者”。因此,正因为做这两者本身就是从事。巴利
Dūtassa idaṃ, dūtena vā kātumarahatīti dūteyyaṃ. Paṇṇanti lekhasāsanaṃ. Sāsananti mukhasāsanaṃ. Gharā gharanti aññasmā gharā aññaṃ gharaṃ. Khuddakagamananti dūteyyagamanato appataragamanaṃ, anaddhānagamanaṃ rassagamananti attho. Tadubhayesaṃ anuyuñjanaṃ anuyogoti āha ‘‘tadubhayakaraṇa’’nti. Tasmāti tadubhayakaraṇasseva anuyogabhāvato.
买就是购买,辗转拿取,是把属于自己的财物给出去。因为在交换物品时,他们把“kī”这个音读作售卖,“卖”就是售卖;他们说,首先是把属于自己的财物给他人。不过在《心义灯》等注疏里说:“‘买’是拿取他人的物品,‘卖’是把自己的物品给出去。”(《心义灯》注2.594)这和《律藏注》中的话一致:“当人把他人之物拿到自己手中时,就是‘被买’;当人把自己的物品交到他人手中时,就是‘被卖’。”(《波罗夷注》515)欺骗就是制造幻象,依凭机智善巧而夺取他人财物,这样说。所谓秤,就是用它来称量、计量;用它作弊,就称为“秤欺”。而做这件事的人,是依于用秤取形、取肢、覆藏形状等方式来做的,所以说有四种。自己将要拿取的物品放在后段,要给他人的放在前段,这样来称量,所以说“拿取时放在后段”等。压就是压迫,在前段压迫,这是关联。根上的绳子,就是系在秤根上的绳子。顶端也是这样。那是指铁粉。巴利
Kayanaṃ kayo, paramparā gahetvā attano dhanassa dānaṃ. Kī-saddañhi dabbavinimaye paṭhanti vikkayanaṃ vikkayo, paṭhamameva attano dhanassa paresaṃ dānanti vadanti. Sāratthadīpaniyādīsu pana ‘‘kaya’’nti parabhaṇḍassa gahaṇaṃ. Vikkayanti attano bhaṇḍassa dāna’’nti (sārattha. ṭī. 2.594) vuttaṃ. Tadeva ‘‘kayitañca hoti parabhaṇḍaṃ attano hatthagataṃ karontena, vikkītañca attano bhaṇḍaṃ parahatthagataṃ karontenā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 515) vinayaṭṭhakathāvacanena sameti. Vañcanaṃ māyākaraṇaṃ, paṭibhānakaraṇavasena upāyakusalatāya parasantakaggahaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Tulā nāma yāya tulīyati pamīyati, tāya kūṭaṃ ‘‘tulākūṭa’’nti vuccati. Taṃ pana karonto tulāya rūpaaṅgagahaṇākārapaṭicchannasaṇṭhānavasena karotīti catubbidhatā vuttā. Attanā gahetabbaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ pacchābhāge, paresaṃ dātabbaṃ pubbabhāge katvā minentīti āha ‘‘gaṇhanto pacchābhāge’’tiādi. Akkamati nippīḷati, pubbabhāge akkamatīti sambandho. Mūle rajjunti tulāya mūle yojitaṃ rajjuṃ. Tathā agge. Tanti ayacuṇṇaṃ.
“铜盘”是指会发光、闪亮的器皿,也就是金、银等做成的饮食器具。这里则特指黄金做的饮器,所以说“金碗”。用那个来欺骗,就是靠欺诈手段来行骗。“展示假相来拿别人的东西,这叫欺诈;而靠辩才、以善巧方便来行骗,这叫欺骗”——这是《黑本生注》等注释书里对欺诈和欺骗所作的区分(《本生注》4.10.19;《长部注》1.10;《中部注》2.149;《相应部注》3.5.1165;《增支部注》2.4.198,义理相同),但在这里,两者都只叫“欺骗”。因为下面用“如何”等话,正是在说明展示假相来拿别人的东西。“价值相等”是指那些碗彼此之间价值没有差别。石头是指能辨别真假的试金石。只要一摩擦就能让人知道是不是金,所以说“摩擦之后”。巴利
Kanati dibbatīti kaṃso, suvaṇṇarajatādimayā bhojanapānapattā. Idha pana sovaṇṇamaye pānapatteti āha ‘‘suvaṇṇapātī’’ti. Tāya vañcananti nikativasena vañcanaṃ. ‘‘Patirūpakaṃ dassetvā parasantakagahaṇañhi nikati, paṭibhānakaraṇavasena pana upāyakusalatāya vañcana’’nti nikativañcanaṃ bhedato kaṇhajātakaṭṭhakathādīsu (jā. aṭṭha. 4.10.19; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.10; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.149; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 3.5.1165; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.198 atthato samānaṃ) vuttaṃ , idha pana tadubhayampi ‘‘vañcana’’micceva. ‘‘Katha’’ntiādinā hi patirūpakaṃ dassetvā parasantakagahaṇameva vibhāveti. Samagghataranti tāsaṃ pātīnaṃ aññamaññaṃ samakaṃ agghavisesaṃ. Pāsāṇeti bhūtābhūtabhāvasañjānanake pāsāṇe. Ghaṃsaneneva suvaṇṇabhāvasaññāpanaṃ siddhanti ‘‘ghaṃsitvā’’tveva vuttaṃ.
“心”是指升斗这类量器的内部,把它弄破、穿孔,就是“心破”。用升斗等量器量芝麻等东西时,堆起来高出的顶端就是“尖”,把那个尖弄平、减少,就是“尖破”。巴利
Hadayanti nāḷiādiminanabhājanānaṃ abbhantaraṃ, tasmiṃ bhedo chiddakaraṇaṃ hadayabhedo. Tilādīnaṃ nāḷiādīhi minanakāle ussāpitā sikhāyeva sikhā, tassā bhedo hāpanaṃ sikhābhedo.
绳子的断裂、弄得不平整,就叫绳破。那些,指酥油等物。内器,指最初放进去的容器。使其升起,就是让它向上鼓起,意思是堆成一堆往上堆。切断,就是移除。巴利
Rajjuyā bhedo visamakaraṇaṃ rajjubhedo. Tānīti sappitelādīni. Antobhājaneti paṭhamaṃ nikkhittabhājane. Ussāpetvāti uggamāpetvā, uddhaṃ rāsiṃ katvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Chindantoti apanento.
对应当作之事以上的推翻、打击,叫“翻案”。收取无事实根据者的贿赂,并不只是再次翻案,所以说“无主……收取”。“以方便”,就是用似是而非的理由。“在那里”,就是在那个欺骗里。不说“事”而说“一事”,是在显示还有其他许多事。因为其他事,比如兔事等,在各处都有说到。“鹿”就是大鹿。“因此”,就是指在捕鹿时的派遣,或者因为他说的“把鹿给我”这个原因。‘hi’这个词只是语气助词。“以瑜伽力”,就是通过咒语、祈祷等运用之力。“以幻力”,就是不靠念咒,而通过能迷惑眼睛、让虚假显现为真实的幻术之力。因为靠这种幻术,不是摩尼宝等东西也会显现成摩尼宝等的样子。所谓“腕环”,是一种符合家族传统的装饰品,世间叫它“祭祀线”。在《婆迦梨长老譬喻》里也说过——巴利
Kattabbakammato uddhaṃ koṭanaṃ paṭihananaṃ ukkoṭanaṃ. Abhūtakārīnaṃ lañjaggahaṇaṃ, na pana puna kammāya ukkoṭanamattanti āha ‘‘assāmike…pe… ggahaṇa’’nti. Upāyehīti kāraṇapatirūpakehi. Tatrāti tasmiṃ vañcane. ‘‘Vatthu’’nti avatvā ‘‘ekaṃ vatthu’’nti vadanto aññānipi atthi bahūnīti dasseti. Aññānipi hi sasavatthuādīni tattha tattha vuttāni. Miganti mahantaṃ migaṃ. Tena hīti migaggahaṇe uyyojanaṃ, yena vā kāraṇena ‘‘migaṃ me dehī’’ti āha, tena kāraṇenāti attho. Hi-saddo nipātamattaṃ. Yogavasenāti vijjājappanādipayogavasena. Māyāvasenāti mantajappanaṃ vinā abhūtassāpi bhūtākārasaññāpanāya cakkhumohanamāyāya vasena. Yāya hi amaṇiādayopi maṇiādiākārena dissanti. Pāmaṅgo nāma kulācārayutto ābharaṇaviseso, yaṃ loke ‘‘yaññopavitta’’nti vadanti. Vakkalittherāpadānepi vuttaṃ –
请看这位年轻人,穿着光洁亮丽的黄衣。
佩戴金色饰物的肢体,吸引众人目光、令人心生欢喜。巴利
‘‘Passathetaṃ māṇavakaṃ, pītamaṭṭhanivāsanaṃ; Hemayaññopavittaṅgaṃ, jananettamanohara’’nti. (apa. 2.54.40);
在这部注释书里也听到并记下了这样的说法:“‘穿着淡黄色衣’的意思是穿着光滑金色布料的衣服。‘佩戴金线’的意思是身体装饰着金环。”听闻就是欺骗,是不正直,所以说“诡诈行”,意思是歪曲的行为。用“即这些”等话显示它们有同一个所依。用“因此”等话显示所获得的功德。如果有人主张四个句子各有不同的所依,就用“某些人”等话来驳斥他们的说法。其中,“某些人”指作简要解释的诸位老师和北寺的住者,用“然而这”等话说明他们的说法不合理,因为已经被欺骗所包含的内容又被重复执取了。巴利
Tadaṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘pītamaṭṭhanivāsananti siliṭṭhasuvaṇṇavaṇṇavatthe nivatthanti attho. Hemayaññopavittaṅganti suvaṇṇapāmaṅgalaggitagattanti attho’’ti (apa. aṭṭha. 2.54.40) savanaṃ saṭhanaṃ sāvi, anujukatā, tenāha ‘‘kuṭilayogo’’ti, jimhatāyogoti attho. ‘‘Etesaṃyevā’’tiādinā tulyādhikaraṇataṃ dasseti. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādi laddhaguṇadassanaṃ. Ye pana catunnampi padānaṃ bhinnādhikaraṇataṃ vadanti, tesaṃ vādamāha ‘‘kecī’’tiādinā. Tattha ‘‘kecī’’ti sārasamāsakārakā ācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca, tesaṃ taṃ na yuttaṃ vañcanena saṅgahitasseva puna gahitattāti dasseti ‘‘taṃ panā’’tiādinā.
“杀害”是就拳打、鞭打等伤害、恼害而言,并不是指杀生。因为“杀”这个词在“恼害”的意义上也会出现,比如“打杀自己后哭泣”等说法中;这里“杀害”一词也应当理解为仅用于恼害的意思。不过有些人说:“像‘先断除杀生’等说的是自己去做,而这里说的是让别人去做。”这种说法不能成立,因为已经说过“由身语加行所生起的思,有六种加行”。正如虽然同属不接受的事物,但为了显示在出家人身上有不可接受的具体差别,才分别说女人、少女、女奴、男奴等;又正如虽然同属不与取,但为了显示不与取的不同形式,才分别说秤欺等;同样,对于与杀生同义的“杀害”再重复执取,并没有必要,因为并不存在需要那样分别的内容。因此,如前所说的含义更为善妙。巴利
Māraṇanti muṭṭhipahārakasātāḷanādīhi hiṃsanaṃ viheṭhanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na tu pāṇātipātaṃ. Viheṭhanatthepi hi vadha-saddo dissati ‘‘attānaṃ vadhitvā vadhitvā rodeyyā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 880) māraṇa-saddopi idha viheṭhaneyeva vattatīti daṭṭhabbo. Keci pana ‘‘pubbe pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’tiādīsu sayaṃkāro, idha paraṃkāro’’ti vadanti, taṃ na sakkā tathā vattuṃ ‘‘kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā, cha payogā’’ti ca vuttattā. Yathā hi appaṭiggāhabhāvasāmaññepi sati pabbajitehi appaṭiggahitabbavatthuvisesabhāvasandassanatthaṃ itthikumāridāsidāsādayo vibhāgena vuttā. Yathā ca parasantakassa haraṇabhāvato adinnādānabhāvasāmaññepi sati tulākūṭādayo adinnādānavisesabhāvasandassanatthaṃ vibhāgena vuttā, na evaṃ pāṇātipātapariyāyassa vadhassa puna gahaṇe payojanaṃ atthi tathāvibhajitabbassābhāvato, tasmā yathāvuttoyevattho sundarataroti.
“颠倒取”是指以特别的方式、从各方面强烈地使人迷惑,或者就是偷盗。因为偷盗、贼行、欺骗是同一个意思。它按原因分为两种,所以说“雪颠倒取”等等。“欺骗者”就是偷盗的人,或者使人迷惑的人,也就是说,欺骗之后拿走他们的财物。“行”则是对那个行为的执取。对于“行于道路之人”,则是对敌方也有涉及。掠夺就是抢劫,即ālopa。粗暴行为就是sahasākāra。以粗暴方式进行的,就是sāhasikā,那种行为也是如此。巴利
Viparāmosoti visesena samantato bhusaṃ mosāpanaṃ muyhanakaraṇaṃ, thenanaṃ vā. Theyyaṃ corikā mosoti hi pariyāyo. So kāraṇavasena duvidhoti āha ‘‘himaviparāmoso’’tiādi. Musantīti corenti, mosenti vā muyhanaṃ karonti, mosetvā tesaṃ santakaṃ gaṇhantīti vuttaṃ hoti. Yanti ca tassā kiriyāya parāmasanaṃ. Maggappaṭipannaṃ jananti parapakkhepi adhikāro. Ālopanaṃ vilumpanaṃ ālopo. Sahasā karaṇaṃ sahasākāro. Sahasā pavattitā sāhasikā, sāva kiriyā tathā.
“到此为止”是指从“断除杀生”开始,一直到“远离粗暴行为”结束,以这一段文字为范围。这里不取中间的分别,只按照巴利文中原样诵出的方式,这戒包含了二十六条学处;因为大多数条目没有展开分别,所以叫小戒。要知道,这里小、中、大等的区别是就说法方式而言,不是就法本身而言。正因如此,这里对略说总举、未加分别的学处加以分别,才说中戒的说法,所以说“广说中戒时”。小戒注释完毕。巴利
Ettāvatāti ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādinā ‘‘sahasākārā paṭivirato’’ti pariyosānena etapparimāṇena pāṭhena. Antarabhedaṃ aggahetvā pāḷiyaṃ yathārutamāgatavaseneva chabbīsatisikkhāpadasaṅgahametaṃ sīlaṃ yebhuyyena sikkhāpadānamavibhattattā cūḷasīlaṃ nāmāti attho. Desanāvasena hi idha cūḷamajjhimādibhāvo veditabbo, na dhammavasena. Tathā hi idhasaṅkhittena uddiṭṭhānaṃ sikkhāpadānaṃ avibhattānaṃ vibhajanavasena majjhimasīladesanā pavattā, tenevāha ‘‘majjhimasīlaṃ vitthārento’’ti.Cūḷasīlavaṇṇanā niṭṭhitā.
中戒的注释巴利
Majjhimasīlavaṇṇanā
11 对于“正如有些尊敬的”等教导,注释书说“现在”等,以此建立关联。这里依照注释书的方法:“正如”是表譬喻的不变词。“或”是表选择,用它来选择这个意思:即使一个凡夫努力称赞我的功德,也只是说“断除杀生,远离杀生”等,或者以指向他人的方式,总之只说到戒行本身,不超过这个范围。或者以指向他人的方式说:“正如有些尊敬的沙门、婆罗门,自称是沙门、婆罗门,也被他人如此认可,却因为不知道、没有能力实行与之相应之行,所以做不到;但这位不是这样。这位沙门乔达摩则完全圆满了与沙门相应之行。”总之只说到戒行本身,不超过这个范围。“而”是话语的装饰,因为以选择之义就能成立提出等意义。“诸”就是其他。也说“某些”。“尊敬的”是对善士的亲爱称呼。善士们用“尊敬的”或“诸天所爱”或“尊者”来称呼他人。“沙门婆罗门”指因为出家而成为沙门的人,以及仅凭出身而成为婆罗门的人。巴利
11. ‘‘Yathā vā paneke bhonto’’tiādidesanāya sambandhamāha ‘‘idānī’’tiādinā. Tatthāyamaṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – yathāti opammatthe nipāto. Vāti vikappanatthe, tena imamatthaṃ vikappeti ‘‘ussāhaṃ katvā mama vaṇṇaṃ vadamānopi puthujjano pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādinā parānuddesikanayena vā sabbathāpi ācārasīlamattameva vadeyya, na taduttariṃ. ‘‘Yathāpaneke bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇabhāvaṃ paṭijānamānā, parehi ca tathā sambhāviyamānā tadanurūpapaṭipattiṃ ajānanato, asamatthanato ca na abhisambhuṇanti, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana samaṇo gotamo sabbathāpi samaṇasāruppapaṭipattiṃ pūresiyevā’’ti evaṃ aññuddesikanayena vā sabbathāpi ācārasīlamattameva vadeyya, na taduttarinti. Panāti vacanālaṅkāre vikappanattheneva upanyāsādiatthassa sijjhanato. Eketi aññe. ‘‘Ekacce’’tipi vadanti. Bhontoti sādhūnaṃ piyasamudāhāro. Sādhavo hi pare ‘‘bhonto’’ti vā ‘‘devānaṃ piyā’’ti vā ‘‘āyasmanto’’ti vā samālapanti. Samaṇabrāhmaṇāti yaṃ kiñci pabbajjaṃ upagatatāya samaṇā. Jātimattena ca brāhmaṇāti.
这里说的“信”,是指对四种事的信,所以论师说“业……”等等。应当从业与业果的关联来看对今生和来世的信,也就是“业在这里成熟,业果应当被感受”。为了说明这个道理,论师用遮遣的方式,通过“这是我的……”等说法来表达。“将会回报”,意思是将会作出回报。为了证明这一点,又说了“如此布施的……”等等。这是以说法的要点为主,通过举例来显示。因此也举例显示了四种缘,所以说“然而从义理上说……”等等。巴利
Saddhā nāma idha catubbidhesu ṭhānesūti āha ‘‘kammañcā’’tiādi. Kammakammaphalasambandheneva idhalokaparalokasaddahanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘ettha kammaṃ vipaccati, kammaphalañca anubhavitabba’’nti. Tadatthaṃ byatirekato ñāpeti ‘‘ayaṃ me’’tiādinā. Paṭikarissatīti paccupakāraṃ karissati. Tadeva samatthetuṃ ‘‘evaṃdinnāni hī’’tiādimāha. Desanāsīsamattaṃ padhānaṃ katvā nidassanato. Tena catubbidhampi paccayaṃ nidassetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘atthato panā’’tiādi.
“Seyyathidaṃ”这个词是一个虚词,意思是“那是什么呢”,或者是一个虚词组合。通过它,在“损害种子村和草木村”这一句中,虽然按照词序来说,种子村和草木村不是重点,但在需要分别说明的地方,它却像重点一样被指出来。因为词序是一回事,义理的次序又是另一回事,所以经文问“那个种子村和草木村是什么”。因为当它被分别说明时,与它相关的损害也就被分别说明了。为了显示这个道理,所以经文说“他们住于从事其损害”。也正是因此,经中以“根种子”等说法来指示它。根本身就是种子,叫根种子;或者根是种子的所属,也叫根种子,这里有两种含义。其余的词也同样理解。因此不应该责难说:“为什么问了种子村和草木村之后,只分别说明了种子村?”因为在那里,以第一种含义指示了种子村,以第二种含义指示了草木村,应该知道这两者是通过总称的方式,或者通过“根种子、根种子、根种子”这样省略的方式被指出的,正因如此,后面才说“一切”等。在药物使用中极度渗透的,叫ativisaṃ,或叫ativisā,也叫“大药”,即kacchaka,也就是kāḷakacchaka,还有人叫它pilakkha。Kapitthana是一种酸味果实的白色树木。因为它会动摇、颤动,所以叫kapitthana,用的是thanapaccaya后缀;或者kapi指猴子,它的果实像猴子的乳房,所以叫kapitthana。《清净道论注》中说:“kapitthana就是pippali树。”Phaḷubīja叫pabbabīja。Ajjaka叫白叶。Phaṇijjaka叫samīraṇa。Hirivera叫vāra。通过“只是能够生长”这句话,说明在其它条件具备时,因为能产生相似的果实,所以是特殊原因,因此“种子”一词也用于有能力生长的坚实果实。其它的则归入非种子的范畴,而且那是从树上分离下来的。如果没有分离,不管它是那样还是别样,按照前面说的第二种含义,就叫“草木村”。律藏中通过“其中”等语,从事相上显示它们的差别。这里应该说的,前面已经说过了。巴利
‘‘Seyyathida’’nti ayaṃ saddo ‘‘so katamo’’ti atthe eko nipāto, nipātasamudāyo vā, tena ca bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhapade saddakkamena appadhānabhūtopi bījagāmabhūtagāmo vibhajjitabbaṭṭhāne padhānabhūto viya paṭiniddisīyati. Añño hi saddakkamo añño atthakkamoti āha ‘‘katamo so bījagāmabhūtagāmo’’ti. Tasmiñhi vibhatte tabbisayasamārambhopi vibhattova hoti. Imamatthañhi dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa samārambhaṃ anuyuttā viharantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Teneva ca pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘mūlabīja’’ntiādinā so niddiṭṭhoti. Mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlaṃ bījaṃ etassātipi mūlabījanti idha dvidhā attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ato na codetabbametaṃ ‘‘kasmā panettha bījagāmabhūtagāmaṃ pucchitvā bījagāmo eva vibhatto’’ti. Tattha hi paṭhamena atthena bījagāmo niddiṭṭho, dutiyena bhūtagāmo, duvidhopesa sāmaññaniddesena vā mūlabījañca mūlabījañca mūlabījanti ekasesanayena vā niddiṭṭhoti veditabbo, teneva vakkhati ‘‘sabbañheta’’ntiādiṃ. Atīva visati bhesajjapayogesūti ativisaṃ, ativisā vā, yā ‘‘mahosadha’’ntipi vuccati kacchakoti kāḷakacchako, yaṃ ‘‘pilakkho’’tipi vadanti. Kapitthanoti ambilaṅkuraphalo setarukkho. So hi kampati calatīti kapithano thanapaccayena, kapīti vā makkaṭo, tassa thanasadisaṃ phalaṃ yassāti kapitthano. ‘‘Kapitthanoti pippalirukkho’’ti (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.108) hi visuddhimaggaṭīkāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Phaḷubījaṃ nāma pabbabījaṃ. Ajjakanti setapaṇṇāsaṃ. Phaṇijjakanti samīraṇaṃ. Hiriveranti vāraṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhanasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bījasaddoti dasseti ‘‘viruhanasamatthamevā’’ti iminā. Itarañhi abījasaṅkhyaṃ gataṃ, tañca kho rukkhato viyojitameva. Aviyojitaṃ pana tathā vā hotu, aññathā vā ‘‘bhūtagāmo’’tveva vuccati yathāvuttena dutiyaṭṭhena. Vinayā (pāci. 91) nurūpato tesaṃ visesaṃ dasseti ‘‘tatthā’’tiādinā. Yamettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
12 12. 储存叫 sannidhi,以它来作,就叫 sannidhikāro,即食物饮料等。这样,是就 kāra 一词有业格的意义,才说 sannidhikāraparibhoga。还有另一种方式:就像本该说 ācayaṃ gāmino,却通过省略鼻音而说成 ācayagāmino,同样,这里本该说 sannidhikāraṃ paribhoga,也通过省略鼻音而说成 sannidhikāraparibhoga,意思是储存之后而受用。依律而言,就是依律藏所传的威仪。因为律藏所传的威仪,通过省略 uttara 而称为 vinayo,或者说调伏身语就是律。由于依经教的行道被单独列出,所以这里只取律的威仪。正确地刻划烦恼,所以叫 sallekho;而由于律的威仪被单独列出,依经教的行道才是 sallekho。已接受,指以身或身所系之物接受。Aparajju 指第二天。给予,指以交换的方式给予。令放置,指通过使之成为自己的而令放置。那些物品也可以依信受取等方式来受用。若依经教的方式,就不是 sallekho。巴利
12. Sannidhānaṃ sannidhi, tāya karīyateti sannidhikāro, annapānādi. Evaṃ kāra-saddassa kammatthataṃ sandhāya ‘‘sannidhikāraparibhoga’’nti vuttaṃ. Ayamaparo nayo – yathā ‘‘ācayaṃ gāmino’’ti vattabbe anunāsikalopena ‘‘ācayagāmino’’ti (dha. sa. 10) niddeso kato, evamidhāpi ‘‘sannidhikāraṃ paribhoga’’nti vattabbe anunāsikalopena ‘‘sannidhikāraparibhoga’’nti vuttaṃ, sannidhiṃ katvā paribhoganti attho. Vinayavasenāti vinayāgatācāravasena. Vinayāgatācāro hi uttaralopena ‘‘vinayo’’ti vutto, kāyavācānaṃ vā vinayanaṃ vinayo. Suttantanayapaṭipattiyā visuṃ gahitattā vinayācāroyeva idha labbhati. Sammā kilese likhatīti sallekhoti ca vinayācārassa visuṃ gahitattā suttantanayapaṭipatti eva. Paṭiggahitanti kāyena vā kāyapaṭibaddhena vā paṭiggahitaṃ. Aparajjūti aparasmiṃ divase. Datvāti parivattanavasena datvā. Ṭhapāpetvāti ca attano santakakaraṇena ṭhapāpetvā. Tesampi santakaṃ vissāsaggāhādivasena paribhuñjituṃ vaṭṭati. Suttantanayavasena sallekho eva na hoti.
凡是那些随顺他们的东西,这里应当理解为:除了有谷粒的饮料、蜜花饮料和熟枣饮料之外,其余一切果实、花、叶的汁液,都是随顺饮料。意思是,在各自限定的时间内没有决意、没有指定。巴利
Yāni ca tesaṃ anulomānīti ettha sānulomadhaññarasaṃ, madhukapuppharasaṃ, pakkaḍākarasañca ṭhapetvā avasesā sabbepi phalapupphapattarasā anulomapānānīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, yathāparicchedakālaṃ anadhiṭṭhitaṃ avikappitanti attho.
被储存起来的东西就是“储存”,也就是物品本身。它被辗转使用、被允许,所以叫“方便”;依照允许的说法去实行,关于这个的谈论就叫“方便说”。与此相反的就是“非方便说”,即使不涉及允许,也以知足来实行;或者“方便”这个词指的是原因,因此依允许的原因所说的谈论就是“方便说”。如果不这样说,而是只依知足来说,那就是“非方便说”。“如果”等句,是显示另一种布施方式。诵出巴利经典就是“诵”。询问义理就是“问”。“不应给与”这句话,显示不布施会破坏少欲知足。Appahonteti:指没有能力做的时候。Paccāsāya:指期望获得衣的时候。Anuññātakāle:指被允许的时间——如果咖提那没有敷展,就是后一个迦提月;如果咖提那已经敷展,就是连同后一个迦提月一起共四个月的冬季;非时的情况下,则是任何一个月份。如此,在第三咖提那学处等中所允许的时间。Sutta:指缝衣的线。作律仪后:指决意了根本衣或资具布之后,把所期望的衣作为根本衣放置,这样它又能得到一个月的宽免。按这个方法,如所说的那样,可以随自己的意愿,把互相作为根本衣放置;或者依分别而作律仪后。为什么不应给与呢?回答说:“因为会成为储存,并且破坏少欲知足。”巴利
Sannidhīyateti sannidhi, vatthameva. Pariyāyati kappīyatīti pariyāyo, kappiyavācānusārena paṭipatti, tassa kathāti pariyāyakathā. Tabbiparīto nippariyāyo, kappiyampi anupaggamma santuṭṭhivasena paṭipatti, pariyāya-saddo vā kāraṇe, tasmā kappiyakāraṇavasena vuttā kathā pariyāyakathā. Tadapi avatvā santuṭṭhivasena vuttā nippariyāyo.‘‘Sace’’tiādi aññassa dānākāradassanaṃ. Pāḷiyā uddisanaṃ uddeso. Atthassa pucchā paripucchanaṃ. ‘‘Adātuṃ na vaṭṭatī’’ti iminā adāne sallekhakopanaṃ dasseti. Appahonteti kātuṃ appahonake sati. Paccāsāyāti cīvarapaṭilābhāsāya. Anuññātakāleti anatthate kathine eko pacchimakattikamāso, atthate kathine pacchimakattikamāsena saha hemantikā cattāro māsā, piṭṭhisamaye yo koci eko māsoti evaṃ tatiyakathinasikkhāpadādīsu anuññātasamaye. Suttanti cīvarasibbanasuttaṃ. Vinayakammaṃ katvāti mūlacīvaraṃ parikkhāracoḷaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā paccāsācīvarameva mūlacīvaraṃ katvā ṭhapetabbaṃ, taṃ puna māsaparihāraṃ labhati, etena upāyena yāva icchati, tāva aññamaññaṃ mūlacīvaraṃ katvā ṭhapetuṃ labbhatīti vuttanayena, vikappanāvasena vā vinayakammaṃ katvā. Kasmā na vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘sannidhi ca hoti sallekhañca kopetī’’ti.
上方像亭子一样的板盖车,或者全部覆盖起来做成的载具,叫vayha。两边装上金银等做的椽木,按照金翅鸟翅膀的样子做出来的,叫sandamānitā。用木板等做成的轿式乘具,叫sivikā。叫做antolikā的布囊,就是pāṭaṅkī。“一个比丘的”等语,是用来证明这个意思的。Araññatthāya:为了去森林。Dhotapādakatthāya:为了保护洗过的脚。Saṃhanitabbā bandhitabbā:应当合起来、应当绑起来,就是鞋履本身,意思是成双的鞋履。Aññassa dātabbā:应当给别人的,这里按照前面所说的方式理解为布施。巴利
Upari maṇḍapasadisaṃ padaracchannaṃ, sabbapaliguṇṭhimaṃ vā chādetvā kataṃ vayhaṃ. Ubhosu passesu suvaṇṇarajatādimayā gopānasiyo datvā garuḷapakkhakanayena katā sandamānitā. Phalakādinā kataṃ pīṭhakayānaṃ sivikā. Antolikāsaṅkhātā paṭapoṭalikā pāṭaṅkī. ‘‘Ekabhikkhussa hī’’tiādi tadatthassa samatthanaṃ. Araññatthāyāti araññagamanatthāya. Dhotapādakatthāyāti dhovitapādānamanurakkhaṇatthāya. Saṃhanitabbā bandhitabbāti saṅghāṭā, upāhanāyeva saṅghāṭā tathā, yugaḷabhūtā upāhanāti attho. Aññassa dātabbāti ettha vuttanayena dānaṃ veditabbaṃ.
“床”只是举例说明而已。其实,所有椅子、垫子等适合坐卧的用具都应该算在内,因为对它们也要同样对待。巴利
Mañcoti nidassanamattaṃ. Sabbepi hi pīṭhabhisādayo nisīdanasayanayoggā gahetabbā tesupi tathāpaṭipajjitabbato.
正是由于疾病的缘故,才允许自己受用香,以此来说明“在患有瘙痒、疥疮、皮肤病等疾病时”这句话。前面已经说过“当特征存在时,原因义在某些情况下也会出现”,这里也是如此。其中,痒就是瘙痒,疥就是疥疮,皮肤病就是白癜风之类。“叫人取来”意思是:不是随便用什么方式让人取来,而是从已受亲属邀请之处,或依照乞食的规矩让人取来。对于病人,为了药资具而提出请求也是允许的。依据“诸比丘,我允许取香在门板上按五指印,取花放在精舍一边”这段开示,所以说了“在门口”等话。熏屋,就是熏香住处或熏香塔庙。“等”字包含了塔庙、佛像供养等内容。巴利
Ābādhapaccayā eva attanā paribhuñjitabbā gandhā vaṭṭantīti dasseti ‘‘kaṇḍukacchuchavidosādiābādhe satī’’ti iminā. ‘‘Lakkhaṇe hi sati hetutthopi katthaci sambhavatī’’ti heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Tattha kaṇḍūti khajju. Kacchūti vitacchikā. Chavidosoti kilāsādi. Āharāpetvāti ñātipavāritato bhikkhācāravattena vā na yena kenaci vā ākārena harāpetvā. Bhesajjapaccayehi gilānassa viññattipi vaṭṭati. ‘‘Anujānāmi bhikkhave , gandhaṃ gahetvā kavāṭe pañcaṅgulikaṃ dātuṃ, pupphaṃ gahetvā vihāre ekamantaṃ nikkhipitu’’nti (cūḷava. 264) vacanato ‘‘dvāre’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gharadhūpanaṃ vihāravāsanā, cetiyagharavāsanā vā. Ādi-saddena cetiyapaṭimāpūjādīni saṅgaṇhāti.
因为会被烦恼所触及,所以叫“食”,也就是任何可以受用的东西。因此,为了遮止对前面所说内容的过度引申,就说“应知其余未说者”。意思是:由于是依剩余法则而取,所以应知其余未说者。若问“那是什么”,就说“即如下”等。“在那样的时候”,指入村困难等时候。干肉,就是干肉。“容器”一词应连同酥油、油、糖等一起理解,因为彼此不可分离。“在适当时候”,就是清晨。“水中泥中”,指在水中和泥中。这里“中”是处格,或表示状态特征。“请坐”,就是请坐下。“正在进食者”,指正在进食的比丘,这是与格,或表不敬意的属格。这里通过动作间隙的断绝关系来表示不敬意。“伸颈”是抽象名词的中性词,意思是伸长脖子、把脖子伸展开;或者,因为吃得太饱而需要伸长脖子,这样解释也可以。“即使四个月”,指雨安居的四个月。财富称为家产,拥有它的人称为有家产者;既是剃度者又是有家产者,所以叫剃度有家产者,他的生计也是这样,就是以此为生。应当知道,这只是举例,以“食”字所表示的,是指储存物品之类。巴利
Kilesehi āmasitabbato āmisaṃ, yaṃ kiñci upabhogārahaṃ vatthu, tasmā yathāvuttānampi pasaṅgaṃ nivāretuṃ ‘‘vuttāvasesaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti āha, pārisesanayato gahitattā vuttāvasesaṃ daṭṭhabbanti adhippāyo. Kiṃ panetanti vuttaṃ ‘‘seyyathida’’ntiādi. Tathārūpe kāleti gāmaṃ pavisituṃ dukkarādikāle. Vallūroti sukkhamaṃsaṃ. Bhājana-saddo sappitelaguḷasaddehi yojetabbo tadavinābhāvittā. Kālassevāti pageva. Udakakaddameti udake ca kaddame ca. Nimitte cetaṃ bhummaṃ, bhāvalakkhaṇe vā. Acchathāti nisīdatha. Bhuñjantassevāti bhuñjato eva bhikkhuno, sampadānavacanaṃ, anādaratthe vā sāmivacanaṃ. Kiriyantarāvacchedanayogena hettha anādaratā. Gīvāyāmakanti bhāvanapuṃsakavacanaṃ, gīvaṃ āyametvā āyataṃ katvāti attho, yathā vā bhutte atibhuttatāya gīvā āyamitabbā hoti, tathātipi vaṭṭati. Catumāsampīti vassānassa cattāro māsepi. Kuṭumbaṃ vuccati dhanaṃ, tadassatthīti kuṭumbiko, muṇḍo ca so kuṭumbiko cāti muṇḍakuṭumbiko, tassa jīvikaṃ tathā, taṃ katvā jīvatīti attho. Nayadassanamattañcetaṃ āmisapadena dassitānaṃ sannidhivatthūnanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
为了说明远离这些的沙门修行方式,说了“然而,对于比丘……”等话。其中,“糖团如多罗果大小”是《义灯》里说的。“约四分之一”是指约一家人的量。不过,因为说了“一米量”,所以有人说它的四分之一就是一钵的量。也有这样的说法:巴利
Tabbirahitaṃ samaṇapaṭipattiṃ dassento ‘‘bhikkhuno panā’’tiādimāha. Tattha ‘‘guḷapiṇḍo tālapakkappamāṇa’’nti sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vuttaṃ. Catubhāgamattanti kuṭumbamattanti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ekā taṇḍulanāḷī’’ti vuttattā pana tassā catubhāgo ekapatthoti vadanti. Vuttañca –
一个拘都婆是一握,四握成为一钵。
四钵他为一阿罗迦,四阿罗迦为一多那。巴利
‘‘Kuḍuvo pasato eko, pattho te caturo siyuṃ; Āḷhako caturo patthā, doṇaṃ vā caturāḷhaka’’nti.
为什么这样说呢?因为已经说了“那些确实……”等等。即使叫人取来之后再存放,也是可以的,更不用说是按原本得到的东西了。通过“在不舒服的时候”等话,说明以清净心存放的物品,受用时不会破坏少欲知足的修行。关于四种共许小屋等,连同作为住处的小屋、布萨堂等,一共五种小屋,所以说“净小屋”等。在那里并没有所谓的储藏,因为允许在屋内煮食、在屋内存放。“如来”等话,则是引出与主题相应的含义。“布片”就是破旧的衣布碎片。巴利
Kasmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘te hī’’tiādi. Āharāpetvāpi ṭhapetuṃ vaṭṭati, pageva yathāladdhaṃ. ‘‘Aphāsukakāle’’tiādinā suddhacittena ṭhapitassa paribhogo sallekhaṃ na kopetīti dasseti. Sammutikuṭikādayo catasso, avāsāgārabhūtena vā uposathāgārādinā saha pañcakuṭiyo sandhāya ‘‘kappiyakuṭiya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Sannidhi nāma natthi tattha antovutthaantopakkassa anuññātattā. ‘‘Tathāgatassā’’tiādinā adhikārānurūpaṃ atthaṃ payojeti. Pilotikakhaṇḍanti jiṇṇacoḷakhaṇḍaṃ.
13 “伸颈”这句话说明,自己主动进入所缘境并没有过失。“仅此”则是指判定、审察以及陈述事由。“仅是词义连接”就是仅仅把词的意思连起来。不过,如果某个词不加以详细解释就无法理解它的含义,那么详细解释也属于词义收摄的范围。巴利
13.‘‘Gīvaṃpasāretvā’’ti etena sayameva āpāthagamane doso natthīti dasseti. Ettakampīti vinicchayavicāraṇā vatthukittanampi. Payojanamattamevāti padatthayojanamattameva. Yassa pana padassa vitthārakathaṃ vinā na sakkā attho viññātuṃ, tattha vitthārakathāpi padatthasaṅgahameva gacchati.
出于好奇而去看,所以叫“看”(pekkhā),也就是按舞者技艺的规矩进行的表演。不过,说“舞者清扫”(naṭasammajja),是因为那是舞者群体在人群中应当做的事。在人群拥挤的集会中做的,就叫“清扫”(sammajja)。但在《精要集》里,他们也说“看会”(pekkhāmaha),按他们的主张,意思是“集会观看的盛会”。关于名叫婆罗多的两兄弟国王和罗摩王打仗等事,由他们的子孙讲述,所以叫“传说”(akkhāna)。连去都不该去,更别说听那些了。用手掌拍打发出的声音叫手掌音,所以说“铜钹”(kaṃsatāḷa);铜钹是一种金属制的乐器,或者金属制的盘,意思是敲打它发出的声音。就手掌拍打声音这个意思,也说“掌击”(pāṇitāḷa)。敲打称为“ghanā”的那类乐器,叫“ghanatāḷa”,也就是木制的标准击板,或者石板做的击板。以咒语,指以降伏鬼神的咒语。“一些人”,指《精要集》的老师们和北方寺院的住众;就像这里一样,在其他出现“一些人”的地方也是如此。据说他们是长部特殊义理的论者。“四方形芒果核击板”(caturassa-ambaṇaka-tāḷa),是用树心木棒等随便什么东西做成四方形芒果核的样子,在四面如法绑好之后敲打乐器。因为它有十一个斗的量、形状特殊,所以叫“芒果核”(ambaṇaka),也叫“bimbisaka”。同样,因为形状像瓮,所以叫“瓮”(kumbha),也就是“ghaṭa”;小诵者们说,那是敲打它的。“撒布”(abbhokkiraṇa),就是给舞台献供。他们在跳舞的地方给天神献供,然后玩耍,这也叫“欢喜”(nandī)。能引生男女结合等烦恼、又因能美化而生的辩才心,叫“美化”(sobhana)。在《精要集》里说“美化妆饰”(sobhanagharaka)。“旃陀罗的”(caṇḍāya alaṃ)就是“旃陀罗”(caṇḍāla),是一种铁球游戏。所谓旃陀罗,是出身低贱、吃狗肉的人,属于他们的,就叫“旃陀罗的”(caṇḍāla)。把麻布用水浸湿后互相拍打的游戏,叫“洗麻布游戏”(sāṇadhovanakīḷā)。用竹子做的游戏叫“竹”(vaṃsa),所以说“把竹子竖起来游戏”(veḷuṃ ussāpetvā kīḷana)。巴利
Kutūhalavasena pekkhitabbato pekkhaṃ, naṭasatthavidhinā payogo. Naṭasamūhena pana janasamūhe kattabbavasena ‘‘naṭasammajja’’nti vuttaṃ. Janānaṃ sammadde samūhe katanti hi sammajjaṃ. Sārasamāse pana ‘‘pekkhāmaha’’ntipi vadanti, ‘‘sammajjadassanussava’’nti tesaṃ mate attho. Bhāratanāmakānaṃ dvebhātukarājūnaṃ, rāmarañño ca yujjhanādikaṃ tappasutehi ācikkhitabbato akkhānaṃ. Gantumpi na vaṭṭati, pageva taṃ sotuṃ. Pāṇinā tāḷitabbaṃ saraṃ pāṇissaranti āha ‘‘kaṃsatāḷa’’nti, lohamayo tūriyajātiviseso kaṃso, lohamayapatto vā, tassa tāḷanasaddanti attho. Pāṇīnaṃ tāḷanasaranti atthaṃ sandhāya pāṇitāḷantipi vadanti. Ghanasaṅkhātānaṃ tūriyavisesānaṃ tāḷanaṃ ghanatāḷaṃ nāma, daṇḍamayasammatāḷaṃ silātalākatāḷaṃ vā. Mantenāti bhūtāvisanamantena. Eketi sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca, yathā cettha, evamito paresupi ‘‘eke’’ti āgataṭṭhānesu. Te kira dīghanikāyassatthavisesavādino. Caturassaambaṇakatāḷaṃ nāma rukkhasāradaṇḍādīsu yena kenaci caturassaambaṇaṃ katvā catūsu passesu dhammena onaddhitvā vāditabhaṇḍassa tāḷanaṃ. Tañhi ekādasadoṇappamāṇamānavisesasaṇṭhānattā ‘‘ambaṇaka’’nti vuccati, bimbisakantipi tasseva nāmaṃ. Tathā kumbhasaṇṭhānatāya kumbho, ghaṭoyeva vā, tassa dhunananti khuddakabhāṇakā. Abbhokkiraṇaṃ raṅgabalikaraṇaṃ. Te hi naccaṭṭhāne devatānaṃ balikaraṇaṃ nāma katvā kīḷanti, yaṃ ‘‘nandī’’tipi vuccati . Itthipurisasaṃyogādikilesajanakaṃ paṭibhānacittaṃ sobhanakaraṇato sobhanakaraṃ nāma. ‘‘Sobhanagharaka’’nti sārasamāse vuttaṃ. Caṇḍāya alanti caṇḍālaṃ, ayoguḷakīḷā. Caṇḍālā nāma hīnajātikā sunakhamaṃsabhojino, tesaṃ idanti caṇḍālaṃ. Sāṇe udakena temetvā aññamaññaṃ ākoṭanakīḷā sāṇadhovanakīḷā. Vaṃsena kataṃ kīḷanaṃ vaṃsanti āha ‘‘veḷuṃ ussāpetvā kīḷana’’nti.
把骨头埋进地里之后,就是在地上挖坑埋好。在星宿时节,就是星宿会合、择时计算的时候。为了说明这件事,他引《增支部·十集》(A. N. 10.106)里的经文,说了“vuttampiceta”等话。其中“tattha”就是指那个洗骨仪式。“以因陀罗网”,是通过念诵洗骨咒语,让别人只看到骨头,看不到肉等,这是一种让肉等消失的幻术。因为这种幻术像因陀罗网一样能够遮盖,所以称为“因陀罗网”,就像彩虹之类一样。“洗骨”,就是洗骨的游戏。巴利
Nikhaṇitvāti bhūmiyaṃ nikhātaṃ katvā. Nakkhattakāleti nakkhattayogachaṇakāle. Tamatthaṃ aṅguttarāgame dasakanipātapāḷiyā (a. ni. 10.106) sādhento ‘‘vuttampiceta’’ntiādimāha. Tatthāti tasmiṃ aṭṭhidhovane. Indajālenāti aṭṭhidhovanamantaṃ parijappetvā yathā pare aṭṭhīniyeva passanti, na maṃsādīni, evaṃ maṃsādīnamantaradhāpanamāyāya. Indassa jālamiva hi paṭicchādituṃ samatthanato ‘‘indajāla’’nti māyā vuccati indacāpādayo viya. Aṭṭhidhovananti aṭṭhidhovanakīḷā.
与象等一起作战:意思是骑在象等上面和别人作战,以及自己和象等一起作战;这里说的是与象等一同跟别人打,或者自己跟象等打。那些“象等”就是指象等。“Mallā”(力士)是互相扭打、翻滚的人,也就是徒手搏斗的人,他们的搏斗就是“mallayuddha”。“Sampahāro”就是交战。“Balaggaṃ”是给军队计数、编组的地方,也就是按“这么多象、这么多马”等等来清点军队的场所。“Senābyūho”是把军队分开部署的地方,或者说是军队的编排布阵,也就是按“象在这边、马在这边”等等,为作战把四兵种军队布置在不同位置,它又按种类分为车阵等。用“ādi”(等)这个词,还包括了轮阵、莲花阵,以及杖阵、蛇阵、圆阵、密集阵等。针对《波逸提》第324条“uyyodhika学处”的分别解说中“三头象为后象军,三匹马为后马军,三辆车为后车军,四名持弓箭的步兵为后步兵军”等,他说了“tayo…pe…ādinā nayena vuttassa”等话。而且应当根据《波逸提》第314条“uyyuttasenā学处”中所说的“十二人大的象、三人大的马、四人大的车、四名持弓箭的步兵”这一特征,以象等来计数理解;由此也驳斥了《大品注》中关于皮革犍度注释所说的“六头母象和一头象,这是一军”的说法。巴利
Hatthiādīhi saddhiṃ yujjhitunti hatthiādīsu abhiruhitvā aññehi saddhiṃ yujjhanaṃ, hatthiādīhi ca saddhiṃ sayameva yujjhanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, hatthiādīhi saddhiṃ aññehi yujjhituṃ, sayaṃ vā yujjhitunti hi attho. Teti hatthiādayo. Aññamaññaṃ mathenti vilothentīti mallā, bāhuyuddhakārakā, tesaṃ yuddhaṃ. Sampahāroti saṅgāmo. Balassa senāya aggaṃ gaṇanakoṭṭhāsaṃ karonti etthāti balaggaṃ, ‘‘ettakā hatthī, ettakā assā’’tiādinā balagaṇanaṭṭhānaṃ. Senaṃ viyūhanti ettha vibhajitvā ṭhapenti, senāya vā ettha byūhanaṃ vinyāsoti senābyūho, ‘‘ito hatthī hontu, ito assā hontū’’tiādinā yuddhatthaṃ caturaṅgabalāya senāya desavisesesu vicāraṇaṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ pana bhedato sakaṭabyūhādivasena. Ādi-saddena cakkapadumabyūhānaṃ daṇḍabhogamaṇḍalāsaṃhatabyūhānañca gahaṇaṃ, ‘‘tayo hatthī pacchimaṃ hatthānīkaṃ, tayo assā pacchimaṃ assānīkaṃ, tayo rathā pacchimaṃ rathānīkaṃ, cattāro purisā sarahatthā pattī pacchimaṃ pattānīka’’nti (pāci. 324 uyyodhikasikkhāpade) kaṇḍaviddhasikkhāpadassa padabhājanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘tayo…pe…ādinā nayena vuttassā’’ti āha. Tañca kho ‘‘dvādasapuriso hatthī, tipuriso asso, catupuriso ratho, cattāro purisā sarahatthā pattī’’ti (pāci. 314 uyyuttasenāsikkhāpade) vuttalakkhaṇato hatthiādigaṇanenāti daṭṭhabbaṃ, etena ca ‘‘cha hatthiniyo, eko ca hatthī idameka’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 245) cammakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttamanīkaṃ paṭikkhipati.
14 14. 所谓“因”,就是果的立足处,因此说“放逸……是立足处”。“诸处”是指棋子等的落脚点。“八格”是指棋盘有八个格子,因为形状长而得名。也有人读作“八足”。“十格”是指有两行、共二十个格子的掷骰游戏。“在八格和十格上”是指在八格棋盘和十格棋盘上。“只在空中玩”是指仅仅用嘴说“我把这个棋子走到那一格,这个棋子走到那一格”,只在空中玩掷骰游戏。“种种路径的圆盘”是指有各种不同棋子路线的棋盘。“应当回避”是指应当回避棋子。“从这边那边移动”是指棋子,即用任何东西做成的骰子。在那里,是指在那些棋子中,或者在那种取走和放上中。“赌场”是指赌博的场所。现在也有“赌板”的读法。所谓“骰子”,是指能在六面各显示一至六点而作游戏的东西,将其增大后,按所得点数,从一等等方面取走、放上棋子而玩;它在八格等处阻碍、触及,所以叫骰子,有二十四种骰子。针对这个而说:巴利
14. Kāraṇaṃ nāma phalassa ṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘pamādo…pe… ṭhāna’’nti. Padānīti sārīādīnaṃ patiṭṭhānāni. Aṭṭhāpadanti saññāya dīghatā. ‘‘Aṭṭhapada’’ntipi paṭhanti. Dasapadaṃ nāma dvīhi pantīti vīsatiyā padehi kīḷanajūtaṃ. Aṭṭhapadadasapadesūti aṭṭhapadadasapadaphalakesu. Ākāseyeva kīḷananti ‘‘ayaṃ sārī asukapadaṃ mayā nītā, ayaṃ asukapada’’nti kevalaṃ mukheneva vadantānaṃ ākāseyeva jūtassa kīḷanaṃ. Nānāpathamaṇḍalanti anekavihitasārīmaggaparivaṭṭaṃ. Pariharitabbanti sāriyo pariharituṃ yuttakaṃ. Ito cito ca saranti parivattantīti sāriyo, yena kenaci katāni akkhabījāni. Tatthāti tāsu sārīsu, tasmiṃ vā apanayanupanayane. Jūtakhaliketi jūtamaṇḍale. ‘‘Jūtaphalake’’tipi adhunā pāṭho. Pāsakaṃ vuccati chasu passesu ekekaṃ yāva chakkaṃ dassetvā katakīḷanakaṃ, taṃ vaḍḍhetvā yathāladdhaṃ ekakādivasena sāriyo apanento, upanento ca kīḷanti, pasati aṭṭhapadādīsu bādhati, phusati cāti hi pāsako, catubbīsatividho akkho. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
八格棋和花环棋已经说了,还有带漩涡的六格棋也被认可。
四法应当多修习,两点是寂静吉祥的。
牟尼王开示了这二十四种义理。巴利
‘‘Aṭṭhakaṃ mālikaṃ vuttaṃ, sāvaṭṭañca chakaṃ mataṃ; Catukkaṃ bahulaṃ ñeyyaṃ, dvi bindusantibhadrakaṃ; Catuvīsati āyā ca, munindena pakāsitā’’ti.
因此,这里的游戏就是掷骰子游戏。ghaṭana 是击打的意思,用击打来玩的游戏就叫 ghaṭikā,所以经文说“用长棍”等等。有些人认为,ghaṭikā 是用瓦罐来玩的游戏。mañjiṭṭhikāya vā 是说取来叫作 mañjiṭṭhi 的攀缘藤树的心材,煮成浓汁。sitthodakena vā 则是煮过的蜜水。salākahattha 是棕榈叶扇等一束束东西的握持之称。也有人说,从许多签中取出一根没有特别标记的签,投进去,再把它抽出来,这样用签来玩,就是 salākahattha。guḷakīḷā 是球戏,或者用任何东西做成的球来玩。用叶子做成竹筒形状的管子,叫叶筒,所以说“吹响它”。khuddakanaṅgala 这个词表明,khuddaka 后面加了 ka 这个后缀。mokkhacikā 是通过手脚松开、解脱而旋转的游戏,所以说“在空中”等等。正是为了说明它因为旋转而被称为“轮”,才说了“旋转轮”。巴利
Tena kīḷanamidha pāsakakīḷanaṃ. Ghaṭanaṃ paharaṇaṃ, tena kīḷā ghaṭikāti āha ‘‘dīghadaṇḍakenā’’tiādi. Ghaṭena kumbhena kīḷā ghaṭikāti eke. Mañjiṭṭhikāya vāti mañjiṭṭhisaṅkhātassa yojanavallirukkhassa sāraṃ gahetvā pakkakasāvaṃ sandhāya vadati. Sitthodakena vāti [piṭṭhodakena vā (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)] ca pakkamadhusitthodakaṃ. Salākahatthanti tālahīrādīnaṃ kalāpassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Bahūsu salākāsu visesarahitaṃ ekaṃ salākaṃ gahetvā tāsu pakkhipitvā puna taññeva uddharantā salākahatthena kīḷantīti keci. Guḷakīḷāti guḷaphalakīḷā, yena kenaci vā kataguḷakīḷā. Paṇṇena vaṃsākārena katā nāḷikā paṇṇanāḷikā, tenevāha ‘‘taṃdhamantā’’ti. Khuddake ka-paccayoti dasseti ‘‘khuddakanaṅgala’’nti iminā. Hatthapādānaṃ mokkhena mocanena cayati parivattati etāyāti mokkhacikā, tenāha ‘‘ākāse vā’’tiādi. Paribbhamanattāyeva taṃ cakkaṃ nāmāti dassetuṃ ‘‘paribbhamanacakka’’nti vuttaṃ.
用叶子做成的筒叫“叶筒”,这里按顺序说明了“板戏”这个词的两种含义。因此说“以彼所作之戏”就是指板戏,所以说了“以彼”等话。“小车”就是“rathako”,因为“ka”这个词缀有“小”的意思。其余几个词也是同样的道理。在空中,或者在板子背面,不管怎么写上一个字,靠知道“就是这样”来玩的游戏,叫“字戏”;也有人说,拿问的人嘴里说出的字,靠判断缺了什么、露了什么来玩的游戏,也叫“字戏”。“vajja”这个词是“过失”的意思,所以说了“名为如法”等话。跟着弹奏的节奏跳舞,或者跟着歌声跳舞,也叫“如法”。“这样做就会赢,那样做就会输”,把输赢放在前头,靠各种手法来操作,应当知道“解路”等也是赌博放逸的场所;用骰子、筹牌等来办成或办不成事情,就是带来输赢的手段,这叫“赌博”;“如法”也是因为用骰子等做出相似的形状,靠输赢来分,所以叫“赌戏”。这一切都以“照耀”“显明”的意思,按输赢来对应;或者说“靠这些而行、而走向输赢”,因此也没有超出“赌博”这个词所指的范围。巴利
Paṇṇena katā nāḷi paṇṇanāḷi, iminā pattāḷhakapadadvayassa yathākkamaṃ pariyāyaṃ dasseti. Tena katā pana kīḷā pattāḷhakāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tāyā’’tiādi. Khuddako ratho rathako ka-saddassa khuddakatthavacanato. Esa nayo sesapadesupi. Ākāse vā yaṃ ñāpeti, tassa piṭṭhiyaṃ vā yathā vā tathā vā akkharaṃ likhitvā ‘‘evamida’’nti jānanena kīḷā akkharikā, pucchantassa mukhāgataṃ akkharaṃ gahetvā naṭṭhamuttilābhādijānanakīḷātipi vadanti. Vajja-saddo aparādhatthoti āha ‘‘yathāvajjaṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Vāditānurūpaṃ naccanaṃ, gāyanaṃ vā yathāvajjantipi vadanti. ‘‘Evaṃ kate jayo bhavissati, evaṃ kate parājayo’’ti jayaparājayaṃ purakkhatvā payogakaraṇavasena parihārapathādīnampi jūtappamādaṭṭhānabhāvo veditabbo, paṅgacīrādīhi ca vaṃsādīhi kattabbā kiccasiddhi, asiddhi cāti jayaparājayāvaho payogo vutto, yathāvajjanti ca kāṇādīhi sadisākāradassanehi jayaparājayavasena jūtakīḷikabhāvena vuttaṃ. Sabbepi hete jotenti pakāsenti etehi tappayogikā jayaparājayavasena, javanti ca gacchanti jayaparājayaṃ etehīti vā atthena jūtasaddavacanīyataṃ nātivattanti.
15 15. “超过标准尺寸的座位”,就是超过“应当用善逝的手指量做八个手指宽的脚”所说的尺寸的座位。这是根据用途,联系“致力于住”这句话而说的。“兽形”,是指狮子、老虎等猛兽的形象。因为在《比丘尼分别》中说:“所谓床,就是用猛兽做成的。”在《精义集》中也说:“混杂不许可形象的、不许可的床和座位。”
“长毛大黑毛毯”,是指毛超过四指长的黑色大毛毯。地叫作kojava,因为在上面行走(javati),以美丽铺展的方式而名为kojava。从“据说它的毛超过四指长”这句话来看,低于四指的也是允许的,他们这样说。
“双面毛”“单面毛”,这是为了显示差别。因此,如果不属于这两种情况,就应当认为也是允许的。
“木雕彩绘”,是指以墙壁、屋顶等形状的木雕彩绘装饰的。“毛织敷具”,是指用兽毛做的敷具。“白色敷具”,是指白色的敷具。因为适合寒冷时使用,所以是白色敷具,也有人说是“多软毛”的。“满花”,是指各方面都完全具备花纹。《精义显示》中说:“毛织敷具就是毛织的红色敷具。”因为大多是用庵摩罗树叶形状的花排列做成的,所以也叫“庵摩罗叶”。巴利
15.Pamāṇātikkantāsananti ‘‘aṭṭhaṅgulapādakaṃ kāretabbaṃ sugataṅgulenā’’ti vuttappamāṇato atikkantāsanaṃ. Kammavasena payojanato ‘‘anuyuttā viharantīti padaṃ apekkhitvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vāḷarūpānīti āharimāni sīhabyagghādivāḷarūpāni. Vuttañhi bhikkhunivibhaṅge ‘‘pallaṅko nāma āharimehi vāḷehi kato’’ti (pāci. 984) ‘‘akappiyarūpākulo akappiyamañco pallaṅko’’ti sārasamāse vuttaṃ. Dīghalomako mahākojavoti caturaṅgulādhikalomo kāḷavaṇṇo mahākojavo. Kuvuccati pathavī, tassaṃ javati sobhanavitthaṭavasenāti kojavo. ‘‘Caturaṅgulādhikāni kira tassa lomānī’’ti vacanato caturaṅgulato heṭṭhā vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Uddalomī ekantalomīti visesadassanametaṃ, tasmā yadi tāsu na pavisati, vaṭṭatīti gahetabbaṃ. Vānavicittanti bhitticchadādiākārena vānena sibbanena vicitraṃ. Uṇṇāmayattharaṇanti migalomapakatamattharaṇaṃ. Setattharaṇoti dhavalattharaṇo. Sītatthikehi sevitabbattā setattharaṇo, ‘‘bahumudulomako’’tipi vadanti. Ghanapupphakoti sabbathā pupphākārasampanno. ‘‘Uṇṇāmayattharaṇoti uṇṇāmayo lohitattharaṇo’’ti (sārattha. ṭī. 258) sāratthadīpaniyaṃ vuttaṃ. Āmalakapattākārāhi pupphapantīhi yebhuyyato katattā āmalakapattotipi vuccati.
三种绵,就是树绵、藤绵和绵团这三种绵。所谓“毛起于两端,其有穗边”,就是uddalomī(双面毛),这是把i音变成a音、省略ta音并作叠音后形成的。所谓“毛起于一端,其有穗边”,就是ekantalomī(单面毛)。有些论师、《纲要》的作者们以及北寺住众认为,两边都有毛。按照他们的说法,“毛起于一边,而有生起的毛花”就是双面毛的意思;“毛从两端生起,而有同一种毛花”就是单面毛的意思。不过《律注》里说:“uddalomī是一端起毛的毛织敷具,也写作uddhalomī;ekantalomī是两端起毛的毛织敷具。”这只是名称上的差别。从义理上看,两种注释其实并没有遗漏任何含义,应当这样理解。巴利
Tiṇṇaṃ tūlānanti rukkhatūlalatātūlapoṭakītūlasaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ tūlānaṃ. Uditaṃ dvīsu lomaṃ dasā yassāti uddalomī i-kārassa akāraṃ, ta-kārassa lopaṃ, dvibhāvañca katvā. Ekasmiṃ ante lomaṃ dasā yassāti ekantalomī. Ubhayattha kecīti sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca. Tesaṃ vāde pana uditamekato uggataṃ lomamayaṃ pupphaṃ yassāti uddalomī vuttanayena. Ubhato antato ekaṃ sadisaṃ lomamayaṃ pupphaṃ yassāti ekantalomīti vacanattho. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘uddalomīti ekato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇaṃ. ‘Uddhalomī’tipi pāṭho. Ekantalomīti ubhato uggatalomaṃ uṇṇāmayattharaṇa’’nti (mahāva. aṭṭha. 254) vuttaṃ, nāmamattamesa viseso. Atthato pana aggahitāvaseso aṭṭhakathādvayepi natthīti daṭṭhabbo.
关于“憍奢耶”(蚕丝)和“迦提舍”(kaṭṭissa),迦提舍衣是依蚕丝的变异状态而说的。用它们本身原有的织法做成的铺具,就叫迦提舍。为了说明这个意思,才说“憍奢耶迦提舍所成的铺具”;也就是在蚕丝线之间穿插金线织成的,称为“纬织铺具”。据说金线叫做“迦提舍、迦沙吒”。正因如此,法护长老说“憍奢耶迦沙吒所成”。也有人说迦提舍是一种特殊的线。“以宝交织”就是用宝物缝缀在一起,有些人说“涂金”。“纯憍奢耶”是指没有宝物交织的。“毗奈耶”是指律注,或者是指律的范畴而说的。因为在这里,经教的范畴中说:“除了毛织物之外,所有牛卧织物等以宝交织的都可以。”但到了律的范畴,由于要安住在重法上,只有纯憍奢耶才可以,其他的不可以,应当这样判定。而在经教的范畴中,没有宝交织的毛织物也不可以,其他的可以;即使它们有宝交织,作为铺地物以及用在床椅等上面也是可以的。经教的说法也是针对在家众而说的,为了摄受他们,有些人说“除了……中略……不可以”。《长部注》中某处读作“古长部注”。“适合跳舞”就是能够跳舞。在这里能跳舞的叫做kuttaka,那实际上就是双面毛和单面毛的区别。如说:巴利
Koseyyañca kaṭṭissañca kaṭṭissāni virūpekasesavasena. Tehi pakatamattharaṇaṃ kaṭṭissaṃ. Etadevatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘koseyyakaṭṭissamayapaccattharaṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, koseyyasuttānamantarantaraṃ suvaṇṇamayasuttāni pavesetvā vītamattharaṇanti vuttaṃ hoti. Suvaṇṇasuttaṃ kira ‘‘kaṭṭissaṃ, kassaṭa’’nti ca vadanti. Teneva ‘‘koseyyakassaṭamaya’’nti ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.15) vuttaṃ. Kaṭṭissaṃ nāma vākavisesotipi vadanti. Ratanaparisibbitanti ratanehi saṃsibbitaṃ, suvaṇṇalittanti keci. Suddhakoseyyanti ratanaparisibbanarahitaṃ. Vinayeti vinayaṭṭhakathaṃ, vinayapariyāyaṃ vā sandhāya vuttaṃ. Idha hi suttantikapariyāye ‘‘ṭhapetvā tūlikaṃ sabbāneva gonakādīni ratanaparisibbitāni vaṭṭantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vinayapariyāyaṃ pana patvā garuke ṭhātabbattā suddhakoseyyameva vaṭṭati, netarānīti vinicchayo veditabbo, suttantikapariyāye pana ratanaparisibbanarahitāpi tūlikā na vaṭṭati, itarāni vaṭṭanti, sacepi tāni ratanaparisibbitāni, bhūmattharaṇavasena yathānurūpaṃ mañcapīṭhādīsu ca upanetuṃ vaṭṭantīti. Suttantadesanāya gahaṭṭhānampi vasena vuttattā tesaṃ saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ‘‘ṭhapetvā…pe… na vaṭṭantīti vutta’’nti apare. Dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyanti katthaci pāṭho, porāṇadīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāyanti attho. Naccayogganti naccituṃ pahonakaṃ. Karonti ettha naccanti kuttakaṃ, taṃ pana uddalomīekantalomīvisesameva. Vuttañca –
二十种双面毛和十一种单面毛的舞女用的跳舞毯。
那正是适合十六位少女跳舞的大毛毯。巴利
‘‘Dvidasekadasānyudda-lomīekantalomino; Tadeva soḷasitthīnaṃ, naccayoggañhi kuttaka’’nti.
铺在象背上的垫子叫象敷。其余的词也这样理解。所谓“以羚羊皮等”,就是用羚羊兽皮做的;据说那些皮更细软,所以做成双层或三层再缝合起来。因此说“羚羊毯”,因为一层层叠上去缝合而成的连续体就叫“毯”。“迦达利鹿”是一种像猫的鹿,用它的皮如法做成的最上等敷具也是这样。“据说那……”等话是在说明它的样子,因此他们说纯迦达利鹿皮是允许的。“覆盖上方部分”就是上覆,指天盖。这里也是指红色的,所以说“以红色天盖”。“凡存在的,就是与上覆俱”,这里省略了,意思是与缝合的状态一起存在。红色天盖中,袈裟色是允许的,用红花等染成的红色则不允许,而且必须是全红的。如果是杂色的、织有花纹的或绘有花样的,那就允许。由于敷具才是主要的,所以说与它相连的白色天盖也不允许。“两边”指床的两头,也就是床头和床尾。这里也和有上覆的情况一样判定。“莲花色”是指不太红的颜色。“杂色”则是因为在任何情况下都合乎戒律才说的,并不是说两头的枕头不合戒律。因为“红色”这个词不适用于杂色。由于举出“片”字,就已经把杂色敷具也包括进去了。为了用遮止的方式成立前面所说的意义,所以说“大枕头则被禁止”。“大枕头”指超过尺寸的枕头,它的尺寸只以头量为准。而且世尊说过:“诸比丘,我允许做头量的枕头。”所谓头量,就是横量时,从三个耳中两个耳之间的距离,有一拃加四指宽。枕头的中间部分,横量是一拳尺,纵量则是一肘半或两肘。那个枕头被禁止,只是因为它不合戒律,并不是因为它属于高床大床。两个,指枕头和脚枕。“给了敷具”就是做了敷具、铺好了的意思,这也是针对病人说的。因此,在《卧坐具犍度》的注释中说:“即使对没病的人,也只是头枕和脚枕这两样允许。对病人,把枕头铺好,上面再铺敷具,躺着也可以。”就像这样,按照律中世尊所说的方式。那么,是怎么说的呢?所以说“据说”。应当知道,就像八指脚的床那样,对安乐椅也要切掉脚。对床座则把带来的兽形装饰取下来,又因为不再连接在一起,这也算破坏。“解开”就是把结解开。“做枕头”就是把解开的棉花放进去,做成枕头。巴利
Hatthino piṭṭhiyaṃ attharaṃ hatthattharaṃ. Evaṃ sesapadesupi. Ajinacammehīti ajinamigacammehi, tāni kira cammāni sukhumatarāni, tasmā dupaṭṭatipaṭṭāni katvā sibbanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ajinappaveṇī’’ti, uparūpari ṭhapetvā sibbanavasena hi santatibhūtā ‘‘paveṇī’’ti vuccati. Kadalīmigoti mañjārākāramigo, tassa dhammena kataṃ pavarapaccattharaṇaṃ tathā. ‘‘Taṃ kirā’’tiādi tadākāradassanaṃ, tasmā suddhameva kadalīmigacammaṃ vaṭṭatīti vadanti. Uttaraṃ uparibhāgaṃ chādetīti uttaracchado, vitānaṃ. Tampi lohitameva idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘rattavitānenā’’ti. ‘‘Yaṃ vattati, taṃ sauttaraccheda’’nti ettha seso, saṃsibbitabhāvena saddhiṃ vattatīti attho. Rattavitānesu ca kāsāvaṃ vaṭṭati, kusumbhādirattameva na vaṭṭati, tañca kho sabbarattameva. Yaṃ pana nānāvaṇṇaṃ vānacittaṃ vā lepacittaṃ vā, taṃ vaṭṭati. Paccattharaṇasseva padhānattā tappaṭibaddhaṃ setavitānampi na vaṭṭatīti vuttaṃ. Ubhatoti ubhayattha mañcassa sīsabhāge, pādabhāge cāti attho. Etthāpi sauttaracchade viya vinicchayo. Padumavaṇṇaṃ vāti nātirattaṃ sandhāyāha. Vicitraṃ vāti pana sabbathā kappiyattā vuttaṃ, na pana ubhato upadhānesu akappiyattā. Na hi lohitaka-saddo citte vaṭṭati. Paṭalikaggahaṇeneva cittakassāpi attharaṇassa saṅgahetabbappasaṅgato. Sace pamāṇayuttanti vuttamevatthaṃ byatirekato samatthetuṃ āha ‘‘mahāupadhānaṃ pana paṭikkhitta’’nti. Mahāupadhānanti ca pamāṇātikkantaṃ upadhānaṃ. Sīsappamāṇameva hi tassa pamāṇaṃ. Vuttañca ‘‘anujānāmi bhikkhave, sīsappamāṇaṃ bibbohanaṃ kātu’’nti (cūḷava. 297) sīsappamāṇañca nāma yassa vitthārato tīsu kaṇṇesu dvinnaṃ kaṇṇānaṃ antaraṃ miniyamānaṃ vidatthi ceva caturaṅgulañca hoti. Bibbohanassa majjhaṭṭhānaṃ tiriyato muṭṭhiratanaṃ hoti, dīghato pana diyaḍḍharatanaṃ vā dviratanaṃ vā. Taṃ pana akappiyattāyeva paṭikkhittaṃ, na tu uccāsayanamahāsayanapariyāpannattā. Dvepīti sīsūpadhānaṃ, pādūpadhānañca. Paccattharaṇaṃ datvāti paccattharaṇaṃ katvā attharitvāti attho, idañca gilānameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tenāha senāsanakkhandhakavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘agilānassāpi sīsūpadhānañca pādūpadhānañcāti dvayameva vaṭṭati. Gilānassa bibbohanāni santharitvā upari paccattharaṇaṃ katvā nipajjitumpi vaṭṭatī’’ti (cūḷava. aṭṭha. 297) vuttanayenevāti vinaye bhagavatā vuttanayeneva. Kathaṃ pana vuttanti āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Yathā aṭṭhaṅgulapādakaṃ hoti, evaṃ āsandiyā pādacchindanaṃ veditabbaṃ. Pallaṅkassa pana āharimāni vāḷarūpāni āharitvā puna appaṭibaddhatākāraṇampi bhedanameva. Vijaṭetvāti jaṭaṃ nibbedhetvā. Bibbohanaṃ kātunti tāni vijaṭitatūlāni anto pakkhipitvā bibbohanaṃ kātuṃ.
16 “从母胎出来的幼儿”这句话,只指卵生和胎生,同时也说明理由:因为是从母胎出来的。正是靠这一点,下面这个意思才能成立:“因为好多天躺在里面,所以才有这种气味。”涂抹,就是擦拭涂抹。为了成就形态,就是为了成就美好的形态。周遍揉按,就是从各个方面揉按。巴利
16.‘‘Mātukucchito nikkhantadārakāna’’nti etena aṇḍajajalābujānameva gahaṇaṃ, mātukucchito nikkhantattāti ca kāraṇaṃ dasseti, tenevāyamattho sijjhati ‘‘anekadivasāni antosayanahetu esa gandho’’ti. Ucchādenti ubbaṭṭenti. Saṇṭhānasampādanatthanti susaṇṭhānatāsampādanatthaṃ. Parimaddantīti samantato maddanti.
就是那些幼儿,指的是有福德的幼儿。因为随顺上下文,所以只取他们。大力士,指的是力气大、从事徒手搏斗的人。镜子,是喜欢装饰的人为了照见自己的面容,用铜、铁等做成的特殊器物。针对这种情况,才说任何……都不允许。只是装饰性的涂眼,不是药用的涂眼。因为这里指的是沉迷装饰,所以此处不取。在世间用语中,花鬘这个词只指编好的花鬘,因为有人说花鬘、花环、花串。但在佛教中,这个词也通用于纯粹的花朵,所以说或未编的花鬘。黑斑等,指黑色的斑点等。泥药团,指用药物合成的药泥粉。给与,就是涂抹。扰动,指因变异而动摇,就是激怒的意思。以此,指用芥子药团。令平息,指平息导致黑斑等的血液之病。食尽,指以去除的方式食尽。平息,指这样的恶血已经耗尽。以面粉,指涂在脸上的东西。粉饰,就是涂抹。那一切,指泥药团、芥子、芝麻、姜黄药团等所谓面粉,以及涂脸的东西,都不允许。这是按义理次第来解释这两个词。或者,是以同格关系来说明所谓面粉之涂脸物的含义。巴利
Tesaṃyeva dārakānanti puññavantānameva dārakānaṃ. Tesameva hi pakaraṇānurūpatāya gahaṇaṃ. Mahāmallānanti mahataṃ bāhuyuddhakārakānaṃ. Ādāso nāma maṇḍanakapakatikānaṃ manussānaṃ attano mukhachāyāpassanatthaṃ kaṃsalohādīhi kato bhaṇḍaviseso. Tādisaṃ sandhāya ‘‘yaṃ kiñci…pe… na vaṭṭatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Alaṅkārañjanameva na bhesajjañjanaṃ. Maṇḍanānuyogassa hi adhippetattā tamidhānadhippetaṃ. Loke mālā-saddo baddhamālāyameva ‘‘mālā mālyaṃ pupphadāme’’ti vacanato. Sāsane pana suddhapupphesupi niruḷhoti āha ‘‘abaddhamālā vā’’ti. Kāḷapīḷakādīnanti kāḷavaṇṇapīḷakādīnaṃ. Mattikakakkanti osadhehi abhisaṅkhataṃ yogamattikācuṇṇaṃ. Dentīti vilepenti. Caliteti vikārāpajjanavasena calanaṃ patte , kupiteti attho. Tenāti sāsapakakkena. Doseti kāḷapīḷakādīnaṃ hetubhūte lohitadose. Khāditeti apanayanavasena khādite. Sannisinneti tādise duṭṭhalohite parikkhīṇe. Mukhacuṇṇakenāti mukhavilepanena . Cuṇṇentīti vilimpenti. Taṃ sabbanti mattikākakkasāsapatilahaliddikakkadānasaṅkhātaṃ mukhacuṇṇaṃ, mukhavilepanañca na vaṭṭati. Atthānukkamasambhavato hi ayaṃ padadvayassa vaṇṇanā. Mukhacuṇṇasaṅkhātaṃ mukhavilepananti vā padadvayassa tulyādhikaraṇavasena atthavibhāvanā.
“手镯”是指应该绑在手上的装饰品,也就是螺贝之类的东西,所以经文说“在手上”等等。螺就是贝,也是这样。“另一些人”等说法,是按顺序解释“髻带”等词的含义。其中,“髻”就是顶髻。“顶”是指屋脊,以宝石围绕的鞘者即是。“髻带”是指用来穿过顶髻、使它稳固又美观的东西。“珍珠”就是珍珠,或者珍珠本身就是藤蔓,叫珍珠蔓,也就是珍珠串。“杖”说的是四肘长的杖,所以说“或者四肘长的杖”。“装饰过的杖”则是指比那个更差的车辕之类东西。“药筒”就是药壶。钵等物悬挂在左肉上是不习惯的,所以说“悬挂在左侧”。所谓“花冠”就是顶,以花冠和宝石围绕的鞘者即是。“以五色线缝制”是指以青、黄、红、白、深红五色线缝制的三种伞。长一肘、宽四指,是依照他们的习惯规定,或者说足以绑在额头上而说的。“显示发际分界”以此显示不覆盖而绑的方式。“云口”是指内部。“宝”是指头宝而说的,所以说“顶髻宝”,意思是顶髻上的宝。牦牛尾的这个是拂尘,那毛本身,用它制成的扇子是牦牛尾毛扇。至于其他蚊拂、灯心草拂、香根草拂、孔雀尾拂,以及扇子、棕榈叶扇,因为都是允许的,所以应当只取那一种。巴利
Hatthabandhanti hatthe bandhitabbamābharaṇaṃ, taṃ pana saṅkhakapālādayoti āha ‘‘hatthe’’tiādi. Saṅkho eva kapālaṃ tathā. ‘‘Apare’’tiādinā yathākkamaṃ ‘‘sikhābandha’’ntiādi padānamatthaṃ saṃvaṇṇeti. Tattha sikhanti cūḷaṃ. Cīrakaṃ nāma yena cūḷāya thirakaraṇatthaṃ, sobhanatthañca vijjhati. Muttāya, muttā eva vā latā muttālatā, muttāvaḷi. Daṇḍo nāma catuhatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘catuhatthadaṇḍaṃ vā’’ti. Alaṅkatadaṇḍakanti pana tato omakaṃ rathayaṭṭhiādikaṃ sandhāyāha. Bhesajjanāḷikanti bhesajjatumbaṃ. Pattādiolambanaṃ vāmaṃseyeva aciṇṇanti vuttaṃ ‘‘vāmapasse olaggita’’nti. Kaṇṇikā nāma kūṭaṃ, tāya ca ratanena ca parikkhitto koso yassa tathā. Pañcavaṇṇasuttasibbitanti nīlapītalohitodātamañjiṭṭhavasena pañcavaṇṇehi suttehi sibbitaṃ tividhampi chattaṃ. Ratanamattāyāmaṃ caturaṅgulavitthatanti tesaṃ paricayaniyāmena vā nalāṭe bandhituṃ pahonakappamāṇena vā vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kesantaparicchedaṃ dassetvā’’ti etena tadanajjhottharaṇavasena bandhanākāraṃ dasseti. Meghamukheti abbhantare. ‘‘Maṇi’’nti idaṃ siromaṇiṃ sandhāya vuttanti āha ‘‘cūḷāmaṇi’’nti, cūḷāyaṃ maṇinti attho. Camarassa ayaṃ cāmaro, sveva vālo, tena katā bījanī cāmaravālabījanī. Aññāsaṃ pana makasabījanīvākamayabījanīusīramayabījanīmorapiñchamayabījanīnaṃ, vidhūpanatālavaṇṭānañca kappiyattā tassāyeva gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
17 17. 通过它从恶趣、从轮回中出离,所以叫“出离”,是生天之道,也是解脱之道。它值得作为出离,或者致力于那种出离,或者那种出离是它的果,所以叫“能出离的”;或者说,从语恶行和烦恼中出离,所以叫“能出离的”——这是把 ī 音缩短,又把 ya 音变成 ka 音。因为 anīya 这个词通常表示行为。这里指的是与思相应的远离杂秽语。从它的对立面来说,就是“不能出离的”,即杂秽语;它的状态就是“不能出离性”,因此是因为不能出离性。成为畜生般的:就是成为障碍般的、成为系缚般的。即使是他,也名为……这里“名为”一词表示呵责。在业处修习中:因为与无常性相连,所以在四谛业处修习中。以欲乐味为因:就是以称为欲的味为因。与义俱者:就是有意义,与利益相连,这是“义”。鞋履:是就与车乘谈论相关而说的。应善安立者:就是善安立。同样,不善安立者:就是不善安立。以“村”一词也摄取了村中居民,所以说“某村居民”等。巴利
17. Duggatito, saṃsārato ca niyyāti etenāti niyyānaṃ, saggamaggo, mokkhamaggo ca. Taṃ niyyānamarahati, tasmiṃ vā niyyāne niyuttā, taṃ vā niyyānaṃ phalabhūtaṃ etissāti niyyānikā, vacīduccaritakilesato niyyātīti vā niyyānikā ī-kārassa rassattaṃ, ya-kārassa ca ka-kāraṃ katvā. Anīya-saddo hi bahulā katvatthābhidhāyako. Cetanāya saddhiṃ samphappalāpavirati idha adhippetā. Tappaṭipakkhato aniyyānikā, samphappalāpo, tassā bhāvo aniyyānikattaṃ, tasmā aniyyānikattā.Tiracchānabhūtāti tirokaraṇabhūtā vibandhanabhūtā. Sopi nāmāti ettha nāma-saddo garahāyaṃ. Kammaṭṭhānabhāveti aniccatāpaṭisaṃyuttattā catusaccakammaṭṭhānabhāve. Kāmassādavasenāti kāmasaṅkhātaassādavasena. Saha atthenāti sātthakaṃ, hitapaṭisaṃyuttanti attho. Upāhanāti yānakathāsambandhaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Suṭṭhu nivesitabboti suniviṭṭho. Tathā dunniviṭṭho. Gāma-saddena gāmavāsī janopi gahitoti āha ‘‘asukagāmavāsino’’tiādi.
“勇士谈论”这里,“勇士”这个词是表示英雄的意思,这从“曾是勇士”这句话就能看出来。所谓“街道”,指的是道路的布局;但这里用“街道”这个词,也把住在那里的人包含进来了,就像说“全村都来了”之类的话一样。所以论中才说“具信、净信”等等。巴利
Sūrakathāti ettha sūra-saddo vīravācakoti dasseti ‘‘sūro ahosī’’ti iminā. Visikhā nāma maggasanniveso, idha pana visikhāgahaṇena tannivāsinopi gahitā ‘‘sabbo gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu viya, tenevāha ‘‘saddhā pasannā’’tiādi.
“罐的处所”是指取水的地方,所以说“水处谈论”。因为包含在同一处,也称为“水渡处谈论”。另外,做罐的地方也叫“罐处”。通过这个称呼,也提到了罐婢,所以用“或罐婢谈论”来表明。先前死去的亡者,叫“先亡者”。因为“亡者”“已逝者”“已命终者”是同义词。为了指出前面已说的方法,所以说了“于彼处”等。巴利
Kumbhassa ṭhānaṃ nāma udakaṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ ‘‘udakaṭṭhānakathā’’ti. Udakatitthakathātipi vuccati tattheva samavarodhato. Apica kumbhassa karaṇaṭṭhānaṃ kumbhaṭṭhānaṃ. Tadapadesena pana kumbhadāsiyo vuttāti dasseti ‘‘kumbhadāsikathā vā’’ti iminā. Pubbe petā kālaṅkatāti pubbapetā. ‘‘Peto pareto kālaṅkato’’ti hi pariyāyavacanaṃ. Heṭṭhā vuttanayamatidisituṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
脱离前后两种谈论,就是指脱离这里所说的前面那些谈论和后面那些谈论。种种不同的自性,是在说明“自”这个词是“自性”的同义词。由某位名叫……的,是指生主梵天,或者自在天。因为通过它来宣说世间的生起、住立、资具等,所以叫“世间解说”;而这部论说实际上是依附于名为“顺世”的诡辩之书的一种谈论,因此用“顺世诡辩谈论”来表明这一点。世间的愚人在这里面“趋赴”,也就是因为尝到论辩的滋味而努力投入,所以叫“顺世”;或者说,世间的好处不在这里面努力追求、不在这里面趋赴,所以叫“顺世”。因为依靠这部书,众生连生起行善的心都做不到。在这里面展开彼此矛盾的言论,或者与生天和解脱相矛盾的言论,所以叫“诡辩”;或者在这里面,论者用矛盾的论棒互相打击,所以叫“诡辩”。一切地方都按照语法规则来成立词句。巴利
Purimapacchimakathāhi vimuttāti idhāgatāhi purimāhi, pacchimāhi ca kathāhi vimuttā. Nānāsabhāvāti atta-saddassa sabhāvapariyāyabhāvamāha. Asukena nāmāti pajāpatinā brahmunā, issarena vā. Uppattiṭhitisambhārādivasena lokaṃ akkhāyati etāyāti lokakkhāyikā, sā pana lokāyatasamaññe vitaṇḍasatthe nissitā sallāpakathāti dasseti ‘‘lokāyatavitaṇḍasallāpakathā’’ti iminā. Lokā bālajanā āyatanti ettha ussahanti vādassādenāti lokāyataṃ, loko vā hitaṃ na yatati na īhati tenāti lokāyataṃ. Tañhi ganthaṃ nissāya sattā puññakiriyāya cittampi na uppādenti . Aññamaññaviruddhaṃ, saggamokkhaviruddhaṃ vā kathaṃ tanonti etthāti vitaṇḍo, viruddhena vā vādadaṇḍena tāḷenti ettha vādinoti vitaṇḍo, sabbattha niruttinayena padasiddhi.
在这里,“被海神所掘”也有人说是“被海王之子们所掘”。所谓“海”(samudda),是因为有能宣说的头存在,所以把 dha 音变成了 da 音;这里的 saha 一词表示“存在”的意思,就像“有毛”“有翼”这类说法一样。“有”(bhava)就是增长,因为“有”就意味着增长、变大。“非有”(vibhava)就是减损,因为它是“有”的反面。在复合词之前听到的 iti 一词,应当分别连接,所以说“iti 有,iti 非有”。“或此或彼”就是任何事物,这里的意思是不确定。因为老师们用 yaṃ taṃ 等词配合简别,来表达不真实、不确定的意思。再者,“有”就是常见,“非有”就是断见。或者,“有”就是欲乐,“非有”就是自我折磨。巴利
Sāgaradevena khatoti ettha sāgararañño puttehi khatotipi vadanti. Vijjati pavedanahetubhūtā muddhā yassāti samuddo dha-kārassa da-kāraṃ katvā, saha-saddo cettha vijjamānatthavācako ‘‘salomakosapakkhako’’tiādīsu viya. Bhavoti vuddhi bhavati vaḍḍhatīti katvā. Vibhavoti hāni tabbirahato. Dvandato pubbe suyyamāno itisaddo paccekaṃ yojetabboti āha ‘‘iti bhavo iti abhavo’’ti. Yaṃ vā taṃ vāti yaṃ kiñci, atha taṃ aniyamanti attho. Abhūtañhi aniyamatthaṃ saha vikappena yaṃtaṃ-saddehi dīpenti ācariyā. Apica bhavoti sassato. Abhavoti ucchedo. Bhavoti vā kāmasukhaṃ. Abhavoti attakilamatho.
这样,和这六种关于“有、非有”的谈论合在一起,就共有三十二种畜生论。或者,经里虽然没有直接按名目列出的森林、山岳、河流、岛屿等谈论,也可以用“iti”这个词把它们收摄进来,所以合称三十二种畜生论。因为在经中“iti vā”这个地方,“iti”表示种类,“vā”表示选择。这里说的是:“像这样一类,或者此外其他类似的无意义谈论,他们安住于随逐。”又或者,“iti”这个词表示“等等”的意思,就像“远离舞蹈、歌唱、音乐、表演等观看”这类例子中那样,“iti”就是“如是等等”,意思是:像这样等等,以及其他类似的谈论,他们安住于随逐。巴利
Iti imāya chabbidhāya itibhavābhavakathāya saddhiṃ bāttiṃsa tiracchānakathā nāma honti. Atha vā pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato anāgatāpi araññapabbatanadīdīpakathā iti-saddena saṅgahetvā battiṃsa tiracchānakathāti vuccanti. Pāḷiyañhi ‘‘iti vā’’ti ettha iti-saddo pakārattho, vā-saddo vikappanattho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti ‘‘evaṃpakāraṃ, ito aññaṃ vā tādisaṃ niratthakakathaṃ anuyuttā viharantī’’ti, ādiattho vā iti-saddo iti vā iti evarūpā ‘‘naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā paṭivirato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.10, 164; ma. ni. 1.293, 411; 2.11, 418; 3.14, 102; a. ni. 10.99) viya, iti evamādiṃ aññampi tādisaṃ kathamanuyuttā viharantīti attho.
18 18. 执取对立观点就是争论,那些持争论的人就是争论者,他们如此,或者通过这种方式执取对立观点,因此就是争论,那话语本身也是如此。带有攻击性的言论就是指责性的言论。连贯的就是前后不相矛盾的。正因为如此才顺畅。为了说明那是由于与义理和原因相结合,所以说“与义理结合、与原因结合,这就是含义”。这句话是言说。就像转身站立、陷入敌阵的无能战士一样,你什么都不知道,反而自己败下阵来,这是所要表达的意思。论说就是过失,这是同义词的说法。同样地,游走与徘徊。各处就是在各个师门中。以破斥就是请你解开我所提出的论说。巴利
18. Viruddhassa gahaṇaṃ viggaho, so yesanti viggāhikā, tesaṃ tathā, viruddhaṃ vā gaṇhāti etāyāti viggāhikā, sāyeva kathā tathā. Sārambhakathāti upārambhakathā. Sahitanti pubbāparāviruddhaṃ. Tatoyeva siliṭṭhaṃ. Taṃ pana atthakāraṇayuttatāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘atthayuttaṃ kāraṇayuttanti attho’’ti vuttaṃ. Nti vacanaṃ. Parivattitvā ṭhitaṃ sapattagato asamattho yodho viya na kiñci jānāsi, kintu sayameva parājesīti adhippāyo. Vādo dosoti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Tathā caravicarāti. Tattha tatthāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ācariyakule. Nibbedhehīti mayā ropitaṃ vādaṃ vissajjehi.
19 信使的职责就是信使事务,关于它的说法也是如此,就在这一点上。“这里、那里”是表示目的格的处格用法,因此说“名为某某地方”。详细的判定在律藏义注中已经说过,所以这里为了简要说明,才说了“然而简要地说”等话。在家人传信,就是与前面所说的相反的那种传信。其他人,指的就是在家人。巴利
19. Dūtassa kammaṃ dūteyyaṃ, tassa kathā tathā, tassaṃ. Idha, amutrāti upayogatthe bhummavacanaṃ, tenāha ‘‘asukaṃ nāma ṭhāna’’nti. Vitthārato vinicchayo vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (pārā. aṭṭha. 436-437) vuttoti saṅkhepato idha dassetuṃ ‘‘saṅkhepato panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gihisāsananti yathāvuttaviparītaṃ sāsanaṃ. Aññesanti gihīnaññeva.
20 以三种方式,即根据近处低语、威仪路和依止资具受用的差别,分为三类。令人惊奇,是说“这个人是奇妙的人”,使他人对自己生起惊奇、欢喜和稀有之感。音韵学者说,前缀vi-加上词根mhi用于欢喜之义;欢喜的表现就是稀有。饶舌,是指抬高自己或施主,为了让对方给出什么东西,就这样抬高、称赞着说出。以这些相为习性的人就是占相者,这是按派生词表示习性的用法,就像“粪扫衣者”一样。或者说,以相而说、造作相的人就是占相者。所谓相,是指能令他人产生施与资具之想的身语行为。研磨就是碾碎,像弄成粉末一样。或者说研磨者是研磨,研磨本身就是研磨术;或者说研磨是碾碎,做这种事的人也叫做研磨术。所谓研磨,就像雇工一样,为了利养恭敬而骂詈、贬损、嘲弄、背后中伤。以利求利,就是从这里得到利益,又到那里去求利益。贪求、寻求、遍求是同义词。诈骗等词,是以诈骗等为相而用于具足这些的人,所以说“诈骗……中略……异名”。以及注释书,就是对各种巴利文的注释,也就是古注释书。巴利
20.Tividhenāti sāmantajappanairiyāpathasannissitapaccayapaṭisevanabhedato tividhena. Vimhāpayantīti ‘‘ayamacchariyapuriso’’ti attani paresaṃ vimhayaṃ sampahaṃsanaṃ acchariyaṃ uppādenti. Vipubbañhi mhi-saddaṃ sampahaṃsane vadanti saddavidū. Sampahaṃsanākāro ca acchariyaṃ. Lapantīti attānaṃ vā dāyakaṃ vā ukkhipitvā yathā so kiñci dadāti, evaṃ ukkācetvā ukkhipanavasena dīpetvā kathenti. Nimittaṃ sīlametesanti nemittikāti taddhitavasena tassīlattho yathā ‘‘paṃsukūliko’’ti (mahāni. 52) apica nimittena vadanti, nimittaṃ vā karontīti nemittikā. Nimittanti ca paresaṃ paccayadānasaññuppādakaṃ kāyavacīkammaṃ vuccati. Nippeso nippisanaṃ cuṇṇaṃ viya karaṇaṃ. Nippisantīti vā nippesā, nippesāyeva nippesikā, nippisanaṃ vā nippeso, taṃ karontītipi nippesikā. Nippeso ca nāma bhaṭapuriso viya lābhasakkāratthaṃ akkosanakhuṃsanuppaṇḍanaparapiṭṭhimaṃsikatā. Lābhena lābhanti ito lābhena amutra lābhaṃ. Nijigīsanti magganti pariyesantīti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Kuhakādayo saddā kuhānādīni nimittaṃ katvā taṃsamaṅgipuggalesu pavattāti āha ‘‘kuhanā…pe… adhivacana’’nti. Aṭṭhakathañcāti taṃtaṃpāḷisaṃvaṇṇanābhūtaṃ porāṇaṭṭhakathañca.
21 21. 因为它是依靠身体各肢节而生起的,所以与肢节相伴的学问被称为“肢”,或者是省略了后一个词。在“相”这个词上也是同样的道理,因此说“在手足等上面”等等。不过有些人说:“‘肢’就是肢体的变化,通过观察他人肢体的变化,也能知道得利、失利等。”相学就是通过相来显示认知方式的学问,为了用事例来说明它,就说了“般度王”等话。所谓般度王,就是前面所说的“陀迦那园主”。据说他是锡兰岛上那座叫陀迦那的僧园的建造者。有些地方也写作“南方摩度罗城主”,意思是南方摩度罗城的主人。以珠,就是珍珠。以拳,就是手印。以壁虎,就是用壁虎。他是以“珠”这个认知标记来说的,又以数量的标记说“三个”。巴利
21. Aṅgāni ārabbha pavattattā aṅgasahacaritaṃ satthaṃ ‘‘aṅga’’nti vuttaṃ uttarapadalopena vā. Nimittanti etthāpi eseva nayo, tenāha ‘‘hatthapādādīsū’’tiādi. Keci pana ‘‘aṅganti aṅgavikāraṃ paresaṃ aṅgavikāradassanenāpi lābhālābhādivijānana’’nti vadanti. Nimittasatthanti nimittena sañjānanappakāradīpakaṃ satthaṃ, taṃ vatthunā vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘paṇḍurājā’’tiādimāha. Paṇḍurājāti ca ‘‘dakkhiṇārāmādhipati’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Sīhaḷadīpe dakkhiṇārāmanāmakassa saṅghārāmassa kārakoti vadanti. ‘‘Dakkhiṇamadhurādhipatī’’ti ca katthaci likhitaṃ, dakkhiṇamadhuranagarassa adhipatīti attho. Muttāyoti muttikā. Muṭṭhiyāti hatthamuddāya. Gharagolikāyāti sarabunā. So ‘‘muttā’’ti saññānimittenāha, saṅkhyānimittena pana ‘‘tisso’’ti.
“大的”这个说法,是在显示:征兆本身虽然微小,但能产生大的果报,所以征兆和果报之间有差别。“跃起”就是跳跃。显示吉凶果报而生起、运行,就叫“兆”,也叫“灾异”,也就是指示吉凶的异常现象。它就像火冒出的烟一样,只是把业果显示出来,并不能产生业果。这就是名为某种果报。如此,就是以这样的方式。“指示”就是说明。“在上午时分”是按时间来说的。“名为某某”是按事物来说的。比如有人在梦里看见自己登上公牛、大象、宫殿或山岳,就会对他说“这名为某某果报”等等,这就是按事物来列举说明。“梦学”就是关于梦的学问。先前只就显示肢体的圆满或不圆满而说为“肢”,这里则因为显示能成就大威力等祥瑞特征的不同,而说为“相”,这就是它们的区别,所以说“以这个特征”等等。所谓“相”,就是在肢体、分支上所见到的特定形相,比如矛、吉祥、卍字、杵、宫殿等;人们通过这些形相来推知各种果报,所以叫“相”;阐明这些形相的学问,就叫相学。“已击者”指旧的,“未击者”指新的。如果读作“未击者”,那就按与前面所说的相反的意思来解释。从这以后,按天、罗刹、人等不同类别,依照所推定的果报,在种种事物的部位上,从这里或那里切割,就会产生名为某某的受用等果报。“用这样的木”指吉祥果木等木材,同样也用勺子等。如果说勺供等也属于火供,那为什么还要另外说呢?回答说“以这样的”等等。勺供等是就供具等不同而显示不同果报来说的,火供则是就其余内容的成就来说的,这是本意。所以说“勺供等”等等。巴利
‘‘Mahantāna’’nti etena appakaṃ nimittameva, mahantaṃ pana uppādoti nimittuppādānaṃ visesaṃ dasseti. Uppatitanti uppatanaṃ. Subhāsubhaphalaṃ pakāsento uppajjati gacchatīti uppādo, uppātopi, subhāsubhasūcikā bhūtavikati. So hi dhūmo viya aggissa kammaphalassa pakāsanamattameva karoti, na tu tamuppādetīti. Idanti idaṃ nāma phalaṃ. Evanti iminā nāma ākārena. Ādisantīti niddisanti. Pubbaṇhasamayeti kālavasena. Idaṃ nāmāti vatthuvasena vadati. Yo vasabhaṃ, kuñjaraṃ, pāsādaṃ, pabbataṃ vā āruḷhamattānaṃ supine passati, tassa ‘‘idaṃ nāma phala’’ntiādinā hi vatthukittanaṃ hoti. Supinakanti supinasatthaṃ. Aṅgasampattivipattidassanamattena pubbe ‘‘aṅga’’nti vuttaṃ, idha pana mahānubhāvatādinipphādakalakkhaṇavisesadassanena ‘‘lakkhaṇa’’nti ayametesaṃ viseso, tenāha ‘‘iminālakkhaṇenā’’tiādi. Lakkhaṇanti hi aṅgapaccaṅgesu dissamānākāravisesaṃ sattisirivacchagadāpāsādādikamadhippetaṃ taṃ taṃ phalaṃ lakkhīyati anenāti katvā, satthaṃ pana tappakāsanato lakkhaṇaṃ. Āhateti purāṇe. Anāhateti nave. Ahateti pana pāṭhe vuttavipariyāyena attho. Ito paṭṭhāyāti devarakkhasamanussādibhedena yathāphalaṃ parikappitena vividhavatthabhāge ito vā etto vā sañchinne idaṃ nāma bhogādiphalaṃ hoti. Evarūpena dārunāti palāsasiriphalādidārunā, tathā dabbiyā. Yadi dabbihomādīnipi aggihomāneva , atha kasmā visuṃ vuttānīti āha ‘‘evarūpāyā’’tiādi. Dabbihomādīni homopakaraṇādivisesehi phalavisesadassanavasena vuttāni, aggihomaṃ pana vuttāvasesasādhanavasena vuttanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘dabbihomādīnī’’tiādi.
“Kuṇḍako”是指碎米粒;“tilassa ida”是指芝麻油。这些复合词和派生词,是在约定俗成的通称意义上成立的;为了显示其特殊作用,所以说了“芝麻油等”。“Pakkhipana”是投入的意思。也有“pakkhipanavijjā”这种读法,意思是作为投入之因的明。“Dakkhiṇakkhakajaṇṇulohitādīhi”是指以右腋血、右膝血等。“Aṅgulaṭṭhiṃ disvā”是指看见手指骨或生于手指之骨,而不是看见手指之皮肤,只是依观察该骨之相而作预言,这就是所说之义。“Kulaputto”是指出身良善的善男子,以及品行端正的善男子。“Disvāpi”中的“api”一词,是“即使未见”的集合义。“Abbhino satthaṃ abbheyyaṃ”是指应刺穿武器。“Māsurakkhena kato gantho māsurakkho”是指摩苏罗叉所造之论。“Rājūhi paribhūttaṃ satthaṃ rājasatthaṃ”是指被诸王所享受的武器。所有这些都是刹帝利明论。“Siva”一词是寂静之义,所以说“santikaraṇavijjā”,即令烦恼止息的明之义。将“Sivā”一词本身缩短,如此而说,是指“siṅgālarutavijjā”,即依豺狼之声而了知吉凶的明。“Bhūtavejjamanto”是指制伏诸鬼神的咒。“Bhūrighare”是指在地下所造之家,或土造之家。“Bhūrivijjā sassabuddhikaraṇavijjā”见于《精义疏》。“Sappāvhāyanavijjā”是指令蛇前来的明。“Visavantameva vā”是指制伏毒者。“Bhāvaniddesa”中“māna”一词的末尾部分。依此而行者,即是毒明,这是连接之义。也有“Visatantrameva vā”这种读法。如此则成为自性之显示,即毒之考察论,这就是其义。“Tantra”一词是论著的别名。“Sapakkhakaapakkhakadvipadacatuppadānanti”是指属于同类的鹧鸪、苍蝇等,属于异类的家鸽等,以及天神、人类、旃陀罗等两足者,和鹿、兔、豺等四足者的。“Rutaṃ vassitaṃ”是指叫声。“Gataṃ gamanaṃ”是指行走,以此在此处省略了“migasadda”,或仅表示例示。“Sakuṇañāṇanti”是指依鸟而了知吉凶果报。“Nanu sakuṇavijjāya eva vāyasavijjāpaviṭṭhāti”是说“那确实是另一部论典”。应当看到,此处是依各自所宣示的论典相应而说各自之语。巴利
Kuṇḍakoti taṇḍulakhaṇḍaṃ, tilassa idanti telaṃ, samāsataddhitapadāni pasiddhesu sāmaññabhūtānīti visesakaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘tilatelādika’’nti vuttaṃ. Pakkhipananti pakkhipanatthaṃ. ‘‘Pakkhipanavijja’’ntipi pāṭho, pakkhipanahetubhūtaṃ vijjanti attho. Dakkhiṇakkhakajaṇṇulohitādīhīti dakkhiṇakkhakalohitadakkhiṇajaṇṇulohitādīhi. ‘‘Pubbe’’tiādinā aṅgaaṅgavijjānaṃ visesadassanena punaruttabhāvamapaneti. Aṅgulaṭṭhiṃ disvāti aṅgulibhūtaṃ, aṅguliyā vā jātaṃ aṭṭhiṃ passitvā, aṅgulicchavimattaṃ apassitvā tadaṭṭhivipassanavaseneva byākarontīti vuttaṃ hoti. ‘‘Aṅgalaṭṭhinti sarīra’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.21) pana ācariyadhammapālattherena vuttaṃ, evaṃ sati aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ viruhanabhāvena laṭṭhisadisattā sarīrameva aṅgalaṭṭhīti viññāyati. Kulaputtoti jātikulaputto, ācārakulaputto ca. Disvāpīti ettha api-saddo adisvāpīti sampiṇḍanattho. Abbhino satthaṃ abbheyyaṃ. Māsurakkhena kato gantho māsurakkho. Rājūhi paribhūttaṃ satthaṃ rājasatthaṃ. Sabbānipetāni khattavijjāpakaraṇāni. Siva-saddo santiatthoti āha ‘‘santikaraṇavijjā’’ti, upasaggūpasamanavijjāti attho. Sivā-saddameva rassaṃ katvā evamahāti sandhāya ‘‘siṅgālarutavijjā’’ti vadanti, siṅgālānaṃ rute subhāsubhasañjānanavijjāti attho. ‘‘Bhūtavejjamantoti bhūtavasīkaraṇamanto. Bhūrighareti antopathaviyaṃ kataghare, mattikāmayaghare vā. ‘‘Bhūrivijjā sassabuddhikaraṇavijjā’’ti sārasamāse. Sappāvhāyanavijjāti sappāgamanavijjā. Visavantameva vāti visavamānameva vā. Bhāvaniddesassa hi māna-saddassa antabyappadeso. Yāya karonti, sā visavijjāti yojanā. ‘‘Visatantrameva vā’’tipi pāṭho. Evaṃ sati sarūpadassanaṃ hoti, visavicāraṇaganthoyevāti attho. Tantranti hi ganthassa parasamaññā. Sapakkhakaapakkhakadvipadacatuppadānanti piṅgalamakkhikādisapakkhakagharagolikādiapakkhakadevamanussacaṅgorādidvipada- kaṇṭasasajambukādicatuppadānaṃ . Rutaṃ vassitaṃ. Gataṃ gamanaṃ, etena ‘‘sakuṇavijjā’’ti idha migasaddassa lopaṃ, nidassanamattaṃ vā dasseti. Sakuṇañāṇanti sakuṇavasena subhāsubhaphalassa jānanaṃ. Nanu sakuṇavijjāya eva vāyasavijjāpaviṭṭhāti āha ‘‘taṃ visuññeva sattha’’nti. Taṃtaṃpakāsakasatthānurūpavasena hi idha tassa tassa vacananti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“已经成熟的状态”要结合自身的存在和寿命的时期来理解,所以用“如今”等话来显示。“已指示之智”是指对应被指示之事的智。“保护箭”是指从箭保护自己,或者从自己保护箭。用“总摄一切”这个说法,是显示“miga”一词通用于一切鸟类和四足动物;或者这是省略一部分的表述,因为在四足动物中“miga”一词已经固定通用。了知一切鸟类和四足动物叫声的论典,通称为“兽轮”,正如在了知吉凶的各种方法中,有“一切吉祥轮”等通称一样,所以说“一切……乃至……已说”。巴利
Paripakkagatabhāvo attabhāvassa, jīvitakālassa ca vasena gahetabboti dasseti ‘‘idānī’’tiādinā. Ādiṭṭhañānanti ādisitabbassa ñāṇaṃ. Sararakkhaṇanti sarato attānaṃ, attato vā sarassa rakkhaṇaṃ. ‘‘Sabbasaṅgāhika’’nti iminā miga-saddassa sabbasakuṇacatuppadesu pavattiṃ dasseti, ekasesaniddeso vā esa catuppadesveva miga-saddassa niruḷhattā. Sabbesampi sakuṇacatuppadānaṃ rutajānanasatthassa migacakkasamaññā, yathā taṃ subhāsubhajānanappakāre sabbato bhadraṃ cakkādisamaññāti āha ‘‘sabba…pe… vutta’’nti.
22 “Sāmino”等语,是在说明可赞叹和不可赞叹的原因。“Lakkhaṇa”是指阐明它们特征的论典。按排除的方法,剩下的就是武器。“Yamhi kule”等语表明,在这个地方,正是以这样了知的因由,其余的才成为特征。“Ayaṃ viseso”说的是这个差别,即与前面所说的“lakkhaṇa”特征不同的差别。为了阐明它的含义,说了“idañcettha vatthū”——也就是正在吹火的人,意思是用嘴。“Piḷandhanakaṇṇikāya”指耳饰之环。“Gehakaṇṇikāya”指屋脊的顶饰,以此显示省略一分的说法,或共相的说法。“Kacchapalakkhaṇa”指龟的相状。“Sabbacatuppadānanti”是指miga一词是四足动物的称呼。巴利
22.‘‘Sāmino’’tiādi pasaṭṭhāpasaṭṭhakāraṇavacanaṃ. Lakkhaṇanti tesaṃ lakkhaṇappakāsakasatthaṃ. Pārisesanayena avasesaṃ āvudhaṃ. ‘‘Yamhi kule’’tiādinā imasmiṃ ṭhāne tathājānanahetu eva sesaṃ lakkhaṇanti dasseti. Ayaṃ visesoti ‘‘lakkhaṇa’’nti heṭṭhā vuttā lakkhaṇato viseso. Tadatthāvikaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘idañcettha vatthū’’ti vuttaṃ aggiṃ dhamamānanti aggiṃ mukhavātena jālentaṃ. Makkhesīti vināseti. Piḷandhanakaṇṇikāyāti kaṇṇālaṅkārassa. Gehakaṇṇikāyāti gehakūṭassa, etena ekasesanayaṃ, sāmaññaniddesaṃ vā upetaṃ. Kacchapalakkhaṇanti kummalakkhaṇaṃ. Sabbacatuppadānanti miga-saddassa catuppadavācakattamāha.
23 “Asukadivaseti”是按初二、初三等日期来说的。“Asukanakkhattena”是按与昴宿、娄宿、毕宿、觜宿等星宿的关联来说的。“Vippavutthānaṃ”指那些远离故土、离开自己国家的人。“Upasaṅkamanaṃ”是前往、接近。“Apayānaṃ”是退回、离开。“Dutiyapadepīti”:在说了“bāhirānaṃ raññaṃ……bhavissatī”之后的第二句中也一样。“Abbhantarānaṃ raññaṃ jayo”等两句所说的胜与败,是显而易见的。巴利
23.Asukadivaseti dutiyātatiyāditithivasena vuttaṃ. Asukanakkhattenāti assayujabharaṇīkattikārohaṇīādinakkhattayogavasena. Vippavutthānanti vippavasitānaṃ sadesato nikkhantānaṃ. Upasaṅkamanaṃ upayānaṃ. Apayānaṃ paṭikkamanaṃ. Dutiyapadepīti ‘‘bāhirānaṃ raññaṃ…pe… bhavissatī’’ti vutte dutiyavākyepi. ‘‘Abbhantarānaṃ raññaṃ jayo’’tiādīhi dvīhi vākyehi vuttā jayaparājayā pākaṭāyeva.
24 罗睺:罗睺是一位名叫罗睺的阿修罗主、阿修罗王。正如《大会经》的阿修罗品中所说:巴利
24.Rāhūti rāhu nāma asurissaro asurarājā. Tathā hi mahāsamayasutte asuranikāye vuttaṃ –
有一百位跋利之子,全都叫维罗遮那;
他们整备好军队后,就向罗睺跋陀走去。巴利
‘‘Satañca baliputtānaṃ, sabbe verocanāmakā; Sannayhitvā balisenaṃ, rāhubhaddamupāgamu’’nti. (dī. ni. 2.339);
日月被罗睺执取这件事,应当依据《相应部》里的《月经》和《日经》来说明。这里“iti”这个词是“等等”的意思,因为前面已经说了“月蚀等等”,所以日蚀和星蚀也都包括在内了。因此应当知道,就像日月一样,星宿也会被罗睺执取。正因如此,接着用“又复”等话,对星宿被执取这件事,说了第二种方式。至于“与火星等被执取相关联”这一句,是通过“未被执取之执取”的方式来说的,也就是与火星、月之子、日之师、金星、水星、彗星等被执取相关联,这也属于星宿被执取,因为是与运用一起被执取的。其实与运用一起,在吠陀时代也被称为执取。“流星陨落”是指光芒的陨落。当风团猛烈地互相撞击时,产生像灯焰一样的光明从空中落下,这就叫作流星陨落。《天文论》里也说:巴利
Tassa candimasūriyānaṃ gahaṇaṃ saṃyuttanikāye candimasuttasūriyasuttehi dīpetabbaṃ. Iti-saddo cettha ādiattho ‘‘candaggāhādayo’’ti vuttattā, tena sūriyaggāhanakkhattaggāhā saṅgayhanti. Tasmā candimasūriyānamiva nakkhattānampi rāhunā gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tato eva hi ‘‘api cā’’tiādinā nakkhattagāhe dutiyanayo vutto. Aṅgārakādigāhasamāyogopīti aggahitaggahaṇena aṅgārakasasiputtasūragarusukkaravisutaketusaṅkhātānaṃ gāhānaṃ samāyogo api nakkhattagāhoyeva saha payogena gahaṇato. Sahapayogopi hi vedasamayena gahaṇanti vuccati. Ukkānaṃ patananti ukkobhāsānaṃ patanaṃ. Vātasaṅghātesu hi vegena aññamaññaṃ saṅghaṭṭentesu dīpikobhāso viya obhāso uppajjitvā ākāsato patati, tatrāyaṃ ukkāpātavohāro. Jotisatthepi vuttaṃ –
大顶髻,以及炽烈的赤风之焰,明亮闪耀;
人的高度作为标准,流星被认为有种种不同。巴利
‘‘Mahāsikhā ca sukkhaggā-rattānilasikhojjalā; Porisī ca pamāṇena, ukkā nānāvidhā matā’’ti.
所谓“方所昏暗”,就是诸方出现扰动。这里用“就像被火焰、烟焰等的顶端弄得混乱的样子”这一说法,把它本身的样貌直接显示出来。意思是说,火焰、烟焰等的顶端以多种方式显现出来,这就叫作“方所燃烧”。世间人把那个就叫做“彗星”。在《天文论》中也这样说:巴利
Disākālusiyanti disāsu khobhanaṃ, taṃ sarūpato dasseti ‘‘aggisikhadhūmasikhādīhi ākulabhāvo viyā’’ti iminā, aggisikhadhūmasikhādīnaṃ bahudhā pātubhāvo eva disādāho nāmāti vuttaṃ hoti. Tadeva ‘‘dhūmaketū’’ti lokiyā vadanti. Vuttañca jotisatthe –
像旗杆一样带着火焰,以光的形式显现出异象。巴利
‘‘Ketu viya sikhāvatī, joti uppātarūpinī’’ti.
干云雷鸣,说的是没有雨的时候,被风力推动的云发出的吼声。世间人把这叫做旱雷。在《天文论》里也这样说:巴利
Sukkhavalāhakagajjananti vuṭṭhimantarena vāyuvegacalitassa valāhakassa nadanaṃ. Yaṃ lokiyā ‘‘nighāto’’ti vadanti. Vuttañca jotisatthe –
当强风在空中被风所击动时,
那雷从天上直劈下来,或者风由此而生起。巴利
‘‘Yadāntalikkhe balavā, māruto mārutāhato; Patatyadho sa nīghāto, jāyate vāyusambhavo’’ti.
乌达亚那的意思是执著和积聚。巴利
Udayananti lagganamāyūhanaṃ.
当它生起时,就是执取,随诸蕴次第而行。巴利
‘‘Yadodeti tadā laganaṃ, rāsīnamanvayaṃ kamā’’ti –
确实如此说。日月沉落也应依照此后第七堆的量来了知。云、烟、尘、罗睺——以这四种原因而有不清净,脱离这些则为清净。经中也这样说:“诸比丘,日月有四种垢染,日月被这些垢染染污时,便不炽热、不照耀、不光辉。哪四种呢?诸比丘,云是日月的垢染……烟……尘……罗睺,诸比丘……正是这些……不光辉。”巴利
Hi vuttaṃ. Atthaṅgamanampi tato sattamarāsippamāṇavasena veditabbaṃ. Abbhā dhūmo rajo rāhūti imehi catūhi kāraṇehi avisuddhatā. Tabbinimuttatā vodānaṃ. Vuttañca ‘‘cattārome bhikkhave, candimasūriyānaṃ upakkilesā, yehi upakkilesehi upakkiliṭṭhā candimasūriyā na tapanti na bhāsanti na virocanti. Katame cattāro? Abbhā bhikkhave, candimasūriyānaṃ upakkilesā, yena…pe… dhūmo…pe… rajo…pe… rāhu bhikkhave…pe… ime kho…pe… na virocantī’’ti (a. ni. 4.50).
25 25.“天”指云。“持续降雨”就是下雨。“不降雨”是指雨水无法被承接、难以承接,因此说“雨障”。“手印”是用手表达心意,而阿阇梨法护长老说,那其实就是屈指计算。阿阇梨舍利弗长老则指出:“所谓手印,是在指节上作标记来计算。”计算,是指以其余智能不间断地数数,应当理解为像足算、豆算等那样,以“一、二”等九种方式连续不断地计数。合在一起就是总合,分别生起就是减除,再次生起就是“善生起”,也有人读作“善生起”,意思是正确生起。用“等”字把除、分、取等也包括进来。其中,除是分别合起,意思是混合;分就是部分;享用就是分别;取就是拿取。这就是所说的总计算。“见已”在这里的意思是:以所见之量计算之后,应当取其义。巴利
25.Devassāti meghassa. Dhārānuppavecchanaṃ vassanaṃ. Avaggāhoti dhārāya avaggahaṇaṃ duggahaṇaṃ, tenāha ‘‘vassavibandho’’ti. Hatthamuddāti hatthena adhippetaviññāpanaṃ, taṃ pana aṅgulisaṅkocanena gaṇanāyevāti ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.21) vuttaṃ. Ācariyasāriputtattherena pana ‘‘hatthamuddā nāma aṅgulipabbesu saññaṃ ṭhapetvā gaṇanā’’ti dassitā. Gaṇanā vuccati acchiddakagaṇanā parisesañāyena, sā pana pādasikamilakkhakādayo viya ‘‘ekaṃ dve’’tiādinā navantavidhinā nirantaragaṇanāti veditabbā. Samūhanaṃ saṅkalanaṃ visuṃ uppādanaṃ apanayanaṃ paṭuppādanaṃ [saṭuppādanaṃ (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)] ‘‘saduppādana’’ntipi paṭhanti, sammā uppādananti attho. Ādi-saddena vokalanabhāgahārādike saṅgaṇhāti. Tattha vokalanaṃ visuṃ samūhakaraṇaṃ, vomissananti attho. Bhāgakaraṇaṃ bhāgo. Bhuñjanaṃ vibhajanaṃ hāro. Sāti yathāvuttā piṇḍagaṇanā disvāti ettha diṭṭhamattena gaṇetvāti attho gahetabbo.
“应辩诗人”在这里指的是《增支部》(4.231)中所说的那类,这是剩下的部分。与“诗人们作诗”相关联,由此显示出“诗人们所作的,或者这是诗人们的诗作”这个意思。“依自己的思考”等语,是在说明他们的本性。正如这样,只靠自己长时间思考题材和脉络来创作,应当知道这就是“思诗人”。听了某些内容之后,把没听过的和听过的连接起来进行创作,这是“闻诗人”。领会了某个义理之后,以略说、广说等方式来创作,这是“义诗人”。看到别人所作的诗歌或戏剧之后,凭着自己应机而起的辩才,创作出与所见相似的另一种,这是“应辩诗人”。以上就是它的含义。“与其相似”,就是与所见到的那种相似。“应作”在这里是修饰语,或者在“我将作”中是中性名词。“依应机而起的辩才”,就是依随顺因缘而生起的智慧。“为了生计”,只是就依论典所获得的意义来说的。诗人们的这个,就是诗作,也就是所谓的“歌”。巴利
Paṭibhānakavīti ettha aṅguttarāgame (a. ni. 4.231) vuttānanti seso, kavīnaṃ kabyakaraṇanti sambandho, etena kavīhi kataṃ, kavīnaṃ vā idaṃ kāveyyanti atthaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Attano cintāvasenā’’tiādi tesaṃ sabhāvadassanaṃ. Tathā hi vatthuṃ, anusandhiñca sayameva cirena cintetvā karaṇavasena cintākavi veditabbo. Kiñci sutvā sutena asutaṃ anusandhetvā karaṇavasena sutakavi, kiñci atthaṃ upadhāretvā tassa saṅkhipanavitthāraṇādivasena atthakavi, yaṃ kiñci parena kataṃ kabbaṃ vā nāṭakaṃ vā disvā taṃsadisameva aññaṃ attano ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānena karaṇavasena paṭibhānakavīti. Nti tamatthaṃ. Tappaṭibhāganti tena diṭṭhena sadisaṃ. ‘‘Kattabba’’nti ettha visesanaṃ, ‘‘karissāmī’’ti ettha vā bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ. Ṭhānuppattikapaṭibhānavasenāti kāraṇānurūpaṃ pavattanakañāṇavasena. Jīvikatthāyāti pakaraṇādhigatavaseneva vuttaṃ. Kavīnaṃ idanti kabyaṃ, yaṃ ‘‘gīta’’nti vuccati.
26 26. 以摄受的方式把女孩娶过来,就是迎娶;同样地,把女孩给出去,就是出嫁。这里则是省略了后分来说明这种做法,或者是把原因含在里面来说,所以说“这个男孩的”等等。“如是”就是指在这样发生的情况下,或者是因为这样的状态。“收入”指从田地等产生的收益。“债务”指为了增长财富而给了别人、应当归还的东西。有人说,在先前约定的时间还没到时收回的债务是收入,到了约定时间则是债务,但这种说法并不合理,因为单凭“债务”一词就已成立。别人给的债务或财物,这样连接。“不动产”指能长久存留者。在别处以两倍、三倍等收取的方式,将货物加以运用,就是运用。在那里或别处,按照时间约定以收取利息的方式加以运用,就是放贷。也有人说:“对没有货物本钱的人,让他们做买卖,说‘连本带这些利润一起还给我’,这样给钱就是运用;暂时性的给予就是放贷。”如果说今天投入的货物,明天变成两倍、今天变成四倍,那么意思就是:如果今天投入货物,这样到明天变成两倍,今天变成四倍。善男子的,或者以善的方式前往、进行,就是“有善男子”,令其生起,就是“令成有吉祥”,而那又只是令可爱可意者、或者有光辉者生起,所以说“令成可爱可意”等等。“令成有光辉”指令身体有光辉。“已消融者”指虽已安立,但未达完全成熟便消失者。同样地,以完全成熟的状态而不住立者。这一组四词是迂回说法。“施药”指给予安立胎儿的药。“以三种原因”在这里,当胎儿因风或生物而毁坏时,并非由先前之业造成机会,正是由于那个缘故,业才成熟;但如果由业本身造成机会,则不应一向期待风或生物,因此应当看到,业是单独的原因。然而在《律注》中说,胎儿因风或生物而毁坏时,没有业就不会毁坏,以此意趣,在那里说“以两种原因”。“应令止息者”指令止息者。“对治”指为了使它们不咬,而作对治。巴利
26. Pariggahabhāvena dārikāya gaṇhanaṃ āvāhanaṃ. Tathā dānaṃ vivāhanaṃ. Idha pana tathākaraṇassa uttarapadalopena niddeso, hetugabbhavasena vā, tenāha ‘‘imassa dārakassā’’tiādi. Itīti evaṃhontesu, evaṃbhāvato vā. Uṭṭhānanti khettādito uppannamāyaṃ. Iṇanti dhanavaḍḍhanatthaṃ parassa dinnaṃ pariyudañcanaṃ. Pubbe paricchinnakāle asampattepi uddharitamiṇaṃ uṭṭhānaṃ, yathāparicchinnakāle pana sampatte iṇanti keci, tadayuttameva iṇagahaṇeneva sijjhanato. Paresaṃ dinnaṃ iṇaṃ vā dhananti sambandho. Thāvaranti ciraṭṭhitikaṃ. Desantare diguṇatiguṇādigahaṇavasena bhaṇḍappayojanaṃ payogo. Tattha vā aññattha vā yathākālaparicchedaṃ vaḍḍhigahaṇavasena payojanaṃ uddhāro. ‘‘Bhaṇḍamūlarahitānaṃ vāṇijaṃ katvā ettakena udayena saha mūlaṃ dethā’ti dhanadānaṃ payogo, tāvakālikadānaṃ uddhāro’’tipi vadanti. Ajja payojitaṃ diguṇaṃ catuguṇaṃ hotīti yadi ajja payojitaṃ bhaṇḍaṃ, evaṃ aparajja diguṇaṃ, ajja catuguṇaṃ hotīti attho. Subhassa, subhena vā gamanaṃ pavattanaṃ subhago, tassa karaṇaṃ subhagakaraṇaṃ, taṃ pana piyamanāpassa, sassirīkassa vā karaṇamevāti āha ‘‘piyamanāpakaraṇa’’ntiādi. Sassirīkakaraṇanti sarīrasobhaggakaraṇaṃ. Vilīnassāti patiṭṭhahitvāpi paripakkamapāpuṇitvā vilopassa. Tathā paripakkabhāvena aṭṭhitassa. Pariyāyavacanametaṃ padacatukkaṃ. Bhesajjadānanti gabbhasaṇṭhāpanabhesajjassa dānaṃ. Tīhi kāraṇehīti ettha vātena, pāṇakehi vā gabbhe vinassante na purimakammunā okāso kato, tappaccayā eva kammaṃ vipaccati, sayameva pana kammunā okāse kate na ekantena vātā, pāṇakā vā apekkhitabbāti kammassa visuṃ kāraṇabhāvo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vinayaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vi. aṭṭha. 2.185) pana vātena pāṇakehi vā gabbho vinassanto kammaṃ vinā na vinassatīti adhippāyena tamaññātra dvīhi kāraṇehīti vuttaṃ. Nibbāpanīyanti upasamakaraṃ. Paṭikammanti yathā te na khādanti, tathā paṭikaraṇaṃ.
“束缚作”是指像这样:无法摇动任何东西,也就是不让它散乱的做法。“为了转身”是指与武器等一起举起手的人,为了转向别处,也就是不投向自己守护的地方,而投向别处的意思。这里说的就是投向别处。“投”就是投向别处的意思。“在判决处”就是在裁决判决的地方。也有人说:把想要达成的事,以在天神耳边诉说的方式低声念出来,就叫“耳边低语”。“让天神降临”在这里是指通过念诵咒语使天神降临。“为了生计”是指像侍奉那样维生,也就是为了维持生计。“日神侍奉”是指以花鬘等供养后,整日面向太阳站立,侍奉太阳。“同样地”这句话是把“为了生计”这个词也连带过来。“Sirivhāyana”是从 ī 音省略 a 音的连声说明,因此说“siriyā avhāyana”。而“Sirena”则是从位置方面显示呼唤的方式。那些从 a 音省略 a 音而读作“siravhāyana”的人,在他们的读法中,这个意思是“念诵咒语后,以头呼唤想要达成的事”。巴利
Bandhakaraṇanti yathā jiṃ cāletuṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ anāloḷitakaraṇaṃ. Parivattanatthanti āvudhādinā saha ukkhittahatthānaṃ aññattha parivattanatthaṃ, attanā gopitaṭṭhāne akhipetvā parattha khipanatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Khipatīti ca aññattha khipatīti attho. Vinicchayaṭṭhāneti aḍḍavinicchayaṭṭhāne. Icchitatthassa devatāya kaṇṇe kathanavasena jappanaṃ kaṇṇajappananti ca vadanti. Devataṃ otāretvāti ettha mantajappanena devatāya otāraṇaṃ. Jīvikatthāyāti yathā pāricariyaṃ katvā jīvitavutti hoti, tathā jīvitavuttikaraṇatthāya. Ādiccapāricariyāti karamālāhi pūjaṃ katvā sakaladivasaṃ ādiccābhimukhāvaṭṭhānena ādiccassa paricaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Tathevā’’ti iminā ‘‘jīvikatthāyā’’ti padamākaḍḍhati. Sirivhāyananti ī-kārato a-kāralopena sandhiniddeso, tenāha ‘‘siriyā avhāyana’’nti. ‘‘Sirenā’’ti pana ṭhānavasena avhāyanākāraṃ dasseti. Ye tu a-kārato a-kārassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘siravhāyana’’nti paṭhanti, tesaṃ pāṭhe ayamattho ‘‘mantaṃ jappetvā sirasā icchitassa atthassa avhāyana’’nti.
27 天神之处就是天神的居所。供养就是敬奉。成就之时就是所祈求的事情实现的时候。寂静回应业是指对天神祈愿时应当做的寂静回应,也就是做出这个回应。这里的寂静是指通过念诵咒语来作供养,以这个寂静作为祈愿的运用,这就是它的意思。于彼是指如果说了“如果我这个名称能够成就”,在那个作为回应之果、符合所愿的业中。其是指所说的“誓愿”,也就是那个回应的誓愿。因为按照回应作了供养时,誓愿和祈愿就已经完成并交付了。已受持咒语者的,就是已受持咒语者的。作运用是指作侍奉之事。iti 是表示原因的词,以此显示 vassa 和 vossa 二词在男子和阉人中的使用,以原因性来说明,由于没有从阉人而来的区别,所以是 vasso。由于缺乏男子相,被轻蔑而住,所以是 vosso。有贪欲之流者,是 vasso。已离贪欲之流者,是 vossoti,也有人说这是依语源方式而成立词义。作 vassa 是指以相应药物而治之。作 vossa 则是以摇动种子等法,因此本生注中说“vossavarā 就是摇动种子的后宫守卫”。唯无欲是指女人仅无欲。相是指男子之相。巴利
27.Devaṭṭhānanti devāyatanaṃ. Upahāranti pūjaṃ. Samiddhikāleti āyācitassa atthassa siddhakāle. Santipaṭissavakammanti devatāyācanāya yā santi paṭikattabbā, tassā paṭissavakaraṇaṃ. Santīti cettha mantajappanena pūjākaraṇaṃ, tāya santiyā āyācanappayogoti attho. Tasminti yaṃ ‘‘sace me idaṃ nāma samijjhissatī’’ti vuttaṃ, tasmiṃ paṭissavaphalabhūte yathābhipatthitakammasmiṃ. Tassāti yo ‘‘paṇidhī’’ti ca vutto, tassa paṭissavassa. Yathāpaṭissavañhi upahāre kate paṇidhiāyācanā katā niyyātitā hotīti. Gahitamantassāti uggahitamantassa. Payogakaraṇanti upacārakammakaraṇaṃ. Itīti kāraṇatthe nipāto, tena vassavossa-saddānaṃ purisapaṇḍakesu pavattiṃ kāraṇabhāvena dasseti, paṇḍakato visesena asati bhavatīti vasso. Purisaliṅgato virahena avaasati hīḷito hutvā bhavatīti vosso. Viseso rāgassavo yassāti vasso. Vigato rāgassavo yassāti vossoti niruttinayena padasiddhītipi vadanti. Vassakaraṇaṃ tadanurūpabhesajjena. Vossakaraṇaṃ pana uddhatabījatādināpi, teneva jātakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘vossavarāti uddhatabījā orodhapālakā’’ti vuttaṃ . Acchandikabhāvamattanti itthiyā akāmabhāvamattaṃ. Liṅganti purisanimittaṃ.
在家宅里做供施仪式,就是为了消除灾祸、求得增长,通过念咒来清净自己和他人。“他们”指的是其他人。“医药”指用药治疗。“催吐”就是让东西吐出来。“上泻”其实就是催吐,因为经上说这是“把病垢向上排出去”。“泻药”就是普通的通便药。“下泻”就是纯净的泻剂、洗肠等通便方法,因为经上说这是“把病垢向下排出去”。这样一来,催吐就是呕出来,上泻就是排病垢;同样,泻药就是排泄,下泻就是排病垢——它们之间的区别就很明显了。“诸垢”指胆汁等垢。“治痰”等指头部放血疗法。“治耳病”指缝合断耳之治疗。“治疮”指敷药之治疗。“眼涂油”指用于排出眼中热气的油。用它涂眼后,眼中热气就会排出。用来塞鼻子的,就是鼻药。“膜”指眼膜。“能去除”指能消除。“碱眼药”指碱性的眼药。依词源规则,清凉本身就是真实的,它的作用就是眼药,所以称为实眼药,因此说“清凉药眼药”。“细棒医业”指治疗眼病的医业。因为像细棒一样,所以称为细棒,即眼病,治疗它的医业就是眼科医业。这里说“涂眼药等也是眼科医业”,是为了包括其余所说的眼病治疗。有些人说,为了取出被刺入的细棒而做的医业就是细棒医业,但这应当理解为已经包含在“外科医业”一词中了。巴利
Vatthubalikammakaraṇanti gharavatthusmiṃ balikammassa karaṇaṃ, taṃ pana upaddavapaṭibāhanatthaṃ, vaḍḍhanatthañca karonti, mantajappanena attano, aññesañca mukhasuddhikaraṇaṃ.Tesanti aññesaṃ. Yoganti bhesajjapayogaṃ. Vamananti pacchindanaṃ. Uddhaṃvirecananti vamanabhedameva ‘‘uddhaṃ dosānaṃ nīharaṇa’’nti vuttattā. Virecananti pakativirecanameva. Adhovirecananti suddhavatthikasāvavatthiādivatthikiriyā ‘‘adho dosānaṃ nīharaṇa’’nti vuttattā. Atho vamanaṃ uggiraṇameva, uddhaṃvirecanaṃ dosanīharaṇaṃ. Tathā virecanaṃ virekova, adhovirecanaṃ dosanīharaṇanti ayametesaṃ viseso pākaṭo hoti. Dosānanti ca pittādidosānanti attho. Semhanīharaṇādi sirovirecanaṃ.Kaṇṇabandhanatthanti chinnakaṇṇānaṃ saṅghaṭanatthaṃ. Vaṇaharaṇatthanti arupanayanatthaṃ. Akkhitappanatelanti akkhīsu usumassa nīharaṇatelaṃ. Yena akkhimhi añjite uṇhaṃ usumaṃ nikkhamati. Yaṃ nāsikāya gaṇhīyati, taṃ natthu.Paṭalānīti akkhipaṭalāni. Nīharaṇasamatthanti apanayanasamatthaṃ. Khārañjananti khārakamañjanaṃ. Sītameva saccaṃ niruttinayena, tassa kāraṇaṃ añjanaṃ saccañjananti āha ‘‘sītalabhesajjañjana’’nti. Salākavejjakammanti akkhirogavejjakammaṃ. Salākasadisattā salākasaṅkhātassa akkhirogassa vejjakammanti hi sālākiyaṃ. Idaṃ pana vuttāvasesassa akkhirogapaṭikammassa saṅgahaṇatthaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘tappanādayopi hi sālākiyānevā’’ti. Paṭividdhassa salākassa nikkhamanatthaṃ vejjakammaṃ salākavejjakammanti keci, taṃ pana sallakattiyapadeneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
把刺进身体的刺切开、拔出来,就是外科;为了这个目的而做的医疗工作,就是外科医业。“养童”指养育孩子,这就是养童业;或者也可以这样理解:孩子本身就叫“童”,被养育叫“养”,养护孩子这件事就是“养童业”,能成办这件事的医疗工作就是它的意思。“根药等”指在止息疾病方面有力量的药物,叫根药;或者,对治根本疾病等的药物也是这样。因为疾病是随着根本而分两种的。其中,治好了根本病,另一种病大多数也会随之平息,所以说“显示身病治疗等”。其中,“身病治疗”指从根本来说,以属于身体的药物治疗,或者指治疗属于身体的疾病。“碱水等”指碱水等。在与此相应的疮口上,即在已平息的根本病的合适疮口上。“那些”指根药。除去、拿走,就是用它们来治疗,这样说。这里,因为养童、外科、眼科等类别的医方在此之前已经说过,所以这里是依剩余而说;因此,应当知道其余医方也在此处收摄。所有这些在此处都只是以活命为因的,因为经中说“以邪命维持生活”。然而,在各地巴利中说的“iti vā”。其中,“iti”是不变词,表示种类之义;“vā”表示选择之义。这里说的是:以这种方式,或者以这种方式之外的另一种方式。因此,应当知道:那些在此之外的出家外道所依止的、作为活命手段的技艺处、明处等,以活命为生者所依止的,它们的摄取也已作。巴利
Sallassa paṭividdhassa kattanaṃ ubbāhanaṃ sallakattaṃ, tadatthāya vejjakammaṃ sallakattavejjakammaṃ. Kumāraṃ bharatīti kumārabhato, tassa bhāvo komārabhaccaṃ, kumāro eva vā komāro, bhatanaṃ bhaccaṃ, tassa bhaccaṃ tathā, tadabhinipphādakaṃ vejjakammanti attho. Mūlāni padhānāni rogūpasamane samatthāni bhesajjāni mūlabhesajjāni, mūlānaṃ vā byādhīnaṃ bhesajjāni tathā. Mūlānubandhavasena hi duvidho byādhi. Tatra mūlabyādhimhi tikicchite yebhuyyena itaraṃ vūpasamati, tenāha ‘‘kāyatikicchataṃdassetī’’tiādi . Tattha kāyatikicchatanti mūlabhāvato sarīrabhūtehi bhesajjehi, sarīrabhūtānaṃ vā rogānaṃ tikicchakabhāvaṃ. Khārādīnīti khārodakādīni. Tadanurūpe vaṇeti vūpasamitassa mūlabyādhino anucchavike arumhi. Tesanti mūlabhesajjānaṃ. Apanayanaṃ apaharaṇaṃ, tehi atikicchananti vuttaṃ hoti. Idañca komārabhaccasallakattasālākiyādivisesabhūtānaṃ tantīnaṃ pubbe vuttattā pārisesavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā tadavasesāya tantiyā idha saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo, sabbāni cetāni ājīvahetukāniyeva idhādhippetāni ‘‘micchājīvena jīvikaṃ kappentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.21) vuttattā. Yaṃ pana tattha tattha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘iti vā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha itī-ti pakāratthe nipāto, vā-ti vikappanatthe. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – iminā pakārena, ito aññena vāti. Tena yāni ito bāhirakapabbajitā sippāyatanavijjāṭṭhānādīni jīvikopāyabhūtāni ājīvikapakatā upajīvanti, tesaṃ pariggaho katoti veditabbaṃ.
过去劫常见论的解释巴利
Pubbantakappikasassatavādavaṇṇanā
28 现在为了解释“空性开示”这一段的含义,要说明它的连结,所以说了“如是”等话。其中,“所说之相”是同一个意思上的第六格,或者因为“连结”这个词在主动语态的动词表达中用作主格。所谓“比丘僧所说之相”,就是“乃至为彼世尊所”等所说的相。在圣典中,这里的关联是这样的:诸比丘,佛的功德并不只是你们所知道的这些,还有未显现的,如“诸比丘,有其他法”等广说。通过“这些见处被这样执取”等话,说明常见等见处被执取的方式是空的;通过“而不执取那认知”,说明戒等不可执取,显示无常、无实等;在那些尚未离贪的受中,外道的这些见缚会产生,而作为它们条件的痴等,通过显示没有感受的造作者这一自性,说明一切法没有我、没有我所,并显示无取般涅槃。因此,这个开示以彰显空性为主,所以说“开始空性开示”。巴利
28. Idāni suññatāpakāsanavārassatthaṃ vaṇṇento anusandhiṃ pakāsetuṃ ‘‘eva’’ntiādimāha. Tattha vuttavaṇṇassāti sahatthe chaṭṭhivacanaṃ, sāmiatthe vā anusandhi-saddassa bhāvakammavasena kiriyādesanāsu pavattanato. Bhikkhusaṅghena vuttavaṇṇassāti ‘‘yāvañcidaṃ tena bhagavatā’’tiādinā vuttavaṇṇassa. Tatra pāḷiyaṃ ayaṃ sambandho – na bhikkhave, ettakā eva buddhaguṇā ye tumhākaṃ pākaṭā, apākaṭā pana ‘‘atthi bhikkhave, aññe dhammā’’ti vitthāro. ‘‘Ime diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṃ gahitā’’tiādinā sassatādidiṭṭhiṭṭhānānaṃ yathāgahitākārassa suññabhāvappakāsanato, ‘‘tañca pajānanaṃ na parāmasatī’’ti sīlādīnañca aparāmasanīyabhāvadīpanena niccasārādivirahappakāsanato, yāsu vedanāsu avītarāgatāya bāhirānaṃ etāni diṭṭhivibandhakāni sambhavanti, tāsaṃ paccayabhūtānañca sammohādīnaṃ vedakakārakasabhāvābhāvadassanamukhena sabbadhammānaṃ attattaniyatāvirahadīpanato, anupādāparinibbānadīpanato ca ayaṃ desanā suññatāvibhāvanappadhānāti āha ‘‘suññatāpakāsanaṃ ārabhī’’ti.
“教法”是指按律等类别区分、由心确立的经教。“说法”则是对那由心确立的经教的阐明,或是如法地宣说、施设成为法的言说,或是依随顺等方式的讲说。教法与说法的差别,前面已经确定过了,就是针对这个意思而说“于说法,于教法”。“如是等”这里,“等”字涵盖了谛、自性、定、慧、本性、福、罪、所知等。正如这个“法”字,在“诸比丘,由于对四法的不了悟”等句中,指的是“谛”;在“善法、不善法”等句中,指的是“自性”;在“那些世尊是如是法”等句中,指的是“定”;在“真实、法、忍、施,此人死后不忧愁”等句中,指的是“慧”;在“诸比丘,有生法的众生,生起这样的欲求”等句中,指的是“本性”;在“善修的法带来安乐”等句中,指的是“福”;在“四波罗夷法”等句中,指的是“罪”;在“一切法以一切行相,现于佛陀世尊的智门前”等句中,指的是“所知”。“诸法存在”的意思是:空无有情、命者,只是诸法而已。为了说明“在功德上转起”是什么意思,而说“因此”等。巴利
Pariyattīti vinayādibhedabhinnā manasā vavatthāpitā tanti. Desanāti tassā tantiyā manasā vavatthāpitāya vibhāvanā, yathādhammaṃ dhammābhilāpabhūtā vā paññāpanā, anulomādivasena vā kathananti pariyattidesanānaṃ viseso pubbeyeva vavatthāpitoti imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘desanāya, pariyattiya’’nti ca vuttaṃ. Evamādīsūti ettha ādi-saddena saccasabhāvasamādhipaññāpakatipuññāpattiñeyyādayo saṅgayhanti. Tathā hi ayaṃ dhamma-saddo ‘‘catunnaṃ bhikkhave, dhammānaṃ ananubodhā’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.1) sacce pavattati, ‘‘kusalā dhammā akusalā dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. tikamātikā 1) sabhāve, ‘‘evaṃdhammā te bhagavanto ahesu’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.13, 94, 145; 3.142; ma. ni. 3.167; saṃ. ni. 5.378) samādhimhi, ‘‘saccaṃ dhammo dhiti cāgo, sa ve pecca na socati’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 190) paññāyaṃ, ‘‘jātidhammānaṃ bhikkhave, sattānaṃ evaṃ icchā uppajjatī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.131; 3.373; paṭi. ma. 1.33) pakatiyaṃ, ‘‘dhammo suciṇṇo sukhamāvahātī’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 184; theragā. 303; jā. 1.10.102; 15.385) puññe, ‘‘cattāro pārājikā dhammā’’tiādīsu (pārā. 233) āpattiyaṃ, ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthamāgacchantī’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) ñeyye pavattati. Dhammā hontīti sattajīvato suññā dhammamattā hontīti attho. Kimatthiyaṃ guṇe pavattananti āha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi.
“蚊喙之针”,是指针口蝇的喙,也就是所说的针。应当与“像没有可立足之处一样”联系起来理解。除了如来之外——也就是把如来排除在外。“难见”这个词本身就已经说明,那些法是难以深入的,所以才说“没有可立足之处”。“应被获得”就是可被得到的,那本身就是“可被获得”;或者说,被得到就是“获得”,值得被得到就是“可被获得”;不可被得到就是“不可获得”;“立足”就是它们安立的地方,或者安立本身就是“立足”;这里有不可获得的立足,就是“没有可立足之处”。这段话的意思是:如果有人不知道自己的限度,想用智慧去深入那些法,他的那种智慧就完全没有立足之地,就像蚊子的喙针落在大海里一样。因为根本无法深入,所以不可能看见它们“有这么多、是这样的”,因此说“因为甚深,所以确实难见”。而那些连看都看不见的法,深入之后一点一点去了悟就更谈不上了,所以说“因为难见,所以确实难了悟”。由于它是在被称为一切烦恼热恼止息的最高果位之顶生起的,又因为以前导和随行的方式,被寂灭一切烦恼热恼的等至所遍满,所以是“寂灭一切热恼”。由于这种状态,所以是“寂静”。意思是:道、果、涅槃这些以寂静为所缘的法,因为不存在不寂静自性的烦恼和诸行的缘故。巴利
Makasatuṇḍasūciyāti sūcimukhamakkhikāya tuṇḍasaṅkhātāya sūciyā. Alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho viyāti sambandho. Aññatra tathāgatāti ṭhapetvā tathāgataṃ. ‘‘Duddasā’’ti padeneva tesaṃ dhammānaṃ dukkhogāhatā pakāsitāti ‘‘alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā’’ icceva vuttaṃ. Labhitabbāti labbhanīyā, sā eva labbhaneyyā, labhīyate vā labbhanaṃ, tamarahatīti labbhaneyyā, na labbhaneyyā alabbhaneyyā, patiṭṭhahanti etthāti patiṭṭhā, patiṭṭhahanaṃ vā patiṭṭhā, alabbhaneyyā patiṭṭhā etthāti alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – sace koci attano pamāṇaṃ ajānanto ñāṇena te dhamme ogāhituṃ ussāhaṃ kareyya, tassa taṃ ñāṇaṃ appatiṭṭhameva makasatuṇḍasūci viya mahāsamuddeti. Ogāhitumasakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘ettakā ete īdisā vā’’ti te passituṃ na sakkāti vuttaṃ ‘‘gambhīrattā eva duddasā’’ti. Ye pana daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tesaṃ ogāhitvā anu anu bujjhane kathā eva natthīti āha ‘‘duddasattā eva duranubodhāti. Sabbakilesapariḷāhapaṭippassaddhisaṅkhātaaggaphalamatthake samuppannatā, purecarānucaravasena nibbutasabbakilesapariḷāhasamāpattisamokiṇṇattā ca nibbutasabbapariḷāhā. Tabbhāvato santāti attho. Santārammaṇāni maggaphalanibbānāni anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ, saṅkhārānañca abhāvato.
或者,就像以遍处为基础而破除遍处的虚空,以及以它为所缘的识那样无边无际,同样,由于散乱已被彻底清除,心恒常安定,依这样的作意之力,那些以彼为所缘的诸法,其寂静的状态应当了知。又像射手不偏离靶心就能射中目标一样,不偏离而如实了悟诸法的自性,这才是殊胜的味道、广大的味道。所以说“以不满足之义”,意思就是具有不让人满足的自性。因为“满足”“饱足”“令饱足”本来就是同义词。也有人把“以不满足之义”解释为“以令人希求殊胜味之义”。对于那些已经通达的人来说,只有佛陀才以一切方式成为这些法的境界,所以这不是思辨之智所能触及的领域,因此说“以最上智为境界故”等等。“微妙”,是指在所知之法中,以锐利的方式运作而显得善巧。然而,这种善巧之所以明显,是因为它在所缘上无碍而转,并且能够把握微细的所知,所以说“以细妙微细自性故”。为了证明“唯诸智者”这一限定,又说“以非愚者之境故”。巴利
Atha vā kasiṇugghāṭimākāsatabbisayaviññāṇānaṃ anantabhāvo viya susamūhatavikkhepatāya niccasamāhitassa manasikārassa vasena tadārammaṇadhammānaṃ santabhāvo veditabbo. Avirajjhitvā nimittapaṭivedho viya issāsānaṃ avirajjhitvā dhammānaṃ yathābhūtasabhāvāvabodho sāduraso mahārasova hotīti āha ‘‘atittikaraṇaṭṭhenā’’ti, atappanakaraṇasabhāvenāti attho. Sohiccaṃ titti tappananti hi pariyāyo. Atittikaraṇaṭṭhenāti patthetvā sādurasakaraṇaṭṭhenātipi atthaṃ vadanti. Paṭivedhappattānaṃ tesu ca buddhānameva sabbākārena visayabhāvūpagamanato na takkabuddhiyā gocarāti āha ‘‘uttamañāṇavisayattā’’tiādi. Nipuṇāti ñeyyesu tikkhappavattiyā chekā. Yasmā pana so chekabhāvo ārammaṇe appaṭihatavuttitāya, sukhumañeyyaggahaṇasamatthatāya ca supākaṭo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘saṇhasukhumasabhāvattā’’ti. Paṇḍitehiyevāti avadhāraṇaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘bālānaṃ avisayattā’’ti āha.
这是从注释书的理路而来的另一种解释:因为能阐明律的制定等甚深且需要引导的内容,所以是“甚深”。因为即使经过无数大劫,也只是偶尔才能遇到,所以是“难见”。而这里的“见”,应当理解为只有以慧眼才能见。因为被称为“法随觉”的随觉,只有某些人才有可能生起,所以是“难了悟”。因为自性是寂静的,而且对于应受调教的众生来说,它是一切功德圆满的最终归宿,所以是“寂静”。因为依靠自身的诸缘而被引导至最殊胜的状态,所以是“殊胜”。因为已经证得诸谛的真实特相,不是靠思辨的人所能行,也不是靠思辨的智慧所能行,所以是“非思辨所行”。因为以谛、缘起等方式阐明精微之义,所以是“精微”。因为只有世间最胜的智者——正自觉者才能了知、才能宣说,所以是“唯智者所能了知”。巴利
Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathānayato aparo nayo – vinayapaṇṇattiādigambhīraneyyavibhāvanato gambhīrā. Kadāciyeva asaṅkhyeyye mahākappe atikkamitvāpi dullabhadassanatāya duddasā. Dassanañcettha paññācakkhuvaseneva veditabbaṃ. Dhammanvayasaṅkhātassa anubodhassa kassacideva sambhavato duranubodhā. Santasabhāvato, veneyyānañca sabbaguṇasampadānaṃ pariyosānattā santā. Attano paccayehi padhānabhāvaṃ nītatāya paṇītā. Samadhigatasaccalakkhaṇatāya atakkehi puggalehi, atakkena vā ñāṇena avacaritabbato atakkāvacarā. Nipuṇaṃ, nipuṇe vā atthe saccapaccayākārādivasena vibhāvanato nipuṇā. Loke aggapaṇḍitena sammāsambuddhena veditabbato pakāsitabbato paṇḍitavedanīyā.
因为世尊确实获得了无碍智,所以用“我是一切知者”“诸比丘,如来具足十力”等话,宣说了自己一切知等功德,因此说“自己证知、现证之后而宣说”。为了显示“自己”这个词,以及通过简别、限定的方式说明应当排除的含义,所以说“成为不由他导”,意思是不由他人觉悟而成为。“证知”一词,依据“无知性发生”等句中省略“y”音的用法,用“以殊胜之智”来表示。另外,“自己证知”这个词的释义是“成为不由他导”,而“现证之后”这个词的释义则是“自己……之后”。因为“自己”这个词在“现证之后”中也应当连接起来。“以殊胜之智”则是表示其原因,或者表示其工具。巴利
Anāvaraṇañāṇapaṭilābhato hi bhagavā ‘‘sabbavidūhamasmi, (ma. ni. 1.178; 2.342; dha. pa. 353; mahāva. 11) dasabalasamannāgato bhikkhave, tathāgato’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.21; 2.22) attano sabbaññutādiguṇe pakāsesi, tenevāha ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā pavedetī’’ti. Sayaṃ-saddena, niddhāritāvadhāraṇena vā nivattetabbamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘anaññaneyyo hutvā’’ti vuttaṃ, aññehi abodhito hutvāti attho. Abhiññāti ya-kāralopo ‘‘aññāṇatā āpajjatī’’tiādīsu (pari. 296) viyāti dasseti ‘‘abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇenā’’ti iminā. Apica ‘‘sayaṃ abhiññā’’ti padassa anaññaneyyo hutvāti atthavacanaṃ, ‘‘sacchikatvā’’ti padassa pana sayameva…pe… katvāti. Sayaṃ-saddā hi sacchikatvāti etthāpi sambajjhitabbo. Abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇenāti ca tassa hetuvacanaṃ, karaṇavacanaṃ vā.
在这里,虽然一切知智并不像果与涅槃那样,具有应当被亲自证得的本性,但是当漏尽智已经证得时,它也就已经证得了,因此,使那一切知智现前就是现证,所以经文说“以殊胜的智现前之后”。这里的工具格表示原因,意思是:以被称为最上道智的殊胜智的证得为原因。或者,如果“殊胜智”指的是省察智,那么表示工具义的工具格也同样说得通。而这里的“宣说”应当理解为:由于成就了向其他境界——如谛等——说法的功用,以及由于“唯我是一正自觉者”等语的自称。所谓“以功德法”,即依称为功德的诸法。“如实”,即如真实,依同义之“ṇya”词缀而成。巴利
Tattha kiñcāpi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ phalanibbānāni viya sacchikātabbasabhāvaṃ na hoti, āsavakkhayañāṇe pana adhigate adhigatameva hoti, tasmā tassa paccakkhakaraṇaṃ sacchikiriyāti āha ‘‘abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena paccakkhaṃ katvā’’ti. Hetuatthe cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ, aggamaggañāṇasaṅkhātassa abhivisiṭṭhañāṇassādhigamahetūti attho. Abhivisiṭṭhañāṇanti vā paccavekkhaṇāñāṇe adhippete karaṇatthe karaṇavacanampi yujjateva. Pavedanañcettha aññāvisayānaṃ saccādīnaṃ desanākiccasādhanato, ‘‘ekomhi sammāsambuddho’’tiādinā (mahāva. 11; kathā. 405) paṭijānanato ca veditabbaṃ. Guṇadhammehīti guṇasaṅkhātehi dhammehi. Yathābhūtameva yathābhuccaṃ sakatthe ṇyapaccayavasena.
“正在说”在这里,“māna”这个词有“努力”的意思,就像“诸比丘,有一个人出现在世间……”(《增支部》1.170;《论事》405)那样,所以意思是“正在努力想说”。因为处于这种状态的人确实可以称为“想说者”,因此说了“如来……”等话。即使那些只说了一部分的人,也像说颠倒话的人一样,不能说他们是在正确地说话。为了显示怎样才是正确地说话,所以说了“不遗漏……”等话。由此表明,只有毫无遗漏地说,才是正确地说话。用“他们能够说”这句话,说明了“他们说”所具有的“有能力说”的含义,就像“他能解开这个结”(《相应部》1.23;《藏论》22;《弥兰陀问经》1.1.9)一样。那些被世尊如此赞叹的法,是哪些呢?这是连接。在“诸比丘,还有其他法……”等经文中,为了指出与所说的“一切知智”一词相矛盾,而说了“如果这样……”等。其中,“如果这样”的意思是:如果“一切知智”这样的说法存在的话。所谓“复数说明”,是针对“诸比丘,有……”等话说的。因为这里的“有”这个词也是复数,就像“有乳,有牛”等中那样,只取不变词的性质。虽然这个智从自性上说只有一个,但从相应和所缘来说,它值得用复数来表达,因此用“由于众多心……所缘”来回答。“由于与众多心相应”就是与众多心相应。“众多所缘是它的所缘”,因此称为“众多所缘”,由于这种状态,也就是说它有一切所缘。巴利
Vadamānāti ettha sattiattho mānasaddo yathā ‘‘ekapuggalo bhikkhave, loke uppajjamāno uppajjatī’’ti, (a. ni. 1.170; kathā. 405) tasmā vattuṃ ussāhaṃ karontoti attho. Evaṃbhūtā hi vattukāmā nāma honti, tenāha ‘‘tathāgatassā’’tiādi . Sāvasesaṃ vadantāpi viparītavadantā viya sammā vadantīti na vattabbāti yathā sammā vadanti, tathā dassetuṃ ‘‘ahāpetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tena hi anavasesavadanameva sammā vadananti dasseti. ‘‘Vattuṃ sakkuṇeyyu’’nti iminā ca ‘‘vadeyyu’’nti etassa samatthanatthabhāvamāha yathā ‘‘so imaṃ vijaṭaye jaṭa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 1.23; peṭako. 22; mi. pa. 1.1.9) ye evaṃ bhagavatā thomitā, te dhammā katameti yojanā. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā’’tiādipāḷiyā ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti vuttavacanassa virodhibhāvaṃ codento ‘‘yadi eva’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yadi evanti evaṃ ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti vuttavacanaṃ yadi siyāti attho. Bahuvacananiddesoti ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādīni sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atthi-saddopi hi idha bahuvacanoyeva ‘‘atthi khīrā, atthi gāvo’’tiādīsu viya nipātabhāvasseva icchitattā. Yadipi tadidaṃ ñāṇaṃ ekameva sabhāvato, tathāpi sampayogato, ārammaṇato ca puthuvacanappayogamarahatīti vissajjeti ‘‘puthucitta…pe… rammaṇato’’ti iminā. Puthucittasamāyogatoti puthūhi cittehi sampayogato. Puthūni ārammaṇāni etassāti puthuārammaṇaṃ, tabbhāvato sabbārammaṇattāti vuttaṃ hoti.
另外,“众多所缘是它的所缘”,所以叫“众多所缘为所缘”。在这个意思上,就像“驼唇”“欲界”等说法那样,省略了其中一个“所缘”词,而说成“从众多所缘”。由此显示:它成就了众多智的作用。因为这种智确实如此:在三时中是无碍智,是简别四生的智,是简别五趣的智,是六种不共智中其余的不共智,是分别七种圣者的智,是在八种大众中不动摇的智,是遍知九种众生居处的智,是十力智等。对于这样无量百千种分类的智,它随其可能而成就相应的作用;应当知道,这些智虽然以无量法为所缘,但此智以它们为所缘。“因为此……”等,是依次解释。“如所说……”等,是以能成立的方式引出《无碍解道》的经文。其中,“于过去法”处,为了排除以一次的方式而成为众多所缘,显示以多次的方式次第转起,所以说“以再三生起的方式”。因为一切知智也是在诸境中次第转起的,并不是像外道所说的那样一次如此:“一切知者一次就知道一切,不是次第的。”巴利
Apica puthu ārammaṇaṃ ārammaṇametassāti puthuārammaṇārammaṇanti etasmiṃ atthe ‘‘oṭṭhamukho, kāmāvacara’’ntiādīsu viya ekassa ārammaṇasaddassa lopaṃ katvā ‘‘puthuārammaṇato’’ti vuttaṃ, tenassa puthuñāṇakiccasādhakattaṃ dasseti. Tathā hetaṃ ñāṇaṃ tīsu kālesu appaṭihatañāṇaṃ, catuyoniparicchedakañāṇaṃ, pañcagatiparicchedakañāṇaṃ, chasu asādhāraṇañāṇesu sesāsādhāraṇañāṇāni, sattāriyapuggalavibhāvanakañāṇaṃ, aṭṭhasu parisāsu akampanañāṇaṃ, navasattāvāsaparijānanañāṇaṃ, dasabalañāṇanti evamādīnaṃ anekasatasahassabhedānaṃ ñāṇānaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ kiccaṃ sādheti, tesaṃ ārammaṇabhūtānaṃ anekesampi dhammānaṃ tadārammaṇabhāvatoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Tañhī’’tiādi yathākkamaṃ tabbivaraṇaṃ. ‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiṃ sādhakabhāvena dasseti. Tatthāti atītadhamme. Ekavāravasena puthuārammaṇabhāvaṃ nivattetvā anekavāravasena kamappavattiyā taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘punappunaṃ uppattivasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kamenāpi hi sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ visayesu pavattati, na tathā sakiṃyeva . Yathā bāhirakā vadanti ‘‘sakiṃyeva sabbaññū sabbaṃ jānāti, na kamenā’’ti.
如果这样,对于不可思维、不可计量的种种所知,一个有局限的智怎么能完全通达呢?又是谁说过“一切知智是有局限的”呢?因为那个智就像所知一样是没有局限的。确实这样说过:“有多少智,就有多少所知;有多少所知,就有多少智。”即便如此,对于按种类、地域、自性等,以及按方向、地点、时间等而分成无数差别的所知,当它被次第认知时,完全通达岂不是根本不可能吗?并非如此。因为凡是世尊想要知道的,不论是全部还是一部分,智都以无障碍的方式直接现前。又因为心不散乱,世尊一切时候都处于定中,所以想要知道的事物直接现前这一点无法被否定。确实这样说过:“佛陀世尊的智系于愿望”等等。那么,在这里难道不应该这样理解吗:就像从远处看画布的人,或者观“一切法无我”的观禅者,在同时了知许多法的时候,世尊的智是以不确定的形象生起的?应该这样理解,因为佛智具有不可思议的威力。因此他说:“佛的境界不可思议。”不过,这里的结论是:世尊获得了能以一切方式了知一切法、系于愿望而转起的无障碍智,由于断除了一切所知障,他的相续能够通达一切法,所以被称为一切知者。并不是说一次就了知了一切法,就像火因为相续燃烧的能力而被称为“烧尽一切”一样。巴利
Yadi evaṃ acinteyyāparimeyyappabhedassa ñeyyassa paricchedavatā ekena ñāṇena niravasesato kathaṃ paṭivedhoti, ko vā evamāha ‘‘paricchedavantaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇa’’nti. Aparicchedañhi taṃ ñāṇaṃ ñeyyamiva. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘yāvatakaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ. Yāvatakaṃ ñeyyaṃ, tāvatakaṃ ñāṇa’’nti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5 adhippāyatthameva gahitaṃ viya dissati) evampi jātibhūmisabhāvādivasena, disādesakālādivasena ca anekabhedabhinne ñeyye kamena gayhamāne anavasesapaṭivedho na sambhavatiyevāti? Nayidamevaṃ. Yañhi kiñci bhagavatā ñātumicchitaṃ sakalamekadeso vā, tattha appaṭihatacāritāya paccakkhato ñāṇaṃ pavattati. Vikkhepābhāvato ca bhagavā sabbakālaṃ samāhitoti ñātumicchitassa paccakkhabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Vuttañhi ‘‘ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇa’’ntiādi, (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5) nanu cettha dūrato cittapaṭaṃ passantānaṃ viya, ‘‘sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti vipassantānaṃ viya ca anekadhammāvabodhakāle anirūpitarūpena bhagavato ñāṇaṃ pavattatīti gahetabbanti? Gahetabbaṃ acinteyyānubhāvatāya buddhañāṇassa. Tenevāha ‘‘buddhavisayo acinteyyo’’ti, (a. ni. 4.77) idaṃ panettha sanniṭṭhānaṃ – sabbākārena sabbadhammāvabodhanasamatthassa ākaṅkhāpaṭibaddhavuttino anāvaraṇañāṇassa paṭilābhena bhagavā santānena sabbadhammapaṭivedhasamattho ahosi sabbaneyyāvaraṇassa pahānato, tasmā sabbaññū, na sakiṃyeva sabbadhammāvabodhato yathāsantānena sabbassa indhanassa dahanasamatthatāya pāvako ‘‘sabbabhū’’ti vuccatīti.
这个意思虽然前面已经详细讲过,但为了用不同的方式利益听众,也为了厘清这部古注,现在再作说明。所以在这种情况下,不必在这里追究重复的过失。这里,世尊的十力等智虽然也是不共的,但因为那些智以局部为所缘,所以不能说它们已经无余地摄尽了佛陀的功德。而一切知智以无余为所缘,一旦摄取了它,就等于摄取了一切佛陀功德。因此应当知道,随顺经文的义趣,这里所摄取的就是那个智。经中也说“凡正确宣说如来实德者应当这样说”,所开显的正是这个智,因为离开它之外,再没有别的以无余为所缘的智,而且只有以无余为所缘,才可能如实正确地宣说。巴利
Kāmañcāyamattho pubbe vitthāritoyeva, pakārantarena pana sotujanānuggahakāmatāya, imissā ca porāṇasaṃvaṇṇanāvisodhanavasena pavattattā puna vibhāvitoti na cettha punaruttidoso pariyesitabbo, evamīdisesu. Ettha ca kiñcāpi bhagavato dasabalādiñāṇānipi anaññasādhāraṇāni, sabbadesavisayattā pana tesaṃ ñāṇānaṃ na tehi buddhaguṇā ahāpetvā gahitā nāma honti. Sabbaññutaññāṇassa pana nippadesavisayattā tasmiṃ gahite sabbepi buddhaguṇā gahitā eva nāma honti, tasmā pāḷiatthānusārena tadeva ñāṇaṃ gahitanti veditabbaṃ. Pāḷiyampi hi ‘‘yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṃ vaṇṇaṃ sammā vadamānā vadeyyu’’nti tameva pakāsitaṃ tamantarena aññassa nippadesavisayassa abhāvato, nippadesavisayeneva ca yathābhuccaṃ sammā vadanasambhavatoti.
这里“aññevā”中的 eva 这个词表示确定,为了说明这一点,才说“aññevā 在这里是表示限定的说法”;“表示限定的说法”就是“表示确定的说法”,而确定也就是限定。“怎么确定呢?”于是说出“aññevā”等话。通过“不是离杀生等”这个限定,显示被排除的内容。而这个 eva 词就像 ca 词一样,并不固定在一处,凡是说到的地方,出于表达的需要,在别的地方也会出现,所以说“甚深”等话。又用 iti 这个词涵盖起始的意义,显示被排除的情况是:难见而非易见,难通达而非易通达,寂静而非躁动,殊胜而非低劣,非思惟所行境而非思惟所行境,微细而非粗浅,唯智者所证知而非愚者所证知。以一切句来说,就是直到“唯智者所证知”这一句为止的所有句子。巴利
Aññevāti ettha eva-saddo sanniṭṭhāpanatthoti dassetuṃ ‘‘aññevāti idaṃ panettha vavatthāpanavacana’’nti vuttaṃ, vavatthāpanavacananti ca sanniṭṭhāpanavacananti attho, sanniṭṭhāpanañca avadhāraṇameva. Kathanti āha ‘‘aññevā’’tiādi. ‘‘Na pāṇātipātā veramaṇiādayo’’ti iminā avadhāraṇena nivattitaṃ dasseti. Ayañca eva-saddo aniyatadesatāya ca-saddo viya yattha vutto, tato aññatthāpi vacanicchāvasena upatiṭṭhatīti āha ‘‘gambhīrāvā’’tiādi. Iti-saddena ca ādiatthena duddasāva na sudasā, duranubodhāva na suranubodhā, santāva na darathā, paṇītāva na hīnā, atakkāvacarāva na takkāvacarā, nipuṇāva na lūkhā, paṇḍitavedanīyāva na bālavedanīyāti nivattitaṃ dasseti. Sabbapadehīti yāva ‘‘paṇḍitavedanīyā’’ti idaṃ padaṃ, tāva sabbapadehi.
像这样,为了用道理来强化“应当遮止”这一点,就说“声闻波罗蜜智”等等。这里,“声闻波罗蜜智”是指声闻弟子因为圆满了布施等波罗蜜而成就的智,这种智分为三明、六神通、四无碍解;同样,也指独觉的独觉智。“从此”:就是从声闻波罗蜜智。“于此”:就是在声闻波罗蜜智中。“从此亦”:就是从紧接着说到的独觉智起。用api这个词,或者用pi这个词,来推想并表示“更何况声闻波罗蜜智”。“于此亦”:就是在独觉智中也是。“从此则”:就是从一切知智起。所以意思是:在这里,也就是在一切知智中,能够获得确定。在甚深之中有殊胜,或者以殊胜的方式对甚深者而言是甚深。这个甚深,那个甚深,它们因为相对于这些而殊胜,所以是甚深,或者说是更甚深。这里仅仅用tara这个词,就已经成立了简别。巴利
Evaṃ nivattetabbataṃ yuttiyā daḷhīkaronto ‘‘sāvakapāramiñāṇa’’ntiādimāha. Tattha sāvakapāramiñāṇanti sāvakānaṃ dānādipāramipāripūriyā nipphannaṃ vijjattayachaḷabhiññācatupaṭisambhidābhedaṃ ñāṇaṃ, tathā paccekabuddhānaṃ paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ. Tatoti sāvakapāramiñāṇato. Tatthāti sāvakapāramiñāṇe. Tatopīti anantaraniddiṭṭhato paccekabodhiñāṇatopi. Api-saddena, pi-saddena vā ko pana vādo sāvakapāramiñāṇatoti sambhāveti. Tatthāpīti paccekabodhiñāṇepi. Ito panāti sabbaññutaññāṇato pana, tasmā ettha sabbaññutaññāṇe vavatthānaṃ labbhatīti adhippāyo. Gambhīresu visesā, gambhīrānaṃ vā visesena gambhīrā. Ayañca gambhīro ayañca gambhīro ime imesaṃ visesena gambhīrāti vā gambhīratarā. Tarasaddenevettha byavacchedanaṃ siddhaṃ.
这里的搭配应当这样理解:声闻波罗蜜智虽然相对于更低的、更低的有学智和凡夫智来说是甚深的,但相对于独觉智来说就没有那么甚深,所以不能判定它“就是甚深”;同样,独觉智相对于前面所说的智来说是甚深的,但相对于一切知智来说就没有那么甚深,所以也不能判定它“就是甚深”。因此,在这两者上无法作出确定的分判。然而,一切知智之法不像声闻波罗蜜智等那样,相对于某些智会失去甚深性,所以可以确定它“就是甚深”。再者,正如这里所示的确定方式,声闻波罗蜜智是难见的;而“独觉智比它更难见,因此在那里没有确定”等等,应当依此类推来理解确定之不可能,所以经文才说“同样,应知难见……乃至……应当理解”。巴利
Etthāyaṃ yojanā – kiñcāpi sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ heṭṭhimaṃ heṭṭhimaṃ sekkhañāṇaṃ puthujjanañāṇañca upādāya gambhīraṃ, paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ pana upādāya na tathā gambhīranti ‘‘gambhīramevā’’ti na sakkā byavacchijjituṃ, tathā paccekabodhiñāṇampi yathāvuttaṃ ñāṇamupādāya gambhīraṃ, sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pana upādāya na evaṃ gambhīranti ‘‘gambhīramevā’’ti na sakkā byavacchijjituṃ, tasmā tattha vavatthānaṃ na labbhati. Sabbaññutaññāṇadhammā pana sāvakapāramiñāṇādīnamiva kiñci upādāya gambhīrābhāvābhāvato ‘‘gambhīrā evā’’ti vavatthānaṃ labbhatīti. Yathā cettha vavatthānaṃ dassitaṃ, evaṃ sāvakapāramiñāṇaṃ duddasaṃ. ‘‘Paccekabodhiñāṇaṃ pana tato duddasataranti tattha vavatthānaṃ natthī’’tiādinā vavatthānasambhavo netabbo, tenevāha ‘‘tathā duddasāva…pe… veditabba’’nti.
“问与答”也是一种读法,意思是针对那个问题的解答。“此”指前面所说的解答语句。“如是”指以这种分析诸见的方式。这里的意思是:暂且不论——因为这是显示佛陀无余功德的方便,所以即使只是一切知智,也由于能成就多种所依、所缘的智的作用,而以“诸比丘,有其他的法”等(长部1.18)这样的复数形式列出;然而,为什么不以谛、缘起等境的差别为切入点,用不共的分别方式来解答它,却以分析诸有依之见的分别方式来开始呢?是为了说明:正如对谛、缘起等的分析是不共的、只属于一切知智的范围,同样,对无余诸见的分析也是如此,所以以“诸佛的……”等语开始。其中,“处”指原因。“吼声广大”:因为所应宣说的义理多种多样,又难以理解,所以以种种理路展开的说法之吼声广大、宽广而多面。“智深入”:正是由此,说法智在细分所应宣说的法时深入其中,意思是说它深入之后仿佛安住于其中。巴利
Pucchāvissajjanantipi pāṭho, tassā pucchāya vissajjananti attho. Etanti yathāvuttaṃ vissajjanavacanaṃ. Evanti iminā diṭṭhīnaṃ vibhajanākārena. Etthāyamadhippāyo – bhavatu tāva niravasesabuddhaguṇavibhāvanupāyabhāvato sabbaññutaññāṇameva ekampi puthunissayārammaṇañāṇakiccasiddhiyā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.18) bahuvacanena uddiṭṭhaṃ, tassa pana vissajjanaṃ saccapaccayākārādivisayavisesavasena anaññasādhāraṇena vibhajananayena anārabhitvā sanissayānaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ vibhajananayena kasmā āraddhanti? Tattha yathā saccapaccayākārādīnaṃ vibhajanaṃ anaññasādhāraṇaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇasseva visayo, evaṃ niravasesadiṭṭhigatavibhajanampīti dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhānañhī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ, tattha ṭhānānīti kāraṇāni. Gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ hotīti desetabbassa atthassa anekavidhatāya, dubbiññeyyatāya ca nānānayehi pavattamānaṃ desanāgajjitaṃ mahantaṃ vipulaṃ, bahuppabhedañca hoti . Ñāṇaṃ anupavisatīti tato eva ca desanāñāṇaṃ desetabbadhamme vibhāgaso kurumānaṃ anupavisati, te anupavisitvā ṭhitaṃ viya hotīti attho.
佛陀智慧的伟大由此显现:对于这样深奥的法,能宣说它、能证悟它的人——也就是诸佛的宣说智和证悟智——其殊胜广大就变得清清楚楚。说“宣说是深奥的”,意思是:这些法本身的性质就是深奥的,有四种,而宣说它们时,因为是按照应当宣说的方式来宣说,所以宣说本身也就是深奥的。而诸佛的宣说,无论在什么地方、什么时候,都是通过三乘这个门径来进行的,所以说“被三相所触、与空性相应”——也就是被三种法印所触,与无我、无我所的空性相应,这就是它的意思。在这里,虽然依据“世尊的一切语业都以智为先导、以智为随转”(大义释 69,156;小义释 85;无碍解道 3.5;导论 15)这句话,世尊的一切宣说没有一样是离开智慧的,而且因为精进力平等、行为如狮子一般,所以在一切处都以同等的努力而现起;但是,按照所应宣说的法来看,宣说特别以智慧深入其中,因此也就更为深奥,应当这样理解。巴利
Buddhañāṇassa mahantabhāvo paññāyatīti evaṃvidhassa nāma dhammassa desakaṃ, paṭivedhakañcāti buddhānaṃ desanāñāṇassa, paṭivedhañāṇassa ca uḷārabhāvo pākaṭo hoti. Desanā gambhīrā hotīti sabhāvena gambhīrānaṃ tesaṃ catubbidhānampi desanā desetabbavasena gambhīrāva hoti, sā pana buddhānaṃ desanā sabbattha, sabbadā ca yānattayamukhenevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tilakkhaṇāhatā suññatāpaṭisaṃyuttā’’ti, tīhi lakkhaṇehi āhatā, attattaniyato suññabhāvapaṭisaññuttā cāti attho. Ettha ca kiñcāpi ‘‘sabbaṃ vacīkammaṃ buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇapubbaṅgamaṃ ñāṇānuparivattī’’ti (mahāni. 69, 156; cūḷani. 85; paṭi. ma. 3.5; netti. 15) vacanato sabbāpi bhagavato desanā ñāṇarahitā nāma natthi, samasamaparakkamanavasena sīhasamānavuttitāya ca sabbattha samānussāhappavatti, desetabbadhammavasena pana desanā visesato ñāṇena anupaviṭṭhā, gambhīratarā ca hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
那么,当涉及律的制定时,开示怎么会被三法印所打击、与空性相应呢?难道那里仅仅只是律的制定吗?并非那里仅仅只是律的制定。因为即使在那里,随顺集会大众的意乐而展开的开示,也在阐明诸行的无常等性、一切法的无我无我所,并显示空性,所以经中说“以种种方式作了法谈”等等。“律的制定”就是律的安立。如果把 ñña 写成 ṇṇa,也有 vinayapaṇṇatti 这种读法。“地之差别”指诸法的状态差别和处所差别。因为诸法存在于其中,所以称为“地”,这既指状态差别,也指处所。其中,状态差别是指念等法分为念处、根、力、觉支、道支等,就像“犊、应调、牡牛”等那样;处所差别是指欲界等的分类。“缘相”一词的含义前面已经说过。“宗义差别”指见的差别,意思是种种不同的见解;或者指其他宗义,也就是外道的宗义。当涉及律的制定时,有广大的吼声等等,这样连接。“因此”是因为吼声广大……乃至……相应,所以。“导向断除”就是导向不可治。巴利
Kathaṃ pana vinayapaṇṇattiṃ patvā desanā tilakkhaṇāhatā, suññatāpaṭisaññuttā ca hoti, nanu tattha vinayapaṇṇattimattamevāti? Na tattha vinayapaṇṇattimattameva. Tatthāpi hi sannisinnaparisāya ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ pavattamānā desanā saṅkhārānaṃ aniccatādivibhāvinī sabbadhammānaṃ attattaniyatā, suññabhāvappakāsinī ca hoti, tenevāha ‘‘anekapariyāyena dhammiṃ kathaṃ katvā’’tiādi. Vinayapaññattinti vinayassa paññāpanaṃ. Ñña-kārassa pana ṇṇa-kāre kate vinayapaṇṇattintipi pāṭho. Bhūmantaranti dhammānaṃ avatthāvisesañca ṭhānavisesañca. Bhavanti dhammā etthāti bhūmīti hi avatthāviseso, ṭhānañca vuccati. Tattha avatthāviseso satiādidhammānaṃ satipaṭṭhānindriyabalabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgādibhedo ‘‘vaccho, dammo, balībaddo’’ti ādayo viya. Ṭhānaviseso kāmāvacarādibhedo. Paccayākāra-saddassa attho heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Samayantaranti diṭṭhivisesaṃ, nānāvihitā diṭṭhiyoti attho, aññasamayaṃ vā, bāhirakasamayanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vinayapaññattiṃ patvā mahantaṃ gajjitaṃ hotītiādinā sambandho. Tasmāti yasmā gajjitaṃ mahantaṃ…pe… paṭisaṃyuttā, tasmā. Chejjagāminīti atekicchagāminī.
像这样,当事情以轻、重等符合它自身的方式呈现时,就是“如是于现起之事”。凡是有所说的学处制定,就在那里——这是连接关系。“势”指智慧的能力。“力”指不可动摇的勇猛状态。或者,“力”和“势”都只是能力的说法,应当依照观察智和宣说智来配合理解。因为宣说智以观察智为先导。“此”是看着正在说的“学处制定”这个词,用阳性来指称;意思是:这个被称为学处制定的领域,不是其他人的领域。“如是”是为了说明那种“是领域”和“不是领域”的原因而反指的话;或者“iti”这个词是举例的意思,用它来指出“这是轻的,这是重的”等等方式。其余的地方也应当按各自情况这样理解。巴利
Evaṃ otiṇṇe vatthusminti yathāvuttanayena lahukagarukādivasena tadanurūpe vatthumhi otarante. Yaṃ sikkhāpadapaññāpanaṃ nāma atthi, tatthāti sambandho. Thāmoti ñāṇasāmatthiyaṃ. Balanti akampanasaṅkhāto vīrabhāvo. Thāmo balanti vā sāmatthiyavacanameva paccavekkhaṇādesanāñāṇavasena yojetabbaṃ. Paccavekkhaṇāñāṇapubbaṅgamañhi desanāñāṇaṃ. Esāti sikkhāpadapaññāpanameva vuccamānapadamapekkhitvā pulliṅgena niddisati, eso sikkhāpadapaññāpanasaṅkhāto visayo aññesaṃ avisayoti attho. Itīti tathāvisayāvisayabhāvassa hetubhāvena paṭiniddesavacanaṃ , nidassanattho vā iti-saddo, tena ‘‘idaṃ lahukaṃ, idaṃ garuka’’ntiādinayaṃ niddisati. Evamaparatthāpi yathāsambhavaṃ.
虽然按照身随观等方式,四念处等在经藏中已经分别说明,但按照经分别等方式,它们尤其是在阿毗达摩藏中被详细分别的,所以说“这四念处……分别阿毗达摩藏”。其中,“七触”是依据与七识界相应而说的。同样,“七受”等也是这样。“出世间法名为”:这里的“iti”一词是“等”的意思,或者表示种类,由此统摄阿毗达摩藏中所说的其余应当分别的法相。“二十四缘广分别在此中,所以叫二十四缘广分别”:这是依外在含义构成的复合词。这正是“阿毗达摩藏”的修饰语。在这里,不采用缘的方式,仅依法而说广分别有二十四种。正如所说:巴利
Yadipi kāyānupassanādivasena satipaṭṭhānādayo suttantapiṭake (dī. ni. 2.374; ma. ni. 1.107) vibhattā, tathāpi suttantabhājanīyādivasena abhidhammeyeva te visesato vibhattāti āha ‘‘ime cattāro satipaṭṭhānā…pe… abhidhammapiṭakaṃ vibhajitvā’’ti. Tattha satta phassāti sattaviññāṇadhātusampayogavasena vuttaṃ. Tathā ‘‘satta vedanā’’tiādipi. Lokuttarā dhammā nāmāti ettha iti-saddo ādiattho, pakārattho vā, tena vuttāvasesaṃ abhidhamme āgataṃ dhammānaṃ vibhajitabbākāraṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānāni etthāti catuvīsatisamantapaṭṭhānanti bāhiratthasamāso. ‘‘Abhidhammapiṭaka’’nti etassa hi idaṃ visesanaṃ. Ettha ca paccayanayaṃ aggahetvā dhammavaseneva samantapaṭṭhānassa catuvīsatividhatā vuttā. Yathāha –
三法与殊胜的分别,以及二法中的最上者,
二法三法,以及三法二法;
三法三法以及二法二法,
在六种顺向的理趣中,这些理趣极为深奥……
在六种逆法中……中略……在顺逆法中……中略……
在逆顺法里,这些理趣非常深奥。巴利
‘‘Tikañca paṭṭhānavaraṃ dukuttamaṃ, Dukatikañceva tikadukañca; Tikatikañceva dukadukañca, Cha anulomamhi nayā sugambhīrā…pe… Cha paccanīyamhi…pe… anulomapaccanīyamhi…pe… Paccanīyānulomamhi nayā sugambhīrā’’ti. [paṭṭhā. 1.1.41(ka), 44(kha), 48(ga), 52(gha)];
这样,按法来分,在二十四缘里的三法发趣等每一类中,逐一按缘理、按顺逆等方式各有四种,所以共有九十六种一切处发趣。其中,在法随顺的三法发趣里,善三法中的缘起分,按缘随顺、以因为根本、依因缘来说,有四十九种问的方式、七种答的方式等;这样显示出来的理趣有无穷无尽的差别,所以说“无尽理趣”。巴利
Evaṃ dhammavasena catuvīsatibhedesu tikapaṭṭhānādīsu ekekaṃ paccayanayena anulomādivasena catubbidhaṃ hotīti channavutisamantapaṭṭhānāni. Tattha pana dhammānulome tikapaṭṭhāne kusalattike paṭiccavāre paccayānulome hetumūlake hetupaccayavasena ekūnapaññāsa pucchānayā satta vissajjananayātiādinā dassiyamānā anantabhedā nayāti āha ‘‘anantanaya’’nti.
以九种行相,也就是以生起等九种缘的行相。为了显示它的自相,所以说“成为生起”等。其中,果从它生起,所以是生起,也就是作为果生起的因。有无明时诸行生起,无无明时则不生起。因此,无明成为诸行的生起而为缘;同样,果在它那里转起、住立,所以是转起。果由它被度量,所以是度量。(果由它安放自己缘所生的果,所以是安放。)(此处与注释书不符。)果由它努力于自己缘所生的生起,所以是努力。果由它与自己缘所生者结合,所以是结合。它在自己所生之处障碍果,所以是障碍。有其他缘和合时,果由它生起,所以是集起。它令至因性,所以是因。确实,有无明时,诸行转起、住立;有无明时,它们安放自己的果,投于有等之中;努力于自己果的生起;与自己果结合;在自己所生的相续中障碍彼;有其他缘和合时,生起、产生;并且令至诸行的因性。因此,无明成为诸行的转起……乃至……成为缘而为缘。如此,应当了知无明对诸行进入因性的差别,即生起等。对于行等对识等,也是同样的道理。巴利
Navahākārehīti uppādādīhi navahi paccayākārehi. Taṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘uppādo hutvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha uppajjati etasmā phalanti uppādo, phaluppattiyā kāraṇabhāvo. Sati ca avijjāya saṅkhārā uppajjanti, nāsati. Tasmā avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ uppādo hutvā paccayo hoti, tathā pavattati dharati etasmiṃ phalanti pavattaṃ. Nimīyati phalametasminti nimittaṃ. (Nidadāti phalaṃ attano paccayuppannaṃ etenāti nidānaṃ.) (Etthantare aṭṭhakathāya na sameti) āyūhati phalaṃ attano paccayuppannuppattiyā ghaṭeti etenāti āyūhanaṃ. Saṃyujjati phalaṃ attano paccayuppannena etasminti saṃyogo. Yattha sayaṃ uppajjati, taṃ palibuddhati phalametenāti palibodho. Paccayantarasamavāye sati phalamudayati etenāti samudayo. Hinoti kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchatīti hetu. Avijjāya hi sati saṅkhārā pavattanti, dharanti ca, te avijjāya sati attano phalaṃ (nidadanti) (paṭi. ma. 1.45; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.28 passitabbaṃ) bhavādīsu khipanti, āyūhanti attano phaluppattiyā ghaṭenti, attano phalena saṃyujjanti, yasmiṃ santāne sayaṃ uppannā taṃ palibuddhanti, paccayantarasamavāye udayanti uppajjanti, hinoti ca saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvaṃ gacchati, tasmā avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ pavattaṃ hutvā…pe… paccayo hutvā paccayo hoti. Evaṃ avijjāya saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvūpagamanavisesā uppādādayo veditabbā. Saṅkhārādīnaṃ viññāṇādīsupi eseva nayo.
为了用《无碍解道》的经文来证明这个含义,论师引用了“如说”等话。其中,“依此而住立”所以叫住立,也就是缘;生起本身就是住立,所以叫生起住立。其余各项也是这样理解。不过,因为经文说“由漏集起故有无明集起”,所以漏就是无明的缘,因此说“这两类法都是缘所生”——无明和行这两类法,都是依缘而生起,不是没有缘就能生起,这就是这里的含义。“缘摄受慧”是指对诸行和无明的生起等缘的行相,加以辨别、执取而生起的慧。“法住智”是指对缘所生之法,从它们具有缘这一点来说,称为法住的缘起,对此的智就是了。因为经中说“十二缘起”,所以十二种缘本身就是缘起。这个道理不只限于现在,也通于过去和未来;不只无明对诸行如此,行等对识等也同样适用。为了完整显示缘行相的分别,论师引了“过去时”等经文。至于《发趣论》中所说的因等缘,在这里也已经由生起等缘行相所涵盖,所以那些缘也应当随其适用之处引出来配合。但因为怕太冗长,就没有一一配合;需要的人可以从《清净道论》等书中去取。巴利
Tamatthaṃ paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷiyā sādhentena ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tiṭṭhati etenāti ṭhiti, paccayo, uppādo eva ṭhiti uppādaṭṭhiti. Evaṃ sesesupi. Yasmā pana ‘‘āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) vuttattā āsavāva avijjāya paccayo, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhopete dhammā ‘‘paccayasamuppannā’’ti, avijjā ca saṅkhārā ca ubhopete dhammā paccayato eva samuppannā, na vinā paccayenāti attho. Paccayapariggahe paññāti saṅkhārānaṃ, avijjāya ca uppādādike paccayākāre paricchinditvā gahaṇavasena pavattā paññā. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti paccayuppannadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvato dhammaṭṭhitisaṅkhāte paṭiccasamuppāde ñāṇaṃ. ‘‘Dvādasa paṭiccasamuppādā’’ti vacanato hi dvādasa paccayā eva paṭiccasamuppādo. Ayañca nayo na paccuppanne eva, atha kho atītānāgatesupi, na ca avijjāya eva saṅkhāresu, atha kho saṅkhārādīnaṃ viññāṇādīsupi labbhatīti paripuṇṇaṃ katvā paccayākārassa vibhattabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘atītampi addhāna’’ntiādi pāḷimāhari. Paṭṭhāne (paṭṭhā. 1.1) pana dassitā hetādipaccayāevettha uppādādipaccayākārehi gahitāti tepi yathāsambhavaṃ nīharitvā yojetabbā. Ativitthārabhayena pana na yojayimha, atthikehi ca visuddhimaggādito (visuddhi. 2.594) gahetabbā.
对于那个那个法,也就是由行等缘所生的法。以这样那样的缘的方式,也就是依生起等因等缘的力量。由于业、烦恼、果而有三种轮转,所以叫三轮。由于过去、现在、未来而有三段时间,所以叫三时。由于因、果、果因、因、果而有三种连接,所以叫三连结。在这里略摄,就是无明等和识等,这些是略摄,也就是因和果。或者,因和果略摄,所以叫略摄。无明等和识等,或者略摄这个词是部分的意思。由于过去因略摄等而有四种略摄,所以叫四略摄。虽然没有从自相来说,但在每一种略摄中,以无明、行等的执取而显示出来,所以叫行相,也就是过去因等的种类。它们在略摄中各有五种,一共二十种行相,所以叫二十行相。巴利
Tassatassa dhammassāti saṅkhārādipaccayuppannadhammassa. Tathā tathā paccayabhāvenāti uppādādihetādipaccayasattiyā . Kammakilesavipākavasena tīṇi vaṭṭāni yassāti tivaṭṭaṃ. Atītapaccuppannānāgatavasena tayo addhā kālā etassāti tiyaddhaṃ. Hetuphalaphalahetuhetuphalavasena tayo sandhayo etassāti tisandhi. Saṅkhippanti ettha avijjādayo, viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepā, hetu, vipāko ca. Atha vā hetu vipākoti saṅkhippantīti saṅkhepā. Avijjādayo, viññāṇādayo ca koṭṭhāsapariyāyo vā saṅkhepasaddo. Atītahetusaṅkhepādivasena cattāro saṅkhepā yassāti catusaṅkhepaṃ. Sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅkhepe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā, atītahetuādīnaṃ pakārā. Te saṅkhepe pañca pañca katvā vīsati ākārā etassāti vīsatākāraṃ.
常见论者虽然因为刹帝利等类别的区分而有许多种不同,但以忆念十万种姓等为执著的因由,他们只有四种,不会比这更多,也不会更少。为了说明常见论者的数量限定不涉及其他范围,所以说“四种人”等。这个道理也适用于其余各类。其中,“四种人”应当理解为四类人群,因为其中每一类也有许多种区分。“他们”指六十二见的论者。“依此”指对缘起法的错误执取。在那里,由于没有区分以因果方式相关联的诸法在相续上的密集,虽然在胜义上确实存在以差别为依据的多样性,却没有加以审察,就执取了单一性。“执此”就是执著并宣说这种常见的执取。按照这个道理,一分常见论者等也应当随其相应情况配合说明。“破斥”就是依“由精勤……”等加以分别,或者依“比丘们,如来如实了知此……”等加以破除。“无缠”就是没有缠结。“无丛”就是没有覆盖。另外,竹子等上下交织的意义是“缠”,草等覆盖的意义是“丛”。因为与之相似,见论的混乱明显,所以被称为“缠”和“丛”。通过解开见的缠结、揭开见的丛聚,而成为无缠、无丛,这就是它的意思。巴利
Khattiyādibhedena anekabhedabhinnāpi sassatavādino jātisatasahassānussaraṇādikassa abhinivesahetuno vasena cattārova honti, na tato uddhaṃ, adho vāti sassatavādīnaṃ parimāṇaparicchedassa anaññavisayataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cattāro janā’’tiādimāha. Esa nayo itaresupi. Tattha cattāro janāti cattāro janasamūhāti attho gahetabbo tesu ekekassāpi anekappabhedato. Teti dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhigatavādino. Idaṃ nissāyāti idappaccayatāya sammā aggahaṇaṃ. Tatthāpi ca hetuphalabhāvena sambandhānaṃ dhammānaṃ santatighanassa abheditattā paramatthato vijjamānampi bhedanibandhanaṃ nānattanayaṃ anupadhāretvā gahitaṃ ekattaggahaṇaṃ nissāya. Idaṃ gaṇhantīti idaṃ sassataggahaṇaṃ abhinivissa voharanti, iminā nayena ekaccasassatavādādayopi yathāsambhavaṃ yojetvā vattabbā. Bhinditvāti ‘‘ātappamanvāyā’’tiādinā vibhajitvā, ‘‘tayidaṃ bhikkhave tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.36) vā vidhamitvā. Nijjaṭanti anonaddhaṃ. Nigumbanti anāvuṭaṃ. Apica veḷuādīnaṃ heṭṭhupariyasaṃsibbanaṭṭhena jaṭā. Kusādīnaṃ ovaraṇaṭṭhena gumbo. Tassadisatāya diṭṭhigatānaṃ byākulā pākaṭatā ‘‘jaṭā, gumbo’’ti ca vuccati, diṭṭhijaṭāvijaṭanena, diṭṭhigumbavivaraṇena ca nijjaṭaṃ nigumbaṃ katvāti attho.
因此,世尊善巧说法,先以“因此”等语,围绕佛的功德而说法,开示了一切知智;接着又以区分不同时机的方式,唯独解答一切知智。巴利
‘‘Tasmā’’tiādinā buddhaguṇe ārabbha desanāya samuṭṭhitattā sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ uddisitvā desanākusalo bhagavā samayantaraṃ viggahaṇavasena sabbaññutaññāṇameva vissajjetīti dasseti.
29 “存在”这个词有一种用法,它就是“有”的意思,而“有”就是能被智慧所认知的状态,所以说“存在”等等。法王用“存在”这个说法,是为了说明那些持邪见的人所认为的存在并没有中断,同时也说明:自己的教导能让他们从邪执中松动、剥离出来,从而达成教导的作用,并且表明这是真实不虚的。“有”这个虚词和“存在”同义,用法很广,比如“在这个身体里有头发”等等。“呼唤语”是指呼唤佛陀的话。因为只有世尊才说“诸比库,比库们”这样称呼,弟子们不会这样。弟子们只用“贤友”“尊者”这类关联的说法。说了“某些”,意思就是一部分,因为表示数目的“一”这个词有确定单数的含义,而不是指那些已经止息、断除了种种恶的沙门婆罗门,所以说“以出家的身份”等等。不管他们是那样还是别样,这里只是就世俗共许的意义上来说的,因此用“世间”等等来说明。以常见等角度来构想过去,就是“构想过去者”。然而,他们用过去已成立的渴爱和见解来构想,因为串习力强、表现多样,又加以区分;再用未来成立的、属于执著性的渴爱和见解执取来抓取、执著、把持,所以说“构想过去、区分而执取”。或者也可以说,前分和后分成立的渴爱与取,应依次理解为构想和执取。因为以渴爱为缘,取就生起。在众多、赞叹、贬斥、过度、交往、恒常相应等义项中,这里取恒常相应的意义,“存在”的含义就成立,所以说“或构想过去”等等,并且说——巴利
29. Atthi pariyāyo santi-saddo, so ca saṃvijjantipariyāyo, saṃvijjamānatā ca ñāṇena upalabbhamānatāti āha ‘‘santī’’tiādi. Saṃvijjamānaparidīpanena pana ‘‘santī’’ti iminā padena tesaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ vijjamānatāya avicchinnataṃ, tato ca nesaṃ micchāgāhato sithilakaraṇavivecanehi attano desanāya kiccakāritaṃ, avitathatañca dīpeti dhammarājā. Atthīti ca santipadena samānattho puthuvacanavisayo eko nipāto ‘‘atthi imasmiṃ kāye kesā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 2.377; ma. ni. 1.110; 3.154; saṃ. ni. 4.127) viya. Ālapanavacananti buddhālapanavacanaṃ. Bhagavāyeva hi ‘‘bhikkhave, bhikkhavo’’ti ca ālapati, na sāvakā. Sāvakā pana ‘‘āvuso, āyasmā’’tiādisambandhaneneva. ‘‘Eke’’ti vutte ekacceti attho eva saṅkhyāvācakassa eka-saddassa niyatekavacanattā, na samitabahitapāpatāya samaṇabrāhmaṇāti āha ‘‘pabbajjūpagatabhāvenā’’tiādi. Tathā vā hontu, aññathā vā, sammutimatteneva idhādhippetāti dasseti ‘‘lokenā’’tiādinā. Sassatādivasena pubbantaṃ kappentīti pubbantakappikā. Yasmā pana tesaṃ pubbantaṃ purimasiddhehi taṇhādiṭṭhikappehi kappetvā āsevanabalavatāya, vicitravuttitāya ca vikappetvā aparabhāgasiddhehi abhinivesabhūtehi taṇhādiṭṭhigāhehi gaṇhanti abhinivisanti parāmasanti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbantaṃ kappetvā vikappetvā gaṇhantī’’ti. Purimabhāgapacchimabhāgasiddhānaṃ vā taṇhāupādānānaṃ vasena yathākkamaṃ kappanagahaṇāni veditabbāni. Taṇhāpaccayā hi upādānaṃ sambhavati. Pahutapasaṃsānindātisayasaṃsagganiccayogādivisayesu idha niccayogavasena vijjamānattho sambhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbanta kappo vā’’tiādi vuttañca –
在众多与称赞中,在贬斥与过度中;
在恒常相应和交往中,有 mantu 等词。巴利
‘‘Pahute ca pasaṃsāyaṃ, nindāyañcātisayane; Niccayoge ca saṃsagge, hontime mantuādayo’’ti.
在这里,“众分”等处的“等”字,应当理解为“众分”之类,因为“等”这个词有涵盖和举例的作用。其实,“antā”(末端/边)这个词也出现在“padapūraṇa”(凑足音节)、“samīpa”(附近)、“ummagga”(歧途)等用法中。比如在“来,你先把经、偈或论学好吧”和“让经中有机会(被学习)”这类句子里,“anta”这个词是用来凑足音节的;在“村边的住处”这类说法里,是“附近”的意思;而在“欲乐耽溺是一种极端,确实存在,迦旃延,这是一种极端”这类说法里,则是“歧途”的意思。巴利
Koṭṭhāsesūti ettha koṭṭhāsādīsūti attho veditabbo ādi-saddalopena, nidassananayena ca vuttattā. Padapūraṇasamīpaummaggādīsupi hi anta-saddo dissati. Tathā hi ‘‘iṅgha tāva suttante vā gāthāyo vā abhidhammaṃ vā pariyāpuṇassu (pāci. 442), suttante okāsaṃ kārāpetvā’’tiādīsu (pāci. 1221) ca padapūraṇe anta-saddo vattati, ‘‘gāmantasenāsana’’ntiādīsu (visuddhi. 1.31) samīpe, ‘‘kāmasukhallikānuyogo eko anto, atthīti kho kaccāna ayameko anto’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.258; saṃ. ni. 2.110) ca ummaggeti.
“末端充满”是指充满大末端与末端功德。“那或者以绿草为末端,或者以道路为末端”出自中部《大象迹喻经》。那里,“那”指火界。“以绿草为末端”是指以绿草树木为界。“以道路为末端”是指以道路为界。其余的话是“依此,无食而熄灭”。“比丘们,这是活命的末端,即乞食”出自《乞食经》。其中,寻求团食的人就是乞食者,即乞食行的人;他的状态就是乞食,意思是靠乞食行而活命。“这个”就是指一切缘灭尽的涅槃法,因此说“一切……被称为……”。由此显示:因为灭尽一切缘,无为的涅槃是有为轮回之苦的彼岸、究竟,所以这里“彼岸”的意思才合理。“自身”就是执取自身。巴利
Antapūroti mahāantaantaguṇehi pūro. ‘‘Sā haritantaṃ vā panthantaṃ vā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.304) majjhimanikāye mahāhatthipadopamasuttantapāḷi. Tattha sāti tejodhātu. Haritantanti haritatiṇarukkhamariyādaṃ . Panthantanti maggamariyādaṃ. Āgamma anāhārā nibbāyatīti seso. ‘‘Antamidaṃ bhikkhave, jīvikānaṃ yadidaṃ piṇḍolya’’nti (saṃ. ni. 3.80; itivu. 91) piṇḍiyālopasuttantapāḷi. Tattha piṇḍaṃ ulati gavesatīti piṇḍolo, piṇḍācāriko, tassa bhāvo piṇḍolyaṃ, piṇḍacaraṇena jīvikatāti attho. Esevāti sabbapaccayasaṅkhayabhūto nibbānadhammo eva, tenāha ‘‘sabba…pe… vuccatī’’ti. Etena sabbapaccayasaṅkhayanato asaṅkhataṃ nibbānaṃ saṅkhatabhūtassa vaṭṭadukkhassa parabhāgaṃ pariyosānabhūtaṃ, tasmā ettha parabhāgova attho yuttoti dasseti. Sakkāyoti sakkāyagāho.
“劫”这个词是引申用法。所谓“由劫所作”,就是指三种使人变丑的行为中,由其中任何一种变丑的行为所作。这里用“等”这个字,是要说明“劫”这个词也适用于大劫、遍满、烦恼欲、寻、时间、假名施设、相似状态等等。也就是说,它在“诸比丘,有四种劫的不可数”等经文中指大劫;在“遍照整个竹园”等经文中指遍满;在“思是欲,贪是欲,思贪是欲”等经文中指烦恼欲;在“论、寻、思”等经文中指寻;在“我以此常常安住”等经文中指时间;在“这位具寿名叫劫”等经文中指假名施设;在“我们竟然不知道是在和一位与导师相当的弟子交谈”等经文中指相似的状态。巴利
Kappoti leso. Kappakatenāti tiṇṇaṃ dubbaṇṇakaraṇānaṃ aññataradubbaṇṇakatena. Ādi-saddena cettha kappa-saddo mahākappasamantabhāvakilesakāmavitakkakālapaññattisadisabhāvādīsupi vattatīti dasseti. Tathā hesa ‘‘cattārimāni bhikkhave, kappassa asaṅkhyeyyānī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 4.156) mahākappe vattati, ‘‘kevalakappaṃ veḷuvanaṃ obhāsetvā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.94) samantabhāve, ‘‘saṅkappo kāmo rāgo kāmo saṅkapparāgo kāmo’’tiādīsu (mahāni. 1; cūḷani. 8) kilesakāme, ‘‘takko vitakko saṅkappo’’tiādīsu vitakke, ‘‘yena sudaṃ niccakappaṃ viharāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.387) kāle , ‘‘iccāyasmā kappo’’tiādīsu (su. ni. 1018) paññattiyaṃ, ‘‘satthukappena vata kira bho sāvakena saddhiṃ mantayamānā na jānimhā’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.260) sadisabhāveti.
他引用《大义释》(Mahāni. 28)来成立渴爱与邪见的生起,说了“又所说”等话。其中,“摄颂”是指简要概括。“因此”等话,是对前面所说的义理解释作功德上的说明。“依渴爱与邪见”是指:依止于名为喜贪的随眠与俱生渴爱,以及依常见等方式执取的邪执。因为这里指的是先前所思量的法境,所以“前”这个词只表示过去时,不像“诸法以意为前导”等地方那样表示“主要”等意思;又因为脱离色等诸蕴的思量对象并不存在,所以“边”这个词表示部分,而不像“内部”等那样表示其他意思;为了说明这一点,说了“过去蕴的部分”。而“思量之后”是指在那前边,对渴爱与执取的堪任、圆满。 “住立”是指不捨弃那见解,他们具有唯以前边为所随行的见,这是连接。 “有性”与“随行性”名为一再生起,因此以“一再生起的方式”来说明。“他们正是”等话,是在解释“缘于前边”等巴利文的义理。其中,“缘于”是指依止。因为那见的所缘就是前边。由于是所缘状态,这确实是那见的来处,是所缘缘,所以说“依止、缘于”。那这就是对其他人的安立之显示,因此说“也使其他人成为见具足者”。巴利
Taṇhādiṭṭhīsu pavattiṃ mahāniddesapāḷiyā (mahāni. 28) sādhento ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha uddānatoti saṅkhepato. ‘‘Tasmā’’tiādi yathāvuttāya atthavaṇṇanāya guṇavacanaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhivasenāti upanissayasahajātabhūtāya abhinandanasaṅkhātāya taṇhāya ceva sassatādiākārena abhinivisantassa micchāgāhassa ca vasena. Pubbe nivutthadhammavisayāya kappanāya idha adhippetattā atītakālavācakoyeva pubba-saddo, na pana ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’tiādīsu viya padhānādivācako, rūpādikhandhavinimuttassa kappanavatthuno abhāvā anta-saddo ca koṭṭhāsavācako, na pana abbhantarādivācakoti dassetuṃ ‘‘atītaṃ khandhakoṭṭhāsa’’nti vuttaṃ. Kappetvāti ca tasmiṃ pubbante taṇhāyanābhinivesanānaṃ samatthanaṃ pariniṭṭhāpanamāha. Ṭhitāti tassā laddhiyā avijahanaṃ, pubbantameva anugatā diṭṭhi tesamatthīti yojanā. Atthitā, anugatatā ca nāma punappunaṃ pavattiyāti dasseti ‘‘punappunaṃ uppajjanavasenā’’ti iminā. ‘‘Te eva’’ntiādinā ‘‘pubbantaṃ ārabbhā’’tiādipāḷiyā atthaṃ saṃvaṇṇeti. Tattha ārabbhāti ālambitvā. Visayo hi tassā diṭṭhiyā pubbanto. Visayabhāvato hesa tassā āgamanaṭṭhānaṃ , ārammaṇapaccayo cāti vuttaṃ ‘‘āgamma paṭiccā’’ti. Tadetaṃ aññesaṃ patiṭṭhāpanadassananti āha ‘‘aññampi janaṃ diṭṭhigatitaṃ karontā’’ti.
“施设言路”是指仅依习惯用法而安立的路。比如在“达萨”等人名中,“尸利瓦达卡”这类词只是言说而已,以言说本身作为依据而使用,同样地,那种安立就是“施设言”,而它就是惯用语的路。或者,“adhi”这个词有“在上”的意思,“vuccati”就是“被说”。在上之说就是“施设言”。对于所取着的色等,在其上被安立的是“所取施设”,因此应当理解为“显示施设的路”。因为这只是施设而已,也就是所谓“我、世间”,并不像色、受等那样属于胜义。这里,“adhimutti(胜解)”一词与“adhivacana(施设言)”同义,正如在“语路”等说法中,“utti”一词是言说的同义词。而依“已生之义”等说法,则是指超出自性真实之外的东西。超越或脱离那些,就是“胜解”,其路则显示它们,这就是此处的意思;或者,执取殊胜的常见等,就是“胜解”。因为人们把常见等、自性等、实我等、命我等、身我等不真实的义理,强加到具有自性之法上,邪见便由此生起。巴利
Adhivacanapathānīti [adhivacanapaadāni (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)] ruḷhimattena paññattipathāni. Dāsādīsu hi sirivaḍḍhakādisaddā viya vacanamattameva adhikāraṃ katvā pavattiyā tathā paṇṇattiyeva adhivacanaṃ, sā ca vohārassa pathoti. Atha vā adhi-saddo uparibhāge, vuccatīti vacanaṃ. Adhi uparibhāge vacanaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Upādāniyabhūtānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ [upādābhūtarūpādīnaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.29)] upari paññāpiyamānā upādāpaññatti, tasmā paññattidīpakapathānīti attho daṭṭhabbo. Paññattimattañhetaṃ vuccati, yadidaṃ ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca, na rūpavedanādayo viya paramatthoti. Adhimutti-saddo cettha adhivacana-saddena samānattho ‘‘niruttipatho’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 107 dukamātikā) viya uttisaddassa vacanapariyāyattā. ‘‘Bhūtaṃ attha’’ntiādinā pana bhūtasabhāvato atirekaṃ. Tamatidhāvitvā vā muccantīti adhimuttiyo, tāsaṃ pathāni taddīpakattāti atthaṃ dasseti, adhikaṃ vā sassatādikaṃ muccantīti adhimuttiyo. Adhikañhi sassatādiṃ, pakatiādiṃ, dabbādiṃ, jīvādiṃ, kāyādiñca abhūtaṃ atthaṃ sabhāvadhammesu ajjhāropetvā diṭṭhiyo pavattanti.
30 他们说“偏执地说”,就是执取“只有这个才是真的,别的都是假的”而说。他们也会用“这个才是法,那个不是法”这类说法,以压制的方式来说。为了显示这种偏执行为至今仍然没有中断,所以用了现在时态,这是这里对巴利文的注释。“想要解说”是作为原因的,因此“问过之后”是连接关系。“邪见”就是见,见本身就是“见处”,就像在“muttagataṃ, saṅkhāragataṃ”等表达中一样,gata这个词表示处于那,或者因为无可去之处,见只是已去之处,所以是“见处”。这只是对见的执取,没有别的可了知,这就是意思;或者见的种类就是“见处”。世间人确实在“vidhayuttagatapakārasadda”等词中接受同义。对于同一个蕴,依“我”和“世间”的执取差别而施设,所以说“取色等中某一种为我,也为世间”。“不死、常、恒”是“常”的同义词,或者因为无死所以不死。因为无生起所以一切时都存在,所以是常。以坚固义、无变异义为恒。“如说”等语,通过大义释和分别道巴利文,说明所说的义。其中“取色”等文句与剩余部分相连。这个意思则是——“取色为我,取受、想、行、识为我”,这是依这五种有身见的形态而说;然而依“有色之我”等十五种其余有身见的形态,取四蕴为“我”,施设此外的为“世间”,这个意思也可以得到。同样,取一蕴为“我”,其他属于自己受用的为“世间”。取自己相续所生的蕴为“我”,施设此外他人相续所生的为“世间”,这里应当这样理解。这里说——“这是他们的常论”,为什么下面说呢?难道他们不是以我及世间为常,而不是论吗?这是真的,但由于与常相伴,论也被说为常,如“kuntā pacaranti”;或者那里应当看到“sassato iti vādo etesaṃ”中iti一词的省略。他们常说“只有这个才是真的,别的都是假的”,执取并如此言说,因此“常论者”也成立。巴利
30.Abhivadantīti ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti abhinivisitvā vadanti. ‘‘Ayameva dhammo, nāyaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā abhibhavitvāpi vadanti. Abhivadanakiriyāya ajjāpi avicchedabhāvadassanatthaṃ vattamānavacanaṃ katanti ayamettha pāḷivaṇṇanā. Kathetukamyatāya hetubhūtāya pucchitvāti sambandho. Micchā passatīti diṭṭhi, diṭṭhi eva diṭṭhigataṃ ‘‘muttagataṃ, (a. ni. 9.11) saṅkhāragata’’ntiādīsu (mahāni. 41) viya gata-saddassa tabbhāvavuttito, gantabbābhāvato vā diṭṭhiyā gatamattanti diṭṭhigataṃ. Diṭṭhiyā gahaṇamattameva, natthaññaṃ avagantabbanti attho, diṭṭhipakāro vā diṭṭhigataṃ. Lokiyā hi vidhayuttagatapakārasadde samānatthe icchanti. Ekasmiṃyeva khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti ca ‘‘loko’’ti ca gahaṇavisesaṃ upādāya paññāpanaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘rūpādīsu aññataraṃ attāti ca lokoti ca gahetvā’’ti. Amaraṃ niccaṃ dhuvanti sassatavevacanāni, maraṇābhāvena vā amaraṃ. Uppādābhāvena sabbadāpi atthitāya niccaṃ. Thiraṭṭhena vikārābhāvena dhuvaṃ.‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādinā mahāniddesa paṭisambhidāmaggapāḷīhi yathāvuttamatthaṃ vibhāveti. Tattha ‘‘rūpaṃ gahetvā’’ti pāṭhasesena sambandho. Ayaṃ panattho – ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassati. Vedanaṃ, saññaṃ, saṅkhāre, viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti imissā pañcavidhāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena vutto, ‘‘rūpavantaṃ attāna’’ntiādikāya pana pañcadasavidhāyapi tadavasesāya sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā vasena cattāro khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadañño ‘‘loko’’ti paññapentīti ayampi attho labbhateva. Tathā ekaṃ khandhaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā añño attano upabhogabhūto ‘‘loko’’ti ca. Sasantatipatite khandhe ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tadañño parasantatipatito ‘‘loko’’ti ca paññapetīti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Etthāha – ‘‘sassato vādo etesa’’nti kasmā heṭṭhā vuttaṃ, nanu tesaṃ attā ca loko ca sassatoti adhippeto, na vādoti? Saccametaṃ, sassatasahacaritatāya pana vādopi sassatoti vutto yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti, sassato iti vādo etesanti vā tattha iti-saddalopo daṭṭhabbo. Sassataṃ vadanti ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti abhinivissa voharantīti sassatavādā tipi yujjati.
31 “以热恼的状态”是指逼迫的状态,或者从逼迫的意义上说。在这里,断除就是逼迫。“以精勤的方式”是指以令心专注的方式。所谓令心专注,就是不让心落入懈怠那一方,而是把心策励起来。为了让定达到殊胜的层次,这样对精进反复修习、多加练习,就是精勤。因此,通过这三个词,说的正是精进,所以说“如是三种精进”。因为在这里,这三个词依次显示了近行定的精进、安止定的精进和调伏心的精进。依此而不放逸,就是不放逸,也就是不远离念。而不放逸其实就是四念处、四蕴。以正确的方法作意业处,就是正作意,而它其实就是智,不是所缘、心路过程、速行等的施设者,因此说“从义上说就是智”。初作意就是因作意。以“于其中……”等语来说明这个义理。其中,“于作意中”是指在作为业处作意方法的、名为智的作意中。“于此之处”一语,通过别语结合等,也表明此词以论题等方式而有所区别的对境。以及精进,是指如前所说的三个词所表达的三种精进。在此,即“热恼……乃至……作意随行”这一文中,应当说与戒清净一起,四种色界禅那的证得行道,而它在《清净道论》(Visuddhi. 2.401)中已详细讲述,因此说“略义”。如是种类,是指如是自性,以此十四种心的调伏,说明通过令色界第四禅那纯熟而达到的调柔。心定就是心一境性,而它只是具备八支的色界第四禅那的定。“如”一词是“由……”之义的不变词,因此说“由何定”。巴利
31.Ātāpanabhāvenāti vibādhanassa bhāvena, vibādhanaṭṭhena vā. Pahānañcettha vibādhanaṃ. Padahanavasenāti samādahanavasena. Samādahanaṃ pana kosajjapakkhe patitumadatvā cittassa ussāhanaṃ. Yathā samādhi visesabhāgiyataṃ pāpuṇāti, evaṃ vīriyassa bahulīkaraṇaṃ anuyogo. Iti padattayena vīriyameva vuttanti āha ‘‘evaṃ tippabhedaṃ vīriya’’nti. Yathākkamañhiha tīhi padehi upacārappanācittaparidamanavīriyāni dasseti. Na pamajjati etenāti appamādo, satiyā avippavāso. So pana satipaṭṭhānā cattāro khandhā eva. Sammā upāyena manasi karoti kammaṭṭhānametenāti sammāmanasikāro, so pana ñāṇameva, na ārammaṇavīthijavanapaṭipādakā, tenāha ‘‘atthato ñāṇa’’nti. Pathamanasikāroti kāraṇamanasikāro. Tadevatthaṃ samattheti ‘‘yasmiñhī’’tiādinā. Tattha yasmiṃ manasikāreti kammaṭṭhānamanasikaraṇūpāyabhūte ñāṇasaṅkhāte manasikāre. ‘‘Imasmiṃ ṭhāne’’ti iminā saddantarasampayogādinā viya pakaraṇavasenāpi saddo visesavisayoti dīpeti. Vīriyañcāti yathāvuttehi tīhi padehi vuttaṃ tippabhedaṃ vīriyañca. Etthāti ‘‘ātappa…pe… manasikāramanvāyā’’ti imasmiṃ pāṭhe, sīlavisuddhiyā saddhiṃ catunnaṃ rūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ adhigamanapaṭipadā idha vattabbā, sā pana visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.401) vitthārato vuttāti āha ‘‘saṅkhepattho’’ti. Tathājātikanti tathāsabhāvaṃ, etena cuddasavidhehi cittaparidamanehi rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānassa paguṇatāpādanena damitataṃ dasseti. Cetaso samādhi cetosamādhi, so pana aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgatarūpāvacaracatutthajjhānasseva samādhi. Yathā-saddo ‘‘yenā’’ti atthe nipātoti āha ‘‘yena samādhinā’’ti.
具足禅那威力,是指以被称为世间神通的、如同舒展般的禅那威力而具足。有人说“他持有这样的见解”,这是现在时态的表述,应当理解为:是为了显示这样说的人其说法没有间断、一切时中都如此。因为在对时间没有限定时,就用现在时态来说。“不生灭”是指渴望、乞求儿子,由“vanati”(渴望)和“yācati”(乞求)二词构成“vañjhā”,并将“jha”作为接尾词,又将“n”音变为鼻音;“vadhati”意为杀害儿子,或“phalaṃ vā hanati”(或杀害果实),因此“vañjhā”是将“sapaccayaghya”的“ghya”变为“jha”,并加入鼻音而成。如同她不能生育某人的果实一样,故称“vañjho”(不孕者),因此说“vañjhapasū”(不孕者的儿子)等。如此,以这个具有词义的说法,要显示什么样的能力之义呢?为了回答内在的责难,说了“以此”等。对于获得禅那者,由于殊胜,禅那诸法出现在其面前,但通过那个门径,其余诸法也出现,针对这个意思,说了“禅那等”。所谓“能生色等”,是指能生色等的功能。所谓“拒绝”,是指“这些不产生任何东西”而拒绝。为什么呢?因为如果存在能生性,那么如同色等诸法、如同乐等诸法,由于依赖条件而存在,就会知道有生起;而如果有生起,灭去必定会发生,因此就不可能常住,所以拒绝那个。巴利
Vijambhanabhūtehi lokiyābhiññāsaṅkhātehi jhānānubhāvehi sampannoti jhānānubhāvasampanno. Sodiṭṭhigatiko evaṃ vadatīti vattamānavacanaṃ, tathāvadanassa avicchedabhāvena sabbakālikatādassanatthanti veditabbaṃ. Aniyamite hi kālavisese vippakatakālavacananti. Vanati yācati puttanti vañjhā jha-paccayaṃ, na-kārassa ca niggahitaṃ katvā, vadhati puttaṃ, phalaṃ vā hanatītipi vañjhā sapaccayaghya-kārassa jha-kāraṃ, niggahitāgamañca katvā. Sā viya kassaci phalassa ajanenāti vañjho, tenāha ‘‘vañjhapasū’’tiādi. Evaṃ padatthavatā iminā kīdisaṃ sāmatthiyatthaṃ dassetīti antolīnacodanaṃ pariharituṃ ‘‘etenā’’tiādimāha. Jhānalābhissa visesena jhānadhammā āpāthamāgacchanti, tammukhena pana sesadhammāpīti imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘jhānādīna’’nti vuttaṃ. Rūpādijanakabhāvanti rūpādīnaṃ janakasāmatthiyaṃ. Paṭikkhipatīti ‘‘nayime kiñci janentī’’ti paṭikkhipati. Kasmāti ce? Sati hi janakabhāve rūpādidhammānaṃ viya, sukhādidhammānaṃ viya ca paccayāyattavuttitāya uppādavantatā viññāyati, uppāde ca sati avassaṃbhāvī nirodhoti anavakāsāva niccatā siyā, tasmā taṃ paṭikkhipatīti.
所谓“住立”,就是不动地安住;或者,“如山般稳固”这个词在世间已经成了表示绝对恒常的惯用语,应当这样理解。“住立”就是安住者,柱也是安住者,所以合起来就是“如柱住立者”,这是形容词放在后面,因此意思是:就像深基不动、安住稳固的因陀罗柱。因此说“如同”等。这里用“如山般稳固”一语说明无常性不存在。用“如柱住立者、住立”则说明:就像柱不被风吹等所动摇,同样不被任何事物所改变,也就是没有改变;而改变,从义理上说就是坏灭,所以说“以此二者显示世间没有坏灭”。巴利
Ṭhitoti niccalaṃ patiṭṭhito, kūṭaṭṭha-saddoyeva vā loke accantaṃ nicce niruḷho daṭṭhabbo. Tiṭṭhatīti ṭhāyī, esikā ca sā ṭhāyī cāti esikaṭṭhāyī, visesanaparanipāto cesa, tasmā gambhīranemo niccalaṭṭhitiko indakhīlo viyāti attho, tenāha ‘‘yathā’’tiādi. ‘‘Kūṭaṭṭho’’ti iminā cettha aniccatābhāvamāha. ‘‘Esikaṭṭhāyī ṭhito’’ti iminā pana yathā esikā vātappahārādīhi na calati, evaṃ na kenaci vikāramāpajjatīti vikārābhāvaṃ, vikāropi atthato vināsoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhayenāpi lokassa vināsābhāvaṃ dassetī’’ti.
先这样展示了注释书的说法,现在为了展示某些人的说法,所以说了“然而有些人……”等这些话。从文阇草:就是从文阇草这种茅草。伊西卡:就是竹笋。所谓“这个被称为我的法聚生起”,意思是它以潜伏的形态先前就已经存在,后来以显现的形态出来,达到显现。因为“已经存在”这句话,是通过显示果存在于因中,来说明以显现形态而显现的主张。就像存在于稻谷中的稻穗是潜伏形态,而从那里面抽出来的则是显现形态。那么,先前就以潜伏形态存在、尚未显现,后来又以显现形态达到显现,这怎么理解呢?就像被黑暗遮住的瓶子,靠光明而达到显现,这个道理也是这样。巴利
Evamaṭṭhakathāvādaṃ dassetvā idāni kecivādaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘keci panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Muñjatoti [muñje (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)] muñjatiṇato. Īsikāti kaḷīro. Yadidaṃ attasaṅkhātaṃ dhammajātaṃ jāyatīti vuccati, taṃ sattirūpavasena pubbe vijjamānameva byattirūpavasena nikkhamati, abhibyattiṃ gacchatīti attho. ‘‘Vijjamānamevā’’ti hi etena kāraṇe phalassa atthibhāvadassanena byattirūpavasena abhibyattivādaṃ dasseti. Sāligabbhe saṃvijjamānaṃ sālisīsaṃ viya hi sattirūpaṃ, tadabhinikkhantaṃ viya byattirūpanti. Kathaṃ pana sattirūpavasena vijjamānoyeva pubbe anabhibyatto byattirūpavasena abhibyattiṃ gacchatīti? Yathā andhakārena paṭicchanno ghaṭo ālokena abhibyattiṃ gacchati, evamayampīti.
这里应当进一步考察:光到底做了什么,才被称为“照亮瓶子”?如果说它是通过生起一个以瓶子为对象的认知来照亮,那等于说它让一个还没生起的认知生起,这样一来,“显现”这个说法就站不住了。如果说它是通过驱除障碍以瓶子为对象的认知的黑暗来照亮,那“显现”这个说法同样站不住。因为,如果以瓶子为对象的认知已经存在,黑暗又怎么能成为它的障碍呢?而且,就像瓶子的显现说不通一样,那些执持邪见的人所构想出来的“我”的显现,也同样说不通。因为在那里,如果依靠根、境等条件的聚合,让一个还没生起的认知生起,那么单凭“生起”这个说法,就已经超出了单纯的“显现”,变成了在说明一个还没生起的认知如何生起,所以“显现”的说法站不住。同样,常见论者的主张也因为这个道理而站不住。如果说认知的生起是因为驱除了处在黑暗位置、成为认知运转之障碍的无明,即便如此,对于一个以对象为所缘的认知来说,无明又怎么能成为它的障碍呢?“显现”的说法依然站不住。更何况,由于有差别这一点,“显现”的说法也站不住。因为能显现的东西,比如月亮、太阳、宝珠、灯等,虽然各有差别,但被显现的东西,比如瓶子等,并没有差别;然而认知却随着对象的差别而有差别,认知是随着对象而产生的,所以“显现”更加说不通。在这里,用“存在”和“显现”的方式来假立一种作用,也是不合理的,因为所谓“存在”和“显现”的作用,与具有这种作用的东西,并不被认为是不同的。那种所谓的作用,与具有那种作用的事物,实际上并不是不同的,就像触等与触的作用一样。因此,某些人构想的“显现”说法,以“存在”和“显现”的作用与具有作用者并非不同来成立,是不合理的。然而,那些读了“住于如柱之地而住”之后,想按上述方式理解其义的人,把这一点作为理由来把握,并且说“那些有情奔跑、流转、死去、投生”等语句也建立义理关联,并非像义注那样没有关联,为了显示这一点,论师说了“yasmā ca”等语。在那里,“那些有情奔跑”等句中,凡是此处以人的状态而住立者,他们正是以趋向天界等状态而从此处前往他处,这就是其义。其意趣是:否则就会有已作之业的毁灭和未作之业的遭遇。巴利
Idamettha vicāretabbaṃ – kiṃ karonto āloko ghaṭaṃ pakāsetīti vuccati, yadi ghaṭavisayaṃ buddhiṃ karonto pakāseti, anuppannāya eva buddhiyā uppattidīpanato abhibyattivādo hāyati. Atha ghaṭavisayāya buddhiyā āvaraṇabhūtaṃ andhakāraṃ vidhamanto pakāseti, evampi abhibyattivādo hāyateva. Sati hi ghaṭavisayāya buddhiyā kathaṃ andhakāro tassā āvaraṇaṃ hotīti. Yathā ca ghaṭassa abhibyatti na yujjati, evaṃ diṭṭhigatikaparikappitassa attanopi abhibyatti na yujjatiyeva. Tatthāpi hi yadi indriyavisayādisannipātena anuppannā eva buddhi uppannā, uppattivacaneneva abhibyattivādo hāyati abhibyattimattamatikkamma anuppannāya eva buddhiyā uppattidīpanato. Tathā sassatavādopi teneva kāraṇena. Atha buddhippavattiyā āvaraṇabhūtassa andhakāraṭṭhāniyassa mohassa vidhamanena buddhi uppannā. Evampi sati atthavisayāya buddhiyā kathaṃ moho tassā āvaraṇaṃ hotīti, hāyateva abhibyattivādo, kiñca bhiyyo – bhedasabbhāvatopi abhibyattivādo hāyati. Na hi abhibyañjanakānaṃ candimasūriyamaṇipadīpādīnaṃ bhedena abhibyañjitabbānaṃ ghaṭādīnaṃ bhedo hoti, hoti ca visayabhedena buddhibhedo yathāvisayaṃ buddhiyā sambhavatoti bhiyyopi abhibyatti na yujjatiyeva, na cettha vijjamānatābhibyattivasena vuttikappanā yuttā vijjamānatābhibyattikiriyāsaṅkhātāya vuttiyā vuttimato ca anaññathānujānanato. Anaññāyeva hi tathā vuttisaṅkhātā kiriyā tabbantavatthuto, yathā phassādīhi phusanādibhāvo, tasmā vuttimato anaññāya eva vijjamānatābhibyattisaṅkhātāya vuttiyā parikappito kesañci abhibyattivādo na yutto evāti. Ye pana ‘‘īsikaṭṭhāyī ṭhito’’ti paṭhitvā yathāvuttamatthamicchanti, te tadidaṃ kāraṇabhāvena gahetvā ‘‘te ca sattā sandhāvanti saṃsaranti cavanti upapajjantī’’ti padehi atthasambandhampi karonti, na aṭṭhakathāyamiva asambandhanti dassento ‘‘yasmā cā’’tiādimāha. Te ca sattā sandhāvantīti ettha ye idha manussabhāvena avaṭṭhitā, teyeva devabhāvādiupagamanena ito aññattha gacchantīti attho. Aññathā katassa kammassa vināso, akatassa ca abbhāgamo āpajjeyyāti adhippāyo.
“一个又一个”是指从一个有到另一个有,或者一个接一个,也就是反复多次的意思。把“cavanti”这个词还原词性后,解释其含义为“这样被计算”,因为他们按照自己所执取的方式,自性是恒常的,所以没有死与生。由于遍及一切,也没有流转和轮回,只是诸法的生起过程有差别,才这样被计算、这样被言说,这是其意图所在。通过这句话,他展示了这样的变异论:“具有固定本质的自我,以及诸法的法性,既生起又灭去。”至于这里应当说明的内容,我们将在探讨常见论、解释“趣向如此”一词的含义时再作说明。现在,为了指出注释书中所述内容与此处无关,而说“然而在注释书中”等语。他用“流转”等说法,破坏、推翻了自己的主张,意思是:由“流转”等说法所成立的无常性,与他先前所承认的常见是相矛盾的。“此见取者”等语,是对这一含义的论证。“不固定”即不坚固。针对“流转”等说法以及常见,他说:“好的与不好的都存在。”“Sassatiyo”指“一切时存续者”,将 ra 变为 sa,并作重叠,指地、须弥、日月等,与“sassati”相同,这是抽象中性词。所谓“我与世间”,是行为主体。或者,“与常相同”是以性、数、格来指示行为主体。意思是:与常相同的我与世间确实存在。这里的“iti”只是填充音节。因为音韵学家主张,在“eva”之后接“iti”时,“i”音变为“va”音。“与常相同”也有恒常、坚固、永恒之义,这是依据注释书中“与常相同”一词与“常”同义而说的。巴利
Aparāparanti aparasmā bhavā aparaṃ bhavaṃ, aparamaparaṃ vā, punappunanti attho. ‘‘Cavantī’’ti padamulliṅgetvā ‘‘evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchantī’’ti atthaṃ vivarati, attano tathāgahitassa niccasabhāvattā na cutūpapattiyo. Sabbabyāpitāya nāpi sandhāvanasaṃsaraṇāni, dhammānaṃyeva pana pavattivisesena evaṃ saṅkhyaṃ gacchanti evaṃ voharīyantīti adhippāyo. Etena ‘‘avaṭṭhitasabhāvassa attano, dhammino ca dhammamattaṃ uppajjati ceva vinassati cā’’ti imaṃ vipariṇāmavādaṃ dasseti. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ imissaṃ sassatavādavicāraṇāyameva ‘‘evaṃgatikā’’ti padatthavibhāvane vakkhāma. Idāni aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ asambandhamattaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhakathāyaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sandhāvantītiādinā vacanena attano vādaṃ bhindati vināseti sandhāvanādivacanasiddhāya aniccatāya pubbe attanā paṭiññātassa sassatavādassa viruddhabhāvatoti attho. ‘‘Diṭṭhigatikassā’’tiādi tadatthasamatthanaṃ. Na nibaddhanti na thiraṃ. ‘‘Sandhāvantī’’tiādivacanaṃ, sassatavādañca sandhāya ‘‘sundarampi asundarampi hotiyevā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbadā saranti pavattantīti sassatiyo ra-kārassa sa-kāraṃ, dvibhāvañca katvā, pathavīsinerucandimasūriyā, sassatīhi samaṃ sadisaṃ tathā, bhāvanapuṃsakavacanañcetaṃ. ‘‘Attā ca loko cā’’ti hi kattuadhikāro. Sassatisamanti vā liṅgabyattayena kattuniddeso. Sassatisamo attā ca loko ca atthi evāti attho, iti-saddo cettha padapūraṇamattaṃ. Eva-saddassa hi e-kāre pare iti-sadde i-kārassa va-kāramicchanti saddavidū. Sassatisamanti sassataṃ thāvaraṃ niccakālantipi attho, sassatisama-saddassa sassatapadena samānatthataṃ sandhāya ṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.31) vutto.
“显示原因”:那些主张“我及世间是常”的人,这位持见者为了给他们显示原因,才这样说,这就是这里的关联。因为他并不是用自己现前亲证的意义来证明自己,而是用自己现前亲证的意义来证明自己尚未亲证的意义,并且把自己想要的意义告诉别人,而不是不想要的。这里之所以显示原因,是因为在无数百千生中,他能忆念“我的这个我及世间是同一个”。因为,谁经验了某个意义,谁才能忆念它,别人不能。别人不能忆念他人所经验的意义,就像法护不能忆念佛护所经验的。就像在这些生中一样,在更早的过去生中也是如此。因此,他投入“我的我及世间是常,就像我这样,其他众生的我及世间也是常”这种常见执取,这位持见者也让别人在这上面站住。不过,依据圣典中“他们宣说种种不同的意趣途径,他这样说”这句话,可以知道这里显示原因,是为了让别人也信受。“此”就是指我及世间的常性。“并非仅仅”等,是显示其意义所归。“处”这个词指原因,而这里特指宿命通,所以说“此”等。原因有三种:能达因、能生因、能知因。其中,圣道是涅槃的能达因,种子是苗芽的能生因,缘生等是无常等的能知因,这里指的只是能知因。能知的意义,因为它是应被知的意义领域之智的原因,所以是原因。那个智依它而住,所以叫“处”;那个智住在这里,所以也叫“所依”。因此,世尊用“所依”这个词指出后,又用“处”这个词说明。巴利
Hetuṃ dassentoti yesaṃ ‘‘sassato’’ti attānañca lokañca paññapeti, tesaṃ hetuṃ dassento ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko āhāti sambandho. Na hi attano diṭṭhiyā paccakkhakatamatthaṃ attanoyeva sādheti, attano pana paccakkhakatena atthena attano appaccakkhabhūtampi atthaṃ sādheti, attanā ca yathānicchitaṃ atthaṃ parepi viññāpeti, na anicchitaṃ , idaṃ pana hetudassanaṃ etesu anekesu jātisatasahassesu ekovāyaṃ me attā ca loko ca anussaraṇasambhavato. Yo hi yamatthaṃ anubhavati, so eva taṃ anussarati, na añño. Na hi aññena anubhūtamatthaṃ añño anussarituṃ sakkoti yathā taṃ buddharakkhitena anubhūtaṃ dhammarakkhito. Yathā cetāsu, evaṃ ito purimatarāsupi jātīsu, tasmā ‘‘sassato me attā ca loko ca, yathā ca me, evaṃ aññesampi sattānaṃ sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti sassatavasena diṭṭhigahaṇaṃ pakkhandanto diṭṭhigatiko parepi tattha patiṭṭhapeti. Pāḷiyaṃ pana ‘‘anekavihitāni adhimuttipathāni abhivadanti, so evamāhā’’ti vacanato parānugāhāpanavasena idha hetudassanaṃ adhippetanti viññāyati. Etanti attano ca lokassa ca sassatabhāvaṃ. ‘‘Na kevala’’ntiādi atthato āpannadassanaṃ. Ṭhāna-saddo kāraṇe, tañca kho idha pubbenivāsānussatiyevāti āha ‘‘ida’’ntiādi. Kāraṇañca nāmetaṃ tividhaṃ sampāpakaṃ nibbattakaṃ ñāpakanti. Tattha ariyamaggo nibbānassa sampāpakakāraṇaṃ, bījaṃ aṅkurassa nibbattakakāraṇaṃ, paccayuppannatādayo aniccatādīnaṃ ñāpakakāraṇaṃ, idhāpi ñāpakakāraṇameva adhippetaṃ. Ñāpako hi attho ñāpetabbatthavisayassa ñāṇassa hetubhāvato kāraṇaṃ. Tadāyattavuttitāya taṃ ñāṇaṃ tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhānaṃ, vasati taṃ ñāṇamettha tiṭṭhatīti ‘‘vatthū’’ti ca vuccati. Tathā hi bhagavatā vatthu-saddena uddisitvāpi ṭhāna-saddena niddiṭṭhanti.
32-33 第二、第三轮转和第一轮转相比,除了时间上的差别以外,没有别的不同,所以说“上面两轮转也是同样的道理”。为了按照圣典原文显示这个时间差别,才说了“只是”等话。意思是:另外的第二、第三轮转,是依照忆念能力,说到乃至十坏劫、乃至四十坏劫而说的。这里“不超过此”是指不超过所述的三时,或不能忆念四十坏劫以上的内容。为什么常见被分成四种呢?难道不应该像无因生起论那样,不按时间差别来分,只分成两种就够了吗?为了澄清这个责难,说了“因为钝根者”等话。意思是:依照获得宿命智的钝根、中根、利根三者,按时间差别分成三种,连同推理则分成四种。难道不是这样吗?依照传闻等,像推理者那样,钝根者等获得殊胜者也有下等、中等、上等种种差别,所以应该有许多种分别,那么为什么把一切获得殊胜者只归纳为三类来说呢?是为了以上限的限定来显示。在三类中,凡是下等、中等智慧者,他们只忆念比所说的限定更少的。而凡是上等智慧者,他们则超越所说的限定而忆念。因此,为了在各处以上限的限定来显示,依照忆念许多百千生、四十坏劫的忆念能力,只归纳为三类来说。不超过此,即不超过所说的三时,或不超过四十坏劫,不再忆念更多,为什么呢?因为智慧软弱。据说,由于他们没有名色分别,所以智慧软弱,这在义注中已说。巴利
32-33. Dutiyatatiyavārānaṃ paṭhamavārato viseso natthi ṭhapetvā kālabhedanti āha ‘‘upari vāradvayepi eseva nayo’’ti. Tadetaṃ kālabhedaṃ yathāpāḷiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kevalañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Itarena dutiyatatiyavārā yāva dasasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappā, yāva cattālīsasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappā ca anussaraṇavasena vuttāti adhippāyo. Yadevaṃ kasmā sassatavādo catudhā vibhatto, nanu tidhā kālabhedamakatvā adhiccasamuppattikavādo viya duvidheneva vibhajitabbo siyāti codanaṃ sodhetuṃ ‘‘mandapañño hī’’tiādimāha. Mandapaññādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇalābhīnaṃ vasena tidhā kālabhedaṃ katvā takkanena saha catudhā vibhattoti adhippāyo. Nanu ca anussavādivasena takkikānaṃ viya mandapaññādīnampi visesalābhīnaṃ hīnādivasena anekabhedasambhavato bahudhā bhedo siyā, atha kasmā sabbepi visesalābhino tayo eva rāsī katvā vuttāti? Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena dassetukāmattā. Tīsu hi rāsīsu ye hīnamajjhimapaññā, te vuttaparicchedato ūnakameva anussaranti. Ye pana ukkaṭṭhapaññā, te vuttaparicchedaṃ atikkamitvā nānussarantīti tattha tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedena dassetukāmato anekajātisatasahassadasacattārīsasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭānussaraṇavasena tayo eva rāsī katvā vuttāti. Na tato uddhanti yathāvuttakālattayato, cattārīsasaṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭakappato vā uddhaṃ nānussarati, kasmā? Dubbalapaññattā. Tesañhi nāmarūpaparicchedavirahato dubbalā paññā hotīti aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ.
34 因为那正是它自身性质的状态,所以它就是作者本身,因此说“他思量”。确实,正因为是它自身性质的状态,第二种说法才成立。其中,“他思量”就是推度,意思是以常见等行相,把心投向这个那个所缘。“思量”是以敲击为特征、或以决断为特征、作为邪见立足处的寻。以各种方式进行的思量,说为“思量后、再思量后”,这只是对“具足考察”的释义。而词源分析则应像“思量者”一词那样,从两方面来说。所谓“考察”,就是审察,它有两种:慧和似慧。但这里指的是似慧,从实质上说,就是与贪俱起的心识生起,或者称为邪执的不如理作意。又或者在前期阶段,它是作为邪见的见的躁动。为了显示这三种含义,所以说“衡量、认可、容忍”。在“衡量后”等句中,也应依次与“以与贪俱起的心识生起”等配合。“遍击”或“反复击打”就是遍击,这正是指寻对所缘的推度,并且此词是中性名词,通过“以各种方式思量后”这句来显示。“以方式”就是以理由。“如前所说的”就是如前以三种方式所说的分类。“随考察”就是随转,或以随考察的伺察而随简择。因为把随转法的功能也归到主要法上,所以这样说。“显现”就是看起来如此,“辩才”就是能清楚显示所专注行相差别的、与邪见相应的心识生起,从它而生起的就叫“辩才”,也就是那样被了知。“自己的辩才”就是自己显现,“自己辩才”就是自己显现,因此说“从自己的少许辩才生起”。这里“少许”一词排除了殊胜证得等。在没有指定时间的语句中,以现在时来释义是恰当的,所以说“他这样说”。巴利
34. Tappakatiyattopi kattutthoyevāti āha ‘‘takkayatī’’ti. Tappakatiyattattā eva hi dutiyanayopi upapanno hoti. Tattha takkayatīti ūhayati, sassatādiākārena tasmiṃ tasmiṃ ārammaṇe cittaṃ abhiniropayatīti attho. Takkoti ākoṭanalakkhaṇo, vinicchayalakkhaṇo vā diṭṭhiṭṭhānabhūto vitakko. Tena tena pariyāyena takkanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘takketvā vitakketvā’’ti vuttaṃ vīmaṃsāya samannāgatoti atthavacanamattaṃ. Nibbacanaṃ pana takkipade viya dvidhā vattabbaṃ. Vīmaṃsā nāma vicāraṇā, sā ca duvidhā paññā ceva paññāpatirūpikā ca. Idha pana paññāpatirūpikāva, sā catthato lobhasahagatacittuppādo, micchābhinivesasaṅkhāto vā ayonisomanasikāro. Pubbabhāge vā micchādassanabhūtaṃ diṭṭhivipphanditaṃ, tadetamatthattayaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tulanā ruccanā khamanā’’ti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Tulayitvā’’tiādīsupi yathākkamaṃ ‘‘lobhasahagatacittuppādenā’’tiādinā yojetabbaṃ. Samantato, punappunaṃ vā āhananaṃ pariyāhataṃ, taṃ pana vitakkassa ārammaṇaṃ ūhanameva, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ padanti dasseti ‘‘tena tena pariyāyena takketvā’’ti iminā. Pariyāyenāti ca kāraṇenāti attho. Vuttappakārāyāti tidhā vuttappabhedāya. Anuvicaritanti anupavattitaṃ, vīmaṃsānugatena vā vicārena anumajjitaṃ. Tadanugatadhammakiccampi hi padhānadhamme āropetvā tathā vuccati. Paṭibhāti dissatīti paṭibhānaṃ, yathāsamāhitākāravisesavibhāvako diṭṭhigatasampayuttacittuppādo, tato jātanti paṭibhānaṃ, tathā paññāyanaṃ, sayaṃ attano paṭibhānaṃ sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ, tenevāha ‘‘attano paṭibhānamattasañjāta’’nti. Matta-saddena cettha visesādhigamādayo nivatteti. Anāmaṭṭhakālavacane vattamānavaseneva atthaniddeso upapannoti āha ‘‘evaṃ vadatī’’ti.
经中以“他是思量者、考察者”这一总说,或者以省略一分的说法,为了分别思量者的种类,而说“其中四种”等。从他人那里听闻称为传闻,具有这种听闻的人就是传闻者。能忆念过去曾经经历过的生,就是宿命通者。“被获得”就是“得”,即自己获得的任何色等、乐等,而不是禅那等殊胜状态,所以经中说:“他依思量遍击、考察随转、自辩才而这样说。”注释书里也说:“生起了自己的少许辩才。”阿阇梨法护长老也说:“以‘少许’一词排除了殊胜证得等。”拥有这个的人就是得者。以纯粹的、不与前面那些混杂的,或者纯粹的思量就是纯思量,具有这个的人就是纯思量者。“因此”是表示催促的虚词,以此催促像须大拏王对世尊那样,催他放下邪见的执取。“由于得的状态”即由于是色等、乐等的获得者。“未来也将如此”这句话,是就“得者思量者”也可能如此而说的,意指这里所说的思量。因为正是以随念未来的思量而执取常见。而“过去也曾如此”这句话,只是随念未来思量的亲依止的举例说明。因为他这样思量而执取邪见:“如同我的自我现在是乐的,过去也是如此”,首先依止随念过去的思量,然后思量“未来也将如此”。“如此存在时,这个就存在”这句话,是在无常的事物上,说一个作者、另一个感受者,就犯了这个过失;若如此,就会有已作之法的毁灭和未作之法的遭遇。而在常恒的事物上,说一个作者、另一个感受者,则不犯这个过失。若如此,就会有已作之法不毁灭、未作之法不遭遇。这样便显示了思量者寻求合理性的方式。巴利
Pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘takkī hoti vīmaṃsī’’ti sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā vuttaṃ takkībhedaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘tattha catubbidho’’tiādimāha. Parehi puna savanaṃ anussuti, sā yassāyaṃ anussutiko. Purimaṃ anubhūtapubbaṃ jātiṃ saratīti jātissaro. Labbhateti lābho, yaṃ kiñci attanā paṭiladdhaṃ rūpādi, sukhādi ca, na pana jhānādiviseso, tenevāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘so takkapariyāhataṃ vīmaṃsānuvicaritaṃ sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ evamāhā’’ti. Aṭṭhakathāyampi vuttaṃ ‘‘attano paṭibhānamattasañjāta’’nti. Ācariyadhammapālattheropi vadati ‘‘matta-saddena visesādhigamādayo nivattetī’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.34) so etassāti lābhī. Suddhena purimehi asammissena, suddhaṃ vā takkanaṃ suddhatakko, so yassāyaṃ suddhatakkiko. Tena hīti uyyojanatthe nipāto, tena tathā vessantararaññova bhagavati samāneti diṭṭhiggāhaṃ uyyojeti. Lābhitāyāti rūpādisukhādilābhībhāvato. ‘‘Anāgatepi evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti idaṃ lābhītakkino evampi sambhavatīti sambhavadassanavasena idhādhippetaṃ takkanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Anāgataṃsatakkaneneva hi sassataggāhī bhavati. ‘‘Atītepi evaṃ ahosī’’ti idaṃ pana anāgataṃsatakkanassa upanissayanidassanamattaṃ. So hi ‘‘yathā me idāni attā sukhī hoti, evaṃ atītepīti paṭhamaṃ atītaṃsānutakkanaṃ upanissāya anāgatepi evaṃ bhavissatī’’ti takkayanto diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhāti. ‘‘Evaṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti iminā aniccesu bhāvesu añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedetīti doso āpajjati, tathā ca sati katassa vināso akatassa ca ajjhāgamo siyā. Niccesu pana bhāvesu añño karoti, añño paṭisaṃvedetīti doso nāpajjati. Evañca sati katassa avināso, akatassa ca anajjhāgamo siyāti takkikassa yuttigavesanākāraṃ dasseti.
“仅以思量”就是指纯粹的思量。因为“仅”这个词,是在显示没有圣教传承、没有传闻等来源。难道获得殊胜证得的常见论者,不是也以殊胜证得为因,在百千生中、在十次成坏劫中、在四十次成坏劫中,随念自己所经历的相续以及与之相关的诸法,执取为“自我、世间”,然后推想过去更早的诸生也是如此存在,思量未来也将如此,并思量一切众生也是如此,从而执著常见吗?如果这样,那么一切常见论者就都跟传闻者、宿命通者、得者思量者一样,是以自己所得的事物相为根据而思量立论,因此都应归入思量者一类。如果这样,由于没有殊胜分类的差别,这常见论就应当只有一种定论。而且,必须承认上述那种思量,否则,具有殊胜证得的常见论者就会归入一分常住论者或无因生论者一类。然而,不应这样看待。因为对于具有殊胜证得者来说,对蕴相续的极长、更长、最长时的随念,才是执取常见的不共因。正如所说:“我随念种种过去生,我以此而知此”,这里唯以随念作为主要因而显示。而他所进行的“我以此而知此”的思量,在此并非主要,因为相对于随念,它是非主要的。以主要的不共因来安立名称,在教法中以及世间中都是通行的。巴利
Takkamattenevāti suddhatakkaneneva. Matta-saddena hi āgamādīnaṃ, anussavādīnañca abhāvaṃ dasseti. ‘‘Nanu ca visesalābhinopi sassatavādino visesādhigamahetu anekesu jātisatasahassesu, dasasu saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu, cattālīsāya ca saṃvaṭṭavivaṭṭesu yathānubhūtaṃ attano santānaṃ, tappaṭibaddhañca dhammajātaṃ ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca anussaritvā tato purimatarāsupi jātīsu tathābhūtassa atthitānuvitakkanamukhena anāgatepi evaṃ bhavissatīti attano bhavissamānānutakkanaṃ, sabbesampi sattānaṃ tathābhāvānutakkanañca katvā sassatābhinivesino jātā, evañca sati sabbopi sassatavādī anussutikajātissaralābhītakkikā viya attano upaladdhavatthunimittena takkanena pavattavādattā takkīpakkheyeva tiṭṭheyya, tathā ca sati visesabhedarahitattā ekovāyaṃ sassatavādo vavatthito bhaveyya, avassañca vuttappakāraṃ takkanamicchitabbaṃ, aññathā visesalābhī sassatavādī ekaccasassatikapakkhaṃ, adhiccasamuppannikapakkhaṃ vā bhajeyyāti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Visesalābhīnañhi khandhasantānassa dīghadīghataraṃ dīghatamakālānussaraṇaṃ sassataggāhassa asādhāraṇakāraṇaṃ. Tathā hi ‘‘anekavihitaṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarāmi. Imināmahaṃ etaṃ jānāmī’’ti anussaraṇameva padhānakāraṇabhāvena dassitaṃ. Yaṃ pana tassa ‘‘imināmahaṃ etaṃ jānāmī’’ti pavattaṃ takkanaṃ, na taṃ idha padhānaṃ anussaraṇaṃ paṭicca tassa apadhānabhāvato, padhānakāraṇena ca asādhāraṇena niddeso sāsane, lokepi ca niruḷho yathā ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaṃ yavaṅkuro’’tiādi.
这段开示是在说明主要的因由,所以,虽然按照传闻等依据、按照思辨者低劣等依据,以及按照下等智慧等获得殊胜者的依据,可以有许多种分类,但世尊为了把其中某一类归摄在一起,仍然把常见论者的四种立场分别开来并加以确定。因为法王在这里并不是在宣说有残余的法。那么,在传闻等依据当中,传闻者等也会成为主要因由吗?不会。因为他们没有以智证知,所以是以思辨为主;而且前面已经说过“以主要因由和不共因由,在教法中和世间中这种表述是通行的”,这个意思已经说明了。或者,为了显示缺少殊胜证得之因的思辨在执取常见时有不同的因由,殊胜证得应当被单独说为执取常见的因由,而它按照下等、中等、锐利智慧分为三种,所以分成三类;又因为一切思辨者在“是思辨者”这一点上共通,所以总合为一类。这样,世尊就把常见论确定为四种。巴利
Evaṃ panāyaṃ desanā padhānakāraṇavibhāvinī, tasmā satipi anussavādivasena, takkikānaṃ hīnādivasena ca mandapaññādīnaṃ visesalābhīnaṃ bahudhā bhede aññatarabhedasaṅgahavasena bhagavatā cattāriṭṭhānāni vibhajitvā vavatthitā sassatavādānaṃ catubbidhatā. Na hi, idha sāvasesaṃ dhammaṃ deseti dhammarājāti. Yadevaṃ anussutikādīsupi anussavādīnaṃ padhānabhāvo āpajjatīti? Na tesaṃ aññāya sacchikiriyāya abhāvena takkapadhānattā, ‘‘padhānakāraṇena ca asādhāraṇena niddeso sāsane, lokepi ca niruḷho’’ti vuttovāyamatthoti. Atha vā visesādhigamanimittarahitassa takkanassa sassataggāhe visuṃ kāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ visesādhigamo visuṃ sassataggāhakāraṇabhāvena vattabbo, so ca mandamajjhimatikkhapaññāvasena tividhoti tidhā vibhajitvā, sabbatakkino ca takkībhāvasāmaññato ekajjhaṃ gahetvā catudhā eva vavatthāpito sassatavādo bhagavatāti.
35 为了说明“以某一种”这个意思,所以说了“以一种”。至于“或”这个字,它和“处”没有搭配关系,因为它的含义不确定,所以又说“以两种或三种”。这样就显示出:在四种事当中,随其适合,以某一事作为另一事确立的辅助条件。为了表明“外”是表达外在意义的、由作者指出的不变词,所以说了“外”等语。
这里有人问:这些事是自身执取的因,还是令他人确立的因?对此,如果是自身执取的因,那为什么只取了随念和思辨,而没有取想颠倒等呢?因为颠倒想、不如理作意、亲近恶友、听闻非法等,也由于能生起见的作用而成为见处。如果是令他人确立的因,那么就像作为随念之因的证得、作为思辨寻求之因的理则一样,圣教也应该被说为一种事;而且无论哪种情况,因为前面所说的其余因都可能存在,所以说“此外更无”就不合理了吗?
并非不合理。为什么?就执取这方面来说,这个持见者由于亲近恶友、听闻非法,生起不如理作意,成为颠倒想的人,因为不能觉知色等诸法刹那刹那坏灭的自性,过度推演法理,错误地执取“一性”之理,依靠前面所说的随念和思辨,在诸蕴上生起“我与世间是常”的执取。因此,由于随念和思辨是近因、是主要因,而且取了它们就已经包含了其余诸因,所以这里只取了随念和思辨。就令他人确立这方面来说,圣教也立足于理则本身,因为外道特别没有圣教,只会执取思辨。因此,随念和思辨就是被取为执取常见的事。巴利
35. ‘‘Aññatarenā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘ekenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhānapayuttassa pana vā-saddassa aniyamatthataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘dvīhi vā tīhi vā’’ti, tena catūsu vatthūsu yathārahamekaccaṃ ekaccassa paññāpane sahakārīkāraṇanti dasseti. ‘‘Bahiddhā’’ti bāhyatthavācako kattuniddiṭṭho nipātoti dassetuṃ ‘‘bahī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Etthāha – kiṃ panetāni vatthūni attano abhinivesassa hetu, udāhu paresaṃ patiṭṭhāpanassāti. Kiñcettha, yadi tāva attano abhinivesassa hetu, atha kasmā anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva gahitāni, na saññāvipallāsādayo. Tathā hi viparītasaññāayonisomanasikāraasappurisūpanissayaasaddhammassavanādīnipi diṭṭhiyā pavattanaṭṭhena diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni. Atha pana paresaṃ patiṭṭhāpanassa hetu, anussaraṇahetubhūto adhigamo viya, takkanapariyeṭṭhibhūtā yutti viya ca āgamopi vatthubhāvena vattabbo, ubhayathāpi ca yathāvuttassa avasesakāraṇassa sambhavato ‘‘natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti vacanaṃ na yujjatevāti? No na yujjati, kasmā? Abhinivesapakkhe tāva ayaṃ diṭṭhigatiko asappurisūpanissayaasaddhammassavanehi ayoniso ummujjitvā vipallāsasañño rūpādidhammānaṃ khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvassa anavabodhato dhammayuttiṃ atidhāvanto ekattanayaṃ micchā gahetvā yathāvuttānussaraṇatakkanehi khandhesu ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti (dī. ni. 31) abhinivesaṃ upanesi, iti āsannakāraṇattā, padhānakāraṇattā ca taggahaṇeneva ca itaresampi gahitattā anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva idha gahitāni. Patiṭṭhāpanapakkhe pana āgamopi yuttiyameva ṭhito visesena nirāgamānaṃ bāhirakānaṃ takkaggāhibhāvato, tasmā anussaraṇatakkanāniyeva sassataggāhassa vatthubhāvena gahitāni.
还有更进一步:胜义法有两种相,自性相和共相。其中,通达自性相是现量智,通达共相是比量智。圣教通过闻所成慧来达成,只能引生比量智;不过,对于所听闻的诸法,以行相加以思择,安住在审察忍中,生起思所成慧,再逐步通过修习而证得现量智。如此,圣教也不超越思辨的范围,因此应当知道,它已被思辨所涵盖。这一点在注释书中,是以“非传闻的思辨”的取摄来阐明的。这样一来,由于不被随念与思辨所摄的其他原因并不存在,所以“此外更无”这句话确实是合理的。然而,依据“他们宣说种种论调”以及“他们施设我与世间为常”这些说法,这里所开示的只是令他人确立的依据,因为通过开示它,执取也能成立。因为在众多分类中,只要开示了其中一项,其余各项也就被开示而成立了,应当看作就是开示了那一项。而在执取与令确立两者中,即使开示了执取,令确立也不能成立,因为执取对于令确立并没有决定性:执取的人当中,有些能令他人确立,有些不能令他人确立。但如果开示了令确立,执取也能成立,因为令确立对于执取有决定性:凡是令他人确立于某处的人,他自己也执取它。巴利
Kiñca bhiyyo – duvidhaṃ paramatthadhammānaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ sabhāvalakkhaṇaṃ, sāmaññalakkhaṇañca. Tattha sabhāvalakkhaṇāvabodho paccakkhañāṇaṃ, sāmaññalakkhaṇāvabodho anumānañāṇaṃ. Āgamo ca sutamayāya paññāya sādhanato anumānañāṇameva āvahati, sutānaṃ pana dhammānaṃ ākāraparivitakkanena nijjhānakkhantiyaṃ ṭhito cintāmayapaññaṃ nibbattetvā anukkamena bhāvanāya paccakkhañāṇaṃ adhigacchatīti evaṃ āgamopi takkanavisayaṃ nātikkamati, tasmā cesa takkaggahaṇena gahitovāti veditabbo. So aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anussutitakkaggahaṇena vibhāvito, evaṃ anussaraṇatakkanehi asaṅgahitassa avasiṭṭhassa kāraṇassa asambhavato yuttamevidaṃ ‘‘natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti vacananti veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Anekavihitāni adhimuttipadāni abhivadantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.29), ‘‘sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.30) ca vacanato pana patiṭṭhāpanavatthūniyeva idha desitāni taṃdesanāya eva abhinivesassāpi sijjhanato. Anekabhedesu hi desitesu yasmiṃ desite tadaññepi desitā siddhā honti, tameva desetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Abhinivesapatiṭṭhāpanesu ca abhinivese desitepi patiṭṭhāpanaṃ na sijjhati abhinivesassa patiṭṭhāpane aniyamato. Abhinivesinopi hi keci patiṭṭhāpenti , keci na patiṭṭhāpenti. Patiṭṭhāpane pana desite abhinivesopi sijjhati patiṭṭhāpanassa abhinivese niyamato. Yo hi yattha pare patiṭṭhāpeti, sopi tamabhinivisatīti.
36 这里,“Tayidaṃ”中的“ta”这个词,指的是“他们安立‘我及世间是常’”这种执取,所以说“这四种见处”。“Tato”的意思是“从那种方式”,也就是从方式上认知。因为邪见是种种祸害的根源,是最应呵责的,所以诸见本身就是“见处”。正如经中所说:“比丘们,我说邪见是至极的罪过”,就是针对这个意思而说诸见即是见处。诸见的因也是见处,因为它是诸见生起的等起因。“如所说”等句是引自《无碍解道》的论证。其中,蕴也是见处,因为它是所缘。经中说“观色为我”等。无明也以亲依止等义为见处,如说“比丘们,未闻凡夫不见诸圣者,不熟知圣法”等。触也以触后执取的方式为见处,正如所说“那也以触为缘”“一次次触而领受”。想也以仅仅取行相为见处,如说“想是戏论之因”“于地认知为地”等。寻也以思择行相为见处,因此说“于诸见中思量推论,说真实与虚妄二法”“是推论者、审察者”等。不如理作意也以诸不善法的共同因义为见处,因此说“他这样不如理作意时,六种见中某一种见生起,或者生起‘我有我’这种见”。恶友也以随顺恶见为见处。经中也说“比丘们,我不见有其他一法像恶友这样,能导致如此大的祸害”。从他闻声也以听闻邪说之法为见处。同样经中说“比丘们,有两种因导致邪见生起。哪两种?从他闻声和不如理作意”。从他人那里听来的、或他人所教导的教说,就是从他闻声。巴利
36.Tayidanti ettha ta-saddena ‘‘sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti etassa parāmasananti āha ‘‘taṃ idaṃ catubbidhampi diṭṭhigata’’nti. Tatoti tasmā pakārato jānanattā. Paramavajjatāya anekavihitānaṃ anatthānaṃ kāraṇabhāvato diṭṭhiyo eva ṭhānā diṭṭhiṭṭhānā. Yathāha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhiparamāhaṃ bhikkhave, vajjaṃ vadāmī’’ti tadevatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘diṭṭhiyova diṭṭhiṭṭhānā’’ti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhīnaṃ kāraṇampi diṭṭhiṭṭhānameva diṭṭhīnaṃ uppādāya samuṭṭhānaṭṭhena. ‘‘Yathāhā’’tiādi paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā (paṭi. ma. 1.124) sādhanaṃ. Tattha khandhāpi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ ārammaṇaṭṭhena. Vuttañhi ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’tiādi, (saṃ. ni. 3.81) avijjāpi upanissayādibhāvena. Yathāha ‘‘assutavā bhikkhave, puthujjano ariyānaṃ adassāvī ariyadhammassa akovido’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.2; paṭi. ma. 1.131) phassopi phusitvā gahaṇūpāyaṭṭhena. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā (dī. ni. 1.118) phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.144) saññāpi ākāramattaggahaṇaṭṭhena. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘saññānidānā hi papañcasaṅkhā’’ti (su. ni. 880; mahā. ni. 109) pathaviṃ pathavito saññatvā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.2) ca ādi. Vitakkopi ākāraparivitakkanaṭṭhena. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘takkañca diṭṭhīsu pakappayitvā, saccaṃ musāti dvayadhammamāhū’’ti, (su. ni. 892; mahāni. 121) ‘‘takkī hoti vīmaṃsī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.34) ca ādi. Ayoniso manasikāropi akusalānaṃ sādhāraṇakāraṇaṭṭhena. Tenāha ‘‘tassa evaṃ ayoniso manasi karoto channaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aññatarā diṭṭhi uppajjati. Atthi me attā’ti vā assa saccato thetato diṭṭhiuppajjatī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 1.19) pāpamittopi diṭṭhānugati āpajjanaṭṭhena. Vuttampi ca ‘‘bāhiraṃ bhikkhave, aṅganti karitvā nāññaṃ ekaṅgampi samanupasssāmi, yaṃ evaṃ mahato anatthāya saṃvattati, yathayidaṃ bhikkhave, pāpamittatā’’tiādi (a. ni. 1.110) paratoghosopi durakkhātadhammassavanaṭṭhena. Tathā ceva vuttaṃ ‘‘dveme bhikkhave, paccayā micchādiṭṭhiyā uppādāya. Katame dve? Parato ca ghoso, ayoniso ca manasikāro’’tiādi (a. ni. 2.126) parehi sutā, desitā vā desanā paratoghoso.
“蕴是因”等语句,是阐明其含义的经文。其中,以能生的意义为因,以支持的意义为缘。“执取之后”就是执取后,也就是依凭、缘取的意思。也有“为生起”这样的读法,意思是“为了生起”。“依此而生起”所以叫等起,指的就是蕴等本身。但在这里,是以“等起”这个词直接表达“等起的状态”,因为省略了表示状态的词,而且重点在状态本身。“执取”是指在自身的相续中执取。“令转起”是指在自身和他人的相续中令其运转。“他”这个词是表示频繁的意思,所以说“一再地”。“已圆满”是指“唯有此见是真实的,其他则是虚妄、空洞、虚假的”,如此固执的终结、顶点、达到究竟的意思。以所缘的方式,是指就八种见处而说诸蕴。以生起的方式,是指无明、触、想、思、不如理作意。以习行方式,是指恶友和他人的声音。虽然依自性义而有同义词,但依约定义则应如此说,为了显示这一点,所以说“如此这般的他世”。因为无论以何种限定,同义词才是有意义的。他世又依业而现前,前往、行进、转起于此,所以称为“后世”。正如“如是,阿难,诸善戒次第导向究竟”等中,语言智者依curādi等类而将“他”一词用于“行”义,这是此处从义注而来的另一种说法。巴利
‘‘Khandhā hetū’’tiādipāḷi tadatthavibhāvinī. Tattha janakaṭṭhena hetu, upatthambhakaṭṭhena paccayo. Upādāyāti upādiyitvā, paṭiccāti attho. ‘‘Uppādāyā’’tipi pāṭho, uppajjanāyāti attho. Samuṭṭhāti etenāti samuṭṭhānaṃ, khandhādayo eva. Idha pana samuṭṭhānabhāvoyeva samuṭṭhāna-saddena vutto bhāvalopattā, bhāvappadhānattā ca. Ādinnā sakasantāne. Pavattitā saparasantānesu. Para-saddo abhiṇhatthoti vuttaṃ ‘‘punappuna’’nti. Pariniṭṭhāpitāti ‘‘idameva dassanaṃ saccaṃ, aññaṃ pana moghaṃ tucchaṃ musā’’ti abhinivesassa pariyosānaṃ matthakaṃ pāpitāti attho. Ārammaṇavasenāti aṭṭhasu diṭṭhiṭṭhānesu khandhe sandhāyāha. Pavattanavasenāti avijjāphassasaññāvitakkāyonisomanasikāre. Āsevanavasenāti pāpamittaparatoghose. Yadipi sarūpatthavasena vevacanaṃ, saṅketatthavasena pana evaṃ vattabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘evaṃvidhaparalokā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yena kenaci hi visesaneneva vevacanaṃ sātthakaṃ siyā. Paraloko ca kammavasena abhimukho sampareti gacchati pavattati etthāti abhisamparāyoti vuccati. ‘‘Iti kho ānanda, kusalāni sīlāni anupubbena aggāya parentī’’tiādīsu (a. ni. 10.2) viya hi curādigaṇavasena para-saddaṃ gatiyamicchanti saddavidū, ayamettha aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo.
“Evaṃgatikā”(有如此去向)的意思是:有如此的趣向、如此的结局;通过这样的追问,它们最终归于坏灭和消失。这里“gati”这个词,就像“具足这些的大人只有两种趣向”等说法中那样,是“结局”的意思。这里说的是:这些被称为见的见处,把胜义中并不存在的我和常恒性叠加在它上面而执取、执著,它们不过是愚者的空谈,只要智者还没有追问,它们就继续存在、显现出来;可是一旦被智者追问,它们就像日出时的露珠、像萤火虫一样,因为没有稳固的立足处、经不起推敲,就坏灭、消失。巴利
Evaṃgatikāti evaṃgamanā evaṃniṭṭhā, evamanuyuñjanena bhijjananassanapariyosānāti attho. Gati-saddo cettha ‘‘yehi samannāgatassa mahāpurisassa dveva gatiyo bhavantī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.258; 2.33, 35; 3.199, 200; ma. ni. 2.384, 397) viya niṭṭhānattho. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ime diṭṭhisaṅkhātā diṭṭhiṭṭhānā evaṃ paramatthato asantaṃ attānaṃ, sassatabhāvañca tasmiṃ ajjhāropetvā gahitā, parāmaṭṭhā ca samānā bālalapanāyeva hutvā yāva paṇḍitā na samanuyuñjanti, tāva gacchanti, pātubhavanti ca, paṇḍitehi samanuyuñjiyamānā pana anavaṭṭhitavatthukā avimaddakkhamā sūriyuggamane ussāvabindū viya, khajjopanakā viya ca bhijjanti, vinassanti cāti.
在这里,针对审察的简要说明是:如果他人所设想出来的“我”或“世间”是常恒的,那么由于它没有变异性、不会舍弃先前的状态,所以不可能对它做出任何特别的改善;为了让人从不善中退回来、为了让人进入善法,对常恒论者来说,教导就完全没有用处了。再说,既然没有变异,他又怎么能施设那样的教导呢?这样一来,被设想出来的“我”就像无碍的虚空一样,布施之类的行为、伤害之类的行为都不可能发生;同样,常恒论者也不可能合理地感受乐与苦,因为并没有业力的系缚。又因为没有生等,解脱也就不可能存在。但如果他说:“只是有法在他那里生起又灭去,依着这些才有所谓行为等的言说。”即使这样,由于不舍弃先前的状态,对安住的“我”来说,也不可能成立所谓“只是法”。或者,那些法就是他的状态。那么,那些生起的状态,与他要么是相异的,要么是不异的。如果是相异的,那么即使那些状态生起,他也没有任何差别,可人们却希望“他依着这些状态来造作、感受、死去、投生”。这样一来,施设法也就没有意义了,所以处于那种状态的他,就有如上所说的过失。如果是不异的,那么与那些有生灭的状态不异的“我”,既然和那些状态一样具有生灭,哪里还有常恒的可能呢?或者,那些状态也像“我”一样常恒相续,那么系缚与解脱就都不可能成立,所以常恒论确实说不通。在这里,也没有任何论者能就诸法的常恒性说出真正清净合理的理由,而没有道理的话不会让智者的心欢喜。因此我们说:“只要智者还没有审察,它们就继续存在,并显现出来。”巴利
Tatthāyaṃ anuyuñjane saṅkhepakathā – yadi hi parehi kappito attā loko vā sassato siyā, tassa nibbikāratāya purimarūpāvijahanato kassaci visesādhānassa kātumasakkuṇeyyatāya ahitato nivattanatthaṃ, hite ca paṭipajjanatthaṃ upadeso eva sassatavādino nippayojano siyā, kathaṃ vā tena so upadeso pavattīyati vikārābhāvato. Evañca sati parikappitassa attano ajaṭākāsassa viya dānādikiriyā, hiṃsādikiriyā ca na sambhavati, tathā sukhassa, dukkhassa ca anubhavananibandho eva sassatavādino na yujjati kammabaddhābhāvato. Jātiādīnañca asambhavato vimokkho na bhaveyya, atha pana dhammamattaṃ tassa uppajjati ceva vinassati ca, yassa vasenāyaṃ kiriyādivohāroti vadeyya, evampi purimarūpāvijahanena avaṭṭhitassa attano dhammamattanti na sakkā sambhāvetuṃ, te vā panassa dhammā avatthābhūtā, tasmā tassa uppannā aññe vā siyuṃ anaññe vā, yadi aññe, na tāhi avatthāhi tassa uppannāhipi koci viseso atthi, yāhi karoti paṭisaṃvedeti cavati uppajjati cāti icchitaṃ, evañca dhammakappanāpi niratthakā siyā, tasmā tadavattho eva yathāvuttadoso, athānaññe, uppādavināsavantīhi avatthāhi anaññassa attano tāsaṃ viya uppādavināsasabbhāvato kuto bhaveyya niccatāvakāso, tāsampi vā attano viya niccatāpavatti, tasmā bandhavimokkhānaṃ asambhavo evāti na yujjatiyeva sassatavādo, na cettha koci vādī dhammānaṃ sassatabhāve parisuddaṃ yuttiṃ vattuṃ samattho bhaveyya, yuttirahitañca vacanaṃ na paṇḍitānaṃ cittaṃ ārādheti, tenāvocumha ‘‘yāva paṇḍitā na samanuyuñjanti, tāva gacchanti, pātubhavanti cā’’ti.
“有因、有去处”这句话里,“俱”这个词是“存在”的意思,就像“有毛的”“有翅膀的”这类说法里那样,不是“集合”的意思。因为用“诸比丘,如来知道这个”这句话,已经把所说的邪见总体收摄起来了,又用“而如来也知道那个”这句话,说明如来是知道因和去处的。这里要表达的是:诸比丘,如来知道这个有因、有去处的邪见,而且不只是知道这个,还知道那个因和去处所构成的一切。对于“由此……知道”这句话,依照前面说的方式,用“由此而……”等语来解释它的含义。“此处分说一切知智”:为了契合论书的主题,所以说“以及一切知智”;或者,当说到这个一切知智时,由于它以它为依止,漏尽智也被包含在内了;又由于与它不相离,一切十力等智也都被包含在内了,所以就说那一切知智本身。巴利
Sakāraṇaṃ sagatikanti ettha saha-saddo vijjamānattho ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu viya, na pana samavāyattho ca-saddena ‘‘tayidaṃ bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānātī’’ti vuttassa diṭṭhigatassa samuccinitattā, ‘‘tañca tathāgato pajānātī’’ti iminā ca kāraṇagatīnameva pajānanabhāvena vuttattā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – tayidaṃ bhikkhave, kāraṇavantaṃ gativantaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ tathāgato pajānāti, na kevalañca tadeva, atha kho tassa kāraṇagatisaṅkhātaṃ tañca sabbanti. ‘‘Tato…pe… pajānātī’’ti vuttavākyassa atthaṃ vuttanayena saṃvaṇṇeti ‘‘tato cā’’tiādinā. Sabbaññutaññāṇassevidha vibhajananti pakaraṇānurūpamatthaṃ āha ‘‘sabbaññutaññāṇañcā’’ti, tasmiṃ vā vutte tadadhiṭṭhānato āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, tadavinābhāvato vā sabbampi dasabalādiñāṇaṃ gahitamevātipi tadeva vuttaṃ.
“如是种类”指的是像“及戒……”这样所说的那种类型。在“虽了知”这里,用pi字或者api字,是为了表明“而彼”中ca字带有赞叹的意味。因此,如来对于比那种见趣更殊胜、以戒等功德为本质的殊胜法尚且不执取,更何况是轮回的诱饵呢?这样就是赞叹。“我”显示的是以见和慢去执取的方式。“我了知”这里的iti字表示方式或举例。“我所”显示的是以渴爱去执取的方式。“以渴爱、见、慢的执取之力”就是以被称为渴爱、见、慢的执取之力。超越诸法的自性,把“我”“我所”执取为外在的、不真实的,这就是执取,也就是渴爱等。因为在诸蕴当中,根本不存在可以执取为“我”或“我所”的东西。对于不执取者,不执取的如来,涅槃已被了知,这就是前后的关联。“对于不执取者”是说明涅槃被了知的原因的修饰语。“已被了知”这个词是配合“对于不执取者”而用的,这里是属格。意思是:由于不执取的行道之因,作为主体的如来了知、证得了涅槃,也就是无为界。或者说,“对于不执取者”是表示原因的从格。巴利
Evaṃvidhanti ‘‘sīlañcā’’tiādinā evaṃvuttappakāraṃ. Pajānantopīti ettha pi-saddena, api-saddena vā ‘‘tañcā’’ti vutta ca-saddassa sambhāvanatthabhāvaṃ dasseti, tena tato diṭṭigatato uttaritaraṃ sārabhūtaṃ sīlādiguṇavisesampi tathāgato nābhinivisati, ko pana vādo vaṭṭāmiseti sambhāveti. ‘‘Aha’’nti diṭṭimānavasena parāmasanākāradassanaṃ. Pajānāmīti ettha iti-saddena pakāratthena, nidassanatthena vā. ‘‘Mama’’nti taṇhāvasena parāmasanākāraṃ dasseti. Taṇhādiṭṭhimānaparāmāsavasenāti taṇhādiṭṭhimānasaṅkhātaparāmāsavasena. Dhammasabhāvamatikkamitvā ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti parato abhūtato āmasanaṃ parāmāso, taṇhādayo eva. Na hi taṃ atthi, yaṃ khandhesu ‘‘aha’’nti vā ‘‘mama’’nti vā gahetabbaṃ siyā, aparāmasato aparāmasantassa assa tathāgatassa nibbuti viditāti sambandho. ‘‘Aparāmasato’’ti cedaṃ nibbutipavedanāya (nibbutivedanassa dī. ni. ṭī. 1.36) hetugabbhavisesanaṃ . ‘‘Viditā’’ti padamapekkhitvā kattari sāmivacanaṃ. Aparāmasato parāmāsarahitapaṭipattihetu assa tathāgatassa kattubhūtassa nibbuti asaṅkhatadhātu viditā, adhigatāti vā attho. ‘‘Aparāmasato’’ti hedaṃ hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ.
“以不执取为缘”这句话,是为了说明感受的生起原因只在于个人自身。虽然已经说了“以”来表示作者,但为了显示只属于个人这一点,又再次说了作者词,所以说“自己就是由自己”。“自己”“由自己”是中性词,属于不变词。从“不执取”这个说法来看,这里所宣说的就是执取本身的寂灭;而通过这一宣说,也能成立其他烦恼的寂灭。因此用“他们的执取烦恼”来说明这一点,意思是被称为执取的诸烦恼。进一步说,虽然从“不执取”这个说法就能知道这里宣说的是执取本身的寂灭,但因为在断除等方面具有同一性,通过这一宣说也就等于宣说了其余烦恼的寂灭,所以为了明确指出那些烦恼的寂灭,才说“他们的执取烦恼”,意思是被称为渴爱、邪见、慢的执取,以及其他烦恼。这是“牛群法则”。所谓“寂灭”,就是趋向寂灭的无为界,而世尊在菩提树下就已经证得了它,因此它是只有个人自身才能了知的。巴利
‘‘Aparāmāsapaccayā’’ti paccattaññeva pavedanāya kāraṇadassanaṃ. Assāti kattāraṃ vatvāpi paccattaññevāti visesadassanatthaṃ puna kattuvacananti āha ‘‘sayameva attanāyevā’’ti. Sayaṃ, attanāti vā bhāvanapuṃsakaṃ. Nipātapadañhetaṃ. ‘‘Aparāmasato’’ti vacanato parāmāsānameva nibbuti idha desitā, taṃdesanāya eva tadaññesampi nibbutiyā sijjhanatoti dasseti ‘‘tesaṃ parāmāsakilesāna’’nti iminā, parāmāsasaṅkhātānaṃ kilesānanti attho. Apica kāmaṃ ‘‘aparāmasato’’ti vacanato parāmāsānameva nibbuti idha desitāti viññāyati, taṃdesanāya pana tadavasesānampi kilesānaṃ nibbuti desitā nāma bhavati pahānekaṭṭhatādibhāvato, tasmā tesampi nibbuti niddhāretvā dassetabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ parāmāsakilesāna’’nti, taṇhādiṭṭhimānasaṅkhātānaṃ parāmāsānaṃ, tadaññesañca kilesānanti attho. Gobalībaddanayo hesa. Nibbutīti ca nibbāyanabhūtā asaṅkhatadhātu, tañca bhagavā bodhimūleyeva patto, tasmā sā paccattaññeva viditāti.
“如实行道者”,就是指依着这样的行道而修行的人。为了说明这种行道,接着用“即于那些……乃至……最初所说”来显示前后文的关联。那为什么只把受拿来作为修行所缘来开示呢?他说“于其中”等等,以此显示说法的善巧。世尊达到了说法的善巧,是善于说法的人;即使在以蕴、处等种种方式展开的四谛说法中,执见者也会在受上以错误的修行方式一头扎进见的密林——为了说明这一点,他就把作为这种趣入之根本的受本身,以“遍知”的层面单独提出来。“于此”,就是在这个论题中;也可以理解为“于此处”。修行所缘,就是四谛的修行所缘。在这里,通过取受,所取的五取蕴就是苦谛;通过取受的集,所取的无明集就是集谛;以灭尽、出离的方式就是灭谛;通过“如实了知”这一句就是道谛——应当这样了知四谛。“如实了知”这一句是分别解说的语句,为了分别显示它的含义,才说了“于其中”等等。因为特别来说,应当依照“无明集故受集”等相,在集等当中按各自的情况分别解说其含义。而不特别来说,受的集等,是通过观智以所缘通达的方式,通过道智以不愚痴通达的方式来了知、通达的。以缘集之义来说,就是依照“此有故彼有,此生故彼生”所说的相,由无明等诸缘的生起,以及由道未能拔除。因为只要还没有被道拔除,就还叫做缘。生起的相就是生的相,也就是生的意思。在五相当中,这里不应只取四缘的生起相,也应当取缘的相,因为依缘集而它们各自适当地成为助伴。同样地,注释中也说“以及由道未能拔除”。以缘灭之义来说,就是依照“此灭故彼灭,此灭故彼灭”所说的相,由无明等诸缘的灭,以及由道拔除。变坏的相就是灭的相,也就是坏灭的意思。坏灭就是灭尽。它们从被称为缘的状态这个因来说。依于受,就是获得先前生起的、作为所缘等缘的受。乐与悦,就是乐和悦。这个,就是先前受对于后来生起的乐与悦各自适当地成为缘的状态。所谓味,就是应当品尝的意思。巴利
Yathāpaṭipannenāti yena paṭipannena. Tappaṭipattiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tāsaṃyeva…pe… ādimāhā’’ti anusandhidassanaṃ. Kasmā pana vedanānaññeva kammaṭṭhānamācikkhatīti āha ‘‘yāsū’’tiādi, iminā desanāvilāsaṃ dasseti. Desanāvilāsappatto hi bhagavā desanākusalo khandhāyatanādivasena anekavidhāsu catusaccadesanāsu sambhavantīsupi diṭṭhigatikā vedanāsu micchāpaṭipattiyā diṭṭhigahanaṃ pakkhandāti dassanatthaṃ tathāpakkhandanamūlabhūtā vedanāyeva pariññābhūmibhāvena uddharatīti. Idhāti imasmiṃ vāde. Evaṃ etthātipi. Kammaṭṭhānanti catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Ettha hi vedanāgahaṇena gahitā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ. Vedanānaṃ samudayaggahaṇena gahito avijjāsamudayo samudayasaccaṃ, atthaṅgamanissaraṇapariyāyehi nirodhasaccaṃ, ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ viditvā’’ti etena maggasaccanti evaṃ cattāri saccāni veditabbāni. ‘‘Yathābhūtaṃ viditvā’’ti idaṃ vibhajjabyākaraṇatthapadanti tadatthaṃ vibhajja dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Visesato hi ‘‘avijjāsamudayā vedanāsamudayo’’tiādilakkhaṇānaṃ vasena samudayādīsu attho yathārahaṃ vibhajja dassetabbo. Avisesato pana vedanāya samudayādīni vipassanāpaññāya ārammaṇapaṭivedhavasena, maggapaññāya asammohapaṭivedhavasena jānitvā paṭivijjhitvāti attho. Paccayasamudayaṭṭhenāti ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.404; saṃ. ni. 2.21; udā. 1) vuttalakkhaṇena avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ uppādena ceva maggena asamugghāṭena ca. Yāva hi maggena na samugghāṭīyati, tāva paccayoti vuccati. Nibbattilakkhaṇanti uppādalakkhaṇaṃ, jātinti attho. Pañcannaṃ lakkhaṇānanti ettha ca catunnampi paccayānaṃ uppādalakkhaṇameva aggahetvā paccayalakkhaṇampi gahetabbaṃ samudayaṃ paṭicca tesaṃ yathārahaṃ upakārakattā. Tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ ‘‘maggena asamugghāṭena cā’’ti. Paccayanirodhaṭṭhenāti ‘‘imasmiṃ niruddhe idaṃ niruddhaṃ hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.406; udā. 3; saṃ. ni. 2.41) vuttalakkhaṇena avijjādīnaṃ paccayānaṃ nirodhena ceva maggena samugghāṭena ca. Vipariṇāmalakkhaṇanti nirodhalakkhaṇaṃ, bhaṅganti attho. Vayanti nirodhaṃ. Yanti yasmā paccayabhāvasaṅkhātahetuto. Vedanaṃ paṭiccāti purimuppannaṃ ārammaṇādipaccayabhūtaṃ vedanaṃ labhitvā. Sukhaṃ somanassanti sukhañceva somanassañca. Ayanti purimavedanāya yathārahaṃ pacchimuppannānaṃ sukhasomanassānaṃ paccayabhāvo. Assādo nāma assāditabboti katvā.
另一种解释:所谓“凡是乐和悦”,这里用中性语态来指出的,正是乐和悦本身;但为了照应“味”这个词,就改用阳性语态来表述。在这个变格用法中,乐和悦的生起本身,就是通过具有这些生起的法来指出的,因为“能力”和“具能力者”并没有差别。因为离开了乐和悦,它们的生起根本得不到。这样一来,依于先前的受,乐和悦的生起也就是先前受的“味”,取“应当品尝”的意思。这里简要的含义是:当依于先前生起的受而生起悦时,那种被称为“先前受作为缘”的、应当品尝的状态,或者称为“悦的生起”的那种品尝状态,就是先前受的味。那么,怎么依于受而生起乐呢?受难道不是触的所缘吗?因为这里只是就心所乐的生起来说的,所以没有这个过失。在依缘而生起时,悦的执取本身就是殊胜的,就像说“尸沙树就是树”一样;而在依其他缘生起时,身乐也是味,或者应当按所得的说法来理解。巴利
Aparo nayo – yanti sukhaṃ, somanassañca. Ayanti ca napuṃsakaliṅgena niddiṭṭhaṃ sukhasomanassameva assādapadamapekkhitvā pulliṅgena niddisīyati, imasmiṃ pana vikappe sukhasomanassānaṃ uppādoyeva tehi uppādavantehi niddiṭṭho, sattiyā, sattimato ca abhinnattā. Na hi sukhasomanassamantarena tesaṃ uppādo labbhati. Iti purimavedanaṃ paṭicca sukhasomanassuppādopi purimavedanāya assādo nāma assādīyateti katvā . Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – purimamuppannaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha somanassuppattiyaṃ yo purimavedanāya paccayabhāvasaṅkhāto assādetabbākāro, somanassassa vā uppādasaṅkhāto tadassādanākāro, ayaṃ purimavedanāya assādoti. Kathaṃ pana vedanaṃ ārabbha sukhaṃ uppajjati, nanu phoṭṭhabbārammaṇanti? Cetasikasukhasseva ārabbha pavattiyamadhippetattā nāyaṃ doso. Ārabbha pavattiyañhi visesanameva somanassaggahaṇaṃ somanassaṃ sukhanti yathā ‘‘rukkho sīsapā’’ti aññapaccayavasena uppattiyaṃ pana kāyikasukhampi assādoyeva, yathālābhakathā vā esāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
以“受是无常的”等语,通过有功能者的功能显示了过患。这里的含义是:凡是受,以“有了之后又消失”这一意义来说是无常;以被生起与坏灭逼迫这一意义来说是苦;以必须经由老与死两种方式变坏这一意义来说是变易法。对于如此存在的受来说,这种无常、苦、变易的状态,就是一切受的过患。“过患”就是极度可悲,或者说“由此而转起”,所以叫过患。再者,以极度可怜、悲惨地持续存在这一意义来说,可怜的人就是有灾患,这个受也具有这样的性质,所以这样称呼。因为功能与有功能者并非分离,不离于它。巴利
‘‘Yā vedanā aniccā’’tiādinā sattimatā satti nidassitā. Tatrāyamattho – yā vedanā hutvā abhāvaṭṭhena aniccā, udayabbayapaṭipīḷanaṭṭhena dukkhā, jarāya, maraṇena cāti dvidhā vipariṇāmetabbaṭṭhena vipariṇāmadhammā. Tassā evaṃbhūtāya ayaṃ aniccadukkhavipariṇāmabhāvo vedanāya sabbāyapiādīnavoti. Ādīnaṃ paramakāruññaṃ vāti pavattati etasmāti hi ādīnavo. Apicaādīnaṃ ativiya kapaṇaṃ pavattanaṭṭhena kapaṇamanusso ādīnavo, ayampi evaṃsabhāvoti tathā vuccati. Sattimatā hi satti abhinnā tadavinābhāvato.
在这里,“无常”这一句,是依行苦来说舍受的过患,或者说一切受的过患;“苦”这一句,是依苦苦来说苦受的过患;“变易法”这一句,是依变易苦来说乐受的过患。或者,这三句也可以不加区分地按三种受来配合。“调伏欲贪”,就是调伏、灭除被称为欲的贪。依据“义需而变格”的说法,应当配合为“断除欲贪”。这两个词其实只是同一个意思的不同说法。“如实了知”,因为前面已经提到了道,所以也可以按道和涅槃的顺序来配合。“于受”是从格。“出离”就是出离。只要还没有断除系缚于受的欲贪,这个人就还是黏着在受上。一旦断除了那欲贪,这个人就从受中出离、脱离了,所以说断除欲贪就是受的出离。由这句话,与受俱生、作为受的所依和所缘的色法与非色法也已经被包含在内了,因此用五取蕴来说出离之义,确实已经成立。因为教说是以受为首来说的,其中的道理前面已经讲过。这个意思也可以依相摄理来阐明。正如大迦旃延尊者所说:巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘aniccā’’ti iminā saṅkhāradukkhatāvasena upekkhāvedanāya, sabbāsu vā vedanāsuādīnavamāha, ‘‘dukkhā’’ti iminā dukkhadukkhatāvasenadukkhavedanāya, ‘‘vipariṇāmadhammā’’ti iminā vipariṇāmadukkhatāvasena sukhavedanāya. Avisesena vā tīṇipi padāni tissannampi vedanānaṃ vasena yojetabbāni. Chandarāgavinayoti chandasaṅkhātarāgavinayanaṃ vināso. ‘‘Atthavasā liṅgavibhattivipariṇāmo’’ti vacanato yaṃ chandarāgappahānanti yojetabbaṃ. Pariyāyavacanamevidaṃ padadvayaṃ. Yathābhūtaṃ viditvāti maggassa vuttattā magganibbānavasena vā yathākkamaṃ yojanāpi vaṭṭati. Vedanāyāti nissakkavacanaṃ. Nissaraṇanti nekkhammaṃ. Yāva hi vedanāpaṭibaddhaṃ chandarāgaṃ nappajahati, tāvāyaṃ puriso vedanāya allīnoyeva hoti. Yadā pana taṃ chandarāgaṃ pajahati, tadāyaṃ puriso vedanāya nissaṭo visaṃyutto hoti, tasmā chandarāgappahānaṃ vedanāya nissaraṇaṃ vuttaṃ. Tabbacanena pana vedanāsahajātanissayārammaṇabhūtā rūpārūpadhammā gahitā eva hontītipi pañcahi upādānakkhandhehi nissaraṇavacanaṃ siddhameva. Vedanāsīsena hi desanā āgatā, tattha pana kāraṇaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Lakkhaṇahāravasenāpi ayamattho vibhāvetabbo. Vuttañhi āyasmatā mahākaccānattherena –
正如所说的,对于同一个法,凡是具有相同特征的任何法,都已经全部说到了。
已经说完了一切,这个理趣就叫作“相”。巴利
‘‘Vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā keci; Vuttā bhavanti sabbo, so hāro lakkhaṇo nāmā’’ti. (netti. 485);
因为其余的取都以欲取为根本,所以当欲取被断除时,其余的取也就不可能存在了,因此说“以离欲贪故而无取”,这是用简略的方式显示“无取解脱”这个词的含义。这里说的是:以离欲贪故而无取,又因为无取的缘故而成为无取解脱。为了详细解释和证明这个含义,才说了“于彼”等话。其中,“于彼取”指的是作为其余取之根本的欲取。“彼”就是指欲取。“无取而”是说不再以欲贪去执取,这就显示了“无取解脱”这个词,要么是省略了 ya 音的复合词形式,要么是分列展开的形式。巴利
Kāmupādānamūlakattā sesupādānānaṃ pahīne ca kāmupādāne upādānasesābhāvato ‘‘vigatachandarāgatāya anupādāno’’ti vuttaṃ, etena ‘‘anupādāvimutto’’ti etassatthaṃ saṅkhepena dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – vigatachandarāgatāya anupādāno, anupādānattā ca anupādāvimuttoti. Tamatthaṃ vitthāretuṃ, samatthetuṃ vā ‘‘yasmi’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yasmiṃ upādāneti sesupādānamūlabhūte kāmupādāne. Tassāti kāmupādānassa. Anupādiyitvāti chandarāgavasena anādiyitvā, etena ‘‘anupādāvimutto’’ti padassa ya-kāralopena samāsabhāvaṃ, byāsabhāvaṃ vā dasseti.
37 “此即是”这一段,是以对所问之法已经作答的方式作出的总结语;同时也是为了表明:所说的“了知”,正是由“此”这个词所指出的。因此说了“那些”等话。应当这样连接理解:那些我所问的一切知智之法……那些我依一切知智之法……而说的,以及那……了知——如此所指出的这些一切知智之法,应当知道是甚深的……唯智者所能了知的。“如是”等话,是显示整体含义。其中,虽然“比丘们,如来是无取而解脱的”这一句显示了最上道果的生起,“诸受,及其集起”等话则显示了四谛业处,然而法王为了让这一点更加明显,便以那已善通达的法界为近因,连同前行修习的生起之处,这样加以显示:因为对那法界已善通达,所以能够对此具有理由、具有趣向的邪见加以分类剖析。因此说“即令彼归趣”,意思是令其归结、令其完成。所谓“中间”,意思是在所问与所答之间,依显示他了知的方式而分别诸见。巴利
37.‘‘Imekho’’tiādi yathāpuṭṭhassa dhammassa vissajjitabhāvena nigamanavacanaṃ, ‘‘pajānātī’’ti vuttapajānanameva ca ima-saddena niddiṭṭhanti dassetuṃ ‘‘ye te’’tiādimāha. Ye te sabbaññutaññāṇadhamme…pe… apucchiṃ, yehi sabbaññutaññāṇadhammehi…pe… vadeyyuṃ, tañca…pe… pajānātīti evaṃ niddiṭṭhā ime sabbaññutaññāṇadhammā gambhīrā…pe… paṇḍitavedanīyā cāti veditabbāti yojanā. ‘‘Eva’’ntiādi piṇḍatthadassanaṃ. Tattha kiñcāpi ‘‘anupādāvimutto bhikkhave, tathāgato’’ti iminā aggamaggaphaluppattiṃ dasseti, ‘‘vedanānaṃ, samudayañcā’’tiādinā ca catusaccakammaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathāpi yassā dhammadhātuyā suppaṭividdhattā imaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ sakāraṇaṃ sagatikaṃ pabhedato vibhajituṃ samattho hoti, tassā padaṭṭhānena ceva saddhiṃ pubbabhāgapaṭipadāya uppattibhūmiyā ca tadeva pākaṭataraṃ kattukāmo dhammarājā evaṃ dassetīti vuttaṃ ‘‘tadeva niyyātita’’nti, nigamitaṃ niṭṭhāpitanti attho . Antarāti pucchitavissajjitadhammadassanavacanānamantarā diṭṭhiyo vibhattā tassa pajānanākāradassanavasenāti attho.
一分常住论的注释巴利
Ekaccasassatavādavaṇṇanā
38 “一分常住论者”这个带缘声词,为了用复合词把它说明清楚,所以又说成“一分常住论”。在众生和诸行当中,认为其中一部分是常住的,这就是“一分常”;持这种见解的,就是“论”;具有这种论的人,就是“一分常住论者”——这是按带缘声的构词方式来说的。若按复合词的构词方式,则是“持一分常住之论的人”,即“一分常住论者”。同样的道理,也适用于“一分无常论”这个词。有人问:既然已经说了“一分常住论者”,那岂不是自然就成立其余那些是另一类、即无常的吗?回答:从意义上说,确实如此;但从言辞上说,并没有明确表达出来。所以,为了让言辞更加清楚明白,才那样说。因为在这里,法主说法不会留下未尽之义。“自在天是常,其他众生是无常”——这样生起的论说,就是“众生一分常住论者”,比如主张自在天的论师。同样,“梵天是常,其他是无常”——这样生起的论说也是如此。“极微是常,二微聚等是无常”——这样生起的论说,就是“诸行一分常住论者”,比如迦那陀派。同样,“眼等是无常,识是常”——这样生起的论说也是如此。这里,在“一分常住论者”这个词上,或者说在这个教说中,所谓“已摄取”,是指已经说了;或者因为应当宣说,所以被教说的智慧所摄取,并且确实就是这样宣说的。因此在这里,前三种论说是就众生而说的,第四种则是就诸行而说的。至于“诸行一分常住论者”这个说法,是就那些被他们执为常的法,依照其真实自性来显示的,并不是依照一分常住论者自己的宗见来说的。因为他们的主张是:他们所认为常的,就是无为法。所以圣典中说:“或谓心……乃至……将常住不变。”如果一个人承认某种自性是由诸缘所造作的,那么只要不是疯子,就不可能同时承认这种自性为常、为恒。由此也就说明,“具有生灭恒常性的自性,或是常,或是无常,或是不可说”等所说的“七支论”是不合理的。巴利
38. ‘‘Ekaccasassatikā’’ti taddhitapadaṃ samāsapadena vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ekaccasassatavādā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sattesu, saṅkhāresu ca ekaccaṃ sassatametassāti ekaccasassato, vādo, so etesanti ekaccasassatikā taddhitavasena, samāsavasena pana ekaccasassato vādo etesanti ekaccasassatavādā. Esa nayo ekaccaasassatikapadepi. Nanu ca ‘‘ekaccasassatikā’’ti vutte tadaññesaṃ ekaccaasassatikabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ siddhamevāti? Saccaṃ atthato, saddato pana asiddhameva tasmā saddato pākaṭataraṃ katvā dassetuṃ tathā vuttaṃ. Na hi idha sāvasesaṃ katvā dhammaṃ deseti dhammassāmī. ‘‘Issaro nicco, aññe sattā aniccā’’ti evaṃpavattavādā sattekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi issaravādā. Tathā ‘‘nicco brahmā, aññe aniccā’’ti evaṃpavattavādāpi. ‘‘Paramāṇavo niccā, dviaṇukādayo aniccā’’ti (visisikadassane sattamaparicchede paṭhamakaṇḍe passitabbaṃ) evaṃpavattavādā saṅkhārekaccasassatikā seyyathāpi kāṇādā. Tathā ‘‘cakkhādayo aniccā, viññāṇaṃ nicca’’nti (nyāyadassane, visesikadassane ca passitabbaṃ) evaṃpavattavādāpi . Idhāti ‘‘ekaccasassatikā’’ti imasmiṃ pade, imissā vā desanāya. Gahitāti vuttā, desitabbabhāvena vā desanāñāṇena samādinnā tathā ceva desitattā. Tathā hi idha purimakā tayo vādā sattavasena, catuttho saṅkhāravasena desito. ‘‘Saṅkhārekaccasassatikā’’ti idaṃ pana tehi sassatabhāvena gayhamānānaṃ dhammānaṃ yāthāvasabhāvadassanavasena vuttaṃ, na pana ekaccasassatikamatadassanavasena. Tassa hi sassatābhimataṃ asaṅkhatamevāti laddhi. Tenevāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cittanti vā…pe… ṭhassatī’’ti. Na hi yassa sabhāvassa paccayehi abhisaṅkhatabhāvaṃ paṭijānāti, tasseva niccadhuvādibhāvo anummattakena sakkā paṭijānituṃ, etena ca ‘‘uppādavayadhuvatāyuttā sabhāvā siyā niccā, siyā aniccā, siyā na vattabbā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.38) pavattasattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā vibhāvitā hoti.
这里要说明它为什么不合理:如果说“一个法以某种自性被称为‘有’,又正是以那同一种自性被称为‘无’”,那才可能落入不定论。如果是以另一种自性来说,就不会成为不定论。而且在这里,说它与别的地方等其他事物有关联,是不合理的,因为这是全世界都共许的,也没有争论。可是有些人说:“就像用金瓶做成王冠时,瓶性消失了,冠性生起了,金性却仍然存在;同样,在一切自性中,某些法消失,某些法生起,只有自性仍然存在。”对他们应当说:“那个在瓶中和在王冠中一直存在的‘金’是什么?如果是色等,那它就像声音一样是无常的。如果是色等的聚集,那只是假名,它的存在、不存在或常住性都无从成立。”因此,不定论不能成立。而且,诸法与具有法性者以变异方式生起的过失,在考察常见时已经说过了。所以,应当按那里所说的方式来了知。再者,并不存在一种不可说为常或无常的“我”和“世间”,因为从胜义上说,对存在性的了知,就像常等中的某一种色,或者像灯等那样。因为对于具有生灭自性的色等,不可能了知它们具有不可说为常或无常的自性;而命者也可能具有常等中的某一种色。这样一来,就像七支论一样,其余支论也根本不可能成立。因此,应当知道七支论的主张是不合理的。巴利
Tatrāyaṃ ayuttatāvibhāvanā – yadi hi ‘‘yena sabhāvena yo dhammo atthīti vuccati, teneva sabhāvena so dhammo natthī’’ti vucceyya, siyā anekantavādo. Atha aññena, na siyā anekantavādo. Na cettha desantarādisambandhabhāvo yutto vattuṃ tassa sabbalokasiddhattā, vivādābhāvato ca. Ye pana vadanti ‘‘yathā suvaṇṇaghaṭena makuṭe kate ghaṭabhāvo nassati, makuṭabhāvo uppajjati, suvaṇṇabhāvo tiṭṭhatiyeva, evaṃ sabbasabhāvānaṃ koci dhammo nassati, koci dhammo uppajjati, sabhāvo eva tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Te vattabbā ‘‘kiṃ taṃ suvaṇṇaṃ, yaṃ ghaṭe, makuṭe ca avaṭṭhitaṃ, yadi rūpādi, so saddo viya anicco. Atha rūpādisamūho sammutimattaṃ, na tassa atthitā vā natthitā vā niccatā vā labbhatī’’ti, tasmā anekantavādo na siyā. Dhammānañca dhammino aññathānaññathā ca pavattiyaṃ doso vuttoyeva sassatavādavicāraṇāyaṃ. Tasmā so tattha vuttanayena veditabbo. Apica na niccāniccanavattabbarūpo attā, loko ca paramatthato vijjamānatāparijānanato yathā niccādīnaṃ aññataraṃ rūpaṃ, yathā vā dīpādayo. Na hi rūpādīnaṃ udayabbayasabhāvānaṃ niccāniccanavattabbasabhāvatā sakkā viññātuṃ, jīvassa ca niccādīsu aññataraṃ rūpaṃ siyāti, evaṃ sattabhaṅgo viya sesabhaṅgānampi asambhavoyevāti sattabhaṅgavādassa ayuttatā veditabbā (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.38).
有人会问:在“有些法是常住的,有些法是无常的”这个主张里,对眼等诸法无常性的确定,本来就是如实了知它们的真实本性,那么持这种主张的人怎么还会有邪见呢?又是谁说过“对眼等诸法无常性的确定是邪见”呢?其实,这里应该理解为:恰恰是在那些无常法当中,把某些法确定为常住,这才是此处所说的邪见。不过,这种邪见是和那一个主张一起生起的,所以它对眼等诸法无常性的了知就被染污了,因为两者混在一起,就像被毒混进去的酥油团一样;因此,它不能发挥自己应有的作用,不该被归入正见这一边。或者说,即使眼等诸法已经被确定为无常,外道见者仍然把它们执取为附带了“命者”本性的东西,所以还是没办法阻止他们对这些法的了知变成邪见。正因如此,巴利圣典里才说:“眼也是……(中略)……身也是这个我”等等。这样说来,依无为界和有为界,依次第而说“有些法是常住的,有些法是无常的”这种分别说者,也会变成一分常见者了——这种责难根本没有成立的余地,因为这是无颠倒地通达法的真实本性。正是这种无颠倒地通达法的真实本性,按照前面所说的道理,因为它不混杂,也不附加“命者”的本性。巴利
Nanu ca ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti etasmiṃ vāde cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ yathāsabhāvāvabodho eva, atha evaṃvādīnaṃ kathaṃ micchādassanaṃ siyāti, ko vā evamāha ‘‘cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ micchādassana’’nti? Asassatesuyeva pana kesañci dhammānaṃ sassatabhāvasanniṭṭhānaṃ idha micchādassananti gahetabbaṃ, tena pana ekavāde pavattamānena cakkhādīnaṃ asassatabhāvāvabodho vidūsito saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato visasaṃsaṭṭho viya sappipiṇḍo, tato ca tassa sakiccakaraṇāsamatthatāya sammādassanapakkhe ṭhapetabbataṃ nārahatīti. Asassatabhāvena nicchitāpi vā cakkhuādayo samāropitajīvasabhāvā eva diṭṭhigatikehi gayhantīti tadavabodhassa micchādassanabhāvo na sakkā nivāretuṃ. Tenevāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cakkhuṃ itipi…pe… kāyo itipi ayaṃ attā’’tiādi. Evañca katvā asaṅkhatāya, saṅkhatāya ca dhātuyā vasena yathākkamaṃ ‘‘ekacce dhammā sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti evaṃpavatto vibhajjavādopi ekaccasassatavādoyeva bhaveyyāti evampakārā codanā anavakāsā hoti aviparītadhammasabhāvapaṭipattibhāvato. Aviparītadhammasabhāvapaṭipattiyeva hesa vuttanayena asaṃsaṭṭhattā, anāropitajīvasabhāvattā ca.
这里有人提出:在前面那个“常住论”里,把无常的诸法执取为“常住”,这特别算是邪见。但对真正常住的东西执取为“常住”,那就不是邪见,因为这是如实执取。既然这样,那这个主张就不该说成和前一个主张不同了,因为就像在这里一样,在前面那个主张里,也是对某些法生起了常住的执取。回答:还是应该说是不同的主张。因为在这里,这个主张是通过“某些法常住,某些法无常”这样的分别构想,对那些被执取的法作出区分而显示出来的——也就是说,它恰恰是在无常法上生起的。难道因为部分包含在整体里,这种“有部分的常住执取”就该归并到前面那种“无部分的常住执取”里去吗?即便如此,也不能这么说,因为论者是根据各自所针对的领域不同,才提出这两种主张的。因为有一类执持邪见的人,坚执“一切法常住”;另一类则坚执“只有某些法常住,某些法无常”。对诸行的无余遍取,与只取一部分,正是这两种主张的明显区别。还有更进一步的理由:由于在多种类的相续和单一种类的相续中,对蕴相续的执取方式不同,所以也不能那样说。因为四种常住论者,按出生类别的不同,有的只是在种种色身所依的无色法聚上生起常住执取——这是通过神通了知的人和依传闻的人,执取色身的坏灭而造成的。正如所说的:“从那里死后,生到了别处”,“死没、结生”等等。而证得殊胜境界的一分常住论者,则是在尚未辨别坏灭的法的相续上,以执取常住相的方式生起执著,因为他的执著是以一期生命所摄的蕴相续为对象的。因此,在三种主张里,都只说“他忆念过去的宿住,之后不再忆念”。至于推理者,也就是常住论者和一分常住论者这两类人,他们常住执著的差别,因为分别以色法和无色法为对象,所以非常明显。巴利
Etthāha – purimasmimpisassatavāde asassatānaṃ dhammānaṃ ‘‘sassatā’’ti gahaṇaṃ visesato micchādassanaṃ bhavati. Sassatānaṃ pana ‘‘sassatā’’ti gāho na micchādassanaṃ yathāsabhāvaggāhabhāvato. Evañca sati imassa vādassa vādantaratā na vattabbā, idha viya purimepi ekaccesveva dhammesu sassataggāhasambhavatoti, vattabbāyeva asassatesveva ‘‘kecideva dhammā sassatā, keci asassatā’’ti parikappanāvasena gahetabbadhammesu vibhāgappavattiyā imassa vādassa dassitattā. Nanu ca ekadesassa samudāyantogadhattā ayaṃ sappadesasassataggāho purimasmiṃ nippadesasassataggāhe samodhānaṃ gaccheyyātī? Tathāpi na sakkā vattuṃ vādī tabbisayavisesavasena vādadvayassa pavattattā. Aññe eva hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘sabbe dhammā sassatā’’ti abhiniviṭṭhā, aññe ‘‘ekacceva sassatā, ekacce asassatā’’ti. Saṅkhārānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ, ekadesapariggaho ca vādadvayassa paribyattoyeva. Kiñca bhiyyo – anekavidhasamussaye, ekavidhasamussaye ca khandhapabandhena abhinivesabhāvato tathā na sakkā vattuṃ. Catubbidhopi hi sassatavādī jātivisesavasena nānāvidharūpakāyasannissaye eva arūpadhammapuñje sassatābhinivesī jāto abhiññāṇena, anussavādīhi ca rūpakāyabhedagahaṇato. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘tato cuto amutra udapādi’’nti, (dī. ni. 1.244; ma. ni. 1.148; pārā. 12) ‘‘cavanti upapajjantī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.255; ma. ni. 1.148; pārā. 12) ca ādi. Visesalābhī pana ekaccasassatiko anupadhāritabhedasamussaye dhammapabandhe sassatākāragahaṇena abhinivesaṃ janesi ekabhavapariyāpannakhandhasantānavisayattā tadabhinivesassa. Tathā hi tīsupi vādesu ‘‘taṃ pubbenivāsaṃ anussarati , tato paraṃ nānussaratī’’ti ettakameva vuttaṃ. Takkīnaṃ pana ubhinnampi sassatekaccasassatavādīnaṃ sassatābhinivesaviseso rūpārūpadhammavisayatāya supākaṭoyevāti.
39 39. 超越了坏劫住、成劫、成劫住这三种不可数劫之后再次坏灭,而且“addhā”这个词是时间的同义词,所以这样说,即说“长的”等等。超越、行进、流转就是“度过”。由于词根有多种含义,加上前缀能表达特殊意义,与“saṃ”结合的“vaṭṭa”一词表示毁灭,所以说“毁灭”;或者“vatu”这个词根只表示“行”,但与表示“灭尽”的“saṃ”结合后,通过关联这个含义而获得毁灭的意思,就用“毁灭”这个词来显示。因为从字面上看,意思是“以灭尽而转起”,这里“ta”音变成了“ṭa”。从导致毁灭的大云生起开始,直到连极微细的行也不存在为止,世间就被称为“正在坏灭”。圣典中的“世间”主要指地等器世间,因为它占了大部分;为了表明正是就这一点而说“大部分”,所以用“即”等词来说明。上方的梵天界,指光音天以上的地界。这里所指的正是以火而起的劫,因此圣典中说“成为光音天坏灭性”。为什么只说这个?因为它频繁发生。这就是次第决定:巴利
39. Saṃvaṭṭaṭṭhāyīvivaṭṭavivaṭṭaṭṭhāyīsaṅkhātānaṃ tiṇṇampi asaṅkhyeyyakappānamatikkamena puna saṃvaṭṭanato, addhā-saddassa ca kālapariyāyattā evaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘dīghassā’’tiādi. Atikkamma ayanaṃ pavattanaṃ accayo. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ, upasaggavasena ca atthavisesavācakattā saṃ-saddena yutto vaṭṭa-saddo vināsavācīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vinassatī’’ti, vatu-saddo vā gatiyameva. Saṅkhayatthajotakena pana saṃ-saddena yuttattā tadatthasambandhanena vināsattho labbhatīti dasseti ‘‘vinassatī’’ti iminā. Saṅkhayavasena vattatīti hi saddato attho, ta-kārassa cettha ṭa-kārādeso. Vipattikaramahāmeghasamuppattitto hi paṭṭhāya yāva aṇusahagatopi saṅkhāro na hoti, tāva loko saṃvaṭṭatīti vuccati. Pāḷiyaṃ lokoti pathavīādibhājanaloko adhippeto tadavasesassa bāhullato, tadeva sandhāya ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti vuttanti dasseti ‘‘ye’’tiādinā. Uparibrahmalokesūti ābhassarabhūmito uparibhūmīsu. Agginā kappavuṭṭhānañhi idhādhippetaṃ, tenevāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ābhassarasaṃvattanikā hontī’’ti. Kasmā tadeva vuttanti ce? Tasseva bahulaṃ pavattanato. Ayañhi vāraniyamo –
七次以火,第八次以水;
六十四次圆满之后,会有一次风劫。巴利
‘‘Sattasattagginā vārā, aṭṭhame aṭṭhame dakā; Catusaṭṭhi yadā puṇṇā, eko vāyuvaro siyā’’ti. (abhidhammatthavibhāvanīṭīkāya pañcamaparicchedavaṇṇanāyampi);
“或在无色界”这里,用表示抉择意义的“或”字,是在抉择:或在正坏灭的世界之外的其他世界。因为并非所有恶趣众生那时都生于色界、无色界,这一点可以理解;恶趣中长寿的众生不可能往生人界,而如果不往生人界,他们那时就不可能往生那里。即使是定邪见者,在坏劫时也不会从地狱解脱,只会生在背面的轮围界,注释书里这样说。虽然一切众生都是由福行、非福行的思所生,但色界众生纯粹由心而生,不依靠外缘,所以只称他们为“意所成”,而不是指那些依靠其他外缘而生的众生;为了说明这一点,才说“由心所生故为意所成”。那么,欲界的化生众生不也成了意所成吗?不会。因为“意所成”这个说法,只用于由殊胜的心——即增上心——所生的众生;因此用“禅那”一词加以限定,说“由禅那心”。即便如此,无色界众生不也成了意所成吗?不会。因为那里根本没有“由外缘所生”的疑虑,所以不能确定地说唯由心生。世间“意所成”这个说法,在色界众生中已成惯例。正如吠陀论者把“我”分为五种:食所成、饮所成、意所成、喜所成、识所成。在断灭论中也会说“天、有色、意所成”;他们靠禅那的威力,以喜为食,自身发光,行于空中,所以说“喜是他们的”等等,意思是他们自身有光。或者也可以说:他们具有清净、稳固的本性,所以是“净居”。这里“殊胜”是指光音天而言。少光天和无量光天则住留两个劫和四个劫。八个劫,是指四个无数劫合在一起的八个大劫。巴利
Āruppesu vāti ettha vikappanatthena vā-saddena saṃvaṭṭamānalokadhātūhi aññalokadhātūsu vāti vikappeti. Na hi sabbe apāyasattā tadā rūpārūpabhavesu uppajjantīti sakkā viññātuṃ apāyesu dīghatarāyukānaṃ manussalokūpapattiyā asambhavato, manussalokūpapattiñca vinā tadā tesaṃ tatrūpapattiyā anupapattito. Niyatamicchādiṭṭhikopi hi saṃvaṭṭhamāne kappe nirayato na muccati, piṭṭhicakkavāḷeyeva nibbattatīti aṭṭhakathāsu (a. ni. aṭṭha. 1.311) vuttaṃ. Satipi sabbasattānaṃ puññāpuññābhisaṅkhāramanasā nibbattabhāve bāhirapaccayehi vinā manasāva nibbattattā rūpāvacarasattā eva ‘‘manomayā’’ti vuccanti, na pana bāhirapaccayapaṭiyattā tadaññeti dassetuṃ ‘‘manena nibbattattā manomayā’’ti āha. Yadevaṃ kāmāvacarasattānampi opapātikānaṃ manomayabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, adhicittabhūtena atisayamanasā nibbattasattesuyeva manomayavohāratoti dassentena jhāna-saddena visesetvā ‘‘jhānamanenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evampi arūpāvacarasattānaṃ manomayabhāvo āpajjatīti? Na tattha bāhirapaccayehi nibbattetabbatāsaṅkāya abhāvena manasā eva nibbattāti avadhāraṇāsambhavato. Niruḷhovāyaṃ loke manomayavohāro rūpāvacarasattesu. Tathā hi annamayo pānamayo manomayo ānandamayo viññāṇamayoti pañcadhā attānaṃ vedavādino parikappenti. Ucchedavādepi vakkhati ‘‘dibbo rūpī manomayo’’ti, (dī. ni. 1.87) te pana jhānānubhāvato pītibhakkhā sayaṃpabhā antalikkhacarāti āha ‘‘pīti tesa’’ntiādi, tesaṃ attanova pabhā atthīti attho. Sobhanā vā ṭhāyī sabhā etesanti subhaṭṭhāyinotipi yujjati. Ukkaṃsenāti ābhassare sandhāya vuttaṃ. Parittābhāppamāṇābhā pana dve, cattāro ca kappe tiṭṭhanti. Aṭṭha kappeti catunnamasaṅkhyeyyakappānaṃ samudāyabhūte aṭṭha mahākappe.
40 “坏灭”这个词本身就是遮止的意思,因为它和表示遮止的前缀结合在一起,所以能让人知道“住立”的意思,因此说“住立”;或者因为词根有多种含义,所以是“产生”或“增长”的意思。从成就大云生起开始,由地持水、水持风等依次生起,直到日月出现为止,世间被称为“正在成立”。“本性”就是自性,这和“空”这个词相关联。说明为什么是空:“因为所生的众生不存在。”意思是,先前其他众生还没有生起,所以不像某些天宫那样,因为所生的众生已经离开而空,这里并不是那样。巴利
40. Vināsavācīyeva vaṭṭa-saddo paṭisedhajotakena upasaggena yuttattā saṇṭhāhanatthañāpakoti āha ‘‘saṇṭhātī’’ti, anekatthattā vā dhātūnaṃ nibbattati, vaḍḍhatīti vā attho. Sampattimahāmeghasamuppattito hi paṭṭhāya pathavīsandhārakudakataṃsandhārakavāyuādīnaṃ samuppattivasena yāva candimasūriyānaṃ pātubhāvo, tāva loko vivaṭṭatīti vuccati. Pakatiyāti sabhāvena, tassa ‘‘suñña’’nti iminā sambandho. Tathāsuññatāya kāraṇamāha ‘‘nibbattasattānaṃ natthitāyā’’ti. Purimataraṃ aññesaṃ sattānamanuppannattāti bhāvo, tena yathā ekaccāni vimānāni tattha nibbattasattānaṃ chaḍḍitattā suññāni, na evamidanti dasseti.
另一种解释:造作自己的业,这是自然。由那个业所生的众生,这是关联。由此说明:就像这个众生首先由自己的业力而出生,其他众生并不是这样比他更早出生,也没有同时出生的情况;因为这样出生的众生不存在,所以这是空的。梵众天、梵辅天、大梵天在这里属于梵类诸天,因为是他们居住的地方,所以那层地界也被称为梵类诸天;而在读作梵类诸天地时,意思是与梵类诸天相关的地界。作者就是自己造作的人。令作者就是对他人下命令的人。按照清净道论中宿住随念智那段所说的方法,这里也说明了出生的次第,以及业为缘和时节为生起之因的道理。业以亲依止的方式成为它的缘,所以叫业缘。或者,因为在那里出生的众生的异熟业有助成的作用,所以业的缘就叫业缘。时节是它的生起之因,所以叫时节生起。业缘时节生起也是按照复合词的读法:业是助伴的缘,或者按前面所说的方法,作为业的助伴的缘,就是业缘;那本身就是时节,那本身就是它的生起之因,所以叫业缘时节生起。宝地:因为殊胜福业的威力而成为像宝一样的地。不只是地,还包括它的附属物,所以说自然等等。自然所生之处:在过去劫中,先前众生的出生之处。此处:在被称为梵天宫殿的梵类诸天地中。这是按共性和差别说的两种所依。为什么住在殊胜的第二禅地界的众生会投生到低劣的第一禅地界呢?为此说然而众生等等。意思是:以爱染之力修习初禅。关联是:以自然、以自性,爱染和渴爱会生起。所住之处:曾经住过的地方。从那里退堕:以投生的方式,从第二禅地界退到第一禅地界,意思是离去。短寿者:因为所造的广大福业应得的异熟相续还没有生起,所以寿命有限。彼天界:在那个天界中,或者以依止的方式作关联的说明。仅以寿量:仅以最长的寿量。少:微少。中间就死去:就像放进王库的米斗一样,福业耗尽后,按各自业的分量,在那个天界最长寿量还没到就死去了。巴利
Aparo nayo – sakakammassa paṭhamaṃ karaṇaṃ pakati, tāya nibbattasattānanti sambandho, tena yathā etassa attano kammabalena paṭhamaṃ nibbatti, na evaṃ aññesaṃ tassa purimataraṃ, samānakāle vā nibbatti atthi, tathā nibbattasattānaṃ natthitāya suññamidanti dasseti. Brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmāno idha brahmakāyikā, tesaṃ nivāsatāya bhūmipi ‘‘brahmakāyikā’’ti vuttā, brahmakāyikabhūmīti pana pāṭhebrahmakāyikānaṃ sambandhinī bhūmīti attho. Kattā sayaṃ kārako. Kāretā paresaṃ āṇāpako. Visuddhimagge pubbenivāsañāṇakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.408) vuttanayena, etena nibbattakkamaṃ kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānabhāve ca kāraṇaṃ dasseti. Kammaṃ upanissayabhāvena paccayo etissāti kammapaccayā. Atha vā tattha nibbattasattānaṃ vipaccanakakammassa sahakārīkārakabhāvato kammassa paccayāti kammapaccayā. Utu samuṭṭhānametissāti utusamuṭṭhānā. ‘‘Kammapaccayautusamuṭṭhānā’’tipi samāsavasena pāṭho kammasahāyo paccayo, vuttanayena vā kammassa sahāyabhūto paccayoti kammapaccayo, so eva utu tathā, sova samuṭṭhānametissāti kammapaccayautusamuānā. Ratanabhūmīti ukkaṃsagatapuññakammānubhāvato ratanabhūtā bhūmi, na kevalaṃ bhūmiyeva, atha kho tapparivārāpīti āha ‘‘pakatī’’tiādi. Pakatinibbattaṭṭhāneti purimakappesu purimakānaṃ nibbattaṭṭhāne. Etthāti ‘‘brahmavimāna’’nti vuttāya brahmakāyikabhūmiyā. Sāmaññavisesavasena cetaṃ ādhāradvayaṃ. Kathaṃ paṇītāya dutiyajjhānabhūmiyā ṭhitānaṃ hīnāya paṭhamajjhānabhūmiyā upapatti hotīti āha ‘‘atha sattāna’’ntiādi, nikantivasena paṭhamajjhānaṃ bhāvetvāti vuttaṃ hoti, pakatiyā sabhāvena nikanti taṇhā uppajjatīti sambandho. Vasitaṭṭhāneti vutthapubbaṭṭhāne. Tato otarantīti upapattivasena dutiyajjhānabhūmito paṭhamajjhānabhūmiṃ apasakkanti, gacchantīti attho. Appāyuketi yaṃ uḷārapuññakammaṃ kataṃ, tassa upajjanārahavipākapabandhato appaparimāṇāyuke. Tassa devalokassāti tasmiṃ devaloke, nissayavasena vā sambandhaniddeso. Āyuppamāṇenevāti paramāyuppamāṇeneva. Parittanti appakaṃ. Antarāva cavantīti rājakoṭṭhāgāre pakkhittataṇḍulanāḷi viya puññakkhayā hutvā sakakammappamāṇena tassa devalokassa paramāyuantarā eva cavanti.
那么,这个所谓的“最上寿”到底是什么?它又怎么说是被限定了的量呢?回答是:对于各类众生来说,在各自不同的生存形态中,异熟相续得以维持的时限是有规定的。就像先前已成就的生存愿求作为亲依止,使得身体肢节、肤色、形态、大小等产生差别一样,在各趣、各部类等当中,大多数都有确定的界限。对胎生者、欲界天众和色界众生来说,他们的寿量是由精血、时节、食物等缘所产生并支持的。因为它是寿的因,所以通过“因”的借代说法,就称为“寿”;又因为从最高限度来说有界限,所以称为“最上寿”。因为即使那些只住一刹那、与自己同时生起的名法与色法,由于它们具有令安住的作用方式,色法与名法的命根就不只是它们刹那住立的因、作为护持者,而且直到坏灭断尽为止,也是相续不断的因。因此,这确实是以寿为因的。不过,诸天和地狱众生的寿量大多是确定的界限,北俱卢洲众生的寿量则是绝对确定的界限。其余的人类、饿鬼、旁生则不确定:在令他们长久住立的业力强盛的时期,依靠与那种业相应的相续所生的精血等缘,以及以那业为根本的、由日月运行平稳或不平稳等所产生的时节、食物等平稳或不平稳的缘,就有了长短不同的时间。因此,寿量没有确定的界限。而它的确定方式,就像先前已成就的生存愿求使得在各趣、各部类等当中,肤色、形态等差别得以确定一样;由于见闻等从一开始就如此被把握,所以应当知道:在种种投生中出生的众生,大多数从见闻等获得了大致相等的住世时间,然后执取那最高标准,依所发起的生存愿求,从一开始就有了确定的界限。巴利
Kiṃ panetaṃ paramāyu nāma, kathaṃ vā taṃ paricchinnappamāṇanti? Vuccate – yo tesaṃ tesaṃ sattānaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhavavisese vipākappabandhassa ṭhitikālaniyamo purimasiddhabhavapatthanūpanissayavasena sarīrāvayavavaṇṇasaṇṭhānappamāṇādivisesā viya taṃtaṃgatinikāyādīsu yebhuyyena niyataparicchedo hoti, gabbhaseyyakakāmāvacaradevarūpāvacarasattānaṃ sukkasoṇitādiutubhojanādiutuādipaccayuppannapaccayūpatthambhito ca, so āyuhetukattā kāraṇūpacārena āyu, ukkaṃsaparicchedavasena paramāyūti ca vuccati. Yathāsakaṃ khaṇamattāvaṭṭhāyīnampi hi attanā sahajātānaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ ṭhapanākāravuttitāya pavattakāni rūpārūpajīvitindriyāni na kevalaṃ nesaṃ khaṇaṭṭhitiyā eva kāraṇabhāvena anupālakāni, atha kho yāva bhaṅgupacchedā [bhavaṅgupacchedā (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.40)] anupabandhassa avicchedahetubhāvenāpi. Tasmā cesa āyuhetukoyeva, taṃ pana devānaṃ, nerayikānañca yebhuyyena niyataparicchedaṃ, uttarakurukānaṃ pana ekantaniyataparicchedameva. Avasiṭṭhamanussapetatiracchānagatānaṃ pana ciraṭṭhitisaṃvattanikakammabahule kāle taṃkammasahitasantānajanitasukkasoṇitapaccayānaṃ, tammūlakānañca candimasūriyasamavisamaparivattanādijanitautuāhārādisamavisamapaccayānaṃ vasena cirācirakālatāya aniyataparicchedaṃ, tassa ca yathā purimasiddhabhavapatthanāvasena taṃtaṃgatinikāyādīsu vaṇṇasaṇṭhānādivisesaniyamo siddho, dassanānussavādīhi tathāyeva ādito gahaṇasiddhiyā, evaṃ tāsu tāsu upapattīsu nibbattasattānaṃ yebhuyyena samappamāṇaṃ ṭhitikālaṃ dassanānussavehi labhitvā taṃ paramataṃ ajjhosāya pavattitabhavapatthanāvasena ādito paricchedaniyamo veditabbo.
业在各种各样的投生中,能够促成与该投生相应的肤色等产生,但在寿命已经限定的投生里,它却不能越过这个限定来产生果报,所以说“只是以寿量而死亡”。另外,由于依靠助缘和护持缘等辅助条件,所执取的诸蕴能够持续运作的方式,实际上取决于最上寿量,因为不能超越前面所说的限定,所以即使还有剩余的业,也没有立足之地,因此说“不能靠自己的福德之力而住立”。不过,根据“或因寿尽,或因福尽,从光音天身死殁”这句话,应当知道在这里,梵天界的众生也和欲界天一样,大多数都是寿命限定的。正如注释书中所说,天子从天上死去有四种原因:寿尽、福尽、食尽、忿怒。“一劫或半劫”——这里指的是不可数劫,那也只是那么长的时间;而“或”字是用来表示劫的三分之一,或者比这更少、更多等的选择义。巴利
Yasmā pana kammaṃ tāsu tāsu upapattīsu yathā taṃtaṃupapattinissitavaṇṇādinibbattane samatthaṃ, evaṃ niyatāyuparicchedāsu upapattīsu paricchedātikkamena vipākanibbattane samatthaṃ na hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘āyuppamāṇeneva cavantī’’ti. Yasmā pana upatthambhakapaccayasahāyehi anupālakapaccayehi upādinnakakkhandhānaṃ pavattetabbākāro atthato paramāyukassa hoti yathāvuttaparicchedānatikkamanato, tasmā satipi kammāvasese ṭhānaṃ na sambhavati, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘attano puññabalena ṭhātuṃ na sakkontī’’ti. ‘‘Āyukkhayā vā puññakkhayā vā ābhassarakāyā cavitvā’’ti vacanato panettha kāmāvacaradevānaṃ viya brahmakāyikānampi yebhuyyeneva niyatāyuparicchedabhāvo veditabbo. Tathā hi devalokato devaputtā āyukkhayena puññakkhayena āhārakkhayena kopenāti catūhi kāraṇehi cavantīti aṭṭhakathāsu (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.appamādavagge) vuttaṃ. Kappaṃ vā upaḍḍhakappaṃ vāti ettha asaṅkhyeyyakappo adhippeto, so ca tathārūpo kāloyeva, vā-saddo pana kappassa tatiyabhāgaṃ vā tato ūnamadhikaṃ vāti vikappanattho.
41 不喜乐,是指独自居住时的不喜乐,也就是想和别人在一起的渴望。对此,经中说“因为独自长久居住的缘故”,所以说了“另一者也是……”等等。这样顺着说明其含义之后,为了以质问和澄清的方式说明“难道就不会厌倦吗”,便通过“然而那……”等语句来显示反面的情况。因为与可爱的事物分离,或者得不到可爱的事物,心受到扰乱,这就是厌倦;它实质上就是与忧相应的心生起,所以说“与嗔相应”。这种厌倦在梵天界不存在,因为已被禅那的力量断除。这里,被称为渴爱和邪见的心先前状态的惊惧和颤动,就是怖畏。因为对于长久安住在禅那之乐中的人,当上述不喜乐的相状生起时,它就成了“我、我所”执取的原因。因此后面会说:“既不是渴爱的怖畏,也不是邪见的怖畏,这也是成立的。”在义理抉择中,不正是引用了这段经文,然后说“啊,但愿其他众生也来到这个状态,这叫做渴爱的怖畏”吗?确实如此,但那是在为邪见的怖畏单独举例时,把渴爱的怖畏从中特别提出来说的,并不是因为这里找不到邪见的怖畏,所以没有过失。现在,提取了那些可以用相同词来说明的含义之后,为了阐明这里真正想要表达的意思,说了“然而那……”等话。被称为嗔的心惊,就是怖畏。对其他情况也应如此类推。“缘于生”等是《分别论》的经文,对此的注释是:缘于生而有怖畏,意思是由生为条件而生起的怖畏。“可怕的”是描述其样态。“身毛竖立”是身体因怖畏而颤抖,特别是心脏肌肉的抖动。“毛骨悚然”是身上的毛竖起来,就像墙壁上的象牙一样竖立起来。用这两个词从作用上显示怖畏之后,又用“心的惊惧”从本质上显示。不过,复注中说:“‘可怕的’是指可怕对象之相,即强烈的怖畏,由此身体变得僵硬,这就是‘身毛竖立’。”用这个就显示了这里所说的“怖畏”是指轻微的怖畏。因此,在这里的用法中,这一切处的意思都是“这种怖畏”。在“只是怖畏和颤动”这句中,注释书会说:“以邪见和渴爱为特征的怖畏和颤动,就是动摇、颤动、抖动的意思。”由此可知,即使有可得之处,如果没有渴爱的怖畏,邪见的怖畏也是被排除的。“他们也是”等是《狮子吼经》的经文。其中“他们也是”是指长寿的天神们。“怖畏”是指修习坏随观之后,对一切行法感到怖畏而生起的怖畏智。“惊惧”是指与愧相应的智,或者就是愧。“恐惧”是指通过过患随观和厌离随观而对诸行生起的恐惧智。“以投生方式”是指以结生的方式。巴利
41.Anabhiratīti ekakavihārena anabhiramaṇasaṅkhātā aññehi samāgamicchāyeva. Tattha ‘‘ekakassa dīgharattaṃ nivasitattā’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vacanatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘aparassāpī’’tiādi. Evamanvayamatthaṃ dassetvā nanu ukkaṇṭhitāpi siyāti codanāsodhanavasena byatirekaṃ dasseti ‘‘yā panā’’tiādinā. Piyavatthuvirahena, piyavatthualābhena vā cittavigghāto ukkaṇṭhitā, sā panatthato domanassacittuppādova, tenāha ‘‘paṭighasampayuttā’’ti. Sā brahmaloke natthi jhānānubhāvapahīnattā. Taṇhādiṭṭhisaṅkhātā cittassa purimāvatthāya ubbijjanā phandanā eva idha paritassanā. Sā hi dīgharattaṃ jhānaratiyā ṭhitassa yathāvuttānabhiratinimittaṃ uppannā ‘‘ahaṃ mama’’nti gahaṇassa ca kāraṇabhūtā. Tena vakkhati ‘‘taṇhātassa nāpi diṭṭhitassanāpi vaṭṭatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.41) nanu vuttaṃ atthuddhāre imaṃyeva pāḷiṃ nīharitvā ‘‘aho vata aññepi sattā itthattaṃ āgaccheyyunti ayaṃ taṇhātassanā nāmā’’ti? Saccaṃ, taṃ pana diṭṭhitassanāya visuṃ udāharaṇaṃ dassentena taṇhātassanameva tato niddhāretvā vuttaṃ, na pana ettha diṭṭhitassanāya alabbhamānattāti na doso. Idāni samānasaddavacanīyānaṃ atthānamuddharaṇaṃ katvā idhādhippetaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘sā panesā’’tiādimāha. Paṭighasaṅkhāto cittutrāso eva tāsatassanā. Evamaññatthāpi yathārahaṃ. ‘‘Jātiṃ paṭiccā’’tiādi vibhaṅgapāḷi, (vibha. 921) tatrāyamatthakathā – jātiṃ paṭicca bhayanti jātipaccayā uppannabhayaṃ. Bhayānakanti ākāraniddeso. Chambhitattanti bhayavasena gattakampo, visesato hadayamaṃsacalanaṃ. Lomahaṃsoti lomānaṃ haṃsanaṃ, bhittiyaṃ nāgadantānamiva uddhaggabhāvo, iminā padadvayena kiccato bhayaṃ dassetvā puna cetaso utrāsoti sabhāvato dassitanti. Ṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘bhayānakanti bheravārammaṇanimittaṃ balavabhayaṃ, tena sarīrassa thaddhabhāvo chambhitatta’’nti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.41) vuttaṃ, aneneva bhayanti ettha khuddakabhayaṃ dassitaṃ, iti ettha payoge ayaṃ tassanāti evaṃ sabbattha attho. Paritassitavipphanditamevāti ettha ‘‘diṭṭhisaṅkhātena ceva taṇhāsaṅkhātena ca paritassitena vipphanditameva calitameva kampitamevā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.105-117) aṭṭhakathāyamatthaṃ vakkhati. Tena viññāyati labbhamānampi taṇhātassanamantarena diṭṭhitassanāyeva nihaṭāti. ‘‘Tepī’’tiādi sīhopamasuttantapāḷi (a. ni. 4.33) tattha tepīti dīghāyukā devāpi. Bhayanti bhaṅgānupassanāpariciṇṇante sabbasaṅkhārato bhāyanavasena uppannaṃ bhayañāṇaṃ. Saṃveganti sahottappañāṇaṃ, ottappameva vā. Santāsanti ādīnavanibbidānupassanāhi saṅkhārehi santāsanañāṇaṃ. Upapattivasenāti paṭisandhivaseneva.
所谓“同伴性”,字面意思就是想要有同伴,因为 sahabya 这个词本来就是表示“同伴”的意思。因为这个人跟着一起行动,或者帮别人掩盖过错,所以称为同伴;这种状态就是同伴性。不过,同伴性实际上就是共存,为了显示这个意思,所以说“共存”。或者,saha 这个词就像 adhikicca 里的 adhi 一样,表示“与手段相结合”的意思,因此“一起行动的状态”就是 sahabya,好比“奴仆状态”一样,那本身就是同伴性。按照这个词自身的含义来使用,针对这个意思所以说“共存”。另外,《天宫事注释》里说:“或者,他一起行动,所以叫 sahava,其状态就是 sahabya,就像英雄的状态叫英雄气概一样,那本身就是同伴性。”为了说明这个意思,也可以看作是这样说的。巴利
Sahabyatanti sahāyabhāvamiccheva saddato attho sahabya-saddassa sahāyatthe pavattanato. So hi saha byāyati pavattati, dosaṃ vā paṭicchādetīti sahabyoti vuccati, tassa bhāvo sahabyatā. Sahāyabhāvo pana sahabhāvoyeva nāmāti adhippāyato atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sahabhāva’’nti vuttaṃ. Sasādhanasamavāyattho vā saha-saddo adhikiccapade adhisaddo viya, tasmā saha ekato vattamānassa bhāvo sahabyaṃ yathā ‘‘dāsabya’’nti tadeva sahabyatā, sakatthavuttivasena imamevatthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘sahabhāva’’nti. Apica saha vāti pavattatīti sahavo, tassa bhāvo sahabyaṃ yathā ‘‘vīrassa bhāvo vīriya’’nti, tadeva sahabyatāti evaṃ vimānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (vi. va. aṭṭha. 172) vuttaṃ, tasmā tadatthaṃ dassetuṃ evaṃ vuttantipi daṭṭhabbaṃ.
42 “征服这些众生”是剩下的部分。这里说的“征服”,是指以邪恶的本性、以最上者的身份,自己认为“我已征服那些众生而安住”,所以经文说“我是最胜者”。“必定”这个词,是通过说明见没有障碍、以及在这里不执取任何可见的差别相,来宣称自己有无碍的见,因此说“意思是:我见一切”。因为,如果不执取某个作为部分的可见差别相,那么应当执取的整体性就被理解了,就像“受戒者不布施”这句话,由于没有执取布施物的某个部分,就被理解为出家人什么都不布施,应当布施的物品被理解为全部。在这里也是如此。“我令其随我意而行”,所以是自在者。因为与“我”这个词结合,所以一切地方的词义解释都与第一人称有关。“为众生所居的器世间的创造者”,这是连接关系。这里“大地”等,是就器世间而说的。“被创造”,即被构造,或被分别,因此说“你是名为刹帝利者”等等。“由已修习的熟练”,即由已修习的五种自在。“于彼处”,即于已生和当生的众生。“于内”,即于母胎之中。“第一心刹那”,即结生心的刹那。“从第二心刹那起”,即从第一个有分心的刹那之后。“第一种威仪”,即他以此结生的那种威仪。这样,以过去的方式显示了“已生”一词,以现在的方式显示了“当生”一词的含义。然而在复注中,“当生”一词的含义也以未来的方式被说明了。因为“已生”就是已发生。“他们存在、他们将存在”,所以是“当生”,就像“应作的”等,因为 ṇya 和 tabbānīya 接尾词也用于主动意义。巴利
42. Ime satte abhibhavitvāti seso. Abhibhavanā cettha pāpasabhāvena jeṭṭhabhāvena ‘‘te satte abhibhavitvā ṭhito’’ti attano maññanāyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘jeṭṭhakohamasmī’’ti. Aññadatthūti dassane antarāyābhāvavacanena, dasoti ettha dassaneyyavisesapariggahābhāvena ca anāvaraṇadassāvitaṃ paṭijānātīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ passāmīti attho’’ti. Dassaneyyavisesassa hi padesabhūtassa aggahaṇe sati gahetabbassa nippadesatā viññāyati yathā ‘‘dikkhito na dadātī’’ti, deyyadhammavisesassa cettha padesabhūtassa aggahaṇato pabbajito sabbampi na dadātīti gahetabbassa deyyadhammassa nippadesatā viññāyati. Evamīdisesu. Vase vattemīti vasavattī. Ahaṃ-saddayogato hi sabbattha amhayogena vacanattho. Sattabhājanabhūtassa lokassa nimmātā cāti sambandho. ‘‘Pathavī’’tiādi cettha bhājanalokavasena adhippāyakathanaṃ. Sajitāti racitā, vibhajitā vā, tenāha ‘‘tvaṃ khattiyo nāmā’’tiādi. Ciṇṇavasitāyāti samāciṇṇapañcavidhavasibhāvato. Tatthāti bhūtabhabyesu. Antovatthimhīti antogabbhāsaye. Paṭhamacittakkhaṇeti paṭisandhicittakkhaṇe. Dutiyatoti paṭhamabhavaṅgacittakkhaṇato. Paṭhamairiyāpatheti yena paṭisandhiṃ gaṇhāti, tasmiṃ iriyāpathe. Iti atītavasena, bhūta-saddassa vattamānavasena ca bhabya-saddassa attho dassito. Ṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.42) pana bhabya-saddattho anāgatavasenāpi vutto. Ahesunti hi bhūtā. Bhavanti, bhavissanti cāti bhabyā tabbānīyā viya ṇyapaccayassa kattaripi pavattanato.
说了“自在主是创造者、是造物者”之后,又说“这些众生是我所造”,这到底是为了什么?回答说“现在从道理上……”等等。意思是说,他是想从道理上加以证明,所以才作出这样的主张。可是,这位梵天难道不是因为见解不定,像凡夫一样丢开了前生所熟悉的“业属于自己”的智慧,凭着与显示神通相应的、仅仅随一念心生起而“创造众生”的想法,就颠倒错乱,执取“这些众生是我所造”之类自在主造作的邪见,一味固执地陷进去,而不是为了建立别人的见解吗?那为什么又说他是想从道理上证明才作出主张呢?不应该这样看。因为对他们来说,后面将会说到“他这样想”等等,那种邪见是后来才生起的;他那种邪见是顺着建立他人见解的次第才产生的,并不是仅仅出于固执,所以应当知道是依这个道理才那样说的。正因为这样,他才说“这是什么原因”等等。在经文中,“心的导向”就是心的希求,所谓“仅仅心念的生起”也就是这个意思。巴利
‘‘Issaro kattā nimmātā’’ti vatvāpi puna ‘‘mayā ime sattā nimmitā’’ti vacanaṃ kimatthiyanti āha ‘‘idāni kāraṇavasenā’’tiādi [kāraṇato (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)] kāraṇavasena sādhetukāmatāya paṭiññākaraṇatthanti vuttaṃ hoti. Nanu cesa brahmā anavaṭṭhitadassanattā puthujjanassa purimatarajātiparicitampi kammassakatāñāṇaṃ vissajjetvā vikubbaniddhivasena cittuppādamattapaṭibaddhena sattanimmānena vipallaṭṭho ‘‘mayā ime sattā nimmitā’’tiādinā issarakuttadassanaṃ pakkhandamāno abhinivisanavasena patiṭṭhito, na pana patiṭṭhāpanavasena. Atha kasmā kāraṇavasena sādhetukāmo paṭiññaṃ karotīti vuttanti? Na cevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tesampi hi ‘‘evaṃ hotī’’tiādinā pacchā uppajjantānampi tathāabhinivesassa vakkhamānattā paresaṃ patiṭṭhāpanakkameneva tassa so abhiniveso jāto, na tu abhinivisanamattena, tasmā evaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘taṃ kissa hetū’’tiādi. Pāḷiyaṃ manaso paṇidhīti manaso patthanā, tathā cittuppattimattamevāti vuttaṃ hoti.
“此性”就是指这种状态。可是,因为这里特指的正是梵天的状态,所以就说成“梵天状态”。这种状态是这样,它的存在就是“此性”,这就是词源解释。“纯粹”是指以业属于自己的智慧而不混杂、清净。“仅仅由于想象”是指仅仅由于见解上的想象,不是因为慢心。就像弯曲破裂的人用弯曲破裂的筛子、持弯曲见解的人用弯曲见解的执取,弯下身子,他们只走向那位梵天的脚下,成为他那一边的,这就是意思。难道天神们在投生之后没有“我从那里死后,由于这个业而在这里投生”这样的回顾吗?那为什么他们会有这样的想法呢?因为只有在过去世中已经完全安住于以业属于自己的智慧的人,才会有那样的回顾生起。只有那样的人才有那样的回顾,而且大多是如此;但这些天神在过去世中也依持自在天创造等邪见而固执,所以就这样想。因此巴利文中说“我们以他”等等。巴利
Itthabhāvanti idappakārabhāvaṃ. Yasmā pana so pakāro brahmattabhāvoyevidhādhippeto, tasmā ‘‘brahmabhāva’’nti vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ pakāro itthaṃ, tassa bhāvo itthattanti hi nibbacanaṃ. Kevalanti kammassakatāñāṇena asammissaṃ suddhaṃ. Maññanāmattenevāti diṭṭhimaññanāmatteneva, na adhimānavasena. Vaṅkachiddena vaṅkaāṇī viya onamitvā vaṅkaladdhikena vaṅkaladdhikā onamitvā tasseva brahmuno pādamūlaṃ gacchanti, taṃpakkhakā bhavantīti attho. Nanu ca devānaṃ upapattisamanantaraṃ ‘‘imāya nāma gatiyā cavitvā iminā nāma kammunā idhūpapannā’’ti paccavekkhaṇā hoti, atha kasmā tesaṃ evaṃ maññanā siyāti? Purimajātīsu kammassakatāñāṇe sammadeva niviṭṭhajjhāsayānameva tathāpaccavekkhaṇāya pavattito. Tādisānameva hi tathāpaccavekkhaṇā sambhavati, sā ca kho yebhuyyavasena, ime pana purimāsupi jātīsu issarakuttadiṭṭhivasena nibaddhābhinivesā evameva maññamānā ahesunti. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘iminā maya’’ntiādi.
43 能压制、能胜过,所以叫“主”(īso);大的主就是“大仙”(maheso)。因为他稳稳地立足于大仙的状态,别人就称他为“大仙”,所以叫“具大威势”(mahesakkha)。在那些具大威势者当中,他更为超胜,所以叫“更具大威势”(mahesakkhatara),这就是这个词的含义。而他那种“更具大威势”的状态,是通过作为其因由的支配力与眷属圆满而被人所知的,因此说“依于自在支配与眷属之力而更为大荣”。巴利
43. Īsati abhibhavatīti īso, mahanto īso maheso, suppatiṭṭhitamahesatāya parehi ‘‘maheso’’ iti akkhāyatīti mahesakkho, mahesakkhānaṃ atisayena mahesakkhoti mahesakkhataroti vacanattho. So pana mahesakkhatarabhāvo ādhipateyyaparivārasampattiyā kāraṇabhūtāya viññāyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘issariyaparivāravasena mahāyasataro’’ti.
44 那么,这个原因到底是什么呢?为了回答这个问题,论师说“他从那之后……”等等。由此表明:前面所说的“来至此性”,就是指“来到此处”本身就是原因。“即在此处来”,意思是就在这个人间,以结生的方式而来。“此”,指的是“诸比丘,确实存在此情形”这句话。在巴利原文中,“某有情”这里的“yaṃ”只是一个虚词;或者这个虚词表示“原因”的意思,或者是在说明因的自性,意思是“由某个处所”;又或者它是指向动作本身。“来至此性”这里,所谓“此性”的“来”所施设的“处所”,那个确实是存在的,这就是意思。在“他不出家,不得心三摩地,不随念宿住”这些地方也是如此。因为“诸比丘,确实存在此情形,某有情”这些词句,也应当与“出家”等词句一一结合。“不行”是指不趋向家、不趋向房屋;对家有益的“家事”,即农耕牧牛等业,此处没有,所以是“非家”,即出家,因此说“从家……”等。“pa”字所限定的“vaja”字有“靠近”的意思,所以说“前往”。 “para”是指之后,或者殊胜,或者指其他的宿住等,也有这个意思。仅仅说“不忆念”时,这个意思就已经成立,论师以“忆念”等语来说明。“不见”是指以宿住随念智不见的缘故,也可以说是因为无法看见。如同“māna”一词,“anta”一词在这里也是“能力”的意思。“常存”是指一切时都存在。“依衰老”这里,“pi”一词也总摄“依死亡”。巴利
44. Kiṃ panetaṃ kāraṇanti anuyogenāha ‘‘so tato’’tiādi, tena ‘‘itthattaṃ āgacchatī’’ti vuttaṃ idhāgamanameva kāraṇanti dasseti. Idheva āgacchatīti imasmiṃ manussaloke eva paṭisandhivasena āgacchati. Etanti ‘‘ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ bhikkhave, vijjatī’’ti vacanaṃ. Pāḷiyaṃ yaṃ aññataro sattoti ettha yanti nipātamattaṃ, kāraṇatthe vā esa nipāto, hetumhi vā paccattaniddeso, yena ṭhānenāti attho, kiriyāparāmasanaṃ vā etaṃ. ‘‘Itthattaṃ āgacchatī’’ti ettha yadetaṃ itthattassa āgamanasaṅkhātaṃ ṭhānaṃ, tadetaṃ vijjatīti attho. Esa na so pabbajati, cetosamādhiṃ phusati, pubbenivāsaṃ anussatīti etesupi padesu. ‘‘Ṭhānaṃ kho panetaṃ bhikkhave, vijjati, yaṃ aññataro satto’’ti hi imāni padāni ‘‘pabbajatī’’tiādīhipi padehi paccekaṃ yojetabbāni. Na gacchatīti agāraṃ, gehaṃ, agārassa hitaṃ āgāriyaṃ, kasigorakkhādikammaṃ, tamettha natthīti anāgāriyaṃ, pabbajjā, tenāha ‘‘agārasmā’’tiādi. Pa-saddena visiṭṭho vaja-saddo upasaṅkamaneti vuttaṃ ‘‘upagacchatī’’ti. Paranti pacchā, atisayaṃ vā, aññaṃ pubbenivāsantipi attho. ‘‘Na saratī’’ti vutteyeva ayamattho āpajjatīti dasseti ‘‘saritu’’ntiādinā. Apassantoti pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena apassanahetu, passituṃ asakkonto hutvātipi vaṭṭati. Māna-saddo viya hi anta-saddo idha sāmatthiyattho. Sadābhāvatoti sabbadā vijjamānattā. Jarāvasenāpīti ettha pi-saddena maraṇavasenāpīti sampiṇḍeti.
45 45. 关于“戏忘者”:这是按照作者意图来成立这个词;而“戏忘者”则是按照词本身的意义来使用。不过,为了不顾文法、只显示其含义,才说“由戏”等等。本来应该说“戏污者”,因为插入了一个i音,才这样说。“污”就是染污,戏的染污就是戏污,他们有这个,所以叫戏忘者。有人说“有些本子也写成padūsikā”,这是显示其他部派的误写。因为大寺派住者的注释是依据他们的诵读传承而来的。另外,这也是显示当时书本上的误写。对此也应当依据注释书所定的规则来取舍,以厘清词义,所以说“这在注释书中没有”。“过时”就是超过了时间,就是那个意思。这是中性词,所以说“极久”,意思是已经过了饮食受用的时间。“喜法”这个词应当分别与“笑”和“戏”搭配:“在笑和戏中,喜法就是喜的本性。”笑就是欢笑,就是嬉笑。戏就是玩耍、娱乐,是身体和语言上的游戏。为了显示通过随转而达到那种状态,所以说“喜法”等等。他们有戏,所以是戏者,他们的笑也是这样。由戏和笑的运用所产生的快乐,就是戏笑乐。由剩余的戏的运用所产生的身体和语言之戏的快乐。巴利
45. Khiḍḍāpadosinoti kattuvasena padasiddhi, khiḍḍāpadosikāti pana sakatthavuttivasena, saddamanapekkhitvā pana atthameva dassetuṃ ‘‘khiḍḍāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Khiḍḍāpadosakā’’ti vā vattabbe i-kārāgamavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Padussanaṃ vā padoso, khiḍḍāya padoso khiḍḍāpadoso, so etesanti khiḍḍāpadosikā. ‘‘Padūsikātipi pāḷiṃ likhantī’’ti aññanikāyikānaṃ pamādalekhataṃ dasseti . Mahāvihāravāsīnikāyikānañhi vācanāmaggavasena ayaṃ saṃvaṇṇanā pavattā. Apica tena potthakāruḷhakāle pamādalekhaṃ dasseti. Tampi hi padatthasodhanāya aṭṭhakathāya sodhitaniyāmeneva gahetabbaṃ, tenāha ‘‘sā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ natthī’’ti. Velaṃ atikkantaṃ ativelaṃ, taṃ. Bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ, tenāha ‘‘aticira’’nti, āhārūpabhogakālaṃ atikkamitvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Ratidhamma-saddo hassakhiḍḍā-saddehi paccekaṃ yojetabbo ‘‘hassakhiḍḍāsu ratidhammo ramaṇasabhāvo’’ti. Hasanaṃ hasso, keḷihasso. Kheḍanaṃ kīḷanaṃ khiḍḍā, kāyikavācasikakīḷā. Anuyogavasena taṃsamāpannāti dassento āha ‘‘hassaratidhammañcevā’’tiādi. Kīḷā yesaṃ te keḷino, tesaṃ hasso tathā. Kīḷāhassapayogena uppajjanakasukhañcettha keḷihassasukhaṃ. Tadavasiṭṭhakīḷāpayogena uppajjanakaṃ kāyikavācasikakīḷāsukhaṃ.
“他们传闻”这一段,是为了展开详细说明。这里的“传闻”一词,只是用来点明详细解说的作用,并不是像经文和注释书里所说的那样,表示传闻、喜好之类的意思。所谓“由妙色与丰足”,是指身体美妙等妙色,以及眷属等圆满。“星宿”是指节庆。大多数情况下,是因为依星宿和合而举办,所以不管是否真的与星宿和合,都通称为星宿。“食”这里要问:天神的食物是什么?他们进食的时间是什么时候?一切欲界天神的食物都是甘露。因为远离十二种恶法之障碍而能保持快乐,所以天神的食物称为“甘露”。它白色如螺贝,相貌无与伦比,清净、芬芳、可爱。关于这一点,《甘露食本生》中说:巴利
‘‘Te kirā’’tiādi vitthāradassanaṃ. Kira-saddo hettha vitthārajotakoyeva, na tu anussavanāruciyādijotako tathāyeva pāḷiyaṃ, aṭṭhakathāsu ca vuttattā. Sirivibhavenāti sarīrasobhaggādisiriyā, parivārādisampattiyā ca. Nakkhattanti chaṇaṃ. Yebhuyyena hi nakkhattayogena katattā tathāyogo vā hotu, mā vā, nakkhattamicceva vuccati. Āhāranti ettha ko devānamāhāro, kā ca tesamāhāravelāti? Sabbesampi kāmāvacaradevānaṃ sudhāhāro. Dvādasapāpadhammavigghātena hi sukhassa dhāraṇato devānaṃ bhojanaṃ ‘‘sudhā’’ti vuccati. Sā pana setā saṅkhūpamā atulyadassanā suci sugandhā piyarūpā. Yaṃ sandhāya sudhābhojanajātake vuttaṃ –
像螺贝一样洁白,相貌无与伦比,
清净、芬芳、令人欢喜、奇妙。
我这双眼睛从来没见过这样的景象,
天神们为什么把手里的东西丢掉了呢?
那位女人已被十二次恶用。
饥饿、口渴、不满、以及身体的疲惫;
愤怒、怨恨,以及争吵和挑拨离间的话,
清凉、暖热、疲倦,以及最上等的味道,这些就是。巴利
‘‘Saṅkhūpamaṃ seta’matulyadassanaṃ, Suciṃ sugandhaṃ piyarūpa’mabbhutaṃ; Adiṭṭhapubbaṃ mama jātu cakkhubhi, Kā devatā pāṇisu kiṃ sudho’dahī’’ti. (jā. 2.21.227); ‘‘Bhuttā ca sā dvādasahanti pāpake, Khuddaṃ pipāsaṃ aratiṃ daraklamaṃ; Kodhūpanāhañca vivādapesuṇaṃ, Sītuṇha tandiñca rasuttamaṃ ida’’nti ca. (jā. 2.21.229);
这种食物,越往上就越殊胜。他们各自按照自己的寿量,每天吃一次。有些人说:他们吃的是像猫爪印那么少量的净食,一放到舌头上,就能从发尖到指甲遍满全身,按照各自计算好的天数,能维持七天。不过有些人说,这里“猫爪印”这个词,指的是黄金这一类特定的数量单位。从分量上说,则是像无花果那么大的量,也就是手掌中一口食物的量。正如《蜜桶》中所说:巴利
Sā ca heṭṭhimehi heṭṭhimehi uparimānaṃ uparimānaṃ paṇītatamā hoti, taṃ yathāsakaṃ parimitadivasavasena divase divase bhuñjanti. Keci pana vadanti ‘‘biḷārapadappamāṇaṃ sudhāhāraṃ te bhuñjanti, so jivhāya ṭhapitamatto yāva kesagganakhaggā kāyaṃ pharati, yathāsakaṃ gaṇitadivasavasena satta divase yāpanasamattho hotī’’ti. Kecivāde panettha biḷārapada-saddo suvaṇṇasaṅkhātassa saṅkhyāvisesassa vācako. Pamāṇato pana udumbaraphalappamāṇaṃ, yaṃ pāṇitalaṃ kabaḷaggahantipi vuccati. Vuttañhi madhukose –
手掌大小的量,还有木棉团,以及金,像无花果那么大的量。
猫足般的手掌,那正是用来抓取饭团的东西。巴利
‘‘Pāṇirakkho picu cāpi, suvaṇṇakamudumbaraṃ; Biḷārapadakaṃ pāṇi-talaṃ taṃ kabaḷaggaha’’nti.
“不间断地吃、喝”这句话,是依假设而说的,并不是决定如此,因为实际上吃、喝并非固定如此。业生火的强盛,是因为殊胜福报所生,以及能消化殊胜、厚重、滋润、纯净的天食。而生身的微弱,则是因为极其柔软。正因如此,世尊对在因德娑罗窟中无法在自然地面上站立的帝释天王说:“你应当决意粗重之身。”而人类的业生火微弱、生身强盛,应知与上面所说的相反。这里所说的“生身”,是指身体,即在那里运作的。尘垢是“生”,那是什么?是精血。因为精血是所说的“贪为尘垢,非谓微尘”中贪尘的果报,所以用表示身体的“ka”音加以区别,依因的称呼而称为“生”。因此,诸阿阇梨说:由名为精血的“生”所生起之身,就是“生身”。正如所说,身体是父母所生。而在《大马满经疏》中说:“被作、被投入母胎者为‘作’,即生起;从‘作’而生者为‘生’,即父母所生之义。另有人说:依母等安立,从‘作’即手而生者为‘生’。无论哪种说法,‘生身’都是指四相续色。”也有人说:“能造作、产生子女者为‘作’,即精血;由此而生者为‘生’。”同样,即使不是这样生起的诸天等之身,也依此语词称为“生身”,如同说“腐臭之身、老豺狼”。他们,指人类。所谓“清粥”,是指清澈无渣的粥。“衣”指生身。“一顿食量”,指仅一日之量,但依某些人的说法,则是七日。巴利
‘‘Nirantaraṃ khādantāpi pivantāpī’’ti idaṃ parikappanāvasena vuttaṃ, na pana evaṃ niyamavasena tathā khādanapivanānamaniyamabhāvato. Kammajatejassa balavabhāvo uḷārapuññanibbattattā, uḷāragarusiniddhasudhāhārajīraṇato ca. Karajakāyassa mandabhāvo pana sukhumālabhāvato. Teneva hi bhagavā indasālaguhāyaṃ pakatipathaviyaṃ patiātuṃ asakkontaṃ sakkaṃ devarājānaṃ ‘‘oḷārikaṃ kāyaṃ adhiṭṭhehī’’ti avoca. Manussānaṃ pana kammajatejassa mandabhāvo, karajakāyassa balavabhāvo ca vuttaviparītena veditabbo. Karajakāyoti ettha ko vuccati sarīraṃ, tattha pavatto. Rajo karajo, kiṃ taṃ? Sukkasoṇitaṃ. Tañhi ‘‘rāgo rajo na ca pana reṇu vuccatī’’ti (mahāni. 209; cūḷani. 74) evaṃ vuttarāgarajaphalattā sarīravācakena ka-saddena visesetvā kāraṇavohārena ‘‘karajo’’ti vuccati. Tena sukkasoṇitasaṅkhātena karajena sambhūto kāyo karajakāyoti ācariyā. Tathā hi kāyo mātāpettikasambhavoti vutto. Mahāassapūrasuttantaṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘karīyati gabbhāsaye khipīyatīti karo, sambhavo, karato jātoti karajo, mātāpettikasambhavoti attho. Mātuādīnaṃ saṇṭhāpanavasena karato hatthato jātoti karajoti apare. Ubhayathāpi karajakāyanti catusantatirūpamāhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Karoti putte nibbattetīti karo, sukkasoṇitaṃ, tena jāto karajotipi vadanti. Tathā asambhūtopi ca devādīnaṃ kāyo tabbohārena ‘‘karajakāyo’’ti vuccati yathā ‘‘pūtikāyo, jarasiṅgālo’’ti. Tesanti manussānaṃ. Acchayāgu nāma pasannā akasaṭā yāgu. Vatthunti karajakāyaṃ. Ekaṃ āhāravelanti ekadivasamattaṃ, kesañci matena pana sattāhaṃ.
像这样从随顺和反方面说明之后,又用譬喻来把它讲清楚,说了“犹如名……”等话。“热石”就是极热的石头。从红莲花和白莲花之外剩下的,是青莲花。“在《大义疏》中”就是在《大义疏》里。“无差别地”是说以“诸天”这个词不加区分地说,因为诸天的业生火强盛、生身微弱,或者说,因为业生火和生身这两者强弱这一原因对一切诸天来说是共同的。这个原因对一切诸天都一样,所以说应当把一切诸天都包括进去。“依段食而活”是说他依止已作段食的天食而活命。“某些人”指无畏山寺的住者。“他们仅以嬉戏之染污,故被称为嬉戏染污者”这段文句,应当读在“应知他们即由此死去”之后,因为这是它的后续关联。这里的关联是这样的:如果所有欲界天都这样做而死去,那为什么世尊用“嬉戏染污者”这个特别的名称来说呢?通过考察而这样说,以此显示这个意思:一切诸天虽然都这样死去,但就嬉戏染污只是其自性这一点,才用这个名称差别这样说。如果有人说“这是建立某些人观点的文句”,那是不合理的,因为中间有“iti”这个词,而末尾没有。不过,想要义理的人应当在末尾加上“iti”这个词,以便与某些人的观点相协调。巴利
Evaṃ anvayato byatirekato ca dassetvā upamāvasenapi tamāvikaronto ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tattapāsāṇeti accuṇhapāsāṇe. Rattasetapadumato avasiṭṭhaṃ uppalaṃ. Akathāyanti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ. Avisesenāti ‘‘devāna’’nti avisesena, devānaṃ kammajatejo balavā hoti, karajaṃ mandanti vā kammajatejakarajakāyānaṃ balavamandatāsaṅkhāta kāraṇasāmaññena. Tadetañhi kāraṇaṃ sabbesampi devānaṃ samānameva, tasmā sabbepi devā gahetabbāti vuttaṃ hoti. Kabaḷīkārabhūtaṃ sudhāhāraṃ upanissāya jīvantīti kabaḷīkārāhārūpajīvino. Kecīti abhayagirivāsino. ‘‘Khiḍḍāpadussanamatteneva hete khiḍḍāpadosikāti vuttā’’ti ayaṃ pāṭho ‘‘teyeva cavantīti veditabbā’’ti etassānantare paṭhitabbo tadanusandhikattā. Ayañhetthānusandhi – yadi sabbepi evaṃ karontā kāmāvacaradevā caveyyuṃ, atha kasmā ‘‘khiḍḍāpadosikā’’ti nāmavisesena bhagavatā vuttāti? Vicāraṇāya evamāhāti, etena imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘sabbepi devā evaṃ cavantāpi khiḍḍāya padussanasabhāvamattaṃ pati nāmavisesena tathā vuttā’’ti. Yadeke vadeyyuṃ ‘‘kecivādapatiṭṭhāpakoyaṃ pāṭho’’ti, tadayuttameva iti-saddantarikattā, ante ca tassa avijjamānattā. Atthikehi pana tassa kecivādasamavarodhanaṃ ante itisaddo yojetabboti.
47-48 47-48. “意染污者”这个说法,是从行为者的角度来成立词形的;“意染污”则是从词本身的意义来使用的。为了说明它的含义,才说了“以意……”等话。本来应该说“意染污者”,但这里是通过插入 i 音才这样说。“以意”,是指被嫉妒所败坏的心。另一种解释是:因为嫉妒而以心生起染污,这叫“意染污”;这种染污是他们毁灭的原因,所以他们被称为“意染污者”。由于经文说“他们彼此以染污心,身疲心疲,那些天就从那个身殁”,所以注释者说“这些是四大王天”。他们仅仅以意染污,因此被称为“意染污者”。“据说在他们中……”等是详细解释。“如乘车而行于道路”,这只是一种标示,因为以其他事物在其他地方行走也是可能的。“此”,指的是自身的成就。“如被扬起”,是指因作为原因的喜而像被抬举。“如被破坏”,是指因那喜而像正在破裂,或者因作为行为者的喜而像被破坏。愤怒的人确实容易辨认,因此,了知他的愤怒状态,这就是其含义。巴利
47-48. Manopadosinoti kattuvasena padasiddhi, manopadosikāti ca sakatthavuttivasena, atthamattaṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘manenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Manopadosakā’’ti vā vattabbe i-kārāgamavasena evaṃ vuttaṃ. Manenāti issāpakatattā paduṭṭhena manasā. Aparo nayo – usūyanavasena manasā padoso manopadoso, vināsabhūto so etesamatthīti manopadosikāti. ‘‘Te aññamaññamhi paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā kilantacittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti vacanato ‘‘ete cātumahārājikā’’ti āha. Manena padussanamatteneva hete manopadosikāti vuttā. ‘‘Tesu kirā’’tiādi vitthāro. Rathena vīthiṃ paṭipajjatīti upalakkhaṇamattaṃ aññehi aññatthāpi paṭipajjanasambhavato. Etanti attano sampattiṃ. Uddhumāto viyāti pītiyā karaṇabhūtāya unnato viya. Bhijjamāno viyāti tāya bhijjanto viya, pītiyā vā kattubhūtāya bhañjito viya. Kuddhā nāma suvijānanā honti, tasmā kuddhabhāvamassa ñatvāti attho.
不愤怒的人能保护对方:当一方发怒时,那愤怒对另一方不愤怒的人来说,既没有执取,也只是生起一次而不再被追随,所以无法让对方退堕,就像火到了水边就熄灭一样。因此,不愤怒的人能保护对方免于退堕。但如果双方都愤怒,愤怒就会互相辗转增长,生起越来越尖锐的现行,具有烧毁所依的作用;这种愤怒生起时会烧灼心所依处,破坏极其柔软脆弱的生身,于是整个自体就消失。为了说明这个道理,所以说“然而当双方……”等句。正如经中所说:“他们彼此以染污心,身疲心疲,那些天就从那个身死去。”一方的愤怒成为另一方的缘,另一方的愤怒也成为这一方的缘——这里应当理解,这种缘的作用只是就愤怒辗转增长而言,并不是就退堕而言。因为退堕是由自身的愤怒,以烧毁所依的作用烧灼心所依处,从而使极其柔软脆弱的生身退堕。“正在哭泣的宫女们”,这是表示不敬语气的属格用法。这里的法性是指:由于这些天人的生身微弱,而这样生起的愤怒又很强烈,所以他们必然退堕。这是色法与非色法的法尔规律,就是这里的义理。巴利
Akuddho rakkhatīti kuddhassa so kodho itarasmiṃ akujjhante anupādāno ceva ekavāramattaṃ uppattiyā anāsevano ca hutvā cāvetuṃ na sakkoti, udakantaṃ patvā aggi viya nibbāyati, tasmā akuddho itaraṃ cavanato rakkhati. Ubhosu pana kuddhesu bhiyyo bhiyyo aññamaññamhi parivaḍḍhanavasena tikhiṇasamudācāro nissayadahanaraso kodho uppajjamāno hadayavatthuṃ nidahanto accantasukhumālakarajakāyaṃ vināseti, tato sakalopi attabhāvo antaradhāyati , tamatthaṃ dassetumāha ‘‘ubhosu panā’’tiādi. Tathā cāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘te aññamaññamhi paduṭṭhacittā kilantakāyā kilantacittā te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti. Ekassa kodho itarassa paccayo hoti, tassapi kodho itarassa paccayo hotīti ettha kodhassa bhiyyo bhiyyo parivaḍḍhanāya eva paccayabhāvo veditabbo, na cavanāya nissayadahanarasena attanoyeva kodhena hadayavatthuṃ nidahantena accantasukhumālassa karajakāyassa cavanato. Kandantānaṃyeva orodhānanti anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ. Ayamettha dhammatāti ayaṃ tesaṃ karajakāyamandatāya, tathāuppajjanakassa ca kodhassa balavatāya ṭhānaso cavanabhāvo etesu devesu rūpārūpadhammānaṃ dhammaniyāmo sabhāvoti attho.
49-52 他看见眼等的坏灭,是因为在相违缘聚集时看到变异,以及最终归于不可见,所以看见色法坏灭的粗显性。给予缘,是指以无间缘等方式给予缘力,意思是成为缘,因此与不见相连,意谓即使心更强有力,也因这个原因而不见。所谓更强有力,是就心坏灭更迅速而言。正如在一个色法存续的期间,就有十六个心识坏灭。关于不见心的坏灭,这里应理解为:虽然心刹那刹那地坏灭,但它只是作为其他心的无间缘而坏灭;由于后心生起时仿佛掩盖了前心的不存在,存在的方面显然更强,而非不存在的方面。为了说明这个原因,所以说了然而心等句。此中义理应以无得轮的譬喻来阐明。然而,由于推论者难以把握多相之理,又错误地执取了单一相之理,便生起这样的执著:这个识在任何时候都以这样的形态流转,这就是我的自我,是常住的。因此,为阐明这一义理,便以他不见彼等配合譬喻来作说明。巴利
49-52.Cakkhādīnaṃ bhedaṃ passatīti virodhipaccayasannipāte vikārāpattidassanato, ante ca adassanūpagamanato vināsaṃ passati oḷārikattā rūpadhammabhedassa. Paccayaṃ datvāti anantarapaccayādivasena paccayasattiṃ datvā, paccayo hutvāti vuttaṃ hoti, tasmā na passatīti sambandho, balavatarampi samānaṃ iminā kāraṇena na passatīti adhippāyo. Balavataranti ca cittassa lahutarabhedaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tathā hi ekasmiṃ rūpe dharanteyeva soḷasa cittāni bhijjanti. Cittassa bhedaṃ na passatīti ettha khaṇe khaṇe bhijjantampi cittaṃ parassa anantarapaccayabhāveneva bhijjati, tasmā purimacittassa abhāvaṃ paṭicchādetvā viya pacchimacittassa uppattito bhāvapakkho balavataro pākaṭova hoti, na abhāvapakkhoti idaṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cittaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Ayañcattho alābhacakkanidassanena dīpetabbo. Yasmā pana takkīvādī nānattanayassa duravadhānatāya, ekattanayassa ca micchāgahitattā ‘‘yadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sabbadāpi evarūpena pavattati, ayaṃ me attā nicco’’tiādinā abhinivesaṃ janesi, tasmā tamatthaṃ ‘‘so taṃ apassanto’’tiādinā saha upamāya vibhāveti.
边无边论的注释巴利
Antānantavādavaṇṇanā
53 53. 如果“边无边”是指与边无边相伴而生的言论,比如“矛在行走”这种说法;或者是指依赖于边无边的言论,比如“床在喊叫”这种说法,那么为了说明“这些是属于他们的”,所以称为“边无边论者”,这里就说成“边无边论”。按照前面所说的方式,与边无边相伴而生、或依赖于它、或在边无边范围内生起的言论属于他们,所以他们是边无边论者。现在,为了按照接下来要说的“这个世界是有边的”等经文来分别解释其含义,就说“边或……”等等。“边”的意思是:存在在这里走到尽头、终结,也就是界限;通过否定它,就是“无边”。“边和无边”以及“非边非无边”,通过统称的方式就说成“边无边”,或者像“名色缘六处”等中的省略说法一样。这里第四项和第三项意义相同,所以通过“边无边”这个词,按照上面说的两种方式,可以理解出四种含义。那么,这个“边无边”是谁的呢?那些追求从轮回中解脱的见行者观察它,或者他们在这里造作福、非福及其果报,所以称为“世界”,也就是属于那个被称为“世界”的自我。因此经中说:“他们施设世界为边无边。”那么,这个自我是什么呢?是作为禅那对象的遍相。这个见行者通过扩展,把似相看作有轮围边界或无边界,或者通过传闻等方式,在那里安住于世界想。正如注释书中将要说的:“执取它为‘世界’。”不过有些人说:“禅那以及与之相应的法在这里是自我,被执取为世界。”这与注释书不符。巴利
53. Antānantasahacarito vādo antānanto yathā ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti, antānantasannissayo vā yathā ‘‘mañcā ukkuṭṭhiṃ karontī’’ti, so etesanti antānantikāti atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘antānantavādā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vuttanayena antānantasahacarito, tannissayo vā, antānantesu vā pavatto vādo etesanti antānantavādā. Idāni ‘‘antavā ayaṃ loko’’tiādinā vakkhamānapāṭhānurūpaṃ atthaṃ vibhajanto ‘‘antaṃ vā’’tiādimāha. Amati gacchati bhāvo osānametthāti hi anto, mariyādā , tappaṭisedhanena ananto. Anto ca ananto ca antānanto ca nevantanānanto ca antānanto tveva vutto sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesenavā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1) viya. Catutthapadañhettha tatiyapadena samānatthanti antānantapadeneva yathāvuttanayadvayena catudhā attho viññāyati. Kassa panāyaṃ antānantoti? Lokīyati saṃsāranissaraṇatthikehi diṭṭhigatikehi avapassīyati, lokiyanti vā ettha tehi puññāpuññāni, tabbipāko cāti ‘‘loko’’ti saṅkhyaṃ gatassa attano. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘antānantaṃ lokassa paññapentī’’ti. Ko paneso attāti? Jhānavisayabhūtaṃ kasiṇanimittaṃ. Ayañhi diṭṭhigatiko paṭibhāganimittaṃ cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ, apariyantaṃ vā vaḍḍhanavasena, tadanussavādivasena ca tattha lokasaññī viharati, tathā ca aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vakkhati ‘‘taṃ ‘loko’ti gahetvā’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.54-60) keci pana vadanti ‘‘jhānaṃ, taṃsampayuttadhammā ca idha attā, lokoti ca gahitā’’ti, taṃ aṭṭhakathāya na sameti.
这里有人问:前三种论师是边无边论者,这是合理的,因为他们都是针对“有边”“无边”“有边无边”而提出主张。但最后那位推理者,是以否定这两者而提出主张的,那怎么算是边无边论者呢?正是因为他以否定这两者而提出主张。因为否定边无边的言论,也是以边无边为对象而发起的。注释书正是针对这个意思才说:“针对边、或无边、或边无边、或非边非无边而发起言论。”或者,就像第三种主张那样,由于处所的差别,同一个世界可以既有边又无边;同样,在这里的推理者主张中,由于时间的差别,同一个我也可以兼具这两者,通过互相否定而说这两者,而且这两种否定都是完全遮遣。怎么说呢?因为否定有边,就说无边;否定无边,就说有边。双重否定正是表明本来要说的意思。这样,由于通过否定的方式说出了称为“边无边”的这两者,所以最后这位论师以边无边为对象,是合理的。那么,既然他是边无边论者,不就应当归入第三种主张吗?不,因为这里指的是时间的差别。第三种论师是由于处所的差别而成为边无边论者,最后这位推理者则是由于时间的差别而成为边无边论者。怎么说呢?因为被称为“世界”的这个我,有时被证得殊胜境界的大仙们随闻而说为“无边”,所以不是有边;又因为有时被他们说为“有边”,所以不是无边。这位推理者由于还没有增长、后来才增长,对于似相的增长在两种情况下都可能,只是他自己没有亲证,所以只停留在传闻等上面,依增长的时候否定说“不是有边”,依未增长的时候说“不是无边”,而不是像“非想非非想”那样,从根本上否定有边性和无边性。像随闻推理者这样,对于宿命智推理者等,也应依各自情况配合理解。巴利
Etthāha – yuttaṃ tāva purimānaṃ tiṇṇampi vādīnaṃ antānantikattaṃ antañca anantañca antānantañca ārabbha pavattavādattā, pacchimassa pana takkikassa tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā kathaṃ antānantikattanti? Tadubhayapaṭisedhanavasena pavattavādattā eva. Antānantapaṭisedhanavādopi hi so antānantavisayoyeva tamārabbha pavattattā. Etadatthameva hi sandhāya aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘antaṃ vā antantaṃ vā antānantaṃ vā nevantānānantaṃ vā ārabbha pavattavādā’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā yathā tatiyavāde desapabhedavasena ekasseva lokassa antavatā, anantavatā ca sambhavati, evamettha takkīvādepi kālapabhedavasena ekasseva tadubhayasambhavato aññamaññapaṭisedhena tadubhayaññeva vuccati, dvinnampi ca paṭisedhānaṃ pariyudāsatā. Kathaṃ? Antavantapaṭisedhena hi anantavā vuccati, anantavantapaṭisedhena ca antavā. Dvipaṭisedho hi pakatiyatthañāpako. Iti paṭisedhanavasena antānantasaṅkhātassa ubhayassa vuttattā yuttoyeva tabbisayassa pacchimassāpi antānantikabhāvoti. Yadevaṃ so antānantikavādabhāvato tatiyavādasamavarodheyeva siyāti? Na, kālapabhedassa adhippetattā. Desapabhedavasena hi antānantiko tatiyavādī viya pacchimopi takkiko kālapabhedavasena antānantiko hoti. Kathaṃ? Yasmā ayaṃ lokasaññito attā ananto kadā ci sakkhidiṭṭhoti adhigatavisesehi mahesīhi anusuyyati, tasmā nevantavā. Yasmā panāyaṃ antavā kadāci, sakkhidiṭṭhoti tehiyeva anusuyyati, tasmā nānantavāti. Ayaṃ takkiko avaḍḍhitabhāvapubbakattā paṭibhāganimittānaṃ vaḍḍhitabhāvassa ubhayathā labbhamānassa parikappitassa attano appaccakkhakāritāya anussavādimatte ṭhatvā vaḍḍhitakālavasena ‘‘nevantavā’’ti paṭikkhipati, avaḍḍhitakālavasena pana ‘‘nānantavā’’ti, na pana antatānantatānaṃ accantamabhāvena yathā taṃ ‘‘nevasaññānāsaññā’’ti. Yathā cānussutikatakkino, evaṃ jātissaratakkiādīnampi vasena yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
有些人则说:如果这个“我”是有边的,那么随念过去世投生到远方等作用就没办法产生。如果它是无边的,那么住在这里就能在天界、地狱等处感受苦乐。如果它既是有边又是无边,那就会同时犯上这两种过失。所以,“有边、无边”的“我”是不可记说的——他们就是这样用推论的方式,来描述第四种主张的成立。
可是,如果这个“我”按前面说的方式真的是有边无边的,那为什么经里用“那些沙门婆罗门说‘这个世界是有边的、周圆的’,他们的话是虚妄的”等等(长部1.57),来驳斥前三种主张呢?因为前三种主张和第四种主张所设想的形态特征不一样。正是因为这个道理才那样驳斥,而不是因为它没有有边无边的性质,也不是用“无边际的邪见”这种说法来驳斥——这一点必须这样理解。否则,这第四种主张就会归到不死矫乱派那一类去了。因为,离开了有边性、无边性以及这两者,根本不存在“我”的另一种形态,而推论者走的正是理路这条路。而且,由于时间上的差别,在同一个世界里这两者同时成立也并不矛盾。
好,后两种主张具有有边无边性,这还说得通,因为它们的主张是以有边无边两者为对象的。可是,前两种主张各自单独怎么也能算是有边无边论呢?因为它们各自只以一个为对象啊。回答是:这是因为“有边无边”这个词虽然是在整体上使用的,但也可以引申到各个部分上。就像“有边无边论者”这个说法用在整体上,由于这个词已经固定下来,它也能分别用在各个部分上,即分别的有边论者和无边论者,好比“在无色定中,分别有八解脱的类别”,又好比“世间中有众生居住”。或者,是因为他们先前生起的思惟方式已经固定下来了。那些持邪见的人,因为先前证得了那种心的定,当时以“这个世界是有边的呢,还是无边的呢”这种同时抓取两种方式的思惟而固定下了“有边无边”的性质,后来虽然只得到其中一种特殊主张,被归入有边无边论中的一种,但由于先前已经成立的固定用法,仍然这样称呼,就像“一切众生都有死法”等中,“众生”这个词可以适用,又像转生到别的存在状态中,仍然用“青蛙”等称呼一样。巴利
Keci pana yadi panāyaṃ attā antavā, evaṃ sati dūradese upapajjanānussaraṇādikiccanibbatti na siyā. Atha anantavā, evañca idha ṭhitasseva devalokanirayādīsu sukhadukkhānubhavanaṃ siyā. Sace pana antavā ceva anantavā ca, evampi tadubhayadosasamāyogo siyā. Tasmā ‘‘antavā, anantavā’’ti ca abyākaraṇīyo attāti evaṃ takkanavasena catutthavādappavattiṃ vaṇṇenti. Yadi panesa vuttanayena antānantiko bhaveyya, atha kasmā ‘‘ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā evamāhaṃsu ‘antavā ayaṃ loko parivaṭumo’ti, tesaṃ musā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.57) tassa purimavādattayapaṭikkhepo vuttoti? Purimavādattayassa tena yathādhippetappakāravilakkhaṇabhāvato. Teneva hi kāraṇena tathā paṭikkhepo vutto, na pana tassa antānantikattābhāvena, na ca pariyantarahitadiṭṭhivācāhi paṭikkhepena, avassañcetaṃ evameva ñātabbaṃ. Aññathā hesa amarāvikkhepapakkhaññeva bhajeyya catutthavādo. Na hi antatāanantatātadubhayavinimutto attano pakāro atthi, takkīvādī ca yuttimaggakoyeva. Kālabhedavasena ca ekasmimpi loke tadubhayaṃ no na yujjatīti. Bhavatu tāva pacchimavādīdvayassa antānantikabhāvo yutto antānantānaṃ vasena ubhayavisayattā tesaṃ vādassa. Kathaṃ pana purimavādīdvayassa paccekaṃ antānantikabhāvo yutto siyā ekekavisayattā tesaṃ vādassāti? Vuccate – samudāye pavattamāna-saddassa avayavepi upacāravuttito. Samuditesu hi antānantavādīsu pavattamāno antānanti ka-saddo tattha niruḷhatāya tadavayavesupi paccekaṃ antānantikavādīsu pavattati yathā ‘‘arūpajjhānesu paccekaṃ aṭṭhavimokkhapariyāyo’’, yathā ca ‘‘loke sattāsayo’’ti. Atha vā abhinivesato purimakāle pavattavitakkavasena ayaṃ tattha vohāro kato. Tesañhi diṭṭhigatikānaṃ tathārūpacetosamādhisamadhigamato pubbakāle ‘‘antavā nu kho ayaṃ loko, udāhu anantavā’’ti ubhayākārāvalambino vitakkassa vasena niruḷho antānantikabhāvo pacchā visesalābhena tesu antānantavādesu ekasseva vādassa saṅgahe uppannepi purimasiddharuḷhiyā vohārīyati yathā ‘‘sabbe sattā maraṇadhammā’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.133) arahati sattapariyāyo, yathā ca bhavantaragatepi maṇḍūkādivohāroti.
54-60 为了说明似相的增长:在下方、上方和横向,以轮围世界为界限,依前往和返回,而存在有边与无边的性质,所以说了“似相”等语。“似相”就是指似相。在“上下不增长,横向增长”这一句里,也应该结合“以轮围世界为界限”这个补充说明来理解。按照已经说过的方式,也就是像“他推论,所以叫推论者”等从词源上,以及“有四种推论者”等从意义上,在常见论中所说的方式。“依循曾见”:就是依靠作为见的识,对曾经领受过的有边等加以随念;这样一来,也就成立了对“随闻推论者”和“纯粹推论者”的包含。或者,仅凭“见”这个说法,就应当知道,如同在“观看舞蹈、歌唱、音乐、表演等”中那样,也包含了“闻”等。由于这些见解的生起,正是以执取自己所希求的“我”恒常存在的方式,通过“有边”等说法而进行,所以应当看作属于常见。正如后面将要说的:“只有七种是断见,其余的是常见。”巴利
54-60. Paṭibhāganimittavaḍḍhanāya heṭṭhā, upari, tiriyañca cakkavāḷapariyantagatāgatavasena antānantabhāvoti dassetuṃ ‘‘paṭibhāganimitta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Nti paṭibhāganimittaṃ. Uddhamadho avaḍḍhetvā tiriyaṃ vaḍḍhetvāti etthāpi ‘‘cakkavāḷapariyantaṃ katvā’’ti adhikāravasena yojetabbaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘takkayatīti takkī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34) saddato, ‘‘catubbidho takkī’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.34) atthato ca sassatavāde vuttanayena. Diṭṭhapubbānusārenāti dassanabhūtena viññāṇena upaladdhapubbassa antavantādino anussaraṇena, evañca katvā anussutitakkīsuddhatakkīnampi idha saṅgaho siddho hoti. Atha vā diṭṭhaggahaṇeneva ‘‘naccagītavāditavisūkadassanā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.10, 194) viya sutādīnampi gahitabhāvo veditabbo. ‘‘Antavā’’tiādinā icchitassa attano sabbadābhāvaparāmasanavaseneva imesaṃ vādānaṃ pavattanato sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.97, 98).
不死矫乱论的解说巴利
Amarāvikkhepavādavaṇṇanā
61 “不欢喜”是说:因为没有“正是如此”这样的确定判断,所以它不会中断,只是始终不确定、不偏向一边,这就是这句话的意思。“无边际”就是没有终点、没有结论,这是它的含义。“种种”就是通过“对我来说也不是这样”等说法而表现出各种不同形态。“抛掷”就是用自己的主张去抛掷、驳倒别人的主张。那么,这个“不死矫乱”到底是什么呢?就是那样生起的、以邪见为主导的、能引发那种言说的心念本身。依着不死的邪见和言说而使人混乱,或者以种种方式加以排除,所以称为“不死矫乱者”,他们本身也可以叫“不死矫乱者”。不说“鱼种”而说“一种”,是为了表明这是某一种特定的鱼。它从这里到那里到处游动,因为在任何一种固定状态上都停不住。就像抓不住、捉不到它一样,它也是这样游动不定;因此,不死的矫乱就像那条鱼一样,称为“不死矫乱”。这里是用“矫乱”这个词的含义来作比喻。这个意思舍利弗长老在《心义灯》中也已经说过。另有人说:像不死鱼那样的矫乱,就叫不死矫乱。或者说:像不死鱼那样使人混乱的人,就是不死矫乱者,他们本身就是不死矫乱者。巴利
61.Namaratīti ‘‘evamevā’’ti sanniṭṭhānābhāvena na upacchijjati, anekantikāyeva hotīti vuttaṃ hoti. Pariyantarahitāti osānavigatā, aniṭṭhaṅgatāti attho. Vividhoti ‘‘evampi me no’’tiādinā nānappakāro. Khepoti sakavādena paravādānaṃ khipanaṃ. Ko paneso amarāvikkhepoti? Tathāpavatto diṭṭhippadhāno tādisāya vācāya samuṭṭhāpako cittuppādoyeva. Amarāya diṭṭhiyā, vācāya ca vikkhipanti, vividhamapanentīti vā amarāvikkhepino, teyeva ‘‘amarāvikkhepikā’’tipi yujjati. ‘‘Macchajāti’’ cceva avatvā ‘‘ekā’’ti vadanto macchajātiviseso esoti dasseti. Ito cito ca sandhāvati ekasmiṃ sabhāve anavaṭṭhānato. Yathā gāhaṃ na upagacchati, tathā sandhāvanato, etena amarāya vikkhepo tathā, so viyāti amarāvikkhepoti atthamāha ‘‘sā ummujjananimujjanādivasenā’’tiādinā vikkhepapadatthena upamitattā. Ayameva hi attho ācariyasāriputtattherenāpi sāratthadīpaniyaṃ (sārattha. ṭī. 1.tatiyasaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā) vutto. Amarā viya vikkhepo amarāvikkhepoti keci. Atha vā amarā viya vikkhipantīti amarāvikkhepino, teyeva amarāvikkhepikā.
62 那些主张矫乱论的人,对于上人法和无记法,没有能按各自的自性差别去洞察了知的智慧,所以这里讲善和不善这些词的时候,是就善业道和不善业道本身来说的。恼害就是伤害,就是身体的苦,因为经文说由于生起追悔,这是就它作为忧的因来说的,所以说会成为苦。于妄语这句里,用的是处格,或者也可以理解为离格。意思是说,或者从妄语而生起惭与愧。他陷入的是哪一种不死矫乱呢?回答说无边际的矫乱,这样就排除了第二种,也就是像不死鱼那样的矫乱。因为在所说的两种方式中,这里的意思是按第一种方式来说明的,而为了说明第二种方式,也就是像不死鱼那样的矫乱,接下来就要说被问这是善吗这样的话。巴利
62. Vikkhepavādino uttarimanussadhamme, abyākatadhamme ca (akusaladhammepi dī. ni. ṭī. 1.62) sabhāvabhedavasena paṭivijjhituṃ ñāṇaṃ natthīti kusalākusalapadānaṃ kusalākusalakammapathavaseneva attho vutto. Vighāto vihesā kāyikadukkhaṃ ‘‘vippaṭisāruppattiyā’’ti domanassassa hetubhāvena vacanato, tenāha ‘‘dukkhaṃ bhaveyyā’’ti. Musāvādeti nimitte bhummavacanaṃ, nissakkatthe vā. Musāvādahetu, musāvādato vā ottappena ceva hiriyā cāti attho. Kīdisaṃ amarāvikkhepamāpajjatīti āha ‘‘apariyantavikkhepa’’nti, tena amarāsadisavikkhepasaṅkhātaṃ dutiyanayaṃ nivatteti. Yathāvutte hi nayadvaye paṭhamanayavasenāyamattho dassito, dutiyanayavasena pana amarāsadisavikkhepaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘idaṃ kusalanti puṭṭho’’tiādivacanaṃ vakkhati.
“对我来说也不是这样”:意思是,你所问的那个见解,对我来说也不成立。这个道理在所有地方都应当按合适的方式套用。“无定矫乱”:就是说不固定站在常见等任何一种立场上而作矫乱;当论敌以任何一种方式提问时,一概加以拒绝,这叫做无定矫乱。或者说,注释书里正是用“对我来说也不是这样,乃至无定矫乱”等说法,以及“被问‘这是善吗’或‘这是不善吗’”等说法,来显示无边际的矫乱。因为通过“对我来说也不是这样”等说法,不论是不确定地还是确定地,都对常见、一分常见、断见以及推论者的主张加以否定,这就正是在驳斥那种种主张,因为它是无边际矫乱论。在指出“不死矫乱者”之后,为了显示他自己因为主张不固定,所以不站在任何一方,就说“然而他自己对此……不记说”。现在,为了说明由于对善等不作记说而体现出的那种不固定,就说“被问‘这是善吗’”等等。因此说“不站在任何一方”。“怎么不是呢?”意思是:你的见解是“不是”吗?这就是它的意思。“对我来说也不是不是”:意思是“不是不是”这样的见解,对我来说也不成立。巴利
‘‘Evantipi me no’’ti yaṃ tayā puṭṭhaṃ, taṃ evantipi me laddhi no hotīti attho. Evaṃ sabbattha yathārahaṃ. Aniyamitavikkhepoti sassatādīsu ekasmimpi pakāre aṭṭhatvā vikkhepakaraṇaṃ, paravādinā yasmiṃ kismiñci pakāre pucchite tassa paṭikkhepavikkhepoti vuttaṃ hoti. Atha vā apariyantavikkhepadassanaṃyeva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ kataṃ ‘‘evantipi me noti aniyamitavikkhepo’’tiādinā, ‘‘idaṃ kusalanti vā akusalanti vā puṭṭho’’tiādinā ca. ‘‘Evantipi me no’’tiādinā hi aniyametvā, niyametvā ca sassatekaccasassatucchedatakkīvādānaṃ paṭisedhanena taṃ taṃ vādaṃ paṭikkhipateva apariyantavikkhepavādattā. ‘‘Amarāvikkhepino’’ti dassetvā attanā pana anavaṭṭhitavādattā na kismiñci pakkhe avatiṭṭhatīti imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sayaṃ pana idaṃ…pe… na byākarotī’’ti āha. Idāni kusalādīnaṃ abyākaraṇena tadeva anavaṭṭhānaṃ vibhāveti ‘‘idaṃ kusalanti puṭṭho’’tiādinā. Tenevāha ‘‘ekasmimpi pakkhe na tiṭṭhatī’’ti. Kiṃ no noti te laddhīti neva na hotīti tava laddhi hoti kinti attho. No notipi me noti neva na hotītipi me laddhi no hoti.
63 63. 为了依着与自身智者身份相应的贪等来作连接,所以说了“即使不知道……”等话。“突然地”是指没有经过审察、急速地。“贤面”是智者之间惯用的称呼,意思是“善妙的面容”。“在那里”指在那番记说中,这里的处格表示所缘。欲贪和贪这两个词虽然意思相同,但因为“或”字表示简别,按“牛与阉牛”这类方式,它们意义有别是妥当的,所以说“欲是弱贪,贪是强贪”。嗔与恚也是这样。“竟连这么一点也……”中,“api”一词用于聚合,“nāma”一词用于呵责。意思是不但比这更进一步,而且我竟连这么一点也不知道,更何况知道比这更进一步的呢?然而,依着他人所作恭敬等相同对象的贪等,这个连接是这样的:即使不能如实了知善与不善,对于我以亲近而会记说“善”就是善、“不善”就是不善的那些人,在他们由于如此记说的原因而作“啊,确实这位是智者”这样的恭敬尊重时,我的欲或贪可能存在。嗔与恚也应按所说的相反方式连接。“那将是我的取著,那将是我的障碍”,这是依阿毗达磨的方式(《法集论》1219等)随所得而说,随可能而连接,所以说“欲贪二者”等。因为渴爱与邪见在阿毗达磨中才被称为“取著”(《法集论》1219等),现在依经的方式显示不加分别的连接,以“或者两者”等。因为在经中,嗔也被称为“取著”,如“由忿取著所系而遭障碍”(《长部注》1.63)等,并且“或者两者”也是依意义而说,不是依词句,因为四个词都表示两种意义。“坚执”是不放舍的执取。因为恚也不放舍所缘,由于随恨等而转起;为了显示由于贪的取著性明显,嗔也有取著性,所以说了这个。杀害、伤害、损害。因为贪也由于遍烧而现起热恼,所以损害所依。“贪 indeed”等,是通过显示贪嗔有取著性的差别,来成立其义。由于想要毁灭而执取所缘,这是连接。因此,由于执取和损害。巴利
63. Attano paṇḍitabhāvavisayānaññeva rāgādīnaṃ vasena yojanaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘ajānantopī’’tiādimāha. Sahasāti anupadhāretvā vegena. ‘‘Bhadramukhāti paṇḍitānaṃ samudāciṇṇamālapanaṃ, sundaramukhāti attho. Tatthāti tasmiṃ byākaraṇe, nimitte cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Chandarāgapadānaṃ samānatthabhāvepi vikappanajotakena vā-saddena yogyattā gobalībaddādinayena bhinnatthatāva yuttāti āha ‘‘chando dubbalarāgo,rāgo balavarāgo’’ti. Dosapaṭighesupi eseva nayo. Ettakampi nāmāti ettha api-saddo sampiṇḍane vattati, nāma-saddo garahāyaṃ. Na kevalaṃ ito uttaritarameva, atha kho ettakampi na jānāmi nāma, pageva taduttarijānaneti attho. Parehi katasakkārasamānavisayānaṃ pana rāgādīnaṃ vasena ayaṃ yojanā – kusalākusalaṃ yathābhūtaṃ apajānantopi yesamahaṃ samavāyena kusalameva ‘‘kusala’’nti, akusalameva ‘‘akusala’’nti ca byākareyyaṃ, tesu tathā byākaraṇahetu ‘‘aho vata re paṇḍito’’ti sakkārasammānaṃ karontesu mama chando vā rāgo vā assāti. Dosapaṭighesupi vuttavipariyāyena yojetabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṃ mamassa upādānaṃ, so mamassa vighāto’’ti idaṃ abhidhammanayena (dha. sa. 1219 ādayo) yathālābhavacanaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbanti āha ‘‘chandarāgadvaya’’ntiādi. Taṇhādiṭṭhiyo eva hi ‘‘upādāna’’nti abhidhamme vuttā (dha. sa. 1219 ādayo) idāni suttantanayena avisesayojanaṃ dasseti ‘‘ubhayampi vā’’tiādinā. Suttante hi dosopi ‘‘upādāna’’nti vutto ‘‘kodhupādānavinibandhā vighātaṃ āpajjantī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.63) ‘‘ubhayampī’’ti ca atthato vuttaṃ, na saddato catunnampi saddānamatthadvayavācakattā. Daḷhaggahaṇanti amuñcanaggahaṇaṃ. Paṭighopi hi ārammaṇaṃ na muñcati upanāhādivasena pavattanato, lobhasseva upādānabhāvena pākaṭattā dosassāpi upādānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ. Vihananaṃ vihiṃsanaṃ vibādhanaṃ. Rāgopi hi pariḷāhavasena sāraddhavuttitāya nissayaṃ vihanati. ‘‘Rāgo hī’’tiādinā rāgadosānaṃ upādānabhāve visesadassanamukhena tadatthasamatthanaṃ. Vināsetukāmatāya ārammaṇaṃ gaṇhātīti sambandho. Itīti tasmā gahaṇavihananato.
64 “Paṇḍā”的意思是:能了知自性之法,或者按自性而趣向,所以称为智者;具有这种智的人们就是“智者”(paṇḍitā)。为了显示这个含义,所以说“以智性……”等。智者的状态就是智性,也就是慧。因为与那个作为生起之因的法相应,才被称为“智者”,那个法本身就是智性。由此说的是闻所成慧和思所成慧,因为它们正是那个智性的所缘。而证得等至的人,则有修所成慧。通过“微细”这个词,说的是由业所生的结生慧,也就是本性智,因此说“具有微细敏锐的智慧”。“异义”指意义的差别,或者就是指意义本身。通过“了知他宗之说”这句话,显示“kata”这个词和“katavijja”(已学明)等用法一样,是通说动作的共性,表示致力于智,所以说“已学明”。“已习论”则和“katasippa”(已学技艺)等用法一样,表示惯习论说。这两者之间,应当理解为用两种合集来作通释,或者视为省略了其中一者。能射毛端者的形相,就像其形相就是他们的本性,所以称“毛端射者相”,因此说“如同能射毛端的射手”。意思是:如同能射穿裂为百分之一的毫毛尖端的射手。正是那样的人,才被称为“毛端射者”。“maññe”这个词是表示譬喻的,所以说“如同在剖析”。以慧所趣入,就是以慧的分别,或者就是以慧本身。质问是对其见解的询问。为了显示诘问是对其理由的追问,所以说“什么是善……”等。教诫也是以教示为形式的质问,因此说“会质问”。“不能成就”中,为了显示“d”音变为“y”音,以及“eyya”这个词表示可能义,所以说“不能成就”等。巴利
64. Paḍati sabhāvadhamme jānāti, yathāsabhāvaṃ vā gacchatīti paṇḍā, sā yesaṃ te paṇḍitāti atthaṃ dasseti ‘‘paṇḍiccenā’’tiādinā. Paṇḍitassa bhāvo paṇḍiccaṃ, paññā. Yena hi dhammena pavattinimittabhūtena yutto ‘‘paṇḍito’’ti vuccati, soyeva dhammo paṇḍiccaṃ. Tena sutacintāmayapaññā vuttā tāsameva visayabhāvato. Samāpattilābhino hi bhāvanāmayapaññā. ‘‘Nipuṇā’’ti iminā pana kammanibbattaṃ paṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātaṃ sābhāvikañāṇaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘saṇhasukhumabuddhino’’ti. Atthantaranti atthanānattaṃ, atthameva vā. ‘‘Viññātaparappavādā’’ti etena kata-saddassa kiriyāsāmaññavācakattā ‘‘katavijjo’’tiādīsu viya kata-saddo ñāṇānuyuttataṃ vadatīti dasseti. ‘‘Katavādaparicayā’’ti etena pana ‘‘katasippo’’tiādīsu viya samudāciṇṇavādataṃ. Ubhinnamantarā pana samuccayadvayena sāmaññaniddesaṃ, ekasesaṃ vāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Vālavedhīnaṃ rūpaṃ sabhāvo viya rūpametesanti vālavedhirūpāti āha ‘‘vālavedhidhanuggahasadisā’’ti. Satadhā bhinnassa vālaggassa aṃsukoṭivedhakadhanuggahasadisāti attho. Tādisoyeva hi ‘‘vālavedhī’’ti adhippeto. Maññe-saddo upamājotakoti vuttaṃ ‘‘bhindantā viyā’’ti. Paññāgatenāti paññāpabhedena, paññāya eva vā. Samanuyuñjanā laddhiyā pucchā. Samanugāhanā taṃkāraṇassāti dasseti ‘‘kiṃ kusala’’ntiādinā. Samanubhāsanāpi ovādavasena samanuyuñjanāyevāti āha ‘‘samanuyuñjeyyu’’nti. ‘‘Na sampāyeyya’’nti ettha da-kārassa ya-kārādesataṃ, eyya-saddassa ca sāmatthiyatthataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na sampādeyya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
65-66 65-66. 慧迟钝、不锐利,就是“钝慧”,所以经文说“这确实是无慧者的称呼”。本来应该说“mohamūho”,但省略了“ha”音,就说成“momūho”;这也是为了表达极度之意,因为这两个同义词合起来有更强的意思,就像说“padaṭṭhāna”那样,所以说成“极度愚痴”。事情已经成立之后还要再说一次,或者是为了确定,或者是为了说明另一种含义。就像过去是依业而来,现在也是如此而来,所以叫“如来”,也就是有情。在这里,前三种人虽然也不了解善等诸法的自性,确实也有迟钝的一面,但他们对自己不了解善等法这件事还是有所了解的,所以有差别。最后一种人则没有这种了解,因此才用迟钝、极度愚痴来描述他。难道这最后一种人对自己不了解法这件事也没有了解吗?因为经文有“如果我认为‘有他世’,你问我‘有他世’,我就会回答‘有他世’,但我也不会这样说”等等。虽然他有这种了解,但他并不像前三种人那样,对于未遍知法而作答、妄语等有害怕和厌离的表现,他只是极度愚痴,所以才这样说他。或者,“但我也不会这样说”等等,只是为了在回答问题时制造混乱,才说“如果你问我‘有他世’”,这只是搁置问题,并不是对自己不了解法的了解,所以他才被特别说成“迟钝、极度愚痴”。正因为如此,针对持这种说法的人——散若耶毗罗梨子——才说:“而此人在这些沙门、婆罗门中是最愚、最痴的。”其中,“有他世”是依常见、或依正见而问。如果问者是执邪见的人,就依常见而问;如果是持正见的人,就依正见而问;两种都说得通。“没有他世”是依断见、或依正见而问。“也有他世也没有他世”是依断灭见、或依正见而问。“既非有他世也非无他世”则是因为在否定前面三种说法之后,不可能再有别的说法,所以“有”“无”都不可说的这种他世,正是以混乱为优先,或依正见而问。其余三组四句也应按照所说的方式理解。就像以福行等三行一样,以身行等三行所摄的前一组四句,其义也已被其余三组四句以执取众生、福等果报的责难方式所摄。这里应当知道,第三组四句说的是福等业有果报,其余三组四句说的则是执取众生,这就是责难的方式。巴利
65-66. Mandā atikkhā paññā yassāti mandapañño, tenāha ‘‘apaññassevetaṃ nāma’’nti. ‘‘Mohamūho’’ti vattabbe ha-kāralopena ‘‘momūho’’ti vuttaṃ, tañca atisayatthadīpakaṃ pariyāyadvayassa atirekatthabhāvatoti yathā ‘‘padaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ ‘‘atisammūḷho’’ti. Siddhe hi sati punārambho niyamāya vā hoti, atthantaraviññāpanāya vā. Yathā pubbe kammunā āgato, tathā idhāpīti tathāgato, satto. Ettha ca kāmaṃ purimānampi tiṇṇaṃ kusalādidhammasabhāvānavabodhato attheva mandabhāvo, tesaṃ pana attano kusalādidhammānavabodhassa avabodhanato viseso atthīti. Pacchimoyeva tadabhāvato mandamomūhabhāvena vutto. Nanu ca pacchimassāpi attano dhammānavabodhassa avabodho atthiyeva ‘‘atthi paro loko’ti iti ce me assa, ‘atthi paro loko’ti iti te naṃ byākareyyaṃ, evantipi me no’’tiādivacanatoti? Kiñcāpi atthi, na pana tassa purimānaṃ viya apariññātadhammabyākaraṇanimittamusāvādādibhāyanajigucchanākāro atthi, atha kho mahāmūḷhoyevāti tathāvesa vutto. Atha vā ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇatthaṃ ‘‘atthi paro loko’’ti iti ce maṃ pucchasīti pucchāṭhapanameva tena dassīyati, na attano dhammānavabodhāvabodhoti ayameva visesena ‘‘mando momūho’’ti vutto. Teneva hi tathāvādīnaṃ sañcayaṃ belaṭṭhaputtaṃ ārabbha ‘‘ayañca imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’ti (dī. ni. 1.181) vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘atthi paro loko’’ti sassatadassanavasena, sammādiṭṭhivasena vā pucchā. Yadi hi diṭṭhigatiko sassatadassanavasena puccheyya, yadi ca sammādiṭṭhiko sammādassanavasenāti dvidhāpi attho vaṭṭati. ‘‘Natthi paro loko’’ti natthikadassanavasena, sammādiṭṭhivasena vā, ‘‘atthi ca natthi ca paro loko’’ti ucchedadassanavasena, sammādiṭṭhivasena vā, ‘‘nevatthi na natthi paro loko’’ti vuttapakārattayapaṭikkhepe sati pakārantarassa asambhavato atthitānatthitāhi na vattabbākāro paro lokoti vikkhepaññeva purakkhārena , sammādiṭṭhivasena vā pucchā. Sesacatukkattayepi vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo. Puññasaṅkhārattiko viya hi kāyasaṅkhārattikena purimacatukkasaṅgahito eva attho sesacatukkattayena sattaparāmāsapuññādisaphalatācodanānayena (attaparāmāsapuññādiphalatācodanānayena dī. ni. ṭī. 1.65, 66) saṅgahito. Ettha hi tatiyacatukkena puññādikammasaphalatāya, sesacatukkattayena ca sattaparāmāsatāya codanānayo vuttoti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
不死矫乱论者因为自己不喜欢常见等观点,所以到处都用“对我来说也不是这样”这类话,专门制造混乱。其中,“对我来说也不是这样”这类说法,就是通过否定各处被问到的情形,来展示他扰乱的方式。那为什么说矫乱论者在一切地方都只是否定呢?难道“正是如此”这种认可,不也因为它属于矫乱论这一方,而显得合理吗?不是的,因为即使在那种认可里,他仍然是迷惑的,而且矫乱论正是以否定的方式展开的。就像散若耶毗罗梨子被阿阇世王问及现见的沙门果时,正是通过否定他世存在等方式,作出了矫乱的回答。巴利
Amarāvikkhepiko pana sassatādīnaṃ attano aruccanatāya sabbattha ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādinā vikkhepaññeva karoti. Tattha ‘‘evantipi me no’’tiādi tattha tattha pucchitākārapaṭisedhanavasena vikkhepākāradassanaṃ. Kasmā pana vikkhepavādino paṭikkhepova sabbattha vutto. Nanu vikkhepapakkhassa ‘‘evameva’’nti anujānanampi vikkhepapakkhe avaṭṭhānato yuttarūpaṃ siyāti? Na, tatthāpi tassa sammūḷhattā, paṭikkhepavaseneva ca vikkhepavādassa pavattanato. Tathā hi sañcayo belaṭṭhaputto raññā ajātasattunā sandiṭṭhikaṃ sāmaññaphalaṃ puṭṭho paralokatthitādīnaṃ paṭisedhanamukheneva vikkhepaṃ byākāsi.
这里有人问:难道这个不死矫乱论者,不也是因为不能如实了知善等诸法以及他世存在等事,才在处处被问到时,对问题只是陷入混乱回避吗?那么,他怎么能算是具足邪见的人呢?因为,仅仅因为不知道被问的意思而混乱回避,就像不愿回答的人一样,这并不足以构成具足邪见,不是吗?回答说:并非仅仅因为对问题混乱回避,他就成为具足邪见的人,而是因为邪执。正是由于执取常见而陷入邪执的人,因为智慧低劣,不能如实了知善等诸法以及他世存在等事,又因为无法让别人理解他自己都不明白的意思,并且害怕妄语,所以才陷入混乱回避。正如后面将会说:“其中七种是断见,其余的是常见。”或者,因为不了知福与非福及其果报,也不信受,于是生起容忍和喜好,认为“对涉及这些问题的问题,混乱回避才是好的”,这样执取的人,便单独生起了这样一种邪见,就像七支见一样,应当这样理解。正如所说:“对具足邪见的人来说,其见和语是没有边际的。”至于所说的“这四种人也是因为依循先前已生起的法而执取见,所以被归入前际分别论者”,这是就这种不死矫乱论被归摄于常见而说的。那么,它为什么被归摄于常见呢?因为不执取断见。世上并没有任何人能如实了知诸法,因为世间争论太多。而“正是如此”这个说法,在世间对法的观察是没有起始时间的,所以,在这里因为可以获得常见这一边,就应当理解它被归摄于常见。巴利
Etthāha – nanu cāyaṃ sabbopi amarāvikkhepiko kusalādayo dhamme, paralokatthitādīni ca yathābhūtaṃ anavabujjhamāno tattha tattha pañhaṃ puṭṭho pucchāya vikkhepanamattaṃ āpajjati, atha tassa kathaṃ diṭṭhigatikabhāvo siyā. Na hi avattukāmassa viya pucchitatthamajānantassa vikkhepakaraṇamattena diṭṭhigatikatā yuttāti? Vuccate – na heva kho pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇamattena tassa diṭṭhigatikatā, atha kho micchābhinivesavasena. Sassatābhinivesavasena hi micchābhiniviṭṭhoyeva puggalo mandabuddhitāya kusalādidhamme, paralokatthitādīni ca yāthāvato appaṭibujjhamāno attanā aviññātassa atthassa paraṃ viññāpetumasakkuṇeyyatāya musāvādabhayena ca vikkhepamāpajjatīti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.97, 98) atha vā puññapāpānaṃ, tabbipākānañca anavabodhena, asaddahanena ca tabbisayāya pucchāya vikkhepakaraṇameva sundaranti khantiṃ ruciṃ uppādetvā abhinivisantassa uppannā visuṃyevesā ekā diṭṭhi sattabhaṅgadiṭṭhi viyāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘pariyantarahitā diṭṭhigatikassa diṭṭhi ceva vācā’’ cāti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.61). Yaṃ panetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘imepi cattāro pubbe pavattadhammānusāreneva diṭṭhiyā gahitattā pubbantakappikesu paviṭṭhā’’ti, tadetassa amarāvikkhepavādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgahavaseneva vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ panassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgahoti? Ucchedavasena anabhinivesanato. Natthi hi koci dhammānaṃ yathābhūtavedī vivādabahulattā lokassa. ‘‘Evameva’’nti pana saddantarena dhammanijjhānanā anādikālikā loke, tasmā sassatalesassa ettha labbhanato sassatadiṭṭhiyā etassa saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
无因生论的注释巴利
Adhiccasamuppannavādavaṇṇanā
67 无因生是指:对被称为“自我与世界”的诸蕴,把“无因生起”这种样子当作所缘来看待的见解,也就是认为任何事物都没有先行的智慧作原因,只随着自己的欲望就生起。它之所以叫无因生,是因为它正是依着这种样子而转起,并且与这种样子同时存在,就像说“床在叫喊,矛在烹煮”那样;或者,这是“无因生之见”省略了后面的词,只说成“无因生”,就像把“色有”说成“色”一样。正是针对这个意思,才说了“无因生”等话。无因而生是指:没有原因,随着自己的欲望而生起。巴利
67. Adhicca yadicchakaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ kassaci buddhipubbaṃ vinā samuppannoti attalokasaññitānaṃ khandhānaṃ adhiccuppattiākārārammaṇadassanaṃ adhiccasamuppannaṃ tadākārasannissayeneva pavattito, tadākārasahacaritato ca yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosanti, kuntā pacarantī’’ti, adhiccasamuppannadassanaṃ vā antapadalopena adhiccasamuppannaṃ yathā ‘‘rūpabhavo rūpa’’nti, imamatthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘adhiccasamuppanno’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Akāraṇasamuppannanti kāraṇamantarena yadicchakaṃ samuppannaṃ.
68-73 “无想有情”这里,“无想”这个词的意思就是如此。“开示之首”是指:因为被当作开示中最首要、最核心的内容来把握,所以世尊是以“想”为纲领来作这次开示的,并不是说在那里其他非色法的法也存在。这一点正是通过“无心转起”等说法来显示的。因为世尊开示出世间法时,是以定或慧为纲领来开示;同样地,开示世间法时,则是以心或想为纲领。其中,“当修习出世间禅时”“五支正定”“五智正定”“以慧见已,他的诸漏已尽”,以及“当欲界善心生起时”“比丘,你以什么心”“诸法以意为前导”“诸比丘,有有情身异想异”“非想非非想处”等等,这些经文都是这个道理的证明。“外道处”:“外道”被称为邪执,因为愚人大多在那里流转,而且那里是他们越过的地方;它本身又是许多无意义之事的所在,也是外道生起之处、居住之处,所以叫“处”,合起来就是“外道处”。这里指的是其他外道的教说。因为外道把某种殊胜的投生当作解脱,他们看不到想有离染与未离染中的过患和功德,于是修成无想定,投生到无暇之地;而佛弟子不是这样。所以说“有一类人在外道处出家”。“在风遍上作准备”是指:在第四种所造色遍——也就是风遍上,先修成前三种禅那,在第三禅中练到自在,从那里出来后,为了证得第四禅而作准备。因此才说“修成第四禅”。巴利
68-73.Asaññasattāti ettha etaṃ asaññāvacananti attho. Desanāsīsanti desanāya jeṭṭhakaṃ padhānabhāvena gahitattā, tena saññaṃ dhuraṃ katvā bhagavatā ayaṃ desanā katā, na pana tattha aññesaṃ arūpadhammānampi atthitāyāti dasseti, tenevāha ‘‘acittuppādā’’tiādi. Bhagavā hi yathā lokuttaradhammaṃ desento samādhiṃ, paññaṃ vā dhuraṃ katvā deseti, evaṃ lokiyadhammaṃ desento cittaṃ, saññaṃ vā. Tattha ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ jhānaṃ bhāveti (dha. sa. 277), pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi (dī. ni. 3.355) pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhi, (dī. ni. 3.355; vibha. 804) paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā hontī’’ti, tathā ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hoti, (dha. sa. 1) kiṃ citto tvaṃ bhikkhu (pārā. 146, 180) manopubbaṅgamā dhammā, (dha. pa. 1; netti. 90; peṭako. 83, 84) santi bhikkhave, sattā nānattakāyā nānattasaññino, (dī. ni. 3.332, 341, 357; a. ni. 7.44; a. ni. 9.24; cūḷani. 83) nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’nti (dī. ni. 3.358) ca evamādīni suttāni etassatthassa sādhakāni. Titthaṃ vuccati micchāladdhi tattheva bāhullena paribbhamanato taranti bālā etthāti katvā, tadeva anappakānamanatthānaṃ titthiyānañca sañjātidesaṭṭhena, nivāsaṭṭhena vā āyatananti titthāyatanaṃ, tasmiṃ, aññatitthiyasamayeti attho. Titthiyā hi upapattivisese vimuttisaññino, saññāvirāgāvirāgesu ādīnavānisaṃsadassāvino ca hutvā asaññasamāpattiṃ nibbattetvā akkhaṇabhūmiyaṃ upapajjanti, na sāsanikā, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekacco titthāyatane pabbajitvā’’ti. Vāyokasiṇe parikammaṃ katvāti catutthe bhūtakasiṇe paṭhamādīni tīṇi jhānāni nibbattetvā tatiyajjhāne ciṇṇavasī hutvā tato vuṭṭhāya catutthajjhānādhigamāya parikammaṃ katvā, tenevāha ‘‘catutthajjhānaṃ nibbattetvā’’ti.
那么,为什么这里只说到以风遍作为准备修行呢?回答是:正如在那些作为色法影像的特定遍处中,通过显现色法而证得被称为“离色修习”的无色等至这一殊胜状态;同样地,在作为无色法影像、其形态尚未明晰的特定遍处中,通过显现无色法而证得被称为“离无色修习”的色等至这一殊胜状态。因此,在这里,依照“想是病,想是疮”等说法,以及“心可鄙,心飘忽”等说法的方式,通过观察无色法运作的过患,以及在无色法不存在时确认寂静殊胜的状态,来造作色等至;而离色修习连同近行定,则是无色等至,特别是指初无色禅。如果是这样,那就应该也说“在限定虚空遍中”才对。因为那个限定虚空遍也能获得无色法影像啊?对某些人来说确实应该这么说,但先代阿阇黎因为没有采纳,所以没有说。正如离色修习是在仅仅具有可厌离法性的事物上生起厌离后,在作为可厌离法影像的特定所缘中生起;同样地,说离无色修习也没有矛盾。然而,由于那种等至只有外道才会进入,而且他们是依照所缘部分的相而进入该禅那的,先代阿阇黎看到这个理由,所以应当知道:只在第四遍处——即真实遍处——才说离无色修习的准备修行。还有更进一步的理由:在色遍中,就像在前三种真实遍处中一样,只是色法的影像成为禅那的概念所缘,这是随顺世间惯例而说的;这样说来,在《清净道论》中,把地遍比喻为镜中月轮的说法也就成立了。但在第四种真实遍处中,只有真实法的影像成为禅那的所缘,因此说它适合作为无色法影像才是合理的。所以应当知道:只说以风遍作为准备修行。巴利
Kasmā panettha vāyokasiṇeyeva parikammaṃ vuttanti? Vuccate – yatheva hi rūpapaṭibhāgabhūtesu kasiṇavisesesu rūpavibhāvanena rūpavirāgabhāvanāsaṅkhāto arūpasamāpattiviseso sacchikarīyati, evaṃ aparibyattaviggahatāya arūpapaṭibhāgabhūte kasiṇavisese arūpavibhāvanena arūpavirāgabhāvanāsaṅkhāto rūpasamāpattiviseso adhigamīyati, tasmā ettha ‘‘saññā rogo saññā gaṇḍo’’tiādinā, (ma. ni. 3.24) ‘‘dhi cittaṃ, dhibbate taṃ citta’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.68-73) ca nayena arūpapavattiyā ādīnavadassanena, tadabhāve ca santapaṇītabhāvasanniṭṭhānena rūpasamāpattiyā abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ, rūpavirāgabhāvanā pana saddhiṃ upacārena arūpasamāpattiyo visesena paṭhamāruppajjhānaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘paricchinnākāsakasiṇepī’’ti vattabbaṃ. Tassāpi hi arūpapaṭibhāgatā labbhatīti? Vattabbamevetaṃ kesañci, avacanaṃ pana pubbācariyehi aggahitabhāvena. Yathā hi rūpavirāgabhāvanā virajjanīyadhammabhāvamatte parinibbindā (virajjanīyadhamma bhāvamattena parinipphannā dī. ni. ṭī. 1.6-73) virajjanīyadhammapaṭibhāgabhūte ca visayavisese pātubhavati, evaṃ arūpavirāgabhāvanāpīti vuccamāne na koci virodho. Titthiyeheva pana tassā samāpattiyā paṭipajjitabbatāya, tesañca visayapadesanimittasseva tassa jhānassa paṭipattito taṃ kāraṇaṃ passantehi pubbācariyehi catuttheyeva bhūtakasiṇe arūpavirāgabhāvanāparikammaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kiñca bhiyyo – vaṇṇakasiṇesu viya purimabhūtakasiṇattayepi vaṇṇapaṭicchāyāva paṇṇattiārammaṇaṃ jhānassa lokavohārānurodheneva pavattito, evañca katvā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.96) pathavīkasiṇassa ādāsacandamaṇḍalūpamāvacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti. Catutthe pana bhūtakasiṇe bhūtapaṭicchāyā eva jhānassa gocarabhāvaṃ gacchatīti tasseva arūpapaṭibhāgatā yuttā, tasmā vāyokasiṇeyeva parikammaṃ vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
“如何见?”所以接着说“有心时”等等。“寂静”就是已般涅槃,这里说的是现法涅槃。“命终”就是死亡;或者也可以理解为:人在世间靠各种资助条件维持的那段寿命,已经做完了、结束了。“生于无想有情天”就是只以色结生的方式,投生到称为无想有情的那一类众生中;也可以理解为,因为别的轮围世界也有那样的地方,所以这是就多种情况而作的广泛说明。“就在那里”就是只在五蕴有中。“在彼处”就是在无想有中。如果无想有中只现起色蕴,那么没有无色法的依托,色法在那里怎么还能运转呢?难道不是只有依托无色法,色蕴才能生起,而在这里的五蕴有中却看不到这样的生起吗?这种追问在别处也不是没有涉及:没有色的依托,无色界的无色法怎么还能运转?这也属于同一类问题。为什么?因为在这里也看不到。没有段食,色界中的色法怎么还能运转?这也同样是同类问题。什么原因?因为在这里也看不到。既然在别处也能看到那样运转,何必还要用这种在这里看不到的追问来为难呢?再者,就像某个心相续的生起因,是对色还未离贪,那么它就和色一起生起,因此依色而运转,因为它的因还依赖色;而如果某个心相续的生起因,是对色已经离贪,那么它没有色也能运转,因为它的因不依赖色。同样,如果某种色相续的生起因,是对无色已经离贪,那么它没有无色也能运转,因为它的因不依赖无色。就像没有修习力量的人,在五蕴有中色与无色一起生起;而有修习力量的人,在四蕴有中只有无色生起;同样,在无想有中,也应该看到只有色依靠修习力量而生起。巴利
Kathaṃ passatīti āha ‘‘citte satī’’tiādi. Santoti nibbuto, diṭṭhadhammanibbānametanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kālaṃ katvāti maraṇaṃ katvā, yo vā manussaloke jīvanakālo upatthambhakapaccayehi karīyati, taṃ karitvātipi attho. Asaññasattesu nibbattatīti asaññasattasaṅkhāte sattanikāye rūpapaṭisandhivaseneva upapajjati, aññesu vā cakkavāḷesu tassā bhūmiyā atthitāya anekavidhabhāvaṃ sandhāya puthuvacananiddesotipi daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idhevāti pañcavokārabhaveyeva. Tatthāti asaññībhave. Yadi rūpakkhandhamattameva asaññībhave pātubhavati, kathaṃ arūpasannissayena vinā tattha rūpaṃ pavattati, nanu siyā arūpasannissitāyeva rūpakkhandhassa uppatti idheva pañcavokārabhave tathā uppattiyā adassanatoti ? Nāyamanuyogo aññatthāpi appaviṭṭho, kathaṃ pana rūpasannissayena vinā arūpadhātuyā arūpaṃ pavattatīti. Idampi hi tena samānajātiyameva. Kasmā? Idheva adassanato, kathañca kabaḷīkārāhārena vinā rūpadhātuyā rūpaṃ pavattatīti. Idampi ca taṃsabhāvameva, kiṃ kāraṇā? Idha adassanatoyeva. Iti aññatthāpi tathā pavattidassanato, kimetena aññanidassanena idheva anuyogena. Apica yathā yassa cittasantānassa nibbattikāraṇaṃ rūpe avigatataṇhaṃ, tassa saha rūpena sambhavato rūpaṃ nissāya pavatti rūpasāpekkhatāya kāraṇassa. Yassa pana nibbattikāraṇaṃ rūpe vigatataṇhaṃ, tassa vinā rūpena pavatti rūpanirapekkhatāya kāraṇassa, evaṃ yassa rūpappabandhassa nibbattikāraṇaṃ arūpe vigatataṇhaṃ, tassa vinā arūpena pavatti arūpanirapekkhatāya kāraṇassa, evaṃ bhāvanābalābhāvato pañcavokārabhave rūpārūpasambhavo viya, bhāvanābalena catuvokārabhave arūpasseva sambhavo viya ca. Asaññībhavepi bhāvanābalena rūpasseva sambhavo daṭṭhabboti.
那么,这里又有人问:为什么在无想天那里,仅仅只有色的相续,没有现前的缘,却能长时间地持续存在?应当如何理解?又会有人提出质疑:它到底能持续多久?针对这个疑问,论师说“犹如名”等话。这是为了表明:这件事不只是靠这里和他处所说的圣教就能让人明白,还要靠这里面的道理来显示。所谓“如弓弦急射”,就是用弓弦的力量射出去。“禅那的速度力”,就是禅那的威力,也就是有能力产生果报。“只有那么长的时间”,最多是五百大劫。这里说的“消失”,是指由缘灭而灭,不再转起。这里说的“于此”,是指于欲界有,意思是因为他们不在他处生起。巴利
Kathaṃ pana tattha kevalo rūpappabandho paccuppannapaccayarahito cirakālaṃ pavattatīti paccetabbaṃ, kittakaṃ vā kālaṃ pavattatīti codanaṃ manasi katvā ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādimāha. Tena na kevalaṃ idha ceva aññattha ca vutto āgamoyeva etadatthañāpane, atha kho ayaṃ panettha yuttīti dasseti. Jiyāvegukkhittoti dhanujiyāya vegena khipito. Jhānavego nāma jhānānubhāvo phaladāne samatthatā. Tattakameva kālanti ukkaṃsato pañca mahākappasatāni. Tiṭṭhantīti yathānibbattairiyāpathameva cittakammarūpakasadisā hutvā tiṭṭhanti. Jhānavegeti asaññasamāpattiparikkhitte catutthajjhānakammavege, pañcamajjhānakammavege vā. Antaradhāyatīti paccayanirodhena nirujjhati na pavattati. Idhāti kāmāvacarabhaveti attho aññattha tesamanuppattito. Paṭisandhisaññāti paṭisandhicittuppādoyeva saññāsīsena vutto. Kathaṃ pana anekakappasatamatikkamena ciraniruddhato viññāṇato idha viññāṇamuppajjati. Na hi niruddhe cakkhupasāde cakkhuviññāṇamuppajjamānaṃ diṭṭhanti? Nayidamekantato daṭṭhabbaṃ. Niruddhampi hi cittaṃ samānajātikassa antarā anuppajjanato samanantarapaccayamattaṃ hotiyeva, na bījaṃ. Bījaṃ pana kammameva, tasmā kammato bījabhūtato ārammaṇādīhi paccayehi asaññībhavato cutānaṃ kāmadhātuyā upapattiviññāṇaṃ hotiyeva, tenāha ‘‘idha paṭisandhisaññā uppajjatī’’ti. Ettha ca yathā nāma utuniyāmena pupphaggahaṇe niyatakālānaṃ rukkhānaṃ vidāraṇasaṅkhāte vekhe dinne vekhabalena aniyamatā hoti pupphaggahaṇassa, evameva pañcavokārabhave avippayogena vattamānesu rūpārūpadhammesu rūpārūpavirāgabhāvanāsaṅkhāte vekhe dinne tassa samāpattivekhabalassa anurūpato arūpabhave, asaññabhave ca yathākkamaṃ rūparahitā, arūparahitā ca khandhānaṃ pavatti hotīti veditabbaṃ.
那么,为什么这里又说到“想生起”呢?因为“那些天人从那个身坏灭”这个想生起,是想生起被说成他们坏灭的原因。或者说,“想生起”这个说法是为了显示什么目的?针对这个质疑,他说了“然而,因为……”等话。在这里,因为通过结生想生起而能了知他们的坏灭,所以是以了知因的方式说的;或者说,“想生起”这个说法是为了显示他们坏灭的了知状态——这是他的意图。因为“想生起”的意思是:以想生起为因,他们坏灭;或者,从想生起,即生起的想,那些天人——这样连接。“为寂静状态”:就是为了涅槃。在这里,难道不是依于在百千生、十坏劫等的顶端或中间生起的无想有,持“得无想有者无因生论”也像持常见一样,有多种分类吗?确实如此,不过因为紧邻,依于近处的无想有,持“得无想有者无因生论”被显示为一种,应当看作是以举例方式显示的。或者,因为“无因生论”被归入常见,在常见中所说的一切教导方式,也应当尽可能地在“无因生论”中理解;为了显示这个特殊之处,世尊没有加以分别地显示了“得无想有者无因生论”,而且必然应当把它归入常见,因为在杂染方面,有情的意乐只有常见和断见两种,而其中又没有落入断见的可能。正如注释书中,以引出“意乐”一词含义的方式说“常见和断见”,同样后面也将说:“只有七种是断见,其余的是常见。”(长部注1.97, 98)巴利
Kasmā panettha puna saññuppādā ca pana ‘‘te devā tamhā kāyā cavantī’’ti saññuppādo tesaṃ cavanassa kāraṇabhāvena vutto, ‘‘saññuppādā’’ti vacanaṃ vā kimatthadassananti codanāya ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādimāha. Idha paṭisandhisaññuppādena tesaṃ cavanassa paññāyanato ñāpakahetubhāvena vutto, ‘‘saññuppādā’’ti vacanaṃ vā tesaṃ cavanassa paññāyanabhāvadassananti adhippāyo. ‘‘Saññuppādā’’ti hi etassa saññuppādena hetubhūtena cavanti, saññuppādā vā uppādasaññā te devāti sambandho. Santabhāvāyāti nibbānāya. Nanu cettha jātisatasahassadasasaṃvaṭṭādīnamatthake, tadabbhantare vā pavattāya asaññūpapattiyā vasena lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādopi lābhīsassatavādo viya anekabhedo sambhavatīti? Saccameva, anantarattā pana āsannāya asaññūpapattiyā vasena lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo nayadassanavasena ekova dassitoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgahato adhiccasamuppannikavādassa sassatavāde āgato sabbopi desanānayo yathāsambhavaṃ adhiccasamuppannikavādepi gahetabboti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ bhagavatā lābhīadhiccasamuppannikavādo avibhajitvā dassito, avassañcassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho icchitabbo saṃkilesapakkhe sattānamajjhāsayassa sassatucchedavaseneva duvidhattā, tesu ca ucchedappasaṅgābhāvato. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ āsaya-saddassa atthuddhāravasena vuttaṃ ‘‘sassatucchedadiṭṭhi cā’’ti, tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘yāsaṃ satteva ucchedadiṭṭhiyo, sesā sassatadiṭṭhiyo’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.97, 98).
难道把“无因生论”归入常见不合理吗?因为它以“我过去不存在”等说法生起,执取的是先前没有的有情出现。而常见则执取自我和世间恒常存在,以“它确实恒常不变”这样的方式生起。难道不是不合理吗?通过观察未来际,它与常见执取是相应的。虽然这种论说以“我现在从不存在变成了存在,已经转变”(长部1.68)的方式,通过执取自我和世间的过去际而生起,但从现在时开始,他们在任何未来处都看不到这些的边际,特别是,常见是由对现在和未来时中无边际的观察所引发的,正如所说“它将如同恒常一样安住”(长部1.31,义同)。如果是这样,那么这种论说和常见等,难道不应该归入“前际分别者”中吗?因为它们是以执取未来时的方式生起的。应该归入,因为其来源属于过去分。正如这些的来源被包含在对过去生的忆念智,以及由随闻等引发、与之相应的推论中,注释也是照此解释的。或者,由于法主以无碍智行于一切处,亲自证知并如实开示了所有无去与去,因此,世尊所开示的见,不论有多少种、不论如何开示,都应如此以决断而信受,不应在此作理趣的审察,因为这是佛的境界。诸佛的佛境界是不可思议的,正如后面将说:“于此不应一味地寻求理由。”(长部注1.78-82)巴利
Nanu ca adhiccasamuppannikavādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho na yutto ‘‘ahañhi pubbe nāhosi’’ntiādivasena pavattanato apubbasattapātubhāvagāhakattā. Sassatadiṭṭhi pana attano, lokassa ca sadābhāvagāhinī ‘‘atthitveva sassatisama’’nti pavattanatoti? No na yutto anāgatakoṭiadassanena sassataggāhasamavarodhattā. Yadipi hi ayaṃ vādo ‘‘somhi etarahi ahutvā santatāya pariṇato’’ti (dī. ni. 1.68) attano, lokassa ca atītakoṭiparāmasanavasena pavatto, tathāpi vattamānakālato paṭṭhāya na tesaṃ katthaci anāgate pariyantaṃ passati, visesena ca paccuppannānāgatakālesu apariyantadassanapabhāvito sassatavādo, yathāha ‘‘sassatisamaṃ tatheva ṭhassatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31 atthato samānaṃ) yadevaṃ siyā imassa ca vādassa, sassatavādādīnañca pubbantakappikesu saṅgaho na yuttoyeva anāgatakālaparāmasanavasena pavattattāti? Yutto eva samudāgamassa atītakoṭṭhāsikattā. Tathā hi nesaṃ samudāgamo atītaṃsapubbenivāsañāṇehi, tappatirūpakānussavādipabhāvitehi ca takkanehi saṅgahitoti, tathā ceva saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Atha vā sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇacārena dhammassāminā niravasesato agatiṃ, gatiñca yathābhūtaṃ sayaṃ abhiññā sacchikatvā paveditā etā diṭṭhiyo, tasmā yāvatikā diṭṭhiyo bhagavatā desitā, yathā ca desitā, tāvatikā tathā ceva sanniṭṭhānato sampaṭicchitabbā, na cettha yuttivicāraṇā kātabbā buddhavisayattā. Acinteyyo hi buddhānaṃ buddhavisayo, tathā ca vakkhati ‘‘tattha na ekantena kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabba’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.78-82).
后际分别论的注释巴利
Aparantakappikavādavaṇṇanā
74 在“后际智”(《法集论》1067)、“执后际见者”(《长部》1.74)等语句中,“后际”一词依次是指未来的时段,针对这一点,他说“称为未来时段”。像“分别前际”等语句中所说的那样,“分别后际”等的含义也应如此理解。这里我们只说明其差别。巴利
74. ‘‘Aparanteñāṇaṃ (dha. sa. 1067), aparantānudiṭṭhino’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.74) viya aparanta –saddānaṃ yathākkamaṃ anāgatakālakoṭṭhāsavācakataṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘anāgatakoṭṭhāsasaṅkhāta’’nti. ‘‘Pubbantaṃ kappetvā’’tiādīsu vuttanayena ‘‘aparantaṃ kappetvā’’tiādīsupi attho veditabbo. Visesamattameva cettha vakkhāma.
75 75. “死后向上”就是指死后往上走,意思是死亡之后继续向上转生的我。所谓“死后向上”这种说法,因为与“向上”相伴,又因为派生构词的关系,就叫作“死后向上者”;或者这是一种省略中间音节的表达方式。持有这种说法的人,就是“持死后向上论者”。为了从词源上这样成立的意义直接显示出来,所以说“他们主张死后向上的我”,意思是在死亡之后,向上成为更高的存在体。因为那些执持邪见的人说:“死后向上,我是不变的。”“这些人的……”等语句,是用来显示“存在”这个意思,就像说“有佛陀存在,所以叫佛陀”一样。这是不同于注释书的另一种解释方法:被称为“有想”的说法,因为与“有想”相伴等等,就叫作“有想”;持有“有想”说法的人,通过复合词构成“有想论者”。意思就是:这些人的说法本身就是“有想论”。巴利
75. Āghātanā uddhanti uddhamāghātanaṃ, maraṇato uddhaṃ pavatto attāti attho. ‘‘Uddhamāghātana’’nti pavatto vādo uddhamāghātano sahacaraṇavasena, taddhitavasena ca, antalopaniddeso vā esa. So etesanti uddhamāghātanikā. Evaṃ saddato nipphannaṃ atthato eva dassetuṃ ‘‘uddhamāghātanā attānaṃ vadantī’’ti vuttaṃ, āghātanā uddhaṃ uparibhūtaṃ attabhāvanti attho. Te hi diṭṭhigatikā ‘‘uddhaṃ maraṇato attā nibbikāro’’ti vadanti. ‘‘So etesa’’ntiādinā assatthiyatthaṃ dasseti yathā ‘‘buddhamassa atthīti buddho’’ti. Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – saññīti pavatto vādo saññī sahacaraṇādinayena, saññī vādo etesanti saññīvādā samāsavasena. Saññīvādo eva vādo etesanti hi attho.
76-77 76-77. 在“有色之我”这句话里,为什么把遍处业处之色说成“我”呢?难道不应该是由脱离色的我来成立吗?当说“他有色”的时候,就像对想一样,色同样也是归属于我的。因为在“有想之我”这句话里,想本身并不是我,而是以“他有想”这个意思归属于我,正如所说的“取那里生起的想为‘想’”。然而,不应该这样理解——“他有色,所以是有色者”,而应该理解为“具有变坏的性质,所以是有色者”。这里所说的“变坏”,因为遍处业处之色与色相似,随着增长和未增长的时段而产生了差别。由于它存在有限、广大等种种差别,所以不能说它“不存在”。如果这样说——“具有变坏的性质,所以是有色者”,那么把这种主张归入常见论,岂不是不合理吗?因为具有变坏性质的东西是有坏灭的。这是合理的,因为他们对于身体坏灭之后所设想出来的我,执取它是不变的。正如所说的“死后无病”。或者,即使说“他有色,所以是有色者”,也没有任何过失,因为可以看到,用施设成立的差别来表述无差别的东西,就像说“石像的身体”一样。巴利
76-77.Rūpīattāti ettha kasiṇarūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu rūpavinimuttena attanā bhavitabbaṃ ‘‘rūpamassa atthī’’ti vutte saññāya viya rūpassāpi attaniyattā. Na hi ‘‘saññī attā’’ti ettha saññā eva attā, atha kho ‘‘saññā assa atthī’’ti atthena attaniyāva, tathā ca vuttaṃ ‘‘tattha pavattasaññañcassa ‘saññā’ti gahetvā’’ti? Na kho panetamevaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘rūpamassa atthīti rūpī’’ti, atha kho ‘‘ruppanasīlo rūpī’’ti. Ruppanañcettha rūpasarikkhatāya kasiṇarūpassa vaḍḍhitāvaḍḍhitakālavasena visesāpatti. Sā hi ‘‘natthī’’ti na sakkā vattuṃ parittavipulatādivisesasabbhāvato. Yadevaṃ siyā ‘‘ruppanasīlo rūpī’’ti, atha imassa vādassa sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho na yujjati ruppanasīlassa bhedasabbhāvatoti? Yujjateva kāyabhedato uddhaṃ parikappitassa attano nibbikāratāya tena adhippetattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti. Atha vā ‘‘rūpamassa atthīti rūpī’’ti vuttepi na koci doso kappanāsiddhena bhedena abhedassāpi niddesadassanato yathā ‘‘silāputtakassa sarīra’’nti.
另外,如果按照组成部分来说明整体,就像“于身随观身”那样,或者像“变坏故为色”“色的本质”“他有这个,所以是有色”在“有色之法”等中的用法一样,那么,由于我具有色的本质,说“有色之我”就是合乎道理的,所以说“遍处之色是我”。“取”这个词,是与这个心相关联的。“在那里”指在遍处之色中。“他的”指所设想的我,意思是像邪命外道等只凭推论来施设。邪命外道只是推论者,并不是证得者。因为他们主张决定论,否定业果,所以他们没有证得禅那与等至。同样,在一些邪命外道中,他们在“黑生”等中承认黑等色为“我”。这里,前一种方式显示的是证得者,后一种方式显示的则是推论者。在这些情况中也是如此。“病”这个词是坏灭的同义词,因为坏灭也有破坏的性质;这样一来,“无病”作为常的同义词就说得通了,所以说“常”。或者,“病”这个词是疾病的同义词。邪见者以无病为名,主张由于没有变异性所以是常,为了说明这一点,所以说“常”。遍处、限定虚空遍、第一无色界识无边处、无所有处,依次是证得无色等至的所缘。就像在苦楝叶中,有与叶等量的苦味一样,与身体等量的无色之我住在身体中——尼乾陀等只凭推论,施设“无色有想之我”,所以说“像尼乾陀等那样”。巴利
Apica avayavavasena avayavino tathāniddesanidassanato yathā ‘‘kāye kāyānupassī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 5.390), ruppanaṃ vā rūpaṃ, rūpasabhāvo, tadassa atthīti rūpī, attā ‘‘rūpino dhammā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 11.dukamātikā) viya, evañca katvā attano rūpasabhāvattā ‘‘rūpī attā’’ti vacanaṃ ñāyāgatamevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kasiṇarūpaṃ attā’’ti. ‘‘Gahetvā’’ti etena cetassa sambandho. Tatthāti kasiṇarūpe. Assāti parikappitassa attano, ājīvakādayo takkamattena paññapenti viyāti attho. Ājīvakā hi takkikāyeva, na lābhino. Niyatavāditāya hi kammaphalapaṭikkhepato natthi tesaṃ jhānasamāpattilābho. Tathā hikaṇhābhijātiādīsu kāḷakādirūpaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti ekacce ājīvakā paṭijānanti. Purimanayena cettha lābhīnaṃ dasseti, pacchimanayena pana takkikaṃ. Evamīdisesu. Roga-saddo bhaṅgapariyāyo bhaṅgassāpi rujjanabhāvato, evañca katvā aroga-saddassa niccapariyāyatā upapannā hoti, tenāha ‘‘nicco’’ti. Roga-saddo vā byādhipariyāyo. Arogoti pana rogarahitatāsīsena nibbikāratāya niccataṃ diṭṭhigatiko paṭijānātīti dassetuṃ ‘‘nicco’’ti vuttaṃ . Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsapaṭhamāruppaviññāṇanatthibhāvākiñcaññāyatanāni yathārahamarūpasamāpattinimittaṃ nāma. Nimbapaṇṇe tapparimāṇo tittakaraso viya sarīrapparimāṇo arūpī attā sarīre tiṭṭhatīti takkamatteneva nigaṇṭhā ‘‘arūpī attā saññī’’ti paññapentīti āha ‘‘nigaṇṭhādayo viyā’’ti.
第三种主张是“我既有色又无色”。这是按混合执取的方式说的:把前面说过的色与无色等至的所缘合在一起,执为一个“我”,又把在那里生起的想执为“想”。这个持邪见的人证得了色与无色等至,就把那些所缘以色性和无色性执为“我”,于是产生“我既有色又无色”的执著,像无因论者那样;或者仅仅靠推论,依对色法与无色法的混合执取,坚持“我既有色又无色”。第四种主张是“我既非有色也非无色”。这只是靠推论执取:就像行等诸法达到极微细状态时,因为极微细而无法起作用,又像柱、墙、手、足等聚合在一起,既不是有色,又因为没有超出色的本质而不是无色——就这样,仅仅靠生起的推论来执取。巴利
Tatiyāpanāti ‘‘rūpī ca arūpī ca attā’’ti laddhi. Missakagāhavasenāti rūpārūpasamāpattīnaṃ yathāvuttāni nimittāni ekajjhaṃ katvā ekova ‘‘attā’’ti, tattha pavattasaññañcassa ‘‘saññā’’ti gahaṇavasena. Ayañhi diṭṭhigatiko rūpārūpasamāpattilābhī tāsaṃ nimittaṃ rūpabhāvena, arūpabhāvena ca ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā ‘‘rūpī ca arūpī cā’’ti abhinivesaṃ janesi athetavādino viya, takkamatteneva vā rūpārūpadhammānaṃ missakagahaṇavasena ‘‘rūpī ca arūpī ca attā’’ti abhinivissa aṭṭhāsi. Catutthāti ‘‘neva arūpī ca nārūpī ca attā’’ti laddhi. Takkagāhenevāti saṅkhārasesasukhumabhāvappattadhammā viya accantasukhumabhāvappattiyā sakiccasādhanāsamatthatāya khambhakucchi [thambhakuṭṭa (dī. ni. ṭī. 176-77)] hatthapādādisaṅghāto viya neva rūpī, rūpasabhāvānativattanato na ca arūpīti evaṃ pavattatakkagāheneva.
这是不依注释书的方法:这里说的“既非有色也非无色”,应当像无边有边论中第四种主张那样,通过互相否定的方式来理解它的含义。虽然第三种主张和它在意义上相同,但正如在那里是由于说法的时间和地点的差别而区分,在这里则应当看到第三种和第四种主张的差别在于时间和所依之事的差别。因为在这里,由于色相与非色相不能同时现起,第三种主张是依时间的差别而成立;而第四种主张则是依所依之事的差别而成立,即认为那是色法与非色法的集合。第二个四句应当按无边有边论中所说的方式来理解,因为两者在词义上完全同义。至于这里应当说而未说的内容,我们也已经在“amati gacchati bhāvo osānametthā”等处说过了,只不过在那里是依前际的安立而展开,在这里是依后际的安立而展开,这个差别是显而易见的。虽说“想有异之我”这一主张也可以依入定者而获得,因为证得八等至的邪见者会产生想的差异;然而,由于在等至中想是以单一的方式现起的,所以依证得者而言“想是一致”更为恰当,因此说“依入定者而想一致”。或者,应当理解为仅依证得一种等至者而言。虽然因等至不同而可能产生想的差异,但由于外在的、以众多事物为所缘的想的差异是粗显的,所以为了显示依推理者而“想有异”,才说“依未入定者而想有异”。“依小遍处”是指因未增长而依小遍处,这里取遍处是为了显示想的所缘。因为想依所缘而有小,以此也显示:即使有想之外的法,他仍然说“想即是我”。在“依大遍处”处也是同样的方法。这样一来,在无边有边论中以及在此处无边有边的四句中,虽然第一、第二主张在词义上相同,但从自性上,以那两种主张与此两种主张的差别得以成立;否则,即使在上述各种主张中,仅以前际、后际安立的差别,有些就有差别,有些则没有差别了。巴利
Ayaṃ aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – nevarūpī nārūpīti ettha hi antānantikacatutthavāde viya aññamaññapaṭikkhepavasena attho veditabbo. Satipi ca tatiyavādena imassa samānatthabhāve tattha desakālabhedavasena viya idha kālavatthubhedavasena tatiyacatutthavādānaṃ viseso daṭṭhabbo. Kālabhedavasena hi idha tatiyavādassa pavatti rūpārūpanimittānaṃ sahaanupaṭṭhānato. Catutthavādassa pana vatthubhedavasena pavatti rūpārūpadhammasamūhabhāvatoti. Dutiyacatukkaṃ antānantikavāde vuttanayena veditabbaṃ sabbathā saddatthato samānatthattā. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, tampi ‘‘amati gacchati bhāvo osānametthā’’tiādinā amhehi vuttameva, kevalaṃ pana tattha pubbantakappanāvasena pavatto, idha aparantakappanāvasenāti ayaṃ viseso pākaṭoyeva. Kāmañca nānattasaññī attāti ayampi vādo samāpannakavasena labbhati. Aṭṭhasamāpattilābhino diṭṭhigatikassa vasena saññābhedasambhavato. Tathāpi samāpattiyaṃ ekarūpeneva saññāya upaṭṭhānato lābhīvasena ekattasaññitā sātisayaṃ yuttāti āha ‘‘samāpannakavasena ekattasaññī’’ti. Ekasamāpattilābhino eva vā vasena attho veditabbo. Satipi ca samāpattibhedato saññābhedasambhave bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇeyeva saññānānattassa oḷārikassa sambhavato takkīvaseneva nānattasaññitaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘asamāpannakavasena nānattasaññī’’ti vuttaṃ. Parittakasiṇavasenāti avaḍḍhitattā appakakasiṇavasena, kasiṇaggahaṇañcettha saññāya visayadassanaṃ. Visayavasena hi saññāya parittatā, iminā ca satipi saññāvinimuttadhamme ‘‘saññāyeva attā’’ti vadatīti dasseti. Esa nayo vipulakasiṇavasenāti etthāpi. Evañca katvā antānantikavāde ceva idha ca antānantacatukke paṭhamadutiyavādesu saddatthamattato samānesupi sabhāvato tehi dvīhi vādehi imesaṃ dvinnaṃ vādānaṃ viseso siddho hoti, aññathā vuttappakāresu vādesu satipi pubbantāparantakappanabhedamattena kehici visese kehici avisesoyeva siyāti.
这是不依注释书的方法:按照“拇指大小的我”“极微小的我”等说法所主张的立场,那个我既是有限的,又是有想的,所以叫“有限有想者”,就像迦毗罗、迦那陀等人那样。由于承认自我遍满一切,那个我既是无量的,又是有想的,所以叫“无量有想者”。巴利
Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāmuttako nayo – ‘‘aṅguṭṭhappamāṇo attā, aṇumatto attā’’tiādiladdhivasena paritto ca so saññī cāti parittasaññī kāpilakāṇādapabhutayo [kapilakaṇādādayo (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.76-77)] viya. Attano sabbagatabhāvapaṭijānanavasena appamāṇo ca so saññī cāti appamāṇasaññīti.
因为天眼是随业趣智的组成部分,所以即使众生是以天眼力所生的随业趣智被看见,他们具有乐等状态也可以说就是被天眼看见了,因此说“以天眼”等。针对四禅法和五禅法,说了“三禅四禅地”。因为在邪见者所缘的五蕴禅地中,除了广果天,其余各地按各自情况,在四禅法中是三禅的果报处,在五禅法中是四禅的果报处,所以叫三禅四禅地。至于净居天,则不是他们所缘的对象。“正在出生”就是正在生起。有人问:执取“我是一向快乐的”等说法属于后际见,那么用“看见正在出生”这种现在时的表达,难道不成立吗?因为这些论说本来是以未来为对象的。回答说:这并没有问题,因为正是通过看见当下的出生,来构想未来一向快乐等状态,这才是这里的意趣。因此说“看见正在出生,就执取为‘一向快乐’”。在这里应当知道,由于看见在各地中与乐等相应的法大多数时候在生起,他们便执取为“一向快乐”等,所以所说的地正是与这种情况相符。就像通过词与词之间的关联能得出特殊含义一样,通过义理脉络等也能得出特殊含义。在“一向快乐”等说法中,“一向”这个词是就大多数时候生起而说的,因为他们仅仅凭看见这样的生起就这样执取。或者,邪见者就像摸象的盲人一样,看见什么就执取什么并那样说。世尊在《优陀那》中确实说过:“比丘们,外道游行者是盲人、没有眼睛”等。因此,在这里再去找合理的论证已经没有必要了。为了说明“以天眼看见”所说的含义,所以说了“特别是”等。巴利
Dibbacakkhuparibhaṇḍattā yathākammūpagañāṇassa dibbacakkhupabhāvajanitena yathākammūpagañāṇena dissamānāpi sattānaṃ sukhādisamaṅgitā dibbacakkhunāva diṭṭhā nāmāti āha ‘‘dibbena cakkhunā’’tiādi. Catukkanayaṃ, pañcakanayañca sandhāya tikacatukkajjhānabhūmiya’’nti vuttaṃ. Diṭṭhigatikavisayāsu hi pañcavokārajhānabhūmīsu vehapphalabhūmiṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā yathārahaṃ catukkanaye tikajjhānassa, pañcakanaye ca catukkajjhānassa vipākaṭṭhānattā tikacatukkajjhānabhūmiyo nāma. Suddhāvāsā pana tesamavisayā. Nibbattamānanti uppajjamānaṃ. Nanu ca ‘‘ekantasukhī attā’’tiādinā pavattavādānaṃ aparantadiṭṭhibhāvato ‘‘nibbattamānaṃ disvā’’ti paccuppannavacanaṃ anupapannameva siyā. Anāgatavisayā hi ete vādāti? Upapannameva anāgatassa ekantasukhībhāvādikassa pakappanāya paccuppannanibbattidassanena adhippetattā. Tenevāha ‘‘nibbattamānaṃ disvā ‘ekantasukhī’ti gaṇhātī’’ti. Ettha ca tassaṃ tassaṃ bhūmiyaṃ bāhullena sukhādisahitadhammappavattidassanaṃ paṭicca tesaṃ ‘‘ekantasukhī’’tiādigahaṇato tadanurūpāyeva bhūmi vuttāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saddantarābhisambandhavasena viya hi atthapakaraṇādivasenapi atthaviseso labbhati. ‘‘Ekantasukhī’’tiādīsu ca ekantabhāvo bahulaṃ pavattimattaṃ pati payutto. Tathāpavattimattadassanena tesaṃ evaṃ gahaṇato. Atha vā hatthidassakaandhā viya diṭṭhigatikā yaṃ yadeva passanti, taṃ tadeva abhinivissa voharanti. Vuttañhetaṃ bhagavatā udāne ‘‘aññatitthiyā bhikkhave, paribbājakā andhā acakkhukā’’tiādi, (udā. 55) tasmā alamettha yuttimagganāti. ‘‘Dibbena cakkhunā disvā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ samatthetuṃ ‘‘visesato hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
无想论与非想非非想论的解释巴利
Asaññīnevasaññīnāsaññīvādavaṇṇanā
78-83 78-83. 接着,为了澄清“根本没有任何差别”这一责难,论主用“kevalañhi”等语句来辨明。当人们执取“无想”和“非想非非想”时,那些就是他们的邪见——这是这里的关联。“原因”指的是差别的因,或者令邪见生起的因。虽然确实有可能去探寻某种原因,但为了表明对执邪见论者之说的轻视,所以说“不应一味地探寻原因”。为什么?因为说了“对执邪见者”等话,以此显示他们不堪被探寻,所以不应探寻其因。这里说的是:在“无想”论中,第一种论说是基于投生到无想处的众生而生起的;第二种论说则依照“将想视为我”处所说的方法,执取想本身就是“我”,由于作为其所属物的想存在而其他想不存在,所以说为“无想”而生起;同样,第三种论说执取想与色法,或者执取一切色法与非色法为“我”而生起;第四种论说则仅仅依靠推论执取而生起。巴利
78-83. Atha na koci viseso atthīti codanaṃ sodheti ‘‘kevalañhī’’tiādinā. ‘‘Asaññī’’ti ca ‘‘nevasaññīnāsaññī’’ti ca gaṇhantānaṃ tā diṭṭhiyoti sambandho. Kāraṇanti visesakāraṇaṃ, diṭṭhisamudāgamakāraṇaṃ vā. Satipi kiñci kāraṇapariyesanasambhave diṭṭhigatikavādānaṃ anādariyabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na ekantena kāraṇaṃ pariyesitabba’’nti vuttaṃ. Kasmāti āha ‘‘diṭṭhigatikassā’’tiādi, etena pariyesanakkhamābhāvatoti apariyesitabbakāraṇaṃ dasseti. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – asaññīvāde asaññībhave nibbattasattavasena pavatto paṭhamavādo, ‘‘saññaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti ettha vuttanayena saññaṃyeva ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā tassa kiñcanabhāvena ṭhitāya aññāya saññāya abhāvato ‘‘asaññī’’ti pavatto dutiyavādo, tathā saññāya saha rūpadhamme, sabbe eva vā rūpārūpadhamme ‘‘attā’’ti gahetvā pavatto tatiyavādo, takkagāhavaseneva catutthavādo pavatto.
在第二组四论里,也是因为遍色不能被认知这种性质,而把它当作“无想”,然后按照无边有边论里说过的方式,转起了四种分别。但在非想非非想论里,第一论是说:生在非想非非非想有的众生,在死时和结生时,或者在任何时候,都有一种微细的想存在,只是它不能执行粗显想的作用;第二论等则按照无想论里说过的方式,依微细想来转起,同时也依承认有认知这种性质来转起。这样一来,虽然以某种方式似乎可以去找原因,但因为执邪见论者的说法根本经不起探寻,所以不应该郑重其事、费很大劲去找它们的原因。而这些有想、无想、非想非非想论,从“无病、死后”这种说法来看,明显都归在常见里面。巴利
Dutiyacatukkepi kasiṇarūpassa asañjānanasabhāvatāya asaññīti katvā antānantikavāde vuttanayena cattāro vikappā pavattā. Nevasaññīnāsaññīvāde pana nevasaññīnāsaññībhave nibbattasattasseva cutipaṭisandhīsu , sabbattha vā paṭusaññākiccaṃ kātuṃ asamatthāya sukhumāya saññāya atthibhāvapaṭijānanavasena paṭhamavādo, asaññīvāde vuttanayena sukhumāya saññāya vasena, sañjānanasabhāvatāpaṭijānanavasena ca dutiyavādādayo pavattāti. Evaṃ kenaci pakārena satipi kāraṇapariyesanasambhave diṭṭhigatikavādānaṃ pariyesanakkhamābhāvato ādaraṃ katvā mahussāhena tesaṃ kāraṇaṃ na pariyesitabbanti. Etesaṃ pana saññīasaññīnevasaññīnāsaññīvādānaṃ sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgaho ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’ti vacanato pākaṭoyeva.
断灭论的解说巴利
Ucchedavādavaṇṇanā
84 对于不存在的东西,谈不上灭尽,所以断灭是以“存在”为原因的。为了说明这一点,注释者在经典中用表示存在的“santa”一词说“sato”(存在的),因此解释说“存在的”。而且,这里所说的与存在性相关联的,正是执邪见论者所执取的对象——众生。为了表明这一点,经典中说“众生的”。由此说明这样的意思:就像依因果状态而转起的自性法,虽然属于同一相续,但与落入不同相续的因果法相比,因为胜义上自性不同,所以像落入不同相续者那样,以绝对差异为最终结论,执取“异门理”的邪解,就是执取断灭的原因;同样,因果法虽然存在而自性有差别,但因为属于同一相续,依“一门理”执取绝对无差异,也是原因。因为依相续而转起的诸蕴,由于没有破除密集,在这里就生起众生执;而对众生存在的执取,正是断灭论的原因。这里依渐次灭而说的无间灭尽,被称为“断灭”,因为执取“此我正在被断灭时,在此之前它确实存在”,所以说“upaccheda”(断灭)。因为“u”是“upa”的同义词,有“靠近”的意思,而这里的“靠近”指次第生起后,以辗转灭尽为无间性。另外,依不再生起而无生灭尽,就名为断灭,如所说的方式执取,所以说“upaccheda”。在这里,“u”和“upa”都有“上方部分”的意思。从已灭之后的部分,在这里就称为“上方部分”。巴利
84. Avijjamānassa vināsāsambhavato atthibhāvahetuko ucchedoti dassetuṃ vijjamānavācakena santa-saddena ‘‘sato’’ti pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘vijjamānassā’’ti. Vijjamānatāpayutto cesa diṭṭhigatikavādavisayo sattoyeva idha adhippetoti dassanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sattassā’’ti vuttaṃ, tena imamatthaṃ dasseti – yathā hetuphalabhāvena pavattamānānaṃ sabhāvadhammānaṃ satipi ekasantānapariyāpannānaṃ bhinnasantatipatitehi visese hetuphalabhūtānaṃ paramatthato bhinnasabhāvattā bhinnasantānapatitānaṃ viya accantaṃ bhedasanniṭṭhānena nānattanayassa micchāgahaṇaṃ ucchedābhinivesassa kāraṇaṃ, evaṃ hetuphalabhūtānaṃ vijjamānepi sabhāvabhede ekasantatipariyāpannatāya ekattanayena accantamabhedagahaṇampi kāraṇamevāti. Santānavasena hi pavattamānesu khandhesu ghanavinibbhogābhāvena tesaṃ idha sattagāho, sattassa ca atthibhāvagāhahetuko ucchedavādo, anupubbanirodhavasena pana nirantaravināso idha ‘‘ucchedo’’ti adhippeto yāvāyaṃ attā ucchijjamāno bhavati, tāvāyaṃ vijjatiyevāti gahaṇatoti āha ‘‘upaccheda’’nti. U-saddo hi upa-saddapariyāyo, so ca upasaṅkamanattho, upasaṅkamanañcettha anupubbamuppajjitvā aparāparaṃ nirodhavasena nirantaratā. Apica punānuppajjamānavasena nirudayavināsoyeva ucchedo nāma yathāvuttanayena gahaṇatoti āha ‘‘upaccheda’’nti. U-saddo, hi upa-saddo ca ettha uparibhāgattho. Niruddhato parabhāgo ca idha uparibhāgoti vuccati.
由于无间断地灭尽,或者由于不再生起而灭尽,这就是特别的坏灭,也就是彻底消失。然而,这种消失是因为它超出了肉眼和智慧之眼的视野,所以经中说“不见”。因为在世间,“灭”这个词本来就用在“不见”这个意思上,比如“又有两种色变的消失”等说法(参见《迦湿迦》6-3-109经)。所谓“有性的离去”,就是自性的离去。因为按照“如法而存在就是‘有’”这个含义,这里的“有”这个词指的是自性。然而,凡是因无间断地、不再生起而彻底消失的,由于它不能以自己的自性而住,所以被称为“有性的离去”。以“在那里”等语,只是以示例的方式显示按照经文所说的断灭论的来源,因此将说“如此这般分别之后”。那里,在“施设存在者的断灭、消失、无有”这句话中。具足者,即具足天眼智的人。只具足其余部分的人和完全不具备的人,在这里所说的末际思维者之处,只被称为“不具备者”。巴利
Nirantaravasena , nirudayavasena vā visesena nāso vināso, so pana maṃsacakkhupaññācakkhūnaṃ dassanapathātikkamanato adassanamevāti āha ‘‘adassana’’nti. Adassane hi nāsa-saddo loke niruḷho ‘‘dve cāpare vaṇṇavikāranāsā’’tiādīsu (kāsikā 6-3-109 suttaṃ passitabbaṃ) viya. Bhāvavigamanti sabhāvāpagamaṃ. Yathādhammaṃ bhavanaṃ bhāvoti hi atthena idha bhāva-saddo sabhāvavācako. Yo pana nirantaraṃ nirudayavināsavasena ucchijjati, so attano sabhāvena ṭhātumasakkuṇeyyatāya ‘‘bhāvāpagamo’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Tatthā’’tiādinā ucchedavādassa yathāpāṭhaṃ samudāgamaṃ nidassanamattena dasseti, tena vakkhati ‘‘tathā ca aññathā ca vikappetvāvā’’ti. Tatthāti ‘‘sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapentī’’ti vacane. Lābhīti dibbacakkhuñāṇalābhī. Tadavasesalābhī ceva sabbaso alābhī ca idha aparantakappikaṭṭhāne ‘‘alābhī’’ tveva vuccati.
“死”就是有学人和凡夫的死,这里说的也只是死本身。“此仅是死而已”这个道理在这里也同样适用。“不见生起”,是说虽然有看见的能力,却因为没有去观察所以看不见。“不见受生”,是因为缺少先前的修习,或者没有做准备工作,所以看不到受生。这样区分之后,两种说法的差别就清楚了。“如是(tathā)”,是指依照“得〔定〕者随念”等所举例的、如前所说的方式;“以其他方式(aññathā)”,是指因推度有多种可能,而以异于此的其他方式。“谁知道有他世?根本不知道”——这是依无有论而执取断灭之见。这句话要和剩下的经文连起来理解,意思是:依无有论,因为极度愚痴,不能了悟“从此之外另有他世”,所以执取此见。“只有这才是范围,即此根之所行”——就像为自己女儿牵手的那位国王一样,虽然也贪著欲乐,但仍会执取,因此说“或者因为贪著欲乐”。关于从茎上落下的叶子不再与茎相连,是就“不再生长”而说的。“同样,众生也是如此”——正如枯黄的叶子从束缚中脱落之后不再连接,同样,一切众生也都是不再连接、以死亡为终结、不再有来生,只是趣向不再连接的死亡,这就是其含义。因为众生如水泡,不再生起,这是他的主张。“如是”,是指以“获得者随念”等,依〔阿罗汉〕为例所说的那种方式。“以其他方式”,是因为推度有多种多样的可能,所以以异于此的其他方式。对于获得者,从死之后再往上受生这一点,仅仅因为看不见,就凭推度而生起这些见解,所以说“或者分别之后”。这样,分别之后生起的,和以其他方式分别之后生起的,就是这样的关联。其中,通过“两个人”等,显示执断灭论者的分类,以此说明这个道理。正如“不死论”等完全是以“获得者”的方式宣说的,又如“上吊想论”中第四组四句里,“想论”完全是以“获得者”的方式宣说的,这里不是这样。而这些“常见论”“一分常见论”等,则完全是以“获得者”和“非获得者”的方式宣说的。既然如此,为什么不像常见论等那样,以“获得者”的方式和“推度者”的方式分别宣说,而是与常见论等的宣说不同,在这里这样宣说呢?回答说:因为说法之庄严所致。诸佛世尊已达成说法之庄严,他们随顺所化众生的意乐,以种种方式宣说正法,不会 otherwise。如果在这里也有与那种宣说相应的所化众生意乐,世尊就会那样宣说,怎样呢?“在此,诸比丘,某沙门或婆罗门,依于精勤……当心如是等持时,为知众生的死生智而引导心,他以清净、超越人间的天眼,看见阿罗汉的死心,或众多其他众生的〔死心〕,却看不见那以上的受生。他这样说:‘朋友,当这个我,有色、四大所成、父母所生,身体坏灭、消亡,死后不存在’等等”,这是对特殊获得者及推度者分别而说。然而,因为在这里没有与那种宣说相应的所化众生意乐,所以应当知道,由于说法之庄严,随顺所化众生意乐,这个宣说与常见论等的宣说不同,就是这样宣说的。巴利
Cutinti sekkhaputhujjanānampi cutimeva. Esa nayo cutimattamevāti etthāpi. Upapattiṃ apassantoti daṭṭhuṃ samatthepi sati anolokanavasena apassanto. Na upapātanti pubbayogābhāvena, parikammākaraṇena vā upapattiṃ daṭṭhuṃ na sakkoti, evañca katvā nayadvaye viseso pākaṭo hoti. Ko paralokaṃ jānāti, na jānātiyevāti natthikavādavasena ucchedaṃ gaṇhātīti saha pāṭhasesena sambandho, natthikavādavasena mahāmūḷhabhāveneva ‘‘ito añño paraloko atthī’’ti anavabodhanato imaṃ diṭṭhiṃ gaṇhātīti adhippāyo. ‘‘Ettakoyeva visayo, yvāyaṃ indriyagocaro’’ti attano dhītuyā hatthaggaṇhanakarājā viya kāmasukhābhirattatāyapi gaṇhātīti āha ‘‘kāmasukhagiddhatāya vā’’ti. Vaṇṭato patitapaṇṇānaṃ vaṇṭena apaṭisandhikabhāvaṃ sandhāya ‘‘na puna viruhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Evameva sattāti yathā paṇḍupalāso bandhanā pavutto puna na paṭisandhīyati, evameva sabbepi sattā appaṭisandhikā maraṇapariyosānā aponobbhavikā appaṭisandhikamaraṇameva nigacchantīti attho. Udakapubbuḷakūpamā hi sattā puna anuppajjamānatoti tassa laddhi. Tathāti ‘‘lābhī anussaranto’’tiādinā [arahato (aṭṭha)] nidassanavasena vuttappakārena. Aññathāti takkanassa anekappakārasambhavato tato aññenapi pakārena. Lābhinopi cutito uddhaṃ upapātassa adassanamattaṃ pati takkaneneva imā diṭṭhiyo uppajjantīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vikappetvāvā’’ti. Tathā ca vikappetvāva uppannā aññathā ca vikappetvāva uppannāti hi sambandho. Tattha ‘‘dve janā’’tiādinā ucchedaggāhakappabhedadassanena imamatthaṃ dasseti. Yathā amarāvikkhepikavādā ekantaalābhīvaseneva desitā, yathā ca uddhamāghātanikasaññīvāde catutthacatukke saññīvādā ekantalābhīvaseneva desitā, nayime. Ime pana sassatekaccasassatavādādayo viya lābhīalābhīvaseneva desitāti. Yadevaṃ kasmā sassatavādādīsu viya lābhīvasena, takkīvasena ca paccekaṃ desanamakatvā sassatavādādidesanāhi aññathā idha desanā katāti? Vuccate – desanāvilāsappattito. Desanāvilāsappattā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vividhenākārena dhammaṃ desenti, na aññathā. Yadi hi idhāpi ca tathādesanāya nibandhanabhūto veneyyajjhāsayo bhaveyya, tathārūpameva bhagavā vadeyya, kathaṃ? ‘‘Idha bhikkhave, ekacco samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā ātappamanvāya…pe… yathā samāhite citte sattānaṃ cutūpapātañāṇāya cittaṃ abhininnāmeti, so dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena arahato cuticittaṃ passati, puthūnaṃ vā parasattānaṃ, na heva kho taduddhaṃ upapattiṃ. So evamāha ‘yato kho bho ayaṃ attā rūpī cātumahābhūtiko mātāpettikasambhavo kāyassa bhado ucchijjati vinassati, na hoti paraṃ maraṇā’tiādinā’’ visesalābhino, takkino ca visuṃ katvā. Yasmā pana tathādesanāya nibandhanabhūto veneyyajjhāsayo na idha bhavati, tasmā desanāvilāsena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ sassatavādādidesanāhi aññathāyevāyaṃ desanā katāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
或者,就像在常见论、一分常见论等里面那样,这里并不是因为推论者的说法和殊胜得定者的说法各有不同形式,才形成不同的形态;实际上,正因为性质相同,形态也就相同。为了说明这个差别,世尊才把这种断灭论以不同于前面那些论说的形态来宣说。因为在这里,推论者也可能依靠传闻等,像证得者那样生起执著。再者,这些见并不是世尊依照“未来将会如此”而宣说的,也不是依照“或许他们会如此”的假设而宣说的,而是按照诸恶见论者所执取的“唯有此是真实,其余都是虚妄”那样,世尊以一切知智如实判定之后,如实地开示了这些恶见;通过这些恶见的宣说,甚深等类、非凡夫所行境的佛法得以彰显,而对它们的称扬,正是对如来的正确赞叹。巴利
Atha vā sassatekaccasassatavādādīsu viya na idha takkīvādato visesalābhīvādo bhinnākāro, atha kho samānappakāratāya samānākāroyevāti imassa visesassa pakāsanatthaṃ ayamucchedavādo bhagavatā purimavādehi visiṭṭhākārabhāvena desito. Sambhavati hi idha takkinopi anussavādivasena adhigamavato viya abhiniveso. Apica na imā diṭṭhiyo bhagavatā anāgate evaṃbhāvīvasena desitā, nāpi evamete bhaveyyunti parikappanāvasena, atha kho yathā yathā diṭṭhigatikehi ‘‘idameva saccaṃ, moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.187, 203, 427; 3.27, 28; udā. 55) maññitā, tathā tathāyeva ime diṭṭhigatā yathābhuccaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā pakāsitā, yehi gambhīrādippakārā aputhujjanagocarā buddhadhammā pakāsanti, yesañca parikittanena tathāgatā sammadeva thomitā honti.
还有一种解释方式:就像持断灭见的邪见者们,他们看到一层比一层更高的存在,为了驳斥那些承认有来世的人,便各自建立起自己的主张;这部经的开示也正是这样进行的。因此,不应该拿前面的那些开示来指责这部开示的展开方式有什么不同。如果按那样做,就像依无色界存在的差别把断灭论分成四种那样,也应该依欲界、色界存在的差别把它分成许多种来讲说;这样一来,断灭论就会比世尊所说的七种断灭论有更多的分类。或者,不应该像依欲界、色界存在的差别那样,再依无色界存在的差别来分别讲说;即便这样,断灭论也会比世尊所说的七种更少——这类指责根本就没有成立的余地。因为开示是随顺那些邪见者的意愿而宣说的。巴利
Aparo nayo – yathā ucchedavādīhi diṭṭhigatikehi uttaruttarabhavadassīhi aparabhavadassīnaṃ tesaṃ vādapaṭisedhavasena sakasakavādā patiṭṭhāpitā, tathāyevāyaṃ desanā katāti purimadesanāhi imissā desanāya pavattibhedo na codetabbo, evañca katvā arūpabhavabhedavasena ucchedavādo catudhā vibhajitvā viya kāmarūpabhavabhedavasenāpi anekadhā vibhajitvāyeva vattabbo, evaṃ sati bhagavatā vuttasattakato bahutarabhedo ucchedavādo āpajjatīti, atha vā paccekaṃ kāmarūpabhavabhedavasena viya arūpabhavavasenāpi na vibhajitvā vattabbo, evampi sati bhagavatā vuttasattakato appatarabhedova ucchedavādo āpajjatīti ca evaṃpakārāpi codanā anavakāsā eva hoti. Diṭṭhigatikānañhi yathābhimataṃ desanā pavattāti.
85 “属于父母的”这句话,因为与父母相关联,所以意思是这是父母所有的东西。“精血”是指父亲的精子和母亲的经血,或者两者合起来称为“精”的血。“母胎”这个词,这里的格是依处格。以上就是用这三句来说明的。不说“依色身”,而说“以色身为首”,是为了表明他们也把无色法执取为“我”。以这种方式,所以说“一些如是”。“如是”这个词在这里就是“以这种方式”的意思。“一些”是指某一些人,或者另一些人。巴利
85.Mātāpitūnaṃ etanti taṃsambandhanato etaṃ mātāpitūnaṃ santakanti attho. Sukkasoṇitanti pitu sukkaṃ, mātu soṇitañca, ubhinnaṃ vā sukkasaṅkhātaṃ soṇitaṃ. Mātāpettiketi nimitte cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Itīti imehi tīhi padehi. ‘‘Rūpakāyavasenā’’ti avatvā ‘‘rūpakāyasīsenā’’ti vadanto arūpampi tesaṃ ‘‘attā’’ti gahaṇaṃ ñāpeti. Iminā pakārena itthanti āha ‘‘evameke’’ti. Evaṃ-saddo hettha idamattho, iminā pakārenāti attho. Eketi ekacce, aññe vā.
86 人类因为先前已被执取,其他众生又不可能投生那里,所以“欲界”在这里是指属于六欲天的范围。这里的“段食”,就是前面说过的清净食物。巴利
86. Manussānaṃ pubbe gahitattā, aññesañca asambhavato ‘‘kāmāvacaro’’ti ettha chakāmāvacaradevapariyāpannoti attho. Kabaḷīkāro cettha yathāvuttasudhāhāro.
87 “由禅那意所成”在这里要说的内容,前面已经讲过了。大肢就是体,其中单独运作的是支,具足一切体和支也是如此。这里“那些”指眼根和耳根,“其他”指鼻根、舌根、身根。这些根的形态也应当依照男性特征来理解。正如注释书中所说:“虽然那里没有两性特征,但那里的梵天都是男性形态,不是女性形态。”巴利
87.Jhānamanenanibbattoti ettha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Mahāvayavo aṅgo, tattha visuṃ pavatto paccaṅgo, sabbehi aṅgapaccaṅgehi yutto tathā. Tesanti cakkhusotindriyānaṃ. Itaresanti ghānajivhākāyindriyānaṃ. Tesampi indriyānaṃ saṇṭhānaṃ purisavesavaseneva veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi aṭṭhakathāsu vuttaṃ ‘‘samānepi tattha ubhayaliṅgābhāve purisasaṇṭhānāva tattha brahmāno, na itthisaṇṭhānā’’ti.
88-92 88-92. 对于“空无边处”这个词,在这里应当是指它本身的存在状态,所以说“空无边处的存在”。对此有人提出:在前面三种主张里,说“身体坏灭”是合理的,因为那些主张是围绕属于五蕴存在的个体而展开的;然而,在围绕属于四蕴存在的个体而展开的第四种等四种主张里,为什么也说“身体坏灭”呢?因为无色界众生并没有身体,哪里谈得上“坏灭”呢?确实如此。不过,持邪见的人是按照在有色身时所用的习惯说法,把它套用到无色身的状态上,才这样说的。因为在世间,确实可以看到把用在某处的事物套用到另一处的说法,比如“兔角”“空中花”。而且,邪见者怎样安立他们的见解,世尊也就照样开示。再者,由于有名身,对于由触等诸法聚集而成的无色身状态,也可以看作是在说“身”——因为“身”也有聚集的意思,就像说“象群”“马群”那样。在这里,那些主张欲界天身等彻底断灭的第二等主张,属于后际论是合理的,因为那些主张以未来为对象;可是,主张现量可见的人自身断灭的第一种主张,怎么能属于后际论呢?因为那种主张是以现在为对象。对于第二等主张来说,由于它表明包含在前前主张中的自我,在未来更高的存在中受生之后被彻底断灭,所以说它是后际论是合理的,正如所说:“然而,贤者,这个自我到这种程度还没有被彻底断灭”等等。其中所说的“贤者,确实有另一个自我”,那是针对比人自身等更低层次的存在状态而说的,并不是说在一切方面都完全不同。那么,第一种主张由于没有表明自我在未来更高的存在中受生后被彻底断灭,而且在“贤者,确实有另一个自我”这句话里,也不是以完全不同的方式被把握,所以它不成立为后际论吗?不,并非不成立。因为即使第一种主张的对象属于此世,它所指的也仍然是未来时。第一种主张者所说的,也是属于此世的自我在死后断灭,而这正是就未来时而言的。因此,说它属于后际论,并没有什么矛盾。巴利
88-92.Ākāsānañcāyatana-saddo idha bhaveyevāti āha ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanabhava’’nti. Etthāha – yuttaṃ tāva purimesu tīsu vādesu ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vattuṃ pañcavokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ attabhāvamārabbha pavattattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ, catuvokārabhavapariyāpannaṃ pana attabhāvaṃ nissāya pavattesu catutthādīsu catūsu vādesu kasmā ‘‘kāyassa bhedā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na hi arūpīnaṃ kāyo vijjati. Yo bhedoti vucceyyāti? Saccametaṃ, rūpattabhāve pana pavattavohāreneva diṭṭhigatiko arūpattabhāvepi kāyavohāraṃ āropetvā evamāha. Lokasmiñhi dissati aññatthabhūtopi vohāro tadaññatthasamāropito yathā taṃ ‘‘sasavisāṇaṃ, khaṃ puppha’’nti. Yathā ca diṭṭhigatikā diṭṭhiyo paññapenti, tathāyeva bhagavāpi desetīti. Apica nāmakāyabhāvato phassādidhammasamūhabhūte arūpattabhāve kāyaniddeso daṭṭhabbo. Samūhaṭṭhenapi hi ‘‘kāyo’’ti vuccati ‘‘hatthikāyo assakāyo’’tiādīsu viya. Ettha ca kāmāvacaradevattabhāvādiniravasesavibhavapatiṭṭhāpakānaṃ dutiyādivādānaṃ aparantakappikabhāvo yutto hotu anāgataddhavisayattā tesaṃ vādānaṃ, kathaṃ pana diṭṭhigatikassa paccakkhabhūtamanussattabhāvāpagamapatiṭṭhāpakassa paṭhamavādassa aparantakappikabhāvo yujjeyya paccuppannaddhavisayattā tassa vādassa. Dutiyavādādīnañhi purimapurimavādasaṅgahitasseva attano anāgate taduttaribhavūpapannassa samucchedabodhanato yujjati aparantakappikatā, tathā ceva vuttaṃ ‘‘no ca kho bho ayaṃ attā ettāvatā sammā samucchinno hotī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.85) yaṃ pana tattha vuttaṃ ‘‘atthi kho bho añño attā’’ti, (dī. ni. 1.87) taṃ manussattabhāvādiheṭṭhimattabhāvavisesāpekkhāya vuttaṃ, na sabbathā aññabhāvato. Paṭhamavādassa pana anāgate taduttaribhavūpapannassa attano samucchedabodhanābhāvato , ‘‘atthi kho bho añño attā’’ti ettha aññabhāvena aggahaṇato ca na yujjateva aparantakappikatāti? No na yujjati idhalokapariyāpannattepi paṭhamavādavisayassa anāgatakālikasseva tena adhippetattā. Paṭhamavādināpi hi idhalokapariyāpannassa attano paraṃ maraṇā ucchedo anāgatakālavaseneva adhippeto, tasmā cassa aparantakappikatāya na koci virodhoti.
现法涅槃论的解说巴利
Diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavaṇṇanā
93 以智见故名为所见,所见且以自性之义为法,所以叫现法,意思是由见性之智所证得的自性。然而它正是现前于诸根的所缘,所以说称为现前之法。这里应当理解:即使不是诸根的所缘,由于极为显了,也如同诸根的所缘一样,因此那样说。正因如此,他说这是于各处所得有身的增语,意思是在每一种生存中随业应得之身的表述词,或者说是名称。而这里的涅槃只是苦的止息,不是最上果,也不是无为界,因为那不是他们的所缘,所以说苦的止息。他们的论说转起于现法涅槃,因此也可以称为现法涅槃论者。巴利
93. Ñāṇena daṭṭhabboti diṭṭho, diṭṭho ca so sabhāvaṭṭhena dhammo cāti diṭṭhadhammo, dassanabhūtena ñāṇena upaladdhasabhāvoti attho. So pana akkhānamindriyānaṃ abhimukhībhūto visayoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘paccakkhadhammo vuccatī’’ti. Tattha yo anindriyavisayo, sopi supākaṭabhāvena indriyavisayo viya hotīti katvā tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, tenevāha ‘‘tattha tatthapaṭiladdhattabhāvassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti, tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhave yathākammaṃ paṭilabhitabbattabhāvassa vācakaṃ padaṃ, nāmanti vā attho. Nibbānañcettha dukkhavūpasamanameva, na aggaphalaṃ, na ca asaṅkhatadhātu tesamavisayattāti āha ‘‘dukkhavūpasamana’’nti. Diṭṭhadhammanibbāne pavatto vādo etesanti diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādātipi yujjati.
94 94. 因为它们是可欲的,所以叫“欲”;又因为许多部分聚集在一起,且能束缚众生,还有种种功德,所以叫“欲功德”。为了说明这个意思,才说“可爱的色等”。这里的“等”字,也把直到触所缘的都包括进去了。“善放置”就是正确地安立。这里的安立就是黏着,所以说“黏着”。为了显示“在他们之中,于种种欲功德到处游走,随各自的根而取所缘”这个意思,才说了“于他们”等话,因此又说“由此及彼地牵引”。或者,这里带有“周遍”意味的“行”字,是嬉戏的意思,所以说“戏弄”等。“戏弄”就是以种种方式嬉戏,也就是作出娇媚的姿态。通过“此中且”等话,显示他们只是把具有最上等欲功德的人说成现法涅槃。因为曼陀多王、婆舍跋提天王(他化自在天王)的欲功德被认为是最上的,所以问“为什么”,然后答以“如是等”。巴利
94. Kāmanīyattā kāmā ca te anekāvayavānaṃ samūhabhāvato sattānañca bandhanato guṇā cāti kāmaguṇāti atthaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘manāpiyarūpādīhī’’tiādi. Yāva phoṭṭhabbārammaṇañcettha ādi-saddena saṅgaṇhāti. Suṭṭhu appitoti sammā ṭhapito. Ṭhapanā cettha allīyanāti āha ‘‘allīno’’ti. Parito tattha tattha kāmaguṇesu yathāsakaṃ indriyāni cāreti gocaraṃ gaṇhāpetīti atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘tesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ, tenāha ‘‘ito cito ca upanetī’’ti. Pari-saddavisiṭṭho vā idha cara-saddo kīḷāyanti vuttaṃ ‘‘palaḷatī’’tiādi [laḷati (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)]. Palaḷatīti hi pakārena laḷati, vilāsaṃ karotīti attho. ‘‘Ettha cā’’tiādinā uttamakāmaguṇikānameva diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ paññapentīti dasseti. Mandhātumahārājavasavattīdevarājakāmaguṇā hi uttamatāya nidassitā, kasmāti āha ‘‘evarūpe’’tiādi.
95 “变异”一词是表示原因的从格用法。所谓“如所说之理”,就是依照经文中所教导的方式;以此显示愁等生起的方式。被亲族损失、财富损失、疾病、戒行败坏、见解败坏等灾祸所触及的人,内心深处的思虑、悲泣、内在的忧思,这就是它的特征,所以是“内在忧思相”。依止于那作为生起之因的愁,就是“依止于彼”。强烈的哀号、哭喊,正是依止于那愁的哭喊,这就是它的特征,所以是“依止于彼哭喊相”。依止于被称为净信之身的、与苦俱行的身识所受的压迫,就是“身压迫”;这也可以说是“有资具的说法”,比如“用弓射”;或者因为依那苦受而生起的不可意色后来生起,所以也通作“色身的压迫”。与嗔相应的心受到恼害,就是“意恼害”。这同样是它的特征——在一切处都应这样配合理解。被亲族损失等触及、连悲叹都无力的人,由内心潜藏的愁所生起的强烈苦恼,就是“忧恼”。然而那只是心不清净的状态,所以说“忧悒相”。令喜悦、令清净就是“悦”,即清净信。即使是不带前缀的词,也如同带前缀的词一样能表达所说的意义,比如“种性”。一切处都是如此。从那里退失就是“忧悒”,即不清净的状态。巴利
95.Aññathābhāvāti kāraṇe nissakkavacanaṃ. Vuttanayenāti suttapadesu desitanayena, etena sokādīnamuppajjanākāraṃ dasseti. Ñātibhogarogasīladiṭṭhibyasanehi phuṭṭhassa cetaso abbhantaraṃ nijjhāyanaṃ socanaṃ antonijjhāyanaṃ, tadeva lakkhaṇametassāti antonijjhāyanalakkhaṇo. Tasmiṃ soke samuṭṭhānahetubhūte nissitaṃ tannissitaṃ. Bhusaṃ vilapanaṃ lālappanaṃ, tannissitameva lālappanaṃ, tadeva lakkhaṇamassāti tannissitalālappanalakkhaṇo. Pasādasaṅkhāte kāye nissitassa dukkhasahagatakāyaviññāṇassa paṭipīḷanaṃ kāyapaṭipīḷanaṃ, sasambhārakathanaṃ vā etaṃ yathā ‘‘dhanunā vijjhatī’’ti tadupanissayassa vā aniṭṭharūpassa pacchā pavattanato ‘‘rūpakāyassa paṭipīḷana’’ntipi vaṭṭati. Paṭighasampayuttassa manaso vihesanaṃ manovighātaṃ. Tadeva lakkhaṇamassāti sabbattha yojetabbaṃ. Ñātibyasanādinā phuṭṭhassa paridevanāyapi asakkuṇantassa antogatasokasamuṭṭhito bhuso āyāso upāyāso. So pana cetaso appasannākāro evāti āha ‘‘visādalakkhaṇo’’ti. Sādanaṃ pasādanaṃ sādo, pasannatā. Anupasaggopi hi saddo saupasaggo viya yathāvuttassa atthassa bodhako yathā ‘‘gotrabhū’’ti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Tato vigamanaṃ visādo, appasannabhāvo.
96 96. 寻与伺:思惟本身、已被思惟者,从意义上看其实就是寻;在“已伺察”这个说法里也是一样。因此说“以执取作用而现起的寻”等等。这里的“以此”是指抓住寻与伺之后,说明其作为工具或因。由此阐明这个意思:因为寻与伺的自性是搅动,所以与它们俱生的禅那也像是被它们压迫一样。因此说“像带刺的果核一样”。所谓粗,是说与被称为寻伺的刺一起现起。与刺俱在,就是被压迫。世间人确实把带刺、粗糙的东西说成粗。巴利
96. Vitakkanaṃ vitakkitaṃ, taṃ panatthato vitakkova, tathā vicāritanti etthāpi, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘abhiniropanavasena pavatto vitakko’’tiādi. Etenāti vitakkavicāre parāmasitvā karaṇaniddeso, hetuniddeso vā. Tenetamatthaṃ dīpeti ‘‘khobhakarasabhāvattā vitakkavicārānaṃ taṃsahitampi jhānaṃ tehi sauppīḷanaṃ viya hotī’’ti, tenāha ‘‘sakaṇṭakaṃ [bhakaṇḍakaṃ (aṭṭhakathāyaṃ)] viya khāyatī’’ti. Oḷārikabhāvo hi vitakkavicārasaṅkhātena kaṇṭakena saha pavattakathā. Kaṇṭakasahitabhāvo ca sauppīḷanatā eva, loke hi sakaṇṭakaṃ pharusakaṃ oḷārikanti vadanti.
97 97. “喜处”其实就是喜本身,就像“见处”等说法里那样,“处”(gata)这个词是用来表达“彼之状态”的意思。注释家有个惯例:遇到没有实义的词和同格修饰的词,就抛开不管,直接解释它的含义。各处都能看到这种做法,比如“凡者即是如此”“涅槃界就是涅槃本身”等等。以踊跃喜为因相,当它生起时,心便踊跃,这叫做“已踊跃”;而这个踊跃性被用在表达状态的词上,所以就是那个意思。因此,喜生起时心就踊跃,心的这种踊跃状态就归名为喜,所以说“令踊跃”。巴利
97. Pītigataṃ pītiyeva ‘‘diṭṭhigata’’ntiādīsu (dha. sa. 381; mahāni. 12) viya gata-saddassa tabbhāvavuttito. Ayañhi saṃvaṇṇakānaṃ pakati, yadidaṃ anatthakapadaṃ, tulyādhikaraṇapadañca ṭhapetvā atthavaṇṇanā. Tathā hi tattha tattha dissati. ‘‘Yopanāti yo yādiso, (pārā. 45) nibbānadhātūti nibbāyanamatta’’nti ca ādi. Yāya nimittabhūtāya ubbilāvanapītiyā uppannāya cittaṃ ubbilāvitaṃ nāma, sāyeva ubbilāvitattaṃ bhāvavācakassa nimitte pavattanato. Iti pītiyā uppannāya eva cittassa ubbilāvanato tassa ubbilāvitabhāvo pītiyā kato nāmāti āha ‘‘ubbilabhāvakaraṇa’’nti.
98 心的弯曲状态、作意、心对目标倾向前去,就是“倾注”。正当、次第地或再三地摄取所缘,就是“正摄持”。因为心在乐受时会倾向目标,不像在苦受时那样背离目标,也不像在不苦不乐受时那样既不倾向也不背离。这里还应当说:就像被饥渴等压倒的人面对可口饮食等,由于远离欲乐时对目标的渴求特别强烈,欲望就增长;而像已经吃过可口饮食的人,对殊胜的欲乐之味已经随欲充分积聚、具足,因而不再有想吃喝诸欲的欲望,因为不贪著于感官对象,就像水蛭从难以附着的境中自行脱离一样。第一位论者以不恰当的方式浮出这种想法,认为由于欲乐的满足,就是轮回苦的止息。第二等论者则因为看见欲等过患,又看见初禅等乐的寂静,所以认为以初禅等乐的满足,就是轮回苦的断除。在这里,也应当把断灭论中说过的那种考察,按情况引进来加以说明。不过这里的差别是:即使在同一个生命体中,也可以得到五种主张。在第一说中,如果自我具足欲乐,那么他就证得现法涅槃。在第二等说中,如果被第一说所包含的同一个自我具足初禅等,那么在这种情况下,就是证得现法涅槃。正因为这样,这里在圣典中不像断灭论那样说“另一个自我”,没有另取一个自我。那么,为什么宣说究竟涅槃的自我现法涅槃论会被归入常见,而不是断灭见呢?因为这说明:通过获得各种不同的殊胜乐而得到束缚的解脱,纯粹自我就以自己的本来形态安住。他们的主张是:通过如此获得的业缚解脱,自我变得纯粹,证得现法涅槃,就以自己的本来形态安住。因此,在圣典中,以“到此程度,朋友,这个自我就证得最上的现法涅槃”这种带有常见意味的说法,展示了他们的主张。巴利
98. Ābhujanaṃ manasikaraṇaṃ ābhogo. Sammā anukkamena, punappunaṃ vā ārammaṇassa āhāro samannāhāro. Ayaṃ pana ṭīkāyaṃ (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.98) vuttanayo – cittassa ābhuggabhāvo ārammaṇe abhinatabhāvo ābhogo. Sukhena hi cittaṃ ārammaṇe abhinataṃ hoti, na dukkhena viya apanataṃ, nāpi adukkhamasukhena viya anabhinataṃ, anapanatañcāti. Ettha ca ‘‘manuññabhojanādīsu khuppipāsādiabhibhūtassa viya kāmehi viveciyamānassa upādārammaṇapatthanāvisesato abhivaḍḍhati, manuññabhojanaṃ bhuttāvino viya pana uḷārakāmarasassa yāvadatthaṃ nicitassa sahitassa bhuttakāmatāya kāmesu pātabyatā na hoti, visayānabhigiddhanato visayehi dummociyehi jalūkā viya sayameva muccatī’’ti ca ayoniso ummujjitvā kāmaguṇasantappitatāya saṃsāradukkhavūpasamaṃ byākāsi paṭhamavādī. Kāmādīnaṃ ādīnavadassitāya, paṭhamādijhānasukhassa santabhāvadassitāya ca paṭhamādijhānasukhatittiyā saṃsāradukkhupacchedaṃ byākaṃsu dutiyādivādino. Idhāpi ucchedavādeva vuttappakāro vicāro yathāsambhavaṃ ānetvā vattabbo. Ayaṃ panettha viseso – ekasmimpi attabhāve pañca vādā labbhanti. Paṭhamavāde yadi kāmaguṇasamappito attā, evaṃ so diṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto. Dutiyādivādesu yadi paṭhamavādasaṅgahito soyeva attā paṭhamajjhānādisamaṅgī , evaṃ sati diṭṭhadhammanibbānappattoti. Teneva hi ucchedavāde viya idha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘añño attā’’ti aññaggahaṇaṃ na kataṃ. Kathaṃ pana accantanibbānapaññāpakassa attano diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādassa sassatadiṭṭhiyā saṅgaho, na ucchedadiṭṭhiyāti? Taṃtaṃsukhavisesasamaṅgitāpaṭiladdhena bandhavimokkhena suddhassa attano sakarūpeneva avaṭṭhānadīpanato. Tesañhi tathāpaṭiladdhena kammabandhavimokkhena suddho hutvā diṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto attā sakarūpeneva avaṭṭhāsīti laddhi. Tathā hi pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘ettāvatā kho bho ayaṃ attā paramadiṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ patto hotī’’ti sassatabhāvañāpakacchāyāya eva tesaṃ vādadassanaṃ katanti.
“到此程度”等语,是对巴利圣典含义的总结。其中,“那些”是对如前所说诸见的不确定指示语。“他的这六十二见已被讲述”是确定语,或者这也可能是不定指称语,就像在“关于什么而说”出现的地方那样。“其余的”指五十五见。其中,边无边论等被归入常见,这一点在各处都已阐明。那么,这里的原因是什么呢?为什么只把过去际和未来际显示为见执着的境域,而不把这两者合在一起呢?这里的原因就是不可能。因为不像过去际和未来际那样,在脱离这两者的中间,不可能安立见解,因为那仅仅是两者之间的短暂时间。或者,如果现在的生命体是两者的中间,那么这样一来,它就有两者的性质,本来就包含在过去际和未来际之中,那又怎么能说两者合在一起没有被显示呢?或者,由于具有过去际和未来际,“中间”被称为“过去未来际”,而世尊在下面说“过去际论者、未来际论者、过去未来际论者”时,也是把它与过去际和未来际分开来说的,应当这样看待。在注释书中,也应当以“他们全都是过去未来际论者”这一总称,或者以省略一分的摄颂,来理解它已被包含。否则,对于归纳而说的言语,如果没有无余的归纳,就会导致无意义。那么,谁是那些过去未来际论者呢?应当知道,就是那些成为边无边论者、现法涅槃论者等,以如此方式执著于两者关联的人。巴利
‘‘Ettāvatā’’tiādinā pāḷiyatthasampiṇḍanaṃ. Tattha yāsanti yathāvuttānaṃ diṭṭhīnaṃ aniyamaniddesavacanaṃ. Tassa imā dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhiyo kathitāti niyamanaṃ, niyatānapekkhavacanaṃ vā etaṃ ‘‘yaṃ sandhāya vutta’’nti āgataṭṭhāne viya. Sesāti pañcapaññāsa diṭṭhiyo. Tāsu antānantikavādādīnaṃ sassatadiṭṭhisaṅgahabhāvo tattha tattha pakāsitoyeva. Kiṃ panettha kāraṇaṃ, pubbantāparantā eva diṭṭhābhinivesassa visayabhāvena dassitā, na pana tadubhayamekajjhanti? Asambhavo evettha kāraṇaṃ. Na hi pubbantāparantesu viya tadubhayavinimutte majjhante diṭṭhikappanā sambhavati tadubhayantaramattena ittarakālattā. Atha pana paccuppannattabhāvo tadubhayavemajjhaṃ, evaṃ sati diṭṭhikappanākkhamo tassa ubhayasabhāvo pubbantāparantesuyeva antogadhoti kathaṃ tadubhayamekajjhaṃ adassitaṃ siyā. Atha vā pubbantāparantavantatāya ‘‘pubbantāparanto’’ti majjhanto vuccati, sopi ‘‘pubbantakappikā ca aparantakappikā ca pubbantāparantakappikā cā’’ti upari vadantena bhagavatā pubbantāparantehi visuṃ katvā vuttoyevāti daṭṭhabbo. Aṭṭhakathāyampi ‘‘sabbepi te pubbantāparantakappike’’ti etena sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesena vā saṅgahitoti veditabbaṃ. Aññathā hi saṅkaḍḍhitvā vuttavacanassa niravasesasaṅkaḍḍhanābhāvato anatthakatā āpajjeyyāti. Ke pana te pubbantāparantakappikāti? Ye antānantikā hutvā diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādāti evamādinā ubhayasambandhābhinivesino veditabbā.
100-104 从现在开始,用这两种安止的说法来显示它们的差别。其中,“一起”是表示聚集意义的虚词。词源学者也说“使成为一”就是“一起”,这是中性抽象名词。“iti”这个词表示“这个意思”,也就是“用这种方式问过之后作了回答”的意思。“意乐”指以常见和断见为内容的见解之意乐。因为这两者,众生在杂染这一方面有两种意乐。正如所说的:巴利
100-104.‘‘Idānī’’tiādinā appanāvacanadvayassa visesaṃ dasseti. Tattha ekajjhanti rāsikaraṇatthe nipāto. Ekadhā karotīti ekajjhantipi neruttikā, bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ. Iti-saddo idamattho, iminā pakārena pucchitvā vissajjesīti attho. Ajjhāsayanti sassatucchedavasena diṭṭhijjhāsayaṃ. Tadubhayavasena hi sattānaṃ saṃkilesapakkhe duvidho ajjhāsayo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
常见与断见,以及顺从的忍耐;
如实了知的那个智,这被称为意乐。巴利
‘‘Sassatucchedadiṭṭhi ca, khanti cevānulomikā; Yathābhūtañca yaṃ ñāṇaṃ, etaṃ āsayasaddita’’nti. (visuddhi. ṭī. 1.136; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā; sārattha. ṭī. 1.paṭhamamahāsaṅgītikathāvaṇṇanā, verajjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; vi. vi. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanāpi passitabbaṃ);
世尊在无量世界中,对无量众生的无量所知差别,虽然随着生起方式而有种种不同,却以“四种人是常住论者”等说法,用六十二种分类来统摄,以一切知智加以限定并开示,就像拿着一把标准的秤在称量一样,因此说“犹如以秤在称量”。正如接下来要说的“已纳入网内”等等。而通过“犹如从须弥山脚取出沙粒”等说法,则显示除了佛陀的一切知智之外,其他智慧无法胜任这个教说,因为这是在宣说极为甚深之法。巴利
Tañca bhagavā aparimāṇāsu lokadhātūsu aparimāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ aparimāṇe eva ñeyyavisese uppajjanavasena anekabhedabhinnampi ‘‘cattāro janā sassatavādā’’tiādinā dvāsaṭṭhiyā pabhedehi saṅgaṇhanavasena sabbaññutaññāṇena paricchinditvā dassento pamāṇabhūtāya tulāya dhārayamāno viya hotīti āha ‘‘tulāya tulayanto viyā’’ti. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘antojālīkatā’’tiādi (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.146) ‘‘sinerupādato vālukaṃ uddharanto viyā’’ti pana etena sabbaññutaññāṇato aññassa ñāṇassa imissā desanāya asakkuṇeyyataṃ dasseti paramagambhīratāvacanato.
在这里,根据“这一切都只是以这六十二种事,或以其中某一种,此外没有别的”这一说法,以及除了三种前际分别论者之外,不存在其他任何持见者,因此应当知道:《沙门果经》等经中所说的各种无作论、无因论、虚无论等,以及在外道中出现的自在天论、生主论、士夫论、时论、自性论、必然论、偶然论等种种见解,虽然也见于外道,但应知道它们都统摄于此中。如何?无作论首先以“ sterile、如柱”等说明无作,故摄于常见;同样,“有此等身”等语所出的 Pakudha 论,以及“无因无缘使众生杂染”等语所出的无因论,则摄于无因偶然生论。“无他世”等语所出的虚无论摄于断见。因为在那里说“身坏后断灭”等。以第一个“等”字,则摄取了尼乾陀论等。巴利
Ettha ca ‘‘sabbe te imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi, etesaṃ vā aññatarena, natthi ito bahiddhā’’ti vacanato, pubbantakappikādittayavinimuttassa ca kassaci diṭṭhigatikassa abhāvato yāni tāni sāmaññaphalādisuttantaresu vuttappakārāni akiriyāhetukanatthikavādādīni, yāni ca issarapakatipajāpatipurisakālasabhāvaniyatiyadicchāvādādippabhedāni diṭṭhigatāni (visuddhi. 1.160-162; vibha. anuṭī. 2.194-195 vākyakhandhesu passitabbaṃ) bahiddhāpi dissamānāni, tesaṃ ettheva saṅgahato antogadhatā veditabbā. Kathaṃ? Akiriyavādo tāva ‘‘vañjho kūṭaṭṭho’’tiādinā kiriyābhāvadīpanato sassatavāde antogadho, tathā ‘‘sattime kāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.174) nayappavatto pakudhavādo, ‘‘natthi hetu natthi paccayo sattānaṃ saṃkilesāyā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.168) nayappavatto ahetukavādo ca adhiccasamuppannavāde. ‘‘Natthi paro loko’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.171) nayappavatto natthikavādo ucchedavāde. Tathā hi tattha ‘‘kāyassa bhedā ucchijjatī’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.85) vuttaṃ. Paṭhamena ādi-saddena nigaṇṭhavādādayo saṅgahitā.
虽然圣典中(《长部》1.177)以尼乾子论的形式提到了四重防护,但因为他超越了七身之说而落入散乱论,所以尼乾子论也像散若夷论一样,归入不死矫乱论中。“命即是身,命异身异”这类主张,则归入“有色之我无病死后存在”等说法中。“如来死后存在,有化生有情”这类说法,归入常见。“如来死后不存在,无化生有情”这类说法,归入断灭见。“如来死后也存在也不存在,有情也存在也不存在”这类说法,归入一分常见。“如来死后既非存在也非不存在,有情既非存在也非不存在”这类说法,归入不死矫乱论。自在天论、本性论、生主论、士夫论、时论,归入一分常见。胜论派论、自性论、决定论、意欲论,则归入无因生论。按照这个道理,应当知道其他经典以及外道宗派中所见的各种见趣,都含摄在这六十二见之中。但如果按照各处出现的理路逐一展开来说,只会增加篇幅,而且像是跳进外道的领域,所以我们没有展开。在这里,依据圣典抉择义理,在注释书中阐明未显明之义,正是我们的责任。巴利
Yadipi pāḷiyaṃ (dī. ni. 1.177) nāṭaputtavādabhāvena cātuyāmasaṃvaro āgato, tathāpi sattavatātikkamena vikkhepavāditāya nāṭaputtavādopi sañcayavādo viya amarāvikkhepavādesu antogadho. ‘‘Taṃ jīvaṃ taṃ sarīraṃ, aññaṃ jīvaṃ aññaṃ sarīra’’nti (dī. ni. 1.377; ma. ni. 2.122; saṃ. ni. 2.35) evaṃpakārā vādā pana ‘‘rūpī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā’’tiādivādesu saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. ‘‘Hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, atthi sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃpakārā sassatavāde. ‘‘Na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃpakārā ucchedavāde. ‘‘Hoti ca na hoti ca tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, atthi ca natthi ca sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃpakārā ekaccasassatavāde. ‘‘Neva hoti na na hoti tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā, nevatthi na natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti evaṃpakārā amarāvikkhepavāde. Issarapakatipajāpatipurisakālavādā ekaccasassatavāde. Kaṇādavādo, sabhāvaniyatiyadicchāvādā ca adhiccasamuppannavāde saṅgahaṃ gacchanti. Iminā nayena suttantaresu, bahiddhā ca aññatitthiyasamaye dissamānānaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ imāsuyeva dvāsaṭṭhiyā diṭṭhīsu antogadhatā veditabbā. Te pana tattha tatthāgatanayena vuccamānā ganthavitthārakarā, atitthe ca pakkhandanamiva hotīti na vitthārayimha. Idha pāḷiyaṃ atthavicāraṇāya aṭṭhakathāyaṃ anuttānatthapakāsanameva hi amhākaṃ bhāroti.
“开示是依这样的连结方式而来的”——借着这句话,为了分析这部经的连结,说了“有三种”等话。因为排除其他含义,正是为了确定特征。其中,连结就是连接,仅仅是联系;由于它以开示之因的身份存在,也被称为“发起”。因为提问等是开示的外在原因,开示是随顺它们而展开的。那与它们的联系,也因为依止于它们,所以同样是原因。而内在的原因则是大悲心、开示智等。这个道理将在后面显现。由提问而成的连结,叫“提问连结”;因为是以提问为连结而说的,所以这部经的关联就被说成是由提问而成的。以提问为本质的连结,也可以叫“提问连结”。因为依止于提问的连结,其依止处的提问也被包含进来了。或者,连结者就是连结,以提问为本质的连结属于这部经,所以是“提问连结”,也就是各各经句。或者,由提问而连结,所以是“提问连结”,也就是以提问为语句关联而说、以它为发起的那些各各经句。对于意乐连结,也是同样的道理。被连结者就是连结,各各连结,或者与连结相应者,就是随连结。巴利
‘‘Evamayaṃ yathānusandhivasena desanā āgatā’’ti vacanappasaṅgena suttassānusandhayo vibhajituṃ ‘‘tayo hī’’tiādimāha. Atthantaranisedhanatthañhi visesaniddhāraṇaṃ. Tattha anusandhanaṃ anusandhi, sambandhamattaṃ, yaṃ desanāya kāraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘samuṭṭhāna’’ntipi vuccati. Pucchādayo hi desanāya bāhirakāraṇaṃ tadanurūpena desanāpavattanato. Taṃsambandhopi tannissitattā kāraṇameva. Abbhantarakāraṇaṃ pana mahākaruṇādesanāñāṇādayo. Ayamattho upari āvi bhavissati. Pucchāya kato anusandhi pucchānusandhi, pucchaṃ anusandhiṃ katvā desitattā suttassa sambandho pucchāya kato nāma hoti. Pucchāsaṅkhāto anusandhi pucchānusandhītipi yujjati. Pucchānissitena hi anusandhinā tannissayabhūtā pucchāpi gahitāti. Atha vā anusandhahatīti anusandhi, pucchāsaṅkhāto anusandhi etassāti pucchānusandhi, taṃtaṃsuttapadeso. Pucchāya vā anusandhīyatīti pucchānusandhi, pucchaṃ vacanasambandhaṃ katvā desito taṃsamuṭṭhāniko taṃtaṃsuttapadesova. Ajjhāsayānusandhimhipi eseva nayo. Anusandhīyatīti anusandhi, yo yo anusandhi, anusandhino anurūpaṃ vā yathānusandhi.
并非由提问和意乐所连结的、属于最初所说之法的后续经文部分,是依与所说之法相应的法、或依与它相对立的法而展开的。正如注释书中以“然而,由彼法……中略……锯喻传来”等语句所说的那样,这是为了表明它是依圣典本身所作的分类,才说了“其中”等话。其中,有人读作“这样说时,牧牛者难陀对世尊说了这番话”,这并不妥当,因为经中并没有那样的内容。应该读作“这样说时,在《牧牛者难陀经》中,对世尊说了这番话”,因为在那部经里,“某位比丘对世尊说了这番话”这个意思是说得通的。因为这是《相应部》中六处相应里所结集的经。以在恒河中被水流冲走的木块为比喻,为那些因信心而出家的善男子说法时,牧牛者难陀心想“我要圆满这个修行”,就在世尊面前出家并受了具足戒,这样修行,不久便证得了阿罗汉果。因此,这部经被称为《牧牛者难陀经》。而“尊者,那是什么呢”等话,其实是另一位比丘说的。因为那里确实说了:“这样说时,某位比丘对世尊说了这番话:‘尊者,那是什么呢,此岸……’”等等。巴利
Pucchāya, ajjhāsayena ca ananusandhiko ādimhi desitadhammassa anurūpadhammavasena vā tappaṭipakkhadhammavasena vā pavatto uparisuttapadeso. Tathā hi so ‘‘yena pana dhammena…pe… kakacūpamā āgatā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.100-104) aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto, yathāpāḷimayaṃ vibhāgoti dasseti ‘‘tatthā’’tiādinā. Tattha ‘‘evaṃ vutte nando gopālako bhagavantaṃ etadavocā’’ti paṭhanti, taṃ na sundaraṃ sutte tathā abhāvato. ‘‘Evaṃ vutte nandagopālakasutte bhagavantaṃ etadavocā’’ti pana paṭhitabbaṃ tasmiṃ sutte ‘‘aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṃ etadavocā’’ti atthassa upapattito. Idañhi saṃyuttāgamavare saḷāyatanavagge saṅgītasuttaṃ. Gaṅgāya vuyhamānaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ upamaṃ katvā saddhāpabbajite kulaputte desite nando gopālako ‘‘ahamimaṃ paṭipattiṃ pūressāmī’’ti bhagavato santike pabbajjaṃ, upasampadañca gahetvā tathāpaṭipajjamāno nacirasseva arahattaṃ patto. Tasmā ‘‘nandagopālakasutta’’nti paññāyittha. ‘‘Kiṃ nu kho bhante’’tiādīni pana aññataroyeva bhikkhu avoca. Vuttañhi tattha ‘‘evaṃ vutte aññataro bhikkhu bhagavantaṃ etadavoca ‘kiṃ nu kho bhante, orimaṃ tīra’ntiādi’’.
这里的意思是:“如此说”指的是,以“比丘们,如果那木块不靠近此岸”等话,用恒河中被水流冲走的木块作比喻,为那些因信心而出家的善男子所作的开示。“对世尊说了这话”指的是,因为善于把握前后关联,所以说了“尊者,究竟是怎么回事”等话。如来只要凭“坐在这会众中的某个人善于把握关联,他会来问我问题”这一点,就已经把开示收束了。“此岸”就是属于此岸的岸,彼岸也是这样。“在中间沉没”就是在正中间沉下去、沉入水中。“在洲上搁浅”就是在水中隆起的洲上被冲上去、爬上去。“被人抓住”就是被人所抓住,或者与人有关系的抓住。同样,“被非人抓住”就是被非人抓住。“被漩涡抓住”就是被水中的漩涡抓住。“内部腐败”就是肾脏、心脏等虽然本身没坏,但因为功德已经败坏,所以说是内部腐败。巴利
Tatrāyamattho – evaṃ vutteti ‘‘sace kho bhikkhave, dārukkhandho na orimaṃ tīraṃ upagacchatī’’tiādinā gaṅgāya vuyhamānaṃ dārukkhandhaṃ upamaṃ katvā saddhāpabbajite kulaputte desite. Bhagavantaṃ etadavocāti anusandhikusalatāya ‘‘kiṃ nu kho bhante’’tiādivacanamavoca. Tathāgato hi ‘‘imissaṃ parisati nisinno anusandhi kusalo atthi, so maṃ pañhaṃ pucchissatī’’ti ettakeneva desanaṃ niṭṭhāpesi. Orimaṃ tīranti orimabhūtaṃ tīraṃ. Tathā pārimaṃ tīranti. Majjhe saṃsīdoti vemajjhe saṃsīdanaṃ nimmujjanaṃ. Thale ussādoti jalamajjhe uṭṭhite thalasmiṃ ussārito āruḷho. Manussaggāhoti manussānaṃ sambandhībhūtānaṃ, manussehi vā gahaṇaṃ. Tathā amanussaggāhoti āvaṭṭaggāhoti udakāvaṭṭena gahaṇaṃ. Antopūtīti vakkahadayādīsu apūtikassāpi guṇānaṃ pūtibhāvena abbhantaraṃpūtīti.
“那时,某位比丘”这一段,出自《中部》后五十经中的《大满月经》(中部3.88–90)。这里的意思是:“据说”这个词在这里表示不满,用来说明那位比丘对世尊所教导的无我性心怀不满。“尊者”是对法的称呼,意思是“喂,自性法”。如果色是无我……乃至……识是无我。既然如此,这是连同剩余文句一起的衔接。不是由我所作,就是不是自己所作的,或者是由无我的诸蕴所作的。将触及怎样的我?就是将会触及什么样的我。既然没有我,而诸蕴又是刹那生灭的,那些业将以自己的果报触及哪个我呢?谁来感受业果呢?这就是所说的意思。世尊以自己的心,也就是与心差别智相应或与一切知智相应的心,了知那位比丘心中的寻思之后——这是衔接。巴利
‘‘Atha kho aññatarassa bhikkhuno’’tiādi majjhimāgamavare uparipaṇṇāsake mahāpuṇṇamasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 3.88-90) tatrāyamattho – iti kirāti ettha kira-saddo aruciyaṃ, tena bhagavato yathādesitāya attasuññatāya attano aruciyabhāvaṃ dīpeti. Bhoti dhammālapanaṃ, ambho sabhāvadhammāti attho. Yadi rūpaṃ anattā…pe… viññāṇaṃ anattā. Evaṃ satīti sapāṭhasesayojanā. Anattakatānīti attanā na katāni, anattabhūtehi vā khandhehi katāni. Kamattānaṃ phusissantīti kīdisamattabhāvaṃ phusissanti. Asati attani khandhānañca khaṇikattā tāni kammāni kaṃ nāma attānaṃ attano phalena phusissanti, ko kammaphalaṃ paṭisaṃvedissatīti vuttaṃ hoti. Tassa bhikkhuno cetoparivitakkaṃ attano cetasā ceto – pariyañāṇasampayuttena sabbaññutaññāṇasampayuttena vā aññāya jānitvāti sambandho.
没有听闻等,所以对圣法不精通,因此是愚人。“有闻”确实是智者的同义词,因为“他知道、他了解”,所以叫智者。已进入无明,就是被无明所覆盖;因为没在圣法中得到调伏,所以没有断除无明,这就是这句话的意思。以渴爱为主导的心,就是心里想:“如果根本没有我,那么我造了业之后,谁来感受果报?可是如果有一个我,那就能享受业果了。”这样从渴爱主导而来、伴随着我执取的心。应当越过去奔跑,就是要越过它而奔跑。这里说的是:即使诸行是刹那刹那生灭的,在哪个相续里造了业,就在那里生起果报,所以业与果报的关系仅仅依于法聚而成立;如果错误地执取“作者和受者是同一个实体”,认为否则业与业果就没有关联,那就会以为应该越过导师教法中“无我、无我所”这一空性的阐明。现在为了说明不应越过而奔跑,说了“你们对此怎么想”等。巴利
Avidvāti sutādivirahena ariyadhammassa akovidatāya apaṇḍito. Vidvāti hi paṇḍitādhivacanaṃ vidati jānātīti katvā. Avijjāgatoti avijjāya upagato, ariyadhamme avinītatāya appahīnāvijjoti attho. Taṇhādhipateyyena cetasāti ‘‘yadi ahaṃ nāma koci natthi, evaṃ sati mayā katassa kammassa phalaṃ ko paṭisaṃvedeti, sati pana tasmiṃ siyā kammaphalūpabhogo’’ti taṇhādhipatito āgatena attavādupādānasahagatena cetasā. Atidhāvitabbanti atikkamitvā dhāvitabbaṃ. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – khaṇikattepi saṅkhārānaṃ yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ kataṃ, tattheva phalūpapattito dhammapuñjamattasseva siddhe kammaphalasambandhe ekattanayaṃ micchā gahetvā ekena kārakavedakabhūtena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā kammakammaphalānamasambandho siyāti attattaniyasuññatāpakāsanaṃ satthusāsanaṃ atikkamitabbaṃ maññeyyāti. Idāni anatidhāvitabbataṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññathā’’tiādimāha.
上面这段开示,是指在阐明开示起因法的下段开示之上,继续进行的开示。按照开示起因法,从随顺法与对治法门来阐明,在两种随顺连接中,这是依随顺法门来显示随顺连接,即“上面出现了六神通”。而其余的全部内容,则是依对治法门来阐明。这些经就收在《中部》的根本五十经中。以烦恼来说,就是“贪是心的随烦恼”等等,这是依烦恼来说。以争吵来说,就是争论。以不忍来说,就是忿怒。锯喻,就是粗恶的比喻。这里的“pi”字表示期待,就像“这也是波罗夷”等处的用法一样,或者表示总集。因此,就像在《衣经》等中依对治法门来阐明随顺连接那样,在这《梵网经》中也是如此,它起到期待或总集的作用。正因为这样,这开示是因常、坚实等被宣说的诸邪见而生起,又以阐明常、坚实等之空性而结束。以“因此”等语,显示前面所说注释的功德。巴利
Upari desanāti desanāsamuṭṭhānadhammadīpikāya heṭṭhimadesanāya upari pavattitā desanā. Desanāsamuṭṭhānadhammassa anurūpapaṭipakkhadhammappakāsanavasena duvidhesu yathānusandhīsu anurūpadhammappakāsanavasena yathānusandhidassanametaṃ ‘‘upari cha abhiññā āgatā’’ti. Tadavasesaṃ pana sabbampi paṭipakkhadhammappakāsanavasena. Majjhimāgamavare mūlapaṇṇāsakeyeva cetāni suttāni. Kilesenāti ‘‘lobho cittassa upakkileso’’tiādinā kilesavasena. Bhaṇḍanenāti vivādena. Akkhantiyāti kopena. Kakacūpamāti kharapantiupamā. Imasmimpīti pi-saddo apekkhāyaṃ ‘‘ayampi pārājiko’’tiādīsu (vi. 1.72-73, 167, 171, 195, 197) viya, sampiṇḍane vā, tena yathā vatthasuttādīsu paṭipakkhadhammappakāsanavasena yathānusandhi , evaṃ imasmimpi brahmajāleti apekkhanaṃ, sampiṇḍanaṃ vā karoti. Tathā hi niccasārādipaññāpakānaṃ diṭṭhigatānaṃ vasena uṭṭhitāyaṃ desanā niccasārādisuññatāpakāsanena niṭṭhāpitāti. ‘‘Tenā’’tiādinā yathāvuttasaṃvaṇṇanāya guṇaṃ dasseti.
对“怖畏与挣扎品”的解说巴利
Paritassitavipphanditavāravaṇṇanā
105-117 为了显示界限的区分:通过诸佛世尊对邪见者的渴爱和邪见执取的如实知见,以及通过正见对常见等邪见的对治,来阐明无混杂与区分的不同方式。那些人只有渴爱和邪见的执取,不像诸佛世尊那样有如实的知见。这只是渴爱和邪见的挣扎,是邪见所感受的,不像入流者的正见所感受的那样不动摇。这段开示正是为了显示界限的区分。因此接下来会说“以邪见的味著……那是感受”,以及“以称为邪见的……显示”。因为说了“那也”,为了表明“他们以之生起喜悦而施设”这一含义的获得,所以说了“以之”等语。在这里,只有依于能力而理解其义的人,才会用“那”字来指代。“以邪见的味著”就是以作为邪见之缘的味著。“以邪见之乐”等是它的同义词。对于那些不知不见的沙门婆罗门,那感受也是渴爱者的感受——这是句子的连接。巴利
105-117.Mariyādavibhāgadassanatthanti diṭṭhigatikānaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiparāmāsassa tathāgatānaṃ jānanapassanena, sassatādimicchādassanassa ca sammādassanena saṅkarābhāva-vibhāgappakāsanatthaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhiparāmāsoyeva tesaṃ, na tu tathāgatānamiva yathābhūtaṃ jānanapassanaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhivipphandanamevetaṃ micchādassanavedayitaṃ, na tu sotāpannassa sammādassanavedayitamiva niccalanti ca hi imāya desanāya mariyādavibhāgaṃ dasseti. Tena vakkhati ‘‘yena diṭṭhiassādena…pe… taṃ vedayita’’nti, ‘‘diṭṭhisaṅkhātena ceva…pe… dassetī’’ti ca. ‘‘Tadapī’’ti vuttattā yena somanassajātā paññapentīti attho labbhatīti dassetuṃ ‘‘yenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sāmatthiyato hi avagatatthassevettha ta-saddena parāmasanaṃ. Diṭṭhiassādenāti diṭṭhiyā paccayabhūtena assādena. ‘‘Diṭṭhisukhenā’’tiādi tasseva vevacanaṃ. Ajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ tesaṃ bhavantānaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ tadapi vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ vedayitanti sambandho.
“如实诸法的自性”这句话,是笼统地说的。因为并不是仅仅由于不了解有为法的自性,就会错误地执著。而一般性的说明,要落在具体的差别上。所以这里应当作具体的连接说明:“我与世间是常”这个见解的立足处,被这样执取、这样把握、有这样的趣向、有这样的来世归宿——这是对那些不如实了知、不见真相的人而说的;或者说,对于那种感受,由于还没有远离渴爱,就执取这样的见解——这是对那些不如实了知、不见该感受的集起与灭去等的人而说的。通过这样具体的连接说明,就能清楚地看出:如来以无遮障的智慧、周全的眼,对这里的一切如实了知、如实照见,而执持邪见的人则不是这样,他们只有渴爱和邪见的执取——这正是这段开示所要显示的义理。而且,这段开示也正是为了显示界限的区分而说的。巴利
‘‘Yathābhūtadhammānaṃ sabhāva’’nti ca avisesena vuttaṃ. Na hi saṅkhatadhammasabhāvaṃ ajānanamattena micchā abhinivisanti. Sāmaññajotanā ca visese avatiṭṭhati. Tasmāyamettha visesayojanā kātabbā – ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti idaṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ evaṃgahitaṃ evaṃparāmaṭṭhaṃ evaṃgatikaṃ hoti evaṃabhisamparāyanti yathābhūtamajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ atha vā yasmiṃ vedayite avītataṇhatāya evaṃdiṭṭhigataṃ upādīyati, taṃ vedayitaṃ samudayaatthaṅgamādito yathābhūtamajānantānaṃ apassantānanti. Evaṃ visesayojanāya hi yathā anāvaraṇañāṇasamantacakkhūhi tathāgatānaṃ yathābhūtamettha jānanaṃ, passanañca hoti, na evaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ, atha kho tesaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhiparāmāsoyevāti imamatthaṃ imāya desanāya dassetīti pākaṭaṃ hoti. Evampi cāyaṃ desanā mariyādavibhāgadassanatthaṃ jātā.
所谓“感受”,是指为了安立“我与世间是常”这种见解而运作的、以见的享受和快乐为同义语所说的那种感受,那也是一种体验。“为渴爱所染者”,就是被渴爱所接近、或者正在运作的人,这里用“只是……感受”这样已经说过的方式来说明。“而那……”则是指前面所说的那种感受本身,由此表明:“那感受也只是为渴爱所染者的感受”,这样断开之后,应当再接上“那感受也只是怖畏与挣扎而已”。“那尚且达不到”是为了显示以最低界限来划分范围,所以说“不像入流者的见那样不动摇”。“见”是指正见之乐,也就是道果之乐。这个意思从哪里得来?从“只是”这个词的力量得来。因为说了“只是怖畏与挣扎而已”,就得出这样的意思:不像道果之乐那样不挣扎而安住于一味,而是由于被见和渴爱之箭所贯穿、带有逼迫,所以只是挣扎而已。因此说“以怖畏……”等。这是此处脱离注释书的连带理趣。巴利
Vedayitanti ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31) diṭṭhipaññāpanavasena pavattaṃ diṭṭhissādasukhapariyāyena vuttaṃ, tadapi anubhavanaṃ. Taṇhāgatānanti taṇhāya upagatānaṃ, pavattānaṃ vā tadeva vuttinayena vivarati ‘‘kevalaṃ…pe… vedayita’’nti. Tañca kho panetanti ca yathāvuttaṃ vedayitameva paccāmasati, tenetaṃ dīpeti – ‘‘tadapi vedayitaṃ taṇhāgatānaṃ vedayitamevā’’ti vacchinditvā ‘‘tadapi vedayitaṃ paritassitavipphanditamevā’’ti puna sambandho kātabboti. Tadapi tāva na sampāpuṇātīti heṭṭhimaparicchedena mariyādavibhāgaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘na sotāpannassa dassanamiva niccala’’nti vuttaṃ. Dassananti ca sammādassanasukhaṃ, maggaphalasukhanti vuttaṃ hoti. Kuto cāyamattho labbhatīti eva-saddasāmatthiyato. ‘‘Paritassitavipphanditamevā’’ti hi vuttena maggaphalasukhaṃ viya avipphanditaṃ hutvā ekarūpe avatiṭṭhati, atha kho taṃ vaṭṭāmisabhūtaṃ diṭṭhitaṇhāsallānuviddhatāya sauppīḷattā vipphanditamevāti attho āpanno hoti, tenevāha ‘‘paritassitenā’’tiādi. Ayamettha aṭṭhakathāmuttako sasambandhanayo.
像这样,从差别因的角度分析了六十二种见之后,现在要从无差别因的角度来说明它们,于是开始了“诸比丘,在此……”等开示。因为对于一切见来说,受、无明和渴爱都是无差别的因。其中,“那也……”是指在“他们安立常住的我和世间”这句话里,作为安立“我与世间是常”之因的、以乐等为区分的三种感受——那些不如实了知、不见这些感受依次是苦箭、无常,或者不加区分地不如实了知、不见它们的集起、灭去、味、过患、出离的人,那感受也同样是存在的。正因如此,由于对乐等生起希求,又因为被渴爱所染,为渴爱所染者以渴爱的怖畏,就只是见的挣扎、见的动摇而已。意思是说:“如果没有我,谁来领受感受?”这只是见在身门和语门中的动摇而已,并不是说有任何可以被见安立的常法存在。在一分常住等见中,这个道理也同样适用。巴利
Evaṃ visesakāraṇato dvāsaṭṭhi diṭṭhigatāni vibhajitvā idāni avisesakāraṇato tāni dassetuṃ ‘‘tatra bhikkhave’’tiādikā desanā āraddhā. Sabbesañhi diṭṭhigatānaṃ vedanā, avijjā, taṇhā ca avisiṭṭhakāraṇaṃ. Tattha tadapīti ‘‘sassataṃ attānañca lokañca paññapentī’’ti ettha yadetaṃ ‘‘sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti paññāpanahetubhūtaṃ sukhādibhedaṃ tividhampi vedayitaṃ, tadapi yathākkamaṃ dukkhasallāniccato, avisesena samudayatthaṅgamassādādīnavanissaraṇato vā yathābhūtamajānantānaṃ apassantānaṃ hoti, tato eva ca sukhādipatthanāsambhavato, taṇhāya ca upagatattā taṇhāgatānaṃ taṇhāparitassitena diṭṭhivipphanditameva diṭṭhicalanameva. ‘‘Asati attani ko vedanaṃ anubhavatī’’ti kāyavacīdvāresu diṭṭhiyā copanappattimattameva, na pana diṭṭhiyā paññapetabbo koci dhammo sassato atthīti adhippāyoti. Ekaccasassatādīsupi esa nayo.
触缘章的注释巴利
Phassapaccayavāravaṇṇanā
118 为了显示缘的辗转相续,意思是:见的根本因,那个因的因,再那个因的因——这样来显示缘的辗转相续。因为那些邪见是随着被渴爱所逼迫的心而生起的,它的缘是感受,感受的缘又是触;这个开示就是这样阐明缘的辗转相续。那么,显示缘的辗转相续是为了什么目的呢?是为了让人了解另一层道理。也就是说,正如被称为见的那个安立之法以及它的缘法,都是各自依各自的缘而生起,离开缘就不能生起;同样,应当安立的法,比如色、受等,也是如此——在这里并没有任何常住的“我”或“世间”。这就是所要让人了解的另一层道理。意思是:那被渴爱和邪见所搅动出来的感受,也是以触为缘的,而触是作为见的根本因——渴爱——的缘。巴利
118.Paramparapaccayadassanatthanti yaṃ diṭṭhiyā mūlakāraṇaṃ, tassāpi kāraṇaṃ, puna tassapi kāraṇanti evaṃ paccayaparamparadassanatthaṃ. Yena hi taṇhāparitassitena etāni diṭṭhigatāni pavattanti, tassa vedayitaṃ paccayo, vedayitassāpi phasso paccayoti evaṃ paccayaparamparavibhāvinī ayaṃ desanā. Kimatthiyaṃ pana paccayaparamparadassananti ce? Atthantaraviññāpanatthaṃ. Tena hi yathā diṭṭhisaṅkhāto paññāpanadhammo, tappaccayadhammā ca yathāsakaṃ paccayavaseneva uppajjanti, na paccayehi vinā, evaṃ paññapetabbadhammāpi rūpavedanādayo, na ettha koci sassato attā vā loko vāti evamatthantaraṃ viññāpitaṃ hoti. Taṇhādiṭṭhipariphanditaṃ tadapi vedayitaṃ diṭṭhikāraṇabhūtāya taṇhāya paccayabhūtaṃ phassapaccayā hotīti attho.
131 “彼缘的”是指那名为触的缘。在“见所受”中,也就是在作为见之缘的感受中,这感受应当以触为首、由各自的缘而产生。这里的处格表示“应当被成就”。为了显示其强力状态,也就是显示它是强力因的状态。因为即使没有眼等依处以及某些相应法,受也能生起,但从来不可能没有触而生起,所以触是受的强力因。不仅对受如此,对其余相应法也是如此。因为即使所缘已经现前,如果心的生起缺少触的行相,它就不能以该所缘为所缘缘,所以触是一切相应法的殊胜缘。正如世尊在《法集论》中分析心生起时,首先举出“有触”,而对于受,它只是特别殊胜的亲依止缘。由于说了“他们将感受”,所以在“那也”处有“那个受”的承前省略,因此说“那个受”。对于应被理解的意义,由于“或”字的运用是随意的,或因省略,或因剩余,这个字未被使用。在这些情况下也是如此。这里有一首偈颂:巴利
131.Tassa paccayassāti tassa phassasaṅkhātassa paccayassa. Diṭṭhivedayite diṭṭhiyā paccayabhūte vedayite, phassapadhānehi attano paccayehi nipphādetabbe. Sādhetabbe cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Balavabhāvadassanatthanti balavakāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ. Tathā hi vināpi cakkhādivatthūhi, sampayuttadhammehi ca kehici vedanā uppajjati, na pana kadācipi phassena vinā, tasmā phasso vedanāya balavakāraṇaṃ. Na kevalaṃ vedanāya eva, atha kho sesasampayuttadhammānampi. Sannihitopi hi visayo sace cittuppādo phusanākāravirahito hoti, na tassa ārammaṇapaccayo bhavatīti phasso sabbesampi sampayuttadhammānaṃ visesapaccayo. Tathā hi bhagavatā dhammasaṅgaṇīpakaraṇe cittuppādaṃ vibhajantena ‘‘phasso hotī’’ti phassasseva paṭhamamuddharaṇaṃ kataṃ, vedanāya pana sātisayamadhiṭṭhānapaccayo eva. ‘‘Paṭisaṃvedissantī’’ti vuttattā ‘‘tadapī’’ti etthādhikāroti āha ‘‘taṃ vedayita’’nti. Gamyamānatthassa vā-saddassa payogaṃ pati kāmacārattā, lopattā, sesattāpi ca esa na payutto. Evamīdisesu. Hoti cettha –
从“所诠义”的角度看,有承前、省略和剩余三种情况;
即使用这四种原因,也无论在哪里都不适合用“或”字。巴利
‘‘Gamyamānādhikārato, lopato sesato cāti; Kāraṇehi catūhipi, na katthaci ravo yutto’’ti.
“正如”等句,通过说明触是强有力的原因,来阐明这个意思。其中,patato指正在落下的;thūṇā是支撑木柱的别名。巴利
‘‘Yathā hī’’tiādinā phassassa balavakāraṇatādassanena tadatthaṃ samattheti. Tattha patatoti patantassa. Thūṇāti upatthambhakadārussetaṃ adhivacanaṃ.
关于各种见趣及其立足点的轮转之论的解释巴利
Diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānavaṭṭakathāvaṇṇanā
144 144. 虽然在这个地方的巴利文中并没有出现“所受”,但下面三处中它都增多了,而且上面又将说“触了又触而感受”,所以这里以“所受”为主,因此说“它总集一切见所受”。“那些也”等,是考虑到各处出现的“也”字的意义,才说“总集”。因为“那些常住论的沙门婆罗门……他们全都通过六触处触了又触而感受”,这样以感受的作用把各个见趣者总集起来,就成了所受的总集。一切语句都是以作用为主的。为了在上面摄入触——也就是说,当说“以六触处”时,是为了摄入触,而这里的摄入正是显示所受以触为缘。通过“以六触处触了又触而感受”这句话,就显示了通过六内处感受六种所缘,必定是以六触为因的,因此说了“他们全部”等。巴利
144. Kiñcāpi imasmiṃ ṭhāne pāḷiyaṃ vedayitamanāgataṃ, heṭṭhā pana tīsupi vāresu adhikatattā, upari ca ‘‘phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti vakkhamānattā vedayitamevettha padhānanti āha ‘‘sabbadiṭṭhivedayitāni sampiṇḍetī’’ti. ‘‘Yepi te’’ti tattha tattha āgatassa ca pi-saddassa atthaṃ sandhāya ‘‘sampiṇḍetī’’ti vuttaṃ. Ye te samaṇabrāhmaṇā sassatavādā…pe… sabbepi te chahi phassāyatanehi phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentīti hi vedayitakiriyāvasena taṃtaṃdiṭṭhigatikānaṃ sampiṇḍitattā vedayitasampiṇḍanameva jātaṃ. Sabbampi hi vākyaṃ kiriyāpadhānanti. Upari phasse pakkhipanatthāyāti ‘‘chahi phassāyatanehī’’ti vutte upari phasse pakkhipanatthaṃ, pakkhipanañcettha vedayitassa phassapaccayatādassanameva. ‘‘Chahi phassāyatanehi phussa phussa paṭisaṃvedentī’’ti iminā hi chahi ajjhattikāyatanehi chaḷārammaṇapaṭisaṃvedanaṃ ekantato chaphassahetukamevāti dassitaṃ hoti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbe te’’tiādi.
“剑蒲阇”是一个叫这个名字的国家。南道也是这样。“于生起处”这句话,是在说明“生起”这个词有处所的含义,也就是“在这里生起”。“集会”这个词也是这样。“处”这个词也兼有这两个意思。“于处”就是指作为集会场所的十字路口。“那”是指大榕树。这其实是《增支部》五集《信利益经》里的经文。那里解释说:“诸比丘,譬如在平坦地面的十字路口有一棵大榕树,成为四周鸟类的归依处。”当念处存在时,也就是名为念的因存在时,就能在那些地方获得亲证,这就是它的意思。“处”是指果报依它而运转,所以在这里运转;或者说,作为因,它延伸、产生自己的果,所以叫“处”,也就是因。“他们平息”是指他们止息、产生安稳。“处”这个词在这里不像在其他地方那样表示别的意思,所以说“仅是假名”,意思是随各种情况只是假名安立。因为在树木丛聚的地方,只是假名安立“林”这个称呼,而林本身就是“林处”。用“也”字,把矿藏、住处、依处这三种意思总集起来。因为在“金处、银处”等中,用于矿藏;在“自在天处、婆薮天处”等中,用于住处;在“业处、工巧处”等中,用于依处,意思是所依。巴利
Kambojoti evaṃnāmakaṃ raṭṭhaṃ. Tathā dakkhiṇāpatho. ‘‘Sañjātiṭṭhāne’’ti iminā sañjāyanti etthāti adhikaraṇattho sañjāti-saddoti dasseti. Evaṃ samosaraṇa-saddo. Āyatana-saddopi tadubhayatthe. Āyataneti samosaraṇabhūte catumahāpathe. Nanti mahānigrodharukkhaṃ. Idañhi aṅguttarāgame pañcanipāte saddhānisaṃsasuttapadaṃ. Tattha ca seyyathāpi bhikkhave subhūmiyaṃ catumahāpathe mahānigrodho samantā pakkhīnaṃ paṭisaraṇaṃ hotī’’ti (a. ni. 5.38) tanniddeso vutto. Sati satiāyataneti satisaṅkhāte kāraṇe vijjamāne, tatra tatreva sakkhitabbataṃ pāpuṇātīti attho. Āyatanti ettha phalāni tadāyattavuttitāya pavattanti, āyabhūtaṃ vā attano phalaṃ tanoti pavattetīti āyatanaṃ, kāraṇaṃ. Sammantīti upasammanti assāsaṃ janenti. Āyatana-saddo aññesu viya na ettha atthantarāvabodhakoti āha ‘‘paṇṇattimatte’’ti, tathā tathā paññattimatteti attho. Rukkhagacchasamūhe paṇṇattimatte hi araññavohāro, araññameva ca araññāyatananti. Atthattayepīti ettha pi-saddena ākaranivāsādhiṭṭhānatthe sampiṇḍeti. ‘‘Hiraññāyatanaṃ suvaṇṇāyatana’’ntiādīsu hi ākare, ‘‘issarāyatanaṃ vāsudevāyatana’’ntiādīsu nivāse, ‘‘kammāyatanaṃ sippāyatana’’ntiādīsu adhiṭṭhāne pavattati, nissayeti attho.
在这里,“处”的意思是:它们在这里活动、居住、安立——这是按顺序解释词义。在眼等之中,触等法是遍满的,而眼等就是它们的住处和安立处,因为眼等是它们依止缘的状态。所以,这三重含义在这里也同样适用。为了说明怎么适用,就说了“在眼等中确实……”等话。触、受、想、思、心——这五个以触为首的诸法,是作为代表性来说的,因为其他与它们相应的诸法也有“处”的性质;或者是因为它们最突出。就像世尊在分析心的生起时,首先分析的就是这些:“有触,有受,有想,有思,有心。”它们生起,是因为以那些处为依止和所缘,就在那里生起。它们会合,是因为在各地以事、门、所缘的方式会合。而那些处就是它们的原因,因为没有那些处,它们就不存在。不过,上面说的这种“生起、住处”等含义,只是依照习惯用法,在各地约定俗成地如此流转而已——这是阿难陀长老说的。下面则是通过解释词义来展开的含义:从“处”义、从“引向”义、从“引导已扩展者”义,称为“处”。因为在眼等处,种种心与心所法以各自的经验等作用而活动、奋起、努力、精勤;而这些处又扩展、广布那些成为“引向”的法;并且引导、令转起那已扩展的轮回之苦。依照这一理路——在这里,“iti”一词以“等”的含义,包含了“缘于耳……”等巴利经文。巴利
Āyatanti ettha ākaronti, nivasanti, adhiṭṭhahantīti yathākkamaṃ vacanattho. Cakkhādīsu ca phassādayo ākiṇṇā, tāni ca nesaṃ vāso, adhiṭṭhānañca nissayapaccayabhāvato. Tasmā tadetampi atthattayamidha yujjatiyeva. Kathaṃ yujjatīti āha ‘‘cakkhādīsu hī’’tiādi. Phasso vedanā saññā cetanā cittanti ime phassapañcamakā dhammā upalakkhaṇavasena vuttā aññesampi taṃsampayuttadhammānaṃ āyatanabhāvato, padhānavasena vā. Tathā hi cittuppādaṃ vibhajantena bhagavatā teyeva ‘‘phasso hoti, vedanā, saññā, cetanā, cittaṃ hotī’’ti paṭhamaṃ vibhattā. Sañjāyanti tannissayārammaṇabhāvena tattheva uppattito. Samosaranti tattha tattha vatthudvārārammaṇabhāvena samosaraṇato. Tāni ca nesaṃ kāraṇaṃ tesamabhāve abhāvato. Ayaṃ pana yathāvutto sañjātidesādiattho ruḷhivaseneva tattha tattha niruḷhatāya eva pavattattāti ācariyaānandattherena vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ pana padatthavivaraṇamukhena pavatto attho – āyatanato, āyānaṃ tananato, āyatassa ca nayanato āyatanaṃ. Cakkhādīsu hi taṃtaṃdvārārammaṇā cittacetasikā dhammā sena sena anubhavanādikiccena āyatanti uṭṭhahanti ghaṭenti vāyamanti, āyabhūte ca dhamme etāni tanonti vitthārenti, āyatañca saṃsāradukkhaṃ nayanti pavattentīti. Iti iminā nayenāti ettha ādiatthena iti saddena ‘‘sotaṃ paṭiccā’’tiādipāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
在这里,“三者的”指的是眼净色、色所缘和眼识这三者,也就是境、根、识。因为要从它们会合的状态来理解,所以说“触是会合”。也正因如此,它被称为“以和合为现起”。依照这一方式而赋予关联,这就是这里的连接关系。由此,它显示了这样的含义:就像在“缘于眼……触……”这部经中,虽然想等相应诸法也存在,但为了显示受是主要因,便以触为首来开示;同样,在这里,为了以“触缘受”等、以触为开端,通过连接后际来显示缘的相续,所以用“六触处”以及“触了又触”等,以触为首来开示。“触处等”中的“等”字,包含了“触了又触”这一说法。巴利
Tattha tiṇṇanti cakkhupasādarūpārammaṇacakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ visayindriyaviññāṇānaṃ. Tesaṃ samāgamanabhāvena gahetabbato ‘‘phasso saṅgatī’’ti vutto. Tathā hi so ‘‘sannipātapaccupaṭṭhāno’’ti vuccati. Iminā nayena āropetvāti sambandho. Tena imamatthaṃ dasseti – yathā ‘‘cakkhuṃpaṭicca…pe… phasso’’ti (ma. ni. 1.204; 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43, 45; 2.4.61; kathā. 465) etasmiṃ sutte vijjamānesupi saññādīsu sampayuttadhammesu vedanāya padhānakāraṇabhāvadassanatthaṃ phassasīsena desanā katā, evamidhāpi ‘‘phassapaccayā vedanā’’tiādinā phassaṃ ādiṃ katvā aparantapaṭisandhānena paccayaparamparaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘chahi phassāyatanehī’’ti ca ‘‘phussa phussā’’ti ca phassasīsena desanā katāti. Phassāyatanādīnīti ādi-saddena ‘‘phussa phussā’’ti vacanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“即便……”这类说法,只是从字面上指出对方稍可指责之处;接着用“尽管如此……”这类说法,从义理上回应它。诸处并不能触,因为色法不具有识知所缘的能力。触是无色法,虽然不遍满,也不以任何部分附着于所缘,但它以触的方式生起、运作,就好像正在触一样,所以说“正是触在触各自所缘”。正因如此,它被称为“以触为相,以撞击为作用”。“以六触处,触了又触”——那些本来不是触的作用,依借代的说法说成触的作用,并纳入触中,这就叫归入,就像说“床在响”一样。所谓“归入后”,就是通过赋予触的作用而把它放进触里;也就是说,使它以触为归宿,纳入触的惯用语中。惯用语只是言说而已,不能靠它成就真实义,因为它并不是事物的本质。为了说明能成就真实义的,正是那具有本质的义理,所以说“因此……”等。正如所说:巴利
‘‘Kiñcāpī’’tiādinā saddamattato codanālesaṃ dassetvā ‘‘tathāpī’’tiādinā atthato taṃ pariharati. Na āyatanāni phusanti rūpānamanārammaṇabhāvato. Phasso arūpadhammo visamāno ekadesena ārammaṇaṃ analliyamānopi phusanākārena pavatto phusanto viya hotīti āha ‘‘phassova taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ phusatī’’ti. Teneva so ‘‘phusanalakkhaṇo, saṅghaṭṭanaraso’’ti ca vuccati. ‘‘Chahi phassāyatanehi phussa phussā’’ti aphusanakiccānipi nissitavohārena phusanakiccāni katvā dassanameva phasse upanikkhipanaṃ nāma yathā ‘‘mañcā ghosantī’’ti. Upanikkhipitvāti hi phusanakiccāropanavasena phassasmiṃ pavesetvāti attho. Phassagatikāni katvā phassupacāraṃ āropetvāti vuttaṃ hoti. Upacāro nāma vohāramattaṃ, na tena atthasiddhi ataṃsabhāvato. Atthasijjhanako pana taṃsabhāvoyeva attho gahetabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘tasmā’’tiādimāha. Yathāhu –
世尊确实说过,义理就是皈依处。
不是文句,而是这位利益世间的大仙所说。巴利
‘‘Atthañhi nātho saraṇaṃ avoca, Na byañjanaṃ lokahito mahesī’’ti.
按照它自己的缘——也就是六种触,从眼触所生受一直到意触所生受——简略地说,是指六种,因此说“六触处所生之受”。如果详细展开来说——巴利
Attano paccayabhūtānaṃ channaṃ phassānaṃ vasena cakkhusamphassajā yāva manosamphassajāti saṅkhepato chabbidhaṃ sandhāya ‘‘chaphassāyatanasambhavā vedanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vitthārato pana –
从触生起有六种,从伺察的差别来区分;
按所依分三种,按两者分两种,按时间分三种,这样增长。巴利
‘‘Phassato chabbidhāpetā, upavicārabhedato; Tidhā nissitato dvīhi, tidhā kālena vaḍḍhitā’’ti. –
按一百零八法门所说的方式,受可分为一百零八种。这里,大寺派的论师主张:识、名色、六处、触和受,即使作为缘所生法,也属于自己的相续,在显示它们时,只承认它们是果报。而其他论师则认为:既然缘的关系确实存在、无法否定,那么这一切都可以成为缘。受就有以上所说的这些分类。所谓“依色爱等分类”,就像依父亲的名字而说“长者子、婆罗门子”一样,是依所缘的名字而说的,从色爱一直到法爱,简要来说有六种。如果详细展开,则——巴利
Aṭṭhasatapariyāye vuttanayena aṭṭhasatappabhedā. Mahāvihāravāsino cettha yathā viññāṇaṃ nāmarūpaṃ saḷāyatanaṃ , evaṃ phassaṃ, vedanañca paccayapaccayuppannampi sasantatipariyāpannaṃ dīpento vipākameva icchanti, aññe pana yathā tathā vā paccayabhāvo sati na sakkā vajjetunti sabbameva icchanti. Sāti yathāvuttappabhedā vedanā. Rūpataṇhādibhedāyāti ‘‘seṭṭhiputto brāhmaṇaputto’’ti pitunāmavasena viya ārammaṇanāmavasena vuttāya rūpataṇhā yāva dhammataṇhāti saṅkhepato chabbidhāya. Vitthārato pana –
色渴爱等,又通过欲渴爱等分成三种;
从相续的角度来看,分为两种,按时间的差别来倍增。巴利
‘‘Rūpataṇhādikā kāma-taṇhādīhi tidhā puna; Santānato dvidhā kāla-bhedena guṇitā siyu’’nti. –
像这样,已经说了一百零八种分类。所谓“以亲依止缘为纲”,就是以亲依止缘作为纲领。那么,为什么这里只举出亲依止缘呢?难道乐受和不苦不乐受,不是以渴爱为所缘,而依所缘所缘、所缘增上、所缘亲依止、自然亲依止这四种方式成为缘吗?苦受不也是依所缘所缘和自然亲依止这两种方式成为缘吗?确实如此,不过它们全都包括在亲依止缘里,所以就这样举出来了。所缘亲依止缘因为与亲依止缘有共同之处,所以包括在亲依止缘里,这还说得通。可是所缘所缘和所缘增上这两种,怎么也能包括在里面呢?因为它们也有所缘的共同性,被所缘亲依止缘所含摄,所以也就包括在作为所缘亲依止缘之集合的亲依止缘里了。正是为了这个意思,才没有说“以亲依止缘”,而是说“以亲依止缘为纲”。因为当道理成立时,开头要么是为了确定,要么是为了说明另外的意思。在这些类似的情况下,就是这样。巴利
Evaṃ vuttaaṭṭhasatappabhedāya. Upanissayakoṭiyāti upanissayasīsena. Kasmā panettha upanissayapaccayova uddhaṭo, nanu sukhā vedanā, adukkhamasukhā ca taṇhāya ārammaṇamattaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayapakatūpanissayavasena catudhā paccayo, dukkhā ca ārammaṇamattapakatūpanissayavasena dvidhāti? Saccametaṃ, upanissaye eva pana taṃ sabbampi antogadhanti evamuddhaṭo. Yuttaṃ tāva ārammaṇūpanissayassa upanissayasāmaññato upanissaye antogadhatā, kathaṃ pana ārammaṇamattaārammaṇādhipatīnaṃ tattha antogadhabhāvo siyāti? Tesampi ārammaṇasāmaññato ārammaṇūpanissayena saṅgahitattā ārammaṇūpanissayavasamodhānabhūteva upanissaye eva antogadhatā hoti. Etadatthameva hi sandhāya ‘‘upanissayenā’’ti avatvā ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Siddhe hi satyārambho niyamāya vā hoti atthantaraviññāpanāya vāti. Evamīdisesu.
“四种”指的是从欲取一直到我语取这四种。有人问:渴爱本身就是欲取,那它怎么能又是欲取的缘呢?确实如此,不过,由于前一刻的渴爱以亲依止缘的力量使后一刻的渴爱变得坚固,所以前一刻的渴爱就是后一刻渴爱的缘。因为所谓“欲取”中的“取”字,正如“欲取、忧恼、逼近”等用法一样,“取”这个前缀本身就有“坚固”的意思,所以坚固的渴爱才叫欲取。再者,微弱的渴爱就只是渴爱,强烈的渴爱才成为欲取。另一种说法是:对尚未得到的对象生起贪求,这是渴爱,就像小偷把手伸向黑暗处一样;对已经得到的对象加以执取,这是欲取,就像小偷抓住已经到手的财物一样。渴爱与少欲相反,欲取与知足相反。渴爱是寻求之苦的根源,欲取是守护之苦的根源。这些就是它们之间的区别。有些论师如法护长老在《长部注疏》中就是这样根据某些说法来显示的,因为前面那种解释方式在《清净道论》中已经以自宗的主张说过了。巴利
Catubbidhassāti kāmupādānaṃ yāva attavādupādānanti catubbidhassa. Nanu ca taṇhāva kāmupādānaṃ, kathaṃ sāyeva tassa paccayo siyāti? Saccaṃ, purimataṇhāya pana upanissayapaccayena pacchimataṇhāya daḷhabhāvato purimāyeva taṇhā pacchimāya paccayo bhavati. Taṇhādaḷhattameva hi ‘‘kāmupādānaṃ upāyāso upakaṭṭhā’’tiādīsu viya upa-saddassa daḷhatthe pavattanato. Apica dubbalā taṇhā taṇhāyeva, balavatī taṇhā kāmupādānaṃ. Atha vā apattavisayapatthanā taṇhā tamasi corānaṃ hatthapasāraṇaṃ viya, sampattavisayaggahaṇaṃ kāmupādānaṃ corānaṃ hatthagatabhaṇḍaggahaṇaṃ viya. Appicchatāpaṭipakkhā taṇhā. Santuṭṭhitāpaṭipakkhaṃ kāmupādānaṃ. Pariyesanadukkhamūlaṃ taṇhā, ārakkhadukkhamūlaṃ kāmupādānaṃ. Ayampi tesaṃ viseso kecivādavasena ācariyadhammapālattherena (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.144) dassito purimanayasseva visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.144) sakavādabhāvena vuttattā.
非俱生的取,以亲依止的方式;而俱生的取,则以俱生的方式——应当按各自的情况来理解这个意思。其中,非俱生的取,通过无间、等无间、无间亲依止、无有、不离去、习行这六种缘起作用。而作为所缘的取,则通过所缘、所缘增上、所缘亲依止这三种方式起作用;这一切也都按前面所说的方式归入亲依止,所以说“以亲依止的方式”。又因为渴爱品味色等之后,便陷入对诸欲的耽溺,所以渴爱以亲依止的方式作为欲取的缘。同样,对色等的种种差别愚昧的人,会执取“没有布施的果报”等邪见;想脱离轮回的人,会在不清净的道路上误执为清净的道路;还有在诸蕴中执取“我、我所”的有身见。因此应当知道:渴爱也以亲依止的方式作为其余三种取的缘。而俱生的取,则通过俱生、相互、依止、相应、有、不离去、因这七种方式作为俱生法的缘;这一切也都归入俱生缘,所以说“以俱生的方式”。巴利
Asahajātassa upādānassa upanissayakoṭiyā, sahajātassa pana sahajātakoṭiyāti yathālābhamattho gahetabbo. Tattha asahajātā anantaraniruddhā anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi chadhā paccayo. Ārammaṇabhūtā pana ārammaṇamattaārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayehi tidhā, taṃ sabbampi vuttanayena upanissayeneva saṅgahetvā ‘‘upanissayakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ca taṇhāya rūpādīni assādetvā kāmesu pātabyataṃ āpajjati, tasmā taṇhā kāmupādānassa upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo. Tathā rūpādibhede sammūḷho ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā (dī. ni. 1.171; ma. ni. 1.445; 2.94-95, 225; 3.91, 116, 136; saṃ. ni. 3.210; a. ni. 10.176, 217; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 907, 925, 971) micchādassanaṃ, saṃsārato muccitukāmo asuddhimagge suddhimaggaparāmasanaṃ, khandhesu attattaniyagāhabhūtaṃ sakkāyadassanañca gaṇhāti. Tasmā itaresampi tiṇṇaṃ taṇhā upanissayakoṭiyā paccayoti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sahajātā pana sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatahetuvasena sattadhā sahajātānaṃ paccayo. Tampi sabbaṃ sahajātapaccayeneva saṅgahetvā ‘‘sahajātakoṭiyā’’ti vuttaṃ.
所谓“有”,就是业有和生有。其中,被称为思等的一切能导致投生的业,就是业有;欲有等九种,就是生有。在这两者当中,四种取都是生有的缘,因为它对作为生有之因的业有起到原因的作用,又因为它是业的助伴,所以以本性亲依止的方式成为缘。而当取以业为所缘的时候,与业俱生的取则以所缘的方式成为生有的缘。对于俱生的业有,俱生的取则以俱生、相互、依止、相应、有、不离去的方式,以及因、道的方式,从多种角度成为缘。对于非俱生的、无间的业有,非俱生的取则以无间、等无间、无间亲依止、有、不离去、习行的方式成为缘;对其余非无间的,则以本性亲依止的方式,在思察等时候,则以所缘等方式成为缘。其中,把无间等缘归入亲依止缘,把俱生等缘归入俱生缘之后,才说“如是”——这或者是为了使文相齐整,或者是为了向后牵引连贯。正是以此显示“以亲依止的方式、以俱生的方式”这个意思。巴利
Bhavassāti kammabhavassa ceva upapattibhavassa ca. Tattha cetanādisaṅkhātaṃ sabbaṃ bhavagāmikammaṃ kammabhavo. Kāmabhavādinavavidho upapattibhavo. Tesu upapattibhavassa catubbidhampi upādānaṃ upapattibhavahetubhūtassa kammabhavassa kāraṇabhāvato, tassa ca sahāyabhāvūpagamanato pakatūpanissayavasena paccayo. Kammārammaṇakaraṇakāle pana kammasahajātamupādānaṃ upapattibhavassa ārammaṇavasena paccayo. Kammabhavassa pana sahajātassa sahajātamupādānaṃ sahajātaaññamaññanissayasampayuttaatthiavigatavasena ceva hetumaggavasena ca anekadhā paccayo. Asahajātassa pana anantarassa asahajātamupādānaṃ anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanavasena, itarassa ca nānantarassa pakatūpanissayavasena, sammasanādikālesu ārammaṇādivasena ca paccayo. Tattha anantarādike upanissayapaccaye, sahajātādike ca sahajātapaccaye pakkhipitvā tathāti vuttaṃ, rūpūpahārattho vā hesa anukaḍḍhanattho vā. Tena hi upanissayakoṭiyā ceva sahajātakoṭiyā cāti atthaṃ dasseti.
在“有是生的缘”这句话里,这里的“有”指的是业有。因为业有才是生的缘,而不是生有。生本身就是生有,也就是最初结生时的诸蕴。因此说“但在这里,‘生’应当看作有变异的五蕴”,这样就挡回了那个质疑:“生不也是有吗?它怎么会是生的缘呢?”那又怎么知道“业有是生的缘”呢?因为即使外在的缘都一样,也唯独依业力才见到优劣等差别。正如世尊所说:“业区分有情,也就是依优劣性。”(中部3.289)“有变异”是指有结生的变异,不是别的变异,而从意义上说它们就是生有。那个生有本身不适合当它的因,因为就像渴爱作为欲取的缘时那样,前后等差别不可能存在。因此,为了说明只有业有才是名为生有的“生”的缘——以业缘和本性亲依止缘为缘,所以说“把业缘摄在亲依止缘里,从亲依止缘的角度说是缘”。又因为有了生才有老死,接触到老死等的愚人才会产生愁等,没有生就不会有,所以说“生……是缘”,是从亲依止的角度说为缘。由于没有广泛展开义理的判定,而且只以俱生亲依止为主来考察缘,也没有触及支等的安立,所以说“这里只是略说”等等。因为缘起考察的范围太广,不可能在这里全部得到,所以用“广说”等话来消除质疑。用“但在这里”等话表明,即使在圣典中,缘起之说也只是说了一部分。其中,“这里”指这部《梵网经》。“它的”指缘起的。“只是所需之量”指以作为见之因的受为依,只说了一部分所需之量。因为“唯量”是限定词的另一种说法,就像在“寿命只有百岁,现在还存在”等话里那样,以互相显明的方式而有其所需;或者“量”字指标准,也就是所需的标准,不超过这个。也有人说:“量字表限定,唯字表决定。”一切地方都是如此。在这里有偈颂:巴利
Bhavojātiyāti ettha bhavoti kammabhavo adhippeto. So hi jātiyā paccayo, na upapattibhavo. Jātiyeva hi upapattibhavoti, sā ca paṭhamābhinibbattakhandhā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘jātīti panettha savikārā pañcakkhandhā daṭṭhabbā’’ti, tenāyaṃ codanā nivattitā ‘‘nanu jātipi bhavoyeva, kathaṃ so jātiyā paccayo’’ti, kathaṃ panetaṃ jānitabbaṃ ‘‘kammabhavo jātiyā paccayo’’ti ce? Bāhirapaccayasamattepi kammavaseneva hīnapaṇītādivisesadassanato. Yathāha bhagavā ‘‘kammaṃ satte vibhajati yadidaṃ hīnapaṇītatāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.289) savikārāti nibbattivikārena savikārā, na aññehi, te ca atthato upapattibhavoyeva, so eva ca tassa kāraṇaṃ bhavitumayutto taṇhāya kāmupādānassa paccayabhāve viya purimapacchimādivisesānamasambhavato, tasmā kammabhavoyeva upapattibhavasaṅkhātāya jātiyā kammapaccayena ceva pakatūpanissayapaccayena ca paccayoti atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘kammapaccayaṃ upanissayeneva saṅgahetvā upanissayakoṭiyā paccayo’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana jātiyā sati jarāmaraṇaṃ, jarāmaraṇādinā phuṭṭhassa ca bālassa sokādayo sambhavanti, nāsati, tasmā jātijarāmaraṇādīnaṃ upanissayavasena paccayoti āha ‘‘jāti…pe… paccayo’’ti vitthārato atthavinicchayassa akatattā, sahajātūpanissayasīseneva paccayavicāraṇāya ca, dassitattā, aṅgādividhānassa ca anāmaṭṭhattā ‘‘ayamettha saṅkhepo’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Mahāvisayattā paṭiccasamuppādavicāraṇāya niravasesā ayaṃ kuto laddhabbāti codanamapaneti ‘‘vitthārato’’tiādinā. ‘‘Idha panassā’’tiādinā pāḷiyampi paṭiccasamuppādakathā ekadeseneva kathitāti dasseti. Tattha idhāti imasmiṃ brahmajāle. Assāti paṭiccasamuppādassa. Payojanamattamevāti diṭṭhiyā kāraṇabhūtavedanāvasena ekadesamattaṃ payojanameva. ‘‘Mattamevā’’ti hi avadhāraṇatthe pariyāyavacanaṃ ‘‘appaṃ vassasataṃ āyu, idānetarahi vijjatī’’tiādīsu viya aññamaññatthāvabodhanavasena sapayojanattā, matta-saddo vā pamāṇe, payojanasaṅkhātaṃ pamāṇameva, na taduttarīti attho. ‘‘Matta-saddo avadhāraṇe eva-saddo sanniṭṭhāne’’tipi vadanti. Evaṃ sabbattha. Hoti cettha –
“唯量”说的是同一个意思,“量”这个词表示标准。
或者,“量”字表示限定,另一个(“唯”字)表示决定。巴利
‘‘Mattamevāti ekatthaṃ, mattapadaṃ pamāṇake; Mattāvadhāraṇe vā, sanniṭṭhānamhi cetara’’nti.
因为缘起在这部圣典里只讲了一部分,所以注释者在这样讲说时,连同举例一起说明理由,说了“因为世尊……”等话。由此显示这样的意趣:“世尊在讲流转之说时,是以无明、渴爱、见这三者中的某一种为首来讲的;在这里,他正是以见为首来讲,因为对受来说,见是强有力的原因,所以只讲了以受为根本的那一部分缘起。”而这些经是在《增支部》第十集(A.10.61语聚)里说的。在那里说“前际不可知”,意思是:无明是在某位正等觉、或转轮王的时代生起的,不是在那之前——如此,无明的前际界限不可知,即使对我这无碍的一切知智来说,那界限也不可知,因为那界限不存在的缘故。以“Evañcetaṃ”这句,是借这种界限的不存在来说这无明。然而“Atha ca panā”是说:虽然如此,以时间限定而说界限不存在。“Idappaccayā”的意思是:从这被称为五盖的缘,无明生起;如此以法性限定,无明的边际可知。因为在同处曾说:“什么是无明的食?‘五盖’应当说。”(A.10.61)但在复注里则说“以漏为缘”(Dī. Ni. Ṭī. 1.144),这与举例经不相符。这个缘就是“此缘”,是把“ma”字转成了“da”字。但善语者说:“因为这种用法可见,所以‘ida’一词才是本来的。”这是不合理的,因为以字音变化等而各种用法可见。譬如以字音变化,说“amū”也见作“asū”,说“imesū”也见作“esū”,如此在这里,字音变化在复合词中也如在句中一样可得,如“jānipati tudampatī”。这里还有什么可说呢?应以已断无碍解的大德摩诃迦旃延长老所说的为准。巴利
Ekadesenevidha pāḷiyaṃ kathitattā paṭiccasamuppādassa tathā kathane saddhiṃ udāharaṇena kāraṇaṃ dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Tena imamadhippāyaṃ dasseti ‘‘vaṭṭakathaṃ kathento bhagavā avijjā-taṇhā-diṭṭhīnamaññatarasīsena kathesi, tesu idha diṭṭhisīseneva kathento vedanāya diṭṭhiyā balavakāraṇattā vedanāmūlakaṃ ekadesameva paṭiccasamuppādaṃ kathesī’’ti. Etāni ca suttāni aṅguttaranikāye dasanipāte (a. ni. 10.61 vākyakhandhe) tattha purimakoṭi na paññāyatīti asukassa nāma sammāsambuddhassa, cakkavattino vā kāle avijjā uppannā, na tato pubbeti evaṃ avijjāya purimo ādimariyādo appaṭihatassa mama sabbaññutaññāṇassāpi na paññāyati tatā mariyādassa avijjamānattāti attho. Evañcetanti iminā mariyādābhāvena ayaṃ avijjā kāmaṃ vuccati. Atha ca panāti evaṃ kālaniyamena mariyādābhāvena vuccamānāpi. Idappaccayāti imasmā pañcanīvaraṇasaṅkhātapaccayā avijjā sambhavatīti evaṃ dhammaniyāmena avijjāya koṭi paññāyatīti attho. ‘‘Ko cāhāro avijjāya, ‘pañca nīvaraṇā’ tissa vacanīya’’nti (a. ni. 10.61) hi tattheva vuttaṃ, ṭīkāyaṃ pana ‘‘āsavapaccayā’’ti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.144) āha, taṃ udāharaṇasuttena na sameti. Ayaṃ paccayo idappaccayo ma-kārassa da-kārādesavasena. Saddavidū pana ‘‘īdisassa payogassa dissanato ida-saddoyeva pakatī’’ti vadanti, ayuttamevetaṃ vaṇṇavikārādivasena nānāpayogassa dissamānattā. Yathā hi vaṇṇavikārena ‘‘amū’’ti vuttepi ‘‘asū’’ti dissati, ‘‘imesū’’ti vuttepi ‘‘esū’’ti, evamidhāpi vaṇṇavikāro ca vākye viya samāsepi labbhateva yathā ‘‘jānipati tudampatī’’ti. Kimettha vattabbaṃ, pabhinnapaṭisambhidena āyasmatā mahākaccāyanattherena vuttameva pamāṇanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“有爱”是指作为有结的爱。 “此缘”是指从这无明之缘。 因为说过:“什么是有爱的食?应当说‘是无明’。” “有见”是指常见。 “此缘”在这里则只是指受缘的意思。 难道不是应该只讲诸见吗?那么讲缘起又是为了什么?针对这个追问,说了“以此”等话。 这里说的是:顺着流转来讲缘起,就叫作流转之说;世尊正是通过这样讲,来显示这些执见者只要还不舍弃这种邪见,就会一直在这个缘的连锁中沉溺于轮回。 从这“有”等开始。 在这里的“有”等之中。 其余两词也是同样的方式。 以此显示没有边际的、一再的生起。 “败坏”是指以种种方式被毁坏。巴利
Bhavataṇhāyāti bhavasaññojanabhūtāya taṇhāya. Idappaccayāti imasmā avijjāpaccayā. ‘‘Ko cāhāro bhavataṇhāya, ‘avijjā’ tissa vacanīya’’nti hi vuttaṃ. Bhavadiṭṭhiyāti sassatadiṭṭhiyā. Idappaccayāti idha pana vedanāpaccayātveva attho. Nanu diṭṭhiyo eva kathetabbā, kimatthiyaṃ pana paṭiccasamuppādakathananti anuyogenāha ‘‘tenā’’tiādi. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – anulomena paṭiccasamuppādakathā nāma vaṭṭakathā, taṃ kathaneneva bhagavā ete diṭṭhigatikā yāvidaṃ micchādassanaṃ na paṭinissajjanti, tāva iminā paccayaparamparena vaṭṭeyeva nimujjantīti dassesīti. Ito bhavādito. Ettha bhavādīsu. Esa nayo sesapadadvayepi. Iminā apariyantaṃ aparāparuppattiṃ dasseti. Vipannaṭṭhāti vividhena nāsitā.
离转说的解释巴利
Vivaṭṭakathādivaṇṇanā
145 “见趣等依处”:是指以诸见趣的邪执之见为根据而成为依处,也就是说,依见趣而说为补特伽罗的依处。因为这是关于补特伽罗依处的法教示。“相应修行比丘依处”:是指成为相应修行的比丘们的依处,也就是说,依比丘而说为补特伽罗的依处。“离转”:就是从转起中脱离。通过“由他们……”等语,显示说法善巧的世尊在此处取用了下面已经说过的、作为诸见趣邪见之因的受的缘的触处。在“受业处”中,是就“受之集……”等这段圣典而说的。为了显示仅有少许差别,所以说“然而如……”等。其中“即”是指“由触集、由触灭”所说的原因。在“由食集……”等中,应当知道是指段食。因为段食在《发趣论》中说“段食对此身体以食缘为缘”,所以对由业所生的眼等也确实是支持缘。在“由名色集……”等中,名只是指受等三蕴。难道不是由于“以名色为缘而有六处”的说法,对所有六触处都应说“由名色集、由名色灭”吗?那么为什么在眼处等中说“由食集、由食灭”呢?确实,就无差别而言是这样;但在这里,为了特别显示在眼等中也有如此由食集等而生的可能性,所以应看作是这样说的。巴利
145.Diṭṭhigatikādhiṭṭhānanti diṭṭhigatikānaṃ micchāgāhadassanavasena adhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, diṭṭhigatikavasena puggalādhiṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Puggalādhiṭṭhānadhammadesanā hesā. Yuttayogabhikkhuadhiṭṭhānanti yuttayogānaṃ bhikkhūnamadhiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ, bhikkhuvasena puggalādhiṭṭhānanti vuttaṃ hoti. Vivaṭṭanti vaṭṭato vigataṃ. ‘‘Yehī’’tiādinā diṭṭhigatikānaṃ micchādassanassa kāraṇabhūtāya vedanāya paccayabhūtaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva phassāyatanamidha gahitaṃ desanākusalena bhagavatāti dasseti. Vedanākammaṭṭhāneti ‘‘vedanānaṃ samudaya’’ntiādikaṃ imaṃ pāḷiṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Kiñcimattameva visesoti āha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Nti ‘‘phassasamudayā, phassanirodhā’’ti vuttaṃ kāraṇaṃ. ‘‘Āhārasamudayā’’tiādīsu kabaḷīkāro āhāro veditabbo. So hi ‘‘kabaḷīkāro āhāro imassa kāyassa āhārapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 429) paṭṭhāne vacanato kammasamuṭṭhānānampi cakkhādīnaṃ upatthambhakapaccayo hotiyeva. ‘‘Nāmarūpasamudayā’’tiādīsu vedanādikkhandhattayameva nāmaṃ. Nanu ca ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti vacanato sabbesu chasu phassāyatanesu ‘‘nāmarūpasamudayā nāmarūpanirodhā’’ icceva vattabbaṃ, atha kasmā cakkhāyatanādīsu ‘‘āhārasamudayā āhāranirodhā’’ti vuttanti? Saccametaṃ avisesena, idha pana evampi cakkhādīsu sambhavatīti visesato dassetuṃ tathā vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
由于仅仅以更上的了知,就已成立对见趣的了知,所以即使圣典中还没有出现,也说“他了知见”。戒、定、慧是世间与出世间混合的,而解脱在这里指较低的果等至,因为“乃至阿拉汉”是对最上果的单独说明。在这里,了知是依现量和比量,因此说“多闻持经的比丘了知”等,或者应随所得而配合。然而“开示”中的“然而”一词表示不悦之意,以此显示:虽然阿那含等也如实了知,但开示是以阿拉汉的究竟智了知而终结于阿拉汉顶。就像金殿以宝珠为顶,开示以阿拉汉顶为终结,这是其义。在这里,以“从……了知”此语,显示法与出离性一起的僧伽善行,因此在注释中说“谁这样了知?漏尽者了知,乃至已起观的修行者了知”,圆满地显示了比丘僧伽,由此,前文所说的“也依比丘僧伽而阐明”,应视为即依文句本身而阐明。巴利
Uttaritarajānaneneva diṭṭhigatassa jānanampi siddhanti katvā pāḷiyamanāgatepi ‘‘diṭṭhiñca jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Sīlasamādhipaññāyo lokiyalokuttaramissakā, vimutti pana ida heṭṭhimā phalasamāpattiyo ‘‘yāva arahattā’’ti aggaphalassa visuṃ vacanato. Paccakkhānumānena cettha pajānanā, tenevāha ‘‘bahussuto ganthadharo bhikkhu jānātī’’tiādi, yathālābhaṃ vā yojetabbaṃ. Desanā panāti ettha pana-saddo aruciyattho, tenimaṃ dīpeti – yadipi anāgāmiādayo yathābhūtaṃ pajānanti, tathāpi arahato ukkaṃsagativijānanavasena desanā arahattanikūṭena niṭṭhāpitāti. Suvaṇṇageho viya ratanamayakaṇṇikāya desanā arahattakaṇṇikāya niṭṭhāpitāti attho. Ettha ca ‘‘yato kho…pe… pajānātī’’ti etena dhammassa niyyānikabhāvena saddhiṃ saṅghassa suppaṭipattiṃ dasseti, teneva aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ko evaṃ jānātīti? Khīṇāsavo jānāti, yāva āraddhavipassako jānātī’’ti paripuṇṇaṃ katvā bhikkhusaṅgho dassito, tena yadetaṃ heṭṭhā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhikkhusaṅghavasenāpi dīpetu’’nti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.8), taṃ yathārutavaseneva dīpitaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
146 146. 应当知道,“没有脱离说法网的见趣者”这一说法,是为了让人了解说法已经完全圆满。所谓“在网内”就是内网:虽然从实物进入的角度来说并没有成为内网,但由于依其所主张的论说而进入网内,所以称为“已入内网者”;或者说,“住在网内”就是内网者,虽然从实物上看并非内网,但由于依其所主张的论说而成为内网者,因此是“已入内网者”。在非真实的状态中要表达“作……”的意思时,加上表示变化的ī后缀,或者把词首的a变成ī,正如声论者所说的“dhavalīkāro, kabaḷīkāro”;为了显示这个意义,所以说了“此……”等。依附而住,就是沉没之后浮现出来,“浮现”就是这个意思。这里,“māna”这个词是以状态来表示状态之相,因为用尚未断除的浮现状态来表征再次浮现的状态;同样,“沉没”等中的“anta”一词也是如此。以“沉没”等语显示:虽然没有直接说沉没,但通过浮现就已经摄取了沉没。其中,以堕入恶趣为向下沉没,以有福报之生为向上浮现。同样,依照狭小地与广大地、依照于见的沉滞与奔逸、依照前际见与后际见,应当依次配合。“所摄”就是包含在内。而那种状态正是被它所系缚,所以说“以此所系”。以“不在此……”等语,显示如同所说圣典中已入之义。巴利
146.‘‘Desanājālavimutto diṭṭigatiko nāma natthī’’ti dassanaṃ desanāya kevalaparipuṇṇataṃ ñāpetunti veditabbaṃ. Anto jālassāti antojālaṃ, dabbapavesanavasena antojāle akatāpi tannissitavādappavesanavasena katāti antojālīkatā, anto jālassa tiṭṭhantīti vā antojālā, dabbavasena anantojālāpi tannissitavādavasena antojālā katāti antojālīkatā. Abhūtatabbhāve karāsabhūyoge vikāravācakato īpaccayo, antasarassa vā īkārādesoti saddavidū yathā ‘‘dhavalīkāro, kabaḷīkāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.181), imamatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘imassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nissitā avasitāva hutvā ummujjamānā ummujjantīti attho. Māna-saddo cettha bhāvenabhāvalakkhaṇattho appahīnena ummujjanabhāvena puna ummujjanabhāvassa lakkhitattā, tathā ‘‘osīdantā’’tiādīsupi anta-saddo. Ummujjaneneva avuttassāpi nimujjanassa gahaṇanti dasseti ‘‘osīdantā’’tiādinā. Tattha apāyūpapattivasena adho osīdanaṃ, sampattibhavavasena uddhamuggamanaṃ. Tathā parittabhūmimahaggatabhūmivasena, diṭṭhiyā olīnatātidhāvanavasena, pubbantānudiṭṭhiaparantānudiṭṭhivasena ca yathākkamaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Pariyāpannāti antogadhā. Tabbhāvo ca tadābaddhenāti vuttaṃ ‘‘etena ābaddhā’’ti. ‘‘Na hetthā’’tiādinā yathāvuttapāḷiyā āpannatthaṃ dasseti.
现在说明譬喻的对应关系,以“如渔夫……”等语句来说。什么是在水中作业、巡行的人呢?就是渔夫,也就是捕鱼的人。虽然圣典中也提到了渔夫的弟子,但那个弟子也是跟随渔夫而行,所以才那样说。“一万世界”是就出生之地而说的,因为证悟正是在那里生起,而其他世界也因为被这个说法涵盖而被包含在内。因为在其他地方,那些执持邪见的人也都归属在这里面,成为已入网中的人。“粗”是指明显而粗大。“彼”是指少量的水。巴利
Idāni upamāsaṃsandanamāha ‘‘kevaṭṭo viyā’’tiādinā. Ke udake vaṭṭati paricaratīti kevaṭṭo, macchabandho. Kāmaṃ kevaṭṭantevāsīpi pāḷiyaṃ vutto, so pana tadanugatikovāti tathā vuttaṃ. Dasasahassilokadhātūti jātikkhettaṃ sandhāyāha tattheva paṭivedhasambhavato, aññesañca taggahaṇeneva gahitattā. Aññatthāpi hi diṭṭhigatikā ettha pariyāpannā antojālīkatāva. Oḷārikāti pākaṭabhāvena thūlā. Tassāti parittodakassa.
147 “摄一切见故”这一说法,是通过论说所摄来显示补特伽罗的摄属。显示自己……无碍:这是以说法善巧,说明在如前所说的、作为诸见趣者浮沉之处的任何有等之中,自己都无所障碍。“引导”:即把众生带到他们想去的地方,而那是通过牵引的方式进行的,所以说“以颈……”等。“与引导者相似故”:这是表示相似的称呼,或者是指譬喻性的派生词。“彼……”等是说明相似性。“以颈”:这里“大众”是属格关系;在“引导”中,也应以业的关系来连接,因为nī这一词根具有双业性,而且在动词用法中,属格常常表示作者或业。对于世尊,“有之引导”已被断除,这是连接的意思。“不再结生之状态”:这是从义理上说的。因为说到“命尽”时,就已经意味着不再结生之状态,因为不再生起正是其主要原因。“他们将不见”:这里以未来时的表达方式显示词句的成立,就像“于此,弟子将如此知、如此见、或如此作证”等说法一样。为了说明所说的意义,说“他们将达于无施设的状态”。“无施设的状态”:就是远离现在一切施设的状态;而过去施设中的如来施设,则直到教法隐没之前,乃至他佛出世时也仍会转起,就像现在的毗婆尸等一样。因此便说“唯成假名而已”。这里“施设”指智与施设,这是语源学者所说。巴利
147.‘‘Sabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ saṅgahitattā’’ti etena vādasaṅgahaṇena puggalasaṅgahoti dasseti. Attano…pe… dassentoti desanākusalatāya yathāvuttesu diṭṭhigatikānaṃ ummujjananimujjanaṭṭhānabhūtesu katthacipi bhavādīsu attano anavarodhabhāvaṃ dassento. Nayantīti satte icchitaṭṭhānamāvahanti, taṃ pana tathāākaḍḍhanavasenāti āha ‘‘gīvāyā’’tiādi. ‘‘Nettisadisatāyā’’ti iminā sadisavohāraṃ, upamātaddhitaṃ vā dasseti. ‘‘Sā hī’’tiādi sadisatāvibhāvanā. Gīvāyāti ettha mahājanānanti sambandhīniddeso netīti etthāpi kammabhāvena sambajjhitabbo nī-saddassa dvikammikattā, ākhyātapayoge ca bahulaṃ sāmivacanassa kattukammatthajotakattā. Assāti anena bhagavatā, sā bhavanetti ucchinnāti sambandho. Puna appaṭisandhikabhāvāti sāmatthiyatthamāha. Jīvitapariyādāne vutteyeva hi puna appaṭisandhikabhāvo vutto nāma tasseva adassanassa padhānakāraṇattā. ‘‘Na dakkhantī’’ti ettha anāgatavacanavasena padasiddhi ‘‘yatra hi nāma sāvako evarūpaṃ ñassati vā dakkhati vā sakkhiṃ vā karissatī’’tiādīsu (pārā. 228; saṃ. ni. 2.202) viyāti dasseti ‘‘na dakkhissantī’’ti iminā. Kiṃ vuttaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ gamissantī’’ti. Apaṇṇattikabhāvanti ca dharamānakapaṇṇattiyā eva apaṇṇattikabhāvaṃ, atītapaṇṇattiyā pana tathāgatapaṇṇatti yāva sāsanantaradhānā, tato uddhampi aññabuddhuppādesu pavattati eva yathā adhunā vipassiādīnaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘vohāramattameva bhavissatī’’ti (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.147) paññāya cettha paṇṇādesoti neruttikā.
所谓“身”,就是自体,也就是色法和非色法组成的集合。这样一来,它就像芒果树,而它的各个组成部分——比如色蕴、眼处、眼界等——就像芒果的果实,这样比喻才说得通。“彼”指的就是这个身。有以五个果为一串、以十二个果为一串、以十八个果为一串这三种,就像一串串芒果果实。这些果实聚成一串,就是“串”,也就是一捆。随彼而行的,就是跟着果柄走的,所以说“就是跟着那个果柄走的”。巴利
Kāyoti attabhāvo, yo rūpārūpadhammasamūho. Evañhissa ambarukkhasadisatā, tadavayavānañca rūpakkhandhacakkhāyatanacakkhudhātādīnaṃ ambapakkasadisatā yujjati. Tanti kāyaṃ. Pañcapakkadvādasapakkaaṭṭhārasapakkaparimāṇāti pañcapakkaparimāṇā ekā, dvādasapakkaparimāṇā ekā, aṭṭhārasapakkaparimāṇā ekāti tividhā pakkambaphalapiṇḍī viya. Piṇḍo etassāti piṇḍī, thavako. Tadanvayānīti vaṇṭānugatāni, tenāha ‘‘taṃyeva vaṇṭaṃ anugatānī’’ti.
“蛙刺毒触”是指与有毒蛙类这种特定生物的刺接触,也包括与其他毒物的接触,或者是指与存在于蛙刺中的毒接触。这里说的“蛙”,是一种带刺的水生生物,人们叫它“石龟”,据说它的尾巴尖上长着一根刺。也有人说是某种毒鱼的刺。“据说”这个词是表示传闻语气的不变词。在这里,就像茎被砍断时,挂在茎上的芒果就从芒果树上断落一样;当“有轮”被切断时,依附于它的蕴等就从相续中分离。应该知道,到这里只是经文中出现的譬喻,其余部分则是从义理中自然得出的。巴利
Maṇḍūkakaṇṭakavisasamphassanti visavantassa bhekavisesassa kaṇṭakena, tadaññena ca visena samphassaṃ, maṇḍūkakaṇṭake vijjamānassa visassa samphassaṃ vā. Sakaṇṭako jalacārī satto idha maṇḍūko nāma, yo ‘‘pāsāṇakacchapo’’ti voharanti, tassa naṅguṭṭhe aggakoṭiyaṃ ṭhito kaṇṭakotipi vadanti. Ekaṃ visamacchakaṇṭakantipi eke. Kirāti anussavanatthe nipāto. Ettha ca vaṇṭacchede vaṇṭūpanibandhānaṃ ambapakkānaṃ ambarukkhato vicchedo viya bhavanetticchede tadupanibandhānaṃ khandhādīnaṃ santānato vicchedoti ettāvatāva pāḷiyamāgataṃ opammaṃ, tadavasesaṃ pana atthato laddhamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
148 佛力就是诸佛的智慧力。在“所说经的名称”这句话里,“名称”这个词是表示赞叹的语气词,用“如此名称的所说经”这种方式来赞叹这部经的功德。“来吧”是表示放下的意思。那么我现在就让他掌握。我不作戏论,就是放下。巴利
148.Buddhabalanti buddhānaṃ ñāṇabalaṃ. Kathitasuttassa nāmāti ettha nāma-saddo sambhāvane nipāto, tena ‘‘evampi nāma kathitasuttassā’’ti vuttanayena suttassa guṇaṃ sambhāveti. Handāti vossaggatthe. Tena hi adhunāva gaṇhāpessāmi. Na papañcaṃ karissāmīti vossaggaṃ karoti.
“法门”是指被称为法教的圣典。“此世利益”是指现世的利益。“他世利益”是指后世的利益,或者兼指这两种利益。把“所说的意义”也理解为法门,同样说得通,因为这里“法网”一词已经包含了经法。“在此”是指在教法之中。“那”只是一个不变词,就像“那位沙门乔达摩不曾被听闻”等语句中的用法一样。“法”是指圣典之法。由于以一切方式含摄义理,所以这里称为“义网”。同样,“法网”“梵网”“见网”在这里也应这样理解。以这种方式战胜交战,所以叫“战胜交战”;而这里的交战,是指与五魔相遇和对抗,因此说“即使天子魔”等。也就是说:以义理的成就是义网;以文句的成就,以及从戒等无过失之法来阐明,是法网;以最胜之义,即对属于梵的道、果、涅槃加以分别,是梵网;以分析诸见、阐明空性,对正见加以分别,是见网;以摧破外道言论为方法,是无上的战胜交战。应当知道,这里的义理就是这样连接的。巴利
Dhammapariyāyeti dhammadesanāsaṅkhātāya pāḷiyā. Idhatthoti diṭṭhadhammahitaṃ. Paratthoti samparāyahitaṃ, tadubhayattho vā. Bhāsitatthopi yujjati ‘‘dhammajāla’’nti ettha tantidhammassa gahitattā. Ihāti idha sāsane. Nanti nipātamattaṃ ‘‘na naṃ suto samaṇo gotamo’’tiādīsu viya. Nti dhammāti pāḷidhammā. Sabbena sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhanato atthasaṅkhātaṃ jālametthāti atthajālaṃ. Tathā dhammajālaṃ brahmajālaṃ diṭṭhijālanti etthāpi. Saṅgāmaṃ vijināti etenāti saṅgāmavijayo, saṅgāmo cettha pañcahi mārehi samāgamanaṃ abhiyujjhananti āha ‘‘devaputtamārampī’’tiādi. Atthasampattiyā hi atthajālaṃ. Byañjanasampattiyā, sīlādianavajjadhammaniddesato ca dhammajālaṃ. Seṭṭhaṭṭhena brahmabhūtānaṃ maggaphalanibbānānaṃ vibhattattā brahmajālaṃ. Diṭṭivivecanamukhena suññatāpakāsanena sammādiṭṭhiyā vibhattattā diṭṭhijālaṃ. Titthiyavādanimmaddanupāyattā anuttaro saṅgāmavijayoti evampettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
从序分的结尾来说,就是从名为“那时世尊已经到达”这句话所代表的序分的结束之处来说。因为这是表示界限、范围的用语。另外,从序分的结尾来说,也是因为这是在序分结束时所说的,所以是从作为序分结尾的“诸比丘,如果其他人要诽谤我……”等话来说的。因为这也是表示包含、范围的用语。而这句话是通过与动词“说了”的关联而说出来的。不过,根据“序分是初善”这句话,序分也像结语一样,是包含在经里面的。“不可得……深奥”,是对一切知智的修饰说明。巴利
Nidānāvasānatoti ‘‘atha bhagavā anuppatto’’ti vacanasaṅkhātanidānapariyosānato. Mariyādāvadhivacanañhetaṃ. Apica nidānāvasānatoti nidānapariyosāne vuttattā nidānāvasānabhūtato ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādi (dī. ni. 1.5, 6) vacanato. Ābhividhiavadhivacanañhetaṃ. Idañca ‘‘avocā’’ti kiriyāsambandhanena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Nidānena ādikalyāṇa’’nti vacanato pana nidānampi nigamanaṃ viya suttapariyāpannameva. Alabbha…pe… gambhīranti sabbaññutaññāṇassa visesanaṃ.
149 就像心里不痛快的人,因为做对自己没有好处的事,就成了对别人怀有敌意的人;正如法王在《法句经》和《自说经》中所说:巴利
149. Yathā anattamanā attano anatthacaratāya paramanā verimanā nāma honti, yathāha dhammarājā dhammapade,udāne ca –
仇敌对方会做的,或者怨敌会对仇敌做的,
心若被错误地导向,只会让它变得更糟。巴利
‘‘Diso disaṃ yaṃ taṃ kayirā, verī vā pana verinaṃ; Micchāpaṇihitaṃ cittaṃ, pāpiyo naṃ tato kare’’ti. (dha. pa. 42; udā. 33);
这些人并不是那样心里不痛快。不过,他们是由于自己修行得利而成为心生欢喜的人,所以经文说“自心欢喜”。而自心欢喜,是因为心已被喜所摄持,这一点通过“随念佛陀”等语句显示出来。巴利
Na evamime anattamanā, ime pana attano atthacaratāya attamanā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘sakamanā’’ti. Sakamanatā ca pītiyā gahitacittattāti dasseti ‘‘buddhagatāyā’’tiādinā.
不过,从义注还有另一种解释:悦意就是完全悦意,意思是说,通过这次说法,他们的心意和意图都圆满了。教说的庄严就是教说的展现,而成就教说事业的,正是那一切知智本身。就像迦陵频伽鸟的鸣声一样,谁有甜美悦耳的声音,谁就具有如迦陵频伽鸟鸣般的甜美,以那声音。所谓如同不死灌顶,是说就像能平息身心疲惫、由一切资具所制成的水,因为能带来长寿,所以称为不死,以那如同灌顶一般的水。就像梵天的声音一样,谁有具足八支的声音,谁就有超梵之声,以那声音。欢喜就是渴爱,所以说以渴爱之义而来。因为界有多种含义,欢喜也指接近、侍奉,所以说也以接近之义。巴利
Ayaṃ pana aṭṭhakathāto aparo nayo – attamanāti samattamanā, imāya desanāya paripuṇṇamanasaṅkappāti attho. Desanāvilāso desanāya vijambhanaṃ, tañca desanākiccanipphādakaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇameva. Karavīkassa rutamiva mañjumadhurassaro yassāti karavīkarutamañjū, tena. Amatābhisekasadisenāti kāyacittadarathavūpasamakaṃ sabbasambhārābhisaṅkhataṃ udakaṃ dīghāyukatāsaṃvattanato amataṃ nāma. Tenābhisekasadisena. Brahmuno saro viya aṭṭhaṅgasamannāgato saro yassātibrahmassaro, tena. Abhinandatīti taṇhāyati, tenāha ‘‘taṇhāyampi āgato’’ti. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ abhinandantīti upagacchanti sevantīti atthoti āha ‘‘upagamanepī’’ti.
同样地,“欢喜”就是接受的意思,所以用“也以接受”来说明。而“欢喜之后”这个已经说过的意思,是通过“随喜之后”这句话来显示的,因此说“也以随喜”。巴利
Tathā abhinandantīti sampaṭicchantīti atthamāha ‘‘sampaṭicchanepī’’ti. Abhinanditvāti vuttoyevattho ‘‘anumoditvā’’ti iminā pakāsitoti sandhāya ‘‘anumodanepī’’ti vuttaṃ.
为了用偈颂的形式显示这个意思,所以说出了“善说”等话。其中,从字面上说,是“善说”;从意义上说,是“善说”。或者,通过开显戒而成为善说,通过开显空性而成为善说。或者,通过分别诸见而成为善说,通过分别能令彼见厌离的一切知智而成为善说。同样,在这里也应结合所显示的方式,如遮止对不可赞者加以赞叹等来理解。“如彼者”,是指以对可爱与不可爱平等看待等五种原因而成为如彼者。这个词的详细解释,在《大义释》中以“于可爱不可爱如彼,已舍者如彼,已吐者如彼”等(《大义释》38)宣说,这个解释在上面的注释书中也会出现。虽然,因为顺应各处“诸比丘,何者为彼”等(《长部》1.7)的欲说之问而作答,所以这部经名为记说。记别就是记说。然而,以问答方式进行的经典,如果带有偈颂,就称为祇夜;如果没有偈颂,且没有其他分类依据,就称为记说。因此,虽然本经以问答方式进行,但与祇夜共通之处在于问答,而因为它无偈颂且无其他分类依据,就不与其他经类共通。所以,不顾及问答形式,唯以无偈颂作为记说的原因,而说“此经无偈颂,故为记说”。巴利
Imamevatthaṃ gāthābandhavasena dassetuṃ ‘‘subhāsita’’ntiādimāha. Tattha saddato subhāsitaṃ, atthato sulapitaṃ. Sīlappakāsanena vā subhāsitaṃ, suññatāpakāsanena sulapitaṃ. Diṭṭhivibhajanena vā subhāsitaṃ, tannibbedhakasabbaññutaññāṇavibhajanena sulapitaṃ. Evaṃ avaṇṇavaṇṇanisedhanādīhipi idha dassitappakārehi yojetabbaṃ. Tādinoti iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu samapekkhanādīhi pañcahi kāraṇehi tādibhūtassa. Imassa padassa vitthāro ‘‘iṭṭhāniṭṭhe tādī, cattāvīti tādī, vantāvīti tādī’’tiādinā (mahāni. 38) mahāniddese vutto, so upari aṭṭhakathāyampi āvibhavissati. Kiñcāpi ‘‘katamañca taṃ bhikkhave’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 1.7) tattha tattha pavattāya kathetukamyatāpucchāya vissajjanavasena vuttattā idaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ nāma bhavati. Byākaraṇameva hi veyyākaraṇaṃ, tathāpi pucchāvissajjanāvasena pavattaṃ suttaṃ sagāthakaṃ ce, geyyaṃ nāma bhavati. Niggāthakaṃ, ce aṅgantaraheturahitañca, veyyākaraṇaṃ nāma. Iti pucchāvissajjanāvasena pavattassāpi geyyasādhāraṇato, aṅgantaraheturahitassa ca niggāthakabhāvasseva anaññasādhāraṇato pucchāvissajjanabhāvamanapekkhitvā niggāthakabhāvameva veyyākaraṇahetutāya dassento ‘‘niggāthakattā hi idaṃ veyyākaraṇa’’nti āha.
有人质问“为什么这样说”,注释者用“因为经中说的是‘正在被诵说时’”这句话来澄清。这里的“正在被诵说时”这个说法,和上文、下文都有关联,因为它既承接前面,也连接后面。这段话的意思是:由于“正在被诵说时”是用现在时态来说的,所以应当知道,并不是只在经文诵到结尾时才震动了大地,而是在六十二处都震动了。那么,既然整部经正在被诵说时,震动这个意思就能成立,难道不是指每一个邪见各自到了结尾处才结束吗?这种质疑根本站不住脚,因为它只是凭可能性来追问;而这个意思并不是仅凭可能性来说的,而是按照说法时震动的具体方式,由师父代代相传下来的。正因为是以那种方式,这个意思才被结集者收录下来,而结集者也正是按照所收录的方式来说的,所以在这里应当得出结论:否则,对于这个不是推理所能触及的意思,用推理去搅乱它就不合理了。像这一类地方都应这样理解。“以界扰动”等处的意思,应当从《大般涅槃经注释》中取得。巴利
Kasmāti codanaṃ sodheti ‘‘bhaññamāneti hi vutta’’nti iminā. Ubhayasambandhapadañhetaṃ heṭṭhā, upari ca sambajjhanato. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – ‘‘bhaññamāne’’ti vattamānakālavasena vuttattā na kevalaṃ suttapariyosāneyeva, atha kho dvāsaṭṭhiyā ṭhānesu akampitthāti veditabbāti. Yadevaṃ sakalepi imasmiṃ sutte bhaññamāne akampitthāti atthoyeva sambhavati, na pana tassa tassa diṭṭhigatassa pariyosāne pariyosāneti atthoti? Nāyamanuyogo katthacipi na pavisati sambhavamatteneva anuyuñjanato, ayaṃ pana attho na sambhavamatteneva vutto, atha kho desanākāle kampanākāreneva ācariyaparamparābhatena. Teneva hi ākārenāyamattho saṅgītimāruḷho, tathāruḷhanayeneva ca saṅgahakārena vuttoti niṭṭhamettha gantabbaṃ, itarathā atakkāvacarassa imassatthassa takkapariyāhatakathanaṃ anupapannaṃ siyāti. Evamīdisesu. ‘‘Dhātukkhobhenā’’tiādīsu attho mahāparinibbānasuttavaṇṇanāya (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.171) gahetabbo.
在其他处也一样,这里用pi这个词把对波罗蜜的简择一并收摄进来。因为《佛种姓》中确实这样说:巴利
Aparesupīti ettha pi-saddena pāramipavicayanaṃ sampiṇḍeti. Vuttañhi buddhavaṃse –
如实观照这些法时,自性、作用与特相……
凭借法的威力,大地和一万个世界都震动了。巴利
‘‘Ime dhamme sammasato, sabhāvasarasalakkhaṇe; Dhammatejena vasudhā, dasasahassī pakampathā’’ti. (bu. vaṃ. 166);
教法的建立和隐没等情形也是这样。其中,说到教法的建立,当世尊接受竹林园时,当大摩哂陀长老接受大云林园时,当大阿利多长老诵习律藏时,像这样一些时候,教法的根基已经扎下,大地就充满喜悦,仿佛在跳舞一样地震动。而说到教法的隐没,人们就像迦叶世尊的教法隐没时那样,因为“唉,这样的正法竟然隐没了”而陷入悲伤,大地也随之震动。在《譬喻》中确实这样说过:巴利
Tathā sāsanapatiṭṭhānantaradhānādayopi. Tattha sāsanapatiṭṭhāne tāva bhagavato veḷuvanapaṭiggahaṇe, mahāmahindattherassa mahāmeghavanapaṭiggahaṇe, mahāariṭṭhattherassa vinayapiṭakasajjhāyaneti evamādīsu sāsanassa mūlāni otiṇṇānīti pītivasaṃ gatā naccantā viya ayaṃ mahāpathavī kampittha. Sāsanantaradhāne pana ‘‘aho īdisassa saddhammassa antaradhāna’’nti domanassappattā viya yathā taṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhāne. Vuttañhetamapadāne –
那时,这整个大地本来是不动的,却变得动摇不定;
大海也像带着忧伤,发出悲悯的声音。巴利
‘‘Tadāyaṃ pathavī sabbā, acalā sā calācalā; Sāgaro ca sasokova, vinadī karuṇaṃ gira’’nti. (apa. 2.54.131);
前往菩提道场时,指的是在毗舍佉月满月那天,第一次走向菩提道场的时候。拾取粪扫衣时,指的是有一个叫富那的婢女,把麻布做的粪扫衣穿过后扔在荒坟堆里,他在那件衣服上抖掉大约一升的虫子,然后安住在伟大的圣种传统中把它拾取起来的时候。洗粪扫衣时,指的是洗涤那件粪扫衣的时候。《黑林经》收在增支部四集里。《瞿昙摩经》也收在同一部的三集里。以精进力,指的是在大出离的时候,由舍弃转轮王荣华所生的精进威力。巴利
Bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamaneti visākhāpuṇṇamadivase paṭhamaṃ bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamane. Paṃsukūlaggahaṇeti puṇṇaṃ nāma dāsiṃ pārupitvā āmakasusāne chaḍḍitassa sāṇamayapaṃsukūlassa tumbamatte pāṇe vidhunitvā mahāariyavaṃse ṭhatvā gahaṇe. Paṃsukūladhovaneti tasseva paṃsukūlassa dhovane. Kāḷakārāmasuttaṃ (a. ni. 4.24) aṅguttarāgame catukkanipāte. Gotamakasuttampi (a. ni. 3.176) tattheva tikanipāte. Vīriyabalenāti mahābhinikkhamane cakkavattisiripariccāgahetubhūtavīriyappabhāvena. Bodhimaṇḍūpasaṅkamane –
就算皮肤、筋和骨头都干枯殆尽,
就让我的身体里的肉和血彻底干枯吧。巴利
‘‘Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatu; Upasussatu nissesaṃ, sarīre maṃsalohita’’nti. (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.22, 237; a. ni. 2.5; 8.13; mahāni. 196; avidūrenidānakathā);
依所说具备四支精进之力,应随宜理解其义。“被稀有之速所冲击”,是指被能带来惊叹的业用之力所触动。有人说,在洗粪扫衣时,是凭世尊的福德威力。在拾取粪扫衣时,虽然看起来适合说“被稀有之速所冲击”,但因为那是偶尔才发生的,所以说为“非时震动”。但在《须大拏本生》中,因为圆满波罗蜜的福德威力而多次震动,所以成为所谓的非时震动。在作证譬喻中,因为与所要说的义理相应,所以像作证一样,说为“以作证的状态”,正如降魔之时那样。“以给予善哉”,是随顺论典而说的,如转法轮和结集之时等。巴利
Vuttacaturaṅgasamannāgatavīriyānubhāvenāti yathārahamattho veditabbo. Acchariyavegābhihatāti vimhayāvahakiriyānubhāvaghaṭṭitā. Paṃsukūladhovane bhagavato puññatejenāti vadanti. Paṃsukūlaggahaṇe yathā acchariyavegābhihatāti yuttaṃ viya dissati, taṃ pana kadāci pavattattā ‘‘akālakampanenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vessantarajātake (jā. 2.22.1655) pana pāramīpūraṇapuññatejena anekakkhattuṃ kampitattā akālakampanaṃ nāma bhavati. Sakkhinidassane kathetabbassa atthassānurūpato sakkhi viya bhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkhibhāvenā’’ti yathā taṃ māravijayakāle (jā. aṭṭha. 1.avidūrenidānakathā). Sādhukāradānenāti pakaraṇānurūpavasena vuttaṃ yathā taṃ dhammacakkappavattanasaṅgītikālādīsu (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 3.301).
“不仅”等语,是通过展示种种大地震动的情形,来说明这部经本身就具有大威神力。其中,“光林”指欢喜园。因为在律注中说,那里是教法中被称为智光的光明显现之处,所以叫“光林”。“法”指《无始相应》等法。“东面嫩芒果标记处”指东方区域中以幼芒果树为标志的地方。巴利
‘‘Na kevala’’ntiādinā anekatthapathavīkampanadassanamukhena imassa suttassa mahānubhāvatāyeva dassitā. Tattha jotivaneti nandavane. Tañhi sāsanassa ñāṇālokasaṅkhātāya jotiyā pātubhūtaṭṭhānattā jotivananti vuccatīti vinayasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Dhammanti anamataggasuttādidhammaṃ. Pācīnaambalaṭṭhikaṭṭhānanti pācīnadisābhāge taruṇambarukkhena lakkhitaṭṭhānaṃ.
“如是”是指世尊说法等时候发生的地震。“多种”就是多种方式。这里的关联是:由自生者所说的《梵网》,也就是这部最胜经。“此处”是指在教法中。“如理”是指通过断除邪见、受持正见等方法和途径来修行,这就是它的意思。以上是这里注释中隐晦含义的阐明。巴利
Evanti bhagavatā desitakālādīsu pathavīkampanamatidisati. Anekasoti anekadhā. Sayambhunā desitassa brahmajālassa yassa suttaseṭṭhassāti yojanā. Idhāti imasmiṃ sāsane. Yonisoti micchādiṭṭhippahānasammādiṭṭhisamādānādinā ñāyena upāyena paṭipajjantūti attho. Ayaṃ tāvettha aṭṭhakathāya līnatthavibhāvanā.
论典理趣的注释巴利
Pakaraṇanayavaṇṇanā
从此以后,由老师法护所作;
对种种含义的说明,比如来源、理趣等。
我们不会忽视她,因为这就是她的净化。
所以,我们也要讲一讲它,好让听众增长智慧。巴利
‘‘Ito paraṃ ācariya-dhammapālena yā katā; Samuṭṭhānādihārādi-vividhatthavibhāvanā. Na sā amhehupekkheyyā, ayañhi tabbisodhanā; Tasmā tampi pavakkhāma, sotūnaṃ ñāṇavuḍḍhiyā.
这段注释是用论典的方式对巴利圣典作义解——而所谓“论典方式”,就是铜鍱部语言中的注释方式。《阿毗达摩注》中说:“也有人把它称为《指导论》和《藏论》中说法者们的连接方式。”不过,因为在这部教法中,起源、目的、分类以及总义首先确定之后,注释就容易做,也容易理解,所以——巴利
Ayañhi pakaraṇanayena pāḷiyā atthavaṇṇanā – pakaraṇanayoti ca tambapaṇṇibhāsāya vaṇṇanānayo. ‘‘Nettipeṭakappakaraṇe dhammakathikānaṃ yojanānayotipi vadantī’’ti abhidhammaṭīkāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Yasmā panāyaṃ desanāya samuṭṭhānapayojanabhājanesu, piṇḍatthesu ca paṭhamaṃ niddhāritesu sukarā, hoti suviññeyyā ca, tasmā –
生起因、目的、分类,以及总义。
智者这样分辨清楚之后,接着就宣说理趣等法。巴利
Samuṭṭhānaṃ payojanaṃ, bhājanañcāpi piṇḍatthaṃ; Niddhāretvāna paṇḍito, tato hārādayo saṃse.
在这里,“起源”指的是说法的因缘。它分为两种:共通的与不共通的;共通的部分同样可以从内在和外在两方面来看。其中,共通的内在起源,就是世尊的大悲。正是被大悲所激励,世间怙主才生起了为应受调伏的众生说法的心。针对这一点,经中说:“因为对众生的悲悯,以佛眼观察世间……”等等。在这里应当知道,三时的大悲都包括在内,因为大悲的生起,正是为了通过宣说正法和施予无畏,把众生从轮回的大洪流中渡脱出来。就像大悲一样,一切知智、十力智等,也是说法的共通内在起源。因为世尊如实了知一切所知法以及它们应当被宣说的方式,也如实了知众生的根性、随眠等,凭借处非处的善巧,随应所度众生的意乐,而开示种种不同理趣的教法。至于共通的外在起源,则是娑婆世界主梵天与一万大梵天眷属的劝请。由于这一劝请,法主平息了因观察法义甚深而生的少事之心,发起了说法的精勤。巴利
Tattha samuṭṭhānaṃ nāma desanānidānaṃ, taṃ sādhāraṇamasādhāraṇanti duvidhaṃ, tathā sādhāraṇampi ajjhattikabāhirato. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ ajjhattikasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma bhagavato mahākaruṇā. Tāya hi samussāhitassa lokanāthassa veneyyānaṃ dhammadesanāya cittaṃ udapādi, taṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘sattesu kāruññataṃ paṭicca buddhacakkhunā lokaṃ volokesī’’tiādi. Ettha ca tividhāvatthāyapi mahākaruṇāya saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo yāvadeva saddhammadesanāhatthadānehi saṃsāramahoghato sattasantāraṇatthaṃ taduppattito. Yathā ca mahākaruṇā, evaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇadasabalañāṇādayopi desanāya sādhāraṇamajjhattikasamuṭṭhānaṃ nāma. Sabbañhi ñeyyadhammaṃ tesaṃ desetabbākāraṃ, sattānaṃ āsayānusayādikañca yāthāvato jānanto bhagavā ṭhānāṭṭhānādīsu kosallena veneyyajjhāsayānurūpaṃ vicitranayadesanaṃ pavattesi. Bāhiraṃ pana sādhāraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ dasasahassimahābrahmaparivārassa sahampatibrahmuno ajjhesanaṃ. Tadajjhesanañhi pati dhammagambhīratāpaccavekkhaṇājanitaṃ appossukkataṃ paṭippassambhetvā dhammassāmī dhammadesanāya ussāhajāto ahosi.
不共的起源同样可以从内在和外在两方面来看,只有这两种。其中,内在的不共,就是使这部经得以宣说的大悲与说法智,这两者都属于内在的不共。因为大悲等特质在一般层面上虽然是共通的,但就大悲等殊胜层面而言,就成了不共的。至于外在的不共起源,注释书里说的是“称扬与贬斥的言说”。再者,在称扬与贬斥中,众生会生起应受调伏、嗔怒、欢喜等状态。在这里,看不见过患,就是外在的不共起源。同样,对于称扬与贬斥中的修行次第、以小小戒等多种形式存在的戒、一切知智在常见等见解处及其超越方面的无碍行境,以及如来在任何存在状态中都不被系属——众生对这些的不了解,也是外在的不共起源。巴利
Asādhāraṇampi ajjhattikabāhirato duvidhameva. Tattha ajjhattikaṃ yāya mahākaruṇāya, yena ca desanāñāṇena idaṃ suttaṃ pavattitaṃ, tadubhayameva. Sāmaññāvatthāya hi sādhāraṇampi samānaṃ mahākaruṇādivisesāvatthāya asādhāraṇaṃ bhavati, bāhiraṃ pana asādhāraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ vaṇṇāvaṇṇabhaṇananti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vuttaṃ. Apica nindāpasaṃsāsu sattānaṃ veneyyāghātānandādibhāvamanāpatti. Tattha ca anādīnavadassanaṃ bāhiramasādhāraṇasamuṭṭhānameva, tathā nindāpasaṃsāsu paṭipajjanakkamassa, pasaṃsāvisayassa ca khuddakādivasena anekavidhassa sīlassa, sabbaññutaññāṇassa ca sassatādidiṭṭhiṭṭhāne, taduttari ca appaṭihatacāratāya, tathāgatassa ca katthacipi bhavādīsu apariyāpannatāya sattānamanavabodhopi bāhiramasādhāraṇasamuṭṭhānaṃ.
目的也有共与不共两种。其中,共的目的,是无取著般涅槃和解脱味,这是世尊一切教法所共通的,所以他说“为此而说,为此而议论”等等(《无碍解道》366)。不共的目的,则要从外道生起的因由反过来理解。因为在批评和称赞中,众生会进入应调伏、嗔害、欢喜等状态,这些作为此教法的果,以因的方式推动此教法生起。果确实以能生起它的那种力量推动因,这才叫“推动”,因为只有果存在时,那种力量才成为因。或者,如前面所说的果推动世尊宣说此教法,这是阿阇梨舍利弗长老所说的。因为教法所要成就的果是可希求的,所以说它推动宣说教法的人。此外,摧毁诡诈、饶舌等各种邪命,解开六十二见的网,以见为首阐明缘起,依六触处开示四谛业处,彻底穷尽一切见趣,以及显示自身的无取著般涅槃,也都是目的。巴利
Payojanampi sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇato duvidhaṃ. Tattha sādhāraṇaṃ anupādāparinibbānaṃ vimuttirasattā sabbāyapi bhagavato desanāya, tenevāha ‘‘etadatthā kathā, etadatthā mantanā’’tiādi (pari. 366) asādhāraṇaṃ pana bāhirasamuṭṭhānato vipariyāyena veditabbaṃ. Nindāpasaṃsāsu hi sattānanveneyyāghātānandādibhāvappattiādikaṃ imissā desanāya phalabhūtaṃ kāraṇabhāvena imaṃ desanaṃ payojeti. Phalañhi taduppādakasattiyā kāraṇaṃ payojeti nāma phale satiyeva tāya sattiyā kāraṇabhāvappattito. Atha vā yathāvuttaṃ phalaṃ imāya desanāya bhagavantaṃ payojetīti ācariyasāriputtattherena vuttaṃ. Yañhi desanāya sādhetabbaṃ phalaṃ, taṃ ākaṅkhitabbattā desanāya desakaṃ payojeti nāma. Apica kuhanalapanādinānāvidhamicchājīvaviddhaṃsanaṃ, dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhijālaviniveṭhanaṃ, diṭṭhisīsena paccayākāravibhāvanaṃ, chaphassāyatanavasena catusaccakammaṭṭhānaniddeso, sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ anavasesapariyādānaṃ, attano anupādāparinibbānadīpanañca payojanameva.
而容器则是教法的所依。凡是那些心被称叹与讥嫌之相牵着走、顺从或抗拒,沉溺于诡诈等种种邪命,陷在常见等邪见的泥沼里,在戒蕴等方面不能圆满行持,又不了解佛陀功德殊胜之智的应受调伏者,他们就是这部教法的容器。巴利
Bhājanaṃ pana desanādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Ye hi vaṇṇāvaṇṇanimittaanurodhavirodhavantacittā kuhanādivividhamicchājīvaniratā sassatādidiṭṭhipaṅkanimuggā sīlakkhandhādīsu aparipūrakārino abuddhaguṇavisesañāṇā veneyyā, te imissā desanāya bhājanaṃ.
这里的“句义”,是指根据此处能找到的词句,并结合整段经文,按实际情况来归纳出的意义。通过说明不该对嗔恨等产生反应,就显示了与誓愿相符的沙门想之修习,同样也显示了堪忍与柔和的实践、梵住的修习、信与慧的结合、念与正知的安住、思择修习之力的成就、缠与随眠的断除、自他两利的行持,以及不被世间法所染污——巴利
Piṇḍattho pana idha labbhamānapadehi, samudāyena ca suttapadena yathāsambhavaṃ saṅgahito attho. Āghātādīnaṃ akaraṇīyatāvacanena hi dassitaṃ paṭiññānurūpaṃ samaṇasaññāya niyojanaṃ, tathā khantisoraccānuṭṭhānaṃ, brahmavihārabhāvanānuyogo, saddhāpaññāsamāyogo, satisampajaññādhiṭṭhānaṃ, paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalasiddhi, pariyuṭṭhānānusayappahānaṃ, ubhayahitapaṭipatti, lokadhammehi anupalepo ca –
通过说明远离杀生等,显示了戒清净;由此也显示了具足惭与愧、具足慈与悲、断除违犯、彼分断除、断除恶行的杂染、成就三种远离、成就可爱可意应尊重应供养之性、获得利养恭敬与名声、成为止观的依止处、削弱不善根、种植善根、远离两种不利、于众中无所畏惧、安住不放逸、不为他人所胜伏、具足无悔等——巴利
Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena dassitā sīlavisuddhi, tāya ca hirottappasampatti, mettākaruṇāsamaṅgitā, vītikkamappahānaṃ, tadaṅgappahānaṃ, duccaritasaṃkilesappahānaṃ, viratittayasiddhi, piyamanāpagarubhāvanīyatānipphatti, lābhasakkārasilokasamudāgamo, samathavipassanānaṃ adhiṭṭhānabhāvo, akusalamūlatanukaraṇaṃ, kusalamūlaropanaṃ, ubhayānatthadūrīkaraṇaṃ, parisāsu visāradatā, appamādavihāro, parehi duppadhaṃsiyatā, avippaṭisārādisamaṅgitā ca –
通过“甚深”等话语,显示了对甚深法的阐明:所依不可得,即使经过不可数劫也难以遇到其出现,即使以微细的智慧也无法现前通达,即使以称为“法随”的推论智慧也难以达到,一切不安已经止息,寂静法的阐明,善妙究竟,令人不满足,成为首要,成为如实智的行境,微细的本质,以及大慧的阐明。通过“示见”等词句,显示了常见与断见的略说阐明、退缩与散乱的阐明、两者系缚的解说、邪执的宣说、邪道修行的开示、颠倒执取的告知、执取的摄持、过去际与未来际之见的安立、有见与无有见的区分、渴爱与无明的运转、有边与无边之见的解说、进入两边,以及漏、暴流、轭、烦恼、结、缚、取之差别分别——巴利
‘‘Gambhīrā’’tiādivacanehi dassitaṃ gambhīradhammavibhāvanaṃ, alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhatā, kappānamasaṅkhyeyyenāpi dullabhapātubhāvatā, sukhumenapi ñāṇena paccakkhato paṭivijjhitumasakkuṇeyyatā, dhammanvayasaṅkhātena anumānañāṇenāpi duradhigamanīyatā, passaddhasabbadarathatā, santadhammavibhāvanaṃ, sobhanapariyosānatā, atittikarabhāvo, padhānabhāvappatti, yathābhūtañāṇagocaratā, sukhumasabhāvatā, mahāpaññāvibhāvanā ca. Diṭṭhidīpakapadehi dassitā samāsato sassataucchedadiṭṭhiyo līnatātidhāvanavibhāvanaṃ, ubhayavinibandhaniddeso , micchābhinivesakittanaṃ, kummaggapaṭipattippakāsanaṃ, vipariyesaggāhañāpanaṃ, parāmāsapariggaho, pubbantāparantānudiṭṭhipatiṭṭhāpanā, bhavavibhavadiṭṭhivibhāgā, taṇhāvijjāpavatti, antavānantavādiṭṭhiniddeso, antadvayāvatāraṇaṃ, āsavoghayogakilesaganthasaṃyojanupādānavisesavibhajanañca –
同样地,通过“受之集”等语句,显示了四圣谛的随觉与通达成就、镇伏断与正断、渴爱与无明的远离、正法住立之因的把握、教法与证法的圆满、自他两利的修行、三种慧的含摄、念与正知的践行、信与慧的结合、精进平等的运用,以及止观的成就——巴利
Tathā ‘‘vedanānaṃ samudaya’’ntiādivacanehi dassitā catunnamariyasaccānaṃ anubodhapaṭibodhasiddhi, vikkhambhanasamucchedappahānaṃ taṇhāvijjāvigamo, saddhammaṭṭhitinimittapariggaho, āgamādhigamasampatti, ubhayahitapaṭipatti, tividhapaññāpariggaho, satisampajaññānuṭṭhānaṃ, saddhāpaññāsamāyogo, vīriyasamatānuyojanaṃ, samathavipassanānipphatti ca –
通过“不知、不见”这些词句,显示了无明的成立;同样,通过“为渴爱所缚者的恐惧与挣扎”这些词句,显示了渴爱的成立。由这两者,也显示了盖与结缚两者的成立、无始轮回流转的无法断绝、对过去际的执取与对未来际的连结、依过去与现在之时而作的因缘分别、无明与渴爱彼此无法超越对方、彼此互相资助,以及慧解脱与心解脱之对立面的说明——巴利
‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti padehi dassitā avijjāsiddhi, tathā ‘‘taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti padehi taṇhāsiddhi, tadubhayena ca nīvaraṇasaññojanadvayasiddhi, anamataggasaṃsāravaṭṭānupacchedo, pubbantāharaṇāparantānusandhānāni, atītapaccuppannakālavasena hetuvibhāgo, avijjātaṇhānaṃ aññamaññānativattanaṃ, aññamaññūpakāritā, paññāvimutticetovimuttīnaṃ paṭipakkhaniddeso ca –
通过“那也以触为缘”这一句,说明了安立常见等(见解)是依赖缘而起的,由此也否定了诸法的常性,确立了无常性;从胜义的角度否定了作者等(的概念),说明了法尔如是性,开示了空性,并阐明了平等、无功用以及缘相的特征——巴利
‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti padena dassitā sassatādipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttitā, tena ca dhammānaṃ niccatāpaṭisedho, aniccatāpatiṭṭhāpanaṃ, paramatthato kārakādipaṭikkhepo, evaṃdhammatāniddeso, suññatāpakāsanaṃ samatthanirīha paccayalakkhaṇavibhāvanañca –
从“已断后有之引导”等语句开始,显示了世尊断德的圆满成就、明与解脱的自在状态、三学的完成、两种涅槃界的区分、四依处的圆满,以及不属于有、生趣等的超离性——巴利
‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko’’tiādinā dassitā bhagavato pahānasampatti, vijjāvimuttivasībhāvo, sikkhattayanipphatti, nibbānadhātudvayavibhāgo, caturadhiṭṭhānaparipūraṇaṃ, bhavayoniādīsu apariyāpannatā ca –
不过,通过整段经文,则显示了世尊在可爱与不可爱之境中如如不动的本性,也显示了在其中安立他人,解说了作为诸善法根本的两种法,教授了三学,成立了自己受苦等四种人,分辨了黑黑业报等四种业,解说了四无量心的所缘境,如实通达了集、灭等五种,阐明了六种可念法,安立了十种依止法——像这样种种应说的义理,随其相应而摄集显示出来,就是句义。巴利
Sakalena pana suttapadena dassito iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu bhagavato tādibhāvo, tattha ca paresaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ, kusaladhammānaṃ ādibhūtadhammadvayaniddeso sikkhattayūpadeso, attantapādipuggalacatukkasiddhi, kaṇhakaṇhavipākādikammacatukkavibhāgo, caturappamaññāvisayaniddeso, samudayatthaṅgamādipañcakassa yathābhūtāvabodho, chasāraṇīyadhammavibhāvanā, dasanāthakadhammapatiṭṭhāpananti evamādayo yathāsambhavaṃ saṅgahetvā dassetabbā atthā piṇḍattho.
十六种句义的解说巴利
Soḷasahāravaṇṇanā
教说句义的解说巴利
Desanāhāravaṇṇanā
现在,按照《导论》和《藏释》里所说的方法,来辨明句义等类别。其中,在以“我、世间”这种见解为立足处,又通过受、触、处等门径而被执取的五取蕴当中,排除渴爱之后的五取蕴就是苦谛。渴爱是集谛。而这个渴爱,通过“以恐惧执取,属于渴爱”以及“以受为缘而有渴爱”这些语句,还有以集谛的方式把握,在圣典中已经按它自身的样貌被把握了。以上就是经说的方法。巴利
Idāni nettiyā, peṭakopadese ca vuttanayavasena hārādīnaṃ niddhāraṇaṃ. Tattha ‘‘attā, loko’’ti ca diṭṭhiyā adhiṭṭhānabhāvena, vedanāphassāyatanādimukhena ca gahitesu pañcasu upādānakkhandhesu taṇhāvajjitā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ. Taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ. Taṃ pana ‘‘paritassanāgahaṇena taṇhāgatāna’’nti, ‘‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti ca padehi samudayaggahaṇenañca pāḷiyaṃ sarūpena gahitameva. Ayaṃ tāva suttantanayo.
在阿毗达摩《分别论》中,依照其中所述的方式,通过“恼害”“欢喜”等词,通过“勤发”等词,通过表明心的染污的词,通过一切见趣的词,通过善与不善的把握,通过有的把握,通过愁等的把握,通过见的把握,以及通过在各处对集起的把握——简要来说,通过阐明一切世间善法与不善法的词所涵盖的法与烦恼,就是集谛。这两者不再生起,就是灭谛。对于灭谛,应当依据经中在各处对诸受的灭尽与出离的说法,以及各别涅槃的说法和无取解脱的说法,来理解其把握方式。了知灭,就是道谛。对于道谛,也应当依据其中在各处对诸受的集起等如实证知的表述,依照了知六触处的集起等如实证知的方式,以及通过断绝有结的说法,来理解其把握方式。巴利
Abhidhamme pana vibhaṅgappakaraṇe āgatanayena āghātānandādivacanehi, ‘‘ātappamanvāyā’’tiādipadehi, cittapadosavacanena, sabbadiṭṭhigatikapadehi, kusalākusalaggahaṇena, bhavaggahaṇena, sokādiggahaṇena, diṭṭhiggahaṇena, tattha tattha samudayaggahaṇena cāti saṅkhepato sabbalokiyakusalākusaladhammavibhāvanapadehi gahitā dhammakilesā samudayasaccaṃ. Tadubhayesamappavatti nirodhasaccaṃ. Tassa pana tattha tattha vedanānaṃ atthaṅgamanissaraṇapariyāyehi paccattaṃ nibbutivacanena, anupādāvimuttivacanena ca pāḷiyaṃ gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Nirodhapajānanā paṭipadā maggasaccaṃ. Tassapi tattha tattha vedanānaṃ samudayādīni yathābhūtapaṭivedhanāpadesena channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayādīni yathābhūtapajānanapariyāyena, bhavanettiyā ucchedavacanena ca gahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ.
在这里,应当通过集来认识味,通过苦来认识过患,通过道与灭来认识出离。也就是说,按照四谛的方式,以及依据经中直接出现的味、过患、出离,从这些角度来理解味等。堪受教化者因此证得如是之性等,这就是果。凡是应当通过教说达成的目的,就是下面所说的用意。那本身就是果,这就是所说的含义。世尊就是为了这个目的而开示这部经。对恼害等不作所应作之事,对恼害等之果不在他人相续中修习,在毁谤与称赞中如实了知并去除——如此,为了达成各种目的,这就是方法。通过遮止对恼害等所作之事等开示,想求利益的人应当好好守护自己的心,远离那些——这是具教敕之法王的教令。这就是依味、过患、出离、果、方法、教令六个方面,显示六法特征的教说理则。正如所说——巴利
Tattha samudayena assādo, dukkhena ādīnavo, magganirodhehi nissaraṇanti evaṃ catusaccavasena, yāni pāḷiyaṃ sarūpeneva āgatāni assādādīnavanissaraṇāni, tesañca vasena idha assādādayo veditabbā. Veneyyānaṃ tādibhāvāpattiādi phalaṃ. Yañhi desanāya sādhetabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttaṃ payojanaṃ. Tadeva phalanti vuttovāyamattho. Tadatthañhi idaṃ suttaṃ bhagavatā desitaṃ. Āghātādīnamakaraṇīyatā, āghātādiphalassa ca anaññasantānabhāvitā nindāpasaṃsāsu yathāsabhāvaṃ paṭijānananibbeṭhanānīti evaṃ taṃtaṃpayojanādhigamahetu upāyo. Āghātādīnaṃ karaṇapaṭisedhanādiapadesena atthakāmehi tato cittaṃ sādhukaṃ rakkhitabbanti ayaṃ āṇārahassa dhammarājassa āṇattīti. Ayaṃ assādādīnavanissaraṇaphalūpāyāṇattivasena chabbidhadhammasandassanalakkhaṇo desanāhāro nāma. Vuttañca –
味、过患、出离,以及果和方法,
世尊的教诫,是给修行人的教说句义。巴利
‘‘Assādādīnavatā , nissaraṇampi ca phalaṃ upāyo ca; Āṇattī ca bhagavato, yogīnaṃ desanāhāro’’ti.
对伺察理的解释巴利
Vicayahāravaṇṇanā
即使没有安立(概念设定),也还是依世俗惯用语、依随顺说法的方式而说“我的”。因为没有决定性的限定,为了表示分别取舍,就用了“或”这个字。因为具足那样的功德、为了令其面向(教法),所以称呼“诸比丘”。因为不同、因为对立,所以说“他人”;因为与功德相反、因为应受贬斥,所以说“诋毁”;因为贤善、因为详尽,所以说“会说”;因为具有受持的本性、因为与非法相违,所以说“法的”;因为与见和戒相结合、因为能摧毁烦恼,所以说“僧的”;因为依照所说的教示、因为文句的陈述,所以说“对此”;因为现前、因为众多,所以说“你们”;因为打击心、因为所缘被打击,所以说“恼害”;因为对所缘缩退而行、不面向所缘,因为不欢喜的状态,所以说“无因”;因为对所缘的思虑、因为作为依止,所以说“心的”;因为义理不能成立、因为随顺随顺而不能成就义利,所以说“不喜”;因为不堪作为理由,在导师的教法中巴利
Kappanābhāvepi vohāravasena, anuvādavasena ca ‘‘mama’’nti vuttaṃ. Niyamābhāvato vikappanatthaṃ vāggahaṇaṃ. Taṃguṇasamaṅgitāya, abhimukhīkaraṇāya ca ‘‘bhikkhave’’ti āmantanaṃ. Aññabhāvato, paṭiviruddhabhāvato ca ‘‘pare’’ti vuttaṃ, vaṇṇapaṭipakkhato, avaṇṇanīyato ca ‘‘avaṇṇa’’nti, byattivasena, vitthāravasena ca ‘‘bhāseyyu’’nti, dhāraṇasabhāvato, adhammapaṭipakkhato ca ‘‘dhammassā’’ti, diṭṭhisīlehi saṃhatabhāvato, kilesānaṃ saṅghātakaraṇato ca ‘‘saṅghassā’’ti, vuttapaṭiniddesato, vacanupanyāsato ca ‘‘tatrā’’ti, sammukhībhāvato, puthubhāvato ca ‘‘tumhehī’’ti, cittassa hananato, ārammaṇābhighātato ca ‘‘āghāto’’ti, ārammaṇe saṅkocavuttiyā anabhimukhatāya, atuṭṭhākāratāya ca ‘‘appaccayo’’ti, ārammaṇacintanato, nissayato ca ‘‘cetaso’’ti, atthassa asādhanato, anu anu anatthasādhanato ca ‘‘anabhiraddhī’’ti, kāraṇānarahattā, satthusāsane
因为对于已安住者来说,无法造作,所以说“不应作”。如此,通过显示它在每一种所指意义中如何运作,并且从意义上来说——巴利
Ṭhitehi kātumasakkuṇeyyattā ca ‘‘na karaṇīyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evaṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ adhippetatthe pavattatānidassanena, atthaso ca –
“我的”是显示所属关系的代名词。“或”是表示选择的助词。“诸比丘”是表示称呼的名词。“他人”是显示行为者的名词。“毁谤”是显示行为对象的名词。“会说”是显示动作的动词。“法之、僧之”是显示所属关系的名词。“于此”是显示处所的代名词。“由你们”是显示行为者的代名词。“不”是表示否定的助词。“恼害、无因、不喜”是显示行为对象的名词。“心之”是显示所属关系的名词。“应作”是显示动作的名词。像这样,通过显示每一个词各自的特征,从字面上加以简择,就是词伺察。不过,因为害怕说得太广会太冗长,这里只是顺着注释书和它对于简略含义的阐明;这个意思应当由智者自己去辨明,所以我们没有详细展开。巴利
Mamanti sāminiddiṭṭhaṃ sabbanāmapadaṃ. Vāti vikappananiddiṭṭhaṃ nipātapadaṃ. Bhikkhaveti ālapananiddiṭṭhaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Pareti kattuniddiṭṭhaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Avaṇṇanti kammaniddiṭṭhaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Bhāseyyunti kiriyāniddiṭṭhaṃ ākhyātapadaṃ. Dhammassa, saṅghassāti ca sāminiddiṭṭhaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Tatrāti ādhāraniddiṭṭhaṃ sabbanāmapadaṃ. Tumhehīti kattuniddiṭṭhaṃ sabbanāmapadaṃ. Na-iti paṭisedhaniddiṭṭhaṃ nipātapadaṃ. Āghāto, appaccayo, anabhiraddhīti ca kammaniddiṭṭhaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Cetasoti sāminiddiṭṭhaṃ nāmapadaṃ. Karaṇīyāti kiriyāniddiṭṭhaṃ nāmapadanti. Evaṃ tassa tassa padassa visesatānidassanena, byañjanaso ca vicayanaṃ padavicayo. Ativitthārabhayena pana sakkāyeva aṭṭhakathaṃ, tassā ca līnatthavibhāvanaṃ anugantvā ayamattho viññunā vibhāvetunti na vitthārayimha.
如果你们当时生气或不满,还能不能分辨别人说的是好话还是坏话?这是征询同意的问题。这个问题以众生为立足点,以多种对象为立足点,以究竟义为范围,以当下为范围——像这样在一切情况下按各自情形审察问题,就是问审察。回答“不是的,尊者”,这是明确回答、完全回答、有待进一步追问的回答、世间层面的回答——像这样对一切回答按各自情形审察,就是答审察。巴利
‘‘Tatra ce tumhe assatha kupitā vā anattamanā vā, api nu tumhe paresaṃ subhāsitaṃ dubbhāsitaṃ ājāneyyāthā’’ti ayaṃ anumatipucchā. Sattādhiṭṭhānā, anekādhiṭṭhānā, paramatthavisayā, paccuppannavisayāti evaṃ sabbattha yathāsambhavaṃ pucchāvicayanaṃ pucchāvicayo. ‘‘No hetaṃ bhante’’ti idaṃ vissajjanaṃ ekaṃsabyākaraṇaṃ, niravasesaṃ, sauttaraṃ, lokiyanti evaṃ sabbassāpi vissajjanassa yathārahaṃ vicayanaṃ vissajjanāvicayo.
“诸比丘,若他人对我毁谤……不应心生不悦”,这第一段教导与“对我……那只会成为你们的障碍”这第二段教导相衔接。为什么?因为第一段教导遮止了心中的嗔害,而第二段教导则显示了其中的过患。同样,这第二段教导与“对我……诸比丘,你们能了知他人所说的善说与恶说吗”这第三段教导相衔接。为什么?因为第二段教导显示了其中的过患,而第三段教导则表明,即使在辨别话语含义这一点上,他们也处于无力的状态。同样,这第三段教导与“对我……而这在我们身上并不存在”这第四段教导相衔接。为什么?因为第三段教导彻底遮止了心中的嗔害,而第四段教导则显示了在不应毁谤之处应当如何行持的方式。以这样的方法,将前文与后文衔接起来加以审察,就是前后审察。至于味审察等,则如前所述。这里的不同之处,仅仅在于显示它们的特相而已。巴利
‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ…pe… na cetaso anabhiraddhi karaṇīyā’’ti imāya paṭhamadesanāya ‘‘mamaṃ vā…pe… tumhaṃyevassa tena antarāyo’’ti ayaṃ dutiyadesanā saṃsandati. Kasmā? Paṭhamāya manopadosaṃ nivāretvā dutiyāya tatthādīnavassa dassitattā. Tathā imāya dutiyadesanāya ‘‘mamaṃ vā…pe… api nu tumhe paresaṃ subhāsitaṃ dubbhāsitaṃ ājāneyyāthā’’ti ayaṃ tatiyadesanā saṃsandati. Kasmā? Dutiyāya tatthādīnavaṃ dassetvā tatiyāya vacanatthasallakkhaṇamattepi asamatthabhāvassa dassitattā. Tathā imāya tatiyadesanāya ‘‘mamaṃ vā…pe… na ca panetaṃ amhesu saṃvijjatī’’ti ayaṃ catutthadesanā saṃsandati. Kasmā? Tatiyāya manopadosaṃ sabbathā nivāretvā catutthāya avaṇṇaṭṭhāne paṭipajjitabbākārassa dassitattāti iminā nayena pubbena aparaṃ saṃsanditvā vicayanaṃ pubbāparavicayo. Assādavicayādayo vuttanayāva. Tesaṃ lakkhaṇasandassanamattameva hettha viseso.
“你们能分辨别人说的是善说还是恶说吗?”这个提问,和“不能,尊者”这个回答是相配的。因为一个被愤怒控制的人,根本分不清佛陀、独觉佛、圣弟子们说的善说和恶说,也分不清父母和仇敌说的善说和恶说。“诸比丘,那微小的……在赞叹如来时,他应当这样说”——这个提问,和“断除杀生,远离杀生”等回答是相配的。因为世尊具足无上的远离杀生等功德,而那戒相对于定和慧而言,只是微小的、低劣的、仅仅属于戒的层面。“诸比丘,哪些法是甚深、难见的……”等提问,和“诸比丘,有一些沙门、婆罗门思惟前际……”等回答是相配的。因为一切知智的功德,除了如来以外,以他人的智慧是无法达到、无法安立的,所以是甚深、难见、难悟、寂静、殊胜、非思量所能及、微细、唯有智者才能了知的。以这种方式,由于这里没有摄颂,只是在审察回答是否与提问相契合,所以就是随颂审察。这就是具有句、问等十一种法审察特征的审察论。正如所说:“所问与所答……”等等。巴利
‘‘Api nu tumhe paresaṃ subhāsitaṃ dubbhāsitaṃ ājāneyyāthā’’ti imāya pucchāya ‘‘no hetaṃ bhante’’ti ayaṃ vissajjanā sameti. Kupito hi neva buddhapaccekabuddhaariyasāvakānaṃ na mātāpitūnaṃ na paccatthikānaṃ subhāsitadubbhāsitassa atthaṃ ājānāti. ‘‘Katamañca taṃ bhikkhave, appamattakaṃ…pe… tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyyā’’ti imāya pucchāya ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāya pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādikā ayaṃ vissajjanā sameti. Bhagavā hi anuttarena pāṇātipātaviramaṇādiguṇena samannāgato, tañca kho samādhiṃ, paññañca upanidhāya appamattakaṃ oramattakaṃ sīlamattakaṃ. ‘‘Katame ca te bhikkhave, dhammā gambhīrā duddasā’’tiādikāya pucchāya ‘‘santi bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā’’tiādikā vissajjanā sameti. Sabbaññutaññāṇaguṇā hi aññatra tathāgatā aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭhattā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā santā paṇītā atakkāvacarā nipuṇā paṇḍitavedanīyāti iminā nayena vissajjanāya pucchānurūpatāvicayanameva idha saṅgahagāthāya abhāvato anugītivicayoti. Ayaṃ padapañhādiekādasadhammavicayanalakkhaṇo vicayahāro nāma. Vuttañca ‘‘yaṃ pucchitañca vissajjitañcā’’tiādi (netti. 4.2).
相应论的解释巴利
Yuttihārasaṃvaṇṇanā
把“我的”解释成表示所属的词,这样说是成立的,因为按语言的自然用法可以看到它这样使用,而且它和“非赞叹”也有关联。把“或”解释成表示选择的词,这样说是成立的,因为不变词有多种含义,而且这里没有确定的意思。把“诸比丘”解释成称呼语,这样说是成立的,因为可以看到这种用法正是为了这个目的,而且说法的人也期待有听受的人。像这样,从文句方面……巴利
Mamanti sāminiddeso yujjati sabhāvaniruttiyā tathāpayogadissanato, avaṇṇassa ca tadapekkhattā. Vāti vikappanatthaniddeso yujjati nepātikānamanekatthattā, ettha ca niyamābhāvato. Bhikkhaveti āmantananiddeso yujjati tadattheyeva etassa payogassa dissanato, desakassa ca paṭiggāhakāpekkhatoti evamādinā byañjanato ca –
以一切方式对一切都不生嫌恨等,能促成“如如”的状态,这是说得通的,因为面对可爱和不可爱的事物时,心是平等运作的。如果某人的心相续中生起了嫌恨等,由它们所引起的障碍只会障碍他自己的成就,这是说得通的,因为业不会转移到别的相续中去。被心所压倒而生起的嫌恨等,会让人连分辨善说和恶说都做不到,这是说得通的,因为瞋和贪具有盲目黑暗的性质。远离杀生等恶行,能让一切众生欢喜赞叹,这是说得通的,因为戒行圆满会使大名声远播。用具备甚深等殊胜功德来赞叹如来,即使只是部分,也能涵盖对全部一切知功德的把握,这是说得通的,因为这些功德不与他人共有。由不如理作意所推动的证因,会导致执著常见等论,这是说得通的,因为虚妄的网没有被拆除。由于对受等不如实了知,以受为缘,渴爱就增长,这是说得通的,因为存在着对乐味的随观;而当有感受存在时,对感受的贪染、对自我的执取、常见等执取就会翻腾起来,这是说得通的,因为因缘已经具足。以渴爱为缘,取就产生了。对于那些安立常见等论的人,以及感受与之相应的受者来说,触是原因,这是说得通的,因为如果没有根、境、识三者和合,它就不存在。以六触处为因,轮回不断,这是说得通的,因为在那里无明和渴爱尚未断除。了知六触处的集起、灭尽等,能超越一切见趣之想而安住,这是说得通的,因为现观了四谛。这六十二种一切恶见都被收进网中,这是说得通的,因为无作论等以及自在天论等都被包含在其中,正如前面已经详细解释过的那样。如来的身体已断除了有的根,这是说得通的,因为世尊以愿行圆满,安住于四念处,如实修习了七觉支。身体坏灭之后,人们将看不到他般涅槃,这是说得通的,因为到达无余涅槃时,色等任何残余都不存在。以这种方法,经中义与文的合理性得以阐明,这就叫做“理趣”的“理趣”,正如所说:“一切理趣之地”等(《导论》4.3)。巴利
Sabbena sabbaṃ āghātādīnamakaraṇaṃ tādibhāvāya saṃvattatīti yujjati iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu samappavattisabbhāvato. Yasmiṃ santāne āghātādayo uppannā, tannimittakā antarāyā tasseva sampattivibandhāya saṃvattantīti yujjati kammānaṃ santānantaresu asaṅkamanato. Cittamabhibhavitvā uppannā āghātādayo subhāsitadubbhāsitasallakkhaṇepi asamatthatāya saṃvattantīti yujjati kodhalobhānaṃ andhatamasabhāvato. Pāṇātipātādidussīlyato veramaṇī sabbasattānaṃ pāmojjapāsaṃsāya saṃvattatīti yujjati sīlasampattiyā mahato kittisaddassa abbhuggatattā. Gambhīratādivisesayuttena guṇena tathāgatassa vaṇṇanā ekadesabhūtāpi sakalasabbaññuguṇaggahaṇāya saṃvattatīti yujjati anaññasādhāraṇattā. Tajjāayonisomanasikāraparikkhatāni adhigamatakkanāni sassatavādādiabhinivesāya saṃvattantīti yujjati kappanajālassa asamugghāṭitattā. Vedanādīnaṃ anavabodhena vedanāpaccayā taṇhā vaḍḍhatīti yujjati assādānupassanāsabbhāvato, sati ca vedayitabhāve (vedayitarāge (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.149) tattha attattaniyagāho, sassatādigāho ca viparipphandatīti yujjati kāraṇassa sannihitattā. Taṇhāpaccayā hi upādānaṃ sambhavati. Sassatādivāde paññapentānaṃ, tadanucchavikañca vedanaṃ vedayantānaṃ phasso hetūti yujjati visayindriyaviññāṇasaṅgatiyā vinā tadabhāvato. Chaphassāyatananimittaṃ vaṭṭassa anupacchedoti yujjati tattha avijjātaṇhānaṃ appahīnattā. Channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ samudayatthaṅgamādipajānanā sabbadiṭṭhigatikasaññaṃ aticca tiṭṭhatīti yujjati catusaccapaṭivedhabhāvato. Imāhiyeva dvāsaṭṭhiyā sabbadiṭṭhigatānaṃ antojālīkatabhāvoti yujjati akiriyavādādīnaṃ, issaravādādīnañca tadantogadhattā, tathā ceva heṭṭhā saṃvaṇṇitaṃ. Ucchinnabhavanettiko tathāgatassa kāyoti yujjati bhagavato abhinīhārasampattiyā catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu ṭhatvā sattannaṃ bojjhaṅgānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ bhāvitattā. Kāyassa bhedā parinibbutaṃ na dakkhantīti yujjati anupādisesanibbānappattiyaṃ rūpādīsu kassacipi anavasesatoti iminā nayena atthato ca sutte byañjanatthānaṃ yuttitāvibhāvanalakkhaṇo yuttihāro nāma yathāha ‘‘sabbesaṃ hārānaṃ, yā bhūmī’’tiādi (netti. 4.3).
立足处理趣的注释巴利
Padaṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
值得称赞与不值得称赞、相貌好与相貌丑、说的话可信与不可信等等,这些是衰败的立足处。值得称赞、相貌好、说的话可信等等,这些是圆满的立足处。同样,嗔恨等是地狱等痛苦的立足处。不造作嗔恨等,是天界圆满等一切圆满的立足处。远离杀生等,是圣者戒蕴的立足处;圣者戒蕴是圣者定蕴的立足处;圣者定蕴是圣者慧蕴的立足处。世尊以甚深等殊胜方式证悟的智,是教说智的立足处。教说智是所化众生出离整个轮回之苦的立足处。由于一切见都成了见取,它随其所应成为九种有的立足处。有是生的立足处。生是老死以及愁等苦的立足处。如实通达受的生起与灭去等,就是对四圣谛的随觉与通达。其中,随觉是通达的立足处。通达是四种沙门果的立足处。“不知、不见”就是指无明。其中,无明是行的立足处,行是识的立足处,这样一直推到受是渴爱的立足处,然后应按“缘受而有渴爱”等经文中的方式把它们连接起来。在“被渴爱所控制的人,便颤抖、挣扎”这句中,渴爱是取的立足处。在“那也只是缘于触”这句中,宣说常见等是他人邪执的立足处。邪执又因为没有听闻正法、没有亲近善士、没有如理作意、没有法随法行,所以成为听闻非正法等的立足处。在“除了触之外”等句中,触是受的立足处。六触处是触的立足处,也是整个轮回之苦的立足处。如实了知六触处的生起等,是厌离的立足处;厌离是离贪的立足处,这样一直推到无取般涅槃。世尊断除有的引导绳,是一切知智的立足处,同样也是无取般涅槃的立足处。以上就是经文中所述诸法的立足处法,以及那些法的立足处法,随其相应而确定立足处法的特相,这叫做立足处论。正如所说:“胜者宣说正法,以及那正法的立足处”等等。巴利
Vaṇṇārahāvaṇṇadubbaṇṇatānādeyyavacanatādi vipattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vaṇṇārahavaṇṇasubbaṇṇatāsaddheyyavacanatādi sampattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tathā āghātādayo nirayādidukkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Āghātādīnamakaraṇaṃ saggasampattiyādisabbasampattīnaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. Pāṇātipātādipaṭivirati ariyassa sīlakkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ, ariyo sīlakkhandho ariyassa samādhikkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Ariyo samādhikkhandho ariyassa paññākkhandhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ bhagavato paṭivedhappakārañāṇaṃ desanāñāṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Desanāñāṇaṃ veneyyānaṃ sakalavaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Sabbāyapi diṭṭhiyā diṭṭhupādānabhāvato sā yathārahaṃ navavidhassapi bhavassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Bhavo jātiyā. Jāti jarāmaraṇassa, sokādīnañca padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vedanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ samudayatthaṅgamādipaṭivedhanā catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ anubodhapaṭivedho hoti. Tattha anubodho paṭivedhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Paṭivedho catubbidhassa sāmaññaphalassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti avijjāgahaṇaṃ. Tattha avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārā viññāṇassa. Yāva vedanā taṇhāya padaṭṭhānanti netvā tesaṃ ‘‘vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’tiādinā pāḷiyamāgatanayena sambajjhitabbaṃ. ‘‘Taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti ettha taṇhā upādānassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha sassatādipaññāpanaṃ paresaṃ micchābhinivesassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Micchābhiniveso saddhammassavanasappurisūpanissayayonisomanasikāradhammānudhammapaṭipattīhi vimukhatāya asaddhammassavanādīnañca padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Aññatra phassā’’tiādīsu phasso vedanāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Cha phassāyatanāni phassassa, sakalassa ca vaṭṭadukkhassa padaṭṭhānaṃ. Channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ samudayādipajānanaṃ nibbidāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, nibbidā virāgassātiādinā yāva anupādāparinibbānaṃ netabbaṃ. Bhagavato bhavanettisamucchedo sabbaññutāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, tathā anupādāparinibbānassa cāti. Ayaṃ sutte āgatadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānadhammā, tesañca padaṭṭhānadhammāti yathāsambhavaṃ padaṭṭhānadhammaniddhāraṇalakkhaṇo padaṭṭhānahāro nāma. Vuttañhi ‘‘dhammaṃ deseti jino, tassa ca dhammassa yaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi (netti. 4.4).
相之理趣的解释巴利
Lakkhaṇahāravaṇṇanā
用“嗔恚等”来统摄,就把忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、争斗、贬损他人等收归在一起,因为它们都归入嗔恚心生起这一类,具有同一相。用“喜悦等”来统摄,就把贪欲、不正之贪、慢、过慢、骄、放逸等收归在一起,因为它们都归入贪心生起这一类,具有同一相。同样,用“嗔恚”来统摄,就把其余诸结和诸盖收归在一起,因为它们具有身结和盖的相,是同一相。用“喜悦”来统摄,就把触等收归在一起,因为它们具有行蕴的相,是同一相。用“戒”来统摄,就把增上心学和增上慧学收归在一起,因为它们具有学处的相,是同一相。用“见”来统摄,就把其余诸取收归在一起,因为它们具有取的相,是同一相。在“诸受”这里,用“受”来统摄,就把其余诸取蕴收归在一起,因为它们具有取蕴的相,是同一相。同样,用“受”来统摄属于法处、法界的受,就把一切可以作为观照对象的处和界都收归在一起,因为它们具有处的相和界的相,是同一相。在“不知、不见”这里,用“无明”来统摄,就把因、漏、暴流、轭、盖等收归在一起,因为它们具有因等的相,是同一相;同样,在“为渴爱所至者,便生战栗与动摇”这里,也是用“渴爱”来统摄。在“那也是缘于触”这里,用“触”来统摄,就把想、行、识收归在一起,因为它们作为颠倒之因,又具有蕴的相,是同一相。用“六触处”来统摄,就把其余诸蕴、处、界、根等收归在一起,因为它们作为触生起的因,又是应当观照的对象,是同一相。用“有之导向”来统摄,就把无明等杂染法收归在一起,因为它们作为轮回之因,是同一相。这就是在这部经中,对未来之法也像对已说之法一样,以同一相等方式加以抉择,名为“相之摄颂”。正如所说:“于所说一法中,诸法同一相”等等(《导论》4.5)。巴利
Āghātādiggahaṇena kodhūpanāhamakkhapalāsaissāmacchariyasārambhaparavambhanādīnaṃ saṅgaho paṭighacittuppādapariyāpannatāya ekalakkhaṇattā. Ānandādiggahaṇena abhijjhāvisamalobhamānātimānamadappamādānaṃ saṅgaho lobhacittuppādapariyāpannatāya ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā āghātaggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaganthanīvaraṇānaṃ saṅgaho kāyaganthanīvaraṇalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Ānandaggahaṇena phassādīnaṃ saṅgaho saṅkhārakkhandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Sīlaggahaṇena adhicittādhipaññāsikkhānaṃ saṅgaho sikkhālakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Diṭṭhiggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaupādānānaṃ saṅgaho upādānalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Vedanāna’’nti ettha vedanāggahaṇena avasiṭṭhaupādānakkhandhānaṃ saṅgaho upādānakkhandhalakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā. Tathā dhammāyatanadhammadhātupariyāpannavedanāggahaṇena sammasanupagānaṃ sabbesampi āyatanānaṃ, dhātūnañca saṅgaho āyatanalakkhaṇena, dhātulakkhaṇena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti ettha avijjāggahaṇena hetuāsavoghayoganīvaraṇādīnaṃ saṅgaho hetādilakkhaṇena ekalakkhaṇattā, tathā ‘‘taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti ettha taṇhāggahaṇenapi. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha phassaggahaṇena saññāsaṅkhāraviññāṇānaṃ saṅgaho vipallāsahetubhāvena, khandhalakkhaṇena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. Chaphassāyatanaggahaṇena avasiṭṭhakhandhāyatanadhātindriyādīnaṃ saṅgaho phassuppattinimittatāya, sammasanīyabhāvena ca ekalakkhaṇattā. Bhavanettiggahaṇena avijjādīnaṃ saṃkilesadhammānaṃ saṅgaho vaṭṭahetubhāvena ekalakkhaṇattāti. Ayaṃ sutte anāgatepi dhamme ekalakkhaṇatādinā āgate viya niddhāraṇalakkhaṇo lakkhaṇahāro nāma. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘vuttamhi ekadhamme, ye dhammā ekalakkhaṇā’’tiādi (netti. 4.5).
四理趣中阵列理趣的解释巴利
Catubyūhahāravaṇṇanā
“我的”这个词是没有语源分析的形式,“vā”也是这样。以乞食为习惯的人就是比丘。走向与对方对立的状态,就是“parā”。不过在别的地方,这个词也是没有语源分析的形式。像这样以“eva”等因缘词以及“mama”等经典原文词为依据的语源解释,还有对它们隐含意义的阐明,因为很容易理解,我们怕太冗长,就没有详细展开。那些被批评和赞扬弄得内心完全动摇、不放弃邪命、执著常见等邪见、在戒等法蕴上没有站稳、背离正等正觉者功德之味的人,怎样才能脱离上面说的这些过失,通过正确的修行成为自他两利的人呢?这就是世尊在这里的用意。这样用意所指的人,以及在说法分类处所指出的人,就是这段说法的因缘。巴利
Mamanti aneruttapadaṃ, tathā vāti ca. Bhikkhanasīlā bhikkhū. Parentiviruddhabhāvamupagacchantīti parā, aññatthe panetaṃ aneruttapadanti evamādinā neruttaṃ, taṃ pana ‘‘eva’’ntiādinidānapadānaṃ, ‘‘mama’’ntiādipāḷipadānañca aṭṭhakathāvasena, tassā līnatthavibhāvanīvasena ca suviññeyyattā ativitthārabhayena na vitthārayimha. Ye te nindāpasaṃsāhi sammākampitacetasā micchājīvato anoratā sassatādimicchābhinivesino sīlādidhammakkhandhesu appatiṭṭhitā sammāsambuddhaguṇarasassādavimukhā veneyyā, te kathaṃ nu kho yathāvuttadosavinimuttā sammāpaṭipattiyā ubhayahitaparā bhaveyyunti ayamettha bhagavato adhippāyo. Evamadhippetā puggalā, desanābhājanaṭṭhāne ca dassitā imissā desanāya nidānaṃ.
前后连贯有六种:词连贯、词义连贯、说明连贯、安立连贯、经连贯、开示连贯。
其中,“我的”这个词和“诋毁”这个词之间的关联,这样词与词之间的连接,就是词连贯。“我的”所说的世尊,和“诋毁”所说的被他人指责的过失之间的关联,这样词义与词义之间的连接,就是词义连贯。
“诸比丘,若他人说我的诋毁……”等开示,是依游方僧须卑所说的诋毁这一连贯而展开的。“诸比丘,若他人说我的赞叹……”等开示,是依青年梵志梵授所说的赞叹这一连贯而展开的。“诸比丘,还有其他甚深、难见、难觉之法……”等开示,是依诸比丘所说的赞叹这一连贯而展开的。这样,对于有多种连贯的经,就依各自的连贯;对于只有一种连贯的经,就依前后部分的衔接,这叫说明连贯。
安立连贯则是依四种经的安立方式。经连贯依三种经的连贯方式,这在注释书中已经讨论过,我们也已在前面解释过。
一种开示与其他开示之间的连接,就是开示连贯。这应这样理解:“诸比丘,若他人说我的……乃至……不应心生不悦”,这段开示与“诸比丘,即使盗贼、恶人以双柄锯将肢体一节一节割截,若有人因此心生嗔恚,他就不是遵行我教法的人”这段开示相连。“你们自己因此有障碍”,这段与“青年们,众生以业为所有,以业为继承,以业为根源,以业为亲属,以业为归依,业将众生分别,即分为卑劣与殊胜”这段相连。“你们是否……乃至……能了知呢?”这段与——巴利
Pubbāparānusandhi pana padasandhipadatthaniddesanikkhepasuttadesanāsandhivasena chabbidhā. Tattha ‘‘mama’’nti etassa ‘‘avaṇṇa’’nti iminā sambandhotiādinā padassa padantarena sambandho padasandhi. ‘‘Mama’’nti vuttassa bhagavato ‘‘avaṇṇa’’nti vuttena parehi upavaditena aguṇenasambandhotiādinā padatthassa padatthantarena sambandho padatthasandhi. ‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādidesanā suppiyena paribbājakena vuttaavaṇṇānusandhivasena pavattā. ‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’ntiādidesanā brahmadattena māṇavena vuttavaṇṇānusandhivasena pavattā. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā’’tiādidesanā bhikkhūhi vuttavaṇṇānusandhivasena pavattāti evaṃ nānānusandhikassa suttassa taṃtadanusandhīhi, ekānusandhikassa ca pubbāparabhāgehi sambandho niddesasandhi.Nikkhepasandhi pana catubbidhasuttanikkhepavasena. Suttasandhi ca tividhasuttānusandhivasena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ eva vicāritā, amhehi ca pubbe saṃvaṇṇitā. Ekissā desanāya desanāntarehi saddhiṃ saṃsandanaṃ desanāsandhi, sā panevaṃ veditabbā – ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave…pe… na cetaso anabhiraddhi karaṇīyā’’ti ayaṃ desanā ‘‘ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi bhikkhave, kakacena corā ocarakā aṅgamaṅgāni okanteyyuṃ, tatrapi yo mano padūseñña, na me so tena sāsanakaro’’ti (ma. ni. 1.232) imāya desanāya saddhiṃ saṃsandati. ‘‘Tumhaṃyevassa tena anantarāyo’’ti ayaṃ ‘‘kammassakā māṇava sattā kammadāyādā kammayonī kammabandhū kammapaṭisaraṇā kammaṃ satte vibhajati, yadidaṃ hīnapaṇītatāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 3.289-297) imāya, ‘‘api nu tumhe…pe… ājāneyyāthā’’ti ayaṃ –
愤怒的人不知道什么是有利的,愤怒的人看不见法。
当愤怒控制了一个人,那时就是一片盲目的黑暗。巴利
‘‘Kuddho atthaṃ na jānāti, kuddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ kodho sahate nara’’nti. (a. ni. 7.64; mahāni. 5, 156, 195); –
比丘们,依这一教说——“诸比丘,无论是别人赞叹我……乃至……不应使心生起雀跃”——以及“诸比丘,法尚且应舍,何况非法”和“诸比丘,我为你们说筏喻之法,是为了渡越,不是为了执取”——还有这一教说——“如果你们在那里……乃至……那只会成为你们自己的障碍”——巴利
Imāya, ‘‘mamaṃ vā bhikkhave, pare vaṇṇaṃ…pe… na cetaso ubbilāvitattaṃ karaṇīya’’nti ayaṃ ‘‘dhammāpi vo bhikkhave, pahātabbā, pageva adhammā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.240), ‘‘kullūpamaṃ vo bhikkhave, dhammaṃ desessāmi nittharaṇatthāya, no gahaṇatthāyā’’ti (ma. ni. 1.240) ca imāya, ‘‘tatra ce tumhe…pe… tumhaṃyevassa tena antarāyo’’ti ayaṃ –
贪心的人不懂什么是真正的利益,贪心的人也看不见法。
那时,人一旦被贪欲压制,就会陷入一片黑暗。
被贪欲弄瞎了眼,被贪网罩住,被渴爱覆盖遮蔽;
被放逸的束缚所捆住,就像鱼钻进了捕鱼笼的口里;
他们跟随衰老和死亡,就像吃奶的小牛犊跟着母牛走。巴利
‘‘Luddho atthaṃ na jānāti, luddho dhammaṃ na passati; Andhaṃ tamaṃ tadā hoti, yaṃ lobho sahate nara’’nti. (itivu. 88; mahāni. 5, 156; cūḷani. 128) ca – ‘‘Kāmandhā jālasañchannā, taṇhāchadanachāditā; Pamattabandhunābaddhā, macchāva kumīnāmukhe; Jarāmaraṇamanventi, vaccho khīrapakova mātara’’nti. (udā. 64; netti. 27, 90; peṭako. 14) ca –
这段教说和“然而,这戒只是很小一部分”这段教说相连,因为前一句说初禅比戒的果报更大、功德更大,这就说明戒的果报和功德比禅那更小。巴利
Imāya, ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ sīlamattaka’’nti ayaṃ ‘‘vivicceva kāmehi…pe… paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ upasampajja viharati, ayampi kho brāhmaṇa yañño purimehi yaññehi appaṭṭhataro ca appasamārambhataro ca mahapphalataro ca mahānisaṃsataro cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.353) imāya paṭhamajjhānassa sīlato mahapphalamahānisaṃsataratāvacanena jhānato sīlassa appaphalaappānisaṃsatarabhāvadīpanato.
“舍弃杀生”等教导,和“贤者们,乔达摩沙门确实是具戒者,成就圣戒”等教导相关联;“另有甚深之法”等教导,和“我所证得的这法甚深、难见、难觉”等教导相关联。因为通过证悟具备甚深等殊胜特质的法,就能了知智慧的甚深等状态。巴利
‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādidesanā ‘‘samaṇo khalu bho gotamo sīlavā ariyasīlena samannāgato’’tiādidesanāya (dī. ni. 1.304), ‘‘aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’tiādidesanā ‘‘adhigato kho myāyaṃ dhammo gambhīro duddaso duranubodho’’tiādidesanāya, (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 1.281; 2.337; saṃ. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7, 8) gambhīratādivisesayuttadhammapaṭivedhena hi ñāṇassa gambhīrādibhāvo viññāyati.
诸比丘,有些沙门婆罗门是前际论者……这一整套教说,和诸比丘,有些沙门婆罗门是前际论者……乃至……他们宣称“我与世间是常,只有这个才是真的,其他都是虚妄的”,某些人这样宣称;“是无常”“亦常亦无常”“非常非无常”“有边”“无边”“亦有边亦无边”“非有边非无边”,我与世间,只有这个才是真的,其他都是虚妄的,某些人这样宣称……这一整套教说相关联。巴利
‘‘Santi bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā’’tiādidesanā ‘‘santi bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā pubbantakappikā…pe… abhivadanti sassato attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadanti, asassato, sassato ca asassato ca, nevasassato ca nāsassato ca, antavā, anantavā, antavā ca anantavā ca, nevantavā ca nānantavā ca attā ca loko ca, idameva saccaṃ, moghamaññanti ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādidesanāya (ma. ni. 3.27).
同样地,像“诸比丘,有些沙门婆罗门是后际论者”等这样的开示,以及“诸比丘……有些人宣称‘有想的我,死后无病’。在这里,有些人宣称‘无想的我,死后无病’,有些人宣称‘亦想亦无想的我,死后无病’,有些人宣称‘非想非非想的我,死后无病’。在这里,有些人则施设众生的断灭、毁灭、消失,或者有些人宣称现法涅槃”等这样的开示(中部3.21);像“受的集起……如来”等这样的开示,以及“这个是有为的、粗的,然而确实有诸行的灭尽,这是真实的,这样了知之后,如来见到它的出离,已经超越了它”等这样的开示(中部3.29);像“那也不过是他们……只是挣扎而已”这样的开示,以及“他们那些尊者,要想除了信、除了喜好、除了传闻、除了推理思惟、除了对见解的审察容忍之外,还能有自己个人亲证的、清净洁白的智慧,这是不可能的。然而,诸比丘,如果没有自己个人亲证的清净洁白的智慧,即使那些尊贵的沙门婆罗门在那里只是把智慧的状态弄得清净,那也不过是他们那些尊贵沙门婆罗门的执取罢了”等这样的开示(相应部2.43);像“那也只是以触为缘”这样的开示,以及“缘于眼和色而生起眼识,三者和合就是触,以触为缘有受,以受为缘有爱,以爱为缘有取”(相应部2.45);像“朋友们,这些法以欲为根,以作意为起因,以触为和合,以受为汇归处”等这样的开示;像“诸比丘,当比丘对于六触处”等这样的开示,以及“诸比丘,当比丘不把受执为我,不把想执为我,不把行执为我,不把识执为我,他这样不执取的时候,在世间就不执取任何东西,不执取就不惶恐,不惶恐就自己个人亲证般涅槃”等这样的开示;像“所有这些都被这六十二种见解的网所网住”等这样的开示,以及“诸比丘,凡是任何人……宣称,他们全都是对这五种取蕴宣称,或者对其中某一种宣称”等这样的开示(中部3.26);像“身体坏散之后……天和人”这样的开示——巴利
Tathā ‘‘santi bhikkhave, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā aparantakappikā’’tiādidesanā ‘‘santi bhikkhave …pe… abhivadanti saññī attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā. Ittheke abhivadanti asaññī, saññī ca asaññī ca, nevasaññī ca nāsaññī ca attā hoti arogo paraṃ maraṇā. Ittheke abhivadanti sato vā pana sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapenti, diṭṭhadhammanibbānaṃ vā paneke abhivadantī’’ntiādidesanāya (ma. ni. 3.21), ‘‘vedanānaṃ samudayañca…pe… tathāgato’’tiādidesanā ‘‘tadidaṃ saṅkhataṃ oḷārikaṃ, atthi kho pana saṅkhārānaṃ nirodho, atthetanti iti viditvā tassa nissaraṇadassāvī tathāgato tadupātivatto’’tiādidesanāya (ma. ni. 3.29), ‘‘tadapi tesaṃ…pe… vipphanditamevā’’ti ayaṃ ‘‘idaṃ tesaṃ vata aññatreva saddhāya aññatra ruciyā aññatra anussavā aññatra ākāraparivitakkā aññatra diṭṭhinijjhānakkhantiyā paccattaṃyeva ñāṇaṃ bhavissati parisuddhaṃ pariyodāta’nti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati. Paccattaṃ kho pana bhikkhave, ñāṇe asati parisuddhe pariyodāte yadapi te bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā tattha ñāṇabhāvamattameva pariyodāpenti, tadapi tesaṃ bhavataṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ upādānamakkhāyatī’’tiādidesanāya (saṃ. ni. 2.43), ‘‘tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ayaṃ ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā, taṇhāpaccayā upādāna’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.45), ‘‘chandamūlakā ime āvuso dhammā manasikārasamuṭṭhānā phassasamodhānā vedanāsamosaraṇā’’ti (pariyesitabbaṃ) ca ādidesanāya, ‘‘yato kho bhikkhave, bhikkhu channaṃ phassāyatanāna’’ntiādidesanā ‘‘yato kho bhikkhave, bhikkhu neva vedanaṃ attato samanupassati, na saññaṃ, na saṅkhāre, na viññāṇaṃ attato samanupassati, so evaṃ asamanupassanto na kiñci loke upādiyati, anupādiyaṃ na paritassati, aparitassaṃ paccattaṃyeva parinibbāyatī’’tiādidesanāya, ‘‘sabbete imeheva dvāsaṭṭhiyā vatthūhi antojālīkatā’’tiādidesanā ‘‘ye hi keci bhikkhave…pe… abhivadanti, sabbete imāneva pañca kāyāni abhivadanti etesaṃ vā aññatara’’ntiādidesanāya (ma. ni. 3.26), ‘‘kāyassa bhedā…pe… devamanussā’’ti ayaṃ –
就像被风吹散的火焰(世尊对优波西婆说),
他归于寂灭,不再被计入名数之中。
牟尼这样从名身中解脱出来,
归于寂灭,不再被称作任何名数。巴利
‘‘Accī yathā vātavegena khittā (upasivāti bhagavā), Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkhaṃ; Evaṃ munī nāmakāyā vimutto, Atthaṃ paleti na upeti saṅkha’’nti. (su. ni. 1080) –
与开示相合。这就是名为“四阵列”的,以阐明词源、意趣、说法因缘、前后连贯这四者为特征。这也已经说过:“词源、意趣”等等(《导论》4.6)。巴利
Ādidesanāya saddhiṃ saṃsandatīti. Ayaṃ neruttamadhippāyadesanānidānapubbāparānusandhīnaṃ catunnaṃ vibhāvanalakkhaṇo catubyūhahāro nāma. Vuttampi cetaṃ ‘‘neruttamadhippāyo’’tiādi (netti. 4.6).
转起门的解说巴利
Āvattahāravaṇṇanā
通过“不应对嗔怒等采取行动”这一说法,说明了忍辱与柔和的行持。其中,忍辱摄受了与信、慧以及他人加害之苦相应的法;同样,柔和摄受了戒。通过提到“信”等,信根等一切菩提分法都被转起。通过提到“戒”,无悔等一切戒的功德法都被转起。通过宣说“远离杀生等”,说明了不放逸而住,由此整个教法梵行都被转起。通过提到具备甚深等殊胜功德,赞颂了大菩提。因为无碍智是漏尽智的近因,漏尽智是无碍智的近因,这被称为大菩提,由此十力等一切佛功德都被转起。通过提到常见等邪见,摄受了渴爱与无明,由此无始以来的轮回流转被转起。通过如实通达受的集起等,世尊的三遍知清净得以说明,由此以般若波罗蜜为首,一切波罗蜜都被转起。在“不知、不见”中,通过提到无明,摄受了不如理作意,由此九种以不如理作意为根本的法被转起。在“为渴爱所缚者的恐惧与挣扎”中,通过提到渴爱,九种以渴爱为根本的法被转起。“彼亦以触为缘”等,是显示常见等安立所依的缘之运作,由此无常等三相被转起。通过如实了知六触处,说明了解脱的成就,由此七清净被转起。“如来之身已断后有结缚”一句,是说明断除渴爱,由此世尊断尽一切杂染被转起。这就是本教导中所收摄诸法的同分与异分转起之相,名为转起阵列。正如所说:“在一个立足处,寻求其余立足处”等。巴利
Āghātādīnamakaraṇīyatāvacanena khantisoraccānuṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha khantiyā saddhāpaññāparāpakāradukkhasahagatānaṃ saṅgaho, tathā soraccena sīlassa. Saddhādiggahaṇena ca saddhindriyādisakalabodhipakkhiyadhammā āvattanti. Sīlaggahaṇena avippaṭisārādayo sabbepi sīlānisaṃsadhammā āvattanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena appamādavihāro, tena sakalaṃ sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ āvattati. Gambhīratādivisesayuttadhammaggahaṇena mahābodhipakittanaṃ. Anāvaraṇañāṇapadaṭṭhānañhi āsavakkhayañāṇaṃ, āsavakkhayañāṇapadaṭṭhānañca anāvaraṇañāṇaṃ mahābodhīti vuccati, tena dasabalādayo sabbe buddhaguṇā āvattanti. Sassatādidiṭṭhiggahaṇena taṇhāvijjānaṃ saṅgaho, tāhi anamataggaṃ saṃsāravaṭṭaṃ āvattati. Vedanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ samudayādipaṭivedhanena bhagavato pariññāttayavisuddhi, tāya paññāpāramimukhena sabbāpi pāramiyo āvattanti. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’nti ettha avijjāggahaṇena ayonisomanasikārapariggaho, tena ca nava ayonisomanasikāramūlakā dhammā āvattanti. ‘‘Taṇhāgatānaṃ paritassitavipphandita’’nti ettha taṇhāggahaṇena nava taṇhāmūlakā dhammā āvattanti. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’tiādi sassatādipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttidassanaṃ, tena aniccatādilakkhaṇattayaṃ āvattati. Channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ pajānanena vimuttisampadāniddeso, tena sattapi visuddhiyo āvattanti. ‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko tathāgatassa kāyo’’ti taṇhāpahānaṃ vuttaṃ, tena bhagavato sakalasaṃkilesappahānaṃ āvattatīti ayaṃ desanāya gahitadhammānaṃ sabhāgavisabhāgadhammavasena āvattanalakkhaṇo āvattahāro nāma. Yathāha ‘‘ekamhi padaṭṭhāne, pariyesati sesakaṃ padaṭṭhāna’’ntiādi (netti. 4.7).
分别论的解说巴利
Vibhattihāravaṇṇanā
嗔怒、欢喜等属于不善法,它们的近因是不如理作意等。而那些能使嗔怒、欢喜等不产生、不现起的法,则是无嗔等善法,它们的近因是如理作意等。在这些当中,嗔怒等只属于欲界,无嗔等则通于四地。同样地,远离杀生等,或是善,或是无记,惭、愧等法是它们的近因。其中,善的或属欲界,或属出世间;无记的则只属出世间。“诸比丘,还有其他甚深之法”所说的法,或是善,或是无记。其中,善法的近因是导向出起的观;无记法的近因是道法、观或转向。在这些当中,善法只属出世间;无记法则或属欲界,或属出世间。一切邪见都只是不善、只属欲界,它们的近因,总体上说是不如理作意对邪执的坚持。分别来说,由于不能破除相续、密集与聚合,执著“一”这一理的邪见,伴随对过去生的推论忆念,是常见(永恒论)的近因;由于不能把握因果相续的关系,执著“异”这一理的邪见,伴随对彼类的作意,是断见(虚无论)的近因。其余邪见,也应依照各自的情况这样来说。巴利
Āghātānandādayo akusalā dhammā, tesaṃ ayonisomanasikārādi padaṭṭhānaṃ. Yehi pana dhammehi āghātānandādīnaṃ akaraṇaṃ appavatti, te abyāpādādayo kusalā dhammā, tesaṃ yonisomanasikārādi padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu āghātādayokāmāvacarāva, abyāpādādayo catubhūmakā, tathā pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirati kusalā vā abyākatā vā, tassā hirottappādayo dhammā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tattha kusalā siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā lokuttarā. Abyākatā lokuttarāva. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’ti vuttadhammā siyā kusalā, siyā abyākatā. Tattha kusalānaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Abyākatānaṃ maggadhammā, vipassanā, āvajjanā vā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Tesu kusalā lokuttarāva, abyākatā siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā lokuttarā, sabbāpi diṭṭhiyo akusalāva kāmāvacarāva, tāsaṃ avisesena micchābhinivese ayonisomanasikāro padaṭṭhānaṃ. Visesato pana santatighanavinibbhogābhāvato ekattanayassa micchāgāho atītajātianussaraṇatakkasahito sassatadiṭṭhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Hetuphalabhāvena sambandhabhāvassa aggahaṇato nānattanayassa micchāgāho tajjāsamannāhārasahito ucchedadiṭṭhiyā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Evaṃ sesadiṭṭhīnampi yathāsambhavaṃ vattabbaṃ.
关于“受”这个地方,受可能是善的,也可能是不善的,也可能是无记的;可能属于欲界,可能属于色界,可能属于无色界。它们的近因是触。如实通达受的集起等,是道智;无执取解脱,是果智。对于这些,应当依照“还有其他甚深之法”那里所说的方法,进行法等的分类。在“不知、不见”等语句中,无明和渴爱是不善的、属于欲界。其中,无明的近因是诸漏,或者就是不如理作意;渴爱的近因是在可被结缚的法上看见滋味。“那也以触为缘”这里,触的法等分类应当像受一样理解。依照这个方法,触处等的法等分类也应当随宜进行。这就是对杂染法和清净法,从共与不共、近因、地这几个方面进行分别的“分别论”。正如所说:“此法、近因与地,此论分别之”等等。巴利
‘‘Vedanāna’’nti ettha vedanā siyā kusalā, siyā akusalā, siyā abyākatā, siyā kāmāvacarā, siyā rūpāvacarā, siyā arūpāvacarā, tāsaṃ phasso padaṭṭhānaṃ. Vedanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ vedanānaṃ samudayādipaṭivedhanaṃ maggañāṇaṃ, anupādāvimutti ca phalañāṇaṃ, tesaṃ ‘‘aññeva dhammā gambhīrā’’ti ettha vuttanayena dhammādivibhāgo netabbo. ‘‘Ajānataṃ apassata’’ntiādīsu avijjātaṇhā akusalā kāmāvacarā, tāsu avijjāya āsavā, ayonisomanasikāro eva vā padaṭṭhānaṃ. Taṇhāya saṃyojaniyesu dhammesu assādadassanaṃ padaṭṭhānaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti ettha phassassa vedanāya viya dhammādivibhāgo veditabbo. Iminā nayena phassāyatanādīnampi yathārahaṃ dhammādivibhāgo netabboti ayaṃ saṃkilesadhamme, vodānadhamme ca sādhāraṇāsādhāraṇato, padaṭṭhānato, bhūmito ca vibhajanalakkhaṇo vibhattihāro nāma. Yathāha ‘‘dhammañca padaṭṭhānaṃ, bhūmiñca vibhajjate ayaṃ hāro’’tiādi (netti. 4.8).
转变门论的解释巴利
Parivattanahāravaṇṇanā
不产生嗔恨等,通过增长忍耐与柔和,依靠思择修习之力的成就,带来利益自他的修行。而嗔恨等一旦生起运作,就会造成容貌丑陋、睡眠痛苦、财产损失、名声败坏,以及被他人难以亲近,并在地狱等恶趣中带来大苦。远离杀生等,辗转带来不追悔等善好;而杀生等则辗转带来追悔等不善。具备甚深等殊胜的智,随所应地为所化众生带来明、神通等功德殊胜,因为它如实了知一切所知。同样,不具备甚深等殊胜的智,因为对诸所知只是共通平常,所以不能带来如上所说的功德殊胜。而这一切见,随其所应,由于属于常见或断见,成为两个极端,不能超越有身之岸,因为其自性不能出离。相反,正见连同其资粮,作为中道,能越过有身之岸而到达彼岸,因为其自性能出离。如实通达诸受的集起等,因为属于道,所以带来无执取的解脱;不如实通达诸受的集起等,因为作为诸行的缘,所以带来轮回牢狱的封闭。覆盖受之自性的愚痴,带来对它的欢喜;而如实的觉知,则对此带来厌离与离贪。在邪执中,伴随不如理作意的渴爱张开种种见网。如上所说渴爱的断除,即初道,收摄那见网。触是施设常论等的缘,因为无触时便无那些论。由于为见缚所缚者的触处等不灭,所以触等不灭,正是轮回苦的不还灭;如实遍知触处等,能超越一切邪见;反之,对它们不如是遍知,则不能超越邪见。有的导引之断除,导向未来自体的不生;若有的导引未断除,未来的有之相续便仍会转起——这就是从对治面转变经中所说诸法的、以转变为相的转变门。说了什么呢?说“于善不善法,在所说、所修、所断等方面”等。巴利
Āghātādīnamakaraṇaṃ khantisoraccāni anubrūhetvā paṭisaṅkhānabhāvanābalasiddhiyā ubhayahitapaṭipattimāvahati. Āghātādayo pana pavattiyamānā dubbaṇṇataṃ, dukkhaseyyaṃ, bhogahāniṃ, akittiṃ, parehi durupasaṅkamanatañca nipphādentā nirayādīsu mahādukkhamāvahanti. Pāṇātipātādipaṭivirati avippaṭisārādikalyāṇaṃ paramparamāvahati. Pāṇātipātādi pana vippaṭisārādiakalyāṇaṃ paramparamāvahati. Gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ veneyyānaṃ yathārahaṃ vijjābhiññādiguṇavisesamāvahati sabbaññeyyassa yathāsabhāvāvabodhato. Tathā gambhīratādivisesarahitaṃ pana ñāṇaṃ ñeyyesu sādhāraṇabhāvato yathāvuttaguṇavisesaṃ nāvahati. Sabbāpi cetā diṭṭhiyo yathārahaṃ sassatucchedabhāvato antadvayabhūtā sakkāyatīraṃ nātivattanti aniyyānikasabhāvattā. Sammādiṭṭhi pana saparikkhārā majjhimapaṭipadābhūtā sakkāyatīramatikkamma pāraṃ gacchati niyyānikasabhāvattā. Vedanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ samudayādipaṭivedhanā anupādāvimuttimāvahati maggabhāvato. Vedanānaṃ yathābhūtaṃ samudayādiasampaṭivedho saṃsāracārakāvarodhamāvahati saṅkhārānaṃ paccayabhāvato. Vedayitasabhāvapaṭicchādako sammoho tadabhinandanamāvahati, yathābhūtāvabodho pana tattha nibbedhaṃ, virāgañca āvahati. Micchābhinivese ayonisomanasikārasahitā taṇhā anekavihitaṃ diṭṭhijālaṃ pasāreti. Yathāvuttataṇhāsamucchedo paṭhamamaggo taṃ diṭṭhijālaṃ saṅkoceti. Sassatavādādipaññāpanassa phasso paccayo asati phasse tadabhāvato. Diṭṭhibandhanabaddhānaṃ phassāyatanādīnamanirodhanena phassādianirodho saṃsāradukkhassa anivattiyeva yāthāvato phassāyatanādipariññā sabbadiṭṭhidassanāni ativattati, tesaṃ pana tathā apariññā diṭṭhidassanaṃ nātivattati. Bhavanettisamucchedo āyatiṃ attabhāvassa anibbattiyā saṃvattati, asamucchinnāya bhavanettiyā anāgate bhavappabandho parivattatiyevāti ayaṃ sutte niddiṭṭhānaṃ dhammānaṃ paṭipakkhato parivattanalakkhaṇo parivattanahāro nāma. Kimāha ‘‘kusalākusale dhamme, niddiṭṭhe bhāvite pahīne cā’’tiādi.
同义词门论释巴利
Vevacanahāravaṇṇanā
“我的、我的、我”是不同说法。“或、如果、以及”是不同说法。“比丘们、沙门、苦行者”是不同说法。“其他、别的、对立者”……乃至……它。“恶名、不誉、诽谤”……乃至……它。“会说、会讲、会谈”……乃至……它。“法、律、师教”……乃至……它。“僧团、团体、众”……乃至……它。“在处处、在那些”……乃至……它。“你们、你们诸位、尊者们”……乃至……它。“嗔、恨、害意”……乃至……它,“不悦、忧、心所苦”……乃至……它。“心、意、识”……乃至……它。“不喜、嗔害、意恼”……乃至……它。“不、无、莫”……乃至……它。“应作、应生起、应转起”是不同说法。按这种方式,在一切词项中都应说明同义词。这就是把各个义与各种同义语词连接起来为特征的同义词论。正如所说:“在经中,一法有许多同义词被说出”等等。巴利
‘‘Mamaṃ mama me’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘Vā yadi cā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Bhikkhave samaṇā tapassino’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. ‘‘Pare aññe paṭiviruddhā’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ akittiṃ ninda’’nti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Bhāseyyuṃ bhaṇeyyuṃ katheyyu’’nti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Dhammassa vinayassa satthusāsanassā’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Saṅghassa samūhassa gaṇassā’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Tatra tattha tesū’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Tumhehi vo bhavantehī’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Āghāto doso byāpādo’’ti…pe… naṃ ‘‘appaccayo domanassaṃ cetasikadukkha’’nti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Cetaso cittassa manaso’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Anabhiraddhi byāpatti manopadoso’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Na no a mā’’ti…pe… naṃ. ‘‘Karaṇīyā uppādetabbā pavattetabbā’’ti pariyāyavacanaṃ. Iminā nayena sabbapadesu vevacanaṃ vattabbanti ayaṃ tassa tassa atthassa taṃtaṃpariyāyasaddayojanālakkhaṇo vevacanahāro nāma. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘vevacanāni bahūni tu, sutte vuttāni ekadhammassā’’tiādi (netti. 4.10).
施设论的解释巴利
Paññattihāravaṇṇanā
怨恨按事由分为十种或十九种。不悦按近察分为六种。喜按“喜悦”等异名分为九种。喜按通称则按小喜等分为五种。悦按近察分为六种;戒按止持、作持等分为多种;具备甚深等特质的智,按心生起分为四种或十二种,按所缘差别分为多种;见按常见等分为六十二种,按其中所含的分类分为多种;受分为六种、一百零八种及多种,它的集起有五种,灭去也同样;味有两种,过患有三种,出离有一种和四种;无执取解脱有两种;“不知不见”所说的无明,按所缘差别分为四种和八种;“渴爱所缚”等所说的渴爱,分为六种、一百零八种及多种;触按所依分为六种;取有四种;有分为两种及多种;生按异名分为六种;老也同样分为七种;死分为八种和九种;愁分为五种;悲分为六种;苦分为四种;忧也同样;恼分为四种。这就是分别施设和总集施设。巴利
Āghāto vatthuvasena dasavidhena, ekūnavīsatividhena vā paññatto. Apaccayo upavicāravasena chadhā paññatto. Ānando pītiādivasena vevacanena navadhā paññatto. Pīti sāmaññato pana khuddikādivasena pañcadhā paññatto. Somanassaṃ upavicāravasena chadhā, sīlaṃ vārittacārittādivasena anekadhā, gambhīratādivisesayuttaṃ ñāṇaṃ cittuppādavasena catudhā, dvādasadhā vā, visayabhedato anekadhā ca, diṭṭhisassatādivasena dvāsaṭṭhiyā bhedehi, tadantogadhavibhāgena anekadhā ca, vedanā chadhā, aṭṭhasatadhā, anekadhā ca, tassā samudayo pañcadhā, tathā atthaṅgamopi, assādo duvidhena, ādīnavo tividhena, nissaraṇaṃ ekadhā , catudhā ca, anupādāvimutti duvidhena, ‘‘ajānataṃ apassata’’nti vuttā avijjā visayabhedena catudhā, aṭṭhadhā ca, ‘‘taṇhāgatāna’’ntiādinā vuttā taṇhā chadhā, aṭṭhasatadhā, anekadhā ca, phasso nissayavasena chadhā, upādānaṃ catudhā, bhavo dvidhā, anekadhā ca, jāti vevacanavasena chadhā, tathā jarā sattadhā, maraṇaṃ aṭṭhadhā, navadhā ca, soko pañcadhā, paridevo chadhā, dukkhaṃ catudhā, tathā domanassaṃ, upāyāso catudhā paññattoti ayaṃ pabhedapaññatti, samūhapaññatti ca.
“生起”是来源的施设;“如实了知”是对苦的遍知施设、对集的断除施设、对灭的作证施设、对道的修习施设。“陷入网中”等是对一切见的统摄施设。“已断有爱之索”等是以两种方式对般涅槃的施设。如此,对瞋恚等也依来源施设、遍知施设等来分别。同样,“瞋恚”是害意的同义词施设,“不悦”是忧的同义词施设,如此应依施设的差别来区分。这就是将每一法以多种施设来施设的方式,其特相如此阐明,名为“施设论”。因此说:“世尊以一法,以种种施设而宣说”等。巴利
‘‘Samudayo hotī’’ti pabhavapaññatti, ‘‘yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti dukkhassa pariññāpaññatti, samudayassa pahānapaññatti, nirodhassa sacchikiriyāpaññatti, maggassa bhāvanāpaññatti. ‘‘Antojālīkatā’’tiādisabbadiṭṭhīnaṃ saṅgahapaññatti. ‘‘Ucchinnabhavanettiko’’tiādi duvidhena parinibbānapaññattīti evaṃ āghātādīnaṃ pabhavapaññattipariññāpaññattiādivasena. Tathā ‘‘āghāto’’ti byāpādassa vevacanapaññatti. ‘‘Appaccayo’’ti domanassassavevacanapaññattītiādivasena ca paññattibhedo vibhajjitabboti ayaṃ ekekassa dhammassa anekāhi paññattīhi paññapetabbākāravibhāvanalakkhaṇo paññattihāro nāma, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ekaṃ bhagavā dhammaṃ, paṇṇattīhi vividhāhi desetī’’tiādi (netti. 4.11).
通过执取“嗔恨”来摄属行蕴,同样,通过执取“不悦”来摄属行蕴。通过执取“忧”来摄属受蕴——这是依蕴门而趣入。同样,通过执取嗔恨等来摄属法处、法界、苦谛或集谛——这是依处门、界门、谛门而趣入。同样,嗔恨等的俱生无明,以俱生、因俱生、互相依止、依处、不离去等缘为缘;不俱生的,则以无间、等无间、无间亲依止、有、离去、习行等缘为缘。非无间的,唯以亲依止为缘。对于渴爱、取等,以及触等与它们俱生或不俱生的法,也应如理宣说其缘的作用。在这里,有人依增上、有人依业、有人依食、有人依根、有人依禅那、有人依道而说为缘——应知这也是缘的差别——这是依缘起门而趣入。依此理趣,对于欢喜等,也应依蕴等门辨明趣入。巴利
Āghātaggahaṇena saṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgaho, tathā anabhiraddhiggahaṇena. Appaccayaggahaṇena vedanākkhandhasaṅgahoti idaṃ khandhamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Tathā āghātādiggahaṇena dhammāyatanaṃ, dhammadhātu, dukkhasaccaṃ, samudayasaccaṃ vā gahitanti idaṃ āyatanamukhena,dhātumukhena,saccamukhena ca otaraṇaṃ. Tathā āghātādīnaṃ sahajātā avijjā hetusahajātaaññamaññanissasampayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayo, asahajātā pana anantaraniruddhā anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi paccayo. Ananantarā pana upanissayavaseneva paccayo. Taṇhāupādānādi phassādīnampi tesaṃ sahajātānaṃ, asahajātānañca yathārahaṃ paccayabhāvo vattabbo. Koci panettha adhipativasena, koci kammavasena, koci āhāravasena, koci indriyavasena, koci jhānavasena koci maggavasenāpi paccayoti ayampi viseso veditabboti idaṃ paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Imināva nayena ānandādīnampi khandhādimukhena otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ.
同样,戒就是远离杀生等的思,以及无嗔等心所法;而杀生等本身就是思。这些法,以及资助它们的法,比如惭等,在行蕴、法处等当中的归属,应当按前面同样的方式,通过蕴等门来辨明趣入。这个道理也适用于对智、见、受、无明、渴爱等的执取。但在执取出离和无取解脱时,还应当依无为界,通过界门来辨明趣入。同样,通过“受……无取解脱”这句话,世尊已经说明了戒等五法蕴以及念处等菩提分法,也应当知道可以通过这个门来趣入。“那也以触为缘”——在说明常等施设时,通过阐明它依赖缘而运作,从而依无常门趣入;同样,通过这样的法性,依缘起门趣入。因为无常所以是苦、是无我,依无愿门趣入,依空门趣入。其余各处也是同样的道理。这就是以缘起等门趣入经义为特征的趣入行。正如所说:“凡缘起,以及根、蕴、界、处”等等。巴利
Tathā sīlaṃ pāṇātipātādīhi viraticetanā, abyāpādādicetasikadhammā ca, pāṇātipātādayo cetanāva, tesaṃ, tadupakārakadhammānañca lajjādayādīnaṃ saṅkhārakkhandhadhammāyatanādīsu saṅgahato purimanayeneva khandhādimukhena otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ. Esa nayo ñāṇadiṭṭhivedanāavijjātaṇhādiggahaṇesupi. Nissaraṇānupādāvimuttiggahaṇesu pana asaṅkhatadhātuvasenapi dhātumukhena otaraṇaṃ vibhāvetabbaṃ, tathā ‘‘vedanānaṃ…pe… anupādāvimutto’’ti etena bhagavato sīlādayo pañcadhammakkhandhā, satipaṭṭhānādayo ca bodhipakkhiyadhammā pakāsitā hontīti taṃmukhenapi otaraṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Tadapi phassapaccayā’’ti sassatādipaññāpanassa paccayādhīnavuttitādīpanena aniccatāmukhena otaraṇaṃ, tathā evaṃdhammatāya paṭiccasamuppādamukhena otaraṇaṃ. Aniccassa dukkhānattabhāvato appaṇihitamukhena, suññatāmukhena otaraṇaṃ. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Ayaṃ paṭiccasamuppādādimukhehi suttatthassa otaraṇalakkhaṇo otaraṇahāro nāma. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘yo ca paṭiccuppādo, indriyakhandhā ca dhātuāyatanā’’tiādi (netti. 4.12).
清净行段的解释巴利
Sodhanahāravaṇṇanā
“诸比丘,若他人对我毁谤”,这是起说。“或对法毁谤,或对僧毁谤”,这是文句清净,不是起说清净。“在那里,你们不应生嗔恨,不应有不悦,不应心生不快”,这是文句清净和起说清净两者。在第二理趣等处也是同样的道理。同样地,“然而这是微少”等是起说。“是什么”等是提问。“离杀生”等是文句清净,不是起说清净,也不是提问清净。“这就是”等是提问清净、文句清净和起说清净。巴利
‘‘Mamaṃ vā bhikkhave, pare avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’nti ārambho. ‘‘Dhammassa vā avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyuṃ saṅghassa vā avaṇṇaṃ bhāseyyu’’nti padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. ‘‘Tatra tumhehi na āghāto, na appaccayo, na cetaso anabhiraddhi karaṇīyā’’ti padasuddhi ceva ārambhasuddhi ca. Dutiyanayādīsupi eseva nayo, tathā ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādi ārambho. ‘‘Katama’’ntiādi pucchā. ‘‘Pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’tiādi padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi. No ca pucchāsuddhi. ‘‘Idaṃ kho’’tiādi pucchāsuddhi ceva padasuddhi ca, ārambhasuddhi.
同样地,“诸比丘,有”等是起说。“哪些呢”等是提问。“诸比丘,有”等是起说。“依什么”等是起说与提问。“如心安定”等是句清净,不是起说清净,也不是提问清净。“这些”等是句清净、提问清净和起说清净。按这个方式,在一切处都应知道起说等。这是考察句与起说清净与否的相,名叫清净行。正如说:“在答问中,以偈颂被问时起说”等。巴利
Tathā ‘‘atthi bhikkhave’’tiādi ārambho. ‘‘Katame ca te’’tiādi pucchā. ‘‘Santi bhikkhave’’tiādi ārambho. ‘‘Kimāgammā’’tiādi ārambhapucchā . ‘‘Yathā samāhite’’tiādi padasuddhi, no ārambhasuddhi, no ca pucchāsuddhi. ‘‘Ime kho’’tiādi padasuddhi ceva pucchāsuddhi ca ārambhasuddhi ca. Iminā nayena sabbattha ārambhādayo veditabbā. Ayaṃ padārambhānaṃ sodhitāsodhitabhāvavicāraṇalakkhaṇo sodhanahāro nāma, vuttampi ca ‘‘vissajjitamhi pañhe, gāthāyaṃ pucchitāyamārabbhā’’tiādi (netti. 4.13).
决择行的解释巴利
Adhiṭṭhānahāravaṇṇanā
“诋毁”是通称层面的确定说法。把这个通称不加分别之后,具体说法是“我的”。对于法或僧也是如此,这个道理同样适用。同样,“戒”是通称层面的确定说法。把这个通称不加分别之后,具体说法是“远离杀生”等等。“其余诸法”等等是通称层面的确定说法,把这个通称不加分别之后,具体说法是“比丘们,如来知道这个”等等。同样,“前际论者”等等是通称层面的确定说法。把这个通称不加分别之后,具体说法是“常见论者”等等。按照这个道理,在一切地方都应该只依照所宣说的内容,来确定通称和具体说法。这就是对于经中所述诸法不作分别、只依照所宣说内容来确定通称和具体说法,名为决择行。正如所说:“诸法以一性,也以种种性被宣说”等等。巴利
‘‘Avaṇṇa’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tamavikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘mamaṃ vā’’ti. Dhammassa vā saṅghassa vāti pakkhepi esa nayo. Tathā ‘‘sīla’’nti sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tamavikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādi. ‘‘Aññeva dhammā’’tiādi sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ, tamavikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘tayidaṃ bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādi, tathā ‘‘pubbantakappikā’’tiādi sāmaññato adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Tamavikappetvā visesavacanaṃ ‘‘sassatavādā’’tiādi. Iminā nayena sabbattha yathādesitameva sāmaññavisesā niddhāretabbā. Ayaṃ suttāgatānaṃ dhammānaṃ avikappanāvasena yathādesitameva sāmaññavisesaniddhāraṇalakkhaṇo adhiṭṭhānahāro nāma, yathāha ‘‘ekattatāya dhammā, yepi ca vemattatāya niddiṭṭhā’’tiādi (netti. 4.14).
资粮行的解说巴利
Parikkhārahāravaṇṇanā
嗔恨等的因,是“他对我做了无益之事”等十九种嗔恨事由。阿难等人(生起贪著)的因,是对所缘的染著。戒的因是惭与愧,以及少欲等。对于“甚深”等所说的法,一切波罗蜜都是它的因,特别是慧波罗蜜。诸见的因,总的说是亲近恶人、听闻非法、以及由邪执取而来的不如理作意;分别地说,常见论等的因是随念过去生等。受的因是无明、渴爱、业、触等。无取解脱的因是圣道。无智的因是不如理作意。渴爱的因是在可结缚之法上观察乐味。触的因是六处。六处的因是名色。断除有之引导的因是清净的修习。这样,把名为资粮的因缘确定下来加以阐释,就是所谓的资粮行,它以赞说为其特征。因此说:“诸法生起某法,以缘为次第”等等。巴利
Āghātādīnaṃ ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādīni (dha. sa. 1237; vibha. 909) ekūnavīsati āghātavatthūni hetu. Ānandādīnaṃ ārammaṇābhisineho hetu. Sīlassa hiriottappaṃ, appicchatādayo ca hetu. ‘‘Gambhīrā’’tiādinā vuttadhammassa sabbāpi pāramiyo hetu. Visesena paññāpāramī. Diṭṭhīnaṃ asappurisūpanissayo, asaddhammassavanaṃ micchābhinivesena ayonisomanasikāro ca avisesena hetu. Visesena pana sassatavādādīnaṃ atītajātianussaraṇādi hetu. Vedanānaṃ avijjā, taṇhā, kammādiphasso ca hetu. Anupādāvimuttiyā ariyamaggo hetu. Aññāṇassa ayonisomanasikāro hetu. Taṇhāya saṃyojaniyesu assādānupassanā hetu. Phassassa saḷāyatanāni hetu. Saḷāyatanassa nāmarūpaṃ hetu . Bhavanettisamucchedassa visuddhibhāvanā hetūti ayaṃ parikkhārasaṅkhāte hetupaccaye niddhāretvā saṃvaṇṇanālakkhaṇo parikkhārahāro nāma, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ye dhammā yaṃ dhammaṃ, janayantippaccayā paramparato’’tiādi.
对“足处”的归纳说明巴利
Samāropanahāravaṇṇanā
通过“不产生嗔恨等”这句话,显示了忍辱的成就。通过“然而,这是微不足道的”等语句,显示了柔和的成就。通过“比丘们,有”等语句,显示了智慧的成就。通过“对他而言,由于不执取,涅槃就在自身中被了知”以及“如实了知诸受……之后,以无执取而解脱”这些语句,连同定的成就一起,显示了明与解脱自在的成就。其中,忍辱的成就因为是省察力的成就,所以是柔和成就的基础;而柔和成就本质上就是戒,戒是定成就的基础;定是智慧成就的基础。这就是基础归类的说明。巴利
Āghātādīnamakaraṇīyatāvacanena khantisampadā dassitā hoti. ‘‘Appamattakaṃ kho paneta’’ntiādinā soraccasampadā. ‘‘Atthi bhikkhave’’tiādinā ñāṇasampadā. ‘‘Aparāmasato cassa paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā’’ti, ‘‘vedanānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ viditvā anupādāvimutto’’ti ca etehi samādhisampadāya saddhiṃ vijjāvimuttivasībhāvasampadā dassitā. Tattha khantisampadā paṭisaṅkhānabalasiddhito soraccasampadāya padaṭṭhānaṃ, soraccasampadā pana atthato sīlameva, sīlaṃ samādhisampadāya padaṭṭhānaṃ. Samādhi ñāṇasampadāya padaṭṭhānanti ayaṃ padaṭṭhānasamāropanā.
把远离杀生等说成是戒的同义表达,这是显示戒的不同说法。而把常见论等分别开来,则是见的同义表达。这就是同义表达的套用。巴利
Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanaṃ sīlassa pariyāyavibhāgadassanaṃ. Sassatavādādivibhāgadassanaṃ pana diṭṭhiyā pariyāyavacananti ayaṃ vevacanasamāropanā.
通过戒,断除犯戒、部分断除以及恶行杂染的断除得以成就。通过定,断除缠缚、镇伏断以及渴爱杂染的断除得以成就。通过慧,断除见杂染、彻底断以及随眠的断除得以成就。这就是关于断的归纳说明。巴利
Sīlena vītikkamappahānaṃ, tadaṅgappahānaṃ, duccaritasaṃkilesappahānañca sijjhati. Samādhinā pariyuṭṭhānappahānaṃ, vikkhambhanappahānaṃ, taṇhāsaṃkilesappahānañca sijjhati. Paññāya diṭṭhisaṃkilesappahānaṃ, samucchedappahānaṃ, anusayappahānañca sijjhatīti ayaṃ pahānasamāropanā.
通过戒等法蕴,达到止观修习的圆满,也就是成就三种断——这就是关于修习的归纳说明。这就是所谓“归纳门”,它的特征是对经中所说诸法的依据、同义词、断除、修习加以归纳考察。正如所说的:“诸法以什么为根,哪些是同一意义的,由牟尼所开示”等等,这就是十六种门的运用。巴利
Sīlādidhammakkhandhehi samathavipassanābhāvanāpāripūriṃ gacchati pahānattayasiddhitoti ayaṃ bhāvanāsamāropanā. Ayaṃ sutte āgatadhammānaṃ padaṭṭhānavevacanapahānabhāvanāsamāropanavicāraṇalakkhaṇo samāropanahāro nāma. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘ye dhammā yaṃ mūlā, ye cekatthā pakāsitā muninā’’tiādi, (netti. 4.16) ayaṃ soḷasahārayojanā.
五种导法的解释巴利
Pañcavidhanayavaṇṇanā
欢喜旋导法的解释巴利
Nandiyāvaṭṭanayavaṇṇanā
通过“没有嗔恨等”这一说法,就显示了渴爱与无明的收摄。因为当对自我和属于自我的事物有贪爱和愚痴时,就会以“他对我做了不利的事”等方式生起嗔恨;如果没有贪爱和愚痴,就不会生起。同样,通过“远离杀生”等说法,以及通过“于自身内证知寂灭”“无执取而解脱”“如实了知六触处……”等说法,就显示了渴爱与无明的彻底断除。而那些渴爱与无明,通过“过去劫”等词句和“不知不见”等词句,也从它们自身的相状上被显示出来,色法和非色法是它们的所依。按顺序来说,止和观是它们的对治,而心解脱和慧解脱是它们的结果。其中,渴爱是集谛,或者渴爱与无明是集谛;作为它们所依的色法、非色法是苦谛;它们的不生起是灭谛;了知灭的止观是道谛。应当这样了知四谛的连结方式。巴利
Āghātādīnamakaraṇavacanena taṇhāvijjāsaṅkoco dassito. Sati hi attattaniyavatthūsu sinehe, sammohe ca ‘‘anatthaṃ me acarī’’tiādinā āghāto jāyati, nāsati. Tathā ‘‘pāṇātipātā paṭivirato’’tiādivacanehi ‘‘paccattaññeva nibbuti viditā, anupādāvimutto, channaṃ phassāyatanānaṃ…pe… yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’tiādivacanehi ca taṇhāvijjānaṃ accantappahānaṃ dassitaṃ hoti. Tāsaṃ pana pubbantakappikādipadehi, ‘‘ajānataṃ apassata’’ntiādipadehi ca sarūpatopi dassitānaṃ taṇhāvijjānaṃ rūpadhammā, arūpadhammā ca adhiṭṭhānaṃ. Yathākkamaṃ samatho ca vipassanā ca paṭipakkho, tesaṃ pana cetovimutti, paññāvimutti ca phalaṃ. Tattha taṇhā samudayasaccaṃ, taṇhāvijjā vā, tadadhiṭṭhānabhūtā rūpārūpadhammā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesamappavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā samathavipassanā maggasaccanti evaṃ, catusaccayojanā veditabbā.
在这里,通过执取渴爱,应当以谄、诳、慢、过慢、骄、放逸、恶欲、恶友、无惭、无愧等门,把一切不善品都统摄进来。同样,通过执取无明,也应当以颠倒作意、忿、恨、覆、恼、嫉、悭、诤、恶口、有见、无有见等门来统摄。反过来,以无谄、无诳等门,以及以无颠倒作意等门,应当把一切善品都统摄进来。同样,还应当以止品方面的信根等,以及观品方面的无常想等来统摄。这就是通过渴爱与无明统摄杂染品,通过止与观统摄清净品,以四谛连接的方式,作为“以智引导为特征”的喜旋引导法的依据。正如已经说过的那样:“以止与观引导渴爱和无明”等等。巴利
Taṇhāggahaṇena cettha māyāsāṭheyyamānātimānamadapamādapāpicchatāpāpamittatāahirikānottappādivasena sabbopi akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā avijjāggahaṇenapi viparītamanasikārakodhupanāhamakkhapaḷāsaissāmacchariyasārambha dovacassatā bhavadiṭṭhivibhavadiṭṭhādivasena. Vuttavipariyāyena pana amāyāasāṭheyyādivasena, aviparītamanasikārādivasena ca sabbopi kusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā samathapakkhiyānaṃ saddhindriyādīnaṃ, vipassanāpakkhiyānañca aniccasaññādīnaṃ vasenāti ayaṃ taṇhāvijjāhi saṃkilesapakkhaṃ suttatthaṃ samathavipassanāhi ca vodānapakkhaṃ catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇassa nandiyāvaṭṭanayassa bhūmi. Vuttañhi ‘‘taṇhañca avijjampi ca, samathena vipassanāya yo netī’’tiādi.
三蒲草导法的解释巴利
Tipukkhalanayavaṇṇanā
通过“不嗔恨等”这样的说法,就成立无嗔;同样,通过“远离杀生、粗恶语”这样的说法,也成立无嗔。通过“不贪爱等”这样的说法,则成立无贪;同样,通过“远离非梵行”这样的说法,也成立无贪。通过“远离不与取等”这样的说法,则这两者同时成立。通过“诸比丘,如来如实了知此”等说法,成立无痴。这样一来,当三不善根被提及的时候,从它们的对立面,也就是通过“不嗔恨等”的说法,三善根就已经被成立了。在这里,应当依三不善根,从三种恶行、杂染、垢秽、不平等、不善想、不善寻、五盖等方面,广泛展开整个不善的一边。同样,应当依三善根,从三种善行、清净、平等、善想、善寻、慧、正法、定、解脱门、解脱等方面,阐明整个善的一边。巴利
Āghātādīnamakaraṇavacanena adosasiddhi, tathā pāṇātipātapharusavācāhi paṭivirativacanenāpi. Ānandādīnamakaraṇavacanena pana alobhasiddhi , tathā abrahmacariyato paṭivirativacanenāpi. Adinnādānādīhi pana paṭivirativacanena tadubhayasiddhi. ‘‘Tayidaṃ bhikkhave , tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā amohasiddhi. Iti tīhi akusalamūlehi gahitehi tappaṭipakkhato āghātādīnamakaraṇavacanena ca tīṇi kusalamūlāni siddhāniyeva honti. Tattha tīhi akusalamūlehi tividhaduccaritasaṃkilesamalavisamākusalasaññāvitakkapañcādivasena sabbopi akusalapakkho vitthāretabbo. Tathā tīhi kusalamūlehi tividhasucaritavodānasamakusalasaññāvitakkapaññāsaddhammasamādhi- vimokkhamukhavimokkhādivasena sabbopi kusalapakkho vibhāvetabbo.
在这里,四谛的对应关系是这样的:贪是集谛;或者,一切善根与不善根都是集谛;由它们所生起、并以它们为依处和行境的取蕴是苦谛;它们的止息是灭谛;了知灭的解脱等是道谛。这就是通过不善根说明杂染品、通过善根说明清净品,以四谛对应的方式,成为以引导为特征的三重引导法的基础。正如所说的:巴利
Ettha cāyaṃ saccayojanā – lobho samudayasaccaṃ, sabbāni vā kusalākusalamūlāni, tehi pana nibbattā tesamadhiṭṭhānagocarabhūtā upādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesamappavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā vimokkhādikā maggasaccanti. Ayaṃ akusalamūlehi saṃkilesapakkhaṃ, kusalamūlehi ca vodānapakkhaṃ catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇassa tipukkhalanayassa bhūmi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
凡是以不善根为依止的人
“导向善法与善根”等等。巴利
‘‘Yo akusale samūlehi, Neti kusale ca kusalamūlehī’’tiādi. (netti. 4.18);
狮子游戏方式的解释巴利
Sīhavikkīḷitanayavaṇṇanā
通过“不造作嗔恨、爱染等”这句话,成就了念。通过“远离邪命”这句话,成就了精进。因为以精进能驱除欲寻、恚寻、害寻,而精进所成的就是活命遍净戒。通过“远离杀生等”这句话,成就了念。因为以念能看见有过失与无过失。在那里,观察过患与功德后,舍离有过失的,受持无过失的而行。正因如此,这被称为“以导向为现起”。通过“诸比丘,如来了知此”等话,成就了定与慧。因为以慧能如实觉了,而入定者亦如实了知。巴利
Āghātānandādīnamakaraṇa-vacanena satisiddhi. Micchājīvāpaṭivirativacanena vīriyasiddhi. Vīriyena hi kāmabyāpādavihiṃsāvitakke vinodeti, vīriyasādhanañca ājīvapārisuddhisīlanti. Pāṇātipātādīhi paṭivirativacanena satisiddhi. Satiyā hi sāvajjānavajjo diṭṭho hoti. Tattha ca ādīnavānisaṃse sallakkhetvā sāvajjaṃ pahāya anavajjaṃ samādāya vattati. Tathā hi sā ‘‘niyyātanapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti vuccati. ‘‘Tayidaṃ bhikkhave, tathāgato pajānātī’’tiādinā samādhipaññāsiddhi. Paññavā hi yathābhūtāvabodho samāhito ca yathābhūtaṃ pajānātīti.
同样地,以“常”“恒”等说法,在无常的事物上把它看成“常”,这就是颠倒;以“无病、死后超越、一向快乐的自我、已证得现法涅槃”等说法,在非乐的事物上把它看成“乐”,这就是颠倒;以“具足五种欲乐”等说法,在不净的事物上把它看成“净”,这就是颠倒;以一切宣说邪见的语句,在无我的事物上把它看成“我”,这就是颠倒。这样,这里就成立了四种颠倒;从它们的对立面,也就成立了四念处。在这里,应当用前面所说的四种根来指出四种人。怎么指出呢?爱行者有钝根和利根两种,同样地,见行者也有两种。其中,第一种人是对不净执为“净”的颠倒见行者,他以念力如实观察身体的自性之后,进入正性决定。第二种人是对非乐执为“乐”的颠倒见行者,他以“不容忍已生起的欲寻”等所说的、名为精进防护的精进力,摧毁那种颠倒。第三种人是对无常执为“常”的颠倒见行者,他以定力,从得定的状态如实通达诸行的刹那性。第四种人是因为相续、聚集、作用、所缘、密集和种种差别,而把只是触等诸法积聚的无我执为“我”的颠倒见行者,他以“离四边空”的作意摧毁那种邪执。在这里,以四种颠倒,应当依四漏、暴流、轭、系缚、无去、渴爱、生起、取、七识住、遍知等,归摄一切不善品;同样地,以四念处,应当依四种禅那、住、增上、乐、分、无量、正勤、神足等,归摄一切清净品。巴利
Tathā ‘‘nicco dhuvo’’tiādinā anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallāso, ‘‘arogo paraṃ maraṇā, ekantasukhī attā, diṭṭhadhammanibbānappatto’’ti ca evamādīhi asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallāso. ‘‘Pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito’’tiādinā asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipallāso. Sabbeheva diṭṭhippakāsanapadehi anattani ‘‘attā’’ti vipallāsoti evamettha cattāro vipallāsā siddhā honti, tesaṃ paṭipakkhato cattāri satipaṭṭhānāni siddhāneva. Tattha catūhi yathāvuttehi indriyehi cattāro puggalā niddisitabbā. Kathaṃ duvidho hi taṇhācarito mudindriyo tikkhindriyoti, tathā diṭṭhicaritopi. Tesu paṭhamo asubhe ‘‘subha’’nti vipallatthadiṭṭhiko satibalena yathābhūtaṃ kāyasabhāvaṃ sallakkhetvā sammattaniyāmaṃ okkamati. Dutiyo asukhe ‘‘sukha’’nti vipallatthadiṭṭhiko ‘‘uppannaṃ kāmavitakkaṃ nādhivāsetī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.26; a. ni. 4.14; 6.58) vuttena vīriyasaṃvarasaṅkhātena vīriyabalena taṃ vipallāsaṃ vidhamati. Tatiyo anicce ‘‘nicca’’nti vipallatthadiṭṭhiko samādhibalena samāhitabhāvato saṅkhārānaṃ khaṇikabhāvaṃ yathābhūtaṃ paṭivijjhati. Catuttho santatisamūhakiccārammaṇaghanavicittattā phassādidhammapuñjamatte anattani ‘‘attā’’ti vipallatthadiṭṭhiko catukoṭikasuññatāmanasikārena taṃ micchābhinivesaṃ viddhaṃseti. Catūhi cettha vipallāsehi caturāsavoghayogaganthaagatitaṇhuppādupādānasattaviññāṇaṭṭhitiapariññādivasena sabbopi akusalapakkho netabbo. Tathā catūhi satipaṭṭhānehi catubbidhajhānavihārādhiṭṭhānasukhabhāgiyadhammaappamaññāsammappadhānaiddhipādādivasena sabbopi vodānapakkho netabbo.
在这里,谛的连结是这样的:以净想和乐想,或者以四种颠倒作为集谛;作为它们依处和所缘的五取蕴是苦谛;它们的止息是灭谛;了知灭的念处等是道谛。这是以颠倒来说明杂染品,以信根等来说明清净品,通过四谛连结的方式,成为引导之相的狮子游戏法的基础。正如所说:“以颠倒引导杂染,以根引导正法”等等。巴利
Ettha cāyaṃ saccayojanā – subhasaññāsukhasaññāhi, catūhipi vā vipallāsehi samudayasaccaṃ, tesamadhiṭṭhānārammaṇabhūtā pañcupādānakkhandhā dukkhasaccaṃ, tesamappavatti nirodhasaccaṃ, nirodhapajānanā satipaṭṭhānādikā maggasaccanti. Ayaṃ vipallāsehi saṃkilesapakkhaṃ, saddhindriyādīhi vodānapakkhaṃ catusaccayojanamukhena nayanalakkhaṇassa sīhavikkīḷitanayassa bhūmi, yathāha ‘‘yo neti vipallāsehi, kilese indriyehi saddhamme’’tiādi (netti. 4.19).
观方与钩两种方法的解释巴利
Disālocanaaṅkusanayadvayavaṇṇanā
这样一来,三种义理之法的成立,也就成就了两种表述之法。因为,观察作为三种义理之法的那类法,本身就是观方之法;把它们统摄起来,本身就是钩法。因此,按照前面所说的方式,以观察作为义理之法的诸法这一角度,把那两种法也连接起来,所以说道:“在记说中,凡是善与不善”等等。这就是五种法的连接。巴利
Iti tiṇṇaṃ atthanayānaṃ siddhiyā vohāranayadvayampi siddhameva hoti. Tathā hi atthanayattayadisābhūtadhammānaṃ samālocanameva disālocananayo. Tesaṃ samānayanameva aṅkusanayo. Tasmā yathāvuttanayena atthanayānaṃ disābhūtadhammasamālokananayanavasena tampi nayadvayaṃ yojetabbanti, tena vuttaṃ ‘‘veyyākaraṇesu hi ye, kusalākusalā’’tiādi (netti. 4.20). Ayaṃ pañcanayayojanā.
《教法安立论》的注释巴利
Sāsanapaṭṭhānavaṇṇanā
不过,这部经在十六种教法安立中,属于杂染与习气的有学部分,因为它分别说明了渴爱、邪见等杂染,以及戒等福行和无学戒蕴等;或者说,它正是杂染与习气之洞察的有学部分,因为它分别说明了前面所说的那些含义,以及有学戒蕴等。而在二十八种教法安立中,因为这部经在这里分别说明了世间与出世间、七法安立、智与所知、见与修、自语与他语、应释与不应释、业与异熟、善与不善、允许与禁止,以及有等世间、出世间诸义,所以如此配属。这就是教法安立的配列。巴利
Idaṃ pana suttaṃ soḷasavidhe sāsanapaṭṭhāne saṃkilesavāsanāsekkhabhāgiyaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhādisaṃkilesānaṃ sīlādipuññakiriyassa, asekkhasīlādikkhandhassa ca vibhattattā, saṃkilesavāsanānibbedhāsekkhabhāgiyameva vā yathāvuttatthānaṃ sekkhasīlakkhandhādikassa ca vibhattattā. Aṭṭhavīsatividhe pana sāsanapaṭṭhāne lokiyalokuttaraṃ sattadhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ ñāṇañeyyaṃ dassanabhāvanaṃ sakavacanaparavacanaṃ vissajjanīyāvissajjanīyaṃ kammavipākaṃ kusalākusalaṃ anuññātapaṭikkhittaṃ bhavo ca lokiyalokuttarādīnamatthānaṃ idha vibhattattāti. Ayaṃ sāsanapaṭṭhānayojanā.
这部名为《善悦意》的《梵网经》注释,对隐晦之义作了阐明。它收在《吉祥悦意》——即长部注释——之中。这部注释是为了阐明极微细、甚深、难解之义,为了生起极清净、广大的智慧与辩才而造的。造论者是名为智胜法军的长老,他是一位大阿阇梨、大语法家,具足正直、柔和、自制、信、念、勇、智、忍、精进等法,在有注释的三藏中无滞无碍、无畏智行,深入自宗与他宗种种差别的稠林,是大法王师。巴利
Iti sumaṅgalavilāsiniyā dīghanikāyaṭṭhakathāya paramasukhumagambhīraduranubodhatthaparidīpanāya suvimalavipulapaññāveyyattiyajananāya ajjavamaddavasoraccasaddhāsatidhitibuddhikhantivīriyādidhammasamaṅginā sāṭṭhakathe piṭakattaye asaṅgāsaṃhīravisāradañāṇacārinā anekappabhedasakasamayasamayantaragahanajjhogāhinā mahāgaṇinā mahāveyyākaraṇena ñāṇābhivaṃsadhammasenāpatināmatherena mahādhammarājādhirājagarunā katāya sādhuvilāsiniyā nāma līnatthapakāsaniyā brahmajālasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthavibhāvanā.